Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080198793 | POINT TO MULTIPOINT DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION WITH A PLURALITY OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS UNITS - A point to multipoint device for use in a wireless network to provide wireless communication with a plurality of telecommunications units is described, for communication from the point to multipoint device to the telecommunications units, the point to multipoint device being operable to employ multiple sets of beams, at any point in time one set being used. The point to multipoint device comprises beam set generation logic for generating the multiple sets of beams arranged into one or more groups, each group comprising one beam from each set. Within each group the beams of that group are orthogonal with respect to each other, and each beam within each set is generated randomly with respect to other beams in that set. An interface is provided for receiving a synchronisation signal issued to all point to multipoint devices in the wireless network. Beam switching logic is then used to determine, having regard to the synchronisation signal, switch times at which the point to multipoint device switches from one set of beams to another set of beams, the switch times being the same for all point to multipoint devices in the wireless network. An antenna array is controlled by the beam switching logic to produce at any point in time one of the sets of beams for transmitting data forming the communication to the telecommunications units. The use of such sets of beams has been found to lower the average co-channel interference observed within the wireless network. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198794 | VIRAL-LIKE ELECTRONIC DATA PROPAGATION - Data propagation is provided with an originating transmitter that receives and processes data into a data packet that it transmits. A sensory input device is connected with and sends data to the transmitter. A plurality of transceivers are disposed in a geographic space and may receive and retransmit the packet. A target receiver receives and processes the packet and reports a result of processing the data. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198795 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING UPLINK DATA BY DRX-MODE TERMINAL IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method and apparatus for transmitting uplink data by a terminal performing a DRX operation in a mobile telecommunication system. According to the method and apparatus, when a UE transmits the uplink data, the UE variably controls given active and sleep periods in consideration of whether or not retransmission for the uplink data is performed, thereby more flexibly operating in the DRX mode. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198796 | Method and Apparatus for Enhancing System Efficiency in a Wireless Communications System - A method for enhancing system efficiency of a user equipment, called UE hereinafter, in a wireless communications system includes operating in a Cell Forward Link Access Channel, called CELL_FACH hereinafter, state with a common High Speed Downlink Shared Channel radio network transaction identifier, called common H-RNTI hereinafter, and a dedicated H-RNTI, and providing a confirmation signal with utilizing the dedicated H-RNTI for a network when the network sends transmissions of Dedicated Control Channel, called DCCH hereafter, and Dedicated Traffic Channel, called DTCH hereinafter, with using the common H-RNTI to the UE. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198797 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MULTICAST AND BROADCAST SERVICE IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Disclosed is an apparatus and method for an MBS service in a BWA system. An apparatus of a base station includes a time controller, a CAC processor, and a buffer controller. The time controller manages a broadcast start time and a broadcast end time and generates a broadcast start message at a predetermined time before the actual broadcast start time. Upon receipt of the generated broadcast start message from the time controller, the CAC processor calculates a capacity decrease due to broadcast service and subtracts the capacity decrease from the current available capacity to update the available capacity. Upon receipt of the generated broadcast start message from the time controller, the buffer controller controls the buffer occupation of unicast traffic in order to provide the buffer space required for a broadcast service. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198798 | Method And Network Apparatus For Adjusting Communication Resources Within A Community - A method and a network apparatus for adjusting communication resources in a community are disclosed. When the topological structure of the community changes, e.g., when new base station joins or exits, and when the community combines or splits, each base station re-allocates the communication resources by using a uniform algorithm, or the server or one base station in the community re-allocates the communication resources uniformly, then the base stations in the community are adjusted to the their own available resource at the same time based on the re-allocation results. The communication resources includes not only the frequency spectrum, but also those are exclusively occupied by a base station required by its normal operation, e.g., time slot, CDMA code word, sub-channel etc. With the present disclosure, the automatic optimum allocation and adjustment of the communication resources in a community could be realized. | 08-21-2008 |
20080205326 | Communications Infrastructure for Content Delivery Using Edge Servers - A communications infrastructure, such as a public land mobile network (PLMN) complying with the GPRS standards, is described comprising at least a local support node for packet stream communication with a plurality of terminals and a gateway support node for packet stream communication with an external network, which may be an IP network such as the public internet. The local support node and the gateway support node are arranged for interconnection by a point to point tunnel, a GTP tunnel in the case of GPRS via for instance an IP network, for carrying packets between each terminal and addressed servers on the external network. A control element and one or more edge servers are associated with the local support node. The edge servers are each associated with respective addresses on the external network and the control element is interposed between the local support node and the gateway support node. The control element is arranged in operation to extract from the tunnel packets destined for a predeterminable set of external network addresses and redirect the extracted packets to corresponding ones of the edge servers. Finally, the control element is arranged route packets received from said edge servers to a corresponding terminal via the local support node. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205327 | Methods, Apparatuses, and Computer Program Products for Providing Dynamic Assignment of Slot Cycle Index for Network Nodes - An apparatus for providing dynamic assignment of slot cycle index includes a processing element. The processing element may be configured to send a registration message to a server for registering a network node to a service associated with the server, to receive a response to the registration message from the server in which the response identifies slot cycle index information, and to apply a slot cycle value at the network node based on stored information defining the slot cycle value corresponding to the identified slot cycle index information. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205328 | Method of scaling soft symbols of an uplink enhanced dedicated transport channel (E-DCH) and method for enabling use of a log-map turbo decoding algorithm for processing the E-DCH - A method of scaling soft symbols of an uplink E-DCH is provided, where the E-DCH is received from a user in a network for processing in a base station receiver in the network employing a log-MAP turbo decoding algorithm to process the E-DCH. The E-DCH includes an E-DPDCH from which the soft symbols are generated at the base station receiver, and an E-DPCCH used to transmit control information associated with the E-DPDCH, which along with configuration information from a radio network controller (RNC) of the network enables the base station receiver to determine a reference amplitude ratio linked to the actual power offset of the E-DPDCH from the legacy DPCCH. In the method, a reference E-DPDCH to DPCCH amplitude ratio is multiplied by a value greater than 1 to output a scaling factor, and the soft symbols are scaled by the scaling factor for processing by the log-MAP turbo decoding algorithm in the base station receiver. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205329 | Method of scaling soft symbols of an uplink enhanced dedicated transport channel (E-DCH) and method for enabling use of a log-map turbo decoding algorithm for processing the E-DCH - A method of scaling soft symbols of an uplink E-DCH is provided, where the E-DCH is received from a user in a network for processing in a base station receiver in the network employing a log-MAP turbo decoding algorithm to process the E-DCH. The E-DCH includes an E-DPDCH from which the soft symbols are generated at the base station receiver, and an E-DPCCH used to transmit control information associated with the E-DPDCH, which along with configuration information from a radio network controller (RNC) of the network enables the base station receiver to determine a reference amplitude ratio linked to the actual power offset of the E-DPDCH from the legacy DPCCH. In the method, an estimated E-DPDCH to DPCCH amplitude ratio that represents a scaling factor for the soft symbols is determined, and the soft symbols are scaled by the scaling factor to enable the soft symbols to be processed by the log-MAP turbo decoding algorithm in the base station receiver. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205330 | TOKENIZED COMPRESSION OF SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL DATA - Systems and methods are provided for compressing and decompressing session initiation protocol (SIP) messages. A serializer and parser compress and decode SIP data structures according to a tokenized binary protocol. The compression/decompression protocol uses tokens that represent message elements of the internal data structures that define SIP messages. Tokens may be assigned to message elements based on various design requirements. Some tokens provide sufficient generality to encode any legal SIP message, while others are highly optimized to match the elements found in most common SIP messages. For those elements requiring specific strings, three dictionaries are defined. Two of the dictionaries are static and are never transmitted; the third dictionary is dynamic and contains strings found only in the specific message. Because the message dictionary is transmitted with each message, and contributes to the size of the transmitted message, the message element tokens are designed to reduce the size of the message dictionary to the greatest degree possible. The compression of SIP messages in this manner is stateless in that it does not require knowledge of the characteristics of previous messages. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205331 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving system information in a mobile communication system are provided, in which a System Frame Number (SFN) is transmitted as system information, and other system information, which excludes the SFN, is transmitted using resources different from resources used to transmit the SFN on a broadcast channel. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205332 | HYBRID PROACTIVE ON-DEMAND ROUTING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Key scalability issues in the management of routing information at each node in wireless networks running a proactive routing protocol have been identified and a solution is set forth based on hybrid proactive on-demand routing with focus on the STA association information management at each MP in a WLAN mesh. A fisheye-scope-based GAB management scheme is described where the priority of an entry is the reverse of the hop count of its associated MAP/MPP from the MP, which can be easily applicable to the case of management of general routing information. For example, the GAB proposed can maintain only those entries whose associated MAPs/MPPs are two or less hops away from the MP. | 08-28-2008 |
20080212522 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION FROM BASE STATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for receiving system information from a Base Station (BS) in a Mobile Station (MS) in a mobile communication system are provided, in which it is determined whether there is buffered system information in a buffer, if current system information has an error, it is determined whether a combining condition is satisfied, in the presence of the buffered system information, the combining condition being defined by at least one of a Master Information Block (MIB) value tag, a System Information Block (SIB) value tag, and modification time information that are associated with the current system information, and the current system information is combined with the buffered system information, if the combining condition is satisfied. | 09-04-2008 |
20080212523 | Session based communication - A user terminal requesting a session establishment although the session already exists, is informed on the existing session in a response to the request. If the user terminal offered in the request one or more media types that were rejected, the response contains an indication of a reason for rejection. | 09-04-2008 |
20080219207 | BASE STATIONS ROUTING TRAFFIC OVER A PACKET BACKHAUL NETWORK TO MULTIPLE ROUTING ELEMENTS - System, methods, and networks are disclosed that allow base station systems of a wireless communication network to transmit outgoing traffic over a packet backhaul network to multiple routing elements on the MSC side of the network. A base station system described herein identifies a primary routing element and a backup routing element. The primary routing element is the device to which the base station system transmits outgoing traffic under normal operation, and the backup routing element is an alternate to the primary routing element. To transmit traffic over the packet backhaul network, the base station system monitors the availability of the primary routing element. If the primary routing element is available, then the base station system transmits outgoing traffic over the packet backhaul network to the primary routing element. If unavailable, then the base station system transmits outgoing traffic over the packet backhaul network to the backup routing element. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219208 | System and Method for Optimizing Roaming in a Wireless Data Network - A system and method for a mobile client device to associate with a preferred access point in a wireless network A determination is made as to whether the mobile client device is stationary within the wireless network The preferred access point is determined between the different access points within the wireless network. The mobile client device associates with the preferred access point to gain desired access to the wireless network | 09-11-2008 |
20080219209 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTIUSER WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS USING ANTI-INTERFERENCE TO INCREASE TRANSMISSION DATA RATE - A method and system for multi-user wireless communications between a sender and a receiver enables effective blocking of interference signals by other senders and improving the channel data rate. The receiver uses two or more receiving devices, such as antennas or smart antennas, to receive multiple wireless input signals. By performing a noise-transparent autocorrelation matching analysis on the multiple input signals, the receiver derives an anti-interference filter for interference-blocking action, without the need for information of the interfering and its transmission channel. In a multi-user environment, the noise-transparent autocorrelation matching analysis is implemented by the Autocorrelation Division Multiple Access (ADMA) system that includes the design and the implementation of ADMA code, the ADMA encoder, the ADMA algorithm and the ADMA decoder. | 09-11-2008 |
20080225778 | Service Discovery Mechanism in Broadcast Telecommunication Network - Aspects of the invention are directed to service discovery in a digital broadcast network. A service discovery descriptor, which may be electronic service guide-provider and cell specific, provides mapping between a service identifier, a logical channel identifier, and a physical channel, which may be characterized by a frame identifier and a slot identifier, that is, each physical channel may have one or more slots within one or more frames. A neighboring service discovery descriptor provides mapping for the service available within neighboring cells. Aspects of the invention are directed to an encapsulation protocol that encapsulates variable length data, including, but not limited to, the service discovery descriptor and the neighboring service discovery descriptor, into fixed length data stream packets. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225779 | LOCATION-BASED NETWORKING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A technique for creating a network model involves receiving location data associated with objects and using the location data to improve the size and/or accuracy of the network model. A technique for creating geo-tagged content involves providing a probable location associated with a client and geo-tagging content at that location. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225780 | USE OF DISTRIBUTED HASHTABLES FOR WIRELESS ACCESS MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A method, apparatus and system for management of a wireless communication network in which the system has a plurality of access nodes. A distributed hash table (“DHT”) is created. The DHT contains mobility management data of mobile devices using the wireless communication network. The DHT is stored across at least a portion of the plurality of access nodes. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225781 | Group MMSE-DFD with Order and Filter Computation for Reception on a Cellular Downlink - A method for decoding in a wireless downlink channel, where all dominant transmitting sources use inner codes from a particular set, including the steps of: estimating a channel matrix seen from each dominant transmitter source in response to a pilot or preamble signal transmitted by each such source; converting each estimated channel matrix into an effective channel matrix responsive to the inner code of the corresponding transmitting source; obtaining the received observations in a linear equivalent form whose output is an equivalent of the received observations and in which the effective channel matrix corresponding to each dominant transmitting source inherits the structure of its inner code; i) determining an order for processing each of the transmitting sources; ii) computing a filter for each transmitting source that will be decoded; iii) demodulating and decoding each transmitting source responsive to the determined order from step i) assuming perfect cancellation of signals of preceding or previously decoded transmitting sources; and iv) re-encoding the decoded message of each transmitting source, except the source decoded last, responsive to the modulation and coding scheme employed by the source and the corresponding effective channel matrix and subtracting it from the received observations in the equivalent linear form. | 09-18-2008 |
20080232299 | Method for Wireless Data Transfer - A method for wireless data transfer between first and second multimedia devices connected via a wireless connection operated according to a first wireless standard or to a second wireless standard, which are different from and/or not compatible with each other. The method includes: choosing the first wireless standard or the second wireless standard as a chosen wireless standard; processing connection commands, connection parameters, and/or connection data to obtain processed connection commands, processed connection parameters, and/or process connection data of the chosen wireless standard; and sending the process connection commands, process connection parameters, and/or process connection data out via the wireless connection according to the chosen wireless standard. The method thus enables a seamless switching from one wireless standard to another wireless standard, wherein upper layers do not notice the switching. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232300 | REFERENCE SIGNAL SELECTION TECHNIQUES FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A technique for improving link performance in a wireless communication system includes detecting whether subscriber stations in the wireless communication system are power-limited. The subscriber stations include at least a first subscriber station that is power-limited and a second subscriber station that is not power-limited. The technique assigns a first reference signal having a first cubic metric to the first subscriber station and a second reference signal having a second cubic metric to the second subscriber station. In this case, the first cubic metric is lower in magnitude than the second cubic metric. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232301 | Slow Adaptation of Modulation and Coding for Packet Transmission - Systems and methods for performing MCS adaptation are provided. In some cases, the network performs MCS adaptation based on received NACKs. In other cases, the mobile station determines an MCS based on channel quality measurements, and feeds back the MCS adaptation decision to the network. In either case, NACK-only feedback may be implemented to reduce interference. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232302 | Wireless data transferring system for a lavatory with wireless local area network module - A wireless data transferring system for a lavatory comprises a host having a decoder to decode a data from a data source, a tuner coupled to the data source to select a desired data, a first WLAN module coupled to the decoder or the data source to transfer data; and at least one sanitary equipment coupled to a receiver, wherein the receiver is coupled to the first WLAN module, and a data output coupled to the receiver to output the data. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232303 | IP mobile communication system and base station - When mobile communication exchange detects that SIP client has moved out of communication area of base station, the mobile communication exchange generates a BYE message, sends the generated BYE message to SIP client and ends a session. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232304 | METHOD OF DETERMINING CHARACTERISTICS OF ACCESS CLASSES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The present invention provides a method of determining characteristics of access classes in a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, a method is provided for implementation in an access network of a wireless communication system. The method includes mapping, at the access network, a plurality of priority levels to a plurality of access classes. Each access class is associated with at least one parameter used by access terminals to establish a wireless communication link with the access network. The method also includes transmitting, from the access network to a first access terminal, information indicating the mapping of the plurality of priority levels to the plurality of access classes in response to receiving a request to establish a communication session between the first access terminal and the access network. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232305 | Distributed Antenna System for MIMO Technologies - The invention is directed to a method and system for supporting MIMO technologies which can require the transport of multiple spatial streams on a traditional Distributed Antenna System (DAS). According to the invention, at one end of the DAS, each spatial stream is shifted in frequency to a pre-assigned band (such as a band at a frequency lower than the native frequency) that does not overlap the band assigned to other spatial streams (or the band of any other services being carried by the DAS). Each of the spatial streams can be combined and transmitted as a combined signal over a common coaxial cable. At the other “end” of the DAS, the different streams are shifted back to their original (overlapping) frequencies but retain their individual “identities” by being radiated through physically separate antenna elements. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232306 | Preserved Bearers - The invention describes a method of providing services on radio resources to a mobile terminal ( | 09-25-2008 |
20080232307 | Method and apparatus to allocate resources for acknowledgments in communication systems - A method and apparatus for transmission between a plurality of units of user equipment and a base station in a wireless communication system. For each of the units of user equipment, a plurality of control channel elements are mapped to a plurality of downlink acknowledgement channel resources in accordance with a first mapping scheme, and the plurality of control channel elements are mapped to a plurality of uplink acknowledgement channel resources in accordance with a second mapping scheme. The first mapping scheme and the second mapping scheme may be different for different units of user equipment. Alternatively, the first mapping scheme and the second mapping scheme may change over time. | 09-25-2008 |
20080240016 | IMS NETWORKS PROVIDING BUSINESS-RELATED CONTENT TO WIRELESS DEVICES - IMS networks and methods are disclosed for providing business-related content to wireless devices that are located within a business. For a business that has a WLAN, wireless devices within range of the wireless access point of the business receive an identifier for the wireless access point. The wireless devices then register with the IMS network using the access point ID. Through the access point ID, the IMS network identifies an application server that is associated with the business. The application server may then initiate sessions with the wireless devices, and transmit business-related content to the wireless devices while they are within range of the wireless access point of the business. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240017 | Method and apparatus of establishing connection in wireless local area network - An access point and a method to discover an associated station in a wireless network is presented. The access point scans the wireless network in order to discover one or more associated stations and establishes a connection with the discovered station. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240018 | Dynamic multi-access relaying for wireless networks - Methods, apparatuses and systems for communicating in a wireless network are disclosed. One embodiment includes a method for communication in a wireless network that comprises determining a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for channels between a base station, one or more relay stations, and a user and selecting a relay station based on the determined SNRs. Embodiments may also include determining a time sharing parameter and a total transmitting time, transmitting by the base station to the selected relay station for a first duration, and transmitting simultaneously by the base station and relay station using multi-access code for a second duration. The simultaneous transmission may be adapted to be decoded utilizing joint decoding with interference cancellation. Other embodiments are disclosed and claimed. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240019 | Methods and devices for scheduling the transmission of multicast messages in wireless local area networks - Real-time broadcast and multicast based packet transmissions/services over a wireless, local area networks (WLAN) may be improved by reducing the interference across neighboring access points (APs) while minimally impacting the performance of unicast transmissions/services. Minimal impact is assured by scheduling the transmission of multicast packet flows such that the duration of the time period required to transmit such flows is also minimized. One type of method provides a constant approximation of an optimal time period/schedule while another provides a logarithmic approximation of an optimal time period/schedule. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240020 | Routing support in heterogeneous communications networks - A device comprises a first binding unit which provides for a binding to a first tunnelling server using a first protocol, a second binding unit which provides for a binding to a second tunnelling server using a second protocol different from the first protocol, and an authorizing unit which causes the first or second binding unit to provide the binding. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240021 | MAC coordination architecture for multi-ratio coexistence and a method for connecting over sideband channels - A wireless device with a multi-radio platform includes a scheduling coordinator connected by a control bus to enable the radios to share frequency spectrum by operating during time slots requested by the radios, avoid collisions, mitigate interference and control shared hardware components. | 10-02-2008 |
20080247353 | CLUSTER HEAD ELECTION IN AN AD-HOC NETWORK - The ad-hoc network includes a plurality of mobile nodes including at least one group of mobile nodes operating as a cluster with a currently elected cluster head node. The mobile nodes include a controller and a wireless communications device cooperating therewith to determine whether the currently elected cluster head node appears inactive and then initiate a token-based cluster head node election based thereon. During the token-based cluster head node election, the cluster mobile nodes generate and transmit tokens having respective token weights, receive tokens from neighboring nodes, selectively retransmit the tokens based upon the token weights, and elect a new cluster head node based upon the token weights | 10-09-2008 |
20080247354 | METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TANGIBLE MACHINE-READABLE MEDIUM, AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PACKETS BASED ON A MULTI-HOP RELAY STANDARD - A method, a wireless communication system, a tangible machine-readable medium, and a communication apparatus for transmitting uplink hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) packets based on a multi-hop relay standard are provided. The wireless communication system comprises a BS, an SS, and a plurality of RSs. The RS transmits a plurality of first uplink HARQ packets to the RSs. After receiving one of the first uplink HARQ packets, at least one of the RSs replies a first ACK to the BS and retrieves a second uplink HARQ packet in the first uplink HARQ packet. Then, the at least one of the RSs transmits the second uplink HARQ packet to the BS. And the second uplink HARQ packet is the same as a part of one of the first uplink HARQ packets. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247355 | DUPLICATE DETECTION METHOD FOR AD HOC NETWORK - A duplicate detection method is disclosed for reducing redundant traffic in an ad hoc network. The duplicate detection method of the present invention includes receiving a first packet having a content identifier and a subcontent identifier, storing the content identifier and the subcontent identifier of the first packet, receiving a second packet, extracting a content identifier from the second packet, determining whether the content identifiers of the first and second packets are identical, extracting, when the content identifiers are identical, a subcontent identifier from the second packet, determining whether the subcontent identifiers of the first and second packets are identical, determining, when the subcontent identifiers of the first and second packets are identical, the second packet is a duplicate of the first packet. | 10-09-2008 |
20080253315 | Communication Network and a Communication Element and Method of Operation Thereof - The invention relates to a communication network in which a first communication element ( | 10-16-2008 |
20080253316 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING FLOW DIRECTION IN A NETWORK - Method and system for providing flow direction in a network. According to an embodiment, the present invention provides a method for providing network connections. The method includes providing a first host. The first host includes a plurality of interfaces. The plurality of interfaces includes at least a first interface and a second interface. The first interface is associated with at least a first application. The second interface is associated with at least a second application. The method also includes storing a plurality of records at a server. The plurality of records is associated with the first host. The plurality of records includes a first record and a second record. The first record includes at least information associated with a name of the first host, the first interface, the first application, a first address of the first interface. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253317 | Wireless Networks for Vehicles - Vehicles having corresponding methods comprise a media source to provide digital data; a first wireless network station comprising a first transmitter to wirelessly transmit first packets of the digital data; a second wireless network station comprising a first receiver to wirelessly receive the first packets of the digital data; and a media player to reproduce media based on the first packets of the digital data wirelessly received by the second wireless network station. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253318 | Configurable Acknowledgement Processing in a Wireless Communication System - Techniques for sending and receiving acknowledgement (ACK) information in a wireless communication system are described. A base station sends control information and data to a user equipment (UE) and receives ACK information from the UE. The base station performs detection for the ACK information based on (i) a first hypothesis for the control information being missed by the UE and (ii) a second hypothesis for the control information being received correctly by the UE. In one design, the ACK information may have a variable size, and the base station may perform detection for the ACK information based on different block codes for the first and second hypotheses. In another design, the ACK information may have a fixed size, and the base station may perform detection for the ACK information based on a single block code and obtain a fixed number of bits for the ACK information for both hypotheses. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253319 | RESTRICTIVE REUSE FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - For restrictive reuse, each cell (or each sector) is assigned (1) a set of usable subbands that may be allocated to users in the cell and (2) a set of forbidden subbands that is not used. The usable and forbidden sets for each cell are orthogonal to one other. The usable set for each cell also overlaps the forbidden set for each neighboring cell. A user u in a cell x may be allocated subbands in the usable set for that cell. If user u observes/causes high level of interference from/to a neighboring cell y, then user u may be allocated subbands from a “restricted” set containing subbands included in both the usable set for cell x and the forbidden set for cell y. User u would then observe/cause no interference from/to cell y. The subband restriction may be extended to avoid interference from multiple neighboring cells. | 10-16-2008 |
20080259841 | SUBSCRIPTION AGGREGATION AND LOAD BALANCING IN A BROADBAND ROUTER - In one embodiment, a bandwidth aggregation router is provided including a wireless broadband modem interface for communicating with a wireless network, a wired wide area network interface, and a processor configured to aggregate bandwidth from the wireless broadband modem interface and the wired wide area network interface. The router may then efficiently allocate the aggregated bandwidth to at least one device for access to a network. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259842 | Multicast Control Channel Design - A system for providing a multicast control channel (MCCH) including information related to a service is provided. The system includes a processor programmed to promote transmission of a MCCH including a multi-cell information portion that contains information common to a plurality of cells in a wireless telecommunications network, and a cell-specific information portion that contains information specific to one of the cells. A method for providing control information is also provided. The method includes transmitting a multicast control channel (MCCH) including information related to a service, wherein the MCCH has a cell-specific portion that contains information specific to a specific cell in a telecommunications network, and wherein the MCCH has a multi-cell portion that contains information common to a plurality of cells in the telecommunications network. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259843 | Method and Apparatus for User Equipment for Long Term Evolution Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services - A user equipment is provided that includes a processor programmed responsive to receiving a point-to-multipoint (PTM) broadcast of a service at a low quality, to request a point-to-point (PTP) communication from the network. A method is provided for user equipment to receive a service. The method includes receiving a point-to-multipoint (PTM) broadcast of a service from a network, and attempting to obtain an improved quality of the service by requesting from the network a point-to-point (PTP) communication of the service | 10-23-2008 |
20080259844 | OVER THE AIR MICROCONTROLLER FLASH MEMORY UPDATES - Techniques for over the air (OTA) microcontroller flash memory updates using a wireless network are disclosed herein. A control node first transmits the microcontroller flash memory update to all devices that can receive the message. Each packet of the message is relayed through multiple communication levels until all devices receive the packet. This starts with communications from the control node to each device node that has a direct communication path to the control node, which are referred to herein as “first level” device nodes. The first level device nodes then relay each communication to each other device node that has a direct communication path to the first level device nodes, which are referred to herein as “second level” device nodes. This process is repeated at each level of the wireless network until each of the plurality of device nodes has received the microcontroller flash memory update. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259845 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING MULTI MESH OPERATION MODES USING SINGLE WI-FI INTERFACING - A wireless-fidelity (Wi-Fi) interfacing method and a Wi-Fi interfacing system are provided. The Wi-Fi interfacing method includes: determining an interfacing operation mode related to a received packet, in interoperation with the receiving of the packet; and processing the packet via a single Wi-Fi interface, according to the determined interfacing operation mode. The Wi-Fi interfacing system includes: an operation mode determination unit determining an interfacing operation mode related to a received packet, in interoperation with the receiving of the packet; and a packet processing unit processing the packet via a single Wi-Fi interface, according to the determined interfacing operation mode. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259846 | Cooperative transceiving between wireless interface devices of a host device - A circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives packetized data with a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol. A second wireless interface circuit transceives packetized data with a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol and wherein the operation of the second wireless interface circuit interferes with the operation of the first wireless interface circuit. A processing module selectively preempts use of the second frequency spectrum by the second external device using a plurality of preemption modes including a first preemption mode and a second preemption mode. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259847 | Coordinated Beacon Period (Bp) Mergins for Distributed Wireless Networks - The application describes a method to merge two wireless networks in which each terminal gets a beacon slot within the beacon period. In order to merge two networks, the beacon slots have to be time-coordinated such that the beacon slots of the first network are completed before the beacon slots of the second network begin. The method includes transmitting a beacon frame having a beacon period switch information element which instructs the neighboring terminals in the first network of the need to merge, provides clock synchronization information; provides the time of the merge; and informs the neighboring terminals which beacon slot to occupy in the beacon period of the merged network. In order to deal with hidden terminals, the information needs to be forwarded terminal-to-terminal within each network. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259848 | Communication Node and Communication Control Method - A technique is disclosed whereby, in the case of wherein a communication node includes both a mobility management function and a multihoming function, based on a condition that occurs due to moving, an appropriate address can be selected from multiple addresses in a multihomed state. According to the technique, a mobility condition determination unit | 10-23-2008 |
20080259849 | MACRO-DIVERSITY REGION RATE MODIFICATION - A system including a buffer to receive and store a stream of content data. A controller module may be configured to determine the macro-diversity region size based on a set of pre-selected configuration parameters including an incoming rate of the content data and to allocate at least a portion of the content data to a macro-diversity region, to monitor an amount of the content data in the buffer in accordance with the set of pre-selected configuration parameters including an incoming rate of the content data to determine whether the amount of content data falls into or out of a target range defined by a low-end value and a high-end value and to adjust the size of the macro-diversity region by one or more increments in response to changes in the amount of the content data in accordance with the target range. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259850 | METHOD FOR REALIZING MOBILE IP MANAGEMENT AND THE NETWORK SYSTEM THEREOF - A method for realizing mobile IP management includes: a mobile node (MN) sends a mobility registration signal to a mobility control (MC) entity in a control function entity of the transmission layer of the network; a home mobility control entity of the mobile node registers the mobile node, returns a registration response to the mobile node and transmits a control signal to a mobility forwarding (MF) entity in the transmission layer; the mobility control entity controls the mobility forwarding entity to provide communication services for the mobile node after it receives a request signal from the registered mobile node. A method for realizing mobile IP management in NGN network and a network system for realizing mobile IP management are also disclosed. | 10-23-2008 |
20080267115 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UPDATING UATI OF AN ACCESS TERMINAL - A system for communication of an access terminal in a wireless network having a plurality of subnets. The system determines, based upon movement of the access terminal in a dormant state between subnets, and upon ColorCode and SecondaryColorCode values of each subnet, whether or not the access terminal should immediately initiate a Unicast Access Terminal Identifier (UATI) update request, or delay the Unicast Access Terminal Identifier (UATI) update. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267116 | Routing method and system for a wireless network - A method and system for selecting a route in a wireless network for the transmission of a data packet between wireless nodes in said network using a modified link-state routing algorithm wherein only a limited number of broadcast messages are generated to synchronize the link-state database throughout the wireless network. A subset of nodes called portal nodes within the network are elected to do the broadcasting for the entire network. Each portal node broadcasts an announcement of its identity to all of the wireless nodes. Each wireless node responds to these broadcasts to select one of the portal nodes as its root portal node. It then identifies a unicast route back to its root portal node, and sends a link-state register message to this portal node. These link-state register messages received by each portal node are aggregated by them and are broadcast to each of the wireless nodes for storage. When a data packet is thereafter received by a wireless node from a neighboring node, it detects if the data packet satisfies one of a plurality of predetermined conditions and rebroadcasts the data packet to neighboring wireless nodes if none of the conditions is satisfied. | 10-30-2008 |
20080273484 | Wireless Communication System - It is an object of the present invention to provide a wireless communication system, which ensures that communication can be maintained in an excellent status although a mobile wireless station may be moved in a service area. A CPU ( | 11-06-2008 |
20080273485 | System and method of discovery of wireless control device - Disclosed herein is a wireless infrastructure node configured to receive a discovery message from a wireless control device, and reply to the wireless control device with a connection request if the wireless infrastructure node is not statically assigned to another wireless control device and the wireless infrastructure node is not being managed by another wireless control device. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273486 | Wireless Protocol Adapter - A wireless protocol adapter for use in a process system includes a wireless interface that communicates with a multi-node wireless communication network using a wireless communication protocol, a wired interface that connects to a first field device over a wired link, and a processing unit that transfers process data between the wireless communication network and the first field device to enable operation of the first field device and of the wireless protocol adapter in the wireless communication network as distinct network nodes. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273487 | PUSH-TO TALK OVER AD-HOC NETWORKS - The invention proposes a network system comprising a plurality of network nodes ( | 11-06-2008 |
20080273488 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE BASED ACCESS POINT NAME (APN) SELECTION - A procedure is provided wherein a serving general packet radio service (GPRS) support node (SGSN) receives a request for an access point name (APN) the SGSN making a determination if the requested packet data protocol (PDP) and APN are the same as subscribed information. In the event that the requested and subscribed PDP type and the requested and subscribed APN are not the same, the SGSN advises that the APN requested is not authorized and agreement to terms and conditions and the provision of credit (or debit) card information must be provided to obtain the requested APN. | 11-06-2008 |
20080279136 | TECHNIQUES TO INCLUDE VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS IN A UNIVERSAL SERVICES INTERFACE - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a mobile station (MS) operable to communicate in a wireless network, the wireless network including a Universal Services Interface (USI) and wherein the MS includes a USI client adapted to monitor external IP addresses of the MS and if the MS enters a virtual private network (VPN) via a VPN tunnel, the external IP address of the VPN tunnel is cached. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279137 | DISCONTINUOUS INQUIRY FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A system for managing the operation of a plurality of wireless communication mediums supported by one or more radio modules integrated within a wireless communication device. A control strategy may be employed to regulate the operation of at least one wireless communication medium operating in a continuous mode, such as an discovery or inquiry mode, so as not to conflict with other active communication occurring substantially simultaneously within the wireless communication device. The regulation may occur in the one or more radio modules, and may include rescheduling part of, or alternatively a whole, discovery hop train. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279138 | Cooperative transceiving between wireless interface devices of a host device with shared modules - An circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives packetized data between a host module and a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol. A second wireless interface circuit transceives packetized data between the host module and a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol. The second wireless interface circuit includes at least one module that is shared with first wireless interface circuit, the module having a first state where the module is operational and a second state corresponding to a low-power state. The first wireless interface circuit and the second wireless interface circuit operate in accordance with a wireless interface schedule that includes a first time interval where the first wireless interface device and the second wireless interface device contemporaneously use the at least one module in the first state and a second time interval where the at least one module is in the second state. | 11-13-2008 |
20080285505 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK TIMING RECOVERY IN COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A system and method for determining the network timing of a communications network from a mobile station that receives signals from a plurality of base stations. An estimated location of a mobile station may be determined through any number of or combination of location technologies. Network measurements such as observed time difference values and/or a round trip time values at the mobile station or base stations in the network may be utilized. Network timing relationships may be determined as a function of the estimated location and network measurements. An estimated location of a second mobile station may be determined as a function of the network timing relationships. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285506 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING A TEMPORARY BLOCK FLOW TO WHICH A PIGGYBACKED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT/NON-ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIELD IS ADDRESSED - A method and apparatus for indicating a temporary block flow (TBF) to which a piggybacked acknowledgement/non-acknowledgement (PAN) field is addressed. A PAN check sequence (PCS) is created, for example using a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) encoding. The PCS is masked with a temporary flow identity (TFI) assigned to a TBF or a mask generated based on the TFI. A data block including the PAN field and the masked PCS is then processed for transmission. The mask may be generated by converting the TFI using an (M, N) code, M being not greater than the number of bits of the PCS and N being the number of bits of the TFI. With this scheme, a TFI may be transmitted in a PAN field without using explicit bits to identify the TBF. | 11-20-2008 |
20080291866 | Control Station Apparatus and Base Station Apparatus - A control station apparatus ensures that, even if transmission times are changed and set, data of channels can be acquired at the receiving end. In this apparatus, a synchronization part ( | 11-27-2008 |
20080291867 | Dynamic Discovery of Home Agent With Specific Binding - The invention relates to a method for obtaining a home node address in a packet switched network comprising nodes. The method comprises the steps of a first node sending to a first home node of a home network a request containing information about a home address of a mobile node to determine whether a binding with said home address indicating a registration of said mobile node at the first home node exists; the first home node receiving the request, said first home node comprising a stored binding table; determining whether the binding with said home address exists in any home node of the home network; and if the home address of the mobile node is in the binding table of any of the home nodes in the home network, the first node receiving a reply comprising the address of the home node with said binding. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291868 | ROUTE PROTOCOL - A route protocol is established whereby a mobile device can communicate to a multitude of (receiving) base stations though a tunnel created through a serving base station. A message that includes a Route Creation Header can be transmitted by the mobile device to create the tunnel. The Route Creation Header is reviewed by the receiving base station while the mobile device is in a Waiting-To-Open State. Various errors might occur with respect to the Route Creation Header. These errors can be conveyed to the mobile device by base station by setting one or more error code fields. Once the errors are resolved, another attempt to create a tunnel with base station can be made, if desired. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291869 | Routing Method for Mobile Wireless Nodes Having Overlapping Internet Protocol Home Addresses - In mobile IP wireless data networking, methods are described for correctly routing packets through a foreign agent to or from wireless nodes where the wireless nodes have the same home network IP address. Instead of using normal IP routing, the foreign agent uniquely identifies the wireless node's home network IP address and home agent IP address with a PPP link address associated with a PPP link between the foreign agent and the wireless node. This association between PPP link addresses, home agent IP addresses, and home network IP addresses, is preferably implemented in software as a table stored in the foreign agent. The routing of packets through the foreign agent to the mobile nodes is performed by reference to the table. The table allows the foreign agent to correctly and efficiently route packets in the situation where multiple wireless nodes are registered with the foreign agent, but more than one of the wireless nodes have the same home network IP address. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291870 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING MOBILE WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS - A mobile access point is disclosed. The mobile access point includes a terminal module configured to provide one or more terminal functions for use by a user, the one or more terminal functions including a voice or data communications application, and a gateway module configured to provide one or more gateway functions for use by at least one client device, the one or more gateway functions including providing the at least one client device access to a computer network, and a processor configured to execute the terminal module and the gateway module to effectuate their corresponding functions. | 11-27-2008 |
20080298300 | Communication Control Method and System for Carrying Out Said Method - A system including communications means ( | 12-04-2008 |
20080298301 | METHOD TO SWITCH BETWEEN NETWORK-CONTROLLED AND MOBILE-CONTROLLED MOBILE IP FUNCTIONALITY - A method for prioritizing Mobile IP between PMIP and CMIP includes the steps of connecting a mobile device ( | 12-04-2008 |
20080298302 | SENSOR DEVICE, SERVER NODE, SENSOR NETWORK SYSTEM, METHOD OF ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION PATH, CONTROL PROGRAM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - For the purpose of allowing a sensor device ( | 12-04-2008 |
20080298303 | MULTI-LINK SUPPORT FOR NETWORK BASED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS - The claimed subject matter relates to systems and methods for processing messages in a wireless communications environment. In an aspect, a communications method is provided. The method includes establishing a communications link though an access component with a network domain node and enabling at least one other communications link through at least one other access component with the network domain node. This also includes enabling concurrent communications with the network domain node via the access component or the other access component. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298304 | ROUTING METHOD IN WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless multi-hop network communication terminal | 12-04-2008 |
20080298305 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, OUTPUT DEVICE, INPUT DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - The objective of the invention is to enable easy recognition of a wireless communication device at the connection destination and to enable connection when wireless connection is newly made between wireless communication devices. On display | 12-04-2008 |
20080298306 | Implicit Signaling for Link Adaptation - Briefly, the invention concerns the issue of supporting link adaptation in a wireless network, and basically involves implicit signaling for link adaptation based on transfer of transmit duration information. More particularly, a designated originating node sends (S | 12-04-2008 |
20080298307 | Apparatus, Method and Computer Program for Seamless Session Transfer - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method in a telecommunication system for controlling communication services between client terminals ( | 12-04-2008 |
20080298308 | Event Notification in a Half Duplex Communication Environment - The present invention is directed towards providing event-triggered communication in a half duplex communication environment of a wireless communication network ( | 12-04-2008 |
20080298309 | PROVIDING ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES - Advanced communications features are provided in a mobile communications network having at least one mobile switching center and at least one mobile station subsystem. The mobile switching center and mobile station subsystem each communicate signaling messages according to a mobile signaling protocol. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298310 | CROSS CHANNEL COEXISTENCE BEACONING PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS NETWORKS - A wireless system including a plurality of WRAN's operating on different channels identifies and addresses a number of important issues relating to the current CBP mechanism (in D0.3) used for inter-cell discovery and communication. The present invention provides fundamental remedies to respectively resolve these issues. Moreover, an Enhanced Coexistence Beaconing Protocol (CBP) is provided that allows efficient, scalable, and backward-compatible cross-channel inter-cell communications for IEEE 802.22 systems. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298311 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTERCONNECTING BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK WITH OPTICAL ACCESS BROADBAND NETWORK - A method and system for interconnecting a broadband wireless network with a wired network includes interconnecting a broadband wireless access (BWA) network with an optical access (OAN) broadband network at any reference point among reference points T, a, ODN, and V in the OAN broadband network, and interconnecting them with a digital subscriber line (DSL) network by the reference point V in the DSL network. The method of the present invention can solve the problem of the interconnection between the worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) network and the OAN broadband network, and the DSL network. An evolution approach is provided for the OAN broadband network operator and the DSL network operator to develop the WiMAX network. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298312 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING TUNNEL IN WLAN - A method and a system for establishing a tunnel in a wireless local area network (WLAN) are described. The method includes the following steps. A WLAN terminal initiates a tunnel establishment request in an Internet Key Exchange Security Association (IKE SA) that has been established. It is judged whether the number of tunnels already established in the IKE SA reaches a corresponding first threshold or not, if the number of tunnels does not reach the corresponding first threshold, establishing the tunnel for the WLAN terminal; otherwise, rejecting the establishment of the tunnel for the WALN terminal. It is decided whether to establish the tunnel for the WLAN terminal or not by judging whether the number of the tunnels already established in each IKE SA reaches the corresponding threshold or not during the tunnel establishment of the WLAN terminal, thereby effectively controlling the rationality and validity about the tunnel establishment. | 12-04-2008 |
20080304438 | Method and Apparatus for Multimedia Communication - A method and apparatus for enabling communication of IP multimedia content to a called user during a circuit-switched call between a calling terminal (A) having called a primary communication unit (B | 12-11-2008 |
20080304439 | Automatic Base Station Configuration - A basestation in a cellular communications network is configured such that it has a different Location Area Identification from other local basestations in the cellular network. This has the effect that a Location Area Update procedure is performed when a mobile device wishes to camp onto that basestation. The basestation is able to configure itself automatically, to ensure that its Location Area Identification differs from other local basestations. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304440 | Terminal and Method for Accessing Wireless Connection - A method for establishing a wireless connection performed by a subscriber station (SS) to receive Internet services from a given terminal node through a base station (BS), the method including: a) when an initial connection with the BS is established, establishing a first MAC connection with the BS, and setting the first MAC connection as a dedicated TCP connection; b) when a given packet is generated, the SS determining whether the given packet is a control packet for a TCP connection with the SS; c) transmitting the given packet through the dedicated TCP connection when a control packet is transmitted, and establishing a TCP connection with the SS; d) after establishing the TCP connection, establishing a second MAC connection for data communication between the SS and the BS; and e) after establishing the TCP connection and the second MAC connection, receiving data from the SS through the second MAC connection. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304441 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT MODE SELECTION IN MULTIPLE ACCESS WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate indicating and determining mobility management modes in access identifiers for wireless communications networks. Wireless devices can indicate mobility management modes to be utilized by choosing a target system and communicating the chosen system and a home system to one or more network components. The network components can infer or otherwise determine a mobility management mode based at least in part on a relationship between the target and home systems. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304442 | Wireless Base Station for Communications Network - A wireless base station includes: a trend factor regression expression calculator for determining, on the basis of measured wireless communication environment factor, the trend of the variation in the environment factor; a trend prediction value calculator for calculating, on the basis of the determined trend of the variation in the environment factor, the environment prediction value; an irregular variation factor calculator for calculating, on the basis of the difference between the determined trend of the environment factor variation and the measured environment factor, the magnitude of correction to be applied to the environment prediction value; and a radio environment prediction correction unit for correcting the environment prediction value according to the tolerance of the base station for its communication failure risk. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304443 | Standards based communictions for a container security system - A container security system includes a plurality of wireless communication devices, each wireless communication device being associated with a respective container, and a sensor assembly located in the interior of each container. Each sensor assembly includes a sensor component and a wireless communication component that is configured to wirelessly communicate with the wireless communication device of the container in which the sensor assembly is located. A standards based wireless interface is utilized in the wireless communications between the wireless communication device of each container and the sensor assembly located in the interior of the container. | 12-11-2008 |
20080310340 | Communication System, Communication Method, Communication Terminal Device, Control Method Thereof, and Program - The present invention proposes a highly reliable communication system and communication method, a communication terminal device used for the communication system, a control method thereof, and a program installed on the communication terminal device. In communication system and communication method, the communication terminal device used for the communication system, the control method thereof, and the program installed on the communication terminal device, a first communication terminal originates a first message. In response to the first message, a third communication terminal originates a second message. Based on these messages, the first through third communication terminals create routes to the first or third communication terminal. The first communication terminal transmits a route request composed of a request for a route used for communication with the third communication terminal. The second and third communication terminals create multiple routes to the first or third communication terminal. A communication route is established between the first and third communication terminals using a route that belongs to the created routes and satisfies the route request transmitted from the first communication terminal. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310341 | Wireless Transmission System - In the present invention, a wireless transmission system includes a plurality of mobile stations in a cell area, and a base station. The base station divides each of an uplink frame and a downlink frame into a plurality of blocks, assigns a specific one of the plurality of blocks to each of the plurality of the mobile stations, assigns a specific frequency channel to the mobile station, and notifies the specific block and the specific frequency channel to the mobile station. The length of each of the plurality of blocks is optional, and a sum of the lengths of the plurality of blocks is equal to the length of the frame. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310342 | Addressing Messages in a Two-Tier Network - In one embodiment, a method includes accessing a frame including a baseline header including a recipient address (RA) field, a transmitter address (TA) field, a destination address (DA) field, and a source address (SA) field. The method includes inserting into the frame a mesh header including a mesh destination address (MDA) field and a mesh source address (MSA) field. The MSA field specifies an address of a first edge node of the wireless mesh network, and the MDA field specifies an address of a second edge node of the wireless mesh network. The first edge node is a first transmitter of the frame with the baseline and mesh headers in the wireless mesh network, and the second edge node is a last recipient of the frame with the baseline and mesh headers in the wireless mesh network. The RA, TA, DA, and SA fields precede the MDA and MSA fields in the frame after insertion of the mesh header into the frame. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310343 | Methods of jointly assigning resources in a multi-carrier, multi-hop wireless communication system - Methods for jointly determining tones, power, scheduling and routing of links in a multi-carrier, multi-hop network to achieve certain desired throughput objectives between source and destination nodes. The methods effectively enhance or optimize throughput received by each destination router under node traffic constraints such as power, scheduling and flow constraints that apply to each link between each of a plurality of nodes within the mesh network. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310344 | TUNNEL OVERHEAD REDUCTION - Reduction of overhead normally caused by the addition of a second IP header in case of tunneling between a home agent and a mobile node located in a foreign network is achieved by replacing an encapsulated first IP header by a tunnel identifier. The home agent and the mobile node agree on a tunnel identifier value at the time of binding update and acknowledgement. The tunnel identifier may be used independently at the home agent and at the mobile node to reconstruct the first IP header, which identifies a correspondent node. Because the encapsulated first IP header is not terminated at either of the home agent or mobile node, overhead reduction is not impacted by eventual transmission error or loss between these two nodes. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310345 | Method of Generating Lower Layer Data Block in Wireless Mobile Communication System - A method of generating a data block including control information in a specific layer of a mobile communication apparatus having a hierarchical structure constructed with a plurality of layers is disclosed. The present invention includes the steps of inserting a control data block including control information into a first region of a lower layer data block if the lower layer has the control information to be transmitted to a receiving side and inserting at least one portion of the data block of an upper layer into a second region of the lower layer data block, wherein the first region is allocated to the control data block before the second region is allocated to the at least one portion of the upper layer data block. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310346 | Communication protocol for a wireless mesh architecture - A wireless mesh communication protocol that dynamically assigns communication time-slots and frequencies to mesh nodes. A first node is established as a PC that sequentially polls other nodes. A second node responds at a predetermined time with information that includes database records, and then a third node responds similarly. The second node is then established as the PC and the first node is polled during dynamically allocated time-slots and on a frequency that depend on the second node's database records. The third node is then established as a PC and acts similarly. In both cases the first node responds by sending information and data records. The first node is then re-established as the PC. The first node then polls the second and third nodes at times and frequencies that depend on the first node's database records. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310347 | Mobile communications system PDIF and method for peer detection of mobile terminal - With a system having no paging function, dead peer detection control and cutoff of a session are implemented as is the case with a system having a paging function. There is provided a method for dead peer detection of a mobile terminal, to be executed in a mobile communications system including a mobile terminal connected to plural wireless systems, a first connection device terminating a first wireless system with access points managing a connection status between the mobile terminal and a wireless link, and a second connection device terminating a second wireless system with access points not managing a connection status between the mobile terminal and a wireless link, said method comprising the steps of the second connection device acquiring the connection status of the mobile terminal in the first wireless system from the first connection device, and the second connection device changing a dead peer detection control process on the basis of the connection status of the mobile terminal, as acquired. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310348 | Wireless Systems and Methods Including Cooperative Communication Medium Access Control - A complementary medium access control (CMAC) method and apparatus are described. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310349 | MULTIPLE BINDINGS HAVING INDEPENDENT FORWARD AND REVERSE LINK BINDINGS FOR MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOLS - Methods, apparatus, systems and computer program products are defined that provide multiple bindings in a Mobile Internet Protocol (MIP) network environment. The multiple bindings that are established are independent of one another, such that a forward link binding is decoupled from, or otherwise does not affect, a reverse link binding and vice versa. Multiple reverse link-only bindings may be established within an active route set for an access terminal. Additionally a single primary binding may be established that provides a forward link binding and reverse link binding. At any point in time, the access terminal may maintain only one primary binding. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310350 | WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A wireless mesh network where a portion of the nodes have reduced receive sensitivity. The negative effects of the density of the wireless mesh network, such as interference, are reduced when fewer nodes receive messages to rebroadcast. In an alternative embodiment, some of the nodes of the mesh network are configured to not rebroadcast even if they receive a message. A method for configuring a dense mesh network is also provided. As many nodes as possible are discovered and registered in the network. Node characteristics of those nodes are adjusted to reduce or eliminate the negative effects of the dense mesh network so that additional nodes may be discovered and registered. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310351 | Preamble Formats for MIMO Wireless Communications - A method for generating a preamble of a frame for a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless communication begins by, for each transmit antenna of the MIMO wireless communication, generating a carrier detect field, wherein, from transmit antenna to transmit antenna, the carrier detect field is cyclically shifted. The method continues by, for a first grouping of the transmit antennas of the MIMO wireless communication: generating a first guard interval following the carrier detect field; and generating at least one channel sounding field, wherein, from transmit antenna to transmit antenna in the first grouping, the at least one channel sounding field is cyclically shifted, and wherein the at least one channel sounding field follows the first guard interval. The method continues by, when the MIMO wireless communication includes more than the first grouping of the transmit antennas, for another grouping of the transmit antennas: generating at least one other channel sounding field, wherein, from transmit antenna to transmit antenna in the another grouping, the at least one other channel sounding field is cyclically shifted, and wherein the at least one other channel sounding field follows the at least one channel sounding field; and generating the first guard interval prior to the at least one other channel sounding field. | 12-18-2008 |
20080316956 | Method and Apparatus for Route Optimization in a Telecommunication Network - A method and apparatus for controlling the routing of a data packet sent from a first node towards a second node of a telecommunication network. The first node is a mobile node having an associated home network. An access router intercepts the data packet and determines whether the packet relates to a first mode of communication between the first and second nodes in which data packets generally bypass a home agent associated with the first node's home network. In a second mode of communication, home agent packets generally passed through the home agent. The access router drops the packet if the packet relates to the first mode of communication and if dropping the packet is determined to be in accordance with a pre-determined routing policy. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316957 | Selection of Orthogonal Covering Sequences and Phase Ramped Sequences - A transmission of information from a secondary to a primary node occurs in a plurality of N logical time durations. The transmission from the secondary to primary node in a wireless network is obtained using a first and a second sequence. Embodiments of the present invention mitigate interference by restricting the choice of the first sequence. Thus, in an embodiment of the invention, the first sequence is selected from a set of M sequences wherein M is strictly less than N. In order to accommodate high—velocity users, the restricted set contains a pair of sequences whose element—wise product is mirror symmetric. In other embodiments of the invention, the choices of the first sequence and second sequence in a time-frequency resource is arranged such that interference is mitigated. A transmission component for K-th logical time duration is obtained from the entire second sequence and K-th element of the first sequence. | 12-25-2008 |
20090003263 | NETWORK FOR A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A METHOD OF OPERATION THEREFOR - A network for a cellular communication system comprises access points ( | 01-01-2009 |
20090003264 | LOAD BALANCING FOR MOBILE IP HOME AGENTS - In one embodiment, mobile nodes may be pre-provisioned with a static home agent address and a static home address. The home agent address may be the same for all the mobile nodes. The home address may be a unique identifier for the mobile node in a network. A registration request from a mobile node may be sent to the home agent address. A load balancer may be configured to receive the registration request at the home agent address. The load balancer is then configured to determine a home agent in the plurality of home agents to send the registration request to. The load balancer determines which home agent to send the request to based on the home address for the mobile node. The load balancer then sends the request to the determined home agent. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003265 | IMS NETWORK PROVIDING PURCHASING SESSIONS TO MOBILE DEVICES THAT ARE LOCATED PROXIMATE TO A BUSINESS - IMS networks and methods are disclosed for providing purchasing sessions to mobile devices that are located proximate to a business. IMS network includes an application server that provides advertisements for the business to mobile devices that are located proximate to the business (i.e., the advertisements are pushed to the mobile devices). Responsive to an advertisement, the user of a mobile device may contact the application server through the mobile device to purchase one or more items from the business. The application server responds to the mobile device with receipt information for the purchase. The user may then request delivery of the purchased item through the mobile device by transmitting some or all of the receipt information to the application server. The application server may then schedule delivery of the item to the user of the mobile device. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003266 | Method of Dynamic Resource Allocations in Wireless Systems - A method of dynamic resource allocations in wireless network is disclosed. The method provides that a base station in the network allocates resources to users independently of other base stations and without resource planning. Resource allocations are done based at least in part on a local optimization objective and a channel quality indicator from one or more users, and result in efficient resource reuse. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003267 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION SCHEDULING IN A MULTIHOP NETWORK - A method of communication scheduling in a multihop network is provided. The multihop network comprises a base station and at least one relay station. The method includes allocating a downlink relay to a relay station; assigning a first one or more connection identifiers to be locally scheduled at the relay station for communication on a first portion of the downlink relay; and assigning a second one or more connection identifiers to be centrally scheduled by the base station for communication on a second portion of the downlink relay. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003268 | CLIENT RESOURCE RESERVATION IN ACCESS NETWORKS FOR ROAMING - A method, apparatus, and system are disclosed. In one embodiment, the method includes granting a mobile device access to a network. The method also includes maintaining the mobile device state information on a network access device that is broadcasting the network, when the mobile device leaves the network, and also maintaining the network state information on the mobile device, when the mobile device leaves the network. Additionally, the method includes restoring the mobile device access to the network using the mobile device state information and the network state information. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003269 | Router Selection Method, Home Agent Device, Mobile Router, and Mobile Network System - Any mobile router or terminal informs a home agent device of a policy of selecting a mobile router, entered by the user. Then, the home agent device creates relay setting information according to the policy information informed and the characteristic information of the mobile routers, and transmits the information to the mobile routers. This relay setting information is for judging whether a packet addressed to the external network, received by the mobile routers is relayed to the external network or transferred to the own network, and if transferring, for determining a transfer destination. Each of the mobile routers relays a received packet according to its relay setting information, thus implementing communication reflecting a user's intention as needed. | 01-01-2009 |
20090010201 | Mobile Communication Access System, Packet Transfer Device, and Path Re-Establishing Method - Disclosed is a technique for providing a mobile communication access system, etc., that can eliminate the useless consumption of resources due to route redundancy, reduce the load on the processing, such as the setup of an LSP, performed by an ingress LSR, avoid an increase in the length of a signal route for setting up an LSP, suppress a delay in providing a notification of a change for an egress LSR to which a mobile terminal is to be connected, and perform a rapid handover process. According to this technique, based on identification information for a second edge device | 01-08-2009 |
20090010202 | Wireless base station - A wireless base station for mobile stations, includes a queue distributor for distributing packets among queues for a real-time system service and queues for a non-real-time system service and storing the packets; a scheduler for performing control of transmission sequence of the packets based on the queues for the real-time system service and the non-real-time system service separately; a buffer for storing the packets therein in the transmission sequence determined by the scheduler; and a mapper for allocating the packets stored at the buffer among ratio frames. Further, the scheduler uses, for the queues for the real-time system service and for the queues for the non-real-time system service, a same type of algorithm determining the transmission sequence according to priority values determined based on QoS requests and employs different equations to compute the priority values for the real time and the non-real-time system service | 01-08-2009 |
20090010203 | Efficient Addressing in Wireless Hart Protocol - A method of providing a wireless extension to a wired protocol for transferring data to and from a field device operating in a process control environment via a wired connection, wherein the wired protocol and the wireless extension to the wired protocol have at least one protocol layer in common includes associating a unique address consistent with an addressing scheme of the wired protocol with each of a plurality of wireless devices operating in the process control environment and forming a wireless network, such that a data packet is routed between two of the plurality of wireless devices based on the unique address; associating a network identifier with the plurality of wireless devices; forming, for each of the plurality of wireless devices, a global address including the respective unique address and the network identifier in accordance with a second addressing scheme; and providing access to an external host operating outside the wireless network to each of the plurality of wireless devices based on the global address associated with the wireless device specified at the external host. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010204 | Support for Network Management and Device Communications in a Wireless Network - A method of efficiently operating a wireless communication network in a process control environment, such that the wireless communication network includes a plurality of field devices, includes defining a communication protocol for supporting wireless communications between pairs of the plurality of field devices, including providing a set of protocol commands, transferring process control data from at least some of the plurality of field devices using a first subset of the set of protocol commands of the communication protocol, and transferring network management data to at least some of the plurality of field devices using a second subset of the set of protocol commands of the communication protocol. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010205 | Priority-Based Scheduling and Routing in a Wireless Network - A method of routing data in a mesh communication network including a plurality of network devices and operating in a process control environment, including assigning one of a plurality of priority levels associated with the communication network to a data packet, sending the data packet from a source network device included in the plurality of network devices to a destination network device included in the plurality of network devices, and routing the data packet to a destination network device via at least one intermediate network device included in the plurality of network devices. The act of routing includes comparing, at each intermediate network device, the priority level of the data packet to a priority mask of the intermediate network device, and modifying at least one of scheduling or routing of the data packet if the priority level of the data packet is not associated with the priority mask of the intermediate network device. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010206 | MOBILE IP HOME AGENT DISCOVERY - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate Mobile IP home agent (HA) discovery in a wireless communication system. Discovery of a HA for Mobile IP can be conducted as described herein for a mobile terminal located on a network wherein movement of the terminal is managed by a network-based mobility protocol. For example, various aspects described herein can be utilized for discovery of a HA located in a 3GPP network from 3GPP and/or non-3GPP access. Further, various aspects described herein can be utilized to discover a gateway acting as mobility anchor for a network mobility protocol utilized by the network. As additionally described herein, HA discovery can be conducted in connection with DNS query formation and communication, network attach and/or re-attach procedures, Neighbor Discovery signaling, and/or other procedures. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010207 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO AUGMENT LEGACY TELEMETRY SYSTEMS AND SENSORS - A method and system to extend the reach and improve the reliability of legacy telemetry systems. A first node transmits a plurality of data to a base station directly or by using a second node and a plurality of transmission nodes. A consolidation node collects transmissions of the plurality of data from the plurality of transmission nodes, thereby extending the reach of the network. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010208 | APPARATUS AND METHOD DETERMINING TBS - In a TBS (Transport Block Size) determination apparatus, a CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) value setting section sets a CQI value which is transmitted from a UE (User Equipment) which communicates based on a packet transmission standard HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access). A TBS acquiring section acquires a TBS by referring to a CQI mapping table based on the set CQI value. A BLER (BLock Error Rate) setting section sets a BLER before, simultaneously, or after the setting a CQI value, and before, simultaneously, or after the acquiring a TBS. A TBS changing section changes the TBS based on the BLER. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010209 | NOTIFICATION EQUIPMENT, TERMINAL EQUIPMENT, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A notification equipment comprises a transmission data determination unit configured to determine whether transmission data to be transmitted to a terminal equipment is first transmission data or repeated transmission data, an instruction data generator configured to generate identification instruction data indicating that the transmission data is the first transmission data or the repeated transmission data based on a transmission data determination result by the transmission data determination unit, and an instruction data transmitter configured to transmit the identification instruction data to the terminal equipment. | 01-08-2009 |
20090016261 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING AND/OR USING A COMMUNICATIONS BAND FOR PEER TO PEER SIGNALING - Methods and apparatus for supporting peer to peer communications are described. A plurality of wide area network communications bands in a wireless communications system are also available for use to communicate peer to peer signals. At different times it may be advantageous for a mobile peer to peer communications device to use a different communications band in order to efficiently share air link resources. A peer to peer communications device receives a signal transmitted by a WAN device, e.g., a base station or WAN wireless terminal, and selects a WAN communications band to use as a function of the received signal, e.g., a corresponding band. In some embodiments, the received signal strength measurements from WAN devices are used in the selection process. In other embodiments, recovered decoded information conveyed in a received WAN device signal is used in the selection process. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016262 | Technique for Low-Overhead Network State Dissemination for Management of Mobile Ad-Hoc Networks - Aspects of the disclosure can provide an ad-hoc network having a clusterhead node and a plurality of nodes associated with the clusterhead, at least one of the plurality of nodes is a remote node and at least one is an intermediate node, the remote node can indirectly communicate with the clusterhead through the intermediate node. The remote node can also transmit network state information at a higher rate, but in lesser amounts, than the intermediate node. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016263 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT - It is an object to provide a wireless base station and a terminal equipment capable of shortening the processing time by not requiring the detection of the spatial correlation coefficient, which is required in general technology, and simplifying the selection process for terminal equipments to be connected to each other in a wireless base station that performs spatial multiplexing transmission to a plurality of terminal equipments and a terminal equipment responding for spatial multiplexing transmission. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016264 | PACKET TRANSFER METHOD IN COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM AND PACKET PROCESSING METHOD IN COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONSTITUTING THE SYSTEM - There is disclosed a technology in which a packet to be sent to a mobile terminal (an MN), distributed from a correspondent node (a CN), can surely reach the MN even in a situation in which the MN is moving. According to the technology, identification information of a plurality of access routers (ARs) | 01-15-2009 |
20090016265 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A radio communication system of an HARQ method that makes an HARQ transmission interval of subpackets appropriate and reduces data transmission delay resulting from subpacket retransmission. In the radio communication system in which a packet is transmitted and receives with the HARQ method between a base station and multiple radio mobile stations, each of the base station and the multiple radio mobile stations has: a packet transmission circuit for transmitting subpackets in predetermined intervals; a packet reception circuit for repeating decoding processing by combining a newly received subpacket and a previously received former subpacket until an original packet is successfully decoded; and a HARQ control equipped with a function of, for packet communication whose data length is short, transmitting a subpacket or response from the packet transmission circuit in an HARQ transmission interval that is shortened from the HARQ transmission interval of the normal mode. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016266 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A MESSAGE VIA AN UPLINK CHANNEL IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a message via an uplink access channel in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes initiating a first preamble access procedure with Node B, receiving from Node B a first acknowledgement indication with respect to the first access preamble procedure, transmitting to Node B a first message upon receipt of the first acknowledgement indication, and receiving from Node B a second acknowledgment indication regarding the first message | 01-15-2009 |
20090016267 | BASE STATION AND PACKET TRANSFER EQUIPMENT - A base station and a router are interactively connected by a multilink group which transmits VoIP packets and a multilink group which transmits data packets other than VoIP packets. The base station and the router split transmission lines by referencing the ToS area of received packets and transmit only VoIP packets by way of a dedicated line. In this way, VoIP packets can be transmitted without being affected by other data packets, and the quality of VoIP can be warranted on the mobile network. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016268 | DELAY CONTROL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is related to controlling delay in a wireless communication system. The present invention includes receiving a signal from a plurality of base stations, measuring at least one signal delay of each of the plurality of base stations, reporting the measured at least one signal delay of each base station to a controller controlling the plurality of base stations, and receiving an adjusted signal from each of the plurality of base stations as a result of reporting the measured at least one signal delay, wherein each adjusted signal is received in a synchronous manner. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016269 | METHOD FOR ROUTING A TRAFFIC FLOW IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK AND NODE FOR IMPLEMENTING SUCH A METHOD - It is disclosed a method for routing an upstream traffic flow generated at a node of a radio access network. The method comprises the following steps: a) at the node, splitting the upstream traffic flow in packets; b) at the node, inserting in at least one of the packets an information indicative of the destination of the upstream traffic flow; and c) routing the at least one of the packets according to the information indicative of the destination through a packet-switch operation. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016270 | MIP/PMIP CONCATENATION WHEN OVERLAPPING ADDRESS SPACE ARE USED - Systems, methodologies, and devices are described that enable communication devices, such as mobile devices, to efficiently connect and communicate with public data networks (PDNs) even if overlapping Internet protocol address spaces exist in the PDNs. The subject innovation can employ virtual home agents (v-HAs) that can respectively serve PDNs. To facilitate connection of a mobile device to a desired PDN, a message, including an identifier relating to the desired PDN, can be transmitted to a v-HA and it can be discovered whether that v-HA serves the desired PDN; if so, the v-HA transmits the message to a “home” home agent (h-HA) associated with the desired PDN; and if not, the v-HA can transmit a switch message indicating the correct v-HA to which the message should be sent. Concatenation of communication tunnels associated with the correct v-HA and h-HA facilitate efficient communication associated with the mobile device and desired PDN. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016271 | METHODS FOR SENDING SMALL PACKETS IN A PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) NETWORK - An improved mechanism is provided that facilitates transmission of small packets within an ad hoc peer-to-peer network. A small packet is identified to a receiver within a control channel so that its lower power can be considered in an interference management protocol implemented among local peer devices. In a traffic slot, a transmitter voluntarily backs down on the transmitter power as a smaller packet will require much lower signal-to-noise ratio. This will improve the signal energy per bit per noise power density for the transmission as well as minimize the interference caused to other wireless communications happening in the same spectrum. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016272 | METHODS FOR SENDING SMALL PACKETS IN A PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) NETWORK - An improved mechanism is provided that facilitates transmission of small packets within an ad hoc peer-to-peer network. A small packet is identified to a receiver within a control channel so that its lower power can be considered in an interference management protocol implemented among local peer devices. In a traffic slot, a transmitter voluntarily backs down on the transmitter power as a smaller packet will require much lower signal-to-noise ratio. This will improve the signal energy per bit per noise power density for the transmission as well as minimize the interference caused to other wireless communications happening in the same spectrum. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016273 | DEFERRED ACCESS METHOD FOR UPLINK PACKET CHANNEL - The equipment and techniques disclosed herein introduce a deferred acknowledgement (DACK), in the context of a protocol for a wireless station to request and obtain access to a wireless network resource for communication of one or more data packets. Essentially, a network node, such as a wireless base station, sends the DACK instruction in response to the access request telling the requesting station that the node has heard the request but that the requesting station should defer its transmission. The requesting station need not back off and re-initiate its access request. Instead, the requesting station waits for a later acknowledgement (ACK) granting access to a resource as requested. Although the DACK provides additional signaling, this technique can still utilize a fast ACK type message, that is to say a relatively short signaling packet. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016274 | CHARGING AND LOCATION INDICATIONS IN A GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK - A Generic Access Network Controller (GANC) for providing both location and charging information from a Generic Access Network (GAN) to a core network. During registration of a mobile station (MS) the GANC determines a Charging Cell Global Identity (Charging-CGI) and a Location Cell Global Identity, (Location-CGI) for the MS and stores the CGIs in an MS context. The MS sends to the GANC, a request a to establish a signaling connection, and includes an Establishment Cause IE indicating a reason for the connection. The GANC selects from the MS context, either the Charging-CGI or the Location-CGI based upon the Establishment Cause IE, and sends the selected CGI to the core network in a message triggering a signaling connection. | 01-15-2009 |
20090022089 | ARCHITECTURE TO SUPPORT NETWORK-WIDE MULTIPLE-IN-MULTIPLE-OUT WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - The present invention provides a method of coordinating transmission by and reception by a plurality of antennas associated with a plurality of radio heads. The method includes determining, at a controller, at least one relative time delay associated with a plurality of backhaul links between the controller and the plurality of radio heads. The method also includes providing information indicative of a first signal over the plurality of backhaul links. The method further includes providing timing information over the plurality of backhaul links. The timing information is determined based on the relative time delay(s) such that the plurality of radio heads can use the provided timing information to coherently transmit the first signal using the plurality of antennas and a plurality of controllers to receive mobile unit transmitted information. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022090 | SWITCHING ALLOCATION IN AD HOC NETWORK - A method in a wireless communication device ( | 01-22-2009 |
20090022091 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING STANDARDIZED INTERFACE IN A WIRELESS DEVICE TO DISCOVER AND USE LOCAL AND REMOTE RESOURCES - A wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may discover available networks, and available local and/or remote resources. The WMC device may configure routes utilizing one or more of discovered resources and one or more available networks. The routes may be utilized to performed operations requested via the WMC device. A standardized language and/or protocol may be utilized in discovering and/or communicating with available resources and/or networks. The standardized language and/or protocol may enable commonality among the discovered networks and/or resources, and encryption of data communicated through the established routes. The standardized language and/or protocol may be updated and/or modified to incorporate new resources either by direct interactions between said new resources and the WMC device, or via existing available resources and/or networks. The discovery of resources and/or establishment of routes may be user-triggered, or it may be based on user preference information. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022092 | Method And System For Managing Information Among Personalized And Shared Resources With A Personalized Portable Device - A user's request via a portable or handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) to process data may result in discovery of one or more networked resources capable of handling the processing. One or more communication routes may be established between one or more discovered network resources and one or more of the HWCD and a networked terminating device. The portable HWCD may be configured as a gateway. The user's identity may be determined and the user's personal networking preferences may be acquired. Based user's preferences, a route may be established between discovered networked resources and one or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device. The user's identity may be authenticated. Data may undergo rate and/or format conversion. The data may be protected by secure operations. One or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device may consume or render the requested data. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022093 | WIRELESS NETWORK WITH SIMULTANEOUS UPLINK TRANSMISSION OF INDEPENDENT DATA FROM MULTIPLE CLIENT STATIONS - A wireless network comprises R client stations that respectively generate simultaneous uplink transmission (SUT) data, where R is an integer greater than one. An access point (AP) receives SUT data from each of the R client stations during an SUT period. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022094 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENCODING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN WIRELESS AND OTHER DEVICES - A method for encoding a message communicated between devices, the message having at least one field, the method comprising: if the field is not optional and contains a value, writing the value to one or more data bytes in a byte buffer; and, if the field is optional and contains a default value, marking a bit in a reserved byte in the byte buffer to indicate that the field contains a default value. | 01-22-2009 |
20090028089 | Communication system and method to be performed in a communication system - The invention relates to a communication method and system wherein a network element of a roaming user is attachable to a visited first network and may still be served by a serving means of the home network. The network element of the roaming user is able to indicate a preference, e.g. home or local control, when registering or initiating a connection. A network element of the visited network such as proxy means adds information on the indicated preference when sending a message to the home network. The message is preferably sent as a protocol message, in particular a message of the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). | 01-29-2009 |
20090028090 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES - A method and system for wireless communication between devices over the same channel in a Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs) environment, and a device capable of wireless communication with other devices over the same channel in a WPANs environment. The method comprises the steps of broadcasting announcements from one or more WPAN control devices; providing in each announcement an announcement portion for announcing information about one or more WPAN control devices other than said respective announcing WPAN control device; and partitioning medium access time for the communication between the devices over the same channel based on the announcements. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028091 | METHOD FOR SENDING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT MESSAGES WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for selecting a radio access point of a network, and a method for transmitting information on at least two radio access points of a network to a mobile terminal. Further the invention relates to an adapted mobile terminal and control entity for performing the methods, respectively. To minimize the transmission delays of acknowledgement messages sent from a mobile terminal to a control entity, the invention provides an access point selection mechanism that determines for a respective one of the at least two radio access points, a selection criterion associated to the respective radio access point. This selection criterion may be based on a transmission delay for sending acknowledgement messages via a respective access point to a control entity. Based on the determined selection criterion the mobile terminal selects one of the at least two radio access points, and sends an acknowledgement message to the control entity through the selected radio access point. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028092 | METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING THE SPATIAL LOCATION OF NODES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method determines the propagation delays between nodes in a network, the network including a plurality of nodes. The method includes recording by each one of the nodes the transmission time of a beacon-signal respective of the one of the nodes and the reception times of other beacon-signals respective of other nodes. The beacon signal and the other beacon signals are transmitted according to a forward transmission sequence, a reverse transmission sequence is determined according to the forward transmission sequence. The procedure of recording for beacon signals is repeated and transmitted according to the reverse transmission sequence, and a propagation delay is determined between each pair of communicating nodes according to a forward propagation delay and a reverses propagation delay respective of the each of pair of communicating nodes. The forward propagation delay and the reverse propagation delay are determined according to the recorded times of transmissions and receptions of the beacon signals by the respective nodes. The pair of communicating nodes are defined as a pair of nodes that can receive transmissions of each other, and the time difference between transmissions of beacon signals respective of two nodes, during the forward transmission sequence, is substantially the same as the time difference between transmissions of the beacon signals respective of the two nodes, during the reverse transmission sequence. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028093 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA WITH TRANSFER OBLIGATION DELEGATED IN WSN - A method for transmitting/receiving data with transfer obligation delegated in a Wireless Sensor Network (WSN) reduces the time and power spent by a transmitting apparatus to wait for acknowledgment that a data transfer was successful. The method for transmitting data from a transmitting end to a receiving end through a set transfer route by multiple data transmit/receive apparatuses provided in a Wireless Sensor Network (WSN), typically includes the steps of: performing temporary storage of data to be transmitted on receiving a request to transmit data; requesting a data transmit/receive apparatus, existing on a next route, to transmit data while transmitting data to a data transmit/receive apparatus which is set as a transfer route; and confirming the delivery of the data to the data transmit/receive apparatus set as the transfer route, and then deleting the temporarily stored data frame. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028094 | Information Communication Terminal, Radio Communication Apparatus and Radio Communication Network System Capable of Performing Communication Corresponding to Purpose - In an information communication terminal, a receiving unit receives a frame for notifying of network identification information for specifying a radio network from a different information communication terminal, and a filter unit checks a preset filter condition and mode information indicating a communication mode of the different information communication terminal in the frame received by the receiving unit, and abandons the received frame based on a result of the checking. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028095 | Wireless Network Throughput Enhancement Through Channel Aware Scheduling - A channel aware scheduler (CAS) is disclosed that takes advantage of changing wireless channel conditions in order to maximize aggregated system throughput. The CAS is aware of the different channel conditions for one or more stations and adjusts its scheduling of packet transmissions in light of the same. A related CAS algorithm may take advantage of that knowledge in order to increase aggregated system throughput while concurrently addressing other potential fairness constraints. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028096 | UPPER STATION, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD - An upper node station includes a packet flow multiplexing portion that multiplexes packet flows that are identified by QoS, in accordance with a QoS requirement; and a transmission portion that transmits the multiplexed packet flows. | 01-29-2009 |
20090034450 | Methods and Devices for Transmitting Data to a Mobile Data Processing Unit - The invention concerns a method for transmitting data to a mobile data processing unit, the method comprising the steps of a. Receiving the data with a digital audio and/or television reception device ( | 02-05-2009 |
20090034451 | System and method for handling QoS flows in a roaming scenario - A system and method for transmitting a packet in a network is described. The method includes establishing a session with a flow identifier between a mobile station and a roaming wireless access gateway via a radio access network. A communication link is established between a home wireless access gateway and the roaming wireless access gateway. A filter is maintained at the home wireless access gateway for packet flow between the home wireless access gateway and the mobile station. The flow identifier is identified for a packet received by the home wireless access gateway from the network. The packet is transmitted with the flow identifier from the home wireless access gateway to the roaming wireless access gateway. The session for the packet is identified the via the flow identifier. Systems and method for establishing a call are also described. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034452 | SYSTEM LEVEL INFORMATION FOR DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION, CELL RESELECTION AND RACH - A wireless transmit/receive unit is configured to receive system level information, including discontinuous reception (DRX) information, cell selection information, and RACH information. The system level information is received as defined parameters assigned to system information blocks or signaled through dedicated RRC signaling. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034453 | SCRAMBLE CODE ALLOCATION METHOD, A RADIO BASE STATION, A MOBILE STATION, AND A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A scramble code allocation method used by mobile communications systems, and a base station and a mobile station that use the method are disclosed. The scramble code allocation method autonomously and optimally sets up a scramble code unique to a target base station. The method includes a step of generating a collection packet for collecting unique information of surrounding base stations, the unique information being used for setting up respective identifiers of the surrounding base stations; a step of broadcasting the collection packet to the surrounding base stations through a network; a step of receiving response packets from the surrounding base stations in response to the collection packet; a step of extracting the unique information of the surrounding base stations inserted in the response packets that are received; a step of storing the extracted unique information; and a step of setting up an identifier of the target base station based on the stored unique information. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034454 | Hierarchical Data Collection Network Supporting Packetized Voice Communications Among Wireless Terminals and Telephones - A packet-based, hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. The network accommodates real time voice transmission both through dedicated, scheduled bandwidth and through a packet-based routing within the confines and constraints of a data network. Conversion and call processing circuitry is also disclosed which enables access devices and personal computers to adapt voice information between analog voice stream and digital voice packet formats as proves necessary. Routing pathways include wireless spanning tree networks, wide area networks, telephone switching networks, internet, etc., in a manner virtually transparent to the user. A voice session and associate call setup simulates that of conventional telephone switching network, providing well-understood functionality common to any mobile, remote or stationary terminal, phone, computer, etc. | 02-05-2009 |
20090040964 | DYNAMIC INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESSING SOLUTIONS WITH NETWORK-BASED MOBILITY - A media access gateway comprises a wireless network interface, an address assignment module, and a proxy mobility agent module. The wireless network interface establishes a wireless link with a wireless terminal. The address assignment module receives an address request message, which includes a mobility signal from the wireless terminal. The proxy mobility agent module selectively transmits a proxy binding update to a local mobility anchor and receives a proxy binding acknowledgement from the local mobility anchor. The address assignment module selectively transmits an address assignment message to the wireless terminal when the mobility signal indicates proxy mobility. The address assignment message is based on address information in the proxy binding acknowledgement. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040965 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device includes: an analyzing unit for analyzing an MAC header of a received frame; a storage unit for storing a source address when analyzed that the received frame is a suspension signal for suspending an occupancy of a radio channel; a determination unit for determining whether or not the source address of the received frame is stored in the storage unit when analyzed that a destination address of the received frame is for other device; and a power controlling unit for suspending a power supply to the demodulation unit and the analyzing unit for a remaining time of a period for occupying the radio channel which is described on the MAC header when determined that the source address is not stored. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040966 | METHOD FOR GUARANTEEING THE QUALITY OF SERVICES IN PACKET-SWITCHING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for guaranteeing the quality of services in packet-switching radio communications networks. The radio access network (RAN) and the core network (CN) use the quality of service information independently of one another, without signalling individual parameters, in order to guarantee the transmission of packets in the uplink and downlink according to the quality of service. This is achieved exclusively using local settings that have been configured for individual TCLs, permitting a radical reduction in complexity compared to conventional methods. The method is further simplified by the described interlinking of different tasks or the linking of such tasks to an existing data transmission. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040967 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR QUICKLY EXPLOITING A NEW LINK DURING HAND-OFF IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A way to deliver traffic to a mobile node that is undergoing a hand-off between two Access Routers (AR) is described. The method of the present invention operates to perform some or all of the following. Decrease, e.g., minimize, delays between the time the old link breaks and the first packet is sent from the new link. Reduce and/or eliminate packet bursts from old to new AR when an old (existing) link breaks. Ensure that packets are neither lost nor duplicated during hand-off. Maintain QoS control of delivery order to the MN. Make good or best use of multiple links during Make before break hand-off. Support both uplink and downlink traffic. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040968 | Wireless telephone system including voice over IP and POTS - A telephone capable of placing or receiving calls over the PSTN or a packet network. The telephone can store multiple telephone numbers for each potential called party along with preferences that govern the order of selecting telephone numbers to service any given outgoing call. Some or all of the telephone numbers can be associated with a presence service. Presence indicators stored in the telephone are dynamically updated via the packet network connection and are used as part of the telephone number selection algorithm. The preferred embodiment is a wireless system having a base station and a remote device. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040969 | Method and Apparatus for Non-Scheduled Transmission for Packet Service in a Mobile Communication System - A method and apparatus for non-scheduled transmission for a packet service in a mobile communication system are provided. A plurality of allowed maximum packet sizes are defined for the non-scheduled transmission and a UE selects one of the maximum packet sizes under circumstances and sends packets according to the selected maximum packet size in a non-scheduled transmission mode. | 02-12-2009 |
20090046627 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROL OF DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION (DRX) BY A MOBILE DEVICE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SUPPORTING VOICE-OVER-INTERNET-PROTOCOL (VoIP) - A method and system for controlling discontinuous reception (DRX) in a mobile device in a wireless communications network that supports voice-over-internet-protocol (VoIP) and that uses an automatic repeat-request (ARQ) method, like a hybrid automatic repeat-request (HARQ) method, uses autonomous DRX control after initial VoIP traffic setup. If the mobile device transmits a negative-acknowledgement signal (NACK) indicating unsuccessful receipt of a VoIP packet, then it autonomously turns on a predetermined delay time later to receive the retransmission of the VoIP packet, where the predetermined delay time is related to the time for the base station to process the NACK and prepare the VoIP packet for retransmission. When the mobile device transmits or retransmits a VoIP packet, reception is deactivated, but is autonomously activated the predetermined delay time later to receive an acknowledgement signal (ACK) or NACK. VoIP packets may be transmitted from the mobile device the predetermined delay time before VoIP packets are transmitted from the base station. This alignment allows an ACK or NACK to be transmitted from the base station in the same transmission time interval (TTI) as a VoIP packet. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046628 | System and method for geocasting in a mobile ad hoc network - Disclosed is a wireless terminal that determines whether to retransmit a received packet. The wireless terminal is configured to determine a first distance from the wireless terminal to a point (e.g., the center point) in a geocast region. The wireless terminal is also configured to determine a plurality of distances between the point and each of a plurality of wireless terminals from which the wireless terminal has previously received a packet having an identifier that is the same as an identifier of the received packet. The wireless terminal is configured to retransmit the received packet if the first distance is less than each of the plurality of distances. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046629 | Signaling of Random Access Preamble Sequences in Wireless Networks - Transmission of random access preamble structures within a cellular wireless network is based on the use of cyclic shifted constant amplitude zero autocorrelation (“CAZAC”) sequences to generate the random access preamble signal. A pre-defined set of sequences is arranged in a specific order. Within the predefined set of sequences is an ordered group of sequences that is a proper subset of the pre-defined set of sequences. Within a given cell, up to 64 sequences may need to be signaled. In order to minimize the associated overhead due to signaling multiple sequences, only one logical index is transmitted by a base station serving the cell and a user equipment within the cell derives the subsequent indexes according to the pre-defined ordering. Each sequence has a unique logical index. The ordering of sequences is identified by the logical indexes of the sequences, with each logical index uniquely mapped to a generating index. When a UE needs to transmit, it produces a second sequence using the received indication of the logical index of the first sequence and an auxiliary parameter and then produces a transmission signal by modulating the second sequence. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046630 | Data-Transmitting Method for Wireless Sensor Network - A data-transmitting method for wireless sensor network comprises: constructing a wireless sensor network having a plurality of nodes for information sensing and a sink for quest raising and data collecting; clustering the nodes to form a plurality of groups, with one of the nodes in each group being identified as a kernel; identifying one of all the nodes as a summit dissemination node and the kernels in all the groups as first level dissemination nodes; and transmitting data between the quest-raising sink and one of the first level dissemination nodes or summit dissemination node to collect information sensed by a source that is one of the nodes. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046631 | TRANSPORT OF PDCP CONTROL PDUs WITHIN MAC FRAMES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate efficiently communicating a data packet related to a protocol layer within a wireless communication system. The systems and/or methods can provide cross-layer optimization by directly transporting or communicating data to a particular protocol layer. In general, a MAC header can include data that indicates a protocol layer to which such data is directed or targeted. The MAC header can allow a portion of data (e.g., PDUs, SDUs, etc.) to bypass at least one protocol layer above the MAC protocol layer for efficient and optimized processing of such data. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046632 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT - In some aspect restricted access nodes are assigned to a designated common channel while access terminals that are in active communication with a macro access node may selectively be assigned to the designated channel. In some aspect an access terminal associated with macro access node may perform a handoff to a different carrier when the access terminal is in the vicinity of a coverage area of a restricted access node. In some aspect an access terminal associated with a macro access node may perform a handoff to a different carrier based on location information. In some aspect access to a restricted access node is controlled based on policy and/or based on operation of an access terminal associated with the restricted access node. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046633 | DIGITALLY SIGNING ACCESS POINT MEASUREMENTS FOR ROBUST LOCATION DETERMINATION - In an example embodiment, a wireless client sends a probe request frame and waits for responses to the probe frame. The responses to the probe request from comprise encrypted data representative of the signal strength of the client as measured by the respondent that are digitally signed by the respondent's certificate. The client aggregates the responses and forwards them to a location based server. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046634 | QOS SERVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A QoS server comprises a receiving unit that receives a QoS setting request for the communication flow of a mobile terminal; and a transmitting unit that simultaneously transmits a QoS setting instruction based on the QoS setting request to both of a wireless system mobile management node that accommodates the mobile terminal and a core network mobile management node that manages the wireless access system mobile management node. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046635 | MOBILE NODE, MOBILE AGENT AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A mobile node moves from a first IP (Internet Protocol) network to a second IP network in a network system in which the first IP network capable of executing communication in accordance with both first and second kinds of IPs and the second IP network capable of executing communication in accordance with only the first kind of IP are connected with each other. When the mobile node communicates a message with other nodes on the first network after its movement accordance with the second kind of IP, a header for the movement containing both home and foreign addresses of the first kind in IP is added to a header containing home and foreign addresses in the second kind of IP, and put to the message, is added. The message to which the movement header is thus added is used for the communication between a first mobile agent on the first network and a second mobile agent on the second network, or between the mobile node and the first mobile agent. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046636 | ROUTING APPRATUS AND SESSION CONTROL METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a routing apparatus and session control method. The routing apparatus includes: a first processor for performing session control of portable subscriber stations (PSSs); and a second processor for independently performing at least one additional function separated from session control. | 02-19-2009 |
20090052374 | Wireless Communication Apparatus, Communication Routing Control Apparatus, Communication Routing Control Method and Communication System - A wireless communication apparatus for performing communication via a plurality of wireless interfaces in a wireless ad hoc network is disclosed. When the wireless communication apparatus receives a request frame via one of the plurality of wireless interfaces, the wireless communication apparatus sends the request frame from at least two wireless interfaces in the plurality of wireless interfaces. In addition, the wireless communication apparatus selects a wireless interface to be used for communication from among the plurality of wireless interfaces based on the request frame. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052375 | HIERARCHICAL MODULATION REVERSE LINK INTERFACE NODE - A wireless communication device transmits a hierarchically modulated reverse link (RL) WWAN signal comprising a lower modulation order component and a higher modulation order component. An interface node receives and demodulates the hierarchical modulated signal to recover the extended data sent with the higher modulation order component. The interface node sends extended data to a base station that is unable to recover the higher modulation order component from the UE device. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052376 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING PAGING OVER AN HS-DSCH IN CELL_PCH AND URA_PCH STATES - A method and apparatus for paging a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) in a CELL_PCH and URA_PCH states are disclosed. A WTRU may send an indication of an enhanced paging channel (PCH) capability of receiving a high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) in CELL_PCH and URA_PCH states, for example, in a CELL UPDATE message, a URA UPDATE message, or a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM message. A drift radio network controller (DRNC) may receive an indication whether the WTRU has an enhanced PCH capability from a serving RNC and page the WTRU based on the indication. An RNC may page the WTRU over both an HS-DSCH and a PCH/secondary common control physical channel (S-CCPCH) if a WTRU capability is not known. The WTRU may monitor both an HS-DSCH and a PCH/S-CCPCH. The WTRU may configure reception over an HS-DSCH based on the capability of the SRNC or configuration from the network. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052377 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - An object of the present invention is to make it possible to appropriately maintain PPP-based communications even in an environment in which the terminal moves and the communication environment continually changes. A mobile communication terminal comprises a plurality of wireless accessing means for establishing PPP-based communication links for respectively different modes of wireless communications with a fixed communication apparatus, which is a communication partner; a PPP device for combining the established communication links; and a valid wireless LAN searching portion for detecting that wireless communication is possible for a wireless LAN adapter. The PPP device executes control so as to establish communication links for the wireless LAN adapter detected as being capable of wireless communication, and for a L2TP virtual device. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052378 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELIABLY TRANSMITTING RADIO BLOCKS WITH PIGGYBACKED ACK/NACK FIELDS - Piggybacked acknowledgement/non-acknowledgement (PAN) bits in unreliable bit positions of a modulated symbol are swapped with data bits located in more reliable bit positions. In addition, a power offset value may be applied to the symbols containing the PAN bits. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052379 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MOBILITY IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL - A method is provided for managing mobility of an Access Terminal (AT) in a mobile communication system using a Mobile Internet Protocol (MIP). The method includes generating, by an AT that has entered a new network, a Security Parameter Index (SPI) and a security key for mutual authentication with a Home Agent (HA) of the new network, sending, by the AT, a registration request message including authentication information including the SPI, the authentication information being generated using the security key, upon receipt of the registration request message, searching, by the HA, a database for the SPI included in the authentication information, verifying the authentication information according to the search result, upon successful verification of the authentication information, generating, by the HA, mobility binding information of the AT, and sending, by the HA, a registration response message including the HA's IP address. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052380 | Mobile media router and method for using same - A mobile media router and a method for using the same receive multimedia data from a first wireless network and reroute the multimedia data in another format without rendering the multimedia. The mobile media router and the method for using the same may reroute the multimedia data over a second wireless network to a rendering device. The mobile media router and the method for using the same may translate, reformat and/or repackage the multimedia data into a form that allows consumption of the multimedia on the rendering device. The mobile media router and the method for using the same may reroute the multimedia data in real time so that the rendering device renders the multimedia as the multimedia data is received by the mobile media router. | 02-26-2009 |
20090059840 | Wireless communication system and method for managing service flow identifier in the same - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and a service flow identifier management method thereof. The wireless communication system includes a plurality of RASs for controlling a plurality of PSSs in a radio network, and a plurality of ACRs for providing wireless communication services to the PSSs through the plurality of RASs, and respectively managing a service flow identifier used for identifying a connection service for each PSS. When a status of each service flow identifier managed by the plurality of ACRs is different, the wireless communication system releases the corresponding service flow identifier so as to set the status of each of the service flow identifiers to be the same. According to the present invention, in the wireless communication system, the plurality of ACRs separately manage service flow identifiers, and mismatched service flow identifier information due to errors in the system or a node or message transmission/receiving errors can be set to be the same. In addition, when a partial system error occurs and thus the system is restored, a service flow identifier not having the same status due to the error can be efficiently released and set to be the same. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059841 | Wireless communication methods and apparatus using beacon signals - Methods and apparatus supporting peer to peer communications are discussed. A base station, serving as an access node for wireless terminals also communicates information supporting peer to peer communications. A base station transmits a beacon signal conveying information about a peer to peer frequency band and also receives user data from a plurality of wireless terminals, using the base station as a current point of network attachment. In some embodiments, the beacon signal is transmitted into the same frequency band being used for access node based communications and identifies a different frequency band which is to be used as a peer to peer frequency band. Alternatively, or in addition, in support of peer to peer communications, a beacon signal transmission apparatus, a free standing device which doesn't transmit user data, transmits a sequence of beacon signal bursts, each beacon signal burst including at least one high power beacon symbol. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059842 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES THAT DYNAMICALLY ESTABLISH A SENSOR NETWORK - A wireless sensor network includes a network sink node and a plurality of cluster nodes. The cluster nodes are configured to pass communications upstream and downstream. Each cluster node has a communication range, or coverage area. A cluster node is configured to communicate with sensor nodes within the coverage area of cluster node. The sensor nodes are configured to register with at least one cluster node. The cluster nodes are configured to register with the network sink. Identifiers for the sensor nodes may be dynamically generated. Identifiers for the cluster nodes may be dynamically generated. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059843 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND COMPUTER PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING A GRADIENT DRIVEN MESH-NETWORK ESTABLISHMENT - Systems, methods and computer products for establishing a mesh-network consisting of wireless personal area network (WPAN) having a large number of nodes. Exemplary embodiments include a gradient-driven mesh-network establishment method, including switching on a plurality of nodes in a vicinity of the wireless personal area network, detecting an acknowledgment signal via a wireless personal area network signal, querying for at least one or a resource and a physical quantity, selecting a subset of the plurality of nodes and instructing the subset of the plurality of nodes to send out a low power radio transceiver DISCOVER squirt signal to a neighborhood associated with the subset of the plurality of nodes, wherein nodes exclusive of the subset of the plurality of nodes turn off in response to an expiration of a time-out period. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059844 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA IN MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method of transmitting data in a wireless communication system comprises receiving feedback data on an uplink data channel, the feedback data comprising a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), wherein the value of the PMI corresponds to an index in a codebook, transmitting a precoding scheme for downlink data on a downlink control channel, wherein the preceding scheme is determined as one of at least two of a transmit diversity irrespective of the received PMI, an acknowledgement indicating preceding according to the received PMI and a new PMI indicating that it is used in precoding downlink data to be transmitted, and transmitting the downlink data on a downlink data channel after applying precoding according to the determined preceding scheme. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059845 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT SELECTION AND ACQUISITION OF SYSTEMS UTILIZING OFDM OR SC-FDM - Techniques for performing system selection and acquisition are described. In one design, a terminal may obtain at least one system record for at least one system utilizing orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) or single-carrier frequency division multiplexing (SC-FDM). Each system record may include system identification information for an associated system and an index for an associated acquisition record. The terminal may also obtain at least one acquisition record for the at least one system. Each acquisition record may include at least one value for at least one configurable system parameter, e.g., FFT size, cyclic prefix length, number of guard subcarriers, etc. The terminal may perform acquisition for the at least one system in accordance with the at least one system record and the at least one acquisition record. The system and acquisition records may be stored in a Preferred Roaming List (PRL) or a Most Recently Used (MRU) list. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059846 | PEER-TO-PEER PROTOCOL FOR CELLULAR BASESTATIONS - A novel method for coordinating the operation of cellular basestations through the use of direct communication among those basestations. This is a departure from the current use of “radio network control” (RNC) elements such as the basestation controller (BSC) and mobile switching center (MSC) of the GSM standard and functionally equivalent elements use in other cellular standards. The replacement of the RNC elements with direct communication among basestations gives a network that is less expensive and more reliable that what is afforded by current practices. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059847 | UNSOLICITED GRANT SERVICE CLASS OF IEEE 802.16/WiBro SYSTEM - Provided is a traffic class of an IEEE 802.16/WiBro system. The unsolicited grant service (UGS) scheduling method with regard to a subscriber station (SS) and a base station (BS) that are disposed in a network wherein an IEEE 802.16/WiBro system is realized, the method includes: when the SS requires 1 through M (where M is a positive integer) UGS flows, and the BS serves 1 through N (where N is a positive integer) frames, the BS storing grant periods and guaranteed sizes that are granted to the M UGS flows in each N frame; and the BS comparing service capacity of a frame and a sum of guaranteed sizes of each flow belonging to the N frames, and determining if an overload occurs. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059848 | Method and System for Supporting Large Number of Data Paths in an Integrated Communication System - Some embodiments provide a method and system for supporting a large set of data paths in a first communication network through a smaller set of data paths over which data services of a core network are accessed. Some embodiments provide such functionality by mapping identifiers associated with the larger set of data paths to a smaller set of proxy identifiers associated with the smaller set of data paths. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059849 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication means which allocates a terminal identifier to a destination communication apparatus and carries out communication with the destination communication apparatus by use of a plurality of functions including an identifier generation section | 03-05-2009 |
20090067366 | Multi-Hop Communication Setup Subject to Boundary Values - A method controls the setup of multi-hop communications. For this purpose, boundary values for the multi-hop communications are determined, actual values of the multi-hop communications are detected and multi-hop communications to subscriber terminals are only established if the actual values do not exceed the determined boundary values. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067367 | Method for configuring a radio terminal through a radio communication network, related network and computer program product therefor - A method for configuring a re-configurable radio terminal through a communication network operating according to a communication system, wherein the radio terminal is configured for exchanging information with at least one node of the communication network by using the communicating system. The method is characterized by the steps of associating with the one node of the communication network a server entity configured for using a protocol layer of the communication system and including a set of operating software modules for configuring the radio terminal with at least one set of elements of protocol stack suitable to reconfigure the radio terminal; associating with the radio terminal a client entity configured for using a respective protocol layer corresponding to the protocol layer of the server entity, establishing an over-the-air connection between the radio terminal and the server entity by using the protocol layer, and downloading at least one module of the set of operating software modules from the server to the radio terminal configuring at least in part the radio terminal. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067368 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting a Radio Access Technology for Communication - A method and apparatus for communicating data between a mobile communication device and a communications node via an appropriate radio access technology. In one embodiment, the method comprises identifying at least one characteristic associated with data pending for communication, identifying a set of radio access technologies available for communication and at least one characteristic of each, evaluating the characteristics of the pending data relative to the characteristics of the available radio access technologies, selecting from the set of available radio access technologies a radio access technology relative to the pending data and effectuating communication of at least a portion of the pending data via a communication link employing the selected radio access technology. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067369 | ROUTING IN A MESH NETWORK - Apparatus and method for associating with any one of a plurality of access points in a mesh network including estimating a plurality of metrics for the access points, the estimated metrics being related to throughputs provided by the access points, and selecting one of the access points to associate with based on the metrics and a plurality of backhaul metrics for the access points, the backhaul metrics being related to backhaul throughputs for the access points. The backhaul metrics may be advertised by the access points. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067370 | CELL SEARCH METHOD IN OFDM CELLULAR SYSTEM, FRAME TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF, AND FORWARD LINK FRAME STRUCTURE - Provided are a cell search method, a frame transmission method thereof, and a forward link frame structure thereof. The cell search method used by a terminal to search a target cell using reception signals received from a plurality of base stations, each base station transmitting a frame of its cell, in an Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing (OFDM) cellular system comprising a plurality cells to which a cell-specific scrambling code is assigned includes: detecting a hopping pattern of the target cell using reception sync channel symbols, which are signals corresponding to sync channel symbol positions of the reception signals, wherein the frame of each cell comprises M sync channel symbols code-hopped according to a hopping pattern of the cell, where M is a natural number equal to or greater than 2, each hopping pattern containing M sync channel code sequences and respectively corresponding to each code group to which a scrambling code of each cell belongs, and an arbitrary hopping pattern used in the OFDM cellular system differs from a cyclically shifted result of the hopping pattern, other hopping patterns, or cyclically shifted results of the other hopping patterns; and detecting a code group of the target cell based on the detected hopping pattern. Accordingly, a cell search time and the complexity of the cell search can be reduced. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067371 | Gateway equipped with a multi-antenna transceiver system with MISO architecture for WI-FI communications - There is described a gateway including an electronic card ( | 03-12-2009 |
20090067372 | HOST-BASED QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate providing quality of service (QOS) functionality on a host device or tethered processor to conserve resources on a network device. In particular, the host device/tethered processor can classify QOS data and manage QOS flows, transmitting data by flow to the network device. The data from the QOS flows can be tagged to identify the flow and/or characteristics thereof allowing the wireless device to simply route the data to its respective flow. Thus, the network device is saved from such classification and flow management freeing resources to provide increased performance and decreased power consumption. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067373 | Deep sleep mode for mesh points - Disclosed herein is an apparatus, method and computer program embodied in a computer-readable memory medium. The method includes transmitting a beacon or a directed transmission from a first device to inform at least one second device in a wireless communication network that the first device will be active only during an active time interval that comprises a beacon transmission period and an additional period near to the beacon transmission period and, at the completion of the active time interval, operating in a lower power mode of operation until a next active time interval. The wireless communication network may be embodied as a mesh network that includes a plurality of mesh points, and the first device and the at least one second device may each be a mesh point. | 03-12-2009 |
20090073919 | Telecommunications apparatus and method - A telecommunications system comprises a user equipment operable to request a bearer for communicating internet protocol data according to the second internet protocol (IPv4) to and from a gateway support node of a packet radio network. The gateway support node is operable to establish a tunnelling protocol bearer for communicating the internet packet data to and from the user equipment across the packet data network. The user equipment is operable in combination with the gateway support node to form a link local address. The link local address comprises an interface identifier including a tunnelling end identifier of the tunnelling protocol bearer which ends at a gateway support node of the core network part of the packet radio network. An internet protocol address according to the first internet protocol is requested from an address allocation server using the link local address. The user equipment is operable in combination with the gateway support node to receive an allocated internet protocol address according to the first internet protocol, and to communicate with the user equipment using the allocated internet protocol address. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073920 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INCORPORATING DIFFERENT PHY MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - In a wireless communications network comprising at least two subscriber terminals each operative to communicate with the same base station using a different PHY mode transmissions than the other, a method and apparatus for allowing communications with these subscriber terminals along a single frequency communication channel is provided. The communication is carried by defining common radio transmission frames in which each of the at least two PHY modes communications is carried out while occupying a different part of the common radio transmission frames. Preferably, at least one of the PHY modes is in compliance with IEEE 802.16 Standard. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073921 | Data forwarding in hybrid mesh networks - A system and method are disclosed for forwarding data in hybrid wireless mesh networks. The method includes configuring a number of mesh network nodes as Potential Relay Nodes (PRNs) in an overlay network associated with a hybrid wireless mesh network, streaming data packets from a source node to a destination node using a native data forwarding algorithm of the hybrid wireless mesh network, dynamically identifying Relay Nodes (RNs) among PRNs in the overlay network, creating secondary paths for sending data packets towards selected RNs in the overlay network, and relaying data packets from RNs to the destination node using the overlay network. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073922 | MULTIPLEXING AND TRANSMISSION OF TRAFFIC DATA AND CONTROL INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for transmitting traffic data and control information in a wireless communication system are described. In an aspect, traffic data and control information may be multiplexed at a coded data level. A user equipment (UE) may encode traffic data to obtain coded traffic data, encode control information to obtain coded control data, multiplex the coded traffic data and the coded control data, modulate the multiplexed data, and generate SC-FDMA symbols. In another aspect, traffic data and control information may be multiplexed at a modulation symbol level. The UE may encode and modulate traffic data to obtain data modulation symbols, encode and modulate control information to obtain control modulation symbols, multiplex the data and control modulation symbols, and generate SC-FDMA symbols. The UE may perform rate matching for traffic data to account for control information. The UE may also perform multiplexing and puncturing for different types of control information. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073923 | Communication device, communication system thereof, and communication setting method thereof - A communication device is disclosed. The communication device includes a radio communication section and a switching section. The switching section switches a function between a station function and an access point function. In a state that the function of the communication device has been switched to the access point function, the communication device is connected to another communication device contained in a radio communication network through the radio communication section. The communication device receives connection setting information from the other communication device through the communication section. The connection setting information has been set to the communication section. The communication device stores the received connection setting information. After the function of the communication device has been switched from the access point function to the station function, the communication device is connected to the radio communication network containing the other communication device based on the stored connection setting information. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073924 | METHOD OF DISCOVERING AN AD-HOC ON-DEMAND DISTANCE VECTOR ROUTE HAVING AT LEAST A MINIMUM SET OF AVAILABLE RESOURCES IN A DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a wireless communication network ( | 03-19-2009 |
20090080369 | RADIO SCHEDULER AND DATA PLANE INTERFACE - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, a MAC layer architecture for a base station may comprise a radio scheduler disposed in a control plane separate from the data plane modules of a data plane. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080370 | Methods and apparatus for home agent discovery in mobile IP using link state advertisements - In one embodiment, an apparatus receives an advertisement from each of one or more Home Agents, the advertisement including a first set of information associated with a corresponding one of the Home Agents, each advertisement being in a first protocol. The apparatus obtains the first set of information associated with a corresponding one of the Home Agents from each advertisement. The apparatus composes a router advertisement including a second set of information associated with at least one of the Home Agents, the router advertisement being in a second protocol. The apparatus then sends the router advertisement. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080371 | Contextually-based local selective communications device - A local communications device comprises a station ( | 03-26-2009 |
20090080372 | BASE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - Provided are a base station device and a mobile station device, which can lighten a cell-search processing. The base station device ( | 03-26-2009 |
20090080373 | MULTICAST COMMUNICATIONS WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Methods of providing multicast communications within a wireless communications network are provided. In an example, an access network forms a target sector group, the target sector group including at least one target sector from among a plurality of sectors, each target sector expected to have one or more access terminals belonging to a given multicast group. The access network also forms a supporting sector group, the supporting sector group including at least one supporting sector from among the plurality of sectors, each supporting sector not being a target sector and satisfying a proximity metric (e.g., being adjacent to one or more target sectors) with respect to at least one target sector. The access network transmits multicast messages associated with the given multicast group in the at least one target sector and the at least one supporting sector. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080374 | METHOD OF CREATING AND DELETING SERVICE FLOW FOR ROBUST HEADER COMPRESSION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method of creating a service flow for ROHC in a control station is disclosed, which can establishes a ROHC channel between ROHC entities, the method comprising obtaining a first ROHC parameter from a ROHC entity of the control station, upon receiving a subscriber profile to which ROHC is applied; and transmitting a first message including the first ROHC parameter for requesting the creation of service flow to a mobile station related with the subscriber profile and a base station performing a dynamic service addition (DSA) procedure through the use of a second message including the first ROHC parameter. | 03-26-2009 |
20090086663 | Selecting Aggregation Nodes in a Network - In one embodiment, a method includes determining, at a local node in a network of multiple nodes, a first neighbor node of one or more neighbor nodes with which the local node is in direct communication based on a first number of nodes with which the first neighbor node is in direct communication. The first neighbor node is selected as an aggregation node for information about the local node. The aggregation node outputs data that is a combination of data received from multiple different nodes. The method allows wireless routers in mobile ad hoc networks to automatically determine their own aggregation nodes for routing information and thus automatically enables routing protocols to scale for many thousands of mobile wireless nodes. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086664 | Packet forwarding in multi-radio multi-hop wireless networks - A packet forwarding technique is presented that forwards data packets through a multi-hop wireless network employing multi-radio nodes. In each multi-radio node, an output buffer is shared among the radios. Outgoing packets are stored in this buffer. Whenever there is a transmission opportunity on the radios sharing the output buffer, the node examines the buffer and searches for packets that are scheduled to be transmitted to a neighboring node having an open communication link with the transmitting node. The packet in the discovered group that has the highest transmission priority is then transmitted to its next scheduled node. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086665 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REQUESTING PILOTREPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for transmitting PilotReportRequest message in a wireless communication system is described. A PilotReportRequest message comprising an 8 bit MessageID field and an 8 bit ReportFormat field is generated, wherein the ReportFormat field indicates the format of the PilotReport being requested from an access terminal. The PilotReportRequest message is transmitted over a communication link | 04-02-2009 |
20090086666 | METHOD FOR ARQ-ENABLED PRE-TRANSMISSIONS IN MULTICAST AND BROADCAST SERVICES OF RELAY NETWORKS UTILIZING THE IDLE PERIODS - A method and apparatus is disclosed herein for transmitting data in a network (e.g., a relay network). In one embodiment, the method comprises performing pre-transmission of a packet to hops to enable the base station and the plurality of hops to transmit the packet synchronously to one or more mobile stations in the wireless communication system; and performing one or more re-transmissions of the packet at a first set of one or more hops in the system during a delay due to pre-transmissions at a second set of one or more hops in the system. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086667 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product for Preserving A Signalling Connection - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for preserving a signaling connection after a network has indicated that the signaling connection can be closed, such as by selection of a no follow on proceed mode during routing area updates or attach procedures. By preserving the signaling connection, subsequent communications between the network and the user equipment can be completed without closing and then subsequently reopening the signaling connection. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086668 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A DUAL-STACK MN TO ROAMING IN AN IPV4 NETWORK - The disclosure provides a method and apparatus for a dual-stack Mobile Node (MN) to roam in an IPv4 network. The apparatus mainly includes a Foreign Home Agent (FHA). The method mainly includes: acquiring, by the MN, a temporary IPv4 address THOA that the FHA assigns to the MN, and registering its IPv4 Care-of Address (COA) in the FHA; and delivering, by the FHA, a packet between the MN and a Corresponding Node (CN) or Home Agent (HA), according to information about the IPv4 COA, which is assigned for the MN and has been registered by the MN in the FHA. With the method of the invention, a routing solution may be implemented for a dual-stack MN to roam from an IPv6 network to an IPv4 network. | 04-02-2009 |
20090092075 | Methods and apparatus for establishing communications between devices with differing capabilities - Methods and apparatus for establishing communications between devices, e.g., mobile communications devices in an ad hoc network, with differing capabilities are described. A device which is capable of supporting multiple protocols in addition to a protocol used to communicate device capability information forms communications links with first and second devices which do not have the ability to form communications links directly between one another, e.g., because of they do not support the same protocols. Once the links are established the first and second devices can communicate via the third communications device. In some embodiments, each of the first, second and third devices support a first communications protocol which is suitable for communicating device capability information but is unsuitable for exchanging user data. The ability to discover other devices and there capabilities facilitates the creation of an ad hoc network. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092076 | Method and apparatus to reduce system overhead - System throughput is improved by decreasing the system overhead by reducing the size of control packets and data packet headers. A connection identifier (CID) is divided into a CID part | 04-09-2009 |
20090092077 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING REORDERING FUNCTIONALITY IN RADIO COMMUNICATIONS - The definition and use of an additional timer for the MAC-hs reordering function in a user equipment. The timer counts transmission time intervals and is reset each time that the user equipment receives a data packet. If the timer reaches a set value, indicating a sufficiently long period of inactivity, then the transmission sequence number is reset to zero or another predefined value. A base station can run a similar timer and, after the timer reaches a set value, can consider the user equipment as no longer being active. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092078 | AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING OF ADMISSION POLICY FOR FEMTOCELL - Automatic provisioning of an access point base station or femtocell. The method may include the femtocell transmitting first information (e.g., location information, signal measurement information, capability information, etc.) to a service provider (e.g., over an IP network). The femtocell may receive second information from the service provider, where the second information includes one or more operational parameters. The operational parameters may include hand-off parameters, admission policy parameters, PN or scrambling codes, power parameters, and/or other parameters. The femtocell may operate according to the received parameters to provide access for a plurality of access terminals in a local area. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092079 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING UPLINK PROTOCOL CHANGES - A method and apparatus for supporting uplink (UL) protocol changes includes reconfiguring a medium access control (MAC) protocol. A hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process is flushed, and a MAC-e/es reset is performed. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092080 | CENTRALIZED MOBILE ACCESS POINT ACQUISITION - Providing for centralized access management to diverse types of mobile network access points is described herein. By way of example, network components can generate a system determination list (SDL) for a user terminal (UT) that is customized to access capabilities of the UT and/or current position of the UT. The SDL can be employed by the UT to determine which network access points to camp on, handoff to, or the like. The network components can include a network database that maintains UT subscriber and related home Femto cell information, or such information can be maintained at a network operator's home location register. In some aspects, the information can be obtained over the air from the UT or from a base station serving the UT. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092081 | DISTRIBUTED MOBILE ACCESS POINT ACQUISITION - Providing for distributed access point management for access to a mobile network is described herein. By way of example, an interface application maintained at a Femto cell base station (BS) can facilitate initial power up and/or acquisition for a Femto user terminal (UT). Upon start-up, a bootstrap process is utilized by the Femto cell to provision the UT with an SDL establishing at least one BS as high priority within a particular geographic area (GEO). Thus, when the Femto UT is within the GEO, the UT is more likely to acquire, camp on and/or handoff to the preferred BS. When outside the GEO, a serving access point can provision the Femto UT OTA with a custom SDL suited to another GEO having a different high priority access point. By implementing access point management at distributed access points, expensive network equipment can be mitigated or avoided. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092082 | MAINTAINING INFORMATION FACILITATING DETERMINISTIC NETWORK ROUTING - In a wireless network that includes a plurality of nodes, a method of maintaining, by a first node, information regarding communications links between nodes in the wireless network includes: for each communications link that is established with another node, recording an identification of the other node; and for each message received by the first node from the other node through the communications link with the other node, recording a network pathway by which the message has been sent in the wireless network, the network pathway identifying the nodes and the communications links therebetween by which the message has been sent. Another method includes recording, by a server, for each message that is received by the server from the wireless network, a network pathway by which the message has been sent, the network pathway identifying the nodes and the communications links therebetween by which the message has been sent. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092083 | MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A source terminal measures characteristics of the path at the source terminal itself, produces a characteristics-measurement packet, and transmits the produced characteristics-measurement packet to a relay terminal. Upon receiving the characteristics-measurement packet, the relay terminal measures characteristics of the path at the relay terminal itself, renews the characteristics of the path included in the characteristics-measurement packet using the measured characteristics of the path, and transmits the characteristics of the wireless communication path to the destination terminal. The source terminal produces an admission-request packet and transmits the packet to the destination terminal. Upon receiving the admission-request packet, the destination terminal allows or rejects the traffic quality maintenance request according to the characteristics of the wireless communication path. The allowance or rejection of the quality maintenance request is transmitted to the source terminal with the admission-reply packet by the destination terminal. | 04-09-2009 |
20090097436 | Methods for access control in femto system - In a method for controlling access to wireless resources provided by femto cells within a femto subnet a femto management system or radio access network may control access to femto cells within the femto subnet by assigning at least one hashing class mask of a first-type or hashing class mask of a second-type to a wireless user. The hashing class mask of the first-type or hashing of the second-type class mask may be assigned based on whether the wireless user is authorized to access a first femto cell within the femto subnet. The hashing class mask of the first-type provides access to at least one first femto cell within the femto subnet. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097437 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING AN ACCESSPARAMETERS GROUP MESSAGE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting an AccessParameters group message in a wireless communication system, the method comprising generating the AccessParameters group message comprising a 2 bit AccessCycle Duration field wherein the AccessCycle Duration field determines the duration of the access cycle in units of Control Segment Periods (as defined by the Physical Layer), a 5 bit AccessSequencePartition field wherein the AccessSequencePartition field indicates the partition of the access sequence space to allow the access terminal to signal pilot power and buffer status information with the access sequence, a 4 bit MaxProbesPerSequence field wherein the MaxProbesPerSequence field determines the maximum number of probe sequence that can be part of one access sequence and is set to n+1, a 4 bit ProbeRampUpStepSize field wherein the ProbeRampUpStepSize field determines the power ramp up used for probes within a probe sequence and is set to a value 0.5*(1+n)dB, a 6 bit RDCHInitialPacketFormat field wherein the RDCHInitialPacketFormat field is set to the packet format that is used on the first transmission the access terminal makes on the R-DCH after getting an access grant, a 2 bit PilotStrengthSegmentation field wherein the PilotStrengthSegmentation field comprises a PilotThreshold1 and PilotThreshold2, a 8 bit OpenLoopAdjust field wherein the OpenLoopAdjust field determines the nominal power used by access terminal in the open loop power estimate and is set to value 70+n dB and transmitting the AccessParameters group message over a communication link. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097438 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMISSIONS IN POWER SAVE MODE - System and method for power saving transmission in a wireless communications networks. In one embodiment, a communications device includes a transceiver configured to transmit or receive frames over a peer communications link to or from another communications device in a wireless communications network. The communications device also includes a controller configured to initiate a service period for transmission of data frames to the another communications device. The controller is also configured to terminate the service period following an acknowledgement to a transmission of a last data frame therein addressed to either the communications device or the another communications device. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097439 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING BROADCASTING IN A WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method of controlling broadcasting in a wireless sensor network. The method includes performing broadcasting from an upper node to a lower node for a predetermined number of times, transmitting a time offset calculated according to the broadcasting from the lower node to the upper node, calculating an average of the time offsets received from at least one lower node, by the upper node and resetting the number of times of broadcasting according to the calculated average by the upper node. Accordingly, the number of times of broadcasting may be controlled according to the average of received time offsets in the wireless sensor network. In another aspect, an adjustment to the number of times of broadcasting may be received and the number of times of broadcasting may be adjusted based on an average of the received adjustments. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097440 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve problems arising when a communication system such as a wireless LAN is constructed as a decentralized distributed type network without a relationship of control station and controlled stations such as a master station and slave stations, in a wireless communication system composed of a plurality of communication stations without a relationship of control station and controlled stations, respective communication stations transmit beacons with information concerning a network written thereon with each other to construct the network, and it becomes possible to make sophisticated judgment such as communication states of other communication stations by those beacons. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097441 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING MBMS RADIO BEARER TYPE - A method and apparatus for selecting a radio bearer type for providing a service to a plurality of mobile terminals according to a count of mobile terminals obtained through responses to a service response request message from a network is provided. An MBMS radio bearer type is selected according to a count that includes RRC-connected mobile terminals that still need to establish a connection in order to receive an MBMS such that the radio bearer type established is sufficient to provide the MBMS to all mobile terminals desiring to receive the service. | 04-16-2009 |
20090103474 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING BLUETOOTH PERFORMANCE IN THE PRESENCE OF A COEXISTENT, NON-BLUETOOTH, WIRELESS DEVICE - The disclosed systems and methods relate to improving the coexistence of Bluetooth devices and devices that use other wireless standards. Aspects of the present invention may enable a higher level of data throughput by reducing the retransmission rate. Aspects of the present invention may minimize design cost by allowing manufactures to use Bluetooth radios from one source and non-Bluetooth radios from another source. Aspects of the present invention may be embodied in a single device or multiple devices that operate in a geographic area. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103475 | TELECOMMUNICATION AND MULTIMEDIA MANAGEMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present invention is directed to a node for transmitting data over a network. The node includes a first ascertaining element configured to ascertain the need to transmit one or more data streams from the node to a second node over the network, the one or more data streams including time-based media that is generated either locally or remotely on the network. The node also includes a second ascertaining element configured to ascertain a timeliness preference for reviewing the one or more data streams by one or more recipients respectively. The ascertained timeliness preference for each one of the data streams is either (a) time-sensitive where at least one recipient of the one data stream has indicated an intent to review the one data stream in a near real-time mode as received by the recipient over the network while the time-based media of the one data stream is being generated or (b) less-than time-sensitive. The node further includes a transmitter that transmits the one or more data streams using either a first transmission technique or a second transmission technique, depending on the ascertained timeliness preference of each data stream. The first transmission technique is used for the less-than time-sensitive preference data streams, whereas the second transmission technique is used for data streams with the time-sensitive preference. The first technique uses a larger first packetization interval, which is defined as the amount of time based media contained in each packet, compared to the second packetization interval used by the second technique. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103476 | GRACEFUL DEGRADATION FOR VOICE COMMUNICATION SERVICES OVER WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for gracefully extending the range and/or capacity of voice communication systems is disclosed. The method involves the persistent storage of voice media on a communication device. When the usable bit rate on the network is poor and below that necessary for conducting a live conversation, voice media is transmitted and received by the communication device at the available usable bit rate on the network. Although latency may be introduced, the persistent storage of both transmitted and received media of a conversation provides the ability to extend the useful range of wireless networks beyond what is required for live conversations. In addition, the capacity and robustness in not being affected by external interferences for both wired and wireless communications is improved. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103477 | GRACEFUL DEGRADATION FOR VOICE COMMUNICATION SERVICES OVER WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A communication device for gracefully extending the range and/or capacity of voice communication systems. The communication device includes a persistent storage device configured persistently store the voice media either generated when using the communication device or received over the network at the communication device. When the usable bit rate on the network is poor and below that necessary for conducting a live conversation, the communication device transmits voice media from persistent storage and stores received voice media in persistent storage at the available usable bit rate on the network. Although latency may be introduced during the back and forth transmissions of a conversation, the persistent storage of both transmitted and received media of a conversation provides the ability to extend the useful range of wireless networks beyond what is required for live conversations. In addition, the capacity and robustness in not being affected by external interferences for both wired and wireless communications is improved. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103478 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PCDP DISCARD - A method and apparatus for discarding a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) service data unit (SDU) are disclosed. A PDCP layer sets a timer and discards a PDCP SDU upon expiration of the timer. The timer may be set upon receiving the PDCP SDU from an upper layer or upon submitting the PDCP SDU to a lower layer for transmission. The timer and a radio link control (RLC) discard timer may be coordinated. Alternatively, the PDCP layer may discard the PDCP SDU based on a notification from an RLC layer or based on a PDCP status report. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103479 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION AND RADIO TERMINAL - A radio terminal | 04-23-2009 |
20090103480 | HYBRID ARQ SCHEMES WITH SOFT COMBINING IN VARIABLE RATE PACKET DATA APPLICATIONS - A system and method for transmitting high speed data on fixed rate and for variable rate channels. The system and method provides the flexibility of adjusting the data rate, the coding rate, and the nature of individual retransmissions. Further, the system and method supports partial soft combining of retransmitted data with previously transmitted data, supports parity bit selection for successive retransmissions, and supports various combinations of data rate variations, coding rate variations, and partial data transmissions. | 04-23-2009 |
20090109897 | LEGACY SUPPORT FOR WI-FI PROTECTED SETUP - Techniques and systems for automatically configuring devices to interact with “legacy” wireless access points (“WAPs”) are disclosed. According to one technique, a user programs a WPS-enabled WAP with the configuration information of a “legacy” WAP. This makes the WPS-enabled WAP “aware” of the “legacy” WAP. When any other user brings his device within discovery range of the WPS-enabled WAP, the WPS-enabled WAP sends, to that device, a list of the WAPs of which the WPS-enabled WAP is aware. The device's user selects one of the WAPs (e.g., a “legacy” WAP) from the list. The WPS-enabled WAP receives the user's selection and sends, to the device, the configuration information for the selected WAP. The user's device configures itself, using the configuration information, to interact with the selected WAP. Thereafter, the user's device can access a network through the selected WAP, even if the selected WAP is a “legacy” WAP. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109898 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A MESSAGE TRANSPORT FOR A MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present disclosure relates to a system and method for selecting a network for use by a communication device to process a data transmission is provided. In the method, the following actions are conducted: tracking transmission characteristics of networks used by the device; maintaining a set of options for the device relating to the networks, including at least one option based on the transmission characteristics; utilizing a selected option identify a selected network to process the data transmission by the communication device; and processing the data transmission using the selected network. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109899 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PARAMETER SETTING CONTROL APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD - This invention has as its object to implement dynamic processing according to processing loads on access points in a wireless communication local network system including a plurality of independent wireless cells. According to this invention, a communication control method for a communication control apparatus, which controls a wireless communication in a wireless communication local network system including a plurality of independent wireless cells, includes: a step of determining the processing loads of respective APs; a step of selecting an STA, which is to associate with another independent wireless cell built using an AP with a low processing load by switching processing, of STAs, which associate with an independent wireless cell built using an AP with a high processing load; and a step of requesting to transmit parameter information required to associate with the other independent wireless cell. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109900 | RADIO CONTROLLER, RADIO BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CALL ADMISSION CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In a radio controller, a radio communication system, and a call admission control method, even when services such as a voice call service and a streaming service other than the best effort service are provided in communication using a shared channel, it is possible to admit a new call while guaranteeing a predetermined throughput for users in communication, the users receiving best effort services through the communication via the shared channel. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109901 | WIRELESS DEVICE WHICH SELECTS ROUTES EXCLUDING LOOP ROUTES AND A MESH NETWORK INCLUDING THE SAME - In wireless communication using links with neighbor wireless devices, a wireless device calculates ratios of throughput to maximum throughput for the links and calculates the costs of the links using the calculated ratios. Then the wireless device finds, for each destination, a route in which the sum of such calculated link costs is the minimum, and sends a packet to the destination using the route. As a consequence, routing can be done according to an isotonic, easy-to-implement routing protocol. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109902 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for a more efficient carrier search. The object is achieved by a method for sending a signal in a first node. The first node communicates with a second node via radio communication, which radio communication is performed by multi carrier transmission. The first node uses a carrier, being associated with a frequency range. The method comprises the step of transmitting an end-marker signal within or close to the frequency range. The end-marker signal is intended to be received and used by the second node for identifying the frequency range of the used carrier. | 04-30-2009 |
20090116424 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A packet communication method according to the present invention includes: transmitting, at a mobile station, a random access request that includes mobile station information assigned to the mobile station, to a radio base station through a random access channel allocated to a predetermined radio resource; receiving, at the radio base station, the random access request from the mobile station; and transmitting, at the radio base station, a random access response signal that notifies the receipt of the random access request and includes the mobile station information, to the mobile station through a downlink shared control channel corresponding to the random access channel. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116425 | ERROR CONTROL METHOD, MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) FRAME DESIGNING METHOD, AND TERMINAL REGISTRATION METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In a method of registering with an access point in a terminal of a wireless communication system, a frame includes a downlink sub-frame including a broadcast interval and a first management connection interval, and an uplink sub-frame including an access interval and a second management connection interval, the broadcast interval being used for transmitting a map message, the method includes: sending a first ranging request message to the access point using the access interval; receiving allocation information of a ranging slot from the access point using the map message; performing ranging through the ranging slot; sending a registration request message to the access point using the second management connection interval; and receiving information on whether to permit the registering from the access point using the first management connection interval. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116426 | SDU DISCARD MECHANISMS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate packet discard restriction in a wireless communication system. As described herein, a discard prohibit counter and/or other similar mechanism can be employed to limit the number of consecutive packets that are discarded by a transmitter, even in the event that the delay bounds of those packets have been exceeded. A discard prohibit counter as described herein can be updated upon a packet transmission and reset upon a packet discard to ensure that an acceptable number of packets are transmitted before a packet can be discarded. An acceptable number of packets can be selected based on device specifications, requirements of a data packet flow and/or traffic associated with the flow, or other suitable factors, and can be constant or adaptable to changes in network conditions. As further described herein, multiple counters can be separately maintained and utilized for a plurality of corresponding packet flows. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116427 | ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY FRAME STRUCTURE WITH BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY - An advanced technology frame structure is described herein. The advanced technology frame structure can enhance a first technology frame structure in dimensions of time, frequency, or a combination of time and frequency. A second technology frame structure time division multiplexes second technology subframes with the first technology downlink and uplink subframes. The first technology downlink subframe can be divided into a first technology downlink subframe and one or more second technology downlink subframes. Similarly, the first technology uplink subframe can be divided into a first uplink subframe and one or more second technology uplink subframes. These principles can be expanded upon and can be applied in many communication systems. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116428 | Mobile communication method and system - In the method for wireless communication between a terminal and a base station supporting a real time packet transfer service mode and reliable packet transfer service mode according to the present invention, one of the real time packet transfer service mode and reliable packet transfer service mode is selected and a communication channel between the terminal and the base station is established, and the packet data are bidirectionally exchanged between the terminal and the base station over the communication channel in real time. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116429 | NETWORK SYSTEM - MTID of a terminal apparatus is preliminarily registered into a database of an ISP. In step S | 05-07-2009 |
20090122748 | Method and System for the Dynamic Adaptation of Service Quality Metrics in an Adhoc Network - A method and system for dynamically managing quality of service metrics in an ad hoc network including a plurality of routing nodes ( | 05-14-2009 |
20090122749 | Method and apparatus for localizing AM/FM/XM radio advertisement - Within a metropolitan area, existing AM/FM radio audience listens to same advertisement message at a time throughout the whole area. Such advertisement could be out of listener's interest if ad sponsor is located geographically far away from the listener. Business owner, such as auto dealer, restaurants or grocery store, may want to reach nearby local customer via radio advertisement. With this invention, radio broadcasting companies can air different advertisements at a time tailored to listeners in a specific sub-areas. They can air multiple advertisements simultaneously each of which is focused on local town or county listeners. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122750 | Internet Protocol Version 4 Support for Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol Version 6 Route Optimization Protocol - A network component comprising at least one processor configured to implement a method comprising promoting an optimization of a communications route associated with a mobile node (MN) and a correspondent node (CN) using Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) packets is disclosed. Also disclosed is a network comprising a mobility access gateway (MAG) in communication with a MN, and a CN in communication with the MAG and that desires to communicate with the MN, wherein a communications route between the MN and the CN is optimized using IPv4 signaling. Included is a method comprising promoting an optimization of a communications route between a MN and a CN using IPv4 signaling. Standalone CNs and CNs under a MAG embodiments are supported. | 05-14-2009 |
20090129313 | CONTROL STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND PACKET DATA DISCARDING METHOD - There is provided a control station device capable of suppressing a traffic amount by discarding packet data to be discarded by a control station device, without transmitting the packet data from the base station device to the control station device. In this device, a buffer ( | 05-21-2009 |
20090129314 | ROUTE OPTIMIZATION WITH LOCATION PRIVACY SUPPORT - The invention relates to a method for route optimisation of packet switched data transmissions between a first mobile node and a second mobile node in a mobile communication system comprising a plurality of access networks. The method comprises the step of transmitting return routability protocol packets and data packets. The return routability protocol packets and data packets are analysed, and at least part of an address comprised in headers of the return routability protocol packets and data packets is removed. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129315 | DATA DISCARD FOR RADIO LINK CONTROL IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate in-band notification of stale service data units (SDU) in a radio link control (RLC) layer for wireless communications. In particular, where SDUs become stale during protocol data unit (PDU) retransmission, in-band notifications can be packed in retransmit PDUs for receipt and interpretation by a receiver. The in-band notification can be a special length indicator that specifies discard of an SDU that was previously partially received, and the transmitter of the PDU can save payload by not retransmitting the stale SDU. In this regard, additional channels, mediums, and/or other out-of-band notifications are not required to specify discard. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129316 | Systems and methods for adaptive routing in mobile ad-hoc networks and disruption tolerant networks - The systems and methods described herein include adaptive routing processes for packet-based wireless communication networks. This routing approach works both in MANETs (when a contemporaneous end-to-end path is available) and in DTNs (when a contemporaneous end to end path is not available, but one of formed over space and time). In particular, the methods include adaptively selecting a routing process for transmitting a packet through a node in the network based on available information on the network topology and/or the contents of the packet. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129317 | ACK/NACK DTX detection - In a first aspect of the invention there is a method, apparatus, and executable software product for receiving scheduling information, determining that at least one downlink allocation of the scheduling information was not received, sending a reply to the received scheduling that comprises an indication of discontinuous transmission in response to the determining. In another aspect of the invention there is a method an apparatus to send scheduling information, and receive a reply to the scheduling information comprising an indication of discontinuous transmission that at least one downlink allocation of the scheduling information was not received. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129318 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPLICATION SERVER FOR ROUTING CS DOMAIN CALLS TO PS DOMAIN - A method and system for routing a Circuit Switched (CS) domain call to a Packet Switched (PS) domain are disclosed. The method includes a Voice Call Continuity Application Server (VCC AS) in the PS domain interacts with a Home Location Register (HLR) in the CS domain to obtain an original called number, allocates a PS domain routing number to a CS domain call, and originates a corresponding PS domain call according to the obtained original called number after the PS domain call, which uses the PS domain routing number as a called party identifier, arrives at the VCC AS in the PS domain. The VCC AS obtains the call information through the interaction with the HLR rather than the interaction with a Service Control Point (SCP). Therefore, a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) needs to communicate with the HLR only, without the requirement to communicate with the SCP, and the MSC in the present disclosure does not need to support intelligent processing. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129319 | INTEGRATED WEB CACHE - A gateway for mobile communications comprises a cache for storing network data recently downloaded from a network, a foreign agent, and a packet filter that directs requests for the network data from a mobile node to the cache. The packet filter directs the requested network data from the cache to the mobile node by way of the foreign agent, without forwarding the requested network data to a home agent of the mobile node. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129320 | Communications Terminal, Server, Playback Control Method and Program - The communications terminal comprises: a playback device which playbacks content; a reading device which reads in access information recorded on a prescribed recording medium, the access information being necessary for downloading the content which can be played back by the playback device, via a network; a communications device which downloads via communications the content corresponding to the access information according to the access information read in; a storage device which stores the downloaded content, the storage device storing details of the access information in association with the content, the details of the access information being used in downloading the content; a judging device which judges whether or not the content corresponding to the read access information is present in the storage device, according to information which is stored in the storage device, when the access information is read in by the reading device; and a control device which controls the playback device, the reading device, the communications device, the storage device, and the judging device, wherein: if the judging device judges that the content is present in the storage device, the control device controls for acquiring the content corresponding to the access information read in from the storage device, and for playing back the content; and if the judging device judges that the content is not present in the storage device, the control device controls for downloading the content corresponding to the access information read in, and for playing back the content. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129321 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CLUSTERING WIRELESS DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Described are a system and method for clustering wireless devices in a wireless network. The system comprises a wireless access point and a plurality of wireless computing units grouped into a cluster as a function of a predetermined parameter. The cluster includes a cluster head unit and at least one cluster member unit. The at least one cluster member unit utilizes a first power level when wirelessly communicating with the cluster head unit, and the cluster head unit utilizes a second power level when communicating with the AP. | 05-21-2009 |
20090135758 | Method for discovering neighbor networks in mobile station and network system for enabling the method - The present invention relates to a wireless network, and more particularly, a method (*“and system”?*) which a mobile station discovers a neighbor network in an Internet protocol based wireless network, a network management server for enabling the method, and a method of operating the network management server. A network management server of a wireless network system, the server including: a neighborhood (NH) database maintaining configuration information with respect to at least one neighbor network; a communication interface receiving a request message for capability/configuration information of the neighbor network from a mobile station which is connected via a predetermined access point or a base station; and a database management unit extracting the capability/configuration information of the neighbor network which is included in the request message by referring to the neighborhood database, and controlling a reply message including the capability/configuration information to be transmitted to the mobile station via the communication interface. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135759 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND NETWORK SIDE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A technology is disclosed for achieving fast and reliable handover. According to this technology, in the network composition where a network coverage area of the cellular base station | 05-28-2009 |
20090135760 | MULTIMODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A multimode wireless communication apparatus that supports plural wireless communication systems and switches wireless communication systems to communicate. The apparatus includes a signal processor capable of switching wireless communication systems by plural manners; and a controller that directs to the signal processor a combination of manners of switching wireless communication systems according to a communication environment. The signal processor switches wireless communication systems according to the combination of manners of switching wireless communication systems directed from the controller. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135761 | PREAMBLE DESIGN FOR A WIRELESS SIGNAL - Providing for base station (BS) acquisition in semi-planned or unplanned wireless access networks is described herein. By way of example, a signal preamble can be dynamically allocated to wireless signal resources, such that the preamble is scheduled to different resource(s) across different cycles of the signal. Dynamic allocation can be pseudo-random, based on collision feedback, or determined by a suitable algorithm to mitigate collisions from a dominant interferer. In addition, dynamic scheduling can be particular to a type of BS to significantly reduce collisions from BSs of disparate types. In at least one aspect, a preamble resource can be sub-divided into multiple frequency sub-carrier tiles. Control channel information can be transmitted on each tile of a group of such tiles, further mitigating effects of a dominant interferer on a subset of the tile group. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135762 | POINT-TO-POINT COMMUNICATION WITHIN A MESH NETWORK - A method and system provide receiving communications via either a short address or a long address. The method may include, responsive to receiving a packet, parsing a packet header. The method may include computing a response to the packet. The method may include, responsive to determining the packet includes a short address addressee, transmitting the response via a mesh network. The method may include, responsive to determining the packet includes a long address addressee, transmitting the response via a point-to-point protocol. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135763 | BASE STATION - The present invention can be achieved by a base station in which a terminal is accommodated and the terminal is communicated with another terminal, and which includes: a data rate operation/management unit which operates and stores a time-averaged data rate Rave of the terminal; a threshold value operation/management unit which obtains a current communication data rate R of the terminal to operate and store R/Rave; and a delay management unit which controls to reduce delay on the basis of the R/Rave. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135764 | ROUTING METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORK - A routing method and system for a mobile ad-hoc network is provided for efficiently routing a packet by quickly updating topology information shared by nodes adaptively to variation of the network topology while minimizing generation of redundant traffic. The routing method includes setting, at each current node, a self-potential value to a destination node upon receiving a route recovery request; and transmitting, when a transmission packet is destined to the destination node, the packet through a route established with at least one node in a descending order of potential value. The present invention reduces the redundant traffic dramatically, thereby improving the entire network throughput. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135765 | WIRELESS ROUTER SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless router employing a technique to couple a plurality a host services or host systems and a plurality of wireless networks. A method to route data items between a plurality of mobile devices and a plurality of host systems through a common wireless router. A point-to-point communication connection is preferably established between a first host system and a common wireless router, a mobile network message at a mobile device is generated, the mobile network message is transmitted via a wireless network to the common wireless router which in turn routes a data item component of the mobile network message to the appropriate host service. | 05-28-2009 |
20090141669 | TRAVEL CHARACTERISTICS-BASED AD-HOC COMMUNICATION NETWORK ALGORITHM SELECTION - A method of operating an ad-hoc communication system is provided. The method comprises determining a pattern type relating to mobile node travel characteristics over a defined traveling region. Based on the pattern type, selecting a neighbor discovery and route determination algorithm. Implementing the neighbor discovery and route determination algorithm on received location and identification mobile node information to determine communication routes to at least one of mobile nodes and stationary communication stations in the ad-hoc communication system. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141670 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL HEADER FORMAT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate employing a variety of medium access control (MAC) header formats in wireless communications. The MAC header formats can be specialized for a particular type of data included in a protocol data unit (PDU). In addition, the MAC headers can have a variable length to accommodate payloads of varying sizes without incurring unnecessary overhead. Further, mechanisms are provided to enable direct access and delivery of control PDUs to associated protocol layers to ensure better quality of service treatment. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141671 | PACKET COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SUBSCRIBER-ASSOCIATED-INFORMATION DELIVERY CONTROLLER - In a packet communication network comprising an MNO network, and an MVNO network including an application server for providing an information service to wireless terminals via the MNO network, the MNO network includes a subscriber-associated-information delivery controller for delivering subscriber associated information of each wireless terminal, which is connected to a radio access network, to the MVNO network, and the MVNO network includes a subscriber-associated-information processor for receiving the subscriber associated information delivered from the subscriber-associated-information delivery controller. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141672 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA USING DOWNLINK DUMMY CONTROL BLOCK AND SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A method for transmitting data using a downlink dummy control block and a system using the same. The method includes receiving, by a Base Station, data to be broadcast to Mobile Stations (MSs) from a mobile communication service provider server, and inserting, by the BS, the received data into a padding bit field within a downlink dummy control block and broadcasting the downlink dummy control block to the MSs. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141673 | Apparatus and method for rate control in a broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus and method for rate control in a wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a preprocessor, a rate controller, a determiner, and a transmitter. The preprocessor determines feedback information on a physical layer packet using a feedback message of MAC ARQ. The rate controller updates a CQI reported from a receiver using the determined feedback information. The determiner determines an MCS using the updated CQI. The transmitter transmits data using the determined MCS. | 06-04-2009 |
20090147729 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING OPEN STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for processing Open state is provided, the method comprising receiving a Control Channel and a Forward Traffic Channel, requesting a MultipleInputMultipleOutput(MIMO) mode on the Forward Traffic Channel by sending a MIMORequest message, monitoring overhead messages and determining if the access terminal receives a ConnectionClose messages. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147730 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A REDIRECT MESSAGE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method of transmitting a Redirect message in a wireless communication system is described. A Redirect message is generated comprising an 8 bit MessageID field, a 16 bit StayAwayDuration field wherein the StayAwayDuration field indicates the units of second for which an access terminal will not make an access attempt at the sector sending this message, an 8 bit NumChannel field wherein the NumChannel indicates the number of channel records included in the message, an 8 bit RedirectReason field wherein the RedirectReason reflect the redirect reason and a Channel field wherein the Channel field indicates the channel that the access terminal should reacquire. The Redirect message is transmitted over a communication link. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147731 | Enhancement of Path Quality of Service in Multi-Hop Packet Communication Networks - Techniques and systems for enhancing quality of service (QoS) in communication networks, including wired and wireless communication networks. Implementations of described techniques and systems can be used to provide path-based QoS with distributed per-hop scheduling for carrying traffic over a multi-hop packet communication network. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147732 | METHOD FOR ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION SPEED OF WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for adjusting a transmission speed of a wireless network comprises the steps of: setting a transmission mode, wherein the transmission mode is either an idle mode or a traffic mode; setting an environmental case, wherein the environmental case is either an ideal case or a corner case; determining a transmission speed adjusting algorithm according to the transmission mode and environmental case; and determining an updated transmission speed according to the transmission speed adjusting algorithm. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147733 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING PREAMBLE INDEX TO SELF CONFIGURABLE BASE STATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for allocating a preamble index to a self configurable base station in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus comprises a first selector for selecting a segment IDentifier (ID) to be allocated to a Self Configurable-Base Station (SC-BS) by using a per-segment ID Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) estimated by the SC-BS, a second selector for selecting an ID cell to be allocated to the SC-BS by using geographical location information of surrounding BSs, and a communicator for transmitting a segment ID and the ID cell to the SC-BS. | 06-11-2009 |
20090154392 | CODING BLOCK BASED HARQ COMBINING SCHEME FOR OFDMA SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for combining retransmitted hybrid automatic repeat-request (HARQ) messages divided into coding blocks in an orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM)/orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA) receiver are provided. According to such a coding-block-based HARQ combining scheme, the quality of each coding block may be compared to a threshold to determine whether the decoded bits or the HARQ combined signal should be saved for each coding block for subsequent HARQ iterations. In addition to reducing the required HARQ buffer size while preserving the combining gain, coding-block-based HARQ combining may also provide fast decoding and reduced power consumption when compared to conventional HARQ combining techniques. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154393 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A data transmission method suitable for a communication system is provided. The communication system includes a plurality of first stations which uses an 802.11 protocol and a plurality of second stations which uses an 802.11e protocol and supports Quality of Service (QoS). The data transmission method includes following steps. One of the second stations is used as a Contention AssisTance (CAT) station to obtain a medium access right with a first access category (AC). The second station broadcasts a CAT packet to all the first stations and the other second stations. The other second stations stop contending for the medium access right for a first predetermined time according to the CAT packet, and the first stations transmit a packet with a QoS requirement according to the CAT packet. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154394 | CALL CONTROL METHOD FOR SEAMLESS MOBILITY SERVICE - A call control method for an Internet Protocol (IP)-based mobility service is provided. The call control method for ensuring service continuity in a mobile communication service environment, includes: receiving a call signal message including permanent IP addresses and transport IP addresses from a transmitter terminal and a receiver terminal, and acquiring the permanent IP addresses and the transport IP addresses of the transmitter terminal and the receiver terminal; and performing call control between the transmitter terminal and the receiver terminal on the basis of the transport IP addresses and the permanent IP addresses of the transmitter terminal and the receiver terminal. Therefore, by interfacing with an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) for controlling a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)-based service, an IP mobility control apparatus for controlling mobility of a terminal when a call is controlled, and a network control apparatus for controlling a network, it is possible to prevent data transmission from being interrupted while the terminal is moving, thereby providing an IP-based seamless, high-quality service. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154395 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK HAVING HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE AND ROUTING METHOD THEREOF - A network having a hierarchical structure includes a plurality of clusters. Each of the clusters includes a plurality of nodes and a cluster head connected to the nodes in a mesh format. Each of the nodes is connected to other clusters via the cluster head. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154396 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - The present invention is to provide a mobile management communication system which can reduce the number of nodes involved in a packet delivery to a mobile terminal which has access to a home network compared to a packet delivery to a mobile terminal which is roaming and can perform a dynamic change to an anchor node suitable for a service, corresponding to a change of a service type required by a user. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154397 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING QUALITY OF SERVICE ENABLERS FOR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS - System and method for providing quality of service enablers for third party applications are described. In one embodiment, the method comprises user equipment (“UE”) establishing a communications session with a third party application server hosting a selected third party application and receiving from the third party application server QoS information comprising at least one of a plurality of QoS attributes and configuring a QoS of a radio access network (“RAN”) in accordance with the received QoS information. The method further comprises activating the RAN QoS for the selected application; and establishing an application session with the third party application server via the RAN. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154398 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION STATE NOTIFICATION METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PROGRAM - There is provided a wireless communication device forming an autonomous distributed wireless network by intermittently transmitting and receiving a predetermined communication management signal, which includes a reception portion to receive the communication management signal, an evaluation portion to evaluate a communication state of the wireless communication device in the wireless network based on a history of receiving the communication management signal by the reception portion, and a notification portion to provide a notification corresponding to an evaluation result of the communication state by the evaluation portion. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154399 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING A RANGING SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for a base station of a wireless communication network includes a detector to detect an access code received from a mobile station in each of a plurality of time durations and to detect a timing offset of the access code detected in each of the plurality of time durations, an estimator to estimate a carrier-to-interference noise ratio (CINR) during each of the plurality of time durations, and a determining unit to determine a timing offset correction value to be applied to subsequent signals from the mobile station using the CINR, the timing offset, and the access code detected in each of the plurality of time durations. | 06-18-2009 |
20090161600 | Wireless slave unit - In a network area of a wireless network managed by a wireless master device, a wireless slave device performs wireless network communication with another wireless slave device connected by wire to a terminal, and wired network communication with a terminal connected by wire to the wireless slave device. The wireless slave device includes a wireless reception unit ( | 06-25-2009 |
20090161601 | Method and Apparatus for Detection of Network Having Multiple IP-Address Capability | 06-25-2009 |
20090161602 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD USING BLUETOOTH - A wireless communication apparatus which is capable of communicating with a first wireless terminal holding a first data packet by Bluetooth includes a search unit, a first transceiver transmitting, a first controller, and a scheduling unit. The search unit reserves a search, and executing the search. The first transceiver transmits the first and second control packets, and receives the first data packet and a second data packet. The first controller reserves a transmission of the second control packet to the first wireless terminal, the first controller giving instructions to transmit the second control packet to the first transceiver. The scheduling unit accepts the reservation from the first controller and the search unit, the scheduling unit preferentially allowing a transmission of the second control packet compared with the search, and allowing the search when no reservation of the transmission of the second control packet is made. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161603 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus is capable of improving communication efficiency by reducing the amount of control information transmitted. A channel quality information extraction section extracts CQI's from a received signal. An allocation control section allocates subcarriers every communication terminal apparatus and selects a modulation scheme in such a manner that required transmission rate is satisfied for each communication terminal apparatus based on required transmission rate information etc. and CQI's for communication terminal apparatus of each user. A required subcarrier number determining section decides the number of subcarriers allocated every communication terminal apparatus in such a manner as to satisfy the required transmission rate for each communication terminal apparatus based on required transmission rate information etc. of communication terminal apparatus of each user. A required subcarrier number information generating section generates information for the number of subcarriers allocated every communication terminal apparatus. A subcarrier allocation section allocates packet data to selected subcarriers. Modulating sections adaptively modulate packet data allocated to each subcarrier. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161604 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE OF PACKET ROUTING FOR LOCALIZED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NETWORK - A method of packet routing for an LMM network includes: by an LMA, determining that both a sending end node and a receiving end node are located in an LMM domain controlled by the LMA, and starting a route optimization; directly forwarding, by an access device attached to the sending end node, a packet to be sent to the receiving end node to an access device attached to the receiving end node without being forwarded by the LMA; and forwarding, by the access device attached to the receiving end node, to the receiving end node. A system of packet routing for an LMM network includes a sending end node, a receiving end node, an access device attached to the sending end node, an access device attached to the receiving end node, and an LMA. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161605 | COOPERATIVE MIMO IN MULTICELL WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and system for cooperative multiple-input multiple output (MIMO) transmission operations in a multicell wireless network. Under the method, antenna elements from two or more base stations are used to from an augmented MIMO antenna array that is used to transmit and receive MIMO transmissions to and from one or more terminals. The cooperative MIMO transmission scheme supports higher dimension space-time-frequency processing for increased capacity and system performance. | 06-25-2009 |
20090168692 | Packet radio communications system - A packet radio communications system communicates internet packets to and/or from mobile user equipment. The system comprises a core network comprising a plurality of packet data networks, each including network communications elements operable to communicate internet packets using an internet protocol transport plane, and a common gateway support node. The gateway support node is operable to route the internet packets via communications bearers established through the packet data networks using the network communications elements. The system includes a plurality of radio access networks connected by the internet protocol transport plane to the core network components of the packet data networks for communicating the internet protocol packets to and/or from the mobile user equipment. Each of the radio access networks is operable to provide radio access bearers for communicating the internet packets to and/or from the mobile user equipment. The system includes a packet service control subsystem function comprising an access network part and a non access network part. The access network part is arranged to control the communication of the internet packets via the radio access bearers and the non-access network part is arranged to control the communication of the internet packets via the communications bearers using the network communications elements of the packet data networks. At least one of the radio access networks is arranged to operate in accordance with a different telecommunications standard than the other radio access networks, and at least one of the plurality of packet data networks is arranged to operate in accordance with a different telecommunications standard than the other packet data networks. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168693 | TECHNIQUES FOR THE OPERATION OF MULTIPLE CLASSES OF DEVICES IN A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising communicating and coexisting in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) by a at least one device operating as an advanced device (AD) and at least one device operating as a simple device (SD) by using the at least one AD as a proxy for the at least one SD to control the communication of the at least one SD. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168694 | Breakout connection apparatus, system, and method - A system includes a local mobile network and user equipment, where the user equipment is configured to detect a local network identity of a local mobile network, determine whether a selected condition involving the local network identity is satisfied, and indicate whether a breakout connection is appropriate based on whether the selected condition is satisfied. The breakout connection is appropriate when the selected condition is unsatisfied. A non-breakout connection is appropriate regardless of whether the selected condition is satisfied or unsatisfied In some embodiments, the selected condition is satisfied when the local network identity corresponds to a network identity of a home public land mobile network or an equivalent home public land mobile network. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168695 | DEFINING A BOUNDARY FOR WIRELESS NETWORK USING PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS - A system and method for defining a boundary within a wireless coverage area using a physical access control system (PACS) and limiting access to the wireless network to devices located within the boundary area is provided. The system includes a PACS for controlling access to a secured area defined by the boundary to authorized personnel and a wireless network generating system for generating a wireless network. Access to the wireless network is limited to devices associated with an authorized personnel when the authorized personnel is determined to be within the secured area and denied to devices associated to personnel determined to be outside the secured area. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168696 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION SESSION FOR MULTIMEDIA - A method and arrangement for establishing a packet-switched multimedia session for a mobile terminal (A) in communication with another party (B), wherein a primary PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context has been activated in a mobile network for the mobile terminal. Information on the forthcoming session is received which has been negotiated and agreed between the communicating parties. It is then determined whether any network resources providing a required QoS are needed for the session, and whether a secondary PDP context is to be activated for the mobile terminal and the forthcoming session. If network resources are needed and a secondary PDP context is to be activated, the activation of said secondary PDP context is triggered. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168697 | METHOD FOR THE INTERCEPTION OF GTP-C MESSAGES - Disclosed is a species of control-message intercept method which includes a passive monitoring approach whereby the relevant control packets are inspected for the purpose of providing additional information for the purpose of facilitating the operation of some primary or ‘master’ Internet Protocol (IP) charging/rating middleware platform/gateway system (intended to equip network operators with the ability to rate and bill IP traffic), and secondly, an invasive technique whereby control (GTP-C) messages are injected for the purpose of altering the state of a given data session in an more aggressive fashion (e.g. to drop a data session when the subscriber runs out of money in his/her prepaid account). | 07-02-2009 |
20090168698 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIMULTANEOUS LOCATION PRIVACY AND ROUTE OPTIMIZATION FOR COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - The invention relates to a method for routing packets in a system of packet-switched networks comprising a plurality of home agents, at least one mobile node and at least one correspondent node, the mobile node having at least a first home address and communicating with the correspondent node over a first of the plurality of home agents. The method comprises the following steps carried out by the mobile node: receiving an application layer request message from the correspondent node; looking up a correspondent node address in a part of the application layer request message; locating a second of the plurality of home agents in proximity to a direct path between the mobile node and the correspondent node using the correspondent node address; bootstrapping with the second home agent to obtain a second home address; including the second home address in a part of an application layer response message to the correspondent node to enable the correspondent node to use the second home address for data communications with the mobile node. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168699 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A NETWORK CONNECTION AND NETWORK DEVICE THEREOF - A method for establishing a network connection includes storing access point identifier information and connection information corresponding to the access point identifier information, establishing a network connection to a target access point, acquiring target identifier information of the target access point, determining whether the target identifier information conforms to the access point identifier information, and using the connection information to connect to a target electronic device through the target access point when the target identifier information conforms to the access point identifier information. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168700 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AVOIDING STALL USING TIMER FOR HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS SYSTEM - At least one timer is used to prevent a stall condition. If a timer is not active, the timer is started for a data block that is correctly received. The data block has a sequence number higher than a sequence number of another data block that was first expected to be received. When the timer is stopped or expires, all correctly received data blocks among data blocks up to and including a data block having a sequence number that is immediately before the sequence number of the data block for which the timer was started is delivered to a higher layer. Further, all correctly received data blocks up to a first missing data block, including the data block for which the timer was started, is delivered to the higher layer. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168701 | MULTI-ACCESS TERMINAL WITH CAPABILITY FOR SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIVITY TO MULTIPLE COMMUNICATION CHANNELS - An apparatus is disclosed for permitting a mobile terminal having multiple, heterogeneous network connections (e.g., multiple wired or wireless transceivers of various types) to set up and maintain virtual connections over multiple networks to either the same or to multiple destinations. The mobile terminal can “load-share” traffic, i.e., it can distribute segments of traffic over a full set of heterogeneous networks, significantly improving the reliability and availability of communications. In a first embodiment, a mobile terminal is configured with multiple radio frequency (RF) transceivers. Operating system software is provided for dynamically establishing and maintaining traffic flow for user applications over multiple communications paths, and for automatically adapting to variations in the networking environment, application traffic flow requirements, end user preferences, or mobility. In a second embodiment, a software-defined radio is used to implement the physical layer protocols for each desired network, eliminating the need for multiple transceivers. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168702 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR IMPLEMENTING A VIRTUAL POSTING SERVICE - Methods, systems, and computer program products for implementing virtual posting services. Methods include receiving content from a communications device located in a geographic proximity that is serviced by an access node, storing the content in a storage device that is in communication with the access node, and tracking an amount of time the content item is stored. If the amount of time does not reach a pre-established threshold, the methods include transmitting the content to another communications device in response to detecting the presence of the other communications device within the geographic proximity and in response to an inquiry from the other communications device. | 07-02-2009 |
20090175215 | Packet radio network and method - A packet radio network provides a facility for communicating internet packets to and/or from a mobile user equipment. The packet radio network comprises a gateway support node, a serving support node and a radio network controller. The gateway support node is operable to provide a packet data protocol context for controlling the communication of the internet packets to and/or from the packet radio network from and/or to the mobile user equipment via a packet communications bearer. The serving support node is connected to the gateway support node and is operable to control communications of the internet packets to and from the gateway support node to and/or from mobile user equipment to form the packet communications bearer. The radio network controller is operable to provide a radio access bearer for communicating the internet packets via a radio access interface to and/or from the mobile user equipment. In response to a packet data protocol activation request message requesting a common packet data protocol context, the serving support node is operable in combination with the gateway support node to establish a common packet data protocol context in association with a common packet communications bearer. The common packet data protocol context is established to communicate internet protocol packets via the common packet communications bearer. The common packet communications bearer is shared with at least one other communications session and is formed by the gateway support node and the serving support node using a common tunnelling protocol bearer. Therefore a packet radio network is provided which can provide a common communications bearer which can be shared between different communications sessions. As a result high-speed broadband communications, such as HSDPA can be supported efficiently, because more than one communications session shares common communications resources. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175216 | Mesh Networking for Wireless Communications - A method for optimizing wireless communications in a mesh network is described. The method includes transmitting a data stream from a wireless module (WM) host to a plurality of WM devices in the mesh network. The method further includes sending status messages from the WM devices to the WM host and the other WM devices. The WM devices are configured to transmit help requests and respond to help requests based on at least one WM device needing help receiving the data stream. The method further includes generating a WM host link quality map at the WM host with the WM host link quality map being dynamically updated upon receiving status messages from the WM devices. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175217 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF ESTABLISHING ACCESS CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for establishing an access channel in a wireless communication system is provided, comprising receiving an AccessGrant on a carrier on which the last probe was transmitted and ending an access probe transmission upon receiving the AccessGrant. A method and apparatus is further provided, comprising determining expiration of an access grant timer and ending an access probe transmission upon the expiration of the timer. A method and apparatus is further provided comprising receiving an IdleState.IdleHO indication and ending an access probe transmission upon receiving the IdleState.IdleHO indication. A method and apparatus is further provided receiving a new AttemptAccess command, wherein the AttemptAccess command is processed after a current probe transmission ends and ending an access probe transmission on receiving the new AttemptAccess command. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175218 | DIGITAL BROADCAST SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DIGITAL BROADCAST DATA, AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD FOR USE IN THE SAME - A digital broadcast system having storing resistance to errors generated during the transmission of mobile service data, and a data processing method are disclosed. The digital broadcast system additionally encodes mobile service data. As a result, the mobile service data has strong resistance to a channel variation and noise, and at the same time the system can quickly cope with the channel variation. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175219 | Representation of a Delay Path in Mobile Networks - The present invention relates to a communication device in a communication network comprising at least two communication devices comprising means for:
| 07-09-2009 |
20090175220 | TRANSMISSION METHOD OF MOBILE STATION FOR RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL DIVERSITY - A transmission method performed by a mobile station for random access channel (RACH) burst transmission diversity gain is provided. According to the method, a variety of combinations of a time switching transmit diversity (TSTD) technique, a frequency hopping technique, and a power ramping technique that are robust against fading channel environments are applied to transmission of an RACH burst, thereby increasing the probability of detecting an RACH signature of a base station. Also, by using the transmission parameters (subband frequencies, transmission antennas, power, etc.) which are used for successful transmission of an RACH burst, for transmission of a successive user packet data, reliable transmission of the successive user packet data can be performed. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175221 | MULTIMEDIA WIRELESS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - An access point for wireless transmission of packets to user devices includes an application module and a radio module. If the radio module fails to successfully transmit a packet to a user device, the application module takes the packet from its queue and places it in the radio buffer for retransmission. This greatly increases the speed of retransmission. The application module can obtain information on the success of transmitting the packet directly from the radio module. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175222 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AVOIDING STALL USING TIMER FOR HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS SYSTEM - At least one timer is used to prevent a stall condition. If a timer is not active, the timer is started for a data block that is correctly received. The data block has a sequence number higher than a sequence number of another data block that was first expected to be received. When the timer is stopped or expires, all correctly received data blocks among data blocks up to and including a data block having a sequence number that is immediately before the sequence number of the data block for which the timer was started is delivered to a higher layer. Further, all correctly received data blocks up to a first missing data block, including the data block for which the timer was started, is delivered to the higher layer. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175223 | System and Method for Mobile Ad Hoc Network - A method and system for geocasting data packets in a MANET. The MANET is combined with a long-range network such that a wireless terminal can decide whether to rebroadcast a geocast packet over the MANET, the long-range network, or not at all, depending on the wireless terminal's proximity to the geocast region, the location of the originating wireless terminal, or both. A wireless terminal close to or within the geocast region can rebroadcast on the MANET, whereas a wireless terminal far from the geocast region can rebroadcast on the long-range network. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175224 | Wireless Base Station Which Operates In Degraded Mode In Mobile Communication System During Disaster, And Mobile Communication System - A mobile communication system prevents the reduction of large communication range even during disasters. A wireless base station includes a communication unit allocates frequency bands and output powers corresponding to distribution areas of wireless terminals, and performs communication with the wireless terminals. The communication unit uses a modulation method with a large number of multiple values to perform communication with wireless terminals in an area with small distribution area in proximity to the center of the cell area, and uses modulation methods with successively smaller numbers of values to perform communication with wireless terminals in larger distribution areas moving toward the peripheral regions of the cell area, and during a disaster, uses a modulation method with the smallest to perform communication over all distribution areas, sets the output power to the lowest value in communication with wireless terminals in an area with small distribution area in proximity to the center of the cell area, and sets the output power so as to increase gradually in communication with wireless terminals in larger distribution areas moving toward the peripheral regions of the cell area. | 07-09-2009 |
20090180422 | Interaction of VoIP calls and cellular networks - A communication system includes a switching network and a wireless network. The switching network includes a first gateway for receiving a communication from a caller, a second gateway for establishing an external connection through which the communication can be routed, and a command center that allows the first and second gateways to make an internal connection. The wireless network includes a visited mobile switch center and a home location register. The visited mobile switch center generates routing information, receives the communication from the external connection of the switching network, and routes the communication to a wireless network subscriber. The home location register locates the visited mobile switch center, and passes the routing information from the visited mobile switch center to the command center of the switching network. The command center causes the external connection to be established based on the routing information. | 07-16-2009 |
20090185522 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISTRIBUTING CONTENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present invention allows content to be delivered to a mobile terminal over different types of networks in order to efficiently use network resources. Content can be delivered using a select delivery method over a cellular network, a local wireless network, or a broadcast network. Within any of the networks, the content may be unicast to individual mobile terminals using individual content flows, multicast to a group of mobile terminals, or broadcast to any or all of the mobile terminals. Content can be multicast or broadcast to mobile terminals via different ones of the disparate networks. During a content flow, the network through which the content flow is delivered may be changed to allow the mobile terminal to receive the content through a different network. Further, the delivery method used to deliver the content may dynamically change as the number of mobile terminals receiving or requesting the content changes. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185523 | Personal Network Access Control System and Method - A server is provided that includes a processor such that for a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) request containing a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) identifying the first device, the processor is programmed to promote adding a URI and redirecting the SIP request to a second device. The added URI used by the second device to invoke a Personal Network Management (PNM) Controller function. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185524 | MANUAL CELL DETECTION AND SELECTION PROCEDURES - A method for performing a manual cell search by a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) includes receiving a manual cell search command and searching for home enhanced Node B (HeNB) cells during a time period. The time period may be a measurement gap or a discontinuous reception period. If an existing measurement gap is available for the WTRU to use, the search can be performed during that gap. Otherwise, the WTRU can request a new measurement gap to search for HeNBs. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185525 | NETWORK SYSTEM, DATA TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING METHOD AND DATA TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION PROGRAM - A network system including a mobile node, a correspondent node for transmitting/receiving a data packet to/from the mobile node, a first router to which the mobile node is connected at a visited domain and a second router to which the mobile node is connected at a moving destination to which the mobile node moves from the first router. The second router including a location registration message generating unit for generating a location registration message of the mobile node and transmitting the location registration message. The first router including a binding cache, a movement managing unit for receiving the location registration message and storing into the binding cache address information from before and after the mobile node moves and an encapsulating unit for receiving the data packet, encapsulating the data packet concerned, and creating and transmitting a data packet containing as a transmission destination the address information after the change. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185526 | Method and Apparatus for a Dynamic Create/Change of Service Flows - A system and method for transmitting data is provided. A preferred embodiment comprises transmitting data by concatenating parameters for multiple service flows into a single transmission. Parameters associated with multiple service flows may be grouped together and other parameters that are not associated with multiple service flows are also preferably included within the same single transmission. | 07-23-2009 |
20090190523 | Router unit, server unit and home agent function transfer control method - An HA function can be stopped and restarted without having an influence on MN performing registration and other nodes. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190524 | APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA TRAFFIC IN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORKS - An apparatus for distributing data traffic in heterogeneous wireless networks is provided. A terminal for transmitting data to a plurality of wireless networks, includes a transmission rule storing unit to store a data transmission rule with respect to the plurality of wireless networks, a data dividing unit to divide first data into a plurality of first data groups based on the stored data transmission rule, a transmission network selecting unit to select an individual transmission network for each divided data group from the plurality of wireless networks based on the determined data transmission rule, and a network access unit to transmit each data group to the selected transmission network. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190525 | ENHANCEMENTS TO THE POSITIONING PILOT CHANNEL - A method for communicating transmitter identification in an interlace structure of a communication network system using positioning pilot channels (PPC), comprising:
| 07-30-2009 |
20090190526 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING RADIO LINK CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNITS - A method and apparatus are used to generate radio link control (RLC) protocol data units (PDUs). A data request for a logical channel is received as part of an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transport format combination (E-TFC) selection procedure in a medium access control (MAC). Upon determining the data field size, an RLC PDU is generated such that it matches the requested data from the E-TFC selection. The size of the RLC PDU generated can be greater than or equal to the minimum configured RLC PDU size (if data is available) and less than or equal to the maximum RLC PDU size. The data is then transmitted in the RLC PDU in a current transmission time interval (TTI). | 07-30-2009 |
20090190527 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE DATA RATE OF A CIRCUIT SWITCHED VOICE APPLICATION IN AN EVOLVED WIRELESS SYSTEM - An apparatus and method of transmitting a circuit switched (CS) voice application via an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH), implemented in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The method includes receiving a grant; performing an E-TFC selection procedure based on the grant, wherein a number of bits that may be transmitted over an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) is determined, determining an adaptive multi-rate (AMR) codec bit-rate based on the number of bits that may be transmitted over the E-DCH, generating AMR voice packets based on the determined AMR codec bit rate, and submitting the AMR voice packets to lower layers for transmission over the E-DCH. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190528 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION PERIODICALLY OR APERIODICALLY - A method for transmitting and receiving channel state information (CSI) periodically and aperiodically is disclosed. The method for aperiodically transmitting channel state information (CSI) by a terminal includes receiving an indicator requesting a channel state information report of a downlink channel from a base station over a downlink control channel, and aperiodically transmitting the channel state information (CSI) to the base station over a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) upon receiving the indicator from the base station. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190529 | Mobile IP Communication System - A mobile IP communication system includes a home agent | 07-30-2009 |
20090190530 | METHOD FOR TERMINATING ATTACH PROCEDURE IN MOBILE TERMINAL - A system and method by which an unnecessary General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) attach procedure is no longer performed when a service cancellation situation is generated during execution of a GPRS attach procedure according to a data service requested by a user is provided. The system determines whether an abnormal situation occurs in an Europe-oriented General Packet Radio Service/Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (GPRS/UMTS) mobile terminal and immediately terminates a currently proceeding attach procedure when an abnormal service cancellation situation occurs. The abnormal situation occurs when the user cancels a service during use of a data service (e.g., Wireless Application Protocol (WAP), Multimedia Message Service (MMS)) or when connection of the service fails due to a bad network state. By not performing an unnecessary GPRS attach procedure due to the occurrence of an abnormal situation, the mobile terminal does not perform an unnecessary routing area updating procedure, thereby reducing power consumption. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190531 | Mesh Node Mobility Across Static and Mobile Mesh Networks - Methods and systems for mobility of mobile nodes in mesh networks are taught wherein the mobile mesh nodes choose an attachment point to another mesh node based on predetermined criteria, such as the characteristics of the attachment point's path to a reference destination, and other factors local to the attachment point, such as load and available capacity. The mobile nodes forward packets on each other's behalf. Static and mobile nodes and the links between them are treated differently from each other in view of their respectively different properties. A special metric is used for paths that include mobile links in addition to the static mesh links and wired mesh links. Mobility is handled completely transparently to any client devices attached to the mesh nodes, where this attachment could be wireless or wired. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190532 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE PROVIDING N-WAY COMMUNICATION THROUGH A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION SERVICES - A system and method, in a mobile communication device, providing N-way communication through a plurality of communication services. Various aspects of the present invention provide a mobile communication device comprising a user interface and at least one communication interface module adapted to perform a first communication with a first communication device through a first communication service and perform a second communication with a second communication device through a second communication service. At least one module may be adapted to receive outgoing information from the user interface and to receive first information from the first communication device through the first communication service. The at least one module may also combine at least the received outgoing information and the received first information and transmit such combined information to the second communication device through the second communication service. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190533 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING ACCESS MODE SELECTION TO MULTIMODE TERMINAL - A method, system and apparatus for providing access mode selection to multimode terminal are disclosed. After selecting an access mode according to a certain policy, a routing decision entity correspondingly instructs a routing execution entity to perform a call connection in the selected access mode. The method for providing access mode selection to multimode terminal includes the following steps: (1) when establishing a registration connection, a terminal notifies related information of a current access network type to a network side; and (2) when performing a call connection to a called party, a routing decision entity on the network side selects the access mode and correspondingly instructs a routing execution entity to perform the call connection according to the related information and the selected access mode. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190534 | MOBILE STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCY BAND MAPPING METHOD, LOCATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD, PAGING METHOD, AND PROGRAM FOR EXECUTING THE SAME AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In a method for mapping an operating frequency band of a mobile station device in a mobile communication system, an operating frequency band position at the time of idle mode of respective mobile station devices is arranged so as to be distributed throughout a unique frequency bandwidth of a base station device. | 07-30-2009 |
20090196216 | Wireless communication device - An object of the present invention is to improve the throughput and reduce the circuit size and power consumption for transmission. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196217 | Signalling the Presence of Extension Frames - Aspects of the invention are directed to signalling extension frames in a telecommunication system. Extension-frame-signalling data may signal whether one or more extension parts are present in one or more gaps in time between data frames, when the one or more extension parts occur, and one or more durations for the one or more extension parts. The one or more extension parts may occur on the same radio frequencies as the data frames. The extension-frame-signalling data may signal when the one or more extension parts occur by signalling after which of one or more data frames in a super frame the extension parts occur. The one or more durations for the extension parts may be expressed in units of time. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196218 | WIRELESS SYSTEM GATEWAY CACHE - A wireless system gateway cache is presented. The gateway includes a first, wireless interface, a second interface, and a cache controller. The cache controller receives a characteristic of a parameter of a first device. The cache controller also receives a value of the parameter from the first device via the first interface and stores the value according to the characteristic of the parameter. The cache controller further receives a request for the value of the parameter from a second device via the second interface and sends the stored value to the second device in response to the request. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196219 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE-BASED UPLINK POLLING SCHEMES - A method for allocating polling bandwidth may include generating polling tokens corresponding to connections maintained by a base station. The polling tokens may be generated at configurable time intervals. The method may also include assigning priorities to the polling tokens. The priority of a polling token may depend on a scheduling type of a corresponding connection. The method may also include allocating polling bandwidth to the connections that correspond to the highest priority polling tokens when uplink bandwidth is available to allocate for polling. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196220 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - When a browser is started up by a user, a packet call establishment request unit of a cellular phone requests the start of processing for establishing a packet call, and a communication control unit executes a packet all establishment processing. A mobile communication network sends a packet call establishment response message to the cellular phone, then sends packet data. A packet date storage unit of the cellular phone stores the packet data in a memory when packet data is received before the packet call establishment response message. If the packet call establishment response message is received thereafter, the packet data storage unit reads the packet data from the memory, and deletes the packet data from the memory. The packet processing execution unit displays a screen corresponding to the packet data on the display. Thereby, instances when packet data is discarded is decreased. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196221 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SIGNALING ACCESS - Signaling-only access may be established with an access node under certain circumstances such as, for example, upon determining that a node is not authorized for data access at the access node. A node that is not authorized for data access at an access node may still be paged by the access node through the use of signaling-only access. In this way, transmissions by the access node may not interfere with the reception of pages at the node. A first node may be selected for providing paging while a second node is selected for access under certain circumstances such as, for example, upon determining that the second node provides more desirable service than the first node. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196222 | Method and apparatus for interfacing synchronous core network with asynchronous radio network - A method and apparatus for interfacing a synchronous core network with an asynchronous radio network in a next-generation mobile telecommunications system is disclosed. The method for mapping a message in order to interface a synchronous core network with an asynchronous radio network, the radio network having a base station (BS), the base station having a radio resource controller, a radio link controller, a medium access controller and a physical controller, the method comprising the steps of: a) selecting a function necessary to map a synchronous message to an asynchronous message; b) determining whether the synchronous message is to be transmitted to the mobile station or not; c) storing information necessary to map the synchronous message to the asynchronous message if the synchronous message is to transmitted to the mobile station, d) mapping parameters in the synchronous message to those in the asynchronous message, thereby generating the asynchronous message; e) discarding the message not to be transmitted to the mobile station after storing parameters included in the message not to be transmitted onto a predetermined device; and f) transmitting the asynchronous message to the radio resource controller. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196223 | TRANSMIT POWER CONTROLLER - A transmit power control system includes: an output power estimator for estimating a transmit power of a transmitter; and a transmit power controller responsive to the output power estimator and to compare this with a requested power in order to calculate a target power which takes account of errors within the transmit power control system, and to vary a gain of an amplifier in a transmit signal path so as to reduce an error between the transmit power of the amplifier and the requested power. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196224 | Base station and scheduling method used in base station - Disclosed in the present invention are base stations and scheduling methods used in base stations. The base station uses a multi-user multi-input and multi-output method, and is characterized in comprising: a storing means for storing codebook vector group information relevant to a combination of codebook vectors capable of being used as a pre-coding group, the codebook vector group information comprising an index of the combination of codebook vectors capable of being used as a pre-coding group; a pre-coding matrix element selecting means for selecting codebook vectors to be taken as elements of a pre-coding matrix; a pre-coding matrix index determining means for determining an index, to which a combination of the codebook vectors selected by the pre-coding matrix element selecting means corresponds, in accordance with the codebook vectors to be taken as elements of a pre-coding matrix as selected by the pre-coding matrix element selecting means and with reference to the codebook vector group information; and a pre-coding matrix index transmitting means for transmitting the index of the combination of the codebook vectors determined by the pre-coding matrix index determining means. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196225 | DEVICES AND METHOD FOR GUARANTEEING QUALITY OF SERVICE PER SERVICE DATA FLOW THROUGH THE BEARER LAYER - In scenarios where the quality of service is negotiated through a signalling layer whereas the services are actually carried through a bearer layer, application functions at the signalling layer are not always aware of how quality of service is individually accomplished at the bearer layer on a service basis. The invention provides a method and devices whereby events are detected on a service data flow basis at a detection device in the bearer layer and notified towards an application device in the signalling layer via a control device between the signalling and the bearer layer. The list of events to be notified is obtainable at the control device from the application device and is included in Quality of Service related rules, along with service data flow filters. This Quality of Service related rules are provided to the detection device for inspecting individual service data flows in order to detect and notify the indicated events. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196226 | BROADCAST RECEIVING TERMINAL DEVICE, BROADCAST RECEIVING METHOD, PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - Provided is a broadcast receiving terminal ( | 08-06-2009 |
20090196227 | METHOD AND NETWORK NODE FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method routes data packets especially in wireless communication network formed by a plurality of network nodes. In order to transmit data packets from a first network node acting as a data packet source to a second network node acting as a data packet sink according to said method, the data packets are transmitted with the help of at least one additional communication network node that is dissociated from the source node, a first network message is transmitted from the source node at least to the additional network node so as to be successively forwarded to each additional network node until the additional network node corresponds to the sink node, the respective additional network node supplies routing data based on the first message in such a way that first data on a next network node on the way to the source node and the value of a first validity period in the actual additional network node is temporarily stored, and the value of the respective validity period is stored in such a way that all first data remains stored at least until a second network message which is sent by the sink node and confirms the first network message has been received by the source node. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196228 | METHOD OF CONNECTING TO NETWORK IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The primitives between an upper management layer and the MAC layer within a mobile station and a base station are defined in order to specify and clarify the operations within the protocol stack layers in a broadband wireless access system to allow a mobile station to perform a method of connecting to the network. Media Independent Handover (MIH) procedures can be achieved because the NCMS and MIH layer can communicate through use of these primitives. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196229 | ACKNAK and CQI Channel Mapping Schemes in Wireless Networks - A transmission of information from a secondary to a primary node occurs in a plurality of N logical time durations. The transmission from the secondary to primary node in a wireless network is obtained using an orthogonal covering sequence and a second sequence. Embodiments of the present invention mitigate interference by calculating a first orthogonal covering (OC) index and a second OC index from an indicator received from a serving base station (NodeB). A first index n | 08-06-2009 |
20090196230 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK LOAD IN CELL_FACH STATE - A method for a user equipment (UE) to perform uplink re-access in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes performing an uplink access procedure to establish a data transmission channel, checking whether or not the data transmission channel has been released, and delaying uplink re-access to the data transmission channel by a wait time when the data transmission channel has been released. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196231 | MOBILE IP MULTIPLE REGISTRATIONS AND PCC INTERACTIONS - In a wireless communication system having multiple access nodes, a home agent (HA) maintains home address (HoA) for a mobile node so that an IP session can be established. As the mobile node moves within a coverage area of various access nodes, the mobile node can establish a secure relationship with a local access gateway and thereby register a local IP address, referred to as a care-of-address (CoA), with the HA. Mobile IP protocol can be established so that multiple sessions can be conducted. In maintaining policy and charging control (PCC), HA informs a policy and charging rules function (PCRF), which in turn can then send the appropriate PCC rules (e.g., IP flows and related policies) to a policy and charging enforcement function (PCEF) for a particular access gateway. Coordination necessary to associate CoA and HoA can further include filter information as to application can run on a particular interface. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196232 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO EXCHANGE CHANNEL INFORMATION - A method and apparatus to exchange channel state information between two or more stations is provided, The channel state information may be used to adapt a power, a transmission rate and a modulation scheme of a transmitted signal. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196233 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO ACCESS METHOD, ACCESS POINT AND GATEWAY - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a radio communication system and a radio access method. In accordance with the embodiments of the present invention, an AP with a PDP forward function unit forwards service traffic accessing an AS to a Packet Radio Service Gateway Support Node, and sends Internet service traffic to the Packet Radio Service Gateway Support Node or directly sends the Internet service data to the Internet via a configured forwarding interface according to the service property of the service traffic. Embodiments of the present invention further disclose an Access Point and a gateway. Therefore, the load of network elements of a mobile network is reduced; meanwhile, the control and the management of the high increment value services by operators can be guaranteed. The investment of the CS network can be protected by the gateway as a concentrator of Access Points and a forwarding node of CS services in the embodiments of the present invention. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196234 | Method And Apparatus For Persistent Communications, Interoperability And Situational Awareness In The Aftermath Of A Disaster - A system for providing situational awareness outside a temporary incident area network includes a prioritized connection module for connecting a mesh network at the incident area to one of a plurality of available communications channels, with the selection based not only on the availability of a communications channel but also on the associated expense, speed, reliability or bandwidth, so that high bandwidth traffic such as video and pictures can be reliably sent from the incident area to a location outside of the incident area. In one embodiment switching to a satellite phone network bypasses problems with terrestrial networks such as cell phone networks and landlines which may be down. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196235 | Method And Apparatus For Setting Gain Factors For Dedicated Physical Channels In A Mobile Telecommunications System - An apparatus and method are provided for setting gain factors for dedicated physical channels in a mobile communication system. The UE receives configuration information indicating uplink dedicated physical channel configuration. The UE sets a gain factor of a dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH) to 1 in the case that no DPDCH is configured. The UE calculates a gain factor of a enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) using the gain factor of the DPCCH. | 08-06-2009 |
20090201848 | PATH CONTROL METHOD AND HOME AGENT - In a mobile network system composed of a mobile network with a mobile router and a terminal interconnected, and of a home agent, when the mobile router connects to an external network, the mobile router informs the home agent of path information to the mobile network including the mobile router. Receiving the path information, the home agent inquires the mobile router in the home network whether or not the mobile router connects to the mobile network informed. Then, the home agent advertises path information to this mobile network only when the mobile router connecting to the mobile network does not exist. Accordingly, the home agent can rapidly switch to an optimum path to the external network. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201849 | Transmission apparatus, transmission method, reception apparatus and reception method - A transmission apparatus which attempts improvement of signal quality in an uplink and a downlink carries out radio transmission of different signals simultaneously from respective ones of a plurality of antennas. The apparatus has pilot multiplexing means for multiplexing a pilot channel to transmit from each antenna in one or more of a time division multiplexing method, a frequency division multiplexing method and a code division multiplexing method, data multiplexing means for time-multiplexing a pilot channel and a data channel, and means for transmitting a signal in a least one of a space division multiplexing (SDM) method and a space time transmission diversity (STTD) method. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201850 | LOCATION TRACKING BASED ON PROXIMITY-BASED AD HOC NETWORK - A system and method is described for constructing a proximity-based ad hoc network among a plurality of sensors and for using such a network to perform location tracking. The system and method uses time-coded data received from each of the sensors to determine a current proximity of each of the sensors to one or more beacons. Then, by leveraging information relating to the effective transmission ranges of the beacons, the system and method determines the relative location of each of the plurality of sensors with respect to other sensors within the plurality of sensors. Where actual (as opposed to relative) location information is available for a particular sensor, it can be used to generate or augment location information associated with other sensors known to be spatially and temporally proximate to the particular sensor. The current location information for each of the sensors is then used in providing location-based services. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201851 | Coordinated Channel Change in Mesh Networks - A coordinated channel change system. In particular implementations, a method includes receiving a prepare-to-change message, wherein the prepare-to-change message indicates instructions to prepare to change channels and includes a designated channel, and forwarding the prepare-to-change message to one or more child nodes. The method also includes receiving a ready-to-change message from the one or more child nodes, and transmitting a change-to-channel message to the one or more child nodes, wherein the change-to-channel message indicates instructions to switch to the designated channel. The method also includes receiving an acknowledgement message from the one or more child nodes, and changing to the designated channel. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201852 | Telecommunications System and Method - A telecommunications system is arranged to provide a mobile communications session to a mobile node using an internet protocol. The telecommunications system comprises a home packet data network which includes a home agent of the mobile node and a visited packet data network. One of the home packet data network or the visited packet data network includes a packet data gateway for controlling the communication of the internet packets to and from the home packet data network from and to the visited packet data network. The mobile node is arranged to communicate a correspondent node binding update internet packet to the correspondent node via the packet date gateway, when the mobile node changes affiliation from the home packet data network to the visited packet data network. The correspondent node binding update internet packet provides a care of address of the mobile node within the visited packet data network and a home address of the mobile node. The packet data network is arranged to store the home address of the mobile node in association with the care of address of the mobile node, to adapt the correspondent node binding update internet packet by replacing the care of address in the received correspondent binding update packet with the address of the packet data gateway, and to communicate the adapted correspondent binding update packet to the correspondent node. The correspondent node therefore receives a correspondent binding update with the packet data gateway as the care of address. Thus, when the correspondent node communicates with the mobile node using the care of address of the packet data gateway, the packet data gateway can adapt the received internet packets, replacing the packet data gateway's address as the destination address with the care of address of the mobile node. Therefore, although a route optimisation process has taken place the internet packets are still routed via the packet data gateway. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201853 | Routing Data Packets in a Communication Network - Routing data packets includes receiving data packets from a network element at a routing gateway. The data packets are determined to be destined for a mobile node. A location of the mobile node is obtained. The data packets are forwarded to the mobile node according to the location on behalf of the network element. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201854 | Method for Optimizing the Reading by a User Equipment of Mcch (Mbms Point-to-Multipoint Control Channel) Information - The invention relates to a method for optimizing the reading by a User Equipment (UE) of MCCH (MBMS Point-to-Multipoint Control Channel) information transmitted periodically to said UE by a Radio Network Controller (RNC) in cellular communication network during a Modification Period (MP) comprising a number of Repetition Periods (RP) during which a same MCCH information is transmitted to the UE. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201855 | MOBILE IPV6 OPTIMISED REVERSE TUNNELLING FOR MULTI-HOMED TERMINALS - The invention relates to a method for packet-switched data transmission between a multi-homed mobile node and a correspondent node in a mobile communication system comprising a plurality of mobile networks. The method comprises the steps of selecting by the mobile node one of its home addresses to be used for communication with the correspondent node. The mobile node registers at least one of a plurality of addresses assigned to a considered network interface as care-of-address at a mobile node's home agent responsible for the selected home address. The correspondent node's home agent and mobile node's home agent receive and store candidate proxy home agent addresses. A correspondent node's home agent sends a request to the correspondent node. The correspondent node registers at least one of a plurality of addresses assigned to a considered network interface as care-of-address at the correspondent node's home agent. At least one of the proxy home agent addresses, one of the mobile node's care-of-addresses, and one of the correspondent node's care-of-addresses is selected on both the mobile node's home agent and the corresponding node's home agent, and the mobile node is triggered by the mobile node's home agent and the correspondent node by the corresponding node's home agent to switch a tunnel, so that two endpoints of the tunnel are one of the selected proxy home agent addresses and the selected mobile node's care-of addresses. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201856 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND BASE STATION - A base station includes a first selecting unit that selects a reduction target terminal, a first calculating unit that calculates a reduction amount of assigned transmission rate assigned to the reduction target terminal, a second selecting unit that selects an increase target terminal, a second calculating unit that calculates an increase amount of the assigned transmission rate assigned to the increase target terminal, and a transmitting unit that transmits transmission rate control date to a radio terminal. The second selecting unit selects the increase target terminal and the second calculating unit calculates the increase amount when the reduction target terminal is not selected by the first selecting unit. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201857 | UMA/GAN KEEP-ALIVE MECHANISIM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A wireless communication terminal ( | 08-13-2009 |
20090201858 | Method, apparatus and computer program product providing slow associated control channel (SACCH) repetition - Techniques are presented for repetition on both uplink and downlink Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH) channels. For instance, an exemplary method is disclosed that is performed by a mobile node. The method includes receiving from a network node a first block of data over a downlink SACCH channel, and storing the first block of data. The method also includes, subsequent to receiving the first block of data, receiving from the network node a second block of data over the downlink SACCH channel. The method further includes attempting to decode the second block of data. The method additionally includes, in response to a failure in the attempt to decode the second block of data, combining into a combination the second block with the stored first block of data. The method also includes attempting to decode the combination. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201859 | Communication Device And Method - A base station unit of a communication device generates control information identical with those generated by other communication devices. The control information includes information defining regions in a radio frame that are used by the communication device and the other communication devices to transmit data. A terminal unit receives data in accordance with the control information. A switching unit changes the connection among the base station unit, the terminal unit and an antenna. When the control information is output from the base station unit, a switch controller operates the switching unit so that the base station unit may be connected to the terminal unit to output the control information to the terminal unit. | 08-13-2009 |
20090207780 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION CONTROL DEVICE, AND BASE STATION DEVICE - There are provided a communication system, a base station control device, and a base station device capable of improving communication quality. In the communication system ( | 08-20-2009 |
20090207781 | EXPLOITING KNOWN RATE MATCHING INFORMATION IN BLIND DECODING OF DOWNLINK WIRELESS DATA TRANSMISSIONS - In the processing of a data transmission received on wireless data channel HS-DSCH during HS-SCCH-less (HSL) operation according to 3GPP TS 25.214 V7.7.0, a situation is identified wherein redundancy version information corresponding to the received data transmission cannot be obtained from wireless control channel HS-SCCH. The redundancy version information is normally indicative of an HSL redundancy version that specifies derate matching for the received data transmission. In response to identification of the situation, derate matching is applied to the received data transmission according to an HSL redundancy version other than the HSL redundancy version that is specified by HSL for derate matching in the situation. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207782 | AGGREGATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, AGGREGATE NODE, AND DEAGGREGATE NODE - A technology for providing an aggregation management system and the like which can quickly and efficiently manage aggregation in a mobile-environment is disclosed. According to the technology, an aggregate node adds mobile status information to signaling messages of end-to-end signaling sessions received from mobile terminals | 08-20-2009 |
20090207783 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS USING VIRTUAL SINK NODE IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A communication method and apparatus using a virtual sink node in a wireless sensor network, in which location information about a destination node is acquired by a source node. If the location of the destination node is out of a transmission range of the source node, data including the location information about the destination node are transmitted from the source node to one of nodes adjacent to the source node, where the one node is typically closest to the destination node. The data are transmitted from the one node to another one of nodes adjacent to the one node, where another node is closest to the destination node, until the destination node is located within a transmission range of the one node. If the destination node is located within the transmission range of the one node, the data are transmitted from the one node to the destination node. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207784 | RANK FEEDBACK METHOD FOR MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT TRANSMISSION - A method for transmitting a plurality of control information through a PUCCH or a PUSCH is disclosed. The method includes transmitting first control information, and transmitting second control information. The transmission of the first control information and the transmission of the second control information are performed in units of one subframe and are performed once per predetermined period, respectively. In a subframe in which the transmission of the second control information is to be simultaneously performed with the transmission of the first control information, the second control information is excluded for transmission or the first and the second information are simultaneously transmitted, according to the configuration of a closed-loop system or an open-loop system. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207785 | Method and Apparatus for Assigning Persistent Resources Dynamically in a Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus for dynamically assigning persistent resources in a wireless communications system is provided. A method comprises transmitting a first boundary indication to a mobile station, and transmitting a position indication to the mobile station, wherein the position indication corresponds to a network resource assigned based on a network resource request, the position indication is relative to the first boundary indication. The method also comprises transmitting a second boundary indication to the mobile station in response to detecting a change in a position of a boundary, and transmitting a first transmission to the mobile station using a network resource corresponding to the position indication or receiving a second transmission from the mobile station using a network resource corresponding to the position indication, wherein the position indication is relative to the second boundary indication. The first boundary indication is based on a position of the boundary. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207786 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FROM RLC LAYER IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for transmitting data from an RLC layer in a radio communication system. The method includes the steps of storing RLC SDUs transferred from an upper layer in a transmission buffer, transmitting RLC PDUs on which the RLC SDUs stored in the transmission buffer are loaded to a receiving side in order, discarding the RLC SDUs stored in the transmission buffer, checking whether a transmission mode indicator is configured, and transmitting discard information about the discarded RLC SDUs to the receiving side entirely or in part in accordance with whether the transmission MRW mode indicator is configured. | 08-20-2009 |
20090213783 | Roaming Network Stations Using A Mac Address Identifier To Select New Access Point - There is disclosed a method of helping mobile stations such as voice over IP devices to roam between wireless access points, by each access point transmitting the MAC address of a spanning tree algorithm root switch of the local network domain. This MAC address is used by mobile stations to detect if two access points are in a common network domain. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213784 | SYSTEM, NODE, AND METHOD OPTIMIZING DATA CONNECTIONS FOR PACKET SERVICES - A method, a wireless node, and a telecommunication system optimizing data connections. The system has a servicing node ( | 08-27-2009 |
20090213785 | System and Method for the Monitoring of Grouped Objects - A system and a method for monitoring grouped objects with a gateway and a plurality of radio nodes attachable to the objects. Each radio node has a computing unit, a short-range communications unit and an energy supply unit. One of the radio nodes or the gateway has a localization unit. Optionally, one of the radio nodes also has a long-range communications unit. The computing unit contains a control program for the processing of predetermined tasks in radio nodes, which is designed for the control of bi-directional communications between the radio nodes via the short-range communications unit for the formation of an ad hoc network. The control program undertakes the control of a tuning process between the radio nodes and selects one of the radio nodes for the processing of one of the predetermined tasks, the selected node at that instant being best suited for the task according to predetermined criteria. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213786 | MOBILE STATION, A BASE STATION, A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - There is disclosed a mobile station performing packet communications with a base station, including: a reservation control signal generating unit configured to generate a reservation control signal, based on control information transmitted in advance of a data packet; and a reservation control signal transmission control unit configured to transmit the reservation control signal at a predetermined timing. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213787 | Wireless Communication Device - A wireless communication device ( | 08-27-2009 |
20090213788 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A SYSTEMINFO BLOCK IN AN ACTIVE STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a SystemInfo block in an Active state in a wireless communication system is described. The SystemInfo block is transmitted every N | 08-27-2009 |
20090213789 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING IN READ SYSTEMINFO STATE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for processing in Read SystemInfo state in a wireless communication network, the method comprising issuing a ControlChannelMAC.Activate command, issuing a OverheadMessages.Activate command and determining if a SystemInfoBlock is received within T | 08-27-2009 |
20090213790 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A MULTI-CODE WORD ASSIGNMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for processing a Multi-code word assignment is provided, comprising receiving a MCW-FLAB | 08-27-2009 |
20090213791 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING IN AN IDLE STATE BY AN ACCESS TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for processing an Idle state by an access terminal in a wireless communication system is described. An IdleState.Activate command, ActiveSetManagement.Activate command is issued. It is determined if a queued OpenConnection command is present. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213792 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING A DEFAULT GATEWAY ADDRESS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for setting a default gateway address of a mobile terminal (MT). In the method, address configuration information is received from a network device. An address different from a Packet Data Protocol (PDP) included in the address configuration information is configured as a network address of the default gateway. Filtering is performed on a packet received by the mobile terminal. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213793 | Radio base station apparatus - A media access control unit of a radio base station apparatus includes: a resource table for storing resource block numbers in order to reserve resource blocks for the packet data; a system information memory unit for storing a parameter used to determine whether to update information stored in the resource table; and a scheduler. When the parameter indicates update, the scheduler selects resource blocks spaced apart from each other in frequency and having a good radio quality, updates the resource table by using resource block numbers corresponding to the selected resource blocks, and performs persistent scheduling and distributed transmission scheduling on the packet data by using the resource blocks corresponding to the resource block numbers stored in the resource table. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213794 | Multiplexing media components of different sessions reference to related applications - An apparatus and a method are provided for multiplexing different sessions using the same authorized contexts for media. The method includes distinguishing different control plane sessions by a user equipment, and identifying media flows of a same application among the different control plane sessions by the user equipment by setting a service identifier. The method further includes sending the service identifier by the user equipment to a call state control function including a policy decision function, and authorizing quality of service for a user plane context by the policy decision function. Furthermore, the method includes enabling, by the policy decision function based on the service identifier, the different control plane sessions with media flows of the same application to share the same user plane context with the authorized quality of service to multiplex the different control plane sessions with media flows of the same application. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213795 | Communication of Access Information in Wireless Communication System - System and method for providing wireless communications is provided. Communications are established between a mobile station and a base station, and the mobile station is provided a list of network providers that can be accessed via the base station. The list of network providers may include identifiers of the available network service providers or both identifiers and names of the available network service providers, and may be provided as a result of a broadcast message or in response to a request. The mobile station may further request the realm of a visited network service provider in order to properly decorate an EAP authentication information request. By transmitting a properly decorated EAP authentication request, the mobile station can determine the type of authentication to be performed and provide it to the visited network service provider. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213796 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATION - A system for enabling at least a first mobile communication device and a second mobile communication device to establish communication, the system including a server adapted to receive from the first device an ID string associated with the second device, the ID string being obtained from the second device over a local communication link between the first and second devices, the server being adapted to program a switch or router so as to cause the switch or router to bridge communication between the first and second devices. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213797 | METHOD FOR BINDING UPDATE IN MOBILE IPV6 AND MOBILE IPV6 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for binding update in the mobile IPv6 is provided. After a binding management key is obtained in a return routability procedure, a home address (HoA) in a binding update (BU) packet is sent in a form of an encrypted option. In the BU process, an HoA index may also be bound. A corresponding mobile IPv6 communication system and a mobile node (MN), a correspondent node (CN), and a home agent (HA) in the communication system are also provided. Thus, the HoA appears only once in an encrypted form in a packet sent to the CN in the BU process, thereby improving the security of the HoA in the BU process. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213798 | METHOD, SYSTEM, MOBILE NODE, COMMUNICATION NODE AND HOME AGENT FOR COMMUNICATION IN MOBILE IPV6 NETWORKS - A method for communication in IPv6 networks is provided. In this method, first, a destination node in communication is notified about an association relation between a home address (HoA) index and an HoA. Then, in a packet, an HoA option and a Type-2 routing header are substituted by an HoA index option or a binding index extension header carrying the HoA index according to the association relation stored in the destination node. Further, a system corresponding to the above method is also provided. Through the present invention, an overhead of a mobile IPv6 packet is effectively reduced. Besides, the HoA index is simple in content and is not relevant to any privacy parameter in content, thus ensuring the security of communication. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213799 | METHOD FOR SETTING USER EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIER IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is directed to a method for setting a user equipment identifier as user equipment identification information used when data received through a dedicated logical channel is transmitted through a common transport channel. The method includes transmitting data and a message type indicator as user equipment identification information from a RRC layer to an RLC layer; setting a user equipment identifier indicator according to the received message type indicator in the RLC layer and transmitting it with the data to a MAC layer; and selecting a user equipment identifier type and a user equipment identifier according to the set user equipment indication identifier, adding it to a header of a MAC SDU in the MAC layer and transmitting it to a corresponding MAC layer in a receiving device. | 08-27-2009 |
20090219855 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD OF DOWNLINK PACKET COMMUNICATION AND WIRELESS BASE STATION - A wireless base station for transmitting a data packet to a plurality of mobile stations through a downlink shared channel determines two powers to be allocated to the downlink shared channel using two large and small transmission power margins. The wireless base station carries out a step of relating a first transmission format, which applies a phase modulation or a phase-amplitude modulation to a data packet to be transmitted by an allocation power corresponding to the larger margin, to the mobile stations and a step of relating a second transmission format, which applies only the phase modulation to the data packet to be transmitted using the allocation power corresponding to the other margin, to the mobile stations, compares the total numbers of bits to be transmitted by the respective transmission formats, and transmits the data packet by the transmission format corresponding to a larger value. With this operation, the communication fault of an HSDPA due to the transmission power margins can be prevented. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219856 | METHOD OF ASSIGNING TRAFFIC RESOURCE - A communication system receives attributes associated with access terminals within a cell and groups them in accordance with similarities between the received attributes. Resource assignment messages customized to their respective attributes are transmitted to the groups, thereby ensuring that all groups receive these messages. These groups are formed dynamically as the attributes of the access terminals vary when they traverse through a cell. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219857 | METHOD OF SERVING SECTOR MAINTENANCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An apparatus and method for serving sector maintenance in a wireless communication system is described. A forward link shared signaling Change (FLSS) command is received and it is determined if a FLSS in the ChangeFLSS command is a member of a NonSynchronousSubset. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219858 | Method and System for Transmitting a Signal to a Communication Device in a Cellular Communication System - A method for transmitting a signal to a communication device in a cellular communication system is provided. The method comprises transmitting a signal using a first antenna being provided in a first sector of the cellular communication system, and transmitting another signal using a second antenna being provided in a second sector of the cellular communication system, wherein the first sector at least partially overlaps the second sector, wherein the signal transmitted by the second antenna is a cyclic delayed version of the signal transmitted by the first antenna. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219859 | Radio Communication Terminal - A radio communication terminal according to the present invention comprises: a call request transmitter configured to transmit a call request for a destination terminal to a call control server; an input information acquisition unit configured to acquire inputted information; a message creation unit configured to create a message for the destination terminal on the basis of the information acquired by the input information acquisition unit; a starting unit configured to start the message creation unit during a period from when the call request transmitter transmits the call request until the communication path is set; and a message transmitter configured to transmit the message created by the message creation unit to the destination terminal. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219860 | BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention relates to a base station for generating and transmitting system information to a mobile station. The present invention also relates to a communication method of communicating system information in a communication system including the base station and the mobile station. The base station generates system information; categorizes the system information into multiple pieces of system information; multiplexes the categorized multiple pieces of system information into multiple channels or multiple blocks; and transmits the system information on the multiple channels or the multiple blocks. The mobile station receives system information included in a portion of the multiple channels or the multiple blocks. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219861 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS, AND PAGING INFORMATION RECEPTION METHOD - A disclosed transmitting apparatus includes a paging indicator information generating unit generating paging indicator information including a group ID of users who are to receive a paging channel and information indicating a radio resource in which the paging channel is transmitted; and a multiplexing unit multiplexing the paging indicator information. | 09-03-2009 |
20090232047 | SYSTEMS FOR CONNECTING AD HOC PICONETS TO WIDE AREA NETWORKS - A hyper-scatternet includes a first ad hoc piconet, a second ad hoc piconet and a wide area network, wherein the first and second ad hoc piconets are configured to communicate with one another via the wide area network. Each ad hoc piconet can include an application server that includes an ad hoc piconet interface that is configured to communicate with an ad hoc piconet using an ad hoc piconet protocol, and a wide area network interface that is configured to communicate with a wide area network using a wide area network protocol. The application server also includes a service manifest that is configured to determine ad hoc piconet services that are available from the ad hoc piconet via the ad hoc piconet interface, and to advertise the ad hoc piconet services to the wide area network as wide area network services via the wide area network interface. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232048 | Computer Program Products for Connecting Ad Hoc Piconets to Wide Area Networks - A hyper-scatternet includes a first ad hoc piconet, a second ad hoc piconet and a wide area network, wherein the first and second ad hoc piconets are configured to communicate with one another via the wide area network. Each ad hoc piconet can include an application server that includes an ad hoc piconet interface that is configured to communicate with an ad hoc piconet using an ad hoc piconet protocol, and a wide area network interface that is configured to communicate with a wide area network using a wide area network protocol. The application server also includes a service manifest that is configured to determine ad hoc piconet services that are available from the ad hoc piconet via the ad hoc piconet interface, and to advertise the ad hoc piconet services to the wide area network as wide area network services via the wide area network interface. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232049 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A MULTIPLE HOP WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method for wireless communication over a multi-hop network are disclosed. One embodiment of the system includes an access point and a plurality of wireless devices. Each of the access point and the plurality of wireless devices includes a high-rate module to send or receive data over a high-rate wireless channel having a first frequency; and a low-rate module to send or receive one or more control signals over a low-rate wireless channel having a second frequency lower than the first frequency. The low-rate modules of the wireless devices are configured to send information for establishing a multi-hop data route to the access point via the low-rate wireless channel. The access point is further configured to broadcast the information over the multi-hop wireless network via the low-rate wireless channel. This configuration efficiently disseminates the information over the network. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232050 | Method And System For Determining Limited Soft Buffer Size On Transport Blocks For Rate Matching - Aspects of a method and system for determining a limited soft buffer size on transport blocks for rate matching are provided. A data stream may be processed for transmission between a base station (eNodeB) and a UE via HARQ procedures. A two-stage rate-matching algorithm may be used in the HARQ procedures. A limited virtual soft buffer size at the UE in the two-stage rate-matching algorithm may be calculated on site based on channel condition information, available channel bandwidth, number of layers in spatial multiplexing, and the capacity of the UE, respectively. The data stream may be first rate-matched to the calculated limited soft buffer size available at the UE, and forwarded for second stage rate-matching to an actual physical channel size determined by the base station. The amount of bits forwarded for second stage rate-matching may equal to the calculated limited virtual soft buffer size of the virtual soft buffer. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232051 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE EXTENSION OF FREQUENCY OFFSET ESTIMATION RANGE BASED ON CORRELATION OF COMPLEX SEQUENCES - Aspects of a method and system for the extension of frequency offset estimation range based on correlation of complex sequences may include partitioning each of a received sample sequence and a local replica sample sequence into three or more similar length contiguous sample sub-sequences. For each of the three or more similar length contiguous sample sub-sequences, a correlation coefficient may be determined between corresponding sample sub-sequences of the partitioned received sample sequence and the local replica sample sequence. A plurality of phase differences may be determined based on adjacent ones of the determined correlation coefficients, and the determined plurality of phase differences may be averaged to generate a phase increment estimate. The communication system may be compliant with a wireless standard, comprising UMTS EUTRA (LTE), WiMAX (IEEE 802.16), and/or WLAN (IEEE 802.11). | 09-17-2009 |
20090232052 | FRAME TERMINATION - Techniques to increase capacity in a wireless communications system. In an aspect, systematic non-transmission, or “blanking,” of minimal-rate frames transmitted in a communications system is provided. In an exemplary embodiment, eighth rate frames in a cdma2000 voice communications system are systematically substituted with null-rate frames carrying zero traffic bits. Provisions are nevertheless made for the transmission of certain designated as “critical” by, e.g., a vocoder. The receiver detects the presence of null rate or non-null rate transmissions and processes the received frames accordingly, including updating an outer loop power control only in response to non-null rate frames. Further techniques for changing the pilot transmission gating pattern to assist the receiver in detecting null rate frames are provided. In another aspect, early termination of a signal transmission over a wireless communications link is provided. In an exemplary embodiment, a base station (BS) transmits power control groups (PCG's) for a frame over a forward link (FL) to a mobile station (MS) until accurate reception of the frame is acknowledged by the MS over a reverse link (RL), possibly before all PCG's of the frame are received over the FL. Possible ACK signaling methods are defined for channels associated with a cdma2000 wireless communications system. In another exemplary embodiment, techniques for reverse link early termination are also provided. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232053 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS HAVING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FUNCTION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus includes a reception unit, an information management unit, and a transmission unit. The reception unit receives data including a plurality of data frames. The data frames are transmitted from an identical data source and managed by an identical traffic identifier. The information management unit retains acknowledgement information to perform an acknowledgement. The information management unit discards an already-retaining acknowledgement information when the data is newly received. The transmission unit performs the acknowledgement to the data source of the data using the acknowledgement information. The transmission unit performs the acknowledgement to the data corresponding to the acknowledgement information irrespective of a request of the acknowledgement from the data source when the information management unit discards the acknowledgement information or when a prediction on the discard of the acknowledgement information is made. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232054 | BEHAVIOR FOR WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNIT AND MAC CONTROL ELEMENTS FOR LTE DRX OPERATIONS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) stops discontinuous reception (DRX) timers that are running and that are related to uplink and/or downlink transmissions during a DRX time period. The WTRU stops the DRX timers in response to receiving a medium access control (MAC) control element signal from an eNode-B. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232055 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING UNSOLICITED TRAFFIC DESTINED TO A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - An apparatus and method of controlling unsolicited traffic are disclosed herein. The apparatus and method can be applied to wireless communication networks such as CDMA2000, UMTS, GPRS and the like so that traffic which is not solicited by wireless communication devices operating on those networks is not sent over the air needlessly. The present application provides techniques to block unsolicited traffic based on the identity of a user (for example based on International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI), Network Access Identifier (NAI), Mobile Station Internet Services Digital Network Number (MSISDN), Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Universal Resource Locator (url)) as opposed to techniques that are based on a session or IP address, such as a traditional firewall. In accordance to this application, user identity based techniques are applied to block unsolicited traffic whenever a user has established a data session. Further in accordance with this application, user identity based techniques are persisted across changes in IP address and/or session. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232056 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A beacon slot position control section of a radio communication apparatus constituting a radio network system which detects whether empty beacon slots are present in a beacon period. When an empty beacon slot is present before the period in which the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon, a movable counter starts counting a specified number of super frames. When the count is completed, the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon of the radio communication apparatus at the earlier empty beacon slot. Consequently, since the empty beacon slots are eliminated and the beacon period is compacted, even if the number of radio communication apparatuses joining the radio network system fluctuates dynamically, the radio communication apparatus can perform radio communication with high efficiency and less waste of consumed electricity. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232057 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A beacon slot position control section of a radio communication apparatus constituting a radio network system which detects whether empty beacon slots are present in a beacon period. When an empty beacon slot is present before the period in which the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon, a movable counter starts counting a specified number of super frames. When the count is completed, the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon of the radio communication apparatus at the earlier empty beacon slot. Consequently, since the empty beacon slots are eliminated and the beacon period is compacted, even if the number of radio communication apparatuses joining the radio network system fluctuates dynamically, the radio communication apparatus can perform radio communication with high efficiency and less waste of consumed electricity. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232058 | METHOD FOR SIGNALING BACK-OFF INFORMATION IN RANDOM ACCESS - A method for performing random access in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes transmitting a preamble for random access in uplink, receiving a random access response message including back-off information as a response to the preamble, and performing back-off using the back-off information when the random access has failed. | 09-17-2009 |
20090238109 | METHOD FOR QUALIFIED ROUTE BUILDING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of establishing a qualified route in a mesh network includes transmitting a route-discovery request from a source node such that transmitting includes transmitting the route-discovery request from the source node to at least one intermediate node that is a neighbor node to the source node, receiving the route-discovery request from an intermediate node at the destination node, and updating a route-discovery table for the intermediate node such that the route between the source node and the destination node is the only qualified route. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238110 | Base Station Apparatus and Method for Controlling Base Station Apparatus - In a base station apparatus ( | 09-24-2009 |
20090238111 | APPARATUS FOR FLOW CONTROL - Disclosed is a technique which enables a mobile node (MN) connected to a mobile router (MR) to carry out flow filtering in a mobile network. This technique allows an MN | 09-24-2009 |
20090238112 | Apparatus and method for location information service of terminal in broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus and a method for a location information service of a terminal in a broadband wireless communication system re provided. The method includes receiving a first location information request message requesting location information of the MS from an Internet Service Provider (ISP) server; forwarding the first location information request message to a DataBase (DB) which stores the location information of the MS; receiving a first location information response message comprising the location information of the MS from the DB; and forwarding the received first location information response message to the ISP server. Hence, the location information service of various requirements based on the accuracy or the time can be provided. Further, new services or various values added can be created. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238113 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS - A preamble for use in a packet based communication system is defined on the basis of a preamble for use in a legacy packet based communication system. The preamble is constructed by extracting from the legacy preamble a pilot symbol sequence in frequency of the legacy preamble, replicating the pilot symbol sequence, and concatenating the pilot symbol sequence and the replicated pilot symbol sequence. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238114 | CELL SELECTION AND RESELECTION IN DEPLOYMENTS WITH HOME NODEBS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate cell search, selection, and reselection within a wireless communication network that includes a home node base station (home nodeB). A user equipment (UE) can detect a home nodeB and communicate such identification to a macro network that includes at least one node base station (nodeB). The detected home nodeB and nodeB can be hierarchically structured in order to prioritize connectivity with the home nodeB over the nodeB. Such prioritization can be implemented by broadcasting home nodeB parameters and macro nodeB parameters having identification information therewith. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238115 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus provides a first transfer unit for transferring a first packet received from a base station to a second home agent, the first packet to be sent from a first mobile station to a second mobile station as a destination, the first terminal and the second terminal being managed by a first home agent and the second home agent respectively, a second transfer unit for transferring the first packet sent back from the second home agent to the base station, and a return instruction unit for issuing to the base station an instruction for directly transferring a second packet to the second mobile station when a predetermined condition is satisfied. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238116 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL -BASED FAST CELL SWITCHING FOR HIGH-SPEED PACKET ACCESS - Methods and apparatuses for facilitating switching HSPA (high speed packet access) serving cells from each of an RNC (radio network controller), base station, and access terminal are provided. The RNC pre-configures an access terminal and each base station in an active set for HS-DSCH operation by providing identification codes identifying each of the base stations. The RNC transmits data packets tagged with sequence numbers to each base station where they are synchronously buffered. The access terminal initiates a handover by transmitting a PDU (protocol data unit) to each of the base stations. The PDU is encoded with the identification code of a target base station and a sequence number of a subsequent packet. The target receives the PDU and directly completes the handover with the access terminal. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238117 | CELL SELECTION AND RESELECTION FOR CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELLS - A method for applying a priority of a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell, including receiving priority information for each of a plurality of communication frequencies over which the CSG cell can communicate; storing the priority information at a wireless transmit/receive unit; and applying the priority information to at least one of: taking measurements on a communication frequency, selecting to a CSG cell in the communication frequency, or reselecting to a CSG cell in the communication frequency. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238118 | REDUCING COST OF CELLULAR BACKHAUL - Methods and systems for reducing the cost of cellular backhaul are disclosed. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238119 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING MOBILITY-BASED CONTENT DELIVERY - A portable subscriber access unit includes a wireless transceiver and a processor. The processor controls the transceiver, determines a mobility state of the access unit, and determines a data packet content type. The transceiver transmits the mobility state, receives service rights based on the mobility state, and transmits the data packet on a condition that the content type is allowed by the service rights. | 09-24-2009 |
20090245168 | Server for Enhancing Communication Between a Content Provider and a Radio Communication Device and Method therefor - The present invention relates to a server ( | 10-01-2009 |
20090245169 | System and method for multiplexing on an LTE uplink control channel - A wireless communication network comprising a plurality of base stations capable of wireless communication with a plurality of subscriber stations within a coverage area of the network, wherein at least one of the plurality of base stations is capable of: determining a multiplexing scheme for multiplexing a frequency- selective channel quality information/precoding matrix index (FS CQI/PMI) feedback report with a wideband channel quality information/precoding matrix index (WB CQI/PMI) feedback report and a rank information (RI) report on a physical uplink control channel; transmitting the multiplexing scheme to a subscriber station; and receiving, from the subscriber station, an FS CQI/PMI feedback report multiplexed with a WB CQI/PMI feedback report and a RI report on the physical uplink control channel according to the multiplexing scheme. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245170 | System and method for the placement of rank information in a physical uplink shared channel - A wireless communication network comprising a plurality of base stations capable of wireless communication with a plurality of subscriber stations within a coverage area of the network, wherein at least one of the plurality of base stations is capable of selecting two or more orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols in a subframe of a physical uplink shared channel, the two or more OFDM symbols are selected starting from the bottom of the physical uplink shared channel in a bottom-up manner, and repeating one or more rank information (RI) coded bits in each of the selected two or more OFDM symbols. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245171 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication system and a wireless communication device capable of performing communication by each transmission signal without mutual interference, when a plurality of transmission signals of different communication systems or the same communication systems exist within the same frequency band. The system includes a first wireless communication device, a second wireless communication device, a third wireless communication device, and a fixed band-pass filter and a variable band-pass filter in the third wireless communication device. The first wireless communication signal includes control information indicating a variable pass band in the variable band-pass filter, and the control information is given to the variable band-pass filter, thereby allowing the first wireless communication signal to be selectively passed through the variable band-pass filter, while removing the second wireless communication signal. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245172 | BASE STATION AND SCHEDULING METHOD - A base station performing wireless communications with terminals includes: a scheduler scheduling data transmitted to the terminal; a desynchronization determining unit acquiring synchronization information on synchronization between the base station and a neighboring base station to the base station and determining, based on the synchronization information acquired, whether the desynchronization occurs in the base station or not; and a changing unit changing, when the desynchronization determining unit determines that the desynchronization occurs in the base station, the scheduling by the scheduler so as to restrain radio waves transmitted from the base station and radio waves transmitted from the neighboring base station from interfering with each other. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245173 | Radio Communication Terminal, Radio Base Station, And Packet Communication Method - A radio communication terminal according to the present invention transmits and receives multiple types of packets including a RTP packet to and from a communication destination device. The radio communication terminal sets an auxiliary service instance used for transmitting the RTP packet and a main service instance used for transmitting another type of packet between the radio communication terminal and the communication destination device. Depending on radio quality information, the radio communication terminal selects any one of a mode in which a service instance flow ID to identify a service instance is added to the RTP packet and a mode in which the addition of the service instance flow ID is omitted. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245174 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DATA TRANSFER IN A PACKET-SWITCHED DATA NETWORK - Apparatus for and methods of enabling a gateway node of a first packet-switched data network to select a first channel for transferring a data packet to a destination packet data protocol address of a correspondent node provided service in the first network are disclosed. The gateway node is configured to select the first channel from a plurality of channels configured to transfer data packets to the destination packet data protocol address of the correspondent node, wherein the data packet is sent from a mobile node of a second packet-switched data network external to the first network, and wherein the mobile node has been in a communication session with the correspondent node while provided service in a third packet-switched data network different to the second network. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245175 | MOBILE RADIO TERMINAL - A mobile radio terminal has a first radio communication unit and a second radio communication unit adopting mutually different communication systems, first starts the first radio communication unit and connects to a content server CS, obtains meta-data of a desired content, and a control unit determines a communication system to be applied to downloading on the basis of the meta-data, and downloads the content data with one of the first radio communication unit and that second radio communication unit that corresponds to the determination. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245176 | DEVICE MANAGED ACCESS POINT LISTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate device-side access point list management. Blacklists of access points unsuitable for providing network access to a related mobile device can be maintained as well as whitelists of suitable access points. The lists can be managed using an interface provided at the mobile device. In addition, lists can be modified according to provisioned network updates. Also, the lists can be of maximum size such that older entries can be purged upon insertion of newer entries based on a number of factors; timed entry deletion is provided as well. Access points in the lists can be stored and presented according to various identifiers related to the access points. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245177 | System and Method for Multiple Packet Data Network Connectivity Detachment - A system is provided that includes a component configured to promote detachment of a user equipment (UE) from a plurality of packet data network (PDN) gateways by sending a message to the plurality of PDN gateways to detach multiple PDN connections associated with the UE. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245178 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO REPORT AND MANAGE CELLS IN A MULTI CARRIER SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses for facilitating managing cells in a multi-carrier system from an access terminal and base station are provided. The base station and access terminal communicate via an anchor carrier and a supplementary carrier. A triggering algorithm generated by the base station is transmitted to the access terminal. The triggering algorithm includes instructions for the access terminal to report downlink measurements as a function of trigger events detected over the anchor carrier and/or the supplementary carrier. Downlink measurements taken by the access terminal are provided to the base station. Cell management instructions based in part on the downlink measurements are then provided to the access terminal by the base station. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245179 | Method and System for Processing International Calls Using a Voice Over IP Process - A method for processing an multi-country international phone call, free from an international toll charge, using a voice over IP (VoIP) call from a first mobile handset to a second handset. The method includes transferring destination number information associated with a destination number within a first country code from the first mobile handset to a data network, which is coupled to a world wide network of computers. In a preferred embodiment, the handset is coupled via cellular network through a data network to the world wide network of computers. The method includes transferring caller number information associated with a caller number within a second country code from the first mobile handset to the data network. In a preferred embodiment, the second country code is different from the second country code. The method includes receiving the destination information at a call server process, which is coupled to the world wide network of computers. The method also includes receiving the caller number information at the call server process. The method initiates a first VoIP phone call using the caller number information from the server process to the first mobile handset. The method initiates a second VoIP phone call using the destination number information from the server process to the second handset. The method also connects the first VoIP phone call to the first mobile handset to the second VoIP phone call to the second handset through the server process. The method also includes exchanging voice information between the first mobile handset and the second handset free from an international toll charge. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245180 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING MULTIMEDIA CALL CONTINUITY - A system, method, and apparatus for implementing multimedia call continuity solve the problem that when a domain transfer happens, part of a media flow in a multimedia session cannot be transfer between bearers of different access modes. Besides a remote UE, the system further includes a multi-mode terminal MTF UE that supports media flow transfer between multiple modes and carries media flow transfer context information in an initiated media stream transfer request, and a media transfer function (MTF) that acts as an agent to initiate and perform a media renegotiation with the remote UE, according to the media flow transfer context information carried in the request. After the media renegotiation, the MTF UE or the MTF is adapted to release the media flow that needs to be transferred before the media renegotiation. Therefore, when a domain transfer happens, the media stream can be transferred between the bearers of different access modes that the MTF UE supports. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245181 | REAL-TIME RATE CONTROL MECHANISM FOR MULTI-RATE DATA TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Wireless networks are becoming increasingly heterogeneous in terms of the processing capabilities of network users' receiving equipment. According to embodiments of the invention, in a communications network comprising a plurality of receivers with different data reception rate capabilities, data frames targeted to respective receivers may be transmitted to the receivers in accordance with the respective data reception rate capabilities of the receivers. | 10-01-2009 |
20090252084 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BROADCASTING PUSH-TO-TALK GROUP SESSIONS - The present invention relates to a method of communicating a push-to data packet within a communications system, where the push-to packet originates from a push-to client participating in a push-to user group comprising at least two push-to clients. The method comprises receiving the push-to data packet from a push-to server and broadcasting the push-to data packet over a broadcast distribution network to broadcasting clients which are not part of the push-to user group. A communications interface arranged to communicate push-to data packets, originating from a push-to client participating in a push-to user group comprising at least two push-to clients, from a push-to server to a broadcast node arranged to broadcast the push-to data packets to broadcasting clients which are not part of the push-to user group is also disclosed. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252085 | ROBUST WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS THEREOF - A wireless communication system includes an access point and first and second stations. The first station transmits a first message that includes an address of a second station as a destination address and an address of the first station as a source address. The access point forwards the message including the address of the second station address as the destination address and the address of the first station as the source address. The second station receives the message from the first station during a first time interval and receives the first message from the access point during a second time interval. The second station processes the duplicate received message to produce inbound data. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252086 | FRONT-END GATEWAY UNIT FOR REMOTE ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT MONITORING SYSTEM - A front-end gateway unit is designed for integration to a remote ecological environment monitoring system that is equipped with a wireless sensor network (WSN) system installed at a remote site, such as a farmland or a garden, for the purpose of allowing the WSN system to exchange data with a back-end host server via a wireless communication system. The front-end gateway unit is characterized by the capability of using either the WSN system or a built-in sensing module for collecting ecological data, and the capability of combining geographical location data in the ecological data. This feature allows the collection of a comprehensive set of ecological data (including geographical location, temperature, humidity, sunlight data, wind speed, and pest number) for transfer to the back-end host server, such that research/management personnel at the local site can conveniently browse these ecological data and learn the ecological conditions of the remotely monitored area. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252087 | Wireless-linked remote ecological environment monitoring system - A wireless-linked remote ecological environment monitoring system is proposed, which is characterized by the use of a sensor network such as WSN (wireless sensor network) installed at the remote site for collecting ecological data, and the use of a public wireless communication system such as GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) for transferring all the collected ecological data to a back-end host server unit where the ecological data are compiled into webpages for posting on a website. This feature allows the research/management personnel to browse the ecological data simply by linking a network workstation via a network system such as the Internet to the website, without having to travel to the remote site and collect ecological data by human labor. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252088 | Method for routing via access terminals - An access-terminal routing methodology is provided that may be used to enable a wireless, meshed backhaul between base stations using existing wireless-access resources (time, bandwidth, code-space, power), protocols, and base station infrastructure. Accordingly, the invention provides a means to extend the coverage of existing networks by adding standalone base stations without wired or specialized wireless backhaul. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252089 | PACKET RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING METHOD - An embodiment of the invention provides a method of receiving packets from a transmitting station at a receiving station in a mobile communication system. The packet receiving method includes receiving a radio resource including a data packet and a packet indicator related to the data packet, identifying the packet indicator, and processing the data packet according to the content of the packet indicator. Another embodiment of the invention provides a method of transmitting packets from a transmitting station to a receiving station in a mobile communication system. The packet transmitting method includes receiving a response signal of a first data packet from the receiving station, allocating a second data packet to a radio resource according to the response signal, allocating a packet indicator related to the second data packet to the radio resource, and transmitting the second data packet and the packet indicator to the receiving station. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252090 | Apparatus and method of 3G mobile communication capable of implementing a multi-channel protocol - This invention discloses an apparatus and a method of 3G mobile communication capable of implementing a multi-channel protocol. The 3G mobile communication apparatus includes: an application layer, for providing applications to transmit voice data; a multi-channel processing layer, for simulating at least one physical communication port of the 3G mobile communication apparatus into virtual logical data channels by software according to priority of the data transmitted, and each virtual logical data channel is connected to the data processing layer, and a multi-channel protocol layer is provided for transmitting the data received by the 3G mobile communication apparatus to the data processing layer according to the priority of the data; and a 3G wireless communication module, which is a wireless communication interface, for connecting the bus interface and achieving a signal connection of the 3G mobile communication apparatus with a base station. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252091 | System and Method for Multi-Stage Zero Forcing Beamforming in a Wireless Communications System - A system and method for multi-stage zero forcing beamforming in a wireless communications system is provided. A method includes receiving feedback information from each mobile station (MS) in a first plurality of mobile stations (MSs), selecting a first MS from the first plurality of MSs, and broadcasting information related to the first MS to the first plurality of MSs. The first MS having a largest value of a first metric based on the feedback information received from the first plurality of MSs. The method also includes receiving feedback information from each MS in a second plurality of MSs, selecting a second MS from the second plurality of MSs, and creating a precoding matrix from feedback information from the first MS and the second MS. The second MS having a largest value of a second metric based on the feedback information received from the second plurality of MSs. | 10-08-2009 |
20090257372 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVED DECODING OF HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST TRANSMISSIONS - A method for improved decoding of hybrid automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) transmissions may include attempting to verify a physical layer (PHY) cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for a candidate H-ARQ encoder packet. If the PHY CRC is not verified, medium access control layer protocol data units (MPDUs) may be identified in the candidate H-ARQ encoder packet, and attempts may be made to verify a medium access control layer (MAC) CRC for each MPDU in the candidate H-ARQ encoder packet. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257373 | Methods and Apparatus for Coverage Verification in a Wireless Sensor Network - Methods and apparatus are provided for improved coverage verification schemes in a wireless sensor network that do not require information about the location of sensor nodes in the wireless sensor network. Coverage holes are detected by a first node in a wireless sensor network by obtaining an estimate of a distance to each of a plurality of additional nodes in a transmission radius of the first node; determining a relative location of each of the plurality of additional nodes in the coordinate system of the first node; identifying border segments of a sensing border of the first node, where each of the border segments comprises a section of a sensing border of the first node that is covered by a sensing radius of at least one of the additional nodes; and determining if a coverage hole exists for the first node by determining if a plurality of the border segments comprise a cyclic segment sequence. The coordinate system comprises r-map coordinates of the first node and the additional nodes, where r is based on a transmission radius of the first node | 10-15-2009 |
20090257374 | MOBILE MULTIMEDIA TERMINAL FOR A CALM SYSTEM AND A METHOD FOR OFFERING CONTINUOUS MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS - A mobile multimedia terminal for a CALM (Continuous Air interface for Long and Medium range) system includes, a wireless multimedia communications transceiver for transmitting and receiving signals over at least two wireless media; a communications link determination and management unit for acquiring interface IDs of the wireless media over which the wireless multimedia communications transceiver receives wireless multimedia signals and establishing communications channels for each of the wireless media whose interface IDs are acquired; and a wireless communications control unit for controlling the communications link determination and management unit to acquire the interface IDs and establish the communications channels, and for controlling data transmission and receipt via the established channels. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257375 | ACCESS GATEWAY APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication control system capable of reducing the traffic amount, CPU's processing load and channel bands related to a location registering process. In this system, a paging part ( | 10-15-2009 |
20090257376 | INTELLIGENT ACCESS POINT FOR DELIVERING LOCATION BASED INFORMATION - A method for delivering location based information in wireless zone is disclosed. All the location based information is stored in the access point itself thus eliminating the need for backend server. Access point has the intelligence to deliver information in customized to each requesting device's display capability. To provide seamless access to local information the user will get a default web page once the device connects to access point and tries to access internet. This web page will act as a gateway to all the location based information available in the access point. Along with location based information advertisements can also be delivered to the end user in a very cost effective and targeted manner. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257377 | REDUCING BUFFER SIZE FOR REPEAT TRANSMISSION PROTOCOLS - A wireless communication device includes a receive buffer and control logic coupled to the receive buffer. The control logic implements an algorithm to selectively drop data blocks in the receive buffer once a predetermined fill threshold for the receive buffer is reached. The receive buffer is sized so that a drop activity level for the algorithm is within a predetermined range. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257378 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING A REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE - A real-time media session is established between user equipment and a media communication server via a serving access network. According to the Invention, dummy data (e.g. a dummy message) is sent in order to maintain a dedicated channel during the inactive periods of a real-time media session or to trigger an early setup of a dedicated channel in the access network. In this manner, user equipment logged on to a real-time media (e.g. PoC) session are prevented from going to a radio resource idle state, thus avoiding potential long extra delays during real-time media (e.g. PoC) service usage. The invention further allows the sending and receiving user equipment to set up dedicated channels (DCH) already during the start-to-talk procedure of the transmitting user equipment, which in turn potentially reduces end-to-end delays during the conversation. | 10-15-2009 |
20090262679 | BROADCASTING SIGNAL RECEIVER AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING BROADCASTING SIGNAL - A broadcasting signal receiver and a method for transmitting/receiving a broadcasting signal are disclosed. An identifier of a cell is set in the broadcasting signal and, if the cell is changed, channel information of the changed cell can be obtained from program table information having the channel information of the cell. Accordingly, the broadcasting signal receiver can continuously output a program although the cell is changed. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262680 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AN UPLINK TRANSMISSION CONTROL MESSAGE, METHOD FOR RECEIVING AN UPLINK TRANSMISSION CONTROL MESSAGE - In an embodiment, a communication device is provided. The communication device may include a scheduling message generating circuit configured to generate a scheduling message such that the scheduling message includes a receiving scheduling information specifying when to receive an uplink transmission control message, the receiving scheduling information being defined depending on a configuration of an uplink transmission channel, an uplink transmission control message generating circuit configured to generate an uplink transmission control message to control an uplink transmission from another communication device via the uplink transmission channel, and a transmitter circuit configured to transmit the uplink transmission control message in accordance with the receiving scheduling information such that the uplink transmission control message is transmitted via an uplink transmission control downlink channel. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262681 | METHOD OF PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing a random access procedure in a wireless communication system includes transmitting a random access preamble, receiving a random access response from a network as a response to the random access preamble, transmitting a connection request message comprising information on a temporary identifier, and receiving a contention resolution message from the network. The temporary identifier is randomly generated and the contention resolution message is addressed to the temporary identifier. Contentions between user equipments can be resolved through a temporary identifier occupying less radio resources in a random access procedure. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262682 | Method and Apparatus for Transport of RANAP Messages over the Iuh Interface in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method covers communication from the user equipment to an access point or from the core network to a network controller. The method sends of a radio access network application part (RANAP) message by identifying the RANAP message with a first header and encapsulating that message with a second header. The method passes the encapsulated message to its destination using information from the second header. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262683 | Method and Apparatus for Setup and Release of User Equipment Context Identifiers in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method covers the sending of a registration request for a user equipment from an access point to the network controller and receiving a registration accept response with a unique identifier for the user equipment allocated by the network controller. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262684 | Method and Apparatus for Home Node B Registration using HNBAP - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method sends a registration request from an access point to a network controller with location information and an identifier for the access point. The method receives at the access point a response when the access point is permitted to access the services of the network controller. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262685 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE IP ROUTE OPTIMIZATION - The current application concerns a method, mobile node, home agent and system for route optimisation between a mobile node and at least one correspondent node in a packet switched network, wherein a route via a first home agent is redirected via a second home agent. The mobile node sends an extended home test initiation message comprising following information: authentication data, an address of the correspondent node, a first home address and a second home address. The first home agent receives the extended home test initiation message and sends an extended home test message to the second home agent, the extended home test message comprising the information from the extended home test initiation message. The second home agent receives the extended home test message and a communication is routed between the mobile node and the at least one correspondent node via the second home agent. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262686 | SESSION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND SESSION CLEAR-OUT METHOD - Session management means holds session information concerning sessions for fixed terminals and sessions for mobile terminals including type information indicating a terminal type and status information indicating the status of communication. Session clear-out means disconnects a session the type information for which indicates a mobile terminal and in which communication has not been performed for a time period longer than or equal to a first monitoring time period, on the basis of the session information held in the session management means. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262687 | Wireless Communications Control Method, Wireless Base Station, And Wireless Terminal - The wireless base station sends control data relating to the processing, belonging to the upper layer (the second layer) of the first layer, to the wireless terminal through the downlink channel. Upon reception of the control data through the downlink data channel, the wireless terminal sends the response data, as a response to the control data, to the wireless base station through the control channel. The wireless base station detects the response data from the received data through the control channel, and then controls the processing belonging to the upper layer based on the response data. The above processing eliminates establishing a data channel to the wireless base station only for the response data as a response to the processing belonging to the upper layer. | 10-22-2009 |
20090268661 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND ROAMING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile communication terminal apparatus and a control method thereof wherein a smooth handoff can be quickly achieved in a seamless manner during a roaming between data communication networks of different packet exchange systems. A mobile communication terminal apparatus ( | 10-29-2009 |
20090268662 | Method and Arrangement for Bi-Directional Relating in Wireless Communication Systems - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in a relaying radio node and/or in a sending/receiving radio node, adapted for use in a relaying communication system. The relaying node is in bidirectional communication with at least a first and a second sending/receiving radio node, and the relaying radio node receives at least a first signal carrying at least first data and a second signal carrying at least second data. The relaying node generates a reduced representation of at least the first and second signal, with a reduced information content as compared to the first and second data, by a joint non-linearly encoding operation, and transmits the reduced representation to at least the first and the second communication node. The first and second sending/receiving node can extract data from the reduced representation by a non-linear decoding operation using stored a priori information. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268663 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus is provided. The wireless communication apparatus includes: detection means that detects that there is another wireless communication apparatus around the wireless communication apparatus; comparison means that compares a first reference value managed in the wireless communication apparatus with a second reference value managed in the another wireless communication apparatus; means that corrects the first reference value based on the comparison result; and means that announces the first reference value to the another wireless communication apparatus. Frequencies are set such that a frequency of the wireless communication apparatus becomes same as a frequency of still another wireless communication apparatus to which a radio wave of the wireless communication apparatus does not reach but a radio wave of the another wireless communication apparatus reaches. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268664 | COMMUNICATION ROUTE OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION ROUTE OPTIMIZATION CONTROL DEVICE - The present invention provides a technique to optimize communication route when two end nodes separated away from own home perform data communication with each other. According to this technique, a communication node (the initiator node | 10-29-2009 |
20090268665 | Method and Apparatus for Locating MediaFLO Capable Wireless Devices - Estimating a current location of a receiver in a MediaFLO™ (Forward Link Only) mobile multimedia multicast system comprises receiving digital signals comprising a MediaFLO™ superframe comprising orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols; performing slot | 10-29-2009 |
20090268666 | RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL PREAMBLE SELECTION - The present invention provides a method of selecting a random access preamble in a radio communication system operable at least on a physical layer and a medium access control layer. Random access preambles are divided into at least two groups, the groups depending on at least one of the following: radio conditions and a size of a message to be transmitted by user equipment. The method comprising: (a) the medium access control layer selecting one of the preamble groups; (b) the medium access control layer randomly selecting one random access preamble within the selected group; (c) the medium access control layer signaling the selected random access preamble to the physical layer; and (d) the physical layer generating and transmitting the generated random access preamble. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268667 | Header compression mechanism for transmitting RTP packets over wireless links - This disclosure describes a new a header compression method for a MAC protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols into a heterogeneous MAC protocol used for forwarding VoIP traffic in VoIP systems on wireless networks using multiple base stations that reduces packet overhead thus allowing for transmission of high bit-rate data to multiple users over wired and wireless means. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268668 | LOCAL IP ACCESS SCHEME - Local IP access is provided in a wireless network to facilitate access to one or more local services. In some implementations, different IP interfaces are used for accessing different services (e.g., local services and operator network services). A list that maps packet destinations to IP interfaces may be employed to determine which IP interface is to be used for sending a given packet. In some implementations an access point provides a proxy function (e.g., a proxy ARP function) for an access terminal. In some implementations an access point provides an agent function (e.g., a DHCP function) for an access terminal. NAT operations may be performed at an access point to enable the access terminal to access local services. In some aspects, an access point may determine whether to send a packet from an access terminal via a protocol tunnel based on the destination of the packet. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268669 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND TERMINAL DEVICE - Disclosed are a base station device and a terminal device. The base station device includes a signal generator to generate a synchronization channel signal based on the cell type of a cell that the base station device manages, and a transmitter to transmit the synchronization channel signal via a synchronization channel established between at least one terminal device and the base station device, wherein the cell type is classified based on the information of the scale of the cell and whether the cell selectively allows access. The terminal may quickly recognize the cell type in a cellular wireless communication system having a hierarchical cell structure. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268670 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION AND PACKET DATA IN DOWNLINK - Provided are a method and apparatus for transmitting control information and packet data. The method includes generating control channels which transmit the control information; generating control indication channel which indicates whether the control channels are transmitted or not; generating data channels in order to transmit the packet data based on the control information; multiplexing the control channels, the control indication channels, and the data channels; and transmitting the control channels, the control indication channels, and the data channels. According to the present invention, when control information and packet data are transmitted in downlink, by transmitting additional information indicating whether control channels are transmitted or not, resources not actually allocated to control channels can be allocated to data channel and the mobile station can receive data channel using the control indication information. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268671 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING ACCESS POINT STARTUP AND INITIAL CHANNEL SELECTION PROCESSES - A startup process of an access point (AP) includes a discovery phase and an announcement phase. During the discovery phase, the AP detects neighboring APs from its own extended service set (ESS), neighboring APs from different ESSs, and external sources of interference. During the announcement phase, the AP transmits its beacon signals at maximum power in order to accelerate recognition by neighboring APs running the discovery phase. An automatic initialization channel selection process of an AP scans channels the AP will use to communicate. Information of each scanned channel is recorded and a best performance channel is determined for use by the AP. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268672 | System and Method for Pushing Data to a Mobile Device - A system for handling information requests from mobile devices includes a memory, a state prediction module, and a push module. The memory is operable to store data requests received from the mobile devices. The state prediction module is operable to access the memory to predict forecasted data requests for a mobile device based on the stored data requests. The push module is operable to receive the forecasted data requests from the state prediction module and in response request and receive response data related to the forecasted data requests and prepare the response data for transmission to the mobile device over a wireless network. | 10-29-2009 |
20090274090 | Push-To-Talk Optimization - A push to talk message protocol operating on a communication network between an originating and terminating communication device operates to transmit compressed message formats to initiate the push to talk message protocol. Four compressed session protocol message formats are used in the preferred embodiment. A compressed originating session initiation invite message is transmitted from the originating mobile station. A compressed terminating session initiation invite message is received by the terminating mobile station. A compressed session initiation protocol ping message is transmitted from the originating mobile station and received by the terminating mobile station. A compressed 200 OK session initiation protocol message is transmitted from the terminating mobile station and received by the originating mobile station. Finally, the originating mobile decompresses the 200 OK session initiation protocol message. These compressed massages are used to initiate the push to talk communication session. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274091 | SYSTEM FOR INTERCONNECTING BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORK WITH WIRED NETWORK - A system for interconnecting a broadband wireless network with a wired network comprises: as for a broadband wireless network required to be interconnected with a wired network, in equipment selected in the corresponding broadband wireless access (BWA) network, setting an interface communicating with at least one kind of wired network; through communicating with equipment of the at least one kind of wired network by the interface, transmitting information required to be transferred between the BWA network and the wired network; and then implementing the interconnection between the broadband wireless network and the wired network. For example, it can implement the interconnection between the worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) network and the multi-service operator (MSO) network and/or the digital subscriber line (DSL) network as the wired network. Therefore, the implementation of the present invention enables subscribers of the broadband wireless network and subscribers of the wired network to inter-utilize the corresponding access network and to acquire the corresponding access services, and thus the services are developed for the subscribers more smartly and conveniently. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274092 | Transmission of internet packets according to a priority - A telecommunications system is operable to provide a facility for a communications session to a mobile node using an internet protocol. When changing affiliation from one of a first and second packet data network to the other of the first and second packet data network, a mobile node is operable to generate a service level identifier representing a requested priority to be afforded to the internet packets communicated to and from the mobile node with respect to other internet packets communicated to and from other nodes. The mobile node is also operable to generate a binding update internet packet providing a care of address of the mobile and an indication of the service level identifier in the binding update internet packet and to communicate the binding update internet data packets to a home agent of the mobile node. The home agent is operable in response to the binding update to identify the service level identifier and to communicate the internet packets in accordance with the requested priority represented by the service level identifier. The telecommunications system can prioritise the transmission of internet packets according to a priority requested by the mobile node represented by the service level identifier thus reducing a likelihood that mobile node will experience delays or interruptions in the transmission of data. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274093 | Process for Routing Data Packets in a Mobile Node Network and Associated Terminal - A method of routing data packets (P) between a source node (S) and a target node (C) in an ad hoc network comprising mobile nodes ( | 11-05-2009 |
20090274094 | ADVERTISING SUPPORT FOR A PLURALITY OF SERVICE NETWORKS BY A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - To advertise capabilities of a wireless access point, the wireless access point communicates, to a mobile station, messages at plural levels of detail to advertise that the wireless access point supports a plurality of service networks. The messages at the plural levels of detail include a first message indicating that the wireless access point supports multiple service networks, and a second message containing information identifying the plurality of service networks. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274095 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS BASE STATION - A mobile wireless communication system includes: a wireless base station that controls, for each timing, a transmission state of a radio wave repeatedly transmitted at timings that respectively differ; and a plurality of wireless mobile devices that are respectively allocated one of the timings, receive the radio wave at the timing allocated, and based on the radio wave received, respectively detect a connection destination. The wireless base station controls the transmission state of the radio wave transmitted at an arbitrary timing to be any one of a complete suspension state of continuously suspending transmission, a discontinuous suspension state of discontinuously suspending transmission, and an invalid information transmission state of transmitting invalid information. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274096 | Method of network entry in OFDM multi-carrier wireless communications systems - A unified two-stage network entry procedure is provided for OFDM multi-carrier wireless communications systems. During a first stage, a mobile station performs a common network entry procedure using a primary radio frequency carrier and then exchanges multi-carrier capability information with a base station. In one embodiment, the base station transmits a network entry allowance indicator to assist the mobile station in selecting the primary carrier. The network entry allowance indicator comprises information of preference of one or more available carriers. During a second stage, the mobile station enables multi-carrier transmission over multiple frequency channels if both the mobile station and the base station support multi-carrier capability. Before enabling multi-carrier transmission, the mobile station may optionally perform additional ranging by transmitting a ranging request for a secondary carrier. In one embodiment, the base station replies with a ranging response in response to the ranging request through the primary carrier. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274097 | INFORMATION TRANSMISSION TO AN AIRCRAFT - A system and a method for information transmission to an aircraft and for the subsequent provision of the information, which includes an information system for an aircraft including a receiver for receiving a message in a mobile communication standard from a ground system. The message contains a message header and a message body including information prepared with a further header. An interpreter analyses the further header of the message and separates the information, and at least one display device is provided for presenting the information. The receiver is connected to the display device by way of the interpreter so as to be able to communicate. The messages transmitted are, for example, SMS messages or MMS messages. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274098 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DATA RETRANSMISSION METHOD - A method which can reduce loss in data transmission is provided. A data block is prepared in a high-level layer and the data block is transmitted in a low-level layer. Status report information associated with reception or non-reception of the data block is received through the low-level layer. When a receiver fails to receive data transmitted from a transmitter, the transmitter can rapidly recognize the reception failure and can retransmit the data. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274099 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING TRANSMITTER INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for communicating transmitter information in a communication network are disclosed. The methods and apparatus communicate transmitter specific information, in particular, which includes location information about network transmitters for use in location or positioning type services. The disclosed methods and apparatus include inserting such transmitter specific information within either a data flow of at least one transmission frame or a control channel in the at least one transmission frame. In addition, a transmitter identifier is encoded in a positioning pilot channel (PPC) within the at least one transmission frame, and the configured transmission frame transmitted to a user device. The user device may use the transmitter specific information of numerous transmitters along with the transmitter identifiers to measure how far it is from the transmitters, and then triangulate to determine position. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274100 | UPLINK RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Management of uplink resources in a wireless communication is presented. In one embodiment, management of uplink resources comprises receiving a multi-bit acknowledge (multi-bit A/N) that is available for uplink transmission and receiving other information that is available for uplink transmission along with the multi-bit A/N. Next, it is determined whether a condition has been met. If the condition has been met, an uplink message is created comprising the multi-bit A/N but dropping the other information. If the condition has not been met, an uplink message is created which jointly codes the multi-bit A/N and the other information. The uplink message is then transmitted to a receiver. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274101 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Access control based on CSMA is favorably carried out with the RTS/CTS method used together. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274102 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR EXTENDING MOBILE IP - Methods and apparatus for extending Mobile IP to enable a Mobile IP Home Agent to forward to a default proxy MN server when it does not have a current binding for a MN home address. This can be used to route traffic when the MN is absent and to add processes onto the Proxy MN server that enables application intelligence at the Proxy MN server to act on behalf of the MN when the MN so wishes, e.g., substituting for the MN while the MN is in sleep mode or otherwise unavailable. | 11-05-2009 |
20090279476 | FREQUENCY CORRECTION IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and systems for correction of frequency errors in multi-carrier communication systems. The composite frequency error associated with the downlink signals are used to infer or derive the composite frequency error associated with the uplink signals, which are used to pre-compensate the uplink signals. Special signal components are transmitted by multiple base stations to facilitate frequency-error estimation and other system control functionalities at a mobile device. The mobile device carries out temporal, spatial, or spatial-temporal processing of the composite frequency errors associated with one or more base stations to determine the clock frequency error and the Doppler shift with respect to its serving base station. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279477 | MOBILE STATION, WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station, a radio access network apparatus and a mobile communication system that can decrease signal amount of each message to decrease connection delay are provided. The mobile station is provided with storing means configured to store a conversion table between a combination of a plurality of parameters defined beforehand and an identifier representing the combination of the plurality of parameters; uplink transmission signal generation means configured to generate an uplink transmission signal including the identifier when performing uplink transmission; transmission means configured to transmit the uplink transmission signal to the radio access network apparatus; reception means configured to receive a downlink transmission signal transmitted by the radio access network apparatus; and parameter setting means configured to detect the identifier from the received downlink transmission signal, read and set a parameter based on the identifier. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279478 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING DYNAMIC COOPERATIVE INTERFERENCE REDUCTION - Various embodiments are described for potentially improving coverage and/or the cell-edge outage rate and thereby the system capacity. Logic flow diagrams | 11-12-2009 |
20090279479 | Wireless communication system and method of wireless communication - A wireless communication system is provided that includes a network and a plurality of access terminals. The plurality of access terminals includes a first group of access terminals configured to receive control information at a first data rate and send a response to the received control information, as well as a second group of access terminals configured to receive the control information at a second data rate and send a response to the received control information. The second data rate is higher than the first data rate. The network is configured to send the control information via a control channel at the first data rate and the second data rate, receive responses from the access terminals, and establish a traffic channel with at least one of the access terminals based on the control information and associated response from at least one of the access terminals. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279480 | Method and Apparatus for Retransmission Scheduling and Control in Multi-Carrier Wireless Communication Networks - In one embodiment, a method of scheduling transmissions for a base station in a multi-carrier wireless communication network comprises scheduling initial transmissions of data packets for one or more users on a first carrier, without reserving scheduling capacity on the first carrier for retransmissions. Doing so increases the scheduled capacity of the first carrier for initial transmissions. The method further includes scheduling retransmissions, as needed, for given ones of the data packets on one or more second carriers. The method allows more traffic to be scheduled on the first carrier, meaning that multi-carrier transmissions are less frequently needed to convey all of the traffic targeted to one or more receivers. Those receivers therefore spend more time operating with a reduced receiver bandwidth (as compared to the bandwidth required for receiving more than one carrier), which reduces operating power. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279481 | System and method for routing a data packet in a wireless network, computing system in a system for routing a data packet in a wireless network, and method for routing a data packet in a computing system - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method and system for detecting the inability of the designated intermediate node (A | 11-12-2009 |
20090279482 | TECHNIQUES FOR ENHANCED BACKHAUL FLOW CONTROL - Techniques for enhanced backhaul flow control are provided. In an exemplary embodiment, a backhaul control system is described that comprises a base station controller (BSC), a backhaul network, and a base transceiver station (BTS). Each is responsive to data and messaging transmitted and received. In one aspect, the BTS includes a queue and a controller. The amount of data in a queue is adjusted by a controller based upon calculating a target queue size value. The controller non-uniformly adjusts the amount of data in a queue based upon a target queue size value which is based upon communication system parameters. The target queue size and amount of data in a queue is adjusted so as to reduce buffer underrun, decrease system latency, and increase communication system throughput. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279483 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO MANAGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS OF HIGH-OCCUPANCY VEHICLES - A system and method for managing wireless communications for a plurality of devices in a high occupancy vehicle is presented. The method comprises steps of creating a global bandwidth usage map across all vehicles, routes, and passengers, transmitting the global bandwidth usage map to a vehicle controller, interpreting the global bandwidth usage map and creating a local usage map, and commanding a wireless concentrator to manage the wireless communications for the devices in accordance with the local usage map. Further, the global map can be created by gathering ticket and route information, obtaining customer productivity data from a network, and parsing obtained data into canonical form. A step of inputting the ticketing information by one of the user, and a ticketing agent can be included. A step of displaying messages using a wireless access application residing on the device can be included. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279484 | LOCATION INFORMATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING NOTIFICATION BASED UPON LOCATION - According to an embodiment, a location based notification method in a SLP (SUPL Location Platform) includes transmitting, by the SLP, a session initialization message including a notification mode parameter indicating one or more of notification and verification based upon the location of the terminal to the terminal; receiving a positioning initialization message from the terminal; calculating the location of the terminal by performing a positioning process with the terminal; transmitting a session notification message including a notification element to the terminal when the location of the terminal is calculated; receiving a session notification response message including a notification response by the user of the terminal from the terminal; and transmitting the location of the terminal to a client who has requested the location of the terminal when the session notification response message is received. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279485 | Method and Apparatus for Network Imposed Packet Data Flow Control - A method and apparatus provide network-based flow control for mobile station having data connections to the network. In an exemplary embodiment, a Packet Control Function (PCF) in a Radio Access Network (RAN) requests that a Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN) in a Packet Core Network (PCN) turn flow control on and off as needed for mobile station data connections. That is, if the PCF receives data from the PDSN for delivery to a mobile station that the PCF determines to be unavailable, the PCF requests that data transfers from the PDSN be suspended for that mobile station. Such suspension avoids needless continued transfer of undeliverable data to the PCF. The PCF monitors or otherwise determines whether a flow-controlled mobile station has become available again and, if so, notifies the PDSN so that it can lift the suspension and resume data transfers as needed. | 11-12-2009 |
20090285156 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SCHEDULING SDMA CODEBOOKS - A method for scheduling an SDMA codebook includes: selecting, by a user, a most matching precoding matrix and a minimally interfering cluster in the SDMA codebook according to Channel State Information, CSI, of the user; calculating a data transmission rate supportable when the user undergoes interference caused by the minimally interfering cluster; and feeding back an index of the most matching precoding matrix, an index of the minimally interfering cluster, and the data transmission rate to a base station. An apparatus and system for scheduling an SDMA codebook is also provided. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285157 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VOICE CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A system is provided that provides a voice call service over a Circuit Switching (CS) domain to a User Equipment (UE) that was receiving a service in a Packet Switching (PS) domain. A Mobile Management Entity (MME) sends a paging message to the UE to provide a service in the CS domain. The MME sends a suspend request message requesting suspension of the service being provided to the UE in the PS domain, upon receiving a report message indicating that the UE has switched to the CS domain. A gateway suspends the service in the PS domain upon receiving the suspend request message from the MME. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285158 | DYNAMIC COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for dynamically varying coverage in a multi-carrier communication system are described. A sector may operate on multiple carriers. The sector may vary coverage on a given carrier k based on its load, so that less interference may be caused to other sectors when the sector load is light. In one design, the sector may communicate on a first carrier at a first transmit power level and on a second carrier at a second transmit power level equal to or lower than the first transmit power level. The sector may vary the second transmit power level based on its load to vary the coverage of the second carrier. The sector may reduce the second transmit power level to zero or a low level if the sector load is light. The sector may also vary the second transmit power level based on a function of sector load or a switching pattern. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285159 | LOAD BALANCING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for selecting a serving sector for a terminal based on server selection information in order to balance the load of sectors in a wireless communication system are described. The server selection information for each sector may be set based on the load of the sector and may be used to rank the sector for selection as a serving sector. In one design, a terminal may receive server selection information for multiple sectors. The server selection information for each sector may include an offset used to adjust a measurement made by the terminal for the sector, a priority of the sector for selection as a serving sector, a DRCLock set based on the load of the sector, etc. The terminal may determine received signal qualities of the sectors. The terminal may then select one of the sectors as a serving sector based on the server selection information and the received signal qualities of the sectors. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285160 | INCREASING RELIABILITY OF HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PROTOCOL - In a communication system using HARQ, the problem of false ACK detection when no ACK/NACK feedback is transmitted is solved sent by varying the reliability of the scheduling information transmitted to the user terminal on a downlink control channel depending on whether the user terminal is expected to use a first or second uplink channel for sending ACK/NACK feedback. When the user terminal is expected to use the first channel to send ACK/NACK feedback, the base station transmits scheduling information to the user terminal with normal reliability. When the user terminal is expected to send ACK/NACK feedback on the second uplink channel, the base station transmits the signaling information to the user terminal with enhanced reliability. The reliability of the signaling information can be increased, for example, by increasing the transmit power on the downlink control channel, increasing the aggregation level, or a combination thereof. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285161 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REPORTING EVENTS IN TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Methods and systems are provided for reporting to subscribers, wireless network events in a plurality of formats and languages depending upon the particular subscriber group to which a wireless subscriber belongs. When a subscriber requests a call, a switching node in the network invokes a trigger that identifies a location register for routing the call and sends a route request to the location register While processing the route request, if the location register detects an event that would prevent the call from being routed, the location register identifies the subscriber group of the wireless subscriber and determines a directory number associated with the identified subscriber group and the detected event. The location register then returns the determined directory number to the switching node Using the determined directory number, the switching node establishes the call to a message node, where a message associated with the determined directory number is executed. Accordingly, the wireless network reports the detected event in a format and language that the wireless subscriber, or an entity attempting to communicate with the wireless subscriber, can recognize. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285162 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND TERMINAL FOR LOCATING - A locating method is provided. The serving ASN-GW sends locating measurement information to a WiMAX terminal; the WiMAX terminal measures the locating data, and sends the locating data measurement result to the entity capable of calculating locating information; and the entity capable of calculating locating information calculates the locating information according to the locating data measurement result. A locating system, a locating data measurement entity, an LCF, and a calculation entity are also disclosed herein. The provided method, system and entity may provide a Locating Service (LCS) for the users in a WiMAX network. | 11-19-2009 |
20090290537 | Providing station context and mobility in a wireless local area network having a split MAC architecture - A method includes receiving a first frame at a wireless access node, the first frame being received through a first communication network and having a source address; applying a function (e.g., a hash function) to the source address to derive a destination address; encapsulating the first frame in a second frame that includes the destination address and a source address identifying the wireless access node; and sending the second frame to a second communication network for receipt by a destination node having the destination address. The destination node is an access controller that maintains state for a station that sends the first frame. The first communication network may be an IEEE 802.11 network, and the second communication network may be an IEEE 802.3 network. The address of the access controller is one of potentially many virtual MAC addresses associated with the access controller that enables an N:M relationship between a particular access node and a plurality of access controllers that may be clustered, and a N:1 relationship between a Station and a virtual access controller. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290538 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a control signal in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes acquiring a resource index, the number of cyclic shifts (CSs) and a CS interval, wherein the number of CSs is an integer multiple of the CS interval, determining a CS index based on the number of CSs and the CS interval, generating a cyclically shifted sequence by cyclically shifting a base sequence by a CS amount obtained from the CS index, generating a modulated sequence based on the cyclically shifted sequence and a symbol for a control signal and transmitting the modulated sequence after mapping the modulated sequence to a resource block obtained from the resource index. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290539 | Method and apparatus for home agent address acquisition for IPv4 mobile nodes - A method and apparatus for home agent address acquisition for IPv4 mobile nodes is provided. A method for device operation includes sending a request message to an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server, and receiving a reply message from the AAA server. The reply message contains an assigned Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) address of a home agent and the home agent is deployed with a dual stack mobile Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) function. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290540 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIPLEXING MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS IN MOBILE IP NETWORK - Disclosed are systems, methods and computer program products for facilitating multiplexing of simultaneous multiple connections between a mobile device and its IP mobility anchors, such as mobile IP home agents or proxy mobile IP local mobility anchors. An example method comprises assigning a unique IP mobility anchor identifier to each IP mobility anchor associated with the mobile device. The method further comprises negotiating an IP flow reservation for each IP mobility anchor identifier and signaling a request to associate each negotiated IP flow with an IP tunnel to a particular IP mobility anchor. The method further comprises sending packets through each negotiated IP flow and associated IP tunnel to each IP mobility anchor. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290541 | RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE AND CONTROL CHANNEL MCS CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a radio communication base station device capable of reducing a communication overhead by a control channel such as SCCH (Shared Control Channel). In this device, each encoding unit ( | 11-26-2009 |
20090290542 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A BEARER FOR A GSM NETWORK - A method for establishing a bearer for a GSM network is disclosed in embodiments of the present invention. The method includes: receiving, by a Media Gateway, a message for adding a wireless side end point, assigning an IP address and a port number for a call and transmitting a response message containing the IP address and the port number assigned for the call; acquiring, by the Media Gateway, the IP address and the port number assigned for the call by the Base Station Controller via the Mobile Switching Center Server and establishing an IP bearer with the Base Station Controller. A device and a system for establishing a bearer for a GSM network are also disclosed in embodiments of the present invention. With the present invention, a full or part path transcoder-free operation may be realized, which can avoid quality reduction and transmission delay. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290543 | Transmit and Receive Method for a Data Service - A method includes receiving a plurality of radio frequency (RF) channels in parallel at a receive site, and demodulating the RF channels using a plurality of demodulators of the receive site to generate a plurality of streams of packets, each stream of packets having a first address space. The method also includes combining the plurality of streams of packets at a tunneling destination of the receive site to generate a first stream of packets having a second address space. | 11-26-2009 |
20090296630 | Packet radio network and method - A packet radio network provides a facility for communicating internet packets to and/or from a mobile user equipment. The packet radio network comprises a gateway support node, a serving support node and a radio network part. The gateway support node is operable to provide a packet data protocol context for controlling the communication of the internet packets to and/or from the packet radio network from and/or to the mobile user equipment via a packet communications bearer. The serving support node is connected to the gateway support node and is operable to control communications of the internet packets to and from the gateway support node to and/or from mobile user equipment to form the packet communications bearer. The radio network part is operable to provide a radio access bearer for communicating the internet packets via a radio access interface to and/or from the mobile user equipment. In response to a packet data protocol activation request message requesting a common packet data protocol context, the serving support node is operable in combination with the gateway support node to establish a common packet data protocol context in association with a packet communications bearer. The common packet data protocol context is established to communicate internet protocol packets via the packet communications bearer according to an internet protocol version specified by the mobile user equipment for one or more communications sessions. The common packet data protocol context therefore provides more flexibility, because a mobile user equipment can send both IPv4 internet packets and IPv6 internet packets as specified by the mobile user equipment. Furthermore a packet radio network according to example embodiments is provided with an arrangement for sharing the same GPRS/UMTS session, using a common packet communications bearer including the high-speed broadband radio bearers. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296631 | SYNCHRONOUS DELIVERY METHOD - An aggregation device performs a synchronous processing so that a synchronous delivery may be made from a plurality of base stations through a broadcasting channel. A BSN ( | 12-03-2009 |
20090296632 | NOVEL DISTRIBUTED BASE STATION ARCHITECTURE - A novel distributed base station architecture having a multiplexer. The base station transmits base station controller interface data over an internet protocol (IP) communication channel. The multiplexer receives the data and combines it with other base station controller interface data to form a single base station controller interface data signal. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296633 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, DISTRIBUTION SERVER, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER AND MOBILE STATION - In a mobile communication system, a radio device is configured to transmit notification information transmitted from a distribution server, to a mobile station, by use of broadcast communication. The distribution server | 12-03-2009 |
20090296634 | Open and extensible framework for ubiquitous radio management and services in heterogeneous wireless networks - An open and extensible framework for ubiquitous radio management and services in heterogeneous wireless networks is disclosed. A radio interface manager abstracts interface attributes of multiple heterogeneous network interfaces into a set of abstracted attributes for access by one or more applications. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296635 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BASE STATIONS AND THEIR PROVISIONING, MANAGEMENT, AND NETWORKING - In wireless system, a group of Base station (BTSs) with smaller footprints have the capability to communicate with each other as well as with the BTSs with relatively larger footprints via wireless air-interfaces. One of such example is coordinated cell systems. A coordinated cell system comprises a group of coordinated cell base stations that have the capability to communicate with each other as well as with relevant macro cell or Pico cell base stations via wireless air-interfaces. Each coordinated cell BTS consists of an over the air control unit in addition to the conventional coordinated cell BTS system. A set of protocols in the form of messages and database are also defined to enable the networking capability. This enables enhancement in performing a variety of tasks by coordinated cell systems, including interference management and coordination, registration and authentication, quality of service coordination, installation and maintenance, location services, etc. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296636 | TRANSCEIVING APPARATUS AND DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION BASE STATIONS - A base station apparatus adaptive for antenna arrays including at least one radio frequency (RF) header module, at least one data processing apparatus, and transceiving apparatus for transceiving data between the at least one radio frequency (RF) header module and the at least one data processing apparatus. The transceiving apparatus includes an uplink module to group data received by the RF header module according to grouping configuration information, and to transfer the grouped data to the data processing apparatus; and a downlink module to degroup the data from the data processing apparatus according to the grouping configuration information, and to transfer the degrouped data to the RF header module. Also provided are methods of receiving and sending data, and a computer readable article of manufacture tangibly embodying computer readable instructions for executing a computer implemented method of sending and receiving data for a base station. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296637 | WIRELESS DEVICE AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA AND BUFFER STATUS REPORTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The method provides buffer status reporting for the transmission of uplink data from a wireless device to a base station. Uncompressed data is stored in a first buffer of the wireless device. A buffer status report is transmitted from the wireless device to the base station, where the buffer status report contains information indicating an amount of the uncompressed data to be transmitted from the wireless device. The information is dependent on the amount of the uncompressed data stored in the first buffer. | 12-03-2009 |
20090303921 | LOW COST MESH NETWORK CAPABILITY - A wireless device that utilizes a single network interface to simultaneously connect to an infrastructure network and a mesh network. The device has a driver layer with a media access control module for each network type. A multiplexing module and transceiver module within the driver can direct received information associated with one of the networks to an appropriate media access control and then to an appropriate network adapter. For transmitted data, the multiplexing module can receive data from the application layer through an appropriate network adapter and route it to an appropriate media access control module for processing. The processed data can be interleaved by the transceiver for transmission. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303922 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING A PLURALITY OF PACKETS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for communicating a plurality of packets in a communication network is provided. The method includes suppressing one or more portions of the plurality of packets based on a suppression rule in a central controller. Thereafter, each packet is transmitted from the central controller to one or more Mobile Stations (MSs) through one or more Base Stations (BSs). | 12-10-2009 |
20090303923 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTERRUPTING A TRANSMITTING DEVICE IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for interrupting a transmitting device during a call. In the system, calls are transmitted from a first device on a communication channel as a series of channel frames. At predetermined times during the transmission, the transmitting device is configured to drop channel frames, resulting in open channel frame periods where the transmitting device is not transmitting on the communication channel. During these open channel frame periods, the transmitting device is also configured to switch to a receiving mode. Other devices in the system are capable of switching into a transmitting mode during the open channel frame periods and, when applicable, sending an interrupt request on the communication channel to the transmitting device in order to request access to the channel. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303924 | PACKET DATA NETWORK SELECTION - According to an example embodiment, a method may include sending, by a mobile station in a wireless network, a dynamic service addition (DSA) message to a base station, the DSA message identifying a packet data network (PDN) by access point name (APN). The method may further include exchanging data with the indicated packet data network via the base station. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303925 | Method and Node for Providing a Quality of Service Support in Multihop Communication Systems - A method and apparatus according to the technique wherein support of a quality of service is provided for transmissions between at least one node (N) and at least one mobile station (MS | 12-10-2009 |
20090303926 | Proxy-bridge for connecting different types of devices - A proxy-bridge for connecting Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) compliant devices with Bluetooth (BT) compliant devices, and includes SSDP support for discovery of available UPnP compliant devices and services; a Bluetooth SDP client for discovery of available Bluetooth devices and available Bluetooth services and a Bluetooth SDP server for communicating with Bluetooth SDP clients in the available Bluetooth devices. The proxy-bridge has a converter for converting the discovered Bluetooth devices and services into associated UPnP device and service information, and the discovered UPnP compliant devices and services into associated Bluetooth device, service, and/or profile information. A device and service announcer advertises device availability at regular intervals. A UPnP adapter represents the Bluetooth devices towards the UPnP devices and a Bluetooth adapter represents the UPnP compliant devices towards the Bluetooth compliant devices. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303927 | Method and System for Controlling Discontinuous Reception/Transmission - A method, a network element, an apparatus and a system for controlling discontinuous reception/transmission during a discontinuous reception/transmission on-period in communication between a transmitter and a receiver, are provided. The control is based on certain well-defined measurements including at least one of the following: the number of bits that are currently in the buffer of the transmitter, the currently supported transport block set for the receiver and the average supported transport block set for the receiver. The measurements are performed at the transmitter in each predefined time interval. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303928 | Method for transmitting channel information in wireless communication system - A method for transmitting uplink channel information in a wireless communication system is provided. The method comprises transmitting an adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) band bitmap indicating at least one AMC band selected from a plurality of AMC bands with a first transmission period through a plurality of uplink control channels and transmitting a channel quality indicator (CQI) based on transmission of the AMC band bitmap with a second transmission period through any one of the plurality of uplink control channels. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303929 | Wireless Terminal Apparatus and Wireless Base Station Apparatus - Both a wireless terminal apparatus and wireless base station apparatus are provided that can, in an operation of encoding the control signals of the upstream link transmitted from the multiple terminal stations while encoding with regard to each of the terminal stations, increase a number of the terminal stations to which different codes are respectively assigned. A wireless terminal apparatus includes: an encoding information receiving portion receiving encoding information which is used at the wireless terminal apparatus from the base station; a phase-shifting unit which conducts a phase-shifting operation on a predetermined first code based on the encoding information; a code selection unit which, based on the received encoding information, selects a second code from multiple codes orthogonally crossing each other; and a control signal encoding portion which conducts an encoding operation on the control signal that is going to be transmitted to the base station by using both the first code on which the phase-shifting operation has been conducted and the second code. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303930 | WIRELESS NETWORKING SYSTEM AND METHOD - In a system comprising a first access point serving a first wireless network; and a neighbouring access point serving a neighbouring wireless network having coverage overlapping with the first wireless network, where the first access point and the neighbouring access point transmit beacon messages at beacon times that are temporally separated by predetermined beacon periods, a method of operating the system is disclosed, the method comprising: the first access point sending a first offer to the neighbouring access point, the first offer offering a period of silent time to the neighbouring access point during which period of silent time the first access point silences the first wireless network, the period of silent time being independent of the beacon times and the beacon periods. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303931 | Wireless communications connection control method - A wireless communications connection control method that enables flexible reconstruction of a wireless communications network system structure. The wireless communications connection control method comprising the steps of retaining in advance a node registration table in which the inter-node distance and node types are associated with each node; issuing a joining notification, together with the inter-node distance, in response to when a new node joins the wireless communications system; refreshing the node registration table according to the joining notification, determining whether it is necessary to change the node type based on the inter-node distance stored in the node registration table, and changing the node type stored in the node registration table when it is determined that the type needs to be refreshed. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303932 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING NETWORK-BASED CONTROL OF A FORWARDING POLICY USED BY A MOBILE NODE - A mobile node receives access network-specific signaling that is related to an Internet Protocol (IP) flow. The mobile node decides which of multiple access networks to use to send the IP flow based on the access network-specific signaling. The access network-specific signaling may be received from an access network, and the mobile node may interpret the access network-specific signaling as a command to send the IP flow over that access network. The mobile node may update a forwarding policy at the mobile node to indicate that the IP flow should be sent over that access network. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303933 | METHOD AND A TRANSCEIVER FOR TRANSMITTING DATA - The present invention provides a method for transmitting data and a transceiver. In one embodiment, the method includes: (1) generating data blocks of a data package in a first transceiver to transmit to a second transceiver, the first transceiver including a micro-controller coupled to a digital signal processor, (2) generating identification data in the first transceiver for the data blocks, wherein the identification data is an index of a list of the data blocks to be transmitted and each of the data blocks is transmitted with the index and (3) identifying the data blocks to be transmitted to the second transceiver based on the identification data, wherein the microcontroller employs the index to manage transmission of the data blocks. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303934 | DIRECT WIRELESS CLIENT TO CLIENT COMMUNICATION - A wireless station is connected to a wireless network through an access point and can establish a direct client-to-client connection to a second wireless station. The wireless station can communicate directly with the second wireless station without involving the access point. The wireless station communicates with the wired network and with other wireless stations through the access point. The second wireless station may have an infrastructure connection to the access point or may be independent. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303935 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF USING SMART ANTENNAS FOR BACKHAULING - A method and system for utilizing smart antenna in transmission of messages between nodes are disclosed. A wireless communication system includes a plurality of nodes, and each node is capable of being connected to each other node. At least a portion of the nodes are provided with a smart antenna configured to generate a plurality of directional beams. Each node maintains a list of other nodes and beam configuration information to be used in transmission of messages to other nodes. When a source node is required to transmit to a target node, the source node retrieves the beam configuration information and transmits with a directional beam directed to the target node. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303936 | MOBILE TERMINAL, CONTROL APPARATUS, HOME AGENT AND PACKET COMMUNICATIONS METHOD - In a packet communications system, a control apparatus implements routing control of a received packet directed for the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal includes a plurality of network interface cards; a communication manager configured to select at least one network interface card among from the plurality of network interface cards, in accordance with information regarding the network interface card; and an upper layer manager configured to receive the packet transmitted from the control apparatus, with using a selected network interface card. | 12-10-2009 |
20090310532 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING AN ADDRESS ASSOCIATED WITH A NEIGHBOURING CELL OF A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network element ( | 12-17-2009 |
20090310533 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT OVERHEAD IMPROVEMENTS - An apparatus comprising a controller configured to pack a plurality of Service Data Units (SDUs) from a plurality of connections associated with a Mobile Station (MS) into a single Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (PDU). In various embodiments, the controller may be further configured to generate a Generic MAC Header (GMH) that indicates that a plurality of Service Data Units (SDUs) from a plurality of connections associated with a Mobile Station (MS) have been packed into the MAC PDU. In some embodiments, the controller may be further configured to generate, for each SDU, an associated Extended Packing Sub-Header (EPSH). The apparatus further comprising a memory configured to store MAC PDU. The apparatus also comprising a wireless transceiver configured to transmit the MAC PDU. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310534 | Medium Access Control Discard Notification - A method is provided for a base station set (NODE B) adapted for RLC and MAC-hs signaling in acknowledged mode (AM), the base station set at least forwarding protocol data units (MAC-d PDU) from a Radio Network controller (RNC) to a user entity (UE), the method comprising the steps of monitoring ( | 12-17-2009 |
20090310535 | Unifying Virtualizations in a Core Network and a Wireless Access Network - To unify virtualizations in a core network and a wireless access network a virtual wireless network is mapped to a virtual network in the core network. Based on the mapping, data associated with a communications session can be communicated through the virtual wireless network and core virtual network. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310536 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CHANNEL ERROR CONTROL OF NON-EXCLUSIVE MULTIPLEXING FOR CONTROL CHANNELS - An apparatus and method for non-exclusive multiplexing of at least one active control channel comprising preparing the at least one active control channel for transmission in a next frame using a transmitter data processor; assessing channel robustness of the at least one active control channel based on a channel robustness threshold; and if the channel robustness threshold is not met, performing constellation control or power control on the at least one active control channel which is active prior to transmitting the at least one active control channel; or if the channel robustness threshold is met, transmitting the at least one active control channel using a transmitter. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310537 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE SIZE ALLOCATED TO A FIELD IN THE HEADER OF A PACKET BASED ON THE LENGTH OF THE PACKET PAYLOAD - The invention relates to a method of transmitting a data signal in a wireless communication system fro m a primary station to a secondary station, said data signal comprising a medium access control header (MAC-hs header) and a protocol data unit associated with said medium access control header, said medium access control header comprising a set of fields (TSN, SEG, LI, LCid), wherein said method comprises determining a size allocated to at least one field of the set on the basis of a length of the protocol data unit. For example, the size allocated to a segmentation indication field (SEG) determined for a first length of the protocol data unit is lower than the one determined for a second length of the protocol data unit, said second length being higher than said first length, said segmentation indication indicating in how many segments the protocol data unit is subdivided. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310538 | METHOD FOR CONSTRUCTING DATA FORMAT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND TERMINAL THEREOF - A method for transmitting downlink data to a mobile terminal is disclosed. The mobile terminal receives a particular common H-RNTI (HS-DSCH Radio Network Identifier) via an HS-SCCH (High Speed-Shared Control Channel) associated with an HS-DSCH (High Speed-Downlink Shared Channel), recognizes whether a header of a MAC (Medium Access Control) PDU (Packet Data Unit) transmitted by the HS-DSCH includes a terminal-exclusive identifier, acquires the terminal-exclusive identifier, and processes the MAC PDU as its own if the acquired terminal-exclusive identifier is intended for the terminal itself. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310539 | ESTABLISHING A SESSION IN A PACKET SWITCHED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A packet-switched wireless communications network includes a mobile station and a radio network controller that are able to establish a radio connection therebetween. Messages are exchanges over one or more traffic channels to establish a packet-switched services session between the mobile station and the radio network controller. The radio connection is not closed until all messages for establishing the packet-switched services session have been exchanged between the mobile station and the radio network controller. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310540 | INTERLEAVING DATA OVER FRAMES COMMUNICATED IN A WIRELESS CHANNEL - A mobile communications system includes a radio access network, such as an Enhanced General Packet Radio Service (EGPRS) network, in which mobile stations are able to enter into a discontinuous transmission (DTX) mode. During DTX mode of a first mobile station that is allocated a channel portion (e.g., a time slot of a frame), the radio access network is able to multiplex traffic from another mobile station onto the same channel portion. A mechanism is provided to enable the first mobile station to send a request for re-allocation of the channel portion. The request includes a real-time fast access associated control channel (RTFACCH) resource request message (RTRRM). In response to the RTRRM, the radio access network sends an RTFACCH resource assignment message (RTUAM). An interleaving scheme is also provided for half-rate mobile stations, in which one set of traffic frames are interleaved over plural bursts according to a first algorithm and a second set of traffic frames are interleaved over plural bursts according to a second algorithm. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310541 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RELAY DEVICE - A communication system, including: a first mobile station; a first node; a first QoS server; a second mobile station; and a second QoS server, wherein the first node includes a first transfer unit which receives a QoS request for requesting to set a QoS channel from the first mobile station and transfers the QoS request to the first QoS server; and a management unit which instructs the first QoS server to transfer the QoS request if it is judged that the second mobile station is accommodated, the first transfer unit transfers the QoS request to the second QoS server based on the instruction from the management unit, and the second QoS server includes a QoS setting message output unit which outputs a QoS setting message to instruct setting of a QoS channel to said second mobile station based on the QoS request. | 12-17-2009 |
20090316622 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING PACKET FORWARDING, AND COMMUNICATION MODE - A technology is disclosed for reducing the number of encapsulations required when MAP forwards a packet to a mobile node which is layered within mobile networks, with mobile networks nested and multiple mobile routers chained behind MAP (Mobility Anchor Point). When a node | 12-24-2009 |
20090316623 | METHODS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND MOBILE ROUTERS FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS FROM A MOVING NETWORK TO A HOME NETWORK OF THE MOVING NETWORK - The present invention aims at making it possible for a data packet originating from a mobile network node ( | 12-24-2009 |
20090316624 | Monitoring and influencing the behavior and status of wireless sensor networks - Monitoring the status and behavior in a wireless network is provided. In a wireless network of operational nodes, one or more monitoring nodes are embedded in the network to monitor the status and behavior of the network without unintentionally disturbing the network. The monitoring nodes receive state information from the operational nodes. The operational nodes can be nodes in a wireless sensor network or a broadcast-only distributed wireless network. State information is sent in small state messages during the idle period of the communication frame of the operational node to be received by monitoring nodes. Transmission of state messages in the idle period for monitoring purposes does not disturb communication between operational nodes and can be energy efficient. The monitoring nodes can also intercept communications between operational nodes. Providing feedback to and influencing operational nodes are also provided. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316625 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING ADAPTIVE MOBILE CLUSTER NETWORK - The invention discloses a method of establishing an adaptive mobile cluster network. The method comprises the steps of: (a) determining a network service requested by a mobile communication device; (b) according to the requested network service, determining at least one communication parameter needed by the mobile communication device; (c) according to the needed communication parameter, selecting a header device from a plurality of wireless communication devices by the communication device; (d) selecting a plurality of agent devices from the remaining wireless communication devices by the header device; and (e) selecting a plurality of normal devices from the remaining wireless communication devices by the agent devices, so as to establish the adaptive mobile cluster network. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316626 | Method for transmitting uplink signals - A method of transmitting uplink signals is disclosed. The method includes transmitting, by a user equipment, periodic control information on a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) at a predetermined period, dropping the periodic control information and multiplexing uplink signals except the periodic control information when the user equipment is operating in subframe bundling transmission mode where the uplink signals are transmitted in a plurality of consecutive subframes, and transmitting the multiplexed uplink signals on a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH). | 12-24-2009 |
20090316627 | Uplink modulation and receiver structures for asymmetric OFDMA systems - The present invention centers upon uplink communication protocols for use primarily with orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) communication systems. Aspects of the invention relate to narrow band frequency division multiplexed (NBFDM) modulation protocols primarily for uplink usage in asymmetric OFDMA communication systems. In particular, NBFDM uplinks that use quadrature multiplexed continuous phase modulation are detailed and noncoherent detection schemes are developed to process the uplink channel signals without the need to transmit uplink phase reference signals. Other aspects of the invention relate to burst mode uplink communications in OFDMA systems such as those involving opportunistic beamforming. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316628 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS PROCESS COMMUNICATION OVER DISTINCT NETWORKS - A dual-mode router for conveying process communication packets across a plurality of distinct wireless process communication networks is provided. The router includes wireless communication circuitry and a controller coupled to the wireless communication circuitry. The wireless communication circuitry is configured to interact with signals from each of the plurality of distinct wireless process communication networks. The controller is configured to adapt process communication packets from a first distinct wireless process communication network for transmission over a second distinct wireless process communication network. Methods for configuring the distinct wireless process communication networks and relaying process packets over the distinct wireless process communication networks are also provided. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316629 | CONCENTRATOR FOR MULTIPLEXING ACCESS POINT TO WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate multiplexing communications from multiple downstream access points to one or more mobility management entities (MME). In particular, a concentrator component is provided that can establish a single transport layer connection with an MME along with multiple application layer connections over the single transport layer connection for each of multiple downstream access points and/or related mobile devices. The downstream access points and/or mobile devices can provide identifiers, such as tracking identifiers, to the concentrator component, which can utilize the identifiers to track communications with the MME. In this regard, the MME can send paging messages, and the concentrator component can determine downstream access points related to the paging messages based on a stored association with a tracking identifier in the paging message. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316630 | RADIO COMMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - A mobile station device transmits a random access preamble to a base station device and performs uplink timing alignment based on the synchronization timing deviation information included in a random access response which the base station device transmits in response to the transmitted random access preamble, wherein in an uplink synchronous status, the mobile station device does not perform uplink timing alignment based on synchronization timing deviation information included in a random access response, which is a response to a random access preamble whose preamble ID is randomly selected by the mobile station device. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316631 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - To prevent a collision from occurring at the time of random access in cases such as handover, response to paging and the like where a mobile station apparatus performs random access in response to directions from a base station apparatus. In a mobile communication system in which a mobile station apparatus | 12-24-2009 |
20090323584 | Method and Apparatus for Parallel Processing Protocol Data Units - An apparatus for processing a protocol data unit (PDU) includes a transmit (TX) module, a physical layer controller (PHY), and a reception (RX) module. The TX module is configured to receive a transmit descriptor that comprises a plurality of fields, wherein the fields contain information for preparing a first PDU. The PHY is configured to receive at least a portion of a second PDU into a reception (RX) physical-layer queue, the second PDU having a header. The RX module is configured to receive a receive descriptor, wherein the receive descriptor includes a plurality of fields having information for processing the second PDU. The RX module is further configured to process the second PDU according to the receive descriptor in parallel with the TX module processing the first PDU based on the transmit descriptor. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323585 | Concurrent Processing of Multiple Bursts - An apparatus includes a physical layer controller (PHY) and a media access control coprocessor (MPC). The PHY includes a plurality of physical-layer queues, wherein each of the plurality of physical-layer queues is associated with one of a plurality of bursts, wherein each of the plurality of bursts includes one or more protocol data units (PDUs). The MPC is configured to receive a first PDU associated with a first burst of the plurality of bursts and write the first PDU of the first burst to a first physical-layer queue of the plurality of physical-layer queues. The MPC is further configured to receive a second PDU and determine that the second PDU is associated with a second burst of the plurality of bursts. The MPC also being configured to write the second PDU to a second physical-layer queue, wherein the second physical-layer queue is associated with the second burst. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323586 | USER INTERFACE BASED ON MAGNETIC INDUCTION - A receiving and transmitting node for a wireless data network, and a wireless data network based on magnetic induction. The receiving node includes an antenna receive module for receiving one or more data signals emitted from the transmitting node and a calculation module adapted to calculate one or more distances between the receiving node and the transmitting node, and/or adapted to calculate the position of the transmitting node in relation to the position of the receiving node, and/or adapted to calculate the orientation of the transmitting node in relation to the orientation of the receiving node. The reception of the data signal is based on magnetic induction and the calculation of the one or more distances, and the position of the transmitting node and/or the orientation of the transmitting node is based on the one or more data signals. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323587 | Method and System for Dual Mode Operation in Wireless Networks - Aspects of a method and system for dual mode operation in wireless networks are presented. Aspects of the system include a communicating device that selects an RF channel and a physical layer type. The communicating device may process signals received via the selected RF channel based on the selected physical layer type. The communicating device may determine whether a beacon frame has been detected base on the signals that were received via the selected RF channel and processed based on the selected physical layer type. When a frame is not detected, the communicating device may determine a signal energy level for the received signals. The communicating device may establish an association with an existing network based on detection of the beacon frame or the communicating device may transmit an originating beacon frame based on the determined signal energy level. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323588 | SIGNALING FOR MULTI-USER REUSING ONE SLOT (MUROS) OPERATION IN GSM - Methods and apparatus for improved Multiple Users Reusing One Slot (MUROS) operation include two or more wireless transmit/receive units (WTRU) multiplexed onto multiple sub-channels in a single timeslot. Addressing information included in layer two headers, Radio Resource Control (RRC) messages, and layer one parameters in a SACCH/FACCH transmission indicate that the transmission is intended for a particular WTRU. A FACCH transmission may be sent on a sub-channel reserved for another WTRU. Stealing bits in a voice frame may be set to indicate that the FACCH transmission is intended for a WTRU on the sub-channel reserved for another WTRU. Different WTRUs in a multiplexed group may be configured to decode layer one parameters in a SAACH according to alternating patterns. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323589 | RADIO FREQUENCY LOCAL AREA NETWORK - An apparatus and a method for routing data in a radio data communication system having one or more host computers, one or more intermediate base stations, and one or more RF terminals organizes the intermediate base stations into an optimal spanning-tree network to control the routing of data to and from the RF terminals and the host computer efficiently and dynamically. Communication between the host computer and the RF terminals is achieved by using the network of intermediate base stations to transmit the data. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323590 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MANAGEMENT SERVER, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system includes a plurality of base stations and a management server. Each base station includes: a carrier sensing unit which performs carrier sensing for other base stations; a list generating unit which generates a monitor list including a difference in frame timing between the base station and each other base station; and a base station transmitter which transmits the monitor list. The management server includes: a management receiver which receives the monitor lists; a calculation unit which calculates a shift amount by which the frame timing of a target base station is to be shifted, based on the monitor lists; and a shift instructing unit which instructs to shift the frame timing of the target base station by the shift amount if the differences in frame timing among the base stations when reflecting the shift amount is improved from those before reflecting the shift amount. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323591 | Receiving Apparatus, Receiving Method and Wireless Communication System - A receiving apparatus is provided which includes a receiving unit to receive a radio signal, a transfer function estimation unit to estimate a transfer function of a communication path of the radio signal, and a cross-correlation calculation unit to calculate cross-correlation between a synchronous signal contained in a radio signal received by the receiving unit and a known synchronous signal multiplied by the transfer function estimated by the transfer function estimation unit. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323592 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING DATA TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS AND CONTROLLING H-ARQ PROCESSES - In a wireless communication system including a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) which transfers data to a Node-B, data transmission parameters such as modulation and coding scheme (MCS) and transport block set (TBS) size are dynamically adjusted on a transmission time interval (TTI) basis, and hybrid-automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) processes used to control the transfer of data between the WTRU and the Node-B are initiated and released, as required. The WTRU transmits and retransmits data to the Node-B through an enhanced uplink (EU) dedicated channel (E-DCH) in accordance with data feedback information received from the Node-B. The WTRU queues data for transmission, and determines a transmission status of the data. The transmission status is set to one of “new transmission,” “successful transmission,” “retransmission” and “restarted transmission.” For each TTI, the WTRU initiates an EU transmission to the Node-B which identifies the assigned H-ARQ process, TBS size and MCS. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323593 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OVER-THE-AIR SUBSCRIPTIONS - Methods and apparatus for over-the-air (OTA) subscriptions. A method is provided for performing over-the-air subscriptions in a data network. The method comprises establishing an overhead notification mechanism, and transmitting a package database to a device using the overhead notification mechanism, wherein the package database identifies one or more service packages. The method also comprises receiving a request from the device to subscribe to one or more selected service packages. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323594 | WIRELESS MAC LAYER THROUGHPUT IMPROVEMENTS - Methods, apparatuses, and systems are presented for transmitting data packets in a wireless network over a multi-access channel involving sequentially sending a plurality of medium access control (MAC) data packets from a transmitter over the multi-access channel, using a physical layer protocol based on a standard physical layer protocol having a short interframe spacing (SIFS), wherein the plurality of MAC data packets includes at least a first data packet and a second data packet separated by a reduced interframe spacing that is less than SIFS, attempting to receive the plurality of MAC data packets at a receiver using the physical layer protocol, including the first data packet and the second data packet separated by the reduced interframe spacing, and sending from the receiver a single acknowledgement packet associated with attempting to receive the plurality of MAC data packets. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323595 | Wireless Switched Network - An access point in a wireless network includes an external indication of the access point's proximity to another access point. The external indication can be a LED that blinks at a rate that is related to the proximity of the access point to the other access point. An access point is also capable of producing a network map that indicates the access point's proximity relative to other access points that are coupled to the network. The access point is further capable of monitoring wireless network traffic to ascertain whether wireless network traffic has exceeded a threshold, and if so, releasing some client devices so that wireless network traffic no longer exceeds the threshold. The access point is also capable of automatically choosing one of a plurality of radio frequencies on which to operate. The access point chooses a frequency after evaluating frequencies on which other access points may be operating. | 12-31-2009 |
20100002624 | Wireless Communication Network System and Method - A system for wireless communication network is disclosed. The system includes several nodes and at least a gateway. Each of the nodes includes several first wireless network interface. Each of the first interfaces utilizes one of channels to send, receive or forward signals. Wherein the first interfaces of the same node utilize different and non-overlapping channels to send, receive or forward the signals at the same time. Each of the gateways includes a network interface and several second wireless network interfaces. The network interface connects to the Internet to receive or forward the signals. Each of the second wireless network interfaces utilizes one of the channels to receive or forward the signals. Wherein the second wireless network interfaces of the same gateway utilize different and non-overlapping channels to receive or forward the signals at the same time. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002625 | METHOD OF CONNECTING A CLIENT ON A MOVING CARRIER WIRELESSLY TO ONE OR MORE ACCESS POINTS - A method of connecting a client on a moving carrier wirelessly to any stationary access point in a list of stationary access points in a predetermined order. The method includes authenticating the client to a first stationary access point in the list of stationary access points. The method includes identifying the client as an authenticated client and informing other access points in the list of stationary access points with respect to the authenticated client. The method includes bypassing an authenticating process when establishing network connections between the authenticated client and one of the other stationary access points. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002626 | ENTERPRISE MOBILE NETWORK FOR PROVIDING CELLULAR WIRELESS SERVICE USING LICENSED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND INTERNET PROTOCOL BACKHAUL - One embodiment is directed to an enterprise mobile network for providing wireless service within a coverage area associated with an enterprise using licensed radio frequency spectrum. The enterprise mobile network includes a base station subsystem deployed on a premises of the enterprise to provide wireless capacity within the coverage area using the licensed radio frequency spectrum. The enterprise mobile network further includes a mobile switching subsystem deployed in an office of a service provider that operates a public land mobile network. The mobile switching subsystem is communicatively coupled to the public land mobile network. The base station subsystem is communicatively coupled to the mobile switching subsystem using an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The mobile switching subsystem is configured to function as a mobile switching center (MSC) and visitor location register (VLR) for roaming subscribers and local subscribers of the enterprise. The mobile switching subsystem is configured to function as a home location register (HLR) and gateway mobile switching center (GMSC) for local subscribers of the enterprise. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002627 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USE OF A SHORT BEACON IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for use of a short beacon in a wireless communication network is disclosed. In one embodiment, the method comprises generating a short beacon comprising PHY information, wherein the short beacon excludes MAC information and transmitting the short beacon via the wireless network. In general, three types of short beacons are disclosed, a first type consisting only of a PHY preamble, a second type also including a PHY header, and a third type also including a MAC header. In addition, the scheme of common beacons and individual beacons is described. Common beacons are broadcast omni-directional at the beginning of each superframe with low data rate and individual beacons are unicast to individual devices directionally with high data rate. A common beacon contains information intended for all of the devices of the network. An individual beacon contains information intended for one particular device. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002628 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF DATA - A method of transmitting packets ( | 01-07-2010 |
20100002629 | System and Method for Mobility Restriction in Wireless Communications Systems - A system and method for mobility restriction in wireless communications systems is provided. A method for base station operations includes receiving a request for service from a terminal, sending a request for authorization of the terminal to a controller, receiving in response to the request for authorization, an indication that the terminal is authorized, and granting access to the terminal. The indication includes a mobility restriction classification associated with the terminal. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002630 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING NDI IN RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE AND A METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A SIGNAL USING THE SAME - A method for processing NDI in a random access procedure and a method for transmitting and receiving a signal using the same are disclosed. The method for transmitting an uplink signal from a user equipment (UE) to a base station comprises receiving a first uplink (UL) grant signal through a message identified by a temporary cell identifier (Temporary C-RNTI) from a base station, the first uplink grant signal including a new data indicator (NDI) toggled if the base station indicates new transmission; receiving a second uplink grant signal through a downlink control channel identified by a cell identifier (C-RNTI) from the base station, the second uplink grant signal including a new data indicator (NDI) with a predetermined value; and determining uplink signal retransmission of the user equipment depending on whether the NDI of the second uplink grant signal has been toggled, wherein the UE ignores the NDI received using the temporary cell identifier. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002631 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR NOTIFYING CHANGE OF SYSTEM CONTROL INFORMATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for notifying a change of system control information in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes, changing a Group Configuration Change Counter (GCCC) and upon change of a Secondary-Super Frame Header/Sub-Packet1 (S-SFH/SP1) whose transmission period is changeable within a range of one or more super frames, changing the GCCC and information representing the change of the common control message upon change of at least one common control message, and transmitting the GCCC and the information representing the change of the at least one common control message. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002632 | PACKET SCHEDULER AND PACKET SCHEDULING METHOD - A method for scheduling packets from a plurality of radio bearers by a scheduler of a first layer includes calculating a virtual scheduling time for the radio bearers by using a packet delay variation of the radio bearers, and transmitting the packet of the radio bearer having the greatest virtual scheduling time from among the plurality of radio bearers to a second layer. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002633 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, ACCESS DEVICE, AND GATEWAY INFORMATION STORAGE DEVICE - A gateway information storage device ( | 01-07-2010 |
20100002634 | Mobile IP Communication System, Mobile IP Communication Apparatus, And Mobile IP Communication Method - A communication system includes mobile IP communication apparatuses in an access service network and having proxy mobile IP client functioning units, foreign agent functioning units, and DHCP proxy functioning units, which have a common IP address. The DHCP proxy functioning unit of a first mobile IP communication apparatus, connected with a mobile station before movement, reports information about the mobile station to a second mobile IP communication apparatus connected with the mobile station after movement. The DHCP proxy functioning unit of the second mobile IP communication apparatus receives the information about the mobile station and further receives from the mobile station, an update message addressed to the common IP address, executes an IP address update process based on the information about the mobile station, and reports an update result to the proxy mobile IP client functioning unit and the foreign agent functioning unit in the second mobile IP communication apparatus. | 01-07-2010 |
20100008290 | CELL SITE CONTENT CACHING - Systems, apparatus, methods, and manufactures for caching content at a communications services cell site which include caching previously provided content and/or predictively caching content. Content may be transmitted to cell sites for caching via primary or ancillary channels. Ancillary channels may be provided through a broadcast medium such as the ancillary or supplementary services spectrum of the digital television (DTV) spectrum. Content may also be broadcast to multiple cell sites simultaneously. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008291 | Cognitive wireless system - A cognitive mobile wireless system is disclosed that enhances connectivity of a mobile device moving among heterogeneous networks, by selecting advantangeous links. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008292 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING A TRAFFIC FLOW TEMPLATE - A system and method for configuring a Traffic Flow Template, TFT, in real time. The present invention dynamically adapts the TFT to control the routing of downlink data packets from a GGSN to an MS. When the MS sends an uplink data packet on a premium bearer channel, a TFT controller extracts from the uplink data packet, parameters which include at least the destination address of the uplink data packet. A downlink packet filter subset for filtering downlink data packets is then defined as a function of the extracted parameters. For example, the downlink packet filter subset may identify downlink data packets having a source address that matches the destination address of the uplink data packet. The TFT is then modified as a function of the downlink packet filter subset to route the identified downlink packets through the premium bearer channel to the MS, and to route differently, downlink data packets having source addresses that do not match the destination address of the uplink data packet. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008293 | X2 INTERFACES FOR ACCESS POINT BASE STATIONS IN SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORKS (SON) - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate leveraging an X2-AP interface for data exchange between an access terminal and a Home access terminal. Based upon a received request from a Home access terminal, the access terminal can activate an X2-AP interface connection on demand over Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) based upon a maximum number of connections not being met and/or a timer evaluation that indicates the request is within an allowed time period. The capacity of the access terminal related to the amount of X2-AP connections can be managed based upon at least one of a timer evaluation, or a maximum number of X2-AP connections. The systems and methodologies provide an optimal and efficient technique in order to enable data to be exchanged between an access terminal and a Home access terminal utilizing an X2-AP interface. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008294 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION FOR INTER-CELL DECODING AND INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - Techniques for supporting data transmission on the uplink in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, a user equipment (UE) may send a data transmission to a serving base station and may send uplink control information (UCI) to a non-serving base station. The UCI may include pertinent information to allow the non-serving base station to process the data transmission from the UE. In one design, the UCI may allow the non-serving base station to estimate the interference due to the data transmission from the UE and to cancel the interference at the non-serving base station. The interference cancellation may improve the received signal quality at the non-serving base station. After the interference cancellation, the non-serving base station may process a data transmission from another UE served by the base station. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008295 | CANDIDATE SET MANAGEMENT IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Techniques for managing candidate sets for a user equipment (UE) are described. In an aspect, multiple candidate sets of cells of different classes may be maintained for the UE. Each candidate set may include cells of a particular class. As some examples, the multiple candidate sets may be for cells of different transmit power levels, cells of different association types, cells associated with different resources, etc. The multiple candidate sets may be maintained separately based on applicable criteria and rules. The multiple candidate sets may be used to select a serving cell for the UE and/or for other communication purposes for the UE. In another aspect, one or more candidate sets may be maintained for the UE and may be used for multiple communication purposes for the UE. The multiple communication purposes may include server selection, interference management, measurement reporting, etc. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008296 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOWING DEVICE SUPPORTING MULTIPLE PHY COMMUNICATION MODE TO COMMUNICATE WITH DEVICE IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is an operation method of a wireless personal area network (WPAN) device. In the wireless personal area network (WPAN) device, the WPAN device supporting a plurality of physical layer (PHY) communication modes determines timing for changing a PHY communication mode, with reference to a beacon frame, in order to communicate with devices using various PHY communication modes, and transmits information indicating a PHY communication mode as a parameter of a primitive to a PHY layer, at the determined timing. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008297 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING COEXISTENCE BEACON PROTOCOL PACKET IN COGNITIVE RADIO BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of and apparatus for operating a Coexistence Beacon Protocol (CBP) packet transmitter in a Cognitive Radio (CR)-based wireless communication system is provided. The method includes, identifying a Self-Coexistence Window (SCW) regular pattern of neighbor Wireless Regional Area Networks (WRANs), if vacant SCW slots are not periodically occurring, selecting a WRAN as a contender among the neighbor WRANs, performing a contention for transmitting the CBP packet with the contender within SCW slots that are occupied by the WRAN, and configuring an SCW usage pattern so that an SCW usage period of the CBP packet sender is double that of an SCW usage period of the contender when winning in the contention. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008298 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS CONTROLLER, AND EXTENSION TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SERVER DEVICE SELECTING METHOD - An appropriate selection is controlled for selecting an extension transmitting/receiving server device for transmitting or receiving user data, to be transmitted or received between mobile station devices, to or from a radio base station device by employing extension transmission or reception of data, in a radio access network relaying data between a core network having a mobile switch station and the mobile station devices. While referring to a management table for managing statuses of extension transmitting/receiving server devices | 01-14-2010 |
20100008299 | IP CONVERGED MOBILE ACCESS GATEWAY FOR 3G MOBILE SERVICE AND SERVICE METHOD USING THE SAME - Provided are an Internet protocol (IP) converged mobile access gateway for a 3rd generation (3G) mobile service and a service method using the same. The IP converged mobile access gateway including: an access controller adapted to exchange a control signal with the base station and perform mobility control for the terminal and session control for a service request; a transport controller adapted to perform routing database information management and routing protocol processing for packet routing; and a transport executor adapted to set a tunnel with the base station for user data transmission according to control information sent from the access controller, configure a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) for a logical connection with the terminal, and interwork with the transport controller to perform packet routing and forwarding. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008300 | ROUTING OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND MESSAGE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM BASED ON PROXY MOBILE AGENT - A routing optimization method includes: establishing a routing optimization proxy binding relationship between a proxy mobile agent (PMA) of a mobile node and a PMA of a correspondent node; controlling, by the PMA of the mobile node, according to the established routing optimization proxy binding relationship, routing of a message to be transmitted. And a message transmission system based on a PMA is also provided, which includes: a proxy binding control unit, configured to establish a routing optimization proxy binding relationship with a PMA of a correspondent node; and a routing control unit, configured to control routing of a message to be transmitted based on the established routing optimization proxy binding relationship. With the present invention, it may raise the communication efficiency for various nodes in the proxy mobile IP architecture and improve the routing performance. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008301 | Radio Transmitting Apparatus, Radio Receiving Apparatus, and Radio Transmission Method - The degree of multiplexing of a code division multiplexed signal transmitted by subcarriers is selected on a subcarrier-by-subcarrier basis. As a result, inter-code interference on the propagation path and degradation on the propagation path are lower for a code division multiplexed signal allocated to subcarriers with a low degree of signal multiplexing (G | 01-14-2010 |
20100008302 | System for mobile broadband networking using dynamic quality of service provisioning - A wireless networking system uses mobile and fixed transceivers to achieve a network with changing topology. A routing process includes quality-of-service considerations in the network to allow for features such as file or other data transfer, streaming audio and video, digital telephone communications, etc. The routing process adapts to transceiver units entering, leaving, or moving within, the network. Auxiliary networks such as the Internet, campus or corporate intranets, home networks, etc., can be accessed through the wireless network. Features, designs and user interfaces for the units are described. Security and access control of media content and other data is presented. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008303 | Method for setting user equipment identifier in radio communication system - The present invention is directed to a method for setting a user equipment identifier as user equipment identification information used when data received through a dedicated logical channel is transmitted through a common transport channel. The method includes transmitting data and a message type indicator as user equipment identification information from a RRC layer to an RLC layer; setting a user equipment identifier indicator according to the received message type indicator in the RLC layer and transmitting it with the data to a MAC layer; and selecting a user equipment identifier type and a user equipment identifier according to the set user equipment indication identifier, adding it to a header of a MAC SDU in the MAC layer and transmitting it to a corresponding MAC layer in a receiving device. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008304 | Method for setting user equipment identifier in radio communication system - The present invention is directed to a method for setting a user equipment identifier as user equipment identification information used when data received through a dedicated logical channel is transmitted through a common transport channel. The method includes transmitting data and a message type indicator as user equipment identification information from a RRC layer to an RLC layer; setting a user equipment identifier indicator according to the received message type indicator in the RLC layer and transmitting it with the data to a MAC layer; and selecting a user equipment identifier type and a user equipment identifier according to the set user equipment indication identifier, adding it to a header of a MAC SDU in the MAC layer and transmitting it to a corresponding MAC layer in a receiving device. | 01-14-2010 |
20100014454 | Method of Cell Reselection in a Wireless Telecommunications Device Operative With a Plurality of Radio Access Networks - Apparatus and a method of cell reselection in a wireless telecommunications device operative with a plurality of radio access networks are disclosed. The method comprises, when the device is camped on a first radio access network: ranking cells in a neighbouring list according to cell reselection criteria; considering for cell reselection a cell in the neighbouring list; when the cell in the list is a cell of a second radio access network different from the first radio access network, applying an algorithm for cell reselection from the second radio access network to the first radio access network; and when the algorithm as applied would result in reselection to the first radio access network, considering for cell reselection another cell in the list. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014455 | ACCESS NETWORK SELECTION - A network, computer readable medium, and method for ranking a plurality of available access networks by a provider, the provider serving a user equipment and the user equipment being configured to connect to at least one of the plurality of available access networks. The method includes receiving a selection request at a selection entity of the provider, where the selection request includes a vector parameter P that includes required characteristics of a data flow for the user equipment, sending from the selection entity a capability request, including the vector parameter P, to the plurality of available access networks, receiving at the selection entity a capability response from the plurality of available access networks, wherein each capability response includes a normalized value expressing a capability of a corresponding available access network to provide the required characteristics of the data flow, and generating a ranking list of the available access networks based on the received normalized values. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014456 | Method and Apparatus for Use in a Communications Network - A method and apparatus in a gateway node of a telecommunications network for receiving frames from a source node such as a Radio Network Controller (RNC) and forwarding the frames with correct sequencing and timing to a destination node in an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. Upon determining that a potential or actual discontinuity in frame numbering has occurred, the apparatus sends a discontinuity indication toward the destination node. The indication may be included in the first frame subsequent to the discontinuity. The destination node is thus made aware that the frame numbering may not be reliable. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014457 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS WITH COLLSION AVOIDANCE (CSMA/CA) WITH DIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION - Aspects of a method and system for carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA) with directional transmission are presented. Aspects of the system may include a communicating device (DEV), which transmits a portion of a PDU utilizing omnidirectionally transmitted signals and a subsequent portion of the PDU utilizing directionally transmitted signals. In an exemplary system the communicating DEV may transmit a frame, which represents a physical layer PDU. The frame may comprise a physical layer convergence procedure (PLCP) preamble that is transmitting utilizing omnidirectionally transmitted signals (omni preamble), a PLCP header that is transmitted utilizing omnidirectionally transmitted signals (omni header), a PLCP preamble that is transmitted utilizing directionally transmitted signals (directional preamble) and a physical layer service data unit (PSDU) field, or data, field, which is transmitted utilizing directionally transmitted signals (directional data). In another exemplary system, the communicating DEV may transmit PDUs utilizing directional signal transmission. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014458 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A DIRECT LINK ON THE HIGH THROUGHPUT CHANNEL OF A MULTI-RATE CHANNEL WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A system and method for wireless communication over multi-rate channels are disclosed. One embodiment of the system includes a first wireless device; a second wireless device; and an access point that can communicate over high-rate and low-rate channels. One or more of the first and second wireless devices and the access point can include neighbor information on the wireless stations in the wireless network. One or more of the first and second wireless devices and the access point may be configured to transmit a frame in an attempt to establish a direct link over the first channel between the first and second stations. Before transmitting the frame, the one or more of the first and second wireless devices and the access point may determine whether a direct link can be established over the first channel between the first and second stations, based at least partly on the neighbor information. This scheme can significantly reduce time wasted for unsuccessful direct link setup attempts for the high-rate channel transmissions. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014459 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING DATA SERVICES IN A MULTI-PROCESSOR COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate enhanced data service functionality for data services operating in a multi-processor computing environment. As described herein, respective processors and/or other components can be utilized to form a Smart Peripheral Subsystem (SPS). As further described herein, the SPS can operate in association with a modem processor and an application processor at a mobile computing device in order to reduce loading at the application processor and improve memory usage efficiency. In the case of a mobile computing device sharing a network connection with a tethered computing device, the SPS can couple a modem interface associated with the mobile computing device and an interface through which the disparate computing device is tethered to the mobile computing device such that operations such as Layer 2 (L2) framing and/or de-framing, Network Address Translation (NAT), or the like can be offloaded to the SPS under various circumstances. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014460 | SENSOR NETWORK MAC SYSTEM FOR MULTIHOP COMMUNICATION - Provided is a method of synchronizing time for a multihop sensor network. According to the method, receiving nodes accurately synchronize time by adding a delay transmission time value to a beacon frame in a beacon mode, or by using a time synchronization frame and time synchronization acknowledgement frame containing time information and superframe structure information in a non-beacon mode. Accordingly, a mesh topology is supported, and a media access control (MAC) structure having high reliability and low delay time is provided. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014461 | System and Method for Creating Multiple Mobility Profiles per Subscriber in Wireless Communications Systems - A system and method for creating multiple mobility profiles per subscriber in wireless communications systems is provided. A method includes receiving a request for service from a terminal, sending a request for authorization of the terminal to a server, receiving, in response to the request for authorization, an indication that the terminal is authorized, and granting access to the terminal. The indication includes a mobility classification associated with the terminal. The mobility classification is based on the terminal's operating conditions. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014462 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECOGNIZING MULTICAST AND BROADCAST SERVICE REGION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for recognizing a Multicast and Broadcast Service (MBS) region in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. In the method, whether a next MBS MAP message transmission point of a first frame and an MBS data burst transmission point indicated by MBS burst assignment information of a second frame match with each other in a third frame is determined. When matching with each other in the third frame, a control message including information for determining a starting point of an MBS region is generated. The generated control message is transmitted during one of the first and second frames. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014463 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL STATION, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A first wireless terminal station transmits beam transmission direction identification information in all directions. A second wireless terminal station receives the transmission direction identification information, combines reception direction identification information and the transmission direction identification information, and transmits directivity direction combination information to a wireless base station. The first and the second wireless terminal stations form directional beams in directions indicated by the directivity direction combination information to thereby perform a direct communication. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014464 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, AND MOBILE NODE - The present invention provides a technique to prevent the generation of a large number of binding update messages in an overlay network when a mobile node changes connection points. According to this technique, in a communication system where a home agent HA | 01-21-2010 |
20100014465 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE - A mobility management method includes: notifying, at a mobile terminal, an edge node of a terminal function indicating that the mobile terminal has a Mobile IP client function; instructing, at the edge node, the mobile terminal to perform an operation for mobility management by using not an MIP function but an IP function when the edge node has a PMIP client function; performing, at the mobile terminal, the operation for mobility management by using the IP function in response to the instruction from the edge node; and performing, the edge node, the operation for mobility management by using the PMIP client function. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014466 | Method and a Device for Improved Status Reports - The invention discloses a method ( | 01-21-2010 |
20100020744 | METHOD FOR MANAGING VOICE CALLS DURING PACKET-SWITCHED SESSIONS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD - A method of managing circuit-switched calls in a mobile communications network supporting packet-switched sessions is performed as follows: upon reception by the mobile communications network of a circuit-switched call for a user of the mobile communication network, the network ascertains whether the user is engaged in a packet-switched session. In the affirmative case, the network closes the packet-switched data exchange session prior to attempting to route the call to the user. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020745 | METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING MEDIA IN AN INFRASTRUCTURE BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication device acquires membership in a predefined group, joins an ad hoc network associated with the predefined group, and joins and participates in a first session established through an infrastructure device for distributing media to the predefined group. If the wireless communication device is a duplicator node for the ad hoc network, then it receives the media from the infrastructure device and distributes the media other nodes of the ad hoc network, otherwise it receives the media from the duplicator node. The infrastructure device identifies the duplicator node for each ad hoc network associated with the predefined group and each member of the predefined group that is not a node of any of the ad hoc networks and distributes the media only to these members of the predefined group. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020746 | ADVERTISEMENT OF MULTIPLE SECURITY PROFILES IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A novel and useful apparatus for and method of advertising multiple security profiles in wireless local area networks (WLANs). The security profile advertisement mechanism of the present invention advertises all configured security profiles by sending unsolicited 802.11 management probe response frames to the broadcast MAC address for available security profile. The access points sends these unsolicited probe response frames periodically, such as with the Beacon period. The conventional management application in the stations receives unsolicited advertisements of multiple SSIDs and perform a passive scanning process to obtain a list of BSSs available on the radio channel. The station can then display a list of all detected SSID advertisements to the user. The user of the station thus obtains information on all security profiles available on the access point without requiring any prior knowledge of specific SSIDs. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020747 | Method and Apparatus for Home Agent Redirect - A method and apparatus for home agent redirect is provided. A method for redirecting a device from a first home agent to a second home agent includes sending a first message to the first home agent, receiving a second message from the first home agent, and sending a third message to the second home agent. The first message includes a binding update, and the second message includes a binding acknowledgement and a redirect indication that the device is being redirected to the second home agent. The third message includes a binding update, and an address of the first home agent. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020748 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - A communication method in a gateway apparatus includes a transmission step of transmitting and receiving packets to and from a mobile station device, and transmitting and receiving packets to and from a home agent; and a setting step of establishing settings such that the packets from the mobile station device can be transmitted to at least a first and a second home agent, and the packets from at least the first and second home agents can be received. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020749 | METHOD OF DOWNLINK PACKET TRANSMISSION CONTROL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Provided is a method of downlink packet transmission control in a mobile communication system. The method includes the steps of: a) establishing a default bearer when a downlink packet is received; b) determining whether a downlink packet filter corresponding to a downlink packet exists or not; c) transferring the downlink packet through the default bearer if the corresponding downlink packet filter does not exist; and d) transferring the downlink packet through a dedicated bearer if the corresponding downlink packet filter exists. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020750 | METHOD FOR REMOTELY CONTROLLING A MOBILE TERMINAL - The invention relates to a method for controlling remotely a mobile terminal ( | 01-28-2010 |
20100020751 | MITIGATION OF INTERFERENCE IN CELL SEARCH BY WIRELESS TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE UNITS - A wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) provides facilitation of cell search. In one embodiment, received samples are split into a plurality of sample sets for processing. Each of the sets is processed and an accumulated result is divided by an estimated noise value. In another embodiment, a code correlator correlates the received signal with a primary synchronization code and an auxiliary code correlator having a same length as the code correlator correlates the received signal with a code having a low cross correlation with the primary synchronization code. In another embodiment, a division of an accumulated result with a noise estimate is performed using indexes of the most significant bits. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020752 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING ADVERTISING AND/OR INFORMATION SERVICES OVER MOBILE AD HOC COOPERATIVE NETWORKS USING ELECTRONIC BILLBOARDS AND RELATED DEVICES - A method of operating an electronic billboard includes detecting a mobile electronic device within a predetermined distance of the electronic billboard, establishing an ad hoc wireless connection with the mobile electronic device, and transmitting location-specific data to the mobile electronic device over the ad hoc wireless connection. The location-specific data is associated with a geographic location of the electronic billboard. For example, the location-specific data may include advertising content, traffic and/or construction conditions, emergency information, and/or tourism information associated with the geographic location of the electronic billboard. Related methods, devices, and computer program products are also discussed. | 01-28-2010 |
20100027462 | TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RANGING METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY CHANGING RANGING PERIOD THEREOF - A ranging method of an access terminal that requests a ranging to an access point through a wireless network and performs the ranging, the ranging method including a) initializing a ranging period, b) setting a timer with the ranging period and starting the timer, c) requesting a ranging by transmitting a given ranging code to the access point based on radio resource allocation information provided by the access point, d) receiving a ranging response message from the access point, and controlling transmission power, timing, and frequency offset of an access terminal according to transmission parameters included in the received ranging response message, e) estimating a downlink channel condition through which a signal from the access point is transmitted, f) resetting the ranging period according to the estimated downlink channel condition, and g) iteratively performing b) to f) according to the reset ranging period. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027463 | Personal Wireless Network User Behavior Based Topology - Point-to-point links making up a wireless network in which the point-to-point links connect at least personal portable devices are dynamically altered (i.e., new point-to-point links are established and/or other point-to-point links are removed) in response to recurring comparisons of the extents of interaction of each of the personal portable devices with the wireless network to increase the resiliency of the wireless network to the observed behavior of the user of the personal portable devices in changing which personal portable devices are within the network at any given time. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027464 | Method & apparatus for minimizing packet transmission loss in a wireless network - A wireless communication device, such as a wireless router or access point, transmits and receives signals according any one of several standard or proprietary wireless protocols and automatically adapts its transmission rate according to the condition of a link or channel over which it is sending and receiving signals. A packet delay value is used to calculate the maximum number of packet retransmissions that are acceptable given a particular application. The packet retransmission value is used to calculate a maximum acceptable packet loss value which is then compared against actual packet losses to determine whether or not to change the packet transmission rate. If it is determined that the actual packet losses are less than the maximum acceptable value, then the packet transmission rate can be changed to a higher rate and if it is determined that the actual packet losses are greater than the maximum acceptable value, then the packet transmission rate can be changed to be a lower rate. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027465 | Delegation based mobility management - A method of handling mobility-related signaling in a communications system comprising a mobile node, a mobile router, and a peer node. The method comprises providing the mobile router with a delegation certificate that is cryptographically signed by or on behalf of the mobile node. At the mobile router, a mobility-related signaling exchange is initiated with the peer node on behalf of the mobile node, the mobile router providing to the peer node within this exchange, said delegation certificate or an identification of the certificate, and a sequence number associated with the certificate. At the peer node, the received sequence number is compared with a sequence number maintained by the peer node in respect of the delegation certificate, and the exchange authorised in dependence upon the result of the comparison. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027466 | Signalling in mobile telecommunications - In a method for use in a base station of a mobile telecommunications system, primary system information is maintained and is periodically broadcast while secondary system information is broadcast in response to a trigger event. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027467 | METHODS FOR HANDLING PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TRANSMISSIONS BY MOBILE STATION WITH SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY CARDS AND SYSTEMS UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for handling packet-switched data transmissions by a mobile station with a first subscriber identity card coupled to a first radio frequency (RF) module and a second subscriber identity card coupled to a second RF module, executed by an adapter of the mobile station, is provided. An uplink Internet protocol (IP) packet is received. Information regarding at least one of the received packet and hardware status of the mobile station is collected. One subscriber identity card is determined from the first and second subscriber identity cards according to the collected information. The received packet is transmitted to an IP network via the RF module corresponding to the determined subscriber identity card. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027468 | Method and system for managing core network information - A method and system for managing information of a plurality of core networks associated with a network access provider is provided. The method includes identifying a core network type of each core network of the plurality of core networks. The method also includes broadcasting the core network type of each core network of the plurality of core networks along with a network identity of each core network. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027469 | POINT OF SALES AND CUSTOMER SUPPORT FOR FEMTOCELL SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT - System(s) and method(s) are provided for a femto cell service framework for purchase of femtocell equipment and service and customer support thereof. A point of sale (POS) platform enables purchase of femtocell equipment based on a set of eligibility criteria. POS also allows purchase of add-on services. Direct fulfillment and post-sale transactions such as returns and equipment replacement are also provided. An account management service enables femtocell equipment and service self-care or through customer representatives. Configuration of service account and monitoring of account status is provided. Customer care architecture also enables remote troubleshooting of purchased equipment. Remote troubleshooting includes diagnosis and related manipulation of purchased equipment. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027470 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK ELEMENTS AND COMMUNICATION METHODS THEREBETWEEN - In a communications network an arrangement for transmitting data between a network element of a first type (e.g. BSS) and a network element of a second type (e.g. MSC) is disclosed. A relationship initialisation message is transmitted from the first network element to the second network element, the message including an information element (e.g. BSC-SCL IE) defining one or more communication modes (e.g. CODECs) with which the first network element is configured to communicate. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027471 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MIMO) IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate distributed multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) or cooperative multipoint (CoMP) communication in a wireless communication system. As described herein, multiple cells, such as a serving cell and an auxiliary cell, can cooperate to conduct communication with one or more associated terminals. In one example described herein, an associated core network can exchange data and/or control signaling with a single cell communicating with a given terminal, which can then tunnel respective data and/or control signaling to other cell(s). By doing so, CoMP communication can be made transparent to the core network and can be achieved without requiring changes to the network. As further described herein, a terminal can exchange Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) assignments and/or other information exclusively with the serving cell in addition to or in place of other information exchanged with a serving cell and/or an auxiliary cell. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027472 | INTERNET PHONE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM THEREOF - An Internet phone communication method includes selecting a destination media access control address from a phone book, transmitting the destination media access control address to an address server having at least one valid media access control address stored therein, checking whether the destination media access control address matches the valid media access control address, communicating with a receiver having the destination media access control address or the valid media access control address via a wireless network system other than a cellular network system when the destination media access control address matches the valid media access control address. An Internet phone communication system is also disclosed herein. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027473 | METHOD OF GENERATING LOW PEAK-TO-AVERAGE POWER RATIO (PAPR) BINARY PREAMBLE SEQUENCES FOR OFDM SYSTEMS - A wireless system and method including a medium access control (MAC) layer adapted to generate low peak-to-average power ratio binary preamble sequences for orthogonal frequency division multiplexing systems described. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027474 | Packet Communication Device - A technique is disclosed, according to which a mobile node detects generation of redundant route optimization messages to an address owned by a node, which already recognizes and comprehends binding with a care-of address and a home address of the mobile node. According to this technique, a CN (correspondent node) | 02-04-2010 |
20100027475 | Apparatus and Method for Radio Communication - A radio communication apparatus capable of alleviating a burden in setting a transmission format and suppressing increases in the scale of the apparatus. In this apparatus, space multiplexing adaptability detection section ( | 02-04-2010 |
20100027476 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DOWNLINK MACRO-DIVERSITY IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - The invention described herein enables a form of downlink macro-diversity in packet-switched cellular networks. It allows packets to be selectively delivered from a network/internetwork to an end node, e.g., a wireless communication device or terminal, over a set of available link-layer connections to/from the end node, through one or more access nodes, e.g., base stations. Downlink macro-diversity is particularly important when the link-layer connections between the end node and the corresponding access node, e.g., the access links, are subject to independent or partially correlated time variations in signal strength and interference. In accordance with the invention, the end node dynamically selects the downlink to be used out of a set of available access links on a per packet basis subject to prevailing channel conditions, availability of air-link resources and other constraints. The invention improves the robustness and efficiency of communication, overall utilization of air-link resources, and quality of service experienced by the end node. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027477 | Processing data units for transfer over the same channel - A radio communication scheme that newly defines a structure of a protocol data unit transmitted through a transport channel so as to avoid unnecessary redundant attachment of the terminal identifier (UE-ID) and the UE-ID type information. As only one terminal identifier (UE-ID) and UE-ID type exist in the header of protocol data unit being processed during one transmission time interval (TTI), the efficiency of overall data transmission is improved and waste of radio resources is remarkably reduced. | 02-04-2010 |
20100034138 | Method and system for using dynamic throughput graphs for ensuring QoS in converged networks - Our invention is a method and system for a method of providing Quality of Service (QoS) over networks that do not provide any information and only serve to carry packets. Specifically, as Traffic traverses between various user networks via an opaque network, gateways at the edge of the user networks keep a record of the packets traversing into the opaque networks and packets traversing out of the opaque network. These gateways also know about the traffic classes that each of these packets belong to. The gateways at the ingress points (the user network where the packets originate) and the gateways at the egress points (the user network where the packets terminate) coordinate amongst themselves to exchange information about the number and latency of packets exchanged between the two. This information is used by the gateway at the ingress to estimate the state of the opaque network using dynamic throughput graphs. Admission control and | 02-11-2010 |
20100034139 | Scheduling Grant Information Signaling in Wireless Communication System - A wireless communication infrastructure entity including a transceiver coupled to a controller configured to generate parity bits based on scheduling grant information and to encode the parity bits based on additional scheduling grant information not used to generate the parity bits, wherein the encoded parity bits combined with the scheduling grant information. The additional scheduling grant information may be transport block size or redundancy version information. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034140 | METHOD FOR MAPPING SIGNALING INFORMATION TO ANNOUNCEMENT INFORMATION AND BROADCAST RECEIVER - A method of providing a Non-Real-Time (NRT) service includes receiving a file configuring the NRT service, first signaling information, and second signaling information in a state of being IP-packetized and contained in a single ensemble, configuring and displaying a service guide using the first signaling information acquired from the ensemble, acquiring a first content identifier of content selected from the displayed service guide, accessing a FLUTE session using the second signaling information acquired from the ensemble and acquiring a second content identifier matched with the first content identifier from the accessed FLUTE session, and receiving and storing at least one file configuring the content based on the acquired second content identifier. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034141 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIATING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for wireless communications is provided. The method includes receiving measurement gap information and receiving random access procedure information. The method also includes scheduling a random access procedure based on the measurement gap information and the random access procedure information. By scheduling random access procedures in view of the measurement gap information, network bandwidth can be conserved. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034142 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADJUSTING AN ON DURATION IN A DISCONTINUOUS RECEIVE TRANSMISSION MODE - A method and an apparatus that includes establishing a link ( | 02-11-2010 |
20100034143 | INTER-CHANNEL COMMUNICATION METHODS IN MULTI-CHANNEL WIRELESS NETWORKS - A network information apparatus ( | 02-11-2010 |
20100034144 | Wireless Communication Apparatus and Control Method Thereof - A wireless communication apparatus capable of using a plurality of different wireless communication systems includes a receiving unit ( | 02-11-2010 |
20100034145 | METHOD FOR RECEIVING PACKET IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method of receiving a packet in a mobile communication system. According to a type of service provided in the present invention and activity of packet service, a mobile station operates in an operation level among DRX (discontinuous reception) operation levels that are based on operation parameters of different values and receives a packet. This results in performing efficient power consumption such that it is possible to minimize power consumption. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034146 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MULTI-USER AND SINGLE-USER MIMO IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for supporting distributed multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) transmissions are described. In one design, a user equipment (UE) determines channel estimates for multiple cells and reports the channel estimates. The UE thereafter receives a data transmission sent by the multiple cells to the UE based on the channel estimates. The data transmission may include at least one data stream, and each data stream may be sent by one cell or the multiple cells to the UE. In another design, a UE determines first and second channel estimates for first and second cells, respectively, and reports the channel estimates. The UE then receives a first data transmission sent by the first cell to the UE based on the first channel estimate. The UE also receives a second data transmission sent by the second cell to another UE and steered away from the UE based on the second channel estimate. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034147 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING BUFFER STATUS REPORT ROBUSTNESS - Systems, methods and apparatus for facilitating buffer status report robustness are provided. A method can include: transmitting a buffer status report, tracking an amount of time elapsed since transmitting the buffer status report; and determining, after a selected amount of time has elapsed, whether authorization to transmit buffered data has been received. The method can also include re-transmitting the buffer status report if the selected amount of time has elapsed and a data condition has been met. In some embodiments, the data condition is that information indicative of the authorization has not been received. In some embodiments, the method also includes determining, after the selected amount of time has elapsed, whether data is buffered for transmission, and the data condition is that information indicative of the authorization has not been received, and a determination has been made that data is buffered for transmission. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034148 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF FLOW CONTROL IN MULTI-HOP WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORKS - A system, method and relay transceiver for multi-hop wireless communications. In the relay, there is a receiver for adapted to receive packets on a first wireless link collectively destined for at least one mobile terminal. The transmitter buffers them and then transmits the packets on a second wireless link. A flow control function is implemented to provide flow control over the first wireless link to limit an amount buffered in the relay transceiver for a given mobile terminal. | 02-11-2010 |
20100039986 | WIRELESS RADIO AND NETWORK - In one aspect, a wireless radio may be used to connect to a wireless network, including a mesh network. For enhanced security, the radio may operate in silent mode whereby it does not advertise its presence until after it has detected another node. The radio may also provide its own subnetwork and provide network address translation to further enhance security and simplify network traffic. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039987 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING A BEARER PATH IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is provided that routes a bearer path of a communication session between an originating Node B and a terminating Node B via an X2 interface, bypassing an IMS core network, while continuing to route the signaling path to an IMS network, thereby allowing the IMS network to retain control of the bearer path while avoiding delay, potential for data loss and jitter to the bearer stream, and additional backhaul capacity requirements that result from routing the bearer path between the originating and terminating Node Bs via the IMS core network. In determining whether the bearer path may bypass the IMS core network, the communication system determines whether IMS core network bearer associated services are required for the communication session such that a bearer path of the call will need to be routed to the IMS core network in order to provide such services. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039988 | Preventing Misuse of Random Access Procedure in Wireless Communication System - A method for preventing misuse of a random access procedure in a mobile station including transmitting a random access preamble, receiving a random access response message addressed to an identifier that has a one-to-one association with the random access preamble transmitted by the mobile station, and decoding the random access response message. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039989 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A PLURALITY OF NETWORK ADDRESSES IN A MOBILE TERMINAL - Provided is a method and apparatus for processing a plurality of network addresses in a mobile terminal. The method for processing a plurality of network addresses in the mobile terminal includes: storing combinations of an HoA (home address), a plurality of CoAs (care-of addresses) and a plurality of network interfaces of the mobile terminal, through which the mobile terminal may be connected to a plurality of networks; when the mobile terminal transmits packets to a target node, selecting a network interface combination for connecting the mobile terminal to the target node from among the combinations, and setting a corresponding path; and transmitting the packets through the set path. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039990 | Method and Arrangement in a Wireless Communications System - A method for assisting the adaptation of a signal from a first node ( | 02-18-2010 |
20100039991 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING ADDRESSES AND/OR SECURITY DATA BETWEEN ENBS OF AN LTE ACCESS NETWORK, AND ASSOCIATED MME AND ENB - A method is intended for automatically configuring address(es) between eNBs (NBi) of an LTE access network. This method comprises i) transmitting a chosen message to at least one Mobility Management Entity (MME) of a core network connected to the LTE access network, this chosen message including at least one transport layer address of a first eNB (NB | 02-18-2010 |
20100039992 | ACQUISITION OF ACCESS POINT INFORMATION WITH ASSISTANCE FROM OTHER ACCESS POINTS - An access point acquires information about another access point from at least one other access point. For example, the access point may send a query to one or more neighbor access points to obtain information about the other access point. In some aspects these operations may be employed in conjunction with establishing neighbor relations in a network. For example, in the event a neighbor list of a given access point does not have certain information about another access point (e.g., an IP address), the given access point may query its neighbor access points to see whether those access points have information about the other access point in their neighbor lists. Upon receipt of this information, the given access point may use the information to establish neighbor relations with the other access point. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039993 | COMBINED GATEWAY FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - The functionalities of one or more of a mobility management entity (MME), serving gateway (SGW), and packet data network gateway (PGW) can be provided in a single device on the network. In the access gateway different functional elements are implemented as services and they can be configured on the same device. For example, the SGW and PGW can be configured on the same device. When user equipment UE connects from a home network, it is possible for the MME to choose the same SGW and PGW. This combined SGW and PGW can implement a single session for the UE, thereby capable of providing a savings in resources, allowing additional capacity, and allowing reduced latency and increased throughput because fewer hops are made on the network. This session acts as a SGW on the ingress side and a PGW on the egress side of the access gateway. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039994 | Processing data units for transfer over the same channel - A radio communication scheme that newly defines a structure of a protocol data unit transmitted through a transport channel so as to avoid unnecessary redundant attachment of the terminal identifier (UE-ID) and the UE-ID type information. As only one terminal identifier (UE-ID) and UE-ID type exist in the header of protocol data unit being processed during one transmission time interval (TTI), the efficiency of overall data transmission is improved and waste of radio resources is remarkably reduced. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039995 | Method for operating a mobile wireless network - A method of operating a mobile wireless network is described to ensure proper function of protocol entities during the transmission of data units between two wireless stations of the mobile wireless network. In this case, user data is assembled by a first convergence protocol layer of the first wireless station into at least one first data unit, particularly a packet data unit, before transmission to a second convergence protocol layer of a second wireless station, particularly on the same protocol level, with the user data being supplied to the first convergence protocol layer by at least one user in a network layer. At least one protocol entity of the first convergence protocol layer is configured as a function of a configuration request received by the second wireless station, in order to form the at least one first data unit from the data received from the at least one user and to transmit it through a carrier to a link control layer. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039996 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND REORDERING METHOD - A reordering method of sending packets, to which numbers indicating the packet order are added, to a mobile station from a base station, and rearranging the order of the packets at the mobile station, this includes forwarding from a source base station to a target base station, packets, not sent to the mobile station before a handover sequence, or packets, a confirmation response of proper reception has not been received from the mobile station, transmitting preferentially those packets from the target base station to the mobile base station and then transmitting packets received from a host station to the mobile station, giving packets information indicating that the packets are jump packets when transmitting the packets to the mobile station, received from the host station with the order jumped, deciding jump packets are not objects of reordering, and performing the reordering process for packets that are objects of reordering. | 02-18-2010 |
20100046423 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REQUESTING SELECTED INTERLACE MODE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for requesting selected interlace mode with a particular sector is provided, comprising generating a SelectedInterlaceRequest message comprising an 8 bit MessageID field, a 12 bit PilotPN field wherein the PilotPN field indicates a value of PilotPN of the sector to which the message is directed and a 4 bit InterlacesRequested field wherein the InterlacesRequested field indicates a value of requested number of interlaces and transmitting the SelectedInterlaceRequest message over a communication link. A method and apparatus for receiving and processing the SelectedInterlaceRequest message is further provided. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046424 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING LOAD MATCHING IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method controls transmission of data packets in a radio communication system, with the radio communication system having at least one central node as well as at least one base station connected to it, and with the base station transmitting data packets, which have been received by the central node and have been provided with encryption by the latter, to at least one subscriber terminal via a radio interface. The base station rejects a first number of data packets, before transmission via the radio interface, as a function of the current or expected load state. A respective first information item is added to a second number of data packets to be transmitted to the subscriber terminal, in the central node after encryption, and the base station rejects or does not reject a respective data packet as a function of the first information item. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046425 | RANDOM ACCESS PREAMBLE SELECTION - The present invention relates to methods for establishing a connection between a user equipment and a wireless network. More particularly, the present invention relates to methods for selecting a preamble based on its power back-off metric in order to randomly access a wireless network while avoiding collisions with other user equipments attempting to access the network at the same time. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046426 | METHODS FOR PROVIDING AN AD HOC MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SYSTEMS THEREOF - A method, computer readable medium, and system for providing a mobile communication network includes dynamically forming a plurality of mobile communication devices into one or more clusters based on one or more parameters, each of the one or more clusters having a tree structure. Each of the one or more clusters are at least partially meshed together. At least one virtual identifier is dynamically assigned to each of the plurality of mobile communication devices based on the tree structure of each of the one or more clusters. The virtual identifier provides address information for routing communications between two or more of the plurality of mobile communication devices. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046427 | MULTIPLE ANTENNA MODE CONTROL METHOD BASED ON ACCESS POINT - A multiple antenna mode control method based on an Access Point comprises the following steps: step 1, the Access Point periodically sends out a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by the Access Point (S | 02-25-2010 |
20100046428 | Method and apparatus of performing cell re-search between heterogeneous networks - A method and apparatus of performing cell re-search between heterogeneous networks is provided. A mobile terminal (MT) accesses to a high rate packet data (HRPD) network. The MT receives a first message from the HRPD network. The first message includes neighbor radio access technology (RAT) indicator which indicates whether neighbor RAT information used to perform inter-RAT measurement is transmitted from the HRPD network. The MT receives a second message from the HRPD network if the neighbor RAT indicator indicates the transmission of the neighbor RAT information. The second message includes the neighbor RAT information. The MT performs cell re-search on the basis of the neighbor RAT information. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046429 | Wireless Communications System That Supports Multiple Modes Of Operation - A wireless communications adapts its mode of operation between spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing in response to transmission-specific variables. An embodiment of a wireless communications system for transmitting information between a base transceiver station and a subscriber unit includes mode determination logic. The mode determination logic is in communication with the base transceiver station and the subscriber unit. The mode determination logic determines, in response to a received signal, if a subscriber datastream should be transmitted between the base transceiver station and the subscriber unit utilizing spatial multiplexing or non-spatial multiplexing. In an embodiment, the mode determination logic has an input for receiving a measure of a transmission characteristic related to the received signal. In an embodiment, the mode determination logic includes logic for comparing the measured transmission characteristic to a transmission characteristic threshold and for selecting one of spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing in response to the comparison of the measured transmission characteristic to the transmission characteristic threshold. In an embodiment, the transmission characteristic includes at least one of delay spread, post-processing signal-to-noise ratio, cyclical redundancy check (CRC) failure, residual inter-symbol interference, mean square error, coherence time, and path loss. By adapting the mode of operation in response to transmission-specific variables, the use of spatial multiplexing can be discontinued in unfavorable conditions. Additionally, because the wireless communications system can adapt its mode of operation between spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing, the communications system is compatible with both subscriber units that support spatial multiplexing and subscriber units that do not support spatial multiplexing. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046430 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication device includes: a control unit configured to control communication data; and memory configured to store communication data; wherein the control unit performs processing of setting a re-order buffer corresponding to a source address, for storing received data in increments of source address in the memory, storing received packets from a single data source in the re-order buffer corresponding to a source address, and arraying the packet order following sequence numbers set to the received packets. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046431 | FAST UPLINK RANGING SYSTEM AND METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a fast uplink ranging system and method in a mobile communication system. According to the present invention, a fast uplink ranging system transmits two pairs of ranging codes having the same value at locations spaced by half of FFT pointers. The fast uplink ranging system calculates a correlation value using the received two pairs of ranging codes. An order in which complex exponential twiddle factors for removing complex exponential terms corresponding to a time delay are searched is determined using the correlation value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a time required for searching a timing error of a terminal using non-periodic symmetry of complex exponential twiddle factors corresponding to the timing error, compared with a known method of searching a complex exponential twiddle factor. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046432 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL AND INFORMATION ON ANTENNA, AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING THE NUMBER OF ANTENNAS - A base station applies frequency switching transmission diversity and a preceding vector to a synchronization channel and applies a space-frequency block coding and a preceding vector to a broadcast channel. The base station controls the synchronization channel and the broadcast channel to be positioned adjacent each other and then generates and transmits a downlink frame. The base station includes partial information on the number of antennas in the synchronization channel, and other information thereon in the broadcast channel. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046433 | LOGICAL INTERFACE ESTABLISHING METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS - A plug-and-play radio base station autonomously establishes X2 logical interfaces and S1 logical interfaces with existing base stations and upper nodes. A new radio base station which is installed in a network advertises an IP address of the new radio base station over a transport network. An existing radio base station or an upper node which receives the IP address detects the number of hops from the new radio base station to the existing radio base station or the upper node. An initial logical interface with the new radio base station is established when the detected number of hops is below a predetermined threshold. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046434 | NETWORK-BASED AND HOST-BASED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN PACKET-BASED COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The present invention describes a method for signalling to a mobility anchor point a position of a mobile node in a network using a network-based mobility management scheme for managing the mobility of the mobile node, said method comprising receiving, by a network element, from the mobile node, during or after network authentication of the mobile node, a sequence number used by a process implementing a mobile node-based mobility management scheme for managing the mobility of the mobile node, and transmitting, by the network element, to the mobility anchor point a message on a position of the mobile node in the network, wherein said message comprises the received sequence number. A common sequence number variable for BU and PBU messages is used, so that the HA is able to determine a correct transmission order of PBU/BU messages based on the sequence number in the message. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046435 | ROUTING TABLE GENERATION, DATA TRANSMISSION AND ROUTING ROUTE FORMATION METHOD FOR MULTI-HOP SERVICES IN HIGH RATE WIRELESS PERSONAL NETWORKS - Provided are a routing table generating method, a data transmission method, and a routing route formation method for multi-hop communication in high rate wireless personal networks. In a high rate WPAN environment including a plurality of piconets, a piconet controller (PNC), which performs a topology server function to provide the optimal route, collects link state information from the PNCs or DEVs (devices) belonging to a sub-tree that serves as a root and applies a minimum cost algorithm based on the collected link state information to calculate the optimal route for all pairs of originations and destinations existing within the sub-tree in consideration of QoS. The optimal route information is transmitted to the origination PNC via the destination PNC/DEV. During performing this, the optimal route between the pairs of originations and destinations is set. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046436 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INTELLIGENT ROUTING OF DATA BETWEEN A REMOTE DEVICE AND A HOST SYSTEM - An apparatus and method is provided for transparent communication between a remote or mobile device and a fixed communication host network. The apparatus and method may include a remote network controller that logically resides between the host network and the existing infrastructure(s) that are used to provide communications network contact with one or more remote devices. The remote network controller is connected to the host communication network as a protocol-appropriate communications controller so that remote devices are indistinguishable to the host network from the locally-attached devices. Each remote device may be provided with an asynchronous serial data interface to communicate with a mobile data controller. The mobile data controller, in combination with the remote network controller, provides end-to-end data communication such that incompatible protocols are transparent to the remote device and host communication network. A router may be provided which selects a communications network in accordance with user configured parameters. The router communicates over a plurality of incompatible networks and is capable of using a variety of different protocols. Switching between the plurality of incompatible networks is transparent to the remote device and host communication network. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046437 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus includes a receiving device configured to receive one physical frame in which a plurality of MAC frames are aggregated. This physical frame includes one acknowledgement request frame for the plurality of MAC frames. The apparatus includes an acknowledgement frame forming device configured to form an acknowledgement frame representing reception statuses of the plurality of MAC frames in response to the acknowledgement request frame. The apparatus also includes a transmitting device configured to transmit the acknowledgement frame. This acknowledgement frame includes a compressed acknowledgement frame representing an acknowledgement bitmap having a size equal to a maximum number of MSDUs (MAC Service Data Units) when one MPDU (MAC Protocol Data Unit) corresponds to one MSDU. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046438 | Method and System for Implementing Data Routing of Roaming User - A method and system for implementing data routing of a roaming user are disclosed. The method comprises: configuring a roaming protocol between the home network and the roaming network; during the registering process of the user in the roaming network, performing an interactive negotiation between the home network and the roaming network, so as to determine one of the home network and the roaming network to allocate IP address according to the roaming protocol between the home network and the roaming network; and establishing the IP access bearer based on the IP address. A corresponding system is also provided. The routing of the roaming user data plane could be optimized under the control of the home network operator, and the IP address of the default IP bearer for the roaming user could be allocated by the roaming network as much as possible, while guaranteeing of the home network operator's interest and dominant position, so as to optimize the routing of the data plane for the roaming user, improve the performance of the data service and bring a better service experience to the roaming user. | 02-25-2010 |
20100054178 | METHOD OF PARALLEL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A data communication method includes providing a sender node having a data packet of information. The data packet is sent to each of a plurality of heterogeneous transmitter devices. The data packet is wirelessly transmitted from each of the transmitter devices to a receiver node. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054179 | SELECTING AN ACCESS POINT FROM A PLURALITY OF ACCESS POINTS - Techniques are provided for selecting an access point (AP) to communicate with from a plurality of candidate access points (APs) when a wireless computing device (WCD) roams in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The WCD stores a pairwise master key (PMK) for each access point that the WCD has previously established a PMK with during authentication. The WCD a plurality of candidate access points and determines an AP statistic (APS) associated with each candidate AP. The WCD then determines an AP rating for each candidate AP based on the APS for the candidate AP and whether the wireless computing device has a pairwise master key stored for the candidate AP. The WCD then selects a particular one of the candidate APs having the highest AP rating as a desired AP of the wireless computing device. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054180 | Method and System for Adaptive Antenna Array Pairing - A method of pairing a first wireless access unit with a second wireless access unit in a mobile ad-hoc wireless pairing system includes determining that the second wireless access unit is available for pairing with the first wireless access unit and pairing the pairing the first wireless access unit with the second wireless access unit upon receiving an input from a user of the first wireless access unit. A location of the second wireless access unit is determined by adjusting a first wireless access unit weighting factor. The first wireless access unit weighting factor is adjusted until a threshold signal strength is received by the second wireless access unit. The first wireless access unit weighting factor is transmitted to the second wireless access unit, and feedback is received from the second wireless access unit. The feedback provides recommendations about the first wireless access unit weighting factor to the first wireless access unit. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054181 | Adaptive Block Sequence ARQ protocol for Wireless Communications - A method of performing wireless communications. The method receives at a receiving unit a sequence of data blocks from a transmitting unit. The method also identifies at the receiving unit a first number of invalid sequential data blocks in the sequence and a second number of valid sequential data blocks in the sequence. The method also communicates from the receiving unit a wireless message to the transmitting unit. The wireless message comprises a first field that specifies the first number and a second field that specifies the second number—the encoding of the first field is operable to specify a different maximum than an encoding of the second field. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054182 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION, EMITTER AND RECEIVER STATIONS AND ASSOCIATED COMPUTER PROGRAMS - Method of communication, on a radio channel, between at least two nodes ( | 03-04-2010 |
20100054183 | SENSOR NETWORK CONTROL METHOD FOR DATA PATH ESTABLISHMENT AND RECOVERY AND SENSOR NETWORK THEREFOR - Disclosed herein are a sensor network control method for data path establishment and recovery and a sensor network therefor. The sensor network control method includes the steps of (a) the sink node or a first sensor node creating an interest message, including information about a hop count between itself and the sink node, and transmitting the interest message to one or more neighboring nodes; (b) a second sensor node, which has received the interest message, creating a routing table using the hop count information of the interest message and information about the node having transmitted the interest message, (c) the second sensor node determining a data transmission path for data transmission to the sink node using the routing table; and (d) the second sensor node transmitting an interest message, including information about a hop count between itself and the sink node to at least one neighboring node. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054184 | CELL SEARCH METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND BASE STATION - A cell search method performed by a mobile station for communication in an OFDM system includes a first step of detecting a timing and a carrier frequency of a primary synchronization channel based on correlation detection between a primary synchronization channel sequence and a received signal; a second step of determining a timing and a carrier frequency of a secondary synchronization channel based on the timing and the carrier frequency of the primary synchronization channel and detecting cell-specific control information including a frame timing and a cell ID group; and a third step of performing correlation detection on each cell ID in the cell ID group with a common pilot symbol on a common pilot channel and identifying a cell ID from the cell ID group. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054185 | Wireless Access Network, Communication Quality Management Apparatus, and Wireless Base Station - A communication quality management equipment connected via a control line to a plurality of wireless base stations within a wireless access network, acquires quality information of a wireless line at a present position of a mobile terminal, resource information as to a wireless line of each of the wireless base stations, and use information as to a network line of each of the wireless base stations from the respective wireless base stations in a periodic manner, or in response to an instruction issued from the communication quality management equipment, and then judges a communication quality at each of the present positions of the mobile terminal; forms communication quality map information in which the judged communication qualities have been defined in correspondence with the positional information, and transmits the formed communication quality map information to the mobile terminal in accordance with a request from the mobile terminal. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054186 | INITIAL ACCESS CONTROL METHOD BETWEEN PERSONAL SUBSCRIBER STATION AND RADIO ACCESS STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an initial access based control method between a personal subscriber station and a radio access station in a mobile communication system. The present invention includes: a) selecting an initial access method corresponding to a first field value of a first parameter included in a first downlink channel descript message received from the radio access station; b) generating a first ranging request message corresponding to the initial access method; and c) transmitting the first ranging request message to the radio access station. The present invention guarantees mutual compatibility with the existing broadband wireless access system and realizes various initial access methods between the subscriber station and the radio access station. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054187 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN SERVICES OVER A PACKET SWITCHED NETWORK - A method of determining a domain mode for a mobile station operating in either a circuit-switched domain or a packet-switched domain. A first domain mode is determined, and then a determination is made whether to rove from the first domain mode to a second domain mode. The determination may be made by a Packet Mobile Switching Center (PMSC) when, for example, the mobile station moves between Routing Areas. Alternatively, the mobile station may make the determination based, for example, on pre-provisioned selection criteria. The mobile station derives a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) based on a cell identifier of a current cell and uses the FQDN in a DNS query to obtain the IP address of the PMSC. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054188 | Wireless Communication Base Station Apparatus and Wireless Communication Method - A wireless communication base station apparatus capable of suppressing the waste of a signaling source in retransmittal signaling of group scheduling. In this apparatus, a multiplexing part ( | 03-04-2010 |
20100054189 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GENERATING MAC PROTOCOL DATA UNIT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for generating a Media Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes reconstructing at least one MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) according to scheduling information of the MAC layer and generating at least one MPDU data portion, adding control information to each MPDU data portion and generating at least one MPDU payload, adding a General MAC Header (GMH) to each MPDU payload and generating at least one MPDU, and transmitting the MPDU to a receive end. The control information includes at least one piece of MSDU information constituting each MPDU data portion. The GMH includes length information on the MPDU and Connection IDentifier (CID) information. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054190 | MOBILE IP ADDRESSING - A system and method are provided for mobile Internet Protocol (IP) addressing, in a multi-mode wireless communications access terminal (AT). The method provides an AT with an IP address (ATA), and a care-of-address (CoA) in each of a plurality of networks. In one aspect, the AT selects a first network for transmission, from the plurality of networks. The AT sends an IP packet to a correspondent node (CN) via a first mobile node (MN) external device. Regardless of the network selected, the AT is able to use the ATA as a source address. Sending the IP packet to the CN may include creating a tunnel between the first MN and the HA. The IP packet is sent to the HA using the first CoA as a tunnel source address, and the HA sends the IP packet to the CN using the ATA as the source address. | 03-04-2010 |
20100061294 | ENFORCING POLICIES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION USING EXCHANGED IDENTITIES - Techniques for facilitating the exchange of information and transactions between two entities associated with two wireless devices when the devices are in close proximity to each other. A first device uses a first short range wireless capability to detect an identifier transmitted from a second device in proximity, ideally using existing radio capabilities such as Bluetooth (IEEE802.15.1-2002) or Wi-Fi (IEEE802.11). The detected identifier, being associated with the device, is also associated with an entity. Rather than directly exchanging application data flow between the two devices using the short range wireless capability, a second wireless capability allows for one or more of the devices to communicate with a central server via the internet, and perform the exchange of application data flow. By using a central server to draw on stored information and content associated with the entities the server can broker the exchange of information between the entities and the devices. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061295 | TRANSFERRING DATA IN A DUAL TRANSFER MODE BETWEEN A MOBILE NETWORK AND MOBILE STATIONS - A circuit mobility management entity (CMM) is intended a mobile network adapted for transferring data in a dual transfer mode to and from mobile stations. The CMM is arranged, when it has established a circuit-switched (CS) connection between a mobile station and the mobile network and when it receives from a radio resource entity (RR) of the mobile network, a message informing that the CS procedure corresponding to this CS connection is ended, to determine if a GPRS Tunnelling Transport Protocol (GTTP) procedure is running for a packet-switched (PS) signalling procedure which concerns the mobile station, then either i) require release of the CS connection near the RR entity if the GTTP procedure is ended, or ii) maintain the CS connection as long as the GTTP procedure is running, and require release of the CS connection near the RR entity when the GTTP procedure is ended. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061296 | PACKET TRANSFER CONTROL METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL AND HOME AGENT USED IN ITS METHOD - A technology is disclosed for providing a packet transfer control method that can transmit a DU message to a specific CN or a specific flow to prompt a change in destination, while maintaining a transfer request to a CoA from a HA. In the technology, when a home agent receives a packet addressed to a mobile terminal from a predetermined communication terminal, the mobile terminal transmits a second message to the home agent, the second message including information required for the home agent to transmit a first message to the predetermined communication terminal. The first message states that a currently used address addressed to the mobile terminal cannot be used. The home agent generates the first message based on the information included in the second message and transmits the generated first message to the predetermined communication terminal. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061297 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA PACKETS USING DIFFERENT FREQUENCY REUSE FACTORS - The method for transmitting a data signal including a plurality of data packets from a base station to a radio device comprises the steps of: subdividing each data packet into at least a first data sub-packet and a second data sub-packet; transmitting simultaneously the first data sub-packet on a first portion of total resources, having a first reuse frequency factor, and the second data sub-packet on at least one second portion of total resources having second reuse factor, said first reuse factor being different from said second reuse factor. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061298 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - To prevent a collision from occurring at the time of random access in cases such as handover, response to paging and the like where a mobile station apparatus performs random access in response to directions from a base station apparatus. In a mobile communication system in which a mobile station apparatus | 03-11-2010 |
20100061299 | DYNAMIC NETWORKING SPECTRUM REUSE TRANSCEIVER - Systems and methods are disclosed for the operation of a network of cognitive radios in a dynamic network topology. The systems and methods make use cross-layer communications to input parameters required by network services into a reasoning engine, which in turns processes the parameter the parameter information and reports linguistic results to the network services. The cross-layer communications are leveraged to shift network service functionality to the MAC or PHY Layers. Route discovery functionality is shifted from routing services down to the MAC or PHY Layers. The route discovery functionality is implemented by a process to elect a relay node based on the number of available channels that each of the source node neighbors has available to communicate with other neighbors. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061300 | Method and Apparatus for Linking Mobile Communication Devices to Wireless Networks in Underground Edifices - An apparatus for linking mobile communication devices to wireless networks in underground edifices includes a plurality of base stations which are arranged at a spatial distance from one another inside tunnel systems, substantially in the direction of the tunnel axes, such that the reception areas of two adjacent base stations overlap as little as possible. All base stations operate on a single common channel. In a method used for the apparatus, the mobile station switches to an adjacent base station when a quality signal drops below a predetermined threshold value. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061301 | Automatic Distribution of Server and Gateway Information for Pool Configuration - A mobile communications network ( | 03-11-2010 |
20100061302 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL METHOD - An out-of-synchronization determining section that determines uplink out of synchronization with the mobile station in accordance with a reception timing of the uplink signal is provided in a base station apparatus for carrying out communications with a mobile station, wherein the mobile station transmits an uplink signal by Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access or Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061303 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL CHANNEL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system using both a discontinuous transmission scheme and a compressed mode transmission scheme, if a preamble and/or a postamble of a channel including control information for transmitting a specific channel overlaps a compressed mode (CM) gap, an overall transmission unit is not transmitted or remaining signals of the transmission unit excluding the preamble and/or the postamble overlapping the CM gap are transmitted. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061304 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND POSITION MANAGING APPARATUS - A mobile node includes a plurality of transceivers, has a network conforming to network-based mobility as its home link and performs position registration to a positional managing apparatus and performs position registration to the position managing apparatus through a foreign network by position registration conforming to host-based mobility. In mobile node and position managing apparatus, a plurality of routes passing through the home link and the foreign link are established. Accordingly, when the mobile node has the plurality of transceivers, it can simultaneously connect to the home link and the foreign link through respective transceivers, to perform communication. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061305 | MOBILE RADIO TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION PROCESSING METHOD - A mobile radio terminal includes a radio transmission/reception unit and a control unit. The radio transmission/reception unit uses a radio signal to perform transmission and reception to and from a base station belonging to a circuit switching network, and also uses a radio signal to perform transmission and reception to and from a base station belonging to a mobile communication network. The mobile communication network is connected to the circuit switching network and forms an integrated communication network together with the circuit switching network. When the mobile radio terminal is on standby in a base station belonging to the mobile communication network, the control unit activates the radio transmission/reception unit and controls the radio transmission/reception unit so as to maintain synchronization with a base station belonging to the circuit switching network. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061306 | CELL SEARCH METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A cell search method and apparatus for an asynchronous mobile communication system are provided. A Secondary Synchronization Code (SSC) correlator despreads a signal at every slot boundary in accordance with a z-sequence to output a SSC correlation value. The signal is received over a first symbol duration. A Primary Synchronization Code (PSC) correlator despreads the received signal in accordance with a PSC to output a PSC correlation value. A dot product calculator performs dot product calculation between the SSC correlation value and the PSC correlation value to output a correlation result of the SSC. A frame synchronization detector extracts frame synchronization information from the correlation result. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061307 | Method and apparatus for supporting multiple MAC versions in broadband wireless communication system - A method and an apparatus are configured to support a plurality of Media Access Control (MAC) versions in a broadband wireless communication system. An operating method of a terminal to support the multiple MAC versions in the broadband wireless communication system includes receiving a message comprising information of one or more MAC versions supported by a base station, from the base station; and sending information of one or more MAC versions supported by the terminal, to the base station using a message. Thus, in the wireless environment where the multiple MAC versions are mixed, the MAC version can be matched. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061308 | MANAGEMENT OF MOBILE TERMINALS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ALLOWING FOR MULTIPLE-TRACKING AREA REGISTRATION - The invention relates to a method and network control node for detecting the point of attachment of mobile terminals moving within a mobile communication network in idle mode, wherein the mobile communication system can be logically divided into plural tracking areas to which the mobile terminals register. Further, the invention relates to a method for enabling management of mobile terminals in idle mode receiving a service within such mobile communication system. Moreover, the invention relates to a method and mobile terminal for updating the mobile terminal's tracking area registration in a mobile communication system being logically divided into plural tracking areas, wherein mobile terminal is in idle mode and is registered to plural tracking areas simultaneously. The invention suggests different mechanism how to detect terminals registering to plural tracking area, how to verify their current location in the network and how to use these information, for example for resource management. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061309 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILITY ACROSS HETEROGENEOUS ADDRESS SPACES - A mobile node includes a processor, a network interface, and a storage device having computer program code for execution by the processor. The computer program code includes a network layer for transmitting and receiving packets and an intermediate driver that transmits packets to the network layer and receives packets from the network layer using a virtual interne protocol (IP) address to identify the mobile node. The intermediate driver transmits packets to the network interface and receives packets from the network interface using a routable actual IP address to identify the mobile node. The intermediate driver permits the actual IP address to change when the mobile node moves from a first subnet to a second subnet without a corresponding change in the virtual IP address. A corresponding NAT associates the virtual IP address with a second actual IP address when the NAT is notified that the mobile node is in the second subnet. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061310 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PROVIDING EXTENSIBLE PROTOCOL TRANSLATION FEATURES AND RELATED METHODS - A communications system may include a plurality of data storage devices each using at least one of a plurality of different operating protocols, and a plurality of mobile wireless communications devices for accessing the plurality of data storage devices. Each mobile wireless communications device may also use at least one of the plurality of different operating protocols. The system may further include a protocol interface device. In particular, the protocol interface device may include a protocol engine module for communicating with the plurality of data storage devices using respective operating protocols, and a front-end proxy module coupled to the protocol engine. The front-end proxy module may include a respective proxy module for communicating with the plurality of mobile wireless communications devices using each different operating protocol, and at least one common core service module connected to the proxy modules. | 03-11-2010 |
20100067434 | QUICK SYSTEM SELECTION AND ACQUISITION FOR MULTI-MODE MOBILE DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for using network topology and coverage information from one radio access technology (RAT) network to assist acquisition of another different RAT network for a multi-mode mobile station (MS), such as acquiring a WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) network based on topology and coverage information about a 3G (Third Generation) network and vice versa, are provided. Base station (BS) acquisition assisted in this manner may provide for quick restoration of a previously interrupted or deactivated network service, while decreasing the power consumption of the multi-mode MS during a power savings state because periodic scanning and registration need not occur. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067435 | ARCHITECTURE TO SUPPORT NETWORK-WIDE MULTIPLE-IN-MULTIPLE-OUT WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OVER AN UPLINK - The present invention provides a method of coordinating the uplink transmissions from at least one mobile unit to a plurality of base stations. The method is implemented in a control and data plane entity and includes scheduling, at the control plane function, uplink signals for transmission from the mobile unit(s) to the plurality of base stations. The method also includes receiving, at the data plane function from the plurality of base stations, signals including scheduled uplink signals transmitted from the mobile unit(s) to the plurality of base stations. The method further includes estimating, at the data plane function, information bits transmitted in the scheduled uplink signals using the received signals and channel state information indicative of a plurality of wireless communication links between the mobile unit(s) and the plurality of base stations. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067436 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF, AND TRANSMITTING NODE - A mobile communication system includes a base station control apparatus, and first and second type base stations having a receiving unit that receives a predetermined signal transmitted from the base station control apparatus. The base station control apparatus includes a type determining unit that determines whether a type of the base station is the second type base station, a transmission period setting unit that sets a transmission period of the predetermined signal for the base station determined to be the second type base stations by the type determining unit, to be longer than a transmission period of the predetermined signal for the base station not determined to be the second type base station, and a transmitting unit that periodically transmits the predetermined signal to the base stations, based on a transmission period set for each of the base stations by the transmission period setting unit. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067437 | Telecommunication System for Controlling Media Gateways - A telecommunication system and method for controlling the establishment of payload connections through media gateways. The system receives and aggregates control orders from a plurality of telecommunication nodes such as media gateway controllers. The system uses knowledge of resources in the network to optimize the path of the payload connection. The system also sends control orders to a given media gateway in order to establish the payload connection. The system may be connected to a plurality of other instances of the same type of system in a hierarchical manner. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067438 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND, TERMINAL APPARATUS AND BASE STATION APPARATUS USING THE METHOD - When a control unit receives an authentication request from a terminal apparatus, the control unit transmits an authentication response to the terminal apparatus. When it receives a connection request from the terminal apparatus to which the authentication response has been transmitted, the control unit transmits a connection response to the terminal apparatus. The control unit carries out data communication with the terminal apparatus to which the connection response has been transmitted. When it receives a notification indicating that a connection has already been granted by another base station apparatus, in substitution for the authentication request, the control unit carries out data communication with the terminal apparatus. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067439 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING USING AN IN-VEHICLE SYSTEM - A system and method for communicating wirelessly from a mobile device to a remote receiver station is disclosed. The system includes a controller configured to monitor a status of the mobile device and, upon an initiation event, initiate a data transfer process to wirelessly communicate data to the remote receiver station. The system also includes a voice-band modem that, upon initiation of the data transfer process. The voice-band modem is configured to receive data for transfer to the remote receiver station, encode the data to form a series of encoded packets, and transmit the encoded packets to the remote receiver station using a first modulation scheme. Thereafter, unless an indication that the series of packets has been received by at the receiving station is provided, the voice-band modem automatically retransmit the encoded packets to the remote receiver station using a second modulation scheme. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067440 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROL CHANNEL OPERATION IN GERAN - A method and apparatus to improve the quality of control signaling based on signaling messages controlling speech or data transmission over an air interface between at least two Multi-User-Reusing-One-Slot/Voice Services Over Adaptive Multiuser Channels On One Slot (MUROS/VAMOS) capable wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs). The WTRUs communicate with each other at the physical layer via signaling messages transmitted in control channels such as Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH) and Fast Associated Control Channel (FACCH). Speech services are provided simultaneously over the same physical channel, and the Timing Advance (TA) and Power Command (PC) parameters of a WTRU are multiplexed in several occurrences of the SACCH or FACCH to increase the number of channel bits available for channel coding. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067441 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAME IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more particularly, to a method of transmitting and receiving frame in a wireless communication system. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067442 | Communication System and Method For Wirelessly Exchanging User Data With a User Terminal - The invention relates to a communication system including a first wireless access station with a first data connection for transferring user data and a second wireless access station with a second data connection for transferring user data. The first wireless access station and second wireless access station are located at distant positions from each other. The first wireless access station has one or more antennas for wirelessly transmitting user data that are received over the first data connection to a user terminal. The second wireless access station is configured to receive user data over the second data connection and to transmit the user data directly to the first wireless access station for transmission to the user terminal. The communication system further includes a controller configured for controlling at least a part of the user data for the user terminal to flow over the second data connection. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067443 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH FEMTO NODES - Systems and methods for performing a handoff of an access terminal from a macro node to a femto node are disclosed. In one embodiment, the femto node is configured to transmit a predetermined signal for determining signal quality and an identifier that uniquely identifies the femto node to the access terminal. The access terminal is configured to transmit the identifier to the macro node. The femto node is identified as a hand in target based on the transmitted identifier and the macro node is configured to hand in the access terminal to the femto node. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067444 | TELEPHONY SERVICES IN MOBILE IP NETWORKS - An emergency telephone call is supported and routed to a Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) in an IP based packet switched wireless communications network. An activate PDP context request is sent from a user equipment to the network. A parameter in said activate PDP context request indicates that the PDP context will be used to transfer an emergency call. An activate PDP context accept message is returned from said support node to said user equipment. Said activate PDP context accept message acknowledges said activate PDP context request message and provides the address of a call state control function. A call setup request transferred to the call state control function includes the Service Area Identity (SAI). The call state control function selects a PSAP based, at least in part, on the SAI included in the call setup request and forwards the emergency call to the selected PSAP. | 03-18-2010 |
20100074168 | METHOD OF GENERATING A BUFFER STATUS FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED DEVICE - A method of generating a buffer state of a packet data convergence protocol, hereinafter called PDCP, layer for a user equipment in a wireless communication system includes including volume information of packets, which have been submitted to a layer lower than the PDCP layer and have not been confirmed by the layer or by a PDCP status report, in a buffer state report of the PDCP layer, where the packets have not been confirmed by the layer due to buffer clearing of the layer. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074169 | PACKET TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD, PACKET UPDATE METHOD, HOST APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREOF FOR THE PACKET TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A packet transmission system, a packet transmission method, a packet update method, a host apparatus, and a computer program product thereof for the packet transmission system are provided. The packet transmission method comprises the following steps: transmitting a first positioning packet that has a first message serial number; receiving the first positioning packet; generating a temporary packet that has a second message serial number; determining that the first message serial number is smaller than the second message serial number; transmitting the temporary packet; receiving the temporary packet and updating the first message serial as the second message serial number; and transmitting a second positioning packet that has the second message serial number. Thereby, the system not only prevents repeat transmission, but also enhances positioning reliability by using two-way transmission. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074170 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLEVIATING BARRED ACCESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment for alleviating barred access while reselecting from a first cell to a second cell in a mobile communication system is provided. A wireless module detects receives system information broadcasted in the first cell. A storage unit stores the system information. A controller reselects from the first cell to the second cell, determines whether a first barred access timer is running, and stops the first barred access timer and informs the upper layer of an RRC protocol that the access of the first service is allowed in response of that the first barred access timer is running. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074171 | PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A packet communication method of the present invention includes a step of: receiving, at a mobile station (UE), restriction information for accepting an incoming call and restricting an outgoing call; establishing, at the mobile station (UE), a control path with a packet exchange (SGSN) in response to incoming of paging for the mobile station (UE); sending, the packet exchange (SGSN), a message instructing to establish the data path via the control path; and establishing, at the mobile station (UE), the data path by calling to the packet exchange (SGSN), when the mobile station (UE) receives the message after the mobile station (UE) has received the restriction information. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074172 | METHOD FOR RECEPTION OF DATA PACKETS AND CORRESPPONDING TRANSMISSION METHOD - the method is implemented in a first station, data packets being transmitted by at least two second stations intended for the first station, said second stations belonging to a set comprising more than one second stations, the method comprising a transmission of at least one acknowledgement of each data packet received at least once correctly, said acknowledgement(s) being transmitted to each second station of said set. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074173 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR UPDATING SCRIPT IMAGES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for updating script images in wireless sensor networks. In one exemplary embodiment, a system has logic that is configured to display a list of nodes of a wireless sensor network. The logic is further configured to display a script source of a first script image stored at one of the nodes in response to a selection of the one node from the displayed list of nodes. The logic is also configured to modify the script source based on user input and to convert the modified script source to a second script image. The logic is configured to transmit at least one remote procedure call through the wireless sensor network to the one node. The one node is configured to write the second script image in memory of the one node in response to the at least one remote procedure call. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074174 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SWITCHING DATA AT NODES OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for switching data at nodes of a wireless networks. In one exemplary embodiment, a node comprises memory, a first port, a second port, a virtual machine, and logic. The memory is configured to store port settings, and the virtual machine is configured to execute a remote procedure call wirelessly transmitted to the node through the wireless network. In executing the remote procedure call, the virtual machine is configured to set the port settings. The logic is configured to receive data from the first port and to transmit the data to the second port based on the port settings without processing of the data by the virtual machine such that the data streams unchanged through the node from the first port to the second port. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074175 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESSLY COMMUNICATING MULTIDROP PACKETS VIA WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for wirelessly communicating multidrop packets via wireless networks. In one exemplary embodiment, communication devices of a multidrop system are respectively coupled to nodes of a wireless network. At least one of the nodes stores data for mapping multidrop addresses to network addresses. Upon receiving a multidrop packet, such node maps the multidrop address of the received packet to a network address identifying the packet's destination communication device within the multidrop system. The receiving node then inserts the multidrop packet into a unicast message and wirelessly transmits the unicast message through the wireless network to the remote node. The remote node depacketizes the unicast message to recover the multidrop packet and provides the multidrop packet to its destination. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074176 | MESHED NETWORKING OF ACCESS POINTS IN A UTILITY NETWORK - A meshed networking of access points in a utility network provides a more efficient and cost effective arrangement for communicating data between meters and the utility by linking the access points of multiple subnetworks for purposes of communicating with the utility. As a result, each individual subnetwork is not required to directly communicate with the utility. For those access points that are relieved of the need to directly communicate with the utility, the communication mechanism, e.g., cellular modem, can be eliminated, or deactivated, to thereby reduce capital expenditures and/or operational costs. Additionally, links to a WAN can be selectively activated or disabled to provision bandwidth, for example, on demand, to react to changing conditions in the subnetworks. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074177 | Exchange of Information in a Communication Network - A portable node capable of forming ad hoc networks with other nodes is disclosed, as well as a method of transferring at least a first and a second information entity (e.g. files) from a first node to other nodes in an ad hoc network. At least the first and the second information entities are jointly encoded, in the first node, into a composite information entity) in a manner so that the composite information entity can be decoded by use of at least the first information entity or the second information entity. The composite information entity is subsequently transmitted. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074178 | Method for Indication of Consecutive Data Units in a RAN - An object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for improving the performance of a radio access network. The object is achieved by a data packet ( | 03-25-2010 |
20100074179 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, MOBILE TERMINAL MANAGEMENT METHOD USED FOR THEM, AND ITS PROGRAM - A mobility management system manages mobility of any one mobile terminal with a different mobility protocol depending on an access method. The system comprises an anchor node haying a function of managing a CMIP (Client Mobile Internet Protocol) SA (Security Association) and a PMIP (Proxy MIP) SA used to authenticate a location registration message of said mobile terminal. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074180 | SYNCHRONIZING A BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for synchronizing a wireless communication system is disclosed. A silence duration for a base station is determined based on the time required for a neighbor base station to obtain or maintain synchronization. All transmissions from the base station are ceased for the silence duration. Multiple base stations level may cease transmissions at the same time, thus mitigating interference. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074181 | APPARATUS AND MESSAGES FOR INTERWORKING BETWEEN UNLICENSED ACCESS NETWORK AND GPRS NETWORK FOR DATA SERVICES - Methods for performing various operations via unlicensed mobile access (UMA) radio link control (URLC) messages in an unlicensed mobile access network (UMAN). The UMAN comprises a first radio access network that may be employed for accessing data services provided by a core network comprising a second radio access network. URLC messages are exchanged between mobile stations (MSs) and UMA network controllers (UNCs) to perform various operations associated with the UMAN. An MS may access the UMAN via a wireless access point (AP) that is communicatively coupled to a UNC via an IP network. The URLC messages are sent between MSs and UNCs using an Up interface comprising a set of layered protocols over an underlying IP transport. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074182 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SUSPENDING DATA - The present invention relates to telecommunication technologies, and provides a method and a device for suspending data to perform effective data suspension in an Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN) system. In the method, the lower layer performs re-establishment; the upper layer sends data to the lower layer after completion of the re-establishment; and the upper layer suspends the data of the data link or instructs the lower layer to suspend the data of the data link after a data suspension is triggered. The technical solution under the present invention is widely applicable to the EUTRAN system, in which data suspension can be performed according to characters of different protocol layers, and sending of data control can be effectively. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074183 | MODE SWITCHING FOR A DOWNLINK COORDINATED MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATION - A mode-switching network transmitter is for use with a network MIMO super cell and includes a super cell control unit configured to orchestrate a transmission from the network MIMO super cell, wherein the transmission is supplied from a portion of super cell transmission points. The mode-switching network transmitter also includes a transmission unit configured to provide the transmission. Additionally, a transmission mode-switching receiver is for use with user equipment in a network MIMO super cell and includes a reception unit configured to receive a transmission for the user equipment within the network MIMO super cell. The transmission mode-switching receiver also includes a processing unit configured to process the transmission, wherein the transmission is supplied from a portion of super cell transmission points. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074184 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method of communication between a mobile station and a base station in a mobile communication system of IMT-2000 communication network basis, which is suitable for effective transmission of various multimedia information within a given channel capacity, the method including the steps of (1) when a mobile station receives a data transmission request, providing one portion of a period of a data frame with regular number and arrangement of down link slots and up link slots and the other portion of the data frame with irregular number and arrangement of down link slots or/and up link slots depending on characteristics and amount of subscriber data to be transmitted, (2) determining a transmission type according to which a communication is executed using a competition period for determining priorities of the subscriber data, a reservation period for making a reservation for time slots for use in transmission of the subscriber data, and an assignment period for assigning a memory period according to an amount of the subscriber data, which periods are selectively and respectively included in the one portion of the data frame and in the other portion of the data frame, and (3) providing the data frame according to the transmission type and transmitting to the base station. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074185 | MOBILE NETWORK DEVICE MULTI-LINK OPTIMIZATIONS - Methods and apparatus for performing optimizations for a mobile network device such as a Mobile Node or Mobile Router supporting multiple links to a Home Agent (or Correspondent Node in a Mobile IPv6 environment) are disclosed. During the registration process, link characteristics are transmitted in the registration request. From the link characteristics, it is possible to determine whether the mobile network device has roamed from a high to a low bandwidth link, or vice versa. A first set of optimizations may be performed when the mobile network device has roamed from a high to a low bandwidth link, while a second set of optimizations may be performed when the mobile network device has roamed from a low to a high bandwidth link. Some optimizations may be performed during the establishment of a TCP session, while others may be performed during or upon completion of the Mobile IP registration process. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074186 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING ROUTING OF DATA IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING A MOBILE NODE CAPABLE OF ROAMING MOVEMENT - Apparatus, and an associated method, for providing routing information to a mobile node operable in a radio communication system. The routing information is used by the mobile node to address data messages that are to be communicated to a relay host, or other, device. The routing information that is provided to the mobile node includes a plurality of separate routing sequences. Different ones of the routing sequences are used by the mobile node, depending upon at what location that the mobile node is positioned when the data message is sent. A registration server is used by which to create the routing information, responsive to indications of a home network associated with the mobile node and a current location of the mobile node. | 03-25-2010 |
20100080167 | HANDSHAKING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OFDM SYSTEMS WITH UNKNOWN SUB-CHANNEL AVAILABILITY - A method and device for determining available communication sub-channels in an OFDM communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of transmitting, on at least one first sub-channel ( | 04-01-2010 |
20100080168 | PROBABILISTIC ROUTING FOR VEHICULAR AD HOC NETWORK - A probabilistic method of determining a second vehicle in the VANET to which a packet is to be forwarded from a first vehicle is provided. The method includes determining the second vehicle to forward the packet from the first vehicle based on pre-calculated expected latency data corresponding to the second vehicle, and forwarding the packet from the first vehicle to the determined second vehicle. The expected latency data is indicative of the latency expected for communication of the packet from the first vehicle to the destination if the packet is forwarded from the first vehicle to the second vehicle, and is calculated in advance of the step of the determining the second vehicle to forward the packet. The second vehicle to forward the packet may also be determined based on pre-calculated communication probability data corresponding to the second vehicle in addition to the pre-calculated expected latency. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080169 | HIERARCHICAL MOBILITY LABEL-BASED NETWORK - A system includes a label edge router associated with a geographical region, an area label edge router associated with an area that includes the region, and a route reflector associated with the area. The label edge router registers a first mobile node, creates a mobility binding for the first mobile node, and sends a first internal update message that includes the mobility binding. The area label edge router receives a second internal update message that carries contents of the first internal update message, updates a forwarding information base based on the second internal update message to establish a first label switched path, and sends an external update message. The route reflector receives the first internal update message, sends the second internal update message to the area label edge router, and receives the external update message from the area label edge router. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080170 | Improved MAC-D Multiplexing in UTRAN HSDPA Wireless Networks - UTRAN MAC-d multiplexing of data from multiple logical channels to a single MAC-d flow is supported while reducing overhead and achieving octet alignment in MAC-d PDU length. In one embodiment, the C/T field of a multiplexed MAC-d PDU is eliminated, and the logical channels multiplexed into the MAC-d flow are mapped to a MAC-hs PQ in at least the NodeB (and preferably in the UE as well). In other embodiments, the C/T field is retained, and an octet-aligned length indicator is transmitted from the RNC to the UE. In one embodiment, the length indicator is octet-aligned by padding the MAC-d PDUs. In another embodiment, transmitters and receivers in the path from RNC to UE are configured with an offset to add to the length indicator to achieve octet alignment. The padding or offset is (8−n) bits, where n=the number of bits in C/T field. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080171 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICES IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in mobile radio telecommunications for enabling access to Circuit Switched (CS) services for a user equipment (UE) that is connected to a LTE/SAE (Long Term Evolution/System Architecture Evolution) network. The UE's current position is stored in a LTE position format in the LTE network or in the SAE network. The invention provides steps and means for transforming the UE's position in LTE format to position information in CS format for the UE, steps and means for registering the UE in the CS network using said transformed position information, and steps and means for establishing access to CS services provided by said CS network. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080172 | PROXY MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL (PMIP) IN A MULTI-INTERFACE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - A communication entity (such as a User Equipment (UE), an Access Gateway (AGW), a Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW), a Policy Charging Rule Function (PCRF), and so forth) notifies another communication entity that the UE intends to use a single Internet Protocol (IP) address for connections to multiple AGWs. The communication entity also sends information that is related to at least one of the UE's IP flows to another communication entity. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080173 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A first storage stores a first number of streams which are capable of being demultiplexed by the wireless communication apparatus. A first acquisition unit acquires a second number of streams which are capable of being demultiplexed by a first wireless communication apparatus. A second acquisition unit acquires a third number of sum of streams of communications performed by the wireless communication apparatus and the first wireless communication apparatus. A second storage stores, if the first number of streams exceeds the third number of streams, a difference between the first and third numbers of streams as an allowable number of streams. A determination unit determines that a wireless medium is idle, in the case where a number of streams required for perform a new communication is not more than the allowable number of streams. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080174 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT SERVER, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND NETWORK SELECTION METHOD - A wireless terminal that can connect to a plurality of networks makes a request for a connection to a management server. The management server holds network information about unchanging service characteristics of a plurality of networks constituting a wireless communication area. The management server selects networks satisfying a request condition of a wireless terminal that has requested a connection based on the network information and notifies the selected networks, as candidates for connection, to the wireless terminal. The wireless terminal measures changing service characteristics of the candidates for connection notified from the management server, selects a network from the candidates for connection based on a measurement result, and connects to the selected network. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080175 | WEB BASED SMART SENSOR NETWORK TRACKING AND MONITORING SYSTEM - A wireless sensor network including a plurality of Smart Sensors coupled to a wide area network such as the Internet via a Wireless Sensor Coordinator. Each wireless sensor network comprises a plurality of Smart Sensors, each operable to measure one or more physical quantities. Each wireless sensor communicates the measured data to a Wireless Sensor Coordinator which then stores the collected data in memory. The Wireless Sensor Coordinator further includes a web server operable to post a web site on a network that is accessible by a common web browser. Upon receiving a request for sensed data via the web site, the Wireless Sensor Coordinator retrieves the appropriate measured and stored data and converts it into HTML format pages which are then posted on the web site for review by the requestor. | 04-01-2010 |
20100085910 | ALLOCATING COMMUNICATION FREQUENCIES TO CLUSTERS OF ACCESS POINTS - A system is used in a wireless communication system made up of cells, at least one of which includes at least one sector. The system includes first access points in a first area of a sector of a cell. The first access points are prohibited from communicating over a first frequency. The system also includes second access points in a second area of the sector of the cell. The second access points are prohibited from communicating over a second frequency that is different from the first frequency. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085911 | Base Station Device and Signal Processing Method - A base station device of the present invention includes a base-station main body and multiple antenna units connected in series to the base-station main body. Each of the antenna units includes: a wireless communication unit that includes an antenna for wirelessly transmitting and receiving a signal to and from a mobile terminal; a multiplexer that multiplexes a reception signal received by another antenna unit and a reception signal received by the wireless communication unit, and outputs the multiplexed reception signals to the base-station main body; and a demultiplexer that separates a transmission signal to be transmitted by the wireless communication unit from among multiplexed transmission signals input from the base-station main body, and outputs a transmission signal to be transmitted from the other antenna unit thereto. The base-station main body includes: a demultiplexer that demultiplexes the multiplexed reception signals into reception signals received by wireless communication units of the antenna units; and a multiplexer that multiplexes transmission signals output from the network and to be transmitted from the antenna units and outputs the multiplexed transmission signals to the antenna units. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085912 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION - There is provided a method for enabling a user equipment to transmit feedback information. The method includes generating feedback data representing the feedback information, the feedback data expressed by a binary number having N bits, where N is an integer, the N bits comprising 2 levels, the feedback information represented by one of the 2 levels, wherein different types of the feedback information are assigned to different levels and transmitting the feedback data. Overheads incurred by transmission of feedback information can be reduced. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085913 | SYSTEM ACQUISITION WITH INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION IN THE PRESENCE OF FEMTOCELLS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate acquisition of a cell in the presence of interfering cells. An undesired cell in close proximity to a user equipment unit (UE) can inhibit detection of a desired cell. For instance, a femto cell near the UE can interfere with detection and acquisition of a macro cell. The UE can detect the undesired cell and reconstruct an estimate of signals transmitted by the undesired cell. The estimate can be employed to cancel interference from received signals to facilitate acquisition of a desired cell. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085914 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING IMS SESSION CONTINUITY TO A USER EQUIPMENT ACROSS A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method and system for providing IP Multi-media Subsystem (IMS) session continuity to a User Equipment (UE) across a plurality of communication networks is provided. The UE traverses from a first communication network to a second communication network. A public user identity associated with a private user identity of the UE is registered with the first communication network by using a first address. The method includes generating ( | 04-08-2010 |
20100085915 | Overlay Network Node - A technology is disclosed for actualizing route optimization on a network base, even when privacy-sensitive information, such as a position of a mobile node, is not revealed between two different networks. In the technology, a pHA | 04-08-2010 |
20100085916 | Systems and Methods for Hybrid Wired and Wireless Universal Access Networks - A method for operating a network having one or more nodes wherein each of the nodes having one or more resources, comprising the steps of: forming the network using one or more nodes, wherein certain one or more of the nodes is a gateway connecting to two or more different network connection types; and managing the one or more nodes of the network; wherein the nodes are segregated into one or more cells each having one or more of the nodes and one or more supernodes; wherein the nodes within the same cell are interconnected; and wherein the supernodes are interconnected. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085917 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATION STRATEGY SELECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate cooperation strategy selection for a network multiple-in-multiple-out (N-MIMO) communication system. As described herein, one or more nodes in a communication system capable of N-MIMO communication can calculate marginal utilities, projected per-user rates, and/or other parameters corresponding to respective associated users. Based on these calculations, respective network nodes can perform user scheduling and selection, cell scheduling and selection, selection of a cooperation strategy (e.g., coordinated silencing, joint transmission, coordinated beamforming, etc.), and/or other operations to provide cooperative communication for respective users. As further described herein, projected rate calculation for a given user can be adjusted based on processing or channel implementation loss associated with the user, interference nulling capability of the user, or other factors. As additionally described herein, these and/or other parameters can be fed back by respective users to a serving network node and/or mandated via system performance requirements. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085918 | Method and Apparatus Pertaining to Updating a High-Bandwidth Hardware-Based Packet-Processing Platform Local Session Context State Database - These various embodiments comprise or are suitable for implementation by a high-bandwidth hardware-based packet-processing platform that is configured to be installed at a traffic-aggregation point for a communications network having a plurality of attachment points at its edge. These teachings provide for receiving (via, for example, a packet-receiving interface) at least substantially all data packets as pass through the traffic-aggregation point and then extracting session context state data from at least a majority of these data packets. By one approach, this session context state data comprises, at least in part, information pertaining to a location as pertains to a calling party (such as the point of network attachment for that calling party). This session context state data is then used to update a local session context state database. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085919 | AMBLE MODULATION SERIES - A base station in a multi-hop network wirelessly transmits a preamble series to be received by a subscriber station in the network, and wirelessly transmits a reverse version of the preamble series to be received by a relay station in the network. The relay station receives the transmitted reverse version of the preamble series. The subscriber station receives the transmitted the preamble series. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085920 | Method of Subnet Roaming within a Network - Disclosed is an apparatus and method of client device roaming from a home subnet to a foreign subnet of a network. The method includes the client device accessing the network through a first access node of the home subnet, and the client device roaming to a second access node of the foreign subnet, the client device accessing the network through the second access node, the client device maintaining a fixed client IP address, default gateway IP address and IP subnet attachment as the client device roams from the first access node to the second access node. | 04-08-2010 |
20100091700 | AD-HOC NETWORK ACQUISITION USING CHAOTIC SEQUENCE SPREAD WAVEFORM - Method and system for identifying neighbor nodes in an ad-hoc wireless network including two or more nodes. The method involves generating a beacon signal at a first node of the network for alerting other nodes in the network of the presence of the first node. A digitally generated first spreading sequence is also generated at the first node. Thereafter, the beacon signal is modulated with the first spreading sequence to produce a spread spectrum signal which is then transmitted. The spreading sequence is selected to be a chaotic sequence. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091701 | METHOD FOR COGNITIVE RADIO BASED COMMUNICATION AND METHOD FOR BROADCASTING POLICY INFORMATION FOR THE SAME - A method of broadcasting frequency policy information in a cognitive radio based communication system, apparatus therefore and a communication method using the same are disclosed. In particular, a policy broadcaster is provided as a subject performing a broadcast of frequency policy information in cognitive radio communication. A method of broadcasting frequency policy information using the same and a method of performing cognitive radio communication by obtaining frequency policy information using the same are provided. Moreover, an enhanced superframe structure, which is capable of providing a seamless service in case that a narrowband terminal is introduced in the middle of a superframe, is provided. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091702 | Cell search based on beacon in a wireless communication system - Techniques for transmitting beacon signals to assist user equipments (UEs) perform cell search and techniques for detecting for beacon signals are described. In an aspect, cells may be assigned beacon patterns defined based on orthogonal grouping of subcarriers. U subcarriers usable for beacon may be arranged into G orthogonal groups, with each group including S subcarriers. different beacon patterns may be defined based on the G groups of S subcarriers. In another aspect, the cells may transmit their beacon signals at configurable transmit power levels, which may be determined based on target beacon detection performance. In yet another aspect, a UE may perform overlapping DFTs in order to capture more received power when symbol timing at the UE is not aligned with symbol timing of cells being detected. In yet another aspect, the UE may perform beacon detection with maximal likelihood decoding. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091703 | BINDING UPDATE METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL, HOME AGENT, AND BINDING UPDATE SYSTEM - Disclosed in a technique for providing a binding update method and the like capable of resolving such a situation that a BA message keeps reciprocating between HAs. According to the technique, there is provided a binding update method, in which a mobile terminal transmits, to a home agent of the mobile terminal, a first message containing an address that is the destination to that the home agent forwards, and the home agent of the mobile terminal updates, based on the first message, a cache in which a home address of the mobile terminal is associated with an address that is the destination to that the home agent forwards, and transmits a second message as a reply to the first message to the mobile terminal, wherein when receiving the second message, the mobile terminal transmits, to the home agent of the mobile terminal, a third message notifying that the second message has been received, and after receiving the third message, the home agent of the mobile terminal updates the cache. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091704 | Mobile telecommunications and random access preamble content - The present invention provides for a mobile radio communications device of a mobile radio communications network arranged for delivering a non-synchronized random access preamble message such that the non-synchronized random access preamble message comprises a multi-bit message including Cause ID bits and selective bits comprising at least signature bits for collision avoidance, and in which the inclusion of CQI bits is determined responsive to signaling received from the network and indicative of cell characteristics or parameters. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091705 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING TCP DATA OVER ASYMMETRIC LINKS - In a method and device the TCP load offered in the uplink is manipulated such that an offered load asymmetry is achieved. Using such an arrangement it is possible to compensate for a link asymmetry when uplink and downlink connections are sharing the same uplink buffer in order to increase performance of the downlink. The method and device are capable of increasing the download performance both in the case when TCP connections are terminated in a different device than the terminal where the link layer is terminated, as well as when the TCP connections are terminated in the same device as the link-layer. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091706 | SCP-CONTROLLED OVERLAY BETWEEN GSM AND IMS - The invention relates to method of executing a service in a Media Gateway Control Function ( | 04-15-2010 |
20100091707 | METHOD FOR ROUTE OPTIMIZATION BETWEEN MOBILE ENTITIES - A communication network ( | 04-15-2010 |
20100091708 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - In a radio communication system including a mobile station and a base station apparatus for communicating with the mobile station according to a SC-FDMA scheme in uplink, the mobile station includes a transmitting unit configured to transmit at least one of a first signal and a second signal; and a Sounding RS transmitting unit configured to determine a transmission band for a Sounding Reference Signal (Sounding RS) based on mapping information of at least one of the first signal and the second signal. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091709 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING RADIO PROTOCOL IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND TRANSMITTER OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS - An apparatus and method for performing procedures (protocols) of a PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) layer and an RLC (Radio layer in an E-UMTS (Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) which has evolved from UMTS, among radio protocols of a mobile communication system. The PDCP layer performs ciphering on data (i.e., PDCP SDU) received from an upper layer, generates an indicator discriminating ciphered data and non-ciphered data (i.e., an ROHC feedback packet directly generated by the PDCP layer), and transmits the same to a lower layer (i.e., MAC layer). A PDCP SN (Sequence Number) is defined as an algorithm for ciphering the data in the PDCP layer to perform ciphering in the PDCP layer. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091710 | METHOD OF PROVIDING IP MOBILITY USING SCTP SIGNALING IN 3GPP BASED NEXT GENERATION MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Provided is a method of providing IP mobility using SCTP (Stream Control Transmission Protocol) signaling in a 3GPP (3 | 04-15-2010 |
20100091711 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication method is provided which includes the steps of selecting, by a wireless communication device belonging to a communication system operating on a certain communication protocol, a communication protocol among a plurality of communication protocols, exchanging, among a plurality of wireless communication devices including the wireless communication device, information including peripheral communication status of each wireless communication device by using the selected communication protocol, and changing the communication protocol to be used for exchanging the information. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091712 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS UTILIZING A SINGLE ANTENNA WITH MULTIPLE CHANNELS AND THE DEVICES THEREOF - The present invention provides wireless communication methods utilizing a single antenna with multiple channels and the devices thereof. The method includes providing a plurality of communication channels within the single antenna. The plurality of communication channels may include a probe channel and a data channel. The single antenna may selectively switch between the probe channel and the data channel based on a probe signal transmitted in the probe channel so as to facilitate data transmission. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091713 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION - In a method of transmitting a logical channel by using a downlink transport channel, a plurality of transmission configurations are limited into a limited set of the transmission configurations. Control information relating to the limited set of the transmission configurations of the downlink transport channel is transmitted and at least a part of data of the logical channel is transmitted over the downlink transport channel. Thus, an amount of the control information is reduced. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091714 | ACCESS POINT MULTI-LEVEL TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL SUPPORTING PERIODIC HIGH POWER LEVEL TRANSMISSIONS - A wireless access point selects its own transmission power for different types of the transmissions. The access point transmits to client devices at reduced power levels, however, periodic beacons and other selected non-beacon transmissions can be transmitted at a high power level to facilitate association by other client devices | 04-15-2010 |
20100097981 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING MULTIPLE MEDIA STREAMS IN A HYBRID WIRELESS NETWORK - A hybrid cellular and IWLAN network having an access gateway providing a user with simultaneous access to GGSN base packet data services and PDG based broadband multi-media services with one IP address. The system further comprises an authentication center retrieving the user's subscription profile information from an operator network to check the user's subscription to simultaneous GGSN and PDG services, wherein said access gateway multiplexes and de-multiplexes the service sessions without any change to said user. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097982 | DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE, IN AUTOMATIC DATA COLLECTION ENVIRONMENT - Dynamic configuration of a wireless environment, for example a wireless automatic data collection environment adjust various thresholds that trigger searching or scanning for new wireless access points (WAPs) and/or roaming. Thresholds may be increased or decreased based on various outcomes. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097983 | CONNECTION BASED LOCAL IP-MOBILITY - The invention relates to a method for packet switched data transmission in a local network, the local network comprising a mobile node and a plurality of interconnected connection anchor points each with a link at which the mobile node can attach. The method comprises the steps of detecting a movement of the mobile node from a first connection anchor point to a second connection anchor point, the mobile node communicating via a tunnelled connection between the first and second connection anchor point, maintaining the existing tunnelled connections between the second connection anchor point and the first connection anchor point, and enabling new connections between the mobile node and correspondent nodes using addresses that are topologically correct. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097984 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EFFICIENT CONNECTION SETUP PROCEDURE FOR MOBILE TERMINATED (MT) CALLS - The invention relates to telecommunication systems and in particular to a method and system for efficient connection setup procedure for mobile terminated calls. A method of connection setup for mobile terminated calls is proposed in which a page message originating from the access network contains one access sequence along with access terminal identity or unicast access terminal identifier (UATI) of the paged access terminal. When more than one access terminal uses the same access sequence for sending their access probe at the same time a collision may occur. Access network selects access sequences from a reserved pool to direct the paged access terminal for performing access attempt to avoid collisions during access attempts. With this resource pooling, there is no need to send bind request and hence connection setup time reduces. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097985 | Method for Randomly Accessing a Wireless Network - In a wireless network including a base station (BS) and a set of mobile stations (MS), a MS transmits a ranging request message to the BS, using random access, when the MS enters the cell. The ranging request message includes request MS specific information for identifying the MS. The MS receives a ranging response message broadcast from the BS, which includes response MS specific information, request and response specific information to determine whether the BS received the request, or whether a collision occurred. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097986 | Loop-Detection in Moving Networks - A method of generating network identifiers for use by mobile routers of a moving network is provided which enables fast and efficient routing loop avoidance and detection. The method comprises receiving at a mobile router of a sub-network chain, a beacon from a preceding mobile router in the chain, the beacon containing a network identifier of the preceding mobile router, generating a new network identifier by applying a pre-defined function to the received network identifier, and including the new network identifier in beacons broadcast by the receiving mobile router. When preparing for a handover, a mobile router compares the network identifier contained in a received beacon with values generated by applying said function against its own network identifier. This allows the mobile router to identify beacons originating from mobile routers that are downstream in the same chain. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097987 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING DATA RETRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for controlling data retransmission at a transmitting side in a wireless communication system is provided. In the method, the transmitting side transmits a new transmission packet to a receiving side. The transmitting side then transmits reason indication information, indicating a reason why the transmitting side has initiated the transmission of the new transmission packet, to the receiving side. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097988 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK WITH LINEAR STRUCTURE BEING CAPABLE OF BIDIRECTIONAL COMMUNICATION AND METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a wireless sensor network with a linear structure capable of bidirectional communication. The wireless sensor network includes a plurality of nodes linearly connected from a sink node to a terminal node by connecting each node to a single upper-level node and a single lower-level node, each node has an active period for transmitting/receiving data to/from its upper-level node and lower-level node, the active period includes a downstream duration for transmitting data/commands from the sink node to the terminal node and an upstream duration for transmitting data/commands from the terminal node to the sink node, and each of the upstream and downstream durations sequentially includes RX, TX, and ACK intervals, so that bidirectional communication between the sink node and the terminal node can be performed within a single active period. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097989 | Communication system and communication method for assisting user retrieving geography-associated multimedia information - The invention discloses a communication system for assisting a user for retrieving geography-associated multimedia information, and the communication system comprises a data processing device and several mobile communication devices. The data processing device receives a first request information including a location term and a time term from a terminal device of the user, and broadcasting a second request information, based on the time term, to the mobile communication devices located within a region relative to the location term. The data processing device receives responding messages and captured audio and/or video data from the mobile communication devices accepting the second request information, and transmitting a location-related information to the terminal device based on the responding messages. The user transmits responding information responsive to the location-related information to the data processing device via the terminal device. The data processing device transmits the captured audio and/or video data (representative of the retrieved geography-associated multimedia information) relative to the responding information to the terminal device. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097990 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN SERVICES OVER A PACKET SWITCHED NETWORK - A method and Packet Mobile Switching Center (PMSC) for providing MSC-based services over a packet-switched network. An interface between a mobile station and the PMSC is used to transfer control plane and user plane information between the mobile station and the PMSC over the packet-switched network. In one embodiment, the PMSC includes a network controller for handling control plane information from a packet-switched core network and an interworking unit for handling user plane information from the packet-switched core network. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097991 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND DESTINATION PARTNER COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A technology is disclosed for performing route optimization on only a one-way direct route when communication is performed between a mobile node and a correspondent node on a direct route without passing through a home agent of the mobile node. In the technology, (1) the MN transmits a HoTi message to the CN via the HA, (2) the CN transmits a HoT message to the MN via the HA in response to the HoTi message, (3) the MN transmits a CoTiα message directly to the CN, (4) the CN authenticates the CoTiα message and transmits a CoTiα message to the MN via the HA, (5) the MN transmits a BUα message directly to the CN, and (6) the CN authenticates the BUα message and transmits a BAα message to the MN via the HA. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097992 | NETWORK CONTROLLED OVERHEAD REDUCTION OF DATA PACKETS BY ROUTE OPTIMIZATION PROCEDURE - The invention relates to a method for reducing the header size of data packets exchanged between a Mobile Node (MN) and a gateway that is located between the MN and a Corresponding Node (CN). Different sort of headers are utilized between the MN and the gateway, and between the gateway and the CN. The sort of header, obtained by an optimizing procedure, allows to reduce the header size of exchanged packets on said data path section. To achieve this, a modified route optimization (RO) process is performed between the MN and the gateway, wherein the gateway acts on behalf of the CN. After completing the first RO process, the MN initiates and performs a second RO process with the gateway acting as CN. After completing both route optimization processes, data packet transmission is performed between the CN and the gateway after switching from IPsec tunnel mode to IPsec transport mode. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097993 | System for Effective Position Management Signaling Associated with Mobile Node Moving in Mobile Network, Router, Mobile Node, and Mobile Router - The present invention provides a system and method for achieving fast and efficient location management signaling between a mobile node, which is nested in a mobile network for possibly long periods of time, and a plurality of correspondent nodes and home agents associated with the said mobile node. More particularly, the present invention relates to attaining fast and efficient location management signaling by means of secure delegation of signaling rights to some trusted signaling proxy server in the fixed domain, which does the location management signaling for the mobile node as a signaling proxy for the mobile node. This signaling proxy server discovered is such that it is in the natural path of the care-of test packets and also be able to send the care-of test init packets using MN's care-of address overcoming ingress filtering. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097994 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE IP - Network system for communicating between a mobile node and a correspondent node via a first IP edge-IP network-second IP edge connectivity, comprising a user IP addressing space and a network IP addressing space, wherein a locator identifier space is inserted between the user IP and network IP addressing space, wherein the first and second IP edges are associated with first and second locator identifiers, and wherein the system is further arranged for associating a mobile node with one or more IP network addresses and an IP user address decoupled from the one or more IP network addresses via the first locator identifier. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097995 | PACKET ROUTING METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An access controller is coupled to an access point and receives data packets from connected user equipment. The access controller is configured to perform packet inspection techniques on the received packets to determine if they should be locally switched. In some embodiments, packets destined for a local intranet services may be locally switched to avoid congesting a core network link. In further embodiments, a local connection to the Internet may be used so that locally switched packets can also be directed to the Internet without the use of a core network link. In still further embodiment, in addition to packet inspection techniques, the access controller maintains a state table for the states of connected user equipment. The access controller may use the information in this table to further decide whether to perform local switching techniques. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097996 | BASE STATION ALMANAC ASSISTED POSITIONING - A database provides base station almanac information pertaining to more than one network mode of communication. A wireless device accesses this database through a centralized server or network, or via the base station, base station controller or the like, with which it is currently communicating. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097997 | MIMO TRANSMITTER AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING OFDM SYMBOLS WITH CYCLIC-DELAY DIVERSITY - A multiple-input multiple output (MIMO) transmitter and methods for transmitting orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (OFDM) symbols with cyclic-delay diversity (CDD) are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a base station uses a number of antennas for MIMO transmission of OFDM symbols. For the number of antennas, quadrature-amplitude modulated (QAM) symbols are distributed across a group of OFDM tones of a block comprising the group of tones and a group of OFDM symbols. An incremented cyclic delay is applied to the QAM symbols of the block associated with each subsequent of the antennas for CDD transmission. Each blocks is transmitted by an associated one of the antennas. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097998 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In order to reduce interference between cells through hopping and use frequencies in a good propagation situation, a scheduler section | 04-22-2010 |
20100097999 | Method and apparatus to enable multiple receivers - Briefly, a wireless communication device that includes a processor to enable a determined number of receivers of a MIMO system according to a value provided with a request to enable the receivers is provided. A method for enabling the receivers of MIMO system is also provided. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098000 | Hybrid fiber twisted pair local loop network service architecture - A new architecture capable of utilizing the existing twisted pair interface between customer premises equipment and an associated serving local switching office is used to provide a vast array of new services to customers. Using an intelligent services director (ISD) at the customer services equipment as an interface for the equipment to an existing twisted cable pair and a facilities management platform (FMP) at the serving local switching office as an interface to various networks and service opportunities, new services such as simultaneous, multiple calls (voice analog or digital), facsimile, Internet traffic and other data can be transmitted and received over the twisted cable pair by using digital subscriber loop transmission schemes. The new services include but are not limited to videophone, utility meter reading and monitoring, broadcasting and multicasting. The architecture provides for fault-tolerant, transparent interaction of components and services and supports a variety of standards for each level of the open systems interconnection layers and layers of TCP/IP. The FMP connects electronically or optically to the public switched telephone network, Internet backbone, a private Intranet as well as other possible network connections. | 04-22-2010 |
20100103868 | METHOD FOR MODELING WIRELESS NETWORK COVERAGE UNDER LINE-OF-SIGHT CONDITIONS - A line-of-sight (LOS) wireless communications network uses an initial coverage map to indicate expected performance of at least a portion of the network. Man-made structures, terrain and vegetative barriers may degrade system performance. The initial coverage map is updated using techniques, such as the automatic searching of construction database information, satellite imaging, actual system performance measurements, and failed installation attempts to generate a revised coverage map. The measurement techniques may be used alone or in combination to generate the revised coverage map. Other information regarding additions to the LOS wireless network or the introduction of other wireless networks within the area may be used to generate the revised coverage map. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103869 | TRANSFERRING DATA IN A MOBILE TELEPHONY NETWORK - A mobile telephony network comprises base stations operating according to a predetermined standard. A transfer node allows the transfer of data from a first base station to a second base station in the mobile telephone network. Data is sent from the first base station to a data receiver of the data transfer node via a first wireless communications channel complying with the said standard. The received data is transferred via an interface within the transfer node to a data sender of the data transfer node. The data sender sends the transferred data to the second base station via a second wireless communications channel complying with the said standard. The interface within the transfer node does not comply with the operating standard because it transfers data only within the node. Data may be sent from the second base station to the first base station via the node in similar manner. Preferably, the receiver appears to the first base station to be a relay and the sender appears to the second base station to be a user terminal. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103870 | CONTEXT-AWARE PACKET SWITCHING - Embodiments of a communication system, a method, and a device for use with the communication system are described. Communication between the devices in the communication system may be enabled by the method. In particular, nodes or devices (henceforth referred to as devices) in a network (such as an ad-hoc network) in the communication system may exchange a dynamic network context via communication with neighboring devices. These devices may use the dynamic network context to determine how network resources are shared during the communication, including performing context-aware packet switching of packets (including data packets) in an information flow. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103871 | Methods and systems for providing user information in telecommunications networks - Example embodiments and methods are directed to providing and otherwise handling user information within telecommunications networks, including wireless telecommunications networks. Example embodiments may include wireless networks having a Correlation Data Records Store (CDRS) that may store and update all user data needed by applications and services operating in example networks. Example methods may provide for collection and handling in the CDRS of all user information relied upon by applications and services operating in wireless networks, so as to reduce resource consumption by such applications and services. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103872 | Method and system of managing QOS-guarenteed multimode fast mobility in wireless networks - Disclosed herein is a method and system for managing QoS-guaranteed multimode fast mobility in wireless networks. The method includes the steps of (a) in response to a request for call establishment, registering a user ID, the unique IP address of a user, a currently used temporary IP address and the current location of the mobile host; (b) completing the call establishment; (c) establishing a tunnel between the OMS and the mobile host; (d) in response to the provision of a new temporary IP address and the wireless network information of a newly activated wireless communication interface, establishing a new tunnel using the unique IP address of the OMS and the new temporary IP address of the mobile host, and then transmitting data packets in parallel; and (e) in response to a request for the removal of a tunnel, removing the corresponding tunnel. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103873 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING CONNECTION OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL TO A RADIO COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for enabling connection of a mobile communication terminal ( | 04-29-2010 |
20100103874 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT, NODE AND ARTICLE FOR OPTIMIZED PS DOMAIN IN GAN - A method and arrangement for optimizing a packet-switched (PS) domain of a Generic Access Network (GAN) that communicates with a Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) in the PS domain. The SGSN detects that a GAN access is being attempted by a mobile station. In response, communications between the mobile station and the SGSN are conducted using a light-weight version of a communication protocol in which functionality that is unnecessary in the GAN mode of operation is decreased. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103875 | Establishing Parallel Tunnels for Higher Bit Rate - An object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for an improved network capacity when using fixed wireless terminal. The object is achieved by a method in a radio access network node for establishing at least two packet data tunnels for packet transmission, from a fixed wireless terminal in a local area network through a set of cells in a radio access network. The set of cells comprises at least two cells. The fixed wireless terminal is a radio access network node comprised in the radio access network. The radio access network comprises a plurality of potential cells to which the packet data tunnels may be established, whereof said set of cells are part of the potential cells. The method comprising the steps of: Selecting the set of cells to use for a packet transmission, based on radio link quality between the fixed wireless terminal and each of the respective potential cells and establishing the at least two packet data tunnels, one individual packet data tunnel from the fixed wireless terminal through each of the respective cells in the selected set of cells. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103876 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A technology is disclosed for actualizing flow filtering associated with a packet destined for a mobile terminal while minimizing processes performed by the mobile terminal in a network environment in which a network-based mobility protocol is operating. In the technology, a mobile node | 04-29-2010 |
20100103877 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS PROVIDING MOBILE TRANSMIT DIVERSITY - A method for use by a remote unit in an Evolution Data Optimized (EVDO) network includes sending transmissions to a base station, each of the transmissions corresponding to a respective one of multiple hypotheses of multiple antenna usage. The method also includes receiving feedback from the base station in response to the transmissions, the feedback being uninformed of multiple antenna usage and using the feedback to select at least one of the hypotheses. The method further includes transmitting data using a multiple-antenna scheme associated with the selected hypotheses. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103878 | WIRELESS SENSOR-NETWORK SYSTEM, SENSING TERMINAL NODE, AND BASE STATION - To correct a sensor data acquisition time with a simple hardware configuration, provided is a wireless sensor-network system including: a base station; and a plurality of sensing terminal nodes, the base station transmitting a beacon at predetermined intervals to the plurality of sensing terminal nodes, the plurality of sensing terminal nodes measuring data and transmitting, based on a reception of the beacon transmitted from the base station, the sensor data thus obtained to the base station, in which the plurality of sensing terminal nodes obtain, based on an internal clock, a time at which the beacon is received and transmit the time to the base station, and the base station corrects, based on the reception time transmitted from each of the plurality of sensing terminal nodes, the sensor data acquisition time. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103879 | Systems and Methods for Providing Wireless Communications for Data and Voice Communications - A wireless communications system that provides communication for a plurality of communication devices. The wireless communications system includes an interface including a local exchange carrier (LEC) connection port, a subscriber connection port and a wireless connection port. The wireless communications system includes a wireless terminal connected to the interface that provides wireless data and voice connectivity over a wireless network. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103880 | DATA TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND DATA TRANSMISSION DEVICE - The embodiments relate to the wireless communication field, and a data transmission control method and a data transmission device are provided. The method includes: receiving from a sender and buffering data in a buffer, and then forwarding the buffered data to a receiver; receiving an acknowledgement (ACK) returned by the receiver, where the ACK indicates that the data is received; adding or reducing the ACK returned by the receiver according to a volume of data unsent in the buffer; and sending the processed ACK to the sender. The data sending rate of the sender is controlled by the processed ACK. This makes the data transmission be reliable and highly efficient. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103881 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL CHANNEL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system using both a discontinuous transmission scheme and a compressed mode transmission scheme, if a preamble and/or a postamble of a channel including control information for transmitting a specific channel overlaps a compressed mode (CM) gap, an overall transmission unit is not transmitted or remaining signals of the transmission unit excluding the preamble and/or the postamble overlapping the CM gap are transmitted. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103882 | EARLY TERMINATION OF LOW DATA RATE TRAFFIC IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and techniques are disclosed relating to wireless communications, and more specifically, to various systems and techniques for early termination of low rate traffic in a wireless network. A physical layer packet (PLP) grouping factor K configures the PLP into K groups and an ACK/NACK is received on each group. | 04-29-2010 |
20100110975 | MAPPING AN ORIGINAL MAC ADDRESS OF A TERMINAL TO A UNIQUE LOCALLY ADMINISTRATED VIRTUAL MAC ADDRESS - In a network terminals communicate wirelessly through gateway devices with an access node. In the access node an original media access control (MAC) address of a terminal is mapped to a unique, locally administered virtual MAC address for the terminal. This virtual MAC address has a particular portion indicating a unit-specific use including fields that indicate a port index for the gateway device through which the respective terminal communicates with the access node, and an MAC index for the original media access control address of the terminal. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110976 | A METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A SECTORPARAMETERS MESSAGE IN AN ACTIVE STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving a SectorParameters message in an Active state is provided. The method comprises transmitting a SectorParameters message over a Forward Traffic Channel Medium Access Control(MAC) in superframe number wherein the superframe number is divisible by N | 05-06-2010 |
20100110977 | MANAGEMENT UNIT NETWORK FOR MANAGING A PLURALITY OF MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A management unit network manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a plurality of local management units, each of the plurality of local management units engaging in bidirectional data communication with at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to the at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices. A first regional management unit processes the inbound data to produce the outbound data and for sending the outbound data to the at least one of the plurality of local management units and on to the multiservice communication devices. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110978 | IMS Device Reconfiguration - A method and arrangement in a telecommunication system for facilitating communications between a first terminal A configured to use a first session model and a second terminal B configured to use a second session model for media transportation. The first terminal A initiates a service capability check and in response, receives capability features of the second terminal B. Upon determining that the second terminal B uses the second session model, the first terminal A is reconfigured to use the second session model. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110979 | System And Method For Incorporating A Low Power Mode In Wireless Communication - According to one embodiment, a method for wireless communication comprises providing, at a base station, a plurality of endpoints with access to a wireless network. The method also comprises the base station entering a low power mode, wherein the base station ceases to provide the plurality of endpoints with access to the wireless network while in the low power mode. In addition, the method comprises the base station transitioning to an active mode from the low power mode during a first predetermined time, wherein the first predetermined time is identified by the base station and at least one endpoint before the base station transitions to the active mode. Further, if the base station receives a request to access the wireless network from at least one endpoint after transitioning to the active mode during a second predetermined time, the method comprises the base station remaining in the active mode. If the base station does not receive a request to access the wireless network from at least one endpoint after transitioning to the active mode during the second predetermined time, the method comprises the base station transitioning to the low power mode. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110980 | Technique for controlling establishment of a tandem-free transcoder operation - The invention relates to a technique for controlling establishment of a tandem free operation (TFO) for transfer of TFO frames including content frames between a first and a second transcoder unit without transcoding of the content frames. A method aspect of the technique comprises the steps of transmitting, in case a remotely used codec does not meet a codec compatibility condition, a first transparent mode message indicating to in-path equipment a transparent mode for subsequent transparent TFO negotiation, and transmitting, in the transparent mode, a TFO configuration frame indicating a local TFO codec list. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110981 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR STATION-TO-STATION DIRECTIONAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Method and system for directional wireless communication, is provided. One implementation involves directionally transmitting a request for access to a shared wireless communication medium, for directional communication between two wireless stations, and receiving a broadcast response indicating a time period during which the wireless stations may perform directional communication therebetween via the wireless communication medium by setting their antenna directions to each other. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110982 | Method for transmitting channel quality information based on differential scheme - A method for transmitting channel quality information based on a differential scheme is disclosed. When channel quality information of a predetermined number of sub-bands selected by a receiver in a frequency selective channel is transmitted, total average channel information is transmitted. Channel information of the selected sub-bands is transmitted as sub-band differential information associated with average channel information. In this case, the sub-band differential information may be denoted by a specific value contained positive (+) values. If at least two channel quality information is transmitted by a MIMO system, channel quality information of one channel is transmitted, then channel quality information of the other channel is transmitted as spatial differential information. In this case, the spatial differential information is denoted by a specific value contained in a differential-value range asymmetrical on the basis of “ | 05-06-2010 |
20100110983 | Downlink network synchronization mechanism for femtocell in cellular OFDM systems - A method of downlink synchronization for a femto base station in a cellular orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) system is provided. The femto base station first scans one or more received reference signals transmitted from a plurality of neighboring macro base stations. The femto base station then determines a desired reference signal from the received one or more reference signals based on the scanning result. Finally, the femto base station configures its downlink radio signal transmission time based on the desired reference signal such that the femto base station is synchronized with the plurality of neighboring macro base stations. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110984 | RETRANSMISSION REQUEST TRANSMISSION METHOD, TRANSMITTING- SIDE APPARATUS AND RECEIVING-SIDE APPARATUS - In a retransmission request transmission method, a receiving-side apparatus notifies identification information of an RLC-data-PDU and a retransmission start position and a retransmission end position in the RLC-data-PDU, through a STATUS-PDU; and a transmitting-side apparatus retransmits a portion from the retransmission start position to the last portion in the RLC-data-PDU, when a predetermined value is notified as the retransmission end position by the STATUS-PDU (NACK). | 05-06-2010 |
20100110985 | WINDOW CONTROL AND RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND TRANSMITTING-SIDE APPARATUS - In a retransmission control method, a transmitting-side apparatus manages an acknowledgement information reception window; and the transmitting-side apparatus does not perform the window control processing and the retransmission control processing of a packet on the basis of the acknowledgement information for a sequence number of the packet which is included in the acknowledgement information received from the receiving-side apparatus, when the sequence number takes a value outside a range of the acknowledgement information reception window. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110986 | BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station device performs communication with terminal devices, and includes a load information acquisition section which acquires load information which shows a load on the base station device, a reporting method selection section which selects a reporting method for the terminal devices to report reception state information to the base station device based on load information acquired by the load information acquisition section, and a reporting section which reports the reporting method selected by the reporting method selection section to the terminal devices. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110987 | SELECTION OF WIRELESS NETWORK IN CONJUNCTION WITH SELECTION OF A WIRELESS CELL SET - An access terminal may switch to a different mode of wireless network selection as a result of manual selection of a wireless cell set (e.g., a closed subscriber group) associated with one or more wireless cells. For example, if the user of an access terminal selects a closed subscriber group in a wireless network that is different than the current wireless network, the access terminal may enter a manual mode of wireless network selection, select the wireless network corresponding to the closed subscriber group, and register on a closed subscriber group cell in the selected wireless network. In addition, an access terminal may automatically switch to a different mode of wireless network selection (e.g., the prior mode) upon losing coverage of a wireless cell set. An access terminal may also automatically select a cell of a wireless cell set if the access terminal returns to a cell of the cell set within a defined period of time after losing coverage of the cell set. Furthermore, an access terminal may return to a prior wireless network upon losing coverage of a wireless cell set. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110988 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING MULTIPLE CARRIERS IN HIGH SPEED PACKET ACCESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and an apparatus for utilizing multiple carriers are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) capable of receiving on a single downlink carrier at a time may tune the receiver to one downlink carrier and switch the downlink carrier in accordance with a configured pattern. The WTRU may switch the carrier from an anchor carrier to a non-anchor carrier at a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) sub-frame boundary, and switches back at an end of a subsequent high speed physical downlink shared channel (HS-PDSCH) subframe. The WTRU may switch the carrier at an HS-PDSCH sub-frame boundary. A WTRU capable of receiving on multiple downlink carriers simultaneously may tune the receiver to an anchor carrier and a supplementary carrier, and switch the supplementary carrier to another carrier based on a carrier switching order. The carrier switching order may be received via an HS-SCCH or via layer 2 signaling. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110989 | Transport Protocol Performance Using Network Bit Rate Information - A method for communicating in a telecommunications system is provided. The method comprises conveying a downlink bit rate and an uplink bit rate associated with an access point name to a user agent. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110990 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FORWARDING DATA TRANSPORT FRAMES - In a data communication system according to the invention the functionality of the gateway device is distributed in a data communication network thereby reducing the need to direct the data traffic from and to terminals ( | 05-06-2010 |
20100110991 | USER EQUIPMENT FOR PHYSICAL LAYER AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST - A user equipment for physical layer automatic repeat request is disclosed. The user equipment comprises a higher layer automatic repeat request (ARQ) mechanism, a physical layer transmitter, a physical layer receiver, an acknowledgment (ACK) transmitter and an adaptive modulation and control unit (AMC). A higher layer ARQ mechanism generates data for transmission. A physical layer transmitter receives the data for transmission from the higher layer ARQ mechanism, to format the received data into packets for transmission. A physical layer receiver receives and demodulates received packets and retransmission statistics. An ACK transmitter transmits a corresponding acknowledgment for a given packet at the physical layer receiver. An AMC unit adjusts a particular encoding/data modulation of each packet using collected retransmission statistics. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110992 | CALL PROCESSING METHOD AND INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE CONTROL DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING ONE NUMBER MULTIPLE TERMINALS SERVICE - A call processing method for implementing “one number multiple terminals” service is disclosed. A service control point (SCP) in a first network exercises control to route a call that is triggered to a “one number multiple terminals” user in a local network to a second network; and an SCP in a second network controls the call connection to multiple called terminals. An intelligent network service control device is also provided. The call control function that the SCP in the first network generally has is used to route the call out of the network, which does not conflict with the existing service features. In addition, the core component of the first network only needs to undergo a simple routing configuration according to the related control instruction, which does not affect other calls and requires only few network changes. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110993 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTI-NETWORK COVERAGE - A system and method are provided for a multi-network wireless communications access terminal (AT) to access multi-network coverage. The method registers a multi-network AT in a first communications network. In response to registering with the first network, the AT receives information via the first network that is required for accessing a second communications network (e.g., an IEEE 802.20 or 1xEV-DO network). The AT obtains services accessed via the second network, in response to the access information received via the first network. For example, the second network access information may be system information, channel information, or access point parameters. The AT retains the option of obtaining services accessed via the first network if the second network cannot be accessing the second network. | 05-06-2010 |
20100118770 | System and method for transferring data using variance based messaging - A system and method for providing data transfer from a source node to a destination node in a network using variance based messaging is provided. The method comprises the steps of receiving one or more messages by the source node; selecting a plurality of messages to be grouped from the one or more messages, wherein the plurality of messages comprise data with minimum deviation in content; creating an integrated message from the plurality of messages; sending the integrated message from the source node to the destination node; and recreating each message of the plurality of messages at the destination node. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118771 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING PROTOCOL MESSAGE FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method of transmitting a media independent handover (MIH) protocol message in a wireless access system. A method for a mobile node to transmit an MIH message in a wireless access system includes receiving a primitive including prescribed information from a first entity, generating the MIH message by mapping a transport address to the primitive, and transmitting the MIH message to one or more network nodes. According to the present invention, transmission defects of the message are effectively reduced by accurately mapping an MIHF ID and a transport address. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118772 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR EXTENSIBLE EXTENDED INFORMATION ELEMENT MAPPING - Methods and apparatus for expressing two or more extended information elements (IEs) of a MAP message using a single Extended or Extended-2 Downlink Interval Usage Code (DIUC) or Uplink Interval Usage Code (UIUC) in an orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) or orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) frame are provided. This enhancement, called extensible Extended IE mapping, allows the WiMAX network to include more IEs into the DL-MAP and UL-MAP messages as the IEEE 802.16 family of standards evolves. Without this enhancement, all of the new IEs may most likely have to be included in the data bursts, and a user terminal (e.g., a mobile station) cannot decode these data-burst IEs unless the user terminal receives the Downlink Channel Descriptor (DCD) message(s). | 05-13-2010 |
20100118773 | USER DEVICE, BASE STATION, AND METHOD - A disclosed user device generates an uplink control channel including at least one of acknowledgement information and a channel quality indicator regarding downlink and transmits the uplink control channel via a dedicated frequency band when no resource is allocated for transmission of an uplink data channel. The uplink control channel includes multiple unit blocks constituting a subframe and each of the unit blocks includes a sequence generated by multiplying all chips of an orthogonal code sequence assigned to the user device by the same factor. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118774 | METHOD FOR CHANGING RADIO CHANNELS, COMPOSED NETWORK AND ACCESS ROUTER - A method and apparatus for changing radio channels includes transmission of first data between a first user device and a second device via a first network element and via a first radio channel. A transmitting channel between the first network element and a second network element is used to transmit second data between the first user device and the second device. Transmission of third data between the first user device and the second device occurs via the second network element and the second radio channel. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118775 | Wireless mesh network system and control method thereof, and wireless device - A wireless mesh network system includes a plurality of wireless devices adapted to forward a message packet. Each of the wireless devices includes a transmitting unit, receiving unit, a communications controller, and a RAM. Further, the communications controller controls such that an original source address contained in a message packet forwarded by a wireless device, which is an address of the wireless device that has firstly transmitted the message packet, and a packet number that identifies the message packet are stored in the RAM, and controls such that a message packet received is forwarded if information contained in the message packet received is not consistent with information of the original source address and the packet number stored in the RAM. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118776 | Wireless mesh network system and control method thereof, and wireless device - A wireless mesh network system having a plurality of wireless devices is adapted to forward a message packet. Each of the wireless devices includes a transmitting unit, a receiving unit, a communications controller, and a RAM. Further, if a message packet received is an acknowledgement signal, the communications controller controls such that an original source address, a destination address, and a packet number contained in the acknowledgement signal are stored in the RAM, and, in case the message packet received is a data signal, if information contained in the message packet received is consistent with the original source address, the destination address, and the packet number contained in the acknowledgement signal stored in the RAM, the communications controller controls such that the acknowledgement signal is forwarded to a original source wireless device. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118777 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATTION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - When a mobile station | 05-13-2010 |
20100118778 | Improvements in Mobile Technology - Apparatus for enabling interworking of CS (Circuit Switched) video calls with video calls using IP multimedia protocols, comprising: a MGW ( | 05-13-2010 |
20100118779 | RETRANSMISSION REQUEST TRANSMITTING METHOD AND RECEIVING-SIDE APPARATUS - In a retransmission request transmitting method, an RLC sublayer of a receiving-side apparatus determines whether or not an RLC-PDU-data (or an RLC-data-Sub-PDU) not received yet is under retransmission control processing in a MAC sublayer; and generates and transmits a STATUS-PDU (NACK) including only a RLC-data-PDU which has neither been received yet nor is under the retransmission control processing in the MAC sublayer, on the basis of the determination result, at a timing when the STATUS-PDU is generated. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118780 | PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RECEIVING-SIDE APPARATUS - A packet communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: starting, at a predetermined sublayer of a receiving-side apparatus, a reordering timer, when receiving a second packet before receiving a first packet in a case where a sequence number of the first packet is smaller than a sequence number of the second packet; and transmitting, at the predetermined sublayer of the receiving-side apparatus, a retransmission request for the first packet, when not receiving the first packet until the reordering timer expires. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118781 | Transmission Scheme of Protocol Data Units During a Procedure That Comprises the Reset of the Protocol Layer - The invention relates to a method for transmitting data via a protocol sublayer of the mobile node during e.g. a handover that comprises the re-establishment of the protocol sublayer. The mobile node anticipates the handover, and has therefore more time to empty its transmission buffer of the protocol sublayer. Also, the segmentation of service data units (SDUs) into protocol data units (PDUs) is halted upon detecting the upcoming handover. The remaining unacknowledged PDUs in the buffer are then re-transmitted to the source base station such that the source base station can reassemble the corresponding SDUs. Also, the UE may prioritize the re-transmission of the unacknowledged PDUs depending on the priorities of the respective radio bearers. Therefore, after performing the handover to the target base station, the previously transmitted PDUs do not have to be transmitted again, as would be the case when no retransmission of unacknowledged PDUs takes place. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118782 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A MIMO CONTEXT - The present invention relates to a method for communicating from a primary station with an array of transmit antennas to a secondary station on a downlink channel, said method comprising steps of, at the primary station, (a) configuring the downlink channel, step (a) being subdivided into steps of: (a2) computing a precoding to be applied during a corresponding transmission from the primary station to the secondary station for each of an array of transmit antennas; (a3) applying a reversible transform N to the precoding, thus ascertaining a set of precoding coefficients substantially representative of the precoding in a transform domain; (a4) computing a set of parameters comprising at least one parameter, said parameter being substantially representative of the coefficients obtained at step (a3); (a5) signaling the set of parameters to the secondary station; (b) transmitting data to the secondary station substantially according to the precoding computed at step (a2). | 05-13-2010 |
20100118783 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING PRECODING INFORMATION IN A MULTI-USER MIMO SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for communicating in a network having a primary station and a plurality of secondary stations, said method comprising a step of, at the primary station, (a) configuring at least one downlink channel from the base station to a first secondary station, step (a) comprising (a1) signalling a first set of at least one parameter indicative of precoding applied to a first transmission from the base station to the first secondary station; (a2) signalling a second set of at least one parameter indicative of precoding applied to a second transmission from the base station to at least one second secondary station, wherein said step (a2) is carried out so that the second set of parameters contains less information than the first set of parameters. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118784 | Recommending a Transmission Mode for a MIMO-Supporting UE - The present invention relates to methods, a network controller unit ( | 05-13-2010 |
20100118785 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication device includes: a reception portion that receives a transmission request signal addressed to the wireless communication device that is transmitted from a counterpart communication device; a determination portion that, when the reception portion receives the transmission request signal, determines whether data transmission from the counterpart communication device is possible, based on an availability of a wireless transmission path; a suspension control portion that, when it is determined that the data transmission from the counterpart communication device is not possible, performs transmission control of a suspension request signal that requests suspension of the data transmission; and a response control portion that, when the determination portion determines that the data transmission from the counterpart communication device is possible after the transmission control of the suspension request signal, performs transmission control of a response signal in response to the transmission request signal addressed to the wireless communication device. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118786 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COLLABORATIVE SENSING BASED ON AN ALLOWED ERROR RANGE OF A SENSOR IN A WIRELESS SENSOR NODE - A method and an apparatus for transmitting sensor data by using AER sensing and collaborative sensing in order to increase the energy efficiency in a wireless sensor network. The method includes calculating an AER for each of said at least one sensor using sensor data measured from said at least one sensor and sensor profile information corresponding to said at least one sensor, and determining sensor data to be transmitted to a higher node from among sensor data provided by the sensor module based on the AER. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118787 | RADIO BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - An error detection coding processing section of the radio base station performs an error detection coding process with data including both first control data to be used for receiving a downlink signal and second control data to be used for sending an uplink signal as a unit. A sending section sends data on which the error detection coding process has been performed by the error detection coding processing section to the mobile station. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118788 | METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION UNIT - In the event of detecting first information used for first random access and second information used for second random access, the second information being received from the base station unit, a wireless terminal selects one between the first information and the second information. Thereby, either one of the random accesses can be selectively performed, efficiently using resources such as signatures used for random access. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118789 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND INDIVIDUAL CONTROL INFORMATION TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION METHOD - A communication system that transmits individual control information to a plurality of respective user terminals using a shared control channel, wherein when transmitting individual control information and prescribed control information to the user terminals, a base station device divides user terminals into groups according to the contents of the prescribed control information for the respective user terminals, arranges the individual control information for each user terminal in a specified group order, creates number-in-group information wherein the number of user terminals belonging to each group is arranged in the group order, and transmits the number-in-group information together with the individual control information for each user terminal in the group order. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118790 | METHOD OF BEARER DELETION, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - A method of bearer deletion is provided to improve the universality of the bearer deletion process. The method includes: receiving, by the original intermediate NE, the cancellation type indication parameter sent by the HSS, and deleting the bearer between the serving gateway (S-GW) and a packet data network gateway (P-GW), if the original intermediate network element obtains an attach type according to the cancellation type indication parameter indicating an attach type and a corresponding bearer exists on the original intermediate NE. This method helps efficiently improve the universality of the bearer deletion flow. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118791 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND HANDOVER COMMUNICATION METHOD - When a downlink transmission is performed in the handover state in a mobile communication system having a mobile station, base stations and a base station controller, user data from the base station controller is transmitted from a first base station to the mobile station and error correction code for the user data from the base station controller is transmitted from a second base station to the mobile station. The mobile station subjects the received user data to error correction processing using the received error correction code and decodes the user data. Also, at the time of an uplink transmission in the handover state, user data and error correction code are transmitted from the mobile station to the base station controller via separate transmission paths. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118792 | DUAL MAC ARBITRATION - A network appliance includes a first media access controller with a first transmit queue storing one or more data packets to be transmitted to a first wireless device. A second media access controller includes a second transmit queue storing one or more data packets to be transmitted to a second wireless device. A baseband processor communicates with the first and the second media access controllers. An arbitration module arbitrates access of the first and second media access controllers to the baseband processor based on whether the first and second transmit queues have data packets to be transmitted to the first and second wireless devices, respectively. When both have data packets to be transmitted, the arbitration module instructs the first or second media access controller to flush any data packets stored in the first or second transmit queue so that transmission of a flushed data packet can be re-tried. | 05-13-2010 |
20100124188 | METHODS UTILIZED IN MOBILE DEVICES AND BASE STATIONS, AND THE MOBILE DEVICES AND BASE STATIONS THEREOF - A method utilized in a mobile device includes: transmitting a broadcasted random access (RA) preamble to a base station for initiating a first RA procedure; receiving a dedicated RA preamble from the base station after the first RA procedure is initiated; and transmitting the dedicated RA preamble to the base station for initiating a second RA procedure. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124189 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA PACKETS AND CONRREPONDING RECEPTION METHOD - In order to guarantee a quality of service, the method, implemented in a first station, each first packet being transmitted by said first station intended for at least two second stations, the said second stations belonging to a set comprising several second stations, comprises:
| 05-20-2010 |
20100124190 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A WIRELESS INTERCONNECTED DATA NETWORK WITH A PLURALITY OF NETWORK NODES, AND NETWORK NODES - A method is described for operating a wireless interconnected data network with a plurality of network nodes (MP | 05-20-2010 |
20100124191 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING PUSH COMMUNICATION ACROSS A NETWORK BOUNDARY - Provided is a method and apparatus for facilitating push communication from a first network to a target device of a second network, the second network comprising a packet service network such as a GPRS core network. A private IP address, usable for addressing the target device when the packet service network is in an activated state with respect thereto, is retained. Upon receipt of a first message from the first network, indicative of a push communication for the target device, the packet service network is disposed into the activated state, and a second message, addressed to the private IP address, is transmitted. The second message may be generated by a NAT configured to implement micro-port forwarding. The second message may be generated by a representative device of the second network, configured to receive the first message via a NAT in response to a query generated by the representative device. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124192 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING RADIO OPERATIONS ON A WIRELESS COMPUTING DEVICE - Embodiments of the invention provide for a wireless computing device that comprises a set of one or more radio components to transmit and receive wireless communications on the device. Additionally, the wireless computing device includes processing and memory resources that individually or in combination provide multiple wireless applications, a radio object, and an arbitration component. The multiple wireless applications are each capable of generating a user-interface for enabling user-input in connection with wireless activities performed with that wireless application. The radio object interfaces the multiple applications with the set of one or more radio components. The arbitration component is configured to arbitrate at least one of (i) requests made by each of the wireless applications to the radio object for access to one or more of the radio components in the set, or (ii) responses from the radio object to requests made by each of the wireless applications. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124193 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS PARAMETERS - A system and method are provided for distributing wireless network access parameters in a multi-mode communications user terminal (UT). The method includes: establishing a link between a UT and a first communications network (i.e., a cellular network); accessing a parameters server via the first network; downloading access parameters for a wireless, second communications network (i.e., a Wireless Local Area Network); and, using the downloaded access parameters to establish a wireless link between the UT and the second communications network. The downloaded access parameters may include information such as a security key, Service Set IDentifier (SSID), traffic channel allocation, and optimization parameters including transmit power, quality of service (QoS) settings, and operational mode. Alternately, the database may cross-reference UT ID to parameters such as QoS, IP address, gateway information, subnet mask, Domain Name Server (DNS) information, or geographical location. | 05-20-2010 |
20100128663 | SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND BASE STATION - When an RG received from a base station is UP, a mobile station compares E-TFC currently used by a HARQ process for transmitting a signal to the base station from the mobile station with E-TFC previously used for transmission by the same HARQ process. When they are identical, the accumulation information is incremented by one. When selecting E-TFC used for transmission, the HARQ process of the mobile station tales the accumulation information into consideration. Thus, when the accumulation is incremented, the HARQ process selects E-TFC of a level incremented by one and accordingly, the transfer rate of the mobile station is increased and the user throughput is improved. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128664 | CELL-TO-WIFI SWITCHER - Systems and methods that enable a user to seamlessly switch between networks and/or devices, during a content delivery session. The system comprises a network change detection component that can determine when the user switches from one network to another. Further, a context management component is employed that stores a context state of the content delivery session on the first network when a change in network is detected. The context state is employed to seamlessly resume content delivery on the newly connected network and continue the content delivery session. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128665 | Method for providing signaling between a core network and a radio access network - Example embodiments provide methods for providing signaling between a core network and a radio access network (RAN). One example embodiment includes receiving an IP packet at the core network; inserting information into a destination options extension header of the IP packet at the core network; and sending the IP packet from the core network to the RAN. Another example embodiment includes receiving an IP packet at the RAN from the core network; extracting information from a destination options extension header of the IP packet at the RAN; and sending the IP packet from the RAN to a terminal. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128666 | METHOD FOR ADVERTISING IN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM AND SERVER AND TERMINAL THEREOF - Disclosure may be to allow a Service Provider (or operator) to intercept SIP messages (e.g., SIP INVITE method, or SIP MESSAGE method) in the path of the IMS signaling link and insert advertising information therein, thereby delivering the advertising information inserted in the SIP messages to one or more end users (i.e., originating end or terminating end, or all of them). | 05-27-2010 |
20100128667 | METHOD OF OPERATING A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT FOR PROVIDING ACCESS TO A NETWORK - A method of operating a wireless access point | 05-27-2010 |
20100128668 | Radio Base Station Apparatus and Radio Terminal Apparatus - A radio base station apparatus of the invention includes a scramble code-generating part that generates a different scramble code for each sector, at least for adjacent sectors, and a scrambling part that uses a scramble code generated by said scramble code-generating part to scramble a scrambling-target portion in said downlink sub-frame. This contributes to increasing extraction precision when extracting a desired signal from a signal that was affected by interference between/among sectors. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128669 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND PROCESSING DATA BLOCK OF SPECIFIC PROTOCOL LAYER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a data block at a transmitting side in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The present invention generates a data block including polling information but no upper layer data, the polling information requesting a transmission of acknowledgement information (status report) on at least one data block transmitted to a receiving side and then transmits the data block to the receiving side, thereby it is possible to raise efficiency in wireless transmission. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128670 | Base station interference-free antenna module and WiFi base station mesh network system using the antenna module - A base station interference-free antenna module includes a plurality of high frequency transceivers respectively facing different directions, and an antenna controller electrically coupled to the high frequency transceivers. The antenna controller is electrically coupled to a signal processor in order to receive a signal transmitting/receiving request output by the signal processor to accordingly select a high frequency transceiver to transmit or receive a circularly polarized high frequency signal. The system includes two WiFi base stations, each having the base station interference-free antenna module and a signal processor, and the high frequency signals wirelessly transmitted between the WiFi base stations in the system are circularly polarized. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128671 | Interference-free antenna module and WiFi network system using the antenna module - An interference-free antenna module includes a WiFi interference-free antenna module having a plurality of high frequency transceivers respectively facing different directions, and an antenna controller electrically coupled to the high frequency transceivers respectively. The antenna controller receives a signal transmitting/receiving request output by a signal processor to accordingly select one of the high frequency transceivers to transmit or receive a circularly polarized high frequency signal. The antenna module also includes a consumer equipment interference-free antenna module having a circular polarization antenna unit. The WiFi network system includes a WiFi base station and a consumer equipment. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128672 | TRANSMITTER APPARATUS, RECEIVER APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A transmitter apparatus ( | 05-27-2010 |
20100128673 | Communication Control Method, Communication System, Communication Control Apparatus and Wireless Base Station - A communication control method for a communication system including a plurality of wireless base stations | 05-27-2010 |
20100128674 | Method of Responding DeletePersonalityRequest Message in Ultra Mobile Broadband - A method of responding a Delete Personality Request message in Ultra Mobile Broadband is disclosed. The Delete Personality Request message is sent to the access terminal by the access network through an air interface in Ultra Mobile Broadband. When the access network requests to delete one or more personalities, the access terminal sends a Delete Personality Accept message to the access network with the following information: Message ID, Transaction ID, Personality Count and Personality Index, wherein, Personality Count is determined by the access terminal according to the number of the personalities which the access terminal agrees to delete, and the information of Personality Index is one or more personalities that the access terminal agrees to delete. Compared with the prior art, the present invention enhances the personality management mechanism in the UMB system and saves the signaling interaction overhead of the air interface and the air interface resource. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128675 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station apparatus in a mobile communication system allowing for user equipment terminals having different numbers of receiving antennas is disclosed. The base station apparatus includes a mapping unit mapping a reference signal, a primary broadcasting signal, a synchronization signal, and an L1/L2 control signal onto a predetermined signal format; and a transmission unit transmitting the mapped signals, in which, within a sub-frame, the mapping unit maps the L1/L2 control signal and the primary broadcasting signal so as to be time-domain multiplexed, maps the primary broadcasting signal and the synchronization signal within a predetermined bandwidth in a middle of a system bandwidth, maps a reference signal included in a predetermined transmission stream within the predetermined bandwidth, but does not map a reference signal included in a transmission stream other than the predetermined transmission stream within the predetermined bandwidth. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128676 | Carrier Channel Distribution System - Carrier channel distribution systems are presented. Wireless carrier channels can be split from their respective bands and can be allocated among remote transceiver units to ensure proper coverage for wireless services. Carrier channels can be allocated or routed individually or as a group according to reconfigurable routing policy. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128677 | SERVICE CONTINUITY DURING LOCAL BREAKOUT IN A FEMTOCELL - A system and methodology that facilitates service continuity when a user equipment (UE), employing local breakout mechanisms at a femto access point (FAP) for a communication session, moves out of the femto coverage area is provided. In particular, a network change detection component can be employed to detect when the UE, attached to the FAP, changes its connection from the femto network to the macro network. Further, an active communication session can exist between the UE and a device/service/application on a local Area network (LAN) connected to a FAP, and/or the Internet, which utilizes local breakout at the FAP. When the UE moves out of the femto network, a context management component can be employed to seamlessly resume the communication session, via the macro network. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128678 | ADAPTIVE CODING AND MODULATION FOR BROADBAND DATA TRANSMISSION - A process is described to build physical layer frames with a modcode adapted to the signal quality of a destination terminal. Data packets assigned to the same modcode may be sent in the same frame, although packets associated with higher modcodes may be used to complete a frame before switching to the applicable higher modcode for construction of subsequent frames. After an interval, the order of progression is restarted with an out of order packet above a threshold age. Flow control filtering mechanisms and a variable reliability margin may be used to adapt dynamically to the current data traffic conditions. | 05-27-2010 |
20100135199 | METHOD AND A COMMUNICATION PLATFORM FOR PACKET COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A SERVICE PROVIDER IN A FIRST NETWORK AND A RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN A SECOND NETWORK - The present invention relates to a communication platform for packet communication between at least one service provider in a first network and a radio communication device in a second network, the second network comprises a first network node provided to, at least partly, handle communication between the radio communication device and a gateway located in the second network. The gateway is provided to handle communication between the second network and the communication platform, and the communication platform comprises an application programming interface provided to handle two-way communication between the service provider and the radio communication device. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135200 | PROVIDING USER-SPOT (U-SPOT) SERVICES IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication device may be utilized to establish a localized user network that is accessible by client devices when the client devices are communicatively coupled to the mobile communication device. The mobile communication device is then operable to determine services that may be provided in the user network to the client devices, and to advertise these services within the user network. The services comprise network and/or data accessibility, and bandwidth availability. Mobile communication devices are also operable to provide, directly or via local and/or remote resources, additional services, comprising audio/video processing capability, storage, and/or processing. Offering of services in user networks is incentivized to the mobile communication devices and/or to client devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the mobile communication devices. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed in U-Spot networks, based on incentives and/or availability of resources. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135201 | REGISTRATION NOTIFICATION FOR MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT - System(s) and method(s) are provided for notification of registration of a mobile device with femto coverage for firmware content management. An attachment component that administers location of mobile devices or a femto access point (AP) conveys a notification to a network platform that manages firmware content updates when a mobile device for which firmware update is available hands off from wireless macro coverage onto femto coverage through the femto AP. The notification is triggered in response to firmware update notification received by the attachment component, or an update flag received by the femto AP. Upon reception of the notification, to exploit wireline bandwidth, the network platform delivers firmware content(s) update through backhaul link to the femto AP to which the mobile device is registered. Femto APs not provisioned to serve a mobile device can be incentivized to authorize the mobile device for coverage and thus facilitate firmware updates. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135202 | METHOD FOR QOS GUARANTEES IN A MULTILAYER STRUCTURE - A method in which a user equipment processes data in a wireless mobile communication system is provided. The method includes the steps of receiving a first data block from an upper layer, transferring a second data block including the first data block to a lower layer at a particular protocol layer, discarding the first and second data blocks present in the particular protocol layer if a certain period of time has passed, and transferring information associated with the discard of the second data block to the lower layer. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135203 | MIMO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING DETERMINISTIC COMMUNICATION PATH AND ANTENNA ARRANGEMENT METHOD THERFOR - A MIMO communication system having deterministic channels the orthogonality of which can be ensured even if a reflected wave other than the direct wave is present during line-of-sight communication is provided. The MIMO communication system is used in a line-of-sight environment and has deterministic channels between the transmission side where a plurality of transmission antennas are arranged and the reception side where a plurality of reception antennas are arranged. The transmission side, the reception side, or both transmission and reception sides of the MIMO communication system have a channel matrix calculation processing means for calculating a channel matrix for establishing an orthogonal channel as a communication channel. The transmission and reception antennas forming the channel matrix are horizontally arranged with respect to the ground. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135204 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR ROUTING A CALL FROM A CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN TO A UNIFIED SERVICE DOMAIN - A technique for routing a call to a unified service domain using one or more client applications providing call routing support from a circuit-switch access domain to unified service domain is described. A first one of the client applications will be provided on a network side and a second one of the client applications may potentially be provided on a terminal side. A method implementation of this technique comprises, on the network side, the steps of receiving a message from the terminal side, detecting, in response to the message, the client application that is to provide the routing functionalities, and controlling an activation state of at least one of the two client applications dependent on a result of this detection. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135205 | EMERGENCY AND PRIORITY CALLING SUPPORT IN WIMAX - The present invention provides methods, apparatuses, and systems for supporting emergency calls on a WiMAX access network. According to an embodiment of the invention, a method of providing emergency calling in a WiMAX network is provided. The method includes determining whether a call from a subscriber station (SS) is an emergency call. To enable making an emergency call, the minimum bandwidth required to enable SIP signaling is reserved and required resources are allocated from the access service network gateway (ASN-GW) via a base station (BS). | 06-03-2010 |
20100135206 | Radio Access Technology Interworking - Radio access interworking technologies allow a target network to notify a source network that a mobile device has moved from source network to target network, wherein mobile device does not need to perform notification to source network. Further, source network can provide a first subset of overhead information to mobile device and, after moving to target network, mobile device can receive a second subset of overhead information from target network. Further, mobile device can perform prehashing prior to moving to target network based on a channel list received from source network. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135207 | Method, System, and Wireless Frame Structure for Supporting Different Mode of Multiple Access - A method, system, and wireless frame structure for supporting different modes of multiple radio access. The described system comprises base stations and terminals. There is a group of base stations at the same location, which include at least two synchronized base stations on the same frequency band, supporting different multiple access techniques in downlink or uplink. The base stations in the described group transmit downlink frames in a negotiated downlink zone and receive uplink frames in a negotiated uplink zone respectively, and the zones of the base stations are not overlapped. Each terminal accesses to one of the base stations according to the downlink multiple access technique that it supports, and receives/transmits signals in the downlink zone/uplink zone allocated to the base station. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135208 | USER EQUIPMENT TERMINAL, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment terminal capable of communicating with a base station apparatus in a mobile communication system includes a transmitting unit configured to transmit to the base station apparatus a first signal concerning a capability of the user equipment terminal; a receiving unit configured to receive from the base station apparatus a second signal concerning the capability of the user equipment terminal; and a communication processing unit configured to perform communication processing based on the capability of the user equipment terminal specified in the second signal. A base station apparatus capable of communicating with a user equipment terminal in a mobile communication system includes a receiving unit configured to receive from the user equipment terminal the first signal concerning the capability of the user equipment terminal; a transmitting unit configured to transmit to the user equipment terminal the second signal concerning the capability of the user equipment terminal; and a communication processing unit configured to perform communication processing based on the capability of the user equipment terminal specified in the second signal. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135209 | RECEPTION CYCLE CONTROL METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A radio base station (eNB) starts a transmitting-side timer upon transmission of downlink data; and changes a reception cycle of downlink data in a mobile station (UE), when transmitting no downlink data during a period from start to expiration of the transmitting-side timer. The mobile station (UE) starts a receiving-side timer upon receipt of downlink data transmitted; and changes a reception cycle of downlink data in the mobile station (UE), when receiving no downlink data during a period from start to expiration of the receiving-side timer. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135210 | METHOD OF RANDOM ACCESS AND A METHOD OF TRANSPORTING INFORMATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method of performing random access in a broadband wireless access system is disclosed. The method includes performing first random access through at least one of a plurality of random access channels, receiving information about the number of access-failed channels among the plurality of random access channels from a base station, when the first random access fails, and performing second random access according to a probability value calculated based on the received information. The present invention increases utilization of random access channels and can effectively schedule an uplink bandwidth, thereby providing an efficient ranging method. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135211 | UBIQUITOUS SENSOR NETWORK-BASED SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY MANAGING FOOD SANITATION - The present invention relates to a ubiquitous sensor network-based system and method for automatically managing food sanitation. The system includes at least one sensor node ( | 06-03-2010 |
20100135212 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING THE LARGE SERVICE DATA UNIT (SDU) - Systems and methodologies are described that segment or concatenate radio link control (RLC) service data units (SDUs) into RLC protocol data units (PDUs). In accordance with various aspects set forth herein, systems and/or methods are provided that receive a first RLC SDU, partition the first RLC SDU into a first RLC PDU and a second RLC PDU, set a length indicator (LI) field associated with the second RLC PDU to indicate the size of information contained in the second RLC PDU, concatenate the second RLC PDU with a third RLC PDU associated with a second RLC SDU to form a concatenated RLC PDU, and dispatch the first RLC PDU, the concatenated RLC PDU, and a fourth RLC PDU associated with the second RLC SDU. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135213 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING REVERSE LINK INTERFERENCE AMONG ACCESS TERMINALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - In a wireless communication system, an apparatus and a method are provided for controlling reverse link interference among access terminals that are power controlled by a sector of a base station. In an embodiment, the maximum effective noise power spectral density is used as a parameter for controlling the level of reverse link loading, by setting a reverse activity bit (RAB) to signal the access terminals to reduce their data rates in order to minimize interference between the access terminals if the maximum effective noise power spectral density is above a predetermined threshold. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135214 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A technique that can effectively utilize unused wireless link and realize high-quality wireless communication between a communication terminal and a base station and enables efficient distribution of radio resources over an entire wireless communication system is provided. A wireless communication system in which a base station and a communication terminal can conduct wireless communication by detecting a usable wireless link and changing a wireless link used for the connection is also provided. On the communication network side, in addition to a plurality of wireless communication networks and a base station, a server device is provided. Connection-method reconstruction management means for determining a connection method of the wireless communication on the basis of communication condition information including information on usable wireless link at current locations of the base station and the communication terminal and connection-method reconstruction control means for controlling the connection method of the wireless communication for the corresponding base station are provided. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135215 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR BEARING CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN SERVICE DATA OVER RADIO BEARER - A method for bearing CS-domain service data over radio bearer is disclosed. The method includes: letting CS-domain service data be borne over a radio high-speed packet data access channel according to a channel mapping relation between CS-domain service data and the radio high-speed packet data access channel. An apparatus and a system are also provided herein. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135216 | Method for transmitting packet data in communication system - A method and apparatus for a transmitter having a radio protocol with an upper layer and a lower layer therein used for management of full header packet transmission when transmitting data packets to a receiver are provided. If the upper layer receives from the lower layer, information of a successful transmission of a full header packet, the upper layer decides to stop sending any additional full header packet that contains the same full header as the previously successfully transmitted full header packet. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135217 | System and Method for Broadband Digital Broadcasting - A system and method are disclosed for providing streaming data information to a receiver. The system accesses one or more information service providers for providing respective information signals, input buffers for storing portions of the streaming information, a digital broadcast transmitter for broadcasting the contents of the input buffers as transmission bursts, a digital broadcast receiver for receiving the transmission bursts for storage in a receiver input buffer, and an application processor for converting the transmission bursts to an information transmission stream. The digital broadcast receiver is synchronized with the transmitter broadcasts to allow for powering down between selected transmission bursts. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135218 | Method and Apparatus for Sequentially Conducting Independent Data Contexts Using a Mobile Communications Device - A mobile communications device including a processor operable to conduct with a wireless packet data service network a PDP context associated with a first application running on the mobile communications device. The processor is further operable to release the PDP context associated with the first application and establish with the wireless packet data service network a PDP context associated with a second application running on the mobile communications device responsive to the second application requesting a PDP context. The processor is further operable to reestablish the PDP context associated with the first application responsive to one of the second application releasing the second PDP context, data transmission within the second PDP context ceasing for a first time period, and a second time period. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135219 | PERSONAL AREA NETWORK WITH AUTOMATIC ATTACHMENT AND DETACHMENT - A network ( | 06-03-2010 |
20100142438 | MESSAGE BROADCASTING OVER WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate broadcasting and receiving messages in a wireless media broadcast network. Mobile devices are equipped to receive media over a broadcast network where presentation of the data can be enabled through a content policy. Broadcast messages can be provisioned and delivered over the network such that mobile devices can receive the message regardless of the level or existence of purchased content. The messages can be broadcast for multiple purposes, including emergency messages, which can come from an emergency or amber alert system, venue and/or location specific messages, etc. The messages can be broadcast at a regional level as well by leveraging such functionality of the media broadcast network. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142439 | REAL-TIME POSITIONING SYSTEM, METHOD THEREFOR, AND DEVICE CONTAINING COMPUTER SOFTWARE - A real-time positioning system, a real-time positioning method, and a device containing computer software are provided. The system includes a coordinator and at least one router. The coordinator carries out a signal interconnection with each router of a first layer via an omni-directional antenna, and calculates an initial distance according to the strength of the signal interconnection. Then, the coordinator carries out a signal interconnection with the router via a plurality of directional antennas respectively to analyze an initial direction of the router of the first layer according to the strength of the signal interconnection with each of the directional antennas and corrects the initial direction according to the slope angle of the coordinator, so as to position the router of the first layer according to the initial distance and the initial direction. Each router positions each router of the next layer in the same manner as the coordinator. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142440 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication method and a wireless communication apparatus capable of efficiently improving communication throughput of a second wireless communication system while securing a capturing capability of informative information in a first wireless communication system are provided. A transmitting/receiving unit ( | 06-10-2010 |
20100142441 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND BASE STATION - Provided is a radio communication method employed in a base station having plural antenna elements. The method includes the steps of: setting an inner zone and an outer zone by dividing a cell formed by the base station into two; determining whether a mobile station is located in the inner zone or the outer zone on the basis of a predetermined criterion; notifying the mobile station located in the inner zone of control information, including information on channel allocation and a communication method, through a broadcast channel; and notifying the mobile station located in the outer zone of control information through a dedicated channel by beamforming using the plural antenna elements. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142442 | PROCESSING OF AN EMERGENCY SESSION IN A WIMAX NETWORK - In a system for processing an emergency session in a WiMAX (worldwide interoperability for microwave access) network system including a home network, at least one roaming network and at least one mobile station, an emergency call is established between the mobile station and the home network in case the mobile station is located in the home network, or between the mobile station and a roaming network (visited network) in case the mobile station is located in the roaming network. In a different embodiment, the location of a mobile station is determined in response to an emergency location request and the location (geographic) coordinates are provided in order to establish an emergency call setup. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142443 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MERGING BEACON TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - A method and wireless device merge multiple unsynchronized beacon groups in a wireless network, each beacon group including at least one wireless device. A first beacon is received from at least one first wireless device in a first beacon group (S | 06-10-2010 |
20100142444 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING USING AN IN-VEHICLE SYSTEM - A system and method for communicating wirelessly from a mobile device to a remote receiver station is disclosed. The system includes a controller configured to monitor a status of the mobile device and, upon an initiation event, initiate a data transfer process to wirelessly communicate data to the remote receiver station. The system also includes a voice-band modem that, upon initiation of the data transfer process. The voice-band modem is configured to receive data for transfer to the remote receiver station, encode the data using a fountain code encoding protocol to form a series encoded packets, and repeatedly transmit the encoded packets until receiving an indication that the series of packets has been received at the receiving station. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142445 | ENVIRONMENTS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet in an environment, in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain environments may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142446 | BUSINESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet utilized by a management system, in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain management systems may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142447 | WEB APPLICATIONS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for providing a mobile, broadband, routable internet, in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as sending and receiving nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual devices independent of fixed infrastructure elements, and where the mobile, broadband, routable internet enables the use of web applications. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142448 | DEVICES FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet that may enable devices in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain devices may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142449 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF SYNCHRONIZATION IN DUAL-BEACON WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless device ( | 06-10-2010 |
20100142450 | LOCALLY ADMINSTERED MAC ADDRESS BASED METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY AND EFFICIENTLY IDENTIFYING ENHANCED VERSION NODES OF STANDARDS - Embodiments of the invention provide a method for selectively identifying nodes implemented enhanced version of a protocol standard by creating a random locally administered MAC address and advertising said random locally administered MAC address as the address that implies a particular protocol amendment of a protocol standard. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142451 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal used in a mobile communication system complying with a carrier sense multiple access scheme is disclosed. The communication terminal includes: a receiving unit configured to receive a wireless packet transmitted by another communication terminal or a base station; a determination unit configured to determine periodic transmission timing of the communication terminal based on determination criterion information included in the wireless packet; and a transmission unit configured to periodically transmit wireless packets to the base station based on the transmission timing. | 06-10-2010 |
20100150055 | AGGREGATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, AGGREGATE NODE, AND DEAGGREGATE NODE - A technology is disclosed that provides an aggregation management method, an aggregate node, and a deaggregate node that can quickly and efficiently manage aggregation. The technology includes a step at which, when an aggregate node | 06-17-2010 |
20100150056 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND RACH DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD - A mobile station capable of reducing the probability of collision of RACH data in a random access. In this mobile station, a moving speed determining part ( | 06-17-2010 |
20100150057 | Method of Controlling Packet Data Traffic - The application relates to a method of controlling packet data traffic of a packet service in a communication network | 06-17-2010 |
20100150058 | Ofdm communication system with fast frequency hops - A method for operating a radio communication system involves the use of OFDM and involves a first sending station modulating a first OFDM symbol onto a first carrier frequency and sending the first OFDM symbol to a first receiving station via a first transmission channel using an air interface. The first sending station changes the first carrier frequency during a time used for sending the first OFDM symbol, the change in the first carrier frequency being made independently of a change in transmission characteristics of the first transmission channel over time. A fast frequency hopping system is disclosed. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150059 | STATIC ADDRESSING OF DEVICES IN A DYNAMICALLY ROUTED NETWORK - A method of routing in a network includes dividing a time corresponding to a predetermined maximum registration age of a first node registered with a second node into a number of first time intervals and second time intervals. The first time intervals each have a predetermined duration and the second time intervals each have a duration greater than the predetermined duration of the first time intervals. Each of the first and second time intervals are assigned a metric designating a cost associated with a path between the first node and the second node. The metric increases in value for each of the first and second time intervals as registration age increases. The second node sends a message including the metric associated with the time interval during which it is transmitted. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150060 | SENSING DEVICE ORIENTATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Sensing installed orientation of an antenna or access node in a wireless digital network. According to one aspect of the invention, an orientation sensor such as a 2 or 3 axis accelerometer is provided in the access node. The orientation sensor may be attached to the access node housing, directly or through a substrate, attached to the main logic board of the access node, or may be mounted to an antenna. The orientation sensor may be mounted to the same substrate as is used to form an antenna, or may be mounted on a separate substrate. When associated with an antenna, such as the orientation sensor on the same substrate as the antenna, or co-located with the antenna such as inside the same package, the orientation of the antenna may be sensed. Orientation data on the access node and/or antenna may be transmitted to the controller for the access node, and/or to clients of the access node. This orientation information may be used for example to verify or validate installation and positioning, for example comparing the actual orientation to the desired orientation as stored in a database. The orientation information may be used in modeling and/or displaying access node coverage. In access nodes with selectable antennas, the orientation information may be used to switch antennas. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150061 | Device and method for arranging access point in wireless location - Provided are an access point arrangement device and a method for wireless location determination. An access point is arranged on a numerical map, received signal strength of a signal received from the access point for each grid point is calculated, and DOP and position error per grid point are calculated by using the received signal strength per grid point. It is determined whether to rearrange the currently arranged access point based on a ratio of a grid point with DOP less than a threshold value for entire grid points on the numerical map and a ratio of a grid point with a position error that is less than a threshold value. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150062 | Packet Indicator for RLC Protocol - In a communication terminal implementing a radio link control (RLC) protocol, error propagation to higher layer protocols is mitigated by use of an additional length indicator, referred to herein as a new packet indicator, in the RLC data blocks to indicate the beginning of a new higher layer packet in addition to a conventional length indicator to indicate the last segment of a higher layer packet. The new packet indicator prevents the LLC data segment at the beginning of an RLC data block from being concatenated with an LLC data segment in the previous data block even when length indicators in the previous data block are not received. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150063 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A NODE TO JOIN A WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORK - A method for a new node to join an ad-hoc network is provided. The method includes two basic functions. When the new node is allowed to join the network, the indicating device of the node being joined generates an indication. When the new node joins the network, the indicating device of the new node also generates an indication. The method further includes two commands, the join-rejection command and the joined-rejection command, to cancel the join procedure when the indicating device of the new node and the node being joined do not indicate correspondingly. Accordingly, the method efficiently reduces the possibility of joining an unanticipated node. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150064 | IP TUNNELING OPTIMISATION - A node arranged in use to communicate over an IP network, the node comprising means for receiving an IP packet either from a peer node or from a higher protocol layer within the node, means for XORing a header of the packet or part thereof with a pad to translate the header or part thereof, and means for sending the packet to a peer node or for delivering the packet to a higher protocol layer within the node. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150065 | MULTIPLE PANS CONFLICT RESOLUTION METHOD IN ZIGBEE - Disclosed is a method of preventing overlap of multiple PANs in a ZigBee network. According to the method of preventing overlap of multiple personal area networks (PANs) in the ZigBee network, a first node included in a first PAN of the ZigBee network verifies whether overlap of the multiple PANs occurs by verifying packets received from neighbor nodes, identifies beacon information of a neighbor node that causes the overlap of the multiple PANs by gradually adjusting radio frequency (RF) transmission wave, and adjusts a communication range based on the beacon information. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150066 | Method For Communicating Data, A Transmitting Unit And A Computer Program Product - The invention relates to a method for communicating data via a shared wifeless channel. The method comprises the steps of preparing a data packet for transmission via the shared wireless channel ( | 06-17-2010 |
20100150067 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN A WIDEBAND WIRELESS NETWORK AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A device for transmitting data in a wideband wireless network. The device may include a transmitter for transmitting data via a channel of the wideband wireless network, the transmitter is arranged to start the transmitting in response to a start signal. A first transmission controller is connected to the transmitter, for controlling transmission of data by the transmitter. The transmission controller includes an energy detector for detecting the amount of energy in the channel. The energy detector is arranged to repeat the detecting in response to a repeat signal. A comparator is connected to an output of the energy detector and to a control input of the transmitter. The comparator is arranged to compare the detected amount of energy with an energy threshold, to output the repeat signal to the energy detector in case the detected amount of energy exceeds the energy threshold; and to output the start signal to the transmitter when the detected amount of energy is below the energy threshold. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150068 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system includes sector units composing base stations, and mobile subscriber stations each being in sectors corresponding to the sector units. The mobile subscriber stations transmit channel estimation signals to the sector units corresponding to the sector and sector units corresponding to sectors contiguous to the sectors. A sector unit that corresponds to the sector forms, based on a channel estimation signal received from the mobile subscriber station in the sector corresponding to the sector unit and channel estimation signals received from the adjacent mobile subscriber stations in the sectors contiguous to the sector, a transmission beam that is directed to the mobile subscriber station but is not directed to the adjacent mobile subscriber stations to transmit data to the mobile subscriber station. By configuring the system in such a manner, interference from contiguous sectors can be avoided. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150069 | Reverse Link Acknowledgment Signaling - Techniques, apparatuses, and systems can include mechanisms for transmitting and receiving data on one or more reverse link acknowledgement channels. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150070 | SENSOR NODE HAVING SELF LOCALIZATION FUNCTION AND SELF LOCALIZATION METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are a sensor node having a self localization function and a self localization method of the sensor node. The sensor node calculates a location thereof by receiving location information measured at each of two mobile nodes at different times and using four location information of the received location information. Additional cost and power consumption required for installing additional equipment such as an anchor node, a ultrasonic transceiver and a signal amplifier are reduced. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150071 | RADIO NETWORK SYSTEM - The radio network system includes a plurality of mobile stations, a radio network controller operable to receive first location registration information for a location registration request from the mobile station, operable to transmit second location registration information including a femtocell identifier used to identify that the radio network controller is a device for a femtocell in the first location registration information to a first core network device, a first core network device operable to receive the second location registration information transmitted from the radio network controller, operable to transmit location registration rejection information used to indicate a rejection of storing location information to the radio network controller, and a second core network device operable to receive the second location registration information transmitted from the radio network controller that have received the location registration rejection information transmitted from the first core network device. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150072 | GATEWAY DEVICES AND WIRELESS CONTROL NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM USING THE SAME - An object of the invention is to improve the reliability of a wireless control network management system. Gateway devices for relaying data communication between a monitoring/controlling host connected thereto via a wired network and a plurality of wireless nodes connected thereto via wireless circuit and constituting a wireless network, wherein the gateway device comprises wireless communication means for sending data from the host to at least any one of the wireless nodes, and redirect means for causing the wireless communication means to send the data to one of the wireless nodes and to transfer the data to the other gateway device connected to the wired network. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150073 | MOBILE STATION AND LOCATION INFORMATION ACQUISITION METHOD - A mobile station comprises: a memory; a location acquisition unit that acquires location information of the mobile station; a detecting unit that detects a communication-ready network; a determining unit that, when the detecting unit detects the communication-ready network and determines whether the memory stores the location information in association with the network; and a control unit that, when the determining unit determines that the memory stores the location information in association with the network, performs a predetermined process using the stored location information, and when the determining unit determines that the memory does not store the location information in association with the network, instructs the location acquisition unit to acquire the location information of the mobile station, performs the predetermined process using the location information acquired by the location acquisition unit, and causes the memory to store the location information in association with the network detected by the detecting unit. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150074 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal used in a mobile communication system complying with a carrier sense multiple access scheme is disclosed. The communication terminal includes: a receiving unit configured to receive a wireless packet transmitted by another communication terminal or a base station; a determination unit configured to determine periodic transmission timing of the communication terminal based on determination criterion information included in the wireless packet; and a transmission unit configured to periodically transmit wireless packets to the base station based on the transmission timing. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150075 | FILTER, DEMULTIPLEXER, AND MODULE INCLUDING DEMULTIPLEXER, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A demultiplexer has a common terminal, a transmission terminal, and a reception terminal, and furthermore includes a transmission filter connected between the common terminal and the transmission terminal, a reception filter connected between the common terminal and the reception terminal, and a phase shift circuit connected in series to the reception filter connected between the common terminal and the reception terminal. A node on the line from the phase shift circuit to the common terminal or the transmission terminal, and a node on the line from the phase shift circuit to the reception terminal are coupled via a reactance. Accordingly, it is possible to fundamentally reduce or eliminate the situation in which transmission signals from the transmission filter arrive at the reception circuit, and improve isolation. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150076 | Communication System, Base Station Apparatus, Server Apparatus, Mobile Station Apparatus, and Transmission Data Amount Determining Method - It is advantageous for present invention to suitably determine amounts of transmission data for links in a multilink communication. In a mobile communication system ( | 06-17-2010 |
20100150077 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION VIA AT LEAST ONE OF DIRECTIONAL AND OMNI-DIRECTION ANTENNAS - Techniques for using at least one of omni-directional and directional antennas for communication are described. A station may be equipped antenna elements selectable for use as an omni-directional antenna or one or more directional antennas. The station may select the omni-directional antenna or a directional antenna for use for communication based on various factors such as, e.g., whether the location or direction of a target station for communication is known, whether control frames or data frames are being exchanged, etc. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150078 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DECODING ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL ABSOLUTE GRANT CHANNEL TRANSMISSIONS - A method of decoding enhanced uplink absolute grant channel (E-AGCH) transmissions in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). E-AGCH data is received, the E-AGCH data including a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) part and a data part, the CRC part having been masked with a WTRU identity (ID). The CRC part and the data part are demultiplexed and the CRC part is demasked with a first WTRU ID. A first CRC is performed with the data part and the CRC part demasked with the first WTRU ID. The data part is decoded on a condition that the first CRC passes. | 06-17-2010 |
20100157882 | Communication Network Control System, Communication Terminal, and Communication Network Control Method | 06-24-2010 |
20100157883 | VOICE OVER IP CELL PHONE - A cellular telephone is disclosed that allows a user to access a VoIP service provider using the WAP protocol to send and receive telephone calls to other users via the internet or other data network. The cellular telephone includes a cellular portion that formats messages to be sent to and from a cellular base station, a WAP portion that interfaces with the internet to send, receive, and display data therefrom. The cellular telephone also includes an audio gateway to sample, analog to digital convert, compress, and packetize an audio signal to prepare the audio signal to be transmitted via the internet to the second user, | 06-24-2010 |
20100157884 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - A base station device and a mobile station device both enabling improvement of the reception quality of transmission data at a mobile station by preventing a sequence for establishing synchronism and the transmission data from interfering with each other. In the base station device ( | 06-24-2010 |
20100157885 | SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEM AND SYNCHRONIZING METHOD FOR PLURALITY OF BASE STATIONS AND MOBILE STATION IN A FORWARD LINK WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - There is provided a radio communication system in which a mobile station which has decided to switch a base station can immediately be synchronized with the base station to which switching is to be made. Each of the base stations creates a synchronization signal for the mobile station to synchronize with the base station from an upstream pilot signal received from the mobile station, creates upstream propagation quality information from the upstream pilot signal, and creates a downstream control signal including the synchronization information and the upstream propagation quality information, and transmits them. The mobile stations creates an upstream pilot signal, transmits the signal, receives a signal including a downstream control signal from each of the base stations, extracts the upstream propagation quality and information on synchronization with the base stations from the received downstream control signal, and selects an optimal base station from the received upstream propagation quality as a new current base station. If the selected base station is different from the current base station, the transmission timing of the upstream pilot signal is modified to the transmission timing based on the synchronization information extracted from the downstream control signal of the selected base station and transmitted. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157886 | PREAMBLE CAPTURE AND MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL - An apparatus and method for wireless communications configured to receive simultaneous transmissions from a plurality of wireless devices, with each of the transmissions having a reference signal, acquire the reference signals and, based on information obtained from the acquisition of the reference signals, select the transmission from one of the wireless devices for timing synchronization and decoding. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157887 | System, Arrangements And Method Relating To Access Handling - The present invention relates to a system comprising a core network access packet data node ( | 06-24-2010 |
20100157888 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING EFFICIENCY AND RELIABILITY OF BROADCAST COMMUNICATIONS IN A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for improving efficiency and reliability of broadcast transmission in a multi-hop wireless mesh communication network. In some implementations, systems and methods are provided for a leaf mesh node to acknowledge reception of a broadcast packet broadcast by an Intelligent Access Point (IAP), and for allowing the IAP to determine whether to re-communicate the broadcast packet that it had previously re-transmitted when no acknowledgment is received from a leaf mesh node. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157889 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING EFFICIENCY OF BROADCAST COMMUNICATIONS IN A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for improving efficiency and reliability of broadcast transmission in a multi-hop wireless mesh communication network. When an intelligent access point (IAP) receives a broadcast packet (BP), the IAP can determine a list of downlink child mesh nodes (DLCMNs) of the IAP based on route information provided in its routing table. After the IAP knows its DLCMNs, the IAP can determine a first lowest data rate (LDR) between the IAP and each of its DLCMNs, and then re-transmit the BP at the first LDR. The BP is then received by at least one “parent” mesh node, which can then perform similar processing, and can then re-transmit the BP to its DLCMNs. This process repeats until the BP reaches a leaf mesh node. In other words, each mesh node can determine its DLCMNs, determine the LDR between itself and each of its DLCMNs, and can then re-transmit the BP at this LDR. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157890 | METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION USING AUTHENTICATION INFORMATION - A data communication method includes providing a sender node having a data packet of information. The data packet includes at least one first field and a second field. The second field has content that is dependent upon actual content of the at least one first field. The content of the second field of the data packet is transmitted from the sender node to a receiver node. The receiver node is used to predict the actual content of the first field of the data packet. The receiver node is used to calculate the content of the second field of the data packet based upon the predicted content of the first field. The predicted content of the first field is confirmed to be equivalent to the actual content of the first field. The confirming step includes comparing the calculated content of the second field to the transmitted content of the second field. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157891 | FEMTOCELL CALL MANAGEMENT - When a call is received for a device within a femtocell area of coverage, all devices within the femtocell area of coverage are rung. The call is connected to the first device that picks up. All devices can be rung at the same time or in a predetermined order. The first device rung can be the device that was most recently moved or the device that was most recently active. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157892 | MOBILITY SUPPORTING METHOD - Provided is a mobility supporting method of a mobile router. The method includes generating an area identifier to identify an open shortest path first area; and transmitting routing information including the area identifier to an access router. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157893 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is an apparatus and method for transmitting data in a wireless communication system. The apparatus for transmitting a packet data in a wireless communication system includes a Media Access Control (MAC) layer for determining the number of the number of preambles to be inserted based on a feed-back reply signal from a receiver, and generating a multi-preamble aggregation packet by inserting the determined number of preambles into packets received from an upper layer and a physical layer for forming the multi-preamble aggregation packet generated in a data processing unit, by using a physical layer packet, and transmitting the formed multi-preamble aggregation packet. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157894 | METHOD OF OPERATING TUNNEL POINT SUPPORTING ROUTING SCALABILITY AND MOBILITY - Provided is a method of operating a tunnel point that provides a tunnel between a router group including at least one router and a mobile node. The method includes: providing a tunnel between the mobile node and the router group by authenticating the mobile node; receiving a packet including an identifier (ID) of a target node from the mobile node; converting the ID of the target node in the packet into a locator corresponding to the ID of the target node; transmitting a packet including the converted locator to the router group; and maintaining the ID of the mobile node by authenticating the mobile node through the router group when the mobile node is connected to another external terminal node. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157895 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING UPLINK TRANSMISSIONS USING MULTIPLE UPLINK CARRIERS - A method and an apparatus for uplink transmission using multiple uplink carriers are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) selects a dedicated channel medium access control (MAC-d) flow with highest priority data to be transmitted and performs uplink carrier selection and enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transport format combination (E-TFC) restriction and selection to select a carrier among a plurality of carriers and select an E-TFC based on a maximum supported payload, a remaining scheduled grant payload of the selected carrier and a remaining non-scheduled grant payload. The WTRU then generates a medium access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU) for E-DCH transmission via the selected carrier based on the selected E-TFC. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157896 | METHOD FOR GENERATING FRAME AND TRANSMITTING FRAME INFORMATION - The present invention relates to a frame generation and transmission method of a wireless communication system. The frame generation method includes dividing a frame into a plurality of subframes, allocating the respective subframes as one of a plurality of predefined modes, and allocating mode allocation information of the respective subframes to the frame information. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157897 | MOBILE GATEWAY APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONNECTING IP BASED SERVICES USING THE SAME - Disclosed are a mobile gateway apparatus and a method of connecting IP based services using the same. The mobile gateway apparatus assigns identifiers to user terminals that have accessed the mobile gateway apparatus through multiple internal interfaces based on various network access standards, and selects an appropriate external interface from multiple external interfaces based on various network access standards, thereby providing IP based services Even if the user terminals and the external networks operate based on various network access standards, the mobile gateway apparatus allows IP based services to be effectively provided to the user terminals by supporting more various network access standards while ensuring higher bandwidth. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157898 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - To control the communication quality on the terminal basis without making the base station more complicated, it is provided a communication system, comprising at least one computer and a gateway that is connected to the at least one computer through a first network. The gateway is connected to at least one terminal through a second network. The at least one terminal performs communications with the at least one computer via the gateway. The gateway estimates quality of the communications between the gateway and the at least one computer in the first network; and determines a priority for the communications between the gateway and the at least one terminal in the second network according to the estimated quality of the communications in the first network. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157899 | DISTRIBUTED GEOSPATIAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method on a first mobile node for facilitating exchange of pertinent data between mobile nodes over a wireless communications network can be provided. The method can include establishing, by the first mobile node, a wireless network connection with at least one other mobile node inside a predefined geospatial area, wherein the wireless network connection is established over the wireless communications network. The method can further include determining that a future position of the first mobile node is outside the predefined geospatial area and transmitting pertinent data residing on the first mobile node over the wireless communications network exclusively to the at least one other mobile node inside the predefined geo spatial area, wherein the pertinent data is associated with the predefined geospatial area. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157900 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING LOCAL ROUTING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and a system for establishing a local routing in a mobile communication network, and for allowing different mobile stations connected with the same Access Service Network GateWay (ASN GW) to transmit and receive traffic without delivering such traffic to a Home Agent (HA) are provided. In the method, a session server determines whether first and second mobile stations are connected with the same ASN GW by using their location information. In case of a connection with the same ASN GW, the session server establishes a local routing in the ASN GW so that traffic between the first and second mobile stations is directly routed to each other at the ASN GW. Then the ASN GW receiving the traffic from one of both mobile stations transmits the traffic to the other according to the local routing. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157901 | WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE AND METHOD FOR BASE STATION UTILIZATION - Wireless network system including a plurality of base stations each configured to manage active links to mobile stations within a range; and a controller configured to control the base stations to provide at least two of the active links from two different base stations simultaneously to a given mobile station in integral manner for joint processing. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157902 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF PROVIDING MULTIMEDIA SERVICE IN IP NETWORK - Provided are a method and system of providing a multimedia service in an information provider (IP) network, wherein the method is performed by a system of providing an IP-based mobile service. The method includes: detecting whether a user, who is being provided with the multimedia service, changed from a first terminal to a second terminal; obtaining characteristic information of the second terminal; and providing the multimedia service after changing the multimedia service according to the obtained characteristic information. When only a terminal changes and an access network does not change, or when only an access network changes and a terminal does not change, a network automatically recognizes characteristics of the terminal and the access network and automatically changes media according to the recognized characteristics. Accordingly, a multimedia service without quality deterioration is received, and moreover, a service that can satisfy characteristics (capacity, size of display, etc.) of a terminal of a user and a corresponding service level agreement (SLA) of the user are provided in various terminal environments. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157903 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT BANDWIDTH UTILIZATION FOR SUBSCRIBER UNIT INITIALIZATION AND SYNCHRONIZATION IN A TIME-SYNCHRONIZED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A bandwidth efficient subscriber unit initialization and synchronization method and apparatus is described. The inventive subscriber unit initialization and synchronization method and apparatus uses a combination of an access burst format and a data transportation technique to efficiently use bandwidth when initializing and synchronizing subscriber units in a time-synchronized communication system. Advantageously, the present invention provides a mechanism for a base station to receive multiple access bursts from multiple subscriber units in a single contiguous time period. In the preferred embodiment of the present invention, bandwidth is efficiently utilized by searching for multiple initial access bursts from multiple mobile stations during a single time period known as a new access opportunity. The preferred embodiment of the present invention initializes and synchronizes subscriber units in a “contention-based” manner. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157904 | OPTIMIZED HEADER FOR EFFICIENT PROCESSING OF DATA PACKETS - Methods, apparatus, and computer program products for processing an RLC PDU having an RLC payload and an RLC header, wherein the RLC payload comprises a plurality of at least partially ciphered SDUs, each of the SDUs being either a partial or complete SDU, and wherein the RLC header comprises a separate count for each of the SDUs, each of the counts being configured to support deciphering of the corresponding SDU. Each SDU is a PDCP PDU having a PDCP payload and a PDCP header, wherein the PDCP payload comprises a plurality of IP packets, and wherein the PDCP header comprises a length indicator for at least one of the IP packets. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157905 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING ROUTE OF MOBILE NODE IN SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided for searching a route of a mobile node in a short-range communication environment. A first router to which a mobile node belongs acquires a unique address of the mobile node for communication with the mobile node. The first router determines whether the mobile node travels during communication. When the mobile node travels, the first router broadcasts the unique address of the mobile node to one or more neighboring routers and determines whether the one or more neighboring routers include the mobile node. If a second router, which is one of the one or more neighboring routers, includes the mobile node, the second router performs communication using the unique address without an additional address acquisition process. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157906 | Techniques for femto cell synchronization in wireless networks - Techniques are disclosed that provide for femto base stations to become synchronized with other base stations in a wireless network. For instance, a macro base station may instruct a mobile station to engage in a synchronization operation that synchronizes one or more timings (e.g., OFDM timings) of a femto base station with one or more corresponding timings of the macro base station. This may involve the mobile station having timing references of the macro base station. Further, this may involve the mobile station performing scanning operations and/or handover ranging operations with the femto base station. The mobile device may determine timing offsets between the femto BS and the macro BS. These offsets may be sent to the macro base station or to the femto base station. Also, the femto base station may adopt timings employed by the mobile station. The macro base station or a femto base station may direct a femto base station to achieve synchronization either directly with timing adjustment offset, or with a list of already synchronized femto base station as synchronization reference. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157907 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALING TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A wireless network uses an improved frame structure to increase timing acquisition capabilities as well as reduction of spectral lines. In one aspect, the frame packet can be used to communicate the different modes of operation under which the packet was created. | 06-24-2010 |
20100165912 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR WIRELESSLY TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CEC MESSAGE - In a wireless communication system including a source device and a sink device for wirelessly transmitting and receiving a CEC message specified in an HDMI standard, a CEC controller of the source device generates and outputs a CEC frame including the CEC message. A controller generates a wireless data packet including the CEC message in the generated CEC frame. A wireless transceiver circuit wirelessly transmits a wireless signal including the generated wireless data packet to the sink device, and receives a wireless signal including a wireless ACK packet and wirelessly transmitted from the sink device in response to the wireless data packet in the wirelessly-transmitted wireless signal. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165913 | METHODS OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA - A method of transmitting data from a first communication device to a second communication device, comprising receiving a first signal on a first frequency channel from the second communication device, generating data, wherein the data comprises a reception status indicating whether there is interference on the first frequency channel due to a second signal transmitted by a third communication device, transmitting a third signal on a second frequency channel to the second communication device, wherein the transmission is carried out for a predetermined duration, receiving a fourth signal on the second frequency channel from the second communication device; and transmitting the data generated on the second frequency channel to the second communication device. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165914 | BEAM DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is related to a beam division multiple access system and a method thereof. The base station according to the present invention comprises a initial mobile station information receiver for receiving initial mobile station information that a mobile station omnidirectionally transmits in an initial communication step, a mobile station location and speed detector for detecting a location and a moving speed of the mobile station from the initial mobile station information, a downlink beam generator for generating a downlink beam based on the location and the moving speed of the mobile station transferred from the mobile station location and speed detector, and adjusting at least one of a width and a direction of each the downlink beam, and a downlink beam transmitter for transmitting the downlink beam generated by the downlink beam generator to the mobile station through a phase array antenna. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165915 | Baseband Recovery in Wireless Networks, Base Transceiver Stations, and Wireless Networking Devices - Baseband recovery in wireless networks, base transceiver stations, and wireless networking devices may be implemented to minimize the number of timing symbols while at the same time enabling wireless devices to use a relatively low per-symbol sampling rate, so that minimal processing is required to implement the timing recovery. In one embodiment, a relatively low number of samples is taken per expected symbol interval during the training sequence. A subset of the samples is selected and processed to determine error signals for each of the samples. The error signals are multiplied by the expected symbol and summed to form an error signal. The error signal is used to adjust the set of samples that will be used and processed in connection with subsequent symbols. The error signal is also used to interpolate between available samples to infinitesimally approach the point of maximum eye opening. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165916 | Wireless Star Network with Standby Central Node - A wireless network with a star topology includes a first central node, a second central node, wherein the first and second nodes are functionally equivalent. A set of leaf nodes are configured to communicate with either the first central node or the second central node via wireless links, depending whether the central nodes are active or inactive. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165917 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, ACCESS GATEWAY APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication control system capable of reducing the traffic amount, CPU's processing load and channel bands related to a location registering process. In this system, a transmitting/receiving part ( | 07-01-2010 |
20100165918 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER, CELLULAR AND LOCATING CELL DISPLAY METHOD FOR USE THEREWITH - The present invention provides a mobile communication system in which a cellular is capable of notifying the user of correct information of an event that the cellular is locating in a cell supporting HSDPA and an event that the cellular is locating in a cell supporting E-DCH. There are notified reconfiguration messages each of which includes “HSDPA cell indicator” and “E-DCH cell indicator” from a cellular base station apparatus | 07-01-2010 |
20100165919 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data transmission method for a mobile communication system is disclosed. A data transmission method at a specific protocol layer of a reception end of a mobile communication system includes receiving at least one data block of a specific protocol layer from a transmission end, and transmitting reception status indication information to the transmission end according to a reception status of the data block of the specific protocol layer. As a result, data can be more quickly and effectively transmitted to a destination. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165920 | METHOD FOR BOOSTING DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION TO MOBILE STATION AND SYSTEM UTILIZING THE SAME - The invention discloses a method for boosting the downlink transmission rate to a mobile station by a processing unit thereof, including the steps of requesting a base station for a bandwidth amount for transmission of at least one un-generated acknowledgement (ACK) packet, generating the ACK packet or packets, and instructing an RF module to transmit the ACK packet or packets to the base station following a notification from the base station indicating that the requested bandwidth amount has been allocated. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165921 | Mobile Station Handover in a Localized Base Station Environment - According to one general aspect, a method of operating a indoor cellular access point (ICAP) may comprise constructing a neighbor list of neighboring indoor cellular access points (NICAPs). The method may also include detecting at least one overlay macro base stations (OMBSs). In one embodiment, the method may further comprise associating the overlay macro base stations with the indoor cellular access point. The method may also include transmitting a message to a mobile station (MS) wherein the message includes the neighbor list. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165922 | DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A communication system for use in a wireless network includes: an audio module configured to provide packets indicative of audio for a part of a communication between the communication system and another communication system, the communication spanning packet times, the packets including at least critical packets indicative of critical audio; and a transceiver coupled to the audio module and configured to cause: the critical packets to be conveyed for transmission; and first non-critical packets, indicative of non-critical audio, to be conveyed for transmission such that (1) the first non-critical packets represent less than all of a time between transmission of critical packets and (2) no more than a threshold number of packet times will pass without one of the critical packets or one of the first non-critical packets being conveyed by the transceiver for transmission. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165923 | WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless network is provided. The wireless network includes a predetermined wireless router and a plurality of wireless routers. The predetermined wireless router has gateway functionality for accessing an external network. Each wireless router of the wireless routers has a single transceiver, and the wireless routers include at least a wireless router which communicates with other wireless router(s) in the wireless network for forwarding network packets by using a single fixed channel and at least a wireless router which communicates with other wireless router(s) in the wireless network for forwarding network packets by using a plurality of channels. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165924 | RADIO INTEROPERABILITY SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method, system and memory are provided for enabling interoperability. A communication session between different communication systems, such as radio systems, operating using different protocols is initiated by receiving a scenario identifier from one of the user devices. An interoperability server receives the scenario identifier and accesses interoperability data to obtain the connection information corresponding the scenario matching the scenario identifier. The data includes scenarios for communication sessions and the connections required for each scenario. Once the interoperability server obtains the connection information, the communication session is initiated. | 07-01-2010 |
20100172286 | RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION APPARATUS AND PILOT TRANSMISSION METHOD - Provided is a base station capable of giving a pilot appropriate for both of multicast data and unicast data which are frequency-multiplexed. In a pilot generation unit ( | 07-08-2010 |
20100172287 | TEMPORAL NETWORK SERVER CONNECTED DEVICES WITH OFF-LINE AD HOC UPDATE AND INTERACTION CAPABILITY - A system and method for using mobile network devices that are periodically connected to a network server are disclosed. The devices exchange data in an ad hoc manner when not connected to the server. In the preferred embodiment, independent mobile wireless network devices are connected to a network server through a client computing device acting as a gateway to the server. The presence of the mobile network device and the client computing device cause both devices to become users. The server pairs both the network device and the client computing device with a unique identity contained on the network device. Paired and independent identities that have presence on the server then interact with each other in such a manner that data on the connected mobile network devices is changed and stored in concordance with this community interaction. Unconnected mobile network devices search for other unconnected mobile network devices within range to form an ad hoc network. This allows the mobile network devices to exchange and store data related to their last community server interaction. This data is context specific in terms of the specific services used by the by the users that had presence on the community server. User interaction directly with mobile network devices can change this information locally even when not connected to a client computer. This information will also be exchanged and affect data stored on mobile devices that are part of an independent ad hoc network according to the context of the previous server data stored on the mobile devices. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172288 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDIRECTING MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - A cellular communication system is capable of supporting local access points with shorter communication ranges than macro cells within which they are positioned. When a user wishes to send a communication a request is sent to an access point. At the access point a determination is made as to whether or not the maximum capacity of the access point has been reached. If maximum capacity has been reached then a rejection signal is sent to the user equipment and the communication is redirected into the macro cell in which the access point is positioned. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172289 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR UTILIZING A CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICE IN A PACKET SWITCHED DOMAIN AND COMNUNICATION SYSTEM COMPRISING SUCH DEVICE - A method and a device for utilizing a circuit switched service in a packet switched domain are provided, wherein a mobile terminal is connected to a first network, said first network comprises a first service and a second service, wherein the mobile terminal is connected to the first service of the first network via a first MAC-d flow, said method comprises the steps of (i) at least one second MAC-d flow is set up between the mobile terminal and the second service of the first network; and (ii) at least a connection is set up via the at least one second MAC-d flow. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172290 | System and method for an uplink acknowledgement transmission in carrier-aggregated wireless communication systems - A system and method of uplink acknowledgement transmission. The wireless network implements carrier aggregation wherein a subscriber station may be allocated downlink resource blocks distributed over multiple downlink carriers. The subscriber station receives control channel elements from at least one base station on at least two downlink carriers. The subscriber station derives uplink acknowledgement signal cyclic shift resource indices for respective carriers from functions of the index of the control channel elements that have carried a downlink grant the respective downlink carrier. The subscriber station transmits N number of ACK/NACK symbols in at least one physical uplink channel resource. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172291 | Dual Base Stations for Wireless Communications Systems - A network apparatus comprises a controller to determine a first base station for transmitting data and to determine a second different base station for receiving data. In one embodiment, the network apparatus further comprises a transceiver to transmit data to the first base station while associated with the second base station. The transceiver is operable to receive data from the second base station while associated with the first base station. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172292 | Wireless Network Connectivity in Data Centers - A method for wireless network connectivity in a data center includes communicating between nodes in a data center across a wireless interconnectivity through artificially created paths between nodes in the data center, the nodes being at least one of a server, router, switch, and other such components in the data center that require connectivity; and managing the wireless interconnectivity by a control and management entity. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172293 | Lightweight Mobility Architecture - Mobility between access domains in an Internet Protocol (IP) network can be supported by introducing a so-called Mobility Manager (MM) that maintains a database of currently attached devices and their current access domain location. The mobility manager may then detect, for a device registered in the database, a change of access domain from a first access domain to a second access domain by monitoring connection maintenance signaling related to the considered device. The mobility manager should at least obtain an indication of such a change of access domain. In response to a detected change of access domain, the mobility manager arranges for a reconfiguration of the network to forward traffic destined to an IP address of the device in the first access domain to a new location in the second access domain. In this way, the mobility manager allows the device to keep its IP address when moving between access domains. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172294 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS AND ROUTER USING NETWORK-BASED IP MOBILITY PROTOCOL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR THE SAME - When a delivery of packets is made between LMA and MN, an options header that enables identification of MN is added between the router (MAG), located between LMA and MN, and LMA so as to achieve appropriate routing. When MN moved, buffer transfer from previous access MAGa to new access MAGb is performed also by adding an options header to make delivery to MN. In this way, in network-based IP mobility protocol, when the mobile terminal (MN) or the control apparatus (LMA) serves as a compressor or decompressor to compress packets, fast handover can be realized when the MN moved, whereby it is possible to save the band for the last one hop, which is the narrowest band. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172295 | Technique for Uplink Data Transmissions in Communication Networks - The invention relates to a technique for uplink data transmissions in, e.g., mobile networks. A method embodiment for performing the technique in a transmitter ( | 07-08-2010 |
20100172296 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTENTION-BASED CHANNEL ACCESS FOR PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A system and method for wireless communication is disclosed. One aspect of the system includes wireless devices, wherein the wireless devices are capable of establishing a peer-to-peer link by contention-based channel access, and wherein the wireless devices are free to contend any time for accessing a wireless channel. The system may include first and second wireless devices, each of which has a directional antenna system. The first wireless device can determine whether the wireless channel is available for establishing a peer-to-peer link, by repeating sensing whether the channel is idle in different directions each during different slot time periods. The first wireless device can also sequentially transmit multiple requests each in different directions for establishing a link with the second wireless device. The second wireless device can sequentially transmit multiple replies each in different directions for establishing the link with the first wireless device. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172297 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL BARRING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate cell barring based on erroneous messages received within a wireless communication system. As described herein, in the event that a device fails to receive and/or decode respective messages transmitted from a network cell over a common communication channel, the device can implement one or more error handling procedures as described herein to reselect away from the network cell and/or a frequency associated with the network cell (e.g., as if the network cell was explicitly barred). Cell barring can be triggered as described herein based on a count of erroneous messages (e.g., consecutive messages, messages received within a predetermined time window, etc.), elapsed time between erroneous messages, or the like. Further, cell barring can be performed as described herein based on failure to acquire pre-scheduled system information, common system information determined to have invalid abstract syntax, or the like. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172298 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF SENSOR NODE IN IP-BASED SENSOR NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for managing mobility of a sensor node in an Internet Protocol (IP)-based sensor network including a plurality of personal area networks (PANs) is provided. The apparatus for managing mobility of a sensor node in a personal area network (PAN), the apparatus including: a sensor node sensing unit to sense a sensor node moving into the PAN from another PAN; a proxy binding update (PBU) message generation unit to generate location change information of the sensed sensor node; and a PBU message transmission unit to transmit the location change information. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172299 | ENHANCEMENT OF LTE RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE - A method and apparatus for enhancement of the random access procedure of a Long-Term Evolution (LTE) system are provided. Enhancements include modeling one cycle in the random access procedure since only one counter is necessary and controlling the delay prior to the preamble transmission in order to reduce conflicts by multiple mobile terminals using the random access channel. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172300 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING REVERSE GAIN - A method for improving reverse coverage is disclosed, comprising: A, when a base station requests a terminal to enable the reverse repetition, under the condition that the service quality requirement and the transmission speed of the terminal are persistent, then step B is executed; B, if the reverse gain still cannot be improved after repetition, the reverse repetition will not be enabled; or, the reverse repetition will be enabled. The method of the present invention can take account of subchannelization gain, repetition gain and the interaction of both as an integration, to ensure that the whole gain of reverse link increases after the enabled repetition, and to prevent the system from sacrificing the bandwidth without improving but deteriorating the reverse coverage capability in certain circumstances after the enabled repetition occurs. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172301 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CANCELING A CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK - A method and apparatus may be used to cancel a communication session. The apparatus may transmit a first message to initiate a communication session and then transmit a second message that indicates a request to cancel the communication session. If the apparatus determines that there is an ongoing Packet Switched (PS) session, the apparatus may continue the ongoing PS session on a current Radio Access Technology (RAT) without performing an intersystem change. If the apparatus receives a handover (HO) command, the apparatus may transmit a message to reject the HO command, or it may ignore the HO command. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172302 | IPv4-to-IPv6 Address Transitioning Methods And Apparatus For Systems That Push Information To Wireless Communication Devices - A front end of an IPv6 communication network includes a network entry point device and a plurality of tunnel servers which facilitate the communication of user information between a host computer of an IPv4 communication network and an IPv6 wireless communication device. The network entry point device is configured to direct a tunnel request from the host computer to a selected tunnel server, which establishes a tunnel connection with the host computer. The tunnel server facilitates the communication of user information between the host and the wireless device through the tunnel connection. The tunnel server also performs a dynamic routing protocol (DRP). In accordance with the DRP, the tunnel server updates a local routing table to reflect the newly established tunnel connection and broadcasts updated routing table information to the other tunnel servers. In another related technical aspect, a back end of the IPv6 communication network facilitates communication with the IPv6 wireless device when it operates in an IPv4 wireless communication network. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172303 | System and Method for Downlink Signaling for High Speed Uplink Packet Access - A wireless communication system ( | 07-08-2010 |
20100172304 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DIVERSITY PROCESSING INCLUDING USING DEDICATED PILOT METHOD FOR OPEN LOOP - Methods and systems for diversity processing including using dedicated pilot method for open loop may include combining a plurality of received WCDMA/HSDPA multipath signals for each diversity transmit antenna to at least one processed diversity signal. The received WCDMA/HSDPA multipath signals may originate from diversity transmit antennas at a base station that may be transmitting information via a closed loop or open loop diversity transmission mode. Open loop symbols may be estimated using information from at least one common pilot channel. At least a portion of the at least one processed diversity signal may be despread from the at least one common pilot channel. | 07-08-2010 |
20100177679 | ROUTE DETERMINING METHODS FOR A NETWORK - An invitation message ( | 07-15-2010 |
20100177680 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DELIVERING CONTENT USING NETWORKED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION UNITS - A wireless network comprises a plurality of areas of interest and a core network coupled to each of the plurality of areas of interest to route real-time data from each of the plurality of areas of interest. Each of the plurality of areas of interest includes a plurality of wireless communication units. Each wireless communication unit comprises a local cache to store non-real-time data; and a gateway to process non-real-time data requests and provide an interface to a packet network. The plurality of wireless communication units in each of the plurality of areas of interest are networked together such that each wireless communication unit has access to data stored on the local cache of another of the plurality of wireless communication units, wherein the gateway in each of the plurality of wireless communication units is operable to provide the requested non-real-time data, if available, from one of its local cache and the cache of other wireless communication units prior to passing the non-real-time data request to the packet network. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177681 | Method and System for Target Positioning and Tracking in Cooperative Relay Networks - A method and system locates a position of a transceiver in a cooperative relay network of nodes. A primary node broadcasts a range request (RREQ) message. A target node, in response to receiving the RREQ message, broadcasts a range reply (RREP) message, wherein the RREP message includes a time difference between receiving the RREQ message and broadcasting the RREP message. A secondary node, in response to receiving the RREQ message and the RREP message, broadcasts a range data (RDAT) message, wherein the RDAT message includes a time difference between receiving the RREQ message and the RREP message. Then, a position solver can determine a location of the target node based on the time differences in the RREP message and the RDAT message. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177682 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVING RESPONSE MESSAGE TRANSMISSION RELIABILITY - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure improve a robustness of some critical MAC management response massages transmitted from a base station (BS) to a mobile station (MS). In this way, a reliability of transmission can be increased and a messaging failure that results in out of sync state between the MS and the BS can be avoided. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177683 | Method and Apparatus for Cell Searching - A cell searching procedure is modified to enable a user terminal to determine whether a detected signal originates in a known cell or a new cell having the same cell identifier as the known cell. When a signal is detected, the user terminal determines the cell identifier and timing of the detected signal. If the cell identifier matches a known cell and the timing is outside the timing window of the known cell, the user terminal compares detected signal with a corresponding received signal received from the known cell having the same cell identifier as the detected signal source. The user terminal determines, based on said comparison, whether the detected signal is from the known cell or a new cell. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177684 | WIRELESS MONITORING AND ALARM SYSTEM - A monitoring system includes a multi-hop time division multiple access communication system to link a control unit wirelessly and redundantly with a plurality of modules. Communications to modules occur during predetermined time slots in a first portion of a selected frame. Communications from the modules occur during corresponding time slots during a second portion of the frame. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177685 | TRANSFER OF MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CONTEXT IN CELLULAR NETWORKS USING EXTENDED ROUTING PROTOCOL - A new architecture provides network-based mobility in cellular networks that is built on Internet Protocol (IP)/Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) technologies, such as Virtual Private Local Area Network (LAN) Service (VPLS), the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and BGP MPLS Layer 3 Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). The architecture consists of several building blocks that provide functionality for different aspects of cellular network mobility. One building block is network-based macro mobility in IP/MPLS networks. The macro mobility techniques described herein are built on extensions to a routing protocol such as BGP. Another building block relates to transferring subscriber context between network devices while preserving the IP address of the subscriber. The techniques described herein provide a subscriber context transfer mechanism for mobile subscriber management that is built on extensions to a routing protocol such as BGP. Another building block of the mobility architecture is network-based micro mobility based on VPLS. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177686 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING ROUTE OPTIMIZATION BETWEEN TWO NODES IN NETWORK BASED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A method for performing route optimization between two nodes in network based mobility management, wherein each of the two nodes is associated with an access network via attachment to an access router, the access routers having directly or indirectly assigned a Mobility Access Gateway (MAG) that signals the node's presence to a Mobility Anchor (MA) which maintains the current IP address information along with location information of the node, is characterized in that some specific control for setting up a route optimized path for data packet exchange between the two nodes is assigned to the Mobility Anchors (MA). | 07-15-2010 |
20100177687 | Communication method using statistical multiplexing and apparatus for performing the same - A communication method using statistical multiplexing in which pre-determined hopping patterns are respectively allocated to two or more users who communicate with a base station using orthogonal resources, the communication method includes: receiving a transmission signal transmitted using the orthogonal resources; and acquiring data from the received transmission signal, wherein each of the users belongs to one of two or more groups and the pre-determined hopping patterns are allocated to prevent collision between the users belonging to the same group. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177688 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER APPARATUS AND METHOD - A base station apparatus for use in a mobile communication system includes: a unit configured to generate a reference signal; a unit configured to generate a transmission symbol including the reference signal; a unit configured to transmit the transmission symbol for each sector; and a unit configured to monitor a radio propagation state. The reference signal is generated by multiplying a first sequence formed by a non-orthogonal code sequence which is different at least between an adjacent cell and an own cell, by a second sequence. Whether to form the second sequence by using an orthogonal code sequence which is different among sectors or by using a non-orthogonal code sequence is determined according to the radio propagation state. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177689 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS AND ROUTER USING NETWORK-BASED IP MOBILITY PROTOCOL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR THE SAME - When an MN | 07-15-2010 |
20100177690 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION UNIT - A wireless communication unit includes a baseband module and a radiofrequency module. A communication interface connects the baseband module to the radiofrequency module. Data can be communicated from the baseband module to the radiofrequency module and/or vice versa via the interface. The communication interface includes one or more data compression arrangement, for compressing original data to be transmitted over the communication interface, from a transmitting side of the communication interface to a receiving side of the communication interface, into compressed data and decompressing the compressed data after transmission and restoring the original data. The data compression arrangement may include a data compression unit at the transmitting side of the communication interface, and a data decompression unit at the receiving side of the communication interface. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177691 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING CAPABILITY OF A SERVING SYSTEM FOR ANCHORING A CALL USING AN INTELLIGENT NETWORK PROTOCOL | 07-15-2010 |
20100177692 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION SESSION - A method and device for managing a communication session via a plurality of wireless carriers in a wireless communication network ( | 07-15-2010 |
20100177693 | METHOD OF MAC HEADER GENERATION AND DATA TRANSMITTING - A method of generating MAC header and a method of transmitting data using the generated MAC header are disclosed. A mobile station can receive a message from a base station, the message including an indicator for identifying a service flow (SF). If the mobile station is connected with the base station to generate the service flow, the mobile station and the base station can map the service flow with the indicator. Accordingly, the base station can generate MAC header, which includes the indicator and a parameter representing whether the MAC header has been compressed. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177694 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION - A method for a user equipment to transmit uplink control information to a base station, the base station being configured to receive uplink control information on a plurality of groups of subcarriers. The method includes: randomly determining one of the groups of subcarriers; and transmitting uplink control information on the randomly determined group of subcarriers. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177695 | TECHNIQUE FOR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION USING MOBILE STATION SIGNALING - A Mobile Station (MS) and a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) Femtocell Base Station (FBS) for Interference Mitigation (IM) in a wireless communication system, and methods for their operation, are provided. A method for operating the MS includes determining if the MS cannot access a first CSG FBS due to interference from a second CSG FBS, the first CSG FBS being a CSG FBS that the MS is authorized to receive service from and the second CSG FBS being a CSG FBS that the MS is not authorized to receive service from, and if it is determined that the MS cannot access the first CSG FBS due to interference received from the second CSG FBS, transmitting an IM-Signal to the second CSG FBS requesting that the second CSG FBS mitigate the interference to the MS. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177696 | Apparatus and method for sharing information through presence service in a communication network - An apparatus is capable of sharing information through a presence service in a communication network and capable of providing presence information of a Mobile Station (MS). The apparatus extracts at least one of application information and contents indication information from an application in execution. Presence information is generated that includes at least one of the application information and the contents indication information, and transmitting the presence information to a presence server. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177697 | BASE STATION AND BROADCAST CHANNEL TRANSMISSION METHOD - A disclosed base station transmits a broadcast channel to a user device a predefined number of times in a predetermined cycle for communication with the user device. The base station includes a repetition unit configured to repeat the broadcast channel, after the broadcast channel is channel-coded, for the predefined number of times to generate multiple broadcast channels; and a signal waveform changing unit configured to process the generated broadcast channels such that the processed broadcast channels have different signal waveforms. Positions of the broadcast channels in the order of transmission in the predetermined cycle are associated with the signal waveforms of the broadcast channels. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177698 | Network Based Local Mobility Management - A network comprises a NetLMM domain having at least one Host Identity Protocol proxy coupled to one or more Access Points for communicating with a Mobile Node and acting, in use, as an Access Router for the NetLMM domain. Use of an HIP proxy as an Access Router allows the Access Router itself to be mobile. Furthermore, the Access Router can reside in IPv4 networks, and can even be behind NAT boxes located between the Access Router and a Local Mobility Anchor to which the Access Router is registered. The invention may be applied using a hierarchical architecture in which each domain comprises a respective Local Mobility Anchor coupled to each HIP proxy acting as an Access Router in the domain. The Local Mobility Anchor of a domain may itself be an HIP Local Mobility Anchor. Alternatively, the HIP proxies in a domain may be arranged in a distributed manner. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177699 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT AND EFFICIENT INFORMATION RETRIEVAL IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and apparatus of forming a generic overlay network for efficient information retrieval in a communications network, comprising receiving in a domain router a register request from a mobile communications apparatus, the register request including an identification of said mobile communications apparatus; looking-up an address to a next-hop router associated with the identification; sending the register request to the next-hop router; receiving a reply from the next-hop router; and if the reply includes an address to a home router, sending a reply to the mobile communications apparatus including the address of the home router, said reply initiating the establishment of a connection between the mobile communications apparatus and the home router. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177700 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION MODES BASED ON MULTIPLE SEARCH SPACES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for enabling multiple transmission modes based on control information of different formats. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177701 | TIMER POLL RETRANSMISSION EXPIRY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Providing for improved acknowledgment and retransmission protocols for wireless communication is described herein. By way of example, the acknowledgment and retransmission protocols can comprise including a poll element, or reply command, within a data unit that is part of a wireless transmission. A timer is set following sending the wireless transmission, and if a reply is not received within expiration of the timer, retransmission is triggered. According to specific aspects, retransmission comprises resending the data unit that includes the poll element or reply command. In this manner, redundant retransmission can be mitigated, whether because a receiver fails to successfully receive one or more subsets of the wireless transmission, or because the transmitter fails to obtain a reply to the wireless transmission. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177702 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND INSTALLATION FOR FORWARDING DATA TRANSMISSION FRAMES - In a system, the functionality is decentralized in a data transmission network so that the need of communications produced by and addressed to data terminals to pass by way of a single point in the data transmission network is diminished. A first data transmission installation is adapted to signal second data transmission installations, each of which is part of a ring-shaped data transmission topology, to be capable of building logical data transmission tunnels directed to the data terminals. Thereby, all the logical data transmission tunnels need not commence or, depending on the direction, terminate at the same point of a data transmission network. In addition, the data transmission installations present in a ring-shaped data transmission topology need not necessarily be taught routing information in order to enable each of these data transmission installations to send data transmission frames to be transmitted to another one of these data transmission installations. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177703 | Persistent Mesh for Isolated Mobile and Temporal Networking - A structured wireless mesh network is disclosed where a tree-like connection topology is formed. In one embodiment, each node has separate uplink and downlink radios operating on different channels. When a cluster of such nodes becomes isolated as in the case of a mobile mesh application, a node in the cluster according to this invention acts as a root node thus enabling the tree structure to persist, even in isolation. Example methods of joining sub networks are disclosed that guide the joining of mesh networks and channel management. Nodes that may operate in isolation also support a distributed DHCP capability such that IP addresses are assigned to clients even when a connection to a central DHCP server is unavailable. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177704 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING CROSS-LAYER QUALITY-OF-SERVICE FUNCTIONALITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for providing cross-layer quality-of-service (QoS) functionality in a wireless network is provided. The method includes obtaining QoS data from each layer of an application stack for a particular application. A QoS matrix is generated based on the obtained QoS data. Packet distribution for the particular application may then be prioritized based on the QoS matrix. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177705 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDLING SIMPLE IP TO MOBILE IP TRANSITION - Methods are provided for transitioning between SIP and MIP. Mobile devices, upon detecting a new system, automatically attempt a MIP session to avoid the default position of SIP. A history is maintained of systems visited, and for systems that did not support MIP in the past, a MIP session is not attempted, but rather SIP is initiated from the start. | 07-15-2010 |
20100182948 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TERMINAL APPARATUS USING THE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless unit | 07-22-2010 |
20100182949 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING AND READING AN AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST (ARQ) STATUS FEEDBACK MESSAGE - An automatic repeat request (ARQ) receiver is provided. The ARQ receiver comprises a receiver configured to receive a plurality of ARQ blocks. The ARQ receiver further comprises a processor configured to generate a feedback message configured to provide status of the plurality of ARQ blocks. The feedback message comprises an acknowledgement sequence number (ACK_SN) field and a flag field. The processor is configured to provide a first value in the flag field if the feedback message contains only the ACK_SN field and the flag field. The processor is also configured to provide a second value in the flag field if the feedback message contains one or more fields in addition to the ACK_SN field and the flag field. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182950 | SENSOR-BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS USING COMPRESSIVE SAMPLING - Methods, devices and systems for sensor-based wireless communication systems using compressive sampling are provided. In one embodiment, the method for sampling signals comprises receiving, over a wireless channel, a user equipment transmission based on an S-sparse combination of a set of vectors; down converting and discretizing the received transmission to create a discretized signal; correlating the discretized signal with a set of sense waveforms to create a set of samples, wherein a total number of samples in the set is equal to a total number of sense waveforms in the set, wherein the set of sense waveforms does not match the set of vectors, and wherein the total number of sense waveforms in the set of sense waveforms is fewer than a total number of vectors in the set of vectors; and transmitting at least one sample of the set of samples to a remote central processor. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182951 | Apparatus and method for rate control in broadband wireless communication system - A method for rate control in a wireless communication system includes feedback information indicating whether a packet is received, is received from a receiver. A channel state value measured by the receiver is received. It is determined whether the same feedback information is received from the receiver successively more than a predetermined frequency. A target error rate is controlled if the same feedback information is received successively more than the predetermined frequency. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182952 | RRC message transmission method in wireless communication system - A Radio Resource Control (RRC) message transmission method and apparatus for a wireless communication system operating in TTI and acknowledge mode is configured to reduce interruption time by minimizing retransmission times of RRC message. The message transmission method for a wireless communication system includes generating, at a transmitter, a message; transmitting the message two or more times consecutively from the transmitter to a receiver; analyzing, at a receiver, the message transmitted by the transmitter; transmitting an acknowledge message or a negative-acknowledge from the receiver to the transmitter depending on the analysis result; and terminating, at the transmitter, a retransmission process of the message upon receipt of the acknowledgement message. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182953 | METHOD FOR INFORMING HOME SUBSCRIBER SERVER OF STORING PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY ADDRESS INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a method for informing Home Subscriber Server (HSS) of Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN GW) address information to be stored in the HSS in the System Architecture Evolution. The method comprises: the Mobility Management Node acquires that the PDN GW address information is not stored in the HSS, or the Mobility Management Node selects another PDN GW; the Mobility Management Node informs the HSS of the PDN GW address information to store. According to the present invention, the HSS can obtain the PDN GW address information directly from the MME without the help of the 3GPP AAA Server and the roaming interface between the PDN GW and the HSS. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182954 | Private Base Station and Radio Network Entity - There is provided a private base station including a processing unit configured to scan data of overlaying macro cells of a public radio network in order to report the location of the private base station; a communication unit configured to request a connectivity service from the public radio network by using identification data of the private base station and the location of the private base station; and a communication unit configured to receive grant to utilize the re-quested connectivity service once the identification data has been verified by the public radio network. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182955 | Matching Used and Allowed Radio Access Technology Types - The present invention provides methods, an application node ( | 07-22-2010 |
20100182956 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR SETTING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS OF THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A device capability attribute regarding a setting on communication parameters, and provision attribute information indicative of whether or not a communication terminal is in a state that it can provide communication parameters to another communication terminal are stored in advance. The communication terminal, where the device capability attribute has at least a provision capability of the communication parameters, is selected as a provision device. In a case where there are plural communication terminals where the device capability attribute has a communication parameter provision capability, a communication terminal where the device capability attribute has the communication parameter provision capability only is preferentially selected. In a case where the device capability attributes of respective communication terminals are equal, a communication terminal storing the provision attribute information indicative of the state that it can provide the communication parameters is selected as a provision device. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182957 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR MANAGING REVERSE LINK COMMUNICATION - An apparatus, system, and method efficiently manage reverse link resources by allowing a mobile station to select between transmitting a payload at a standard power level and transmitting a smaller payload at a boosted power level. The mobile station, therefore, can autonomously select a QoS (Quality of Service) level for physical layer packets. Based on reverse link transmission information received from a base station, the mobile station derives a reverse link transmission guideline defining the power levels and associated payloads for at least a standard service and boosted service. The mobile station selects a reverse link transmission power level from a plurality of power levels including at least a standard reverse link transmission power level associated with a standard payload size and a boosted reverse link transmission power level associated with a boosted payload size where the standard payload size is greater than the boosted payload size. | 07-22-2010 |
20100189029 | DISTRIBUTED IP ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT PROTOCOL FOR A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK WITH COLLISION DETECTION - An apparatus and method for a multi-tier wireless home mesh network is described. The method may include formation of a wireless home networking environment comprising a collection of nodes that operate as a decentralized, wireless network with multiple sub-networks or tiers that are responsible for different functions within the network. Each node of the multi-tier network is configured to forward data to other nodes and is assigned to a particular tier based on the node's performance capabilities. The method may include the automatic establishment of a unique Internet protocol (IP) address within a multi-hop wireless home mesh network with the ability to do automatic collision detection and correction. Once established as either a mobile node or a stationary node of the wireless home mesh network, a new node (the home electronics device) may wirelessly communicate with one or more existing nodes of the wireless home mesh network. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189030 | MULTIPLE ANTENNA MODE CONTROL METHOD BASED ON STATION - The present invention provides a multiple antenna mode control method based on Station, including the steps: step 1 the Station reports a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by the Station to the Access Point; step 2, the Access Point returns a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by the Access Point to the Station, or returns directly a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by both the Station and the Access Point to the Station; and step 3, a multiple antenna mode is chosen from a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by both the Station and the Access Point for communicating between the Station and the Access Point. Thereby, a best transmission quality can be achieved during data transmission, and furthermore, the retransmission times and the error frame rate are reduced, and the network throughput is decreased. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189031 | Wireless Communication Apparatus - In a wireless communication device, a switching section ( | 07-29-2010 |
20100189032 | FREQUENCY HOPPING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for performing frequency hopping in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, frequency hopping may be performed based on both cell identity (ID) and system time information. In one design, a user equipment (UE) may determine a cell ID of a cell and may obtain system time information for the cell. The UE may determine resources to use for transmission with frequency hopping based on the cell ID and the system time information. In one design, the UE may initialize a PN generator in each radio frame with an initial value determined based on the cell ID and a system frame number (SFN) for the radio frame. The UE may determine the resources to use for transmission based on a hopping function, a mirroring function, and a PN sequence from the PN generator. The UE may send a transmission on the resources to the cell. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189033 | Method and System for Operating a Communication Network - A network node, a coordination node, a management node, a communication system and method for operating a communication system having a first type of communication network and a second type of communication network, wherein a request message identifying a network node in the first type of communication network is sent to the coordination node in the first type of communication network by the management node in the second type of communication network, the network node is removed from the first type of communication network by the coordination node, the removed network node is included in the second type of communication network by the management node, and a data interchange is performed between the management node and the network node inserted in the second type of communication network. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189034 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND SERVER APPARATUS - Each of wireless communication terminals UA | 07-29-2010 |
20100189035 | Service Areas In CS Domain Services - The invention provides a method of enabling the service level networks (e.g. CSoLTE or IMS CN) to provide location-dependent services based on a circuit switched domain from a service level network to a mobile station communicating with a cell in a radio access network that utilises a packet switched domain. The method includes providing cell location information relating to the location of the cell; determining a Service Area Identifier based on the cell location information; and providing the Service Area Identifier to the service level network. The Service Area Identifier is then used for different location based services and applications in the service level network nodes. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189036 | METHOD FOR NEGOTIATING AND TRANSMITTING LENGTH INFORMATION OF LOCATION UPDATE TIME - A method for negotiating and transmitting location update time length information, applied in a Wimax network architecture, comprises: a mobile station initiating a request for initially accessing a network, a request for entering an idle mode, or a request for a location update to a services access service network gateway; when receiving said request, said services access service network gateway negotiating an idle mode timer length, and notifying said mobile station of the negotiated idle mode timer length. The present invention can implement the negotiation and transmission of location update time length information between access service network gateways as well as between an access service network gateway and a mobile station in a Wimax network so that the location update time lengths of the network side and the mobile station maintain consistent. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189037 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MOBILE ROUTER IN PROXY MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL VERSION 6 DOMAIN - A system for managing mobile routers connected to a PMIP6 (proxy mobile interne protocol version 6) domain is provided with a plurality of MAGs (mobility access gateways) to which the mobile routers are to be connected, an LMA (local mobility anchor), connected to the plurality of MAGs, for managing location information of the mobile routers and packet forwarding information of the mobile routers, and a profile server in which profile information of the mobile routers is registered. Further, the plurality of MAGs and the LMA set up forwarding information of a home prefix of a mobile router that is connected to the PMIP6 domain and a mobile network prefix managed by the connected mobile router, based on the profile information of the mobile routers registered in the profile server. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189038 | CIRCUIT AND METHOD FOR MAPPING DATA SYMBOLS AND REFERENCE SIGNALS FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT SYSTEMS - A method of mapping data in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes forming a first frame ( | 07-29-2010 |
20100189039 | DERIVATION OF LTE SYSTEM INFORMATION RETRANSMISSION REDUNDANCY VERSIONS - A method and apparatus for transmitting system information in an e Node B includes a processor configured to map system information to a plurality of subframes, determine that at least one of the plurality of subframes includes non-SI information, and assign a redundancy version to all of the plurality of subframes except the at least one subframe including non-SI information such that the redundancy versions are assigned in a particular pattern and the at least one subframe including non-SI information does not effect the particular pattern. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189040 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION VIA UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL IN OFDMA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus is capable of transmitting information via an uplink control channel in an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) communication system. Uplink control information is encoded to obtain a predetermined bit string. A signal sequence corresponding to the predetermined bit string is generated. The signal sequence is cyclic-shifted according to a predetermined rule. The cyclic-shifted signal sequence is controlled according to a subframe length. Therefore, reception performance deterioration of an uplink control channel allocated to an irregular subframe can be minimized. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189041 | UTILIZATION OF THE INTERNET PROTOCOL TO FACILITATE COMMUNICATION INVOLVING MOBILE DEVICES - A data communication system capable of forwarding IP-addressed data to devices as such devices move among networks having different IP addresses is dislcosed herein. The system includes first and second networks containing first and second pluralities of nodes. At least one of the first plurality of nodes is adapted to receive data transmissions from an external IP-based network. Upon joining the first network, this device is assigned an IP address which remains with it irrespective of whether it moves beyond the range of the first network. When this device roams into the vicinity of the second network, data addressed to the device which is received at the first network is forwarded via at least one node of the second network to the roaming device. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189042 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER COMPENSATION - Aspects of compensating for transmitter output power may comprise sampling an on-chip transmitter circuit temperature at various time instants and determining a feedback temperature compensation value. At least one digital-to-analog converter may be adjusted by utilizing the feedback temperature compensation value, which may correspond to the sampled temperature. The digital-to-analog converter may be an I-component digital-to-analog converter and/or a Q-component digital-to-analog converter. At least a portion of the on-chip transmitter circuit may be characterized to determine power output dependence of the on-chip transmitter circuit on temperature variation of the on-chip transmitter circuit. Based on this characterization, a feedback temperature compensation value that may correspond to the sampled temperature may be used to adjust the digital-to-analog converter. The feedback temperature compensation value may be, for example, from a lookup table or an algorithm. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189043 | Seamless Wireless Mobility - Seamless wireless mobility is described. In one embodiment, a mobility manager can query a subscriber catalog for a current registration status of handset. The mobility manager can then use the registration status to send a first signal to the handset over either a wireless network or an Internet protocol-based network. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189044 | MULTI-NODE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF REQUESTING, REPORTING AND COLLECTING DESTINATION-NODE-BASED MEASUREMENTS AND ROUTE-BASED MEASUREMENTS - A multi-node communication system and method used to request, report and collect destination-node-based measurements and route-based measurements is disclosed. The communication system may be a mesh network including a plurality of mesh points (MPs). In one embodiment, a destination-node-based measurement request is sent to one or more destination nodes via destination-unicast, destination-multicast, or destination-broadcast, using routes specified via next-hop-unicast, next-hop-multicast, or next-hop-broadcast addressing. In another embodiment, a source node sends a measurement request message to a final destination node, whereby each node along the route individually sends a measurement report message to the source node. Alternatively, measurement results of each node are combined and appended to the measurement request message, and a measurement report message including the combined measurement results is sent to the source node. | 07-29-2010 |
20100195566 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AND PROCESSING A POSITIONING REFERENCE SIGNAL BASED ON IDENTIFIER ASSOCIATED WITH A BASE STATION - A base station communicates a positioning reference signal (PRS) to wireless communication devices over a downlink in a wireless communication system by encoding a PRS into a first set of transmission resources, encoding other information into a second set of transmission resources, multiplexing the two sets of resources into a subframe such that the first set of resources is multiplexed into at least a portion of a first set of orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (OFDM) symbols based on an identifier associated with the base station and the second set of resources is multiplexed into a second set of OFDM symbols, and transmitting the subframe. Upon receiving the subframe, a wireless device determines which set of transmission resources contains the PRS based on the identifier associated with the base station that transmitted the subframe and processes the set of resources containing the PRS to estimate timing (e.g., time of arrival) information. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195567 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA PACKETS - Method for transmission of data packets by a first station, the packets being intended for a destination node belonging to a network comprising a second station, said packets being transmitted by said first station to said destination node via said second station. In order to simplify the transmission, the method comprises:
| 08-05-2010 |
20100195568 | MOBILE RADIO TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile radio terminal UE performs starting PNG, detecting a best cell, and starting generation of Long Code and receives various types of messages from a 1×RTT CS Access on the basis of System Information supplied from an E-UTRAN. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195569 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a communication terminal device that reduces, in a network using a power line, the percentage of bands consumed for transmission of control packets in the bands consumed for all the communication, so as to ensure transmission of data intended to be transmitted. A PLC terminal F | 08-05-2010 |
20100195570 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER - A communication control system connects a call using a local service number valid within a local service area within which a user equipment is positioned, and forwards data via an internet protocol network, including a local number converter and a session controller group. The local number converter is located in each local service area, in response to a query specifying a local service number, accesses a database of correspondence between a local service number valid within the local service area and a global routable number, and determines a global routable number corresponding to the specified local service number. The session controller group accepts a call request including the local service number from the user equipment, queries the local number converter in the local service area to convert the local service number into a global routable number, and routes the internet protocol network using the global routable number. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195571 | Wireless Communication Device and Retransmission Judging Method - It is an object to provide a wireless communication device configured to reduce a communication resource necessary for retransmission, so that data transmission efficiency can be improved. In this device, when an NACK signal is input from an error detecting unit ( | 08-05-2010 |
20100195572 | DISTRIBUTED PRIORITIZED CONTENTION FOR SPECTRUM SHARING - Techniques for use in contending for a portion of a television channel spectrum are disclosed. In some instances, a back-off value is used to decide whether a contender's contention number will be transmitted when the contention channel is free, and the back-off value is determined based on the contention number. In some instances, a contender monitors the contention channel and withdraws from contention if it detects from the contention channel that a higher priority contender is in contention. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195573 | SELECTIVELY INCLUDING ALLOWED CSG LIST IN PAGE MESSAGE - Problems caused by interaction between paging optimization and synchronizing CSG information are mitigated by setting a network indication indicating, for example, that a subscriber is no longer a member of a CSG, but the network has not yet received confirmation that an access terminal associated with the subscriber has been informed of this. A timer-based scheme may be employed for removing a CSG ID from the subscriber information for a subscriber once it is determined that the subscriber is no longer a member of the CSG. In addition, a temporary member of a CSG may determine whether it is still a member of a CSG upon expiration of a CSG timer. Also, the frequency with which an access terminal registers may be changed based on various criteria. Furthermore, an allowed CSG list may be selectively included in a page message depending on the destination of the page message. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195574 | Other Protocol Message Routing Over a Wireless Network of Metering Devices - Methods and apparatus are provided for routing DNP (or other) protocol messages over a network of an advanced metering infrastructure (AMI) system that employs a different communications protocol. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195575 | TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION OVER A DATA CHANNEL OR OVER A CONTROL CHANNEL - Methods and apparatus are described for a User Equipment (UE) to concurrently transmit Uplink Control Information (UCI) and data information to a Node B. The Node B can configure the UE whether to transmit UCI together with data information in a Physical Uplink Shared CHannel (PUSCH) or, separate from data information, in a Physical Uplink Control CHannel (PUCCH). The UE may also determine whether to transmit UCI together with data information in the PUSCH or, separate from data information, in the PUCCH based on criteria involving either a ratio of PUSCH resources for UCI transmission over the total PUSCH resources, a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) for the data information, an absolute power difference between PUCCH and PUSCH transmissions, whether the PUSCH transmission uses frequency hopping, or whether spatial multiplexing is used for the data transmission. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195576 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MESSAGE PUSH SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and a system for providing a push service in a wireless communication system adopting an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) scheme or an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) scheme are provided. The method includes when receiving a message from another network or another messaging server, transmitting, at a messaging server, a push service request message to a push server; when a Mobile Station (MS) of which the push service is requested using the push service request message of the messaging server, operates in an awake mode, transmitting, at the push server, a first push deliver message comprising a message designated for the MS, to a Base Station (BS), and when receiving the first push deliver message, transmitting, at the BS, a second push deliver message based on a Media Access Control (MAC) layer comprising the message designated for the MS, to the MS. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195577 | METHOD OF GENERATING AN INDEX VALUE - A method of generating an index value associated with a primary synchronization code within a communication signal includes splitting a sampled communication signal into even and odd samples. The even and odd samples are correlated with a primary synchronization code of the communication signal and complex values of the even and odd samples are generated. Signal strength values for the even and odd samples are approximated and the approximate signal strength values within a frame of the communication signal are accumulated. A highest accumulated signal strength value is assigned as an index value. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195578 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING VOIP DATA PACKETS IN GROUP COMMUNICATIONS AMONG WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION DEVICES - In group wireless telecommunication, such as push-to-talk (PTT) calls, a voice communication is broadcast through Internet protocol data packets to other member devices of the PTT group. At least one communication server receives a single communication stream from a communicating wireless device, such as a PTT call, and creates a group communication to all wireless telecommunication devices of the designated group with the broadcast of Internet protocol data packets containing the voice data of the communication stream to one or more wireless telecommunication devices of the receiving group that can receive and handle the packets. Other wireless network infrastructure can be used to assist the communication server in generation and broadcast of the Internet protocol data packets to the receiving wireless telecommunication devices. | 08-05-2010 |
20100202344 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, DATA COMMUNICATION DEVICE, MOBILE BASE STATION, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - Disclosed is a technique which reduces the packet loss and the band consumption for data transfer when a mobile terminal conducts the handover between a fixed base station and a mobile base station for group movement. According to this technique, when an MH (mobile terminal) | 08-12-2010 |
20100202345 | WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK BRIDGING ADAPTOR - A network bridging adaptor and method for enabling nodes to access a multi-tier wireless home mesh network is described. The network bridging adaptor is adapted to operate in an ad hoc network having access restricted to only wireless nodes that are provided from a common entity. According to one embodiment of the invention, the network bridging adaptor comprises a housing; one or more ports positioned along a side of the housing to receive data from an electronic device; a first radio logic unit contained within the housing and adapted to transmit and receive messages in order to detect a presence of the ad hoc network; and a second radio logic unit contained within the housing and adapted to operate as an access point by establishing communications with nodes that are provided by an entity different than the common entity. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202346 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Provided in some embodiments is a method of wireless inter-vehicle communication. The method includes storing a message packet in a shared memory location of a first communication device. The shared memory location is wirelessly accessible by one or more other communication devices. The method also includes assessing, at a second communication device, whether or not the message packet stored in the shared memory location of the first communication device is intended to be received at the second communication device and assessing, at the second communication device, whether or not to accept the message packet from the shared memory location of the first communication device. Further, the method includes receiving at least a portion of the message packet at the second communication device if it is determined that the message packet should be accepted from the shared memory location of the first communication device. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202347 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACKNOWLEDGING SUCCESSFUL RECEPTION OF A DATA TRANSMISSION FOR MULTI-ACCESS COMPATIBILITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of wireless communication for acknowledging receipt of a packet is disclosed that includes determining that the packet has been received successfully; and, generating an acknowledgment (ACK) message upon the determination that the packet is received successfully, wherein the ACK message includes a unique identifier associated with a receiver used to receive the packet. An apparatus for performing the method is also disclosed herein. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202348 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PACKET ACKNOWLEDGMENT - Systems and methods for packet acknowledgement are disclosed. In one embodiment, codewords are redundantly used in order to decrease the total number of bits required for feeding back acknowledgment information or in order to increase the Euclidean space between codewords. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202349 | METHOD FOR USING AN EXTENDING SUPER-FRAME TO TRANSFER DATA IN A SHORT DISTANCE WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - A method for using an extending super-frame to transfer data in a short distance wireless personal network is provided. Firstly, the super-frame segments, which are in an active period of a network coordinator are continuously copied to a whole inactive period of a current device, and an extending super-frame segments are obtained. Then, information is broadcasted to all general devices. The general device with a quality of service requirement send a service guarantee time slot bandwidth application to the network coordinator, and indicates in the application that the extending super-frame is required. When the application is granted, the super-frame segments, which are in the active period of the current device are copied to the whole inactive period, and the extending super-frame segments are obtained. Then, data is transmitted to the network coordinator with the extending super-frame segments. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202350 | PROXY MOBILE IP SYSTEM, ACCESS GATEWAY AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE ORDER OF REGISTRATION NOTIFICATION MESSAGES USED THEREFOR - A proxy mobile IP system comprises: a mobile terminal including a time management/notification unit; the time management/notification unit alerting time information, managed by the mobile terminal itself, to an access gateway at the time of access authentication in proxy mobile IP (Internet Protocol) communication; the access gateway; the access gateway including a time information acquisition/management unit alerting the time information, received from the mobile terminal, to a mobility anchor, at the time of performing proxy mobile IP registration in the proxy mobile IP communication, as the time information received from the mobile terminal is carried on a registration notification message; and the mobility anchor; the mobility anchor including a time information acquisition/management unit alerting the registration notification message including the time information to a proxy mobile IP registration unit responsible for performing proxy mobile IP registration. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202351 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING ADDRESSING BY USER STATIC IP ADDRESS IN LTE SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, system and relevant apparatuses for supporting addressing by a user static Internet Protocol (IP) address in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. The method includes: when a user attaches to a network, downloading, by a Home Subscriber Server (HSS), user subscription data including a user static IP address and information of a corresponding Access Point Name (APN) to a Mobility Management Entity (MME); sending, by the MME, the user static IP address and the information of the corresponding APN to a Serving Gateway (S-GW) through a Create Default Bearer Request message; sending, by the S-GW, the user static IP address, the information of the corresponding APN and an address of an S-GW serving the user to a Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW) corresponding to the APN which corresponds to the user static IP address; and establishing, by the P-GW, a default bearer according to the user static IP address, the information of the corresponding APN and the address of the S-GW serving the user. The present invention solves the packet data addressing problem of the user static IP address in a simple manner. The procedure is simple and convenient for use and has better applicability. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202352 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTE-OPTIMIZED COMMUNICATION FOR A MOBILE NODE NESTED IN A MOBILE NETWORK - In a future scenario where end to end route optimization protocol such as the Access Router Option protocol and Hierarchical Mobility Management protocol are implemented in the visiting mobile nodes, mobile routers and the mobility anchor points, routing sub-optimality may occur when visiting mobile node that is nested is trying to communicate with the correspondent node. To overcome such routing sub-optimality arising in this heterogeneous protocol scenario, this invention presents a primary mechanism where the registration at the mobility anchor point is such that the local care-of address associated with visiting mobile node and local care-of addresses associated with upstream mobile routers of the visiting mobile node can be obtained using a single access router option protocol type of recursive tracing mechanism. Such tracing is achieved by embedding a different type of address in the access router option based binding registration at the mobility anchor point. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202353 | WIRELESS ACCESS MODULE WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA - An integrated wireless antenna/transceiver module that has particular application for use on a vehicle. The module includes a plurality of antenna radiating elements integrated on a circuit board where a separate radiating element is typically provided for each wireless application desirable for the particular vehicle. The module further includes a separate transceiver integrated on the circuit board where each transceiver is electrically coupled to a particular radiating element. Each of the transceivers is also electrically coupled to a local area network hub that receives signals from the transceiver, where the hub multiplexes the signals onto a digital interface to be sent to the particular application in the vehicle. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202354 | Frame Structure for Medium Access in Body Area Networks (BAN) - A system and method for providing a variety of medium access and power management methods are disclosed. A defined frame structure allows a hub and a node to use said methods for secured or unsecured communications with each other. Contended access is available during a random access phase. The node uses an alternate doubling of a backoff counter to reduce interference and resolve collisions with other nodes attempting to communicate with the hub in the random access phase. Non-contended access is also available, and the hub may schedule reoccurring or one-time allocation intervals for the node. The hub and the node may also establish polled and posted allocation intervals on an as needed basis. The node manages power usage by being at active mode at times during the beacon period when the node is expected to transmit or receive frames. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202355 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING ROUTE OPTIMIZATION IN 6LoWPAN BASED MANEMO ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided for registering a mobile router in an Internet Protocol version 6 over Low power Wireless Personal Area Network (6LoWPAN) network. The mobile router detects movement into a wireless network through the reception of a beacon message, and sends a Router Solicitation (RS) message requesting registration in the wireless network to a gateway. The gateway acquires an address of the mobile router from the RS message, stores the acquired address, assigns a new address to be used in the wireless network to the mobile router, and sends a Router Advertisement (RA) message with assigned address information and gateway address information, to the mobile router. The mobile router acquires the assigned address information and the gateway address information from the RA message. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202356 | BACKFIRE DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM (DAS) WITH DELAYED TRANSPORT - A distributed antenna system (DAS) is provided, comprising a host unit and a plurality of remote placed to define a common coverage area. Each of the plurality of remote units is communicatively coupled to the host unit, points at least partially towards the common coverage area, and simulcasts data from the host unit. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202357 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF A MOBILE NODE IN A MULTI-HOP IP NETWORK AND A NETWORK SYSTEM THEREFOR - A method is provided for supporting mobility of a Mobile Node (MN) in a multi-hop Internet Protocol (IP) network, in which an MN that has moved from a source Personal Area Network (PAN) to a target PAN, sends a Router Solicitation (RS) message with an option for requesting its profile to a gateway of the target PAN, and receives a Router Advertisement (RA) message from the gateway in response to the RS message. The RA message includes a home prefix of the MN as the requested profile. The method supports mobility of MNs, enables unicast communication, and facilitates efficient use of the network. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202358 | PROCESSING APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF - The invention discloses an apparatus and transmission method thereof. The apparatus combines a wired network transmission unit with a wireless network transmission unit. A control unit distributes and controls the packet to achieve the purpose of link aggregation and fail-over function. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202359 | RADAR DETECTION AND DYNAMIC FREQUENCY SELECTION - A wireless network device includes a correlation module, an automatic gain control module, and a control module. The correlation module correlates a predetermined portion of a radio frequency (RF) signal and generates a correlation signal based thereon. The automatic gain control (AGC) module generates a gain control signal based on said RF signal. The control module selectively determines whether said RF signal is a radar signal based on said correlation signal and said gain control signal. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202360 | MAC MULTIPLEXING AND TFC SELECTION FOR ENHANCED UPLINK - A method and a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) for multiplexing data for an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) is disclosed. The WTRU receives at least one serving grant and at least one non-scheduled grant, wherein the at least one serving grant is a grant for scheduled data transmission and the at least one non-scheduled grant is a grant for non-scheduled data transmission. The WTRU determines supported enhanced dedicated channel transport format combinations (E-TFCs). The WTRU determines an enhanced uplink medium access control (MAC-e) protocol data unit (PDU) payload amount. For each logical channel, in order of priority, the WTRU multiplexes data from MAC-d flows associated with each logical channel into a MAC-e PDU, wherein each MAC-d flow is configured as either a scheduled MAC-d flow or a non-scheduled MAC-d flow, wherein on a condition that the MAC-e PDU payload amount is not equal to a supported E-TFC size, reducing the amount of data from a scheduled MAC-d flow to multiplex into the MAC-e PDU, based on a next smaller E-TFC size relative to the MAC-e PDU payload amount. The WTRU selects an E-TFC for transmission of the MAC-e PDU, wherein the selected E-TFC is a smallest E-TFC that supports the MAC-e PDU. The WTRU transmit the MAC-e PDU over the E-DCH processed in accordance with the selected E-TFC. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202361 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING IP MOBILITY WITH HIGH SPEED ACCESS AND NETWORK INTELLIGENCE IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - An architecture for network layer mobility support, using always on broadband high speed access and a network-based mobility manager, termed as a network server or gateway is disclosed. The present invention obviates the need of MIP for IP mobility. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202362 | Network-Initiated Session Recovery - Techniques for network-initiated session recovery are described. A relationship is maintained between two identifiers both associated with a session between a first device and an access terminal in a wireless network. The first identifier is associated with the first device, and the second identifier is associated with a second device in communication with the first device. After a breach of the session, communications associated with the session are preserved based on the relationship between the first and second identifiers. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202363 | METHOD OF SCHEDULING FOR ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL (E-DCH) - A method of scheduling for an Enhanced Dedicated Channel (E-DCH) in a user equipment (UE) is disclosed. More specifically, a method of receiving an information indicating an allowable transmit power range from a base station and updating a group of Transport Format Combinations (TFCs) allowed by the base station by selecting the TFCs that can be used within the allowable transmit power range. Furthermore, the method comprises transmitting the E-DCH by at least one TFC selected from the group of TFCs. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202364 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATIONS OF DATA FROM MULTIPLE BASE STATIONS TO A MOBILE STATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method provides for controlling communications from multiple base stations to a mobile station in a communication system. A mobile station transmitter transmits from the mobile station channel quality indicator data of a first base station. The data is covered with Walsh code assigned to the first base station. A base station receiver receives the transmission of the channel quality indicator data of the first base station. The mobile station transmitter punctures the transmission of the channel quality indicator data of the first base station with null channel quality indicator data, and covers the null channel quality data with Walsh code assigned to a second base station of the multiple base stations to indicate a desire to switch a source of transmission of traffic data from the first base station to the second base station. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202365 | MODULAR COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD - A modular device for providing wireless services and a network of such devices. | 08-12-2010 |
20100208648 | LOCATION-BASED IMS SERVER SELECTION - A user location is estimated based on an IP address assigned to the user's device/equipment during registration for multimedia application services that are provided over the IP multimedia subsystems (IMS) network. The latitude and longitude information of the user location is obtained based on the IP address assigned to the user device/equipment. Such information is used to determine an appropriate server(s) for establishing an IP multimedia service session. In some embodiments, a closely located IMS server(s) is selected for proxying, interrogating, providing or delivering IP multimedia services. In this manner, each user device/equipment communicates with IMS servers that are located close to the user and thus, the geographically distributed load among the IMS gateway servers can be achieved. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208649 | METHOD FOR POSITIONING USER EQUIPMENT ACCESSING MULTIPLE MOBILE NETWORKS - The invention provides a method for positioning a user equipment. First, a plurality of wireless links between the user equipment and a plurality of mobile networks are established. A plurality of first location information sets describing a location of the user equipment are then obtained from the mobile networks through the wireless links. The first location information sets are then converted to a plurality of second location information sets with a predetermined format. The second location information sets are then combined to estimate a third location information set describing the location of the user equipment. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208650 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING OR RECEIVING DATA UNIT USING HEADER FIELD EXISTENCE INDICATOR - A method for transmitting and receiving data between a base station and a terminal in an E-UMTS (Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) or an LTE (Long Term Evolution) system is disclosed. A header overhead of data transmitted from a wireless end can be minimized by adding a header field existence indicator indicating presence or absence of a header in an upper data block to a data block of a lower layer, to thus effectively use radio resources. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208651 | Out of Sequence Delivery of Status Reports on a Separate Channel - In a method and a system Radio Link Control (RLC) Status Reports in a cellular radio system employing Acknowledge Mode (AM) RLC are not delivered in sequence, thereby obtaining an increased peak throughput. Thus, even when an in-sequence delivery exists, for example if the system uses HARQ transmission, it is not used for data related to the RLC status report. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208652 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, TELECOMMUNICATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention provides a wireless communication method. The method comprises launching an application which requires a network service for a data transmission and generating a connection request. Then, a wireless communication function is turned on to implement a channel scan according to the connection request. When at least an access point of at least a wireless network is available, a network connection with the wireless network is established for the data transmission through the access point. When there is no available access point, the wireless communication function is terminated and a connection control mechanism is initiated. The connection control mechanism comprises forbidding re-turning on the wireless communication function within a connection suspension time and re-turning on the wireless communication function when the connection request is received after the connection suspension time. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208653 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ACCESS GATEWAY HAVING PLURAL USER PLANE AGWs - In an access gateway (AGW) comprising a C-AGW for handling control messages and a plurality of U-AGWs for handling data packets, when a tunnel setup request is issued from one of base stations to hand over a mobile station, the C-AGW selects a new U-AGW being in the lowest load status out of the U-AGWs, estimates the load status of the new U-AGW in the case of changing the tunnel endpoint for the mobile station from a current U-AGW to the new U-AGW. The C-AGW designates the new U-AGW as the tunnel endpoint for the mobile station if the estimated load status satisfies a predetermined condition, but designates the current U-AGW as the tunnel endpoint if the estimated load status does not satisfy the predetermined condition. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208655 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING PACKET FOR REDUCING HEADER OVERHEAD - A method of transmitting a packet for reducing header overhead is disclosed. That is, a detailed method of transmitting a packet including a compressed header by omitting a header including the same information as a header of a packet which is previously transmitted or omitting information overlapping with the header of the packet which is previously transmitted is provided. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208656 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, PILOT CHANNEL GENERATION METHOD, SYNCHRONIZATION CHANNEL GENERATION METHOD, AND ANTENNA SELECTION METHOD - The present invention is to provide base station apparatuses and mobile station apparatuses suitable for a configuration of a distributed wireless communications system, configure the distributed wireless communications system, and provide a pilot channel generation method and synchronization generation method suitable for the distributed wireless communications system. Provided are a control signal generating section | 08-19-2010 |
20100208657 | PROXY MOBILE IP SYSTEM, ACCESS GATEWAY AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE ORDER OF REGISTRATION NOTIFICATION MESSAGES USED THEREFOR - In a proxy mobile IP system, a mobility anchor comprises: a proxy mobile IP registration unit effectuating proxy mobile IP registration in proxy mobile IP (Internet Protocol) communication by one or more registration notification messages from an access gateway; and a last registration time recording/management unit effectuating recording and management of time of last registration by the registration notification message. The mobility anchor, on receipt of a new registration notification message, determines, in case a receipt time difference (or a receipt time interval) between the time of receipt of the new registration notification message and a registration notification message recorded last time in the last registration time recording/management unit is within a pre-set period of time, and the access gateway has changed by switching, possibility of order reversal of the new registration notification message and the registration notification message recorded last time. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208658 | Method, Radio System, and Base Station - There is provided a method including providing a local breakout service to an Internet protocol gateway while retaining user access control and a remote Internet protocol gateway of a packet core network of a radio network for a mobile terminal; providing information on neighboring macro cells in which the local breakout service can continue, the macro cells belonging to a network using another tracking area than that of the serving cell of the mobile terminal; executing a handover process of the mobile terminal from a source base station in the serving cell of the mobile terminal to a target base station in a neighboring macro cell; and providing session continuation of the mobile terminal local breakout service traffic in the neighboring macro cell by controlling user plane tunneling between the target base station and the local packet switched network from which an Internet protocol address for the local breakout service was assigned. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208659 | LOCAL BREAK OUT IN CASE OF WIMAX ROAMING - Architecture, in particular a home agent being placed in a visited connectivity service network in order to separate a data traffic path to a home connectivity service network and a data traffic path to the internet in order to minimise a number of hops and delay times. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208660 | METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED DRX OPERATION FOR EASE OF SCHEDULING AND EFFECTIVE POWER SAVING - A method for improving performance of a discontinuous reception (DRX) mode is provided. The method includes assigning a plurality of DRX Start Offsets to a plurality of mobile stations served by a base station. By assigning a plurality of DRX Start Offsets to mobile stations, the mobile stations will not wake up at the same time, thus preventing excessive signaling overhead as well as improving scheduling and improving the power saved by a mobile station while executing DRX. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208661 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR A MOBILE STATION CELL SYSTEM - This invention describes a method, apparatus and system for a mobile-station cell system, MSCell for short. An MSCell operates in a wireless network, more specifically in a cell of the wireless network. It interacts with the cell's BS the way a regular MS(s) do. The MSCell consists of an MSCell base and multiple MSCell terminals. The MSCell base simulates the regular MS(s) to set up one or more radio connections with the BS and simultaneously serves its own MSCell terminals. In other words, the MSCell behaves simultaneously as regular MS(s) to the BS and as the base to all its MSCell terminals. The MSCell terminals gain services from the wireless network through the MSCell base. The MSCell can also operate independently of any BS to be a self-contained standalone system where its MSCell terminals can call each other. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208662 | Systems and Methods for Creating, Managing and Communicating Users and Applications on Spontaneous Area Networks - A Spontaneous Area Network (SPAN) is formed by mobile and fixed nodes using wireless transmission links between nodes, usually in a nearby geographical area. Applications allow users to create, join, leave, and manage SPANs and groups in a SPAN. Automatic procedures allow nodes to join other SPANs. Transmission power of the wireless network interface is dynamic, varying depending on battery level, type of information to transmit, state and topology of the network. A delay tolerant object layer abstraction creates, modifies, deletes, publishes, and handles Delay Tolerant Distributed Objects (DTDOs). A Patient Transport Protocol (PTP) ensures a reliable transport of information through the network while avoiding congestion conditions. An aggressive and explosive network protocol (AGENET) has routing and forwarding capacities and uses datagrams to establish communication between different nodes of the SPAN. Cooperation and diversity are exploited to react to node mobility that causes frequent changes in network topology and disconnections. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208663 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND NETWORK NODE - The invention discloses a technique to efficiently realize a routing based on preference of a mobile terminal in case the mobile terminal is connected to a mobility management domain of network base different from a home network domain. According to this technique, a mobile terminal (mobile node; MN) | 08-19-2010 |
20100214975 | FAST DATA-LINK CONNECTION METHOD FOR SAVING CONNECTION TIME IN CDMA 2000 NETWORK - Disclosed herein is a fast data call connection method capable of reducing a connection time and increasing the probability of connection success in a CDMA 2000 network. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214976 | OPERATOR CLOUD FOR MOBILE INTERNET SERVICES - An “operator cloud” is interposed between mobile subscribers and the Internet. The operator cloud aggregates operators so as to comprise a single node. The operator cloud can provide services through such aggregation, including the tracking of subscriber usage. The operator cloud services can produce accurate metrics concerning mobile Web traffic while safeguarding subscriber personal information. Thus, the metrics and associated information can be valuable to publishers in the mobile Web. In this way, the operator cloud services can be monetized to produce a revenue stream. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214977 | FEMTO-CELL MANAGEMENT BASED ON COMMUNICATION NETWORK BACKHAUL CAPABILITY - A method and apparatus for managing femto-cells based on communication network backhaul capability includes a step | 08-26-2010 |
20100214978 | System and Method for Reducing Overhead in a Wireless Network - A method for reducing overhead includes concatenating a plurality of packets into a single jumbo packet. Each packet of the plurality of packets comprises a header. The method also includes identifying a base header from among the plurality of headers. The method further includes determining a plurality of hamming distances that are each associated with a respective packet of the plurality of packets other than the base header and are indicative of a number of differences between the respective header and another header of the plurality of headers. The method further includes determining a plurality of encoded values that are each associated with a respective packet of the plurality of packets other than the base header and determined based on a difference between the respective header and at least one other header. The method additionally includes generating, and transmitting via a wireless connection, a jumbo header comprising the base header, the plurality of hamming distances, and the plurality of encoded values. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214979 | GATEWAY ADVERTISEMENT IN A WIRELESS MESH - A computing environment containing a mesh network that is adapted to provide a reliable transport mechanism over which services may be delivered. Nodes of the mesh can automatically select routable addresses without conflicts, which allows nodes of the mesh to be accessed, even as the mesh changes through the addition or deletion of nodes. Also, nodes communicate with a protocol that supports service advertisements. These advertisements can identify mesh nodes that supply services, such as file or print servers, for which devices that have not yet connected to the network may be searching. Advertisements can also identify services to be used by nodes in the network, allowing, for example, a node to select a gateway providing a reliable connection to an external network. The mesh network can be used as a transport for communication using protocols, such as TCP/IP, that generally exhibit poor performance when using unreliable transports. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214980 | ERRORLESS AND HITLESS VARIABLE DATA RATE COMMUNICATIONS - A variable data rate wireless transmitter configured to receive input of data from a plurality of input channels and transmit at least some of the data over a variable data rate wireless point-to-point communication link, wherein portions of the data are associated with priorities, and the wireless transmitter is configured to change transmission of at least some of the portions of the data, based, at least partly, on the priorities associated with the portions of the data, and on a data rate configured for transmitting the portions of the data over the variable data rate wireless communication link. A variable data rate wireless receiver configured to receive data over a variable data rate wireless point-to-point communication link, including a delay compensation buffer configured to maintain a substantially fixed delay between input of the data into a wireless transmitter transmitting the data and output of the data from the delay compensation buffer, by maintaining a suitable output rate of the data from the delay compensation buffer. Related apparatus and methods are also described. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214981 | TRANSMISSION DEVICE, TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND TRANSMISSION PROGRAM - A transmission device ( | 08-26-2010 |
20100214982 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, NETWORK NODE, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A technology is disclosed with which a mobile terminal moving in a PMIP domain receives various types of prefixes and selects a type of an address to be configured, and route optimization is performed without adding a signaling load on the PMIP domain. According to the technique, when connecting with a home domain, a MN ( | 08-26-2010 |
20100214983 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COLLISION CODING DEVICES, SYSTEMS, & METHODS - Wireless communication collision coding devices, systems, and methods are provided. According to some embodiments, wireless communication systems can generally comprise a plurality of wireless access points and wireless clients. The wireless access points can be controlled by a network controller. The wireless access points can be configured to enable a plurality of wireless clients to wirelessly connect to the wireless access points. The wireless access points can be configured to encode data packets destined for the wireless clients with a collision coding scheme so that wireless data packets concurrently transmitted from at least two wireless access points colliding in air can be decoded at the wireless clients with the collision coding scheme so that data packets are not affected by collisions with another data packet. Other aspects, embodiments, and features, are also claimed and described. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214984 | METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS PROCESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for a random access process in a mobile communication system. According to the exemplary embodiments, in the case where a mobile terminal requests a random access to a network, when the network is not able to promptly allocate a resource for the random access to the mobile terminal due to an insufficient resource, the mobile terminal is maintained in a standby state without repeatedly requesting the random access to the network. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the uplink signal interference caused by the repeated random access request, reduce the possibility of communication contention between the mobile terminals for the access to the mobile communication system, and reduce the power consumption of the mobile terminal. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214985 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL ON BANDWIDTH REQUEST CHANNEL AT MOBILE STATION, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS USING THE SAME, METHOD FOR PERFORMING BANDWIDTH REQUEST PROCEDURE AT BASE STATION, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A method for transmitting a signal on a bandwidth request channel, a mobile station apparatus using the same, a method for performing a bandwidth request procedure in relation to a bandwidth request from a mobile station, and a base station apparatus using the same are disclosed. A mobile station transmits a bandwidth request preamble and a bandwidth request message together to a base station to request a bandwidth. A region of the bandwidth request message may be configured as null tones. In response to the bandwidth request of the mobile station, the base station transmits a BR ACK A-MAP IE indicating reception of the bandwidth request to the mobile station in response to the bandwidth request. The base station transmits an uplink grant to the mobile station by a BR ACK A-MAP IE or a CDMA allocation A-MAP IE. Upon receipt of the uplink grant from the base station, the mobile station transmits uplink scheduled data to the base station. However, if the base station fails to decode the quick access message or the region of the quick access message is filled with null tones, the base station transmits a grant for a bandwidth request header to the mobile station, instead of an uplink grant. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214986 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING CONNECTION PAYLOAD INFORMATION IN MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT - A method and system for encoding connection payload information of a plurality of connection payloads in a Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (PDU) are provided. The method includes encoding connection payload information of a first connection payload from the plurality of connection payloads in a first header of the MAC PDU. The method also includes encoding connection payload information of each of a second set of connection payloads from the plurality of connection payloads in a second header of the MAC PDU, wherein the second set of connection payloads includes the plurality of connection payloads excluding the first connection payload. Further, the method sends the MAC PDU with encoded information. Thereafter, the method also includes a procedure to decode connection payload information of a plurality of connection payloads from a Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (PDU). | 08-26-2010 |
20100214987 | TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL METHOD AND INFORMATION MEMORY MEDIUM - There is provided a terminal device or the like which can prevent a user from fall in trouble with an unknown third person when the user executes a network game or the like over a computer communication network. As terminal devices establish a connection in an ad-hoc mode, individual unique identification information thereof are exchanged and a communication for a game is carried out, the terminal devices saves the unique identification information of the communication counterparty. When the terminal devices establish a connection in an infrastructure mode, introduction requests each specifying the saved unique identification information are transmitted to a server device, the server device transmits introduction responses each informing an address of the terminal device to the terminal devices which have transmitted an introduction request specifying the unique identification information of the communication counterparty, and the terminal devices carry out a communication for the game. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214988 | METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY SETTING THE NUMBER OF HS-SCCH CHANNELS TO BE USED ON A CELL - Embodiments of the invention relate to methods for dynamically setting the number N of HS-SCCH channels to be used as signalling channels of the HS-DSCH traffic channel in a cell served by a Node B, which comprises, at predefined periods of time:
| 08-26-2010 |
20100214989 | Dynamic Selection By A Mobile Station Of Its Home Agent Using Its Preferred Roaming List (PRL) - Methods and systems are provided for dynamic selection by a mobile station of its home agent using its preferred roaming list (PRL). A mobile station maintains a PRL comprising an association between (i) a first set of data identifying a first wireless wide area network (WWAN) and (ii) a first identifier of a first home agent. The mobile station detects a broadcast of the first set of data by the first WWAN. Responsive to detecting the broadcast of the first set of data by the first WWAN, the mobile station connects to the first WWAN. Responsive to connecting to the first WWAN, the mobile station uses the first identifier to register with the first home agent. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214990 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a communication system in which a communication is performed between a base station and one or more terminals by using one or more communication channels, a control element unit is defined by T OFDM symbols and F subcarriers. A second combination of T and F is determined for a first combination of T and F such that the number of modulation symbols (one OFDM symbol×one subcarrier) included in the control element unit defined by the second combination is closest to the number of modulation symbols included in the control element unit defined by the first combination. | 08-26-2010 |
20100220647 | METHOD OF OPERATING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND SYSTEM,A COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND A SYSTEM INCLUDING THE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication system, such as UMTS, comprises a scheduler ( | 09-02-2010 |
20100220648 | Method And Device For Controlling Data Flows At Communication Terminals - The present invention involves traffic management in a communication system ( | 09-02-2010 |
20100220649 | PATH CONNECTION - If a packet received from a communication terminal is larger in size than a maximum transmission unit used between a wireless base station and a gateway apparatus and also if it cannot be fragmented, an echo request packet of a size not larger than the maximum transmission unit is generated and transmitted to the gateway apparatus. Thereafter, if an echo reply packet corresponding to the echo request packet is received from the gateway apparatus, an ICMP data packet including the value of the maximum transmission unit is generated and transmitted to the communication terminal. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220650 | COEXISTENCE OF DATA STREAMS - A system for transmitting data from two or more data streams on a communication channel between two or more devices. Roughly described, the data from each data stream is transmitted on the channel in the form of data packets, at least one data packet of one or more of the data streams being transmitted in between the data packets of the other data streams. The system is characterised in that the system comprises means to generate or process data packets for at least one of the data streams for transmission, the generated or processed data packets having a size below a certain value. Collisions between data packets of different data streams are thereby reduced. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220651 | Method and apparatus for broadcasting and receiving system information in OFDMA systems - A method for broadcasting system information via a broadcast channel (BCH) in an OFDMA system is provided. The BCH comprises one or more two-dimensional resource blocks. A plurality of pilot tones and a plurality of data tones are positioned within each resource block. The system information is mapped onto the plurality of data tones. In one embodiment, the plurality of pilot tones are located in configurable positions such that pilot tones of the same resource blocks transmitted by different base stations in the OFDMA system are interlaced to reduce pilot-to-pilot collision. In another embodiment, data tones that are located in pilot positions of other adjacent cells are nullified to reduce data-to-pilot collision. In one novel aspect, the property of interlaced pilot patterns and tone nullification is leveraged to estimate interference second-order statistics, which facilitates receiver implementation and improves receiver performance. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220652 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus to be used for a mobile communication system capable of providing communications using plural frequency carriers is disclosed. The base station apparatus includes a frequency carrier selection unit selecting one of a first frequency carrier and a second frequency carrier as a frequency carrier to be used for the communications based on at least one of a service type of the communications and a congestion degree of the communications, the first frequency carrier being used for communications based on allocation in which radio resources are dynamically allocated, the second frequency carrier being used for communications based on allocation in which the radio resources are allocated at every predetermined period. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220653 | MULTI-PATH ROUTING METHOD IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A multi-path routing method is provided a multi-path routing method for selecting appropriate multiple paths when information sensed from a source node is transmitted to a sink node in wireless sensor networks. The source node for transmitting the sensed information first transmits a Hello message to the sink node to identify the existence and position of the sink node. The sink node receives the Hello message and then re-transmits the Hello message with respect to all the received Hello messages. Respective middle nodes accumulate distances between the middle nodes while the Hello message is transmitted to the source node through a reverse path of the Hello message, and all the middle nodes maintain a real distance from the sink node. The source node receiving all the Hello messages can rout a plurality of appropriate paths through Hop-by-hop to the sink node by providing respective weights to an energy remaining amount, an appropriate transmission radius and a real distance from the sink node. Accordingly, priorities can be provided to lifetime of the source node, average energy consumption and the shortest path by adjusting the respective weights when routing the plurality of paths. In addition, appropriate paths can be routed considering the transmission success rate of a path, and a load balancing effect can be obtained using path cost. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220654 | VIDEO TRANSMISSION OVER SDMA - Certain aspects of the present disclosure generally relate to communication, and more specifically, to techniques for transmitting data in parallel, such as spatial division multiple access (SDMA) techniques. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220655 | METHOD AND A MOBILE PHONE TERMINAL ENABLING TO MERGE TELEPHONY SERVICES OVER HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method to merge telephony services over a circuit switched network ( | 09-02-2010 |
20100220656 | SERVICE REDUNDANCY IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - This disclosure relates to an apparatus and method for providing service redundancy among devices in a communication network. The devices can be, for example, a mobility management entity (MME), a serving gateway (SGW), a PDN gateway (P-GW), a call session control function (CSCF), a SGSN, a GGSN, or any other device implemented on a chassis. The redundancy includes a geographic redundancy where the devices are remotely located from one another to prevent a service outage. The devices can provide redundancy to multiple other devices, such that one device serves as a backup to multiple other devices. The information used to provide service to a mobile node such as user equipment can be backed up on the redundancy device and the device can advertise the same routing information to the network so the network is unaware of any change. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220657 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT RELATING TO COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method and arrangements in a communications system enabled for transmission of several data streams to or from different receivers ( | 09-02-2010 |
20100220658 | ORDERED AND DUPLICATE-FREE DELIVERY OF WIRELESS DATA FRAMES - Techniques for ordered and duplicate-free delivery of wireless data frames are provided. A source address, a destination address, and a message sequence number are acquired from a wireless data frame. The message sequence number is compared against a last-received message sequence number, and a last-delivered message sequence number. The destination address is also compared to a current address. In response to the compares, a decision is made to forward the wireless data frame to the destination address, discard the wireless frame as a duplicate wireless data frame, queue the wireless data frame, or release the wireless data frame to a next protocol layer. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220659 | Method, Device and System for Differentiating Operators in One Network - Methods, devices and apparatus are provided for differentiating operators in a wireless communications network. Information about the frequency occupied by the air interface resource of a service is received, and corresponding operator information is provided from the configured mapping relation between frequency information and operator information according to the received information about the frequency occupied by the air interface resource of the service. A Base Station Controller (BSC)/Packet Control Function (PCF), and a device and system for differentiating operators in a network for performing the above functions is also provided. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220660 | WIRELESS DATAGRAM TRANSACTION PROTOCOL SYSTEM - Systems are provided for sequencing, delivery acknowledgement, and throttling of data packets over a network layer, such as UDP and SMS. To support devices with limited battery resources, the invention incorporates asymmetric retry logic and/or acknowledgements with overlapping ranges, to minimize the transmissions required for the device. The sender of a data-bearing frame does not need to wait for a frame to be acknowledged before sending the next, such that many frames can be “in flight” at once. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220661 | PACKET CONCATENATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless network includes a transmitting device and a plurality of receiving devices. The transmitting device is configured to receive a plurality of data packets, including a first data packet and a second data packet, prepare a preamble, prepare a signal field for each of the plurality of data packets, including a first signal field based on the first data packet and a second signal field based on the second data packet, and broadcast the preamble, the first signal field, the first data packet, the second signal field, and the second data packet as a concatenated packet. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220662 | BEARER PROCESSING METHOD AND MOBILE MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A bearer processing method and a network device are provided. The method includes: determining whether a corresponding user equipment (UE) exists, if user subscription data recorded in a mobile management device is changed; and initiating a bearer modification or deletion process by the mobile management device according to the determining result with regard to whether the UE exists. The mobile management device includes: a storage unit, adapted to record user subscription data; a determination unit, adapted to determine whether a corresponding UE exists, after the user subscription data recorded in the storage unit is changed; and a trigger unit, adapted to initiate a bearer modification or deletion process according to the determining result with respect to whether the UE exists. | 09-02-2010 |
20100226308 | node- arbitrated media access control protocol for ad hoc broadcast networks carrying ephemeral information - Techniques for organizing nodes of an ad hoc broadcast network into sets and employing the sets to arbitrate access by the nodes to a shared communications medium. Each node has a copy of a signal library and the node indicates its membership in the set by associating itself with a signal in the library. In one application, the signals are ranked, the set is a queue, and the node's position in the queue is indicated by the rank of the signal associated with the node. Each node has rules for selecting the next signal. The hidden terminal problem is solved by having each node broadcast its tone and all of the other tones it has heard. The techniques are particularly useful for the broadcast of ephemeral information by the nodes. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226309 | BEACONING MODE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to facilitating apparatus interaction. In at least one example embodiment of the present invention, apparatuses may comprise both triggered communication activities and automated communication activities. Triggered communication activities may correspond to, for example, user and/or application instigated actions in a wireless apparatus. Automated activities may occur without any requirement for user intervention, and further, without any notification to the user that an action has occurred. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226310 | INTERFACE SELECTION IN A MOVING NETWORK - A method of establishing a traffic route for a mobile network node attached to a mobile router, where the mobile router has a plurality of upstream interfaces available to it. The method comprises sending from the mobile router to the mobile node, identifiers of the interfaces and of their properties, the identifiers mapping to IPv6 traffic classes or IPv4 type of service. In the case of IPv6, the identifiers may be contained within router advertisement messages broadcast by the mobile router. At the mobile network node, an interface is chosen based upon the identified interface properties. The traffic class or type of service field of at least certain outgoing packets includes the identifier of the chosen interface. At the mobile router, packets are routed across the interface corresponding to the identifier contained in the traffic class or type of service fields, typically using rules created upon detection of a traffic class value in a packet header. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226311 | EFFICIENT PAGING OPERATION FOR FEMTOCELL DEPLOYMENT - Efficient paging operation for femtocell deployment is generally presented. In this regard, a paging controller is introduced including a wired backbone interface to communicate with a plurality of macro base stations and a plurality of femto base stations, and control logic, the control logic to generate a page for a mobile station, and the control logic to transmit the page over the wired backbone interface to a select subset of all base stations, wherein the select subset of all base stations includes base stations that the mobile station is authorized to access. Other embodiments are also described and claimed. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226312 | Apparatus and method for transmitting coexistence beacon protocol packet in cognitive radio wireless communication system - An apparatus and a method for transmitting a Coexistence Beacon Protocol (CBP) packet in a Cognitive Radio (CR) wireless communication system are provided. In the method for transmitting CBP packet in a transmitter that operates in a scalable Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) mode, a priority is given to each channel of one or more channels based at least partly upon channel use statuses of two or more neighbor Wireless Regional Area Networks (WRANs). Whether a Quality of Service (QoS) for CBP packet transmission for each channel is met is sequentially determined according to the respective priority. A channel having a highest priority is selected from the one or more channels meeting the QoS as a channel for CBP packet transmission. A CBP packet is transmitted via the selected channel. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226313 | Proxy Binding Management in Mobile IP Networks - There is provided a method of managing binding information, on behalf of a Mobile Node, at a Home Agent in a Mobile IP network. A record of Correspondent Binding Recept ion and Correspondent Binding Registration is maintained at the Home Agent. The Correspondent Binding Reception record comprises a Home Address of the Mobile Node and a Care-of-Address of a Correspondent Node, and the Correspondent Binding Reception record comprises an IP address of the Correspondent Node and security credentials authenticating that the Home Agent can act on behalf of the Mobile Node. In the event that the Home Agent receives a Binding Update message on behalf of the Mobile Node, the Care of address of the Correspondent Node in the Correspondent Binding Reception record is updated. In the event that the Home Agent sends a Binding Update message on behalf of the Mobile Node, it is sent using the security credentials stored in the Correspondent Binding Reception record. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226314 | METHOD FOR USER EQUIPMENT PERFORMING DIRECT COMMUNICATIONS VIA HNB ACCESS SYSTEMS - A method for User Equipments performing direct communication via HNB access system, the method comprising steps of: Initiating, by a first UE having a unique identifier GII in a closed subscriber group (CSG), a call request to a second UE in the same CSG to inform the HNB access system of the unique identifier GII of the second UE; establishing, by the HNB access system, communication bearer via the HNB access system for the first and the second UEs if the two UEs are under the same HNB access system. With the method for UEs performing direct communication via HNB access system of the present invention, transmission efficiency can be improved upon application of HNB, and network resources can also be saved. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226315 | SCALABLE HEADER EXTENSION - Systems and methods for extending header fields are disclosed. The header field may be extended without changing the current size of the header. Reserve bits may be used to indicate the use of an extended header and the extended header may be store in a variety of locations within the frame, including the frame payload or pad bits. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226316 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PRIORITIZATION OF RETRANSMISSION OF PROTOCOL DATA UNITS TO ASSIST RADIO-LINK-CONTROL RETRANSMISSION - A medium access control (MAC) architecture reduces transmission latency for data block retransmissions. A plurality of data blocks are received and temporarily stored in a first memory (e.g., queue, buffer). The plurality of data blocks are then transmitted. A determination is made as to whether each of the transmitted data blocks was received successfully or needs to be retransmitted because the data block was not received successfully. Each of the transmitted data blocks that needs to be retransmitted is marked and temporarily stored in a second memory having a higher priority than the first memory. The marked data blocks are retransmitted before data blocks stored in the first memory location. | 09-09-2010 |
20100232352 | PRECODING TECHNIQUE FOR MULTIUSER MIMO BASED ON EIGENMODE SELECTION AND MMSE - The present disclosure proposes a method for preceding of a transmission signal at an access point of a multiuser system based on eigenmode selection and minimum mean square error (MMSE) processing. The most reliable eigenmodes of every multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) channel in the system can be selected at each user terminal and corresponding eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be fed back to the access point. The linear MMSE precoding (beamforming) applied at the access point based on the selected eigenmodes may provide an improved transmission capacity performance compare to techniques from the prior art. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232353 | NEW ARCHITECTURAL MODEL FOR LTE (LONG TERM EVOLUTION) EPC (EVOLVED PACKET CORE) DEPLOYMENT - A system and methodology that provides a new a deployment model for a seamless migration to LTE (long term evolution)/EPC (Evolved packet core) is disclosed. In addition, an intelligent edge gateway (IEG) that can support future distributed architecture and a converged network for service providers is provided. Specifically, the model supports existing data services (e.g. UMTS) and the delivery of LTE services does not affect the existing data services. Moreover, a distributed architecture is employed, such that, local traffic is optimally routed at the edge and backhaul is minimized. The system can also provide support for enhanced Femto cell 3GPP access to a home network. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232354 | NODE QUERY IN AD HOC HOME MESH NETWORK - An embodiment is a technique to collect network and device information. A request for local information is responded to. The request is sent by a remote node in an ad hoc home mesh network. A first node listed in a local route table is queried for node information of the first node. Querying is expanded to a second node in the ad hoc home mesh network using the node information. The second node is a neighbor of the first node. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232355 | ASYMMETRIC BROADBAND DATA NETWORK - An asymmetric wireless network ( | 09-16-2010 |
20100232356 | LAYER TWO SEGMENTATION TECHNIQUES FOR HIGH DATA RATE TRANSMISSIONS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided to enable a reduction in processing power while handling high data rates. An apparatus includes a processing system configured to service a MAC PDU. Here, the MAC PDU includes a MAC header and at least one MAC SDU. The MAC header includes a transmission sequence number (TSN) having a length greater than 6 bits. Further, the processing system is configured to read the MAC header and to transport the MAC PDU in accordance with the MAC header between a MAC and a PHY utilizing one or more transport blocks over one or more transport channels. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232357 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system which communicates data through communication between a first communication device and a second communication device having common network identification information, wherein a first communication device includes a first communication unit which communicates data to and from other communication device having the common network identification information, a first attachment unit to which a storage device is detachably attached, an issuing unit which obtains network identification information of other communication device and issues network identification information not coinciding with the network identification information of this communication device, and a writing unit which writes the network identification information issued by the issuing unit to the storage device attached to the first attachment unit. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232358 | FRAME BASED, ON-DEMAND SPECTRUM CONTENTION PROTOCOL VECTOR MESSAGING - A frame-based, on-demand spectrum contention protocol provides a fine grain allocation of a shared spectrum resource in a cognitive radio network. Each frame of a plurality of synchronized superframes is allocated independently based on contention criteria. As demands for increased spectrum resources are realized, targeted requests are issued to base stations currently occupying targeted data frames via vector messages. Such messages, carried by a beacon period within each data frame, identify to the current occupier of a data frame which data frames have been targeted for contention. A contention resolution occurs at the base station currently occupying the targeted spectrum resource and the results of which are communicated via other vector messages. After a predetermined period of time a vector message announces the release of the data allowing the contention winner to occupy the contended spectrum resource. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232359 | FRAME BASED, ON-DEMAND SPECTRUM CONTENTION DATA FRAME ACQUISITION - A frame-based, on-demand spectrum contention protocol provides a fine grain allocation of a shared spectrum resource in a cognitive radio network. Each frame of a plurality of synchronized superframes is allocated independently based on contention criteria. As demands for increased spectrum resources are realized, targeted requests are issued to base stations currently occupying targeted data frames. A contention resolution occurs at the base station currently occupying the targeted spectrum resource. The winner of the base station is announced and after a predetermined period of time, the contention winner occupies the contended spectrum resource. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232360 | FRAME-BASED, ON-DEMAND SPECTRUM CONTENTION SOURCE RESOLUTION - A frame-based, on-demand spectrum contention protocol provides a fine grain allocation of a shared spectrum resource in a cognitive radio network. Each frame of a plurality of synchronized superframes is allocated independently based on contention criteria. As demands for increased spectrum resources are realized targeted requests are issued to base stations currently occupying targeted data frames. A contention resolution occurs at the base station currently occupying the targeted spectrum resource. The winner of the base station is announced and after a predetermined period of time the contention winner occupies the contended spectrum resource. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232361 | FRAME BASED, ON-DEMAND SPECTRUM CONTENTION DESTINATION RESOLUTION - A frame-based, on-demand spectrum contention protocol provides a fine grain allocation of a shared spectrum resource in a cognitive radio network. Each frame of a plurality of synchronized superframes is allocated independently based on contention criteria. As demands for increased spectrum resources are realized targeted requests are issued to base stations currently occupying targeted data frames. A contention resolution occurs at the base station currently occupying the targeted spectrum resource. The winner of the base station is announced and after a predetermined period of time the contention winner occupies the contended spectrum resource. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232362 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING POSITION RELATED DATA - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose a method for providing positioning assistance data and other supporting information for positioning methods in a wireless communication system utilizing the long term evolution (LTE) standard. The positioning assistance data may be sent in a packet to a radio network node. The radio network node may broadcast the packet to one or more user equipments. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232363 | METHOD OF HANDLING PACKET ERROR IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of handling packet error for a communication device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of: obtaining a payload from a received protocol data unit (PDU) and verifying the payload according to a predetermined payload format. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232364 | METHOD OF HANDLING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of handling a random access procedure for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method of handling the random access procedure comprises the steps of applying a backoff parameter value associated with the random access procedure according to an operation mode of the mobile device and selecting a backoff time according to a uniform distribution between 0 and the backoff parameter value. | 09-16-2010 |
20100238857 | CARRIER TIMING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Synchronization of uplink carriers for transmission is disclosed in accordance with different aspects. The uplink carriers that transmit information are configured such that at least one of the uplink carriers is an anchor carrier. When a plurality of carriers are thus configured for the uplink, they are synchronized such that they bear a predetermined phase relationship with each other. The predetermined phase relationship between the plurality of carriers depends on the transmit timing of the anchor carrier or a combination of transmit timings of the anchor carrier and one or more non-anchor carriers comprised within the uplink carriers. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238858 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS OF TERMINAL TO HOME (E)NODEB - A method for controlling access of a terminal to a Home (e)NodeB by a network entity, the terminal accessed to the Home (e)NodeB operated in a closed access mode or a hybrid access mode by using a specific closed subscriber group (CSG) ID, the method comprises: recognizing by the network entity, that an allowed access timer of the specific CSG ID with respect to the Home (e)NodeB has expired; transmitting an Update Bearer Request message to other network entity in order to change a membership of the expired CSG ID; transmitting a Bearer Modify Request message to the Home (e)NodeB in order to change a membership of the expired CSG ID; and updating a bearer with said other network entity, and a bearer with the Home (e)NodeB. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238859 | REDUCING ACCESS CHANNEL DELAY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for reducing access channel delay in a wireless communication system includes a step | 09-23-2010 |
20100238860 | NETWORK SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - In a network system provided with a plurality of wireless networks each having an access point and one or more wireless communication devices wirelessly connectable to the access point, and a predetermined network adapted to connect the access points of the plurality of wireless networks to each other, a predetermined wireless communication device issues inquiry request of the information to the other wireless communication devices, and then receives the inquiry response from each of the other wireless communication devices receiving the inquiry request, thereby receiving the BSSID. The BSSID thus received is accumulated in the first information table. By searching for the BSSID identical to the BSSID of the wireless network to which the predetermined wireless communication device belongs among the BSSID stored in the information table, the predetermined wireless communication device can detect the wireless communication device connected to the predetermined wireless network as the adjacent projector. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238861 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A radio communication terminal includes a link-usage level calculating section that calculates usage level of a radio link, and a data reception continuation/suspension determining section that determines continuation of data reception or suspension of data reception according to the level of usage calculated by the link-usage level calculating section. The link-usage level calculating section calculates a current usage level indicating a level of usage of the radio link associated with current data reception in the radio communication terminal. The data reception continuation/suspension determining section determines continuation of data reception when the current usage level is equal to or higher than a reference level of usage being a threshold and determines suspension of data reception when the current usage level is lower than the reference level of usage. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238862 | REAL-TIME NETWORK NODE LOCATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A real-time location system and method for a wireless network includes, in one embodiment: (a) obtaining received signal-strength indicator measurements between stationary routers and mobile devices; (b) determining the relative angles of mobile devices from stationary routers using directional antenna systems; and (c) using signal strength and angle information to calculate the location of mobile devices. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238863 | Method and Apparatus for Power Headroom Reporting - A method for performing Power Headroom Reporting (PHR) in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless communication system supports Carrier Aggregation (CA), which enables the UE to perform transmission through multiple carriers. The method includes steps of configuring a plurality of uplink carriers, and generating at least one PHR values, each corresponding to one of the plurality of uplink carriers. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238864 | MOBILE TERMINAL, NETWORK NODE, AND PACKET TRANSFER MANAGEMENT NODE - A technique is disclosed, according to which a race condition between a PMIPv6 binding by a PBU message of PMIPv6 and a CMIPv6 binding by a BU message of CMIPv6 can be resolved. MN | 09-23-2010 |
20100238865 | Data Burst Communication Techniques For Mobile Communication Devices Operating In Packet Data Sessions - In one illustrative example, a mobile communication device receives and decodes a plurality of packet data bursts over a packet data channel of a serving cell. While receiving and decoding the packet data bursts, the mobile communication device also receives and decodes a plurality of broadcast data bursts over a broadcast control channel of a neighbor cell. When a time conflict exists between receiving and decoding at least one of the packet data bursts and receiving and decoding at least one of the broadcast data bursts, the mobile communication device receives and decodes the at least one packet data burst instead of the at least one broadcast data burst when no imminent call drop between the mobile communication device and the serving cell is identified. On the other hand, the mobile communication device receives and decodes the at least one broadcast data burst instead of the at least one packet data burst when an imminent call drop between the mobile communication device and the serving cell is identified. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238866 | Method for Routing Ad-Hoc Signals - An ad-hoc network is a typically a dynamic collection of nodes capable of communicating therebetween without the aid of pre-established infrastructure. Ad-hoc networks differ from traditional networks in that the topology of interconnections between nodes is inherently dynamic and not fixed. Generally, the routing protocols belong to two groups: proactive and reactive. Proactive protocols attempt to maintain correct and up-to-date routing information at every node. Reactive protocols, in turn, collect necessary routing information only if a pair of nodes are to establish a communication. In accordance with embodiments of the invention a reactive ad-hoc network protocol is disclosed that uses controlled flooding to broadcast packets of information within the ad-hoc network. Furthermore, the ad-hoc network protocol does not maintain up-to-date routing information at every node in an ad-hoc network and does not utilize specific control messages to assure that packets within the ad-hoc network follow optimal paths. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238867 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR REGISTERING IN UNIVERSAL SERVICE INTERFACE SYSTEM - A method, an apparatus, and a system for registering in a USI system are disclosed herein. The method includes: an H-USI system receives a USI registration request message that carries an identifier of a terminal from a V-USI system; and the H-USI system interacts with an H-AAA server according to the USI registration request message to perform USI system registration for the terminal. An apparatus for registering in a USI system is disclosed herein. The apparatus includes a receiving module and a registering module. Through the method and the system disclosed herein, the terminal can be registered in the USI system successfully, and the USI service can be implemented smoothly. | 09-23-2010 |
20100246479 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING AND MAINTAINING A HIGH SPEED RADIO ACCESS BEARER FOR FOREGROUND APPLICATION - A method and system for establishing and maintaining a high speed tunnel between a mobile device and a network, the method determining whether a foreground application on the mobile device requires the high speed tunnel, and if the foreground application requires the high speed tunnel, closing all tunnels from the mobile device to a network except the tunnel for the foreground application. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246480 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A ROUTE BASED ON LINK METRICS INCORPORATING CHANNEL BANDWIDTH, SPATIAL STREAMS AND/OR GUARD INTERVAL IN A MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MIMO) NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for determining a link metric for a communication link along a path between a source node to a destination node is provided. A node can generate a link metric (LM) for the communication link between the particular node and next-hop node towards the destination node in the path based on a plurality of variables. The node can determine the LM for the communication link based on a plurality of variables including: bandwidth on the communication link, a number of spatial streams used to transmit over the communication link, and a guard interval used used to transmit over the communication link. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246481 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A NUMBER OF SPATIAL STREAMS TO BE USED FOR TRANSMISSION BASED ON PROBING OF CHANNELS - Systems and methods are provided for determining a number of spatial channels to use to transmit a data packet from a source node to a destination node. This determination can be made based on a Probability of Channel non-Correlation (PCC) function that is generated and updated by the source node based on feedback from the destination node. The PCC function indicates a probability of whether a plurality of spatial channels are non-correlated. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246482 | Method and System for Dynamic Adjustment of Power and Frequencies in a Femtocell Network - Aspects of a method and system for dynamic adjustment of power, antenna direction and frequencies in a femtocell network are provided. In this regard, a communication system may comprise a plurality of femtocells, one or more base stations, and a femtocell management entity that coordinates operation of the plurality of femtocells. One or more parameters may be communicated from one of the plurality of femtocells and/or one or more base stations to the femtocell management entity. The femtocell management entity may be enabled to utilize the one or more parameters to determine configuration information for one of the plurality of femtocells and/or for one or more remaining ones of the plurality of femtocells. One of the plurality of femtocells may be enabled to receive the determined configuration information from the femtocell management entity. One of the plurality of femtocells may be configured utilizing the received determined configuration information. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246483 | Method and System for Communication Between a Plurality of Femtocells to Mitigate Interference Between the Femtocells - Aspects of a method and system for communication between a plurality of femtocells to mitigate interference between the femtocells are provided. In this regard, a first of a plurality of femtocells in a network may receive interference information from one or more other femtocells, one or more base stations, and/or one or more communication devices in the network. The first femtocell may determine configuration information for the first femtocell and one or more other femtocells in the network based on the communicated interference information. The first femtocell and the other femtocells in the network may be configured based on the determined configuration information. The interference between the plurality of femtocells may be mitigated based on configuring the first femtocell and the other femtocells in the network based on the determined configuration information. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246484 | COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND LOCATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS - The present invention provides a new technique, according to which a mobile router can fulfill functions as a dynamic home agent, in a system where a plurality of mobile routers are in operation, under the management of a service provider belonging to the home agent. According to this technique, the home agent verifies the legitimacy of the mobile router when it receives a Query message and a binding update message requesting permission to fulfill functions as dynamic home agent. Then, after confirming that no other mobile router is currently present, which is fulfilling the functions as dynamic home agent in a set of a plurality of mobile routers, to which this mobile router belongs, it allows said mobile router to operate as the dynamic home agent. Then, even when other mobile router requests the permission to fulfill functions as the dynamic home agent, the request is rejected, and said other mobile router utilizes the mobile router, which is fulfilling functions of the dynamic home agent, as its home agent. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246485 | INFRASTRUCTURE FOR LOCATION DISCOVERY - Techniques are generally described for determining locations of a plurality of communication devices in a network. In some examples, methods for creating a location discovery infrastructure (LDI) for estimating locations of one or more of a plurality of communication nodes may comprise one or more of determining a plurality of locations in the terrain to place a corresponding plurality of beacon nodes, determining a plurality of beacon node groups for the placed beacon nodes, and determining a schedule for the placed beacon nodes to be active. Additional variants and embodiments are also disclosed. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246486 | INTELLIGENT HOTSPOT CONNECTION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Intelligent hotspot connection systems and methods are provided. The intelligent hotspot connection system includes a storage unit, a wireless connection unit, and a processing unit. The storage unit includes a hotspot information database recording at least one property for each of a plurality of hotspots, and a hotspot preference database recording at least one preference inclination, respectively defining a reference weight for the property and signal strength. The processing unit detects the signal strength of the respective hotspots via the wireless connection unit. The processing unit obtains the preference inclination, and calculates a score for the respective hotspots according to the preference inclination, the property and signal strength of the respective hotspots. The processing unit selects and automatically connects to the hotspot with the highest score via the wireless connection unit. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246487 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD THEREOF - In a radio base station apparatus that connects a radio control device and plural radio devices to each other through plural links and transmits and receives data by using a frame, a synchronization unit calculates a difference between a first reference counter and a second reference counter from first and second transmission values and first and second reception values and corrects a count value of the second reference counter based on the difference so as to make the count value of the second reference counter coincide with a count value of the first reference counter. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246488 | WWAN TO ETHERNET CONVERTER AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREOF - A wireless wide area network (WWAN) to Ethernet converter comprises a subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, for accessing data stored in a SIM card; a radio frequency (RF) circuit, for receiving in the WWAM an RF signal associated with the data stored in the SIM card and for converting between the RF signal and a baseband signal; a digital signal processor (DSP), coupled to the RF circuit, for processing the baseband signal; and an Ethernet control device, coupled to the DSP, for converting between the processed baseband signal and an Ethernet signal. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246489 | MIMO OFDMA WITH ANTENNA SELECTION AND SUBBAND HANDOFF - An access node wirelessly coupled to a plurality of access terminals, having a subband scheduler, a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplex elements, and a plurality of antennas. The subband scheduler receives precoded data, and schedules transmission of a preamble signal and a plurality of data streams. The plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplex elements converts the preamble signal and the plurality of data streams into a corresponding preamble tone and a corresponding plurality of data tones. The preamble tone indicates a mapping of the plurality of data tones to one or more of the plurality of access terminals. The plurality of antennas transmits the corresponding preamble tone and the corresponding plurality of data tones in timely fashion for receipt by the plurality of access terminals. The corresponding preamble tone and the corresponding data tones are transmitted over subbands of a code division multiple access (CDMA)-based carrier frequency. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246490 | METHOD FOR HANDLING CORRUPTED SIGNALS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method is provided for combining corrupted messages received in a wireless network which comprises the following steps: (a) receiving a first message transmitted from one of a plurality of communication devices, wherein that first message is received as a corrupted message; (b) following the receipt of the first corrupted message, receiving a first plurality of messages, wherein the first plurality of messages are received as corrupted messages and wherein at least one of the first plurality of corrupted messages is essentially identical to the first message; (c) combining the first corrupted message with the at least one of the first plurality of corrupted messages that is essentially identical to that first message to form a combined message; and (d) deriving from the combined message information which was transmitted within the first message. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246491 | OPERATING METHOD AND APPARATUS ACCORDING TO DATA DUPLICATE RETRANSMISSION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An operating method and an apparatus according to data duplicate retransmission in a mobile communication system are provided. A method of a User Equipment (UE) according to data duplicate retransmission in a mobile communication system includes storing a Media Access Control Protocol Data Unit (MAC PDU) received from an Evolved Node B (ENB) in a soft buffer, decoding the MAC PDU, determining whether the decoding is a first successful decoding of data of the corresponding soft buffer, and determining whether to forward the decoded MAC PDU to an upper layer according to the determination result. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246492 | Method for Routing in a Mobile Ad Hoc Network - The present disclosure relates to mobile ad hoc networks that may include aircraft. Embodiments of the present invention provide a method of providing routing data for use in routing a message from a source node to available destination nodes through a mobile ad hoc network. A list of neighbour nodes corresponding to nodes within range for direct communication is obtained. For each neighbour node, a cost function is used to calculate the lowest costs of sending messages to respective available destination nodes; and routing data is generated based on these lowest costs. A message may be routed to the most suitable neighbour node by reference to the routing data. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246493 | CONTROL APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR CONTROLLING APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - A control apparatus communicable with a plurality of controlled apparatuses includes an acquisition unit configured to acquire information about a communication apparatus within a communication range of the controlled apparatus and information about other communication apparatuses within a communication range of the communication apparatus, and a selection unit configured to select the controlled apparatus that transmits a synchronization signal for synchronization based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246494 | System and Method for Communications Using Spatial Multiplexing with Incomplete Channel Information - A system and method for communications using spatial multiplexing with incomplete channel information are provided. A method for wireless communications includes receiving, at a controller, a reference signal transmitted by a communications device, computing channel statistics based on the received reference signal, computing a first beamforming vector and a second beamforming vector, and transmitting information to the communications device. The reference signal being transmitted using a subset of antennas used for data reception at the communications device, and the controller and the communications device utilize cross-polarized antennas. The computing being based on the channel statistics, the transmitting uses the first beamforming vector and the second beamforming vector, the first beamforming vector precodes information for a first antenna at the communications device, and the second beamforming vector precodes information for a second antenna at the communications device. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246495 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for providing a resource allocation of a Base Station (BS) in a mobile communication system includes, when a Mobile Station (MS) is located in a cell boundary region, locating a transmission frame region for the MS in a duty cycle reduction region. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246496 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING MIMO COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY AND HAVING MULTIPLE RECEIVING ANTENNAS TO BE SELECTED - Before start of streaming, a server apparatus obtains from client apparatuses their respective numbers of antenna combinations, determines a training time t | 09-30-2010 |
20100246497 | SELECTIVE COMBINING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for performing duplicate avoidance of broadcast data packets in a (UE). The includes receiving a broadcast data packet from a plurality of cells; storing, if a sequence number of the received broadcast data packet does not fall within a reception window, the broadcast data packet in a buffer and updating the reception window based on the sequence number; determining, if the sequence number of the received broadcast data packet falls within the reception window, whether a broadcast data packet having the sequence number has previously been stored in the buffer; discarding the broadcast data packet, if the broadcast data packet has previously been stored in the buffer; and storing the broadcast data packet in the buffer, if the broadcast data packet has not previously been stored in the buffer. | 09-30-2010 |
20100254304 | Differential Detection Unit for the Zigbee 802.15.4 Standard - The invention relates to a detection unit for detecting data symbols which are contained in a differentially demodulated signal and to which one respective PN sequence from a supply of sequences can be allocated at the transmission end. The inventive detection unit comprises the following units: a) a sequence supplying unit that is configured for supplying a third group of derived sequences. Said third group of derived sequences is provided with a derived sequence for each first PN sequence, which is assigned to said first PN sequence and can be derived therefrom by means of logical combinations but is not identical thereto while the derived sequences of the third group are different from each other only by cyclically shifting the chip values thereof; b) a correlation unit which is connected to the sequence supplying unit and is configured for calculating correlation results by correlating the differentially demodulated signal with each of the derived sequences of the third group; and c) an evaluation unit that is connected to the correlation unit and is configured for deriving the values of the data symbols by evaluating the correlation results. The invention also relates to a transceiver and an integrated circuit comprising such a detection unit. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254305 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - In mobile communication between a base station and a mobile station, reception quality is prevented from being degraded even when transmission power supplied from a base station is remarkably changed. A code generated in accordance with an amount of change in transmission power is transmitted from the base station to the mobile station. In the mobile station, the code generated by the base station is detected by a detector ( | 10-07-2010 |
20100254306 | COMMUNICATION ROUTE CONTROLLER, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION ROUTE CONTROLLING METHOD AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A switching server | 10-07-2010 |
20100254307 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A switching server | 10-07-2010 |
20100254308 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PEER DISCOVERY IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus supporting enhanced discovery operations in peer to peer networks are described. Peer discovery, based on direct peer to peer discovery between two mobile nodes can be somewhat limited, e.g., due to power limitations, processing power, and/or channel conditions. An access point, e.g., base station, monitors for and receives peer discovery signals conveying a set of identifiers from a wireless communications device. The access point retransmits at least one identifier in the set in a wireless peer to peer communications channel. Thus the access point effectively extends the peer discovery range for wireless communications devices utilizing the peer to peer network. Wireless communications devices can monitor for and recover the rebroadcast peer discovery signals from access points. Thus, via access point signaling a wireless communications device can be made situationally aware of other devices of interest which would be otherwise outside its discovery detection range. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254309 | SYSTEM, DEVICE, AND METHOD FOR UNIFYING DIFFERENTLY-ROUTED NETWORKS USING VIRTUAL TOPOLOGY REPRESENTATIONS - Systems, devices, and methods for routing data through a first and a second ad-hoc network are described. Routing information structured according to a first routing protocol associated with a plurality of nodes in the first network is received at a border node that is part of at least the first and second ad-hoc networks. Routing information structured according to a second routing protocol associated with a plurality of nodes in the second ad-hoc network is also received. The received routing information is translated from the first routing protocol to the second routing protocol, or vice versa, and disseminated to nodes in the first or second ad-hoc networks. Data packets from nodes in the first ad-hoc network are forwarded to nodes in the second ad-hoc network, or vice versa, based in part on the translated routing information. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254310 | PACKET SNIFFER FOR AD HOC NETWORK - A sniffer for an ad-hoc network is described. The sniffer includes an RF transceiver for receiving network packets from an ad-hoc network, the RF transceiver being operable to receive the network packets without the sniffer being connected to the ad-hoc network; a microprocessor connected to the RF transceiver for processing the network packets to create associated FIFO packets; a memory connected to the microprocessor for storing the associated FIFO packets,- and a communications interface for receiving the associated FIFO packets from the memory and for transmitting the associated FIFO packets to a computer. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254311 | Pulse-Coupled Discrete-Time Phase Locked Loops For Wireless Networks - A model of a pulse-coupled discrete-time phase locked loops (PLLs) in a wireless network is provided. The PLLs at each node in the network may have an indeterminate order. A method for securing discrete-time distributed phase locked loops (PLLs) in a wireless network by including an outlier detection scheme in the timing update at each node is also provided. The method may include evaluating each collaborating node based on a weighted average of the clock errors and evaluating the dispersion of clock errors. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254312 | DYNAMICALLY TRANSFORMED CHANNEL SET ROUTING - A crosslayer routing operation in a network of cognitive radios retrieves routing input parameters from a crosslayer interface, creates additional parameters from retrieved parameters, processes retrieved and additional parameters using a knowledge mapping and reasoning engine, utilizes numeric or linguistic results for targeted routing operations, updates a routing knowledge database; and sends relevant routing information to a route controller. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254313 | Address Provisioning in a Mobile Telecommunication System - A method of provisioning an address of a Packet Mobile Switching Centre at a Mobile Station, the Packet Mobile Switching Centre providing an interface between a packet switched domain to which the Mobile Station is attached, and a circuit switched service domain, and the packet switched domain comprising a Mobility Management Entity for handling Mobility Management in respect of the Mobile Station and for performing location updates with the Packet Mobile Switching Centre on behalf of the Mobile Station. The method comprises sending a Location Update request from the Mobility Management Entity to a Mobile Switching Centre server within the Packet Mobile Switching Centre on behalf of the Mobile Station. In response, the Mobile Switching Centre server returns to the Mobility Management Entity a Location Update Accept containing an address of the Packet Mobile Switching Centre. The Mobility Management Entity forwards the address to the Mobile Terminal. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254314 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal comprises a communication unit, a detection unit, and a control unit. The communication unit wirelessly communicates with another communication terminal belonging to a wireless network where communication terminals directly communicate with each other and a communication terminal which does not belong to the wireless network. The detection unit detects a predetermined trigger. The control unit determines whether or not the communication unit is in a busy state with the other communication terminal belonging to the wireless network. The control unit controls the communication unit to prohibit transmission of a positive response to a connection request directed to the wireless network from the communication terminal which does not belong to the wireless network, upon detection of the trigger when determining that the communication unit is in the busy state with the other communication terminal. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254315 | METHOD FOR INDICATING MODULATION MODE IN HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESSING - The present invention discloses a method for indicating a modulation mode in HSDPA, comprising the following steps: a NodeB receiving capability information reported by a terminal, if determining that the terminal supports 64QAM modulation mode, determining a transmission block size, a modulation mode and code channel resource to be indicated based on an capability constraint condition and the capability information, and if the determined modulation mode is the same as a basic modulation mode satisfying requirement of the transmission block size, setting modulation mode information of a HS-SCCH as 0, otherwise setting the modulation mode information of the HS-SCCH as 1, and then sending the HS-SCCH to the terminal. Application of the present invention is compatible with a UE device which supports or does not support 64QAM high order modulation, without changing the current frame structure of the HS-SCCH, thereby achieving functional support of the 64QAM modulation mode. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254316 | Method for Routing Ad-Hoc Signals - An ad-hoc network is a typically a dynamic collection of nodes capable of communicating therebetween without the aid of pre-established infrastructure. Ad-hoc networks differ from traditional networks in that the topology of interconnections between nodes is inherently dynamic and not fixed. Generally, the routing protocols belong to two groups: proactive and reactive. Proactive protocols attempt to maintain correct and up-to-date routing information at every node. Reactive protocols, in turn, collect necessary routing information only if a pair of nodes are to establish a communication. In accordance with embodiments of the invention a reactive ad-hoc network protocol is disclosed that uses controlled flooding to broadcast packets of information within the ad-hoc network. Furthermore, the ad-hoc network protocol does not maintain up-to-date routing information at every node in an ad-hoc network and does not utilize specific control messages to assure that packets within the ad-hoc network follow optimal paths. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254317 | Full duplex network radio bridge with low latency and high throughput - A full duplex radio bridge using two transceivers coupled to a first packet network, one for transmitting data toward another radio bridge coupled to a second packet network, and the other for receiving data transmitted from the first packet network toward said second packet network by a transceiver of the other radio bridge. Each radio bridge is coupled to its packet network through one network port whose transmit data path is coupled to one of the transceivers, and whose receive data path is coupled to receive data from the other transceiver. An inner loop and outer loop is used. Management packets are routed to the various transceivers using the inner loop and outer loop by routing and filtering functions. Payload packets are transmitted from one packet network to the other using only the outer loop. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254318 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD IN THE DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM - A digital broadcasting system and a data processing method are disclosed. In an aspect of the present invention, the present invention provides a data processing method including receiving a broadcast signal in which main service data and mobile service data are multiplexed, demodulating the received broadcast signal, outputting demodulation time information of a specific position of a broadcast signal frame, and acquiring reference time information contained in the mobile service data frame, setting the reference time information to a system time clock at a specific time based on the demodulation time information and decoding the mobile service data according to the system time clock. | 10-07-2010 |
20100260099 | HSPA Evolution Architecture - A telecommunications network, including an evolved base station node having a node controller and a first radio network controller (RNC), the node controller configured to communicate with user terminals, and the first radio network controller configured to communicate with a packet switched component of a core network, but not with a circuit switched component, may further include a second RNC that communicates with the node controller and also communicates with the packet switched component of the core network and a circuit switched component. A method of establishing communication between a user terminal and the core network via the second RNC, when the user terminal has a control plane connection with the evolved base station node, such that the first RNC is the serving RNC (SRNC), may include tunnelling communication set up messages over the control plane between the node controller and the core network via the second RNC. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260100 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING END TO END QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR CELLULAR VOICE TRAFFIC OVER A DATA NETWORK - Embodiments of the disclosed invention include a system and method for providing end to end quality of service for cellular voice traffic over a data network. For example, in one embodiment, the method includes tagging outgoing cellular traffic at a network interface device with a prioritization marking to produce prioritized data and transmitting the prioritized data directly to an access carrier network associated with providing an access line to the cellular network interface device. The method maintains, at the access carrier network, the prioritization marking of the outgoing cellular traffic for routing the outgoing cellular traffic through the access carrier network. The method hands off the prioritized data directly to a cellular service provider network associated with the cellular device via a directly connected network to network interface. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260101 | ROUTE OPTIMIZATION FOR DIRECTLY CONNECTED PEERS - Aspects relate to allowing peer nodes that establish a communication through a home agent to move that session to a directly connected link. Thus, the directly connected nodes can exchange packets natively without encapsulation. Further aspects allow a node that does not have any home agent entity to switch from a local network to a global network without losing ongoing sessions. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260102 | COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS ENHANCED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORKS - A method and system for communication in a wireless enhanced control area network including wireless station nodes is provided. One implementation involves each wireless station node employing a wireless communication protocol for wireless communication of control area network (CAN) messages among the wireless station nodes on a wireless communication medium, wherein each CAN message comprises a content-identified data message or an error message. The wireless communication protocol including a medium access control protocol for controlling access to the wireless communication by the wireless station nodes. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260103 | Distributed Antenna System - A wireless communication network employs a distributed antenna system to provide radio coverage. The wireless communication network comprises a plurality of access points providing service in respective coverage areas. The access point within each coverage area connects to a plurality of antennas that are widely distributed within the coverage area. Radio resources at antennas within the overlapping region of two or more neighboring coverage areas are shared by the access points in the neighboring coverage areas according to a multiple access scheme. The sharing of radio resources within the overlapping region of two or more coverage areas allows the overlapping region to be enlarged, thereby providing more time to complete a handover. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260104 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING THE ABSOLUTE GRANT MAPPING TABLE FOR DRIFTING RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER - A method for configuring an absolute grant mapping relationship table for a drift radio network controller, comprises: a serving radio network controller informing the drift radio network controller of the absolute grant mapping relationship table used by an enhanced-dedicated channel absolute grant channel (E-AGCH) by signaling; and the drift radio network controller returning a response message to the serving radio network controller after storing the information configured. The present invention guarantees that absolute grant values corresponding to the Node B and the user equipment are obtained from the same absolute grant mapping relationship table, i.e. from the same table of relationships between absolute grant values and indexes, and the allocation and use of the power resource by them are consistent, so that efficient use of resources and security of the system are guaranteed. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260105 | DOMAIN TRANSFER SERVICE CONTINUITY PROVISION TO A MOBILE TERMINAL - The invention refers to a method of providing a service continuity of a communication between a mobile terminal (UE) and a service node (AS) within a communications network (CN), the communication network comprising a first radio access network (RAN | 10-14-2010 |
20100260106 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE USING PREAMBLE - Provided are a network communication method and a network device using a preamble. According to the network communication method and the network device, network coexistence is easily achieved by using network identification transmitted in the preamble, and an unknown terminal, which has a low reception signal to noise ratio (SNR) and has not yet been connected to an existing network, is easily connected to the existing network. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260107 | REDUCING TIME FOR CALL FAILURE INDICATION - Techniques are disclosed for reducing the time for a wireless communication device originating a group communication, such as a push-to-talk call, to receive a call failure indication on a wireless communications system. In an embodiment, a group communications server receives a request to initiate a call with a target from an originator, and sends a corresponding message to a network node. If the call cannot be completed, the server receives from the network node an internet control message protocol (ICMP) message indicative of there being no connection between the network node and the target wireless communication device. In response to the message, the group communications server sends a status failure message to the originating wireless communication device. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260108 | SETTING UP A REVERSE LINK DATA TRANSMISSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Aspects including methods and apparatuses for setting up a reverse link data transmission within a wireless communications system are disclosed. An access terminal sends, to an access network, an initial data packet in a sequence of data packets including a data portion and a header portion including an identifier of a first type, the identifier of the first type configured to uniquely identify the given access terminal in more than one of a subset of sectors of the wireless communications system. The access network sends a message to the access terminal to (i) assign a dedicated channel to the given access terminal, or to (ii) assign an identifier of a second type to uniquely identify the given access terminal in a single sector of the wireless communications system. The access network thereafter receives additional packets from the access terminal in accordance with the assignment. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260109 | OPTIMIZED INTER-ACCESS POINT PACKET ROUTING FOR IP RELAY NODES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate communicating inter-eNB packets among eNBs in a cluster implemented by a donor eNB. A relay eNB can report an address received from a gateway upstream to one or more eNBs. The one or more eNBs can store the address along with one or more parameters for communicating with the relay eNB. In this regard, disparate eNBs can communicate with the relay eNB by specifying the address in an inter-eNB packet, and upstream eNBs can route the inter-eNB packet to the relay eNB based at least in part on locating the address in a routing table. In this regard, the inter-eNB packets need not pass through the gateway to reach the relay eNB. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260110 | Hierarchical Data Collection Network Supporting Packetized Voice Communications Among Wireless Terminals and Telephones - A packet-based, hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. The network accommodates real time voice transmission both through dedicated, scheduled bandwidth and through a packet-based routing within the confines and constraints of a data network. Conversion and call processing circuitry is also disclosed which enables access devices and personal computers to adapt voice information between analog voice stream and digital voice packet formats as proves necessary. Routing pathways include wireless spanning tree networks, wide area networks, telephone switching networks, internet, etc., in a manner virtually transparent to the user. A voice session and associate call setup simulates that of conventional telephone switching network, providing well-understood functionality common to any mobile, remote or stationary terminal, phone, computer, etc. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260111 | MULTI-FA PERSONAL SUBSCRIBER TERMINAL AND METHOD OF ORDERING PROTOCOL DATA UNIT THEREOF - A multi-FA personal subscriber station and a method of ordering protocol data units thereof having advantages of simultaneously accessing two frequency channels to transmit and receive data and appropriately ordering protocol data units transmitted through each frequency channel, thereby minimizing errors in TCP/IP packet transmission, are disclosed. According to the multi-FA personal subscriber terminal and the method of ordering protocol data units thereof according to exemplary embodiments of the present invention, two frequency channels are simultaneously accessed to transmit and receive data and protocol data units transmitted through each of the frequency channels are ordered, thereby minimizing errors in TCP/IP packet transmission. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260112 | QUICK PAGING IN TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In an orthogonal frequency division multiple access communication system, unused frequency resources during a conventional preamble signal are used for a quick paging mechanism. A set of quick paging signals is sent over the unused frequency resources to signal one or more subscriber stations. | 10-14-2010 |
20100265880 | CONVERT IP TELEPHONY NETWORK INTO A MOBILE CORE NETWORK - A system includes a terminal, a wireless access network, an IP telephony network, a core network gateway from the IP telephony network to the public mobile phone network and a network device, which connects the wireless access network to the IP telephony network and adapts the IP telephony network services to be used by utilizing the circuit-switched signaling protocols of the terminal. A location updating request is received from the terminal over the wireless access network. Location updating is performed via a core network gateway. The network device performs user registration to the IP telephony network using a domain name formed by the phone number of the user and the domain name of the network device or the numeric IP address as the address connection to be registered and as location data in the IP telephony network. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265881 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EFFICIENT TRANSMISSION OF DCD/UCD MESSAGES IN A WIMAX SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present disclosure propose a method and apparatus for ensuring each mobile station serviced by a base station does not miss a new version of a DCD/UCD message before the new version takes effect. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265882 | USER APPARATUS AND CELL SEARCH METHOD - A user apparatus to be used in a mobile communications system including multiple cells is disclosed. The user apparatus includes a unit which receives a sync channel; a unit which extracts a primary sync channel and a secondary sync channel from the sync channel and conducts a cell search; and a unit which controls, based on a condition for setting an averaging time in a time direction in the cell search, a correlation detection time in a correlation detection performed in the unit which conducts the cell search. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265883 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-SECTOR MIMO CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS - An apparatus for wireless communication is disclosed that includes a processing system configured to communicate with a plurality of sectors in an active set; and receive independent data streams from the plurality of sectors on the same carrier. A method for performing the process is also disclosed herein. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265884 | CIRCUIT-SWITCHED SERVICES OVER SAE/LTE NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for providing both Mobile Terminated, MT, and Mobile Originated, MO, circuit switched (CS) services such as Short Message Service, SMS, services in networks utilizing CS Fallback and CSoLTE-I architectures. An extended SGs interface referred to as SGs+ is implemented between a Mobility Management Entity, MME, in an SAE core network and a Mobile Switching Center Server, MSC-S. The SGs+ interface supports transmission of upper layer CS packet data units while utilizing either connectionless or connection-oriented Signaling Connection Control Part, SCCP, operation. The non access stratum, NAS, signaling support between the User Equipment, UE, and the MME is extended to provide support for both MT SMS and MO SMS service. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265885 | ACCESS POINT SCAN METHOD, STORAGE MEDIUM STORING SCAN PROGRAM, AND STATION - In an access point scan method by which a station disconnected from an access point scans for a next access point to which the station can be connected at a predetermined scan interval, the station sets a shorter scan interval when a possibility of connection to the next access point to which the station can be connected is presumed to be high or a need for connection is presumed to be great, and sets a longer scan interval when the possibility of connection is presumed to be low or the need for connection is presumed to be small, based on one of information on the access point to which the station being connected just before disconnection and information on the station. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265886 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PRIORITIZE MOBILE STATION TRANSMISSIONS IN RESPONSE TO NETWORK ACKNOWLEDGMENT POLLING - Methods and apparatus to prioritize mobile station transmissions in response to network acknowledgment polling are disclosed. An example method in a mobile station disclosed herein comprises receiving a request for acknowledgment information expected to be transmitted with data, and transmitting a control message in response to the request if a previously transmitted data block is associated with a tentative acknowledgment state, the control message including acknowledgment information. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265887 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING CONTENTS OF WIRELESS TERMINAL IN HOME NETWORK SYSTEM - Provided is a method for using home network contents of a wireless terminal located outside a home network. The method includes transmitting bandwidth information and wireless terminal information to a contents storage device, when a home gateway receives a remote access request message including the bandwidth information from the wireless terminal; setting, by the home contents storage device, the bandwidth information as a filtering parameter for the wireless terminal; filtering, by the contents storage device, contents available for the wireless terminal and generating a contents list corresponding to the wireless terminal by using the filtering parameter, upon receiving a request for the contents list; and transmitting the generated contents list to the wireless terminal. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265888 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPER FINE POSITIONING WITH NETWORKS IN TIERED STRUCTURE - A super fine positioning apparatus is provided. A super fine positioning apparatus, including: a network module unit comprising a plurality of network modules which processes a signal among a user terminal and a plurality of communication networks, the plurality of communication networks being sorted by a positioning precision; a network module control unit which sequentially selects the plurality of network modules and controls connection to the plurality of network modules; a positioning calculation unit which sequentially connects to the plurality of network modules and calculates a location of the user terminal according to each connection phase; and a database which stores information about the user terminal and provides the network module control unit and positioning calculation unit with the information. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265889 | METHOD FOR RECOGNIZING POSITIONS OF A PLURALITY OF NODES WHICH CONSIST WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A method for recognizing positions of a plurality of nodes which constitute a wireless sensor network is provided, the method comprises generating sub-maps which represent the relative position to neighbor nodes by taking each of the plurality of nodes as a reference; selecting a sub-map which takes a node with the highest connectivity as a reference from among the plurality of nodes; selecting a sub-map which takes a node with the highest connectivity as a reference, except for the node which becomes a reference of the selected sub-map among the nodes which are included in the selected sub-map; integrating the selected sub-maps into one map by matching the same nodes among the nodes which are commonly included in the selected sub-maps; and thereafter correcting positions of nodes which are included in the integrated map to real positions, whereby integrating order of the sub-map is adjusted using an information of the connectivity of the nodes, and the positions of the nodes which constitute the wireless sensor network is constituted are correctly recognized by correcting the position of the nodes. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265890 | TRANSPORT FOR WIRELESS RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - A radio access network includes a transport network layer; a radio network layer having a layer 2 network for communicating between entities within the radio network layer by exchanging datagrams having a predetermined format used only within the radio network layer. Accordingly, the present invention provides for a true decoupling at layer 2 between the radio network layer and the transport network layer. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265891 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY ROUTING DATA PACKETS AND MANAGING CHANNEL ACCESS AND BANDWIDTH IN WIRELESS MULTI-HOPPING NETWORKS - A method for routing data packets from a source to a destination in a wireless communication network comprising a plurality of nodes, wherein each node is in uplink-downlink association with at least one neighboring node, and wherein each node comprises a registration table identifying all downlink nodes that are associated with the node, the method comprising: sending an Open Stream message from a source node which specifies a destination node; and receiving the Open Stream message at the uplink node of the source node, wherein the uplink node relays the Open Stream message to the destination node if the destination node is registered in the registration table of the uplink node. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265892 | LAYER-2 IP NETWORKING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE HOSTS - A method and apparatus to enable IP networking for mobile hosts without requiring changes to be made to the TCP/IP stack in the operating system installed on the mobile hosts. The apparatus is an “intelligent device” that can be installed on or connected to a mobile host, and may comprise a software-only logical module, physical hardware, or a combination of both. To a mobile host, the intelligent device emulates a network interface such as an Ethernet card or a telephone modem. The intelligent device appears to an access network just like any regular IP host connected to the access network through a physical network interface device. The intelligent device handles all mobile networking functions for the mobile host, and may control multiple different physical network interface devices to enable a connection to the “best” access network available to the mobile user at his location. | 10-21-2010 |
20100272010 | APPARATUS FOR EXCHANGING MEDIA CONTENT - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a media gateway having a controller to establish communications with a media processor over a wireline network according to a next generation home network (G.hn) protocol, establish communications with the media processor over a wireless network according to a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) protocol, determine a first measure of communication according to the WiFi protocol, determine a second measure of communication according to the G.hn protocol, and coordinate with the media processor to select one of the wireline network and the wireless network according to the first and second measures of communication for delivery of the media services to the media processor. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272011 | ITERATIVE DECODING WITH CONFIGURABLE NUMBER OF ITERATIONS - Techniques for transmitting and receiving data in a communication system are described. A receiver may iteratively decode a data packet and may obtain better performance with more decoding iterations. The receiver may select the number of decoding iterations based on at least one parameter (e.g., packet size) to tradeoff between decoder throughput and link performance. In one design, a transmitter may obtain a transport format selected based on the number of decoding iterations, process a data packet in accordance with the transport format, and send a transmission of the data packet to the receiver. The receiver may receive the transmission of the data packet and may perform decoding for the data packet for up to the selected number of decoding iterations. The transport format and/or CQI information may be determined based on an expected degradation in link performance due to the receiver performing the selected number of decoding iterations. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272012 | APPARATUS AND A METHOD FOR DETECTING A COMMUNICATION CHANNEL - The present invention provides a method and an apparatus for detecting a communication channel in whose frequency band radio signals are transmitted by different radio signal sources inside a cabin. In this case a wide band antenna receives the radio signals transmitted inside the cabin. Different demodulators are provided, each of which demodulate the radio signals received by the wide band antenna within an associated frequency range of the demodulator. A configuration logic establishes whether, in a frequency hand within a demodulated frequency range, radio signals are being transmitted simultaneously by different radio signal sources. In the case of impermissible signal transmissions of a radio signal source, e.g. when a non-safety-relevant system transmits signals in the same frequency band of a safety-relevant system in the same frequency bands of a safety-relevant system, the non-safety-relevant system is reconfigured by the configuration logic and an alarm or warning signal is generated as an indication of the impermissible condition. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272013 | ESTABLISHING PACKET DATA NETWORK CONNECTIVITY FOR LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS TRAFFIC - Providing for establishment of local Internet Protocol access (LIPA) for cellular communication is provided herein. According to particular aspects of the subject disclosure, provided are mechanisms to identify a request to establish a packet network connection as a request for a LIPA context. Once identified, a local gateway associated with the UE or with a subscriber-deployed base station is identified, and a packet context is established to support LIPA traffic for the UE. Additional mechanisms support UE mobility from one base station to another, including identifying and terminating inactive LIPA contexts. Further, a UE is described that can recognize and facilitate the establishment of a LIPA context for applications executing at the UE. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272014 | Parametric Compression of Rank-1 Analog Feedback - Channel state information in a closed-loop, multiple-input, multiple-output wireless networks is fed back from each mobile station to a base station by first determining a transmit covariance matrix R, and applying a singular value decomposition (SVD) R=UΣV | 10-28-2010 |
20100272015 | Method For Accelerating System Information Acquisition - Method for transmitting system information from a base station BS, eNB to a user equipment UE, the method includes transmitting a system information SI within a period p, which system information comprises a first part of information MIB, wherein the first part of information comprises an identifier ID, which identifier identifies a modification status of the first part of information MIB, and adapting a boundary b upon which the period p terminates, and upon which a modified system information SI is valid, wherein adapting a boundary b is carried out based on the modification status of the first part of information MIB. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272016 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING TRANSPORT NETWORK INDEPENDENT IP MOBILITY IN MOBILE TERMINAL AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A method and system for supporting Internet protocol (IP) mobility independently of the IP version of a transport network are provided. The method includes providing a mobility control apparatus, which maps the home addresses of a plurality of mobile terminals, including first and second mobile terminals, and the Care-of-Addresses (CoAs) of the mobile terminals, and setting a first control tunnel between the mobility control apparatus and the first mobile terminal, the care-of-addresses varying from one transport network to another transport network; setting a second control tunnel between the mobility control apparatus and the second mobile terminal; and enabling the first and second mobile terminals to exchange a data packet with each other through the first and second control tunnels. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272017 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING ADVANCED LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEM INFORMATION - A method and apparatus for processing advanced long term evolution (LTE-A) system information (SI) are described. When a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is in an idle mode/state, an LTE-A SI broadcast may be received on at least one downlink (DL) anchor carrier, including a physical DL shared channel (PDSCH) having paging message content. At least one SI-change parameter included in the paging message content may be decoded and processed. The SI-change parameter may include a flag used to indicate an SI change on a logical partition, (a primary or a secondary SI broadcast group information change). When the WTRU is in a connected mode/state, an LTE-A SI-CHANGE-radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) transmission may be received during a modification period (MP), and an SI change may be performed during a subsequent MP. At least one SI-change parameter included in the SI-CHANGE-RNTI transmission may be decoded and processed. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272018 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - The present invention pertains to the technology for avoiding interference between adjacent frequencies occurring on cell boundaries or sector boundaries in a mobile wireless communication system using an OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) scheme. There are a single sector mode of no collaboration between sectors; a sector selection mode of collaborating between sectors to transmit with a specified frequency resource from only one sector, and a collaboration mode of collaborating between sectors to transmit signals from both sectors. Any of the three modes is selected on the basis of measurement results of RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) reported from a mobile station. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272019 | MULTIPLEXING LARGE PAYLOADS OF CONTROL INFORMATION FROM USER EQUIPMENTS - Disclosed is multiplexing transmissions of Uplink Control Information (UCI) signals having variable payloads from User Equipments (UEs). The UCI transmission uses a first format type if its size is less than or equal to a predetermined values and it uses a second format type if its size is greater than a predetermined value. When the first format type is used the UE multiplexing is through a first method while when the second format type is used the UE multiplexing is through a second method which is different than the first method. The structure of the second format type is the same as the structure used for the transmission of data information by UEs. The UEs can also be grouped and UCI transmission can be triggered through the reception of control signaling addressing a group of UEs and indicating UCI transmission by a sub-group of UEs in the group of UEs. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272020 | Telecommunications Network Responsive to Server-Provided Location Information - The invention relates to a telecommunications network for wirelessly establishing a connection with a terminal located at a location in said network by a server. The terminal is identified by a terminal identifier in the telecommunications network. The telecommunications network contains a first network node and a second network node. The first network node is configured for receiving a data unit for the terminal from the server, that is preferably located outside the telecommunications network. The data unit comprises the terminal identifier. The first network node is being configured for receiving a location identifier indicative of the location of the terminal from the server and for deriving an address of the second network node using the location identifier. The derived address of the second network node is then used for transmitting a first connection request for establishing a connection with the derived second network node. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272021 | METHOD, APPARATUSES AND PROGRAM FOR HANDLING PROTOCOL TRANSLATION BETWEEN EPS AND GPRS - The present invention relates to a solution for handling protocol translation issues in a mixed communication protocol network ( | 10-28-2010 |
20100272022 | SEQUENCE HOPPING METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BASE STATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication terminal apparatus wherein the occurrences of inter-sequence interferences between a reference signal preceding a sequence hopping and a reference signal following the sequence hopping can be reduced so as to improve the randomizing effect achieved by the sequence hopping. In this apparatus, a sequence number deciding part ( | 10-28-2010 |
20100272023 | GATEWAY DEVICE, SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A gateway device includes a communication unit communicating a frame signal conforming to an IuUP (Iu User Plane) protocol with a wireless base station controller connected to a circuit switching network; a determination unit determining whether the frame signal received by the communication unit satisfies a predetermined condition or not; a conversion unit converting information included in the frame signal to information to be set in a flow control signal of an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) when the frame signal satisfies the predetermined condition; and a flow control signal transmission unit transmitting the flow control signal to a communication device in the IMS. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272024 | INTELLIGENT PICO-CELL FOR TRANSPORT OF WIRELESS DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS OVER WIRELINE NETWORKS - In one embodiment a pico cell may be used to detect a presence of a wireless device and receive a wireless signal from the wireless device. The wireless signal may then be converted from a protocol used by the wireless device to a converted signal in a protocol suitable for use with a broadband connection. The converted signal may then be transmitted over the broadband connection. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272025 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICES IN AN EVOLVED PACKET NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method, system and device for processing circuit switched (CS) services in an evolved packet network. The method includes: by a mobility management entity (MME), receiving a mobile terminated (MT) service indication from a mobile switching center (MSC); sending the MT service indication to user equipment (UE); and receiving an MT service response returned by the UE and performing subsequent operations according to the MT service response. In the method of the present invention, when an MT service arrives, the MME does not trigger the evolved NodeB (eNodeB) to hand over the packet switched (PS) services of the UE but notifies the UE of the MT service and performs subsequent operations according to the MT service response returned by the UE, thus avoiding the waste of network resources caused by a meaningless handover of PS services. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272026 | Communication Nodes for Use with an Ad-Hoc Network - Communication nodes for use with a wireless ad-hoc communication network are disclosed. In an embodiment of the present invention, the communication node comprises a transducer, which generates a signal in response to an external signal. The ad-hoc network communication is supported in part by static communication nodes, which defined an organized infrastructure network in order to achieve the various functions of the transducers. In another embodiment, the communication node for use with a wireless ad-hoc network does not include a transducer. Such communication nodes are preferred for use with a less structured network with virtually no infrastructure and allow for being used with expanding and contracting networks. Mobile communication nodes mostly support the propagation of signals. However, pseudo-static or static communication nodes are also used in wireless communication ad-hoc networks. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272027 | Communication Nodes for Use with an Ad-Hoc Network - Communication nodes for use with a wireless ad-hoc communication network are disclosed. In an embodiment of the present invention, the communication node comprises a transducer, which generates a signal in response to an external signal. The ad-hoc network communication is supported in part by static communication nodes, which defined an organized infrastructure network in order to achieve the various functions of the transducers. In another embodiment, the communication node for use with a wireless ad-hoc network does not include a transducer. Such communication nodes are preferred for use with a less structured network with virtually no infrastructure and allow for being used with expanding and contracting networks. Mobile communication nodes mostly support the propagation of signals. However, pseudo-static or static communication nodes are also used in wireless communication ad-hoc networks. | 10-28-2010 |
20100278099 | Methods for Transmitting and Receiving Data and Communication Devices - A method for transmitting data from a first communication device to a second communication device, comprising generating a message, wherein the message comprises data to be sent to the second communication device, a source address and a destination address, associating a first address of the first communication device as the source address for the message, associating a first address of the second communication device as the destination address for the message, determining a second address of the first communication device, determining a second address of the second communication device, replacing the first address of the first communication device with the second address of the first communication device as the source address for the message, replacing the first address of the second communication device with the second address of the second communication device as the destination address for the message, and sending the message. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278100 | EXTENDED RANGE VOICE OVER IP WIMAX DEVICE - A method implemented in a mobile station (“MS”). When the MS transmits, it generates radio frequency (“RF”) energy. To limit exposure to RF energy, regulatory agencies determined a maximum transmit power for mobile stations. The amount of RF energy considered safe is that generated when the MS is transmitting continuously at the maximum transmit power for a predetermined period. The method first determines whether the maximum transmit power is too low to effect communication between the MS and a base station. If it is, the transmit power is increased and if possible, the data transmit rate of outbound data is reduced to at or below a data rate threshold that reduces the RF energy generated by the mobile station to an amount considered safe. Then, any data having a data transmit rate less than or equal to the data rate threshold is transmitted at the increased transmit power. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278101 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF MAINTAINING A CONNECTION IN A NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for maintaining a connection between two hosts in a multi-hop network comprising at least one network node disposed between the two hosts and a network element, e.g., a NAT, designed to release the connection after a period of inactivity. The method includes determining a first node in which a keep-alive message will terminate after crossing a network element designed to release the connection after a period of inactivity, and sending a keep-alive data packet configured to terminate in the first node after crossing the network element designed to release the connection. The keep-alive packet configured to terminate in the first node after crossing the network element designed to release the connection may be sent within a time period less than the time period of inactivity after which the network element would release the connection. The method allows for a connection to be kept open without waking up a client device and/or without activating air interface procedures. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278102 | DATA FLOW ROUTING IN A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORK - A data flow from a source to a destination is routed in a multi-hop wireless network. Nodes are searched in the multi-hop wireless network for information of route metrics for the nodes, the information of the route metrics are received, a route that has a most optimal route metric for the data flow are determined based on the route metrics and a data flow metric of the data flow, and the data flow are received from the source via the route at the destination in the multi-hop wireless network. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278103 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF AN AVERAGING PARAMETER FOR PCINR AND RSSI - A system and method for adaptive control of an averaging parameter in a communications network may include an averaging parameter adaptive control module (APAC) that is associated with a base station and that includes one or more processors configured to generate a first averaging parameter that is transmitted by the base station to a mobile station communicating with the base station. The mobile station may use the first averaging parameter to generate first channel condition information that indicates a condition of a communication channel. First feedback information including the first channel condition information may be received at the base station. The APAC may generate a second averaging parameter using the first averaging parameter and the first feedback information and may transmit the second averaging parameter from the base station to the mobile station, thereby adaptively controlling the second averaging parameter based on the first feedback information. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278104 | Computing Device and Communications Framework - A computing device having communications framework for a protocol stack. The framework includes a number of layers, each layer representing a layer in a protocol stack. At each layer, a protocol is a bearer of an upper adjacent layer. Each layer is arranged to monitor the availability of one or more alternate bearer layers below. Where there is more than one alternate bearer layer below, a layer is said to be mobile. In the event of a new bearer layer becoming available at a mobile layer, a decision is made as to whether or not to migrate to that bearer layer based on established policies in the mobile layer and, optionally, on communication with higher layers or with the client application. If the decision to migrate is positive, the mobile layer then ensures establishment of the new bearer layer and initiates and completes migration to it. The client of a connection active over the connection stack need not be disturbed by mobility events within the stack providing the connection. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278105 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING RADIO LINK CONTROL (RLC) DATA BLOCKS - In one aspect, the invention provides apparatuses and methods for wirelessly transmitting application data utilizing priority information for each radio link control (RLC) data block transmitted. Advantageously, the application data with a relatively high transmission priority is not substantially delayed by the transmission of application data with substantially lower transmission priorities. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278106 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION - A method for receiving control information for data reception at a specific user equipment in a communication system in which at least one data transmission mode is used to transmit data of the at least one UE is disclosed. The method receives the control information including a first field and a second field, in which the first field indicates a data transmission mode of the specific user equipment (UE) and the second field indicates a resource block via which the data is transmitted, and receives the data by decoding the control information. As a result, a method for constructing control information required for receiving control data of a localized-mode UE and a distributed-mode UE can be recognized. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278107 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR SELECTING A PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK USING UNLICENSED ACCESS NETWORKS - When a mobile station (MS) seeks access to a public land mobile network (PLMN) via an unlicensed or generic access networks (GAN) it first registers with a default GAN. If the default GAN is unable to serve the MS at its current location, it redirects the MS to other GANs serving the same of different PLMNs. However, when using the existing registration and redirection process, an MS has no means of knowing what services are provided by a specific combination of GAN and PLMN. In accordance with the present invention this is achieved by indicating for each PLMN and serving GANC an operation mode supported by the GANC. This operation mode being indicative of the interface used for communication between the GANC and PLMN it serves. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278108 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING LOCAL IP ACCESS IN A FEMTO CELL OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for providing a local IP access service to a User Equipment (UE) attached to a femtocell including a Packet Data Network (PDN) gateway function in a wireless communication system. A method includes receiving a service request from a User Equipment (UE), transmitting an initial UE message including information on a local gateway to a Mobility Management Entity (MME), storing bearer information carried in an initial context setup request transmitted by the MME, receiving a Packet Data Network (PDN) connectivity request from the UE, forwarding the PDN connectivity request to the MME, receiving a create session request from the MME, and establishing a radio bearer with the local gateway, the local gateway being co-located with the femtocell. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278109 | MULTIPLEXING LARGE PAYLOADS OF CONTROL INFORMATION FROM USER EQUIPMENTS - Disclosed is multiplexing transmissions of Uplink Control Information (UCI) signals having variable payloads from User Equipments (UEs). The UCI transmission uses a first format type if its size is less than or equal to a predetermined values and it uses a second format type if its size is greater than a predetermined value. When the first format type is used the UE multiplexing is through a first method while when the second format type is used the UE multiplexing is through a second method which is different than the first method. The structure of the second format type is the same as the structure used for the transmission of data information by UEs. The UEs can also be grouped and UCI transmission can be triggered through the reception of control signaling addressing a group of UEs and indicating UCI transmission by a sub-group of UEs in the group of UEs. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278110 | GATEWAY DEVICE, SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A gateway device includes a communication unit communicating a frame signal conforming to an IuUP (Iu User Plane) protocol with a wireless base station controller connected to a circuit switching network; a determination unit determining whether the frame signal received by the communication unit satisfies a predetermined condition or not; a conversion unit converting information included in the frame signal to information to be set in a call control signal of an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) when the frame signal satisfies the predetermined condition; and a call control signal transmission unit transmitting the call control signal to a communication device in the IMS. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278111 | DUMMY PADDING SUB-HEADER IN MAC PROTOCOL DATA UNITS - An approach is provided for padding a protocol data unit. A protocol data unit is generated. A dummy padding sub-header is inserted within a header of the protocol data unit. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278112 | BINDING UPDATE METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE USED FOR SAME - Disclosed is a technique for providing a binding updating method and the like, capable of reducing the number of messages, and hence the power consumption of terminals and processing time required for binding update between both terminals. According to the technique, a first mobile terminal sends a second mobile terminal a first pair of messages including predetermined information on the first mobile terminal to acquire predetermined information on the second terminal. The second mobile terminal sends the first mobile terminal a second pair of messages including the predetermined information on the second mobile terminal. The first mobile terminal sends a third message to which authentication information is added, the authentication information generated based on the predetermined information on the second mobile terminal. The second mobile terminal sends a fourth message including response information to the third message and to which authentication information is added, the authentication information generated based on the predetermined information on the first mobile terminal. When the authentication information from the first mobile terminal is valid, the second mobile terminal updates binding information, while when the authentication information from the second mobile terminal is valid, the first mobile terminal updates the binding information. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278113 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING BEARER UNDER ISR MECHANISM - A method and a system for processing a bearer under an idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) mechanism are provided. The method for processing a bearer under an ISR mechanism includes the following steps. A mobility management network element acquires an access mode of a current network. The mobility management network element notifies a serving gateway (SGW) of the access mode of the current network, so that the SGW processes bearer according to the access mode of the current network. It can be ensured that the access mode of the current network is consistent with the access mode for a policy and charging control (PCC) strategy adopted during a bearing procedure under the ISR mechanism. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278114 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNALS BASED ON SEGMENTED ACCESS SCHEME AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING SEQUENCE FOR THE SAME - A segmented access based signal transmitting/receiving method and a sequence allocating method for the same are disclosed. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method of transmitting a signal of a user equipment in a communication system includes selecting a channel in accordance with at least one selected from the group consisting of a signal attenuation extent of a downlink signal to the user equipment and a speed of the user equipment from channels differently provided based on at least one selected from the group consisting of the signal attenuation extent of the downlink signal and the speed of the user equipment and transmitting the signal using the selected channel. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278115 | Wireless Base Station Apparatus, Frequency Deviation Detecting Method, And Mobile Communication System - A wireless base station apparatus includes a path detecting unit configured to detect a preamble signal sent from a terminal and obtain a back-diffusion timing; a back-diffusion unit configured to execute back-diffusion processing on a message signal sent from the terminal, by using the back-diffusion timing reported from the path detecting unit; and a calculating unit configured to calculate a frequency deviation of the message signal that has been subjected to the back-diffusion processing, based on a pilot signal of the message signal that has been subjected to the back-diffusion processing. The path detecting unit includes an information detecting unit configured to detect a frequency deviation of the preamble signal when detecting the preamble signal and supply the frequency deviation of the preamble signal to the calculating unit as initial value information. The calculating unit includes an information adding unit that calculates the frequency deviation of the message signal by using the initial value information. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278116 | Method and Device for Information Transfer - A method for information transfer includes: determining, by a source Mobility Management Network Element (MMNE) of a source Access Network (AN), version number of GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GTP) used between the source MMNE and a destination MMNE of a destination AN; and transmitting, by the source MMNE, user information corresponding to the version number of the GTP used between the source MMNE and the destination MMNE to the destination MMNE. The embodiment of the invention also provides a device for information transfer. With the embodiment of present invention, corresponding user information transfer may be realized. | 11-04-2010 |
20100284326 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A mobile communication system that is a wireless communication system using the AMC scheme and does not require any transmission/reception of control signals between a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus during controlling of the transmission/reception of the mobile station apparatus. In this mobile communication system, the mobile station apparatus measures reception quality of a downlink signal transmitted by the base station apparatus, and uses an uplink control channel to transmit, to the base station apparatus, downlink signal quality information (CQI) corresponding to the measured reception quality. The base station apparatus receives the downlink signal quality information CQI to control the data transmission to the mobile station apparatus. The base station apparatus judges whether the downlink signal quality information CQI transmitted by the mobile station apparatus is present, and controls, based on the result of this judgment, the downlink signal to be transmitted to the mobile station apparatus. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284327 | Policy Enforcement Within an IP Network - A method and network node for generating and applying policy rules in an IP network. A Policy Enforcement Function (PEF) is implemented in a node such as a Gateway GPRS Service Node (GGSN) routing packet flows to and from network users. An Application Function (AF) determines source and destination addressing information for a packet flow and sends the information to a Policy and Charging Decision Function in a Policy and Charging Control Function (PCRF) having access to service and mobility policies for network users. The PCRF generates policy rules based on the addressing information and the appropriate service and mobility policies. The PCRF sends the policies rules to the PEF for application to the traffic flow. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284328 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A connection adapter is disposed intervening between a communication module for connection to a radio packet communication network and high-level equipment. The connection adapter transmits a communication request for second high level equipment to a management computer after connecting to the radio packet communication network. The management computer sends a calling message to second connection adapter. Upon receipt of the calling message, the second connection adapter connects to the radio packet communication network. Then, each of the connection adapter relay the communication between the high-level equipments. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284329 | LOCAL MOBILITY MANAGEMENT APPARATUS FOR TOTAL MOBILITY MANAGEMENT, AND TOTAL MANAGEMENT METHOD AND SYSTEM - A local mobility management apparatus for total mobility management, and a total mobility management method and system are provided. A local domain mobility registration request message on a terminal is received from a mobile access gateway that receives a network attach message including information on a home agent from the terminal moving from a first local domain to a second local domain, a location of the terminal in an area managed by the mobile access gateway is registered, and a global domain mobility registration request message for reporting registration of the location to the home agent is transmitted. Accordingly, it is possible to remove a side effect generated in a case where a transmission order of a local domain mobility registration request message and a global domain mobility registration request message is disordered and provide an efficient mobility management. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284330 | Radio Telecommunications Network Node and Method of Adjusting Routing Table Up-date Interval - A method of adjusting a routing table update interval in a node of an ad-hoc radio telecommunications network comprising: reducing the routing table update interval by dividing it by a first constant value if a local change in the network is detected by the node. If a remote change in the network is detected by the node a rate of routing table exchange is increased by a second constant value. If no network change is detected by the node the rate of routing table exchange is reduced by the second constant value, wherein the rate of routing table exchange is reciprocal of the routing table update interval. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284331 | MOBILE IP ROUTE OPTIMIZATION IN IP VERSION TRANSITION SCENARIOS - The invention relates to a method for routing packets in a system of packet-switched networks using different internet protocol versions. The system comprises a plurality of home agents, at least one mobile node and at least one correspondent node. A first mobile node is configured with at least one topologically correct internet protocol address of a first internet protocol version and is located in a network supporting at least routing of packets having a header of the first internet protocol version. The method comprises the following steps. Communication is requested with a first correspondent node being configured with at least an internet protocol address of a second internet protocol version and being located in a network supporting at least the routing of packets having a header of the second internet protocol version, by an application on the first mobile node. A first of the plurality of home agents is located in proximity to a direct path between the first mobile node and the first correspondent node, the first home agent being located in a network supporting at least the routing of packets to the first mobile node with the packets having a header of the first internet protocol version and the routing of packets to the first correspondent node with the packets having a header of the second internet protocol version. Bootstrapping is carried out with the first home agent to obtain a first home address of the second internet protocol version and other communication parameters. The first mobile node's location is registered with the first home agent by sending a first binding update message comprising a first mobile node's topologically correct address of the first internet protocol version as care-of address and the first home address as home address; and the first home agent is used in bi-directional tunnelling mode, the outer header of the tunnelled packets using the first internet protocol version and the inner header of the tunnelled packets using the second internet protocol version, for communication with the first correspondent node, with the communication parameters set up in the bootstrapping step and the first home address as home address. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284332 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN MULTI CARRIER WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - There is provided a method in which a base station transmits downlink data in a wireless access system supporting multi-carriers. The method comprising negotiating with a terminal about a sleep mode parameter including information on a sleep window and a listening window, if the terminal is operating in a sleep mode, transmitting information on a carrier used for data transmission among the multi-carriers to the terminal through at least one of a medium access control (MAC) header, a MAC control message, and a control channel and transmitting data to the terminal based on the information during the listening window. Accordingly, waste of radio resources can be prevented by making efficient use of the multi-carriers even though the terminal is operating in the sleep mode. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284333 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA SESSION SUSPEND CONTROL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate data session suspend control in a multi-radio wireless communication system based on user equipment capability. As described herein, various techniques are provided herein whereby a wireless communication network with which a user device communicates can suspend a data session and/or other communication session associated with the user device upon identifying that the user device has moved to a disparate communication network based on the transmitter/receiver capabilities of the user device. In one example herein, a mobility management entity and/or other network management entity can determine whether to perform suspend control based on an event notification from another network based on user capability. In another example herein, a network to which a user device moves can determine whether to send an event notification to another network associated with the user device based on capabilities of the user device. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284334 | ASYNCHRONOUS MULTI-CHANNEL ADAPTATION METHOD FOR WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORK - There is provided an asynchronous multi-channel adaptation method. An asynchronous multi-channel adaptation method according to an aspect of the invention may include: a channel scanning operation in which a new node, participating in a wireless ad-hoc network, scans channels and selects a receiving channel thereof; and a receiving channel information transmission operation in which the new node transmits information on the selected receiving channel thereof to a neighboring node. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284335 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A telecommunication system includes a first node, a second node and a network. The first node is configured with a set of predefined functions and a group of addresses of the telecommunication network such that a session setup request targeted to any address in the group of addresses is routed to the first node, and each address in the group of addresses is associated with at least one of the predefined functions. The second node is configured to send a session setup request to a target address that corresponds to an address in the group of addresses. The first node is configured to determine the function to be performed on the basis of the target address in the session setup request. Information delivery from the second node to the first node is implemented quickly. In the second node the power consumption may be significantly reduced. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284336 | METHOD FOR SELECTING A POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION SERVER ON A NON-ROAMING SCENE - The present invention discloses a method for selecting a policy and charging rules function server in a non-roaming scenario to achieve that the PCC policies for each IP-CAN session are determined only by one PCRF. The method comprises of a Diameter Routing Agent (DRA) establishing an association relationship table in which IP Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session information and corresponding address information of a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) server are stored; and when a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF) entity and a Gateway Control Function Entity (GWCF) requests the PCRF for or to update a Policy and Charging Control (PCC) policy of one IP-CAN session, or when an Application Function (AF) entity sends application information or service information down to the PCRF, obtaining the address information of the PCRF associated with said IP-CAN session from said DRA, then performing subsequent processing. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284337 | AD-HOC COMMUNICATION RADIO MODULE, AD-HOC COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING AN AD-HOC COMMUNICATION RADIO MODULE - An ad-hoc communication radio module is provided, which may include at least one of an ad-hoc communication reception circuit; and an ad-hoc communication transmission circuit; and an ad-hoc communication-protocol-stack-external control interface for the ad-hoc communication-protocol-stack-external control of the ad-hoc communication reception circuit or of the ad-hoe communication transmission circuit. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284338 | Method and Transmitting Unit for Reducing a Risk of Transmission Stalling - The present invention relates to a method and a transmitting unit for reducing a risk of transmission stalling between a transmitting unit and a receiving unit in a communication network system comprising said transmitting unit arranged to transmit data blocks to said receiving unit. Each data block comprises a block sequence number and transmitted data blocks are stored in a transmission buffer. A transmission buffer window is arranged to control the flow of retransmission of said transmitted data blocks. When the block sequence number has been acknowledged in a piggybacked acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement field, it is only set as acknowledged upon receipt of a packet uplink acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement message or a packet downlink acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement message comprising an acknowledgement for said block sequence number. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284339 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CYCLIC PREFIX LENGTH INFORMATION - A method of transmitting cyclic prefix length information when wireless access systems having different cyclic prefix lengths coexist is disclosed. The method of transmitting cyclic prefix length information comprises including the cyclic prefix length information in a preamble; and transmitting the preamble to a receiving end, whereby a transmitter can notify the receiving end of a current cyclic prefix length. Also, in a specific interval where a super frame header is defined, a single cyclic prefix length is used in a legacy support mode and a legacy disable mode, and cyclic prefix length information of other data or control channel is included in the super frame header and then transmitted to the receiving end. If different CP lengths are used in a legacy support mode of an evolved system, it is possible to solve a problem in detecting a control channel or a data channel, which may occur as the CP lengths are not distinguished from each other after preamble detection. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284340 | METHOD OF PACKET RETRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION AND WIRELESS DEVICE EMPLOYING THE SAME - A first wireless device communicates data to a second wireless device. The first wireless device employs at least one of a first interleaving scheme and a first sub-carrier mapping scheme to produce a first data packet from a first plurality of data bits, and transmits the first data packet to the second wireless device. When the first data packet is not received correctly by the second wireless device, then the first wireless device employs at least one of a second interleaving scheme and a second sub-carrier mapping scheme to create a second data packet from the first plurality of data bits, and transmits the second data packet to the second wireless device. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284341 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING MULTIPLE QUALITY OF SERVICE LEVELS IN A WIRELESS PACKET DATA SERVICES CONNECTION - The packets generated by each of multiple packet data applications are provided to a single Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) stack and a single High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) framing layer to convert data packets into byte streams suitable for transmission through Radio Link Protocol (RLP) connections. Each of the resultant multiple byte streams is then provided to one of multiple RLP connections having different retransmission and delay properties. The RLP connection selected for sending data from each application is based on the grade of service most appropriate for the application. At the receiver, the data from the multiple RLP connections is provided to a single PPP stack. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284342 | Wireless Communication System, Transmitting Device And Receiving Device - A wireless communication system has a transmitting device and a receiving device that perform communication by using a multi-carrier signal, wherein the receiving device includes a quality generating unit generating each piece of receiving quality information on each pilot channel for transmitting each pilot signal, a determining unit determining the number of pilot channels needed in the multi-carrier signal based on the receiving quality information, and a notifying unit transmitting a signal requesting the determined number of pilot channels to the transmitting device, and the transmitting device includes an allocation unit determining allocations of pilot signals in the direction of the time axis and in the direction of the frequency axis, corresponding to a requested number of pilot channels, and a transmitting unit transmitting the multi-carrier signal having the determined pilot signal allocations. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284343 | PROVIDING A DATA FUNCTION IN AN ACCESS GATEWAY NODE - An access gateway node couples a control node to an external data network, where the control node and access gateway node are for use in a wireless communications network. The access gateway node comprises a data function to route packets containing traffic data between the control node and the external data network. An interface to the control node enables exchange of control messages between the data function and a control function in the control node. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284344 | RADIO PROTOCOL FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Radio protocol for a next generation mobile communication system is disclosed including a radio link control layer for connecting to an upper layer through a service access point provided in advance and for connecting to a lower layer through a plurality of logic channels provided in advance The radio link control layer includes at least one radio link control entity for transmission/reception of data to/from up-link or down-link according to a form of a data transmission mode. | 11-11-2010 |
20100290387 | AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION OF BP MERGER IN MULTI-BAND OFDM ALLIANCE (MBOA) ULTRA WIDE BAND (UWB) SYSTEMS - The current MBOA UWB MAC protocol requires a device that detects alien devices to include a BP Switch IE in its beacon so that its neighbors may learn the presence of the alien devices and follow that device to relocate their beacons in a coordinated fashion. However, during the transition period of beacon relocation, that device may decide to halt the relocation process as required by the standard and such decisions also have to be received by its neighbors. In such a case, a BP switch IE will be generated by that device which includes a BPST offset equal to a length of a superframe. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290388 | INTEGRATED INTERNET MULTIMEDIA AND COMPUTING ACCESS INTERACTIVE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device for integrated interactive multimedia and access to remote computing power and data storage capabilities. The communication device is present in a network and converts the signals received from the network into audio, video or web content. Further, the communication device is capable of accessing remote computing power and data storage capabilities from servers through the network. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290389 | Multi-carrier System Selection - In general, a method performed on a personal base station includes transmitting a first pilot signal to a portable access terminal operating in an idle mode in a macrocell that uses a first carrier frequency. The first pilot signal is transmitted in the first carrier frequency to allow the portable access terminal to temporarily connect to the first pilot signal. A second pilot signal is transmitted in a second frequency that is different than the first frequency. The portable access terminal is dispelled from the first pilot signal, and the portable access terminal is allowed to connect to the second pilot signal. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290390 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING DEVICE NETWORK ACCESS THROUGH A WIRELESS ROUTER - A wireless router comprises a wide area network radio interface configured to enable communications between a wide area network and the wireless router; a local area network radio interface configured to enable communications between the wireless router and a plurality of computing device; memory configured to store instructions; and a processor coupled with memory, the instructions configured to cause the processor to perform the following in response to an activation of the power input: automatically establish a data connection with a base station associated with the wide area network over the wide area network, automatically establish a data connection with the plurality of computing devices over the local area network, automatically discover, for each of the plurality of device, a device type, determine whether the device type is an authorized device type, and allow the associated computing device to access the wide area network only if the device type is an authorized device type. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290391 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ACCESSING MULTIPLE WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present invention provides an apparatus and method for concurrently accessing multiple wireless networks, comprising: a host for allocating a plurality of virtual MAC addresses based on the number of the wireless networks to be accessed, and a plurality of virtual MAC devices each having one of the virtual MAC addresses allocated by the host, for accessing the multiple wireless networks concurrently; wherein a physical address of the apparatus is set as a transmitter or receiver address of frames for accessing the multiple wireless networks concurrently. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290392 | Session and Media Binding to Common Control - There are provided a method and structural means for session and media binding to a common control, in particular to a common policy control. The method may basically comprise extracting a user identification parameter from a private user identity during session registration, retrieving the user identification parameter in accordance with a public user identity during session handling, obtaining a corresponding user identification parameter during bearer handling, and establishing a binding for policy-controlled sessions of the user to a policy control entity on the basis of the user identification parameter. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290393 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a communication terminal that is capable of securing a route having the finest state while suppressing a bandwidth that is consume by a transmission of a control packet at a low level, when applied in an ad-hoc network which uses an electrical power line. The communication terminal included in the ad-hoc network acquires a plurality of route candidates at the beginning of a data transmission by conducting a broadcast transmission of a route creation packet, and acquires a route having the finest state by conducting an unicast transmission of a route estimation packet to each of the route candidates in each predetermined period. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290394 | Method and and an Arrangement for Call Establishment between an Internet Communication Environment and a Mobile Communication Environment - A method of and an arrangement for call establishment between user equipment ( | 11-18-2010 |
20100290395 | SENSOR-BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS USING COMPRESSIVE SAMPLING - Methods, devices and systems for sensor-based wireless communication systems using compressive sampling are provided. In one embodiment, the method for sampling signals comprises receiving, over a wireless channel, a user equipment transmission based on an S-sparse combination of a set of vectors; down converting and discretizing the received transmission to create a discretized signal; correlating the discretized signal with a set of sense waveforms to create a set of samples, wherein a total number of samples in the set is equal to a total number of sense waveforms in the set, wherein the set of sense waveforms does not match the set of vectors, and wherein the total number of sense waveforms in the set of sense waveforms is fewer than a total number of vectors in the set of vectors; and transmitting at least one sample of the set of samples to a remote central processor. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290396 | SPLIT-PLANE WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - A split-plane mobility network architecture separates control and data plane operations typically encapsulated in a conventional wireless controller. Configurations provide a unified split-plane mobility switch that separates the data transport and switching in a separate hardware element, and performs control plane operations via exchanges with a centralized topology, rather than simply by adjacent switches within range. In contrast to conventional switch deployment, in which the same switch handles processing demands of the control plane and the data plane, the disclosed approach separates the data plane processing base by employing a mobility agent to define adjacent switch visibility. Thus, the routing capabilities of the data plane may be enhanced, such as to handle increasingly bandwidth-hungry applications of the same user base, without uprooting the infrastructure defined by the control plane. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290397 | LOCATION BASED LOAD BALANCING OF WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS AND WIRELESS SWITCHES - A method, apparatus and computer program product for performing location based load balancing of wireless access points and wireless switches is presented. A wireless controller (WC) receives an associate message from an Access Point (AP)/wireless switch (WS) at the WC. The WC then determines whether a preferred WC for the AP/WS is available. When the preferred WC is not available, then the WC determines if an alternate WC for the AP is available. When the alternate WC is not available, an administrator configured policy may be used that maps the AP to a specific WC. When the policy does exist then the AP is coupled to the WC according to the policy and when the policy does not exist then the WC parses the AP/WS location information for the AP/WS to determine an available geographically closest WC for the AP/WS and sends a message to the AP/WS relating to the available WC. The WC will also assign an available geographically closest WS to AP. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290398 | Unifying Local and Mobility Network Identifiers - In a mobility domain providing wired and wireless network transport to an enterprise or campus environment, a mobility switch maps a logical network identifier, such as a VLAN ID, to a “home” or wired network VLAN ID so that a mobile device is mapped to the wired VLAN for user identification, IP address consistency, and network policy enforcement. Propagation of the mapping to mobility switches ensures that a roaming user is mapped to the wired network VLAN from a remote L2 switch, and mobility tunnels across L3 boundaries allow roaming into a different broadcast domain or L3 switch connectivity in the mobility domain. Users are assigned to mobility VLAN(s) which are mapped to a VLAN in the wired domain at a mobility switch. The wireless users can roam within the wireless enterprise, or mobility domain, and the network maintains access to the user assigned mobility VLAN(s). | 11-18-2010 |
20100290399 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A DEDICATED PHYSICAL CHANNEL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method and apparatus for determining a transmission configuration for a dedicated channel in a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, an optimum configuration is determined based on minimizing Peak-to-Average Ratio (PAR) of the channel. The configuration is defined as a transmission pair of transmission branch and spreading code. The transmission branch may be the In-Phase (I) branch or the Quadrature (Q) branch. PAR analysis may be performed off-line to determine the optimum configuration. In operation, if the spreading code of the optimum configuration is used by another channel, the next best optimum code is used. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290400 | TRANSMITTING DATA IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is related to transmitting data in a mobile communication system. Preferably, the present invention comprises transmitting first data to a receiving side and receiving acknowledgment information for indicating whether the first data was successfully transmitted to the receiving side. If the first data was not successfully transmitted to the receiving side, the method further comprises determining whether an amount of available radio resources is sufficient for retransmitting the first data to the receiving side, retransmitting the first data to the receiving side if the amount of available radio resources is sufficient to retransmit the first data, reconfiguring the first data into at least one second data if the amount of available radio resources is insufficient to retransmit the first data, wherein the at least one second data can be transmitted to the receiving side using the amount of available radio resources, and transmitting the at least one second data to the receiving side. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290401 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING SIGNAL - A method of transmitting a signal according to the present invention includes: receiving a signal that is encoded with a predetermined code rate and that is modulated by a first modulation method from a base station; creating a signal that is obtained by demodulating the signal that is modulated by the first modulation method using a method corresponding to the first modulation method; creating a signal that is obtained by modulating the demodulated signal using a second modulation method while maintaining the predetermined code rate; and transmitting the signal that is modulated by the second modulation to a mobile station. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290402 | OPTIMIZED MOBILE INTERNET ACCESS - The present invention is directed to a method and a mobile node and a node arrangement for performing the method, which method is for selecting a connection ( | 11-18-2010 |
20100290403 | METHOD OF ACCESS PROVISION - A method is proposed for providing a mobile terminal associated with a user with access to a visited Internet Protocol based mobile communication network. The mobile terminal generates a network information element that comprises a home network identifying element that identifies a home network of the user, and a domain name of the visited IP based mobile communication network as a base domain identifier. The mobile terminal then provides this special network information element to the visited IP based mobile communication network, which executes a subscription generating procedure for generating a subscription for the user upon recognizing the special network information element and provides the mobile terminal access based on the generated subscription. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290404 | INTEGRATED CIRCUIT THAT CONTROLS TRANSMISSION OF A RANDOM ACCESS SIGNAL - A communication terminal apparatus that exhibits a shorter time period required until a start of communication and causes the throughput in the wireless communication system to be less reduced. In this apparatus, when the number, N, of retransmissions notified by a response determining part ( | 11-18-2010 |
20100296436 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a data transmission method in a mobile communication system. The data transmission method through a code sequence in a mobile communication system includes grouping input data streams into a plurality of blocks consisting of at least one bit so as to map each block to a corresponding signature sequence, multiplying a signature sequence stream, to which the plurality of blocks are mapped, by a specific code sequence, and transmitting the signature sequence stream multiplied by the specific code sequence to a receiver. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296437 | DYNAMIC MULTI-POINT ACCESS NETWORK - A router is operatively coupled to a plurality of local computers and has one or more connections to a remote computer network for managing one or more data routes between the local computers and the remote computer network. In providing dynamic access to the remote computer network by any of the local computers, one or more of the connection(s) of the router to the remote computer network includes one or more wireless connections independent of the router between the local computers and the remote computer network. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296438 | UP-LINK SDMA RECEIVER FOR WiMAX - A method, a system and a receiver device provide timing and frequency correction in a spatial division multiple access (SDMA) system. A timing and frequency correction (TFC) logic/utility obtains a timing error estimate by using pilot symbols on a slot of six tiles. The TFC logic estimates the timing error based on pilot phase differences between unique pairs of tiles when the frequency separation of the tiles is less than a threshold value. When none of the unique pairs of tiles satisfies the threshold value, the TFC logic estimates timing error based on an exhaustive search for each candidate phase error value. The TFC logic performs timing error correction via a timing error estimate based on pilots from the symbols received on each antenna. The TFC logic performs inexplicit frequency error correction according to phase differences based on relative symbol indices. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296439 | MULTI-FUNCTION WIRELESS APPARATUS - Systems and methods which provide a multi-function wireless node are shown. Multi-function wireless nodes of embodiments provide link completion infrastructure suited for a plurality of situations and environments, such as for repeaters, bridges, gateways, and APs. Embodiments provide a multi-function wireless node comprising a plurality of radios. Multi-function wireless nodes of embodiments further comprise a smart antenna system coupled to radios thereof and providing illumination within a service volume. The service volume of embodiments comprises a semi-spherical volume. Embodiments comprise a controller facilitating proper and/or optimal deployment and commissioning of the multi-function wireless node in each of a plurality of different link completion infrastructure forms. Embodiments further comprise a communication interface providing one or more information communication links in addition to those available through wireless links. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296440 | UNICAST STREAM DISTRIBUTION FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. According to an example embodiment, a technique may include establishing, by a primary wireless station, a first wireless connection with a transmitting wireless station; receiving, at the primary wireless station from the transmitting wireless station via the first wireless connection, a unicast data stream that is directed to the primary wireless station; providing data stream identification information from the primary wireless station to a secondary wireless station, the data stream identification information to allow the secondary wireless station to receive the unicast data stream that is directed to the primary wireless station. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296441 | WIRELESS INTERNET SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method for providing a wireless Internet connection to WiFi-enabled devices (STAs) comprising: wirelessly connecting a first STA to the Internet through a first AP with a first SSID; remaining connected to the first Access Point (AP), the first STA creates a software-based wireless AP with a second SSID for wirelessly connecting other STAs to the Internet through the first STA. A software module running on the first STA allows a second STA a wide access to the Internet only if the second STA has a copy of the software module running installed and active therein. A method for configuring STAs to connect to a wireless network, comprising: a customer first connects a STA by wire to its network; a software on the STA copies to the STA the security information gained through the wired connection, thus setting the security parameters for the STA. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296442 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - An origination terminal UA | 11-25-2010 |
20100296443 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTE-OPTIMIZED COMMUNICATION FOR A MOBILE NODE NESTED IN A MOBILE NETWORK - When a mobile host or mobile router in nested mobile network is roaming in a domain with multiple mobility anchor points, if the mobile host or mobile router in the nested mobile network tree path chooses different mobility anchor points to derive its regional care-of address, routing sub-optimality may occur. To overcome such routing sub-optimality, this invention presents two main methods. The first method is where the mobile router detects that a downstream node in its tree path has derived a regional care-of address from another mobility anchor point, and will make appropriate on-demand duplicate registration at the other mobility anchorpoint. The second method is such that the mobile router informs its own mobility anchor point of other mobility anchor point addresses, so that the mobile router's mobility anchor point will pass the location entries of the mobile router to the other mobility anchor points. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296444 | System and Method for Providing Voice Communications Over a Multi-Level Secure Network - According to one embodiment, a communication network includes an analog voice bridge coupled to two secure network domains that each have a differing security level. The analog voice bridge includes two codecs that are coupled together through an analog voice line that transfers analog voice signals. The analog voice bridge is coupled to each secure network domain through a network switch that transfers data packet streams from their respective networks to the codecs while restricting data packets that are not associated with the data packet stream. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296445 | System and Apparatus for Local Mobility Anchor Discovery By Service Name Using Domain Name Service - An apparatus comprising a mobile access gateway (MAG) configured to register an Internet Protocol (IP) address for a mobile node (MN) with a local mobility anchor (LMA) to allow proxy mobile IP version 6 (PMIPv6) mobility management for the MN, wherein the MAG communicates a query message that comprises a PMIPv6 service name to a Domain Name Service (DNS) and obtains the IP address of the LMA from the DNS. Also disclosed is a network component comprising at least one processor coupled to a memory and configured to send a DNS query for a plurality of Service Resource Records (SRV RRs), and receive a DNS reply that comprises a plurality of Fully Qualified Domain Names (FQDNs) for a plurality of LMAs, wherein the DNS query comprises a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol version 6 (PMIPv6) service name, a protocol name, and a domain name. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296446 | DYNAMIC SWITCHING BETWEEN MIMO AND DC HSDP - A communication device configured for dynamic switching between Multiple-Input and Multiple-Output (MIMO) and Dual-Cell High Speed Downlink Packet Access (DC HSDPA) is disclosed. The communication device includes a processor and instructions stored in memory. The communication device begins a connection setup for one or more wireless communication devices, obtains MIMO and DC HSDPA capabilities for the one or more wireless communication devices and optimizes the coexistence of MIMO and DC HSDPA. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296447 | Remote unit, and signal transmission and reception method of remote unit - A remote unit including: a first communication apparatus including a first amplification portion that amplifies a signal from a console, the amplified signal being outputted to an information processing apparatus; and a second communication apparatus including a second amplification portion that receives a reply signal to the signal from the information processing apparatus via the first communication apparatus, and amplifies the received reply signal, the reply signal amplified by the second amplification portion being outputted to the console. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296448 | Scalable Deployment of Network Nodes - A method for communicating between nodes in a communication system. Communicating in a first node in a radio access network and a second node in a core network using messages associated with a first set of operations connecting the first node to the core network. Communicating in the first node with other nodes of the radio access network using messages associated with a second set of operations connecting the radio access network nodes. Communicating in the first node with a third node using messages associated with a third set of operations, the third set of operations providing at least part of the operations provided by the first and second set of operations. The scalability of the core network nodes is enhanced when the number of the radio access network nodes connecting to the core network nodes increases. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296449 | MOBILE STATION, RADIO BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station according to the present invention includes: a packet discarder unit (102, 103) configured to discard a packet in an uplink transmission buffer, after assigning a sequence number to the packet, when a predetermined condition is met. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296450 | TRANSMISSION METHODS, NETWORK EQUIPMENT, USER EQUIPMENT AND TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmission between network equipment and user equipment, a method of network equipment transmission, a method of user equipment reception, a network equipment, an user equipment and a telecommunications system are disclosed. Packets transmitted over a channel containing information elements are multiplexed in accordance with a predetermined format in which each information element has an identifier which identifies that information element within that packet. The method comprises the steps of: determining that a packet to be transmitted over the channel will not contain more than one information element; transmitting an indicator between the network equipment and the user equipment to indicate that the packet to be transmitted over the channel will be encoded with a revised format in which no identifiers are provided; transmitting a packet over the channel encoded with the revised format with any identifiers omitted; and decoding the packet received over the data channel in accordance with the revised format to extract the information element. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296451 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING RANDOM ACCESS PREAMBLE - Base Station (BS) and User Equipment (UE) apparatuses for configuring a Random Access CHannel (RACH), and methods thereof, are provided. The method for a BS to configure a RACH includes generating configuration information on RACH resources, transmitting the configuration information on the RACH resources to a UE, receiving a random access preamble multiplexed on a plurality of continuous RACH resources from the UE, extracting the random access preamble multiplexed on the plurality of continuous RACH resources, and detecting the extracted random access preamble. The method for a UE to configure a RACH includes receiving configuration information on RACH resources from a BS, selecting occupied RACH resources among a plurality of continuous RACH resources, generating a random access preamble, multiplexing the generated random access preamble on the selected RACH resources, and transmitting the random access preamble on the selected RACH resources to the BS. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296452 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND RESPONSE SIGNAL DIFFUSION METHOD - Provided is a radio communication device which can suppress inter-code interference between an ACK/NACK signal and a CQI signal which are code-multiplexed. In this device, a diffusion unit ( | 11-25-2010 |
20100296453 | APPARATUS AND METHOD COMPRISING AT LEAST ONE RESOURCE RECORD - Embodiments provide a method and apparatus configured to store at least one record which comprises information on an address of an access point and on the type of the access point. The method or apparatus may return the information on the address and on the type of the access point in response to a query request requesting the address of the access point. The apparatus may be a domain name server. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296454 | METHOD OF DOWNLINK HARQ OPERATION AT AN EXPIRY OF TIME ALIGNMENT TIMER - Disclosed is the radio (wireless) communication system providing a radio communication service and the terminal, and more particularly, to a method of a downlink HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest) operation of terminal that is not time-aligned with the base station in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) evolved from the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296455 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONSTRUCTING NETWORK THEREBY - When a connection is made to a wireless network constructed by a base station, a request to construct a wireless network in which a wireless communication apparatus operates as a base station is sensed and a determination is made as to whether communication is in progress with a communication apparatus of a network different from the wireless network constructed by the base station. If the request to construct the wireless network is sensed and it is determined that communication is in progress with a communication apparatus of a network different from the wireless network in which the base station is the intermediary, then an attempt is made to construct a wireless network in which the wireless communication apparatus operates as a base station. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296456 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATING AND ASSISTANT LOCATING IN PHS NETWORK - The present invention proposes a method and apparatus for locating and assistant locating in PHS Network, which uses PHS Packet IP connection to provide real time location services to all mobile stations. In the present invention, the location services use PHS Packet IP connection without voice circuit occupation and more importantly, the present invention provides real time location services to all PHS Packet subscribers. Base on this invention, the CSID and Geographic Information which includes but not limited to the information of longitude and latitude will be transmitted upon PHS Packet IP connection from end to end. Moreover, the present invention could provide more attractive location based services (like real time tracing, navigation, etc.) | 11-25-2010 |
20100296457 | RADIO BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION AND METHOD OF CONNECTING THE SAME TO NETWORK - There are provided a radio base transceiver station and a method of connecting the same to a network, whereby a home radio base transceiver station is connectable in an automated manner to a network (network) of a mobile communications operator and the security is ensured in the reception of information. A network interface section | 11-25-2010 |
20100303003 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENTLY COMMUNICATING INFORMATION USING A PROXY - Methods for communicating discovery information are described. A module intercepts messages within a device which include a first identifier, e.g., a service, application, device or other identifier which is to be communicated or which is to be monitored for in the case of a device seeking something. A second identifier corresponding to the information to be communicated or item or service being sought is generated. The second identifier is transmitted in the case of an advertisement or monitored for in the case of the device seeking something. Following a second device establishing a communications connection in response to an advertisement, stored information such as all or a portion of the first identifier is transmitted over the established connection. A device seeking an item or service, in response to detecting the second identifier, establishes a connection with the second device. The second identifier maybe shorter than the first identifier. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303004 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-DIMENSIONAL DATA PERMUTATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus that seek to increase the diversity seen in wireless communication systems by intelligently implementing a joint multi-dimensional permutation approach. In an exemplary embodiment, this is accomplished by combining the permutation of various transmitter antennas, various data streams (for example, in a MIMO configuration) and various constellation-bit mappings into a coherent multi-dimensional permutation scheme. Subsequent retransmissions in combination with an initial transmission are utilized to obtain substantial signal flattening at a receiver which increases the likelihood that retransmissions that follow detected errors will successfully convey the transmitted data to the receiver. Both open and closed-loop approaches are contemplated which take advantage of the multi-dimensional permutation schemes. In addition, embodiments utilized in the context of retransmission mechanisms such as HARQ are also contemplated. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303005 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PROVIDE DIFFERENTIATED ROUTING IN MULTI-HOP MULTI-RADIO WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method provides for differentiating usage permissions between different categories of communication traffic within a given network. The method includes ensuring one or more categories of traffic never transits communication radios, link, and/or spectrums dedicated to a different category of traffic. A combined routing metric is calculated using a scaling factor for discouraging usage of restricted communication links and encouraging usage of non-restricted communication links. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303006 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING DATA PACKETS TO AND FROM MOBILE NODES IN A DATA NETWORK - Methods for transmitting packets using a Mobile IP protocol between a mobile node and a first node in a data network after the mobile node has transmitted data packets to the first node via a first router from a first CoA or CCoA address and by a first security association with the first node. One method includes the mobile node, sending to the first node via a second router using a second CoA or CCoA address, data packets that include an identifier of the mobile node that enables the first node to identify the mobile node as the sender of the data packets during an initial time period after transmission of the data packets via the second router has started, and during the initial time period, the mobile node authenticates the data packets it transmits to the first node using the first security association with the first node. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303007 | Technique for Performing GSM/WCDMA Circuit Switched Services Over a Long Term Evolution Radio Access - A method of performing CS (Circuit Switched) services over a LTE (Long Term Evolution) access comprises: performing CM (Connection Management) procedures via an AGW (Access Gateway); and performing MM (Mobility Management) procedures via a MME (Mobility Management Entity). | 12-02-2010 |
20100303008 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING EXTENDED CONNECTIVITY VIA PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION - Techniques for supporting communication with extended connectivity via peer-to-peer communication are described. In one design, a first device may determine at least one radio selected for use on a second device. The first device may communicate with at least one communication network via the at least one radio on the second device. At least one application running on the first device may be mapped to the radio(s) on the second device based on the capabilities of the radio(s) and the requirements of the application(s). In another design, the first device may communicate with a first communication network via the second device and may receive configuration information sent to it via the second device. The first device may access a second communication network using the configuration information, which may include authentication information for the first device for the second communication network. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303009 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING ACCESS GATEWAY AND GATEWAY SELECTION EXECUTION NODE IN MOBILE PACKET DOMAIN - A method and system for selecting a gateway and a gateway selection execution node in the mobile packet domain are disclosed. The method includes: encapsulating, by a gateway selection execution node upon reception of a bearer setup request transmitted from a User Equipment, an operator domain name corresponding to the bearer setup request into a DNS parse request when creating the DNS parse request, and transmitting the DNS parse request to a DNS server; parsing by the DNS server for obtaining the address of an access gateway; returning by the DNS server, to the gateway selection execution node, a DNS parse result containing the address information of the access gateway corresponding to the operator domain name; selecting by the gateway selection execution node according to the address information the access gateway corresponding to the operator domain name as the access gateway corresponding to the bearer setup request. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303010 | CIRCUIT-SWITCHED CALL CONTROL VIA AN IP USER CHANNEL CONNECTION IN THE ACCESS NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for implementing call control in packet-switched networks, wherein a connection is established between two communications partners by means of static multiplexing in a network and the use of the network for telephone services on an application level, causing signaling between two participating terminal devices. In the course of the general development of the internet, it seems reasonable for operators of conventional telecommunications networks to operate their telephone services via packet-switched networks. However, the establishment of a completely new SIP-based protocol world is disadvantageous for an operator that wishes only to continue its known telephone services. As a result, the operator has the aim of enhancing the transfer of protocols such that the protocols known from circuit-switched technology may be transferred in a simplified fashion to packet-switched networks. Said aim is achieved in that a user channel is configured in the packet-switched access network, wherein call control occurs by means of a circuit-switched signaling via the IP user channel. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303011 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPONENT CARRIER AGGREGATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) receives a downlink subframe having multiple component carriers, each component carrier having control information encoded in a physical data control channel (PDCCH). The WTRU performs a blind decoding of control information in a first PDCCH located within a first component carrier to obtain a location of a second PDCCH located within a second component carrier, where the location of the second PDCCH is relative to a location of the first PDCCH as control channel element offset. The WTRU decodes the second PDCCH at the obtained location. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303012 | Fall Back Using Mobile Device Assisted Terminating Access Domain Selection - Fall back using mobile device assisted terminating access domain selection is provided. A network entity forwards an invitation to a session to a mobile device. Session has packet switched bearers for media. Mobile device replies with a rejection of the invitation and a request for network entity to hold the session. Rejection is based on mobile device determining circuit switched bearers should be utilized. Mobile device sends a circuit switched call and network entity correlates the circuit switched call with the session. A dialog is set up over circuit switched domain bearers and Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem bearers. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303013 | DYNAMIC SELECTION OF SUBFRAME FORMATS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques for dynamically selecting subframe formats in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, a base station may dynamically switch between different subframe formats to support communication for different types of user equipments (UEs). In one design, the base station may declare a set of subframes as multicast/broadcast single frequency network (MBSFN) subframes for first/legacy UEs. The base station may send signaling conveying the set of subframes as MBSFN subframes to the legacy UEs. The base station may dynamically select the formats of the set of subframes for second/new UEs, e.g., on a per subframe basis. The format of each subframe may be selected from a plurality of formats, which may include at least one regular subframe format, at least one MBSFN subframe format, and/or at least one blank subframe format. The base station may send transmissions in the set of subframes based on the selected formats. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303014 | PEER TO PEER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system includes a plurality of headsets, each embodying a wireless transceiver, and wherein communication can be established between the headsets via the wireless transceivers over a network in which the headsets act as nodes. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303015 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CALIBRATION FOR COOPERATIVE MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for multi-cell calibration in a wireless communication system supporting cooperative Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) are provided. Operations of a Base Station (BS) according to the method include transmitting a first message indicating a start of multi-cell sounding calibration to a reference Mobile Station (MS); estimating an uplink channel matrix of the reference MS using pilot symbols received from the reference MS; transmitting pilot symbols for enabling the reference MS to estimate a downlink channel matrix; when receiving downlink channel information of cooperative BSs from the reference MS, transmitting second messages comprising the downlink channel information to the cooperative BSs; and determining a multi-cell calibration matrix using the uplink channel matrix and the downlink channel information received from the reference MS. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303016 | System and Method for Transport Block Size Design for Multiple-Input, Multiple-Output (MIMO) in a Wireless Communications System - In one embodiment, a method for transmitting information includes processing a downlink transport channel to generate a transport block (TB) having a TB size. The TB size is selected by selecting a modulation and coding scheme index (I | 12-02-2010 |
20100303017 | Wireless Communication System - Improvement of transmission efficiency is sought by stopping transmission of unnecessary MLI data. A transmitting circuit | 12-02-2010 |
20100303018 | Specialized Data Transfer in a Wireless Communication System - A wireless communication system and method is provided for the transfer and processing of data in accordance with specialized data transfer protocols while utilizing conventional base station equipment. For example, the wireless communication system may include a subscriber station that provides for the modification of data packets in accordance with a proprietary protocol and the addressing of the modified data packets to a server. The server is adapted to reconstruct the data packets for transmission to other local subscriber stations or to a packet-switched network. In additional embodiments, the base station itself rather than a server operates to reconstruct the data packets. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303019 | RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE AND CORRELATION SETTING METHOD - Provided is a radio communication base station device which can suppress a use amount of an SRS communication resource. In this device, a correlation rule setting unit ( | 12-02-2010 |
20100303020 | EVENT AND DATA MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method for transferring data based on an event function is provided. The method includes receiving an event function from an event initiator. The event function is distributed to one or more destinations associated with event performers. A response message is received as a function of destination and time. It is determined whether the time is less than or equal to a limit time, and it is further determined whether an event parameter is greater than or equal to an event constant if the time is less than or equal to the limit time. Data is transferred from a data origination system accessible by the event initiator to a data destination system accessible by the event performer if the event parameter is greater than or equal to the event constant and if the time is less than or equal to the limit time. | 12-02-2010 |
20100309840 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD USED IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A disclosed radio communication apparatus includes a unit receiving a broadcast channel including a system frame number (SFN), a control channel including a process number (Proc) and a new data identification, and a user data channel including a sequence number; a unit detecting whether a received first packet includes an error and reporting the detection result indicating ACK or NACK to a transmitter side; a unit detecting whether the control channel has not been correctly received in the past based on the process number and the new packet identification information of a second packet transmitted after the first packet; and a unit reporting an indicator including the SFN at which the second packet is transmitted to the transmitter side, so that a packet is re-transmitted, the packet being transmitted to the radio communication apparatus by a preceding SFN that precedes an SFN at which the second packet is transmitted. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309841 | Robust Multipath Routing - Implementations related to robust multipath routing are disclosed. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309842 | WIRELESS STATION CLUSTERING IN COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATIONS - A wireless system includes a cluster ( | 12-09-2010 |
20100309843 | Apparatus and Method for Providing Mobility to IMS Sessions in Mobile IP Networks - An apparatus and method for providing mobility to IMS sessions comprising connecting to an APN through a 3GPP access; determining if a non-3GPP access is available; determining if the APN is specific to an IMS application being used or desired to be used, or if an IP header of an IMS application flow matches a configured pattern; and performing one of: a) triggering an IMS Session Continuity flow through the non-3GPP access for the IMS application based on one of the following: if the APN is specific to the IMS application or if the IP header of the IMS application flow matches the configured pattern; or b) triggering an IP mobility flow through the non-3GPP access for the IMS application or a non-IMS application if the APN is not specific to the IMS application and if the IP header of the IMS application flow does not match the configured pattern. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309844 | INTEGRATED SENSOR NETWORKS WITH OPTICAL AND WIRELESS LINKS - Systems and methods are disclosed for communicating data in an integrated sensor network having one or more nodes coupled to an optical sensor network and a radio frequency wireless sensor network, each node having an optical link and a wireless link. The method includes determining a transmission path having one or more hybrid hops for packet transmission over the optical sensor network and the radio frequency wireless sensor network, each hybrid hop including optical and wireless links between two neighboring nodes; and selecting a set of optical and wireless links for the optical sensor network and the radio frequency wireless sensor network to minimize contiguous wireless links. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309845 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for transmitting data in a transmitting device of a wireless network comprises transmitting one or more data packets to a receiving device via a reserved region comprising channel resources allocated by a coordinator, and transmitting channel time extension information for requesting channel time extension to the receiving device, in order to transmit the data packets on an unreserved region in which the coordinator does not allocate channel resources to any devices. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309846 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for use in a communications network in which a Mobile Node accesses the communications network via a proxy node. The proxy node receives a filter rule from the Mobile Node. The filter rule includes a filter rule identifier and at least one rule for applying to packets relating to the Mobile Node. The proxy node forwards the filter rule to a mobility anchor function, and also sends to the mobility anchor function information associating the filter rule to a Binding Unique Identifier, which is associated with a care-of address associated with the Mobile Node. The Binding Unique Identifier is stored at the mobility anchor function. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309847 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMS APPLICATION DOMAIN SELECTION AND MOBILITY - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a multimode access terminal, capable of accessing IMS services through a plurality of wireless domains, includes a domain selector for selecting among the plurality of domains based on selection criteria such as RF signal quality, QoS, and pre-configured policies stored in memory. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309848 | TRANSMISSION COORDINATION WITHIN MULTIPLE USER, MULTIPLE ACCESS, AND/OR MIMO WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Transmission coordination within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. Within wireless communication systems, there can be various wireless communication devices therein that are not all compliant with a common capability set, communication protocol, communication standard, recommended practice, etc. For example, some communication systems may have some wireless communication devices characterized as ‘legacy’ wireless communication devices, and other wireless communication devices therein may be newer and compliant with newer capability sets, communication protocols, communication standards, recommended practices, etc. In such instances, coordination of transmissions among the various wireless communication devices may be made, when performing simultaneous transmissions, by ensuring that transmissions of devices on different channels is made when aligned on a common boundary of an OFDM symbol. Alternatively, such simultaneous transmissions may be made when offset by some multiple of OFDM symbol duration. When performing non-simultaneous transmissions, transmissions may be made based on channel availability. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309849 | METHOD OF LOW DUTY MODE OPERATION FOR FEMTO BASE STATION - A method of an efficient low duty mode (LDM) operation for a femto base station is disclosed. The method of a low duty mode (LDM) operation for a femto base station comprises operating at an available interval of a first length according to a default LDM pattern; and operating at an unavailable interval of a second length according to the default LDM pattern, wherein the available interval begins with a frame including a first preamble, the first preamble including information of carrier configuration and system bandwidth. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309850 | POWER CONTROL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of power control in a wireless communications system wherein blocks are transmitted from a transmitter to a receiver via a wireless transmission channel. The method comprises comparing a target signal quality value with a received signal quality value and providing the results of the comparing step to the transmitter to adjust transmit power based on the comparing step. The target signal quality value is set by the following steps: determining an initial target value; determining if received blocks have been successfully decoded; identifying the received blocks as pass or fail blocks; when pass blocks are received, comparing the target signal quality value with the received signal quality value and decreasing the target value only if the target value is greater than the received signal quality value less a margin. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309851 | HARDWARE-CENTRIC MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) DEVICE - A hardware-centric medium access control (MAC) device comprises a control plane module and a hardware media access planed module. The control plane module is configured for providing control functions of the hardware-centric MAC device. The hardware media access plane module communicatively coupled to the control plane module is configured for performing real-time data communication functions without requiring a microprocessor. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309852 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SRS IN LTE TDD SYSTEM - The method for transmitting an uplink SRS by an LTE UE comprising steps of: the UE receiving information N indicating SRS transmission; generating an SRS sequence by the UE; and the UE transmitting the SRS in two OFDM symbol in a half-frame or frame if the information N indicates that a period of SRS transmission is 2 ms. With present invention, a format of SRS in LTE FDD and LTE TDD will be the same. Meanwhile, a problem of supporting 2 ms period in the LTE TDD system is solved. | 12-09-2010 |
20100315994 | PARTICIPANT RESPONSE SYSTEM WITH FACILITATED COMMUNICATIONS BANDWIDTH - A participant response system ( | 12-16-2010 |
20100315995 | CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A METHOD OF OPERATION THEREFOR - A cellular communication system comprises a media gateway ( | 12-16-2010 |
20100315996 | HOST APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND TANGIBLE MACHINE-READABLE MEDIUM THEREOF - A host apparatus, a transmission method and a tangible machine-readable medium storing a program of the transmission method for use in the host apparatus are provided. The host apparatus is for use in a wireless network which comprises a plurality of access points and a mobile node. The access points are wirelessly connected to the host apparatus. The host apparatus stores a statistics table relating to the mobile node. The host apparatus may be aware of the possible moving paths about the mobile node and proceed the data transmission with the mobile node via the access points in the possible moving paths, so as to save the resource of the wireless network. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315997 | Method of exchanging messages, sink device and source device - A method of exchanging messages for switching of a sink device of a wireless network to a source device comprises receiving audio/video (A/V) data from a first source device; transmitting a first command to a second source device within the wireless network to identify whether the second source device can transmit A/V data; receiving a second command from the first source device, the second command being transmitted from the second source device in response to the first command and including indication information indicating whether the second source device can transmit A/V data; and determining whether to switch to the second source device depending on the indication information included in the second command. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315998 | Communication Apparatus, Base Station Apparatus And Data Reception Timing Synchronizing Method - A communication apparatus comprises a processing information acquiring unit to acquire a processing delay time, a transmission information acquiring unit to acquire each transmission delay time, a collecting unit to collect each arrival time from nodes onward from each of the subordinated nodes, a calculating unit to calculate the time after distribution data is received by the self-node until it arrives at each of the terminals as the arrival time from the home node onward for each of the nodes through which the distribution data is routed based on the processing delay time, the transmission delay times, and each the arrival time from the node onward, and a transmission control unit to control the transmission timing of the distribution data to at least one of the nodes based on the arrival times from the home node onward for each of the nodes. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315999 | USE OF BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT POLICY FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. According to an example embodiment, a technique may include receiving, via a wireless network, a frame indicating whether or not regular acknowledgements may be used (or alternatively indicating whether or not data frames with fragmented payloads may be used), in addition to block acknowledgements. In example embodiments, an Add Block Acknowledgement (ADDBA) response frame or a block Acknowledgement may be received indicating whether or not regular acknowledgements may be used to acknowledge receipt of data frames, or alternatively, indicating whether or not data frames with fragmented payloads may be transmitted. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316000 | METHOD FOR ACCESSING A SERVICE UNAVAILABLE THROUGH A NETWORK CELL - In an access device associated with a first network cell, a method for enabling user equipment (UE) to obtain a service unavailable through the first network cell includes receiving a request for the UE to access the service, and identifying, in a message to the UE, a plurality of second network cells providing the service. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316001 | Method of Transmitting Synchronized Speech and Video - In a method and mobile station for transmitting speech data over a packet data connection and video-data over a packet switched connection information about the rendering and capturing clocks for both a Circuit switched (CS) speech connection and a Packet Switched (PS) video connection are determined by a transmitter. The information is transmitted to a receiver and the receiver uses the information to enable synchronization between the speech connection and the video connection. | 12-16-2010 |
20100322151 | BACKHAUL HEADER COMPRESSION - A telecommunications network, and particularly a mobility management entity (MME) ( | 12-23-2010 |
20100322152 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless transmission scheme for transmitting images utilizing a cross layer method integrated the slice allocation and multiple modulation and coding modes selection without the need of feedback channel. The scheme divides a coded image into isolated coded slices, wherein each slice represents a region of the image and each slice is then modulated using modulation schemes of differing robustness. Data of most interest is received by all receivers, with some receivers receiving more data in areas with good channel conditions. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322153 | HARQ ADAPTATION FOR ACQUISITION OF NEIGHBOR CELL SYSTEM INFORMATION - A method in a mobile station including receiving an order from a serving cell for system information acquisition of a neighbor cell, wherein the order includes at least a physical cell identifier and a time limit for acquisition of the system information of the neighbor cell, acquiring the system information of the neighbor cell within the time limit for the acquisition of the system information, and reporting at least a part of the acquired system information to the serving cell. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322154 | CONTROL CHANNEL DESIGN FOR DYNAMIC SUB-FRAME SELECTION - Certain aspects of the disclosure relate to providing detailed control channel design for a dynamic selection scheme between normal subframes and special subframes. In one aspect, a method may be provided for generating a subframe that comprises a data region and at least one control region interpretable by a first group of one or more legacy User Equipments (UEs) as a first type and by a second group of non-legacy UEs as a second type, wherein the second group of UEs supports a plurality of features that are a superset of a plurality of features supported by the first group and transmitting the subframe to the first group and the second group of UEs. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322155 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System - A method is provides in a receiving node for handling status information of data units transmitted from a sending node to the receiving node over a radio link. The receiving node establishes ( | 12-23-2010 |
20100329177 | AP-LOCAL DYNAMIC SWITCHING - A technique for implementing AP-local dynamic switching involves Layer 2 switching. This may be accomplished by providing data associated with wireless stations to an AP sufficient to enable the AP to determine whether traffic from a particular wireless station should be locally switched. Alternatively, the wireless station may be able to determine whether to locally switch traffic based upon the traffic itself. For example, it may be desirable to AP-locally switch voice traffic to avoid latency, which is particularly detrimental to voice transmissions such as voice-over-IP. Traffic that is not to be switched locally is Layer 2 tunneled upstream. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329178 | Use of delayed clear-to-send and denial-to-send in directional wireless networks - For directional wireless communications, at least one new response to a Request-to-Send (RTS) message has been created to avoid a hidden-node problem that is particular to directional networks. In response to an RTS received during a NAV period, a Denial-to-Send (DTS) may be transmitted to indicate that the responding device cannot currently communicate further because its NAV is currently set, but it will be ready to communicate after expiration of the time period specified in the DTS. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329179 | Wireless access point with digital television capabilities - In some embodiments a wireless access point receives digital television content. The digital television content is transmitted in a wireless manner over a wireless network of the wireless access point. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329180 | METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING SPATIAL DIVERSITY GAIN OF A SET OF NODES USED FOR COOPERATIVE SENSING - A group of nodes used for sensing in a cooperative sensing communication system ( | 12-30-2010 |
20100329181 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DUAL-MODE WIMAX/CDMA OPERATION - A system, computer-readable medium, and method of operating a dual-mode WiMAX and CDMA communications device capable of operating in a CDMA mode or a WiMAX mode includes receiving a first base station (BS) location message from the BS and storing the received location as a current BS location. The BS location is compared to stored region coordinates for the different regions, and the comparison is used to determine a particular region in which the dual-mode device is currently located. Analysis determines whether a WiMAX market is located within the particular region. If no WiMAX markets are located, the dual-mode device is operated in the CDMA mode. If one or more WiMAX markets are located within the particular region, a determination is made as to whether the BS location is within a WiMAX market and, if so, the dual-mode device is placed in a WiMAX mode of operation. Battery power is conserved by avoiding WiMAX transmission when WiMAX service is not available at the current BS location. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329182 | Apparatus, Methods, Computer Program Products And Systems Providing RACH Parameters In A Broadcast Channel For A Random Access Procedure - In one non-limiting, exemplary embodiment, a method includes: receiving at least one parameter from a broadcast channel ( | 12-30-2010 |
20100329183 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - A communication terminal providing optimal communication services between content providers comprising a property management table with an appraised value registered for each of a predetermined set of communication media properties for various types of communication media, a first user specified priority ranking list and a second priority ranking list specified by an application program provider with rankings for the set of communication media properties, whereby the desired communication medium is selected by adding weightings for priority from the first and second priority ranking lists and adding the appraised value for each item from the property management table and using the highest total to specify the optimum communication medium for use when commencement of communication is specified by a predetermined application program, and establishing communication connections between opposing devices using the selected optimum communication medium. Also disclosed are a communication system, control device and program including the communication terminal's elements. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329184 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MOBILE IP ROUTE OPTIMIZATION - The present application relates to network mobility (e.g., mobility in an IPv6 network). More specifically, the present application discloses systems and methods for enabling mobile nodes to switch to a routing optimization mode using a minimum of mobility messages. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329185 | SUBSCRIBER STATION, BASE STATION, AND SERVICE FLOW ESTABLISHING METHOD - A subscriber station in communication with a base station transmits a request (REQ) packet to the base station to request an establishment of service flow between the subscriber station and the base station, starts a first timer to time a preset period determined according to the REQ packet, receive a response (RSP) packet from the base station to determine if the base station currently permits the establishment of service flow with the subscriber station. The subscriber station further receives a RSP-DELAY packet from the base station before the first timer times out if the base station does not currently permit the establishment of service flow with the subscriber station, and establishes the service flow with the base station according to the RSP-DELAY packet. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329186 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PREAMBLE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for reducing a Peak to Average Power Ratio (PAPR) of a Secondary Advanced (SA) preamble in a wireless communication system are provided. A method for transmitting an SA preamble includes determining an SA preamble, constructed in a unit of subblocks, according to a frequency band to be used for transmitting information, determining a sequence for reducing a PAPR of the SA preamble in consideration of at least one of a frequency band, a segment IDentifier (ID), and the number of antennas transmitting the SA preamble, updating the SA preamble using the determined sequence, and transmitting the updated SA preamble to a receive end. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329187 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION - A method for decoding a wireless transmission in a communication system, particularly for mobile communications, comprising a plurality of receiver stations communicatively coupled to a common decoder station, wherein the receiver stations transmit digital representations of received user signals to the common decoding entity. These digital representations are initially transmitted to the common decoder station in coarse granularity, and in case the decoder station cannot decode the transmitted digital representations of one or multiple user signals, the decoder requests a refined digital representation of the received signals from at least one receiver station. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329188 | Method for Handling Transmission Status and Related Communication Device - A method for handling transmission and transmission status information for a relay capable of conveying data between a mobile device and a base station in a wireless communication system comprises the steps of autonomously handling uplink (UL)/downlink (DL) transmission, a UL/DL transmission report, a UL/DL reception report and resources of the UL/DL transmission when the relay receives the UL/DL transmission or the UL/DL transmission report or the UL/DL reception report, or receives a feedback signals corresponding to the UL/DL transmission. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329189 | BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A synchronization channel control unit halts generation of a synchronization channel signal. A signal control unit halts generation of signals other than the synchronization channel signal after the synchronization channel control unit halts generation of the synchronization channel signal. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329190 | Communication Unit and a Method in a Wireless Communication Network - A communication unit for use in a wireless communication system in which a transmitting unit is arranged for wireless communication with at least one receiving unit, said network further comprising at least a first and a second relay node arranged to receive a signal from the transmitting unit and forward it to the receiving unit, said node being characterized in that it comprises a processor arranged to perform the following steps: identifying at least a first and a second communication path between the transmitting unit and the receiving unit, at least one of said paths involving the first or the second relay node, calculating a first and a second capacity of at least one hop in the first and second communication path, respectively communicating information related to the first and second capacity to at least one other communication node in the wireless network. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329191 | Radio Communication Device and Radio Communication Method - A wireless communication device includes a battery voltage monitoring section, which monitors the amount of decline in output voltage when a network connection section is connected to a wireless communication network to which the wireless communication device should be connected based on a communication, request; and an operation control section, which selects fewer wireless communication networks than the wireless communication device should be connected to based on the communication request if a predicted voltage calculated by subtracting the amount of decline from the output voltage is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold, and connects the network connection section to the selected one or more wireless communication networks. Based on the amount of decline, the operation control section selects one or more wireless communication networks so that the predicted voltage exceeds the predetermined threshold. | 12-30-2010 |
20110002260 | PRIVATE MULTIMEDIA CONTENTS BROADCASTING EQUIPMENT WHICH USES ISM RADIO FREQUENCY BAND OR U-NII 5GHz RADIO FREQUENCY BAND, PRIVATE MULTIMEDIA CONTENTS BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - An individual multimedia contents broadcasting equipment is disclosed, which includes an individual broadcast process unit which provides a private IP through a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) to a receiving terminal, which requests a connection, and makes a connection of the receiving terminal through a radio network, and transmits a broadcast content to the connected receiving terminal; and a radio communication unit which forms a radio network and communicates data with the connected receiving terminal through the radio network. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002261 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTION TO A WIRELESS NETWORK - The invention provides a method and system for connection and/or reconnection of a computing device to a wireless network. Embodiments of the system and method may, when appropriate, inhibit use of stored IP addresses, for example by deleting or effectively deleting stored IP addresses. By deleting or effectively deleting stored IP addresses, the computing device is influenced to request, via an associated wireless communication device, a new valid IP address from an access point which in turn requests a valid IP address from the wireless service provider server. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002262 | MAC RESET AND RECONFIGURATION - A method and apparatus for reconfiguring a medium access control (MAC) entity in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU). The method and apparatus includes the WTRU transmitting a MAC reconfiguration request, the WTRU receiving a MAC reconfiguration command including new MAC parameter values and the WTRU reconfiguring a MAC entity based on the new MAC parameter values in the MAC reconfiguration command. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002263 | BEAMFORMING USING BASE AND DIFFERENTIAL CODEBOOKS - Embodiments of methods and apparatus for determining and/or quantizing a beamforming matrix are disclosed. In some embodiments, the determining and/or quantizing of the beamforming matrix may include the use of a base codebook and a differential codebook. Additional variants and embodiments are also disclosed. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002264 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERSION WITH VECTOR QUANTIZATION - A digital-to-analog converter (DAC) includes a mismatch shaping feedback vector quantizer configured to store state information in expanded format using One-Hot Encoding of a matrix. The expanded state format storage enables implementation of a simplified state sorter for the vector feedback mechanism of the vector quantizer. The simplified state sorter may minimize the variance of ones (or other symbols representing state values) in the matrix, and allow performing sorting in a reduced number of clock cycles. For example, sorting may be performed on a predetermined edge of single clock cycle, or on two edges of the same clock cycle. The matrix may be normalized periodically or as needed, to avoid overflow and underflow. The DAC may be used as a quantizer of a modulator of an access terminal in a cellular communication system. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002265 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING A SERVICE - A method for providing a service comprising a plurality of coding layers in a communication network is provided, and wherein each one of said plurality of layers is associated with a unique identifier, the method uses a single message containing necessary information for a receiver to derive all identifiers for several layers within a single service; the method allows to reduce the messages exchange in such a communication system. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002266 | System and Method for Frequency Domain Audio Post-processing Based on Perceptual Masking - In an embodiment, a method of frequency domain post-processing is disclosed. The method includes applying adaptive modification gain factor to each frequency coefficient, and determining gain factors based on Local Masking Magnitude and Local Masked Magnitude. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002267 | VOICE SERVICE IN EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus to manage voice service in evolved packet systems are disclosed. An example method in a User Equipment (UE) with a first indicator related to voice services in an Evolved Packet System (EPS) comprises receiving a Non Access Stratum (NAS) protocol response message with a second indicator and responsive to at least one of the first indicator or the second indicator, determining availability of voice services over IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) in at least one of long term evolution (LTE) or global system for mobile communications edge radio access network (GERAN)/universal mobile telecommunications system terrestrial radio access network(UTRAN). | 01-06-2011 |
20110002268 | VOICE SERVICE IN EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus to manage voice service in evolved packet systems are disclosed. An example in a UE with a first indicator related to voice services in an Evolved Packet System (EPS) includes receiving a first Non Access Stratum (NAS) protocol response message with a second indicator and responsive to at least one of the first indicator or the second indicator, cause the UE to select to another radio access technology (RAT). | 01-06-2011 |
20110002269 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ADAPTING A BUFFER OF A TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM COMPRISING SUCH A DEVICE - A method and a device for adapting a buffer of a terminal are provided, said method comprising the steps of (i) a network provides data to the terminal; and (ii) the terminal adapts its buffer based on the data provided. Furthermore, a communication system comprising such a device is provided. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002270 | BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR REDUCING ASYNCHRONOUS INTERFERENCE IN A MULTI-TIER OFDMA OVERLAY NETWORK - Embodiments of a base station and method for reducing asynchronous interference in a multi-tier OFDMA overlay network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a lower-tier base station is configured to adjust OFDMA frame boundaries to cause frames communicated by a higher-tier to arrive within a cyclic prefix at the lower-tier base station. The lower-tier base station may also be configured to adjust OFDMA frame boundaries to cause frames communicated by a lower-tier of the network to arrive within a cyclic prefix at a higher-tier mobile station. Accordingly, frames from one tier may arrive within the cyclic prefix of another thereby reducing asynchronous interference. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002271 | SERVICE PROVIDING APPARATUS FOR DIGITAL PROCESSING SERVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A service providing apparatus that provides a digital processing service and performs wireless communication with a service use apparatus that uses the service includes: a wireless communication unit that performs wireless communication; an interface unit that enables the attachment of a portable wireless communication device that performs wireless communication for the apparatus to which the wireless communication device is attached when the wireless communication device is attached; a generation unit that generates configuration information for wireless communication; and a configuration unit that executes, on the wireless communication device attached to the interface unit, based on the configuration information generated by the generation unit, a configuration process that enables wireless communication between the service use apparatus to which the wireless communication device has been attached and the wireless communication unit. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002272 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communications network is a communications network that performs both circuit switching and packet switching. A data communications network is a communications network that performs packet switching. A communication apparatus is capable of connecting to the mobile communications network and the data communications network. The communication apparatus includes a communication control unit which obtains access from a mobile station to the mobile communications network, terminates the access whose call type is packet-switched call, and replaces that access with access to the data communications network. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002273 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SUBFRAME GROUPING INFORMATION AND DECODING SUBFRAME GROUPED FRAMES - A method for transmitting subframe grouping information and a method for decoding subframe-grouped frames are provided. The subframe grouping information transmission method updates a grouping information field of a MAC message, which a serving base station periodically broadcasts to an MS, using subframe grouping information determined by a target base station, and periodically transmits the MAC message to the MS. This method enables provision of a downlink signaling method for supporting variable TTIs of a base station when handover is performed, thereby minimizing service delay of each mobile station and enabling efficient utilization of resources. | 01-06-2011 |
20110007687 | QUEUING ARCHITECTURES FOR ORTHOGONAL REQUIREMENTS IN QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) - A node in a mobile ad-hoc network or other network classifies packets (a) in accordance with a first set of priority levels based on urgency and (b) within each priority level of the first set, in accordance with a second set of priority levels based on importance. The node: (a) queues packets classified at highest priority levels of the first and/or second sets in high-priority output queues; (b) queues packets classified at medium priority levels of the first set in medium-priority output queue(s); and (3) queues packets classified at low priority levels of the first and/or second set in low-priority output queue(s). Using an output priority scheduler, the node serves the packets in order of the priorities of the output queues. In such manner, orthogonal aspects of DiffServ and MLPP can be resolved in a MANET or other network. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007688 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EVENT PRIORITIZATION AND ARBITRATION IN A MULTI-RADIO DEVICE - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate prioritization and arbitration of radio events associated with a set of potentially conflicting radios supported by a wireless device. As described herein, bin-based priority can be implemented for respective radio events such that events are assigned to bins of varying priority levels based on factors such as functional correlations of respective events to data loss, event deadlines, or relative radio priorities. Subsequently, selection of an event combination can be performed based on bins to which respective events are assigned. Techniques are additionally described herein for arbitrating among conflicting radio events assigned to the same bin using random selection, history-based arbitration, or the like. As further described herein, arbitration can be adjusted to favor selection of new, ongoing, or previously events. Further, arbitration as described herein can be adjusted to accommodate events that execute in a plurality of decision units in time. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007689 | SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING INTERACTING DATA BETWEEN NEIGHBORING BSS VIA MS AND METHOD THEREOF - The present invention provides a system for transmitting interacting data between neighboring BSs via a MS and a method thereof The system comprises a first BS which transmits the interacting data to the MS, and a MS which receives the interacting data from the first BS and transmits the received interacting data to a second BS that neighbors to the first BS. The invention also provides a communication system and a method thereof, wherein a MS communicates with a first BS using an established first communication channel, and the MS to communicates with the second BS using an established second communication channel. The system of the invention uses a MS within the overlapped coverage area of neighboring BSs to perform transmission of interacting data such as control information for coordination, so as to reduce latency required for interacting data transmission between neighboring BSs. Compared to legacy BS coordination via a backbone, the BS coordination via a MS of the invention is predictable and requires less latency. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007690 | Preamble partition and cell identification procedure in wireless communication systems - Two preamble partition schemes are provided for flexible network deployment and efficient utilization of limited cell identification resources in a wireless network. In a soft partition scheme, the entire preamble sequences are partitioned into several configurable non-overlapping subsets, and each subset is associated with a corresponding cell type. In a hybrid partition scheme, a combination of fixed and configurable subsets is used for preamble partition. The partitioning information is carried in a broadcasting channel broadcasted from base stations to mobile stations. In one embodiment, after a mobile station performs scanning and synchronization with a first base station, it derives the cell type of the first base station from cell identification and partitioning information. The mobile station completes ranging and network entry with the first base station if the cell type is preferred, and starts to perform scanning and synchronization with a second base station if the cell type is non-preferred. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007691 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSFER NODE, MOBILE NODE, SERVER APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes transfer node | 01-13-2011 |
20110007692 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN DLS WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for transmitting data in a direct link setup (DLS) wireless network and an apparatus supporting the method, and a new frame format for the data transmission method are disclosed. A data transmission method of a tunneled direct link setup (TDLS) wireless network, including: transmitting a TDLS relay request message including relay destination station (STA) information; receiving one or more TDLS relay response messages with respect to the TDLS relay request message from one or more STAs; and selecting a relay STA from among the one or more STAs, and transmitting data desired to be transmitted to the relay destination STA, to the relay STA. A service coverage of a basic service set (BSS) can be extended, communication can be performed at low power consumption, and power of stations can be easily managed. | 01-13-2011 |
20110013555 | USE OF A WIRELESS CIRCUIT-SWITCHED CONNECTIONS FOR TRANSFERRING INFORMATION REQUIRING REAL-TIME OPERATION OF PACKET-SWITCHED MULTIMEDIA SERVICES - A system includes a terminal, a wireless access network, a multimedia core network and a network device, which connects the wireless access network to the multimedia core network, expanded location updating to the registration procedure of the multimedia core network, and performs double registration of the user to the multimedia core network. The terminal performs expanded location updating relaying the registration point identity of the multimedia core network, the user's phone number and the private user identity to the network device in connection with normal location updating signaling. In the double registration performed by the network device, two addresses are registered for the user of the terminal, one of which is associated with the domain name of the terminal in question or a numeric IP address, and the other to a domain name of the network device or a numeric IP address. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013556 | INTERFERER REGION IDENTIFICATION USING IMAGE PROCESSING - Demodulation and interference parameter estimation in an OFDM receiver is improved by identifying regions, in a two-dimensional array of time-frequency transmission positions, having related interference parameters, such as resulting from the same pre-coding scheme, transmission rank, transmitting antennas, and the like. An interference measure is estimated for each of a plurality of time-frequency positions. The interference measures are analyzed by considering them as pixels, or picture elements, in a two-dimensional image, and applying image processing algorithms to identify the regions having related interference parameters. The image processing algorithms may include operations such as edge detection, segmentation, and/or clustering. The receiver may perform interference suppression or cancellation such as interference rejection combining of data extracted from signals received within an identified time-frequency region having related interference parameters. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013557 | MOBILITY PLANE ARCHITECTURE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In a telecommunications system ( | 01-20-2011 |
20110013558 | Reducing processing resources incurred by a user interface - A method, program and apparatus for limiting processing resources incurred due to refreshing a user interface of a first terminal. The method comprises: at a first terminal, receiving a plurality of event indications which indicate respective events, each of the event indications being received at a different time; and based on the event indications, refreshing the user interface of the first terminal to reflect each of the respective events. Refreshing comprises determining a plurality of time periods, and during each of those time periods postponing the user interface from being refreshed to reflect any outstanding ones of the event indications until that time period has elapsed. The time periods are each determined having a length set in dependence on a timing of the receipt of one or more of the event indications, wherein the length of a later time period is set to an increased value relative to an earlier time period in response to the receipt of one or more of said event indications within a time limit. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013559 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION VIA A TUNNEL THROUGH A SERVING ACCESS NETWORK - Disclosed are an apparatus and a method for wireless communication with a non-serving access network via a tunnel through a serving access network. The method includes establishing a tunnel through a serving network to a target network independent of a handoff. The method then provides for communicating via the tunnel between a mobile station and the target network. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013560 | BROADCAST SIGNALING L1 OVERLOAD INDICATION - Devices and methods are provided for implementing an over-the-air (OTA) broadcast of an overload indication to reduce interference levels at neighboring node(s). In one embodiment, the method involves receiving the OTA broadcast of the overload indication from a neighboring node. The method further involves performing transmit power control based upon the received overload indication to reduce Interference over Thermal (IoT) noise at the neighboring node (e.g., by adjusting the transmit power spectral density). Such a method may be performed, for example, by an access terminal or a small base node. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013561 | Apparatus And Method For Adjusting Transmission Power Of Communication System - The present invention provides a method for adjusting transmission power of a communication system having a first terminal and a second terminal. In accordance with a preferred embodiment, the method comprises steps of: (a) repeatedly transmitting a detecting packet from the first terminal to the second terminal by sequentially using one of a variety of transmission powers; (b) receiving a responding packet from the second terminal, wherein the responding packet corresponds to the one of the variety of transmission powers; and (c) choosing at least one from the variety of the transmission powers for transmitting at least a data packet to the second terminal therewith based on the responding packet from the second terminal. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013562 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING MOBILITY TO A MOBILE NODE - The present invention relates to a method for providing mobility to a mobile node capable packet based communication within a communications system via an access point. The method uses a signed session information package for allowing the mobile node to provide a further access point with information relating to the routing of a communications session so that the first access point can be used as an anchor point for the communications session even if the mobile node has changed its point of access to a further access point, wherein the communications session is a communications session between the mobile node and a corresponding node within a communications system. The signed session information package comprises routing information relating to the communications session and is signed by the first access point which is the access point via which the mobile node was communicating at the time of initiation of the communications session. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013563 | COMMUNICATING A FEEDBACK DATA STRUCTURE CONTAINING INFORMATION IDENTIFYING CODING TO BE APPLIED ON WIRELESSLY COMMUNICATED SIGNALING - To perform wireless communications in a closed loop multiple input, multiple output (MIMO) system, a feedback data structure is communicated over a wireless channel between a first wireless node and a second wireless node, where the feedback data structure contains indicators identifying coding to be applied by the second wireless node on signaling communicated between the second wireless node and the first wireless node, where the information in the feedback data structure is based on wireless channel conditions detected at the first wireless node. The indicators identify different codings to be used for different corresponding bands in the wireless channel. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013564 | MOBILE STATION AND METHOD FOR INTERWORKING WITH BASE STATION COMPATIBLE WITH FIRST AND SECOND PROTOCOLS - This invention provides a Mobile Station (MS) interworking with a Base Station (BS) which is compatible with a first protocol and a second protocol, the MS comprising: a synchronizing unit for synchronizing with the BS; a broadcast information obtaining unit for obtaining first protocol broadcast information from the BS; an operation mode selecting unit for selecting a first operation mode or a second operation mode according to whether the MS supports the first protocol or the second protocol, wherein when the MS supports the second protocol, second protocol MAP information is obtained according to the first protocol broadcast information, and data are transmitted via a prescribed channel to the BS according to the second protocol MAP information. Also, the present invention provides a method of MS network entry to communicate with a BS and a method of forming an IEEE 802.16m frame compatible with IEEE 802.16e frame. According to this invention, an IEEE 802.16e MS can access an IEEE 802.16m BS, and an IEEE 802.16m MS can also access an IEEE 802.16m BS. Even if an MS and a BS operate under different protocols, the MS can enter a network to perform communication with the BS. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013565 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, AND RETRANSMISSION PROGRAM - A communication system which can immediately retransmit data under a condition that it cannot specify number of retransmissions, characterizing in that a mobile station comprises a first transmission unit for transmitting the data through a first physical channel, a first reception unit for receiving a decoded result through a second physical channel from a base station, and a second transmission unit for generating a first control information based on a decoded result and transmitting a first control information through a third physical channel, and a base station comprises a second reception unit for receiving the data, a third transmission unit for decoding the data in the physical layer and transmitting the decoded result through the second physical channel, and a third reception unit for receiving the first control information through the third physical channel, wherein the third transmission unit transmits the second control information through the second physical channel to the mobile station in order to retransmit the data from the beginning in a case when it cannot specify number of the retransmissions from the first control information. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013566 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE NODE, ACCESS ROUTER - Disclosed is a technique to reduce the number of messages to register mobile node position information with a home agent when a mobile node roams into a foreign network domain having a roaming relationship with a home network domain. Upon reception of network information | 01-20-2011 |
20110013567 | Method and a Transceiver for Reducing Retransmissions in a Telecommunications System - The present invention relates to a method and to a transceiver ( | 01-20-2011 |
20110019610 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING TUNNEL LOOPING - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for preventing endless tunnel looping in a mobile communication network. An originating home agent inserts an extended TEL option into a packet that is being forwarded by the originating home agent. The extended TEL option includes an address of the originating home agent and indicates the original tunnel entry point of the packet. When another home agent receives the forwarded packet containing the extended TEL option, the receiving home agent may send a loop risk indicator (LRI) to the originating home agent to inform the originating home agent of the tunnel looping risk. The originating home agent may then use the conventional TEL option for subsequent packets forwarded during that particular mobility session for the mobile terminal. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019611 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETECTING SPREAD SPECTRUM SIGNALS IN AN AREA OF INTEREST - Systems and methods are provided for detecting and geo-locating a target transmitting a CDMA or other spread-spectrum signal within an area of interest. Targets are identified by spatially-dividing the area of interest into a number of cells. First and second receiving beams are sequentially directed toward each of the cells from two or more different intercept sites. The presence of the spread-spectrum signal within each cell is identified from the signals received at each directional beam, and if the spread-spectrum signal is present in both the first and the second receiving beams, then the target can be indicated to be present within the cell. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019612 | PICOCELL SYSTEM WITH LOCAL VOICE MEDIA SUPPORT - A methodology includes servicing a voice call between mobile User Equipment and an Enterprise Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Services Environment using, at least in part, Voice over Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (VoIMS), detecting that the User Equipment is moving out of range of Radio Access Point (RAP) infrastructure servicing the User Equipment, and in response to detecting, initiating a procedure to hand out the voice call and anchor the voice call in a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of a macro service provider. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019613 | DOWNLINK PMI COORDINATION BASED ON BASE STATION ANTENNA CONFIGURATION - A Mobile Station (MS) apparatus and a Base Station (BS) apparatus, and methods for their operation in a wireless communication system, are provided. The method for operating the MS includes receiving Precoding Matrix Index (PMI) subset information from a BS, determining downlink channel quality of the BS, determining a PMI for the BS based on the PMI subset information and the determined downlink channel quality of the BS, and transmitting the determined PMI to the BS. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019614 | Enhanced Techniques For Using Core Based Nodes For State Transfer - Methods and apparatus for storing, manipulating, retrieving, and forwarding state, e.g., context and other information, used to support communications sessions with one or more end nodes, e.g., mobile devices, are described. Various features are directed to a mobile node controlling the transfer of state from a first access node to a second access node during a handoff operation thereby eliminating any need for state transfer messages to be transmitted between the second access node and the first access node during handoff. Other features of the invention are directed to the use of a core network node to store state information. State information stored in the core node can be accessed and used by access nodes in cases where a mobile node does not send a state transfer message during a handoff, e.g., because communication with the first access node is lost or because such messages are not supported. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019615 | Delivering System Information in Wireless Communications Network - A method of controlling user equipment in a wireless communications network, the method comprising: producing ( | 01-27-2011 |
20110019616 | RADIO GATEWAY NETWORK - A radio gateway network and method is disclosed in which a first master radio gateway is provided and at least one second slave gateway is provided. The first gateway establishes at least one radio net comprised of radios which communicate with at least one of the gateways. The radio net enables communication from a user terminal to radios in the radio net wherein the number of radios in the radio net is greater than the number of ports of each respective gateway. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019617 | HEADER COMPRESSION FOR RELAY NODES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate compressing headers for relay nodes. In particular, a plurality of internet protocol (IP) headers, tunneling protocol headers, and/or other routing headers in a packet can be compressed to facilitate efficient communications of packets between relay nodes and/or a donor access point. A donor or other upstream access point can be provided with a filter mask, bit stream, and filter mask identifier generated by a related relay node for packets having given static header data. Thus, the donor or other upstream access point can apply the filter mask to incoming packet headers, and where a resulting bit stream matches the received bit stream, can replace at least a portion of the packet headers with the filter mask identifier. The relay node can subsequently decompress the packet headers based on the filter mask identifier. Similar functionality can be used for compressing uplink communications. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019618 | WIRELESS TERMINAL AND METHOD OF DATA COMMUNICATION THEREIN - A wireless terminal and a method of data communication between such wireless terminals includes a first wireless terminal determining whether a second wireless terminal is located within a preset distance, the first wireless terminal determining whether the first wireless terminal is tilted at more than a preset slope and the first wireless terminal transmitting a preset packet of data to the second wireless terminal where it determines that the second wireless terminal is located within the preset distance from the first wireless terminal and the first wireless terminal is tilted at more than the preset slope. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019619 | Method and Apparatus for Handling Physical Downlink Control Channel Orders in Wireless Communication System - A method for handling physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) orders in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless communication system supports Carrier Aggregation, which enables the UE to perform transmission and/or reception through multiple carriers. The method includes steps of configuring a plurality of carriers, receiving a PDCCH order, and using a specific carrier within the plurality of carriers to trigger a random access procedure according to the PDCCH order. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019620 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING STREAMING SERVICE - A method, a system, and an apparatus for switching a streaming service are disclosed herein. The method for switching a streaming service is applied in IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) architecture and includes: receiving a switching request that carries an identifier of requested media; and using a before-switching media channel to send switched media content to User Equipment (UE). The streaming service switching method disclosed herein uses the fast switching capability of the real-time streams in the IMS architecture to switch the streaming service, and uses the before-switching media channel to transmit the switched media content in the IMS architecture, thus improving the switching speed, the user experience, and the network capability of controlling the switching. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019621 | SECURE CONTROL OF A WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK VIA THE INTERNET - A method and a system for controlling a wireless sensor network from a user interface coupled to the Internet are provided. A user accesses an Internet-based portal from the user interface and establishes a secure broadband Internet connection between a remote control module coupled to the wireless sensor network and the portal. The connection is established by manually triggering a connection between the remote control module and the portal from the remote control module. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019622 | RANGING STRUCTURE, MULTIPLEXING METHOD AND SIGNALING METHOD FOR LEGACY SUPPORT MODE - A method of performing communication in a wireless communication system is disclosed. In performing ranging, which is performed by a terminal in a wireless communication system supporting a normal scheme and a legacy scheme, the present invention includes selecting a specific ranging structure from a first ranging structure supporting the normal scheme and a second ranging structure supporting the legacy scheme, and transmitting a ranging signal using the specific ranging structure, wherein the first ranging structure and the second ranging structure are set to differ in at least one of a time resource, a frequency resource and a code resource. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019623 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR PROCESSING PACKET INCLUDING AT LEAST ONE OF VIDEO OUTPUT FORMAT OF VIDEO DATA AND AUDIO OUTPUT FORMAT OF AUDIO DATA - A wireless node device receives data island packets from an HDMI device with a time cycle, and prohibits wireless transmission of a data island notification message when a video output format and an audio output format included in the data island packet are the same as a video output format and an audio output format included in the data island packet, respectively. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019624 | METHOD FOR INDICATING THE BEARER MANAGEMENT OF A SERVING GATEWAY - The present invention provides a method for indicating a serving gateway to update the bearer, comprising: a mobility management unit sending to a serving gateway a bearer establishing request message carrying a bearer update indication for indicating the serving gateway whether to update the bearer between the serving gateway and a packet data network gateway immediately; after receiving the bearer establishing request message, the serving gateway determining whether to update the bearer between the serving gateway and the packet data network gateway immediately according to the bearer update indication carried in the message. The method provided by the present invention can enable the serving gateway to easily judge when to update the bearer between the serving gateway and the packet data network gateway so as to avoid updating the bearer between the serving gateway and the packet data network gateway by the serving gateway too early or too late. | 01-27-2011 |
20110026453 | Enhanced Mobility Management at a Mobile Access Gateway - A method is disclosed that enables the transmission of media and signaling packets in a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol-based (PMIP-based) network. A mobile access gateway is enhanced to differentiate between different types of packet traffic and to act as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) proxy on behalf of a mobile node. For example, the gateway is able to handle quality-of-service-sensitive (QoS-sensitive) traffic such as voice or video media packets differently from QoS-insensitive traffic such as SIP signaling packets. In the case of traffic packets that are not QoS-sensitive, the gateway engages standard PMIPv6 procedure. In the case of traffic packets that are in fact QoS-sensitive, the gateway acts as a SIP proxy for each mobile node attached to it, thereby avoiding tunneling of the packets between the gateway and the mobile node's local mobility anchor, and thereby reducing the amount of delay that affects the packets. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026454 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of operating a communication system comprises exchanging initial communications between a wireless communication device and a communication network over a wireless connection between the wireless communication device and a network access system and over a network connection between the wireless device and the communication network. The method further comprises, in response to a loss of the network connection due to a deterioration of the wireless connection, determining if a partial network entry process is possible to regain the connection, and if the partial network entry process is possible to regain the network connection, performing the partial network entry process. The method further comprises, in response to an improvement of the wireless connection and upon regaining the network connection, exchanging new communications between the wireless communication device and the communication network over the wireless connection and the network connection. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026455 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of operating a communication system comprises exchanging initial communications between a wireless communication device and a communication network over a wireless connection between the wireless communication device and a network access system and a network connection between the wireless communication device and the communication network. The method further comprises performing a plurality of ranging processes to monitor a status of the wireless connection. Upon successfully completing a ranging process of the plurality of ranging processes, the method comprises determining a duration elapsed since the last successful ranging process and processing the duration to determine if the duration satisfies a criteria. The method further comprises, if the duration does not satisfy the criteria, then setting the indicator to indicate that a partial entry process is required to regain the network connection, and in response to the deterioration of the wireless link, processing the indicator to determine if the partial network entry process is required to regain the network connection. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026456 | WIRELESS NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communication system comprising one or more wireless stations programmed to await for an authorizing signal to initiate wireless communications with a network controller or access point. The network controller maintains identification information in different queues, said queues based upon the wireless station's activity. The wireless station identification information is moved between the different queues in response to wireless station activity. Between polling, each mobile station aggregates data for the next opportunity to transmit. Multi-polling may be employed such that more than a single station is polled at a time. Polling is accomplished by polling one of the more active station along with a less active station. The less active station is unlikely to transmit, so collisions are avoided to a certain degree. If a lesser active station becomes active, it is moved into the more active queue and consequently will be polled more often. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026457 | SYSTEM FOR USING INTERNET TELEPHONE WITH MOBILE AND METHOD THEREOF - This invention relates to VoEP phone that send-receive voice through the internet and normal phone that send-receive voice using PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) that is a telephone system that do send-receive be, and more particularly not exclusively, the invention relates to a system and method that use VoP phone and normal phone using mobile communication terminal. According to the present invention that is proposed in order to achieve purpose such as preceding, a system that use VoP phone and normal phone using mobile communication terminal comprises VoIP phone or normal phone; mobile communication terminal that can connect to wireless internet; WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) server that send mobile communication terminal telephone number and destination telephone number of linked user inputted to preceding mobile communication terminal to service application server; service application server that is linked with preceding WAP server, and includes VoP phone user or database that store normal telephone user information and mobile communication terminal information linked with preceding VoP phone or normal phone, and set up user authentication and call service model; gateway that is connected with preceding service application server, does user authentication and request call to mobile communication terminal of linked user and destination terminal. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026458 | ASYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE MANAGER - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate an asynchronous bus architecture for multi-radio coexistence associated with a wireless device. As described herein, a system of buses operating in an asynchronous manner, combined with optional on-chip and/or other supplemental buses, can be utilized to couple respective radios and/or other related endpoints to a coexistence management platform, thereby facilitating management of coexistence between multiple radios in a unified and scalable manner. As further described herein, communication between a coexistence manager and its respective managed endpoints can be facilitated through the use of a single bus or multiple buses that can be switched and/or otherwise operate in a concurrent manner to facilitate expedited conveyance of radio event notifications and their corresponding responses. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026459 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CLOSED-LOOP TRANSFORMED CODEBOOK BASED ANTENNA BEAMFORMING - A wireless communications network including a plurality of base stations is provided. Each one of the base stations wirelessly communicates with a plurality of subscriber stations. At least one of the plurality of base stations includes a receiver configured to receive a precoding vector index (PVI) from a subscriber station. The least one of the plurality of base stations also includes a controller configured to update a transmit covariance matrix using the precoding vector index, and transform a codebook using the updated transmit covariance matrix. The least one of the plurality of base stations further includes a transmitter configured to perform transmit beamforming to the subscriber station using the transformed codebook. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026460 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of enabling redundancy for a Home Subscriber Service (HSS) of an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is provided. Redundancy is provided by a plurality of HSS instances. Where a client node of the IMS requires details of an HSS, the client node is provided with details of a proxy HSS representing the HSS instances. The client node uses the details to send a subsequent request directed to the proxy HSS. The proxy HSS selects an appropriate one of the HSS instances to handle the request received at the proxy HSS from the client node. The proxy HSS forwards the request to the selected HSS instance for handling. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026461 | COMMUNICATING OVER A WIRELESS LINK USING A DATA CONTAINER STRUCTURE THAT HAS PARTITIONS OF DIFFERENT TYPES - A wireless communications node communicates, over a wireless link, data in a data container structure that includes a configurable concatenation of partitions of different types. The partitions of different types in the data container structure carry information according to different wireless access technologies. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026462 | Method and Apparatus For Packer Communications in Wireless Systems - Techniques for transmitting and receiving data in an efficient manner to potentially improve capacity for a wireless network and achieve power savings for a wireless device are described. The techniques utilize a Continuous Packet Connectivity (CPC) mode comprised of multiple (e.g., two) discontinuous transmission (DTX) modes and at least one (e.g., one) discontinuous reception (DRX) mode. Each DTX mode is associated with different enabled uplink subframes usable for transmission from the wireless device to the network. Each DRX mode is associated with different enabled downlink subframes usable by the network for transmission to the wireless device. The wireless device may send signaling and/or data on the enabled uplink subframes and may receive signaling and/or data on the enabled downlink subframes. The wireless device may power down during non-enabled subframes to conserve battery power. Mechanisms to quickly transition between the DTX and DRX modes are described. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026463 | METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING A USER EQUIPMENT PDN (PACKET DATA NETWORK) CONNECTION - The invention concerns a method for optimizing a UE PDN (Packet Data Network) connection when said UE enters a VPLMN (Visited PLMN) characterized by automatically allocating a default bearer to said UE in said VPLMN during Tracking Area Update procedure. The method according to the invention is preferably but not exclusively used for allowing a local breakout of user plane or control plane traffic when the UE is roaming between several PLMNs. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026464 | METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING BETWEEN A GATEWAY AND BASE STATIONS AND CORRESPONDING GATEWAY AND BASE STATION - A method for synchronizing between an access gateway and a plurality of base stations is provided, which comprises the following steps of: at the gateway, determining (S | 02-03-2011 |
20110026465 | METHOD FOR PRE-EMPTING DATA TRANSMISSION IN A DISCOVERY CHANNEL | 02-03-2011 |
20110026466 | Triggering and Implementing Method and System for Terminating a Session - The present invention discloses a session termination triggering method, an implementing method and a system, wherein the session termination triggering method comprises: a policy control and charging rules function entity (PCRF) detects that the policy control session between the PCRF and a policy and charging enforcement function entity (PCEF) shall be terminated; the PCRF sends a first request message to the PCEF, and carries the session identifier of the policy control session and the session termination indicator for indicating to terminate the policy control session in the first request message; in response to the first request message, the PCEF removes/deactivates the policy and charging control rules related to the policy control session according to the session termination indicator. | 02-03-2011 |
20110032868 | METHODS FOR HANDLING DATA TRANSMISSION BY A MOBILE STATION WITH MULTIPLE RADIO FREQUENCY TRANSCEIVERS AND SYSTEMS UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for handling data transmission by a mobile station with a first RF module and second RF module is provided. The mobile station is coupled to a computer acquiring an IP address IP(U). A packet with a source IP address IP(U) and a destination IP address IP(Y) corresponding to an access network is received by the mobile station. The first RF module is assigned to transmit the received packet by replacing the source IP address IP(U) with a source IP address IP(A). Another packet with the source IP address IP(U) and destination IP address IP(Y) is assigned to the second RF module, and the source IP address IP(U) is replaced by a source IP address IP(B). The replaced packets are transmitted to the access network via the first and second RF module respectively. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032869 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACTIVATING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method and apparatus to activate over the air a wireless communication device by using a client-initiated bootstrap server and without the use of a provisioning server, a provisioning session and a provisioning protocol implementation at one or more servers of the wireless network. The client-initiated bootstrap server sends a bootstrap script and/or document to the wireless communication device to set an activation flag with commands included in the bootstrap scrip. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032870 | EMPLOYING PHYSICAL LOCATION GEO-SPATIAL CO-ORDINATE OF COMMUNICATION DEVICE AS PART OF INTERNET PROTOCOL - System(s), method(s), and device(s) that incorporate a current physical location value associated with a communication device as part of internet protocol (IP) are presented. An IP management component obtains current physical location information of a wireless communication device and modifies the IP address to incorporate the current physical location value corresponding to the current physical location of the communication device as part of the IP address of the communication device to prevent undesired intrusions by hackers, as communications associated with the communication device are routed to/from the communication device that is at the current physical location. If the communication device moves to a new location, the IP management component can perform a new IP address modification to modify the IP address to incorporate a new physical location value associated with the communication device. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032871 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION BY HNB - A method for establishing a connection of a home Node B (HNB), the method comprising the steps of: transmitting, by the HNB, an attachment request message including an identifier of a closed subscriber group (CSG) where the HNB is located and information on location of the HNB to an operation and maintenance center (OMC); selecting, by the OMC a device establishing a connection with the HNB using the information on location of the HNB; transmitting, by the OMC, an attachment response message including information on the device to the HNB; establishing, by the HNB, a connection with the selected device. With the method proposed in the present invention, a UE can switch between HNBs in the same CSG through interface X2. Meanwhile, such information as the radio resource management and so on can be exchanged between two HNBs. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032872 | Apparatus and method for overhead reduction of feedback in closed loop MIMO system - A method and apparatus reduce overhead of feedback in a closed loop Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) system. A controller feeds back the long-term Precoder Matrix Index (PMI) to a serving base station under direction of the serving base station when the long term PMI feedback transmission is required, generates a new codebook using the long term PMI, and determines a short term PMI from the new codebook. A feedback transmitter feeds back the short-term PMI to the serving base station. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032873 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING BROADCAST INFORMATION IN MULTIPLE CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of transmitting broadcast information by using multiple carriers is provided. The method includes: configuring a superframe for an operation of the multiple carriers; and transmitting the broadcast information through at least one primary carrier selected from the multiple carriers. Accordingly, the multiple carrier system can effectively manage respective carriers, and particularly can effectively use radio resources in transmission of broadcast information. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032874 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR NETWORK MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN PROXY MOBILE IPv6 NETWORK - Provided is a network mobility management apparatus for providing mobility in a proxy mobile Internet Protocol (IP) network of mobile nodes which configure a mobile network. The network mobility management apparatus includes an address generation unit and a communication unit. The address generation unit transmits a router request message to a mobile access gateway of a proxy mobile IP network to be accessed by the mobile nodes, and receives a router advertisement message containing a home network prefix to generate an address. The communication unit transmits a proxy binding update message containing the home network prefix and an identification code of the mobile node to the mobile access gateway when the router request message is received from the mobile node, and includes the mobile home network prefix, which is contained in a proxy binding response message received from the mobile access gateway and is for the mobile node, in the router advertisement message to transfer the mobile home network prefix to the mobile node. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032875 | Distributed signal field for communications within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Distributed signal field for communications within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. In accordance with wireless communications, a signal (SIG) field employed within such packets is distributed or partitioned into at least two separate signal fields (e.g., SIG A and SIG B) that are located in different portions of the packet. A first of the SIG fields includes information that may be processed and decoded by all wireless communication devices, and a second of the SIG fields includes information that is specific to one or more particular wireless communication devices (e.g., a specific wireless communication device or a specific subset of the wireless communication devices). The precise locations of the at least first and second SIG fields within a packet may be varied, including placing a second of the SIG fields (e.g., including user-specific information) adjacent to and preceding a data field in the packet. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032876 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING RESPONSE INFORMATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method for transmitting radio resources in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving a random access channel (RACH) preamble from a plurality of UEs and transmitting response information associated with the received preambles over a common channel wherein the plurality UEs can access the common channel and receive corresponding information. If a HARQ scheme is used when a UE transmits data to the eNode-B using uplink radio resources allocated over the RACH, the eNode-B does not pre-allocate uplink radio resources required for re-transmission and performs allocation of radio resources for a first transmission of HARQ. If the re-transmission is required, the eNode-B allocates the radio resources required for the re-transmission with the NACK signal. If re-transmission is not required, the present invention can reduce an amount of wasted radio resources. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032877 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING AMD RE-SEGMENTATION - A method and apparatus for acknowledge mode data (AMD) re-segmentation are disclosed. An AMD protocol data unit (PDU) is generated from at least one RLC SDU. The AMD PDU size is within a flexible maximum AMD PDU size. The original AMD PDU is stored in a retransmission buffer, and transmitted. If transmission of the original AMD PDU fails and the original AMD PDU size is larger than an updated maximum AMD PDU size, the original AMD PDU is segmented to segmented AMD PDUs. If transmission of one of the segmented AMD PDUs fails, the original AMD PDU may be re-segmented to smaller size AMD PDUs. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032878 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING BAND BITMAP IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting a band bitmap in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes selecting at least one selection band from a plurality of bands, the plurality of bands being distributed throughout a whole frequency band, grouping the plurality of bands into a plurality of band groups, setting a primary bitmap for each band group according to whether the selection band is included in each band group and setting a secondary bitmap for bands in each band group, and transmitting the primary bitmap and the secondary bitmap. Radio resources used to transmit a band bitmap can be reduced by decreasing the number of bits of the band bitmap. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032879 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR A REMOTE RADIO MODULE WITH RELAY CAPABILITY - Provided are an apparatus, system, and method for facilitating wireless communication between a hub and a mobile terminal via a remote radio module. The remote radio module includes a first transceiver operable to wirelessly communicate with the mobile terminal, a second transceiver operable to wirelessly communicate with the hub that is coupled to a core network, and a processor for executing instructions stored in memory. The instructions include instructions for receiving a signal from the hub at a first carrier frequency and processing the signal so that the signal can be retransmitted to the mobile terminal at a second carrier frequency different from the first carrier frequency. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032880 | GATEWAY APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A gateway apparatus that interconnects a mobile circuit switched network and a mobile IMS network to implement the video phone includes a conversion unit. The conversion unit demultiplexes a multiplexed bit stream signal output from a mobile terminal connected to the mobile circuit switched network to take out one or more of a control signal, a compression-encoded speech signal, and a compression-encoded video signal. The conversion unit converts the control signal into one or more of a MEGACO signal, a SIP signal and a SDP signal, while converting the speech signal and the video signal, if necessary. The conversion unit also packetizes the speech signal and the video signal to transmit resulting packets to the IMS network. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032881 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSCEIVING DATA USING DIRECTIONAL BEAM IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided are a method and apparatus for data communication in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) using directional beams, the method including: setting priorities to a plurality of beam paths capable of establishing a link between a first device and a second device; generating a list of the beam paths to which the priorities are set; and establishing a link between the first device and the second device with reference to the generated list. Accordingly, time and wireless resources for restoring the link can be minimized. | 02-10-2011 |
20110038304 | Telecommunication network broadband off-loading system and method - A telecommunication network broadband off-loading system and method, wherein, a first multi-service-packet-control unit and a second first multi-service-packet-control unit are provided in offsetting and off-loading packets onto one or a plurality of xDSLs or fiber glass cables through a load balance mechanism to proceed with packet transmission, and in this way of packet offsetting and off-loading transmission, a stable quality of service can be maintained. Through application of said telecommunication network broadband off-loading system and method disclosed, the load of transmission equipment and transmission cost can be significantly reduced, hereby raising transmission efficacy and performance. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038305 | Apparatus, Method and Computer Program Product Providing Uplink Gain Factor for High Speed Uplink Packet Access - Apparatus, methods and computer program products operate a radio network controller in a wireless communications system to determine a factor to be used by user equipment operative in the wireless communications network to determine a gain factor for an E-TFC based on the gain factor of a reference E-TFC; and to signal the factor to the user equipment. The radio network controller may select the factor based on at least one criterion. In another aspect, apparatus, methods and computer program products operate user equipment to receive a factor from a wireless communications network, and to use the factor transmitted by the wireless communications network to determine a gain factor that relates a data signal to be transmitted by the user equipment in a data channel and a control signal transmitted by the electronic device in a control channel, where the control signal transmitted in the control channel carries information for use in receiving the data signal. In additional aspects, the user equipment is further configured to select a formula for use in determining the gain factor in dependence on signaling received from the wireless communications network. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038306 | FORWARD-LOOKING PROBABILISTIC STATISTICAL ROUTING FOR WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORKS WITH LOSSY LINKS - Techniques related to a localized routing approach are generally described where the number of transmissions, the maximum number of transmission per node, effective bandwidth, the latency, overall energy consumption, the maximum energy consumption, or other individual or composite objective in a wireless network may be optimized. The localized routing approach may use a metric that combines immediate progress benefit and expense with a statistics-based forward looking estimation of future routing properties and cost. The protocol may also employ a combination of probabilistic and deterministic mechanism to detect and escape local minima. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038307 | PACKET DATA ORIGINATION FOR VEHICLE COMMUNICATION WITH A CALL CENTER - A system and method for making vehicle originated calls to a telematics service provider or other call center. The method includes identifying a call type associated with a desired wireless communication of speech or data to the call center, and then carrying out one of a number of different call connection processes depending on the call type. For voice channel cellular connections, an in-band modem cellular connection is preferably established in most instances using a connection retry strategy that includes primary, secondary, and possibly tertiary connection attempts each of which utilize at least one of a number of different voice and data call origination processes. The system and method can be carried out in connection with various cellular system technologies, but is especially suited for use with GSM systems. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038308 | FORMING SPATIAL BEAMS WITHIN A CELL SEGMENT - To perform wireless communications in a wireless network, at least two spatial beams are formed within a cell segment, where the at least two spatial beams are associated with different power levels. The at least two spatial beams are swept across the cell segment according to a sweep pattern. In some implementations, multiple antenna assemblies can be used, where each antenna assembly has plural antenna elements. A lower one of the antenna assemblies can be used to form high and lower power beams, and an upper one of the antenna assemblies can be used to communicate backhaul information, for example. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038309 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION AND DETECTION OF FRAME INCLUDING BURSTS OF PULSES - A method of transmitting and receiving data frames using pulses is disclosed. According to the transmitting method, a first signal is transmitted including one or more bursts of pulses during a first portion of a transmission frame, and not transmitting the first signal during a second portion of the transmission frame. The not transmitting the first signal may include maintaining one or more silence periods for the second portion of the transmission frame, or transmitting a second signal distinct from the first signal. According to the receiving method, a signal including one or more bursts of pulses is received during a first portion of a transmission frame, an analysis of the one or more bursts of pulses is performed, and the transmission frame is detected based on the analysis of the one or more bursts of pulses. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038310 | INITIALIZATION OF REFERENCE SIGNAL SCRAMBLING - A scrambling sequence is initialized using at least a cell identifier and an offset, and a physical downlink control information DCI is sent to a user equipment which indicates the offset. In more particular embodiments a user equipment-specific reference signal UE-RS is scrambled using the initialized scrambling sequence, and the scrambled UE-RS is sent to the UE for demodulating a downlink shared channel (PDSCH). In another exemplary embodiment the generated UE-RS is sent in a pilot part of a subframe transmission associated with the PDSCH and is for demodulating at least a data part of that subframe transmission. In a specific embodiment from the UE side, the UE receives the UE-RS and the DCI which indicates the offset, descrambles the UE-RS using a scrambling sequence that is initialized using a cell identifier and the indicated offset; and demodulates the PDSCH using the de-scrambled UE-RS. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038311 | COORDINATING OPERATION IN INFRASTRUCTURE AND AD-HOC MODES FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. In an example embodiment, an apparatus may include a controller, a memory coupled to the controller and a wireless transceiver coupled to the controller. The apparatus may be configured to receive, at a mobile station operating in Ad-Hoc mode in a wireless network, a message indicating that an access point (AP) has pending data in infrastructure network for the mobile station, and receive, at the mobile station the pending data from the AP. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038312 | METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING CONNECTION, MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION - Disclosed are a method for identifying a connection, mobile station and base station. The method comprises the steps of: assigning a MS ID to the mobile station when the mobile station enters into the coverage area of the base station; and assigning a connection ID to a connection when the connection is established between the base station and the mobile station. With the proposed solution, the data overhead could be reduced due to short Connection ID instead of | 02-17-2011 |
20110038313 | ENHANCED COMMUNICATION APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING ENHANCED CONCATENATION, SEGMENTATION AND REASSEMBLY OF SERVICE DATA UNITS - Provided is an enhanced communication apparatus. The enhanced communication apparatus may enable a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer unit to perform a part of a concatenation function, a segmentation function, and a reassembly function of a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer unit that is a sublayer of Layer 2, and may decrease a number of Packet Data Convergence Protocol Packet Data Units (PDCP PDUs) to be processed by the RLC layer unit. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038314 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DUAL BAND DUAL MODEM - Disclosed is an apparatus for controlling DBDM including a first modem that performs an EVDO (Evolution-Data Optimized) or a HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) communication, and the second modem that performs a WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) communication, and a method for controlling DBDM, wherein one of the modems selected from the two (first and second) modems that is used for data communication of a user terminal generates a wake up signal to wake up the other modem that is not selected, and the other woken-up modem receives and analyzes communication data, and transmits a data of analysis result to the user terminal and the UART via the one modem performing the data communication. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038315 | MINI-SLOT COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL - Mesh communications based on a plurality of time-slots in which every time slot is associated with communications between a pair of nodes, in which at least one time-slot is associated with communications between a first node and a second node, and in which at least a second time-slot is associated with communications between the first node and a third node. The first node and the second node communicate during the at least one time-slot, while the third node awaits communications with the first node during the second time-slot. If the first node is still communicating with the second node during the second time-slot the first node does not communication with the third node. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038316 | CONTROL APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system has a mobile terminal, basestations, and a Radio Network Controller (RNC). In the case where drop of a frame occurs during data communication in Iub/Iur (between the basestations and the RNC), the RNC executes retransmission of an EDCH FP frame between the RNC and the basestations by transmitting a TN frame to the basestations to repair the drop of the frame without executing retransmission with the terminal device. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038317 | WIRELESS TERMINAL CALL METHOD AND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A wireless terminal receives a first broadcast signal transmitted from a wireless base station; detects whether a part of a wireless terminal ID of the own wireless terminal is included in the first broadcast signal received in the broadcast signal reception or not and determines that the second broadcast signal is to be continuously received when the part of the wireless terminal ID is included; and receives the second broadcast signal when it is determined in the broadcast signal determination that the second broadcast signal is to be received, stops receiving data transmitted from the wireless base station when assignment information to be transmitted to the own wireless terminal is not present in the received second broadcast signal, and receives data transmitted from the wireless base station to the own wireless terminal based on the information on the assignment position of the wireless slot included in the second broadcast signal when the assignment information to be transmitted to the own wireless terminal is present in the received second broadcast signal. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038318 | UBIQUITOUS ACCESS TO FEMTO-CONNECTED NETWORK - A system and method of enabling a mobile device to communicate with a local IP network host and an external IP network host using a femto cellular access point on a femto cellular access network. A local gateway is coupled to the femto cellular access network for receiving data packets transmitted on the femto cellular access network and for routing the data packets to one of a local IP network and an external IP network, based on a destination address associated with the data packets. The femto cellular access network includes an LTE network, an EVDO network connected to an EPC, or a WiMax 802.16e/m network connected to the EPC. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038319 | Method, System and Device for Realizing User Identity Association - The present invention discloses a method for realizing user identity association, the method comprising: setting an equivalent behavior user identifier in a Home Subscription Server (HSS); associating IMS Public User Identities (IMPUs) with the equivalent behavior through the set equivalent behavior user identifier. The present invention also discloses a system and a device realizing user identity association. According to the embodiments of the present invention, the association of the IMPUs with the set equivalent behavior is realized, which improves the user experiences. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038320 | METHOD FOR ACQUIRING MULTI-CELL SPECIFIC MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for acquiring a multi-cell specific message in a wireless communication system includes receiving a downlink preamble, receiving the multi-cell specific message weighted with the downlink preamble, and decoding the weighted multi-cell specific message by using the received downlink preamble. Accordingly, since a preamble is used to transmit a multi-cell specific message, there is no need to transmit an additional signal in order to estimate a channel of the multi-cell specific message. In addition, a user equipment can acquire the multi-cell specific message by simply performing decoding. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038321 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNALS FOR RELAY NODE - A method for transmitting reference signals for a relay node is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a first reference signals for a base station in a first transmission region of a subframe and a second reference signals for a relay node in a second transmission region of the subframe. The first transmission region and the second transmission region in the subframe are regions for transmitting data and the first transmission region and the second transmission regions are different sub-bands of Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH). Accordingly, it is possible to transmit wideband reference signals by the relay node, to maximally support a Long Term Evolution (LTE) user equipment while operating the relay node, and to perform cooperative multipoint transmission and reception between the base station and the relay node. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038322 | METHOD AND DEVICE TO SUPPORT INTERWORKING BETWEEN 3G SYSTEM SAE SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method and device to support interworking between 3G system and SAE system, and the method includes steps of detecting by PDN-GW if any NON-GBR packet data protocol context exists in all packet data protocol contexts corresponding to a terminal or not; triggering by PDN-GW a packet data protocol context establishment process to ensure that the NON-GBR packet data protocol context is always well established in the network, if there is no NON-GBR packet data protocol context. With the method of the present invention, an LTE terminal accessing through the 3G network can still enjoy services provided by a default bearer after it moves from the 3G network to the SAE network. | 02-17-2011 |
20110044238 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR UPDATING CHANNEL DESCRIPTOR INFORMATION IN WIMAX NETWORKS - This application provides techniques for updating channel descriptor (CD) information in a wireless communications system. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044239 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CARRIER ACTIVATION - A method for receiving data using a user agent (UA) configured to communicate with a wireless communications network using a first and second communication carrier is presented. The method includes receiving control information at a first time interval using the first communication carrier. The control information allocates a resource on at least one of the first communication carrier and the second communication carrier. The control information indicates whether a carrier switch is required. In one implementation, when the control information indicates a carrier switch is required, the method includes ceasing signal reception on the first communication carrier, and receiving a signal on the second communication carrier. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044240 | Method for transmitting a packet at a base station in a network using multiple communication schemes - A method of transmitting a packet, at a MS and base station operable using multiple communication schemes is disclosed. The base station of the multiple communication schemes receives a packet from the MS and then determines a transmission path based on a link status of a network, a traffic characteristic of the packet and the like. The base station transmits the packet of the first communication scheme via a network using a second communication scheme, thereby enabling traffic redirection. Such a resource as a frequency band and the like, which will be used between networks using different communication schemes, can be cooperatively set between the MS and the base station. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044241 | TRANSMISSION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A transmission according to the present invention includes: (A) determining a maximum allowable data size for an uplink user IP packet in accordance with a type of a transmission path connected to a radio base station ( | 02-24-2011 |
20110044242 | METHOD FOR INTEGRATING A PARTICIPANT INTO A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK OF PROCESS AUTOMATION - A method for integrating a new participant into a wireless communication network of process automation technology, wherein the network has at least one node. The at least one node is selected at least on the basis of a predeterminable criterion, and that the at least one selected node is placed in an integration mode, which enables integration of the new participant into the network. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044243 | HARQ OPERATION METHOD FOR RETRANSMITTED DATA - Disclosed is the radio (wireless) communication system providing a radio communication service and the terminal, and more particularly, to a method of processing retransmitted data effectively so as to minimize a data loss during a HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest) operation in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) evolved from the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044244 | MAC/PHY IDENTIFICATION OF BASE STATION TYPES AND THEIR PREFERRED AND RESTRICTED ACCESS - Embodiments of a system and methods for identification of base station types are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044245 | BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station includes at least one first application section, a determining section, and a controlling section. Each of the first application sections executes one of a plurality of first application programs corresponding to one of a plurality of first application services utilizing a first wireless communication service provided by a mobile virtual network operator. The determining section receives a connection request to connect to the first application service from a first terminal for using the first wireless communication service, and determines the first application section corresponding to the first application service specified in the connection request. The controlling section controls communications between the determined first application section and a server managed by the mobile virtual network operator and between the determined first application section and the first terminal. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044246 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING TWO-WAY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK TRANSMISSIONS OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL - A system and method for an improved two-way packet-centric like radio communication network that transmits signals and data over Internet Protocol. The improved like radio communications network provides advanced features and enhanced services to its users, such as the capability of roaming across a plurality of similar like radio communications networks. A plurality of client devices including an enhanced client application for the operation of two-way like radio networks that accesses, contacts, and communicates with one or more client devices of the same network or one or more client devices of different like radio networks. The radio network includes an optional server application to establish packet-based radio communications between at least two client devices within a single radio network or across a plurality of radio networks. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044247 | MAXIMUM POWER SPECTRAL DENSITY REPORTING IN RESPONSE TO OVERLOAD INDICATIONS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose methods for reporting information such as a maximum power spectral density to a serving access point after receiving overload indicators from one or more neighboring access points. The reported information may be multiplexed with other information (e.g., Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), Precoding Matrix Index (PMI), rank indication (RI) or acknowledgement (ACK)/negative acknowledgment (NACK) message for downlink data channel) before transmission to the serving access point. In addition, the information may be transmitted in a medium access control (MAC) packet data unit (PDU). | 02-24-2011 |
20110044248 | RELIABLE INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY CORE NETWORK TUNNEL - A method of a mobile switching center includes determining if a message belongs to a first set of messages or a second set of messages, filtering the message when the message belongs to the first set of messages, and sending the message when the message belongs to the second set of messages. A method of an interworking solution includes receiving a message from an apparatus, determining if the message belongs to a first set of messages or a second set of messages, and discarding the message when the message belongs to the first set of messages. The first set of messages are 1× native messages unsupported for tunneling to a user equipment and the second set of messages are 1× native messages supported for tunneling to the user equipment for circuit switch fallback procedures. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044249 | EVOLVED NODEB, RELAY NODE AND CONNECTION INITIALIZATION METHOD THEREOF - An evolved NodeB eNB, a first relay node (RN) and a connection initialization method thereof for use in a long term evolution (LTE) network are provided. The LTE network comprises the eNB, the first RN, a second RN and a mobility management entity (MME). In the LTE network of the present invention, various multi-hop protocols can be achieved by using different identification mapping implementations. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044250 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING A REFERENCE SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving reference signals in Long Term Evolution (LTE) and LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) systems includes determining whether a dedicated reference signal is detected in a current subframe; estimating, if a dedicated reference signal is detected in the current subframe, a data channel using the dedicated reference signal to receive data; and estimating, if no dedicated reference signal is detected in the current subframe, a data channel using a common reference signal detected in the current subframe to receive data. The transmission scheme uses a DeModulation Reference Signal (DM-RS) for channel response estimation. To secure backward compatibility of the LTE-A system, a Common Reference Signal is transmitted in normal subframes. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044251 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CORE NETWORK APPARATUS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A mobile communication system for relaying user data includes a plurality of base station apparatus and a core network apparatus. Each of the base station apparatus forms a cell for connecting to a terminal through a wireless link. The core network apparatus can be connected to the base station apparatus. Even when the terminal moves between the base station apparatus while the terminal is in an active mode in which the terminal is communicating, the core network apparatus which is connected to the terminal keeps itself connected to the terminal. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044252 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING ROUTING OF DATA IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING A MOBILE NODE CAPABLE OF ROAMING MOVEMENT - Apparatus, and an associated method, for providing routing information to a mobile node operable in a radio communication system. The routing information is used by the mobile node to address data messages that are to be communicated to a relay host, or other, device. The routing information that is provided to the mobile node includes a plurality of separate routing sequences. Different ones of the routing sequences are used by the mobile node, depending upon at what location that the mobile node is positioned when the data message is sent. A registration server is used by which to create the routing information, responsive to indications of a home network associated with the mobile node and a current location of the mobile node. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044253 | ACCESS NETWORK DISCOVERY AND SELECTION IN A MULTI-ACCESS TECHNOLOGY CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication unit ( | 02-24-2011 |
20110044254 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION DEVICE USING THE SAME, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A packet communication unit and a signal processing unit communicate with a plurality of terminals, respectively, in an infrastructure mode. A control unit controls the communications performed by the packet communication unit and the signal processing unit. The control unit permits two of the plurality of terminal apparatuses to communicate with each other in an ad-hoc mode, over a predetermined period time, and specifies the ad-hoc period to at least the two terminal apparatuses via the packet communication unit and the signal processing unit. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044255 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A radio communication system includes a plurality of radio communication devices that transmit and receive a subframe as a unit. Each of the plurality of radio communication devices adds a cyclic prefix to the head of the effective symbol of each OFDM symbol that makes up a subframe and adds a postfix to the tail of the effective symbol of the last OFDM symbol of the subframe. | 02-24-2011 |
20110051657 | Methods and apparatus for multi-carrier communications systems with automatic repeat request (ARQ) - Hybrid ARQ is employed in a multi-carrier communication system for retransmission of erroneous packets by taking advantage of time/frequency/space diversity and by combining ARQ functions at physical layer and MAC layers, making the multi-carrier system more robust in a high packet-error environment. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051658 | TWO STAGE MOBILE DEVICE GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION DETERMINATION - A system and method for mitigating the delay associated with using GPS technologies to determine the location of a mobile device. The system utilizes a two-stage location determination process. During the first stage, an estimated position of the mobile device is immediately provided based on the most accurate stored location information that is available to the system. If greater accuracy is still required, during the second stage a more accurate position of the mobile device is provided using GPS-based technologies. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051659 | NETWORK PREFIX SELECTION - Method and nodes for selecting a network prefix to be advertised in an IP network comprising an access router and a mobile node (MN). From the access router, a first validity period is used to advertise at least a first and a second network prefixes towards the MN. The access router receives a message from the MN indicating an intended address thereof that it intends to use. In the access router, based on the message, only one of the first or second network prefix that the MN needs to use is then determined. The access router afterwards advertises towards the MN the only one network prefix with a second validity period longer than the first validity period. The access router may further acquire a current address and a current network prefix used by the MN and it may use these in the determination of the only one network prefix. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051660 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUISITION OF NEIGHBOUR CELL INFORMATION - A system and method for acquisition of neighbour cell information are provided. A serving cell receives a request for neighbour cell system information, and in response to the request, the serving cell transmits neighbour cell system information. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051661 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO AVOID MOBILE STATION TRANSMISSION OF DUPLICATE EVENT-BASED AND POLLED ACKNOWLEDGMENTS - Methods and apparatus to avoid mobile station transmission of duplicate event-based and polled acknowledgments are disclosed. An example method for a mobile station configured to send event-based acknowledgment information as disclosed herein comprises classifying a downlink data block as unreported, receiving a poll from a network requesting the mobile station to send polled acknowledgment information during a period, and refraining from sending during the period event-based acknowledgment information for the downlink data block classified as unreported. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051662 | REGISTRATION OF A NEW NODE TO A METER READING WIRELESS MESH NETWORK AND ASSOCIATED SYSTEM - A meter reading system includes a meter reading wireless mesh network having already-registered nodes already registered for communication with an access point, and not-yet-registered nodes not yet registered for communication with the access point. To register a new node with meter reading wireless mesh network, the new node transmits a request to register message. Neighboring already-registered nodes receiving the request to register message transmit responses back to the new node, whereas neighboring not-yet-registered nodes receiving the request to register message do not transmit responses back to the new node and do not transmit responses to neighboring already-registered nodes. The new node selects an already-registered node based on evaluation of the responses, and communicates to the access point via the selected already-registered node to thereby be added to network. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051663 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A RAIL VEHICLE - A rail vehicle includes of one or more locomotives and may further include one or more rail cars, and the rail vehicle further includes a locator element, a communications device and a control module located on the rail vehicle. The locator elements provide a location information of the rail vehicle to a control module. The control module is coupled to the communications device and the locator element. The control module determines control settings for controlling the operations of the communications device based on the location of the rail vehicle. The communications device sends and/or receives data, including communications data, off-board the rail vehicle. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051664 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING PACKET DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for simultaneously receiving a plurality of Packet Data Units (PDUs) are provided. In a method of receiving a plurality of PDUs, the plurality of PDUs, each PDU having an associated Sequence Number (SN), are received, one of the plurality of PDUs is input into a reception buffer, a first variable is updated based on the SN of the PDU input into the reception buffer, wherein the first variable indicates the highest SN of PDUs input into the reception buffer, a determination is made if a timer is running, if the timer is not running, a determination is made if all of the received PDUs are input into the reception buffer, and, if any of the received PDUs is not input into the reception buffer, a next PDU to be input into the reception buffer is awaited. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051665 | Location Histories for Location Aware Devices - A location aware mobile device can include a baseband processor for communicating with one or more communication networks, such as a cellular network or WiFi network. In some implementations, the baseband processor can collect network information (e.g., transmitter IDs) over time. Upon request by a user or application, the network information can be translated to estimated position coordinates (e.g., latitude, longitude, altitude) of the location aware device for display on a map view or for other purposes. A user or application can query the location history database with a timestamp or other query to retrieve all or part of the location history for display in a map view. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051666 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION USING SUB-MAP - A radio access system, and more particularly, a frame structure and a map structure are provided. A communication method includes transmitting an uplink sub-map to a receiver at a first downlink sub-frame included in a predetermined frame, and receiving data via a data burst indicated by the uplink sub-map at a first uplink sub-frame included in the predetermined frame. If the suggested sub-frame structure is used, it is possible to reduce HARQ ACK delay and HARQ retransmission delay. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051667 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING RANGING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING TWO WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SCHEMES - A method for performing ranging is disclosed. The method for performing ranging in a wireless communication system which simultaneously supports a legacy system and a new system includes a method for additionally allocating a ranging channel to a zone other than a legacy zone and a method for re-using a legacy ranging channel within the legacy zone. When the legacy ranging channel is re-used, ranging codes may be shared by a legacy mobile station and a new system mobile station or may be separated on a ranging code domain. Limited radio resources can be effectively employed by re-using the legacy ranging channel. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051668 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PAGING INFORMATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for efficiently transmitting and receiving a paging message and system information from and in a mobile station of a broadband wireless access system is disclosed. A method for receiving a paging message in a mobile station comprise receiving paging information from a serving base station, the paging information including paging sub group identifier (paging sub_group ID) indicating a paging sub group to which the mobile station belongs; and receiving the paging message for a predetermined paging interval of the paging sub group, wherein the paging sub group is determined separately from a paging group and a geographical location determining the paging group, and is maintained while the mobile station is being operated in an idle mode. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051669 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL IN-ORDER DELIVERY - Method and apparatus for MAC in-order delivery are disclosed. The MAC in-order delivery may be activated per-connection and may be negotiated at connection setup. The MAC in-order delivery either for non-ARQ connections or ARQ connections may be performed by using HARQ packet ordering information. Alternatively, the MAC in-order delivery may be performed using a sequence number (SN) field at the MAC PDU level or using an SN field at the MAC SDU level. For a connection that has MAC in-order delivery disabled, the MAC PDU may not include an SN field, and an SN field may be included in a MAC extended header or a MAC sub-header when needed. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051670 | INTEGRATED BLOCKER FILTERING RF FRONT END - A receiver architecture for canceling blocking signals in the receive path includes a low noise amplifier for receiving and amplifying an inbound RF signal to produce an amplified inbound signal, in which the inbound RF signal includes a modulated RF signal and a blocking signal, and a cancellation module for substantially canceling the blocking signal from the amplified inbound RF signal and substantially passing the modulated RF signal. The cancellation module cancels the blocking signal by generating an injection signal representative of the blocking signal, combining the blocking signal with the injection signal to produce an error signal, updating the injection signal based on the error signal and using the injection signal to cancel the blocking signal from the amplified inbound RF signal. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051671 | Method and Apparatus for Transmitting Control Signal in Radio Communication System - A method and an apparatus of transmitting a control signal in a wireless communicatino system is provided. They generate a first-spread sequence by spreading a modulated sequence in the first slot by using a first orthogonal sequence, generate a second-spread sequence by spreading a modulated sequence in the second slot by using a second orthogonal sequence. The first spread sequence and the second spread sequence are transmitted in a subframe. A length of the first orthogonal sequence is shorter than a length of the second orthogonal sequence, the second orthogonal sequence is generated by removing at least one element included in the first orthogonal sequence, and the at least one element to be removed is identical in every index of the first orthogonal sequence. | 03-03-2011 |
20110058516 | Accessory Based Data Distribution - In some aspects, a telecommunications device obtains an identifier from an accessory token. The telecommunications device may transmit the identifier to a server to request content associated with the identifier. The telecommunications device may receive the content from the server when the identifier is valid and/or the content is available. In various aspects, the accessory token is communicatively coupled to the telecommunications device, which enables the telecommunications device to obtain the identifier. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058517 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A radio communication system for connecting mobile nodes to public network, include base stations connected to mobile nodes by radio, node registration devices connected to control the stations and register node registration information representing contents of node connection to the node registration device through the station into node information management device which is connected to public network and manages mobile node address information in registration information registered by the node registration devices. A combination of the base station and node registration device controlling the station and a combination of the station, node registration device controlling the station, other node registration device and one or a plurality of the node information management device constitute different communication routes any of which is utilized to realize connection from node to public network. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058518 | Multi-Channel Single Carrier Per Channel (SCPC) Systems and Related Methods - A multi-channel demodulating system comprising an analog to digital converter (ADC) that samples an input signal and produces a digital signal, a tuning, filtering, and decimation stage coupled to the ADC and configured to select a transponder based on a frequency range of the digital signal and deliver a signal representative of the digital signal to the transponder, and a demodulator coupled to the selected transponder, a decoder, and the circuit stage, the demodulator configured to receive the representative signal from the transponder, the demodulator and decoder configured to separate and process the representative signal to produce a processed signal. The system further comprises a packet de-encapsulation module coupled to the demodulator and decoder configured to de-encapsulate packets of data contained in the processed signal, a switch coupled to the packet de-encapsulation module and a satellite router, the switch configured to transmit the packets of data to the satellite router. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058519 | System and Method for Over the Air Provisioning of a Mobile Communications Device - A method for provisioning a mobile communications device comprises sending a registration request for registration with a registration server, the registration request including a request for a personal information number; receiving a response from the registration server, the response including the personal information number; sending a provisioning request to a network node, the request including the personal information number and at least one device identifier associated with the mobile communications device; receiving a response from the network node, the response including a URL and a session ID based upon the personal information number and the at least one device identifier associated with the mobile communications device; and launching an application on the mobile communication device to establish a communication session between the mobile communication device and a provisioning system. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058520 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR SUPPORTING A SESSION IDENTIFIER IN CASE OF A TRANSFER BETWEEN DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - A method and application server for supporting a communication established between a first mobile terminal towards a telecommunications network that includes first and second radio access networks. When a session setup is initiated with respect to the first mobile terminal, the application server receives a session identifier. The application server enters the identifier into an identifier list comprising one or more identifiers for identifying sessions with respect to the first mobile terminal. If the application server receives an indication of a session transfer from the first radio access network to the second radio access network, the application server provides the identifier list to the second radio access network in response to the indication. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058521 | USER INFORMATION NOTIFYING METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS - The present invention discloses a user information notifying method, system and apparatus. In the present invention, a MME obtains RAT/Frequency Selection Priority information of UE, and notifies an eNodeB of the information. According to the method, system and apparatus of the present invention, the eNodeB can obtain the RAT/Frequency Selection Priority information of the UE, and further perform Radio Resource Management according to the information, thereby improving system performance. | 03-10-2011 |
20110064021 | TARGETING COMMUNICATIONS IN A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - The disclosed subject matter relates to an architecture that can leverage Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) features to facilitate more efficient or more robust communication with a femtocell network. In particular, features such as a UMTS localized common pilot channel along with various UTRAN features can enable communications to be directed to specific targets such as to a specific home nodeB (HNB) or to a specific mobile device served by the HNB, while also reducing macro network load. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064022 | Method and Apparatus for Enabling Networked Operations in Voice Radio Systems - A method and system for the networking of radio transceivers is disclosed. The system includes a source transceiver with a source address, and a destination transceiver with a destination address. A router gateway includes a first interface in communication with the source transceiver and a second interface in communication with the destination transceiver, and interconnections between the two are defined in a routing table. A network signaling system independent of the respective radio transmission and receipt systems enables communication between the source transceiver and the destination transceiver. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064023 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system comprises a host and a device. The host is provided with a communication unit capable of data communication using a first communication system and a second communication system which is higher in maximum transmission rate than the first communication system, and without regard to any communication system to be used by the device, the host uses the first communication system to start processing for establishment of a communication link with the device. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064024 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CALL ROUTING AND PAGING ACROSS DIFFERENT TYPES OF NETWORKS - A network architecture uses an Application Server Autonomous Access (ASAA) server which allows paging and call routing across different types of wireless and wireline access networks. The ASAA server provides connectivity between an external voice or data network and a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The external voice or data network may be a public switched telephone network (PSTN) or a public data network (PDN), so that the connectivity between the external network and the WTRU is provided through the access networks using data from the ASAA server. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064025 | WIRELESS POSITION SENSING IN THREE DIMENSIONS - A position sensing system enabling dynamic adjustment of the sensing by dynamically adjusting amplifier gain or comparator thresholds in response to received signals. The system compares the time a signal takes to travel from a transmitter in a mobile component to a plurality of receivers in a fixed component and, adjusts the amplifier gain or comparator thresholds if the difference in times measured by the receivers is large or at least one receiver does not detect a signal. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064026 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK AND SENSOR NODE - In a method for operating a wireless sensor network ( | 03-17-2011 |
20110064027 | GRACEFUL DEGRADATION FOR COMMUNICATION SERVICES OVER WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - An application for gracefully extending the range and/or capacity of voice communication systems. The application includes a module for the persistent storage of voice media on a communication device as the voice media is created. When the usable bit rate on the network is poor and below that necessary for conducting live communication of the voice media, a transmit module transmits the voice media out of storage at or below the available usable bit rate on the network. Although latency may be introduced, the storage of transmitted media provides the ability to extend the useful range and/or capacity of the network when conditions on the network otherwise make live communication impossible or impractical. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064028 | Dual-Mode Device for Voice Communication - A terminal for use in a voice communications system includes a base station and at least one handset arranged to communicate wirelessly with the base station. The base station includes a first interface to a packet data network and a second interface to a public switched telephone network, the base station being arranged to selectively establish a packet data call from the first interface and a public switched telephone call from the second interface. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064029 | DOWNLINK SIGNALING FOR A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - System and method for signaling control information in a multi-carrier communications system to transmit data. A preferred embodiment comprises demodulating a first carrier that is used for transmitting a control channel transmission, determining a second carrier that is used for transmitting a data channel transmission based upon the demodulated control channel transmission, and demodulating the second carrier to obtain the data channel transmission. Additionally, designs for multi-carrier receivers are provided. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064030 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND DATA MAPPING METHOD - A base station device includes a determining unit that determines a combination of a plurality of users having different reception qualities, an allocating unit that generates a plurality of hierarchical modulation channels having different qualities based on channel elements constituting channels corresponding to the respective users in the combination determined by the determining unit, and allocates the hierarchical modulation channels to the respective users such that a hierarchical modulation channel having a higher quality is allocated to a user having a lower reception quality, a mapping unit that maps data for each user to the hierarchical modulation channel allocated to each user by the allocating unit, and a transmitting unit that transmits the data mapped by the mapping unit. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064031 | Method and System for Wireless VoIP Communications - Methods, an apparatus, and a system for communications using multiplexed packets including payloads of the current and at least one preceding packet are disclosed. The invention is able to implement both robustness and a degree of compression while still being able to operate in environments of limited bandwidth having high rates of packet loss, such as in wireless VoIP networks. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064032 | Method for Configuring a Preamble and a Method for Searching a Cell - The present invention provides a method for configuring a preamble and a method for searching a cell, wherein the method for configuring a preamble comprises: configuring a preamble as comprising a first reference preamble and a second reference preamble, wherein the first reference preamble and the second reference permeable are located in different OFDM symbols. By means of the technical solution of the present invention, accessing solution between the fourth-generation communication system with the third-generation communication system based on the OFDM technology can be realized and the accessing time is shortened. | 03-17-2011 |
20110069656 | METHOD FOR WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK USING SYNCHRONOUS MAC PROTOCOL - Technology for a wireless multi-hop network is provided. A method by which a source node operates in a wireless multi-hop network includes selecting one of first to M-th frame structures (M is a natural number greater than or equal to 2), based on a data packet generation interval, when the source node is in an active state, synchronizing with neighboring nodes in a first synchronization period of the selected frame structure, and when the source node is in the active state, transmitting a control packet to a next hop in a data period of the selected frame structure, and waiting for a response from the next hop, the control packet indicating that the source node will transmit a data packet in a sleep period subsequent to the data period and including information on the selected frame structure. Here, each of the first to M-th frame structures defines a frame including at least one synchronization period, at least one data period, and at least one sleep period, and having a different duty cycle. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069657 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE SIMULTANEOUS TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OF FLO AND FLO-EV DATA OVER A MULTI-FREQUENCY NETWORK - A system for receiving data comprising a receiver configured to receive a radio frequency communication signal comprising at least one superframe, the at least one superframe having at least a first data stream encoded therein; and overhead information carried in the superframe, the overhead information comprising a control channel, the control channel having control channel information for separating the at least one first data stream from any other data streams encoded in the at least one superframe, where the at least first data stream and any other data streams may be carried on different radio frequency channels. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069658 | Method for Reducing Closed Subscriber Group Identity Comparison - A method for reducing CSG identity comparison for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes the steps of including RAT information in an Allowed CSG list and an Operator CSG List, wherein the Allowed CSG list and the Operator CSG List are stored in an elementary file of the mobile device and the RAT information indicates a plurality of RATs associated with a plurality of CSG identities listed in the allowed CSG list; maintaining a plurality of sub-allowed CSG lists in an access stratum (AS) layer of the mobile device according to the plurality of RATs, wherein the number of the sub-allowed CSG lists corresponds to the number of the RATs; and comparing a CSG identity associated with a first RAT with the CSG identities listed in a first sub allowed CSG list corresponding to the first RAT. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069659 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING LOCAL BREAKOUT SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for providing a Local BreakOut (LBO) service in a wireless communication system are provided. In the method for providing an LBO service in a wireless communication system, after an access authentication procedure between an authentication server and a terminal, a femto gateway receives a subscriber profile including LBO service flow information from the authentication server to provide the LBO service flow information to a femto base station through initial service flow setting between the terminal and the femto gateway. The femto base station sets an LBO service flow through a Dynamic Service Addition (DSA) procedure. The terminal performs a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) procedure through the LBO service flow setting, and obtains an IP address for LBO based on the DHCP procedure. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069660 | FEMTOCELL AND RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD THEREOF - A femtocell and a resource allocation method thereof are provided. The femtocell comprises a storage unit and a processing unit. The storage unit is configured to store a priority region threshold. The processing unit is configured to assign a first region of a frame as a CSG region according to a priority region threshold and assign a second region of the frame as a non-CSG region according to the priority region threshold. The CSG region and the non-CSG region are exclusive. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069661 | Telecommunication Service Employing an Electronic Information Repository Storing Social Network User Information, Developer Information, and Mobile Network Operator Information - A telecommunication system that carries out telecommunication functions between multiple parties as initiated by the user interaction with a social network application, while maintaining privacy of the device identifiers (phone numbers or static IP addresses assigned to devices) of the participating parties. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069662 | CONTEXT TRANSFER SYSTEMS AND METHODS IN SUPPORT OF MOBILITY - A broad aspect of the invention provides a method of providing mobility support for a mobile node's traffic. The method involves maintaining context information for the mobile node on each of a first plurality of network nodes carrying the traffic; and proactively transferring and maintaining at least a portion of the context information in a plurality of network nodes which are not carrying the traffic, but which are candidates for carrying the traffic due to mobility of the mobile node. The method typically further involves defining and maintaining a definition of the second plurality of network nodes. In one embodiment of the invention, this involves adding a particular network node to the second plurality when the particular network node becomes a candidate for carrying the traffic, removing a particular network node from the second plurality when the particular network node is no longer a candidate for carrying the traffic. Furthermore, for each node in the second plurality of network nodes, a definition is made of a node in the first plurality of network nodes from which to obtain the context information. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069663 | INTERCEPTING GPRS DATA - GPRS Tunneling Protocol (“GTP”) packets are intercepted by receiving a GTP tunnel packet, determining whether the GTP tunnel packet is to be intercepted, intercepting GTP tunnel packets if it is determined that the GTP tunnel packet is to be intercepted, and processing the intercepted GTP tunnel packets. Multiple tunnels may be intercepted simultaneously and GTP tunnel packets from different tunnels may be processed differently. Implementations include both inline and offline interception of GTP traffic between SGSN and GGSN. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069664 | LOCATION INTERCEPT METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present disclosure discloses a location monitoring method and apparatus. The method includes: creating a tracking area (TA) list for user equipment (UE) according to a monitoring precision indication and sending the TA list to the UE; and obtaining location information of the UE when the UE executes a location update according to the TA List and reporting the location information to a monitoring center. With the present disclosure, the monitoring location precision of a monitoring target may be set so that more accurate location information of the monitoring target can be obtained and that the needs of various monitoring tasks can be satisfied. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069665 | NETWORK INTERFACE UNIT FOR A NODE IN A WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK, AND A METHOD OF ESTABLISHING A NETWORK PATH BETWEEN NODES IN A WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK - The invention describes a network interface unit ( | 03-24-2011 |
20110075603 | MEDIUM ALLOCATION IN A DISTRIBUTED NETWORK - A method of network operations comprises conducting communication activities at a first network device using a shared network medium and having a first coverage area, wherein the communication activities comprise broadcasting a data transmission reservation or receiving a data transmission reservation of another network device during a beacon period; and conducting communications with the first network device at a second network device using the shared network medium; wherein the second network device is configured to provide a second coverage area that is substantially contained within the first coverage area and wherein the second network device does not monitor network communications during the beacon period. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075604 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method for execution by a mobile station (MS) in a mobile communications network, the method comprising: receiving a first MS identifier from the network during a ranging operation involving the MS; using the first MS identifier to extract the contents of at least one message received from the network during said ranging operation; using a second MS identifier, different from the first MS identifier, to extract the contents of at least one message received from the network after said ranging operation is complete. Also, a method for execution by the base station, comprising: outputting a first message destined for the MS, the first message including a first identifier for use by the MS during a ranging operation; determining that said ranging operation is complete; outputting a second message destined for the MS, the second message including a second identifier for use by the MS in subsequent communication with the network. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075605 | Transmitting Data Packets In Multi-Rat Networks - In order to transmit data packets in multi-RAT networks, a method and a system of network controllers are proposed comprising:
| 03-31-2011 |
20110075606 | Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method - A wireless communication system is disclosed. The system performs data transmission from a first terminal including N antennas to a second terminal including M antennas using spatially multiplexed streams (N and M are integers larger than or equal to 2). | 03-31-2011 |
20110075607 | Multi-user null data packet (MU-NDP) sounding within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Multi-user null data packet (MU-NDP) sounding within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. Within communication systems including multiple wireless communication devices (e.g., one or more APs, STAs, etc.), channel sounding of the selected communication links between the various wireless communication devices is performed. A MU-NDP announcement frame is transmitted to and received by various wireless communication devices indicating which of those wireless communication devices (e.g., one, some, or all) are being sounded. Then, respective NDP sounding frames are transmitted via the communication links corresponding to those wireless communication devices (e.g., one, some, or all) are being sounded, and sounding feedback signals are subsequently sent back to the original transmitting wireless communication device. In some instances, after transmission of the MU-NDP announcement frame, a clear to send (CTS) is sent from at least one of the wireless communication devices thereby precipitating the transmission of the NDP sounding frames. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075608 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR NETWORK SELECTION - A method, system, and device for network selection are provided. The method for network selection includes the following steps. After network selection is triggered, a network selection list stored in a Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC) and a network selection list stored in a Mobile Equipment (ME) are read, where the UICC is embedded in the ME and accessible to the ME. Network selection is performed according to the network selection list stored in the UICC and the network selection list stored in the ME. Also, a method for network selection through a network selection policy is added and methods for implementing a type and a data structure of a network selection policy as well as a method for network selection based on a network selection policy are provided, so that network selection can be controlled more flexibly, a terminal can locate a target network faster, and time consumed for the network selection is reduced. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075609 | CALL FLOW SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USE IN A VOIP TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of establishing a communication link between a mobile terminal of a wireless network and a subscriber of a network, such as an enterprise network, and/or a residential network. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075610 | MOBILE TERMINAL, BASE STATION DEVICE AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system is provided with a base station device and a mobile terminal, which mutually perform radio communication. The system is also provided with a cell search part provided in the mobile terminal conducting a cell search, and an operation part configured to calculate a period for another cell search based on a period required for the cell search. The cell search part conducts the another cell search during the period calculated by the operation part. | 03-31-2011 |
20110080867 | Method and an Arrangement for Legacy Fallback Between Communication Network Systems - A mechanism is provided by a method and an arrangement for performing Circuit Switched fallback from a packet switched domain to a circuit switched domain, in order to speed up the time it takes for a User Equipment to access an 1×RTT system before initiating services. Thus, the teachings herein provide a method of Circuit Switched fallback (i.e. for handling Circuit Switched Services) for a User Equipment residing in a Packet Switched domain, comprising of the eNB, located within the packet switched domain, transmitting an indication that Circuit Switched Services are supported to a User Equipment and registering to a Circuit Switched domain by signalling Circuit Switched Registration information, via the eNB, enabling the User Equipment to register to a Circuit | 04-07-2011 |
20110080868 | ENERGY EFFICIENT QUALITY OF SERVICE AWARE COMMUNICATION OVER MULTIPLE AIR-LINKS - A method, an apparatus, and a machine-readable medium are provided for wireless communication in which at least two modems are selected from a set of modems for the wireless communication based on quality of service requirements for and an energy consumption of the wireless communication. In addition, the selected at least two modems are utilized concurrently for the wireless communication. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080869 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR EXPLOITATION OF WELL-CONNECTED NODES IN PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS NETWORKS - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure relate to a method for increasing a capacity in a peer-to-peer (P2P) wireless network. A scheme has been proposed in which well-connected nodes of the P2P wireless network can be exploited in a manner that increases the overall connectivity of all the nodes in the network. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080870 | INTERNETWORKING TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Techniques, apparatuses, and systems can include mechanisms for interworking different wireless technologies. Interworking different wireless technologies can include operating a wireless communication system that includes a first wireless network based on a first wireless technology and a second wireless network based on a second wireless technology. Interworking different wireless technologies can include processing a network based change to an Aggregated Maximum Bit Rate (AMBR) parameter that corresponds to an Access Point Name (APN) and communicating the network based change to a wireless device. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080871 | Systems and methods for establishing a telecommunications bridge between a user device and a node - Systems and methods for establishing a telecommunications bridge between a user device and a node are provided herein. In some embodiments a method for establishing a telecommunications bridge between a user device and a node includes receiving a request to establish a telecommunications bridge, the request including information indicative of a user device, and a campaign identifier corresponding to at least one node, comparing the campaign identifier to a campaign database, the campaign database including information indicative of campaign identifiers associated with at least one node, and establishing the telecommunications bridge between a user device and at least one node. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080872 | Distributed Local Mobility Anchors for Achieving Optimized Mobility Routing - A method and system for optimizing mobility routing are disclosed. A preferred embodiment comprises a home local mobility anchor and two or more distributed local mobility anchors, wherein the distributed local mobility anchors have a reduced functionality from the home local mobility anchor. A first distributed local mobility anchor may send an initial data packet from a correspondent node to the home local mobility anchor, which may route the initial data packet to a second distributed local mobility anchor where a mobile node is anchored while also sending the location of the mobile node back to the first distributed local mobility anchor. Subsequent packets can be sent by the first distributed local mobility anchor directly to the second distributed local mobility anchor and bypassing the home local mobility anchor. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080873 | MAC PACKET DATA UNIT CONSTRUCTION FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method for wireless communication using MAC PDUs. The method includes determining one or more characteristics of a service flow and selecting on the basis of the one or more characteristics a MAC PDU header type among a plurality of MAC PDU header types. The service flow data is encapsulated in MAC PDUs with a header of the selected type. The MAC PDUs with the encapsulated service flow data are then wirelessly transmitted. Also, a method for communication between a Base Station (BS) and a Subscriber Station (SS). The method includes generating at the BS a plurality of MAC PDU packets with a payload component holding service flow data and a plurality of MAC PDU packets without payload component, carrying control information. The method also includes transmitting wirelessly the MAC PDU packets with the payload component and the MAC PDU packets with the control information to the SS. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080874 | Method of and Apparatus for Adaptive Control of Data Buffering in a Data Transmitter - A data transmitter divides incoming data for transmission into data blocks and passes them in frame transmission order to a radio link stage via a serial frame buffer. The buffer holds the data frames until the radio link stage is able to transmit them. The incoming data has associated with it various parameters. The radio link stage has allocated to it radio link resources. The parameters and resources, which change independently of each other from time to time, are supplied to a controller which calculates high and low buffer levels therefrom. The controller controls the passing of the data frames through the frame buffer to maintain the number of frames in the buffer at any instant of time at a level between the calculated high and low levels. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080875 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING A KEY IN AN ACTIVE STATE - A method for updating a key in an active state is disclosed according to the embodiments of the present invention. The method includes steps of: initiating a key update by a user equipment in the active state or a network side when a pre-defined condition is met; updating the key by the network side and the user equipment, and negotiating an activation time of the new keys. An apparatus for updating a key in an active state is also disclosed according to the present invention. With the present invention, the user equipment in an active state and the network side may actively initiate the key update procedure in different cases, thereby solving the problem concerning the key update for a session in an active state. | 04-07-2011 |
20110085492 | System and Method for Extending a Wireless Communication Coverage Area of a Cellular Base Transceiver Station (BTS) - The present document describes a system and method for extending a wireless communication coverage area of a cellular wireless base station transceiver (BTS) to enable control signaling and identification of mobile stations not currently within a coverage area of an existing beamform antenna pattern of the BTS, for example. A cellular BTS may scan through dead zones of coverage areas provided by the BTS to identify mobile stations not within the coverage area of the BTS, but within a possible service area of the BTS. In addition, the BTS may receive a relaying control signal from a mobile station located within the coverage area of the BTS, and the signal will indicate a location of another mobile station not within the coverage area of the BTS but within the service area of the BTS. In either example, the BTS may attempt to provide a coverage area to the mobile station located in the control signaling dead zone, for example. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085493 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTINUOUS PACKET CONNECTIVITY - A UE receives HSDPA traffic comprising legacy HSDPA traffic and HS-SCCH-less HSDPA traffic. The UE concurrently processes the received legacy HSDPA traffic and the received HS-SCCH-less HSDPA traffic. The received HSDPA traffic is concurrently buffered into a first storage and a second storage to support simultaneously receiving legacy HSDPA traffic and HS-SCCH-less HSDPA traffic. A HARQ process is performed on the buffered HSDPA traffic in the first storage or the second storage according to a corresponding HS-SCCH CRC test. The resulting HARQ processed HSDPA traffic is Turbo decoded. Turbo decoding on the previously HARQ processed HSDPA traffic is performed simultaneously with HARQ processing on the buffered HSDPA traffic in the first storage or the second storage. The buffered HS-SCCH-less HSDPA traffic is processed via HARQ processing and Turbo decoding for each of the four pre-determined transport formats. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085494 | DATA ROUTING IN HYBRID WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - System(s), device(s), and method(s) are provided to route data in a mesh network of devices that can communicate wirelessly through a plurality of technologies. One or more of such devices receive broadcast message(s) from a destination device intended to receive the data, and generate a first radio link quality metric (RLQM) value based on the broadcast message(s). A source device originates and delivers a quantum of data with an embedded first RLQM value. A set of intermediate devices relays the quantum of data if a forwarding criterion is fulfilled; the forwarding criterion is based in part on the first RLQM value and a second RLQM value generated by an intermediate device in the set of intermediate devices based on the broadcast message(s). The intermediate device exploits an optical interface to transmit the quantum of data. The destination device broadcasts an acknowledgement signal in response to receiving intended data. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085495 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Provided is method of forming a signal in a wireless communication system in which a plurality of terminals commonly use a resource in the time domain and the frequency domain. The method includes multiplying a signal to be transmitted by a frequency domain orthogonal code symbol corresponding to a first cyclic shift index in a first slot to be transmitted to a base station, wherein the multiplying is performed by a first terminal and a second terminal; and multiplying information to be transmitted by a frequency domain orthogonal code symbol corresponding to a second cyclic index that is different from the first cyclic index of the first slot to be transmitted to the base station, in a second slot, wherein the multiplying is performed by the first terminal and the second terminal. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085496 | Method for triggering a status report of automatic repeat request - The present invention discloses a method for triggering a status report of automatic repeat request. When a receiver acknowledged mode radio link control entity detects that received radio link control layer PDUs are missing, a timer T | 04-14-2011 |
20110085497 | Connectionless modes for wireless machine to machine communications in wireless communication networks - Techniques, devices, and systems that include mechanisms for connectionless communications in wireless communication networks or systems. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085498 | PLMN SELECTION AND INTER-SYSTEM MOBILITY POLICY CONFLICT RESOLUTION FOR MULTI-INTERFACE USER - A mobile device includes: multiple interfaces that are configured to support a various access technology such as 3G or Wi-Fi etc. A public land mobile network (PLMN) selector that generates a list for each of the PLMN networks that provide coverage to the mobile device. A PLMN selection policy parameter that is set to True or False to allow or prohibit the selection of PLMN networks by the mobile device based on the generated list where the generated list includes information as to different access technologies and selection priorities supported on the PLMN access networks providing coverage to the mobile device. In particular, when the PLMN selection policy parameter is set to True, multiple PLMN registrations are allowed; and when the A PLMN selection policy parameter is set to False, multiple PLMN registrations are prohibited. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085499 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE SIMULTANEOUS TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OF FLO AND FIO-EV DATA - A system for transmitting a data stream, includes a transmitter for broadcasting a radio frequency communication signal comprising at least one superframe having at least a first data stream encoded therein, and overhead information carried in the superframe, the overhead information comprising a control channel, the control channel having control channel information for separating the at least one first data stream from any other data streams encoded in the at least one superframe. A system for receiving data includes a receiver configured to receive a radio frequency communication signal comprising at least one superframe having at least a first data stream encoded therein; and overhead information carried in the superframe, the overhead information comprising a control channel, the control channel having control channel information for separating the at least one first data stream from any other data streams encoded in the at least one superframe. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085500 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO TRANSMITTING APPARATUS AND RADIO RECEIVING APPARATUS - The present invention is a radio communication system in which a radio transmitting apparatus transmits a packet to a radio receiving apparatus using a HARQ scheme, including a moving speed acquiring unit configured to acquire a moving speed of a radio communication terminal which is the radio transmitting apparatus or the radio receiving apparatus, a selection unit configured to select a transmission method of an information bit and an error correction bit which are transmitted under the HARQ scheme based on the moving speed acquired by the moving speed acquiring unit, and a transmitting unit configured to perform initial transmission and retransmission of the packet according to the transmission method selected by the selection unit. | 04-14-2011 |
20110090842 | Network mobility management method and corresponding apparatus - The present invention discloses a technique for realizing more secure communication and more efficient communication. According this technique, mobile router | 04-21-2011 |
20110090843 | WIRELESS INFRASTRUCTURE ACCESS NETWORK AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION ON SUCH NETWORK - Method of communication, in a wireless infrastructure access network having a plurality of wireless-enabled network nodes (WNNs), with a wireless-enabled infrastructure gateway node (WIG) and a wireless infrastructure access network. A default unidirectional route is established from each of said plurality of wireless-enabled network nodes (WNNs) to said wireless-enabled infrastructure gateway node (WIG). A bi-directional packet pathway is established over said wireless infrastructure access network between any given one of said wireless-enabled network nodes (WNNs) and said wireless infrastructure gateway node (WIG) that satisfies a specified quality of service (QoS). | 04-21-2011 |
20110090844 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SELECTIVELY ABORTING RECEPTION OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PACKETS - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of selectively aborting reception of wireless communication packets. For example, a receiver may at least partially process a portion of a wireless communication packet, to determine based on the portion of the communication packet whether the packet is intended to be received by the receiver and, if the packet is not intended to be received by the receiver, to abort processing of a remainder of the communication packet by one or more components of a physical layer of the receiver. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090845 | ENABLING UE ACCESS DOMAIN SELECTION FOR TERMINATED SPEECH/VIDEO CALLS - There is discussed a method of selecting an access domain for receiving a speech and/or video call at a mobile station of a mobile communications network in which calls are routed via a central service control common to a plurality of access domains. The method comprises the central service control transmitting an invite to establish a call to the terminating mobile station; the mobile station deciding on an access domain for receiving the call taking into account the capabilities of the local access network, and transmitting the selected access domain to the central service control; and establishing the call in accordance with the selected access domain. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090846 | Portable Access Point - A portable access point device is formed from a handheld computing device; an environmentally hardened case disposed around the computing device, and an access point module for reading and writing data to low frequency active radiating transceiver tags, such as RuBee® tags. The access point module is connected to the handheld computing device and the environmentally hardened case to provide a unitary handheld device, and the access point module transfers data between the handheld computing device and tags within communication range of the device. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090847 | ENABLING INTEROPERABILITY OF DUAL-RADIO AND SINGLE-RADIO DEVICES FOR VEHICULAR MULTI-CHANNEL OPERATIONS - A method for interoperations between single-radio (channel switching) devices and single-radio (always-on) devices includes single-radio (always-on) devices keep announcing safety messages on the safety channel at any time and keep monitoring packet transmissions on the safety channel at all times when it not transmitting in a normal mode; single-radio (channel switching) devices announce safety messages on the safety channel and keep monitoring packet transmissions on the safety channel during a safety channel interval; and once a single-radio (always-on) device detects the existence of a single-radio (channel-switching) device after successfully receiving at least one safety message transmitted by the single-radio (channel-switching) device during the safety channel interval, it enters to an interoperation mode, in which the single-radio (always-on) device shall transmit safety messages at least during the safety channel interval of the single-radio (channel-switching) device. Methods for interoperations between single-radio devices and dual-radio devices, with and without a safety channel are also disclosed. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090848 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING ISR ACTIVATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for determining Idle mode Signaling Reduction (ISR) activation in a mobile communications system. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090849 | Approach for QoS control on un-wanted services (e.g. VoIP or Multimedia) over wireless and wireless IP network - An apparatus in one example has: at least one access network operatively coupled to an access and data network; and a controller in the access and packet data network, the controller determining access of data flow from the access network through the access and data network. Embodiments allow access or packet data service providers to control which types of services are allowed over their respective access and packet data networks. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090850 | System and Method for Adaptive Frame Size Management in a Wireless Multihop Network - A system and method for adaptively managing frame size in a wireless multihop network is disclosed. In one embodiment, a packet is transmitted from a source to a destination. A acknowledgement packet is received and a successful acknowledgement packet counter is incremented if the acknowledgement packet arrives prior to a time-out of a timer. A frame size is increased if the successful acknowledgement packet counter reaches a specified value. If the acknowledgement packet arrives after the time-out of the timer, the successful acknowledgement packet counter is reset and the frame size is decreased. These procedures can be repeated until the frame size is greater than or equal to a maximum frame size or less than or equal to a minimum frame size. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090851 | Method and System for Transmission of Fragmented Packets on a Packet-Based Communication Network - The present invention provides a method and system for the identification and discovery of the lowest maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for transmission packets on some or all of the transmission path nodes. Different methods and protocols are described in the present patent application to support the identification and discovery of the lowest maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for fragmented transmission packets. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090852 | ENHANCED APN RESOLUTION - The present invention relates to a solution for resource allocation and in particular in relation to resolving a gateway. The solution according to the present invention uses an infix in an access point name, comprising a geographical area, in communicating with a domain name server. The infix is chosen from a list comprising unique combinations of selection criteria. | 04-21-2011 |
20110096720 | Method and System for Managing Information Within a Network - A method and system for managing information using a gateway ( | 04-28-2011 |
20110096721 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SELECTING TRACKING AREAS AND REDUCING PAGING - Some embodiments provide methods for selecting tracking areas in a network, including: generating and storing a plurality of tracking area groups based on which tracking areas of a plurality of tracking areas are served by which base transceiver stations of a plurality of base transceiver stations, each tracking area group including at least one tracking area; receiving a request for a tracking area list from user equipment connected to the network from a first tracking area belonging to a first tracking area group of the stored plurality of tracking area groups; based on the stored plurality of tracking area groups and the first tracking area group, generating a list comprising at least one tracking area; and sending the list comprising at least one tracking area to the user equipment. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096722 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device includes an RF receiver that receives a combined signal including a first signal transmitted from a first node and a second signal transmitted from a second node, a channel estimator that estimates first channel information of the first signal and second channel information of the second signal, respectively, a multiuser detector that detects original signal values of the combined signal using the estimated first and second channel information and an RF transmitter that transmits a signal generated based on the values detected by the multiuser detector to the first node and the second node during a predetermined period. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096723 | RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE, CORE NETWORK DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication base station device, core network device, radio communication system, radio communication terminal, and radio communication method all enabling reduction of the delay caused when a call connection is carried out simultaneously even when security setting and data channel setting are both carried out when the first call connection is carried out. In attaching stored setting information by an index imparting method different with each terminal, a base station sets security for a terminal and transmits it to the terminal. In call connection, the base station checks the status of the stored setting information transmitted from the terminal and the stored setting information list and transmits the index to the terminal under the condition that the CN, the base station, and the terminal hold common stored setting information. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096724 | Mobile Core Network Node Redundancy - Apparatus configured to operate within a communication network as a pool proxy, routing signalling traffic between a node of a first network and one of a set of pooled nodes within a second network. The apparatus is further configured to operate in one of an active state and a passive state towards the first network node and, when in said active state to send a heartbeat signal to at least one of said pooled nodes for relaying to a peer pool proxy and, when in said passive state, to receive a heartbeat signal from a peer pool proxy relayed via at least one of said pooled nodes. In the event that no heartbeat signal is received when in the passive state, the apparatus is configured to activate itself as pool proxy towards the first network node. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096725 | Method and Apparatus for Processing Padding Buffer Status Reports - A method and system for processing buffer status reports (BSRs) such that when BSR triggering is performed, the size(s) of the necessary sub-header(s) are also to be considered together in addition to the BSR size. The steps of checking whether any padding region is available in a MAC PDU that was constructed, comparing the number of padding bits with the size of the BSR plus its sub-header, and if the number of padding bits is larger than the size of the BSR plus its sub-header, triggering BSR are performed. Doing so allows the sub-header(s) to be inserted or included into the MAC PDU or transport block (TB) or other type of data unit. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096726 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR A PORTABLE TRANSCEIVER DEVICE THAT OPERATES AS A GATEWAY TO A PROPRIETARY NETWORK SERVICE - A portable gateway device facilitating shared access to a proprietary wireless network. The portable gateway device acts as an external modem for one or more auxiliary personal computing devices, and the device includes: a local power supply, one or more processors, one or more memories, an identification module associated with a proprietary wireless network, a first wireless communications component, and a second wireless communications component having longer range communications capability than the first wireless communications component. The portable gateway device is configured to facilitate one or more external computing device accessing the proprietary wireless network by: establishing communications with a first external computing device using the first wireless communications component, authenticating access with the proprietary wireless network using the second wireless communications component, and subsequently relaying communications between the first external computing device and the proprietary wireless network using both the first and the second wireless communications components. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096727 | Methods and Devices for Multiple Modulated Data Streams Signaling - Embodiments relate to a base station ( | 04-28-2011 |
20110096728 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ASSOCIATION BETWEEN EQUIPMENT AND GATEWAY - A method and a device for association between an equipment and a gateway are provided. The method includes: acquiring information of a user equipment (UE); establishing a virtual equipment according to the information of the UE; and configuring an identification of the gateway into the virtual equipment. A gateway is further provided, including: an acquiring module, adapted to acquire information of a UE; an establishing module, adapted to establish a virtual equipment according to the information of the UE acquired by the acquiring module; and a configuration module, adapted to configure an identification of the gateway into the virtual equipment established by the establishing module. Through the method, a configuration management system is enabled to acquire the association relation between the virtual equipment and the gateway. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096729 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Disclosed is radar wave detection and DFS (dynamic frequency selection) with high efficiency while considering, for instance, the power consumption of each communication station within an autonomous distributed network. At least one communication station runs in an interference avoidance operation mode, operates a radar wave detection section, and fulfills the obligation to issue instructions for radar wave detection and DFS for an approximately predetermined period of time. After the lapse of the approximately predetermined period of time, another communication station switches to the interference avoidance operation mode and assumes the obligation to issue instructions for radar wave detection and DFS. In other words, two or more communication stations sequentially run in the interference avoidance operation mode in a time sharing manner. Therefore, the average power consumption of the communication stations decreases. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096730 | Routing VoIP calls to an external network - A system and method for routing calls from a communication system in a VoIP network to an external network. The communication system comprises a plurality of communicating nodes. The communication system is configured to request routing information from a register associated with the external network for routing a communication to a subscriber of the external network, receive routing information from the register, and establish an external connection from the VoIP network for routing the communication to the external network based on the routing information. | 04-28-2011 |
20110103298 | Systems and Methods for Wireless Transmission of Packet-Based Data to One or More Residential Gateways - Methods and systems are disclosed that include receiving packet-based data at residential gateway from a service provider unit. In one embodiment, a location of a residential gateway is determined and at least a portion of the packet-based data is transmitted wirelessly to the residential gateway when the residential gateway is at an approved location. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103299 | PACKET ACKNOWLEDGMENT FOR POLLED MESH NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - A method, wireless mesh network and processor-readable storage medium for promoting successful end-to-end communication in a polled mesh network while improving system throughput are disclosed herein. Successful communications are acknowledged at each hop level to reduce the need to duplicate packets for redundancy. In this way, if a first bidirectional node transmits a packet to a second bidirectional node, the second bidirectional node acknowledges the packet, and the first bidirectional node receives the acknowledgement, then the first bidirectional node does not need to send a duplicate packet. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103300 | DATA ENCAPSULATION AND SERVICE DISCOVERY OVER A BROADCAST OR MULTICAST SYSTEM - Systems and methods may receive a baseband frame comprising a Layer 2 signaling section and an encapsulation protocol packet encapsulating: a service discovery real time transport protocol packet, and a real time transport protocol packet comprising at least one physical layer pipe transporting at least one service component for at least one service, wherein the Layer 2 signaling section includes a service list comprising one or more service names each associated with a respective physical layer pipe identifier of the at least one physical layer pipe; process the Layer 2 signaling section to obtain the service list; determining a desired service name of the one or more service names, the desired service name being associated with a first service component of the at least one service component; and identify a first physical layer pipe identifier associated with the desired service name to initiate decoding of the first service component. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103301 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RECEPTION OF DYNAMIC INFORMATION BY INACTIVE RECEIVERS - Methods and apparatus for the resource-efficient reception of selected segments of system information in receivers. In one embodiment, a wireless device can automatically receive and store segments of pilot channel information, which may be decoded at a later time. By time-shifting the decoding of pilot channel information (or selectively obviating portions thereof based on “intelligent” filtering), the wireless device can reduce the radio and processing burdens for monitoring radio channels. In one variant, the majority of the wireless device can power down for a “snoozing” mode, wherein the device wakes at a later point in order to decode the cached context information data. Various methods for selectively receiving and filtering context information for storage are also disclosed, as well as network apparatus and associated business methods. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103302 | CAMPUS ALERTING VIA WIRELESS GEOCAST - A geocast alerting system employs wireless geocast transmissions to deliver customized alerting messages to particular geographic areas. Geocast alerting regions and sub-regions can be defined within the system. Upon notice of the occurrence of an emergent situation, one or more geographic areas that may potentially be affected by the emergent situation are determined. The potentially effected geographic regions are compared with geocast alerting regions and sub-regions corresponding to particular geographic areas. Target alerting regions that should receive alerting messages are identified based on the comparison. The content of alerting messages can be tailored for each target alerting region. The content of alerting messages can contain distinct portions of content, each portion tailored based upon one or more conditions related to communications devices within the target alerting region. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103303 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ROUTING METHOD FOR PACKET SWITCHING SERVICE, FEMTO AP USING THE ROUTING METHOD - A wireless communication system, a routing method for a packet switched service, and a Femto AP (FAP) using the routing method are provided. The wireless communication system may include a core network, a broadband IP network, a FAP and at least a user equipment (UE). The UE connects the core network through the FAP and the broadband IP network. The routing method is as follows. The FAP may evaluate a request of the packet switched service sent by the UE, and may reply an accept message to the UE. The accept message may include a FAP address. The UE may use the FAP address to send a packet switching data to the FAP in order to obtain the packet switched service. The FAP may directly conduct the packet switched service with a packet switched service supply end through the broadband IP network without routing through the core network. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103304 | PACKET BUFFERING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING PACKET LOSS IN PROXY MOBILE IPv6 - Disclosed are a packet buffering apparatus and method for reducing packet loss in a proxy mobile IPv6, which include a first Mobile Access Gateway (MAG) requesting a Local Mobility Anchor (LMA) for packet buffering when outgoing Mobile Node (MN) being served by the MAG is detected, and the LMA for buffering the packet transmitted to the corresponding MN when receiving a request for the packet buffering. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103305 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO SUSPEND PACKET SWITCHED SERVICES - Methods and apparatus to suspend packet switched services in a mobile network are disclosed. An example method includes sending from a mobile equipment a session management status message comprising a first indication indicating suspend packet data protocol context. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103306 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO USE WINDOW ALIGNMENT INFORMATION TO PROCESS ACKNOWLEDGMENT INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH TRANSMITTED DATA BLOCKS - Methods and apparatus to use window alignment information to process acknowledgment information associated with transmitted data blocks are disclosed. An example method disclosed herein comprises receiving acknowledgment information piggy-backed with data when a first previously transmitted block is associated with at least one of a tentative acknowledgment state or a pending acknowledgment state, and advancing a transmit window when the acknowledgment information indicates that all previously transmitted data blocks including the first previously transmitted block have been positively acknowledged. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103307 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING REFERENCE SIGNAL FOR POSITIONING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving a reference signal for positioning in a wireless communication system are provided. In the method, a BS locates a PA preamble in a second frame among frames constituting each of multiple superframes, locates a SA preamble in first symbols of first and third frames among the frames constituting each of the multiple superframes, determines multiple consecutive first superframes belonging to an LBS zone from among the multiple superframes, includes a reference signal for LBS in a first symbol of a first subframe of a last frame among frames constituting each of the first superframes, includes data in a first symbol of a first subframe of a last frame among frames constituting each of second superframes that correspond to the multiple superframes excluding the first superframes when the data is to be transmitted, and communicates with an MS by using the first and second superframes. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103308 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING WARNING MESSAGE IN MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a warning message in a multiple carrier system performed by a network is provided. The method includes transmitting configuration information on aggregated downlink carriers for a user equipment (UE), transmitting, to the UE, carrier information on a first downlink carrier which is used to transmit a warning message, transmitting, to the UE, a notification which informs the UE of the upcoming transmission of the warning message via a second downlink carrier, and transmitting, to the UE, the warning message via the first downlink carrier. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103309 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONCURRENTLY PROCESSING MULTIPLE RADIO CARRIERS - A concurrent multi-carrier (MC) wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) capable of concurrently processing multiple radio carriers may simultaneously connect to multiple base stations for receiving multiple service flows via multiple air links. The concurrent-MC WTRU may be serviced by multiple base stations through multiple concurrent radio carriers simultaneously during normal operation for downlink and/or uplink communications. Each base station may provide special services optimized for each base station. The WTRU may use a lower quality air link for low priority services or low resolution data services while use a higher quality air link for high bandwidth or low latency services. A diversity gain may be achieved by combining signals from multiple base stations. The support and use of the multiple air links at the WTRU may be transparent to the base stations. Alternatively, base stations' support may be provided for setting up and operations of the multiple air links. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103310 | CORRELATION ID FOR LOCAL IP ACCESS - The invention relates to a home cellular base station (HeNB), comprising a radio interface (RI), to communicate with a user equipment (UE), a local interface (LI), to communicate with a local gateway (L-GW) providing access to a local IP network, a user plane interface (S1-U), to communicate with a serving gateway (SGW), and a control plane interface (S1-MME), to communicate with a control node (MME). The home cellular base station (HeNB) further comprises a selection module (SelMod) set to obtain a first correlation ID for enabling a direct user plane path between the home cellular base station (HeNB) and the local gateway (L-GW), the first correlation ID being obtained via the control plane interface (S1-MME) upon each establishment of a bearer providing access to the local IP network. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103311 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLEXING DIFFERENT TRAFFIC TYPES OVER A COMMON COMMUNICATION SESSION - An approach is provided for providing a reliable transmission of data associated with different traffic types over a common communication session. A temporary block is established between an apparatus and another apparatus. The apparatus multiplexes Radio Link Control (RLC) acknowledged mode data and at least one of RLC unacknowledged mode data and RLC non-persistent mode data. The apparatus then determines to transmit the multiplexed data in the temporary block flow to the other apparatus. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103312 | Methods and Apparatus for Switching A Transponder To an Active State, and Asset Management Systems Employing Same - A transponder that may be used as an RFID tag includes a passive circuit to eliminate the need for an “always on” active RF receiving element to anticipate a wake-up signal for the balance of the transponder electronics. This solution allows the entire active transponder to have all circuit elements in a sleep (standby) state, thus drastically extending battery life or other charge storage device life. Also, a wake-up solution that reduces total energy consumption of an active transponder system by allowing all non-addressed transponders to remain in a sleep (standby) state, thereby reducing total system or collection energy. Also, the transponder and wake-up solution are employed in an asset tracking system. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103313 | METHOD FOR MANAGING A MOBILE NETWORK - Please add an abstract of the disclosure on a separate page. A method for managing a mobile network having local mobile nodes and a mobile router for routing packets amongst said local mobile nodes and to and from another packet routing network comprises the steps of, in response to a recognized indication condition indicating that a local mobile node left the mobile network, notifying one or more components in the mobile accordingly, and in one or more of the components of the mobile network, adapting one or more settings in accordance with said notification. | 05-05-2011 |
20110110293 | Location tracking using response messages identifying a tracked device in a wireless network - In one embodiment, an apparatus includes a receiver configured for receiving a response message from a tracked device in a wireless network, the response message transmitted in response to a provoking message having an identifier of the tracked device in a transmitter address field, and a processor for measuring at least one location related parameter, extracting the identifier of the tracked device from the response message and identifying the response message as a location tracking message based on information in the response message. A field of the response message includes the identifier of the tracked device copied from the provoking message and the transmitter address is not provided in another field of the response message. An apparatus for location tracking is also disclosed. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110294 | VIRTUAL CARE-OF ADDRESS FOR MOBILE IP (Internet Protocol) - An IP (Internet Protocol) session for a mobile node is carried out through the use of a virtual care-of address. A foreign agent sends an agent advertisement to the mobile node to allow the mobile node to choose from a list of IP addresses of the foreign agent. To perform virtual care-of address services, the foreign agent ties the virtual care-of address to a mobile node so that an intelligent and dynamic selection of tunnels to be used for the IP session can occur. Therefore, traffic for an IP session is not limited to transmission over the single particular tunnel that corresponds to an IP address initially selected by the mobile node. Rather, the virtual care-of address shifts the tunneling decision from the mobile node to the foreign agent. Supporting multiple tunnels between home agent and foreign agent allows resilience, redundancy, and service-level differentiation to mobile node traffic without involving the mobile node in the process. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110295 | ENABLING LOCAL SWITCHING IN MOBILE RADIO NETWORKS - When a new connection needs to be established in a mobile radio network between the core network and the radio access network to terminate a local circuit switched (CS) call, i.e. a CS call for which another connection has already been established between the core network and the same radio access network, the core network includes an optional information element containing “Other party information” in the messages that establish the new connection, allowing the radio access network to correlate the two connections, put them in direct communication and exclude the core network from the user plane data flow. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110296 | DATA AND CONTROL MULTIPLEXING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate defining a new control region over resources allocated for communicating general non-control data in a legacy network specification. The new control region can comprise multiple control channels, which can be multiplexed together and/or with general data channels. Devices can receive control data over the new control region as well as information regarding the region, such as location of the region, location of specific resources, multiplexing schemes, frequency hopping patterns, and/or the like to appropriately decode relevant control data. This allows for expanded control resources to support multicarrier assignments, large numbers of devices being addressed, special operation modes, new downlink control information (DCI) formats, and/or the like. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110297 | WIRELESS BROADBAND SUBSCRIBER EQUIPMENT AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH NETWORK QUALITY MANAGEMENT CAPABILITY, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A wireless broadband subscriber equipment with network quality management capability includes a parsing unit, a quality-of-service (QoS) controller, and a grant controller. The parsing unit receives a session signal containing session-establishing information, and parses the session signal to obtain a control signal. The QoS controller sends to a base station a QoS request signal corresponding to the control signal. The grant controller receives a response of the base station to the QoS request signal, is configured to forward the session signal to an intended recipient of the session signal when the response of the base station indicates that the base station is available to establish a session conforming to the QoS request signal, and to send a busy notification to a sender of the session signal when the response of the base station indicates that the base station is unavailable to establish the session conforming to the QoS request signal. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110298 | Call Control Method, Communication System, and Revelant Devices - A call control method, a communication system, and relevant devices are provided so that communications can be implemented under different network conditions based on the same number. The method includes: receiving a call request of a calling terminal, where the call request carries a called terminal number; querying a Home Location Register (HLR) of a called terminal according to the called terminal number; obtaining a Supplementary Service Code (SS_Code) from the HLR, where the SS_Code carries a Mobile Station International ISDN Number (MSISDN)-based IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) service identifier; and triggering an Application Server (AS) to implement an MSISDN-based IMS service according to the MSISDN-based IMS service identifier. A communication system and relevant devices are also provided. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110299 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE TO A TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK USING FIXED AND MOBILE ACCESS NETWORKS - The present invention relates to an apparatus ( | 05-12-2011 |
20110110300 | Access Network Selection in Multi-Access Network Environment - Novel techniques of access network selection in multi-access network environment are provided, which allow for avoiding access selection loops for independent access selection processes. The multi-access network environment provides a first access selection function, e.g. a 3GPP access selection function, and a second access selection function, e.g. an ANDSF based access selection function. At least a portion of the first access selection function ( | 05-12-2011 |
20110110301 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for transmitting control information in a small base station of a wireless communication system are provided. In the method, when the small base station operates in a Low Duty operation Mode (LDM) in a superframe, a control signal including LDM operation information is generated. Only a subframe via which a preamble, a control signal including the LDM operation information, and a SuperFrame Header (SFH) are transmitted is transmitted during the superframe. When the small base station operates in a normal operation mode in a superframe, at least one of the control information and data is transmitted via at least one subframe of the superframe. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110302 | Determination of Appropriate Radio Resource to be Requested in Case of a Circuit-Switched (CS) Fallback Procedure - A system and method for implementing fallback on a wireless device for circuit switched fallback from a first network that does not provide a circuit switched domain service is presented. A paging message is received from the first network. The paging message instructs the wireless device to implement circuit switched fallback to a circuit switched network. The paging message is inspected for information indicative of a service associated with the paging message, and a channel type suitable for the service is determined from the information indicative of the service. A request message for initiating the establishment of a radio connection is transmitted. The request message identifies the suitable channel type, and the service is used on the circuit switched network. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110303 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CREATING AT LEAST ONE EXPANSION OF AN ASSOCIATION MESSAGE FOR WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - The invention relates to a method for operating a mesh network, especially according to IEEE standard 802.11s, wherein the mesh network comprises a plurality of network nodes, which have outer edge nodes and inner network nodes. A first edge node forms a connection point for external first stations disjunctive to the network, and a second edge node forms a connection point for external second stations disjunctive to the network, wherein data packets are to be exchanged between the first and second stations. During a switch of an external station from one edge node to another edge node, especially from a coverage area of the first edge node to a coverage area of the second network node, the respective association information of the network nodes is updated by means of an association message while inserting a validity duration for the association of the external stations connected to the edge nodes. The invention also relates to a device for carrying out the method for operating a mesh network. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110304 | Methods and Systems for Interference Mitigation - Embodiments herein provide methods and systems for enhancing interference mitigation using conjugate symbol repetition and phase randomization on a set of subcarriers. The repeated data tone in the signal is complex-conjugated before transmission, when the repetition factor is two. When the repetition factor is greater than two, a combination of conjugate repetition and random/deterministic phase variation of the repeated tones is used to mitigate the interference mitigation. Embodiments further disclose Collision Free Interlaced Pilot PRU Structures that can be used with or without conjugate symbol repetition and phase randomization for interference mitigation. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110305 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING PROTOCOL DATA UNITS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for processing protocol data units in network devices of wireless networks are provided. In this solution, data corresponding to different logical connections could be carried in the same protocol data unit. As a result, the overheads of processing information in a system that is irrelevant to data are reduced, especially the overheads for MAC Headers and Sub-headers. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110306 | NETWORK SYSTEM, MOBILE GATEWAY, LOCATION MANAGEMENT SERVER, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD OF MOBILE NODE - In a network system that communicates with a mobile node, optimization of a communication route between the mobile node and its communication partner is realized while suppressing modifications of the mobile node, the communication partner of the mobile node, and devices constituting a network. A mobile gateway includes a communication monitor unit that monitors the communication status of a mobile node that is a management target to acquire data indicating the communication status; a mobile processing unit that registers location information of the mobile node with a location management server and forwards a message between the mobile node and the location management server; a home network modification report unit that generates a modification request to a new routing table in which a forwarding destination of a message destined to a home address of the mobile node is modified, if the data indicating the communication status exceeds a threshold value; and a routing management unit that receives the modification request and reports the new routing table to a router. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110307 | DATA TRANSMISSION APPARATUS USING MULTIPLE ANTENNAS AND METHOD THEREOF - An apparatus for transmitting data includes a data processing unit for generating a data symbol by channel-coding and constellation-mapping on information bits, a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) unit for generating a frequency domain symbol by performing DFT on the data symbols, a Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) processing unit for generating a first transmission symbol by applying a first transmission diversity scheme to the frequency domain symbol and generating a second transmission symbol by applying a second transmission diversity scheme to the first transmission symbol, a Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) modulation unit for generating an SC-FDMA symbol by performing Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) on the first transmission symbol and the second transmission symbol, and a plurality of transmission antennas for sending the SC-FDMA symbol. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110308 | METHOD FOR DETACHING NETWORK, A METHOD FOR DEACTIVATING ISR AND AN INDICATING DEVICE THEREOF - A method for detaching network, a method for deactivating ISR and an indicating device thereof are provided in the present invention, wherein the method for deactivating ISR includes: when a registration state of a user equipment of a current core network node in a pair of core network nodes with ISR activated is changed, sending an ISR deactivating message to an associated core network node and indicating the associated core network node to perform related operation, wherein the related operation comprises one of the following: ISR deactivation, ISR deactivation and bearer deletion. Through the present invention, the ISR deactivation flow could be implemented correctly and the flow error due to the asynchronous ISR state and the resource waste due to the invalid information could be prevented. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110309 | NETWORK NODES COOPERATIVELY ROUTING TRAFFIC FLOW AMONGST WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - End-point devices, access points and other types of network nodes each employ multi-path management software to manage communication via multiple possible paths to the Internet backbone from communication applications that run on an end-point device. The multi-path management software on an end-point device may operate independently and/or cooperate with the local communication applications and the multi-path management software located on the access points or other network nodes to select one or more pathways for the local communication applications. The multi-path management software depending on data types and data requirements also supports selection and maintenance of two or more paths that simultaneously serve a single communication application. The multi-path management software of an end-point device may pass all or a portion of multi-path management responsibility to a local communication application and/or to multi-path management software of another network node. In addition to managing the selection of one or more pathways, the multi-path management software seamlessly switches pathways as may become necessary to meet changing network conditions or bandwidth demands. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110310 | FRAME STRUCTURE FOR MULTI-HOP RELAY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Implementations of systems and techniques for scheduling wireless transmission of data blocks between a base station (BS) and one or more relay stations (RSs) in a wireless relay communication network. | 05-12-2011 |
20110116442 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTHORIZING ACCESS TO AN IP-BASED WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE - A system for providing an IP-based wireless telecommunications device with access to an IP-based wireless telecommunications service provided by a carrier network includes an access point that sets up a radio link with the IP-based wireless telecommunications device and couples the IP-based wireless telecommunications device to the network. The system also includes a network controller in communication with the carrier network and the access point. The network controller is configured to receive data packets corresponding to the IP-based wireless telecommunications device at the access point. The network controller is also configured to accept/reject the provision of the IP-based wireless telecommunications service to the IP-based wireless telecommunications device based on an IP address or other unique identifier associated with the access point. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116443 | APPARATUS FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC AGGREGATION OF RADIO LINKS - A multi-radio device system includes a set of sending radio devices and a set of receiving radio devices. Among the sending radio devices is a load-balancing radio device that receives data packets from an originating network. The load-balancing radio device labels data packets with sequence numbers and distributes the labeled data packets among the sending radio devices based on the relative capacities and statuses of those sending radio devices. The sending radio devices transmit the labeled data packets to the receiving radio devices. The receiving radio devices send the labeled data packets to an aggregating radio device within the set of receiving radio devices. The aggregating radio device uses the sequence numbers to ensure that the data packets are forwarded to a destination network in the correct order, extracting original data packets from the labeled data packets before forwarding the original data packets on toward the destination network. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116444 | WIRELESS CONNECTION UTILIZATION - An exemplary system includes a service provider configured to provide a network service to a local device via a network, and a plurality of mobile devices, where each mobile device is configured to establish a wireless connection with the network. Such an exemplary system also includes a router in selective communication with the local device and the plurality of mobile devices. The router may be configured to establish a local connection with each of the plurality of mobile devices, and receive a request for a network service from the local device. In addition, the router may be configured to provide the requested network service to the local device via the wireless connection. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116445 | NODE DISPOSITION APPARATUS, NODE DISPOSITION METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM THEREOF - A node disposition apparatus, a node disposition method and a computer readable medium thereof are provided. The node disposition apparatus may determine where a base station (BS) and a relay station (RS) should be disposed according to a connected mobile station amount of each node disposition candidate position in a non-transparent wireless network. Thereby, the BS and the RS may be disposed effectively to overcome the defects of the conventional BS and RS disposition way. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116446 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING COEXISTENCE WITH WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method for supporting coexistence with a wireless personal area network (WPAN) is provided. A method for supporting coexistence with a WPAN in a mobile station which periodically receives a beacon signal for local wireless communication includes, at the mobile station, calculating the numbers of uplink frames which overlap with the beacon signal, configuring a bitmap using the calculated frame numbers, and transmitting coexistence information including the bitmap to a base station. Accordingly, when a broadband wireless access system and WiMedia or ZigBee are simultaneously used, a beacon signal of WiMedia or ZigBee can be efficiently protected from the interruption of the broadband wireless access system and thus WiMedia or ZigBee can be normally operated. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116447 | MEDIA PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus for performing media performance management are provided. A media performance controller (MPC) may control a media performance unit (MPU) to perform media flows. The MPC may detect events associated with the MPU, may evaluate the events, and may control the MPU in response to the events. The MPC may prioritize the events based on priority information associated with the media flows, the MPU, control units, media sources, users, communication links, relationships, policies, or other events associated with the events. The MPU may control the MPC to concurrently perform the media flows such that a first media flow my be performed using a first portion of a media performance capability of the MPU and a second media flow may be performed using a second portion of the media performance capability of the MPU. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116448 | SUPPORT FOR RETRANSMITTING A TRANSPORT BLOCK WITH A DIFFERENT NUMBER OF LAYERS THAN A PREVIOUS TRANSMISSION ATTEMPT - A method of conveying transport block size (TBS) information includes determining TBS parameters for a wireless transmission of data between a first node and a second node based on a first number of transmission layers associated with the wireless transmission. The method also includes generating a control message indicating the TBS parameters and transmitting the control message to the second node. The method also includes transmitting a transport block to the second node in accordance with the TBS parameters indicated by the control message. The transport block is transmitted over a first number of transmission layers. The method also includes retransmitting the transport block to the second node in accordance with the TBS parameters indicated by the control message. The transport block is retransmitted over a second number of transmission layers that differs from the first number of transmission layers. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116449 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR JUDGING THE ACTIVATION OF IDLE-MODE SIGNALLING REDUCTION FUNCTION - A method and system for determining whether to activate the Idle mode Signalling Reduction (ISR) function. The method comprises: an ISR activation determining network element acquiring ISR capabilities of a terminal and network, and the information related to SGs and Gs during a process of activating ISR function after receiving a routing area update request or tracking area update request; the ISR activation determining network element restricting activation of ISR function under a special scenario, according to the acquired information related to SGs and Gs, where the terminal and the network satisfy ISR activation conditions; wherein, the ISR activation determining network element is one among a mobility management entity (MME) and a serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN). The method and system of the present invention solve the problem that the MSC/VLR may be unable to find the UE by paging due to the introduction of the ISR function. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116450 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND NETWORK NODE - Disclosed is a technique for surely supporting multihoming for a mobile terminal (mobile node) moving in a local mobility domain. A mobile node (MN) | 05-19-2011 |
20110116451 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROL OF DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION (DRX) BY A MOBILE DEVICE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SUPPORTING VOICE-OVER-INTERNET-PROTOCOL (VOIP) - A method and system for controlling discontinuous reception (DRX) in a mobile device in a wireless communications network that supports voice-over-internet-protocol (VoIP) and that uses an automatic repeat-request (ARQ) method, like a hybrid automatic repeat-request (HARQ) method, uses autonomous DRX control after initial VoIP traffic setup. If the mobile device transmits a negative-acknowledgement signal (NACK) indicating unsuccessful receipt of a VoIP packet, then it autonomously turns on a predetermined delay time later to receive the retransmission of the VoIP packet, where the predetermined delay time is related to the time for the base station to process the NACK and prepare the VoIP packet for retransmission. When the mobile device transmits or retransmits a VoIP packet, reception is deactivated, but is autonomously activated the predetermined delay time later to receive an acknowledgement signal (ACK) or NACK. VoIP packets may be transmitted from the mobile device the predetermined delay time before VoIP packets are transmitted from the base station. This alignment allows an ACK or NACK to be transmitted from the base station in the same transmission time interval (TTI) as a VoIP packet. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116452 | TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS DEPLOYMENT - A variety of techniques are described in which wireless access points or base stations are deployed in wireless networks to achieve geographic isolation, i.e., distinct zones of operation having well-defined geographic boundaries, and increased overall capacity in an area having a high population of access and client devices. | 05-19-2011 |
20110122809 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERWORKING OF 3GPP LTE AND 3GPP2 LEGACY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A terminal and an advanced Base Station (BS), and methods for their operation in a wireless communication system including an advanced network that provides a data service and a legacy network that provides a Circuit Switched (CS) voice service, are provided. The method for operating the terminal includes monitoring a paging channel of the advanced network for a data paging message and a paging channel of the legacy network for a CS paging message, when the terminal is in an idle state, receiving one of the CS paging message and data paging message, and establishing a connection with the one of the advanced network and the legacy network corresponding to the received one of the CS paging message and data paging message. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122810 | Router-Based Home Network Synchronization - Described herein is a home data router and a plurality of home communication devices that utilize the home data router for voice and data connectivity. The home data router includes functionality for synchronizing user-added data items across the plurality of home communication devices. Such user-added data items can include things like contacts, addresses, telephone numbers, events, calendar items, notes, and other information that might be useful to have stored in individual home communication devices. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122811 | Codebook restructure, differential encoding/decoding and scheduling - A method and apparatus for feedback of channel information characterizing a wireless transmission between a base station and a mobile station. The method involves, at the base station, locating in a codebook of predetermined channel responses a predetermined channel response identified by: a primary identifier identifying a cluster associated with a channel response generated by a mobile station; and a differential identifier identifying channel response member within the cluster identified by the primary identifier. The predetermined channel responses are grouped in a plurality of clusters in accordance with a correlation criterion, each cluster including a plurality of predetermined channel response members. The method also involves generating a control signal for controlling transmissions to the mobile station in accordance with the located predetermined channel response. A method and apparatus for feedback of channel information characterizing a wireless transmission between a mobile station and a base station are also disclosed. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122812 | SEAMLESS SERVICE METHOD CONTROLLED BY USER TERMINAL - Provided are a seamless service method controlled by a user terminal, the method including: storing radio access technology (RAT) information and service flow information associated with a connecting radio access network (RAN); when a new link is detected, storing RAT information associated with the new link; verifying whether a new RAN satisfying a handover initiation criterion exists; when the new RAN exists, attempting a link connection with the new RAN; being assigned with an Internet Protocol (IP) to be used in the new RAN; setting up a handover service flow using the new RAN; and receiving a service via multiple paths using a connecting service flow and the handover service flow. Through this, it is possible to provide the seamless QoS even while the handover is being performed. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122813 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PREVENTING USE OF STOLEN TERMINAL THROUGH FORCED LOCATION RE-REGISTRATION - Provided are a method and system for preventing the use of a stolen terminal when the stolen terminal registers its location again by making it inevitable for the stolen terminal to register its location again to be used. The method includes: receiving information that a user terminal was stolen; making a mobile application part (MAP) cancel location request to a mobile switching center (MSC) or a serving general packet radio service support node (SGSN) after receiving the information that the user terminal was stolen; and checking whether the user terminal is a stolen terminal when receiving a location registration approval request from the user terminal after performing a MAP cancel location process by deleting subscriber information of the user terminal from the MSC or the SGSN in response to the MAP cancel location request. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122814 | UNIFIED MULTI TECHNOLOGY SWITCHBOARD SYSTEM - A unified switchboard systems is capable of simultaneously interacting with different available voice communications systems to provide PABX features across these systems. The unified switchboard includes networking hardware to provide data communications over a network, a web server to provide a user interface to a user terminal connected to the network, a plurality of VoIP switches, a database and related database application program to store user-specific data and related call data, and a web-service application to obtain call status information from carriers of non-VoIP calls. Call commands originating from the user terminal propagate from the web server into the database and thence to the VoIP switches. Call-related data propagates from the VoIP switches and the web-service service into the database, which may then be used to update the webpage for the user terminal hosted by the web server. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122815 | INFORMATION EXCHANGE BETWEEN GATEWAYS FOR ROUTE OPTIMIZATION WITH NETWORK-BASED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - The invention relates to a method for informing two access gateways about each other's presence and identity, in order to establish a data path between them, thereby shortening the overall data path of data packets exchanged between two mobile nodes (MN), that are located in different networks. In particular, each access gateway is provided with the other gateway's address and additionally with the other MN's address for forwarding by the access gateway those data packets destined to the other MN to the other access gateway. A combination of Session Initiation Protocol messages (Invite and Ringing) and route optimization messages are used, so as to confer the information on the gateway's ID and MN's address to the gateways. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122816 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING TRANSMISSION OF TCP DATA SEGMENTS - A communication device is arranged to transmit data segments over an interface, wherein the communication device comprises transmission management logic. In response to receipt of a data segment for transmission over the interface, the transmission management logic is arranged to determine a sequence number of a data segment to be transmitted and compare the sequence number of the data segment to be transmitted with at least one pending sequence number of a previous data segment. Based on the comparison, the transmission management logic either discards the data segment to be transmitted if the sequence number of the data segment to be transmitted matches the at least one pending sequence number of the previous data segment; or adds the sequence number of the data segment to be transmitted to the at least one pending sequence number and transmits the data segment over the interface if the sequence number of the data segment to be transmitted does not match the at least one pending sequence number. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122817 | Mobile voice over internet protocol operation - A mobile station is operated within at least one radio network having a plurality of base stations. Only some of the plurality of base stations support a Voice over Internet Protocol, VoIP, service. The mobile station is registered with a first base station of the plurality of base stations. The mobile station may be registered with a second base station. The mobile station determines that one of the first base station and the second base station has functionality to support VoIP and the other does not. A Routing Area Update Request message or Tracking Area Update Request message is sent from the mobile station to the second base station in response to determining support for VoIP. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122818 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STATE/MODE TRANSITIONING - A user equipment implements a method of processing indication messages, such as SCRI (signalling connection release indication) messages. The user equipment (UE) maintains a count of how many indication messages with a cause set have been sent by the UE while in at least one radio resource control (RRC) state. Various conditions are provided for resetting the count. These include receiving packet switched (PS) data by the UE and transmitting packet switched (PS) data. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122819 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in a wireless communication system that enable the use of multi-codeword transmission and ACK/NACK compression with low performance loss. It also enables the use of advanced receivers of reasonable complexity. This is achieved by a solution based on the even distribution of the symbols of separately coded blocks of information bits over the available physical resources before transmission. Each physical resource will thus carry a mixture of symbols from all blocks of information bits, which results in a more similar channel quality for the blocks of information bits. A compressed ACK/NACK message corresponding to the blocks of information bits will thus be more accurate and the performance loss due to the ACK/NACK compression can be reduced. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122820 | SYSTEM OPERABLE TO ENABLE MOBILE ACCESS - The present invention relates to a system ( | 05-26-2011 |
20110122821 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate supporting multiple connections associated with a wireless terminal. Notifications may be provided to a primary base station upon establishment and/or removal of connections between the wireless terminal and secondary base station(s). Additionally, the multiple connections may be evaluated and a preferred connection from the set of multiple connections may be utilized to transfer data to the wireless terminal over a downlink connection. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122822 | PAGING METHOD, NETWORK ELEMENT, MANAGEMENT NETWORK ELEMENT AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure discloses a paging method, network element (NE), management NE, and communication system to reduce paging messages and save system resource effectively. The technical solution provided in the present disclosure includes: receiving a closed subscriber group (CSG) ID supported by an access network element (NE) or an access gateway (GW) from the access NE or the access GW; obtaining, according to the CSG ID, the access NE or the access GW to be paged; and sending a paging message to the access NE or the access GW to be paged. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122823 | METHOD FOR MEASURING ADJACENT AREAS - The present invention discloses a method for measuring adjacent cells, and the method is used for measuring adjacent cells by using dormant idle sub-frames to receive specified data from a network side in an idle state, and adjacent cells are measured by using an idle window to receive the specified data from the network side in a connection state. The present invention realizes measurement of the TD-SCDMA adjacent cells in a WCDMA mode and measurement of the WCDMA adjacent cells in a TD-SCDMA mode; and further more achieves reselection and switching from WCDMA to TD-SCDMA adjacent cell and from the TD-SCDMA to WCDMA adjacent cell on this basis, meets a real-time requirement effectively, and has high practical value. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122824 | ANCHORING SERVICES OF A MOBILE STATION ATTACHED TO A FIRST SERVICE DOMAIN AT A HOME AGENT IN A SECOND SERVICE DOMAIN - A first node receives information associated with a mobile station to allow for establishment of a session for the mobile station that is attached to a first wireless access network in a first service domain. In response to the received information, the first node sends messaging to a home agent in a second service domain that is of a different type than the first service domain. The first node receives, from the home agent, an Internet Protocol (IP) address allocated to the mobile station in the second service domain, where the IP address is allocated in response to the messaging, and where services provided to the mobile station are anchored in the second service domain. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122825 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus of receiving data in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes detecting a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) on which control information is transmitted in a first subframe, and receiving data in at least one second subframe based on the control information. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122826 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A communication terminal acquires positional information indicating the position at which the communication terminal exists, from a GPS satellite, determines a range of correspondence information to be acquired, from among the correspondence information that makes the positional information indicating position identified by latitude and longitude correspondent to the frequency to be used at that position and that is stored in a server, based on the acquired positional information, acquires the correspondence information included in the determined range, from the sever, and, identifies the frequency to be used between the communication terminal and the radio base station to be connected to the communication terminal, based on the acquired positional information and the correspondence information included in the range. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122827 | MOBILE GATEWAY - A method of initiating a call to a callee using a mobile telephone involves: receiving, from a user of the mobile telephone, a callee identifier associated with the callee; transmitting an access code request message to an access server, said access code request message including said callee identifier; receiving an access code reply message from the access server in response to said access code request message, said access code reply message including an access code different from said callee identifier and associated with said callee identifier; and initiating a call with the mobile telephone using said access code to identify the callee. | 05-26-2011 |
20110128906 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTIVELY RECEIVING COMMUNICATION - An approach is provided for selectively receiving communication from a sender. After the communication platform receives a communication from a user device, the communication platform generates a request for an action to be performed by a user via the user device and transmits the request to the user device. Then, the communication platform receives, from the user device, a response relating to the action, and evaluates the response for treatment of the communication. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128907 | METHOD FOR NETWORK CONTROLLED ACCESS SELECTION - The invention provides an Access Selection Server (ASS) and a method for the same. The invention also provides a User Equipment (UE). The Access Selection Server (ASS) comprises storing means and software and is adapted for location in a communication network comprising at least one User Equipment (UE) and communication nodes. The ASS is also arranged to store information of all accesses for each UE in the communication network and information of overall load status of the communication network in the storing means by means of collecting information through interactions with the communication nodes, the UE and an Access Selection Server subscriber Data Base (ASS DB). The ASS is further arranged to communicate control messages, based on the stored information, from the ASS to the UE, thereby enabling control of multiple UE-accesses from the ASS. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128908 | RECURSIVE HEADER COMPRESSION FOR RELAY NODES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate compressing multiple headers in wireless communication networks that utilize relay nodes. Relay nodes and/or other access points can insert headers in packets related to routing the packets. The multiple headers can be compressed at a transmitter and decompressed at a receiver to save bandwidth over a radio interface. Recursive compression and/or decompression can be utilized at least in part by recursively calling a compression/decompression engine or context, such that no modification is required of the engine or context. The recursive compression/decompression can compress and/or decompress packet headers until a certain type of header is reached (or a certain type of header is no longer found in the packet), according to a tunnel depth, according to newly defined compression and/or decompress profiles, and/or the like. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128909 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MUTIPLEXING REFERENCE SIGNAL AND DATA IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for efficiently multiplexing a reference signal and data on different sets of subcarriers in the same symbol period are described. In one design, a user equipment (UE) performs a discrete Fourier transform (DFT) on a set of modulation symbols for data to obtain data symbols. The UE also obtains reference symbols generated based on a reference signal sequence corresponding to a cyclic shift of a base sequence. The UE maps the reference symbols to a first set of subcarriers and maps the data symbols to a second set of subcarriers. The UE then generates a transmission symbol based on the mapped reference symbols and the mapped data symbols. The UE may also transmit reference signals and data (i) in multiple symbol periods of a slot or a subframe and/or (ii) from multiple antennas using frequency division multiplexing (FDM) or code division multiplexing (CDM). | 06-02-2011 |
20110128910 | Sensor net management method - There is provided a sensor node management method in which a user is unconscious of a service break even when a sensor mode has failed among a plurality of sensor nodes assuming intermittent operation. Moreover, it is possible to provide a flexible sensor node management method capable of freely modifying the observation grading (space, time) in accordance with a user's desire. A base station ( | 06-02-2011 |
20110128911 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATION REGISTRATION - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for Machine to Machine (M2M) communication registration. The methods provide single and periodic registration and may be device or network based. The devices in the system may be divided into groups. A single device member may perform the basic access steps for the group. Other devices may receive related access information on a control channel and use the information to access the system. The devices may send data, get updates, and then go to sleep. Internet addresses may be released or maintained. During a control cycle, the devices may wake up and listen to the control channel for any paging messages. Individual devices or the entire group may access the system. During a reporting cycle, all the devices may wake up and access the system to connect to the M2M system to upload data. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128912 | PACKET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A system including multiple nodes performing radio communication, wherein each node stores routing information, uses it to determine a transmission path, and performs cut-through transmission by transmitting and receiving packets to and from a node on the determined path through transmission and reception radio waves given a directivity by controlling their phases. In the system, time synchronization and transmission and reception of packet communication records are performed during a certain time period by carrying out the cut-through transmission while controlling phases of the radio waves so that all of the nodes form one or more closed loops. The node transmits and receives packets in accordance with routing information and a time frame assigned to each of the nodes as a time when each node is allowed to transmit and receive a packet, updates the routing information, and shares it with each node. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128913 | PROVIDING PROXY MOBILE IP OVER A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and systems for providing interconnection between network operation environments are disclosed in some embodiments. This can include providing interoperability between 3GPP and 3GPP2 standards environments. In one embodiment, a method is disclosed that includes receiving a request from a mobile device for service at a gateway, determining a mode of operation for the mobile device by inspecting an incoming message, wherein the mode of operation includes 3GPP and 3GPP2, establishing a connection using a proxy mobile internet protocol (PMIP), where the type of connection established is dependent on the mode of operation, providing an IP address to a mobile device based on the mode of operation and the parameters associated with the mode of operation, and communicating with an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server operating in accordance with the mode of operation. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128914 | TERMINAL-TO-TERMINAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION CONTROL METHOD USING IP TRANSFER NETWORK - Both a connection server and a relay connection server are installed in an IP transfer network; a function similar to a line connection control of a subscriber exchanger is applied to a connection server; a function similar to a line connection control of a relay exchanger is applied to the relay connection server; and a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method with using the IP transfer network is realized in such a manner that a telephone set and a terminal such as an IP terminal and a video terminal transmit/receive an initial address message, an address completion message, a call pass message, a response message, a release message and a release completion message, which can be made in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship with line connection control messages of the common line signal system. Furthermore, while an address administration table is set to a network node apparatus of an IP transfer network, means for registering addresses of the terminals into this address administration table is employed, so that an IP packet communication by a multicast manner can be realized with improving information security performance. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128915 | METHOD FOR DEACTIVATING ISR AND A MOBILITY MANAGEMENT UNIT - The present invention discloses a method for deactivating ISR and a mobility management unit. Wherein the above method includes: when an ISR deactivation is needed to be performed, the mobility management unit judging whether to perform the following operation by the S-GW according to reasons of the ISR deactivation: the mobility management unit sends a request message of deleting bearer to the S-GW, and carries, in the request message, an identifier which is used to instruct the S-GW to initiate the bearer deletion to the other mobility management unit associated with the ISR function activation; or the mobility management unit notifies the other mobility management unit associated with the ISR function activation to perform the ISR deactivation. The synchronization between the bearer deletion and the network element state in the ISR function deactivation scenarios can be realized by the above technical scheme. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128916 | METHOD FOR SELF-CONFIGURING A CELLULAR INFRASTRUCTURE AS DESIRED, AND A DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to wireless communications system. More specifically, the present invention relates to a method in which a mobile station communicates with any desired node in a wireless communications system. This communications method comprises the steps of: transmitting upwards a first signal for searching for any desired node; receiving from the desired node a second signal indicating that a service can be provided to the mobile station, by way of response to the first signal; and carrying out a procedure for receiving the service from the desired node, wherein the desired node monitors the first signal in a sleep mode. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128917 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method for transmitting data in a multiple antenna system comprises the steps of: generating a transmission signal in plural antennas through the application of a precoding eight matrix to first and second antenna clusters including the plural antennas, and transmitting the transmission signal. The precoding weight matrix is a block diagonal matrix that is configured in a precoding weight corresponding to first and second antenna clusters respectively. The precoding weight of the first antenna cluster is selected according to a channel condition, and the precoding weight of the second antenna cluster is selected regardless of the channel condition but according to a rule. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128918 | METHOD FOR DISCOVERING HIGH THROUGHPUT ROUTES IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS | 06-02-2011 |
20110134829 | REPEAT CONTROL METHOD IN ENHANCED UPLINK ASYNCHRONOUS HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST - A repeat control method in the enhanced uplink asynchronous hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) includes the following steps: (1) the network side adding a parameter of retransmission timer in the HARQ Profile of each dedicated media access control (MAC-d) entity flow in the user equipment, and the user equipment configures the value of the retransmission timer of the enhanced media access control entity (MAC-e) protocol data unit (PDU) according to the parameter of the retransmission timer; (2) the user equipment uses the value of the retransmission timer and the maximum number of retransmissions to control the retransmission. The radio bearer QoS delay requirement and the cooperation work between the sender and the receiver are implemented. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134830 | Telecommunication network transmission divergence system and method - A telecommunication network transmission divergence system and method is disclosed. A first multi-service-packet-control-unit and a second multi-service-packet-control-unit are disposed between a base station and a radio network controller. Packets are diverged to one or more low-stability & long-delay routes based on priorities of the packets. The system and method reduce transmission load of a frame exchange protocol interface (Iub) while maintaining a stable quality of service for divergent packet transmissions. As a result, transmission load and cost are significantly reduced and transmission efficiency is improved. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134831 | Architecture Providing Multi-System Carrier Aggregation - Disclosed is a method for enabling interoperability between different types of wireless communication systems operating with different types of air interfaces to provide at least downlink radio resource aggregation for a user equipment. The method includes providing a common set of upper radio layer functionalities for one or more radio bearers assigned to the user equipment, the one or more radio bearers being associated with a first wireless communication system and a second wireless communication system. The method further includes performing wireless communications with the user equipment via one or more of the radio bearers via the first and second wireless communication systems. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134832 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATIVE MULTIFUNCITIONAL COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The described apparatus and methods may include a controller configured to determine capabilities of at least one remote access terminal, and delegate at least one task to the at least one remote access terminal based on the capabilities. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134833 | CONTROLLING ACCESS POINT FUNCTIONALITY - Wireless transmission and/or other functions of an access point (e.g., a femto access point) are controlled based on whether an access terminal is in the vicinity of the access point. For example, wireless transmission may be enabled or disabled based on whether an authorized access terminal is inside or outside a perimeter associated with the access point. An access terminal may send a message to control wireless transmission and/or other functions of the access point based on signals (e.g., pilot signals) the access terminal receives from other access points. For example, the access terminal may determine whether it is inside or outside the perimeter based on comparison of phase information derived from received macro pilot signals with phase information maintained at the access terminal. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134834 | Coordinating Broadcast Operations in a Mobile Wireless Network With Overlaid Cells - Advertising in connection with handing off a cell from one cell to another may be facilitated by segregating communication descriptors into a common part that does not change in different types of cells and a unique part that changes in different types of cells. The unique parts may be advertised more frequently than the common parts. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134835 | METHOD FOR DISPLAYING INFORMATION - The invention relates to a method for displaying information, using a mobile identification provider ( | 06-09-2011 |
20110134836 | ANNOUNCING A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - An access network (AN) receives a call announcement message for transmission to an access terminal (AT). The AN initiates, in response to the received call announcement message, a physical-layer synchronization procedure for at least one channel between the AN and the AT, the physical-layer synchronization procedure associated with a transition of the access terminal to a dedicated channel state. The AN performs the initiation by sending a message to the AT. In response to the message, the AT monitors a downlink channel for receipt of the call announcement message. The AN then transmits the call announcement message on the downlink channel to the access terminal, and the AT receives the call announcement message due to the monitoring. The call announcement message is transmitted either (i) before the physical layer synchronization procedure completes or (ii) before a transmission of a reconfiguration complete message indicating completion of dedicated channel state transition. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134837 | FEMTOCELL ACCESS CONTROL - Access by a mobile station to a femto access point (FAP) of a wireless communication system is controlled by an enforcement point in response to mobile station authorization data provided from a storage point that is remote from the FAP. The authorization data is provided in response to FAP authentication data. The authentication data may include a FAP identifier and a message authenticator that the FAP generates by hashing shared secret information. The storage point may provide the authorization data in response to determining that the message authenticator is a hash of the shared secret information. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134838 | Voice over internet protocol provision - A method and system for routing a voice connection over a cellular network to a mobile station is disclosed. The cellular network comprises a plurality of base stations, some of which have capability to provide the voice connection to the mobile station using Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP). A voice connection for the mobile station is identified at an Application Server of the cellular network. A request message is sent from the Application Server to a Home Subscriber Server (HSS), or Home Location Register (HLR), of the cellular network. The request message requests an indication ds to whether the mobile station is being served by a base station having capability to provide a voice connection using VoIP. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134839 | User plane location based service using message tunneling to support roaming - An improved User Plane location based service (LBS) architecture and message flow, enabling seamless User Plane location based services even when a mobile or wireless device has roamed among different carrier networks. The present invention overcomes constraints inherent in the current protocol for roaming support defined by the Secure User Plane Location Service specification. A location system is enabled to automatically fall back to a message tunneling mechanism to ensure the security of a communication path between the location service system and the target wireless device, ensuring that the communication path is uninterrupted as the wireless device travels. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134840 | LOCATION BASED VEHICLE MULTIHOP PROTOCOL UNICAST APPARATUS AND ROUTING METHOD USING THE APPARATUS - In order for a source node including a vehicle multihop protocol unicast apparatus to route data to a destination node, the source node broadcasts a location request message to neighbor node and receives a location response message from the neighbor nodes in response to the location request message. Therefore, the source node routs unicast data on the basis of the location information of the destination node included in the location response message. At this time, the source node uses a location based forwarder selecting algorithm in order to select a forwarder. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134841 | MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION PREREGISTRATION - A method and apparatus for machine type communication (MTC) preregistration are provided. The methods provide single or periodic preregistrations and may be machine to machine (M2M) application function (AF) or device (MTC user equipment based). The devices in the system may be divided into groups and accessed by on a group Internet Protocol (IP) address. Two wake up cycles may be provided, one for control and one for uploading information (a reporting cycle). During the control cycle, the devices may wake up and listen to the control channel for any paging messages. Depending on the paging information, individual devices or the entire group may access the system. In the reporting cycle, all the devices may wake up and access the system to connect to the M2M system to upload data. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134842 | Address Space Partitioning and Filtering for Discretionary Wireless Connection Response - A system and method for providing wireless communications between a medical controller hub and an implant node are disclosed. The hub transmits signals to facilitate communication connections with the node. The signals include connection invitation polls with identification parameters. A node monitors the hub's transmissions for the connection invitation polls. When a poll is detected, the node compares the identification parameters to a list of preferred identification values. If the received identification parameter is on the preferred list, and the node and hub are not already connected, then the node responds to the connection invitation poll. If the received identification parameter is not on the preferred list, then the node continues to monitor hub transmissions for other connection invitation polls that include identification parameters that are on the preferred list. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134843 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MESSAGE ROUTING IN IMS AND CIRCUIT SWITCHED NETWORKS - Method and gateway unit for registering a user terminal ( | 06-09-2011 |
20110134844 | OPERATION FREQUENCY SETTING METHOD, NETWORK DEVICE AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method includes an operation frequency setting method for setting an operation frequency of a radio base station including measuring by the radio base station a received power level of a common control signal transmitted by each of neighboring radio base stations, and comparing each of the measured received power levels of the common control signals with a prescribed threshold and determining an operation frequency of the radio base station from among operation frequency candidates from which a frequency of a common control signal having a received power level higher than the prescribed threshold is excluded. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134845 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK PROVIDING MULTI-HOP COMMUNICATIONS - A wireless communication network is provided that includes a plurality of communication cells each defined by at least one communication coverage area and a plurality of access points each corresponding to a different one of the plurality of communication cells. Each access point is configured to communicate on a first frequency with at least one of (i) a subscriber in the at least one communication coverage area in a first communication cell and (ii) a subscriber in a second communication cell. Each access point is further configured to communicate on a second frequency with an access point in a third communication cell. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134846 | Identifying Misconfigured Profiles for Wireless Local Area Networks (WLANs) - In a wireless device, active scanning for a particular wireless network name is initiated during passive scanning for a wireless network that matches a profile stored in a wireless local area network controller, the profile including the particular wireless network name. Following receipt of a response from the active scanning that indicates discovery of one or more access points with the particular wireless network name, the profile is identified as misconfigured if the passive scanning fails to result in association. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134847 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PROVISIONING SECURE WIRELESS SENSORS - We present technology that allows layman computer users to simply create, provision, and maintain secured infrastructure—an instant PKI. This technology can be used in a wide variety of applications including wired and wireless networks, secure sensor networks (such as medical networks), emergency alert networks, as well as simply and automatically provisioning network devices whether secure or not. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134848 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - There is provided a wireless communication system in which a feedback volume is reduced as exceeding a communication speed demanded by a mobile station. The wireless communication system includes: a plurality of base stations | 06-09-2011 |
20110134849 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting data in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes receiving cyclic shift information indicating a first cyclic shift value, obtaining a second cyclic shift value from the first cyclic shift value, transmitting a first signal based on the first cyclic shift value through a first antenna, and transmitting a second signal based on the second cyclic shift value through a second antenna, wherein the first signal and the second signal are transmitted on the same radio resource. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134850 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND TERMINAL DEVICE - A base station ( | 06-09-2011 |
20110134851 | EPS CONNECTIVITY DURING OPERATOR DETERMINED BARRING - A node and method for handling barring of services in an Evolved Packet System (EPS) enabled network using an amended full Access Point Name (APN). The Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of the APN is amended to include an extension, which indicates that the corresponding APN is to be excluded from Operator Determined Barring (ODB). | 06-09-2011 |
20110141965 | NETWORK DISCOVERY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Apparatuses may stay synchronized with a network via a beacon signal transmitted at a set interval. Communication-related activities may be planned around instances when beacon signals are expected, which may also be known as a target beacon transmission time (TBTT). Scanning opportunities, which are periods of time during which apparatuses may perform passive scanning, may be planned based on an interfere multiple of a network beacon signal interval. Apparatuses may, upon realizing a scanning opportunity, opt either to utilize the scanning opportunity or to participate in network beaconing. In example scenarios where apparatuses opt to utilize scanning opportunities, apparatuses may prepare a network information message and then enter a passive scanning mode. Apparatuses may remain in the passive scanning mode for the duration of the scanning opportunity, reacting when messages are received from devices outside of the network by transmitting the network information message. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141966 | DATA-RELATED TASK SUPPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Apparatuses may stay synchronized with a network via a beacon signal that is transmitted at a set interval. Various communication-related activities may be planned around an instance when a beacon signal is expected, or a target beacon transmission time (TBTT). While some networked apparatuses are active during every TBTT, other apparatuses may operate using a diluted beacon period that is an integer multiple of the network beacon signal interval. Diluted beacon intervals may initiate periods of time during which apparatuses may become “aware” of other apparatuses. Awareness may comprise information related to communication configuration, apparatus status, and services offered by the various apparatuses in the network. Awareness information obtained during an awake window may also comprise information on data-related tasks that are pending in one or more apparatuses which may allow for the control of further data conveyance activities. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141967 | METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO SUBSTANTIALLY REAL-TIME DATA TRANSMISSION AND ANALYSIS FOR SENSORS - In some embodiments, a system includes a mobile base station, multiple sensors, and multiple communication devices. Each sensor is configured to collect sensor data. Each communication device is coupled to at least one of the multiple sensors. Each communication device is coupled to an encryption engine configured to receive and encrypt data from at least one of the multiple sensors. Each communication device is configured to send the sensor data from the respective sensor to the mobile base station. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141968 | TECHNIQUES FOR MANAGING HETEROGENEOUS TRAFFIC STREAMS - Techniques for managing heterogeneous traffic streams are described. An apparatus may include wireless device having a transceiver and a media access control controller operative to communicate in a wireless network, the media access control controller having a traffic stream manager operative to establish a wireless communication channel between a first and second wireless device, and communicate multiple traffic streams in a single service period over the wireless communication channel, with each traffic stream having a different level of reliability for delivery of information from the first wireless device to the second wireless device. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141969 | BACKOFF PROCEDURE FOR POST DOWNLINK SDMA OPERATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for decreasing a probability of post-backoff collisions that occur during uplink transmissions from multiple user stations (STAs) following completion of downlink transmission from an access point to the STAs. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141970 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION ON WIRELESS ALTERNATING SWITCHING CHANNELS - A system for data transmission on wireless alternating switching channels comprises a user, which allows a user to have at least an additional service on multiple service channels. The user sends at least a service forwarder a request to get at least an additional service, and receives the replied information of a specified forwarding channel. Before the connection between the user and the service forwarder fails or ends, the user receives original service and the service forwarder uses a specified service channel and transmits or receives additional service data for the user in the service channel interval; while in the control channel interval, the service forwarder uses the specified forwarding channel and transmits selective control message and selective additional data for the user, and the user switches to the specified forwarding channel to receive the selective control messages and the selective additional data. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141971 | MECHANISMS FOR INFORMATION EXCHANGE ACROSS CELLS TO FACILITATE RECEPTION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a signal including a signal from a UE is received. System information of a neighboring eNodeB is obtained. The received signal is processed based on the system information in order to enhance the received signal with respect to the signal from the UE. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141972 | TNL CONNECTION SETUP METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BASE STATION USING DOWNLINK RECEIVER - A Transport Network Layer (TNL) connection setup method for a base station includes monitoring Physical Cell Identity (PCI) values of neighboring cells. When it is monitored that the PCI values are changed, IP addresses of neighboring base stations corresponding to the changed PCI values are acquired. Thereafter, it is determined whether it is necessary to perform a new TNL connection setup with respect to other neighboring base stations, based on the changed PCI values and the acquired IP addresses. When it is determined that it is necessary to perform the new TNL connection setup, the TNL connection setup is performed with the acquired IP addresses. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141973 | METHOD FOR REASSEMBLING MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT AND RECEIVER PERFORMING THE SAME - A method for reassembling a medium access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU) of a receiver includes: receiving at least one hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) burst in an automatic repeat request (ARQ) disabled connection that does not support an ARQ function; extracting at least one fragment from at least one MAC PDU included in at least one HARQ burst; setting a new start point by comparing a predetermined start point with the sequence number of the fragment; and reassembling fragments having sequence numbers before the new start point. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141974 | ELECTRONIC MESSAGING TECHNOLOGY - Techniques are described for capturing text (e.g., SMS) messages and multimedia (e.g. MMS) messages along with messages and data sent with other communication modalities. The captured information may be used for performing social networking-related, data processing and auditing operations in real-time. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141975 | METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR TIME SYNCHRONISATION BETWEEN A CONTROL CENTRE AND SEVERAL TRANSMITTERS - A central station and several transmitters in a single-frequency network are synchronised. A first reference time signal is generated with a high degree of time and frequency accuracy on the short and long time horizon and a second reference time signal is generated and supplied to the central station with a low degree of time and frequency accuracy on the short time horizon and a high degree of accuracy on the long time horizon. A transport data stream with a temporally variable data rate that corresponds to the frequency of the second reference time signal is generated by means of the central station, said stream being supplied to several transmitters and comprising distributed data packets that contain the transmission instant of the data packet, referenced to the second reference time signal, for the transmitters. The time accuracy of the transmission instant of each data packet is optimised by averaging the time and frequency accuracy of the second reference signal over time. The system temporally offsets the transport data stream received by each transmitter from the central station until the data packets of the transport data stream that each contain a transmission instant are transmitted at the correct transmission instant with regard to the first reference time signal supplied to each transmitter. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141976 | FAST PATH PACKET DESTINATION MECHANISM FOR NETWORK MOBILITY VIA SECURE PKI CHANNEL - Disclosed is a method for reducing routing overheads during data transmission to a destination mobile router of a plurality of mobile routers roaming in a network. The method comprises registering by top level mobile routers with a central authority server, sending data packets by a corresponding node of the network to the destination mobile router operationally attached to a corresponding top level mobile router, locating a position of the destination mobile router by identifying attachment of the destination mobile router to the corresponding top level mobile router from the information registered by the plurality of mobile routers with the central authority server, routing the data packet directly to the corresponding top level mobile router to which the destination mobile router is operationally attached and receiving the data packet by the destination mobile router from the corresponding top level mobile router, thereby reducing routing overheads in the network. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141977 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CDMA TIMER-BASED REGISTRATION ON A MOBILE DEVICE - A method and apparatus for improved timer based registration for a mobile device with a network, the network having a standard slot cycle time for interrupts, the method comprising the steps of: receiving, at the mobile device, a system parameter message from the network, the message having a value indicating a frequency for periodic registration; setting a timer value on a timer at the mobile device, the timer value being greater than the standard slot cycle time; setting a counter to count expiration of the timer; starting the timer; upon expiration of the timer, decrementing the counter; upon the counter reaching zero, waiting for a paging slot to communicate with the network; and sending a registration message to the network on the paging slot. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141978 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MOVING A RECEIVE WINDOW IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method of moving a receiving window in a wireless mobile communication system, wherein the AM RLC of the transmitting side sends information of the last discarded SDU regardless of continuity of the discarded SDUs. The AM RLC of the receiving side checks whether all SDUs from the start point of the receiving window up to the last discarded SDU are successfully received, delivers the SDUs that are successfully received to an upper layer, and discard only those SDUs that are not successfully received. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141979 | TECHNIQUE FOR EMERGENCY SESSION HANDLING IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques of emergency session handling in a communication network are provided, in which a packet switched network control function configured to handle emergency sessions established from a user equipment via a packet switched network access, e.g. an Emergency Call Session Control Function (E-CSCF), is associated with a switching control node of a circuit switched network. The switching control node is capable of handling emergency session established via a circuit switched network access, e.g. a Mobile Switching Centre Server (MSC-S) of a mobile network. Handling of emergency sessions established via the packet switched network access is forwarded from the packet switched network control function to the associated switching control node. | 06-16-2011 |
20110149838 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIGNALING TRAFFIC AND MEDIA TYPES WITHIN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SWITCHING SYSTEM - Signaling regarding traffic and media types within a communications network control system is described. In one embodiment, the invention includes receiving an assignment request message from a call server of a communications network, the assignment request message including a description of a bearer connection between a subscriber and the communications network, sending a channel activation request to the subscriber, the channel activation request including at least a portion of the description of the bearer connection between the subscriber and the communications network, receiving connection information about a channel activated by the subscriber in response to the channel activation request, and sending the connection information to the call server to allow the call server to modify the bearer connection. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149839 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING NETWORK BASE IP MOBILITY PROTOCOL, CONTROL APPARATUS, ROUTER AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - There are provided a communication system, a control apparatus, a router, and communication method thereof, there are capable of eliminating loss in packets during a handover and effectively releasing a resource of a router in a network base IP mobility protocol in which a mobile mode is movable without mounting a special protocol. When an MN | 06-23-2011 |
20110149840 | TRANSMITTER APPARATUS, RECEIVER APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION, RADIO BASE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A transmitter ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110149841 | INTEGRATED WIRELESS AND WIRELINE NETWORKS - A method may include receiving, from an egress switch in a first wireless network, a request for instructions for routing a call from a calling party to a called party in a wireline network. In addition, the method may include performing a lookup to identify a service provider of the called party in a database. Still, in addition, the method may include generating an instruction indicating that the egress switch is to route the call to a core network connected to the egress switch via a direct access line when the same service provider operates the core network and the wireline network, the core network integrated with the wireline network. Furthermore, the method may include sending, by a service control point device, the instruction to the egress switch. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149842 | NATIVE MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL SUPPORT FOR BEAMFORMING - Apparatuses, systems, and methods that enable native MAC support of beamforming are contemplated. An embodiment may comprise a mobile computing device, such as a laptop, with wireless communications capabilities, such as an integrated wireless networking card. The networking card of the laptop may transmit and receive various types of frame data using one or more beamforming techniques. Upon establishing a link with another wireless device, the laptop may sense that the link quality is degrading. Instead of having to reestablish a new link using dedicated BF frames and the conventional BF protocol, embodiments described herein may instead transmit beamforming information in various types of frames which enable the wireless communication devices to adjust the beamforming parameters in a more efficient manner. For example, the devices may include beamforming information in control frames and data frames and transmit the frames in a sweeping sector fashion. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149843 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING OPERATION STATE OF PHYSICAL LAYER - An apparatus for controlling IEEE 802.15.4 physical layer operation state is provided. The physical layer operation state controlling apparatus defines an operation state of a physical layer including a Hardwired Low-MAC (HL-MAC) device in which functions of IEEE 802.15.4 MAC layer are hardwired, and includes a state module for controlling the operation state of the physical layer. The state module includes a Finite State Machine (FSM) for, when receiving an event for the operation state of the physical layer, transiting to a state module corresponding to the event and controlling the operation state of the physical layer; and an interrupt handler for converting an interrupt received from the physical layer to the event corresponding to a register of the state module and sending the event to the FSM. Hence, by means of the state machine for the IEEE 802.15.4 PHY, the IEEE 802.15.4 physical layer operation state can be controlled to optimize the operations of the upper MAC. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149844 | MULTI-SERVICE ADAPTABLE ROUTING PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS - In accordance with various aspects of the present disclosure, an apparatus is disclosed that includes a sensor node configured to operate in a wireless sensor network, wherein the sensor node is configured to receive a data packet that comprises a quality of service field, examine the quality of service field, and invoke one of a plurality of pre-stored algorithms depending on the value of the quality of service field. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149845 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING ONE-TO-ONE AND GROUP COMMUNICATION CONCURRENTLY IN A WIRELESS IP NETWORK - A system and method for concurrently performing a group communication and a one-to-one communication in a wireless Internet Protocol (IP) network are disclosed. The method includes requesting, upon receipt of a one-to-one communication request from another terminal during a voice group communication, a concurrent mode service to the server by a compound terminal, determining, upon receipt of a group communication IP packet, whether there is a concurrent mode user among group members to receive a voice data packet corresponding to the group communication IP packet by a server, converting the group communication IP packet to a text data packet in the presence of a concurrent mode user by the server, transmitting the text data packet to the concurrent mode user by the server, and transmitting the voice data packet corresponding to the group communication IP packet to group communication mode users except for the concurrent mode user by the server. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149846 | UPLINK CONTROL SIGNAL DESIGN FOR WIRELESS SYSTEM - Transmission of uplink control message for a wireless system. The uplink control message may be encoded according to one of multiple possible schemes. The choice of encoding scheme may be made based on the control message size and/or based on the available transmission resources and/or based on the detection scheme used on the receiving end. A modulation scheme may also be selected based on such factors. CDM may be used for certain control messages. Block code encoding, such as Reed-Muller encoding may be used for certain control messages. Different transmission resources may be allocated for different control message uses. The encoding specifics may be selected to obtain a certain hamming distance and/or size of the encoded message or based on other factors. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149847 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HIGHER-LAYER PROTOCOL MESSAGING IN AN IN-BAND MODEM - Detecting an acknowledgment signal sent from a destination terminal at a source terminal in an in-band communication system is disclosed. A first synchronization sequence followed by a low layer acknowledgement message and a second synchronization sequence followed by a high layer acknowledgement message is detected. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149848 | HEADER COMPRESSION FOR RELAY NODES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate compressing headers for relay nodes. In particular, a plurality of internet protocol (IP) headers, tunneling protocol headers, and/or other routing headers in a packet can be compressed to facilitate efficient communications of packets between relay nodes and/or a donor access point. An access point receiving packets to be compressed can provide a disparate access point with a compression context and an uncompressed packet. The disparate access point can generate a decompression context related to subsequent packets having similar header values and can store the decompression context with the context identifier. The access point can subsequently compress received packets having similar header values and communicate the compressed packets with the context identifier to the disparate access point. The disparate access point can apply the previously generated decompression context associated with the context identifier to decompress the packets. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149849 | WIRELESS BLACK BOX COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Embodiments of the present invention provide wireless black box communication systems and methods. According to some embodiments, a wireless black-box flight recorder network system can generally comprise an earth-station server and a plurality of aircraft based clients. The earth-station server can be configured to transmit and receive wireless data messages. The earth-station server can be coupled to or comprise a storage medium for storing data recorded about an aircraft. The plurality of aircraft based clients can each comprise a device to receive aircraft data. The clients can also each comprise a client controller configured to implement a client process. The client process of at least one of the aircraft based client can select a transmission path to the earth-station server that is an indirect link to the earth-station server through at least one of the other aircraft based clients. The indirect link can be used to transmit aircraft data to the earth-station server for storing said data in the storage medium. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149850 | BASE STATION AND TERMINAL, AND CONTROL METHODS THEREOF - In order to reduce a disruption of communication which occurs upon performing an active scan, an access point ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110149851 | Enhanced E911 location information using voice over internet protocol (VoIP) - An E-9-1-1 voice-over-IP (VoIP) solution is provided wherein a 911 call from a wireless VoIP device is routed directly to the correct Public Safety Answer Point (PSAP) via dedicated trunks, together with correct location information and call-back number. VoIP gateways are implemented locally, at least one per LATA, and accept VoIP packetized data inbound, and convert it to standard wireline voice calls. Calls are routed to an IP address at the VoIP gateway, which then egresses the call to a voice port at a selective router. Dedicated voice trunks (CAMA, SS7, FG-D) are installed between each local VoIP gateway and appropriate selective routers. An Automatic Location Identification (ALI) database is provisioned with ESRKs dedicated for VoIP use. TCP/IP circuits may be established between some or all of the various local VoIP gateways. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149852 | KEEPING PACKET SWITCHED SESSION IN LTE WHILE CIRCUIT SWITCHED REGISTERED IN WCDMA - A wireless terminal, when already having a registration and/or session for a packet switched (PS) service with a Long Term Evolution (LTE) core network, makes a registration for a circuit switched (CS) service over a Wide Band Code Division Multiplexing (WCDMA) air interface with a circuit switched (CS) core network, but in conjunction with the registration for the circuit switched (CS) service maintains the registration and/or session for a packet switched (PS) service with the Long Term Evolution (LTE) core network. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149853 | MAINTAINING PACKET SWITCHED SESSION IN LTE WHEN ESTABLISHING GSM CIRCUIT SWITCHED CALL - A wireless terminal ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110149854 | WIRELESS ACCESS DEVICE AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING PACKETS - A wireless access device communicates with a plurality of customer premised equipments (CPEs) via a network. The wireless access device establishes a plurality of queues and distributes intervals for each of the CPEs. The wireless access device receives packets from the network, obtains one of the intervals corresponding to one of the CPEs with a MAC address being a destination MAC address of one of the received packets, and stores each of the received packets to one of the queues with sequence number being in the obtained interval. The wireless access device transmits the received packets stored in the plurality of queues in the way of one row by one row. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149855 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF POWER SAVING FOR STATIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A power control apparatus of a wireless communication terminal providing a voice over internet protocol (VoIP) service in a wireless communication system includes a user interface unit configured to include a voice CODEC using in the VoIP service, a controller configured to be connected to the user interface unit, include predetermined application programs including a VoIP application program, and control signaling for setting up a VoIP call and canceling a VoIP call, and a medium access control (MAC) processor configured to perform a medium access control function and include a timer unit for beginning a unscheduled-service period (U-SP) by receiving a VoIP call setup signal and a VoIP call cancel signal from the controller. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149856 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING/TRANSMITTING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data receiving apparatus includes a receiving unit configured to receive a beacon packet from at least one base station, a searching unit configured to search an index of a subchannel including an optimal channel state among subchannels allocated to a sector divided through spatial multiplexing based on the base station using the beacon packet, a calculating unit configured to calculate a final back off time by adding a slot time of the subchannel index and a random time, and a transmitting unit configured to include the searched subchannel index in a beacon response packet and transmit the beacon response packet after the calculated final back off time. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149857 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING USING PHASE SHIFT-BASED PRECODING AND AN APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING THE SAME IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting data using a plurality of subcarriers in a multi-antenna wireless communication system is disclosed. More specifically, the method includes receiving feedback information from a mobile station (MS), performing channel encoding and modulation independently on user data to be transmitted by each antenna using the received feedback information, determining a phase shift-based precoding matrix for increasing a phase angle of the user data by a fixed amount, and performing precoding using the determined phase shift-based precoding matrix on the user data. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149858 | MESH ROUTING METHOD AND MESH ROUTING APPARATUS IN BEACON ENABLED WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORKS - There is provided a mesh routing method in beacon-enabled wireless AD-HOC networks that includes: broadcasting, by nodes constituting a wireless AD-HOC network, a beacon message loading neighbor node information on a beacon payload; managing, by a node receiving the broadcasted beacon message, its own neighbor node table by extracting the neighbor node information loaded on the beacon payload; and performing, by a source node attempting to transmit data or commands, mesh routing on the basis of its own neighbor node table. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149859 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COUPLING COMMUNICATION TERMINALS - Disclosed herein is a system and method for coupling communication terminals. In a communication method performed by a terminal coupler according to the present invention, sequence numbers are sequentially assigned to data packets received from a terminal end device. The data packets with the sequence numbers assigned thereto are individually transferred to a plurality of communication terminals belonging to a same group in conformity with preset scheduling policies. Data packets, received from the plurality of communication terminals belonging to the same group, are reordered by sequence numbers, and the reordered data packets are transferred to the terminal end device. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149860 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DIGITAL BROADCAST SIGNAL - A digital broadcasting system and a method for transmitting and receiving digital broadcast signal are disclosed. The method of transmitting digital broadcast signal includes convolutional encoding mobile data to build SCCC blocks, generating signaling data, forming a first data group and a second data group which includes mobile service data and the signaling data, interleaving data including the mobile service data in the first and second data groups and outputting a interleaved first data group and an interleaved second data group, wherein at least one of the SCCC blocks include an extension data block from the interleaved first data group and a data block from the interleaved second data group, transmitting the digital broadcasting signal including the first data group and the second data group. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149861 | ACTIVATION OF MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICE ON A CELLULAR NETWORK - An automated network registration and activation system and method of the present invention automatically configures a communication network device for communicating on a network and automatically handles the communication network registration and activation. In one embodiment a processor automatically configures a device for communicating on a communication network with automated registration and activation on the communication network. In one exemplary implementation, network configuration information includes a network unit device identifier (e.g., a MAN) and the present invention automatically registers and activates a device with a communication network when requested to activate by a user tapping on an activation application or being taken to the activation application. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149862 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND INFORMATION TRANSFER DEVICE - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes step of notifying an information transfer device | 06-23-2011 |
20110149863 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING ENHANCED POSITION LOCATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Embodiments disclosed herein relate to methods and systems for providing improved position-location (e.g., time-of-arrival) measurement and enhanced position location in wireless communication systems. In an embodiment, an access point may replace information (e.g., data) transmission by a “known” transmission (or “reference transmission”) at a predetermined time known to access terminals in the corresponding sectors. The access terminals may use the received reference transmission to perform a position-location measurement, and report back the measured information. The access point may also send a reference transmission on demand, e.g., in response to a request from an access terminal in need for a location-based service. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149864 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF EXCHANGING IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION FOR MOBILE STATIONS - A system is provided for allowing mobile stations to exchange identification information using a predetermined communication path for the purpose of obtaining identification information to use in establishing a different communication path for communicating. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149865 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MOVING A RECEIVE WINDOW IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method of moving a receiving window in a wireless mobile communication system, wherein the AM RLC of the transmitting side sends information of the last discarded SDU regardless of continuity of the discarded SDUs. The AM RLC of the receiving side checks whether all SDUs from the start point of the receiving window up to the last discarded SDU are successfully received, delivers the SDUs that are successfully received to an upper layer, and discard only those SDUs that are not successfully received. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149866 | WIRELESS TERMINAL BASEBAND PROCESSOR HIGH SPEED TURBO DECODING MODULE - A baseband processing module for use within a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver includes a downlink/uplink interface, TX processing components, a processor, memory, RX processing components, and a turbo decoding module. The RX processing components receive a baseband RX signal from the RF front end, produce a set of IR samples from the baseband RX signal, and transfer the set of IR samples to the memory. The turbo decoding module receives a set of IR samples from the memory, forms a turbo code word from the set of IR samples, turbo decodes the turbo code word to produce inbound data, and outputs the inbound data to the downlink/uplink interface. The turbo decoding module performs metric normalization based upon a chosen metric, performs de-rate matching on the set of IR samples, performs error detection operations, and extracts information from a MAC packet that it produces. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149867 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DELIVERY OF ASSISTANCE DATA - A method and apparatus are used for providing assistance data to wireless transmit/receive units (WTRU)s. The assistance data may include information regarding neighboring access points (AP)s. The assistance data may be transmitted to WTRUs using multicast, broadcast, and/or point-to-point signaling. The assistance data may be used to facilitate ring and handover of WTRUs from one AP to another. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149868 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AND PROCESSING A REFERENCE SIGNAL BASED ON AN IDENTIFIER ASSOCIATED WITH A BASE STATION - A wireless communication device receives at least a section of a subframe from a base station in a wireless communication system. The subframe includes transmission resources multiplexed onto subcarriers of orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (OFDM) symbols. A first set of OFDM symbols includes a reference signal and at least a second set of OFDM symbols includes information other than the reference signal (e.g., channel-coded data). The wireless device determines which OFDM symbols of the subframe constitute the first set of OFDM symbols based on an identifier associated with a base station that transmitted the subframe. The wireless device may then process the reference signal from the OFDM symbols that are determined to be the first set of OFDM symbols. The wireless device may also determine which OFDM symbols of the subframe constitute the second set of OFDM symbols and process non-reference signal information from OFDM symbols of the second set. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149869 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR HSDPA - In the data transmission method of an HSDPA system according to the present invention, a transmitter transmits Data Blocks each composed of one or more data units originated from a same logical channel, and a receiver receives the Data Block through a HS-DSCH and distributes the Data Block to a predetermined reordering buffer. Since each Data Block is composed of the MAC-d PDUs originated from the same logical channel, it is possible to monitor the in-sequence delivery of the data units, resulting in reduction of undesirable queuing delay caused by logical channel multiplexing. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149870 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR HSDPA - In the data transmission method of an HSDPA system according to the present invention, a transmitter transmits Data Blocks each composed of one or more data units originated from a same logical channel, and a receiver receives the Data Block through a HS-DSCH and distributes the Data Block to a predetermined reordering buffer. Since each Data Block is composed of the MAC-d PDUs originated from the same logical channel, it is possible to monitor the in-sequence delivery of the data units, resulting in reduction of undesirable queuing delay caused by logical channel multiplexing. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149871 | SEAMLESS SESSION SWITCHING METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A seamless session switching method and a mobile terminal are provided in the present invention. The method includes: a first mobile terminal establishing a first VOIP session with a second terminal via an initial wireless network; the first mobile terminal acquiring a target wireless network when the first mobile terminal detects that a switching event occurs; the first terminal transmitting a second session request to the second terminal via the target wireless network, and keeping the first VOIP session continued; and the first mobile terminal establishing a second VOIP session with the second terminal via the target wireless network after receiving an acknowledge message for the second session request from the second terminal, and terminating the first VOIP session after the second VOIP session is established. The present invention can realize the seamless free switching, and use a better wireless network for the session, so as to increase the session quality of the user. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149872 | MOBILE DATA COMMUNICATION - A method provides data communication to a vehicle. The method comprises a first data packet from a device associated with said vehicle at an intermediate device, said first data packet comprising a first identifier identifying said vehicle, modifying said first identifier to identify said intermediate device and forwarding said modified first data packet from said intermediate device to a further device. A communications session between said device associated with said further device is established, and a session identifier is associated with the communications session, and said first data packet comprises said session identifier and said modified data packet comprises said session identifier. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149873 | METHOD AND FOREIGN AGENT GROUP FOR REGISTERING TO A HOME AGENT OF A MOBILE NODE - The present invention provides an improved solution of registering with a Home Agent HA of a Mobile Node MN, comprising: grouping at lest two Foreign Agents FAs to form a Foreign Agent Group FAG to enable FA members of the FAG to share information of the MN roaming into a FAG coverage area; when any FA member of the FAG receives a registration request for registering a care-of address with the HA sent by the MN, determining whether the MN enters the FAG coverage area for the first time based on the shared MN information; and if the MN enters the FAG coverage area for the first time, the FA forwards the received registration request to the HA; otherwise, the FA directly sends a registration response to the MN. The solution of the present invention greatly reduces registration messages from the MN to the HA, thereby reducing signaling delay produced when the MN moves in the FN. Also, both the MN and the HA in the prior art can be merged into the solution, thereby achieving seamless integration with IPv4, preferably with Mobile IPv4 scheme. | 06-23-2011 |
20110158159 | EFFICIENT UPLINK SDMA OPERATION - According to various embodiments, a computer-implemented method is disclosed that allows an AP to efficiently poll various information from STAs belonging to a SDMA group. Each STA may transmit uplink frames using uplink SDMA mechanism. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158160 | IP ENCAPSULATION AND ROUTING OVER WIRELESS RADIO NETWORKS - Various methods of operating a wireless mesh network are disclosed herein. According to various embodiments, an Internet Protocol (IP) router generates IP addresses for wireless sensor nodes that do not have native support for the IP protocol stack. The IP router then receives and translates an incoming IP request and routes the incoming IP request to the appropriate wireless sensor node. In some embodiments, an IP data packet can be encapsulated and routed using an IP router and an IP bridge device. In other embodiments, an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) session can be managed over a wireless mesh network. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158161 | PROTOCOL FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MOBILE STATION AND WIMAX SIGNALING FORWARDING FUNCTION - A protocol for communication between a mobile station and a WiMAX signaling forwarding function is generally presented. In this regard, a method is introduced including generating a packet containing a header and a broadband wireless network message, the header to establish communication between a broadband wireless network single radio server and a mobile station in communication with a wireless network of a different standard from the broadband wireless network, storing the packet in a buffer, and transmitting the packet through a core network. Other embodiments are also described and claimed. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158162 | Method for interworking among wireless technologies - A method is provided for interworking of mobility key management among access networks operating under different access technologies. The method is carried out by performing mobility key management by a core-network authentication server based on the access technology that a mobile terminal accessing a wireless network has selected for operation. The method of the invention defines authentication server behavior based on different access technologies and therefore solves the technology interworking issue seamlessly. The method of the invention also facilitates coexistence of more than two different access technologies without any need for each access technology to be modified in order to interwork with core network that is specified by another technology. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158163 | ENERGY EFFICIENT INTEGRATED ROUTING PROTOCOL - A Link Layer (e.g., TCP/IP Layer 1, OSI Layer 2) routing protocol that routes frames from a sending node to a receiving node based upon service solicitation and availability is proposed. The routing protocol may reduce control messages across the layers, and may achieve greater energy efficiency by placing non-participating nodes into a sleep mode for durations of time while an ad hoc network is being utilized by participating nodes. The proposed scheme may also reduce network setup time by enabling routing as soon as a service and corresponding request is initiated. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158164 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR JOINT PROCESSING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which signals are received from a plurality of base stations, and a measurement is made of synchronization parameters between the plurality of base stations at a user equipment. A signal is transmitted from the user equipment to at least one of the plurality of base stations with information about the synchronization parameters. The base station determines an offset in the received synchronizations and adjusts a transmission waveform based on the determined offset. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158165 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE VOICE SERVICE MANAGEMENT - Methods and apparatus for mobile voice service management are described. An example method includes receiving a mobile network request for registering with a mobile network and responsive to the mobile network request, sending a response including an area identity list and an identifier indicating whether an area identified in the tracking area identity list supports a service. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158166 | ROBUST HEADER COMPRESSION FOR RELAY NODES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate compressing headers for relay nodes. In particular, a robust header compression (RoHC) profile can be defined for general packet radio service (GPRS) tunneling protocol (GTP) headers. Upon receiving a packet with one or more GTP headers, an access point or relay node can determine whether the one or more GTP headers are compressible and can apply the RoHC profile to compress the one or more GTP headers. In addition, the packet can include a baseheader encapsulated by the one or more GTP headers, which can also be compressed according to a RoHC profile specific to the baseheader. Moreover, RoHC compressed headers can be decompressed according to the GTP RoHC profile. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158167 | TRANSMITTING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DIGITAL BROADCAST SIGNAL IN TRANSMITTING SYSTEM - A transmitting system and a method of transmitting digital broadcast signal are disclosed. The method of transmitting digital broadcasting signal in a transmitter includes multiplexing a specified number of mobile data packets, a first scalable number of mobile data packets, and a second scalable number of main data packets, interleaving mobile data in the mobile data packets and main data in the main data packets, transmitting the interleaved mobile and main data during a slot, wherein the data group includes a plurality of first blocks, each first block including a plurality of data segments, specified block of the plurality of first blocks including the mobile data, known data sequence, trellis initialization data and RS parity bytes inserted in pre-determined position of the data group, wherein the data group includes a plurality of regions, wherein the last region includes the first scalable number of mobile data packets. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158168 | SIGNAL INTERFERENCE HANDLING METHOD AND SYSTEM AND APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A signal interference handling method adapted to a cellular system, and a system and an apparatuses using the same are provided, where the cellar system includes a macro/micro cell base station (MBS), a home base station (HBS), and a MBS-served mobile station (m-MS), and the signal interference handling method includes steps. The m-MS detects whether there is mutual interference. The m-MS sends an interference mitigation (IM) request to the HBS if there is mutual interference. The HBS enters a low duty mode (LDM) after the HBS receives the IM request. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158169 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF ACKNOWLEDGING THE CONTROL INFORMATION - A method of acknowledgment by a receiver includes: receiving a control message via a payload of a medium access control protocol data unit (MAC PDU) from a transmitter or receiving control information through an extended header or signaling header of the MAC PDU; and transmitting an acknowledgment of the control message or control information through an acknowledgment extended header containing information about whether the acknowledgment is an acknowledgment of the control message or an acknowledgment of the control information. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158170 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DIGITAL BROADCAST SIGNAL - A digital broadcasting system and a method for transmitting and receiving digital broadcast signal are disclosed. The method for processing a digital broadcast signal comprises processing the digital broadcast signal in at least two transmission modes, wherein the processing comprises first processing for a first transmission mode comprising forming a data group including mobile service data and place holder data for main service data, an MPEG-2 header and non-systematic RS parity data, removing the place holder data for main service data and non-systematic RS parity data in the data group, replacing the place holder data for the MPEG-2 header with an MPEG-2 header having a packet ID of mobile service data packets, thereby forming and outputting 118 mobile service data packets including data in the data group, multiplexing the outputted mobile service data packets and 38 main service data packets. Second processing for a second transmission mode of the processing comprises forming a data group including mobile service data, forming and outputting M numbers of mobile service data packets including data in the data group, wherein the M is an integer equal to or greater than 118 and equal to or less than 156, multiplexing the outputted mobile service data packets and N numbers of main service data packets when the N is not zero, wherein a sum of the M and N is 156 and transmitting the first and second processed digital broadcast signal. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158171 | Decentrallizing Core Network Functionalities - The present invention relates to methods and apparatuses for providing network access, wherein a connection to a core network is established via a wireless access device and a gateway device. Connectivity of the wireless access device is restricted to a pre-defined group of core network address of a pool of gateway devices with multi-node connectivity to the core network, and a single address is selected to establish the connection to a one of the gateway devices. The gateway device is provided with a relay function for mapping a single input address to a plurality of core network addresses based on a location information of the wireless access device and with at least one co-located decentralized core network functionality. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158172 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ENFORCING INTERNET USERS' GEOGRAPHICAL POSITIONING TRACEABILITY - A method for enforcing Internet users' geographical positioning traceability, through the building of a community of several network elements with known geographical locations with identified boundaries. The network access to the community is controlled and access of external devices to the community is only possible within one connectivity hop from the network elements of the community. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158173 | SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTING BROADBAND WIRELESS SIGNALS INDOORS - system for distributing broadband wireless signals indoors includes a radio access node, connected to a telecommunication access network via an access interface, where said radio access node comprises a broadband-signal-transmitting/-receiving module configured to transmit and receive broadband wireless signals via a broadband radio interface; at least one client device comprising a broadband-signal-transmitting/-receiving module configured to transmit and receive broadband wireless signals to/from said radio access node via said broadband radio interface. It also comprises a control channel configured to exchange control signals between said radio access node and said at least one client device over a control radio interface, each of said radio access nodes and at least one client device comprising a control-signal-transmitting/receiving module configured to establish said control channel for transmitting and receiving wireless signals over said control radio interface. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158174 | Method and System For Establishing A Connection Between Network Elements - The invention provides a method and system for establishing or handling a connection between a first and a second network element connected to different networks such as GPRS/UMTS and IP-based networks. The connection is established by means of at least one third network element such as a SGSN or GGSN arranged in one of the networks. The third network element is adapted to send, when receiving information on an establishment of a connection, a request to a fourth network element which may be a Call State Control Function (CSCF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), or a Call Processing Server (CPS). The request requests permission for establishing a requested type of connection, or requests a check of a connection parameter, and specifies the first and/or second network element and/or the connection or connection type to be established. The fourth network element returns a response specifying a permission for establishing a connection or connection type, or specifying a connection parameter. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158175 | Wireless Device For Voice Communication - A wireless handset for use in a peer-to-peer voice communications system comprising: a display; a keyboard comprising multifunctional keys capable of entering numeric or alphabetic characters depending on a number of key presses, said keyboard being arranged to enter contact information into a user interface displayed on said display, select contacts on the user interface, and initiate a packet data voice call with a contact; a microprocessor arranged to execute embedded client software, wherein the client software is arranged to establish a packet data voice call over the network and encode speech information as individually addressed packets; and a radio communication device arranged to transmit said individually addressed packets as radio signals from said wireless handset to a network. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158176 | Method for Wireless Data Transmission - A method for wireless data transmission between a base station and a transponder is provided, in which data are transmitted between the base station and the transponder in the form of data packets that include a header section with at least one symbol for setting one or more transmission parameters and include at least one additional section. The transponder monitors, during the data transmission, to determine whether a time period between two successive symbol delimiters transmitted by the base station exceeds a maximum time, and if the maximum value is exceeded, a receiver unit of the transponder is reset. The maximum time can be determined in the transponder on the basis of the at least one symbol in the header section. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158177 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION CONTROL DEVICE, AND BASE STATION DEVICE - There are provided a communication system, a base station control device, and a base station device capable of improving communication quality. In the communication system ( | 06-30-2011 |
20110158178 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF EDGE CACHING WHEN CUMMUNICATING DATA - A communication system for distributing data over an area. The system includes a base station configured to transmit common data over a range that is within the area. The system also includes a plurality of nodes, wherein each node is configured to receive the common data from the base station when within the range, receive the common data from another node when within the area, store and transport the common data, transmit the common data to another node within the area, and display the common data. Neither the base station nor nodes individually are capable of transmitting data over the entire area, but the features of the nodes provide for propagating the data by passing the data from node to node when two nodes are within relatively close proximity to each other. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158179 | NETWORK-AWARE ADAPTER FOR APPLICATIONS - Streams of data traffic from various applications may be handled by a network-aware adapter module as part of a greater platform for filtering communicating the streams to intelligent network components. A distinguishing factor associated with a given data stream may be determined and used as a basis for selecting a QoS policy setting for the given data stream. The selected QoS policy setting may then be signaled to a media access control layer to take advantage of the QoS function of the embedded underlying active media type that is active and optimal (both from technical and business perspective) to carry out the communication for the application. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158180 | METHOD OF PROCESSING RECEIVED SIGNALS, CORRESPONDING RECEIVER AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREFOR - Signals received from channels exposed to multi-path propagation via a plurality of diversity antennas and including at least one pilot signal are processed by detecting a set of multi-path components for each received signal and computing a set of channel coefficients from multi-path components of the at least one pilot signal in the set of multi-path components. The set of channel coefficients is organized as a channel coefficient vector. From the channel coefficient vector, a set of combining weights is estimated to be applied to the received signals by: computing a spatial correlation matrix of the channel coefficient vector by neglecting the correlations between multi-path components of the channel coefficient vector having different delays, whereby the correlation matrix is a block diagonal matrix including null coefficients other than for non-null sub-matrixes arranged along the diagonal of the correlation matrix, wherein the sub-matrixes have a size equal to the number of diversity antennas; deriving from the spatial correlation matrix a resulting matrix by calculating the inverse of the sub-matrixes or a scaled version thereof; and multiplying the resulting matrix and the channel coefficient vector in order to obtain the desired set of combining weights. | 06-30-2011 |
20110164555 | Cooperative Relay Communication in Wireless OFDMA Star Networks - A wireless star network includes including a master node (master) and a set of N slave nodes (slaves), wherein the network uses orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA). The master partitions the set of slaves in a first subset A(i) and second subset B(j), wherein the first and second subsets are disjoint. Packets are transmitted by the first subset of slaves only while the master and second subset of slaves operate in receive mode, and | 07-07-2011 |
20110164556 | Wireless Star Networks with Dual Adaptive Central Nodes - A wireless network with a star topology has a first and second central node. The first central node starts up first and initiates the network. The second central node starts up second and synchronizes to the first central node, and wherein one node is in active mode and the other node is in standby mode, and a set of leaf nodes configured to communicate only with the active node. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164557 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ITERATIVE DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM (DFT) BASED CHANNEL ESTIMATION USING MINIMUM MEAN SQUARE ERROR (MMSE) TECHNIQUES - A method and system for iterative discrete Fourier transform (DFT) based channel estimation using minimum mean square error (MMSE) techniques are presented. Aspects of the method and system include a procedure for computing channel estimates in both the time domain and frequency domain (or mixed domain) using an iterative DFT method based on MMSE techniques. One aspect of the method and system may achieve low computational complexity and produce more accurate channel estimate values in low signal to noise ratio (SNR) regimes in comparison to conventional DFT-based channel estimation methods, which utilize least squares (LS) techniques. The method and system disclosed herein may be practiced in connection with a wide range of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) based systems, for example wireless local area networks (WLAN, for example IEEE 802.11 WLAN systems), and LTE systems. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164558 | USING A PROXY TO IMPROVE A PACKET BASED WIRELESS NETWORK - This disclosure describes a system and method for optimizing the transport of payload data on a wireless telecommunications network. For downstream data flow to a mobile communication device client, an application proxy residing on a transmitting server terminates TCP data flows, extracts payload data and encapsulates the data into a UDP packet. A far host server residing on a receiving client device receives the UDP packet, extracts the payload and presents it to an application program on the client device as a TCP packet. For upstream data flow to a server, software running on the mobile communication device acts as the application proxy, extracting payload data from a TCP data flow and encapsulating the extracted data into a UDP packet. The server receiving the UDP packet will extract the payload and present it as a TCP packet. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164559 | CELLULAR AND LANDLINE INTERFACE TO CORDLESS CALL ROUTING SYSTEM - A method and system are provided for routing multiple communications sessions. One or more communication devices are paired to an access point having control circuitry for processing multiple concurrent communication sessions. Communications pertaining to a communication device are routed through the access point to a terminal. Additionally, communications pertaining to a terminal are routed through the access point to a communication device. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164560 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING MAC PROTOCOL DATA UNIT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for processing a MAC PDU in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method includes segmenting a MAC PDU into a first MAC PDU segment and a second MAC PDU segment, transmitting the first MAC PDU segment to a receiver, and discarding the second MAC PDU segment not to be transmitted to the receiver, if the transmission of the first MAC PDU segment is failed. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164561 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD - A digital broadcasting system and a method of processing data are disclosed, which are robust to error when mobile service data are transmitted. To this end, additional encoding is performed for the mobile service data, whereby it is possible to strongly cope with fast channel change while giving robustness to the mobile service data. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164562 | Vehicular Content Distribution - A system and method provides an electronic content to a vehicle from access point(s) within a network using a controller. The controller divides the electronic content into one or more files wherein each file contains at least one packet, and generates two or more random linear combinations of the packets within each file. For each file, each random linear combination of the packets is replicated to a different access point within the network. The electronic content is provided to the vehicle using at least one of the different access points. The controller can also determine a set of nearest trajectories for the vehicle in a location database that match a recent location history for the vehicle. For each determined nearest trajectory, one or more mobility trajectories are determined for the vehicle, and a set of access points are determined that correspond to the determined mobility trajectories for the vehicle. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164563 | Method of Avoiding or Minimizing Cost of Stateful Connections Between Application Servers and S-CSCF Nodes in an IMS Network with Multiple Domains - Methods of avoiding or minimizing cost of stateful connections between application servers (ASs) and S-CSCF nodes in an IMS network with multiple domains. S-CSCF service logic is provided and connected to a co-located AS. The IMS includes a network operator administration domain and an MVNO service domain, and the S-CSCF logic and AS are maintained in the same domain, e.g., the MVNO or network operator domain. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164564 | MOBILE SWITCHING CENTRE SERVER - MSC server enhanced for rSRVCC from UTRAN/GERAN to E-UTRAN/HSPA, comprising:
| 07-07-2011 |
20110164565 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of routing a wireless network is provided. The method is performed by each of a group of nodes and includes: receiving a routing request signal; determining whether a node itself is a destination node, by referring to a traffic distribution table showing traffic throughput of the group of nodes and an intermediate-node weight table showing weights of intermediate nodes on all paths between the group of nodes and a source node, wherein a route path is selected by referring to the weights of intermediate nodes; and when it is determined that the node itself is the destination node transmitting a routing response signal to the source node that has transmitted the routing request signal, and receiving a packet from the source node, wherein the transmitting and receiving are performed by the determined destination node. By using the method, traffic in wireless network extreme communications can be distributed at intermediate nodes as well as at destination nodes. Therefore, all the networks can be effectively used in extreme circumstances. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164566 | Method, Apparatus and System for Enabling to Release PDN Connections - A method for releasing Packet Data Network (PDN) connections includes: when the subscription data of the user in Home Subscriber Server (HSS) changes, the HSS notifies Mobility Management Entity (MME) to trigger releasing of the PDN connections ( | 07-07-2011 |
20110164567 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING BLIND SIGNAL SEPARATION IN AN OFDM MIMO SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing blind signal separation in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) system are disclosed. A transmitter generates a plurality of spatial streams of data and transmits the spatial streams via a plurality of transmit antennas. A receiver receives the transmitted spatial data streams with a plurality of receive antennas and generates a plurality of receive data streams. The receiver performs a discrete Fourier transform (DFT) on each of the receive data streams to generate a plurality of frequency domain data streams. The receiver then performs a blind signal separation on the frequency domain data streams to recover spatial streams transmitted by the transmitter. The blind signal separation may be performed by using an independent component analysis (ICA) in the complex domain. The blind signal separation may be performed individually for each OFDM subcarrier. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164568 | FFT-SIZE DETECTOR AND FFT-SIZE DETECTION METHOD AND CELL SEARCH APPARATUS AND CELL SEARCH METHOD IN CELLULAR SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for cell acquisition and downlink synchronization acquisition in an OFDMA wireless communication system are provided. In an SS apparatus in a broadband wireless communication system, a preamble subcarrier acquirer extracts subcarrier values having a preamble code from an FFT signal. A multiplier code-demodulates the subcarrier values by multiplying the subcarrier values by a preamble code. A correlator calculates a plurality of differential correlations in the code-demodulated signal. An IFFT processor IFFT-processes the differential correlations by mapping the differential correlations to subcarriers. A maximum value detector detects a maximum value from the IFFT signal and calculates a timing offset using an IFFT output index having the maximum value. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164569 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE COMPUTER-AIDED CLASSIFICATION OF MEASUREMENTS FOR THE FEATURE-BASED POSITIONING OF A MOBILE OBJECT IN A PREDETERMINED REGION - In a method for the computer-aided classification of measurements for the featured-based positioning of a mobile object in a predetermined region, for which one or more starting regions are defined through which the mobile object can leave and enter the predetermined region, each measurement is specified by a time and features of several base stations. The measurements are classified based on the relative base stations positions and the base station features, wherein a respective first class measurement is categorized as a measurement in a mobile object position inside the predetermined region and a respective second class measurement is categorized as a potential measurement in a mobile object position outside of the predetermined region. Subsequently, for a respective second class measurement, the path of the mobile object is tracked to determine whether the respective measurement is located inside the predetermined region to be also assigned to the first class. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164570 | GATEWAY APPARATUS, METHOD, SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - A gateway apparatus receives an image signal, including a moving image or a still image and transmitted from the first terminal to a first network, performs a conversion of the received image signal for enhancing resolution and image quality thereof, transmits the converted image signal to the second terminal connected to the second network, receives an image signal, including a moving image or a still image, and transmitted from a second terminal to the second network 170, and outputs the received image signal to the first network. The first terminal receives the image signal, output from the gateway apparatus to the first network, decodes the received image signal, and performs a conversion for enhancing resolution and image quality thereof, and displays the image signal. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164571 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING OF A POINT-TO-POINT CONNECTION BETWEEN A MOBILE NODE AND A NETWORK ENTITY, A CORRESPONDING MOBILE NODE AND A CORRESPONDING NETWORK ENTITY - The present invention refers to establishing of a point-to-point connection between a mobile node and a network entity by use of an access link of the network entity, wherein the network entity is configured to manage mobility related signalling for mobile nodes attached to the access link of the network entity. According to the present invention, the mobile node is attached to the access link of the network entity. Further, a router advertisement message is transmitted from the network entity to the mobile node, wherein the router advertisement message comprises a home network prefix and a mobile node identifier. Then, a home address of the mobile node is configured from the home network prefix by the mobile node, if the node identifier represents a node identifier of the mobile node. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164572 | Method of Transmitting Control Signal in Multi-Cell Cooperative Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus of transmitting a control signal in a multi-cell cooperative wireless communication system is provided. The method comprises transmitting to a first user equipment a first control signal for first downlink data by a serving base station and transmitting to the first user equipment a second control signal for second downlink data received from a neighboring base station by the serving base station, wherein the first downlink data is data for the first user equipment, and the second downlink data is data for a second user equipment in a neighbor cell and is restorable by the first user equipment. | 07-07-2011 |
20110170476 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CABLES CARRYING ETHERNET SIGNALS - It is provided a method for transmitting a wireless signal on Ethernet wiring The wireless signal is received in a hub unit for delivery to a remote unit In the hub unit the wireless signal is down converted to a down-converted frequency band for propagation on the Ethernet wiring A reference signal associated with a local oscillator used for the down conversion is embedded on a synchronous Ethernet stream that may include Ethernet data received at hub unit The synchronous Ethernet stream and the down converted wireless signal are submitted through the Ethernet wiring to the remote unit. The synchronous Ethernet stream may include data for management of electronic circuits installed in the remote unit, as well as a synchronization signal used thereof A converted replica of the first signal may be included in digital form in frames of the synchronous Ethernet stream | 07-14-2011 |
20110170477 | MOBILE BROADBAND PACKET SWITCHED TRAFFIC OPTIMIZATION - A method in an electronic device and a system for use in a communication network including a core network and at least one access network are described. Intermediate service platforms in an access network process data bound from a base station towards a core network, and vice versa. A first data channel or stream is processed by the intermediate service platform. Exemplary embodiments bypass the intermediate service platform by intercepting a second data channel or stream bound for the intermediate service platform. The data in the second data channel or stream is processed and inserted into a data channel or stream downstream of the intermediate service platform. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170478 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING DATA BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A device for transferring data. The device includes a processor operable to process a header portion of data without processing a payload. Processing the header portion generates a processed header. The processor may signal a direct memory access (DMA) unit to access the payload of the data. As a result, the DMA accesses and passes the payload to a wireless interface for transmission to a destination electronic device based on the processed header. The processor used to process the header portion may be a processor of an electronic device, e.g., a cellular phone, a PDA, etc. Alternatively, the processor may be a processor of a removable memory component. In one embodiment, the processor may be a processor of a module adapted to receive a removable memory and further adapted to couple to an electronic device, e.g., a cellular phone, a PDA, etc., where the removable memory includes its own processor. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170479 | Mobility Management System and Method - A method and system for optimizing mobility routing are disclosed. A preferred embodiment comprises a first system of networks that comprise a home local mobility anchor and two or more distributed local mobility anchors, and a second system of networks separate from the first system of networks. Packets of data may be transmitted from a correspondent node anchored in the second system of networks to a mobile node anchored in the second system. Additionally, packets of data may be transmitted from the mobile node to the correspondent node. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170480 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFICIENT STATION IDENTIFICATION - A base station is provided. The base station includes a transmit path circuitry that generates a masking sequence to mask a cyclic redundancy check of a control channel information element. The masking sequence includes a 4-bit prefix. The three least significant bits of the 4-bit prefix indicate a message type of the control channel information element. A subscriber station is also provided. The subscriber station includes a receive path circuitry that determines a message type of a control channel information element using a three least significant bits of a 4-bit prefix of a masking sequence used to mask a cyclic redundancy check of the control channel information element. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170481 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING CSG PRIORITIES IN IDLE AND CONNECTED MODES - A method comprising detecting closed subscriber group (CSG) proximity based on an autonomous search function; signaling a proximity indication to a network, wherein the proximity indication includes at least one priority of at least one allowed neighbor CSG cell. A method comprising, performing measurements on neighboring CSG cells; and generating a measurement report including measurements of at least one neighboring CSG cell; and transmitting a message including a measurement report and a CSG priority for at least one CSG cell. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170482 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALING TO A MOBILE DEVICE WHICH SET OF TRAINING SEQUENCE CODES TO USE FOR A COMMUNICATION LINK - The present patent application improves DARP by allowing multiple users on one time slot (MUROS). It comprises means and instructions for signaling training sequence set information to a remote station, comprising receiving signaling from a remote station indicating if a new set of training sequences is supported, and using a channel description to signal the training sequence set to be used by the remote station for a communication channel being established. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170483 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus includes a measurement gap assignment unit configured to assign a user equipment a measurement gap for measuring received quality for a frequency different from a frequency assigned to the user equipment and a DRX duration assignment unit configured to assign a DRX controlled user equipment a DRX duration. The measurement gap assignment unit sets the measurement gap to except the DRX duration and a duration for retransmitting a downlink signal. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170484 | RADIO APPARATUS WHICH COMMUNICATES WITH OTHER RADIO APPARATUSES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data processing unit selects either one of a base station mode and a terminal mode so as to perform communications using packet signals. The base station mode is a mode in which a packet signal, containing data indicating that an initial source and a final destination are not its own radio apparatus, is to be communicated; the terminal mode is a mode in which a packet signal, containing data indicating that the initial source or the final destination is its own radio apparatus, is to be communicated. A control unit starts the radio apparatus by setting the data processing unit in the terminal mode. When a packet signal, which has been transmitted from another radio apparatus and which contains broadcast information, has not been received before a certain period of time elapses after the start, the control unit switches the mode of the data processing unit to the base station mode. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170485 | RADIO APPARATUS - A control unit, in cooperation with an interface (IF) unit, a modulation unit and a baseband processing unit, produces a packet signal composed of a plurality of streams. While using as a reference a first known signal assigned to one of the plurality of streams and performing a cyclic timing shift within the first known signal on a first known signal assigned to another stream, the control unit performs a timing shift also on an extensional known signal assigned to a stream where no data is assigned. The amounts of timing shift are given degrees of priority beforehand and for the stream where data signals are assigned the control unit uses the amounts of timing shift in descending degree of priority. For the stream where no data signal is assigned, the control unit uses the amounts of timing shift also in descending degree of priority. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170486 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND BASE STATION CONTROLLER - The invention provides a radio base station apparatus forming a wireless zone in a mobile communication system and to a base station controller performing channel control over a terminal visiting a wireless zone. The radio base station apparatus has an identifying section identifying a particular radio base station that is to maintain a radio channel between the radio base station apparatus and a terminal during a process of diversity handover, a network interface section delivering a signal to a network if a local station is not the particular radio base station, and an inter-office interface section delivering to the network a composite wave of the signal and a signal having arrived and forwarded from the terminal via the radio channel at a radio base station forming a wireless zone adjacent to a wireless zone formed by the local station if the local station is the particular radio base station. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170487 | Method and Apparatus for Data Communication Between a Base Station and a Transponder - A method and system for data communication between a base station and at least one transponder via a high-frequency electromagnetic carrier signal onto which information packets are modulated. Each information packet has a header section, a middle section, and a trailer section. The header section can be provided in a forward link of a data communication between the base station and the transponders for controlling data communication. The header section is used in a return link of a data communication in order to transmit information from the transponder to the base station. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170488 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING PIGGYBACKED POSITIVE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT/NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIELD INDICATOR AND A POLLING INDICATOR - A method and apparatus of providing a piggybacked positive acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) (PAN) field indicator (PANI) and a polling indicator are disclosed. A combined field of a PANI bit, a relative reserved block period (RRBP) bit and an EGPRS supplementary polling (ES/P) field may indicate a polling scheme and a presence of a PAN field. Alternatively, the presence of the PAN field in the data block may be indicated by using a specific training sequence. Alternatively, a forward error correction (FEC) coding may be performed on the data block including the header, and the presence of the PAN field may be indicated by scrambling the encoded bits corresponding the header with a specific scrambling sequence. Alternatively, a header check sequence (HCS) may be generated and the presence of the PAN field is indicated by mixing a predetermined sequence with the HCS. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170489 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus of transmitting information in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes transmitting information based on a first resource index through a first antenna and transmitting the information based on a second resource index through a second antenna. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170490 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR ENABLING A MOBILE TERMINAL TO ACCESS TO A WIRELESS CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for enabling a mobile terminal to access to a wireless cellular telecommunication network including plural base stations, the mobile terminal having right to access to the wireless cellular telecommunication network through a first base station, the mobile terminal having no right to access to the wireless cellular telecommunication network through a second base station. The method includes: detecting reception of a message transferred by the mobile terminal to the second base station, determining if the first base station is operational, giving right to the mobile terminal to access to the wireless cellular telecommunication network through the second base station if the first base station is not operational, and rejecting right to the mobile terminal to access to the wireless cellular telecommunication network through the second base station if the first base station is operational. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170491 | Communication device and communication method - A communication device with a communication protocol including at least two layers includes a data reception unit that receives data transmitted from another communication device; a buffer control unit that rearranges a storage order of data in a buffer based on a number of retransmission times and a retransmission interval of retransmission data, stores the retransmission data in the buffer when the data reception unit has successfully received the retransmitted retransmission data; and a data transfer unit that transfers the data stored in the buffer to an upper layer. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170492 | WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR A BASE STATION USING A COMMON PILOT CHANNEL AND AN INDIVIDUAL PILOT CHANNEL - A wireless data-communication arrangements including a wireless terminal, located in a direction, receiving the pilot signal and determining a data rate according to reception quality of the pilot signal; the wireless terminal transmitting to a base station a signal for requesting the determined data rate; the base station receiving the signal and, based on the requested data rate, transmitting data to the wireless terminal with the radiation pattern, which includes the beam pattern in a same direction as the direction in which the pilot signal was transmitted, using a data channel of a second slot which is a predetermined number of slots after the first slot. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170493 | METHOD FOR SEARCHING PILOT SIGNALS TO SYNCHRONIZE A CDMA RECEIVER WITH AN ASSOCIATED TRANSMITTER - A method for synchronizing a CDMA receiver to a transmitter when an adaptive antenna is utilized to receive transmitted data, wherein a receiving antenna system is adapted between a 360° reception angle pattern (i.e., an omni-directional pattern) and a fixed reception angle (i.e., a directional pattern) by permitting the receiver to identify a pilot signal having the largest magnitude. The receiver minimizes interference from other pilot signals by steering antenna pattern nulls toward other transmitters. As a result, the time required for the receiver to acquire a valid pilot signal is significantly reduced. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170494 | SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD OF FEMTOCELL BASE STATION AND FEMTOCELL BASE STATION USING THE SAME - The exemplary embodiment of the present invention provides a method of synchronizing a femtocell base station securing time synchronization of a femtocell base station by allowing the femtocell base station to transmit a symbol to a terminal belonging to the femtocell by performing the time synchronization with a preamble signal when the femtocell base station receives the preamble signal from the macrocell base station in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) communication system in which a femtocell is present in a macrocell. | 07-14-2011 |
20110176480 | Channel Sounding Using Multiple Sounding Configurations - More than one set of sounding signal configuration parameters are determined for the same mobile terminal. The mobile terminal uses the sets of configuration parameters to generate different sounding reference signals which can be used for different purposes such as estimating timing and channel quality. In one embodiment, a method of configuring uplink sounding transmissions by mobile terminals in a wireless communication network is characterized by determining different sets of configuration parameters for sounding signal transmissions for a given mobile terminal ( | 07-21-2011 |
20110176481 | Method to Support Emergency Call Through Mesh Network - A method is provided for managing an emergency call in a mesh network. The method comprises a mesh station receiving an emergency indicator indicating that a call is an emergency call. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176482 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of controlling data transfer between a mobile device and a data telecommunications network includes: receiving a service request requiring a data transfer; determining at least one parameter requirement relating to the service request from a predefined profile; determining a network/user condition relating to one or more of the at least one parameters; comparing the one or more parameter requirements with the relevant network/user condition; and using the comparison to determine whether or not to proceed with the service request. Data transfer to and/or from a mobile device may be managed so that the network conditions, such as available signal strength and bearer type, are taken into consideration before proceeding with the data transfer. Accordingly, if the network conditions are not suitable for the service request requiring a data transfer, it is possible to not proceed with the request, such as by delaying it until network conditions become suitable. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176483 | SYNCHRONIZATION OF DEVICES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for synchronizing devices in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, a device determines a receive time for a base station, obtains a time offset for the base station from a network entity, and sets its transmit time based on the receive time and the time offset for the base station. The time offset compensates for the degree by which the base station is asynchronous with respect to a reference time, e.g., UTC time. In another aspect, a device determines and sends time difference information (e.g., a time offset or a TDOA measurement) for at least one base station to support synchronization of other devices. In yet another aspect, a network entity supports synchronization of devices, receives time difference information for at least one base station, and determines at least one time offset for the at least one base station based on the time difference information. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176484 | Channel Quality Indicator Design for Multiple-User Multiple-Input and Multiple-Output in High-Speed Packet Access Systems - A method for providing multiple-user multiple-input and multiple-output in a high-speed packet access system is described. A channel quality indicator is received from a dual-stream-capable wireless communication device requesting a single-stream transmission at a first data rate. The first data rate is adjusted by an adaptive outer loop margin to obtain a second data rate. A data stream is transmitted to the wireless communication device using the second data rate. A positive-acknowledgement/negative-acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) is received from the wireless communication device. The adaptive outer loop margin is adjusted according to the received ACK/NACK. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176485 | CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK - A method for performing Circuit Switched Fallback of a radio access terminal in a multi-RAT network environment comprised of a packet switched network and one or more circuit switched networks, each of said networks including a plurality of cells and the radio access terminal camping on a serving cell in the packet switched cellular network, the method comprising; receiving a service indication for a circuit switched service; transmitting to the radio access terminal a message to release the radio connection in the packed switched network; wherein the message to release the radio connection from the packet switched network comprises: data identifying one or more carrier frequencies associated with one or more of the circuit switched cellular networks; and system information data of a plurality of cells associated with one or more of the circuit switched cellular networks to the radio access terminal; releasing the radio access terminal from the packet switched cellular network; and in the radio access terminal, using the one or more carrier frequencies and the system information data of a plurality of cells to access a cell of the one or more circuit switched networks. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176486 | System and Method for Reporting Trusted Access Network Information - A system and method for reporting trusted access network information are provided. A method for network entity operations includes setting up a session with a communications device, subscribing to location reports for the communications device, and receiving a location report for the communications device. The subscribing includes sending an indication of the subscription in a message passed during the setting up of the session or at network registration. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176487 | METHOD FOR DISCOVERING PATHS WITH SUFFICIENT MEDIUM TIME IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS | 07-21-2011 |
20110176488 | METHOD FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for facilitating communication in a mobile communication system in which address-delegating entities are involved, wherein mobile nodes attaching to the communication system get assigned an address or address prefix, wherein the address or address prefix assignment is delegated from an entity being associated with mobility management—mobility entity—to some other configuration component ( | 07-21-2011 |
20110176489 | Apparatus and method of block acknowledgements with reduced recipient state information - An apparatus and method for block acknowledgements with reduced recipient state information are described. In one embodiment, the method comprises the storing of a receive state for a block of frames received during a transmission opportunity (TXOP) with an on-chip state memory. Once stored, an immediate block acknowledgement, including the receive state information, may be transmitted to an originator according to a block acknowledgement request (BAR) received during the TXOP. In the embodiments described, the BAR is received during the TXOP in which the block of data frames were transmitted to a recipient. In one embodiment, the recipient is free to discard the receive state information to free space within the on-chip system memory by requiring the originator to maintain the receive state information of blocks of data frames transmitted during TXOPs. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176490 | IDENTIFICATION OF DEVICES IN A MEDICAL DEVICE NETWORK AND WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES UTILIZING DEVICE IDENTIFIERS - A fluid infusion system as described herein includes a number of local “body network” devices, such as an infusion pump, a handheld monitor or controller, a physiological sensor, and a bedside or hospital monitor. The body network devices can be configured to support communication of status data, physiological information, alerts, control signals, and other information between one another. In addition, the body network devices can be configured to support networked communication of status data, physiological information, alerts, control signals, and other information between the body network devices and “external” devices, systems, or communication networks. The networked medical devices are configured to support a variety of wireless data communication protocols for efficient communication of data within the medical device network. In addition, the wireless medical devices may be configured to support a number of dynamically adjustable wireless data communication modes to react to current operating conditions, application-specific data content, or other criteria. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176491 | OPTIMIZING STATIC DICTIONARY USAGE FOR SIGNAL COMPRESSION AND FOR HYPERTEXT TRANSFER PROTOCOL COMPRESSION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method includes receiving a registration request including a first dictionary definition. The registration request is associated with user equipment. The method includes transmitting to the user equipment a response including a second dictionary definition. The method includes transmitting subsequent messages to the user equipment if the first and second dictionary definitions agree, the subsequent messages being compressed using the first static dictionary. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176492 | METHOD FOR PDU REORDERING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a protocol data unit (PDU) reordering method in a wireless communication system. The terminal maintains the number of bytes of PDUs stored in the buffer for reordering PDUs received in a sequence that is changed due to HARQ error correction to thereby prevent overflow of the reordering buffer. When the HARQ function unit transmits a PDU received at the radio access control RAS (S | 07-21-2011 |
20110176493 | Method and Apparatuses for Processing a Message Comprising a Parameter for More Than One Connection - A method and a device for data processing are provided, wherein an IPCS message is processed including at least one parameter for more than one connection. Furthermore, a communication system is suggested including the device. | 07-21-2011 |
20110182232 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FORMING APPLICATION DEPENDENT DYNAMIC DATA PACKET IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS - A system and method for forming application dependent dynamic data packet format in a wireless sensor network is provided. The system comprises one or more sensor nodes, wherein each sensor node comprises one or more sensors for sensing physical events. Each sensor is defined as an active or an inactive sensor based upon the application requirement. The system also comprises one or more processing units for converting the physical events sensed by the active sensors to corresponding sensed data in digital format and forming dynamic length data packets comprising the sensed data and a sensor identifier field for conveying the identities of the active sensors. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182233 | METHOD FOR PRUNING PERIMETER WALKS IN DATA-CENTRIC STORAGE SENSOR NETWORKS - A method for pruning perimeter walks includes: hashing a name or attributes of an event, when the event occurs, to figure out a destination location of the event; performing greedy forwarding of geographic routing so as to send a packet of the event towards the destination location; checking a distance D between the destination location and a current node where a packet transmission using greedy forwarding mode is impossible, when the packet reaches the current node; checking distances between the destination location and respective neighboring nodes of the current node to obtain a neighboring node having a minimum distance M, when the distance D between the current node and the destination location is same or less than half of radio transmission range; comparing the minimum distance M to the distance D; and determining which node is a rendezvous node, according to the comparison result. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182234 | SUPPORT FOR OPTIONAL SYSTEM PARAMETER VALUES - Aspects describe conveying optional network signaled values that can be utilized for communication in a communications environment. A method that includes generating a first network signaled value and a second network signaled value and transmitting first network signaled value and second network signaled value to at least one mobile device is provided. A communications apparatus, comprising a memory that retains instructions related to obtaining a first network signaled value and a second network signaled value from an access point and applying first network signaled value or second network signaled value for communication in a network as a function of a priority is also provided. Also provided are optional network signaled values that can be utilized separately from a mandatory network signaled value. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182235 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER USER-EQUIPMENT TRANSFER (IUT), ACCESS TRANSFER AND FALLBACK INITIATED BY A SERVICE CENTRALIZATION AND CONTINUITY APPLICATION SERVER (SCC AS) - Methods and apparatuses for Inter-User Equipment Transfer (IUT), access transfer (AT) and fallback of an IP Multimedia (IM) Subsystem (IMS) session initiated by a service centralization and continuity application server (SCC AS). The SCC AS receiving information, wherein the information includes availability information, capability information or preference information and processing the information to determine IUT or AT capabilities of one or more IMS-capable wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) and initiating AT or IUT. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182236 | WIRELESS BASE STATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless base station apparatus communicates with first terminal devices belonging to the present cell by means of IDMA. The apparatus receives signals sent from the first terminal devices and at least a signal sent from a second terminal device belonging to another cell; separately extracts each received signal from the first terminal devices and the second terminal device from the signals received by the receiver and computes a channel value for each received signal, by using interference replica signals; sends information for requesting a second wireless base station apparatus which communicates with the second terminal device to send a log-likelihood ratio obtained based on a signal received from the second terminal device; performs decoding using the channel value for each first terminal device, and generates a log-likelihood ratio as a decoding result and the corresponding interference replica signal; and performs decoding using the log-likelihood ratio received from said second wireless base station apparatus and the channel value for the second terminal device, and generates a log-likelihood ratio as a decoding result and the corresponding relevant interference replica signal. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182237 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DIGITAL BROADCAST SIGNAL - The disclosed method of processing a digital broadcast signal comprises generating one RS frame or two RS frames according to the RS frame mode, forming the data group including the mobile service data and signaling data, forming and outputting a plurality of data packets including the mobile service data in the data group, wherein the 118 data packets and K data packets are outputted for the data group, the K being scalable between 0 and 38, interleaving the mobile service data included in the plurality of data packets, wherein the data group includes a scalable data region including data included in the K data packets, wherein the scalable data region carries data included in the first RS frame when the RS frame mode is the single frame mode, or carries data included in the third RS frame when the RS frame mode is the dual frame mode. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182238 | LOCATION ESTIMATION BY OBSERVING WIRELESS SIGNALS - A method and apparatus for estimating the position of an electronic device. The method comprises: receiving an observation comprising the identity of at least one wireless transmitter detected by the device at the position to be estimated; comparing the observation with the contents of a set of records; detecting respective first and second matches between the observation and records, and retrieving the corresponding positions. The method comprises estimating the position of the electronic device based on at least one of the first position estimate and the second position estimate, depending upon quality characteristics of the first match and the second match and indications of the sources of the respective records. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182239 | MOBILE STATION AND CAMPING-ON METHOD - A mobile station UE includes a manager configured to manage a macro cell and a home cell in association with each other, the mobile station being authorized to access the home cell, and a camping-on processor configured to determine, when receiving a broadcast information from the macro cell, whether to start performing camp-on in the home cell or not according to a comparison result between a radio quality of the home cell which is managed in association with the macro cell and a radio quality in a camping-on cell. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182240 | MOBILE STATION AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station (UE) according to the present invention includes: a storage unit ( | 07-28-2011 |
20110182241 | LONG TRAINING SEQUENCE METHOD AND DEVICE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and device for transmitting a frame of a wireless communication begins by generating a preamble of the frame that includes a short training sequence and at least one long training sequence. The at least one long training sequence includes non-zero energy on each of a plurality of subcarriers except a DC subcarrier. The at least one long training sequence corresponds to the number of antennas and applicable wireless communication standards. A matrix is defined to represent the at least one long training sequence. The preamble is compatible with legacy and current standards. A channel is defined with a set of sub carriers to transmit the frame. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182242 | Network-Initiated Method and System for Establishing Data Communication Using IP with a Wireless Terminal - A method and apparatus are provided for establishing data communication between a wireless network and a wireless terminal by means of a packet data protocol connection, using internet protocol. When a determination is made that the wireless terminal is active but does not have an internet protocol address, a page is initiated from the wireless network to the wireless terminal over a control channel requesting that the wireless terminal obtain a temporary internet protocol address. A temporary internet protocol address is then assigned to the terminal in response to a request from the terminal initiated in response to the page so that data communication can be established with the terminal based on the temporary address. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182243 | MESSAGING FOR PAGING A MOBILE STATION IN AN UNLICENSED MOBILE ACCESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Techniques for performing messaging between mobile stations (MSs) and UMA network controllers (UNCs) in an unlicensed mobile access network (UMAN). URR (UMA radio resource) messages are exchanged between an MS and one or more UNCs to perform various operations associated with UMAN. The MS may access the UMAN via a wireless access point (AP) that is communicatively coupled to the UNC via an IP network. The URR messages are sent between MSs and UNCs using an Up interface comprising a set of layered protocols over an underlying IP transport. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182244 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING CONTEXT MANAGEMENT BY HOME NODE-B - A method for managing user context by a Home evolved NodeB (HeNB) is provided. The method includes requesting, by a Mobility Management Entity (MME), the HeNB to reserve a first type of User Equipment (UE) context information, obtaining, by the HeNB, the MME of the UE according to the first type of UE context information after receiving data, and notifying, by the HeNB, the MME of an arrival of the data. With the method according to the present invention, it is guaranteed by an HeNB system that a terminal can receive downlink signaling after activation of a local routing optimization service by the terminal. | 07-28-2011 |
20110188446 | ENABLING IMS SERVICES FOR NON-IMS UEs VIA A HOME BASE STATION SUBSYSTEM - Apparatuses and methods for enabling IMS services for non-IMS UEs via a home base station subsystem are described. In various embodiments, a home base station subsystem includes a message generator configured to generate an Internet Protocol multimedia subscription request message comprising a unique user identifier and an information request message, the information request message requesting an Internet Protocol multimedia subscription for the user identified by the unique user identifier. The home base station subsystem also includes a transmitter configured to transmit the generated Internet Protocol multimedia subscription request message to a user database. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188447 | LOW COMPLEXITY UNIFIED CONTROL CHANNEL PROCESSING - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate unified, low-complexity processing (e.g., user separation and noise estimation) of a control channel. One or more UEs can respectively transmit one or more control signals, which are multiplexed on a control channel and a base station can receive a control channel signal that includes the one or more control signals. The base station, in a single pass, can separate the control signals by matching the control channel signal with a base sequence and translating the matched signal to a time-domain representation. In the time-domain representation, each control signal resides at a different tap. Further, the base station can identify taps of the time-domain representation corresponding to an unused cyclic shift or orthogonal cover sequence. Such taps can be employed to generate a noise and/or interference estimate. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188448 | IDENTIFYING A DOMAIN FOR DELIVERY OF MESSAGE SERVICE INFORMATION - An indication is used to control how message service information is routed over different domains. For example, an access terminal may be configured with an indication that indicates that a message service is preferred to be invoked over an IP domain or that the message service is not be invoked over the IP domain. The access terminal then delivers message service information based on the value of the indication. In some cases, a network entity generates the indication and sends the indication to the access terminal. In some cases, a domain for delivery of message service information is selected based on a domain that was selected for particular type of traffic. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188449 | INTER-DEVICE SESSION DUPLICATION - A method and apparatus for performing session duplication are provided. A communication session between a first wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and a remote device may be duplicated to add a second WTRU to the communication session without disruption of the communication session on the first WTRU or the remote device. The communication session may be duplicated by a network unit in response to a policy or a communication session duplication request. The first WTRU or the second WTRU may initiate session duplication by transmitting a communication session duplication request. Session duplication may include duplication of one or more media flows associated with the communication session. Session duplication may include transferring or sharing control of the communication session. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188450 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving system information in a wireless communication system are disclosed. A method for receiving system information by a mobile station (MS) of a wireless communication system includes receiving a secondary superframe header (S-SFH) change cycle from a base station (BS), and receiving a primary superframe header information element (P-SFH IE) including a first field indicating a change count of a plurality of secondary superframe header subpacket information elements (S-SFH SP IEs) from the base station (BS). Once each of the plurality of S-SFH SP IEs is changed, each of the plurality of S-SFH SP IEs remains unchanged during one or more S-SFH change cycles. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188451 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ENABLE INTER-SYSTEM TRANSFER OF A PACKET SWITCHED SESSION - Apparatus and methods for a user equipment (UE) to initiate an inter-system transfer of a communication session include listening for communications from a first and a second technology type network. Further, the aspects include establishing a circuit switched session with the first technology type network and establishing a packet switched session with a serving node of a first one of the first or the second technology type network. Also, the aspects include determining to transfer the packet switched session to a target node of a second one of the first or the second technology type network. Additionally, the aspects include transmitting a message, by the UE, to the target node, thereby causing the technology type network of the target node to fetch information about the packet switched session from the other network of the serving node in order to effect the transfer and continuation of the packet switched session. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188452 | MESH INFRASTRUCTURE UTILIZING ALTERNATIVE COMMUNICATION PATHS - A wireless mesh network, method, and processor-readable storage medium for maintaining both a primary communication path and an alternative communication path for a communication node are disclosed herein. A control node determines an alternative communication path for each node in communication with the control node and stores, for each node, primary communication path information and alternative communication path information. By maintaining both primary and alternative communication path information, the control node can switch from the primary path to the alternative path when a failure in the primary path is detected. Because the control node determines and stores information relating to the alternative path before the failure occurs, switching from the primary path to the alternative path involves little, if any, delay. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188453 | BASE STATION, CSG MANAGEMENT SERVER, AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MOBILE TERMINAL - Disclosed are a small base station and a method for managing a mobile terminal, and a closed subscriber group (CSG) management server. The small base station may communicate with a server for managing a CSG in which the mobile terminal is registered, and may temporarily delete the mobile terminal from the CSG if the mobile terminal is in a packet data protocol (PDP) preservation state or re-register the temporarily deleted mobile terminal in the CSG. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188454 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus which can operate as a cluster header and a node is disclosed. The cluster header transmits a cluster header preamble signal in a first time interval of the frame, and transmits a cluster control signal in a second time interval of the frame. The cluster header receives a node ranging signal in a third time interval of the frame, receives a node preamble in a fourth time interval of the frame, and receives a node control signal in a fifth time interval of the frame. The cluster header can determine the operation mode of a reported node. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188455 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION AND MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting, to a mobile switching center MME/SGSN, a NAS connection establishment request for the specific communication, while an AS connection is established between the mobile station UE and a radio access network apparatus eNB/RNC; determining, at the mobile switching center MME/SGSN, to restrict establishment of the NAS connection for the specific communication, when the NAS connection establishment request signal is received and when a predetermined condition is satisfied; and restricting, at the mobile station UE, transmission of a first connection establishment request signal and transmission of the NAS connection establishment request signal, after reception of a rejection signal including a restriction time period for restricting establishment of the NAS connection for the specific communication until expiry of the restriction time period. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188456 | METHOD TO IDENTIFY VOICE OVER PACKET DEVICE CAPABILITY AND USE IT TO MAKE APPROPRIATE CALLS WITH OTHER CLIENT DEVICES - A system provides push-to-talk (PTT) or similar communication service via a radio access network providing wireless mobile packet data communications for mobile stations. A server distributes packets of digitized audio received from a broadcasting mobile station to one or more client devices of other parties. The called client device(s), however, may not all have the same communications capabilities as the broadcasting mobile station. Signaling procedures are adapted to inform the broadcasting station of the capabilities of the other client device(s). This enables the broadcasting mobile station to configure its transmissions of digitized audio through the network for compatibility with the capabilities of the other client device(s). Proper configuration avoids loss of data at the destination, particularly at the start of a PTT transmission, due to transmission in a form or configuration that may be incompatible with one or more of the receiving stations. | 08-04-2011 |
20110194487 | ENHANCED RESEQUENCING OF DATA RECEIVED OVER A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for efficiently decoding data received in the form of data packets is provided. The design includes at least one decoding unit configured to receive and decode multiple packet groups, each packet group comprising a plurality of data packets received over at least one wireless transmission channel; a buffer arrangement configured to collect complete and incomplete packet groups received over each wireless transmission channel, and a processor configured to direct data packets from the at least one decoding unit to specific locations in the buffer arrangement. The processor further inserts later received data packets into associated packet groups maintained in the buffer arrangement to minimize sequence gaps in the data packets. The design subsequently provides multiple packet groups and any later received data packets from the buffer arrangement to a resequencer. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194488 | Telephone System - The present invention discloses a telephone system, for establishing a connection of Internet Protocol (IP) phone with a destination via Internet, comprises a television (TV) set and a smart phone device. The smart phone device transmits a voice signal generated by a microphone and an image signal generated by a camera via a wireless transceiver module, to another wireless transceiver module of the TV set. The TV set transfers the voice signal and the image signal to the destination and outputs a communication content of the destination via a monitor or a speaker. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194489 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROGRAM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a wireless communication device including a receiving unit that receives, from one or more than one first wireless communication devices, information indicating an order of each of the one or more than one first wireless communication devices in a queue for data communication with a second wireless communication device, an order management unit that manages an order of its own device in the queue based on the information received by the receiving unit from the one or more than one first wireless communication devices, and a transmitting unit that transmits information indicating the order of its own device in the queue managed by the order management unit. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194490 | METHOD FOR TCP ACK CONTAINMENT IN UNIDIRECTIONAL FLOWS WITH CROSS LAYER OPTIMIZATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method that addresses a cross layer optimization technique for TCP in which the need to send ACK frames across wireless links is contained by using the information from the MAC layer acknowledgements is disclosed. More specifically the method significantly reduces bandwidth consumption and improves the performance of TCP on wireless networks. Furthermore, since the number of transmitted and received packets is reduced at the mobile device, the battery life of the device can be improved significantly. The proposed method can also be applied to downlink and uplink ACK frames with a slight variation between the two. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194491 | METHOD OF PROCESSING A 2G CALL, DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A method of establishing, maintaining or releasing a call in a 3G mobile communications network, wherein at least one 2G terminal participates in said call. The method comprises the steps of: at a network entity, checking whether an incoming signal from a mobile terminal is a 2G signal or not and, if said signal is a 2G signal: extracting the user information from said signal and checking whether its content is user payload or signalling information, and: if it is signalling information, checking whether it is a channel request or a disconnection request. The method further comprises, if it is user payload instead of signalling information, encapsulating said user payload in a frame of a call established on a radio access bearer and sending said frame to a higher level network entity. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194492 | Service Discovery Mechanism in Broadcast Telecommunication Network - Aspects of the invention are directed to service discovery in a digital broadcast network. A service discovery descriptor, which may be electronic service guide-provider and cell specific, provides mapping between a service identifier, a logical channel identifier, and a physical channel, which may be characterized by a frame identifier and a slot identifier, that is, each physical channel may have one or more slots within one or more frames. A neighboring service discovery descriptor provides mapping for the service available within neighboring cells. Aspects of the invention are directed to an encapsulation protocol that encapsulates variable length data, including, but not limited to, the service discovery descriptor and the neighboring service discovery descriptor, into fixed length data stream packets. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194493 | Method for Transferring a Base Station of a Wireless Communication Network from a Standby Mode to a Fully Activated Mode - It is described a method for transferring a base station of a wireless communication network from a standby mode to a fully activated mode. The method includes sending an activation signal from a user equipment (UE) to the base station. The method further includes receiving the activation signal by the base station and transferring the base station (BS | 08-11-2011 |
20110194494 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - When communication is performed on communication equipment that is connected to a communication control system to which a mobile communication terminal is connected, and is included in a private network, the communication is performed with reduced traffic. A communication control system | 08-11-2011 |
20110194495 | Method for Managing Radio Resources for Uplink and Downlink in Wireless Communication System - A method for managing radio resources for an uplink and a downlink in a wireless communication system is provided. The method for managing radio resources may be applied to a system based on a heterogeneous cell deployment scenario. The heterogeneous cell deployment scenario implies that a plurality of cells coexist in the wireless communication system, and transmit power, processing capacity, and/or cell coverage are different from one cell to another. In the method for managing radio resources, a mobile station included in the wireless communication system establishes an uplink and a downlink with the same base station. In addition, an asymmetric management scheme is used in which a radio resource management scheme used for the uplink is different from a radio resource management scheme used for the downlink. Accordingly, each mobile station can use a different optimal radio resource management scheme for the uplink and the downlink, each mobile station and link can be effectively controlled, and usage efficiency of radio resources can be improved. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194496 | SYSTEM FOR REGISTRATION OF COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a mobile voice over internet protocol communication device, comprising a controller operable to register with a voice over internet protocol call processing system by way of a wireless fidelity access point operating in a cluster of wireless fidelity access points, and re-register with the voice over Internet Protocol call processing system by way of the wireless fidelity access point in response to receiving a re-registration request upon expiration of a timer having a period determined from one or more usage characteristics of the cluster by the mobile voice over Internet Protocol communication device. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194497 | NETWORK REQUESTED PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT ACTIVATION - A packet switched (PS) core network (CN) supporting several quality of services levels, comprising at least a serving node (SGSN), a gateway node (GGSN), a home location register (HLR), a short message service gateway and interworking unit (SMS-GMSC, SMS-IWMSC), charging gateway functionality (CGF), and a public data network (PDN) comprising an application server (AS). The core network is adapted for carrying out a packet data protocol (PDP) context activation in which a PDP address is assigned to a mobile station and in which a given quality of service is assigned through the network in a communication session between the mobile station and the application processor in question, whereby the application server (AS) initiates a context activation in which the QoS is seeked altered for the mobile station. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194498 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING PACKET SWITCHED SERVICES - A method, a device, and a system for transmitting Packet Switched (PS) services are provided. The method includes: receiving an Activate Packet Data Protocol (PDP) Context Request message of PS services sent by a User Equipment (UE), in which the Activate PDP Context Request message carries an Access Point Name (APN) for identifying a first service network or a second service network (s | 08-11-2011 |
20110194499 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - When a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus perform communication using a wider system band consists of carrier components, the base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus flexibly use all the carrier components to perform efficient HARQ processing. A mobile communication system includes a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus, and the base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus transmit and receive downlink transport block on each of carrier components and perform HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) processing in each of carrier components using a unified HARQ process number in a band consists of multiple carrier components. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194500 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING A HARQ IN A MULTIPLE CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of performing hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) in a multiple carrier system is provided. A user equipment receives a plurality of downlink data through a plurality of downlink carriers and transmits one acknowledgement (ACK)/not-acknowledgement (NACK) signal for the plurality of downlink data through an uplink carrier. The ACK/NACK signal is an ACK signal when all of the plurality of downlink data are successfully received. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194501 | COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND DEVICE IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A communication method and apparatus using multiple carriers are provided. A primary carrier is configured, and multi-carrier control information for monitoring a control channel of a secondary carrier is transmitted through the primary carrier. A user equipment monitors a control channel of the secondary carrier on the basis of the multi-carrier control information. | 08-11-2011 |
20110199961 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING A CONTENTION BASED UPLINK CHANNEL - A method, a mobile system, and a user communication device are disclosed. A receiving unit | 08-18-2011 |
20110199962 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS TECHNOLOGY SELECTION - A method and system for selecting at a terminal at least one of a plurality of available access networks for use with a wireless application invoked at the terminal according preferences associated with the wireless application, the network service provider, the subscriber, the subscriber subscription and application content provider. The selection may be constrained by an Application Policy received from a network service provider | 08-18-2011 |
20110199963 | Systems and Methods for Managing PDP Contexts in a Wireless Data Communications Network - Systems and method are for managing packet data protocol (PDP) contexts in a wireless data communications network. A plurality of real-time applications are prioritized within a single, shared PDP context or allocated a second PDP context based upon priority levels logically assigned to the plurality of applications such that high priority applications are delivered before lower priority applications. Lower priority applications are suspended and interrupted by higher priority applications and are set to resume after the higher priority applications are completed. Priority levels are established by a priority management engine (PME) that may reside in one or more network elements, such as a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Support Node or a network probe system. The priority management engine establishes the priority levels based upon one or more factors including, for example, PDP utilization characteristics at a given time and/or given network location, and/or user preferences. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199964 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A LOCATION OF AN ACCESS POINT BASED ON ASSOCIATION OF THE ACCESS POINT WITH A COMMUNICATION DEVICE HAVING A KNOWN LOCATION - A communication device associated with a wireless access point, namely, a WiFi access point or a Bluetooth access point for example, communicates its location information to the wireless access point. The wireless access point determines its own location utilizing the communicated location information. The communicated location information comprises a device location address and/or a GNSS position of the associated communication device. The device address comprises a network accessible address, a device identifier, a telephone number, an IP address, a url and/or ftp location, an e-mail address, and/or an account number that identifies a corresponding location of the communication device. The wireless access point retrieves corresponding device location addresses and/or GNSS positions from a plurality of associated communication devices. The retrieved device location addresses are converted to determine corresponding locations for self-locating the wireless access point. The determined location of the wireless access point is shared with each associated communication device. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199965 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RADIO APPARATUS - After checking a status of frequency band usage of a primary system by preliminary sensing, a master node transmits to slave nodes a sensing request containing a target frequency band for cooperative sensing. The slave nodes perform spectrum sensing according to specified parameters and send, as responses, results thereof to the master node. The master node collectively receives these results, comprehensively determines the sensing results of the slave nodes, and makes a final determination on whether or not the target frequency band is available. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199966 | CLUSTERING MANAGEMENT IN mmWAVE WIRELESS SYSTEMS - According to various embodiments, a method is disclosed that includes detecting if a first cluster capable PCP/AP is within range of a non-PCP/non-AP STA; and transmitting a message to a second cluster capable PCP/AP associated with the non-PCP/non-AP STA requesting that the second cluster capable PCP/AP start or continue the use of clustering in a basic service set (BSS) of the second cluster capable PCP/AP. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199967 | TECHNIQUES TO ASSIGN MULTIPLE IDENTIFIERS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques are described that can be used to assign identifiers to mobile stations in a Network Access Provider (NAP) domain and a paging identifier. In some cases, the NAP identifier and paging identifier can be unique in the NAP domain and the paging group domain. The paging identifier can be derived from a NAP identifier. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199968 | Beamforming feedback frame formats within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Beamforming feedback frame formats within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. A transmitting wireless communication device (TX) transmits a sounding frame to one or more receiving wireless communication devices (RXs) using one or more antennae and one or more clusters. Any antenna/cluster combination may be employed in communications between TXs and RXs. The one or more RXs receive/process the sounding frame to determine a type of beamforming feedback frame to be provided to the TX. Any one of a variety of beamforming feedback frame types and a types of information may be contained within a respective beamforming feedback frame including various characteristics of the respective communication channel between the TX and each of the various RXs. A common beamforming feedback frame format may be supported and employed by all such wireless communication devices (e.g., TX and RXs) when performing MU-MIMO operation such as in accordance with IEEE 802.11ac/VHT. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199969 | GTPv2 NODE - A GTPv2 node for an E-UTRAN or a GERAN/UTRAN access system, arranged to comprise in a session related signaling message to a peer GTPv2 node information in an information element which indicates that the GTPv2 node supports a certain feature which is identified in the information element. The information element also indicates to the peer GTPv2 node that the peer GTPv2 node should indicate information about its own support or non-support for the feature in the information element in a session related signaling message which is sent as a result of the session related signaling message from the GTPv2 node, as well as including information about the GTPv2 node's support for the feature. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199970 | Method of Handling Proximity Indication and Related Communication Device - A method of handling a proximity indication for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of entering a proximity of a CSG (closed subscriber group) cell, reporting an entering proximity indication to a network and starting a specified timer; and sending a leaving proximity indication whenever the mobile device leaves the proximity of the CSG cell even the specified timer is running. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199971 | Packet transmission/reception method and apparatus in wireless communication system - A method for simultaneously transmitting packets having different lengths to two or more users in a wireless communication system includes: generating the packets which are to be transmitted to the respective users; and simultaneously transmitting the generated packets to the respective users. Each of the packets contains information on the position of a symbol to which a tail field of the packet belongs, and the information on the position of the symbol to which the tail field belongs includes at least one of the maximum symbol number of the packet, the symbol number of transmission data of the packet, positional information of a last aggregated MAC protocol data unit (A-MPDU) subframe, and positional information of a null delimiter. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199972 | Wireless Chip-to-Chip Switching - Embodiments of the invention provide a system and method for chip to chip communications in electronic circuits. A router or switch receives data packets at input port ASICs. A routing table on the input port ASIC or on a routing ASIC is used to identify a destination port ASIC based upon header information in the data packet. The data packet is transmitted from the input port ASIC to the destination port ASIC using millimeter wave signals that are transmitted across a waveguide or a wireless interface. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199973 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING MULTICAST BROADCAST SINGLE FREQUENCY NETWORK RESOURCES - In the field of mobile communication, a method, device, and system for configuring multicast broadcast single frequency network (MBSFN) resources are provided, so as to solve the problem that configuration information of each radio network controller (RNC) in an MBSFN cannot be dynamically synchronized. With the coordination of a master RNC, a multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS) configuration information message is transferred through IUR interface connection, and MBMS configuration information of the master RNC and each slave RNC is synchronized. In this way, the problem that configuration information of each RNC in an MBSFN cannot be dynamically synchronized is solved, thereby satisfying the demands of soft combing and air interface combining. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199974 | METHOD AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL FOR IMPLEMENTING A VOICE SERVICE THROUGH A WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method and a communication terminal for implementing a voice service through a wireless network. The method includes: generating a request for a voice service according to a voice service access code and generating a trigger signal according to the request; setting up a connection with the wireless network according to the trigger signal; performing network registration for the voice service; and processing a call of the voice service through the network connection after the network registration is successful. The technical solution of the present invention overcomes the conflict between Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) and dial-on-demand when VoIP traffic is carried over a Packet Switched (PS) network, so that no radio bandwidth is wasted and that the user can use VoIP at any time with no need to modify the network. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199975 | WIRELESS BASE STATION DEVICE USING COLLABORATIVE HARQ COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a transmission device on a serving eNB side, a first packet transmission unit performs an operation of transmitting a retransmission data packet. On the other hand, in a transmission device on a collaborative eNB side, a second packet transmission unit performs an operation of transmitting a new data packet corresponding to information transferred from the serving eNB by the packet transfer unit. The control information about a communication to a UE by the serving eNB and the collaborative eNB is communicated by using only a PUCCH from the UE to the serving eNB and a PDCCH from the serving eNB to the UE. The serving eNB and the collaborative eNB perform communications of a new data packet and communication control information etc. through an X2 interface. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199976 | Wireless Aircraft Sensor Network - A method and apparatus in a sensor network in an aircraft for collecting data about the aircraft. The sensor network in the aircraft collects the data about the aircraft. The sensor network comprises a set of wireless sensors attached to a first set of locations for the aircraft, a set of wireless routers attached to a second set of locations for the aircraft, and a set of gateways connected to an aircraft data processing system. The set of wireless routers is capable of receiving the data in wireless signals transmitted by the set of wireless sensors. The set of gateways is capable of receiving data in the wireless signals from the set of wireless routers to form received data and is capable of transmitting the received data into the aircraft data processing system. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199977 | PACKET-BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method for facilitating communication of packets between one or more applications residing on a first computing device and at least one second computing device. The system comprises a connection manager adapted to receive packets from the at least one second computing device, and a packet cache for storing packets received by the connection manager. The connection manager, upon receiving a packet from a second computing device, transmits the packet to the packet cache for storage and notifies each of the applications of receipt of the packet. Subsequently, the packet is retrievable from the packet cache by a notified application, and verification that the packet is intended for communication to the notified application is made. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199978 | RECOVERY TECHNIQUES IN MOBILE NETWORKS - A technique for protecting location information of a subscriber in a mobile network is disclosed. A User Mobility Server (UMS) receives a first query from a first call state control function (CSCF). The UMS transmits a call setup and a subscriber identity to a servicing-call state control function (S-CSCF). The S-CSCF may have no record of the subscriber identity due to a restart are some other event. The UMS receives a second query from the S-CSCF based in part of the subscriber identity. The UMS transmits a home address of a mobile station to the S-CSCF. The UMS may also transmit a profile download to the S-CSCF. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199979 | Method and System for Processing Bearer under ISR Mechanism - A method and a system for processing a bearer under an idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) mechanism are provided. The method for processing a bearer under an ISR mechanism includes the following steps. A mobility management network element acquires an access mode of a current network. The mobility management network element notifies a serving gateway (SGW) of the access mode of the current network, so that the SGW processes bearer according to the access mode of the current network. It can be ensured that the access mode of the current network is consistent with the access mode for a policy and charging control (PCC) strategy adopted during a bearing procedure under the ISR mechanism. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199980 | CHANNEL SWITCHING IN MESH TYPE NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus which enable flexible channel switching by exchanging channel information among network nodes to cumulate their view of the quality and availability of the available communication channels. The network nodes can now switch to the same channel independently of one another even when initiating a switch simultaneously. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199981 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, NETWORK SIDE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - Disclosed is a technique for performing flexible service-level access control in real-time while suppressing occurrence of signaling. According to the technique, a network entity (AAA server | 08-18-2011 |
20110199982 | PROCESSING INFORMATION BLOCKS FOR WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - In general, according to an embodiment, a wireless transmitter includes a plurality of coding and modulation modules to apply corresponding coding and modulation algorithms to input information blocks. A discrete Fourier transform (DFT) precoder applies DFT processing to outputs of the coding and modulation modules, and an inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) module receives a DFT output of the DFT precoder, which is mapped to different subcarriers according to the resource allocation indicated by the base station, and applies IFFT processing to the DFT output. An output processing stage produces output signals based on the output of the IFFT module to transmit wirelessly to a wireless receiver. In a different implementation, the outputs of the coding and modulation modules can be provided to an IFFT module to produce IFFT-processed output information. | 08-18-2011 |
20110205959 | Packet Forwarding in Telecommunication Network - A solution for rearranging data transfer in a telecommunication network is provided. Accordingly, a data packet related to a first logical connection and originating from a first user terminal is received in a network node of a first logical connection associated with a first user terminal and a second logical connection associated with a second user terminal in a telecommunication network, wherein the data packet is addressed to the second user terminal. Then, the network node checks for an intermediate network node common to both the first logical connection and the second logical connections, and arranges a shortcut between the first and the second logical connection through the intermediate network node, if the common intermediate network node has been detected. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205960 | CLIENT ROUTING IN A PEER-TO-PEER OVERLAY NETWORK - A method of client routing in a peer-to-peer (“P2P”) overlay network is provided. In one embodiment, the method of client routing in a P2P overlay network comprises requesting communication with a client by a first peer using the P2P overlay network, wherein said first peer is directed to a second peer to which said client is registered in the P2P overlay network; determining that said client is not attached to said second peer in the P2P overlay network and said client has access to another network; providing said second peer with said client's location in the P2P overlay network using said other network, wherein said client's location is associated with a third peer to which said client is attached and not registered in the P2P overlay network; forwarding said client's location from said second peer to said first peer using the P2P overlay network, and using said client's location to communicate with said client by said first peer using the P2P overlay network. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205961 | CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS (CSMA) PROTOCOL WITH MULTI-PACKET RECEPTION (MPR) IN A WIRELESS AD HOC NETWORK - This invention relates to systems and methods for communication in a wireless ad hoc network that employs multi-packet reception. The wireless network includes a transmitting node configured to transmit a control packet to a receiving node while other nodes within a transmission range of the transmitting node are involved in ongoing communication. The receiving node is configured to receive the control packet while simultaneously receiving a second packet from a second transmitting node, and to process the control packet without aborting the receiving of the second packet. Methods for transmitting and receiving multiple packets simultaneously are also presented. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205962 | ENHANCEMENTS FOR INCREASED SPATIAL REUSE IN AD-HOC NETWORKS - A method of facilitating communication in a wireless ad-hoc network comprises: generating, at a node in the wireless ad-hoc network, target availability information with regard to one or more transmission slots, the target availability information indicating whether the node is permitted to receive a transmission during each transmission slot; generating, at the node, owner availability information with regard to one or more transmission slots, the owner availability information indicating whether the node is permitted to transmit during each transmission slot; and broadcasting, from the node, the target availability information and the owner availability information to separately indicate availability as either an owner or a target for one or more transmission slots. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205963 | System and Method for Reduced Feedback in Multiuser Multiple Input, Multiple Output Wireless Communications - A system and method for reduced feedback in MU-MIMO communications is provided. A method for transmitter operations includes transmitting a pilot signal, receiving channel information feedback from a set of K communications devices served by a transmitter, where K is a non-negative integer value and K≧2, selecting M communications devices out of the set of K communications devices, where M is a non-negative integer value and M≦K, computing a precoder for each of the M selected communications devices based on the channel information feedback, and simultaneously transmitting information to the M selected communications devices. The channel information feedback includes partial information for a communications channel between the transmitter and a communications device, the selecting being based on the channel information feedback, and the information transmitted to each communications device in the M selected communications devices being precoded using a computed precoder associated with the communications device. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205964 | TIMED FINGERPRINT LOCATING FOR IDLE-STATE USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and techniques for determining the location of user equipment (UE) in a wireless network are disclosed. These techniques leverage geometric calculations for an overlaid bin grid framework mapping the wireless network area to store differential values for each frame of the bin grid framework for each pair of relevant NodeBs. A timing offset can be determined, such that when a time value from a target UE is accessed, the location can be quickly determined with minimal real time computation. In an aspect, the time value from an idle-state target UE can be accessed. The target UE time value can be searched among pre-computed differential value data sets indexed by relevant NodeB site pairs to return sets of frames that can facilitate converging on a location for the target UE. Intersecting frames can represent the geographic location of the UE in the wireless network. Further, the data can be leveraged to correct timing in the network. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205965 | VIRTUAL PERIPHERAL HUB DEVICE AND SYSTEM - Methods and devices provide a virtual peripheral hub and services enabling remote access to peripherals commonly connected to personal computers in a manner that simplifies device networking. A virtual peripheral hub device may include a processor and wireless communication transceivers configured to connect to cellular and/or WiFi networks to access a remote server, and wired and/or wireless local networks for connecting to peripheral devices. The virtual peripheral hub device may plug into a power source (e.g., a wall socket or cigarette lighter), connect to a peripheral device, and be configured to enable any computer attached to a local area network or the Internet to use or access the peripheral device. An associated server-based service enables discovery of the virtual peripheral hub device and connected peripherals. The associated server-based server may provide the drivers for various peripherals, store and forward data, and provide remote access to the various peripherals. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205966 | RADIO TRANSMISSION DEVICE AND RADIO TRANSMISSION METHOD - Provided are a radio transmission device and a radio transmission method which can suppress lowering of the throughput caused by switching between the single carrier communication method and the multi-carrier communication method while suppressing increase of the signaling amount. A PHR threshold value setting unit ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110205967 | METHOD FOR SYNCHRONOUSLY MAINTAINING PDP CONTEXT STATUS BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND MOBILE STATION AND ASSOCIATED MOBILE STATION - A method for synchronously maintaining packet data protocol (PDP) context status between a wireless communication network and a mobile station and an associated mobile station are disclosed to prevent from the asynchronous PDP context status caused by the prior arts. When both the mobile station and the network activate a PDP context for a packet-switched service, if the mobile station is to establish a circuit-switched connection with the network, the mobile station will request the network to suspend the packet-switched service. After the circuit-switched connection is established, the mobile station locally deactivates the PDP context. After the circuit-switched connection is disconnected, if the network informs the mobile station that the packet-switched service is resumed, the mobile station will inform the network that the PDP context is deactivated. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205968 | Method and apparatus for performing sounding in wireless communication system - A sounding method of a transmitting terminal that transmits data to two or more receiving terminals in a wireless communication system includes transmitting a frame for requesting transmission of first sounding information to the two or more receiving terminals, receiving a frame including the first sounding information from each of the two or more receiving terminals, transmitting a frame including information for requesting transmission of channel state information and second sounding information to the two or more receiving terminals, and receiving a frame including the channel state information, which is measured by each of the two or more receiving terminals by using the second sounding information, from each of the two or more receiving terminals, wherein the channel state information measured by using the first sounding information and the channel state information received from each of the two or more receiving terminals are used to simultaneously transmit the data to the two or more receiving terminals. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205969 | COMMUNICATION USING DIRECTIONAL ANTENNAS - Method and apparatus having a beamforming antenna generates a plurality of directional antenna beams. A discovery beacon is generated for use in associating with a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The discovery beacon is transmitted to a plurality of sectors using coarsely focused directional antenna beams. A WTRU may receive one of the coarsely focused directional antenna beams, and may then transmit a response message. Finely focused directional antenna beams are establishing for packet data transmission. A periodic beacon may then be transmitted to the WTRU using one of the coarsely focused directional antenna beams. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205970 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION AND MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting, to a mobile switching center MME/SGSN, a NAS connection establishment request for the specific communication, while an AS connection, is established between the mobile station UE and a radio access network apparatus eNB/RNC; determining, at the mobile switching center MME/SGSN, to restrict establishment of the NAS connection for the specific communication, when the NAS connection establishment request signal is received and when a predetermined condition is satisfied; and restricting, at the mobile station UE, transmission of a first connection establishment request signal and transmission of the NAS connection establishment request signal, after reception of a rejection signal including a restriction time period for restricting establishment of the NAS connection for the specific communication until expiry of the restriction time period. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205971 | WIRELESS DEVICE - A data processing section ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110205972 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A MAC PDU BASED ON MAC HEADER TYPE INFORMATION - An Apparatus and methods for communicating in a wireless access system using a medium access control protocol data unit (MAC PDU) is disclosed. The method comprises steps of receiving, by a mobile station (MS) from a base station (BS), a dynamic service addition request (AAI_DSA-REQ) message requesting to create a service flow, wherein the AAI_DSA-REQ message comprises a first MAC header type parameter indicating a type of a MAC header included in the MAC PDU of the service flow and a flow identifier (FID) identifying a connection associated with the service flow; transmitting, by the MS to the BS, a dynamic service addition response (AAI_DSA-RSP) message in response to the AAI_DSA-REQ message, wherein the AAI_DSA-RSP message comprises a second MAC header type parameter indicating the type of a MAC header included in the MAC PDU of the service flow; and communicating with the BS using the MAC PDU comprising the MAC header indicated by the second MAC header type parameter; wherein the MAC header type parameter indicates one of a generic MAC header (GMH) for general data packet transmission and a short-packet MAC header (SPMH) for small data packet transmission and a non-ARQ connection. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205973 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - Disclosed is a wireless communication apparatus that can improve the efficiency of using data resources, while suppressing the increase in CM of transport signals in a wireless communication system in which single-carrier transmissions and multi-cluster transmissions are coexistent. In this apparatus, a multiplex manner deciding unit ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110211524 | IP BASED MICROPHONE AND INTERCOM - A transceiver including, a codec, microcontroller, and radio. The codec including an analog to digital converter for receiving a first audio program and converting it to a first digital signal; a digital to analog converter for receiving a second digital audio signal and converting it to a second audio program; and, a control function for managing characteristics of the codec. The microcontroller is in electrical communication with the codec: for receiving the first digital audio signal from the codec and packetizing it into a first packet for transmission over a TCP/IP network; for receiving a second packet from network and converting it into the second digital audio signal and sending it to the codec; and for receiving control signals from the network. The radio is in electrical communication with the microcontroller for connection to the network to transmit the first packet to the network and receive the second packet from the network. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211525 | SESSION TRANSFER BETWEEN DIFFERENT ACCESS NETWORK TYPES - A request is originated by a mobile station, wherein the request contains information relating to both packet-switched communication and circuit-switched communication of data in a session. The request is originated by the mobile station in response to detecting that a transfer is to be performed from a source packet-switched access network to a target network in which different parts of the session is to be communicated in the packet-switched domain and circuit-switched domain. The transfer is completed using the information in the first request. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211526 | CALL ROUTING METHOD AND APPARATUS - The invention relates to a telecommunications chip card for carrying personalization data for connection to at least a mobile telecommunications network, said telecommunications chip card further comprising: means for receiving a dialed telephone number from a first wireless terminal coupled to a first network, wherein said first wireless terminal is adapted for initiating a call between said first wireless terminal and a second wireless terminal, wherein said dialed telephone number belongs to said second wireless terminal; means for obtaining a geographic location of said first wireless terminal; —means for fetching an access point address from a look-up table according to said geographic location, wherein said look-up table is stored in said telecommunications chip card, wherein said access point address belongs to an access point coupled to a second network and within said geographic location, wherein said second network is coupled to said first network; means for initiating a connection with said access point; means for sending said dialed telephone number to said access point for establishing connection through a third network between said first wireless terminal and a second wireless terminal having said dialed telephone number; means for connecting said call between said first and said second wireless terminal. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211527 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR USING A SIGNALING MESSAGE ROUTING NODE TO PROVIDE BACKUP SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SERVICE - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for using a signaling message routing node to provide a backup subscriber information management service are disclosed. According to one method, a signaling message routing node obtains information associated with a subscriber. The signaling message routing node receives a first subscriber information management message including a message destination and being associated with the subscriber. The signaling message routing node determines whether the message destination is operable to process the first subscriber information management message. In response to determining that the message destination node is operable to process the first subscriber information management message, the signaling message routing node routes the first subscriber information message to the message destination. In response to determining that the message destination is not operable to process the first subscriber information management message, the signaling message routing node responds to the first subscriber information management message on behalf of the message destination | 09-01-2011 |
20110211528 | WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE - There is disclosed a wireless terminal device in which also when IEEE802.16e is used in an access system of the next generation network, an end-to-end QoS is kept, and comfortable communication can be performed. In a wireless access system including the next generation network as a core network, in a terminal for BWA (the wireless terminal device), an SDP generating section generates a session description protocol (SDP) corresponding to an application, an SDP analysis section analyzes the SDP, a packet classifier section distributes an IP packet to each queue of a QoS class, and a DSA-REQ message generating section sets a QoS parameter of a DSA-REQ message to generate the DSA-REQ message, and reports the message to a wireless base station for the BWA. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211529 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIDE BANDWIDTH MIXED-MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A network device for implementing high-rate greenfield transmission in a mixed mode frame structure. The network device is configured to transmit a mixed mode frame on two adjacent channels. The mixed mode frame comprises at least two backward compatible portions of a first frequency and a greenfield portion of a second frequency. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211530 | System and Method for Securing a Personalized Indicium Assigned to a Mobile Communications Device - In one embodiment, a method operable on a mobile communications device is disclosed, the method comprising generating an authentication key for securing a personalized indicium assigned to the mobile communications device, wherein the personalized indicium comprises a Personal Information Number (PIN) that is mapped to at least one identifier associated with the mobile communications device; transmitting a registration request to a network node operable with a wireless network, the registration request having a registration request payload including the authentication key; receiving a challenge message from the network node, the challenge message generated when the network node detects a change of the IP address associated with the mobile communications device, and responsive to receiving the challenge message, executing a challenge response including an authentication value of a challenge string transmitted in the challenge message, wherein the authentication value is created using the authentication key. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211531 | Method and System for Selective Application of Cellular-PBX Integration Service - A method and system for selectively applying a cellular-PBX integration service. When a radio access network (RAN) receives a call request seeking to set up a call for a cellular wireless communication device (WCD) that is operating in the coverage area of the RAN, a determination is made as to whether the WCD is currently checked-into a cellular-PBX integration service. A service control point (SCP), for instance, may make the determination. If the determination is that the WCD is currently checked-in, then the call is set up to an IP PBX server that services the WCD, and the IP PBX server may then handle the call as it would handle a call placed to any IP PBX extension. Further, differential billing can be applied, charging an enterprise billing-account for the call if the WCD is checked-in, and charging a WCD billing-account for the call if the WCD is not checked-in. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211532 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR RE-CONNECTING TO A ZIGBEE NETWORK - An end device on a Zigbee network exits a power saving mode and transmits a wake notification message to the network. The network retrieves a cached status flag indicating whether the end device is defined on the Zigbee network and transmits the status flag to the end device. If the end device is undefined on the Zigbee network, the end device attempts to re-join the network. During the power saving mode, the network can cache messages intended for the end device and transmit the messages to the end device when the device exits the power saving mode. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211533 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGEMENT OF MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus manages resources in a wireless communication system by transmitting a multi-carrier switch command message to an access terminal instructing the access terminal to switch between a diversity mode where each antenna module of a plurality antenna modules receives a single carrier signal transmitted at a single carrier frequency and a multi-carrier mode where a first antenna module of the plurality antenna modules receives a first multi-carrier signal transmitted at a first carrier frequency and a second antenna module receives a second multi-carrier signals transmitted at a second carrier frequency. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211534 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF PROVIDING EVENT CONTENT SHARING BY MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - An approach is disclosed for providing sharing of content relating to an event. Detection of a plurality of mobile communication devices within a predetermined location is performed. An event is identified corresponding to the predetermined location and a current time. The mobile communication devices are notified to enable exchange of content about the event. The content is received from one or more of the mobile communication devices, wherein the content is accessible by the mobile communication devices. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211535 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NODE DEVICE, ROUTING METHOD AND ROUTING PROGRAM - Each of nodes A through Z calculates delivery predictability for a destination node and exchanges the delivery predictability as an SV message with an adjacent node. At this time, the delivery predictability calculated in each of the nodes A through Z is transmitted together with a next hop node for the destination node. Upon receiving the delivery predictability for the destination node and the next hop node for the destination node, each of the nodes A through Z checks whether or not the next hop node matches the local node itself, wherein whey they match with each other, the delivery predictability is not registered with a delivery predictability database. Since the node transmitting the delivery predictability is not selected as the next hop node for the destination node, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a routing loop between nodes. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211536 | DECENTRALIZED AND COOPERATIVE RECEPTION OF DATA BY BASE STATIONS - The invention relates to a method for eliminating interferences for an interconnected group of base stations of a mobile radio network when receiving data transmitted by mobile radio terminals in the mobile radio network, wherein a) the data are encoded at the mobile radio terminal device as symbols of a modulation alphabet, and modulated at a carrier frequency for transmitting, b) information regarding the symbols received at the base station of the interconnected group are transmitted between the base stations by means of communication connections for eliminating interferences, and c) the base stations of the interconnected group demodulate and decode the received symbols in a cooperative and decentralized manner. | 09-01-2011 |
20110216692 | SELECTION OF A PREFERRED ACCESS POINT FROM AMONG A PLURALITY OF ACCESS POINTS - Techniques are provided for selecting an access point (AP) to communicate with from a plurality of candidate access points (APs) when a wireless communication device (WCD) roams in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The WCD can determine whether a particular link quality metric (e.g., a signal strength indicator value) of a particular preferred access point (that has the highest link quality metric) is greater than an upper threshold. If so, the WCD can then create a preferred candidate list that comprises only preferred access points, and determine whether a current serving access point of the wireless communication device is a preferred access point. If the current serving access point is not a preferred access point, the WCD can initiate a roam to the particular preferred access point that has the strongest link quality metric. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216693 | Method and Apparatus for Ordered Partial Detection with MIMO Cooperation - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus comprising: at least one processor; and at least one memory including computer program code, wherein the at least one memory and the computer program code are configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus to perform at least the following: receiving a MIMO (multiple-input multiple output) encoded symbol vector, the symbol vector encoding a plurality of streams of a source node; estimating channel matrix between the source node and the apparatus; re-ordering columns in said channel matrix; determining a plurality of feedback bits based at least in part on the re-ordered channel matrix, wherein each bit of the feedback bits indicates detection or no detection of the corresponding antenna streams of the source node; and transmitting the feedback bits. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216694 | Enhanced Circuit-Switched Calls - A terminal for transmitting a voice signal, comprising: a transmitter having a first transmission module arranged to transmit signals over a packet-switched data network and a second transmission module arranged to transmit signals over a circuit-switched telephony network; a microphone for generating a voice signal; and signal processing apparatus configured to generate a first signal and a second signal from the voice signal, each representing information from the voice signal over a same portion of time. The signal processing apparatus is further configured to supply the first signal to the first transmission module for transmission to a receiver via the packet-switched data network, and to supply the second signal to the second transmission module for transmission to the receiver via the circuit-switched telephony network. There is also provided a terminal for receiving such signals and reconstructing the voice signal, and corresponding methods and program products. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216695 | APPARATUS FOR INTERCONNECTING WIRELESS NETWORKS SEPARATED BY A BARRIER - An apparatus for bridging a barrier to wireless communication between wireless field device networks includes a pair of locally-powered wireless devices connected by a wired link spanning the barrier. At least one of the locally-powered wireless devices is in wireless communication with each of the wireless networks intended to be interconnected. The wireless devices include a wireless transceiver and an antenna. Messages from one wireless field device network addressed to a member node of another wireless field device network are received by a wireless device on one side of the barrier and transmitted via the wired link to another wireless device on the other side of the barrier for routing to the member node of the other wireless field device network. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216696 | DISTRIBUTED FLUID NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method for transmitting message data within a multi-hop mesh network is disclosed. Message data is provided that includes an identifier of the source node, an identifier of the destination node, a transmission route and a message for the destination node. At least one processor tracks one or more of an incoming queue, an outgoing queue and an idle queue. The message data is transmitted from the source node to a destination node or, if the destination node is not directly connected, to an intermediate node, the receiving node determines whether it is the destination node and/or whether there is at least a first predetermined condition that precludes the message delivery. If no such condition is determined and the node is not the destination node, it continues forwarding the message to a subsequent and possibly the destination node, otherwise it attempts a re-routing and if it does not determine a second predetermined condition that precludes calculating a different route, drops the message and updates the knowledge base. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216697 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND RELATED WIRELESS ROUTING CIRCUIT - A wireless routing circuit is disclosed including: a first RF circuit having a first physical address for communicating with a first set of one or more wireless networking devices each has a gateway address configured as the first physical address; a second RF circuit having a second physical address for communicating with a second set of one or more wireless networking devices each has a gateway address configured as the second physical address; a processing circuit coupled with the first and second RF circuits for processing packets received or to be transmitted by the first and second RF circuits; and a network interface coupled with the processing circuit for communicating with one or more network areas under the control of the processing circuit. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216698 | APPARATUSES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP (CSG) MEMBERSHIP SYNCHRONIZATION - A mobile communications device with a wireless module and a controller module is provided. The wireless module performs wireless transceiving to and from a cellular station of a service network, and the cellular station is associated with a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) identification (ID) and configured to operate in a hybrid access mode. The controller module transmits a Circuit Switched (CS) or Packet Switched (PS) domain request message to the cellular station via the wireless module, and receives a rejection message corresponding to the CS or PS domain request message from the cellular station via the wireless module. Also, the controller module determines whether the rejection message indicates unauthorized membership of the CSG ID, and removes the CSG ID from an allowed CSG list in response to the CSG ID being in the allowed CSG list and the rejection message indicating unauthorized membership of the CSG ID. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216699 | TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - A transmission system determines whether property data of a transmission terminal matches property data of a counterpart terminal to generate similarity information indicating the degree of similarity between the property data of the transmission terminal and the property data of the counterpart terminal, and determines a destination to which the event data specifying an event created by the transmission terminal is to be transmitted based on the similarity information. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216700 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING UPLINK RANDOM ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of a base station (BS) perform uplink (UL) random access in a wireless communication system. Random access channel information is determined on each of a plurality of frames constituting a superframe, and a control message comprising the random access channel information is broadcasted. A method and apparatus of a mobile station (MS) perform UL random access in a wireless communication system. A control message comprising random access channel information is received. A frame for minimizing a collision during a contention-based random access is selected based on the random access channel information. For data to be transmitted using the selected frame, it is determined whether the information to be transmitted is an access class with equal or higher priority to a received access class comprised in the random access channel information. A contention-based random access bandwidth request is transmitted to the BS for the data to be transmitted. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216701 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFICATION AND TRANSFER IN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM COLLABORATIVE SESSIONS - A method and apparatus are described for performing Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) operation. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) registers an IMS service priority with an IMS network. The IMS service priority indicates the WTRU's priority in receiving IMS services. The WTRU may receive an IMS service from the IMS network based on the WTRU's IMS service priority. The IMS service priority may be indicated using a priority value and the WTRU may use Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) messaging to signal with the IMS network. The WTRU may register the service priority value using a q-value parameter in an SIP Contact field header. The WTRU may also register a public user identity with the IMS network and the public user identity may be shared with other IMS-capable WTRUs. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216702 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING STREAMING DATA IN A PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for receiving streaming data in a portable terminal are provided. The apparatus includes a controller and an Intra-frame (I-frame) manager. The controller decodes and reproduces received streaming data. In a case of a stopping of a streaming service, the I-frame manager stores information on a stopped position of the streaming service and, in a case where the stopped streaming service is reattempted, reproducing the streaming data from the stopped position of the streaming service. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216703 | Spread Spectrum Transmission Systems - A code phase signalling module arranged to provide code phase signalling to assist in signal acquisition of direct sequence spread spectrum signalling received by a receiver module from a transmitter module. The code phase signalling is arranged to be used by the receiver module to synchronise the phase of a synchronisation code provided from within the receiver module with the phase of a modulation code of the direct spread spectrum sequence signalling received by the receiver module. The synchronisation code sequence corresponds to the modulation code sequence. The code phase signalling module is arranged to provide code phase time signalling representing the offset time of the synchronisation code from a reference time. The reference time is associated with the time of transmission of a particular reference portion of the modulation code of the direct spread spectrum signaling. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216704 | ENHANCED FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Enhanced frequency division multiple access (EFDMA) is a multiplexing scheme that sends modulation symbols in the time domain and achieves a lower PAPR than OFDM. An EFDMA symbol occupies multiple subband groups that are spaced apart in a frequency band, with each subband group containing multiple adjacent subbands. To generate an EFDMA symbol, multiple modulation symbols are mapped onto a first sequence of symbols. A transform (e.g., a DFT) is performed on the first sequence to obtain a second sequence of values. The values in the second sequence corresponding to the subbands used for the EFDMA symbol are retained, and the remaining values are zeroed out to obtain a third sequence of values. An inverse transform (e.g., an IDFT) is performed on the third sequence to obtain a fourth sequence of samples. A phase ramp may be applied on the fourth sequence, and a cyclic prefix is appended to form the EFDMA symbol. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216705 | METHOD FOR SIGNALING BACK-OFF INFORMATION IN RANDOM ACCESS - A method for performing random access in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes transmitting a preamble for random access in uplink, receiving a random access response message including back-off information as a response to the preamble, and performing back-off using the back-off information when the random access has failed. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216706 | METHOD FOR SIGNALING BACK-OFF INFORMATION IN RANDOM ACCESS - A method for performing random access in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes transmitting a preamble for random access in uplink, receiving a random access response message including back-off information as a response to the preamble, and performing back-off using the back-off information when the random access has failed. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216707 | APPLICATION SPECIFIC TRAFFIC OPTIMIZATION IN A WIRELESS LINK - A packet data system such as a TCP/IP network transmits packets containing a variety of data types along links in the network. Packets are transmitted in a stream between nodes interconnected by the links connections which conform to a transport layer protocol such as TCP, UDP, and RSTP, and includes wireless links, which transmit packets using a radio frequency (RF) medium. Typical protocols, however, are usually developed to optimize throughput and minimize data error and loss over wired links, and do not lend themselves well to a wireless link. By examining the data in a packet, performance characteristics such as a port number are determined. The performance characteristics indicate the application type, and therefore, the data type, of the packets carried on the connection. Since certain data types, such as streaming audio and video, are more loss tolerant, determination of the data type is used to compute link control parameters for the wireless link which that are optimal to the type of data being transmitted over the link. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216708 | TRANSMISSION OF MULTIPLEX PROTOCOL DATA UNITS IN PHYSICAL LAYER PACKETS - A transmitter generates MUX-PDUs for video, audio, data, and/or control streams based on a fixed PHY packet size such that all or a substantial percentage of the MUX-PDUs conform to the PHY packet size. The MUX-PDUs have variable sizes and are mapped to PHY packets such that (1) each MUX-PDU that is smaller than the PHY packet size is sent in one PHY packet and (2) each MUX-PDU that is larger than the PHY packet size is sent in a minimum number of PHY packets. Each MUX-PDU is padded with one or more null MUX-PDUs and/or one or more padding bytes, if needed, to obtain the PHY packet size. Each PHY packet is sent in one transmission time interval (TTI) to a receiver. The receiver performs the complementary processing on the received PHY packets to recover the MUX-PDUs. The receiver forwards each valid MUX-PDU and discards any padding. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216709 | PROVIDING ACCESS TO A GPRS NETWORK - Methods and devices for providing a device (TD | 09-08-2011 |
20110216710 | Method and Apparatus for Controlling Access to a Radio Resource - In a radio system where wireless nodes are in contact, the wireless nodes are enabled to exchange information with adjacent nodes. In addition, in one embodiment distant nodes out of range for direct communication can be communicated with by forwarding data over multiple hops. When a user, in particular a primary user, is detected by a node, a spectrum access blocking message is sent, to other nodes in the vicinity of the node thereby enabling blocking of the radio resource in a geographical area in which the other usage is detected. This means that the radio resource is blocked in that area from being accessed by other users than the primary user. The blocking message can be distributed in any suitable manner and can be tailored for the application at hand. | 09-08-2011 |
20110222468 | CONCURRENT TRANSMISSION OF MULTIPLE SIGNALS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for concurrent transmission of multiple radio-frequency signals in a wireless network. The method is executed at a node of the wireless network and makes use of the node's knowledge of local network topology, locations of certain packets in the node's neighborhood, and local state of the radio-frequency (RF) channel to identify a relatively wide range of different opportunities for zero-forcing, aligning, and/or canceling unwanted RF signals at the receiving node(s). The identified opportunities are communicated to the neighbor nodes to advantageously cause concurrent transmissions of a relatively large number of packets. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222469 | MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME SELECTION METHOD FOR A SPECIFIC ABSORPTION RATE COMPLIANT COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Transmission of data from a portable communication device to a base station via a radio frequency signal uses a plurality of modulation and coding schemes and a protocol that has recurring frames. Each frame has a plurality of transmission slots, different numbers of which can be used to transmit data. When it is desired to transmit data a higher rate than was used previously, an attempt is made to increase the number transmission slots being used. If doing so, produces a transmission results in a specific absorption rate limit being exceeded, then the modulation and coding scheme is changed to one having a greater data coding rate. The power level and the number transmission slots then are set so that the data transmission does not exceed the specific absorption rate limit. The data is then transmitted by the portable communication device. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222470 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING QUALITY OF SERVICE TO VOICE-OVER-IP TRAFFIC ON A WIRELESS RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - In various embodiments, a system, network node, and method of providing voice communications in a wireless packet communications system includes registering a communications path between a gateway (GW) and a base station (BS); establishing a real-time service flow in the BS; activating the real-time service flow over an air interface between the BS and a terminal device; requesting, by the terminal device, that zero bandwidth be allocated by the BS to the activated real-time service flow in the absence of voice traffic to or from the terminal device; requesting, by the terminal device, that sufficient bandwidth be allocated by the BS to the activated real-time service flow when voice traffic to or from the terminal device is detected by the terminal device; and transmitting and/or receiving the voice traffic over the registered communications path via the activated real-time service flow. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222471 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZED TRANSFER OF LOCATION DATABASE INFORMATION - A servicing communication device may receive a subset of a location reference database that is maintained by a plurality of location servers, and may provide location related data to a mobile device that is communicatively coupled to the servicing communication device based on the received subset. The servicing communication device may determine capabilities and/or requirements of the mobile device, and may generate the location related data based on that determination. The servicing communication device may determine attributes and/or parameters that may affect determination of the subset of the location reference database. The subset of location reference database may be requested based on the determined attributes and/or parameters. The attributes and/or parameters may comprise a location of the servicing communication device. The servicing communication device may determine its location, directly based on GNSS transmissions and/or indirectly based on assisted GNSS (A-GNSS) data received from the plurality of location servers. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222472 | PROTOCOL TO SUPPORT ADAPTIVE STATION-DEPENDENT CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK RATE IN MULTI-USER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatuses are proposed for supporting one or more user-dependent channel state information (CSI) feedback rates in a downlink spatial division multiple access (SDMA) system. For certain aspects, an access point (AP) may receive a channel evolution feedback from one or more stations and send a request for CSI to the stations whose CSI values need to be updated. For certain aspects, the AP may poll the stations for updated CSI values. For certain aspects, deterministic back-off timers may be assigned to the stations indicating when to send their CSI feedback. The proposed methods may improve system performance. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222473 | PROTOCOL TO SUPPORT ADAPTIVE STATION-DEPENDENT CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK RATE IN MULTI-USER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatuses are proposed for supporting one or more user-dependent channel state information (CSI) feedback rates in a downlink spatial division multiple access (SDMA) system. For certain aspects, an access point (AP) may receive a channel evolution feedback from one or more stations and send a request for CSI to the stations whose CSI values need to be updated. For certain aspects, the AP may poll the stations for updated CSI values. For certain aspects, deterministic back-off timers may be assigned to the stations indicating when to send their CSI feedback. The proposed methods may improve system performance. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222474 | Content output apparatus, content playback system, content output method, and program - There is provided a content output apparatus including a wireless communication unit for transmitting an acquisition request for content data based on a position of the content data in an output order, a communication control unit for investigating whether or not acquisition of the content data is possible, before transmitting the acquisition request, and an output control unit for rearranging the output order according to a result of the investigation. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222475 | COMMUNICATION STATIONS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING ON A RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL - Example communication stations and methods for transmitting on a random access channel (RACH) in wireless networks are disclosed herein. An example method for transmitting on an enhanced RACH by a device such that an initial access burst is received in a single time slot by a wireless network involves determining a timing advance, the timing advance being associated with a serving cell. The example method also involves transmitting, using the determined timing advance, the initial access burst, on the enhanced RACH, that includes at least one of an identifier or user data. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222476 | COMMUNICATION STATIONS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON AN ENHANCED RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL - Example communication stations and methods for transmitting additional information on an enhanced random access channel (RACH) are disclosed herein. An example method performed by a device involves generating an initial access burst for transmission on an enhanced RACH and transmitting the initial access burst using a timing advance. The timing advance is to cause the initial access burst to be received at the network within a single time slot of the enhanced RACH. The initial access burst includes at least one of information about capabilities of the device or information identifying the device. The example method also involves receiving a temporary block flow (TBF) assignment from the network in response to sending the at least one of the information about the capabilities of the device or the information identifying the device. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222477 | COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND METHODS THEREOF - Communication devices and methods thereof are provided. In one embodiment, the method comprises the communication device receiving information from one of a first carrier which indicates a second carrier carries a point-to-multipoint data, and the communication device determining to receive the point-to-multipoint data according to the received information. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222478 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME TO MULTI-USER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Provided a method for simultaneously transmitting data frames to a plurality of STAs in a multi-user based wireless communication system. The method includes: requesting sounding or feedback for the plurality of STAs by using a first control information frame containing first group information; receiving responses to the sounding or feedback request; reconfiguring the plurality of STAs composing the first group into a plurality of second groups on the basis of the responses such that the sum of maximum transport streams of the respective STAs composing one group becomes equal to or less than the maximum number of streams transmitted by an AP; transmitting a second control information frame containing second group information on the respective second groups to the plurality of STAs composing the first group; and transmitting data frames by using the second group information. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222479 | Transmission and Reception of a Wideband Signal with Narrowband Interference - It is disclosed a method including accommodating, in frequency domain, a first bandwidth of a first carrier signal with respect to a second bandwidth of a second carrier signal such that the first bandwidth adjoins to or overlaps the second bandwidth, the first bandwidth being greater than the second bandwidth. In a further aspect, prior to the transmission, the interference of the modulated second carrier signal is subtracted from each of the plurality of subcarrier signals of the first carrier signal. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222480 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TO A WIND FARM - A system and method of providing wireless communication to a user computing device at a wind turbine including a tower, a nacelle, and a plurality of rotor blades defining a sweep area. The method includes coupling a wireless bridge to an exterior of the wind turbine, the wireless bridge configured to receive the wireless communication signal and coupling a wireless access point to the wind turbine near a roof of the wind turbine, wherein the wireless access point is configured to communicate with at least one user computing device within an access area of the wind turbine, the access area including an interior of the tower and the nacelle, and the sweep area. The method also includes communicatively coupling the wireless bridge to the wireless access point, and configuring the wireless bridge to forward, to a remote device, a data request from the user computing device, the data request received from the wireless access point. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222481 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication system providing a multimedia service that informs a calling terminal that a communication sent from the calling terminal to a called terminal is undesired by the called terminal. Typically, the calling terminal is connected to a calling-side communication network, and the called terminal is connected to a called-side communication network; the called-side communication network includes an access request receiving device that receives an access request sent from the calling terminal; an access request cancel determination device that determines whether or not the received access request is cancelled; and an access request cancel notice sending device that sends an access request cancel notice when the access request is cancelled; and the calling-side communication network includes an addressee information communicating device that communicates addressee information to the calling terminal based on the access request cancel notice, where the addressee information is information of an addressee to be accessed so as to withdraw the cancellation of the access request. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222482 | RCC CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION - A method and apparatus for establishing a RRC connection between a base station and a mobile station in a wire-less communication system is provided. A packet transmission method for a communication system including a transmitter and a receiver according to the present invention includes transmitting, at the transmitter, a packet; retransmitting, when a confirmation message is not received in response to the packet, the packet; and stopping, when the confirmation message is received in response to the packet, retransmission of the packet. An RRC connection establishment method and apparatus of the present invention allows the transmitter to retransmit the RRC Connection Response message periodically until the RRC Connection Complete message is received from the receiver, thereby improving the RRC connection success probability. | 09-15-2011 |
20110228724 | USER-SPECIFIC SEARCH SPACE DESIGN FOR MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for user-specific search space design for multi-carrier operation in Long Term Evolution Advanced (LTE-A) systems. The user-specific search space can be designed for searching Physical Downlink Control Channels (PDCCHs) transmitted on one component carrier (CC) that schedules Physical Downlink Shared Channel/Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PDSCH/PUSCH) transmissions on two or more different CCs. In one aspect, multiple independent user-specific search spaces can be designed. In another aspect, one user-specific search space can be randomly derived and then expanded to accommodate search for multiple CCs. In yet another aspect, the search space design can retain randomness in starting search element indices of multiple PDSCH/PUSCH CCs, while overlapping of search spaces for multiple PDSCH/PUSCH CCs can be avoided. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228725 | FIELD COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND FIELD COMMUNICATION METHOD - A field communication system may perform wireless communication with field devices. The field communication system may include a connection allowing unit that determines whether or not to allow a connection to the field device by referring a field device list, the field device list listing tag names related to the field devices, an address issuance unit that automatically issues a communication address for the field device if the connection allowing unit allows the connection with the field device, an address management unit that establishes correspondences between the communication addresses and the tag names of the field devices by using the field device list, and a communication unit that transmits data to the field device designated by the tag name, the communication unit receiving the data transmitted from the field device, the data being used to control the field device designated by the tag name. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228726 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING MULTI-LEVEL PACKET TRANSMISSION PATHS IN A WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A method of configuring multi-level packet transmission paths in a wireless sensor network includes an initial configuration procedure and an optimization procedure. The wireless sensor network includes a plurality of sensor units and a processing unit that configures the multi-level packet transmission paths among the sensor units for transmitting a to-be-transmitted packet group. The initial configuration procedure configures the packet transmission paths among the sensor units for transmitting the to-be-transmitted packet group which includes a plurality of packets under a condition that a number of the sensor units is not increased. The optimization procedure adjusts the packet transmission paths, resulting from the initial configuration procedure, among the sensor units for transmission of a portion of packets in the to-be-transmitted packet group so as to reduce the number of the sensor units. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228727 | Seek and find location method, system and apparatus - Methods, systems, and apparatus for locating the seek and find RF device are provided. An exemplary embodiment of a seek and find RF device receives a first RF cell phone signal from a requesting party device, wherein the first RF cell phone signal includes at least a location query requesting location information of the seek and find RF device, and wherein the location query is directed to the seek and find RF device using a mobile device identifier. The seek and find RF device receives at least three GPS satellite signals and determines a location of the seek and find RF device based upon the at least three GPS satellite signals. The seek and find RF device then transmits a second RF cell phone signal, wherein the second RF cell phone signal includes the determined location, and wherein the second RF cell phone signal is directed to the requesting party device using a device identifier. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228728 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SPACE CODE TRANSMIT DIVERSITY OF PUCCH - Aspects of the invention are directed to a transmit diversity method for use in a wireless terminal having a plurality of antennas and a wireless terminal configured to implement the method. The transmit diversity method includes using a different orthogonal sequence for each antenna, or group of antennas, for transmitting an uplink control channel from a wireless terminal to a base station. A first step of the method involves assigning at least one orthogonal sequence to one or more of the plurality of antennas, each of the plurality of antennas being assigned at least one orthogonal sequence. Once the orthogonal sequence is assigned, a further step involves scrambling a signal to be transmitted on the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) using the at least one orthogonal sequence for each antenna thereby producing a scrambled PUCCH for transmission by each antenna. The scrambled PUCCH can then be transmitted on the plurality of antennas. | 09-22-2011 |
20110235573 | MOBILE AD HOC NETWORK CONFIGURED AS A VIRTUAL INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORK - According to one embodiment, a method for facilitating communication of a MANET is provided. A MANET may include a plurality of nodes configured as a virtual IP network. The virtual IP network may comprise a plurality of physical paths of the MANET. The physical paths may couple an IP network to an IP node. Each physical path may traverse a distinct set of nodes of the MANET. The physical paths may be represented to the IP network as a logical path comprising one or more virtual IP nodes. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235574 | ASSIGNMENT SCHEME FOR WIRELESS NODE IDENTIFIERS AND LOCATION CODES - A method including receiving a geographic area value limit that segments a geographic region associated with a network into geographic areas; receiving a geographic area-level evolved Node B (eNB) value limit that indicates a maximum number of eNBs to reside in each geographic area; calculating eNB identifiers based on the geographic area value limit and the geographic area-level eNB value limit; assigning the eNB identifiers to eNBs associated with the network; receiving a tracking region value limit that segments the geographic region associated with the network into the geographic areas; receiving a tracking area value limit that indicates a maximum number of tracking areas within each geographic area; calculating tracking area codes based on the tracking region value limit and the tracking area value limit; and assigning the tracking area codes to the tracking areas within each geographic area. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235575 | Signaling Message Prioritization - Methods, system, and articles are described herein for receiving and prioritizing a plurality of signaling messages based at least on classifications of the signaling messages. At least a number of the signaling messages are processed in order of priority, the number processed being based at least on a volume of the signaling messages. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235576 | ENHANCED CARRIER SENSING FOR MULTI-CHANNEL OPERATION - In various embodiments, a multi-channel request-to-send and a multi-channel clear-to-send may be used in a wireless communications network to assure that a subsequent multi-channel communications exchange between two devices takes place only over channels that are sensed by both devices as being free. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235577 | CONTENT IDENTIFICATION AND RETRIEVAL BASED ON DEVICE COMPONENT PROXIMITY - The invention provides proximity based content retrieval. A proximity element is provided for each of a plurality of components associated with a primary device. Identification information of each proximity element for an associated particular proximity space is communicated to a mobile wireless device. Upon the mobile wireless device being located within the associated particular proximity space of a particular proximity element, the mobile device receives associated identification information of the particular proximity element. The mobile device retrieves video content based on the associated identification information. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235578 | MULTIPATH COMMUNICATIONS FOR MOBILE NODE INTERFACES - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate establishing multiple sub-connections between a correspondent node (CN) and a mobile node (MN), through a home agent (HA) to provide multipath functionality over multiple MN interfaces. The MN can connect to multiple networks using multiple MN interfaces, receiving care-of addresses (CoA) at each network. The MN can establish multiple connections to the CN specifying, to the HA, a different 5-tuple (or n-tuple) for each connection. The different 5-tuple can include a different port number related to a home address assigned by the HA. Also, bindings at the HA can be updated to associate the different 5-tuple with a CoA of one of the multiple MN interfaces. In this regard, the HA can route packets to the MN from the CN based at least in part on determining the HoA port number in the packet associated with the CoA of an MN interface. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235579 | Method And Apparatus For Home Network Access Using A Remote Mobile Device - A manner of facilitating access to a home network having an HA by a remote mobile device, such as a smartphone, having an FA that is or may be registered with the HA. A secure tunnel or similar communication path is established between the FA and an HA of a home network, and an SSR (specialized service request) is transmitted to the mobile network though which the mobile device is communicating, providing advance notification that a bandwidth intensive operation is anticipated so that the mobile network may take preparatory action. The SSR is preferably sent by the FA after a tunnel to the HA has been established, but prior to the user selecting a particular bandwidth intensive application for execution. The user may be queried in advance to determine which operation might be anticipated. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235580 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: establishing a first radio link between the “LTE-AS” and the eNB in response to the “Service Request” received from the “EMM”; transmitting, from the “UMTS-AS” to the “MM/GMM”, the “reconnect request”, after the completion of the switching process from the mobile communication system of the LTE scheme to the mobile communication system of the UMTS scheme, when the “LTE-AS” detects RLF within a first predetermined period after receiving the switching command instructing performance of the switching process; and not transmitting, from the “MM/GMM” to the “UMTS-AS”, the “Service Request” responding to the “reconnect request”, when the mobile station UE has not performed a packet communication in the mobile communication system of the LTE scheme before a start of the switching process. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235581 | POST ACCESS POLICING IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - When a wireless terminal attaches to the network, the wireless terminal is assigned a temporary identifier. Different sets of access restrictions are associated with different blocks of temporary identifiers. When a message and a corresponding temporary identifier is received by the network from a requesting wireless terminal, an access controller identifies the block to which the assigned temporary identifier belongs and determines the access restrictions associated with that block. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235582 | SUBFRAME DEPENDENT TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT - According to certain aspects, transmission power control may be applied to uplink transmissions in a subframe-type dependent manner as part of an interference management scheme. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235583 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DOWNLOADING DATA IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for downloading data in a mobile communication system are provided. A method of a mobile terminal for downloading data in a mobile communication system includes receiving a transmit (TX) data existence indication message from a server, determining an access network according to an amount of TX data included in the received TX data existence indication message, performing a data connection through the access network, and receiving the data from the server. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235584 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELIABLE TRANSMISSION OF CONTROL INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for reliably transmitting and receiving control information in a wireless network are described. A cell may typically send control information on a control channel and associated data (e.g., system information) on a data channel in the same subframe. This subframe may have strong interference from other cells. For cross-subframe signaling, the cell may transmit the control information in a first subframe and the associated data in a second subframe. The first subframe may be a usable subframe for the cell and may have less interference from other cells. A UE may not know the location of the first subframe and may perform window-based decoding. The UE may decode the control channel in at least one subframe within a decoding window covering the first subframe to obtain the control information. The UE may then decode the data channel in the second subframe based on the control information to obtain the data. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235585 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for transmitting a message in a portable terminal are provided. The method includes determining message contents to send to at least one recipient terminal, determining a number of recipient terminals, when transmitting the message to at least two recipient terminals, determining identification information of at least two recipient terminals to which the message is transmitted, and transmitting a message which includes the identification information of the at least two recipient terminals and the message contents to the at least two recipient terminals. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235586 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING RETRANSMISSION ON UPLINK IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MIMO - A method is provided for controlling retransmission by a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system supporting Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) technology. A plurality of transport blocks is initially transmitted to a Node B. A retransmission request for at least one transport block among the plurality of transport blocks is received from the Node B. A precoding matrix for retransmission of the at least one transport block is determined based on the retransmission request for the at least one transport block. The at least one transport block is retransmitted using the determined precoding matrix. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235587 | Apparatuses and Methods for Coordinating Operations of Multiple Wireless Communications Modules with Multiple Subscriber Numbers - A wireless communications device is provided with a plurality of card slots, a first wireless communications module, and a second wireless communications module. The card slots are inserted with at least one subscriber identity card. The first wireless communications module performs wireless transceiving in compliance with at least a first wireless technology. The second wireless communications module determines at least a first subscriber number and a second subscriber number from the at least one subscriber identity card, and enables the wireless transceiving of the first wireless communications module using the first subscriber number. Also, the second wireless communications module performs wireless transceiving in compliance with at least a second wireless technology using the second subscriber number. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235588 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND MULTI-ADDRESS SPACE MOBILE NETWORK FOR SENDING DATA AND FORWARDING DATA - A method for forwarding data is provided. A first host belongs to a first locator domain (LD). The first LD belongs to a first Internet service provider (ISP) and a second ISP. A second host belongs to a second LD. The ISP to which each LD belongs allocates an LD identifier (LD ID) to the LD, respectively. The method includes: receiving a first data packet sent to the second host by the first host; selecting one LD ID of the first LD as a source LD ID according to a preset traffic engineering (TE) policy, so as to obtain a second data packet corresponding to the first data packet, and selecting an ISP network corresponding to the source LD ID to forward the second data packet. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235589 | Communication System for Voice-Over Internet Protocol Using License-Free Frequencies and a Mobile Telephone - In a communication system comprising—at least one mobile telephone ( | 09-29-2011 |
20110235590 | FREQUENCY CORRECTION IN MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and systems for correction of frequency errors in multi-carrier communication systems. The composite frequency error associated with the downlink signals are used to infer or derive the composite frequency error associated with the uplink signals, which are used to pre-compensate the uplink signals. Special signal components are transmitted by multiple base stations to facilitate frequency-error estimation and other system control functionalities at a mobile device. The mobile device carries out temporal, spatial, or spatial-temporal processing of the composite frequency errors associated with one or more base stations to determine the clock frequency error and the Doppler shift with respect to its serving base station. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235591 | BAND STEERING FOR MULTI-BAND WIRELESS CLIENTS - Band steering for multi-band wireless clients. In a wireless digital network having at least one central controller and a plurality of access nodes connected to the central controller, and wherein some of the access nodes support a preferred wireless band and at least one non-preferred wireless band, the central controller identifies wireless client devices capable of multi-band operation, and encourages them to connect to the preferred wireless band. Client devices may be identified as multi-band capable by tracking probe requests. The central controller keeps a list of multi-band capable clients, for example in a database. This information is provided to other central controllers, and to access nodes attached to the central controller. Multi-band capable clients are encouraged to connect on the preferred wireless band for example by having the access nodes not respond to probe requests on the non-preferred wireless bands. Connections made on the non-preferred wireless bands may be moved to the preferred wireless band. | 09-29-2011 |
20110243063 | Method for Configuring the Link Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) in a User Equipment (UE) - In a System Architecture Evolution/Long Term Evolution (SAE/LTE) radio network, the network is set to configure the link MTU in the UE for each bearer where the network-configured link MTU can represent an MTU of a path for a SAE bearer service in complete or part of a particular SAE/LTE network. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243064 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND DEVICES FOR CONVERGENT COMMUNICATIONS USING REMOTE KEYING - Systems, devices and methods for convergence of a variety of communication sources are presented. More particularly, embodiments relate to a radio communications gateway device and associated methods, that is lightweight, small, portable, secure, and useful for converging communications via handheld radios and telephonic devices to an interne protocol network having a variety of different available media. The device preferably has a weight under 15 pounds and sufficient interconnectability to be field-useful in a variety of situations. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243065 | Packet Routing Method, Proxy Server And Apparatus - A method is described of routing a packet comprising routing information between a mobile host and a correspondent host in respective first and further network domains, at least the first network domain comprising a plurality of subnets, said mobile host being attached to one of said subnets. The method comprises registering the mobile host with the first network domain, said registration including assigning a global IP address and a local IP address to said mobile host, said local IP address being associated with the subnet to which the mobile host is attached; communicating said local IP address to said mobile host; using the global IP address as the routing information between the domains; reformatting said packet by replacing the global IP address with the local IP address upon receipt of the packet in the first network domain; and communicating the reformatted request to the mobile host via the associated subnet. A proxy server and apparatus for use in this method are also disclosed. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243066 | Uplink Control Data Transmission - Methods and systems for transmitting uplink control information and feedback are disclosed for carrier aggregation systems. A user equipment device may be configured to transmit uplink control information and other feedback for several downlink component carriers using one or more uplink component carriers. The user equipment device may be configured to transmit such data using a physical uplink control channel rather than a physical uplink shared channel. The user equipment device may be configured to determine the uplink control information and feedback data that is to be transmitted, the physical uplink control channel resources to be used to transmit the uplink control information and feedback data, and how the uplink control information and feedback data may be transmitted over the physical uplink control channel. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243067 | DELAYED AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST (ARQ) ACKNOWLEDGMENT - Disclosed are examples in which the acknowledgement channel is used for retransmitting a frame received with error. A receiver is configured to transmit an acknowledgment for a frame when the frame is decoded following receipt of the last Pilot Control Group (PCG) of the same frame. The transmitter is configured to receive the acknowledgment of an earlier frame during a subsequent frame, and not to retransmit the earlier frame. The two frames may be adjacent. During connection setup negotiation, the system can determine the values of ack_mask1 defining allowed times for the receiver to acknowledge successful decoding of the subsequent frame, and ack_mask2 defining allowed times for the receiver to acknowledge successful decoding of the earlier frame. The two mask values provide non-overlapping allowed times, so the receiver can acknowledge within the subsequent frame (1) successful decoding of the earlier frame, and (2) successful decoding of the subsequent frame. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243068 | ASSOCIATION PROCESSING METHOD OF A MOBILE DEVICE AND A SERVICE CONTENT PROVIDING SYSTEM THEREOF - An association processing method of a mobile device, the method including accessing a service point with a mobile device for the first time, wherein the service point is connected to a service content providing server, and receiving, at the mobile device, a connection context transmitted from the service point to provide service content of the service content providing server to the mobile device through the service point, wherein the connection context is transmitted to the mobile device in response to a determination that the mobile device is permitted to receive the service content of the service content providing server. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243069 | Automatic Disconnect in Ringing State of Call from User with No Credit - A virtual network has an identity distinct from an existing network identity. A user of the virtual network, without being charged, generates a request, over an existing telephony network, for a first communication between a first communication device and a second communication device. Without allowing the first communication to connect completely to the second communication device, a notification is transmitted to the second communication device and the request is automatically disconnected. The notification includes information sufficient to allow a user of the second communication device to request a second communication connection with the first communication device. The user of the second communication device to request the second communication after the request for the first communication is disconnected. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243070 | CONTROL SIGNALING TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Various example embodiments are disclosed relating to wireless networks, such as relay networks or multi-hop networks, and also relating to control signaling techniques for wireless networks. In an example embodiment, a method or technique may include transmitting (e.g., data or control) frames in a downlink direction and control frames in an uplink direction during a first phase, and transmitting (e.g., data or control) frames in an uplink direction and control frames in a downlink direction during a second phase. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243071 | COMMUNICATION SIGNAL MULTIPLEXING METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RADIO EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER - The present invention discloses a communication signal multiplexing method, a radio communication system, and a radio equipment controller (REC). Taking the common public radio interface (CPRI) standard as an example, by carrying multiple CPRI links on limited physical links (CPRI-MUX), generally one high-speed physical link, physical bandwidth is used more efficiently and the number of interconnected interfaces and the system cost are reduced without compromising with the CPRI standard is maintained. When the bandwidth provided by the high-speed physical link is insufficient, more physical links can be adopted. | 10-06-2011 |
20110249617 | CORE NETWORK INTERFACE FOR PACKET DOMAIN FOR UMA UNC APPLICATIONS - An UMA network controller (SGW, CM) is dedicated for an UMA mobile network comprising a CS core network (CN | 10-13-2011 |
20110249618 | Systems, Methods and Computer Program Products for Intelligent APN Management in Wireless Communications Networks - Systems, methods, and computer program products are for managing APNs in a wireless communications network during a PDP context activation sequence. An exemplary method includes a radio network controller (RNC) generating an APN assignment request in response to a PDP context activation request being received from a device and sending the APN assignment request to an intelligent APN management system (iAPNMS). The method also includes determining, at the iAPNMS based upon an assignment factor, an APN to assign to the PDP context activation request and assigning the APN to the PDP context activation request. The method also includes one of the RNC and the iAPNMS modifying the PDP context activation request to include the APN, and the RNC forwarding the PDP context activation request including the APN to a serving general packet radio service (GPRS) gateway support node (SGSN) to continue the PDP context activation sequence. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249619 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE-SERVING NODES - Methods, devices and systems for a wireless communication system using multiple-serving nodes are provided. In one embodiment, a method of wireless communication comprises sending from a wireless device an uplink control signal to a first node via a second node using a second communication link; receiving by said wireless device a downlink control signal from said first node using a first communication link; sending from said wireless device another uplink control signal to said second node using said second communication link; and receiving by said wireless device another downlink control signal from said second node via said first node using said first communication link. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249620 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE-SERVING NODES - Methods, devices and systems for a wireless communication system using multiple-serving nodes are provided. In one embodiment, a method of wireless communication comprises sending from a first node a downlink control signal to a wireless device using a first communication link; receiving by said first node an uplink control signal from said wireless device via a second node using a third communication link; and forwarding by said first node another downlink control signal from said second node to said wireless device using said third communication link and said first communication link. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249621 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE-TO-COMPUTER COMMUNICATION - Apparatus and methods for establishing a voice call between a wireless device and a personal computer (PC) are disclosed. A call initiation message can be received at a server including information for the PC from the wireless device. A conference can be setup, including establishing a conference ID to conference the wireless device and the PC. A message can be generated for the PC containing voice contact information for the wireless device related to the conference ID. The message can be transmitted to the PC. A dial-in phone number can be transmitted to the wireless device to dial into the conference. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249622 | WIRELESS PORTABLE COMPUTER CAPABLE OF AUTONOMOUSLY ADJUSTING LOAD OF WIRELESS BASE STATION - A method for allowing a portable computer to adjust the load of a wireless base station autonomously is disclosed. The portable computer can communicate in an infrastructure mode and an ad-hoc mode. The portable computer includes a traffic table for storing the performance of various wireless stations and the traffic of other portable computers. Each portable computer measures its traffic to a wireless base station. Then, the portable computer transmits the measured traffic to the other portable computers in the ad-hoc mode and receives the traffic of the other portable computers. A newly connected portable computer acquires the traffic in the ad-hoc mode. When the newly connected portable computer enters into a cell overlap area to connect to any wireless base station, the newly connected portable computer selects a wireless base station having little traffic based on the performance and traffic of wireless base stations instead of a wireless base station that provides a stronger radio field. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249623 | SUPL 3.0 CONCEPT - Techniques for initiating and, if desired, modifying location services for Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) and other location architectures are described. To initiate SUPL service, a SUPL Location Platform (SLP) transmits a SUPL initial session message applicable to any service request to a SUPL enabled terminal (SET) and receives in response the service capabilities of the SET. The SLP selects and requests service from the SET consistent with the service capabilities of the SET. The SET may initiate SUPL service by requesting the service capabilities of the SLP. The SET selects and requests service from the SLP that is consistent with the service capabilities received from the SLP. The SET and SLP communicate to determine a position estimate for the SET. The service may be modified before or while communicating between the SET and the SLP to determine a position estimate for the SET. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249624 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD TO ENABLE DOMAIN SELECTION IN A MULTIMODE DEVICE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose a method for domain selection in a multimode UE. The domain selection method may be used to select domains for short message service (SMS) and/or voice service when the UE has camped on a packet switched (PS) network such as LTE. The proposed domain selection method may take into account UE capabilities, home operator preferences, visited operator preferences, visited network capabilities, and user settings. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249625 | GROUPING OF CIRCUITS - Embodiments of the present invention include a method and system of communicating from a first node of a first telecommunications network towards a second node of a second telecommunications network is executed by the first node and comprises dynamically assigning a group identifier to at least one circuit usable by the first node during communicating and sending the group identifier towards the second node. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249626 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM DYNAMIC PHONEBOOK SERVICE - The present invention discloses a method and a system for implementing an IP multimedia subsystem dynamic phonebook service, the system comprising a terminal and an IP multimedia system, and the method comprising: when the terminal is in a network that does not support IP access, the terminal and the IP multimedia subsystem make the IP multimedia subsystem dynamic phonebook service data packet contained in a short message, and implement information interaction on the IP multimedia subsystem dynamic phonebook service between the terminal and the IP multimedia subsystem by using the short message. By using the method and system of the present invention, and by using the existing 3G IMS network standard and devices, without any network structure changes, subscribers are able to use functions of the IMS dynamic phonebook in a network that does not support IP access only by performing a little protocol extension work, so that the subscribers can experience the “IMS Permanent Online” service without causing network congestion, thereby subscriber experience is enhanced. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249627 | CONTENTION-BASED COMMUNICATION - For an example embodiment, a method for a communication device operating in a synchronous communication system is described. The method includes performing a listen-before-talk (LBT) procedure prior to the start of a downlink subframe of a synchronous frame and determining if a transmission from another communication device of another communication system is detected during the LBT procedure. In the case that a transmission is detected during the LBT procedure, the communication device refrains from transmitting during the downlink subframe. In the case that a transmission is not detected during the LBT procedure, the communication device transmits during the downlink subframe. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249628 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING REDUNDANCY IN RAILROAD COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT - A railway communication system ( | 10-13-2011 |
20110255465 | WIMAX VOIP SERVICE ARCHITECTURE - A wireless communication system to support voice over internet protocol (VoIP) service is presented. In one embodiment, the system includes a connectivity service network comprising a voice over internet protocol (VoIP) gateway to enable the VoIP service. The VoIP gateway is operable to perform transcoding function to support VoIP data plane communication. The connectivity service network also includes a home agent and an authentication, authorization, and accounting server (AAA server). In one embodiment, the connectivity service network includes a VoIP service server. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255466 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AGGREGATION AND QUEUING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A technique for improved throughput at an access point (AP) involves when frames are received for transmission by the AP, queuing the frames for a particular station. A system constructed according to the technique may include an aggregation and queuing layer. Station queues may be processed by the aggregation and queuing layer before being given to radio hardware for transmission. In an illustrative embodiment, when frames are received by the aggregation and queuing layer, the packet will be assigned a target delivery time (TDT) and an acceptable delivery time (ADT). The TDT is the “ideal” time to transmit a frame, based on its jitter and throughput requirements. Frames are mapped on to a time axis for transmission by TDT. In an illustrative embodiment, each frame is mapped by priority, so that there are separate maps for voice, video, best effort, and background frames. There will be gaps between frames for transmission that can be used for aggregation. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255467 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF RADIO COMMUNICATIONS WITH VARIOUS RESOLUTION LEVELS OF SIGNAL MODULATION DEPENDING ON PROPAGATION CONDITIONS - The present invention relates to communications. More especially it relates to multiple access communications over channels of diverse channel qualities, e.g. signal to noise and interference ratios. Particularly it relates to data communications over radio links with diverse propagation path losses and exploitation of diverse path losses for multiplexing and multiple access purposes. The present invention discloses multiplexing of users or channels in a communications system, particularly a multi-resolution system, where users are allocated different respective resolution levels depending on propagation conditions | 10-20-2011 |
20110255468 | ENHANCING UPLINK COVERAGE IN INTERFERENCE SCENARIOS - A method for wireless communication in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network includes transmitting a request, from a first evolved Node B (eNodeB) of the LTE network to a second eNodeB of the LTE network, for the second eNodeB to yield a bundles of non-consecutive subframes. The method also includes configuring a User Equipment (UE), which is associated with the first eNodeB and experiencing interference from the second eNodeB, for uplink transmission in the plurality of bundles of non-consecutive subframes. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255469 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS - A mobile terminal apparatus and radio base station apparatus supporting each of a plurality of mobile communication systems when the plurality of mobile communication systems coexists is disclosed, wherein the mobile terminal apparatus is a mobile terminal apparatus in a radio communication system for performing transmission and reception in uplink and downlink, each assigned to a relatively wide system band obtained by aggregating a plurality of component carriers, each of which is a relatively narrow system band, and has coding and data modulation sections that perform coding and data modulation on uplink control signals including report information of individual component carriers assigned to downlink, and mapping sections that map the control signals subjected to coding and data modulation to uplink communication channels. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255470 | DATA PROCESSING DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DATA PROCESSING, RECORDING MEDIUM WITH PROGRAM RECORDED THEREIN, DATA TRANSFER DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DATA TRANSFER, AND RECORDING MEDIUM WITH PROGRAM RECORDED THEREIN - When the first radio unit receives CEC frame data from the PDP and recognizes that a second BDP (destination) is connected to a second radio unit and the CEC frame data does not include a Give command, the first radio unit substitutes for the second BDP to give an ACK response for reporting the reception of the CEC frame data by the second BDP, and sends the CEC frame data to the second BDP. When the first radio unit recognizes that the second BDP is connected and the CEC frame data contains a Give command, the first radio unit sends the CEC frame data to the second BDP without giving an ACK response; when the first radio unit recognizes that the second BDP has received the CEC frame data, the first radio unit gives an ACK response to the same Give command that is re-sent by the PDP and prompts the PDP to start a timer at that timing. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255471 | Assist Reordering Of Downlink Data At Serving GW Relocation - A packet data network gateway (PDN-GW) on a wireless telecommunications network having a target radio access network (RAN) and a Serving (GW) includes a process-unit which generates an end marker packet The PDN-GW includes a network interface which sends the end marker packet onto the network to assist the target RAN in reordering of downlink data. A method for a packet data network gateway (PDN-GW) on a wireless telecommunications network having a target radio access network (RAN) and a Serving (GW) includes the steps of generating an end marker packet with a processing unit. There is the step of sending the end marker packet onto the network with a network interface to assist the target RAN in reordering of downlink data. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255472 | Forwarding Data Path Optimization in a Distributed Environment for Achieving Micro-Mobility - A method and apparatus of updating a forwarding plane of a network element in response to receiving a mobility event is described. The network element receives a mobility message indicating a mobile node has coupled to a new access port associated with the network element. The message further indicates that the mobile node moved from an old access port to a new access port. The network element adds an entry in a forwarding table of the old egress engine to redirect a set of packets destined to the mobile node to a new egress engine, where the new egress engine is associated with the new access port. Furthermore, the network element redirects the set of packet from the old egress engine to the new egress engine. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255473 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND MOBILE ACCESS GATEWAY FOR LOCAL ROUTING OPTIMIZATION - A method, system, and Mobile Access Gateway (MAG) for local routing optimization are provided. After receiving a packet sent from a Mobile Node (MN) to a Correspondent Node (CN), an MAG queries for a binding update entry corresponding to the MN. When an MAG local routing flag is set in the binding update entry, the packet is sent to the CN; and when a Local Mobile Anchor (LMA) local routing flag is set in the binding update entry, the packet is sent to an MAG of the CN. With the present invention, the delay in sending the packet from an MN to a CN is shortened, the communication efficiency is increased and the user experience is improved. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255474 | PRIORITIZED COMMON SUBFRAME TO PROVIDE BETTER SERVICE TO THE OVERLAPPING AREAS IN A COMMUNITY - A subframe structure for wireless communication uses a master common subframe and second master common subframe method to give BSs different priorities to serve overlapping areas in common subframes. The subframe structure and corresponding method can increase overlapping cells' capacity and reduce interference. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255475 | USER EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SPECIFIC SCRAMBLING - A base station for use in a code division multiple access communication system comprises circuitry configured to process a user equipment identification (UE ID) by ½ rate convolutionally encoding the UE ID to produce a sequence. The sequence is used by the base station for scrambling a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH). The base station is configured to transmit a wireless signal. The wireless signal provides the user equipment with payload data carried on a high speed physical downlink shared channel (HS-PDSCH). The HS-PDSCH is associated with the HS-SCCH. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255476 | System And Method Of Data Access For Mobile Stations - Method and apparatus for data access for a mobile terminal comprising a module for determining whether first and second modes of wireless network coverage is available, a module for selecting the first mode if available, a module for attempting access via the second mode on failure to establish access via the first mode and a module for monitoring availability of the first mode. Even when a connection is established via the second mode, availability of the first mode is monitored and access attempted, when second mode connection is idle. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255477 | RADIO RECEIVING APPARATUS - A radio receiving apparatus for receiving the variable-length RLC PDU data in an RLC layer includes the buffer memory sectioned into a plurality of areas having a predetermined maximum data length of the RLC PDU data. By referring to a sequence number SN included in each received RLC PDU data, the radio receiving apparatus stores the RLC PDU data having an identical sequence number SN into an identical area, and assembles an RLC SDU data on a basis of the RLC PDU data stored in each area. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255478 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR SENDING SCAN REPORT BASED ON MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method and terminal for sending a scan report based on a multi-carrier system are provided. The method comprises the following steps: a terminal acquiring a first configuration parameter of carrier(s) indicated by a base station and a second configuration parameter needed for the terminal to send a scan report, wherein the carrier(s) indicated by the base station is one of or a plurality of carriers of the base station and/or a neighboring base station of the base station; and the terminal scanning the carrier(s) indicated by the base station according to the first configuration parameter, generating a scan report, and sending the scan report to the base station according to the second configuration parameter. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255479 | ROUTE SELECTION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are described for locating a route between a source node and a destination node in an on-demand wireless network including flooding the wireless network with a route request message by the source node and receiving a route reply message responsive to the route request message from a first intermediate node having a valid route to the destination node, wherein the first intermediate node responds to the route request message based on a condition of a flag in the route request message. Also described are a method and apparatus for locating a route between a source node and a destination node in an on-demand wireless network including receiving a route request message from the source node and responding to the route request message with a route reply message by a first intermediate node having a valid route to the destination node, wherein the intermediate node responds to the route request message based on a condition of a flag in the route request message. | 10-20-2011 |
20110261752 | SIGNALING FOR PREAMBLE USED FOR RANDOM ACCESS - Methods for allocating and choosing dedicated signatures for random access are provided. Options for allocating dedicated signatures include allocating the dedicated signature from the unused space of the random signature root index when there is unused space and allocating more dedicated signatures from the same root index using the same time/frequency resources if additional signatures are needed, and reserving some preambles from the contention-based random access preambles from both sets of preambles. The present invention also proposes that the dedicated signatures be reserved in each of two sets of preambles. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261753 | ENABLING IPv6 MOBILITY WITH SENSING FEATURES FOR AD-HOC NETWORKS DERIVED FROM LONG TERM EVOLUTION NETWORKS - A wireless communication device includes a plurality of different wireless interfaces to facilitate communications with a remote device over a corresponding plurality of networks. The device can switch between the different interfaces to migrate an on-going communications session from one that requires the infrastructure of a fixed wireless communication network to one that does not require the infrastructure of a fixed wireless communication network. Switching between the various interfaces allows the migration to occur while protecting the device against malicious third-party impersonation attacks. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261754 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SWITCHING TRAFFIC STREAMS AMONG MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BANDS - Devices, systems and methods may provide control of traffic streams before transition to another frequency band, during a transition and after a transition is completed and the devices are active in the other frequency band or in multiple frequency bands. The provided solution cover the transparent mode when the devices have the same Medium Access Control (MAC) addresses in both frequency bands and the non-transparent mode when at least one of the communicating devices has different MAC addresses in the different frequency bands. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261755 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR FAST SESSION TRANSFER FOR MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Devices, systems and methods to provide session transfer between a pair of multiband stations by a fast session transfer (FST) setup protocol. The FST protocol or the method may include operating the session on a first frequency band and/or a first channel wherein the session includes or is described by state information kept or stored in a pair of stations that have an established direct physical link; setting an agreement to operate the session on a second frequency band and/or a second channel; establishing a direct physical link on a second frequency band and/or a second channel and transferring the session to the second frequency band and/or the second channel. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261756 | METHOD FOR REPORTING INFORMATION ABOUT RESULT OF Iu-UP PROTOCOL NEGOTIATION, PROTOCOL CONVERSION METHOD, COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM, INTERWORKING DEVICE, DEVICE FOR ACQUIRING INFORMATION ABOUT RESULT OF IuUP NEGOTIATION, AND COMPUTER-READABLE INFORMATION RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication network system in which a CS (Circuit Switched) terminal is connected to an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) via an RNC (radio network controller) and the Iu-UP (Iu-User Plane) is terminated by the RNC comprises: an IuUP negotiation result information acquiring device which requests the RNC to supply IuUP negotiation result information and receives the IuUP negotiation result information from the RNC; and an interworking device which receives the IuUP negotiation result information from the IuUP negotiation result information acquiring device and executes protocol conversion between an IuUP protocol and a protocol used in the IMS by use of the IuUP negotiation result information when a connection is made between the CS terminal and the IMS. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261757 | FIELD COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND FIELD COMMUNICATION METHOD - A field communication system may include a communication device that transmits and receives data to and from a field device through a wireless communication, the communication device communicating with the field device if field device data corresponds to communication device data, a field device setting unit that generates the field device data related to a device tag of the field device, the field device setting unit setting the field device data to the field device, a storage unit that stores the field device data, and a communication device setting unit that extracts the field device data stored in the storage unit by using the device tag as a key, the communication device setting unit setting the field device data to the communication device as the communication device data. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261758 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TRANSMISSION-SIDE NODE - In a mobile communication system according to the present invention, an AP/ULP layer of a transmission-side node (A) is configured to acquire, from a SCTP layer of the transmission-side node (A), a “rwnd” for each connection of the SCTP layer, a “cwnd” for each physical path, and a third data amount indicating an amount of data transmitted within a unit time by the transmission-side node (A) for each stream; and when an urgency flag is included in data subject to transmission, the AP/ULP layer of the transmission-side node (A) is configured to determine a stream and a physical path through which the data subject to transmission should be transmitted, based on the “rwnd”, the “cwnd”, and the third data amount, and to notify, to the SCTP layer, the determination. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261759 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION DEVICE AND BASE STATION DEVICE - Provided are a communication system and a mobile station apparatus which can effectively manage setting information held in a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus in a system having a plurality of component carriers. The mobile communication system is formed by the base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus. The system manages specific system information elements used by a plurality of component carriers occupying a part of the bandwidth in the system band as unique information. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261760 | SIGNAL RECEPTION APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - An apparatus and a system, as well as a method and article, may operate to separate, in the frequency domain, a combined plurality of asynchronous data streams received at substantially the same time into a separated plurality of data streams, converting to the time domain for detection, synchronizing, and decoding. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261761 | EXTENDED CALL HANDLING FUNCTIONALITY USING MULTI-NETWORK SIMULCASTING - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of calls using simulcasting of multimedia information via a broadband access gateway are disclosed. A broadband access gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information simultaneously exchanged by an associated access device via a wide area network. The broadband access gateway may store the received multimedia information locally, within the broadband access gateway, or may communicate the multimedia information to storage accessible from the broadband access gateway. The broadband access gateway may cause a user of the access device to be notified of the availability of multimedia information for a recorded call, and may communicate the multimedia information to the access device for playback. A user may be notified if storage and bandwidth for the recording of a call is not available. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261762 | WIRELESS BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless base station device includes a plurality of transmit weight generation sections and a beam selection section. The transmit weight generation sections generate pieces of transmit weight information used for spatial division multiplexing transmission according to different algorithms. The pieces of transmit weight information are generated based on channel information on a plurality of terminals each having one or more antennas with which the wireless base station device performs spatial division multiplexing transmission. The beam selection section selects one of the pieces of transmit weight information generated. | 10-27-2011 |
20110268018 | GATEWAY, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD THEREOF - Discloses is a gateway, base station, communication network and synchronization method thereof. The method comprises: at time T | 11-03-2011 |
20110268019 | USING JOINT DECODING ENGINE IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method for using a joint decoding engine in a wireless device is disclosed. A first symbol stream and a second symbol stream in a received multiple input multiple output (MIMO) signal is determined. A scaled channel estimate for a wireless transmission channel and a scaled noise covariance of the MIMO signal are also determined. The scaled channel estimate and the first symbol stream are whitened. Max log maximum a posteriori (MLM) processing is performed on the whitened first symbol stream to produce a first data stream. The first data stream may be de-rate matched and decoded to produce a decoded first data stream. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268020 | COMMUNICATING WITH TWO NODES WITH OVERLAPPING FRAMES - According to an example embodiment, a wireless node may determine that a first reserved retransmission frame overlaps with a second reserved transmission frame and a second reserved retransmission frame and that the second reserved transmission frame overlaps with a first reserved transmission frame and the first reserved retransmission frame. The first reserved transmission frame and the first reserved retransmission frame may be reserved for wireless communication with a first master node, and the second reserved transmission frame and the second reserved retransmission frame are reserved for wireless communication with a second master node. The wireless node may also process and acknowledge data received from the first master node during the first reserved transmission frame based on the determining, ignore data sent by the second master node during the second reserved transmission frame based on the determining, and process and acknowledge data received from the second master node during the second reserved retransmission frame based on the determining. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268021 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF INDICATING STATION-SPECIFIC INFORMATION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of indicating station-specific information within a wireless communication. For example, a device may include a wireless communication unit to transmit a wireless communication frame to a plurality of stations using a respective plurality of beamforming configurations, wherein the wireless communication unit is to transmit to the stations beamforming configuration information including station-specific information corresponding to the plurality of beamforming configurations, respectively. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268022 | System and Method for Routing Signals Using Network-Specific Identifiers for a Common Server Module - A communication management system has a server module and a signal routing gateway that is connected to a plurality of different cellular network operators. At the signal routing gateway a request is received. The request is addressed to a network-specific address assigned to the server module in accordance with an addressing scheme of a cellular network operator. In response to the request the network-specific address is replaced with an internal address assigned to the server module in accordance with an internal addressing scheme of the communication management system. A response to the request is obtained from the server module. The response is addressed from the internal address. The internal address is replaced with the network-specific address. The response is sent to the cellular network operator. In some embodiments, this process is repeated for multiple requests from the plurality of different cellular network operators. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268023 | Mobile device accessory with interworking circuit switched and internet protocol based voice channels - An accessory device ( | 11-03-2011 |
20110268024 | DETECTION OF CO-LOCATED INTERFERENCE IN A MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE ENVIRONMENT - Unscheduled transmissions of one wireless network device while a collocated wireless network device has control of a communication medium can corrupt packets received by the collocated wireless network device. Interference between the collocated wireless network devices can lead to degradation in performance of either/both the wireless network devices. In a communication system comprising a first wireless network device collocated with a second wireless network device, the first wireless network device can be configured to transmit a coexistence message to the second wireless network device when the first wireless network device transmits a packet without control of the communication medium. On receiving the coexistence message indicating that the first wireless network device transmitted a packet without control of the communication medium, the second wireless network device can discard any packets received at the second wireless network device and can request retransmission of the discarded packets. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268025 | DELIVERY EDGE PROFILE AGGREGATION - A system and method for aggregating subscriber information at a delivery edge is disclosed. The method comprises interfacing a user profile aggregation device (UPAD) at a subscriber location with at least one subscriber database in each of a wired network core and a wireless network core. The wired network core and the wireless network core are operated by a Multi-System network Operator. Profile information can be aggregated at the UPAD about the subscriber from at least one database in the wired network core and the wireless network core. The subscriber's aggregated profile information can be communicated to the MSO. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268026 | DEVICE FOR LOW PRIORITY HANDLING - The embodiments herein relates to a method in a transceiver ( | 11-03-2011 |
20110268027 | Wireless Communication Device - A wireless communication device may obtain, from each of one or more access points, access point information including network identification information corresponding to the access point. The wireless communication device may determine, in a case where specific network identification information corresponding to a specific access point is selected by a user from among one or more network identification information, whether specific access point information obtained from the specific access point includes support information indicating that the specific access point is supporting an automatic wireless setting mode. The wireless communication device may perform a wireless setting in accordance with the automatic wireless setting mode in a first case where a determination is made that the specific access point information includes the support information. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268028 | UPLINK SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNALS CONFIGURATION AND TRANSMISSION - Methods and apparatus for sounding reference signals (SRS) configuration and transmission. The methods include receiving configuration of wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU)-specific SRS subframes for transmitting SRS and upon receipt of a trigger, transmitting the SRS for a number of antennas. The SRS transmissions may occur in each subframe of a duration of WTRU-specific SRS subframes that start a number of WTRU-specific SRS subframes after a triggering subframe. For multiple SRS transmissions from multiple antennas, cyclic shift multiplexing and different transmission combs may be used. The cyclic shift for an antenna may be determined from a cyclic shift reference value. The cyclic shift determined for each antenna providing a maximum distance between cyclic shifts for the antennas transmitting SRS in a same WTRU-specific subframe. SRS transmissions from multiple antennas in the WTRU-specific subframe may be done in parallel. Methods for handling collisions between SRS and physical channels are presented. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268029 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A COMPONENT CARRIER DEACTIVATION TIMER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for a Component Carrier (CC) deactivation timer in a wireless communication system includes receiving a first Medium Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE) for CC Management to activate a first Secondary CC (SCC) that has been already activated by using a second MAC CE for CC Management. The method then includes restarting a deactivation timer for the first SCC based upon the first MAC CE for CC Management. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268030 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND PACKET FORWARDING METHOD - A radio communication apparatus including: a radio communication interface; and a processor; the processor being configured to detect a first radio communication apparatus and a second radio communication apparatus based on a piece of address information received by the radio communication interface; and to select one of a first layer and a second layer as a forwarding layer, in which a packet is forwarded to a next forwarding address according to the radio communication apparatus of the next forwarding address corresponding to a destination address of the packet. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268031 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF ENCODING AND DECODING CONTROL INFORMATION IN A MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT - Methods and apparatuses are provided for transmitting and receiving a MAC PDU. The MAC PDU including a MAC header, an extended header group and a payload is generated. The MAC PDU is transmitted to a receiving device. The extended header group includes a first field that indicates whether at least one extended header is included in the extended header group, and a second field that indicates a length of the extended header group. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268032 | METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY TRANSMITTING PHYSICAL CHANNEL IN MULTI-CARRIER AGGREGATION STATE TO SUPPORT BROADBAND - The present invention relates to a wireless connection system, and more specifically to a method for efficiently transmitting a control channel in a multi-carrier aggregation state. According to one aspect of the invention, a method for enabling a terminal to transmit data in a broadband wireless connection system that supports multiband comprises the steps of: receiving uplink acknowledgement information from a base station through a first downlink component carrier among plural downlink component carriers available in the terminal; transmitting data to the base station through an uplink resource indicated by the uplink acknowledge information; and receiving feedback information from the base station through the first control channel of the first downlink component carrier, wherein the feedback information indicates whether there is an error in the reception of the transmitted data. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268033 | METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS, CORRESPONDING SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method of arranging exchange of signals between user terminals in a cellular communication system and at least one base station. The base station includes a central unit and a plurality of remote units. The signals are exchanged between the central unit and the remote units as aggregated signals for plural user terminals. The signals are processed at the remote units as distinct signals each associated with a respective one of the plural user terminals. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268034 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CSG ID IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) Identifier (ID) in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes information about a number of one or more CSG IDs that the BS has and information about a list of the one or more CSG IDs in a Secondary-SuperFrame Header (S-SFH), and transmitting the S-SFH. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268035 | GATEWAY APPARATUS, GATEWAY METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A gateway apparatus receives a packet from the mobile high-speed network or from the IMS network, performs protocol conversion of the packet, converts an audio compression-encoding scheme, and outputs a resulting packet to the IMS network or the mobile circuit switched network, and receives a circuit switching protocol signal from the mobile circuit switched network or a packet from the IMS network to perform protocol conversion, converts an audio compression-encoding scheme, converts a resulting signal into a packet, and outputs the packet converted to the IMS network or the mobile high-speed network. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268036 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TUNNEL MANAGEMENT SERVER, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, TUNNEL SETUP METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system comprises a first communication device that transmits a setup request that causes a tunnel to be set up such that a first tunnel address of said first communication device and a second tunnel address of a second communication device are tunnel interfaces and a tunnel management server that receives said setup request from said first communication device and that, when said second communication device has a plurality of said second tunnel addresses, combines said plurality of second tunnel addresses and said first tunnel address and sets up a plurality of tunnels. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268037 | MULTI-ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MULTI-ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The wireless communication devices A and B determine the optimal diversity combining weight information that optimizes a diversity reception state at each antenna group A | 11-03-2011 |
20110268038 | SPACE DIVERSITY METHOD - A space diversity method is disclosed having the steps of: setting space-frequency block coder (SFBC) based on Alamouti coder as the minimum unit of space-time coder; orthogonally processing the SFBC to acquire the transmission signals of part of antenna ports in eight antenna ports, and cyclically delaying the acquired transmission signals of antenna ports to obtain the transmission signals of the rest antenna ports; transmitting the acquired transmission signal in the corresponding time and sub-carrier by each antenna port. A space diversity device is also provided which has an orthogonal processing module, a signal cyclic delay module and a transmitting module. With the method and device, the eight-antenna data transmission in the long time evolution (LTE) advanced system is achieved, and better diversity gain is acquired without adding extra pilot overhead. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268039 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING SERVICE ROAMING - The present invention discloses a method for implementing service roaming. The method includes: receiving a roaming registration request that includes a service identifier (ID); obtaining a physical access address of a service according to the service ID, and generating and storing service registration route information that includes the service ID and the physical access address of the service; obtaining an address of a home service router or a service router to which the service belongs before the service roams, and sending a roaming notification message to the home service router or the service router to which the service belongs before the service roams. In this way, a user may access the service, thus the user experience and the universality of services created by the user are improved. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268040 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA VIA MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving data via a MAC protocol in a mobile communication system. The method includes inputting an SDU including transmission data through a logical channel and generating a first PDU that includes the SDU without including multiplexing information for identification of the logical channel, by a first transmission entity; acquiring the first PDU and generating a second PDU including the first PDU in a payload of the second PDU, by a second transmission entity that operates between the first transmission entity and a physical layer; inserting the multiplexing information for identification of the logical channel corresponding to the first PDU into header information of the second PDU; and transmitting the second PDU through the physical layer. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268041 | LINK ADAPTATION AND ANTENNA SELECTION IN COOPERATIVE MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEMS - Embodiments of the present invention provide techniques for applying link adaptation and antenna selection in cooperative multiple access systems where multiple user devices act cooperatively to communicate with a network access station through a MIMO channel. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268042 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AVOIDING HANGING PDP CONTEXTS - A method and system for avoiding hanging Packet Data Protocol (PDP) contexts in a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) network. A time-out period is included in a request message to create a PDP context. The request message is transmitted from a first GPRS Support Node (GSN) to a second GSN. The second GSN receives the request message and transmits a response message to the first GSN. If the second GSN is unable to create the PDP context within the time-out period, the response message informs the first GSN that creation of the PDP context has been aborted. A Network Service Access Point Identifier (NSAPI) may be included in the response message so that the first GSN may request the second GSN to delete the request for creating the PDP context after a N3-T3 timeout of the first GSN has expired. | 11-03-2011 |
20110274033 | Using Secondary Channel to Activate Primary Channel for Data, Video, and Voice Communication - A method is provided so mobile devices can communicate through their wireless data services to a public computer network, which are normally deactivated when not in use. A first device calls a second device over a wireless voice service. The first device activates its wireless data service and sends a request to communicate with the second device to a server on the public computer network. Without answering the voice call, the second device determines an ID of the first device. The second device then activates its wireless data service and sends a query to the server to determine if the first device desires to communicate over the public computer network. The server responds to the request and the query by setting up a network connection between the first and the second device over the public computer network so they can exchange data packets. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274034 | CONNECTING A CIRCUIT-SWITCHED WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK TO AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A network device performs a delayed registration in connection with phone call setup, if the network device does not know a phone number of a user in question at the time of updating the location updating. In addition, the network device performs user authentication and creates and maintains an encrypted and secure network connection between the network device and an IP multimedia subsystem by using data security mechanisms of a terminal of the IP multimedia subsystem and the authentication and data security parameters of the terminal received from the IP multimedia subsystem. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274035 | Routing to the Access Layer to Support Mobility of Internet Protocol Devices - Techniques are provided for seamless integration of wired and wireless functionality packet forwarding in network. A plurality of access switches are provided in each of a plurality of mobility sub-domains that are part of a mobility domain of a network. Each access switch serves one or more Internet Protocol (IP) subnets, each comprising a plurality of IP addresses. An access switch obtains an IP address for a wireless device according to the one or more IP subnets that the access switch serves. The access switch sends an association advertisement message to indicate the IP address of the wireless device and to enable other access switches and routers to compute a path to the wireless device. When a wireless device obtains an IP address, it can keep the same IP address as it roams in the mobility domain. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274036 | Maintaining Point of Presence at Tunneling Endpoint for Roaming Clients in Distributed Wireless Controller System - Techniques are provided to support roaming of wireless devices in a network such that the wireless devices can keep their Internet Protocol (IP) addresses as they roam within and across mobility sub-domains. When a wireless device roams from one access switch to another access switch, a tunneling endpoint apparatus in the wireless device's home mobility sub-domain is configured to serve as the point of presence for the roamed wireless device. Traffic for the roamed wireless device is tunneled from the access switch where the wireless device has roamed (where it is currently attached) to the tunneling endpoint apparatus. When the wireless device roams across mobility sub-domains, then traffic is tunneled from the access switch where the wireless device is currently attached to the tunneling endpoint apparatus in that mobility sub-domain (called a “foreign” mobility sub-domain) to the tunneling endpoint apparatus in the wireless device's home mobility sub-domain. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274037 | Hierarchical Control Signaling for Mobile Clients in Distributed Wireless Controller System - A system and method are provided for a hierarchical distributed control architecture to support roaming of wireless client devices. A plurality of access switches are provided and configured to serve one or more Internet Protocol (IP) subnets that comprises a plurality of IP addresses. The plurality of access switches are arranged in switch peer groups such that each access switch within a given switch peer group is configured to store information about other access switches in that switch peer group and about locations of wireless client devices that are associated with any wireless access point on any access switch in the switch peer group. The plurality of access switches are further grouped into a corresponding one of a plurality of mobility sub-domains each comprising a plurality of switch peer groups. A plurality of controller devices are provided, each configured to control access switches in a corresponding mobility sub-domain. Each controller device stores information about the plurality of access switches within its mobility sub-domain and about locations of wireless client devices at access switches in its mobility sub-domain. A central controller device is provided and configured to communicate with the plurality of controller devices for the respective mobility sub-domains. The central controller device is configured to store information about locations of wireless client devices in the mobility sub-domains. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274038 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING UNNECESSARY BEARER ESTABLISHMENT IN CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate avoiding establishment of unnecessary radio bearers in circuit switched fallback (CSFB). A CSFB procedure related to a device can be detected from receiving an extended service request or a forward relocation request, or from determining that an evolved packet system (EPS) is insufficient to handle a circuit switched voice call, and/or the like. Based at least in part on detecting the CSFB, establishment of radio bearers for inactive EPS bearers can be avoided. Where the device is in idle mode before CSFB, avoiding establishment of radio bearers can include avoiding establishment of all data radio bearers for the device. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274039 | COMMUNICATION METHOD OF HUB AND TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING TERMINAL INCLUDED IN VIRTUAL GROUP - Provided is a communication method of a hub that selects a transmission route from the hub to a receiving terminal of a receiving virtual group based on interface information about at least one interface which is available for use by the receiving terminal and is received from the receiving terminal and interface information about at least one interface which is available for use by a transmitting terminal of a transmitting virtual group and is received from the transmitting terminal. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274040 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING UPLINK RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL TRANSMISSION - Method and apparatus are disclosed for optimizing Random Access Channel (RACH) transmissions from wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) for multiple transmissions. A WTRU may initiate uplink transmission for a random access procedure using a configured time resource such that the uplink resources may be time shared by a plurality of WTRUs. The transmission time may be calculated on an absolute or relative basis. A backoff time may be applied before starting the uplink transmission. The backoff time may be WTRU-specific, WTRU group-specific, specified per access class and may be determined based on a priority basis. A scaling factor may be applied to the backoff time. A contention free allocation method may be used to determine the appropriate resource. The data may be transmitted with and without a preamble. The WTRUs may include machine type communication devices and may be grouped in accordance with a number of factors or characteristics. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274041 | DYNAMIC PEER DISCOVERY AND INTER-UNIT TRANSFER (IUT) USING MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL (MIP) - Methods and systems for a mobile node of a communication network to use mobile internet protocol (MIP) to query a node, such as a home agent (HA) of the communication network to obtain information regarding other nodes that may be registered with the same node of the network, such as the HA, or nodes that may be registered with the same HoA. Also, a node of a communication network, such as a HA, may send to registered nodes of the communication network via MIP un-requested information regarding nodes that may be registered with the HA, or nodes that may be registered with the same HoA. A node of the communication network may initiate an inter-unit transfer (IUT) to one or more other nodes of the communication network using the information regarding nodes that may be registered with the HA or registered with the same HoA. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274042 | REDUCING PROTOCOL OVERHEAD IN SINGLE-BLOCK PACKET ACCESS PROCEDURES - Methods and techniques for reducing both signaling and data traffic related to machine-type communication devices (MTC) in a GPRS communication network are disclosed. Optimized MTC messages from an MTC device are transmitted using Single-Block Packet Access procedures and restored by SGSNs based on a PDP context established during the mobile station's GPRS attach procedure. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274043 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INDICATING THE TRANSMISSION MODE FOR UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION - A base station includes a transmit path circuitry to select one of a first UCI multiplexing method that allows a subscriber station to simultaneously transmit PUSCH and PUCCH and a second UCI multiplexing method that does not allow the subscriber station to simultaneously transmit PUSCH and PUCCH. The transmit path circuitry also transmits a higher layer signal indicating the one selected UCI multiplexing method, and transmits one or more uplink grants. Each of the uplink grants schedules a PUSCH in an UL CC for a subframe n, and each of the uplink grants carries a CQI request. The base station also includes a receive path circuitry to receive an aperiodic CSI report on the PUSCH in the uplink component carrier i when only one of the uplink grants scheduling a PUSCH in an uplink component carrier i carries a CQI request having a value from a set of values. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274044 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF REPORTING AMOUNT OF INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of reporting an amount of information in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment reports a first part indicating that an amount of information is larger than a specific value, and reports a second part indicating the amount of the information. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274045 | Method of Controlling Packet Switched Data Transmission and Related Communication Device - A method of controlling packet switched data transmission functionality for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises disabling the packet switched data transmission functionality, and being allowed to initiate a telephony service via a circuit switched fallback functionality or via an internet protocol multimedia subsystem signaling even when the packet switched data transmission functionality is disabled. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274046 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICES IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in mobile radio telecommunications for enabling access to Circuit Switched (CS) services for a user equipment (UE) that is connected to a LTE/SAE (Long Term Evolution/System Architecture Evolution) network. The UE's current position is stored in a LTE position format in the LTE network or in the SAE network. The invention provides steps and means for transforming the UE's position in LTE format to position information in CS format for the UE, steps and means for registering the UE in the CS network using said transformed position information, and steps and means for establishing access to CS services provided by said CS network. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274047 | Method for Receiving a Signal at a User Equipment (UE) in a Wireless Communication System - A method of receiving a signal at a user equipment (UE) from at least two cells in wireless communication system is disclosed. Receiving module may receive data and at least one reference signal from a CoMP (Coordinated Multi-Point) set including at least two cells. Decoding module may decode the received data and the received at least one reference signal. In this case, a power level of the data is same as a power level of the at least one reference signal, or a power ratio between the data and the at least one reference signal is a scaled value. Also, the power level of the data and the at least one reference signal are same for each of the at least two cells. A power ratio between the data and the at least one reference signal is a same scaled value for each of the at least two cells. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274048 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING FRAMES IN A MESH NETWORK, MESH DEVICE AND MESH NETWORK THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting frames from a transmitting mesh device to a receiving mesh device in a mesh network, comprising: storing frames received in the transmitting mesh device from a source mesh device and intended for a destination mesh device in a relay queue, the source mesh device and the destination mesh device being different from the transmitting device, storing frames generated by the transmitting mesh device in a local queue, different from the relay queue, selecting a frame from the relay queue or local queue based on a predetermined scheduling strategy, -transmitting the selected frame to the receiving mesh device. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274049 | Method and A Mobile Terminal For Roaming in a Mobile Network - The invention comprises a method for a mobile terminal ( | 11-10-2011 |
20110274050 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BASE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication base station apparatus which reduces the power consumed by UE in communication using VoIP when in a silent state; and a wireless communication terminal device and wireless communication method of the same. A residual amount control unit ( | 11-10-2011 |
20110274051 | DISTRIBUTION OF ACCESS CONTROL INFORMATION IN A NETWORK - Methods and systems described herein may provide for the updating, maintenance, and/or transference of a CSG White List that is stored on a user equipment. The CSG White List may be implemented to store information related to the access of CSG cells, such as, for example, femto cells. Additionally, methods and systems described herein may provide for the updating, maintenance, and/or transference of an access control database. The access control database may be stored in one or multiple devices in a communication system. The access control database may be implemented to store information regarding home nodes and which user equipment is allowed to access the femto cell or CSG cell provided by each home node. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274052 | METHOD OF SPACE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS COMMUNICATION USING USER COOPERATION AND SYSTEM OF ENABLING THE METHOD - A communication device using user cooperation is provided with a channel information reception unit to receive channel information from a plurality of member terminals within the same group, the channel information being associated with a radio channel formed between the plurality of member terminals and a base station; a member terminal selection unit to select at least one active member terminal from among the plurality of member terminals based on the channel information; and a selection information transmission unit to transmit selection information to the base station, the selection information being associated with a radio channel formed between the at least one active member terminal and the base station. | 11-10-2011 |
20110280179 | Method And Apparatus For Access Selection In A Communication Network - The invention relates to a method for selecting ( | 11-17-2011 |
20110280180 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO AUTHENTICATE REQUESTS FOR NETWORK CAPABILITIES FOR CONNECTING TO AN ACCESS NETWORK - Example methods and apparatus to authenticate requests for network capabilities for connecting to an access network are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves receiving a request at a first access network. The request requests network connectivity information for connecting a wireless terminal to a second access network. The example method also involves encapsulating the request in an authentication frame. The authentication frame indicates the request as a white space protocol frame. The authentication frame is sent to a database addressed in the request. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280181 | CYCLIC PREFIX FOR NON-CONTIGUOUS SIGNAL TRANSMISSION - Transmitted signals are modified to facilitate the emulation of circular convolution in non-contiguous transmission environments. These modified signals may be derived from well-known signature sequences. In an exemplary method, a tail portion of a final segment of a base signal is prefixed to an initial segment of the base signal, to form a first transmit segment. One or more additional transmit segments are formed by prefixing, to each of the one or more segments of the base signal other than the initial segment, a tail portion of the immediately preceding segment of the base signal. The transmit segments so formed are transmitted in respective ones of the plurality of non-contiguous transmit-time intervals. Corresponding methods for receiving the transmitted segments and reconstructing the base signal are also described, as are corresponding transmitting and receiving apparatuses. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280182 | PACKET TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for simultaneously transmitting packets to one or more users in a wireless communication system includes: generating the packets which include length information and are to be transmitted to the one or more users; and simultaneously transmitting the generated packets to the one or more users. The length information includes information representing a unit of the length information and information representing lengths of the packets according to the unit. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280183 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING REVERSE LINK CQI REPORTING MODES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for setting Reverse Link CQI Reporting Modes in an access terminal is provided, comprising determining a value for CQIReportingMode received as a parameter in a transmitted message and setting the reverse link CQI reporting mode of the access terminal based on CQIReportingMode value. The CQIReportingMode value is indicative of a reporting mode selected from a plurality of reporting modes. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280184 | MTC SERVICE ACTIVATION - An MTC device activates an MTC service by first performing an MTC device attachment procedure to attach to a mobile communication network. After the MTC device is attached to the mobile communication network, the MTC device activates a packet data protocol context for the MTC device with the mobile communication network. After the packet data protocol context is activated, the MTC device activates an MTC service with an MTC server. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280185 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PARALLEL DE-INTERLEAVING OF LTE INTERLEAVED DATA - A wireless communication signal in Long Term Evolution (LTE) may be interleaved in a manner which permits a partitioning of a received inter-column bit-reversed interleaved code block for improved de-interleaving. The code block may be divided into equal subportions which may be simultaneously de-interleaved both forward and backward, and in parallel with other subportions. An even number of subportions may be provided. Dividing a received code block in this manner may improve de-interleaving performance. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280186 | RATE MATCHING DEVICE - In rate matching and interleaving in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, use of a circular buffer following interleaving may be avoided by reading out interleaved data directly from the interleaver in a manner which matches an expected output from a circular buffer. The read out data may be rate matched according to instructions from upper layers. The order in which the data is read out is configured to match the expected rate matched output from a circular buffer. In this manner use of a circular buffer may be avoided, resulting in saved memory costs. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280187 | Provision of an end-to-end connection from a terminal unit to a network - There is provided a method for providing at least one packet-oriented end-to-end connection from a terminal unit to another network via at least one connection in a mobile telecommunications network. A set-up of the connection includes an assignment of an address for addressing data packets to the terminal unit. The method comprises transferring, via a modem that is connected to the mobile telecommunications network via an air interface, the address to the terminal unit. The method also comprises forwarding data packets of the end-to-end connection that have been received from the mobile telecommunications network to the terminal unit, the data packets being forwarded in an association with the connection. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280188 | PRE-CODING METHOD FOR SPATIAL MULTIPLEXING IN MULTIPLE INPUT AND OUTPUT SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a pre-coding method for spatial multiplexing, comprising the steps of: performing a beam search for beam forming with a receiver device equipped with multiple antennas to perform pre-coding for spatial multiplexing in a transmitter device equipped with multiple antennas; transmitting a first packet including at least one or more training sequences to the receiver device after completion of said beam search; receiving, from the receiver device, a second packet including feedback information for pre-coding, determined in the receiver device by using the training sequences; and performing pre-coding for spatial multiplexing, onto the data stream to be transmitted to the receiver device, by using the pre-coding matrix calculated on the basis of the feedback information. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280189 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To keep PAPR low even when the same physical cell ID is used in each component carrier, a base station apparatus | 11-17-2011 |
20110280190 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Broadcast data is divided into a plurality of broadcast channels. Any of the plurality of broadcast channels is placed on a predetermined subcarrier in each of a plurality of main bands such that the placed broadcast channels differ from each other in a same frame and are consecutive in a predetermined order in a frame direction. The subcarriers are converted into a transmit RF signal and the transmit RF signal is transmitted. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280191 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING AN HRPD SIGNAL LINK | 11-17-2011 |
20110280192 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CHARGING OF PACKET DATA SERVICE - A method for controlling the charging of packet data service is disclosed, which includes: monitoring a number of event triggers; and when one of the event triggers is met, a Traffic Plane Function (TPF) requesting charging rules from a Charging Rule Function (CRF). In the preferred embodiments of the preferred embodiments of the present invention, the event triggers, which the TPF is required for request charging rules from the CRF according to are set by the CRF and then are provided to the TPF. Charging-relevant input information is provided in the request, based on which the CRF determines proper charging rules and sends the determined charging rules to the TPF. In this way, the timing that the TPF requests charging rules from the CRF becomes controllable, and redundant information caused by the unnecessary charging rule from the TPF becomes avoidable, which enables interaction between the TPF and the CRF more effective and the charging control of packet data service reasonable and perfect. | 11-17-2011 |
20110286384 | Method and apparatus for providing local breakout in a mobile network - There is provided a Local Breakout Gateway node for use in a hierarchical mobile network. The node comprises a database, which stores a plurality of Local Breakout Policy rules. The node further comprises a receiver for receiving an IP packet from a Mobile Node attached to the network at which the node is located, the network being a visited network for the Mobile Node. The node further comprises means for selecting a Local Breakout Policy from the plurality of Local Breakout Policy rules, and means to apply the selected Local Breakout Policy to the received IP packet. The node further comprises a Network Address translation function to apply a Network Address Translation to the received IP packet, and a transmitter for sending the IP packet to a destination according to the applied Local Breakout Policy. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286385 | Methods and Systems for Communications - There is provided a method and system for making a call from a first communications device at any location to a recipient with a second communications device by inputting a contact number of the recipient into the first communications device, selecting a communications mode on the first device, wherein at least one of the first communications device and the second communications device operate using at least one data channel, and wherein a caller makes the call in a manner similar to “dial-and-connect” phone calls. There is also provided a method and system for sending at least one message from a first communications device at any location to a recipient with a second communication device by inputting a contact number of the recipient into the first communications device when sending the at least one message, transmitting the contact number and the at least one message to a server through at least one data channel: storing the at least one message at the server; the server contacting the second communications device; and either the second communications device drawing the at least one message from the server through at least one data channel, or the server transmitting the at least one message to the second communications device, wherein the messenger sends the at least one message in a manner similar to “compose-and-send” messaging. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286386 | Reliable Transfer of Time Stamped Multichannel Data Over A Lossy Mesh Network - System and method for transmitting data over a wireless medium. A wireless sensor node receives data from at least one sensor, where the data include a plurality of data sets. For each data set: the wireless sensor node compares the size of the data set with a specified packet size, and if the size of the data set exceeds the specified packet size, transmits a plurality of packets containing respective portions of the data set to a gateway device over a wireless medium. If the size of the data set does not exceed the specified packet size, then a packet containing the data set is transmitted to the gateway device over the wireless medium. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286387 | METHOD TO CONTROL MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARERS IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method to control multiple radio access bearers is performed at a mobile wireless communication device when the mobile wireless communication device is connected to a radio network subsystem in a wireless communication network by first and second bidirectional radio access bearers. The mobile wireless communication device transmits a data packet on an uplink of the first bidirectional radio access bearer to the radio network subsystem. When the data packet is not correctly received by the radio network subsystem, the mobile wireless communication device retransmits the data packet repeatedly. After N retransmissions of the data packet, the mobile wireless communication device releases the first bidirectional radio access bearer while maintaining the second bidirectional radio access bearer. The first bidirectional radio access bearer provides a channel to transport packet switched data, and the second bidirectional radio access bearer provides a channel to transport circuit switched data. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286388 | Method for Operating a Mobile Wireless Network - A method of operating a mobile wireless network is described to ensure proper function of protocol entities during the transmission of data units between two wireless stations of the mobile wireless network. In this case, user data is assembled by a first convergence protocol layer of the first wireless station into at least one first data unit, particularly a packet data unit, before transmission to a second convergence protocol layer of a second wireless station, particularly on the same protocol level, with the user data being supplied to the first convergence protocol layer by at least one user in a network layer. At least one protocol entity of the first convergence protocol layer is configured as a function of a configuration request received by the second wireless station, in order to form the at least one first data unit from the data received from the at least one user and to transmit it through a carrier to a link control layer. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286389 | NETWORK REGISTRATION PROCEDURES - A method of communication involves sending a request from a first network entity (e.g., a femto convergence server) to a second network entity (e.g., a home subscriber server) for user data relating to an access point, receiving a response to the request, wherein the response identifies at least one application server, and sending registration status information to the identified at least one application server. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286390 | WIRELESS IMAGE TRANSMITTING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA THEREOF - A wireless image transmitting apparatus includes an image processing unit, a wireless bridging module, and a wireless local area network module. The wireless bridging module includes a network switch and a network port. The network switch is in signal communication with the network port and the image processing unit. The WLAN module is in signal communication with the network switch. The WLAN module uses a first type of packet and a first band to transmit a signal from the image processing unit and uses a second type of packet and a second band to transmit a signal from the network port. A method for transmitting data in a wireless image transmitting apparatus is also disclosed. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286391 | QOS-BASED POWER CONTROL IN AGGREGATED CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A user equipment (UE) is configured for carrier aggregation in a wireless communication system. The UE selects control information to be transmitted in an uplink control channel format in a component carrier of two or more component carriers, where the control information includes information types associated with different information reliability requirements. The UE generates an open-loop power control parameter and/or a closed-loop power control parameter based on the information types. The UE transmits the control information in the uplink control channel format at a power level determined by the open-loop power control parameter and/or the closed-loop power control parameter. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286392 | Providing Access to Information of Multiple Types Via Coordination of Distinct Information Services - Techniques are described for providing users of client devices with coordinated access to information and/or functionality of multiple types, such as by using multiple types of connections to multiple information services of distinct types that exchange context information related to activities of the users and/or clients. The client devices can be, for example, wireless devices with multiple distinct modes (e.g., voice and data modes) for different types of connections with different types of servers (e.g., voice servers and data servers). In some situations, coordination between different servers allows multiple distinct interaction sessions of different types with different servers to remain synchronized or otherwise coordinated over time as the user performs interactions via the different sessions. This abstract is provided to comply with rules requiring an abstract, and is not intended to be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286393 | COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A communications device includes a first circuit and a second circuit. The first circuit includes a wired medium interface circuit that is configured to, in use, communicate data over a wired medium. The second circuit includes a wireless medium interface circuit that is configured to, in use, communicate data over a wireless medium. A destination address controller is included in the first circuit and is operative to determine to which of a plurality of destination addresses at a communications device data is to be communicated from the second circuit. The communications device can have individual visibility of a plurality of destination addresses (e.g. for respective devices) when data is received or transmitted by the wireless medium interface circuit (second circuit). | 11-24-2011 |
20110286394 | PROTECTION AGAINST UNSOLICITED COMMUNICATION FOR INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A protection against an unsolicited communication for an IMS (PUCI) system includes a call session control function (CSCF), and a plurality of PUCE application servers. The PUCI application servers make an evaluation as to whether a communication received from the user equipment is an unsolicited communication; the CSCF makes a decision on routing toward the PUCI application servers based on the evaluation; then, the PUCI application servers execute the routing based on the decision. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286395 | RADIO NETWORK AND A METHOD FOR OPERATING A RADIO NETWORK - A radio network allows a flexible distribution of data flows between a mobile station and a mobility anchor of the network over different interfaces. Data flows are routed between at least one mobile station and a mobility anchor of the network. The mobile station can connect to the mobility anchor using multiple network interfaces simultaneously, the radio network including an application function capable of processing and/or analyzing information about routing policies contained in a signalling received from a mobile station, which is able to push or signal the processed and/or analyzed information from the application function to an entity that can enforce routing policies to forward the data flows to one or more selected interfaces and which is able to signal routing policies received from the network to the mobile station. Further, an according method for operating a radio network, especially for routing data flows within the network, is disclosed. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286396 | Proxy Mobile IPv6 Support in Residential Networks - Apparatus for providing a gateway between a residential network and a Wide Area Network including a packet core network of a cellular telecommunication system. The apparatus comprises an IP router for routing IP packets between a user equipment attached to the residential network, and said Wide Area Network. A detector is employed to detect attachment of user equipment to said packet core network, whilst a tunnel establishment unit is configured, upon detection of attachment of a user equipment to said packet core network by said detector, to establish an IP packet tunnel between itself and a Broadband Network Gateway of said packet core network. Thereafter, said IP router is configured to route IP packets to and from the attached user equipment via said IP tunnel. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286397 | WIRELESS DEVICE IN MULTICARRIER SYSTEM - A wireless device and method for a multiple carrier system are provided. The wireless device comprises a carrier management unit for determining at least one of a plurality of carriers as a reference carrier for monitoring a control channel and a control channel unit for monitoring the control channel over the reference carrier, wherein the carrier management unit switches the reference carrier to at least one of remaining carriers of the plurality of carriers. Accordingly, control channel traffic can be prevented from concentrating on a particular carrier, and a diversity gain can be achieved. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286398 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM THAT SUPPORTS COORDINATED MULTI-POINT (COMP) INCLUDING MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION POINTS - The present system relates to a method for transmitting control information in a wireless communications system that supports coordinated multi-point (CoMP) including N (N>1) transmission points. The method comprises: generating control information for downlink transmission of the N transmission points; and transmitting the generated control information to a user device, wherein the control information contains a control information region for transmission of intrinsic control information on a reference transmission point among the N transmission points, and N−1 control information regions for transmission of intrinsic control information on the N−1 transmission points. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286399 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK DATA TRANSMISSION - Device and method to recognize and report the source of interference relate to data transmission between a user terminal and a base station, wherein a pilot signal is transmitted from all antenna assemblies of the user terminal simultaneously, said pilot signals from the user terminal are received by the base station, wherein the base station sends a power control command to the user terminal, corresponding to each of the pilot signals, and wherein the user terminal chooses on receipt of the power control commands, which antenna assembly of the user terminal is used to transmit the next uplink data. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286400 | METHOD FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING CLOCK, APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CLOCK - A method for sending and receiving a clock and an apparatus for transmitting the clock. Several kinds of clocks are encoded and framed at a sending port so that the clocks needed by all modes of base stations are transmitted in one pair of interconnecting lines. A receiving port can precisely recover the needed clock out. This not only reduces the number of interconnecting lines on the backboard and improves flexibility, but also avoids that the clock decoded out by the receiving port might be imprecise. | 11-24-2011 |
20110292868 | Method and Apparatus for Increasing the Capacity and Coverage of a Multi-Sector, Omni Site - A base station unit of a multi-sector omni-radio base station sends different transmit signals to first and second splitters, via first and second feeders, respectively, according to transmit diversity, spatial multiplexing, or both. The first splitter splits the transmit signal sent thereto amongst sector antennas in a first set of sector antennas, and the second splitter splits the transmit signal sent thereto among sector antennas in a second set of sector antennas. These first and second sets provide coverage for some of the same sectors of a geographic area. Finally, first and second combiners combine signals received by the sector antennas in the first or second set, respectively, at least one of those signals having first been converted to a different frequency, and send the resulting composite signal to the base station unit, via the first or second feeder, respectively. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292869 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING AND CONTROL POWER - An improved system for power monitoring and control is an aftermarket method for improving power monitoring and control in end-user environments such as offices and homes. The disclosed is a wirelessly connected panel that monitors and/or controls power passed through a power interface and is intrinsically paired with that interface. The system uses an ultra low power panel that is associated with its power interface. The system can be detached and located at a distant remote location. The radio link is used to maintain control automatically paired with the power interface connection it is physically associated with. The panel and system use a hopping meshed radio network to insure full range of coverage within a building. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292870 | Utilizing Emergency Procedures to Determine Location Information of a Voice Over Internet Protocol Device - Described are methods and apparatuses, including computer program products for utilizing emergency procedures to determine location information for a Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) device. A wireless access gateway (WAG) determines location information of the VOIP device and stores the location information. A request for a location of the VOIP device from a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) is received by the WAG. The WAG translates the stored location information into a format used by the MSC to receive location information from a Radio Access Network (RAN). The WAG provides the translated location information to the MSC. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292871 | Wireless Attachment To Multiple Radio Access Networks At The Same Time - Wireless communication within an area covered by multiple radio access networks may be accomplished where a user equipment (UE) is configured for first and second radio access networks. The UE attaches to the first radio access network, and, while maintaining the attachment to the first radio access network, also attaches to the second radio access network. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292872 | Method for Operating a Mobile Wireless Network - A method of operating a mobile wireless network is described to ensure proper function of protocol entities during the transmission of data units between two wireless stations of the mobile wireless network. In this case, user data is assembled by a first convergence protocol layer of the first wireless station into at least one first data unit, particularly a packet data unit, before transmission to a second convergence protocol layer of a second wireless station, particularly on the same protocol level, with the user data being supplied to the first convergence protocol layer by at least one user in a network layer. At least one protocol entity of the first convergence protocol layer is configured as a function of a configuration request received by the second wireless station, in order to form the at least one first data unit from the data received from the at least one user and to transmit it through a carrier to a link control layer. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292873 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING BUFFER STATUS REPORTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for handling buffer status reporting in a wireless communication system includes providing a first buffer size level table having a first maximum buffer size value, and providing a second buffer size level table having a second maximum buffer size value greater than the first maximum buffer size value. The method includes using the second buffer size level table when carrier aggregation (CA) is configured with more than one UL carrier component (CC) or when more than one UL CC is activated. To indicate whether to use the second buffer size level table or the first buffer size level table, an indication can be used in one of a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message, a Medium Access Control (MAC) Control Element or a corresponding subheader of the MAC Control Element. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292874 | POWER HEADROOM REPORTING FOR MULTICARRIER LTE SYSTEMS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus maintains at least one PHR trigger for triggering communication of a PHR for a plurality of component carriers. In addition, the apparatus communicates the PHR for at least one of the component carriers upon the at least one PHR trigger being triggered. The communicated PHR may be an aggregated PHR that includes power headroom information on the PCC and activated SCCs. The communicated PHR may further include an index associating information in the PHR to a corresponding component carrier. The communicated PHR may further include information indicating use of a PUSCH reference for computing the PHR for the at least one of the component carriers on which there is no PUSCH transmission. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292875 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PHYSICAL BROADCAST CHANNEL (PBCH) DECODING FOR MULTIPLE CELLS - A method of wireless communication includes generating a list of cells for physical broadcast channel (PBCH) decoding. The method also includes allocating memory for decoding and cancelling a subset of cells from the generated cell list. The method further includes storing information related to subsets of cells from the generated list in the allocated memory during different time periods. The allocated memory is sufficient for attempting, at each time period, decoding of each subset of cells and cancelling of decoded cells in each subset. The method further includes cycling through the generated cell list by processing each subset of the cell list during the different time periods. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292876 | DYNAMIC MESH NETWORKS - In an embodiment, a wireless data exchange network includes a wireless device (WD) operating under a wireless network communications protocol, a wireless access point (AP), operatively linked to the WD and a wired network, and operating under the wireless network communications protocol, and a wireless mobile device (WMD) capable of operatively linking with the WD and the AP, and operating under the network communications protocol. In another embodiment, a method for dynamically establishing a wireless data link between the WD and the AP wherein the WMD functions as a bridge there between, where the method may include determining the state of the data exchange link between the WD and the AP, selectively receiving and retransmitting data, by the WMD, from the WD to the AP and from the AP to the WD; and maintaining the wireless network communications protocol of the WMD during reception and retransmission of data between itself and the WD or the AP. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292877 | METHOD FOR CHANGING GAN CONTROLLER WITH WHICH A TERMINAL IS REGISTERED BASED ON LOCATION OF THE TERMINAL WHICH IS MOVING - The present invention relates to a mobile communication network, and more particularly to a method for the allocation and registration of a suitable generic access network (GAN) controller for the location of a terminal when the terminal moves in the mobile communication network. The mobile communication network comprises: a terminal, which transmits the location information thereof to the mobile communication network, makes a new request for GAN controller information under instructions from the mobile communication network and performs GAN registration again based on the GAN controller information provided from the mobile communication network; a mobility management entity, which receives a location registration request from the terminal, changes WCDMA/GSM location information from the location information of the terminal in the current LTE service area and sends the changed information to the terminal, instructs the terminal to do GAN re-registration and notifies the GAN controller of the change in the location information of the terminal; and the GAN controller, which processes the GAN registration from the terminal and assigns suitable GAN control information for the current location of the terminal. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292878 | GATEWAY APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD - A gateway apparatus receives a call control signal and/or a packet that has voice data stored therein in a predetermined protocol or payload format from an access point, converts a protocol of the call control signal and/or a protocol or payload format of the packet into a circuit switched protocol used when an RNC connects to the circuit switching equipment for output to the circuit switching equipment, receives a call processing signal that uses the protocol as that used when the circuit switching equipment outputs to the RNC and a voice signal that uses the same protocol, converts protocol of the call processing signal and/or the voice signal for output to the access point. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292879 | PREFIX ALLOCATION METHOD, NETWORK SYSTEM, AND LOCAL MOBILITY ANCHOR - The present disclosure relates to the mobile communication field and discloses a prefix allocation method, a network system, and a Local Mobility Anchor (LMA). With the prefix allocation method, the network system and the LMA provided in the present disclosure, the problem that a shared prefix cannot be allocated to a multi-interface (IF) Mobile Node (MN) is solved. The prefix allocation method includes: receiving a registration request for a second IF of the MN from a Mobile Access Gateway (MAG); obtaining a first Home Network Prefix (HNP) that is already allocated to a first interface (IF) of the MN; and allocating the first HNP shared with the first IF to the second IF. The LMA obtains the first HNP that is already allocated to the first IF and allocates the first HNP to the second IF. In this way, a shared prefix is allocated to the multi-IF enabled MN. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292880 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GATING TRANSMISSION OF A DATA RATE CONTROL CHANNEL IN AN HDR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for communicating with a network by a terminal in a wireless communication system, wherein the terminal receives, from the network, signaling information representing a transmission period and a time offset for uplink transmission of a feedback information, and determines a time to transmit the feedback information based on the transmission period and the time offset. The terminal transmits the feedback information to the network based on the determined time. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292881 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus in a multi-carrier cellular wireless network with random access improve receiving reliability and reduce interference of uplink signals of a random access, while improving the detection performance of a base station receiver by employing specifically configured ranging signals. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292882 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA TO A MOBILE DEVICE USING PLURAL ACCESS POINTS - A system and method for providing connectivity between mobile devices and access points of a network without redundant solicitation of communication by the mobile device at each access point is described. The method involves receiving a data packet at a first access point in a control group; transmitting the data packet from the first access point to the mobile device; determining if the mobile device acknowledges receipt of the data packet; responsive to determining that the mobile device failed to acknowledge receipt of the data packet, forwarding the data packet to a second access point; and transmitting the data packet from the second access point to the mobile device. | 12-01-2011 |
20110299454 | APPLICATION-PROXY SUPPORT OVER A WIRELESS LINK - Application proxy support over a wireless link between a mobile device and a wireless node is disclosed. Application proxy support is configured to conserve energy and resources and is configured to mitigate delays in a communication environment. Application proxy support can be associated with a wireless node, such as a femto cell, which can provide a coarse-grain wireless application proxy support that can utilize various criteria to buffer data and determine how long to delay delivery of data. Femto cell can provide a fine-grain wireless application proxy that runs application proxies for each mobile device for one or more applications associated with mobile device. The proxy can determine whether to buffer and forward received data to mobile device. The wireless application proxy can respond to network on behalf of mobile device. The proxy can wake up mobile device upon arrival of a significant event associated with a proxied application. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299455 | COMPRESSING DATA IN A WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK - A first node receives aggregated compressed data and unaggregated data from a second node in a wireless multi-hop network. The first node compresses its own collected data based on the received unaggregated data. The first node aggregates its own compressed data with the aggregated compressed data received from the second node. The first node forwards an unaggregated version of its own collected data along with aggregated compressed data to a next hop in the wireless multi-hop network. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299456 | ACTIVE ANTENNA ARRAY AND METHOD FOR RELAYING RADIO SIGNALS - The present disclosure teaches an active antenna array for a mobile communications network. The active antenna array comprises a base band unit, a plurality of transceiver units terminated by at least one antenna element; and at least one link. The link couples the individual ones of the plurality of transceiver units to the base band unit. The link is a digital link and is adapted to relay a payload signal at a selectable payload rate. The digital link is further adapted to relay a timing signal at a fixed timing rate, when the timing signal is embedded in the payload at a selectable payload rate. The present disclosure further teaches a method for relaying radio signals and a computer program for manufacturing the active antenna array and for executing the method. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299457 | DISTRIBUTED RECEPTION WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEM - An apparatus is provided that includes a plurality of portable wireless transmitter units, a plurality of digital receiver modules that alternate transmitting wireless synchronization pulses and that receive information from the plurality of transmitter units synchronized to the synchronization pulses, a receiver control unit in communication with each of the receiver modules that coordinates transmission of synchronization pulses among the plurality of digital receiver modules in accordance with a predetermined transmission sequence and a system that receives the information from at least some of the microphone transmitter units through the receiver modules and delivers the information exclusively to a geographic area proximate a source of the audio information. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299458 | VoIP CALL OVER WIRELESS SYSTEMS USING ANY PREFERRED DIALING NUMBER - A method of establishing a communication connection, by a communication unit. A telephone number of a destination is received through a human interface of the communication unit and transmitted over a data connection to a number translation server. Responsive thereto an identifier of the destination for VoIP communications is used to establish a real time communication connection between the communication unit and the destination over a data connection, using the identifier. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299459 | SAW-LESS RECEIVER WITH OFFSET RF FREQUENCY TRANSLATED BPF - A SAW-less receiver includes a front end module (FEM) interface module, an RF to IF section, and an IF to baseband section. The RF to IF section includes a frequency translated bandpass filter (FTBPF), an LNA, and a mixing section. The FTBPF includes a switching network and a complex baseband filter having an offset baseband filter response. The switching network is operable to frequency translate the offset baseband filter response to an RF frequency response such that the FTBPF filters the inbound RF signal by passing, substantially unattenuated, a desired RF signal component and by attenuating an image signal component and/or an undesired signal component. The LNA amplifies the filtered inbound RF signal and the mixing section mixes the amplified inbound RF signal with a local oscillation to produce an inbound IF signal. The IF to baseband section converts the inbound IF signal into an inbound symbol stream(s). | 12-08-2011 |
20110299460 | Complementary Beamforming Methods and Apparatuses - Improved methods and apparatuses are provided to address a potential “hidden beam problem” in wireless communication systems employing smart antennas. The improved methods and apparatuses utilize complementary beamforming (CBF) techniques, such as, for example, Subspace Complementary Beamforming (SCBF), Complementary Superposition Beamforming (CSBF) and/or Single Beam Complementary Beamforming (SBCBF) techniques. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299461 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, PROGRAM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - There is provided a wireless communication device including a determination unit that determines a location region of the wireless communication device, a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with another wireless communication device, and a setting unit that sets a frequency in accordance with the location region of the wireless communication device determined by the determination unit to the communication unit. The determination unit determines a location region of the wireless communication device based on a plurality of pieces of location region information of the wireless communication device acquired by a plurality of different methods. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299462 | Mobile Radio Access Information Validation - A validation method for validating IP information header in data packets from user equipment connected to a mobile telecommunications network ( | 12-08-2011 |
20110299463 | OPTIMIZED HOME LINK DETECTION - The invention relates to a method for establishing by a mobile node an additional session via a connection to a packet data network in a mobile communication network and a mobile node and a packet data network gateway adapted to perform this method. In order to suggest optimized home link detection by a mobile node one aspect of the invention is to delay the decision on whether the mobile node is located on the home link or not. In conventional home link detection, the mobile node checks before sending any binding update on an access interface whether its prefix of the local IP address configured on that access interface is matching a home address prefix received during bootstrapping. According to one aspect of the invention, this home link detection is delayed in that home link detection is based on comparing a home address prefix received during bootstrapping and the advertised local prefix of a router advertisement received after bootstrapping. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299464 | Radio communication method and radio base transmission station - An antenna pattern assigning method capable of avoiding interference between a plurality of base transmission stations constituting a radio system in a cellular type broad band communication. In the radio system, when assigning a fixed beam pattern different for each frequency, each of the radio base transmission station devices transmits a radio wave having a directivity pattern having a peak in the same direction in two or more different frequencies, and between adjacent radio base transmission station devices, radio transmission is performed by using different directivity patterns in the two or more frequencies. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299465 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes performing, at a mobile station UE which establishes a first connection in a first cell, a cell selection process at the time of detecting a failure in the first connection and transmitting, from the mobile station UE to a second cell selected in the cell selection process, a connection re-establishment request signal. The method includes determining, at a radio base station that manages the second cell, whether or not to store context information of the mobile station UE in response to the connection re-establishment request signal and acquiring, at the radio base station, the context information of the mobile station UE from a radio base station that manages the first cell, and establishing a second connection in the second cell for the mobile station UE, based on the context information of the mobile station UE. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299466 | RADIO BASE STATION - A radio base station (eNB) according to the present invention includes: an RI acquisition unit ( | 12-08-2011 |
20110299467 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION OF DOWNLINK MULTI CARRIERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting channel quality information in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method of transmitting channel quality information from a mobile station in a wireless communication system includes generating channel quality information of a downlink multi carrier including N number of downlink component carriers; and transmitting the generated channel quality information to a base station through at least one of a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) on a single uplink component carrier. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299468 | FORMAT OF VHT-SIG-B AND SERVICE FIELDS IN IEEE 802.11AC - Methods and apparatus for transmitting and receiving frames with various Very High Throughput Signal B (VHT-SIG-B) and Service field formats are provided. Some of these formats may be in accordance with the IEEE 802.11ac amendment to the wireless local area network (WLAN) standard. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299469 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PAGING MESSAGE USING BAND INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving a paging message in a wireless communication system are provided. A Base Station (BS) transmits, to a Mobile Station (MS) in an idle mode, a Paging Group IDentification Information (PGID_Info) message including paging group information for a paging group to which the BS belongs, and frequency band-specific paging carrier information for indicating at least one of paging carriers included in each of a plurality of frequency bands operated by the BS. The BS determines a paging carrier for transmitting the paging message among paging carriers included in a frequency band supported by the MS, and transmits the paging message to the MS using the determined paging carrier. By doing so, reception of the paging message in the frequency band supported by the MS is guaranteed, thereby preventing the unnecessary location update procedure. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299470 | SENSOR AND SENSOR NETWORK FOR AN AIRCRAFT - The invention relates to a sensor network in an aircraft, which comprises several sensor nodes that communicate with a central data collection and evaluation unit via a radio transmission path. Data transmission can take place in various ways. For example, different frequency ranges are provided, from which the respective frequency range enabling the best data transmission quality is selected. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299471 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING VOIP AND CS TELEPHONE - The present invention discloses a system for supporting Voice over Internet Protocol (VOIP) and Circuit Switch (CS) telephone. The system includes a terminal gateway device, a wireless broadband module, a Subscriber Line Interface Circuit (SLIC), a SWITCH and a telephone. The present invention also discloses a method for supporting VOIP and CS telephone. By adopting the system and the method of the present invention, a subscriber can enjoy different voice services on the same telephone according to different service scenes, and a mobile operator can deploy a corresponding service in accordance with specific conditions; the present invention enhances the value-adding capability and saves communication cost. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299472 | Adaptive Synchronization scheme for wireless communication systems - A method and system for synchronization in a wireless communication network using a plurality of synchronization frames (SF) and ciao frames (CF) distributed across a configurable period, termed as synchronization activity period (SAP) is disclosed. The periodicity of the SAP could be configured, to align with the data exchange periodicity. The length of the SAP is configurable; it is directly proportional to its periodicity and inversely proportional to the number of attempts and duration the unsynchronized nodes will make to listen to the synchronization information. This method provides a mechanism in which the network can configure the synchronization periodicity based on the data exchange periodicity and also it distributes the synchronization load among all its associated nodes to optimize the power efficiency. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299473 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR IDENTIFYING RADIO NETWORK SERVICE AVAILABILITY - Apparatus, and an associated method, for identifying availability of services in a radio network of a radio communication system. A system information message is generated at the radio access network that identifies the service availability of the radio network, such as by indicating the communication services supported by the network. The system information message, once generated, is communicated upon a broadcast control channel, or other appropriate channel, and delivered to a mobile node. The mobile node detects the system information message and determines the availability of services of the radio network therefrom. Selection of whether to register with the network is made responsive to whether the network supports the communication service that the mobile node intends to initiate. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299474 | METHOD AND APPARATUS USING CELL-SPECIFIC AND COMMON PILOT SUBCARRIERS IN MULTI-CARRIER, MULTI-CELL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A multi-carrier cellular wireless network ( | 12-08-2011 |
20110299475 | Wireless Messaging Using Notification Messages In A Wireless Communication Network - A method of operating a router for enabling communication between a plurality of host services and a mobile device is described. The method includes receiving notification messages from a host service of the plurality of host services, where the plurality of host services support a plurality of message types. Each notification message has contents indicating a destination mobile device and a data message for the destination mobile device stored on the host service. The data message has a message type corresponding to one of the plurality of message types. The method further includes determining whether a first active service session with the destination mobile device exists and, if the first active service session exists, then sending the notification message to the destination mobile device for subsequent retrieval of the indicated data message stored on the host service using a second active service session between the destination mobile device and the host service. The method further includes, if no active service session exists, then holding the notification message until a new active session is detected, and upon detecting the new active session, sending the notification message to the destination mobile device for subsequent retrieval of the indicated data message stored on the host service using a second active service session between the destination mobile device and the host service. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299476 | WIRELESS DEVICE AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA AND BUFFER STATUS REPORTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The method provides buffer status reporting for the transmission of uplink data from a wireless device to a base station. Uncompressed data is stored in a first buffer of the wireless device. A buffer status report is transmitted from the wireless device to the base station, where the buffer status report contains information indicating an amount of the uncompressed data to be transmitted from the wireless device. The information is dependent on the amount of the uncompressed data stored in the first buffer. | 12-08-2011 |
20110305192 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR VOICE DOMAIN OPERATION - Methods and apparatus for voice domain operation are described herein. One example method includes determining that an LTE network is not preferred for voice service provision; storing an identification of the LTE network that is not preferred for voice service provision; and accessing the stored identification of the LTE network that is not preferred for voice service provision. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305193 | Signaling Mechanism for Inter-RAT Carrier Aggregation - A signaling mechanism informs a Radio Network Controller of the radio access technology associated with data packets forwarded to the Radio Network Controller from base stations supporting multiple radio access technologies. With this information, the Radio Network Controller can associate received data with the corresponding radio access technologies, and thus manage differing physical layer procedures, such as outer-loop power control, for the radio access technologies. In an example method, first and second data units transmitted by a mobile station over first and second radio access technologies, respectively, are forwarded from one or more base stations to a network control node for further processing. A control message associated with at least some of the data units is also sent to the network control node, the control message indicating the radio access technology over which the associated data units were transmitted. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305194 | Legacy cyclic shift delay (CSD) for orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) signaling within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Legacy cyclic shift delay (CSD) for use within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. Appropriately designed CSD is applied to communications in wireless communication systems thereby ensuring a minimized power error difference between respective portions of a packet transmitted therein. Such respective portions of the packet may be portions of the packet's preamble. For example, the first and second portions may be a legacy short training field (L-STF) and a very high throughput short training field (VHT-STF). By applying such appropriately designed CSD to a packet, a wireless communication device receiving a signal corresponding to that packet need not perform extra or very significant backoff (e.g., with respect to a signal subsequent to automatic gain control (AGC) processing) thereby simplifying signal processing and potentially also reducing a total number of effective analog to digital converter (ADC) bits needed to represent a digitally sampled version of that signal. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305195 | Method for Network Co-ordination in a Mobile Communications System and Apparatus Thereof - Method and Apparatus thereof for coordinating a joint transmission between a plurality of cooperative access nodes serving a plurality of user terminals in a mobile communications system, including the steps of: receiving channel information by said access nodes from user terminals that are being served by said access nodes; exchanging between said access nodes of said received channel information thus ensuring that all channel information is distributed to all cooperative access nodes; processing all received channel information by each one of said access nodes, and determining by said access nodes using said processed channel information, of a channel estimation for said joint transmission. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305196 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, FEMTO-CELL BASE STATION, AUTHENTICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND MEMORY MEDIUM - A communication system that includes at least UE and an HLR that are used in an IMS network further includes: a Femto-cell base station that makes up a predetermined communication area, and a control unit for controlling at least communication between the UE and the HLR. The Femto-cell base station and the control unit are present between the UE and the HLR. The Femto-cell base station includes a transmission unit for transmitting messages received from the UE to the control unit and for transmitting messages received from the control unit to the UE. The control unit converts messages received from the Femto-cell base station to messages that can be recognized by the HLR, and converts messages received from the HLR to messages that can be recognized by the UE. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305197 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD USING NDI AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR THE SAME - A random access method for preventing unnecessary uplink (UL) signal transmission using a New Data Indicator (NDI) and a user equipment for the same are disclosed. In the random access procedure, in order to prevent unnecessary transmission when a user equipment erroneously recognizes a UL grant signal transmitted using a cell identifier (C-RNTI) of another user equipment as a UL grant signal transmitted using its temporary cell identifier (temporary C-RNTI), toggling of an NDI indicating whether new data is transmitted may be used in a Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest (HARQ) system. In addition, determination as to whether or not the UL grant signal received during the random access procedure is different from that of a HARQ process used for transmission of a third message (Msg | 12-15-2011 |
20110305198 | LTE BASEBAND RECEIVER AND METHOD FOR OPERATING SAME - An LTE baseband receiver and a method for operating the receiver are provided. The receiver comprises a frequency selective interference estimator, an interference level averager and an interference assessor operative to control which output of the frequency selective interference estimator or the interference level averager is to be supplied to a soft-metric calculator. Frequency selectivity of the interference is assessed, and the best mode of interference estimation is selected to increase LTE receiver performance in loaded networks without impacting receiver performance in unloaded networks. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305199 | WIRELESS ROUTER SYSTEMS AND METHODS - A communication routing arrangement includes two or more wireless routers coupled to a communication network, and a user device adapted to couple with the communication network through a communication path including at least one of the two or more wireless routers. The communication path between the user device and the communication network is selected based on available resources of the two or more wireless routers. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305200 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING A LIGHTING SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method of controlling a lighting system, the lighting system being arranged as a wireless network comprising a controller and a plurality of operating nodes arranged to communicate with each other, wherein the method comprises the steps of synchronizing the operating nodes with the controller, determining, from the plurality of operating nodes, a set of operating nodes that are located within a predetermined operating area, estimating a state-shift delay based on a maximum communication delay between the controller and the set of operating nodes located within the predetermined operating area, communicating the estimated state-shift delay to the plurality of operating nodes, and communicating a state-shift command to the plurality of operating nodes. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305201 | Method and System for Processing Bearer under ISR Mechanism - A method and a system for processing a bearer under an idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) mechanism are provided. The method for processing a bearer under an ISR mechanism includes the following steps. A mobility management network element acquires an access mode of a current network. The mobility management network element notifies a serving gateway (SGW) of the access mode of the current network, so that the SGW processes bearer according to the access mode of the current network. It can be ensured that the access mode of the current network is consistent with the access mode for a policy and charging control (PCC) strategy adopted during a bearing procedure under the ISR mechanism. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305202 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION - A method for establishing a connection is provided. The method includes the following steps. A mobility management entity generates a create bearer context request message and sends the message to a selected serving gateway. The create bearer context request message at least includes address information of at least one packet data network gateway and corresponding indication information of the protocol type of connection establishment. The serving gateway receives and analyzes the create bearer context request message, and determines the protocol type of the connection according to the indication information of the protocol type of connection establishment. The serving gateway processes the create bearer context request message with the determined protocol type of connection. A mobility management entity, a serving gateway, and a network system which are able to reduce time delay when connection is established are further provided. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305203 | WIRELESS TRANSFER APPARATUS AND WIRELESS TRANSFER METHOD - According to one embodiment, a wireless transfer apparatus generates physical addresses by adding values, which are different between the source-side wireless transfer apparatuses, to a physical address received from a sink device, and transmits the generated physical addresses to the source-side wireless transfer apparatuses. The wireless transfer apparatus switches the source-side wireless transfer apparatus, which is to be used for transmitting content data to the sink device, to the source-side wireless transfer apparatus corresponding to the identifier which is associated with the physical address included in a source change request transmitted from the sink device. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305204 | INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention provide an information transmission method and apparatus. The method includes: encoding an information bit sequence corresponding to data stream control information and Precoding Control Indication (PCI) information to obtain a code sequence; and sending the code sequence to a NodeB by carrying the code sequence on a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH). With the present invention, a User Equipment (UE) in a macro diversity state feeds back PCI information to the NodeB of the non-serving cell in time. | 12-15-2011 |
20110310793 | ON-DEMAND INFORMATION RETRIEVAL USING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method, information processing system, and computer program product provide on-demand information captured from wireless devices. An information request is received from an electronic device. At least one wireless communication device is identified from a set of wireless communication devices that is available to satisfy the information request. The information request is sent to the at least one wireless communication device in response to identifying the at least one wireless communication device. A set of information is received from the at least one wireless communication device that satisfies the information request. The set of information that has been received is sent to the electronic device. The information request comprises a request for a set of information of at least one information type and from a given geographical location. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310794 | METHODS OF PROVIDING PAGES INCLUDING CALLING PARTY NUMBER USING A TUNNELING PROTOCOL - A page including a calling party number from a circuit-switched network may be provided to a wireless terminal in wireless communication with a packet-data network. More particularly, a call origination message may be received at the circuit-switched network for the wireless terminal with the call origination message including a calling party number. Responsive to receiving the call origination message at the circuit-switched network, a Generic Circuit Services Notification Application (GCSNA) message may be generated at the circuit-switched network, and the GCSNA message may include a page message and the calling party number. The GCSNA message including the page message and the calling party number may then be transmitted to the wireless terminal through the packet-data network using a GCSNA tunneling protocol. Related methods, terminals and networks are also discussed. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310795 | Method and Apparatus for Reducing Interference in a Mobile Communications Network - The invention relates to a method for reducing interference between users in a mobile communications network ( | 12-22-2011 |
20110310796 | DISPLAY APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING TO VIDEO CALL THEREOF - Embodiments relates to a display apparatus that can perform a video call and a method of connecting to a video call thereof, in which the method includes: receiving a control signal from an external device where an identification information for a video call is registered when a video call is received; turning on the display apparatus in response to the received control signal; and connecting to the received video call. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310797 | Packet retransmission control apparatus and packet retransmission controlling method - The present invention provides a packet retransmission control technique in which the communication performance can be improved in a state that the load of a network is high. The packet retransmission control apparatus includes a priority determining section configured to set a packet kind to each of transmission packets to indicate a kind of the transmission packet, and determine a priority level based on the packet kind to indicate an transmission order of the transmission packets; a packet buffer comprising a plurality of queues respectively assigned with priority levels, and configure to store the transmission packet in one of the plurality of queues which is determined based on the priority level of the transmission packet; and an arbitrating section configured to output the transmission packets from one assigned with the highest priority level of the plurality of queues to a lower layer in order of higher priority level. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310798 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND CONNECTION DESTINATION SEARCH METHOD - A wireless communication device which can quickly switch connection to an optimal AP. In this device: a profile storage unit ( | 12-22-2011 |
20110310799 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING PACKET DATA NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - Methods and apparatuses are provided for managing packet data network (PDN) connectivity for a device. PDN connectivity to a local gateway can be managed at an access point with which the device is communicating based at least in part on received PDN connectivity parameters. The PDN connectivity parameters can include access points, related closed subscriber groups, public land mobile networks, etc., from which a device can request a PDN connection. The PDN connectivity parameters can be specific for the device and/or for one or more access point names. In addition, a subscription server or other core network device can communicate the PDN connectivity parameters to the device and/or the device can receive PDN connectivity parameters as a result of a failed PDN connection attempt to an access point. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310800 | Method of Handling Buffer Status Report and Communication Device Thereof - A method of handling buffer status report for a mobile device capable of UL MIMO and/or capable of receiving and/or transmitting on a plurality of component carriers in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises generating at least a buffer size table each including a plurality of indexes according to the maximum uplink data transmission rate, wherein some of the plurality of indexes each is used for indicating a data amount in an uplink buffer of the mobile device for the buffer status report. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310801 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING LOCAL ROUTING IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for performing local routing in a mobile communication system. In accordance with the method, if a flow between a first Mobile Station (MS) and a second MS is a local routing candidate, an Access Serving Network GateWay (ASN-GW) receives an AAA request message including information indicating start of local routing from an Authorization, Authentication and Accounting (AAA) server, and performs the local routing between the first MS and the second MS after transmitting to the AAA server an AAA response message including information indicating that the local routing will start in response to the AAA request message. The local routing is based on consent among entities involved in the local routing. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310802 | ADAPTIVE RESOURCE PARTITIONING INFORMATION (ARPI) TRANSITION BEHAVIOR IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - One aspect discloses transition behavior of dynamically changing subframe interlaces and the corresponding behavior of the bases stations during the changing. A method of wireless communication includes receiving a request to dynamically change a subframe interlace. The subframe interlace is transitioned and during the transition either new data transmission is prevented on the prohibited subframe interlace and/or retransmissions are allowed on the prohibited subframe interlace. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310803 | TRANSPORTING GSM PACKETS OVER A DISCONTINUOUS IP BASED NETWORK - A system for transferring data includes an interface configured to receive data that is sent via a first link, and a processor coupled to the interface. The processor is configured to: receive data that is sent via a first link; determine whether there is discontinuity in the received data, the determination being based at least in part on information included in the received data; in the event that the received data includes a discontinuity, generate replacement data that repairs the discontinuity; and transmit at least a portion of replacement data to a second link such that a synchronization requirement associated with the second link is fulfilled. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310804 | Method and Arrangement for Paging in a Wireless Communications System - A method in an eNodeB, a radio network controller, or a base station controller for handling paging of a first user equipment being in idle mode is provided. The base station is comprised in a communication system. The base station obtains ( | 12-22-2011 |
20110310805 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF SETTING CELL ID - A base station apparatus installed by a general user, wherein a cell ID can be easily set in cases when setting of a cell ID is necessary. In this apparatus, a DHCP message reception unit ( | 12-22-2011 |
20110310806 | PROVIDING ACCESS DEPENDENT SERVICES VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system supporting controlled access to multimedia information and media-related services, the system including a gateway communicatively coupled to a broadband network and at least one wireless interface, the gateway capable of selectively communicating multimedia information among the at least one wireless interface and the broadband network, and of communicating with a plurality of access devices via the at least one wireless interface. The gateway is also capable of selecting one of a plurality of access privilege tiers based upon identification information received from one of the plurality of access devices. The identification information includes a plurality of identity data pieces. Each of the plurality of identify data pieces differs from another of the plurality of identity data pieces. Access to each of the plurality of access privilege tiers requires a different degree of authentication that is represented by a different combination of the plurality of identity data pieces. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310807 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING EFFICIENT OPERATION OF MULTIPLE MODES IN A WLAN SYSTEM - A method and apparatus that applies medium access control (MAC) transmission opportunity (TXOP) protection for multiple mode operation in a WLAN system. In particular, MAC mechanisms are defined to support multiple mode CTS frames, and multiple mode CF-End frames sent by the AP, each in a format appropriate for the corresponding mode which may also apply to a single mode. MAC mechanisms permit truncation of TXOP duration for releasing the unused portion of the TXOP when no further data for transmission is available. Release of unused protected TXOP is possible for both protected AP transmissions and STA transmissions. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310808 | Robust Data Transmission - In a method and system control signaling, such as ROHC control signaling is separated from the user plane in the RLC layer. An indication is further being provided to the RLC layer of the Base Station Controller (BSC) and the Mobile station (MS) for enabling recognition of the separated control signaling. Hereby a more robust transport means than for the user plane can be activated. | 12-22-2011 |
20110317621 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A destination terminal UA | 12-29-2011 |
20110317622 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NOTIFYING A PARTY AT AN END-USER PREMISE WHEN A PARTICULAR EVENT OCCURS AT ANOTHER END-USER PREMISE - Methods and systems to notify a party at a given premise when a particular event, such as a fire, an intrusion, an emergency or another event, occurs at another premise. One method comprises: obtaining an indication of a particular event at a first end-user premise, the first end-user premise including first end-user equipment connected to a communications network via a first communication link; establishing a wireless communication link between the first end-user equipment and second end-user equipment at a second end-user premise, the second end-user equipment being connected to the communications network via a second communication link; and causing the first end-user equipment to transmit information to the second end-user equipment via the wireless communication link to instruct the second end-user equipment to issue a notification concerning the particular event. Also provided are apparatus and computer-readable media containing a program element executable by a computing system to perform such a method. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317623 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING ACCESS TO A PACKET DATA NETWORK - A network element for a cellular communication network comprises gateway router logic. The gateway router logic is arranged to receive a request to create a packet data context for enabling a mobile communication device to access a packet data network; obtain an address for a gateway logic module for the packet data network, the gateway logic module being located within a femto radio network subsystem; and forward the request to create a packet data context to the obtained address for the gateway logic module. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317624 | METHODS OF CONTROL/DATA PARTITION SCHEME IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS FOR LTE-A - When there are different power classes of base stations (BSs), there may be a need to coordinate transmission from the different BSs to reduce interference to a user equipment (UE) on both control channels and data channels. There are different ways of coordination. For some embodiments, time division multiplex (TDM) resource partitioning may be performed across BSs on a subframe level. TDM resource partitioning may avoid control channel interference since resource mapping on time and frequency for control channels may span the whole frequency domain. However, the data rate for the UE may be limited due to the TDM partitioning of subframes. In other words, a limitation may derive from control channel interference coordination. For some embodiments, a UE may transmit and/or receive in subframes other than the ones partitioned for the UE. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317625 | Antenna Diversity - The invention is directed to a method of communicating between a first node including a plurality of antennas and a second node, the method comprising the steps of: transmitting a signal from the first node to said second node using each of the plurality of antennas of the first node; at the second node, selecting one of the plurality of antennas for use; and communicating between the two nodes using this selected antenna. The invention is also directed to apparatus and software for performing the methods. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317626 | BANDWIDTH REQUEST PREAMBLE SEQUENCE SELECTION METHOD AND RANDOM ACCESS METHOD - The present invention relates to a bandwidth request preamble sequence selecting method for bandwidth requests on a wireless access system, and to a random access procedure using the same. Also, the present invention relates to devices supporting the random access procedure. In one example of the present invention, the method for randomly accessing a wireless access system may comprise the steps of: receiving a first message containing a predefined bandwidth request index from a base station; selecting a bandwidth request preamble sequence from the predefined bandwidth request index on the basis if the properties of uplink data to be transmitted by a mobile terminal; transmitting a second message containing a predefined bandwidth request index to the base station; and transmitting the selected bandwidth request preamble sequence to the base station. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317627 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND INTERMITTENT RECEPTION METHOD - An efficient discontinuous reception operation is provided for a mobile station device in Advanced-EUTRA. In a mobile station device connected to a base station device using a plurality of component carriers, during discontinuous reception, one discontinuous reception parameter is applied to all the component carriers used by the mobile station device to thereby perform the operation of monitoring a control channel in all the component carriers, and when the control channel addressed to the mobile station device is received in one or more component carriers during a reception ON period, the reception ON period is extended in all the component carriers. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317628 | METHOD OF PERFORMING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of performing wireless communication in a multi-carrier system by a User Equipment (UE) comprises receiving minimum aggregation information on at least one carrier which is determined as a default irrespective of carriers supportable by the UE, configuring the at least one carrier on a basis of the minimum aggregation information, and performing communication using the at least one carrier . | 12-29-2011 |
20110317629 | Transmission Scheme - In a transmission scheme for transmitting data over a connection connecting a transmitting Main Unit and a receiving Radio Unit of a cellular radio system, where the transmitted data corresponds to user-plane data in the form of digital baseband data for different antenna-carriers, the digital signal is transmitted over the connection, e.g. a fiber, before spreading and combining is provided. The power and weight factor is transmitted separately with a few additional bits. Hereby, the Digital signal before spreading and combining is transmitted in the fiber instead of the combined multi-code signal. | 12-29-2011 |
20120002599 | Implicit Channel Sounding for Closed-Loop Transmission in MIMO-OFDM Wireless Networks - Symbols are encoded in a transmitter of a wireless network that uses multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (MIMO-OFDM) by partitioning the sub-carriers to be used for transmitting the symbol into a set of K groups of contiguous sub-carriers. For each group k of N | 01-05-2012 |
20120002600 | SYSTEM FOR DATA COMMUNICATIONS, ROUTER, AND METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - The embodiments of the present invention disclose a system for data communications, a router, and a method for data transmission and mobility management. The method for data transmission includes: receiving, by a first AR, data; identifying the transmission route based on the results of querying the local mapping information base; and transmitting data, where the local mapping information base stores the mappings between IDs and LLs. The embodiments of the present invention completely separate the ID, LL, and GL of the terminal, and thus solve the problems with the routing table expansion and scalability faced by the Internet. In this way, the terminal data can be transmitted without changing the terminal or the routing protocol stack; in addition, the hierarchical mapping helps reduces the amount of locally and globally stored information, and thus accelerating the query. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002601 | MESSAGE ROUTING PLATFORM - A system and method for routing messages in a communication network is disclosed. The system include a plurality of nodes for receiving a packet for delivery to an intended recipient wherein the system is adapted to determine if the intended recipient is connected to a first selected node within the plurality of nodes; and if the recipient is connected to the first selected node, deliver the packet; and if the recipient is determined not to be connected to the first selected node within the plurality of nodes, the system is further adapted to determine which node from the plurality of nodes the intended recipient is connected and forward the packet to the node to which the intended recipient is connected. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002602 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - TPC is appropriately operated in response to access method switching timing, an error is prevented from occurring in communication, and influence given to another cell due to transmission of unnecessary power is reduced. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002603 | INTERFERENCE LIMITATION FOR RETRANSMISSIONS - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting data packets from a mobile terminal to a base station using a hybrid automatic repeat request protocol and soft combining of received data. Further, the present invention provides a base station and a mobile terminal both adapted to perform the respective method steps. Moreover, a communication system is provided which comprises at least one base station and at least one mobile terminal. The present invention also provides a computer-readable medium for storing instructions that, when executed on a processor, cause the processor to transmit data packets from a mobile terminal to a base station using a hybrid automatic repeat request protocol and soft combining of received data. In order to restrict the interference caused by retransmissions, the present invention suggests controlling the amount of information in the retransmissions and thus the transmission power required for their transmission by TFCS restriction. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002604 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING MOBILE STATION IDENTIFICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and a method for switching mobile station identification information in a wireless communication system are provided. A method for transmitting mobile station identification information includes, when a base station receives a RaNGing (RNG)-REQuest (REQ) message from the mobile station, sending, at a base station, a RNG-ReSPonse (RSP) message including a temporary mobile station identifier to the mobile station, determining, at the mobile station, the temporary mobile station identifier in the RNG-RSP signal, when base station receives REGistration (REG)-REQ message including the temporary mobile station identifier from the mobile station, sending, at the base station, a REG-RSP message comprising a mobile station identifier of the mobile station to the mobile station, determining, at the mobile station, the mobile station identifier in the REG-RSP message and sending a response signal for the REG-RSP message to the base station, when receiving the response signal for the REG-RSP message, deleting, at the base station, the temporary mobile station identifier of the mobile station, and communicating, at the mobile station and the base station, using the mobile station identifier. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002605 | WIRELESS FIELD DEVICE - There is provided a wireless field device that performs a wireless communication with other filed devices in a wireless network through a gateway. The device includes: a battery incorporated in the field device to activate the field device; and a wireless communication module configured to exchange radio signals with the gateway to perform the wireless communication with said other field devices. When the filed device starts procedure for joining in the wireless network, firstly, the wireless communication module continuously accesses the gateway in a first period to receive an advertisement signal from the gateway, and when the wireless communication module fails to receive the advertisement signal in the first period, the wireless communication module intermittently accesses the gateway until receiving the advertisement signal from the gateway. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002606 | RANDOM ACCESS RESPONSE PROCESSING - The invention relates to a method of and an apparatus for processing a random access response, the method comprising the steps of: transmitting a random access preamble; receiving a random access response within a random access response time window; checking an extension field flag of the random access response; checking if the random access response matches the random access preamble; wherein if the random access response does not match the random access preamble and if the extension field flag is set to zero, the random access response reception is considered as unsuccessful and a further random access preamble is transmitted. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002607 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO CONTROL WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method of controlling wireless communications is provided. A call is received from a first mobile device at a base transceiver station (BTS) interface of a first distributed mobile architecture (DMA) server. The call is associated with a destination device. The first DMA server determines that a first distributed mobile architecture gateway (DMAG) supports communication with the destination device based on registration data stored at the first DMA server. Voice information associated with the call is converted to packet data. The packet data is routed to the destination device via the first DMAG. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002608 | LOCAL BREAKOUT WITH OPTIMIZED INTERFACE - The present invention relates to methods, apparatuses, and computer program products at interrelated entities of a network system for providing access via a cellular access network to a packet data network, wherein a simple local IP access or local breakout (LBO) feature is provided, which uses a bridging function between a packet data network interface and a radio interface in an access device (e.g. base station device or HNB) that can be controlled by a single control plane interface. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002609 | Method and Arrangement for Positioning in a Wireless Communications System - Systems and methods provide for an increase in hearability by a user equipment (UE, | 01-05-2012 |
20120002610 | Radio Base Station, a Network Control Node and Methods therein for Outer Loop Power Control in Dual-Carrier HSUPA - The invention relates to a radio base station ( | 01-05-2012 |
20120002611 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION OF USER DATA - The present invention provides an uplink progressive multi-point coordinated MIMO processing scheme. A coordinated processing management equipment determines whether it is necessary to send ACK or NACK message to neighboring base stations in the same CoMP cluster; when it is necessary to send ACK message to the neighboring base stations, the ACK message is sent to all the neighboring base stations in the cluster which have not participated in joint to inform each neighboring base stations that it is not necessary to send user data to the coordinated processing management equipment; when it is necessary to send NACK message to the neighboring base stations, the NACK message is sent to at least one neighboring base station in the cluster which has not participated in joint to inform the at least one base stations to send user data to the coordinated processing management equipment; according to the user data obtained by the base station and the user data from the at least one neighboring base stations, the coordinated processing management equipment performs joint detection and combination. Through the application of solution of the invention, the backhaul cost has been saved and the complexity of the system realization is reduced. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002612 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A MIMO NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for communicating in a network, said network comprising a primary station and at least a first secondary station, wherein the first secondary station transmits to the primary station an indication of a first plurality of precoding vectors, wherein the number of first precoding vectors is greater than a preferred rank of transmission from the primary station to the first secondary station. | 01-05-2012 |
20120008551 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETACH HANDLING IN MULTIPLE ACCESS WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate detaching one of a plurality of network connections to ensure state information is retained at one or more network nodes. For a device initiated detach, the device can transmit a handover message related to performing a handover of one network connection to another active network connection, as opposed to explicitly detaching the network connection. This can cause at least some state information, such as a gateway identifier, to be retained in one or more network nodes. For a network initiated detach, a gateway can provision state information to a state information server following receiving a routing tunnel termination message to ensure state information deleted as a part of the detach is re-provisioned to the state information server. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008552 | Power Headroom Reporting for Carrier Aggregation - Power headroom reporting and report handling are discussed in the context of a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), on which a user equipment (UE) has no valid uplink grant, and a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) on which a UE has no transmission. Under these circumstances, it is not possible to directly calculate one or more parameters which are used to calculate power headroom. Accordingly, exemplary embodiments provide for predetermined, known values to be used by the UE to calculate the power headroom, and by the eNodeB to understand the meaning of a received power headroom report. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008553 | Wireless access system - A wireless access system, including plural wireless control stations; a wireless terminal device to transmit and receive data to and from the plural wireless control stations, wherein the wireless control stations adjust with each other to reserve data transmission periods so as not to overlap with those of the other wireless control stations and transmit data in the reserved periods, and the wireless terminal device transmits data to at least one of the wireless control stations through space-division multiple access communication. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008554 | LOCAL PDN ACCESS METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A local Packet Data Network (PDN) access method of a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is provided. The local Packet Data Network (PDN) access method in a wireless communication system according to the present invention includes transmitting a local PDN connectivity request message from a base station to a Mobility Management Entity (MME); transmitting a bearer request message from the MME received the PDN connectivity request message to a Serving Gateway (SGW) proxy of the base station; forwarding the bearer request message from the SGW proxy to a PDN Gateway (PGW) proxy of the base station; transmitting a bearer response message indicating a local PDN access service of the base station in gateway mode from the PGW proxy to the SGW proxy; forwarding the bearer response message from the SGW to the MME; transmitting a bearer setup message from the MME received the bearer response message to the base station; and connecting a mobile terminal to the local PDN based on information contained in the bearer setup message. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008555 | TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE PROCESSING IN THE PRESENCE OF INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for communicating in a wireless network includes receiving a signal intended to be spread over a first subcarrier and a second subcarrier. The method also includes determining the first subcarrier is subject to interference, and in this case decoding the received signal on the second subcarrier without demodulating the signal on the first subcarrier. The signal is intended to be spread in the frequency domain over multiple subcarriers or intended to be coded based on SFBC (space frequency block codes). The first and second subcarriers may be consecutive. Rate matching around the first stream or puncturing of the first stream enables proper decoding of the SFBC stream. Changing the spreading factor enables proper decoding in the case of frequency domain spreading over multiple streams. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008556 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK REFERENCE SIGNAL IN A MULTI-ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a Reference Signal (RS) during retransmission at a User Equipment (UE) in a multi-antenna wireless communication system are disclosed. The RS transmission method includes receiving an uplink grant from a Base Station (BS), initially transmitting data and an RS corresponding to each layer based on the uplink grant, receiving ACKnowledgment/Negative ACKnowledgment (ACK/NACK) information for the initially transmitted data, and retransmitting the RS corresponding to each layer and the data according to the ACK/NACK information. The retransmission includes initializing a cyclic shift value for the RS corresponding to each layer according to a cyclic shift field for RSs included in the uplink grant. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008557 | Method of Handling Capability Information of a Mobile Device and Related Communication Device - A method of handling capability information of a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises setting a first device capability recognized by a legacy base station of a network of the wireless communication system, and transmitting the first device capability with a second device capability to the network, to convey the capability information to the network, wherein the second device capability is recognized by an advanced base station of the network. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008558 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR OPERATING A SOUNDING ANTENNA SWITCHING SCHEME IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system, an Advanced Mobile Station (AMS) sends, to an Advanced Base Station (ABS), a message including information indicating whether the AMS supports a sounding antenna switching scheme. If the information indicates that the AMS supports the sounding antenna switching scheme, the message including the information includes information indicating an antenna configuration that the AMS desires to use in a sounding antenna switching operation. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008559 | Method of using link adaptation and power control for streaming services in wireless networks - A method for improving the performance for a streaming service by link-adaptation and power-control in a wireless packet network such as an Enhanced General Packet Radio Services (EGPRS) cellular network is described. In particular, the effects of a combined link adaptation and power control scheme (referred to as an error-based scheme) for achieving a target error rate, which is non-zero but low enough so that limited retransmission and error concealment techniques are effective, is presented. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008560 | WIRELESS ROUTER SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless router employing a technique to couple a plurality a host services or host systems and a plurality of wireless networks. A method to route data items between a plurality of mobile devices and a plurality of host systems through a common wireless router. A point-to-point communication connection is preferably established between a first host system and a common wireless router, a mobile network message at a mobile device is generated, the mobile network message is transmitted via a wireless network to the common wireless router which in turn routes a data item component of the mobile network message to the appropriate host service. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008561 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR SENDING A DATA PACKET - The present invention relates to radio communications technologies and discloses a method, an apparatus, and a system for sending a data packet to avoid repeated forwarding of data when a user equipment hands over between an access point and an evolved NodeB. The method includes: receiving, by an evolved NodeB, a data packet sent by a core network and sending the data packet to a current access point; and keeping caching the data packet on the evolved NodeB before determining that a user equipment has correctly received the data packet from the current access point. The present invention is applicable to data transmission in a network. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008562 | WIRELESS INTELLIGENT SWITCH ENGINE - A wireless intelligent switch engine (WISE) is described. The wireless intelligent switch engine provides for automatic switching between different physical wireless interfaces in mobile devices while roaming to maintain a wireless network connection. WISE functions as a bridge between a mobile device and multiple wireless network interfaces to provide automatic and seamless switching among networks while roaming. The mobile device sees WISE as a LAN interface and communicates with WISE using the TCP/IP protocol stack, thus providing a PPP-less configuration that uses the TCP/IP protocol stack regardless of the wireless interface. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008563 | Power Backoff for Multi-Carrier Uplink Transmissions - Teachings presented herein provide reduced computational complexity and/or memory requirements for a mobile terminal to determine the power backoff required for a multi-carrier uplink signal. In particular, the mobile terminal determines whether its power headroom falls below a pre-defined power headroom threshold, indicating that it is headroom limited. If so, it5 quantizes power allocated to each carrier of the multi-carrier uplink signal according to a pre-defined quantization policy. In doing so, the mobile terminal thereby reduces the possible configurations that may be selected for the multi-carrier uplink signal. Thus, in one embodiment, the mobile terminal stores the required backoff in a look-up table for only the configurations that may be selected when the mobile terminal is headroom limited. This relieves 10 the memory requirements of the mobile terminal as compared to storing the required backoff for all possible configurations of the multi-carrier uplink signal. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008564 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OPERABLE TO ENABLE SHORTEST CONNECTION ROUTE - The present invention relates to a system operable to enable shortest connection route for a mobile means of a subscriber, when the mobile means has roamed between a home network comprised in the system, and a foreign network comprised in the system. When the mobile means requests connection to Internet I, a serving means comprised in the foreign network is operable to communicate with, and to receive information regarding a voucher, representing an amount of money, regarding the foreign network, from a voucher registry means comprised in the system. If a voucher, representing enough amount of money, is registered in the voucher registry means, the serving means is operable to route a packet to a gateway means comprised in the foreign network. The gateway means is operable to allocate an IP address for the mobile means and to function as an access point to Internet I. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008565 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR MULTI-CELL COLLABORATIVE COMMUNICATION IN A MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT SYSTEM - A method and device for multiple-cell collaborative communication in a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) system are disclosed by the present invention. In said method, base stations participating in multiple-cell collaborative MIMO communication perform precoding and scheduling one by one. At first, a first base station selects the mobile terminals participating in the collaborative communication and performs transmission setting, including pre-coding setting; then the scheduling and setting results of the first base station are kept invariant, so that a second base station selects the mobile terminals participating in the collaborative communication and performs transmission setting, including pre-coding setting, according to the scheduling and setting results of the first base station. If a third base station participates in the multiple-cell collaborative MIMO communication, the scheduling and setting results of the first and second base stations are kept invariant, so that the third base station selects the mobile terminals participating in the collaborative communication and performs transmission setting, including pre-coding setting, according to the scheduling and setting results of the first and second base stations. Based on the gradual collaborative communication method, fully distributed multiple-cell collaborative MIMO communication can be achieved. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008566 | Method and system for transmitting non-3GPP2 message in HRPD system - The present invention discloses a method for transmitting a non-Third Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GPP2) message in a High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) system, comprising: a transmitting end encapsulates the non-3GPP2 message in a non-3GPP2 Info Transfer message according to a preset format of the non-3GPP2 Info Transfer message and transmits the non-3GPP2 Info Transfer message to a receiving end through an HRPD air interface ( | 01-12-2012 |
20120014316 | Radio Network Controller With IP Mapping Table - Devices, systems, and methods are disclosed for seamlessly routing data to mobile devices that undergo handovers from one access point to another. A controller, such as a RNC or BSC, includes logic to map the locations of mobile devices that are connected to various access points on one or more networks. The access points include base stations, Node Bs, wireless LAN, etc., and incorporate or are coupled to network agents. The network agent reports the location of the mobile device to the controller via a plurality of means such as over an IP network, a powerline network, or a satellite network. Using the database, or IP mapping table, having the most current locations of all the mobile devices under its domain or area, the controller can route data packets to the mobile devices using the most effective routing paths. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014317 | Radio Access Network Node With IP Interface - Devices, systems, and methods are disclosed to directly connect a node of a Radio Access Network (RAN) with an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The node is provided with an interface to a broadband local loop network. Access to the local loop network or last mile enables the node to communicate directly with an IP network, including an IP Multimedia System (IMS) core. The node need not access a packet-switched core network via a controller. Embodiments include a Node B with an IP interface in a UMTS system and a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) with an IP interface in a GSM system. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014318 | MULTIPLEXING DEMODULATION REFERENCE SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatuses are provided for determining cyclic shift (CS) values and/or orthogonal cover codes (OCC) for a plurality of demodulation reference signals (DM-RS) transmitted over multiple layers in multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communications. A CS index can be received from a base station in downlink control information (DCI) or similar signaling. Based at least in part on the CS index, CS values for the plurality of DM-RSs can be determined. In addition, OCC can be explicitly signaled or similarly determined from the CS index and/or a configured CS value received from a higher layer. In addition, controlling assignment of CS indices and/or OCC can facilitate providing orthogonality for communications from paired devices in multiuser MIMO. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014319 | GSM controlled wireless mesh system - This invention discloses a GSM controlled mesh wireless system, apparatus and data routing method which can facilitate the low latency, high reliability and security enabled data transmission system. Unlike prior arts, the invented system make use of AP reported information, centrally determine the transmission path based on service requirements, and control the AP configuration change in real or near real time through in band 802.11 messages or WAN air interface, e.g. GSM messages. Those APs not participating in the transmission route will be optionally turned off or transmission power reduced. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014320 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTIPLEXING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SIGNALS AND SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNALS - A base station includes a transmit path circuitry that determines a PUCCH format 3 index and transmits an uplink grant to a subscriber station, the uplink grant including an indication of the PUCCH format 3 index. The base station also includes a receive path circuitry that receives a PUCCH format 3 signal in a subframe from the subscriber station. The receive path circuitry also receives a first demodulation reference signal for the PUCCH format signal in the first slot of the subframe, where the first demodulation reference signal is determined based at least partly upon a first demodulation reference signal cyclic shift number. The receive path circuitry also receives a second demodulation reference signal for the PUCCH format 3 signal in the second slot of the subframe, where the second demodulation reference signal is determined based at least partly upon a second demodulation reference signal cyclic shift number. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014321 | MESSAGING ACTIVITY FEED - The present invention provides a method for providing mobile originated and/or mobile terminated user data to a public IP network includes transferring the user data from the first party to the mobile radio network instance. A copy of the user data is generated by the mobile radio network instance and the user data is transmitted from the mobile radio network instance to the second party. The copied user data is transmitted from the mobile radio network instance to the user data collector. A data entry is stored in the user data collector, wherein the content of the data entry is related to the copied user data. In an initialization step at least one of the first party and the second party initializes the use of the user data collector such that, for user data to be transmitted after the completion of the initialization step, the copy of the user data is generated and transmitted from the mobile radio network instance to the user data collector. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014322 | BROADCASTING SIGNAL RECEIVER AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING BROADCASTING SIGNAL - A broadcasting signal receiver and a method for transmitting/receiving a broadcasting signal are disclosed. An identifier of a cell is set in the broadcasting signal and, if the cell is changed, channel information of the changed cell can be obtained from program table information having the channel information of the cell. Accordingly, the broadcasting signal receiver can continuously output a program although the cell is changed. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014323 | SYSTEM WITH WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING WIRELESS NETWORK PROFILE - A system with a wireless network device is provided. The system includes a wireless network device and an electrical device. A storage unit of the electrical device stores a wireless network profile. A second processing unit of the electrical device detects if the wireless network device is connected to the electrical device. When the wireless network device is connected to the electrical device, the second processing unit of the electrical device transmits the wireless network profile to the wireless network device. When the wireless network device obtains the wireless network profile, a first processing unit of the wireless network device drives a first wireless network unit of the wireless network device to transmit data wirelessly according to the wireless network profile. A method for processing a wireless network profile is also disclosed. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014324 | VOICE SERVICE IN EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus to manage voice service in evolved packet systems are disclosed. An example method in a User Equipment (UE) includes receiving a Non Access Stratum (NAS) protocol response message with a first indicator, the first indicator provided by lower layers of the UE to upper layers of the UE, responsive to the first indicator, initiating an IMS registration if the UE is not already registered with the IMS, and responsive to the UE having registered with the IP Multimedia (IM) Core Network (CN) Subsystem (IMS), determining availability of voice services over the IP Multimedia (IM) Core Network (CN) Subsystem (IMS). | 01-19-2012 |
20120014325 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STATE/MODE TRANSITIONING - A user equipment implements a method of processing indication messages, such as SCRI (signalling connection release indication) messages. The user equipment (UE) maintains a count of how many indication messages with a cause set have been sent by the UE while in at least one radio resource control (RRC) state. Various conditions are provided for resetting the count. These include receiving packet switched (PS) data by the UE and transmitting packet switched (PS) data. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014326 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STATE/MODE TRANSITIONING - A user equipment implements a method of processing indication messages, such as SCRI (signaling connection release indication) messages. If upper layers indicate that there is no more packet switched data for a prolonged period, then if a count of how many indication messages have been triggered in at least one RRC (radio resource control) state is less than a maximum number, the UE increments the count, and a cause is set in the indication message, and the indication message is sent. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014327 | Policy-Based Data Routing for a Multi-Mode Device - Communication devices capable of at least two communication modes (e.g. WLAN, WMAN and WWAN and/or wired modes) can be configured to optimize communications using a policy-based mechanism to configure connections and routes. A rules engine evaluates its policies on a state change (e.g. network availability, time of day, etc.) to configure a routing table and, together with communication APIs, provides an appropriate connection to an application for its respective communications. Policies may be responsive to various factors such as Radio Access Technology (high/low bandwidth), cost, presence, time of day, location, application type and quality of service (QoS) requirements among others to optimize communications. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014328 | HARQ in Spatial Multiplexing MIMO System - A method and apparatus for signaling scheduling information in a spatial multiplexing wireless communications system, as well as corresponding methods and apparatus for processing such signaling information, are disclosed. Signaling scheduling information includes scheduling first and second transport blocks for simultaneous transmission during a first transmission interval on first and second data substreams, respectively, and assigning a single re-transmission process identifier for the first transmission interval and transmitting first scheduling information for the first transmission interval. The first scheduling information includes the re-transmission process identifier and first disambiguation data. Additionally, at least one of the first and second transport blocks is scheduled for re-transmission during a second transmission interval. Second scheduling information for the second transmission interval is also transmitted; the second scheduling information including the re-transmission process identifier and second disambiguation data. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014329 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING ACK/NACK SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM APPLIED CARRIER AGGREGATION AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method for transmitting ACK/NACK signal in a wireless communication system applied carrier aggregation is disclosed herein. More specifically, the method includes receiving multiple transmission blocks respectively through multiple downlink component carriers from a base station, determining ACK/NACK responses corresponding to each of the multiple transmission blocks by decoding the multiple transmission blocks, mapping the ACK/NACK responses to a ACK/NACK state information, and transmitting the ACK/NACK state information through a single uplink component carrier, wherein ACK information included in the ACK/NACK state information indicates a number of ACK response among the ACK/NACK responses. | 01-19-2012 |
20120020281 | METHOD FOR CHANGING MODULATION SCHEME AND BASE STATION APPARATUS USING SAID METHOD - An EVM measurement unit measures the EVM of received signals, and performs a weighted average on them so as to derive MSE. A frequency acquiring unit acquires the change frequency of modulation scheme and the occurrence frequency of data retransmission. A moving status acquiring unit acquires the variation situation in moving velocity of a terminal apparatus or positional relationship between a base station apparatus and the terminal apparatus. A threshold modifying unit determines the modulation scheme used for the next communication, based on the value of MSE and other pieces of information described above. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020282 | Allowing a User to Accept or Deny a Mobile Terminated Call From Another Radio Access Technology - A user entity (UE) of a wireless telecommunications network for a user comprises an interface that receives packet oriented sessions and circuit switched sessions. The UE comprises a processor in communication with the interface that produces an indication to alert the user while a packet oriented session is established at the terminal that a circuit switched session is being requested to be established with the terminal. The UE comprises an input in communication with the processor for the user to instruct the processor to accept the request and establish the circuit switched session; otherwise the processor does not accept the request and does not establish the circuit switched session with the terminal. A method of a UE of a wireless telecommunications network for a user. A mobile switching system (MSC) of a wireless telecommunications network. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020283 | Enhancing Pilot Channel Transmission in TD-SCDMA Multicarrier Systems Using Secondary Carrier Frequencies - Wireless communication in a multicarrier radio access network, such as a (TD-SCDMA) network, may be implemented where a user equipment (UE) maintains communication over various carrier frequencies in the multicarrier network. The UE will receive a downlink pilot channel transmitted on every subframe on a primary carrier frequency. The UE will also receive a downlink pilot channel transmitted on less than every subframe on a secondary carrier frequency The downlink pilot channel is sent in subframes on the secondary carrier frequencies using a particular period and offset to reduce or minimize interference. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020284 | System and Method for Mobility with a Split Home Agent Architecture Using MPTCP - A method implemented in a network element functioning as a home agent (HA) for a mobile node (MN) communicating with a corresponding node (CN) using Mobile Internet Protocol version 6 (MIPv6), the method including selecting by the HA a virtual home agent (VHA) to provide home agent services to the MN with a better quality of service than the HA based on pre-defined policies, sending a flow switch request (FSR) message to the selected VHA, the FSR message including transmission control protocol (TCP) parameters and the FSR message including a care-of address for the MN and an address of the CN, the FSR message to initiate a flow redirection at the VHA using multi-path TCP exchange, and receiving a flow switch acknowledgement (FSA) message from the VHA indicating that the VHA is receiving data packets from the CN and tunneling the data packets to the MN at the care-of address. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020285 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA IN AD-HOC NETWORK - Provided are an apparatus and a method for processing data in an ad-hoc network, particularly, an MANET. The method includes: (a) determining whether to generate any one of first data and second data having a priority lower than the first data; (b) when predetermined data is generated in accordance with the determination, measuring a mode value related to the driving of a first node which currently possesses the predetermined generated data; and (c) processing, by the first node, the generated data by considering a content of the generated data and the measured mode value. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020286 | CHANNEL PRIORITIZATION AND POWER SCALING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Techniques for adjusting transmission power of one or more channels of a power-limited wireless device are disclosed. A required transmission power can be allocated to one or more control channels, such as a retransmission feedback channel, and a remaining transmission power can be apportioned among other control channels and/or data channels. Transmission power can be allocated among the other control channels and/or data channels according to a reduction from the required transmission power for the channels, according to power coefficients for scaling transmission power allocated to the channels, and the like. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020287 | Area Update Procedures for a Multiple USIM Mobile Terminal - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for improving location area and routing area update procedures in a multiple-USIM mobile terminal. A technique is provided for allowing the mobile terminal to reduce update procedures by using a message for multiple USIMs. The discussed technique reduces the number of messages exchanged and CPU processing. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020288 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PUCCH FEEDBACK IN 3GPP WIRELESS NETWORKS - A mobile station for use in a wireless network. The mobile station transmits feedback values in a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) to a base station of the wireless network. The mobile station is operable to transmit to the base station a subband second precoder matrix index (PMI) associated with a particular subband and a subband channel quality indicator (CQI) value associated with the particular subband together in a subframe of the PUCCH. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020289 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHOD AND WIRELESS TRANSMISSION DEVICE - An external signal is received by the first wireless transmission device of one wireless transmission device group, and then is divided. One divided signal is transmitted to the first wireless transmission device of the other wireless transmission device group opposite to the one wireless transmission device group, and the other divided signal is transmitted to the second wireless transmission device of the one wireless transmission device group. In the same manner, in the second, third, . . . , wireless transmission devices of the one wireless transmission device group, an input signal is divided into two signals, and the divided signals are each transmitted to the opposing wireless transmission device of the other wireless transmission device group and to the adjacent wireless transmission device of the one wireless transmission device group. The wireless transmission devices of the other wireless transmission device group each extracts a signal from the wireless signal transmitted from the opposing wireless transmission device of the one wireless transmission device group, and transmits the signal to the preceding adjacent wireless transmission device of the other wireless transmission device group. The first wireless transmission devices of the other wireless transmission device group combines a signal extracted from the wireless signal transmitted from the first wireless transmission device of the one wireless transmission device group and a signal transmitted from the second wireless transmission device of the other wireless transmission device group together, and outputs the combined signal to the outside. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020290 | MOBILE STATION AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station (UE) according to the present invention includes: an emergency call originating process unit configured to originate an emergency call via a cell under the control of a UMTS-scheme network having a circuit switching network, when an emergency call originating trigger is detected while camping on a cell under the control of an LTE-scheme network that is a packet switching dedicated network, and when it is determined that camping on the cell under the control of the UMTS-scheme network is possible. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020291 | Packet Data Service With Circuit-Switched Call Notification - Systems and techniques are disclosed relating to wireless communications. The systems and techniques involve wireless communications wherein a packet data session may be established between a wireless communications device and a packet data serving node to support a network connection to a packet-switched network. The wireless communications device may be configured to receive a notification of an incoming call from a circuit-switched network even when the network connection is active. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020292 | LABEL SWITCHED PACKET TRANSFER DEVICE - A device for connecting base station(s) to a cellular label switched network in a cellular network. The cellular network includes: base station(s), the connecting device(s); cellular label switched network(s); and service area(s). The base station(s) communicates with mobile terminals using wireless technology. The wireless technology uses a protocol layer architecture that includes at least one of the following: a wireless physical layer; a wireless medium access control protocol layer; a radio link control layer; and a network layer. The connecting device(s) include: a first interface to connect to the base station(s); a second interface to connect to cellular label switched network(s); and a label forwarding layer that: forwards packets between base station(s) and cellular label switched network(s); attaches label(s) to packets and removes label(s) from packets. A service area divided into a multitude of cells through which mobile terminals can move through and communicate with base station(s). | 01-26-2012 |
20120020293 | VOIP ENABLED FEMTOCELL WITH A USB TRANSCEIVER STATION - Telephone calls between a mobile station (MS) and the mobile network or PSTN are routed through the Internet via VoIP using a femtocell, as opposed to the traditional macrocellular network. The femtocell can comprise a USB Transceiver Station that is connected to a personal computer through a universal serial bus port, which provides both power and a multi-megabit per second connection between the personal computer and the USB transceiver station. The USB transceiver station can comprise a microcontroller to manage signaling between the RF front end/baseband processor and the personal computer, as well as a precise timing mechanism to assist the synchronization of femtocell timing with the surrounding macrocellular network, if it is present. The USB transceiver station can have a compact form factor that that facilitates a high degree of portability by the subscriber, such as being readily attachable to their keychain. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020294 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY IMPROVING CALL CONNECTION - A method for controlling an output of a power amplifier of a portable communication device includes determining a power level of a signal received at the portable communication device, generating a receive reference signal (RXLEV) that is indicative of the power level of the signal received at the portable communication device, and determining whether the receive reference signal is within a threshold value window. When the receive reference signal is within the threshold value window a nominal power output of a power amplifier in the portable communication device is transmitted during a random access channel signal transmission. When the receive reference signal is below the threshold value, a power output of the power amplifier in the portable communication device is increased during the random access channel signal transmission. When the receive reference signal is above the threshold value, a power output of the power amplifier in the portable communication device is decreased during the random access channel signal transmission. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020295 | Method of handling close subscriber group list synchronization - A method of handling CSG list synchronization for a network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises associating a version number with a user subscribed CSG identities (IDs) list, wherein the user subscribed CSG IDs list is stored in the network; and sending the version number in a OTA (over-the-air) message or in a NAS (non-access stratum) message when the version number is currently used by the network, wherein the OTA message is intended to update an operator CSG list which is stored in a mobile device. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020296 | PROVIDING EASY ACCESS TO RADIO NETWORKS - An improved connectivity to radio access point is enabled by a server that includes a database storing data about various radio access points, and an evaluation module evaluating the quality of connection to each of the access points. Clients receive updates about relevant access points from the server and use the information to connect to the preferred access point. The clients also check connectivity to other access points in the vicinity, and report the findings to the server. The server uses the reports to update its database, and send corresponding updates to the clients. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020297 | MOBILE HANDHELD FOR VOICE COMMUNICATION OVER THE INTERNET - A mobile handheld device implements VoIP over IP wireless networks, such as Wi-Fi or WiMAX, by connecting a WNIC to a peripheral receptacle, such as a USB receptacle, that is hardwired to components of the handheld. The WNIC is not hardwired into the handheld, rather just the receptacle is hardwired to the handheld. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020298 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SELECTING WPAN BASED ADAPTIVE RF INTERFACE - A method and apparatus for selecting a wireless personal area network (WPAN) based adaptive radio frequency (RF) interface. The method includes obtaining RF interface information by establishing a WPAN based network connection with a target RF device; selecting an RF interface from among a plurality of RF interfaces using the obtained RF interface information, based on characteristics of applications and a network load; and establishing the selected RF interface by negotiating about the selected RF interface with the target RF device. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020299 | Method of Transmitting and Receiving HARQ Feedback, and Mobile Station and Base Station Apparatus Using the Same Method - A method for transmitting and receiving a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) feedback, and a mobile station and a base station using the same are disclosed. A method for allowing a mobile station to transmit a HARQ feedback in a wireless communication system includes receiving two downlink bursts or one downlink burst including two codewords from a base station, and transmitting an ACK/NACK feedback corresponding to either each downlink burst of the received two downlink bursts or each codeword of one downlink burst including the two codewords to the base station. An orthogonal sequence is applied to the ACK/NACK feedback of the mobile station so that the resultant | 01-26-2012 |
20120020300 | MAINTAINING NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - A network device may select between two or more network connections based on a determination of whether the network device can access general Internet resources via an available, higher-preference network without providing additional (e.g., OSI Model Layer Seven) login credentials. In one example, a network device includes a first network interface configured to maintain a connection to a first network gateway, a second network interface configured to connect to a second, different network gateway upon determining that the second network gateway is both available and preferable over the first network gateway, and means for determining whether a remote network resource is currently accessible via the second network gateway. When the remote network resource is accessible via the second network gateway, the second network interface maintains the connection to the second network gateway. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020301 | CONTROLLED DATA NETWORK ERROR RECOVERY - A method, a system and network nodes use an indication of possible duplicates of units, so that these units can be handled differently than other units. The unit is indicated to be a possible duplicate to the entity to which it is resent because no response was received from the entity it was sent to. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020302 | Method and Apparatus for Generating Time-Frequency Patterns for Reference Signal in an OFDM Wireless Communication System - In one embodiment, a method for a wireless communication includes generating a first time-frequency reference signal pattern at a first base station. The first time-frequency reference signal pattern includes a modified version of a mother pattern of time-frequency of a fixed size. The method further includes transmitting a first reference signal using the first time-frequency reference signal pattern. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020303 | Method and Apparatus for a Dynamic Create/Change of Service Flows - A system and method for transmitting data is provided. A preferred embodiment comprises transmitting data by concatenating parameters for multiple service flows into a single transmission. Parameters associated with multiple service flows may be grouped together and other parameters that are not associated with multiple service flows are also preferably included within the same single transmission. | 01-26-2012 |
20120026938 | Applying Policies to a Sensor Network - In one embodiment, a method comprises accessing a statistic concerning a sensor node in a sensor network, the statistic being based on one or more of sensor data from a sensor at the sensor node, communication to the sensor node from one or more other sensor nodes in the sensor network, or communication from the sensor node; generating a message that includes a type-length-value (TLV) element based on the statistic, the TLV element including a first portion that indicates a class of the statistic, a second portion that indicates a numerical value for the statistic, and a third portion that indicates a length of the second portion; and communicating the message to a police node in the sensor network. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026939 | ENHANCED CHANNEL INTERLEAVING FOR OPTIMIZED DATA THROUGHPUT - In a transmission scheme wherein multi-slot packet transmissions to a remote station can be terminated by an acknowledgment signal from the remote station, code symbols can be efficiently packed over the multi-slot packet so that the remote station can easily decode the data payload of the multi-slot packet by decoding only a portion of the multi-slot packet. Hence, the remote station can signal for the early termination of the multi-slot packet transmission, which thereby increases the data throughput of the system. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026940 | RADIO REPORTING SET AND BACKHAUL REPORTING SET CONSTRUCTION FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT COMMUNICATION - Systems, methods, apparatus and articles of manufacture are disclosed for constructing radio reporting sets and backhaul reporting sets for coordinated multi-point transmission in a wireless communication network. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026941 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING AN AGGREGATED BEACON - Techniques for sending an aggregated beacon in a cognitive wireless network are disclosed. A beacon device may segment beacon information and send beacon segments via a plurality of channels simultaneously. A certain information elements of the beacon information may be included in each beacon segment. Each beacon segment may include channel information for other beacon segments that are transmitted simultaneously. Alternatively, a discovery beacon may be transmitted in addition to a regular beacon. The discovery beacon may include information indicating an operating channel on which the regular beacon is transmitted. The discovery beacon may be transmitted using a predetermined channel bandwidth, with a smaller beacon interval than the regular beacon, or in a frequency hopping fashion. The discovery beacon may be sent on a channel selected based on a regulatory class and corresponding channel information. The discovery beacon may be transmitted on a side channel. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026942 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD | 02-02-2012 |
20120026943 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PAGING MESSAGES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting and receiving paging messages in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method of transmitting paging messages in a wireless communication system comprises transmitting paging messages to a plurality of user equipments from a network of the wireless communication system, wherein the network transmits the paging messages to different user equipments, which are in different connection states, through different channels. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026944 | BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, CONTROL INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD, CONTROL INFORMATION RECEPTION METHOD AND PROGRAM - In a radio system which allocates resources using as units resource blocks which are formed by frequency components and time components, control information for mobile station devices, and identification information which is used to identify a format for a control information transmission channel which transmits the control information is transmitted from the base station device to the mobile station devices by means of the control information transmission channel. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026945 | Method and a Device for Improved Status Reports - A method for use in a cellular communications system in which system traffic can be exchanged between transceivers comprises receiving traffic from a second transceiver at a first transceiver. The traffic includes data units that are each associated with an identifier. The data units are also divided into segments. The method additionally includes sending status information from the first transceiver to the second transceiver. The status information pertains to one or more data units transmitted by the second transceiver. Additionally, sending the status information includes, for non-received and partially received data units, sending information indicating the data units were non-received or partially received and, for partially received data units, sending information indicating which parts of the data units were not received. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026946 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING ACCESS MODE SELECTION TO MULTIMODE TERMINAL - A method, system and apparatus for providing access mode selection to multimode terminal are disclosed. After selecting an access mode according to a certain policy, a routing decision entity correspondingly instructs a routing execution entity to perform a call connection in the selected access mode. The method for providing access mode selection to multimode terminal includes the following steps: (1) when establishing a registration connection, a terminal notifies related information of a current access network type to a network side; and (2) when performing a call connection to a called party, a routing decision entity on the network side selects the access mode and correspondingly instructs a routing execution entity to perform the call connection according to the related information and the selected access mode. | 02-02-2012 |
20120033610 | Network Servers, Systems, and Methods for Multiple Personas on a Mobile Device - Network servers, systems, and methods are disclosed which relate to providing a plurality of user identities or personas on a single mobile device. The mobile device has a unique address to communicate with entities on the network. The mobile device further has a plurality of telephone numbers associated with it. The usage of each telephone number may be billed to a separate account. Each telephone number further has a plurality of personas associated with it. Each persona has its own visual interface on the mobile device and a corresponding set of rules. The relationship between personas and telephone numbers, and associated rules, are stored on an application server on the network. The application server routes incoming connections to a specific persona on the single mobile device based on the plurality of rules. The rules can be edited by a user of the mobile device via an interface or via another device connected to the network. An SIP stack on the mobile device enables seamless communication with an IP Multimedia Subsystem. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033611 | ACTIVE/STANDBY OPERATION OF A FEMTOCELL BASE STATION - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for operating a femtocell base station of a wireless communication system. A method of the present invention comprises obtaining a list of designated wireless devices capable of communication with the base station; counting the number of designated wireless devices currently within range of the base station; and switching the base station between an active state and a standby state based on the count. The base station may obtain information for counting wireless devices currently within range by monitoring the wireless environment, and/or by monitoring information received through a network interface. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033612 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING DATA TRANSMISSION OVERHEAD - Methods and apparatus for reducing data transmission. In one embodiment, rather than immediately transmitting first data, a first device postpones opening a data connection; any subsequently arriving data is queued with the first data, and transmitted together. Connection overhead is optimized by delaying connection establishment until it is necessary, and in some cases eliminating idle mode operation altogether. Stochastic embodiments are also disclosed for adjusting transmission behavior to maximize one or more desirable outcomes. For example, one such embodiment queues data for a stochastically determined period of time, prior to opening a data connection. The stochastically determined time interval balances the likelihood of efficiently servicing successively arriving data, and overall performance. Mechanisms for receiving and utilizing device user and/or receiver (e.g., base station) feedback are also disclosed. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033613 | Enhanced rach design for machine-type communications - An adaptive RACH operation is proposed for machine-type communications (MTC) in a 3GPP wireless network. The adaptive RACH operation is based on context information to reduce RACH collision probability, to control network overload, and to enhance system performance. The context information includes device related information and network related information. Device related information includes device type and service or application type. Network related information includes network load information and historical statistics information. Based on the context information, an MTC device adjusts various network access and RACH parameters by applying adaptive RACH operation in different levels. For example, in the application level and the network level, the MTC device adjusts its access probability or RACH backoff time for RACH access. In the radio access network (RAN) level, the MTC device adjusts its access probability or RACH backoff time, or transmits RACH preambles using adjusted RACH radio resources and preambles. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033614 | VHT-SIG-B FIELD IN NULL DATA PACKETS (NDPs) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to methods and apparatus for using information in a Very High Throughput Signal B (VHT-SIG-B) field in the preamble of a null data packet (NDP). Retaining the VHT-SIG-B field in NDPs offers several advantages, such as maintaining a unified IEEE 802.11ac preamble structure, providing for 4 μs extra time to process beamforming feedback, and being able to use information in the VHT-SIG-B field to determine a level of interference in the NDP. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033615 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR SENDING POSITIONING REFERENCE SIGNALS, FOR SENDING DATA AND FOR RECEIVING DATA - The present invention discloses methods for sending positioning reference signals (PRSs), for sending data and for receiving data. When PRSs and data carried by a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) are required to be sent on a same physical resource, only the data carried by the PDCCH or the PRSs are sent on the same physical resource; or, when a sending end sends the PRSs and the data carried by the PDCCH on the same physical resource at the same time, a receiving end is made to ignore the received PRSs or the data carried by the PDCCH; or, the sending of the PRSs or the data carried by the PDCCH is limited so that they will not be sent on the same physical resource. The present invention also discloses devices for sending positioning reference signals, for sending data and receiving data. The present invention has solved the problem that the data carried by the PDCCH are in conflict with the PRSs over the fourth OFDM symbol when the PDCCH is sent over the first four OFDM symbols in the subframe, thereby ensuring the overall performance of the system. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033616 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND PEER-TO-PEER MODE BASED DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF - The application relates to field of the mobile communication, specially relates to an instant communication technology for realizing peer-to-peer (P2P) mode between mobile terminals. The application provides a mobile terminal and a P2P mode based data transmission method thereof. The method comprises the following steps of: generating a data packet from information input by a user, wherein the data packet carries an identification of the opposite-end communication equipment and a number of a receiving port; sending the data packet to a base station via a predefined sending port; if it is monitored that the data packet is received at the receiving port, obtaining information from the received data packet. Since the mobile terminal sends the data packet to the opposite-end equipment directly via the sending port according to the identification of the opposite-end equipment, and receives the data packet returned by the opposite-end equipment by monitoring the receiving port, the instant communication data transmission between mobile terminals can be realized without the support of the instant communication server. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033617 | WIRELESS DATAGRAM TRANSACTION PROTOCOL SYSTEM - Systems are provided for sequencing, delivery acknowledgement, and throttling of data packets over a network layer, such as UDP and SMS. To support devices with limited battery resources, the invention incorporates asymmetric retry logic and/or acknowledgements with overlapping ranges, to minimize the transmissions required for the device. The sender of a data-bearing frame does not need to wait for a frame to be acknowledged before sending the next, such that many frames can be “in flight” at once. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033618 | MODE AND RATE CONTROL FOR MIMO TRANSMISSION - Techniques for performing mode and rate control for a MIMO transmission are described. For mode selection, the use of an eigensteering mode is permitted if a first set of at least one criterion is satisfied. The eigensteering mode is selected for data transmission if a second set of at least one criterion is satisfied, and an unsteered mode is selected otherwise. For rate selection, SNR estimates are derived for data streams to potentially transmit, e.g., based on channel estimates and/or data symbol estimates. The number of data streams to transmit as well as at least one rate for at least one data stream to transmit are selected based on the SNR estimates and at least one backoff factor. The backoff factor(s) are adjusted based on status of received packets. The at least one rate may be adjusted based on the age of rate information. Other aspects, features, and embodiments are also claimed and described. | 02-09-2012 |
20120039248 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IN-VEHICLE WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY - One embodiment of the present invention is a vehicle computer system for establishing in-vehicle wireless connectivity to remote computer network, e.g., the Internet. The system may include a processor in communication with a human machine interface (HMI) for control by a user. The processor may also be in communication with one or more wireless transceivers for wireless data communication. The processor may be capable of being paired to a pneumatic commuting device (e.g., cellphone, PDA, etc.) having wireless Internet connectivity. The processor may be configured to wirelessly connect to one or more personal computing devices in the vicinity of the vehicle, and provide a wireless Internet access point to the one or more personal computing devices based on the wireless connection and the Internet connectivity. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039249 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A data transmission method and a data transmission apparatus are disclosed. The data transmission method includes: receiving a data packet sent by a sender, and recording information about the data packet received; sending the data packet received to a receiver through a protocol layer; looking up recorded information about data packets according to a data packet mapping after the protocol layer receives confirmation information of a data packet sent by the receiver to the sender, wherein the data packet mapping is a relation between a recorded data packet and a data packet received by the protocol layer; and constructing an Acknowledgement, ACK, destined for the sender according to information about the data packet obtained by the steps of looking up recorded information about received data packets. Through the method provided herein, the apparatus constructs an ACK and sends it to the sender actively, thus improving the data transmission rate. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039250 | Processing method for access mode based on an HNB/HENB - This invention discloses a processing method for access mode based on an HNB/HeNB, wherein the method includes: establishing a stream control transmission protocol connection between the HNB/HeNB and a core network; and notifying, by the HNB/HeNB, the core network of the access mode information of the HNB/HeNB, wherein the access mode information indicates an access mode of the HNB/HeNB. This invention effectively improves network performances and user experiences. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039251 | METHOD OF CODEBOOK DESIGN AND PRECODER FEEDBACK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for two component feedback in wireless communication systems wherein a wireless communication device sends a first representation of a first matrix chosen from a first codebook, the first matrix is a N-by-N diagonal matrix with the k-th diagonal elements being σ1*exp(jπ(k−1)m/N), for k from 1 to N/2 and being σ2*exp(jπ(k−N/2−1)m/N) for k from N/2+1 to N, N is a number of antennas, m is an integer between 0 and N−1, and σ1, σ2 are complex valued scalars. The device also sends a second representation of a second N-by-R matrix chosen from a second codebook, with R being a number of spatial layers wherein the first and second representations together convey a precoder matrix as the matrix product of the first and second matrices. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039252 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK FOR CARRIER AGGREGATION - Techniques for reporting channel state information (CSI) in a multi-carrier wireless communication system are disclosed. In some examples, a user equipment determines a configuration for reporting CSI for each component carrier (CC) in a plurality of component carriers. For a first subframe, the user equipment determines a priority for transmitting CSI associated with the plurality of CCs based at least in part on the configuration. The user equipment sends, in the first subframe, a CSI report including the prioritized CSI. The CSI report can include CSI for a single CC, or CSI for multiple CCs. For multi-CC reporting of CSI, the user equipment can multiplex CSI reports or CSI elements for the plurality of CCs up to an available payload size. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039253 | DATA PROCESSING METHODS FOR PROCESSING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DATA AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS THEREOF - A data processing method for a wireless communication system with a plurality of terminals, an intermediate device and a service network, the method comprising: sending a plurality of machine type communication (MTC) data flows from the plurality of terminals to the intermediate device; performing a data multiplexing operation by the intermediate device on the plurality of machine type communication data flows to generate a multiplexed data flow; and the service network receiving the multiplexed data flow. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039254 | Daisy-Chained Ring of Remote Units For A Distributed Antenna System - The present disclosure is a novel utility of a software defined radio (SDR) based Distributed Antenna System (DAS) that is field reconfigurable and support multi-modulation schemes (modulation-independent), multi-carriers, multi-frequency bands and multi-channels. More specifically, the present invention relates to a DAS utilizing one or more Daisy-Chained Rings of Remote Units. The present invention enables a high degree of flexibility to manage, control, enhance, facilitate the usage and performance of a distributed wireless network such as Flexible Simulcast, automatic traffic load-balancing, network and radio resource optimization, network calibration, autonomous/assisted commissioning, carrier pooling, automatic frequency selection, frequency carrier placement, traffic monitoring, traffic tagging, pilot beacon, etc. As a result, a DAS in accordance with the present invention can increase the efficiency and traffic capacity of the operators' wireless network. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039255 | FRAME CONCATENATION IN WIRELESS UWB DEVICES - A method and system is provided for transmitting data frames from a first device to a second device in a wireless network. The method includes concatenating a plurality of data frames ( | 02-16-2012 |
20120039256 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SYSTEM INFORMATION FROM A BASE STATION SUPPORTING AN IMPROVED SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More particularly, the present invention relates to a method for transmitting system information in which a base station that supports a legacy system and an improved-functions legacy system having one or more functions added thereto, transmits system information, wherein said system information transmitting method comprises a step of transmitting a broadcast channel, containing system information for supporting user equipment for the legacy system, in a predetermined number of symbols which follow the synchronous channel in a first subframe of a wireless frame containing a plurality of subframes; and a step of transmitting additional system information for supporting user equipment for the improved system in a second subframe, excluding the first subframe, from among the plurality of subframes. The present invention also relates to a base station which implements said method for transmitting system information. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039257 | COMMUNICATION APPARTUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Even when the lengths of data items to be transmitted to users are not the same, the frames multiplexed at the same time finally have the same frame length and are transmitted. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039258 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RESPONSE SIGNAL SPREADING METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus capable of minimizing the degradation in separation characteristic of a code multiplexed response signal. In this apparatus, a control part ( | 02-16-2012 |
20120039259 | TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION PARAMETER CONTROL - A system and method for implementing transmission parameter control at a transmitting station is described. The exemplary system and method comprises querying a transmission parameter control module for a transmission schedule. The transmission schedule comprises at least one schedule entry defining a set of transmission parameter controls as they pertain to a destination address. At least one packet of data is then transmitted to the destination address according to the transmission parameters controls of at least one schedule entry from the transmission schedule. A system and method for selecting an antenna configuration corresponding to a next transmission of packet data is also disclosed. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039260 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND EQUIPMENT FOR INFORMATION PROCESSING - A method, a system, and equipment for information processing are provided. The method includes receiving information sent by a source eNodeB of UE, where the information includes processing status information and data information which are obtained after the source eNodeB processes data transmitted by the UE, or data information in at least two user plane protocol stacks of the source eNodeB, or data information in user plane protocol stacks except PDCP in the source eNodeB; and correspondingly, transmitting data with the UE according to the processing status information and data information, or the data information in the at least two user plane protocol stacks, or the data information in user plane protocol stacks except PDCP. | 02-16-2012 |
20120044861 | CONTROL DOMAIN CHANGE BASED ON NETWORK REGISTRATION CONDITION - Aspects describe a separate domain selection function that is utilized as the first function in a communication path for a communication that is to be connected to a user device registered in a first network or a second network. If a result of the domain selection function indicates call control should be maintained by first network (e.g., user device is registered with first network or a network with which first network has a control relationship), call control of the communication remains with first network. If the result of the domain selection function indicates the user device is registered with second network, call control is suspended by the first network, which allows the communication to bypass the first network. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044862 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MAINTAINING A COMMUNICATION SESSION - Systems and methods for maintaining a communication session. A gateway supports both a local access point (AP) and a virtual AP. The local AP is accessible only to an “owner” of the gateway. The virtual AP (VAP) is accessible to devices associated with the owner of the gateway and to roaming Wi-Fi devices. A datastore conveys information about the roaming Wi-Fi devices to the VAP to permit them to access the VAP without the need for manual configuration of the VAP. A roaming Wi-Fi/cellular device may communicate with a gateway via a tunnel to maintain session connectivity during roaming. A session may be initiated on one network, such as a Wi-Fi network or a cellular network, handed off to another network, such as a cellular network or a Wi-Fi network, and then returned to network on which the session was initiated. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044863 | PLUG-AND-PLAY WIRELESS NETWORK EXTENSION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF AUTOMATIC CONNECTION FOR THE SAME - Provided is a plug-and-play wireless network extension system and a method of automatic connection for the system. The system at least has a wireless Ethernet extension controller and at least one wireless Ethernet extension station. The controller and the station preferably adopt a power-line communication technology to accomplish an initial connection and data transferring. While the connection is done, an automatic connection process is initiated. By means of an automatic exploration mechanism to search any existed wireless Ethernet extension controller, the station obtains the controller's network address. The station then automatically establishes the connection and receives the wireless network configuration from the controller. It is featured that the system achieves a plug-and-play effect to simplify the process for expanding the coverage of wireless signals. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044864 | DATA TRANSMISSION IN MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORK - Techniques are generally described related to a mobile ad-hoc network. One example method for transmitting data from a source node to a destination node in a mobile ad-hoc network may include receiving a route reply packet from a first node by a second node; identifying the route reply packet as an overheard route reply packet by the second node; adding a first routing entry in a routing table of the second node and the first routing entry being associated with the overheard route reply packet by the second node; broadcasting a routing entry added message associated with the first routing entry by the second node; receiving data transmitted from a third node and the data being transmitted by the third node responsive to the routing entry added message by the second node; and sending data received from the third node towards the destination node via an active route established based on the first routing entry in the routing table of the second node by the second node. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044865 | Apparatus And Method For Coupling An M2M Device To A Wireless Network - Apparatus for coupling one or more machine-to-machine (M2M) devices to a wireless network, including: a first network interface controller (NIC) module configured to communicate with the M2M devices; an M2M controller unit coupled to the first NIC module, the M2M controller unit including a database and a controller, the controller being configured to store information regarding the M2M devices in the database and to retrieve information regarding the M2M devices from the database; and a second NIC module coupled to the M2M controller unit, the second NIC module including an M2M enable unit configured to send the information retrieved by the controller to the wireless network. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044866 | Routing of a Message in a Shared Radio Access Network - The subject innovation relates to a system and method for routing in a base station system a message received from a mobile communication device to a core network. The base station system may be connected to at least two core networks and an identifier being assigned to each core network. An exemplary method comprises receiving in the base station system the message from the mobile communication device together with an identifier assigned to a first core network of the core networks. The identifier may be read in the base station system. The exemplary method also comprises forwarding the message from the base station system to the first core network based upon the read identifier. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044867 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO MAINTAIN CALL CONTINUITY - Example methods and apparatus to maintain call continuity are disclosed. A disclosed example method to control a user equipment (UE) includes the UE initiating a tracking area updating (TAU) procedure in an EMM_CONNECTED mode, identifying a lack of a voice service in response to the TAU procedure being successful, identifying a remaining bearer comprising a bearer context, and the UE staying in the EMM_CONNECTED mode until radio bearers associated with the bearer context are released. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044868 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO MAINTAIN CALL CONTINUITY - Example methods and apparatus to maintain call continuity are disclosed. A disclosed example method to authorize a request with service information (SI), including detecting whether the SI pertains to an existing Internet Packet (IP) flow, when the SI pertains to an existing IP flow, detecting whether the existing IP flow includes CS media, and when the existing IP flow includes CS media, determining a response to the request independent of a CS media indicator. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044869 | PLMN SELECTION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE UTILIZING THE SAME - PLMN selection methods and mobile communication devices utilizing the same are provided. The PLMN selection method is performed by a mobile communication device attached to a service network for an emergency bearer service through an emergency packet data connection, wherein the mobile communication device is capable of accessing a SIM card comprising a forbidden PLMN. The PLMN selection method comprises: receiving an equivalent PLMN list comprising the forbidden PLMN from the service network; and removing the forbidden PLMN from the equivalent PLMN list after the emergency bearer service has been completed. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044870 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a mobile communication system having a coordinated communication mode in which radio communication is performed between a user equipment and a plurality of base stations in a coordinated manner and an uncoordinated communication mode in which radio communication is performed between a user equipment and a base station without coordinating with another base station, in which radio communication is performed by selectively using any of the coordinated communication mode and the uncoordinated communication mode. The coordinated communication in which radio communication is performed between a user equipment and a plurality of base stations in a coordinated manner and the uncoordinated communication in which radio communication is performed between a user equipment and a base station without coordinating with another base station are selectively used in an appropriate manner, with the result that a mobile communication system capable of exerting its performance in accordance with a situation can be provided. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044871 | METHOD FOR FEEDING BACK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT/NEGATIVE-ACKNOWLEDGEMENT MESSAGE IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - This invention provides a method for feeding back an acknowledgement/negative-acknowledgement ACK/NACK message The network side of the multi-carrier system sends the downlink control signal in a multi-carrier system, where in multiple comand the downlink data signal via the PDCCH and via the PDSCH over the ponent carriers, a primary component carrier is multiple component carriers supported by the user equipment respectively set for user equipment, and the rest is set as a secondary component carrier, and the method includes: receiving, by the user equipment, a downlink control signal and a downlink data signal sent over the multiple component carriers via a Physical Downlink Control CHannel PDCCH and via a Physical Downlink Shared CHannel PDSCH respectively; and determining, by the user equipment, an ACK/NACK channel corresponding to the PDSCH in the multiple component carriers for feeding back the ACK/NACK message, according to a Control Channel Element CCE index of the PDCCH of the primary component carrier having been set. The method provided by this invention can feed back the ACK/NACK message in the multi-carrier system. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044872 | UPLINK COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention provides a method of operating a first base station ( | 02-23-2012 |
20120044873 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A DOWNLINK SHARED CHANNEL - A method and apparatus is disclosed wherein a user equipment (UE) receives control information on a first channel and uses the control information to process a second channel. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044874 | DEDICATED GATEWAYS FOR MOBILE BROADBAND DEVICES - A quite simple and effective way for simplifying the mobile system for the mobile broadband customers, thereby lowering the equipment costs and in the end allowing for more competitive flat rate fees, is to direct the traffic from mobile broadband devices ( | 02-23-2012 |
20120044875 | Uplink Communications - A method including communicating by an apparatus with base stations using a high speed uplink packet transmission technique that provides the apparatus with serving and non-serving links to base stations as well as scheduled transmissions in a serving link. A transmission power downgrading command is detected at the apparatus from a non-serving link. In a situation in which no scheduled transmission took place by the apparatus during preceding transmission period, the downgrading command is prevented from causing the apparatus to start applying a lowest value of a variable or parameter that defines the transmission power or power ratio for scheduled transmission. | 02-23-2012 |
20120057524 | MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method for a subscriber station to perform network entry in a multi-carrier wireless environment that has a primary carrier and at least one secondary carrier associated with a base station. The method includes sensing a carrier in an area serviced by the base station and determining if the carrier is a primary carrier or a secondary carrier. The method further includes performing the network entry if the determining establishes that the sensed carrier is a primary carrier and not a secondary carrier. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057525 | METHOD OF RESOLVING RECEPTION CONFLICTS FOR MULTI-CARD MULTI-STANDBY MOBILE TERMINAL - The present invention provides a method of resolving reception conflicts for a multi-card multi-standby mobile terminal, which is for resolving the conflicts of the mobile terminal based on Goble System for Mobile communication (GSM) network and in the standby mode, including: acquiring synchronization result with base stations and judging if there are time slot conflicts between multiple SIM cards of the multi-card multi-standby mobile terminal according to the synchronization result; if the conflicts being non-time slot conflicts, receiving and processing data of different SIM cards in different time slots of a TDMA frame; and if the conflicts being time slot conflicts, receiving and processing data of a non-current SIM card in redundant frames of BCCH or CCCH of a current SIM card. The present invention manages the logical channel conflicts with other SIM cards through using the redundant frames corresponding to the BCCH or CCCH of a SIM card, thereby resolving the signal conflicts because of the signals from different base stations being not synchronized for a dual-card dual-standby handset and is compatible with the prior art. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057526 | Soft State Framework for Mobile WSN Routing - A soft state framework to support routing functionality in a mobile wireless sensor network is provided. This invention allows each node of the wireless sensor network to move in random directions in a three dimensional space. The invention seeks to minimize resource consumption while optimizing routing functionality in a mobile condition. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057527 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING A MEASUREMENT REPORT FROM A USER EQUIPMENT TO A NETWORK IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for providing a measurement report from a User Equipment (UE) to a network in a wireless communication system according to one embodiment includes using a configuration to indicate whether or not a corresponding additional measurement result should be included in the measurement report, and using the configuration to indicate more than one type of additional measurement result. A method and apparatus for providing a measurement report from a UE to a network in a wireless communication system according to another embodiment includes triggering a measurement report, and omitting an additional measurement result in the measurement report if the measurement report is triggered by inter-Radio Access Technology measurement (inter-RAT measurement). | 03-08-2012 |
20120057528 | Method for Operating a Mobile Wireless Network - Operating a mobile wireless network to ensure proper function of protocol entities during the transmission of data units between two wireless stations of the mobile wireless network. User data is assembled by a first convergence protocol layer of the first wireless station into at least one first data unit, particularly a packet data unit, before transmission to a second convergence protocol layer of a second wireless station, particularly on the same protocol level, with the user data being supplied to the first convergence protocol layer by at least one user in a network layer. At least one protocol entity of the first convergence protocol layer is configured as a function of a configuration request received by the second wireless station and transmits the at least one first data unit through a carrier to a link control layer. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057529 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING A HARQ IN A MULTICARRIER SYSTEM - Provided are a method and apparatus of performing a HARQ in a multiple carrier system. A receiver determines the size of a soft buffer to be used in an effective HARQ process on the basis of the maximum number of effective HARQ processes over a plurality of component carriers and stores the received transport block in the soft buffer. The present invention enables the performance of a HARQ in an efficient manner by using multiple carriers in the event the size of the soft buffer is limited. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057530 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING TRANSMISSIONS IN VARIOUS STATES VIA A HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK SHARED CHANNEL - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving via a high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) is disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) receives the HS-DSCH while operating in a cell forward access channel (Cell-FACH) state, a cell paging channel (Cell-PCH) state, or URA paging channel (URA-PCH) state. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057531 | CONDITIONAL UPLINK TIMING ALIGNMENT IN A MOBILE STATION DEVICE OF A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station device transmits a random access preamble, whose preamble ID is randomly selected by the mobile station device, to a base station device and performs uplink timing alignment based on the synchronization timing deviation information included in a random access response which the base station device transmits in response to the transmitted random access preamble. In an uplink synchronous status, upon receiving the random access response including timing deviation information, the mobile station device ignores the timing deviation information. Otherwise, the mobile station device performs the uplink timing alignment based on the timing deviation information. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057532 | METHOD, SYSTEM, NETWORK ELEMENT, AND GATEWAY FOR PROCESSING ACCESS POINT NAME RESTRICTION INFORMATION - A method, a system, a network element, and a gateway for processing access point name restriction information are disclosed. The method includes: a second mobility management element receives first access point name restriction information from a first mobility management element; the second mobility management element obtains maximum access point name restriction information according to the first access point name restriction information, so that a packet data network gateway determines to or refuses to establish a new packet data network gateway connection. With the present invention, the second mobility management element may obtain the maximum access point name restriction information according to the received access point name restriction information. In this way, the packet data network gateway can determine to or refuse to establish a new packet data network gateway connection, therefore improving the security of private packet data network gateways. | 03-08-2012 |
20120063387 | Hybrid Routing and Forwarding Solution for a Wireless Sensor Network - A hybrid routing and forwarding solution for a mobile wireless sensor network is provided. This invention allows each node of the wireless sensor network to move in random directions in a three dimensional space. The invention seeks to minimize resource consumption while optimizing routing and forwarding in a wireless sensor network. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063388 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTELLIGENT ROUTEBACK - An intelligent routeback mechanism that may inter alia receive from an entity (such as for example a wireless carrier) aspects of the entity's messaging traffic, data, etc. with the intelligent routeback mechanism aiding the (1) return (optionally augmented, optionally transformed, etc.) to the entity of that portion of the traffic, data, etc. that the entity is able to deliver itself and (2) delivery of that portion of the traffic, data, etc. that the entity is unable to deliver itself. Such an intelligent routeback mechanism may reside in inter alia a Messaging Inter-Carrier Vendor. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063389 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless network of devices comprising a relay start device, an intermediate device and a relay end device, information being communicated wirelessly in use between the relay start device and the relay end device via the intermediate device, wherein:
| 03-15-2012 |
20120063390 | Transmission Timing Interval Adjusting Method and Network Device - A transmission timing interval (TTI) adjusting method is provided according to the embodiments of the present invention. Use condition of a system resource is obtained and it is judged whether a user meets a TTI adjusting requirement according to a current TTI of the user and the obtained use condition of the system resource. TTI adjustment is performed on all or a part of the users meeting the TTI adjusting requirement. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063391 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING AN EVOLVED UTRAN - A method and system for supporting an evolved universal mobile telecommunication systems (UMTS) terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) are disclosed. The system includes a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), a UTRAN and an E-UTRAN. The UTRAN sends to the WTRU a list of available radio access technologies in a coverage area of the UTRAN. The list includes information related to the E-UTRAN. The WTRU receives the list and may initiate a handoff based on the list. The WTRU then sends its multi-mode/multi-RAT capability information including the E-UTRAN capability to the UTRAN. The UTRAN then sends a measurement capability message to the WTRU. The measurement capability message includes parameters necessary for performing measurements on an E-UTRAN channel. The WTRU performs measurements based on the measurement capability message and reports measurement results to the UTRAN. The UTRAN may initiate a handoff to the E-UTRAN based on the measurement results. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063392 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product for Preserving a Signalling Connection - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for preserving a signaling connection after a network has indicated that the signaling connection can be closed, such as by selection of a no follow on proceed mode during routing area updates or attach procedures. By preserving the signaling connection, subsequent communications between the network and the user equipment can be completed without closing and then subsequently reopening the signaling connection. | 03-15-2012 |
20120069796 | MULTI-CARRIER INCREMENTAL REDUNDANCY FOR PACKET-BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - In a particular embodiment, a method of providing redundancy for error recovery in multi-carrier wireless communications includes transmitting a primary version of information via a first carrier, transmitting a first portion of a redundancy version of the information via a second carrier, and transmitting a second portion of the redundancy version of the information via a third carrier. The primary version is encoded using a first encoding scheme and the redundancy version is encoded using a second encoding scheme. The primary version, the first portion, and the second portion are transmitted substantially simultaneously. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069797 | METHOD FOR A COMMUNICATION NODE WITH A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION INTERFACES TO NOTIFY DYNAMIC PATH SETUP AND ASSOCIATES APPARATUS THEREOF - A User Equipment (UE) that is simultaneously connected (via a 3G connection and a non-3G connection) to a Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW) can direct how traffic flows would be routed from the P-GW to the UE. Typically, the P-GW would setup the 3G communication path to the UE when it receives a downlink data packet directed to the UE's 3G path. If the P-GW uses such logic for setting a communication path to the UE without knowing the user's actual intention, this might result in the case where the user would experience some service degradation for ongoing session. In addition, it is possible that the packets filters for a first UE interface are not utilized due to the erroneous setting of the packets filters for a second UE interface. To resolve this issue, the UE would indicate to the P-GW of the user's intention for communication path setup with the benefit of conserving the UE's battery. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069798 | TIMING CONTROL IN A MULTI-POINT HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS NETWORK - A method, apparatus, processing system, and computer program product enable association of mis-aligned subframes from a first and second downlink with one another, such that a HARQ acknowledgment message including jointly encoded feedback for the respective subframes can be correctly interpreted by the corresponding cells. Here, an RNC may provide an RRC message to the UE to associate particular subframes with one another. Further, the RNC may provide NBAP messages to the cells transmitting the downlink signals, so that the cells can associate the HARQ acknowledgment message with the appropriate subframe. Still further, additional signaling provides for changing the set of associated subframes when needed due to a drift in the timing offset between cells. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069799 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS SERVICES ADVERTISING VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting the advertising of extended network access to multimedia services via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may determine available media-related services, and may transmit information about those services to an access device that may comprise, for example, a mobile multimedia handset, a personal digital assistant, and a personal computer. The access device may notify a user of the availability of the media-related services using visual and/or audible means. The gateway may receive from the access device capability and/or subscriber related information, and the gateway may transmit service information based upon the capability and/or subscriber-related information. | 03-22-2012 |
20120076072 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MAINTAINING PRIVACY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method for of maintaining privacy in a wireless network is provided. A wireless communication device may transmit, to a broadcast address, a plurality of messages using a respective plurality of source identifiers. A response to at least one of the plurality of messages may be received. A predefined source identifier is used to establish a link. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076073 | PROTECTION MECHANISMS FOR MULTI-USER MIMO TRANSMISSIONS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for medium reservation in the case of multi-user (MU) communications. Multiple mechanisms are supported for protecting MU transmissions, wherein appropriate control messages can be exchanged between an access point and served user stations before transmitting downlink data packets. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076074 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONTENTION WINDOW IN WIMEDIA WIRELESS NETWORK - There are provided an apparatus and a method for establishing a contention window in a WiMedia wireless network. The contention window establishing apparatus includes: a parsing unit extracting the number of devices that intend to transmit data from a beacon received during a beacon period and an access category (AC) of each device; a calculation unit calculating a transmission probability of each access category (AC) on the basis of the extracted number of devices; and a contention window establishing unit establishing a contention window for each access category (AC) on the basis of the calculated transmission probability, to reduce contentions among the devices and decrease data transmission latency time, thereby maximizing efficiency in data transmission latency time. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076075 | INITIAL ACCESS SETTING INFORMATION GENERATING APPARATUS, METHOD, AND PROGRAM, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - An initial access setting information generating apparatus includes a preamble information transmission number obtaining unit that receives and obtains the number of transmissions for preamble information in a non-contention type initial access procedure performed between a base station and a communication terminal, where the preamble information transmission number obtaining unit receives and obtains the number of transmissions after the initial access procedure is completed; an expected reception power determination unit that determines an expected reception power at the base station, based on the number of transmissions for the preamble information, which is obtained by the preamble information transmission number obtaining unit; and a set value communication unit that generates and outputs initial access setting information about the initial access procedure for the communication terminal, based on the expected reception power determined by the expected reception power determination unit. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076076 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTING TO NETWORK FROM MOBILE TERMINAL - A method for connecting to a network from a mobile terminal capable of forming a high-performance radio channel in a Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), and an apparatus implementing the same are provided. The method includes transmitting a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection request message indicating a first release version to the network, receiving an RRC connection setup message indicating a second release version from the network, comparing the first and second release versions, determining whether there is a third release version lower than the first release version and higher than the second release version when the second release version differs from the first, and, if there is the third release version lower than the first release version and higher than the second release version, transmitting an RRC connection request message indicating the third release version to the network when the second release version differs from the first release version. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076077 | Efficient Signaling of Discontinuous Transmission - Methods and devices are disclosed for efficient signaling of discontinuous transmission in a wireless communication system. In various aspects of the disclosure, a user equipment device monitors transmissions on a plurality of physical downlink control channels (PDCCHs) and, in response to said transmissions, generates an acknowledge/negative acknowledge (ACK/NACK) signal comprising a plurality of bits, wherein the plurality of bits includes a discontinuous transmission (DTX) indicator bit. In some embodiments, the indicator bit corresponds to an even or odd number of PDCCHs successfully decoded. In other embodiments, the indicator bit corresponds to an odd or even number of component carriers comprising “TRUE” NACKs. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076078 | TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK MIMO RETRANSMISSION IN LTE SYSTEM - A transmission/reception method and apparatus for a mobile communication system supporting uplink MIMO is provided. In the transmission method, a User Equipment (UE) transmits two transport blocks according to a predetermined number of layers and respective precoding indices, an evolve Node B (eNB) transmits, when one of the transport blocks is lost, a negative acknowledgement for the lost transport block, and the UE sets a precoding index for the lost transport block to a predetermined value to retransmit the lost transport block while maintaining the number of layers. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076079 | BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station device including: a receiver that receives data from a terminal device; and a processor that performs setting for the reception of data from the terminal device, and deactivates a management of the terminal device after performing setting, wherein the receiver receives data from the terminal device in a state of deactivated management. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076080 | AUTOMATED VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL WIRELESS HEADSET - A system, apparatus, and method are provided for automatically provisioning wireless local area network (LAN) access point and/or hotspot information, Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) service provider information, and VoIP account information on a service provider's Web page to configure a wireless VoIP headset for use. | 03-29-2012 |
20120082089 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING GTP TRIGGERED MESSAGES - A GTP Triggered Message handling capability is provided for enabling handling of GTP Triggered Messages. A GTP Triggered Message including a GTP Sequence Number and an invalid TEID is received, and one of a plurality of processing elements is selected for the GTP Triggered Message based on the GTP Sequence Number of the GTP Triggered Message. The selected one of the processing elements is selected based on a mapping of a group of GTP Sequence Numbers to the selected one of the processing elements. The GTP Triggered Message is propagated toward the selected processing element such that the GTP Triggered Message may be processed by the selected processing element. In this manner, processing of GTP Triggered Messages having invalid TEIDs may be performed by processing elements which typically process GTP Triggered Messages having valid TEIDs, such that GTP Triggered Messages having invalid TEIDs are not required to be processed by a central processing module before being provided to the processing elements. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082090 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL OFFLOAD - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate establishing packet data context for local internet protocol (IP) offload at a device. One or more indicators regarding local IP offload access or support can be evaluated to determine whether to establish a requested context for the device. Where the one or more indicators allow, a packet data context for local IP offload traffic can be established and associated with a radio bearer at an access point allowing the device to communicate local IP offload data over the radio bearer. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082091 | LANGUAGE DEPENDENT POSITIONING AND SIGNALLING - Presented is a system and methods for allowing the translation the civic address portion of a positioning message to different languages. The positioning message can be in response to an Emergency-911 call providing much better information regarding the location of the caller associated with the user equipment on a wireless network. The positioning message can contain an indicator of the originating language or a translation of the language from the originating language to the preferred or required language of the destination address. The positioning message can also contain a series of translated messages representing all the languages supported by the wireless network. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082092 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD OF OPERATING THE SAME - A communication terminal for wireless internet communication and a method of operating the same are disclosed. When entering a wireless internet communication mode, a switch unit is controlled to connect a communication pattern unit to a wireless internet communication unit. In the internet communication mode, the communication terminal accesses the wireless internet through the communication pattern unit and communicates with the wireless internet. When the wireless internet communication mode ends, the switch unit is controlled to ground the communication pattern unit. A supplementary device of the communication terminal is used as a part of the communication pattern unit for wireless communication so that installation space for an antenna may be secured in the communication terminal. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082093 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OFFLOADING DATA IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes communicating an in-band message packet from a first network element; receiving a response to the in-band message from a second network element, the response contains tunnel identification binding data that identifies a tunnel on a backhaul link on which traffic from a user equipment can flow; and receiving instructions from the second network element to offload a received data packet from the backhaul link. In particular instances, the in-band message is set to loopback when the in-band message is sent from the first network element. In other embodiments, the tunnel identification binding data is provided in the payload of the in-band message when the in-band message is sent from the first network element. In other examples, the method can include receiving an assigned Internet protocol (IP) address of the user equipment in the response to the in-band message. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082094 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OFFLOADING DATA IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving a downstream data packet transported on a backhaul link at a first network element, the downstream data packet is associated with a user equipment; identifying whether a downstream tunnel used to communicate the data packet to the user equipment has become dormant; and communicating an in-band message to a second network element that the downstream tunnel is dormant. In other examples, the method can include dropping the data packet when a network address port translation binding has expired or does not exist. In certain implementations, the method can include identifying the downstream tunnel as dormant when an activity timer has expired, or identifying the downstream tunnel as dormant based on a stale state setting. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082095 | ATTENTION COMMANDS ENHANCEMENT - An apparatus includes a Mobile Termination (MT) that offers functions related to communication with a network, a Terminal Equipment (TE) that offers services to a user of the apparatus, and a Terminal Adaptor (TA) that allows communication between the MT and the TE using Attention (AT) commands. A packet domain event reporting command (+CGEREP) is one type of AT command that enables or disables sending of result codes from the MT to the TE in case certain events occur in the MT for a packet domain or in the network. One such type of event is a Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context activation, for which the MT sends to the TE a result code that includes an integer type parameter to indicate the reason why a context activation request with PDP type IPv4v6 was not granted, and a context id parameter to indicate the capability of Mobile Termination for autonomously requesting a second address bearer, and the result of the second address bearer activation. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082096 | MAC AND RLC ARCHITECTURE AND PROCEDURES TO ENABLE RECEPTION FROM MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION POINTS - A method for use in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) for two-stage reordering of received protocol data units (PDUs). The method comprising receiving PDUs from Node-Bs, wherein each of the received PDUs has a transmission sequence number (TSN), reordering the received PDUs from Node-Bs using the TSN in a MAC layer in different reordering queues, delivering the received PDUs from reordering queues to one logical channel in the RLC layer, reordering the received PDUs in the RLC layer based on a sequence number (SN), starting a timer when at least a RLC PDU is missing based on SN of the RLC PDU, and transmitting a status report indicating a missing RLC PDU based on SN of the RLC PDU if the timer expires, wherein transmission of the status report is delayed if a RLC PDU is missing based on SN of the RLC PDU and the timer is running. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082097 | Radio Network Control - A radio network control method that allows uplink signals transmitted by a mobile station to be received by two or more selected base station radio systems and then combined, thus providing receiver diversity. The method requires measurement of radio link qualities of the OFDM signals passing between mobile station and base station radio system. The method is selectively applied to individual mobile stations and for each mobile station to a selection from the available base station radio systems—the selection being based upon the relative and/or absolute measurements of radio link qualities. | 04-05-2012 |
20120087301 | ASSET MANAGEMENT FOR INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY RESOURCES - A method to identify information technology resources whereby a locator device is inserted into a communication port of each information technology resource, such as a computers, router, cable endpoints, etc. When activated, the device passively receives wireless RF transmissions from broadcast units in the vicinity while actively receiving and storing configuration and other predetermined information from the resource. The device can calculate the exact position of the information technology resource and store the location in memory. The location and the identifying data of the information technology resource can be used in an asset management database, to locate a lost or missing resource, or can be used for billing for service level agreements. The method and device herein is particularly useful in secure facilities. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087302 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A REVERSE INVITATION IN A HYBRID PEER-TO-PEER ENVIRONMENT - An improved system and method are disclosed for peer-to-peer communications. In one example, the method enables an endpoint to send a reverse invitation in response to an incoming call. The reverse invitation may be used to set up an alternate communication session rather than maintaining the incoming call. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087303 | COMMUNICATION METHOD OF A VEHICULAR ACCESS POINT, A VEHICULAR USER EQUIPMENT, AND A MACRO BASE STATION - Provided is a communication method of a vehicular access point, a vehicular user equipment, and a macro base station for a user present in a vehicle capable of effectively forming an operational relationship between the vehicular access point and the macro base station using a plurality of operational modes. The plurality of operational modes may be differentiated based on an operation of the vehicular access point and the macro base station, and are capable of transitioning the vehicular access point from an active state to an idle state by a triggering with respect to the vehicular access point. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087304 | Differential feedback within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Differential feedback within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. After full feedback signal(s) have been received by a communication device (e.g., one that is to be performing beamforming for use in subsequent signal transmission), differential feedback signal(s) are received. Those differential feedback signal(s) are employed to update the full feedback signal(s) thereby generating updated/modified full feedback signals. Over time, such updated/modified full feedback signals may subsequently be further updated based upon later received inferential feedback signal(s). Such differential feedback signaling takes advantage of time and/or frequency correlation in a communication channel to provide for reduced feedback overhead by feeding back a difference or delta (Δ) relative to a previous value. For example, instead of providing full feedback signals in each respective/successive communication, feedback overhead is reduced by providing a difference or delta (Δ). | 04-12-2012 |
20120087305 | PACKET TRANSMISSION DEVICE, SIGNAL TERMINATING DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A packet transmission device includes a receiver which receives an encapsulated packet obtained by adding a header to a packet which includes a user signal; a memory which stores an address of a transmission source of the user signal stored in the encapsulated packet with respect to an identifier that identifies a type of the user signal included in the header; a processor which controls a band, through which the encapsulated packet passes, based on a value obtained by multiplying a number of addresses of the transmission source stored in the memory with respect to the identifier by a guarantee band allocated for the identifier; and a transmitter which transmits the encapsulated packet to a first network based on the control by the processor. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087306 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION POWER PER CARRIER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and apparatus for determining a maximum transmission power per carrier in a mobile communication system supporting carrier aggregation are provided. The method for determining the maximum transmission power of a terminal in a mobile communication system supporting carrier aggregation includes checking whether a data channel transmission occurs on each of a plurality of carriers of which Power Headrooms (PHs) are reported in an extended PH Report (PHR), and determining the maximum transmission power of each carrier of the plurality of carriers in consideration of whether the data channel transmission occurs on a carrier corresponding to the data channel transmission. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087307 | Differential Detection unit for the Zigbee 802.15.4 Standard - In one embodiment, a detection unit includes a sequence providing unit to provide a third group of derived sequences. The third group for each first pseudo noise (PN) sequence has a derived sequence assigned to the first PN sequence. The detection unit includes a correlation unit, which is connected to the sequence providing unit and formed to calculate correlation results by correlating the differentially demodulated signal with each derived sequence of the third group. The detection unit includes an evaluation unit, which is connected to the correlation unit and is formed to derive the values of the data symbols by evaluating the correlation results. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087308 | RANDOM ACCESS BURST TRANSMISSION SCHEME - An apparatus for transmitting and receiving signals in a wireless telecommunication system and to a method for transmitting random access bursts in such an apparatus. The apparatus includes a transmitter for transmitting random access bursts, a receiver for receiving acknowledgement information confirming a successful transmission of a random access burst, a decision unit for deciding if acknowledgement information has been received, and a control unit for randomly choosing a time point for an attempt to retransmit said random access burst from an interval if no acknowledgement information has been received after a random access burst had been transmitted. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087309 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA PACKETS AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING DATA PACKETS - The invention relates to a data packet structure for conveying data of service data units (SDU) using protocol data units (PDU). The data packet comprise a data packet payload comprising at least one protocol data unit (PDU), wherein a protocol data unit (PDU) comprises a service data unit (SDU) or a fragment of a service data unit; and a data packet header comprising an indicator (FFF,SFF) indicating whether or not the data packet payload begins with a protocol data unit (PDU) being a fragment of a service data unit and whether or not the data packet payload ends with a protocol data unit (PDU) being a fragment of a service data unit. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087310 | DISTRIBUTED COMPUTATION OF PRECODING WEIGHTS FOR COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION ON THE DOWNLINK - In a Coordinated Multi-point (CoMP) system, the base station (BS) in each serving cell (or sector) is allowed to use not only its own antennas, but also the antennas of neighboring BSs to transmit to mobile terminals in the serving cell to form a floating CoMP cell. The serving BS in each floating CoMP cell computes tentative linear precoding weights for transmissions from the coordinating BSs in the floating CoMP cell to users in the serving cell of the floating CoMP cell. The serving BS determines the power availability for transmit antennas in the floating CoMP cell that are shared with other floating CoMP cells, and scales the tentative precoding weights based on the power availability of the shared transmit antennas to determine final precoding weights so that the power constraints of the shared transmit antennas will not be violated. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087311 | MIXED WAVEFORM CONFIGURATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A mixed waveform configuration for wireless communications including a first portion that is modulated according to a single-carrier modulation scheme and a second portion that is modulated according to a multi-carrier modulation scheme. The waveform is specified so that a channel impulse response (CIR) estimate obtainable from the first portion is reusable for acquisition of the second portion. The first portion includes a preamble and header and the second portion typically incorporates the payload. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087312 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR END NODE ASSISTED NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY - Methods and apparatus for using end nodes, e.g., wireless terminals, to discover base stations and communicate information about discovered access nodes, e.g., base stations, to other access nodes in a system are described. As the wireless terminal roams in the system and new access nodes are encountered, one or more physically adjacent access nodes will be informed of the presence of the new access node as a result of communications with the wireless terminal. A message indicating an access node's inability to route a message to another access node which is known to a wireless terminal may trigger the wireless terminal to begin the process of updating access node routing and neighbor information. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087313 | Paging Processing Method, Communication Apparatus, and Communication System - A paging processing method, a communication apparatus, and a communication system are disclosed, which can improve the quality of service provided to a user equipment. The paging processing method includes: receiving, by a mobility management network element, a downlink data notification message which includes service attribute information of a downlink data packet; obtaining the service attribute information; and initiating paging of the user equipment based on different policies according to the service attribute information. Accordingly, embodiments of the present invention also provide a communication apparatus and a communication system. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087314 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system according to the present invention, with the separate use of a plurality of component carriers or with the use of a carrier set including the plurality of component carriers aggregated, a base station performs radio communication with a user equipment corresponding to the component carrier or a user equipment corresponding to the aggregated carriers. In particular, in a case where the base station performs radio communication with the user equipment corresponding to the aggregated carriers with the use of the aggregated carriers, each of a plurality of transport blocks created by dividing a transport channel is transmitted per each of the plurality of component carriers constituting the aggregated carriers, and control information related to radio communication between the base station and the user equipment corresponding to the aggregated carriers is transmitted such that physical information of the corresponding component carrier is identifiable. | 04-12-2012 |
20120093073 | UL ACK/NACK For Inter-Radio Access Technology Carrier Aggregation - A method is disclosed that includes, for each of a multiplicity of subframes to be communicated using a first radio access technology, determining a first number of bits used for first feedback information corresponding to a first communication effected using the first radio access technology and a second number of bits used for second feedback information corresponding to a second communication effected using a second radio access technology. The method further includes, using only the first radio access technology, communicating the multiplicity of subframes, wherein for each of the multiplicity of subframes, included in the subframe are the first feedback information using the determined first number of bits and the second feedback information using the determined second number of bits. Apparatus, program products, and computer programs are also disclosed. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093074 | Local breakout with local gateway for mobile users - A user equipment UE context is stored in a local memory including a session context for a breakout data session. The session context comprises a source internet protocol IP address, a destination IP address, an identifier of a former local breakout gateway LBGW and an identifier of a new LBGW. The former LBGW receives first traffic originating from the destination IP address and addressed to the source IP address, and uses the session context to forward the first traffic from the former LBGW to the new LBGW via a first tunnel. There is thus a globally routable IP address for the session context that need not change when the UE moves from one LBGW to another. Embodiments are detailed for routing through more than two LBGWs, and for when the UE initiates another breakout data session on the new LBGW ion addition to the aforesaid breakout data session. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093075 | Multiple SIM support with single modem software architecture - Disclosed are methods, apparatus and computer program products that provide an enhanced multi-SIM wireless communication device. For example, a method includes providing in a wireless communication device a protocol stack software component composed of a first native protocol stack software and a second native protocol stack software each comprising layer | 04-19-2012 |
20120093076 | DIMINISHING THE IMPACT OF TIMING DELAY IN DOWNLINK SIGNALS - When performing interference cancellation on selected information (e.g., synchronization signals, certain broadcast signals, etc.) through cross correlation, symbol periods of signals being combined will generally match up. Slight mismatches will generally produce negligible impact on interference cancellation. However, where the mismatch is severe due to significant timing offsets, serious performance degradation may occur, particularly when timing offsets are sufficiently large as to overlap data portions of a transmission. By selectively puncturing resource elements prior to the selected information and/or after the selected information, the selected information may be protected and allow for interference cancellation even in cases of large timing offsets. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093077 | FEMTOCELL LOCATION ENCODING - A device associated with a Voice over IP (VoIP) network receives a call from a mobile device. The device determines whether a sector identifier (ID) associated with the call includes a femtocell identifier. The device further determines a location identifier included in the sector ID when the sector ID includes the femtocell identifier. The device also identifies a recipient of the call based on the location identifier and forwards the call to the recipient. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093078 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR PLANNED EVOLUTION AND OBSOLESCENCE OF MULTIUSER SPECTRUM - A system and method are described which enable planned evolution and obsolescence of multiuser wireless spectrum. One embodiment of such a system includes one or multiple centralized processors and one or multiple distributed nodes that communicate via wireline or wireless connections. The distributed nodes may share their identification number and other reconfigurable system parameters with the centralized processor. The information about all distributed nodes may be stored in a database that is shared by all centralized processors. The reconfigurable system parameters may comprise power emission, frequency band, modulation/coding scheme. The distributed nodes may be software defined radios such as FPGA, DSP, GPU and/or GPCPU that run algorithms for baseband signal processing and may be reconfigured remotely by the centralized processor. A cloud wireless system may be used wherein the distributed nodes are reconfigured periodically or instantly to adjust to the evolving wireless architecture. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093079 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING PERFORMANCE OF MULTIPLE CARRIERS - The present invention relates to a wireless access system which supports multiple carriers, and disclosed is a method for coordinating the performance of the multiple carriers and an apparatus for supporting same. The method for coordinating the performance of the multiple carriers according to the present invention broadly consists of two steps. For example, the method comprises the steps of coordinating the basic performance of the multiple carriers in mobile user equipment and coordinating the extended performance of the multiple carriers in the mobile user equipment. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093080 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting and receiving data in a wireless communication system is disclosed. In the method of transmitting the data in the wireless communication system, a base station transmits downlink data to a first terminal supporting a first system through a first zone of a frame, and transmits downlink data to a second terminal supporting a second system through a second zone located at a location separated from the first zone backwardly by a frame offset on a time axis. The wireless communication system may support a bandwidth of 8.75 MHz, the frame offset is an offset between a start point of a frame for the first system and a start point of a frame for the second system, and the first zone includes 3+6*(frame offset−1) Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093081 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio base station includes a mobile communication system that sends and receives control signals between a mobile station and a mobile switching center via a first radio bearer, a second radio bearer, and a wired bearer. The relay node includes a first radio bearer function, a second radio bearer function, an IP layer function, an SCTP layer function, and an application layer function. The radio base station includes a second radio bearer function, a wired bearer function, and an IP layer function. The mobile switching center includes a wired bearer function, IP layer function, SCTP layer function, and an application layer function. Keep-alive processing is performed between the SCTP layer function of the relay node and the SCTP layer function of the mobile switching center. Security processing is performed between the IP layer function of the relay node and the IP layer function of the mobile switching center. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093082 | METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WHICH A RELAY STATION MAKES A HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of performing a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) of a relay station in a backhaul link of a multi-carrier system is provided. The method includes: receiving backhaul downlink data through at least one carrier between a first carrier and a second carrier; transmitting acknowledgement/not-acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) for the backhaul downlink data through an uplink component carrier; and receiving new backhaul downlink data or retransmitted backhaul downlink data in accordance with the transmitted ACK/NACK through at least one carrier between the first carrier and the second carrier, wherein the first carrier is a component carrier dedicated to the backhaul downlink between a base station and the relay station, and the second carrier is a component carrier used in both the backhaul downlink and an access downlink between the relay station and a relay user equipment at different times. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093083 | Data Session Authentication Credentials Update For A Wireless Communication Device - Techniques in a wireless device for use in accessing a common data application with a service network which is external to a plurality of wireless networks are described. The device receives a data session configuration file which includes a list of the plurality of wireless networks mapped against authentication credentials associated with each wireless network. The device communicates with a current one the wireless networks. The device selects from the list one of the authentication credentials that is associated with the current wireless network. The device submits, via the current wireless network, the selected authentication credentials for establishing a packet data session via the current wireless network. The device then accesses, via the current wireless network using the packet data session, the common data application with the service network which is external to the current wireless network. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093084 | MODULAR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS PLATFORM - A modular wireless communications platform is provided. The modular wireless communications platform has a modular host unit and a modular remote unit in communication with the modular host unit. The modular host unit and remote unit include a serial radio frequency communicator configured to convert serial digital data into RF sampled data and configured to convert RF sampled data into serial digital data. The modular host unit and remote unit also include an interface coupled to the serial radio frequency communicator and configured to allow transfer of the RF sampled data from the serial radio frequency communicator to a digital to analog radio frequency transceiver module. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093085 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING LEGACY FORMAT DATA IN HIGH THROUGHPUT WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and an apparatus are provided for enabling a legacy station to perform virtual carrier sensing when a plurality of stations with heterogeneous capabilities coexist in a wireless network. The method includes receiving first data compliant with a first protocol, and transmitting second data compliant with a second protocol, where the first protocol is downward compatible with the second protocol. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093086 | Method, Apparatus and System for Transmitting User Plane Data - Receiving a connection establishment request message sent by a user equipment; establishing a signaling connection with the user equipment according to the connection establishment request message; and transmitting a user plane IP data packet through the signaling connection. After a signaling connection is established between a UE in an idle state and a mobility management device, an uplink user plane IP data packet or a downlink user plane IP data packet, is directly transmitted between the UE and the network side through the signaling connection, with no need to specifically establish (recover) an RAB between the UE and an S-GW, which can save the signaling overhead, thus reducing the network load and lowering the operating cost of an operator. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093087 | Trail-Based Data Gathering Mechanism for Wireless Sensor Networks with Mobile Sinks - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for routing data packets through a wireless sensor network to a mobile sink in a relatively quick and efficient manner while utilizing low protocol overhead. Additionally, a method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided such that a sensor node within a wireless sensor network maintains sink information and routing information to facilitate efficient delivery of a data packet to a mobile sink within a wireless sensor network. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093088 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING COMPONENT CARRIERS TO BE AGGREGATED FOR TRANSMISSION - A method for processing multiple Component Carriers (CCs) to be aggregated for transmission is provided in the present invention, the method comprising the steps of: acquiring a time domain signal of each of the multiple CCs; applying multiple fixed phase rotations respectively to the acquired time domain signal by utilizing phase rotation values in a set of phase rotations, so as to obtain multiple phase rotation versions of each CC; randomly selecting one of the multiple phase rotation versions of each CC to respectively constitute multiple candidate transmission groups, and acquiring an amplitude sum of the phase rotation versions for each of the multiple candidate transmission groups; determining a candidate transmission group having the minimum amplitude sum; and transmitting multiple phase rotation versions in the determined candidate transmission group having the minimum amplitude sum. The present invention substantively provides a general solution capable of minimizing CM/PAPR of aggregated CCs for UL and DL. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093089 | METHOD FOR SELECTING PRECODER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS USING THE SAME, FEEDBACK METHOD OF CHANNEL INFORMATION OF TERMINAL, AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING CHANNEL INFORMATION OF BASE STATION - Disclosed is related to a wireless communication system, and is a method and an apparatus for selecting a UE and a precoder based on a measurement during a determined period after receiving information extracted by using channel state information from each UE in a MU-MIMO communication system, and a switching apparatus and method between modes using the same. Accordingly, the BS performs a long term measurement based precoding by using only the same feedback information (for example, PMI) as that of a SU-MIMO mode, so that a set of UEs to be supported by a MIMO and precoders for each UE, which prevent or minimize interference between UEs, may be determined without an increase of a feedback overhead. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093090 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION IN MULTI-ANTENNA SYSTEM - Provided are a method and apparatus for uplink transmission in a multi-antenna system. A terminal transmits a plurality of first transmission symbols via a plurality of antennas using a first spatial processing performed on the first transmission symbols, and transmits a plurality of second transmission symbols via a plurality of antennas using a second spatial processing performed on the second transmission symbols. At least one column or at least one row of a first spatial processing matrix used in the first spatial processing is switched to form a second SFBC matrix used in the second spatial processing. According to the present invention, peak-to average power (PAPR)/cubic metric (CM) ratio can be kept at a low level, and imbalanced transmission power among antennas can be evened out. | 04-19-2012 |
20120099522 | CELL SELECTING APPARATUS AND CELL SELECTING METHOD - A cell selection apparatus is used in the environment in which multiple communication systems coexists and at least one of the communication systems use guard intervals inserted in the transmission signal. The apparatus includes delay profile creation means ( | 04-26-2012 |
20120099523 | ENSURING CONTENT FILTERING THROUGH A SPECIALIZED TIER OF PROXY CACHES AT THE BASE STATION - Embodiments of the invention provide a method, system and computer program product for content caching with remote filtering services in a radio access network (RAN). In an embodiment of the invention, a method for content caching with remote filtering services in a RAN can include receiving a response to a request from an end user device wirelessly coupled to a base station of the RAN, marking the response as uncacheable, and routing the response to the base station over a data communications network. In one aspect of the embodiment, the response can be received in an RNC of the RAN. Of note, the process of marking the response as uncacheable can depend upon the evaluation of a policy with respect to the response. Finally, in another aspect of the embodiment, marking the response as uncacheable, can include annotating a hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) header of the response to indicate that the response is not to be cached in the base station. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099524 | DELIVERY REPORT FOR TEXT MESSAGES IN SIP COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods are disclosed for providing a delivery status of a text message in a SIP response. In one embodiment, a text message system receives a SIP request from an entity in a packet-switched network, where the SIP request encapsulates a text message. The text message system determines a status for delivering the text message to a recipient, and generates a SIP response that includes a delivery status parameter for text messages. The text message system inserts the determined delivery status for the text message in the delivery status parameter of the SIP response, and transmits the SIP response to the entity over the packet-switched network. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099525 | COUNTER CHECK PROCEDURE FOR PACKET DATA TRANSMISSION - A counter synchronization process is described that is event driven rather than conducted on a periodic basis. A receiving device, which may be a user equipment (UE) or a base station, monitors received data packets to detect a rollover of a packet data sequence number in successive data packets. When the sequence number rollover is detected, the receiving device increments the variable data portion of the deciphering key stored in memory. Also in response to this detected rollover event, the receiving device transmits a synchronization message to the source device. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099526 | DECODING DEVICE - A decoding device includes a decoder that conducts decoding on transmission data sent a predetermined number of transmissions from respective communication partners; and a scheduler that identifies transmission data to be decoded by the decoder at a certain decoding timing among decoding timings that occur periodically and that determines whether to decode the identified transmission data at the certain decoding timing, based on a number of transmissions in which the identified transmission data has been sent. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099527 | USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio base station includes a user equipment configured to execute radio communication with a base station device in a mobile communication system including, a control signal reception unit configured to receive a control signal instructing transmission of an uplink signal and an uplink signal transmission unit configured to transmit an uplink signal to the base station device based on the control signal. The uplink signal transmission unit is configured not to transmit the uplink signal when the information contained in the control signal matches predetermined details. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099528 | RADIO NETWORK CONTROL DEVICE, PACKET SWITCHING DEVICE, CIRCUIT SWITCHING DEVICE, AND INFORMATION REPORTING METHOD - A radio network control device in a mobile communication network includes a first communication unit communicating with a packet switching device in a packet switched domain; a second communication unit communicating with a circuit switching device in a circuit switched domain; and a management unit transmitting information to the packet switching device, the information indicating whether the radio network control device can correctly communicate with the circuit switching device. The management unit transmits the information when transmitting a signal to the packet switching device via the first communication unit, the signal indicating whether the radio network control device can correctly communicate with the packet switching device, or when transmitting an attach request signal to the packet switching device via the first communication unit, the attach request signal being transmitted from a mobile station. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099529 | Arrangement and Method for Session Control in a Wireless Communication Network - An arrangement and method for session control in a wireless UMTS radio access network ( | 04-26-2012 |
20120099530 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Communication operations are optimally conducted by applying space-division multiple access in which wireless resources on a spatial axis are shared among a plurality of users. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099531 | Method for Processing Packets of the IP Type Intended to be Carried Over a Communications Channel of a Wireless Network, and Equipment for Same - A method for processing packets of the IP type within equipment of a wireless communications network comprising an encapsulation of the packets within frames carried over a communications channel of the wireless network. The said encapsulation comprises a first encapsulation of the signalling packets of the IP type within a frame of a first type containing an indication associated with this type of packet, then an additional encapsulation of the said frame of the first type within a frame of a second type different from the first type, and a second encapsulation of the packets transporting the user data of the IP type within a frame of a third type then an additional encapsulation of the said frame of the third type within a frame of the second type. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099532 | METHOD FOR CONSTRUCTING RACH PREAMBLE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING RACH SIGNAL - A wireless communication system is disclosed. A method for constructing a RACH preamble according to a cell radius of a base station (BS) irrespective of a guard time (GT) and a method for allocating the RACH preamble are disclosed. A method for constructing a preamble of a random access channel (RACH) includes acquiring time-length information of a predetermined cyclic prefix (CP) for each cell radius of a base station (BS), acquiring sequence time-length information of a single sequence or a repeated sequence, and constructing the preamble using the predetermined CP time-length information and the sequence time-length information, irrespective of a time length of a guard time (GT). | 04-26-2012 |
20120099533 | Content Caching in the Radio Access Network (RAN) - A system and method to intercept traffic at standard interface points as defined by Cellular/Wireless networks (GSM/GPRS, 3G/UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA, CDMA, WIMAX, LTE), emulate the respective protocols on either side of the interception point, extract user/application payloads within the intercepted packets, perform optimizations, and re-encapsulate with the same protocol, and deliver the content transparently is disclosed. The optimizations include but are not limited to Content Caching, prediction & pre-fetching of frequently used content, performance of content-aware transport optimizations (TCP, UDP, RTP etc.) for reducing back-haul bandwidth, and improvement of user experience. An additional embodiment of the current invention includes injecting opportunistic content (location based, profile based or advertisement content) based on the information derived while monitoring control plane protocols. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099534 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, TRANSMITTING METHOD AND RECEIVING METHOD - A receiving method and apparatus that performs receiving processing of data transmitted at timings of a predetermined interval. The method and apparatus includes transmitting a signal indicating that a data is successfully received when the data transmitted at M | 04-26-2012 |
20120099535 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION FAILURE DETECTION IN TIME DIVISION SYNCHRONOUS CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS (TD-SCDMA) NETWORKS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided, wherein a first synchronization signal is transmitted to request access to a Node B; an acknowledgement transmitted from the Node B is detected, wherein the acknowledgment comprises an indication that a second synchronization signal was transmitted after the first synchronization signal; and the first synchronization signal is retransmitted based on the acknowledgment. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099536 | APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - An apparatus for transmitting and receiving data in a wireless communication system method thereof are disclosed. In a terminal of a wireless communication system, the present invention includes receiving a physical downlink control channel (hereinafter abbreviated PD-CCH), receiving a physical downlink shared channel ((hereinafter abbreviated PDSCH), and demodulating the PDSCH by interpreting the PDCCH according to a type of a subframe including the PDCCH and the PDSCH. | 04-26-2012 |
20120106439 | CELL SITE MODEM APPLICATION MESSAGE INTERFACE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for implementing a cell site modem application message interface (CSM API) for a cell site of Long Term Evolution (LTE) wireless system. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106440 | GENERATING PLATFORM IDENTIFICATION FOR CERTIFICATION VERSION SIGNALING - A method for generating platform identification is presented. In one embodiment, the method includes determining whether a hash value collision indication presents in a table based on one or more platform attributes. The method includes generating a hash value based at least on the one or more platform attributes if there is no hash value collision indication and setting a platform identifier to a string generated based on the hash value. The method further includes sending a message including at least the platform identifier during network entry. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106441 | SUPPORTING A WIRELESS NETWORK PROTOCOL ON A MOBILE DEVICE USING A WIRED INTERFACE - The disclosed mobile communication device, system and method permit the process of integration and/or testing of one or more new and/or evolving wireless technologies on a mobile device without complete hardware integration. To achieve this, the mobile communication device includes a wired interface configured to communicate with a separate device via a wired connection using a wired network protocol. The mobile device also includes a data plane bridge that translates data packets between the wired network protocol of the wired interface and a wireless network protocol. The wireless network protocol is used by a mobile application executing on the mobile communication device to transfer the data packets over a wireless link. The data plane bridge and wired interface permit the data packet to be transferred over the wired interface, instead of the wireless link. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106442 | System and Method for Cooperative Heterogeneous Communications Systems - A system and method for cooperative heterogeneous communications systems are provided. A communications system includes a plurality of cooperation sets, such as closed-space sets. Each closed-space set includes at least two information sources configured to operate cooperatively to transmit to a plurality of communications devices operating within a coverage area of the cooperation set. There is limited cooperation between closed-spaced sets. In addition, there may be limited or no overlap between .the coverage areas of the adjacent closed-spaced sets. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106443 | UNIVERSAL INTEGRATED CIRCUIT CARD ACTIVATION IN A HYBRID NETWORK - A universal integrated circuit card (UICC) may include a universal subscriber identity module (USIM); a code division multiple access (CDMA) subscriber identity module (CSIM); a memory to store instructions; and a processor. The processor may execute instructions to determine a type of wireless access network available to a user equipment (UE) associated with the UICC; perform activation of the UICC using the USIM, in response to detecting a CDMA enhanced High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) network, a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) access network, or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) access network; and perform activation of the UICC using the CSIM, in response to detecting an available CDMA access network other than a CDMA eHRPD access network. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106444 | FEMTOCELL AND INTERNET ACCESSING METHOD - A femtocell to allow a user terminal device access to the Internet includes a tunnel communication module to establish a secure tunnel between the user terminal device and the Internet and a network address translator to translate network address for the user terminal device. The femtocell selects the network address translator to allow the user terminal device access to the Internet upon the condition that the user terminal device requires a video streaming service. The femtocell further selects the network address translator or the tunnel communication module according to a speed of the user terminal device accessing the Internet upon the condition that the user terminal device requires a web service. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106445 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING AN INTERFACE BETWEEN ACCESS POINTS - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate establishing an interface for communications between access points. Where access points operate in a same local or enterprise network, an interface can be established via the local or enterprise network instead of (or in addition to) a wireless operator network. A source access point can determine an address over which to request establishment of the interface based at least in part on an identifier of a target access point. In another example, target access point can determine an address to provide to the source access point for establishing the interface based at least in part on an identifier of the source access point. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106446 | Managing Devices Within A Vehicular Communication Network - A network node module within a vehicle operates to manage devices coupled to a vehicular communication network of the vehicle based on a use mode defining rights and privileges for operating in the vehicular communication network. Upon being configured in accordance with a particular use mode of a set of use modes, the network node module can identify a device coupled to the vehicular communication network and enable the device to operate within the vehicular communication network in accordance with the use mode. The network node module is securely reconfigurable to any use mode in the set of use modes. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106447 | PRIORITY PACKET PROCESSING - A network node in a vehicular network processes packets based on a prioritization scheme. The prioritization scheme uses packet type, priority, source, destination, or other information to determine a priority of the packets. Packets can be stored in one of multiple queues organized according to packet type, or other criteria. In some cases, only one queue is used. The packets are time stamped when put into a queue, and a time to live is calculated based on the timestamp. The time to live, as well as other factors such as packet type, packet priority, packet source, and packet destination can be used to adjust a packet's priority within the queue. Packets are transmitted from the queues in priority order. In some cases, the network node can identify a top-priority packet, and transmit the top priority packet without first storing the packet in the queue. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106448 | UNIFIED VEHICLE NETWORK FRAME PROTOCOL - A network node module includes a processing module and memory. The processing module is operable to generate a header section of a frame for transmission within a unified vehicle communication network. The header section includes a preamble, routing information, and a vehicle network field, which includes information that identifies a type of the frame. The processing module is further operable to generate a payload section of the frame. The payload section includes data payload and an integrity check field. The processing module is further operable to transmit the frame to the unified vehicle communication network in accordance with a global vehicle network communication protocol. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106449 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal may include a recognition unit that recognizes terminals that are located in its own vicinity and that are capable of performing wireless communication, an authentication unit that performs authentication at a data link level for the recognized terminals that are capable of performing wireless communication, a communication unit that receives authentication requests from the recognized terminals that are capable of performing wireless communication, and performs data communication with the recognized terminals, a selection unit that selects any one of the recognized terminals that are capable of performing wireless communication, and an authentication control unit that, if the authentication request is received from a terminal that has not been recognized, causes the authentication unit to perform the authentication for the selected terminal, and at the same time prohibits the authentication unit from performing the authentication for terminals other than the selected terminal. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106450 | CHANNEL QUALITY FEEDBACK SIGNALING IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The invention relates to a message for reporting a channel quality of a communication system, a corresponding method and apparatuses performing such method. The invention is inter alia applicable to a 3GPP LTE and LTE-A system as standardized by the 3 | 05-03-2012 |
20120106451 | Method and Arrangement for Session Negotiation - In a method of improved session negotiation between first and second clients in a cellular telecommunication system, the two clients negotiating S | 05-03-2012 |
20120106452 | WIRELESS STATION CONNECTIVITY INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION - According to an example embodiment, a method may include receiving, by a broker station in a wireless network, a broker activation request message from a first client station, the broker activation request message comprising wireless networking capabilities of the first client station. The method may also include sending a networking capability message to at least one other client station, the network capability message comprising identifier and wireless network capabilities of the first client station, the networking capability message being based at least partly on the broker activation request message. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106453 | WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICE, WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SELECTION OF ROUTINGS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a wireless network device, a wireless network system and a method of controlling selection of routings. The wireless network device includes: a memory configured to store routing latency information for routing from the wireless network device to other nodes in a network; a processor configured to determine transmission latency requirement of transmitting data packets from the wireless network device to a destination node according to transmission latency requirement information carried in the data packets after obtaining the data packets to be transmitted, query available routes from the wireless network device to the destination node, and the stored latency information corresponding to the available routes, select a route most approximate to the determined transmission latency requirement from the available routes according to a query result of the query module, and transmit the data packets. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106454 | PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS USING A DISTRIBUTED MOBILE ARCHITECTURE - A method includes receiving a call at a distributed mobile architecture (DMA) server. The DMA server includes a mobile switching center (MSC) module, a wireless transceiver, and a base station controller (BSC). The MSC module includes an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) module configured to support generation of call detail records at the DMA server. The method includes routing the call from the DMA server to a communication device. The method further includes generating a call detail record associated with the call at the DMA server. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106455 | METHOD FOR GENERATING A REFERENCE SIGNAL SEQUENCE USING GROUPING - A method for a base station to receive a reference signal sequence from one or more devices within a cell of the base station in a multiple cell environment includes providing the one or more devices with information about the reference signal sequence, wherein the reference signal sequence is defined by a cyclic shift of a base sequence, wherein the base sequence is one of a plurality of base sequences divided into groups, wherein each of the groups comprises at least one base sequence for each length (N), wherein each length (N) corresponds to (12*n), (n) being a positive integer, and receiving the reference signal sequence from one or more of the one or more devices. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106456 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR ROUTING USER PLANE DATA IN MOBILE NETWORK - A method, an apparatus, and a system for routing user plane data in a mobile network are disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention, relate to the field of communications, and solve the problem that transmission delay of packet service data is relatively great in the prior art. The method for routing user plane data in the mobile network includes that: an access network bearer and a PDN gateway bearer of a user equipment are directly interconnected through a tunnel established between an access network and a PDN gateway; and data between a Home NodeB, a Home NodeB Gateway or a macro network access network and the PDN gateway is directly routed through the tunnel. The method, the apparatus, and the system can be applied to a mobile communication system. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106457 | COOPERATIVE TRANSCEIVING BETWEEN WIRELESS INTERFACE DEVICES OF A HOST DEVICE - A method and/or apparatus for cooperative transceiving between wireless interface devices of a host device includes processing that begins by providing an indication of receiving an inbound packet from one wireless interface device (e.g., Bluetooth compliant radio transceiver, IEEE 802.11 compliant radio transceiver, etc.) to another. The wireless interlace device receiving the indication processes the indication and, based on the processing, transmits an outbound packet in accordance with the processing of the indication. For example, the wireless interface device receiving the indication may delay transmission until the other wireless interface device has received the packet, or, if transmission of the packet would not interfere with the receiving of the packet by the other wireless interface device, the wireless interface device receiving the indication would transmit its packet. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106458 | PROVIDING A DENY RESPONSE THAT SPECIFIES A DELAY TIME - A system receives, from a mobile station, a connection request that specifies a particular application type. In response to determining that the connection request is to be denied, the system sends a response denying the connection request to the mobile station, where the response includes a delay time that is applicable to the particular application type but not to another application type, and where the delay time indicates an amount of delay that the mobile station is to wait before resending another connection request. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106459 | GATEWAY APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A femtocell gateway apparatus arranged on a mobile IMS network comprises a conversion unit that when receiving a request from a terminal via a mobile network, transfers the request to a femtocell access point located in a home, reads a stream or file including at least one of video and audio, from at least one of devices connected to the femtocell access point and devices connected thereto via a home network, subjects the read stream or file to a conversion suitable for at least one of the capability of the terminal and the characteristics of the network, and outputs the stream or file converted. The output packet is then sent through a packet forwarding apparatus on the mobile network to the terminal. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106460 | CARRIER RECONFIGURATION IN MULTI-CARRIER AGGREGATION - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system which supports carrier aggregation. In detail, the present invention relates to a method and apparatus, wherein a mobile station changes a component carrier (CC) in a wireless communication system that supports carrier aggregation. The method comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, a CC reconfiguration command via one or more first preconfigured CCs; reconfiguring, in accordance with the CC reconfiguration command, CC-related information to change one or more first preconfigured CCs to a second CC; and transmitting a signal indicating the completion of CC reconfiguration to the base station after the reconfiguration of the CC-related information. | 05-03-2012 |
20120113891 | Vogarwit access system - The Vogarwit functions like a cell phone but relying on Wireless, VOIP and Broadband. The wireless uses open unsecured networks or those for sell. Security bypass technology for wireless access on the remote unit becomes a functional part of the unit later. VOIP gateways will include a Host Service Application that functions over IP using TCP as the transport protocol announcing an available service with a name set by the user and a unique MAC statically coded in the host application obtained from the MAC of the second MC located on the VOIP gateway. The VOIP gateway will be plugged into a local IP network twice; the local network will have a broadband connection with a configured router. The remote handheld will access the internet then connect to its unique service host. The host will provide the dial tone virtually connecting the remote handheld to the users home phone system. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113892 | Intelligent Wireless Access Point Notification - In one or more embodiments, one or more methods and/or systems described can perform determining identification information associated with the first wireless access point from at least a first signal; determining that a first instance of encountering the first wireless access point has concluded; storing information associated with the first instance of encountering the first wireless access point; determining the identification information associated with the first wireless access point from at least a second signal; determining that a second instance of encountering the first wireless access point has concluded; storing information associated with the second instance of encountering the first wireless access point; determining that the first wireless access point has been encountered at least a number of times; and displaying, in a menu usable by a user, at least a portion of the identification information associated with the first wireless access point. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113893 | Traffic Acceleration in Mobile Network - A method for enabling traffic acceleration in a mobile telecommunication network. The method includes the steps of receiving, at a Radio Network Node, a reply message from a content delivery provider located outside the mobile telecommunication network; intercepting the reply message; extracting a token from the reply message; comparing the token with a stored token in the Radio Network Node; replacing in the reply message, an Internet protocol IP address of a content delivery provider server with a preset IP address corresponding to an acceleration edge server in the mobile network, when there is a match between the token and the stored token; and sending from the Radio Network Node the modified reply message to a mobile terminal. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113894 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION - A method and device for providing post idle mobility procedure. The method and device providing an indication of a Radio Access Technology (RAT) type after an Idle Mode Signaling Reduction (ISR). | 05-10-2012 |
20120113895 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION INDICATING THE PRIORITY LEVEL OF A NON ACCESS STRATUM SIGNALING MESSAGE AND FOR USING THE PRIORITY LEVEL INFORMATION TO SELECT A RESPONSE - A system and method for providing an indication of a priority level of a non access stratum (NAS) message. In one aspect, a wireless communication device transmits a NAS signaling message together with a Packet Flow Identifier (PFI) information element that includes information indicating a priority level of the NAS signaling message. If the NAS signaling message has a low priority, the wireless communication device may receive a response message indicating that the ongoing NAS signaling message scenario can be performed less frequently in the future, thereby mitigating network congestion and radio interference. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113896 | Skip Ahead Routing in Wireless Ad Hoc Networks - A wireless ad hoc network may be composed of several nodes that are coupled by communication links and configured dynamically. As the packet is transmitted from one node to the next node or hop in a predetermined route, a neighboring node, within the same transmission range, may hear the broadcasted transmission. If the neighboring node determines that a future hop on the route includes the neighboring node, the neighboring node may receive the packet at that time thereby skipping one or more hops along the route. The neighboring node may then forward the packet to the next node in the route. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113897 | Method and Device for Data Processing in a Communication Network - A method and a device for data processing in a communication network are provided, wherein a mobile terminal receives several input signals from at least one base station; and wherein the mobile terminal processes said several input signals into a feedback information that is conveyed to at least one base station. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113898 | USING PRECODING VECTOR SWITCHING IN UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - Methods and apparatuses are provided that include using orthogonal precoding vectors to precode signals for transmission in a given subframe. Transmissions in a first slot of the subframe can be precoded with a first precoding vector, and transmissions in a second slot of the subframe can be precoded with a second precoding vector, which can be orthogonal to the first precoding vector. The precoding vectors can be selected using precoding vector switching or a similar mechanism. Thus, diversity is provided for transmissions within a given subframe to improve reliability of receiving the transmissions. In addition, other precoding vectors can be used to precode signals for transmissions in a subsequent subframe. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113899 | COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD - The present invention relates to the field of communications apparatus, systems and method(s) of communication. In one form, the invention relates to a mobile phone device and it's associated systems and method(s) of communication. More particularly, the present invention, in aspect of invention, relates to a mobile VoIP (Voice Over Internet Protocol) device. In one particular aspect the present invention a mobile internet phone (MIP). | 05-10-2012 |
20120113900 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING CIRCUIT SWITCHED INTERWORKING - A wireless transmit/receive unit communicates with a second wireless transmit/receive unit in a combined circuit switched (CS) session and an IP multimedia core network subsystem (IMS) session, where the second wireless transmit/receive unit uses VoIP. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113901 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ROUTE EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - Methods and apparatus to route emergency communication sessions are disclosed. An example method involves querying a gateway node cache in response to a first broadcast probe received at a node of a wireless Internet-based network. When the gateway node cache identifies a first gateway node, a first response is selectively sent to nodes that participated in a search flood associated with the first broadcast probe. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113902 | WIRELESS RFID NETWORKING SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Embodiments of the present invention include a wireless access point that acquires and processes radio frequency identification (RFID) information. The wireless access point may be coupled to a network of RFID readers over a wireless network. The RFID readers may read a plurality of RFID tags and transmit information to one or more readers. The readers may, in turn, transmit the RFID information to a wireless access point. The wireless access point may include a middleware layer for performing a variety of RFID data processing functions. In one embodiment, the wireless RFID reader network may be used to improve positioning of readers and tags, and may include a GPS system or position assisted GPS system at the reader and/or tag level. | 05-10-2012 |
20120120871 | Wireless Network Medium Access Control Protocol - A method for a device to communicate in one operational mode over a wireless network uses any suitable media access control mechanism for periodically communicating scheduled data transmission information between nodes. Scheduled data is then periodically transmitted according to the scheduled data transmission information and neighbor scheduled data is periodically listened for according to the neighbor scheduled data transmission information. Finally, the device is otherwise allowed to enter in a different operational mode. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120872 | IPV6 ANYCAST-BASED LOAD BALANCING AND REDIRECTION FUNCTIONALITY FOR PMIPV6 - A method, apparatus, computer program, and system is provided to redirect an internet protocol mobility session establishment request. According to certain embodiments of the invention, the request message is redirected from an original local mobility anchor (“LMA”) to an alternative LMA. According to certain embodiments of the invention, this redirection provides load balancing between the LMAs. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120873 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING MIMO MODES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is an apparatus for switching MIMO modes, which can efficiently switch an MIMO mode of a mobile station. The apparatus for switching MIMO modes includes an MIMO mode determining unit, a staying time determining unit, and an MIMO mode switching unit. The MIMO mode determining unit determines a current MIMO mode of a mobile station. The staying time determining unit determines a first staying time in a first MIMO mode of the mobile station when the MIMO mode determining unit determines the current MIMO mode of the mobile station as the first MIMO mode for transmitting the same data through a plurality of antennas, and determines a second staying time in a second MIMO mode of the mobile station when the MIMO mode determining unit determines the current MIMO mode of the mobile station as the second MIMO mode for transmitting different data by antenna. The MIMO mode switching unit switches the MIMO mode of the mobile station to the second MIMO mode when the first staying time is greater than or equal to a first threshold staying time. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120874 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEM - In an ultra-wideband (“UWB”) network, a central location engine (“CLE”) coordinates operation of an anchor access point (“AP”), AP[0], and a plurality of non-anchor AP[x]s. A clock calibration packet (“CCP”) transmission method and related apparatus facilitate normalization of CCP time references reported to the CLE by all APs. Implementing a digital phase locked loop (“DPLL”) in the CLE facilitates clock normalization. Implementing a DPLL in at least the non-anchor AP[x]s facilitates local clock synchronization, and may improve network efficiency by reducing clock synchronization traffic. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120875 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - This invention provides a mobile communication system which expanded the operation limitation of the heretofore adopted mobile communication systems and improved the spectrum efficiency greatly. A data transmission method for use in the mobile communication system of the present invention includes means for channel pluralizing by which to expand the Shannon limit and means for interference reduction by which to expand the interference limit. More specifically, a transmitting module comprises M units of modulators and L units of transmitting antennas, generates L units of signals by multiplying M units of modulated signals by a complex matrix consisting of M×L units of elements, and transmits the L units of signals from the L units of transmitting antennas. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120876 | BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION FOR OFDMA CELLULAR SYSTEM - In a cellular radio communication system, a base station or a mobile station has a TA (Time Alignment)-range-out detection function, so that when a TA-range-out state that is unable to compensate with a guard interval is detected, the transmission condition of an uplink signal at the mobile station is changed by the mobile station autonomously or by the base station and the mobile station cooperatively. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120877 | EXPEDITED CALL SETUP - An origination terminal initiates a call by providing a third party call control message in association with a traffic channel request. While the traffic channel is being established, the service node may initiate third party call control to initiate a call leg to the destination terminal on behalf of the origination terminal. As such, the destination call leg is initiated earlier. Since the destination call leg is initiated earlier, a corresponding ringback message indicating that a call is being presented to the called party is provided to the origination terminal sooner. When the ringback message is received quickly, a corresponding ringback indication may be presented to the caller in less time than was previously possible. The process is made even more efficient by waiting until the ringback message is received from the destination terminal before providing the SDP information, or communication information, for the origination terminal to the destination terminal. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120878 | COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL, A SYSTEM AND A METHOD FOR INTERNET/NETWORK TELEPHONY - A communication terminal for Internet telephony is provided that handles and control communication of data in accordance with a standardized network protocol and exchanges data with a connecting unit connected to the Internet where the resulting data exchanged between the terminal and a connecting unit consist of packets in a standardized protocol data packet format embedded in a wireless format. This provides a communications terminal which uses a network or the Internet for the transfer of digitized speech, etc., thereby achieving great economic savings. Also, the flexibility is increased with respect to wireless communication with the network or the Internet without any need for specialized equipment and functionality. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120879 | GATEWAY DEVICE, DATA CONVERTING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A gateway device includes a control signal conversion unit that accepts a stream or file request message from a mobile terminal via a femtocell access point and, after performing predetermined conversion, forwards the request message to a request destination; an ability table in which ability information on various types of mobile terminal is stored; a packet reception unit that receives a stream or a file from the request destination; a conversion instruction unit that determines a way of conversion according to ability information on the mobile terminal of a request source by referencing the ability table; a conversion unit that performs conversion for the stream or the file, received from the request destination, according to the way of conversion; and a packet transmission unit that transmits the converted stream or file to the mobile terminal. | 05-17-2012 |
20120127923 | Method and Apparatus for Enabling a Low Complexity Receiver - A method and apparatus for enabling a low complexity DL receiver in a TD-SCDMA system is provided. The method may comprise receiving two or more signals from two or more cells, determining at least one of the two or more cells does not comprise colored noise, applying a white noise matrix approximation to each of the at least one of the two or more cells that does not comprise colored noise, applying a channel matrix approximation to the two or more received signals, and generating a MMSE coordination matrix using the white noise matrix approximation and the channel matrix approximation. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127924 | TRACKING AND MONITORING SYSTEM FOR OPENCAST MINES - The tracking and monitoring system for opencast mines of the present invention enables continuously tracking and monitoring vehicles and moveable equipment in opencast mines using ZigBee-enabled active RFID devices forming a dynamic wireless network among them and other static and mobile ZigBee devices placed at strategic locations. The present invention provides a tracking and monitoring system for opencast mines comprises in combination of ZigBee-compliant devices (programmable to operate as end devices, routers and coordinators by hardware specific embedded software) and wireless sensor network software having various application modules for opencast mines. Use of the system of the present invention would help in maintaining computerized record and analysing the performance of costly shovels and dumpers deployed in opencast mines. This would help in optimising the placement of dumpers with each shovel depending on the change in working and dumping places. This would also help in maintaining computerise attendance of dumper operators and other personnel working in an opencast mine. This would further help in providing warning to the signal man and dumper operator, while dumper approaching close proximity to the signal man. This would help in establishing two-way message communication among the personnel engaged in an opencast mine. This would ultimately help in improving production, productivity and safety in opencast mine. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127925 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING ACCESS POINT IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method connect an Access Point (AP) in a portable terminal. More particularly, an apparatus and method designate a group of searched peripheral APs, and attempt an access to an AP corresponding to a group selected by a user in a portable terminal. The apparatus includes a group set unit and an AP search unit. The group set unit sets items of peripheral APs to a group according to user's selection. After searching the peripheral APs at the time of AP connection, the AP search unit classifies an AP belonging to a selected item and connects to the classified AP. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127926 | SESSION TRANSFER BETWEEN ACCESS NETWORKS - In an embodiment, there is provided a method for session transfer between Access Networks for a User Equipment UE, said method including insertion in a signaling path of a Service Continuity Application Server anchoring said session in IMS, said method including:
| 05-24-2012 |
20120127927 | METHOD FOR DISCARDING ALL SEGMENTS CORRESPONDING TO THE SAME PACKET IN A BUFFER - The technology described relates to management of data packets and buffers comprising segments of data packets in a mobile communication system. Information associated with data packet segments is analyzed by a Base Station System (BSS) housing a data buffer. Based on this information analysis, the BSS can identify those segments in the buffer that constitute a complete data packet. Once identified, the segments can be discarded from the buffer. The information can include size information, whereby the analysis comprises pairwise comparing the size of a current segment with the size of a next consecutive segment. This size comparison enables identification of a first segment and a last segment of the complete data packet. The information could also, or alternatively, include a notification provided in the header of the segment. This notification identifies the associated segment as the first or last segment of the data packet or an intermediate segment. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127928 | GATEWAY DEVICE FOR VEHICLES - The invention relates to a gateway device for a vehicle that is provided in a vehicle, is connected to an out-vehicle network, an in-vehicle information system network, and an in-vehicle control system network, and controls data communication between the three networks. The gateway device for a vehicle has a function of changing the priority of the data communication between the in-vehicle information system network and the in-vehicle control system network with respect to the data communication between the out-vehicle network and the in-vehicle information system network, according to traveling conditions of the vehicle. | 05-24-2012 |
20120134319 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCAL GATEWAY ASSIGNMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A local gateway assignment capability is depicted and described herein. In a wireless service provider network, the local gateway assignment capability enables a local gateway, rather than a core gateway, to be selected to serve a user request for an APN. The local gateway and core gateway may be a Local-GGSN (L-GGSN) and a GGSN, respectively, where the L-GGSN is associated with an SGSN and provides local traffic offloading for the GGSN and where the GGSN provides a gateway for the core network portion of the wireless service provider network. A DNS element or other device is configured to determine an SGSN-specific APN in response to receiving a DNS Request from an SGSN. A DNS element is configured to identify, using an SGSN-specific APN associated with an SGSN, an L-GGSN associated with the SGSN, and to provide an indication of the L-GGSN to the SGSN from which the DNS Request is received, thereby enabling the user associated with the DNS Request to use the L-GGSN rather than the GGSN. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134320 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVED MULTI-CELL SUPPORT ON A SINGLE MODEM BOARD - A system for providing multi-cell support within a single SMP partition in a telecommunications network is disclosed. The typically includes a modem board and a multi-core processor having a plurality of processor cores, wherein the multi-core processor is configured to disable non-essential interrupts arriving on a plurality of data plane cores and route the non-essential interrupts to a plurality of control plane cores. Optionally, the multi-core processor may be configured so that all non-real-time threads and processes are bound to processor cores that are dedicated for all control plane activities and processor cores that are dedicated for all data plane activities will not host or run any threads that are not directly needed for data path implementation or Layer 2 processing. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134321 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENABLING RECIPIENT CONTROL OF COMMUNICATIONS - Disclosed herein are methods and systems for enabling recipient control of communications. According to an aspect, a method may include receiving a communication request identifying a proposed timing of a communication and/or a proposed communication channel for the communication. The method may also include receiving selection of an actual timing and/or an actual communication channel for the communication. Further, the method may include initiating the communication based on the selection. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134322 | CELL SEARCH METHOD FOR A DOWNLINK CHANNEL OF AN OFDMA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A cell search method in a multiple carrier wireless network includes a step of trying to select, among a list of candidate couples [carrier frequency; bandwidth], at least one candidate associated with at least one cell of the multiple carrier wireless network. The cell search method includes: a step of obtaining and ordering an initial list of possible candidate couples [carrier frequency; bandwidth] according to the multiple carrier wireless network; a step of reducing the initial list, delivering a reduced list, the reduced list including only candidates compatible with a predetermined communication mode of the multiple carrier wireless network, through a differential cross correlation of the candidate couples [carrier frequency; bandwidth] of the initial list; a cell search step in which a cross-correlation is performed by testing all time/frequency hypothesis for at least one candidate of the reduced list of candidates, delivering synchronisation information. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134323 | Managing User Registrations of Roaming IMS Users - Techniques for managing a registration of a roaming user terminal ( | 05-31-2012 |
20120140706 | Inter-cell Interference Coordination of Multiple Transmission Ranks - Inter-cell interference coordination of multiple transmission ranks can be accomplished by various methods and apparatuses. For example, a method can include defining indexing of resources for which a base station will restrict a maximum rank for transmission. The method can also include informing a neighboring base station of the first base station about the resources for which the base station will restrict the maximum rank of transmission. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140707 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENSURING TRANSMISSION OF CRITICAL DATA THROUGH A WIRELESS ADAPTER - In embodiments a host reserves capacity of a wireless adapter for critical data transmission. Critical data is injected into a transport interface of the host, which passes the critical data to the wireless adapter for wireless transmission to a destination device. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140708 | PRIORITIZING MULTIPLE CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (CSI) REPORTING WITH CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) on a user equipment (UE) is described. A collision of multiple channel state information (CSI) reports corresponding to multiple component carriers (CCs) that are scheduled to be reported in the same subframe is detected. A highest priority CSI report of the multiple CSI reports is determined using a prioritization scheme. The highest priority CSI report is transmitted. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140709 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZING CARD WITHOUT TRAFFIC IN MULTI-CARD MULTI-STANDBY MOBILE TERMINAL - A method and an apparatus for synchronizing card without traffic in multi-card multi-standby mobile terminal are disclosed. The method includes: receiving, by a non-traffic card, a synchronization channel signal from an adjacent network cell according to frequency point of a synchronization channel of the adjacent network cell prestored in the non-traffic card, when a traffic card is in traffic; if the receiving of the synchronization channel signal from the adjacent network cell fails, performing, by the non-traffic card, a full-frequency network searching after the traffic of the traffic card, for receiving a synchronization channel signal from a network cell of the network cells and establishing synchronization with the network cell corresponding to the synchronization channel signal. The method and apparatus avoid communication failures caused by the out-of-synchronization of non-traffic card during the traffic (i.e. service) of the traffic card. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140710 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS OF USER EQUIPMENT TO NETWORK - A method and a system for controlling user equipment (UE) access to a network are used for controlling the access of a UE to a local network. The method includes: a Serving General Packet Radio Service Support Node (SGSN) obtains the information of the local network to which the UE requests access via an Activate Packet Data Protocol Context initiated by the UE; the SGSN instructs a Home Node B (HNB) to establish a local network bearer for the UE according to the information of the local network to which the UE requests to access; the HNB grants the UE access to the local network by establishing a local network wireless bearer for the UE based on the instruction of the SGSN. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140711 | TRANSCEIVING APPARATUS AND DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION BASE STATIONS - A base station apparatus, methods of receiving and sending data, and a computer readable article of manufacture. A computer implemented method includes the following for receiving and sending data: receiving the data by an RF header module; grouping data received; transferring the grouped data to a data processing apparatus; distributing the grouped data into an uplink sub-channel; merging the distributed data using at least one downlink sub-channel; transferring the merged data to a transceiving apparatus; degrouping the merged data; and sending the merged data by RF header module. A method of receiving data, a method of sending data, and computer readable non-transitory articles of manufacture are also provided. | 06-07-2012 |
20120147813 | CLOSED-LOOP FEEDBACK DURING INITIAL RANGING PROCEDURE - During operation, the choice of the initial ranging code (sometimes referred to as a ranging preamble code, or a random-access preamble) at the mobile station is associated with a PMI feedback to be signaled to the base station during the initial ranging. More particularly, during initial system access a ranging code is transmitted by the mobile station to the base station. The mobile station chooses one of the available ranging codes based on the channel conditions and associates the ranging code with channel feedback information. The ranging code is then transmitted to the base station, and provides the base station with the channel feedback information. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147814 | SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION DEVICES WITH DIFFERENT TECHNOLOGIES WITHIN THE SAME COMMUNICATION CHANNEL - A method and apparatus for support communication devices with different communication technologies within the same communication channel includes establishing a common frame structure for the communication channel, the frame having a fixed length and having downlink and uplink portions split between different first and second communication technologies. A next step includes providing different control messages for the respective different technologies in the frame. A next step includes decoding downlink data in a downlink subframe of the frame using the different technologies utilizing information in the control messages. A next step includes supplying uplink data in an uplink subframe of the frame using the different technologies utilizing information in the control messages. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147815 | UPLINK HYBRID-ARQ MECHANISM FOR COOPERATIVE BASE STATIONS - Method for performing a feedback process between a network access node and a user terminal, comprising collecting supporting information and suspending a transmission of a transport block until the supporting information is collected and/or a decision is taken as to whether request either a new transmission or a retransmission. The method may be performed in a serving network node cooperating with supporting network nodes, receivers or antennas, wherein a first part of the information of the transport block is gathered from a receiver or antenna within the serving network node and a second part of the information of the transport block is gathered from one of the supporting network nodes, receivers or antennas. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147816 | PICH-HS TIMING AND OPERATION - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate employing a paging indicator channel in connection with high speed channels in a wireless communications network. A paging indicator transmission can be sent on the paging channel to one or more mobile devices. The paging indicator indicates that additional information such as a full paging messages, other control plane data or other user plane data is expected to be transmitted at a specific time instant (e.g., subframe) on the associated high speed channel. A set of parameters can be transmitted on common channels that specify a set of associated subframes in a high speed channel. Mobile devices can analyze the set of parameters to determine the associated subframes and receive the subframes in accordance with a schedule. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147817 | Iterative Interference Suppressor for Wireless Multiple-Access Systems with Multiple Receive Antennas - This invention teaches to the details of an interference suppressing receiver for suppressing intra-cell and inter-cell interference in coded, multiple-access, spread spectrum transmissions that propagate through frequency selective communication channels to a multiplicity of receive antennas. The receiver is designed or adapted through the repeated use of symbol-estimate weighting, subtractive suppression with a stabilizing step-size, and mixed-decision symbol estimates. Receiver embodiments may be designed, adapted, and implemented explicitly in software or programmed hardware, or implicitly in standard RAKE-based hardware either within the RAKE (i.e., at the finger level) or outside the RAKE (i.e., at the user or subchannel symbol level). Embodiments may be employed in user equipment on the forward link or in a base station on the reverse link. It may be adapted to general signal processing applications where a signal is to be extracted from interference. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147818 | TRANSMISSION FRAME GENERATING DEVICE, WIRELESS DEVICE, BASE STATION AND TRANSMISSION FRAME GENERATING METHOD - A transmission frame generating device includes an encoding processor | 06-14-2012 |
20120147819 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UPLINK ESTABLISHMENT IN A WIRELESS CELLULAR COMMUNICATION - The present invention relates to wireless communications. More especially it relates to wireless packet data communications. Particularly it relates to latency reduction by distinguishing connection initiation of circuit switched and packet switched connections, respectively. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147820 | DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS PACKET ASSEMBLY - Distributed assembly of data packets into messages at a group of interface devices that receive data packets from within a coverage area. Each interface device in the group will take ownership of a sequence of data packets forming a message when a data packet of the message meeting predetermined criteria is received by that interface device. Once an interface device takes ownership of a sequence of data packets, it sends a request to the other interface devices for any missing data packets of the sequence that the ownership claiming interface does not have, and then assembles message upon receiving all the data packets of the sequence. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147821 | RANDOM ACCESS DESIGN FOR HIGH DOPPLER IN WIRELESS NETWORK - UE-initiated accesses within a cellular network are optimized to account for Doppler shift. A user equipment (UE) receives information that designates a particular access slot as high-speed and designates another access slot as low-speed within a given cell. The UE determines its relative speed to a serving base station (NodeB) within the cell. The UE selects either a baseline structure or an alternate structure if the relative speed is less than a threshold value or only an alternate structure if the relative speed exceeds the threshold value. The UE transmits a signal to the NodeB using the selected structure, such that the baseline structure is transmitted only in the designated low-speed access slot and that the alternate structure is transmitted only in the designated high-speed request slot. | 06-14-2012 |
20120155379 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING UNIFORM HASHING TO WIRELESS TRAFFIC - A method, computer readable medium and apparatus for hashing wireless traffic are disclosed. For example, the method hashes the wireless traffic uniformly by a plurality of probe servers based on at least one first key to provide a plurality of streams, and hashes at least one output stream of each of the plurality of probe servers uniformly based on at least one second key to provide a plurality of output streams. The method then provides the plurality of output streams to at least one aggregator server. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155380 | PROVIDING TOLL FREE DATA IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A wireless data-oriented service provides toll free data access to wireless users, such as GSM or CDMA-based users, when accessing specified content. The content provider pays for (“sponsors”) access to specific content for wireless users, often in conjunction with advertisement campaigns. In one embodiment a separate access point name is used when making the request to distinguish between sponsored data and conventional data access requests. In another embodiment, a portal proxy is used and sponsored data is distinguished from conventional data by the address of the destination web site. Wireless users accessing the sponsored content are not billed for usage, but rather the content provider is billed for usage. A data session management platform generates appropriate call data records indicating the session usage and transmits the records to reconcile accounts between the mobile network operator and the content provider. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155381 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING A WIRELESS DEVICE WITH MULTIPLE RADIOS - A method and apparatus for operating a dual-modem wireless device is provided herein. During operation, a mobile unit is allowed to operate in both a single-radio and a dual-radio mode. The mobile unit is allowed to dynamically switch between a single-radio and a dual-radio mode depending on environmental parameters. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155382 | PROVIDING MAGNETIC DEVIATION TO MOBILE DEVICES - A method of providing magnetic deviation corresponding to positions in a wireless communication system includes receiving a request wirelessly for a magnetic deviation corresponding to a position of an access terminal, the request including the position of the access terminal; retrieving the magnetic deviation corresponding to the position of the access terminal from a repository; and transmitting wirelessly the magnetic deviation corresponding to the position of the access terminal to the access terminal. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155383 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCANNING FOR CELLS IN A CELLULAR NETWORK - Provided is a method and apparatus for scanning for cells in a cellular network. Upon an event triggering scanning while a mobile device resides in a current cell of a cellular network, the mobile device scans for at least one cell purported by the cellular network to neighbor the current cell. In accordance with an embodiment of the disclosure, the mobile device also scans for at least one other cell that is not purported by the cellular network to neighbor the current cell. This occurs promptly without waiting for completion of the scanning for cells purported by the cellular network to neighbor the current cell. Advantageously, in the case of poor network planning, the mobile device might promptly acquire a cell that is not purported by the cellular network to neighbor the current cell but nonetheless offers coverage in vicinity of the current cell. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155384 | METHOD FOR PARTITIONING CELL IDENTITIES ACCORDING TO CELL TYPE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND AN APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method of transmitting a cell type information, which is transmitted by a base station in a wireless communication system, is disclosed. The present invention includes broadcasting a first boundary point information (Z) between a cell identity of a public ABS (advanced base station) and a cell identity of a private ABS via an S-SFH SP3 (secondary-super frame header subpacket3), and broadcasting at least one second boundary point (K) information via an AAI-SCD (Advanced Air Interface_System Configuration Descriptor) message. In this case, the at least one second boundary point information (K) indicates a last index of cell identity corresponding to a specific ABS type. Further, an order of ABS types of the public ABS and an order of ABS types of the private ABS are pre-defined. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155385 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING SCANNING FROM A MULTI-BAND COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - Systems and methods for optimizing scanning from a multi-band communications device. A multi-band communications device scans for identifiers from one or more base stations. The multi-band communications device determines whether the received base station identifiers are associated with an access point (AP) on a list of APs. The multi-band communications device connects to the AP when the received base station identifiers are associated with the AP. The terms “base station” and “access point” encompass transmit and receive sites that provide communications using various technologies that may include Wi-Fi and cellular. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155386 | SIGNALING REDUCTION FOR THE CORE NETWORK OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for the reduction of signaling to the core network of a wireless communications system. In one example, a proxy receives a request message transmitted from a mobile device to the core network. The proxy traps the request message to prevent it from being forwarded to the core network. The proxy generates a request accept message in response to the trapped request message, the request accept message spoofing a core network response to the request message. The proxy transmits the request accept message to the mobile device. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155387 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SIMPLE PAIRING OF WIRED AND WIRELESS HEALTHCARE DEVICES TO A GATEWAY - A system and method for effecting communication between a plurality of healthcare measurement devices and a remote patient monitoring server is disclosed. In one embodiment, a method of effecting communication between the healthcare measurement devices and the remote patient monitoring server, includes communicating with an healthcare gateway device using a common gateway protocol to receive translated data via a plurality of translation units associated with a plurality of device communication modules residing in wired and wireless healthcare measurement devices, and communicating with the remote patient monitoring server using a plurality of remote protocols residing in a plurality of remote communication modules to transmit the received translated data. In some embodiments, the healthcare gateway device is communicatively coupled between the healthcare management devices and the remote patient monitoring server. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155388 | SIGNAL SENDING DEVICE, SIGNAL RECEIVING DEVICE, AND SIGNAL SENDING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A signal sending device, a signal receiving device, and a signal sending and receiving system and method are presented. The devices and system combine a plurality of sense data into a data packet to transmit the data packet. Through the method, the data packet is processed, received, and sent under a transmission mechanism based on independent data packets. Therefore, the plurality of sense data and overhead data are combined into a data packet, and thus the redundant overhead data is reduced, so as to reduce the time spent on sending actual data to a transmission channel, thus improving the efficiency of data exchange and saving electrical energy. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155389 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND DEVICES FOR DYNAMIC CONTEXT-BASED ROUTING - Methods, servers and systems for performing dynamic context based routing operations in a telecommunications signaling network in which a dynamic context based router may receive a first message encoding signaling information from a source component, decode the message into an internal representation, perform application level routing operations using contextual information derived from the internal representation to identify a destination component, encode signaling information contained in the internal representation into a second message, and send the second message to the identified destination component. Application level routing operations using contextual information may include generating keys based on the internal representation, transmitting the generated keys to an external resource, receiving supplementary information in response to the generated keys, and using the supplementary information to identify the destination component. The information in the internal representation may be modified to send a subset or a superset of the information contained in the first message. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155390 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOG REPORTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for log reporting in a wireless communication system includes receiving a request message by a user equipment (UE), the request message requesting log reporting, wherein at least one logged measurement entry is stored in the LIE and the at least one logged measurement entry corresponds to a current Registered Public Land Mobile Network (RPLMN); including all or parts of the at least one logged measurement entry in a response message; including an indication in the response message if less than all of the at least one logged measurement entry is included in the response message; and not including the indication in the response message if all of the at least one logged measurement entry is included in the response message. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155391 | DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD USING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION GROUP BASED TUNNELING, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A data transmission method is disclosed. A data transmission method for at least one machine type communication (MTC) device constituting an MTC group includes receiving an attach request from the MTC device; determining whether the attach request is a first attach request from the MTC group; and if it is determined that the attach request is a first attach request from the MTC group, establishing a downlink tunnel and an uplink tunnel to be used for data transmission and reception between a GW and a base station using an MTC group identity. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155392 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND CONTROL APPARATUS - Disclosed is a communication method for switching between a first connection state, in which a data unit is transmitted in a first size, and a second connection state, in which a data unit is transmitted in a second size which is larger than the first size. The communication method comprises a step of maintaining the size of a data unit at the first size in a case where there is a transition from the first connection state to the second connection state after there had been a transition from the second connection state to the first connection state. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155393 | DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD, DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELEVANT DEVICES - A data communication method, a data communication system, and relevant devices are disclosed to reduce the size of a base station and optimize the network structure. The data communication method includes that: through an antenna, a base station receives a signal sent by a mobile terminal; the base station performs intermediate frequency processing, radio frequency processing and baseband processing for the signal to obtain digital information; the base station encapsulates the digital information to obtain encapsulated information; the base station performs physical-layer interface adaptation for the encapsulated information to obtain transmission information; and the base station sends the transmission information to a first centralized processing device of a network so that the centralized processing device performs network service protocol processing for the transmission information. A data communication system and relevant devices are also provided herein. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155394 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING A TEMPORARY BLOCK FLOW TO WHICH A PIGGYBACKED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT/NON-ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIELD IS ADDRESSED - A method and apparatus for indicating a temporary block flow (TBF) to which a piggybacked acknowledgement/non-acknowledgement (PAN) field is addressed. A PAN check sequence (PCS) is created, for example using a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) encoding. The PCS is masked with a temporary flow identity (TFI) assigned to a TBF or a mask generated based on the TFI. A data block including the PAN field and the masked PCS is then processed for transmission. The mask may be generated by converting the TFI using an (M, N) code, M being not greater than the number of bits of the PCS and N being the number of bits of the TFI. With this scheme, a TFI may be transmitted in a PAN field without using explicit bits to identify the TBF. | 06-21-2012 |
20120163291 | Physical uplink control channel Interference Mitigation in heterogenous networks - In some embodiments, a wireless device comprises a baseband processor, a control module coupled to the signal processor and comprising logic to map a first set and at least one redundant set of physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) blocks into a subframe structure, wherein the at least one redundant set of PUCCH blocks is embedded in an interior section of the subframe, an RF modulator/demodulator coupled to the baseband processor to modulate/demodulate the PUCCH blocks for communication within a predetermined frequency range, and a transmitter to transmit the PUCCH blocks. Other embodiments may be described. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163292 | Frame Header in Wireless Communication System - A method, apparatus, and computer program for providing a physical layer convergence protocol header for the frame, wherein the physical layer convergence protocol (PLCP) header is arranged to comprise information identifying a subset of group-addressed frames to which the frame belongs. The identification of the subset enables a receiver to determine from the PLCP header whether or not to process the frame. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163293 | MULTIPLE GATEWAY HANDLING FOR SUPPORTING NETWORK SHARING OF HOME BASE STATIONS - A home base station receives from a wireless user equipment an identification of a selected Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN, among multiple available PLMNs to which the wireless user equipment is to be connected. The home base station identifies a communication path to a home base station gateway is associated with the selected PLMN and communicates with the selected PLMN that was identified over the communication path that was identified. The home base station may thereby be shared among multiple PLMNs. Related networks, methods and home base stations are described. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163294 | PACKET DATA TRANSFER APPARATUS AND PACKET DATA TRANSFER METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are a packet data transfer apparatus and a packet data transfer method in a mobile communication system. In the mobile communication system, the packet data transfer apparatus reduces a load of a protocol stack processor, which causes performance degradation due to a considerable time taken to transfer a large amount of packet data to a memory of a packet processor from Ethernet, so that the clock speed of the processor can be lowered. Accordingly, it is possible to implement a modem for mobile communication using low power. Further, the packet data transfer apparatus is positioned between a processor and a memory so that the processor does not perform packet data transfer from the outside to an internal memory of the process or packet data transfer from the internal memory of the process to the outside. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce packet data transfer of the processor. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163295 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A mobile terminal in a sensor network selects one of the sensors nodes in the sensor network as an upstream agent, and piggybacks a list of neighboring sensor nodes found in the upstream agent selection process on an upstream packet and transmits the upstream packet to a gateway through the upstream agent. The gateway in the sensor network selects one of the neighboring sensor nodes as a downstream agent using state information of the neighboring sensor nodes in the list, and transmits a downstream packet to the mobile terminal through the selected downstream agent. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163296 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING SMALL AMOUNT OF UPLINK DATA AND METHOD OF RECEIVING SMALL AMOUNT OF UPLINK DATA - Disclosed is a method of transmitting and receiving a small amount of uplink data. A method of transmitting uplink data includes detecting uplink data to be transmitted, determining whether or not uplink data transmission is necessary only once, transmitting a service request message including information instructing that a data radio bearer not be generated when it is determined that uplink data transmission is necessary only once, starting a radio resource control (RRC) connection setup process, and performing the uplink data transmission once using a signaling radio bearer without generating the data radio bearer with reference to the information instructing that the data radio bearer not be generated, during the RRC connection setup process, when it is determined that \ uplink data transmission is necessary only once. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163297 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR MODIFYING A DIAMETER SIGNALING MESSAGE DIRECTED TO A CHARGING FUNCTION NODE - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for modifying a Diameter signaling message directed to a charging function node are disclosed. In one example, the method comprises receiving, at a Diameter routing node, a Diameter signaling message that is associated with a mobile subscriber and is directed to a destination charging function node. The method further includes accessing mobile subscriber related information that is associated with the Diameter signaling message. The method also includes modifying the Diameter signaling message to include the mobile subscriber related information and routing the modified Diameter message to the destination charging function node. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163298 | PROCESSING SERVICE, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for offloading processing service, comprising: acquiring a first packet carrying payload data and transmitted from a user equipment; identifying a service type of the first packet by using Deep Packet Inspection DPI technique; determining a transmission channel interface that corresponds to the identified service type according to a first correspondence relationship between service types and transmission channel interfaces; and transmitting, via the determined transmission channel interface, the first packet to a destination end to which the user equipment requests for access. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163299 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system base station, and a remote radio head (RRH) and a computer-implemented synchronization method for the wireless communication system base station. The RRH is communicably coupled to a baseband unit (BBU) of the wireless communication system base station through a network, and the BBU processes and transmits downlink data to the RRH. The RRH includes: a time-delay measurement unit for measuring a time-delay for the downlink data to arrive at the RRH from the BBU; and a time-delay notification unit for notifying from the RRH to the BBU of time-delay data on the time-delay measured by the time-delay measurement unit, wherein the time-delay data is used to advance the starting time for the BBU to process and transmit the downlink data by an amount of time obtained based on the time-delay data. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163300 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING ROUTE STRATEGIES - The present invention discloses a method and system for acquiring routing strategy. In the solution of the present invention, a routing strategy provision unit sends routing strategies of local IP access to radio side network elements; the radio side network elements receive the routing strategies of local IP access. With the solution of the present invention, the radio side network elements are able to acquire the routing strategies of local IP access at the network element level or the user level, so that the radio side network elements transmit data according to the routing strategies, and the radio side network elements can effectively offload the data with the acquired routing strategies. Besides, in the solution of the present invention, the routing strategies might be for users, that is, different routing strategies might be made for different users, thereby improving the user experience and promoting generalization and popularization of services. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163301 | RECEIVING INFORMATION RELATION RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY CAPABILITIES OF A MOBILE STATION - A base station sends a request for information relating to radio access technology capabilities of a mobile station. The base station receives a message containing information relating to radio access technology capabilities of the mobile station, where the message is responsive to the request, and the information contained in the message specifies that the mobile station supports at least two different types of radio access technologies useable by the mobile station to communicate over a wireless link between the base station and the mobile station. The base station is able to control which of the at least two different types of radio access technologies the mobile station is to use. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163302 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication system for carrying out data communication among a plurality of communication stations is disclosed in which a first communication station for transmitting to other communication stations a Request To Send (RTS) signal for requesting a transmission upon the start of the data transmission; and a plurality of second communication stations transmitting to other communication stations a Clear To Send (CTS) signal for notifying the completion of preparing the reception, wherein the first communication station transmits the RTS signal describing at least each of addresses the second communication stations that are desired to receive the data, and receives a plurality of CTS signals transmitted from each of the second communication stations in order to increase communication capacity. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163303 | Method And Apparatus For Improved Data Communication In Cellular Access Systems - A method for use in a cellular access system is disclosed. The system comprises at least one Radio Base Station (RBS) which controls traffic to and from a cell in the system. The cell can have a User Equipment (UE) in it, such that the UE and RBS can send and receive data blocks, which may comprise sequence numbers, to and from each other. The RBS and UE can also exchange reports comprising information on whether or not data blocks have been received successfully. The method comprises sending by a reporting party a transmission comprising a report to the report receiving party, said report comprising information on whether or not data blocks have been received successfully. The method further comprises sending by the reporting party said report together with data to the report receiving party or to another party. The method further comprises attaching by the reporting party addresses for a recipient of the data blocks and for the report in the transmission. The method further comprises deciding by the reporting party the contents of the report using at least one of the following priority rules which have been given an internal priority ranking, in which data blocks which are identified as having a lower delay tolerance than other data blocks are given priority; data blocks which have been detected as received in error, and whose status has not been reported since the error was detected are given priority; and, data blocks are given priority according to their sequence numbers. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163304 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DATA RE-TRANSMISSION METHOD - A method which can reduce loss in data transmission is provided. A data block is prepared in a high-level layer and the data block is transmitted in a low-level layer. Status report information associated with reception or non-reception of the data block is received through the low-level layer. When a receiver fails to receive data transmitted from a transmitter, the transmitter can rapidly recognize the reception failure and can retransmit the data. | 06-28-2012 |
20120170511 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DATA CONNECTIVITY IN A LOCAL WIRELESS TELEPHONY SYSTEM - In an embodiment, a base station of a local wireless telephony system routes data between a handset on a first link and a data network-connected device on a second link of a local wireless telephony interface to provide data service to the handset. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170512 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR APPLICATION LAYER GATEWAY ASSISTED LOCAL IP ACCESS AT A FEMTO BASE STATION BY NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION - A method for application layer gateway (ALG) assisted local IP access (LIPA) at a base station by network address translation (NAT) allows IP capable UEs connected via HeNB or other kinds of Femto cell base station to use LIPA to establish multimedia session with other IP capable entities in the same IP network by NAT. The method relays a LIPA request to IMS, determines whether the terminating entity residing in the same IP network or not, and determines if the originating and terminating entities are allowed to use LIPA, and modifies the transport address information accordingly to facilitate signaling and packet routing. The method also provides the capability to apply different charging policies for LIPA and non-LIPA usages. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170513 | Method and System for Facilitating Wireless Communication Via Alternate Wireless Pathway - A mobile device system and related method are disclosed by which the device is able to communicate wirelessly not only via a Wide Area Network (WAN) link but also via an alternate link such as a Wi-Fi link. In one embodiment, the method includes receiving a command from a remote server, via the WAN link, to establish a Wi-Fi link when possible. The method further includes, upon establishing the Wi-Fi link, sending a message for receipt by the server indicating that the Wi-Fi link has been established, and receiving software update information from the server, the information being communicated to the mobile device via the Wi-Fi link. Further, the method includes one or both of (1) sending an acknowledgement for receipt by the server indicating that the information has been received and (2) receiving an instruction from the server that communications via the Wi-Fi link be ended. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170514 | WIRELESS OPERATION IN VERY HIGH DENSITY ENVIRONMENTS - Protocols and algorithms for contention-based adaptive modulation networks, typically used in unlicensed bands. A wireless system in which high modulation rate packets are prioritized over low rate packets. The wireless system is configured to process communication signals from plural user portable devices having wireless access points capable of dynamically adjusting access point transmit power on a user-by-user basis to a minimum level required to achieve a target signal-to-noise ratio from each user portable device irrespective of the interference observed on the link is also disclosed. The wireless system is also capable of dynamically adjusting access point transmitter power and receiver sensitivity on a user-by-user basis to a minimum level required to achieve the highest possible modulation rate. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170515 | PROCESSING EXTENSION TYPE SYSTEM INFORMATION BLOCKS (SIBS) - A method for determining an extension type of a system information block segment is described. A system information block segment of type extension is received in a system frame number. A byte in a system information block extension type lookup table corresponding to the system frame number of the system information block segment is calculated. A bit position in the system information block extension type lookup table corresponding to the system frame number is calculated. The extension type expected at the system frame number for the system information block segment is determined using the byte and the bit position. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170516 | UPLINK SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING OPTIMIZED RANK 3 CODEBOOK - A method for transmitting and receiving uplink signals using an optimized rank 3 codebook is disclosed. The optimized rank 3 codebook includes 6 precoding matrix groups, each of which has 1 variable having an amplitude of 1. Preferably, the optimized 4Tx rank 3 codebook has 12 precoding matrix, two precoding matrixes are selected from each the above 6 precoding matrix groups considering chordal distance and the number of precoding matrix. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170517 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING SERVING GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE SUPPORT NODE ADDRESS - The present invention discloses a method and system for acquiring an address of a Serving General Radio Packet Service support node (SGSN). The method comprises: a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF) entity providing a SGSN change event trigger to a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) entity; and the PCRF entity reporting a SGSN change event and a new address of the SGSN to the PCEF entity after receiving the SGSN change event trigger. The method solves the problem that credit control management cannot be carried out for different general radio packet service support nodes during online charging. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170518 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RELIABLE COMMUNICATIONS OVER MULTIPLE PACKET RF NETWORKS - The invention is a method and system for mobile communications. A mobile communicator communicates with a network routing center. The communicator monitors each of two or more wireless carriers for a service characteristic. The communicator selects, based on the monitored service characteristic, one of the two or more wireless carriers. The mobile communicator can then communicate with the network routing center using the selected wireless carrier. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170519 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING SIGNAL PATHS, AND FUNCTION GROUP DESIGNED THEREFOR - A method and system for connecting signal paths in a circuit arrangement with multiband capability for processing and/or influencing signals in radio communication, on the basis of which at least the transmission paths of a corresponding circuit arrangement are activated or deactivated on the basis of the presence of a transmitted signal from a terminal which is operated with the circuit arrangement. The transmission paths, which are deactivated in a basic state of the circuit arrangement, are periodically checked in succession for the presence of a transmitted signal from the terminal with a multiplexer that forms a functional component of a detection unit and that is switched through by a controller for sequential scanning of the transmission paths for the presence of such a transmitted signal. If a signal is present, only a transmission path for the correct frequency band of the transmitted signal is activated and continuously checked for the presence of a transmitted signal. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170520 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CELL SEARCH IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing cell search includes receiving a primary synchronization signal (PSS) comprising a primary synchronization code (PSC) and receiving a secondary synchronization signal (SSS) comprising a first secondary synchronization code (SSC) and a second SSC, wherein the SSS includes a first SSS and a second SSS, the first SSC and the second SSC are arranged in that order in the first SSS, and the second SSC and the first SSC are arranged in that order in the second SSS. Detection performance on synchronization signals can be improved, and cell search can be performed more reliably. | 07-05-2012 |
20120176963 | VOICE AND DATA CONNECTION CONTROL IN A MOBILE DEVICE - Controlling non-simultaneous voice and data connections between a mobile wireless device and a wireless network is described. Following a voice connection origination failure between the mobile wireless device and the wireless network, the mobile wireless device sends a voice connection redial request only after closing an existing data connection between the mobile wireless device and the wireless network. The mobile wireless device tunes a wireless transceiver to a second voice connection channel radio frequency that differs from a first data connection channel radio frequency and establishes a voice connection with the wireless network on the second voice connection channel radio frequency. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176964 | APPLICATION-ORIGINATED TEXT MESSAGES DELIVERED OVER A PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK - Systems and methods are disclosed for correlating messages used to deliver an Application Originated (AO) text message to User Equipment (UE). A text message gateway is implemented between a text message application and a packet-switched network that uses Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The text message gateway receives a delivery request from the text message application that includes an Application Originated (AO) text message intended for the UE. The text message gateway identifies a correlation identifier (ID) for the AO text message, inserts the correlation ID in a delivery response, and transmits the delivery response to the text message application (to store for later use). The text message gateway also converts the delivery request into a SIP request that encapsulates the AO text message, inserts the correlation ID in the SIP request, and transmits the SIP request to the UE. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176965 | CQI DEFINITION FOR TRANSMISSION MODE 9 IN LTE-ADVANCED - An evolved Node B (eNB) in a 3GPP LTE-based network receives Channel State Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS) from a User Equipment (UE) that is configured with Precoder Matrix Indictor (PMI) disabled. A channel is estimated between the eNB and the UE for link adaptation in Transmission Mode 9 (TM9) based on CSI-RS by the UE and SRS by the eNB. CQI is calculated at UE such that if a number of CSI-RS antenna ports equals one, TM9 transmission from the eNB to the UE uses a predetermined single antenna port. If the number of CSI-RS antenna ports equals two, TM9 transmission from the eNB to the UE uses transmit diversity. If the number of CSI-RS antenna ports does not equal one or two, TM9 transmission from the eNB to the UE uses spatial multiplexing based on a rank-1 precoder that is determined from a wideband channel covariance matrix R. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176966 | FREQUENCY DOMAIN COMPRESSION IN A BASE TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM - A method and apparatus provide signal compression for transfer over serial data links in a base transceiver system (BTS) of a wireless communication network. For the uplink, an RF unit of the BTS applies frequency domain compression of baseband signal samples, resulting from analog to digital conversion of received analog signals followed by digital downconversion, forming compressed coefficients. After transfer over the serial data link, the baseband processor then applies frequency domain decompression to the compressed coefficients prior to normal signal processing. For the downlink, the baseband processor applies frequency domain compression of baseband signal samples and transfers the compressed coefficients to the RF unit. The RF unit applies frequency domain decompression to the compressed coefficients prior to digital upconversion and digital to analog conversion, generating the analog signal for transmission over the antenna. This abstract does not limit the scope of the invention as described in the claims. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176967 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD AND APPARATUS OF UE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for performing random access and uplink transmission of a User Equipment (UE) supporting Carrier Aggregation (CA) are provided. The method includes determining whether a Scheduling Request (SR) is pending, determining, when the SR is pending, whether an uplink transmission resource is available in a current Transmission Time Interval (TTI), determining, when the uplink transmission resource is not available, whether a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) resource is configured for transmission of the SR, and initiating, when the PUCCH resource is not configured, a random access process in a primary cell. The random access method and apparatus of the present invention is advantageous to reduce the waste of transmission resources. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176968 | MOBILE APPLICATION TRAFFIC OPTIMIZATION - Systems and methods for mobile application traffic optimization are disclosed. In one aspect, embodiments of the present disclosure include a distributed proxy and cache system, including, a local proxy on a mobile device for intercepting a data request made via a mobile device, and a proxy server coupled to the mobile device and a content server to which the data request is directed. In one embodiment, the local proxy can forward the data request to the proxy server for transmission to the content server for a response to the data request. In addition, the proxy server sends the data request to the content server independent of activities on the local proxy and notifies the local proxy when changed or different content on the content server is detected for the data request. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176969 | SYNCHRONIZATION OF AN ACCESS POINT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to apparatuses, method and computer program product for setting the timing of control signal transmission in a communication network access point. The present invention discloses obtaining information on external control signal timing, randomly offsetting internal control signal timing with respect to the external control signal timing, and providing information on the randomly offset internal control signal timing. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176970 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPLEMENTING INTER-NETWORK ROAM, QUERYING AND ATTACHING NETWORK - Methods and systems are disclosed for implementing inter-network roam and for querying and network attachment, applied in a network of access identifier and location identifier separation, wherein the method for implementing inter-network roam comprises: after attaching to an ASN of a roaming area network, a roaming terminal sending a first data packet whose destination address is the AID of a destination device to the destination device; after receiving the first data packet, the ASN querying locally AID-RID mapping information, and requesting a roaming gateway to query the RID of the destination device if the RID is not found and the destination device does not belong to the roaming network; the roaming gateway querying the RID from a home network of the destination device and returning to the ASN; according to the RID, the ASN sending subsequent data packets of the roaming terminal to the destination device. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176971 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SEGMENTATION OF PACKETS FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION - A method and apparatus for segmenting medium access control (MAC) service data units (SDUs) creates enhanced MAC-es PDUs in the enhanced MAC-e/es sub-layer by concatenating MAC SDUs received from the logical channels. An enhanced transport format combination (E-TFC) selection entity controls the concatenation of MAC SDUs into enhanced MAC-es PDUs. When a MAC SDU is received that is too large to fit into a selected enhanced MAC-es PDU payload, a segmentation entity segments the MAC SDU such that the MAC SDU segment fills the remaining payload available in the selected enhanced MAC-es PDU. The enhanced MAC-es PDU is then assigned a transmission sequence number (TSN) and multiplexed with other enhanced MAC-es PDUs to create a single enhanced MAC-e PDU that is transmitted on the E-DCH in the next transmission time interval (TTI). A HARQ entity stores and, if necessary retransmits the enhanced MAC-e PDU when a transmission error occurs. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176972 | Method and System for Establishing Wireless IP Connectivity - A method and system for establishing wireless IP connectivity, in which a wireless communication device (WCD) obtains a routable IP address during its registration with a radio access network, rather than first registering with the RAN and then subsequently requesting and acquiring packet-data connectivity. Preferably, when the WCD sends a radio access registration request that triggers a registration notification to a home location register (HLR), the HLR or an associated entity will assign an IP address for use by the WCD and will deliver the assigned IP address in a registration notification response message to the RAN. The RAN will then deliver the assigned IP address to the WCD over the air in a radio access registration response message. The WCD may then use the assigned IP address to engage in packet data communications, such as to set up a VoIP session with another IP node, for instance. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176973 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING MULTIPLE ACCESS, HOME AGENT AND USER EQUIPMENT - A method for processing multiple access, a home agent and user equipment are disclosed in the present invention. The method includes the following steps: when a user equipment establishes a mobile internet protocol version 6 (MIPV6) security association with a home agent, the home agent sends first indication information to the user equipment, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate to the user equipment that the home agent is able to support multi-registration flow binding. The present invention can improve the system efficiency. | 07-12-2012 |
20120182933 | CLUSTERING CROWD-SOURCED DATA FOR DETERMINING BEACON POSITIONS - Embodiments analyze crowd-sourced data to identify a moved or moving beacon. The crowd-sourced data for the beacon is grouped into a plurality of clusters based on spatial distance. Timestamps associated with the crowd-sourced data in the clusters are compared to select one of the clusters. The crowd-sourced data associated with the selected cluster is used to determine position information for the beacon. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182934 | APPLICATION LAYER COMMUNICATION VIA AN INTERMEDIATE NODE - An intermediate node in a wireless communication system transmits application layer messages between first and second nodes. To do so, the intermediate node receives a request to activate a packet data protocol (PDP) context for the first node. The request, as generated by the first node, indicates the first node is capable of using a first protocol stack that excludes one or more particular layers included in a second protocol stack used by the second node. The intermediate node activates a PDP context for the first node in accordance with the request. The intermediate node thereafter forwards application layer messages supported by the activated PDP context between the first node and the second node, forwarding application layer messages destined for the first node in accordance with the first protocol stack and forwarding application layer messages destined for the second node in accordance with the second protocol stack. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182935 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PACKET DISTRIBUTION IN A VEHICULAR NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment that includes receiving a request for data from a source device, such as an on-board unit of vehicle or a mobile device coupled to an on-board unit, over a vehicular network. Location data, such as GPS coordinates, speed, and heading associated with the source device may also be received. A travel path for the source device can be predicted based on the location data, and an access point to the network can be located within range of the travel path. Packets associated with the requested data may be sent to the access point and then forwarded to the source device when the source device is in range. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182936 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING THE MOBILITY OF MOBILE NETWORKS - In response to a Mobile Access Router (MAR) initially attaching to a Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) domain through a first Access Router (AR) in the domain, a Mobility Anchor Point (MAP) in the MPLS domain establishes a plurality of Label Switched Paths (LSPs) for the MAR. For example, the MAP establishes an active LSP to the MAR through the AR to which the MAR has initially attached, and further establishes an inactive LSP for the MAR to each of one or more other ARs in the MPLS domain. An inactive LSP established at a given AR for a given MAR is activated when/if that MAR attaches to the AR. Correspondingly, the present invention includes method and apparatus teachings related to the MAP, ARs and the MAR, as regards establishing inactive LSPs, activating inactive LSPs, and extending an activated LSP to the MAR. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182937 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A MOBILE SYSTEM - A method is provided for bi-casting real time data packets in a mobile system that includes a first Node-B and a second Node-B for communication with a user equipment. The method includes associating a first sequence number with a first real time data packet when sending the first real time data packet to the first Node-B and transmitting the first real time data packet associated with the first sequence number to the first Node-B. The method also includes associating a second sequence number with a second real time data packet when sending the first real time data packet to the second Node-B, wherein the second sequence number is different from the first sequence number and transmitting the first real time data packet associated with the second sequence number to the second Node-B. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182938 | WIRELESS ELECTRONIC DEVICES WITH DUAL CIRCUIT ARCHITECTURE - Electronic devices may have multiple wireless integrated circuits such as first and second baseband processor integrated circuits. The first baseband processors may be used exclusively for handling packet switched traffic, whereas the second baseband processor may be used exclusively for handling circuit switched traffic. Radio-frequency front end circuitry may be used to couple multiple antennas to the baseband processors and associated radio-frequency transceivers. The first baseband processor may be coupled to a first universal integrated circuit card (UICC) storing a first subscriber profile, whereas the second baseband processor may be coupled to a second UICC storing a second subscriber profile. The first baseband processor may be used to support any desired circuit switched radio access technology, whereas the second baseband processor may be used to support any desired packet switched radio access technology. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182939 | TELEHEALTH WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HUB AND SERVICE PLATFORM SYSTEM - Methods and devices provide a wireless communications hub device and services enabling remote access to electronic medical or fitness devices in a manner that simplifies device networking A wireless communication hub device may include a processor and wireless communication transceivers configured to connect to cellular and/or WiFi networks to access a remote server, and wired and/or wireless local networks for connecting to electronic medical or fitness devices. The wireless communication hub device may plug into a power source, connect to an electronic medical or fitness device, and communicate via a second wireless network with an associated server-based service. The system enables discovery of the wireless communication hub device and connected electronic medical or fitness devices. The associated remote server based service platform services may provide drivers for various electronic medical or fitness devices, store and forward data, and provide remote access to the various electronic medical or fitness devices. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182940 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE TRAFFIC WITHIN A NETWORK STRUCTURE AND A NETWORK STRUCTURE - A reliable and flexible method for controlling traffic within a network structure without the addition of remarkable complexity to the core network is provided, the structure including a PDN (Packet Data Network), an operator core network with a DNS (Domain Name System) server, a HeNB (Home evolved Node B) or HNB (Home Node B) and/or eNB (Evolved Node B) or NB (Node B) and a UE (User Equipment) that is associated with the HeNB or HNB and/or eNB or NB. On the basis of a predefinable routing policy the DNS server is controlling whether a traffic from a UE to a destination address within a local network associated to the HeNB or HNB or eNB or NB or within a PDN and/or vice versa will be routed via the core network or directly via the local network in support of local network protocol access or selected network protocol traffic offload. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182941 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING POWER RESOURCES IN WIRELESS DEVICES - A method and system is disclosed for a device to quickly determine if data is being sent to it. If no data is being sent to the device, the device may return to a sleep mode so as to conserve energy. The present invention includes organizing and transmitting, one at a time, all device destination identifiers. If a message listing search indicates that no message is being sent for a device, the device can continue with any other activity that needs servicing, or if no other activity is pending, it may shut down to conserve power until the next wake up period arrives. If the search returns a positive indication, the count value when the identifier is found can be used to determine the location of the pointer to the message. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182942 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION OF UPLINK CONTROL SIGNALING AND USER DATA IN A SINGLE CARRIER ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment (UE) operating in an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing communication system transmits Layer 1 and Layer 2 user data non-associated and user data associated control signaling on an uplink by puncturing user data information with the user data non-associated and user data associated control signaling to produce a data stream wherein the control signaling and user data information are multiplexed. The UE then conveys the punctured data stream to a radio access network via an air interface. The communication system further provides for a selection of a coding and modulation for the control signaling based on a modulation and coding scheme of the user data and a transmission scheme that is applied for transmission of the user data information over the air-interface. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182943 | Method for Establishing a Bidirectional Communication Path in a Wireless Network - A method for establishing a bidirectional communication path in a wireless network, where the network includes nodes comprising a sink node and a plurality of subscriber nodes, and where the communication path for the bidirectional transmission of data packets is to be established between the sink node and at least one queried node of the subscriber nodes. An uplink path from a particular subscriber node to the sink node is determined by periodically exchanging path messages between adjacent nodes of the network, where a particular path message signals the respectively shortest distance to the sink node, i.e., as a metric. A downlink path from the sink node to the at least one queried node is determined by inserting an address list into at least one of the path messages sent by the sink node, which list comprises the address of a respectively queried node. | 07-19-2012 |
20120188938 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A LOCATION AWARE WIRELESS NETWORK - This disclosure is directed to devices and methods for providing a location aware wireless network including at least one network node that is configured to calculate a position estimate on the basis of signals received from other network nodes and to transmit location information based on the position estimate to other nodes on the network. Preferably, the network node is configured to autonomously determine a signal-derived position estimate, including those based on location information from other network nodes, signal strength or the timing of signals. Other network nodes can feature GPS receivers, which can optionally be configured to perform signal-derived estimates as well. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188939 | DYNAMIC WIRELESS NETWORKS AND INTERACTIVE WIRELESS INFORMATION COMMUNICATION AND DELIVERY SYSTEMS - Wireless information communication and delivery systems are described herein that include at least one wireless-enabled device, a device location system, a positioning and communication system, and an information repository system. A configurable wireless protocol device is disclosed that includes a multi-modal transceiver that can establish a communication network with a local wireless-enabled device. A wireless network is described that includes: at least one configurable wireless protocol device; at least one wireless-enabled device; and at least one wireless access point. Methods of locating a wireless-enabled device are described and include: providing a wireless-enabled device, providing a configurable wireless protocol device comprising a modified wireless-protocol; and utilizing the configurable wireless protocol device to actively scan for the wireless-enabled device. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188940 | Spatiotemporal Annotation of Data Packets in Wireless Networks - Techniques for annotating data packets with time and/or location information in wireless networks are provided. In one aspect, a method for processing information streams produced by end-computing devices that are transmitted over a wireless network having at least one network element is provided. The method includes the following steps. Data packets which originate from the end-computing devices and are received by the network element are inspected for spatiotemporal metadata. Spatiotemporal metadata is inserted into the data packets and the data packets are transmitted if the step of inspecting the data packets reveals that the data packets are missing spatiotemporal metadata. Otherwise the data packets are transmitted if the step of inspecting the data packets reveals that spatiotemporal metadata is already present in the data packets. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188941 | EMERGENCY SUPPORT FOR VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VOIP) OVER MIXED MACRO AND FEMTO NETWORKS - A device receives, from an emergency call server (ECS), a query that includes a telephone number, a femto global positioning system (GPS) identifier, and an Internet protocol (IP) address associated with a user equipment (UE) placing an emergency call. The device obtains a serving cell E-UTRAN cell global identifier (ECGI) of the UE based on the query, and determines whether the ECGI is a macro ECGI associated with a base station or a femto ECGI associated with a femto cell. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188942 | NODE FOR A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - It is disclosed a node of a radio access network. The node comprises an access device having a transceiver suitable for exchanging upstream and downstream traffic with a plurality of terminals located in a coverage area thereof, a digital unit suitable for performing base-band processing of the upstream and downstream traffic, and a traffic link connecting the transceiver and the digital unit. The node further comprises a backhauling apparatus having an outdoor unit suitable for exchanging the upstream and downstream traffic with a further node of the radio access network by means of a point-to-point microwave connection. The transceiver is connected to the outdoor unit by means of a backhauling link. The digital unit of the access device and the outdoor unit of the backhauling apparatus are configured to exchange the upstream and downstream traffic through the traffic link, the transceiver and the backhauling link. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188943 | SS7 ANSI-41 TO SIP BASED CALL SIGNALING CONVERSION GATEWAY FOR WIRELESS VoIP E911 - An SS7-based call protocol conversion gateway that translates between circuit-switched SS7 protocols and session initiation protocol (SIP) oriented protocol, allowing an E911 call initiated over a switched network to be routed by a VoIP network. The SS7-based call protocol conversion gateway provides a PSAP with MSAG quality (street address) information about a VoIP dual mode phone user without the need for a wireless carrier to invest in building out an entire VoIP core. Thus, wireless carriers may continue signaling the way they are today, i.e., using the J-STD-036 standard for CDMA and GSM in North America, yet see benefits of a VoIP network core, i.e., provision of MSAG quality location data to a PSAP. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188944 | HOME AGENT ON A HOME LINK - In node management in a packet-switched network, a first node acts as a proxy for a second node. Both nodes have network-layer addresses at the network layer and link-layer addresses at the link layer. The first node receives a request to receive and forward packets addressed to the second node's network-layer address. The same network-layer address is associated with the first and the second node, and the first and the second node have distinct link-layer addresses. The first node advertises to nodes attached to the packet-switched network the first node's link-layer address as a destination address for the second node's network-layer address; the second node does not advertise. The first node receives in response to advertising, packets destined to the second node's network-layer address having the first node's link-layer address and forwards packets addressed to the second node's network-layer address to the second node using its link-layer address. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188945 | ROUTE OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND ACCESS ROUTER - A route optimization method and an access router are disclosed. The route optimization method includes: an access router receives a test initiation message sent by a source IP node that initiates route optimization; determine a destination IP node of the route optimization according to the test initiation message; and establish route optimization between the source IP node and the destination IP node in place of the destination IP node. Therefore, the destination IP node that receives the route optimization can implement route optimization through the access router even if the route optimization in the mobile IPv6 protocol is not supported. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188946 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and system for wireless frequency division multiple access communications in the uplink and/or downlink directions. A first time duration for transmission of a data payload block is established, and the transmission is processed using a first frequency domain or a time domain. A second time duration for transmission of at least one pilot block is established, and the transmission is processed using a second frequency domain or the time domain, the second time duration is not greater than the first time duration. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188947 | Uplink Power Control in Wireless Communication Systems - Methods in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) base station for controlling transmit power of a User Equipment(UE) are provided. The method includes configuring UE individual power weighting factors to be used for weighting available UE transmit power between uplink component carriers and/or between Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) and Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH); and signaling the configured UE individual power weighting factors to the UE. Related methods and arrangements are also provided. | 07-26-2012 |
20120195253 | Transfer of Synchronization in a Hybrid Global Satellite Packet Network System - Networks, network devices and methods of synchronization using transfer of synchronization packets are provided. Some network devices are configured to use either a timing reference extracted based on GPS signals or an imported timing reference, as an operative time reference. A network device from which to import the time reference is selected and may be updated to meet a selection rule related to the quality of receiving the transfer of synchronization packets. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195254 | COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES WITH ENVELOPE EXTRACTION AND RELATED METHODS - A communications device may include an encoder generating digital baseband In-phase (I) and Quadrature (Q) signals, a processor coupled to the encoder and extracting an envelope characteristic from the digital baseband I and Q signals based upon a bandwidth of the digital baseband I and Q signals. A power amplifier may be coupled downstream from the processor and may generate an amplified I and Q signal based upon the envelope characteristic. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195255 | MINIMIZING TRACKING AREA UPDATES IN HETEROGENEOUS RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A communications network ( | 08-02-2012 |
20120195256 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TIMING AND/OR FREQUENCY OFFSET MONITORING AND HANDLING - Methods and apparatuses are provided for obtaining downlink or uplink signal characteristics of at least one access point in a network. The signal characteristics may be obtained through user equipment receiving the signal characteristics, through the at least one access point, or through another access point. Frequency or timing offset between two or more access points may be determined based on the obtained signal characteristics, where the frequency or timing offset may be handled through post processing. For example, a clock servo may be controlled or adjusted in response to the determined offset, the absolute frequency of a master network oscillator may be calibrated, traffic anomalies within the network may be detected and corrected, and/or respective clocks of the two or more access points may be synchronized. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195257 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN CABLE NETWORK - Disclosed herein are a method and an apparatus for transmitting data in a cable network. The transmitter generates upper layer data including multiplexed data of a plurality of subscriber terminals, dividing the upper layer data into a plurality of segment data, performs channel coding on each segment data, extracts information on at least one subscriber terminal included in each segment data to generate subscriber identification signals, inserts the subscriber identification signals into each channel-coded segment data, and modulates and transmits each segment data into which the subscriber identification signals are inserted. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195258 | NETWORK REENTRY METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a network re-entry method and apparatus in a mobile communication system. The network re-entry method includes sending, by a group delegate Mobile Station (MS) among MSs of a group, a ranging code based on a group Identifier (ID) to a Base Station (BS) and receiving, by the MSs, a Ranging-Response (RNG-RSP) message comprising a ranging status for the group from the BS. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195259 | Remote Transmission System - A transmission apparatus includes a plurality of modems, which are configured to communicate via respective wireless communication channels and includes at least first and second modems configured to communicate respectively over separate first and second wireless communication networks. The transmission apparatus also includes a stream processor, which is configured to receive and process an incoming media stream so as to provide multiple upload streams for transmission by different ones of the modems, including first and second upload streams for transmission by the first and second modems, respectively. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195260 | Packet switched eCall connection - The present invention relates to a server unit ( | 08-02-2012 |
20120195261 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system capable of switching between a first communication state and a second communication state, in a case of a first communication state, a VoIP media signal is exchanged between a mobile station. UE # | 08-02-2012 |
20120195262 | INTEGRATED INFORMATION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system, for functioning without the use of dedicated lines or the Internet so as to ensure communication speed, communication quality, and communication trouble countermeasures, including a communication network and domain name server. The domain name server includes a domain name tree with a country number of a telephone number as a level | 08-02-2012 |
20120195263 | PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus may be used for peer-to-peer communications. A first non-access point (non-AP) station (STA) may receive a message for establishing a direct communication link from a second non-AP STA. The message may include a service priority. The first non-AP STA may transmit another message in response to receiving the message from the second non-AP STA, and communicate directly with the second non-AP STA. The system may be an Ad hoc network comprising a plurality of STAs without an access point (AP) where each STA maintains a database of one-hop and two-hop STAs, and establishes a direct link to other STAs after informing neighboring STAs of an intention to establish a direct communication link. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195264 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL METHOD - To suppress deterioration of throughput characteristics in the entire system even when a plurality of transmission antennas is placed in an indoor environment, a base station apparatus (eNode B) is provided with a power control matrix generating section ( | 08-02-2012 |
20120195265 | ACK/NACK FEEDBACK METHOD AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS USING SAME - Disclosed is a wireless communication system, and particularly, a technology of feedbacking an ACK/NACK or multiple ACK/NACKs through a single uplink component carrier in response to multi downlink information transmitted through multiple component carriers in a wireless communication system. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195266 | Mobile IP over VPN Communication Protocol - The present invention supports a communication protocol for transmission of information packets between a mobile node and a virtual private network. Information packets are encapsulated and decapsulated along the route as the information packet is forwarded among the various networks on its path to the destination address; either the mobile node on a foreign network or a correspondence node on a virtual private network. A home agent on the virtual private network supports transmitting the information packets, and the information packets are transmitted from the virtual private network from the home agent or a virtual private network gateway. | 08-02-2012 |
20120201194 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SYSTEM LEVEL SOLUTION FOR DIFFERENT SERVICE CO-EXISTENCE - An apparatus and method for implementing a system solution for co-existence between a first service and a second service including accepting a first service selection for a first wireless system on a mobile terminal; performing a data transport using the first service selection on the mobile terminal; accepting a second service selection for a second wireless system on the mobile terminal; implementing a suspension of the data transport using the first service selection on the mobile terminal; and redirecting the data transport using a different wireless system. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201195 | Macro-Network Location Determination, Local-Oscillator Stabilization, and Frame-Start Synchronization Based on Nearby FM Radio Signals - Exemplary methods and systems may generally be implemented to allow a macro-network base station without access to a GPS reference signal to provide some or all of the functionality for which existing macro-network base stations typically rely on GPS. In a first aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may determine its location using a location-determination technique that is based upon the angles of arrival of FM radio signals from nearby FM stations. In a second aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may stabilize its local oscillator by phase-locking its local oscillator to an FM radio signal, and periodically adjusting its local oscillator to account for phase drift of the FM radio signal. And in a third aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may synchronize its frame-start timing with a nearby base station using a frame-start timing signal that the base station has synchronized to frame transmissions from the nearby base station during a setup routine. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201196 | SIGNALING FOR EXTENDED MPDU, A-MPDU AND A-MSDU FRAME FORMATS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for signaling extended sizes for Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (MPDU), Aggregated MPDU (A-MPDU) and Aggregated MAC Service Data Unit (A-MSDU) frame formats. A first technique proposes modifications to the current specifications of the IEEE 802.11 | 08-09-2012 |
20120201197 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA, AND BASE STATION AND TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE SAME IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method for transmitting uplink data by a terminal in a mobile communication system, the method comprising: when data to be transmitted to uplink is generated in an idle mode, transmitting a ranging request message including at least one of a group identifier allocated to each terminal group to which the terminal belongs, an offline transmission indicator indicating transmission of uplink data in a state in which the terminal is not connected to a network, and uplink data, to a base station; and receiving a ranging response message confirming that the uplink data has been successfully transmitted, from the base station. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201198 | Method and Apparatus for Route Optimization in a Telecommunication Network - A method, access node, and mobile node for controlling the routing of a data packet sent from the mobile node towards a correspondent node of a foreign Internet Protocol (IP)-based telecommunication network different from a home network associated with the mobile node. The access router intercepts the data packet and determines whether the packet relates to a route optimization mode of the Mobile IP standard in which data packets bypass a home agent associated with the mobile node's home network, or whether the packet relates to a bidirectional tunneling mode of the Mobile IP standard in which home agent packets pass through the home agent. The access router drops the packet when the packet relates to the route optimization mode and when dropping of the packet is determined to be in accordance with the predetermined routing policy. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201199 | ANTENNA CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD - A subscriber unit, including an antenna array and an antenna array interface coupled to the antenna array, is described. Wireless transmissions, at least two of which are based on different directional transmissions from a transmitter, are received at the antenna array. Feedback messages are generated using the antenna array interface. The feedback messages are communicated using the antenna array to adjust settings of the transmitter. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201200 | FAST GENERALIZED DECISION FEEDBACK EQUALIZER PRECODER IMPLEMENTATION FOR MULTI-USER MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT WIRELESS TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS - A technique is used to realize a generalized decision feedback equalizer (GDFE) Precoder for multi-user multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) systems, which significantly reduces the computational cost while resulting in no capacity loss. The technique is suitable for improving the performance of various MU-MIMO wireless systems including future 4G cellular networks. In one embodiment, a method for configuring a GDFE precoder in a base station of a MU-MIMO wireless system having k user terminals, each user terminal having associated therewith a feedforward filter. The method comprises computing a filter matrix C using one of a plurality of alternative formulas of the invention; and, based on the computation of the filter matrix C, computing a transmit filter matrix B for a transmit filter used to process a symbol vector obtained after a decision feedback equalizing stage of the GDFE precoder, a feedforward filter matrix F, and an interference pre-cancellation matrix G. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201201 | PREDICTIVE ROAMING BETWEEN SUBNETS - A network device of a subnet determines predictive roaming information for a wireless client. Predictive roaming information can identify the wireless client and a home network subnet of the wireless client. The network device provides predictive roaming information associated with a wireless client to neighboring subnets. Neighboring subnets store received predictive roaming information, and use the predictive roaming information if the wireless client roams to them. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201202 | METHOD FOR UPLINK MULTI-RECEPTION, AND BASE STATION DEVICE USING SAME - The present specification relates to a wireless communication system, and particularly, to a method for uplink multi-reception in a wireless communication system and to a base station device using same. The present specification relates to an uplink multi-reception technique for enabling two or more base stations including a serving main base station and one or more neighbor base stations, in order to receive data from a user equipment. The base station device checks whether or not the signal received from the user equipment is decoded, receives a transmission ready signal (RPT) from the neighbor base station or exchanges ACK/NACK signals, determines one or more neighbor base stations as selected neighbor base stations in accordance with a predetermined regulation, transmits a transmission request signal to the selected neighbor base stations, and receives data. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201203 | MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM - When accepting an establishment request (Cx-LIR) for establishing an information communication path between a sending-side UE and a receiving-side UE, an HSS performs control so as to establish the information communication path between the sending-side UE and the receiving-side UE via an MGW and an existing 3G network if the receiving-side UE exists in an IMS network and is a communication interception target terminal. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201204 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING AN APPLICATION SESSION, DEVICE AND CORRESPONDING NOTIFICATION - In the field of mobile telephony and more particularly the field of so-called machine-to-machine communication modules, the invention aims to define a notification format for establishing an application session integrating the operator connection parameters. In this case, in the case of GPRS, this entails the name of the gateway and connection identifiers. | 08-09-2012 |
20120207086 | SIMULTANEOUSLY SUPPORTING MULIPLE 3GPP STANDARD VERSIONS - Embodiments are disclosed that enable a device such as a policy and charging rules function (PCRF) node to operate with other nodes in a long term evolution (LTE) network that are operating at different respective major-minor release combinations of the 3 | 08-16-2012 |
20120207087 | AGGREGATED MPDU (A-MPDU) NUMEROLOGY AND MPDU GROUPING - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for transmitting, receiving, and acknowledging MAC protocol data units (MPDUs), allowing single bits in a Block Acknowledgment (BA) bitmap to acknowledge receipt of multiple MPDUs. As a result, a greater number of MPDUs may be acknowledged than if each bit acknowledged only a single MPDU. By reducing the overhead associated with a re-transmission bitmap, a greater number of MPDUs may be aggregated, thereby increasing overall throughput. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207088 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING METADATA - A method and apparatus are described for updating metadata, (e.g., media presentation descriptions (MPDs)). A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may transmit a hypertext transport protocol (HTTP) request message and receive an HTTP response message including metadata requested by the HTTP request message. The WTRU may then register with at least one server to establish a metadata update service based on information included in the metadata. The WTRU may fetch updated metadata in response to receiving a metadata update signal provided by the metadata update service. The information may identify a uniform resource identifier (URI) or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) associated with an event server used to provide the metadata update service. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207089 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR HANDLING SECONDARY CELL (SCELL) REACTIVATION - A method for handling Secondary Cell (SCell) reactivation by a mobile communication device supporting a Carrier Aggregation (CA) technique is provided. The method includes the following steps: receiving at least one Media Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE) indicating activation of an already activated SCell with configured uplink from a service network, comparing an accumulated number of the at least one MAC CE with a predetermined number, and ignoring the MAC CE for the already activated SCell with configured uplink in response to the accumulated number of the at least one MAC CE being greater than or equal to the predetermined number. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207090 | INITIALIZING A COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A MOBILE HOST AND A CORRESPONDENT NODE - Embodiments of the present invention relate to a router able to cooperate with a mobile host of a home network for initializing a communication between said mobile host and a correspondent node over at least a first and a second networks, said mobile host comprising at least a first and a second network interfaces able to connect respectively to said first and second networks, said router being further able to: | 08-16-2012 |
20120207091 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: after a mobile station UE having RRC connection with the radio network controller RNC gets out of the coverage of the mobile communication system of WCDMA scheme, performing location registration to the mobile communication system of LTE scheme, issuing a notification to the radio network controller RNC by the exchange apparatus SGSN upon reception of predetermined signal, the notification implying that the mobile station UE performs the location registration to the mobile communication system of LTE scheme; and the radio network controller RNC releasing the resources for RRC connection without transmitting a signal to release the resources to the mobile station UE in response to the notification from the exchange apparatus SGSN. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207092 | Channel-Adaptive Transmission in a Distributed Coordinated Multi-Point Transmission System - A user equipment obtains channel state information for base stations serving the user equipment according to a coordinated multi-point transmission, arranges the channel state information in a predetermined order, and transmits the channel state information in the predetermined order. At least one base station of the base stations receives the channel state information, arranges the channel state information in the predetermined order into a datagram, and transmits the datagram to at least one other base station of the base stations. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207093 | COORDINATED MULTI-POINT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - A coordinated multi-point communications system is provided. A first center site is operative to serve one or more user equipment located under coverage of a first cluster. Multiple first remote devices are connected to the first center site and operative to receive downlink signals from the first center site and transmit the downlink signals to the one or more user equipment and/or receive uplink signals from the one or more user equipment and transmit the uplink signals to the first center site. The first center site and the first remote devices form the first cluster to support coordinated multi-point transmission and reception for simultaneously transmitting and/or receiving the downlink and/or uplink signals to and/or from the one or more user equipment, and at least one of the first remote devices is further connected to at least a second center site of a second cluster adjacent to the first cluster. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207094 | SERVICE NETWORKS AND METHODS FOR HANDLING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICE TRIGGERING - A method for handling Machine Type Communication (MTC) device triggering by a service network connected to an MTC server and at least one MTC device is provided. The method includes the steps of receiving a trigger request message from the MTC server, and transmitting a trigger indication comprising trigger information to the MTC device in response to the trigger request message. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207095 | REDUCED INTERFRAME SPACING IN A WIRELESS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - Providing wireless transmission, where in a first transmission mode, transmitting a plurality of frames using a first interframe spacing interval. When in a second transmission mode, transmitting the plurality of frames using a second interframe spacing interval, wherein the second interframe spacing is less than the first interframe spacing. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207096 | PROTOCOL DATA UNIT PRIORITY MANAGEMENT - A single receiver can collect multiple protocol data units at one time originating from different sources. While it can be desirable for higher priority protocol data units to be processed, loss of data unit portions can cause confusion to the receiver. Therefore, even if a higher priority protocol data unit transfers to the receiver while a lower priority data unit is being processed, the lower priority unit can be completed before processing the higher priority unit; thus, there can be a lower likelihood of confusion among protocol data units. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207097 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN MULTI-USER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention particularly relates to a method and an apparatus for improving the efficiency of data transmission in a multi-user wireless transmission system. According to one embodiment of the present invention, the method, which is a transmission method of data in a multi-user wireless communication system, comprises the steps of: estimating channel states of each terminal through sounding or feedback information received from the terminals, and selecting terminals to which individual data are to be transmitted at the same time; determining a signal to noise ratio of the selected terminals, and calculating a precoding matrix; calculating a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) of each terminal and the number of symbols of data fields in accordance with the | 08-16-2012 |
20120213149 | Method and System for Power Headroom Reporting in the Presence of Multiple Transmit Antennas - A method and system are provided in which a mobile device may be operable for long term evolution (LTE) communication or some other wireless technology via two or more transmit antennas. The device may comprise a power amplifier for each transmit antenna with substantially similar maximum power being provided by both amplifiers. A power headroom value may be determined in the device based on path loss values between the transmit antennas and a base station and the maximum transmit power for each transmit antenna. Transmission via one of the transmit antennas may occur concurrently with transmission via another of the transmit antennas. The device may generate an indication of the determined power headroom value for communication to the base station. The power headroom value may be reported periodically or in response to a change in the power received at the base station. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213150 | MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - A multi-radio device, such as User Equipment (UE), may experience coexistence issues among various ones of its constituent radio devices that operate at the same time. Various aspects of the disclosure provide techniques to mitigate coexistence issues in multi-radio devices, where significant in-device coexistence problems can exist. In particular, a method for coexistence of multi-radio devices is described. The method includes identifying, at an upper layer of a multi-radio UE, a type of incoming broadcast stream data. The method further includes determining a coexistence policy for operation of communication resources within the multi-radio UE based on the type of the incoming broadcast stream data. The method also includes arbitrating, at a lower layer of the multi-radio UE, between the communication resources based on the coexistence policy. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213151 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING RANDOM ACCESS PREAMBLE - A method, a system and a device for sending a random access preamble are provided. The method includes: a base station determines an uplink component carrier to be utilized by a terminal for sending a random access preamble, and sends identification information of the uplink component carrier to the terminal ( | 08-23-2012 |
20120213152 | Methods and Systems for Reducing Service Delays in IMS Systems - Methods and systems are provided to reduce service delays in wireless communications networks. A method for gathering information associated with a user equipment (UE) at a node which is a part of a mobile communication network, the method includes: receiving a message at the node; and prefetching information associated with the UE upon receipt of the message, wherein prefetching includes transmitting a request for the information associated with the UE and receiving a response to the request for the information associated with the UE. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213153 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO REPORT LINK QUALITY MEASUREMENTS FOR DOWNLINK DUAL CARRIER OPERATION - Methods and apparatus to report link quality measurements for downlink dual carrier operation are disclosed. Example methods and apparatus disclosed herein implement one or more example techniques for reporting link quality measurements involving, for example, modifying measurement reporting messages to increase the number and/or types of link quality measurements that can be reported, permitting mobile stations, when appropriate, to use different reporting messages capable of supporting more link quality measurements, and/or prioritizing certain link quality measurements to be reported when the reporting messages do not contain sufficient space to report all requested and/or specified link quality measurements. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213154 | UPLINK TRANSMIT ANTENNA SELECTION IN CARRIER AGGREGATION - An uplink antenna selection method where a base station transmits first and second control information to a user equipment. The first control information includes instructions for configuring the user equipment with closed-loop transmit antenna selection on one of a plurality of component carriers, and the second control information includes instructions for configuring the UE with open-loop transmit antenna selection on at least one other of the plurality of the component carriers. Also, the UE may transmit an indication of its capability for transmission antenna switching per component carrier. Further, the UE may perform steps to resolve inconsistent antenna selection triggers received from the base station. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213155 | ENSURING CONTENT FILTERING THROUGH A SPECIALIZED TIER OF PROXY CACHES AT THE BASE STATION - Embodiments of the invention provide a method, system and computer program product for content caching with remote filtering services in a radio access network (RAN). In an embodiment of the invention, a method for content caching with remote filtering services in a RAN can include receiving a response to a request from an end user device wirelessly coupled to a base station of the RAN, marking the response as uncacheable, and routing the response to the base station over a data communications network. In one aspect of the embodiment, the response can be received in an RNC of the RAN. Of note, the process of marking the response as uncacheable can depend upon the evaluation of a policy with respect to the response. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213156 | OPERATING METHOD OF WIRELESS ACCESS POINT DEVICE AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT DEVICE - In the field of communications technologies, an operating method of a wireless Access Point (AP) device and the wireless AP device are provided according to the embodiments of the present invention, to decrease the power consumption and prolong the operating time when a battery is used for power supply. One method includes: in the absence of data connection, after transmitting N broadcast frame signals with full power, transmitting M broadcast frame signals with low power. Another method includes: in the presence of data connection, establishing a connection with a lowest one of all compatible transmission rates; judging whether a current transmission rate is greater than or equal to a sum of a current actual throughput and a preset system parameter; and if the current transmission rate is smaller than the sum of the current actual throughput and the preset system parameter, increasing the transmission rate. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213157 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for transmitting and receiving System Information (SI) in a mobile communication system. The method for receiving the SI by a User Equipment (UE) includes receiving, by the UE, at a fixedly scheduled sub-frame of a predetermined radio frame within a Primary Broadcast CHannel (P-BCH) transmission period, the SI including first partial bits of a System Frame Number (SFN), the first partial bits indicating a repeated value; and acquiring, by the UE, second partial bits of the SFN in the predetermined radio frame by decoding the P-BCH, the second partial bits indicating a different value. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213158 | Wireless Network Setup and Configuration Distribution System - The present invention relates to a wireless network that operates in accordance with the IEEE 802.11.n standards and comprises at least one router ( | 08-23-2012 |
20120213159 | System and Method for Centralized Station Management - A wireless network is adapted with a wireless network switch in communication with a plurality of access points, which are in communication with one or more stations. Specifically, a network device may receive a plurality of request messages on a plurality of wireless communication channels through a plurality of access points. The request messages are originated from a single station. Furthermore, the network can extract a plurality of channel identifiers from the request messages, and generates a filtered radio frequency neighborhood list dynamically based on the extracted channel identifiers. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213160 | Method and Apparatus for VoIP Roaming - A method and apparatus for transferring a user data profile from a user's home terminal to a visiting terminal is disclosed. User or network configuration settings are transferred from a home telephony adapter to a visiting telephony adapter. In accordance with one embodiment, a computer readable medium, such as a flash drive is inserted into the home telephony adapter and, either with or without authentication, user or network configuration settings are transferred from the home telephony adapter to the medium. In another embodiment, the medium is then inserted into the visiting telephony adapter | 08-23-2012 |
20120213161 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system includes: a base station for specific subscribers that operates in a closed access mode setting corresponding to a closed access mode in which specific user equipments are allowed access and in a hybrid access mode setting corresponding to the closed access mode as well as an open access mode in which user equipments to be allowed access are not specified; and a base station that does not specify a user equipment that makes access and, in a case where the base station for specific subscribers is installed outside a communication area of the base station that does not specify a user equipment that makes access, the base station for specific subscribers is caused to operate in the hybrid access mode setting. | 08-23-2012 |
20120218937 | User Equipment Feedback In Support of Multiple Input Multiple Output Operations - A method of feedback in wireless telephony includes a hybrid of implicit and explicit feedback. The implicit and explicit feedback are transmitted in distinct subframes. These distinct set of subframes may have the same periodicity but differing offsets. The distinct set of subframes may have periodicities related by an integral factor. Either set of subframes may include aperiodic subframes. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218938 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus includes a receiving unit, a transmitting unit and a control unit. The receiving unit is configured to receive a first connection request frame indicating a connection request from another apparatus. The transmitting unit is configured to transmit a connection acceptance frame indicating a response to the first connection request frame. The control unit is configured to control the transmitting unit to retransmit the connection acceptance frame until a first acknowledgement frame addressed to the apparatus as a response to the connection acceptance frame is received from the another apparatus, and control the transmitting unit to stop from transmitting the connection acceptance frame if a second acknowledgement frame addressed to the another apparatus as a destination is received or if a second connection request frame addressed to the another apparatus is received. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218939 | Dynamic selection among algorithms for generating fillers for security of data communications - To reduce the effectiveness of eavesdropping attacks, a filler such as one utilized in a data frame for link-layer LAPDm signaling may be dynamically selected to utilize a first bit pattern (first filler) generated utilizing a first algorithm when the transmissions are unencrypted, and to utilize a second bit pattern (second filler) generated utilizing a second algorithm different from the first algorithm when the transmissions are encrypted. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218940 | Method and apparatus for determining a slot format of a fractional dedicated physical control channel - A method for determining a slot format of an F-DPCH is disclosed in the present disclosure, including: a Node B using No.0 slot format of the F-DPCH as the slot format for transmitting information over the F-DPCH when detecting that a UE in CELL_FACH state or idle mode is using an E-DCH. An apparatus for determining a slot format of an F-DPCH is also disclosed. The present disclosure ensures that the slot format of the F-DPCH transmitted by the Node B is identical with that of the F-DPCH received by the UE, so that the UE can correctly receive the TPC bits carried on the F-DPCH, and thus the UE can use the TPC bits to implement inner loop power control. Therefore, the Node B can correctly receive the data information transmitted over an E-DPDCH. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218941 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station apparatus that wirelessly communicates with a wireless terminal, including: a determination portion that determines a mode of the wireless terminal that exists in a service area of the base station apparatus; and a setting portion that sets a first mode in which a first period in which the base station apparatus is communicable with the wireless terminal and a second period in which the base station apparatus is incommunicable with the wireless terminal are provided alternately, based on a result of the determination of the determination portion, and sets a length of the second period based on the result of the determination of the determination portion. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218942 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - The present invention provides a data transmission method, apparatus and system, which relate to the field of the wireless network technology. The data transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present invention includes: acquiring a downlink data packet sent to a terminal, in which the downlink data packet does not have a high layer protocol stack header; sending the downlink data packet to the terminal through an air interface; Through the present invention, the data amount in the air interface transmission is reduced to a great extent, the efficiency of air interface transmission is substantially enhanced, and the air interface resource is saved, thereby facilitating the enrichment and development of wireless services and satisfying the demands of users. The present invention is applicable to a scenario of air interface transmission in a wireless network. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218943 | CONTROL RESOURCE MAPPING FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for sending control information in a wireless communication system are described. A control segment may include L≧1 tiles, and each tile may include a number of transmission units. A number of control resources may be defined and mapped to the transmission units for the control segment. For symmetric mapping, multiple sets of S≧1 control resources may be formed, and each batch of L consecutive sets of S control resources may be mapped to S transmission units at the same location in the L tiles. For localized mapping, S>1, and each set of S control resources may be mapped to a cluster of S adjacent transmission units in one tile. For distributed mapping, S=1, and each control resource may be mapped to one transmission unit in one tile. For diversity, each control resource may be mapped to multiple (e.g., three) transmission units in at least one tile. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218944 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Disclosed is a radio base station ( | 08-30-2012 |
20120218945 | Method and Arrangement for Random Access Diversity - Methods and arrangements for enablement of transmission of a network node assisted random access request using transmit diversity. The methods and arrangements relate to providing information related to a non-transparent diversity scheme to a mobile terminal, which diversity scheme then is used by the mobile terminal when transmitting a network node assisted random access request. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218946 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND RE-CONNECTION METHOD - It is possible to complete a re-connection in a short time and prevent instantaneous interruption of communication by including a plurality of base station apparatuses and a mobile station apparatus; the mobile station apparatus includes: a delay difference detecting unit that detects a difference in reception timing between a signal from the base station apparatus with which the mobile station apparatus currently communicates and a signal from the base station apparatus that is a re-connection destination candidate; a transmission timing calculating unit that calculates, based on the difference in reception timing, a transmission timing to the base station apparatus that is the re-connection destination candidate; and a re-connection processing unit that, having detected a disconnection of the communication with the base station apparatus with which the mobile station apparatus currently communicates, uses the transmission timing to start a communication with the base station apparatus that is the re-connection destination candidate. | 08-30-2012 |
20120224528 | PACKET-SWITCHED CORE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE FOR VOICE SERVICES ON SECOND- AND THIRD- GENERATION WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORKS - Communications systems and methods with an evolved packet-switched core network architecture to enable voice services on second- and third- generation wireless access networks. The systems and methods permit unmodified 2G and 3G mobile devices to conduct voice calls using conventional circuit-switched user-plane and control-plane protocols at the air interface while the voice calls are switched at the back-end using a packet-switched core network. The system may include a translation module at a controller component that is configured to provide both user-plane and control-plane translation functions between an unmodified 2G/3G mobile device that utilizes circuit-switched protocols for a voice call and the packet-switched core network that utilizes packet-switched protocols to switch the voice call. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224529 | USER EQUIPMENT AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A user equipment | 09-06-2012 |
20120224530 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RAPID GROUP SYNCHRONIZATION - A first device of a network may decide to transmit a flood of packets that is longer in duration than the maximum amount of time that the first device can continuously transmit. The first device may coordinate with one or more second devices of the network such that each of the one or more second devices transmits a respective second portion of the flood of packets following transmission of a first portion of the flood of packets by the first network device. The packets may advertise a pending network event that is to occur at a time indicated by the contents of the packets. The first device may select the one or more second devices from a plurality of devices based on a location of the one or more second devices and/or how many third devices are in the network. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224531 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR HYBRID SESSION BASED DIAMETER ROUTING - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for hybrid session based Diameter routing are disclosed. According to one method, the method comprises receiving, at a first Diameter signaling router (DSR), a first Diameter message for processing by a Diameter server. The method also includes selecting, using a Diameter node selection algorithm that operates on at least one parameter in the first Diameter message without requiring use of stored Diameter binding information, a first Diameter server to which the first Diameter message is to be routed. The method further includes determining whether the first Diameter server is available. The method also includes, in response to determining that the first Diameter server is not available, selecting a second Diameter server to which the first Diameter message is to be routed and creating an exception binding record that associates the second Diameter server and information in the first Diameter message. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224532 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC ACK/NACK REPETITION FOR ROBUST DOWNLINK MAC PDU TRANSMISSION IN LTE - A method and apparatus for dynamic acknowledgement repetition for a downlink medium access control packet data unit transmission ‘MAC PDU’ requiring multiple acknowledgements, the method having the steps of: receiving the downlink MAC PDU requiring multiple acknowledgements; and utilizing a differentiating factor and acknowledgement scheme, sending the multiple acknowledgements. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224533 | HENB Blind Detection for Hierarchy Configuration - It is provided an apparatus, comprising including deciding means configured to decide whether or not a predefined condition is met; receiving means configured to receive a first signal at predefined places; inhibiting means configured to inhibit sending a second signal at the predefined places, if the deciding means decides that the predefined condition is met; monitoring means configured to monitor, if the deciding means decides that the predefined condition is met, for at least two of the predefined places whether or not a first signal is received at the predefined places; defining means configured to define a first mute place based on the monitoring result of the monitoring means and a predefined rule, wherein the first mute place is one of the predefined places at which a first signal is received; wherein the inhibiting means is configured to inhibit sending the second signal at the first mute place. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224534 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication apparatus to transmit a plurality of frames in a network, where each frame includes one or more symbols having a symbol length, includes a data processing unit. The data processing unit acquires an inter-frame space between two consecutive frames from the plurality of frames. The data processing unit further adjusts the inter-frame space between the two consecutive frames upon determination that the inter-frame space is not an integral multiple of the symbol length. The communication apparatus also includes a transmitter unit to transmit the adjusted consecutive frames. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224535 | TERMINAL DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING A POWER HEADROOM REPORT IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR SAME - Disclosed is a terminal device for transmitting a power headroom report (PHR) in a multi-carrier communication system, and a method for same. The terminal device for transmitting a power headroom report (PHR) in a multi-carrier communication system comprises a transmitter and a processor. The transmitter transmits, to a base station, a power headroom report for one or more active component carriers allocated to user equipment from among multiple carriers. The processor controls the transmitter such that the transmitter transmits the power headroom report including a first type of power headroom information calculated using the power value of a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) of the main component carrier among the active component carriers, and a second type of power headroom information calculated using the power value of the PUSCH and the power value of a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) of the main component carrier. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224536 | NETWORK DEVICE IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS TRAFFIC BREAKOUT - According to an exemplary embodiment of the invention a network device may be provided which may comprise a receiving unit, a sending unit and an evaluating unit. It may be foreseen that the receiving unit may be adapted to receive a trigger signal for preparing a breakout of a plurality of packets, wherein the plurality of packets may comprise at least one packet from a first source and at least one packet from a second source and wherein the evaluating unit may be adapted to evaluate the trigger signal. Moreover, the evaluation unit may be adapted to evaluate packets from a first source and packets from a second source and the evaluation unit may be adapted to distinguish packets from the first source from packets from the second source. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224537 | Method for Transmitting a Beacon in a Star Network (Master-Slave Ad Hoc Network) and a Sensor Node in a Star Network - A method for transmitting a beacon for a star network in manufacturing automation, for use in a communications protocol, such as IEEE Standard 802.15.4e, for manufacturing automation, using at least one gateway and at least one sensor node, wherein the beacon comprises a field including information about a number of base time slots in a superframe. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224538 | RESET FUNCTIONS - The invention discloses a node ( | 09-06-2012 |
20120224539 | DEVICES FOR VARIABLE TRAFFIC FLOW TEMPLATES - The invention discloses a user terminal ( | 09-06-2012 |
20120230250 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR CONTROLLING COEXISTENCE BETWEEN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed for independent wireless resource sharing on a fair basis to enable selecting the most suitable coexistence between wireless networks. Example embodiments of the invention include a method comprising receiving, at a network controller, a coexistence management service request allowing one or more network controllers to make decisions concerning operational parameters of a wireless network originating the request; determining whether control of the wireless network is to be shared with one or more network controllers serving one or more wireless networks neighboring the wireless network originating the request; and in response to determining that control of the wireless network is not to be shared with the one or more network controllers serving the one or more wireless networks neighboring the wireless network originating the request, notifying the one or more network controllers serving the one or more wireless networks neighboring the wireless network originating the request that the wireless network has requested a coexistence information service. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230251 | Method for controlling devices through electric power transmission line based network - A control method for an electric power transmission line based network including network sections each having a monitor and at least one device group, each device group having at least one input device and at least one output device, each input or output device having a set switch comprising transmitting a packet from one device to another device of the same device group over the network section containing the device group wherein the set switch of the device may set itself to belong to one device group, all devices have a right of controlling the network with different priorities, the packet transmission is performed after the device transmitting the packet having controlled the network if the priority thereof is the highest among the activated devices, and the remaining devices in the same network section may read the packet. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230252 | Apparatus and method for suppressing interference caused by coexistent of WIMAX and WIFI - The disclosure provides an apparatus and method for suppressing interference caused by coexistence of World Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) and Wireless Fidelity (WiFi). When a user receives the RF signal from a wireless network by using the apparatus, a WiMAX filtering module filters out the WiFi RF signal received through a WiMAX antenna; the WiMAX RF signal is converted into the WiFi RF signal, and the out-of-band interference signal from the WiFi RF signal is filtered out by a WiFi filtering module, then the filtered WiFi RF signal is transmitted to the user through a WiFi antenna. When the user transmits the RF signal to a wireless network by using the apparatus, a WiFi filtering module filters out the WiMAX RF signal received through the WiFi antenna, the WiFi RF signal is converted into the WiMAX RF signal, and the out-of-band interference signal from the WiMAX RF signal is filtered out by the WiMAX filtering module, the filtered WiMAX RF signal is transmitted to the wireless network through the WiMAX antenna. The disclosure reduces the interference between WiMAX and WiFi, increases the data transmission rate, and avoids the waste of frequency spectrum resources. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230253 | Method and system for reporting quality statistic information of call link - The disclosure provides a method and system for reporting quality statistic information of a call link. The method comprises the steps that: a message for transmitting the quality statistic information of the call link is predetermined between a Base Station (BS) and a Base Station Controller (BSC); when detecting that the current call enters into a local switching mode, the BS reports the detected quality statistic information of the call link of the current call to the BSC through the predetermined message; the BSC parses the received predetermined message, and reports quality statistic information of the call link of the current call obtained by parsing. The system comprises a BS and a BSC. The disclosure can transmit, in the local switching mode, the quality statistic message of the call link to the BSC, to enable the BSC to learn the link quality of the user plane in the local switching mode in time, thus a decision can be made in time and continuity of observing the call link quality by the BSC and the staff in two switching modes is guaranteed. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230254 | TWO-WAY RADIO BASED UNIFIED COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A system for establishing two-way calls between a radio and a phone system is provided. The system comprises at least one control station for exchanging messages with the radio, at least one interconnect control station, or pair of interconnect control stations, for communicating audio signals to and from the radio over a communication channel comprising respective transmit and receive frequencies, and a gateway for exchanging messages with the phone system, the control station and the at least one interconnect control station, or pair of interconnect control stations, causing the radio to switch to the communication channel whereby audio is transmitted from the phone system to the radio over the transmit frequency and audio as well as DTMF is transmitted from the radio to the phone system for activating special features of the phone system. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230255 | METHOD AND IMPLEMENTING APPARATUS FOR COOPERATIVE MULTI-HOP ROUTING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method and an implementing apparatus for cooperative multi-hop routing in a wireless network. According to the method the diversity gains and the interrupt probabilities in a cooperative communication manner between master nodes in the route are obtained, and the segmenting mode for sending packet data is determined accordingly, thus implementing cooperative communication in a multi-hop route, where signals having same information are sent through different paths, and multiple independently faded copies of data symbols may be obtained at a receiver end, thus obtaining higher reception reliability and higher transmission capacity, and improving performance of a communication process | 09-13-2012 |
20120230256 | Adaptive (RLC) Segmentation - A method and nodes for providing adaptive segmentation in a higher protocol layer interacting with a lower protocol layer. An adaptable segmentation limit, defining a threshold of a largest Protocol Data Unit (PDU) that is to be submitted to a lower protocol layer, is deployed at a higher protocol layer interacting with the lower protocol layer. For each Service Data Unit (SDU) arriving at the higher protocol layer, it is determined if the respective SDU can fit into the segmentation limit or not. Each SDU that do not fit into the segmentation limit is segmented into PDUs which are smaller than or equal to the segmentation limit, while no segmentation is performed on SDUs that fit into the segmentation limit. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230257 | RETRANSMISSION METHOD AND TRANSMITTER - An automatic retransmission request control system in an OFDM-MIMO communication system includes a retransmission mode selection part which selects a retransmission mode from among (a) a mode in which to transmit the data, which are to be retransmitted, via the same antenna as in the previous transmission, while transmitting, at the same time, new data by use of an antenna via which no data retransmission is requested; (b) a mode in which to transmit the data, which are to be retransmitted, via an antenna via which no retransmission is requested, while transmitting new data via another antenna at the same time; (c) a mode in which to use STBC to retransmit the data via an antenna via which no retransmission is requested; and (d) a mode in which to use STBC to retransmit the data via all the available antennas. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230258 | RADIO COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS - When time resource data that is assigned to a downlink control channel signal is reported on the downlink, the present invention improves the reliability of the time resource data that is reported, and prevent purposeless repetitions of retransmission requests. A base station apparatus ( | 09-13-2012 |
20120230259 | ACCESSING SERVICE INFORMATION - First, second and third apparatuses, methods and computer programs are provided. The first apparatus ( | 09-13-2012 |
20120236786 | HIGH PERFORMANCE MOBILITY NETWORK WITH AUTOCONFIGURATION - A high performance wireless mesh architecture which has been optimized for mobile end points is described. The mesh architecture is intended for Navy applications, where the wireless mesh network extends between mobile ships and includes ship-to-shore links, but it is equally applicable to other mobile elements on, in, or under land, air, sea, or space. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236787 | METHOD FOR ENABLING A WIRLESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONNECTED TO A FIRST DOMAIN OF A NETWORK, TO ACCESS A SERVICE IN A SECOND DOMAIN, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for enabling a wireless communication device ( | 09-20-2012 |
20120236788 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING STORAGE DEVICES - An approach for enabling wireless communication devices to mount and/or unmount one or more storage devices to facilitate data sharing is described. A processor of a user device generates a request message according to a storage access protocol that is operating system agnostic. The processor then initiates transmission of the request message over a wireless link of an ad-hoc network to a system that includes one or more storage devices, wherein the request message requests storage device information relating to the one or more storage devices. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236789 | MEMORY MANAGEMENT FOR HIGH SPEED MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL - Aspects disclosed herein address the need in the art for memory management for high speed media access control. A packet buffer may store packets with a first data structure, comprising the packet length, sequence number, and a pointer to a second data structure. Packet data may be stored in a linked list of one or more second data structures. Transmit and receive queues may be formed using linked lists or arrays of the first data structures. Memory locations for storing first and second data structures may be kept in lists indicating free locations for the respective data structure types. A flexible memory architecture is disclosed in which two configurations may be selected. Various other aspects are also presented. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236790 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REAL TIME CONTROL OF AN ACTIVE ANTENNA OVER A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method and system suitable for supporting wireless medical telemetry services (WMTS) on a Distributed Antenna System (DAS). A DAS can provide wireless services including voice and data services using the same equipment. WMTS systems can include one or more active antenna units controlled by the MTS access point. The DAS includes control channels for transferring the MTS control and status information between the MTS access point and the antenna. The control channels can be transferred over a separate cable, or transferred using one or more intermediate frequency signals transferred over existing cables DAS between the MTS access point and the antenna. The control channels can be used to configure and control and receive status from the managed components of the DAS including active antennas, control the amplifiers used to process TDD signals, and control the switching of the diversity antenna systems. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236791 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A mobile communications session is provided to a mobile node using an internet protocol. A home packet data network communicates with an affiliated mobile node. The home packet data network includes a home agent of the mobile node. A visited packet data network communicates with an affiliated mobile node. A packet data gateway controls communication between the home and visited packet data networks. Following a change of affiliation from the home packet data network to the visited packet data network, the packet data gateway and the home agent establish a route to the mobile node via the packet data gateway, which controls communication between the home packet data network and the mobile node affiliated with the visited packet data network. If the mobile node roams between a 3GPP network and a non-3GPP network; the packet data gateway controls communication, using resources on the 3GPP network by the mobile node. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236792 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SAME - A wireless network, which includes a wireless router client operable to broadcast data packets to at least one wireless server and one additional wireless client. Each client and server includes programs for determining optimum routes between them. The client also includes a program for determining if a received data packet is not addressed to it and if the packet has been sent via a new optimal route unknown to the client, and for notifying the respective server of such a new optimal route. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236793 | Transmission of Acknowledge/Not-Acknowledge With Repetition - In ACK/NAK responses with repetition, the ACK/NAK response from the user equipment to a Physical Downlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH) transmission is repeated in consecutive frames a predetermined number of frames following receipt. This repeat ACK/NAK causes a problem when a PSCCH transmission directed to the same user equipment occurs in consecutive subframes. In a first embodiment, the first ACK/NAK response repeats preempting any ACK/NAK response to the later PDSCH transmission. In a second embodiment, the first ACK/NAK response does not repeat and the ACK/NAK response to the later PDSCH transmission occurs. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236794 | Creating a Globally Unique Identifier of a Subscriber Device - To register a mobile device located in a first network with a packet-switched services network, a registration request is received from an aggregation device in the first network. The registration request contains an identifier of the aggregation device and identification information of the mobile device, where the identification information is previously unknown to the packet-switched services network. A globally unique identifier of the mobile device is dynamically created based on the identifier of the aggregation device and the identification information of the mobile device, wherein the globally unique identifier is used for uniquely identifying the mobile device in the packet-switched services network. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236795 | Method and Apparatus for Routing a Call to a Dual Mode Wireless Device - Disclosed is a system and method for routing a call to a dual mode wireless device. In accordance with an embodiment of the invention, a network node receives a call. The network node determines that the call is associated with a dual mode wireless device. Once this determination is made, the network node then selects one of a plurality of networks (e.g., cellular network or packet-based network, such as a VoIP network) for use in connecting the call to the dual mode wireless device. The network node then routes the call to the dual mode wireless device via the selected network. During the call, the network node re-routes the call to another network if the network node determines that this other network is now better suited for the call. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236796 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF EXCHANGING IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION FOR MOBILE STATIONS - A system is provided for allowing mobile stations to exchange identification information using a predetermined communication path for the purpose of obtaining identification information to use in establishing a different communication path for communicating. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236797 | Method for Enabling Delivery of a Message Between an IMS Domain and a CS Domain - A method and apparatus for enabling delivery of a message in a communication system comprising an IMS domain and a circuit switched domain. Upon receiving a registration message in the IMS domain from a user equipment operated by a user, wherein the message comprises an Equipment Identifier valid for the user equipment and an IMPI valid for the user, the Equipment Identifier and the IMPI are extracted from the received message. Then a creation or an update of a mapping of the Equipment Identifier to the IMPI and a C-MSISDN is initiated. Upon receiving a message, relating to the user, which is to be communicate between the IMS and circuit switched domains in the communication system, a use of the mapping for translating between the Equipment Identifier, IMPI and the C-MSISDN is initiated. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236798 | Method and Apparatus for Transmitting Physical Signals - Transmitting physical signals precoded at the physical layer, and transmitting via a physical channel precoded at the physical layer decoding information for use in physical layer decoding of said physical signals; wherein said decoding information is incorporated into one or more data units at a layer higher than the physical layer. Transmitting in a single sub-frame one or more physical reference signals for use in physical layer decoding of a physical channel in a plurality of sub-frames. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236799 | Method and Device for Transmitting Uplink Transmission Power Control Information - A method and an apparatus for transmitting uplink transmission power control information are disclosed. The method includes: transmitting uplink transmission power control information of all uplink component carriers allocated to a user equipment (UE) to the UE by one downlink component carrier. By adopting the above technical scheme, it is implemented that the uplink transmission power control information is transmitted in a carrier aggregation system. | 09-20-2012 |
20120243466 | Systems and methods for locating endpoints in a communication network - Systems and methods for determining and/or providing call origin location information. In one particular case, a method is provided for identifying communication origin location in relation to an emergency response system. The method includes providing a communication device stability module and receiving a network access request associated with a communication device. A location status of the communication device is determined, and based at least in part on the location status of the communication device, a query is issued requesting a location of the communication device. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243467 | PREFERRED PLMN LIST FOR FASTER SERVICE ACQUISITION - A user device determines whether a modem specifies at least one network present at a current geographical location of the user device. When the modem does not specify any present networks, the user device identifies one of the present networks that is available to provide a roaming service to the user device, and adds the identified network to a list of preferred networks in the modem. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243468 | SIGNAL COMPRESSION FOR BACKHAUL COMMUNICATIONS USING LINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS - A compression/decompression method for backhaul communication of a complex-valued radio signal between base stations and the network processing unit, such as a Central Processor of a Coordinated MultiPoint (CoMP) system, significantly reduces backhaul bandwidth. The spatial and temporal correlations of the wireless IQ signal are exploited in order to remove redundancy and substantially reduce signal bandwidth. Feature component signals of significance are extracted through linear transformation to form the radio signal, and are individually quantized, possibly at different bit rates in accordance with their relative importance. The transformation can either be pre-determined or computed in real-time based on the spatial and temporal statistics of the radio signal. In the latter case, the transformation matrix or matrices are also sent over the backhaul in order to allow the radio signal to be reconstructed at the receiving end. Different methods of generating the transformation matrices are proposed. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243469 | IN-HOUSE LOCATION BASED SERVICES - A mobile device of a user discovers topological information about electronic devices in a premise environment, and shares such information with a media gateway. The media gateway uses the topological information to augment content from a server, such as a web page that supports access to media content, to add graphical objects corresponding to those electronic devices in proximity to the mobile device that are capable of reproducing the streaming media content. Selection of the one of the add-on graphical objects causes delivery of the media content to the corresponding electronic device instead of the display of the mobile device. In this manner, a more natural selection mechanism than that available using conventional pull-down lists of options is provided. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243470 | COMMUNICATION SWITCHING SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A communication switching method is provided. The method is implemented by a communication switching system. The system includes mobile phones, landline phones, and a RFID server. Each mobile phone includes a RFID tag. Each landline phone includes a RFID reader. The RFID server includes a database. The method includes: putting the call on hold through the IP-PBX; transmitting the mobile phone number of a called mobile phone to the RFID server; searching the database to determine whether the mobile phone number is registered; transmitting the landline phone number corresponding to the mobile phone number to the RFID reader when the mobile phone number is registered; determining whether the landline phone corresponding to the landline phone number is busy; and switching the call to the landline phone corresponding to the landline phone number through the IP-PBX when the landline phone corresponding to the landline phone number is idle. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243471 | CALL DELIVERY TO AN IMS NETWORK FOR A MOBILE DIRECTORY NUMBER HOMED IN A 2G WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method to provide call delivery to an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network for a Mobile Directory Number (MDN) homed in a second generation (2G) wireless network, without requiring Wireless Intelligent Network (WIN) operations and associated Mobile Switching Center emulation (MSCe) translations for routing the call request. A Home Location Register (HLR) determines whether the subscriber has subscribed to the IMS services. The HLR-based subscriber profile is enhanced with new IMS-related subscriber information. Enhanced American National Standards Institute-41 (ANSI-41) Mobile Application Part (MAP) operations and a new ANSI-41 parameter allow the MSCe to re-route the call origination request from a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) to an entry point for the IMS network based upon the new IMS-related subscriber information received from the HLR. A Domain Name Server (DNS) supports routing-related traffic distribution. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243472 | Routing of a CDMA MS Initiated USSD Request - A Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of a CDMA telecommunications wireless network which includes a CDMA mobile station (MS), a CDMA base station (BS), a CDMA HLR, and an Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD) Gateway. The MSC is capable of receiving a MS initiated USSD request from the BS, determining if the subscriber is authorized to use USSD services and if authorized constructing a MAP message containing the USSD Request which is then sent to a USSD Gateway identified by subscriber profile information received during registration. The MSC is also capable of identifying MAP messaging it receives that contains USSD messaging, constructing an IOS message that contains the USSD messaging and sending the IOS message to the BS which in turn sends it to the MS. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243473 | MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - A method of wireless communication includes determining denial rates for first and second communication attempts of a packet using a first communication resource (e.g., an LTE radio). The method also includes allowing a second communication resource (e.g., a Bluetooth radio) to communicate when communication attempts from the first communication resource are denied. The denial rates are chosen to achieve threshold levels of performance for the first and second communication resources. The second denial rate may be set and the first denial rate adjusted in a looped manner to achieve desired Bluetooth performance. The denial rates may be set to deny all first communication attempts but to allow all second communication attempts. Final attempts to transmit Bluetooth packets may be given priority regardless of the first and second denial rates. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243474 | BAND STEERING FOR MULTI-BAND WIRELESS CLIENTS - Band steering for multi-band wireless clients. According to one embodiment of the invention, a method of operations comprises receiving, at a network device, a request from a wireless client device on a first wireless communication band. Thereafter, the network device identifies a unique address identifier associated with the wireless client device based on the received request and stores the unique address identifier in response to determining that the wireless client device is capable of communicating on the first wireless communication band. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243475 | Method of Converging a Plurality of Communication Standards and Related Communication Device - A method of converging a plurality of communication standards is disclosed. The method comprises establishing a unified medium access control (MAC) layer comprising a unified physical (PHY) interface; and arranging the unified MAC layer between an upper layer and a plurality of PHY layers of the plurality of communication standards. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243476 | RADIO NETWORK CONTROL - In connection with a mobile wireless subnetwork having multiple radio network controllers and multiple radio nodes, a session established for an access terminal is associated with a serving radio network controller. The association is maintained as the access terminal moves from the coverage area of one radio node to the coverage area of another radio node within the same subnetwork. Access channel packets are routed from an access terminal having an existing session to the serving radio network controller by determining the IP address of the serving radio network controller using a session identifier. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243477 | WIRELESS BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION - A wireless base station capable of communicating with a wireless terminal includes an analyzer that analyzes a pattern of a status of the wireless terminal; and a controller that provides the wireless terminal with information or a function based on the pattern. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243478 | AUTHENTICATING A MOBILE STATION THAT COMMUNICATES THROUGH A LOCAL PREMISES WIRELESS GATEWAY - To authenticate a mobile station that is able to access packet-switched services in a packet-switched services network, an intermediate server receives a registration request from a local premises wireless gateway on behalf of the mobile station. In response to the registration request, the intermediate server performs an authentication procedure with an authentication infrastructure in a circuit-switched network, where the authentication infrastructure contains authentication information relating to the mobile station to enable authentication of the mobile station. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243479 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A radio receiving apparatus for receiving the variable-length RLC PDU data in an RLC layer includes the buffer memory sectioned into a plurality of areas having a predetermined maximum data length of the RLC PDU data. By referring to a sequence number SN included in each received RLC PDU data, the radio receiving apparatus stores the RLC PDU data having an identical sequence number SN into an identical area, and assembles an RLC SDU data on a basis of the RLC PDU data stored in each area. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243480 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BANDWIDTH REQUEST/GRANT PROTOCOLS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for allocating bandwidth in a broadband wireless communication system is disclosed. One embodiment uses a self-correcting bandwidth request/grant protocol. The self-correcting bandwidth request/grant protocol utilizes a combination of incremental and aggregate bandwidth requests. CPEs primarily transmit incremental bandwidth requests to their associated base stations, followed by periodic transmissions of aggregate bandwidth requests. The use of periodic aggregate bandwidth requests (that express the current state of their respective connection queues) allows the bandwidth allocation method and apparatus to be “self-correcting”. Another embodiment utilizes an abridged bandwidth request/grant protocol to allocate bandwidth. The abridged bandwidth request/grant protocol system utilizes padding packets to request a reduction in bandwidth allocation to a CPE. A base station modem alerts a base station CPU when the BS modem receives a padding packet from a CPE. After alerting the BS CPU the method can reduce the associated CPE's bandwidth allocation. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243481 | Providing Packet-Based Multimedia Services Via a Circuit Bearer - A packet-based multimedia service is provided to a terminal in a network. A packet signaling connection is established between the terminal and the network. Signaling information for the multimedia service is transferred via the packet signaling connection using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) or a similar protocol. A circuit bearer connection is also established with the terminal. Data for the multimedia service is transferred via the circuit bearer connection. This allows the data to be carried across networks which do not support the required QoS functionality for the packet-based service, or which cannot efficiently carry packet-based data. The circuit bearer connection can be established by a network entity or by the terminal. The circuit bearer can be interworked to a packet-switched bearer at some point in the network, such as at a gateway, so as to provide a remote party with the appearance that a fully packet-switched connection is being used. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243482 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NEGOTIATING APPLICATION SUPPORTING ABILITY BETWEEN TERMINAL AND BASE STATION (BS) - The present invention discloses a method for a terminal to negotiate application support ability with a base station. The method comprises identifying application subtypes using different subtype values during session negotiation between the terminal and base station. The present invention further discloses a system for a terminal to negotiate application support ability with a base station, wherein the terminal is configured to identify the terminal supported application subtypes using different subtype values during session negotiation with the base station, and/or recognize the base station supported application subtypes identified using different subtype values by the bases station; and the base station is configured to recognize the terminal supported application subtypes identified using different subtype values by the terminal during session negotiation with the terminal, and/or identify the base station supported application subtypes using different subtype values. Regardless of versions of the terminal and base station, the base station can accurately recognize the terminal supported application subtypes and its ability from the application subtypes reported by the terminal, and further select correctly application subtypes bound to service flows. | 09-27-2012 |
20120250608 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of operating a network node comprising one or more transmit antennas that are associated with a plurality of antenna ports includes transmitting a first user-equipment—(UE-)specific reference signal on a first antenna port and reusing the first UE-specific reference signal to transmit a second UE-specific reference signal on one of the first antenna port and a second antenna port. The second UE-specific reference signal is orthogonal to the first UE-specific reference signal. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250609 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, BY WHICH TO SELECT PACKET COMMUNICATION SERVICE PROVIDER AT ELECTRONIC DEVICE - An apparatus, and an associated method, permits a user to select a VoIP, or other packet-communication, service provider to be used pursuant to VoIP, or other packet-communication, services. Selection is made at a wireless device. The selection is communicated to a network entity, and the network entity integrates operations such that subsequent services are provided by way of the selected service provider. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250610 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING RADIO-SILENCE IN WIRELESS DEVICES - The techniques of this disclosure allow a central wireless monitoring device, such as a coordinator device, in a wireless network to remotely control the operation of wireless end devices in the network. In particular, controlling the operation of the wireless end devices may include enabling and disabling different modes of operation, such as a radio silence mode, of the devices. The monitoring device may wirelessly transmit a command that turns devices, which in normal operation transmit and receive data, into receiving-only devices. The end devices may operate in the receiving-only mode until the monitoring device sends a command that restores the normal operating mode of transmitting and receiving data. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250611 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEATACHMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a system and method for detachment in wireless communication systems. Some example embodiments are directed towards detaching a user from a wireless communications network without providing any signaling towards the user. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250612 | Method for Scanning in a Multi-Mode Multi-Antenna Device - A method and system are provided in which a device comprising a first or main phase locked loop (PLL) and a second or reference PLL, is operable to communicate utilizing a first and a second receiving antenna. The first PLL may generate a first signal based on a reference signal generated by the second PLL. A second signal may also be generated based on the reference signal. Data associated with a first radio access technology (RAT) may be received via the first receiving antenna utilizing the generated first signal. The first RAT or another RAT may be scanned via the second receiving antenna utilizing the generated second signal. The scan via the second receiving antenna may be performed concurrently with the reception of data via the first receiving antenna. A switch may be utilized to enable or disable scanning operations via the second receiving antenna. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250613 | RULES SYSTEM VERSION CLONING - A rules systems version cloning method is disclosed for exporting a rules system version from a first PCRN and importing the rules system version on a second PCRN. The plain text export format is jointly suitable both for review on a display terminal and for data transfer. The rules systems version cloning method is particularly useful for providing a means to propagate a rules system version from a test environment to a working environment, and from a standalone environment to a distributed environment. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250614 | COMMON RF INTERFACE FOR SEPARATING AND MIXING WIRELESS SIGNALS - When a wireless communication device is receiving, a baseband circuit generates frequency domain LTE and WCDMA signals using a Fourier transform. The frequency domain WCDMA signal is then filtered with an RRC filter and converted back to the time domain using an inverse discrete Fourier transform. During transmission, the baseband circuit uses a Fourier transform to convert a time domain WCDMA signal to a frequency domain WCDMA signal. The frequency domain WCDMA signal is then filtered with an RRC filter and combined with a frequency domain LTE signal using an inverse Fourier Transform. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250615 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARING DATA OVER WIRELESS ADHOC NETWORK - The method for sharing data over wireless adhoc network using mobile devices comprises a step of determining a user required data on a handheld device. The method further comprises broadcasting the user required data within the wireless adhoc network. Further, the method includes detecting a plurality of devices comprising the user required data. The method also comprises establishing a communication channel, in a proximity environment between the plurality of devices and the handheld device. The method further comprises sharing of the user required data automatically between the plurality of devices and the handheld device. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250616 | MULTI-NETWORK ACCESS CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RELEVANT DEVICES - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a multi-network access control method, a communication system, and relevant devices to prevent interruption of normal network communication when the multi-access function is used. The method includes the following steps: A User Equipment (UE) receives multi-access indication information sent by a network device; the UE judges, according to the multi-access indication information, whether the UE uses a multi-access function; and the UE initiates an access connectivity establishment from multi-networks if the multi-access function is used. The embodiments of the present invention further provide a communication system and relevant devices. The embodiments of the present invention may prevent interruption of normal network communication when the multi-access function is used. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250617 | LEGACY-COMPATIBLE CONTROL FRAMES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for using different MAC addresses in frames for the same station to indicate how to process the frames. In this manner, frames for IEEE 802.11ac can carry information not present in legacy frames (e.g., frames according to IEEE 802.11 | 10-04-2012 |
20120250618 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATION OF CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for communicating Channel State Information (CSI) feedback. In some aspects, the CSI feedback is communicated in a very high throughput (VHT) wireless communications system. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250619 | MAINTAINING INFORMATION FACILITATING DETERMINISTIC NETWORK ROUTING - In a wireless network that includes a plurality of nodes, a method of maintaining, by a first node, information regarding communications links between nodes in the wireless network includes: for each communications link that is established with another node, recording an identification of the other node; and for each message received by the first node from the other node through the communications link with the other node, recording a network pathway by which the message has been sent in the wireless network, the network pathway identifying the nodes and the communications links therebetween by which the message has been sent. Another method includes recording, by a server, for each message that is received by the server from the wireless network, a network pathway by which the message has been sent, the network pathway identifying the nodes and the communications links therebetween by which the message has been sent. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250620 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING SYSTEM INFORMATION - A method, system and device for transmitting system information are provided, and said method includes the following steps: the network side transmits the system information on a downlink work carrier, wherein said system information includes the master system information and wireless resource configuration information of said downlink work carrier, and master system information of at least one of the other downlink carriers in multiple carriers. By using the present invention, the speed and efficiency of the terminal obtaining the system information of other downlink work carrier can be improved in multi-carrier system. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250621 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus includes: a communication control unit performing a connection rights reservation request for wirelessly connecting to a predetermined network in a specific region in a specific time band; and a control unit performing control for setting the connection rights based on the setting information according to the reservation request. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250622 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE IMPROVEMENT OF ROUTING IN COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS PROVIDING MULTIMEDIA SERVICES OVER IMS NETWORKS - The present invention proposes a method and system which improves the assignment of resources in communication networks providing multimedia services, which allows offering different qualities of service to the users of an IMS network. To that end, a new node which controls signaling, routing and security for the operator according to the content of the session and the user is introduced in the method or system. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250623 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MESSAGE DELIVERY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A router system receives from a host service a message which is intended for delivery to a mobile device via a wireless network. The message includes at least a first field having an identifier which identifies the mobile device, a second field having a payload of the message, and a third field having a return packet indication on whether to return a return packet to the host service. The router system examines the indication in the message and, if the indication is set to a first setting, the router system returns to the host service a return packet which indicates a status associated with the message for delivery to the mobile device. If the indication is set to a second setting, then the router system does not return to the host service the return packet which indicates the status associated with the message for delivery to the mobile device. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250624 | METHOD AND NETWORK ELEMENT FOR ESTABLISHING A IP COMMUNICATIONS SESSION BETWEEN MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Embodiments of a network element and method of establishing an internet-protocol communications session between a first device and a second device and generally described herein. In some embodiments, the network element is configured to receive a request from the first device to invite the second device to participate in an IP communications session. The second device may be identified in the request by a network identifier. The network element may relate the network identifier to a mobile IP (MIP) address of the second device and a second IP address. The network element may send an invitation to the MIP address of the second device. The invitation may include a MIP address of the first device and a first IP address. The first device establishes an IP connection for an IP communications session with the second device using the MIP address of the second device and the second IP address. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250625 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INDICATING WHETHER TERMINAL CARRIER AGGREGATION HAS BEEN ACTIVATED IN A CELLULAR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and device deactivate carrier aggregation and execute single carrier operation in a terminal, in a wireless communication system in which broadband is achieved by means of carrier aggregation. More specifically, in a terminal which is running a plurality of carriers, unnecessary power consumption in the terminal is prevented and additional screening events are minimized by defining physical layer signaling so as to make the terminal rapidly convert to running a single carrier. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250626 | MOBILE STATION - Even when it is not possible for a radio base station eNB to transmit SSAC barring information in an LTE Rel. 9 scheme, access barring control is performed for “MMTEL mobile originating call”. In a mobile station UE according to the present invention, an AS layer function | 10-04-2012 |
20120250627 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM WITH ENHANCED ADDRESS CONFLICT RESOLVING FUNCTIONALITY - A wireless network system ( | 10-04-2012 |
20120250628 | METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION UNIT - A method for random access in a wireless communication system communicating between a base station and a wireless terminal, the method consists of: at the wireless terminal, selecting first information used for first random access or second information used for second random access and performing a data communication with the base station during or after the completion of random access using selected information. | 10-04-2012 |
20120257565 | MOBILE NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT - A method for mobile computer networking on a distributed network includes, with a network element of a local network, establishing a connection to a mobile client device, determining a home network of the mobile client device without using a logical address of a packet of data from the mobile client device, and forwarding network traffic from the mobile client device to a home network of the mobile client device in response to determining that the home network is not the local network. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257566 | ROUTING DIFFERENT SUBSETS OF AN INTERNET PROTOCOL FLOW OVER DIFFERENT POINTS OF ATTACHMENT - An IP flow is received by an Internet Protocol (IP) mobility anchor point, where the IP mobility anchor point is to anchor traffic of a mobile node. The IP mobility anchor point routes different subsets of the packets of the IP flow to corresponding different points of attachment of the mobile node. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257567 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATION OF CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for communicating Channel State Information (CSI) feedback. In some aspects, the CSI feedback is communicated in a very high throughput (VHT) wireless communications system. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257568 | Systems And Methods For Uplink Feedback For High-Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSPDA) - Systems and method for uplink feedback for multipoint transmission of high-speed downlink packet access (MP-HSDPA) that may improve downlink transmission efficiency and cell coverage. For example, Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) and/or Precoding Control Indicator (PCI) that may be calculated to accommodate the needs of coordinated dynamic network scheduling. Additionally, various frame structures may be generated for the uplink feedback that may carry multiple CQI and HARQ-ACK feedbacks from MP-HSDPA. The frame structures may also address asynchronous downlink transmissions between two cells. Moreover, HS-DPCCH power offset settings for both CQI and HARQ-ACK fields that may be modified and/or created to ensure reliable uplink feedback transmission. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257569 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF CONFIGURING DOWNLINK TIMING AND TRANSMITTING RANDOM ACCESS RESPONSE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method of configuring downlink timings and transmitting a random access response message is provided for a random access procedure in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system supporting carrier aggregation. The method for adjusting timing of a terminal in a wireless communication system supporting carrier aggregation of at least one carrier includes transmitting a Random Access Preamble to a base station, and receiving a Random Access Response with a Timing Advance Command (TAC) for commanding uplink timing adjustment from the base station, wherein the Random Access Response comprises information indicating a Timing Advance Group (TAG) to which the TAC is applied. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257570 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF OPERATING MULTIPLE TIME ALIGNMENT TIMERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method of operating multiple time alignment timers (TimeAlignmentTimer) is provided for facilitating communication between and evolved Node B (eNB) and a User Equipment (UE) in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system supporting multiple carriers. The method includes starting a first TAT of a first group including the primary cell, starting a second TAT when Timing Advance (TA) information on a second group not including the primary cell; and determining transmission of at least one of a Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request Acknowledgement/Negative-acknowledgement (HARQ ACK/NACK), a physical uplink control channel, and a sounding reference signal according to a start and an expiration of at least one of the first and second TATs. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257571 | Method of Handling Signaling and Data Transmission for Machine-Type Communication - A method of handling signaling and data transmission for machine-type communication (MTC) for a network node in a mobile communication environment is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a non-access stratum (NAS) request message from a mobile communication device when the network control node is congested; and sending a trigger delivery failure report to a network gateway node in the core network to reject a trigger request message received from the network gateway node for triggering the mobile communication device. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257572 | Method and System for Automatic Selection of Detour Paths in a Wireless Mesh Network - Method of detour path determination for data packets re-routing in a mesh network comprising a plurality of N nodes, arranged according to a network topology, each node has a K-hops neighborhood knowledge of the network topology, with 1≦K10-11-2012 | |
20120257573 | MOBILE ROUTER WITH RATE LIMITING - One embodiment of a mobile router, comprises: a wireless wide area network interface to access a cellular network and operable to receive downloaded data; a memory comprising a data rate limiting rule; and a processor. The processor is operable to generate usage data based on the quantity of the downloaded data during a predetermined time period, and is operable to control the data rate of downloaded data based on the usage data and the data rate limiting rule. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257574 | METHOD OF REDUCING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN STATIONS IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING THE SAME - An interference avoidance method performed by an Access Point (AP) in a WLAN system in an Overlapping Basic Service Set (OBSS) environment is provided. The interference avoidance method includes receiving an interference avoidance request message from the first STA, the interference avoidance request message informing that frame transmission of the AP acts as interference with a first STA; transmitting an interference avoidance response message in response to the interference avoidance request message; obtaining first channel information about a first channel between the first STA and the AP from the first STA which has received the interference avoidance response message; determining a transmitting steering matrix based on the first channel information; and transmitting data to a second STA by performing beamforming according to the transmitting steering matrix. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257575 | CO-PHASING OF TRANSMISSIONS FROM MULTIPLE INFRASTRUCTURE NODES - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, mobile station or user equipment receives pilot signals from two or more infrastructure nodes in a distributed antenna system, and calculates phase or timing information, or combinations thereof, from the pilot signals. The mobile station feeds back the phase or timing information, or combinations thereof, to the infrastructure nodes, and then receives one or more subsequent transmissions from the infrastructure nodes with phase shift or timing adjustments, or combinations thereof, calculated by the infrastructure nodes and applied to the spatial streams transmitted by the infrastructure nodes. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257576 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING CONTENTION DURING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method is provided for performing a random access procedure in a mobile communication system. The method includes receiving a random access response message from a Base Station (BS); transmitting a message including a Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) to the BS, if the C-RNTI exists; and determining that a contention for the random access procedure is resolved successfully, when User Equipment (UE)-specific control information addressable by the C-RNTI is received from the BS. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257577 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MOBILE WIMAX THREE-WAY DOWNLINK CONCURRENT PROCESSING AND THREE-WAY HANDOVER - Methods and apparatus for establishing multiple connections between a wireless device and multiple base stations and transferring data using these connections via different segments of an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) frame are provided. The multiple connections may be used for multi-way (e.g., three-way) concurrent processing, multi-way (e.g., three-way) handover, or a hybrid between concurrent processing and multi-way handover in an effort to increase data throughput for the wireless device. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257578 | METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION UNIT - Random access in a wireless communication system including a base station and a wireless terminal, whereby at the wireless terminal, selecting first information used for first random access or second information used for second random access; and transmitting, during or after the completion of random access using selected information, third information with a response message to be transmitted to the base station during random access using information which is not selected. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257579 | METHOD FOR FEEDING BACK CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION, AND METHOD AND DEVICE FOR OBTAINING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for feeding back channel state information, and a method and a device for obtaining channel state information. The method for feeding back the channel state information includes: compressing, by a user equipment, original time domain channel state information to obtain compressed time domain Channel state information: quantizing the compressed time domain channel state information to obtain a codebook index; and sending the codebook index to a base station. With the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention, the total overhead used for feeding back the channel state information from the user equipment to the base station is reduced. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257580 | COMMUNICATION WITH RECEIVING STATIONS ACCORDING TO THEIR GEOGRAPHICAL STATUS - A method for communicating with a receiving station and a system for implementing the method. The system includes the receiving station. A geographical area is divided into at least two geographical cells. Each cell is a unique geographical region within the geographical area. Each cell is associated with one and only one unique joining address of at least two joining addresses. A totality of joining addresses in a joining message consisting of the one and only one unique joining address to which each cell is associated. The joining message is an IP unicast message including the at least two joining addresses. | 10-11-2012 |
20120263101 | METHOD TO DE-MULTIPLEX DATA AND/OR SIGNALS FROM A SINGLE DATA CARD INTO MULTIPLE INTERFACES AND TO ALLOW PARALLEL CONNECTIVITY - An apparatus comprising a device, a multiplexer circuit and a plurality of interface circuits. The device may be configured to present/receive a multiplexed data signal from a wireless network. The multiplexer circuit may be configured to present/receive a plurality of data signals in response to the multiplexed data signal. The plurality of interface circuits may each be configured to present/receive a respective one of the data signals. At least one of the interface circuits is a first interface type. At least one of the interface circuits is a second interface type. The apparatus may allow the plurality of interface circuits to share access to the wireless network. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263102 | ARCHITECTURE FOR OPEN COMMUNICATION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Network architecture configured for open communication between a plurality of sub-networks. Each of the plurality of sub-networks has a different routable network addressing scheme. The architecture includes at least one broker node adapted to communicate using at least two different routable network addressing schemes. The broker node comprises an identification management module configured to collect peer-application addresses for nodes currently accessing a specific application, the peer-application addresses being associated with a specific application, an address resolution module configured to map each of the peer-application addresses to a sub-network specific routable network address and a network coordination module configured to monitor and coordinate sub-network communication capabilities between the broker node and at least one other broker node and elect a primary broker node for each sub-network which the broker node and at least one other broker node is capable of communication. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263103 | Method of Handling Zone Based Service Procedure - A method of handling zone based service procedure for a PN gateway in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises performing a periodical search in a zone; sending a service description advertisement to a PN entity (PNE) when the PN entity or a service is newly found in the zone; and performing zone information synchronization. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263104 | Method for Transmitting Data, User Equipment and Base Station - The present invention discloses a method for transmitting data, a user equipment and a base station, wherein the method comprises: sending by user equipment data to a base station and indicating a receiver of the data is target user equipment residing on the base station; receiving the data and paging the target user equipment by the base station; and sending the data to the target user equipment by the base station after the target user equipment obtains a radio resource. With the present invention, the core network resources are saved. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263105 | WIRELESS NETWORK - The invention relates to a radio network comprising a plurality of first clients which can communicate with one another by means of radio waves, wherein the first clients have at least one input unit for the input of data and/or at least one output unit for the output of data, wherein a first reference can be adjusted on one input unit and a second reference can be adjusted on one output unit, wherein the radio network is configured such that the incoming data to the input unit is communicated to the one or more output units the second reference thereof corresponding with the first reference adjusted on the input unit. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263106 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PAGING MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting uplink (UL) data in a wireless communication system is provided. A machine-to-machine (M2M) device receives a deregistration response message including a transmission type and a maximum number of paging cycle during an idle mode entry, waits to receive a paging message for the M2M device to transmit the UL data during a period corresponding to up to (the maximum number of paging cycle×a length of paging cycle), and transmits the UL data. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263107 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RANGE EXTENSION OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN SUB GIGAHERTZ BANDS - Systems, methods, and devices to enable range extension for wireless communication in sub-gigahertz bands are described herein. In some aspects, portions of packets are repeated in time and/or space when transmitting the packet in order to increase the chance that the packet can be decoded. The repetition of portions of the packet may be based, in part, on the channel characteristics of the channel over which the packet is sent. In some aspects, portions of packets are transmitted over a smaller bandwidth with increased power per frequency range. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263108 | ADAPTIVELY CONTROLLING PREFIX LENGTH - Provided are apparatus and method for setting a cyclic prefix length according to a type of a base station. The apparatus may include a memory, a receiver, a selector, and an inserter. The receiver may be configured to store and to manage a plurality of prefix lengths associated with base station types. The receiver may be configured to receive base station information from a base station. The selector may be configured to select a prefix length from the plurality of prefix length based on the received base station information. The inserter may be configured to insert a cyclic prefix having the determined prefix length in a guard interval of a transmission frame. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263109 | Method and Apparatus for Planning of Cell Sizes and Frequency Use in a Wireless Communications Network - A method including providing at least a first and a second operationally adjacent base stations; each base station providing at least one cell in respect of a first carrier and at least one cell in respect of a second carrier, and wherein for each carrier, the respective cell areas overlap, and wherein for a first carrier, the cell area provided by the first base station is substantially larger than the cell area provided by the second base station. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263110 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE, AND PACKET EXCHANGER - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step A of releasing, by a gateway device S-GW, a first GBR bearer for a mobile station UE and transmitting “Downlink Data Notification” to a packet exchanger SGSN if a fault of a radio network controller RNC is detected in the state in which a second GBR bearer for the mobile station UE is set, a step B of transmitting, by the packet exchanger SGSN, “Paging” to the mobile station UE, and a step C of starting, by the packet exchanger SGSN, a procedure for releasing the second GBR bearer when no response to the “Paging” is received from the mobile station UE in a predetermined period. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263111 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, GATEWAY DEVICE, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A mobile communication system comprises: at least one terminal; a source base station to which the terminal is connected before movement of the terminal; a target base station to which the terminal is connected after the movement; a gateway device that connects the source base station and the target base station to a core network; and a core network node provided in the core network, wherein: the gateway device determines by itself, or makes query to the core network node to determine whether or not to preferentially treat the terminal by the target base station when the terminal moves from the source base station to the target base station; and the gateway device notifies to the target base station preferential information indicative of whether or not to preferentially treat the terminal by the target base station. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263112 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND INTERFERENCE PREVENTING METHOD - Where two or more wireless communication networks having mutually different physical layers coexist, and wireless communication is performed between a plurality of devices and a coordinator in each one of the wireless communication networks, the coordinator of one wireless communication network generates coexistence notification frame data to notify coordinators of the other wireless communication networks of existence of the coordinator. This first coordinator encodes the generated coexistence notification frame data, inserts source data so as to be set as FEC data, modulates the FEC data through a Gaussian frequency shifting keying system (GFSK) so as to be set as a GFSK modulated wave signal, and transmits the GFSK modulated wave signal to the coordinators of the other wireless communication networks. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263113 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An access point allows access from at least one user device, which may be a wireless device or a wired local area network device. The access point has radio frequency transceiver circuitry for communicating over a wireless link with a base station selected from a plurality of available base stations, and an antenna, having an adjustable preferred direction for transmission and reception of radio frequency signals. Control circuitry selects a preferred direction for the antenna such that the access point can establish a wireless link with one of said base stations, based on a data rate that is available over the wireless link. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263114 | Access Network Selection Method - An access network selection method in a communications network having access networks is disclosed that includes notifying devices in calling-side and called-side networks of the identifiers of currently available access networks and user preferences; making a list of candidates for an access network to be assigned to the called-side terminal, and transmitting the list to the device in the calling-side network; determining an access network to be assigned to the calling-side terminal in response to reception of the list, and notifying the calling-side terminal of the determined access network; notifying the device in the called-side network of the type of the access network assigned to the calling-side terminal; and determining the access network to be assigned to the called-side terminal in response to reception of the signal of the type of the access network assigned to the calling-side terminal, and notifying the called-side terminal of the determined access network. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263115 | METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION UNIT - A wireless communication system including a base station and a wireless terminal, the method includes at the wireless terminal, selecting first information used for first random access or second information used for second random access; and transmitting, during or after the completion of random access using selected information, third information to be transmitted to the base station during random access using information which is not selected, the third information being used by the wireless terminal until the random access using information which is not selected is finished. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263116 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ASSOCIATED METHODS AND DATA STRUCTURES - A wireless communication device, and a wireless communication system and a method of beamforming is presented. The wireless communication system and/or device includes a beamformee unit, a beamformer unit and two or more antennas to transmit the data unit and the protocol data unit according to the beamformee and the beamformer units, respectively. The beamformee conveys feedback information by a data unit in one of the feedback positions that include an immediate feedback position, an aggregated feedback position and a delayed feedback position. The beamformer unit generates a protocol data unit including a control field that includes one of the feedback request information types which is selected from a Channel State Information or uncompressed Steering Matrix or compressed Steering Matrix, to request feedback from a remote communication device. | 10-18-2012 |
20120269115 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE RESOURCE MULTIPLEXING IN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - A method of wireless communication includes determining resources available for peer discovery. The resources include first peer discovery resources with a first time interval and second peer discovery resources with a second time interval less than the first time interval. The method further includes communicating peer discovery signals through a first subset of peer discovery resources of the first peer discovery resources and a second subset of peer discovery resources of the second peer discovery resources. The second subset of peer discovery resources includes less resource elements than the first subset of peer discovery resources. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269116 | CONTEXT-AWARE MOBILE SEARCH BASED ON USER ACTIVITIES - Search processes are improved by modeling a mobile device user's context for a particular mobile search activity. Activity data characterizing usage of the mobile communications device is collected. This data may include the user's usage of the music and video player, including the types of media and specific titles, as well as activity data related to phone calls and other communications activities. The activity information is used by a predictive model to predict search parameters based on recent activity data. The predictive model can provide suggested search parameters, based on the user's recent activity as well as on search-specific user input. In some cases, the predictive model may be used to re-order the search results returned from a conventional search engine, based on the collected activity data. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269117 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING DOMAIN SELECTION DURING THE TERMINATED CALL - The present invention discloses a method and a system for implementing domain selection during a terminated call, wherein, the method comprises: an application server (AS) sending, according to a received call request message, a query request message to a home subscriber server (HSS); the HSS querying, according to the query request message, a packet switching (PS) domain mobility management network element to obtain information of a called terminal and/or a network accessed by the called terminal in the call request message; the HSS feeding back the obtained information of the called terminal and/or the network accessed by the called terminal to the AS; and the AS selecting a domain to which a call message is to be routed according to the information of the called terminal and/or the network accessed by the called terminal. The present invention can greatly reduce the number of the signalings between the PS domain mobility management element and the HSS, avoids various limitations of the signaling loads generated by the HSS on network deployment, is convenient for the network deployment, and ensures the implementation of services. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269118 | WARNING MESSAGE TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present invention provides a warning message transmission method and apparatus after the warning message transmission procedure is completed. The method comprises: after sending a WRITE-REPLACE WARNING REQUEST message to an eNB and receiving a WRITE-REPLACE WARNING RESPONSE message corresponding to the WRITE-REPLACE WARNING REQUEST message and returned by the eNB, a mobility management entity (MME) determining areas where warning broadcast fails based on the WRITE-REPLACE WARNING RESPONSE message corresponding to the WRITE-REPLACE WARNING REQUEST message and returned by the eNB, and then controlling the eNB to resend a warning message to the areas where warning broadcast fails. The present invention can ensure that disastrous information associated with the ETWS can be timely and effectively notified to all users in areas where broadcast fails so as send an escape or precaution warning to them to further minimize huge losses of human life and property when the disaster comes. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269119 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING MULTI-CARRIER ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL DATA - A method for transmitting multi-carrier enhanced dedicated channel data, comprising a first sending step and a first receiving step, wherein the first sending step comprises: when a node B only has an enhanced dedicated channel cell of a single carrier frequency layer in the multi-carrier, setting “uplink multiplexing information” in an enhanced dedicated channel uplink data frame as “null” and sending it to a serving radio network controller; the first receiving step comprises: the serving radio network controller receiving the enhanced dedicated channel uplink data frame sent by the node B of sender which only has the enhanced dedicated channel cell of a single carrier frequency layer in the multi-carrier, and distinguishing which carrier in the multi-carrier is the carrier for receiving data carried in the enhanced dedicated channel uplink data frame based on carrier identifier information corresponding to carrier frequency of the enhanced dedicated channel cell recorded. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269120 | CHANNEL OCCUPYING METHOD, MOBILE AP AND EXTERNAL STA - A channel occupying method is disclosed by the present invention. Channel occupying periods are configured in advance in an internal AP, each of the channel occupying periods includes a first period, and the first period includes an AP occupying channel period; when the internal AP detects a starting end of the AP occupying channel period, the internal AP occupies a channel alone in the AP occupying channel period to perform data transmission. Meanwhile, a mobile AP and an external STA are further disclosed by the present invention, and the method and the apparatuses disclosed by the present invention are adopted to increase the data transmission rate of the internal AP. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269121 | BASE STATION APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING OR RECEIVING A SIGNAL INCLUDING PREDETERMINED INFORMATION - A setting unit defines the first frame and the second frame and selects use of the first frame or the second frame. A generation unit generates control information which is defined by the same format regardless of the selection by the setting unit and which includes at least information related to the base station broadcast period. The generation unit puts information related to the ratio between the priority period and the general period into the control information and reflects the selection by the setting unit to the ratio. The modem unit and the RF unit broadcast a packet signal including the control information in the base station broadcast period. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269122 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING RADIO ACCESS WITH DELAY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In one design, a method to change a network-assigning mechanism and to use a distributed UE-selecting mechanism with the minimum possible information transferred from the network to the UE is proposed. In particular, it provides mechanism to define a lower bound and an upper bound for the extended wait time. For instance, the method comprises transmitting a RRC connection request message to a network, wherein an establishment cause of the RRC connection request message is set to be delay tolerant or low priority; receiving information associated with a first wait time included in an RRC connection reject/release message from the network; and performing a radio access to the network with a delay which is determined based on a lower bound of the first wait time and a upper bound of the first wait time. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269123 | Preamble for use within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Preamble for use within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. A selected preamble type is employed for use in generating a signal to be transmitted from one communication device to at least one other communication device. Depending upon a desired operational mode, as few as one preamble type, or two or more preamble types may be associated with a given operational mode. When operating in accordance with a given operational mode, a preamble type is selected from available preamble types of an operational mode. A preferred implementation may include two respective preamble types such that one preamble type is used for single user (SU) operation with transmit beamforming weights applied at the beginning of the packet or for open loop SU transmissions only, while the other preamble type, having an multiple user (MU) characteristic, is used for both SU beamforming and MU operations. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269124 | Long training field (LTF) for use within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Long training field (LTF) for use within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. Classification of a signal may be performed using one or more LTF's therein. While such one or more LTF's may also be employed for performing functions such as channel estimation, channel characterization, etc., one or more particular characteristics of an LTF extracted from a received signal may also be employed to classify the signal as corresponding to one of a number of possible signal types. For example, such LTF-based classification may be used to classify the respective channel bandwidths associated with the signal (e.g., as being either 1 MHz or 2 MHz channel bandwidth). Generally, one or more LTF fields within one or more signals are employed for any of a number of additional uses beyond or in addition to such functions as channel estimation, channel characterization, etc. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269125 | Short training field (STF) for use within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Short training field (STF) for use within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. An STF design as is made such that the power associated with the tone indices at the edges of the STF design is relatively less than the power associated with the tone indices more centrally located within the STF design. Also, when multiple respective operational modes are supported (e.g., | 10-25-2012 |
20120269126 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS ROUTER AND WIRELESS ROUTER - A method for controlling a wireless router and a wireless router includes: detecting whether the wireless router has a connection with a terminal; and if the wireless router has no connection with any terminal, turning off the wireless router. By using the method for controlling a wireless router and the wireless router provided in embodiments of the present invention, whether the wireless router has a connection with a terminal may be detected; and the wireless router is turned off when the wireless router has no connection with any terminal. In this way, the wireless router may be automatically turned off in an idle state, which saves energy resources and avoids unnecessary consumption. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269127 | Radio access device, a radio access system, a network selection method and a recording medium - [Issues] To provide: a radio access device, a radio access system, a network selection method and a recording medium which is capable of: in an environment where a plurality of radio access networks is intermingled, evading cut off of a communication accompanied by a movement of a radio access device; and continuing the communication more stably. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269128 | Method and Arrangement in a Communications System - The present invention relates to a method and a network node for selecting a gateway for a user equipment in a communications system. The communications system comprises the network node and one or more gateways, configured to provide packet data network connectivity to the user equipment. The network node detects ( | 10-25-2012 |
20120269129 | BASE STATION, TERMINAL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To adaptively interleave in accordance with communication channel conditions. Provided is a base station performing radio communication with a terminal apparatus on a communication channel formed by integrating a plurality of component carriers, including a quality acquisition unit that acquires channel quality of the communication channel for each of the component carriers and an interleaver that interleaves data signals transmitted on the communication channel in accordance with at least one of the channel quality acquired by the quality acquisition unit and available situations of communication resources for each of the component carriers. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269130 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND INTERFERENCE PREVENTING METHOD - To prevent communication interference between two or more wireless communication networks that have mutually different physical layers. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269131 | SILENT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ROUTING IN A MESH NETWORK - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for sending a single cast frame from a first node to a second node in a mesh network; sending the single cast frame from the second node to a third node in a mesh network; using the first node to detect the single cast frame sent from the second node to the third node; and interpreting this detection within the first node as an acknowledgement of success in sending the single cast frame from the first node to the second node. An additional method described herein may send a second single cast from the second node to a third node in a mesh network, interpret detection of the second single class frame within the first node as an acknowledgement of success in sending the first single cast frame from the first node to the second node. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269132 | COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MOBILE TERMINALS AND SERVICE PROVIDERS - An intermediate service provider operates to mediate communications between mobile terminals and various service providers. In one embodiment, the intermediate service provider and a given mobile terminal establish a persistent session supported by a logical communication channel that is used to convey communications for all of the various service applications implemented by the mobile terminal, i.e., a single, multiplexed channel. In another embodiment, common command subsystems are used to support the multiple service applications, thereby reducing overhead resulting from multiple protocol headers. In yet another embodiment, establishment of communications with various service providers begins with a single connection request message that specifies at least two selected service applications such that the intermediate service provider can establish communications with the multiple service providers in response to the single connection request message. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269133 | Method and system for high speed wireless data transmission between communication devices - Herein described are at least a method and a system for transmitting high speed wireless data from a first communication device to a second communication device. The method comprises using a first physical layer for transmitting management data or control signals between the first and second devices. In one embodiment, the management data may be used to authenticate and assign an appropriate wireless communication channel between the first and second device. The wireless communication channel is established by implementing a second physical layer in each of the first and second devices. The wireless communication channel may be used to transmit the high speed wireless data. The system comprises a first communication device and a second communication device wherein each of the first communication device and the second communication device utilizes a first physical layer and a second physical layer. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269134 | Traffic Offload Method, Traffic Offload Function Entity and Traffic Offload System - Embodiments of the present invention provide a traffic offload method, a traffic offload function entity, and a traffic offload system. The method includes: receiving, by a first traffic offload function entity, user information of a user equipment sent by a core network device; obtaining, a traffic offload policy and matching the traffic offload policy with the user information; and offloading traffic corresponding to the user equipment according to the user information that successfully matches the traffic offload policy. The traffic offload function entity may obtain the user information and may perform traffic offload according to the user information. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269135 | SIGNALING FORMAT FOR WLANS - A method for wireless communication begins by determining whether legacy devices are within a proximal region of the wireless communication. The method continues, when at least one legacy device is within the proximal region, formatting a frame to include: a legacy preamble; a signal field; an extended preamble; at least one additional signal field; at least one service field; an inter frame gap; and a data field. | 10-25-2012 |
20120275374 | RATE MATCHING FOR WIDEBAND CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS - Described embodiments provide a wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA) system that employs a rate matching rule having a modified puncturing algorithm. The modified puncturing algorithm defines the input variables of the rate matching rule in a manner that provides for identification of relations between non-punctured data bit position addresses in the output data stream through an iterative process, from which absolute bit position addresses of non-punctured output bits might then be generated. A counter, in accordance with instruction generated by a processor or state machine, for example, might implement the modified puncturing algorithm on an input string of bits to provide an output string of bits based on the absolute bit position addresses of non-punctured output bits, thereby providing for rate matching in the communications channel. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275375 | MICROWAVE BACKHAUL ARRANGEMENTS - Described herein are techniques related to wireless communication systems that may implement microwave backhaul for connectivity between network elements deployed by the wireless communication systems. This Abstract is submitted with the understanding that it will not be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275376 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK FRAME FORMAT AND FEEDBACK RULES FOR VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for generating a unified format of channel state information (CSI) feedback for Very High Throughput (VHT) wireless systems. One example method generally includes generating, at a first apparatus, a frame comprising information relating to SNR if a second apparatus is communicating with the first apparatus using single-user MIMO (SU-MIMO) or multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO) and transmitting a signal based on the generated frame to the second apparatus. Another example method generally includes generating, at an apparatus, a structure comprising CSI, wherein the CSI includes one of a first matrix with estimates of a channel associated with the apparatus or a second matrix obtained based on singular value decomposition (SVD) of the first matrix and wherein the structure further comprises an indication of which of the first and second matrices is included in the CSI; and transmitting the structure over the channel. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275377 | SYSTEMS, DEVICES AND METHODS OF CROWD-SOURCING ACROSS MULTIPLE DOMAINS - The various embodiments include methods, computers and communication systems for controlling services across multiple heterogeneous networks by collecting communication information from a plurality of telecommunications domains, generating a message based on the collected communication information, and sending the generated message to a public interface of a telecommunications domain to alter the functionality of the telecommunications domain component. The generated message may include information for altering a functionality of a telecommunications domain component. Generating a message based on the collected communication information may include crowd sourcing the collected information, which may include summing, averaging, aggregating, comparing and/or correlating the collected information. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275378 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS BASED ON DELAY DETERMINED BY NETWORK - A method for performing random access is provided. The method is performed for random access procedure based on a lower bound of back-off time and an upper bound of back-off time. Based on the proposed method, subsequent transmission of a random access preamble is determined by control information included in a random access response. The control information explicitly or implicitly indicates an upper bound and a lower bound of a back-off time value. An exact back-off time is selected from a uniform distribution between the lower bound and the upper bound. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275379 | Method and System for Frame Timing Acquisition in Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (EUTRA) - Aspects of a method and system for frame timing acquisition in evolved universal terrestrial radio access (EUTRA) may include determining a received secondary synchronization sequence (SSS) based on a selected cyclic prefix length and on synchronization of a primary synchronization sequence (PSS). A first portion of information associated with the received SSS may be processed separately from a second portion of information associated with the received SSS. A frame timing and/or base station identifier may be determined by comparing the processed first portion of information with the processed second portion of information. The cyclic prefix length may be selected from a finite set of possible cyclic prefix lengths. The cyclic prefix length may be, for example, 9 samples or 32 samples. The primary synchronization sequence synchronization may be determined via correlation. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275380 | Methods and Apparatus for Scheduling Paging Monitoring Intervals in TD-SCDMA Multimode Terminal - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques for scheduling paging intervals in a multimode terminal (MMT) whenever a paging interval conflict between two different networks occurs. Certain aspects provide a method for communicating, by an MMT, with first and second networks via first and second radio access technologies (RATs), such as Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) and Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) | 11-01-2012 |
20120275381 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING CONTENTION-BASED ACCESS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus in which a terminal performs contention-based access in a mobile communication system, wherein the method comprises: a sensing step of sensing whether or not contention-based access is allowed for at least one logical channel; a receiving step of receiving a contention-based reverse grant from a base station; and a transmitting step of transmitting data to the base station through the logical channel for which the contention-based access is allowed. According to the present invention, contention-based access can be efficiently performed, and the reliability of transmission can be ensured. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275382 | OPTIMIZED DELAY - A method for adjusting a timing offset value (CO) for a receiver (Node-B) is provided, the receiver being adapted to controlling and receiving reverse radio Sink transmissions from a transmitter (UE) according to predetermined response time requirements. The method comprising the steps of—estimating ( | 11-01-2012 |
20120275383 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication apparatus mounted on a mobile body establishes a local network using terminals and relays a packet transmitted and received between a predetermined terminal connected to the local network and a server connected to an external network, which is another network. The radio communication apparatus includes an uplink-traffic monitoring unit and a downlink-traffic monitoring unit to extract header information from packets received from the server and the terminal, a policy table that registers policy information indicating possibility of communication connection establishment for each combination of the server and the terminal and a priority degree of the communication connection, a priority-degree determining unit to determine whether relay processing for the packet is performed, and an uplink-traffic control unit and a downlink-traffic control unit to discard the received packet when the priority-degree determining unit determines that the relay processing is not performed. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275384 | METHOD FOR CHANGING SESSION MEDIA, METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A CALL, AND EQUIPMENT THEREOF - A method for changing ICS session media includes: receiving a media type change request comprising a new media type sent from one of a terminal equipment, a mobile switching center (MSC), or a second party; releasing a circuit-switched (CS) call leg based on an original media type between an IMS CS control function (ICCF) and the terminal equipment; establishing a CS call leg based on the new media type between the ICCF and the terminal equipment; and updating the media type of a second call leg between the ICCF and a second party into the new media type or establishing a second call leg based on the new media type between the ICCF and the second party. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275385 | RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL PREAMBLE - One out of sixteen preamble signatures is selected. A code is produced based on the selected preamble signature. The produced code is phase rotated to produce a processed preamble signature signal. The processed preamble signature signal is used in processing the CDMA RACH signal and the CDMA RACH signal is used to access a CDMA system. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275386 | Reporting of Channel State Information - A transmit node device includes a receiver that is configured to receive a first sub-index and, for each of one or more matrices, a second sub-index. The first and second sub-indices have different time-frequency reporting granularity. The transmit node device also includes a processor that is configured to reconstruct each of the one or more matrices, which are indexed by the first and second sub-indices. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275387 | Intelligent Mode Switching In Communication Networks - Systems and methods for intelligently switching between communication modes. An optimum communication mode is selected based upon determining the mobility of the subscriber station, the location of the subscriber station, and orthogonality of signals received from the subscriber station with respect to a signal of another subscriber station. Each determination may be continually or incrementally performed according to the passage of a time interval or upon observation of changes in relevant conditions. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275388 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF AN AVERAGING PARAMETER FOR PCINR AND RSSI - A system and method for adaptive control of an averaging parameter in a communications network may include an averaging parameter adaptive control module (APAC) that is associated with a base station and that includes one or more processors configured to generate a first averaging parameter that is transmitted by the base station to a mobile station communicating with the base station. The mobile station may use the first averaging parameter to generate first channel condition information that indicates a condition of a communication channel. First feedback information including the first channel condition information may be received at the base station. The APAC may generate a second averaging parameter using the first averaging parameter and the first feedback information and may transmit the second averaging parameter from the base station to the mobile station, thereby adaptively controlling the second averaging parameter based on the first feedback information. | 11-01-2012 |
20120281618 | NETWORK TRANSCEIVER AND BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREOF - A loop method for determining transmission orders of asynchronous packets includes the steps of: classifying the asynchronous packets into a number of groups according to their lengths; and judging whether a length of a packet belonging to a longest-length packet group is smaller than or equal to a remained bandwidth of an asynchronous transmission period. If yes, the packet is transmitted in the asynchronous transmission period and the step is repeated to transmit other packets of the longest-length packet group. If not, it is judged whether a length of a packet belonging to a second-longest-length packet group is smaller than or equal to the remained bandwidth of the asynchronous transmission period to transmit the packets of the second-longest-length packet group. These steps are repeated until a shortest-length packet group is greater than the remained bandwidth. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281619 | IDENTIFIER-SHARING METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEIVCE AND BASE STATION USING THE SAME - Identifier-sharing methods for wireless communication devices are proposed along with wireless communication devices and base stations using the same method. The proposed methods allow multiple M2M devices to share the same device identifier. The shared device identifier is valid for only one M2M device in a given time interval by a mechanism of assigning the same periodicity value and different offset values to the M2M devices associated with the shared device identifier. The proposed methods can also categorize M2M devices into different classes respectively based on their M2M application types. By adjusting periodicity value associated with the shared device identifier, a class associated with delay-tolerable applications can be allocated with more M2M devices sharing the same device identifier in comparison to the another class associated with delay-sensitive applications. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281620 | BEAMFORMING FEEDBACK FORMAT - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose transmitting a feedback message to an access point. The feedback may comprise a beamforming extension field, which may carry per tone signal to noise ratio of a station. For certain aspects, the station transmitting the per-tone SNR may be a single user (SU)-capable device. For certain aspects, the station may indicate to the access point whether or not it has a maximum likelihood (ML) receiver. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281621 | WIRELESS PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK TOPOLOGY - A method and apparatus for generating a topology for wireless peer-to-peer (P2P) networks. A network architecture comprises a traffic optimization service including a traffic optimization server and an adaptor to effect bi-directional translation of a request-response protocol of the traffic optimization service and a signaling protocol of a multimedia network. The traffic optimization server stores information related to wireless communication systems comprising user/location id information including cache proxies, media gateways, and network peers of multiple access networks and cost metric information including maximum bit rate, guaranteed bit rate, storage capacity, CPU capabilities, number of clients serving, battery capabilities, reliability of path, and supported video/audio codec. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281622 | MULTIPLE DATA SERVICES OVER A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A system for supporting multiple time division duplexed (TDD) based wireless services or frequency division duplexed (FDD) wireless services on a Distributed Antenna System (DAS). TDD based services use a common clock signal to synchronize the components of the DAS for transmission and reception of TDD signals. The DAS includes a GPS receiver which extracts a timing signal from a GPS signal and distribute the timing signal to components of the DAS to enable synchronization of the components for transmitting and receiving TDD signals. The GPS receiver can be part of the interface that connects a TDD based service to the DAS. The DAS distributes a reference clock signal to the DAS components to maintain zero frequency shift while manipulating with the carrier frequencies of the various wireless services carried by the DAS. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281623 | USE OF WIRELESS CIRCUIT-SWITCHED CONNECTIONS FOR TRANSFERRING INFORMATION REQUIRING REAL-TIME OPERATION OF PACKET-SWITCHED MULTIMEDIA SERVICES - A system includes a terminal, a wireless access network, a multimedia core network and a network device, which connects the wireless access network to the multimedia core network, expanded location updating to the registration procedure of the multimedia core network, and performs double registration of the user to the multimedia core network. The terminal performs expanded location updating relaying the registration point identity of the multimedia core network, the user's phone number and the private user identity to the network device in connection with normal location updating signaling. In the double registration performed by the network device, two addresses are registered for the user of the terminal, one of which is associated with the domain name of the terminal in question or a numeric IP address, and the other to a domain name of the network device or a numeric IP address. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281624 | USE OF WIRELESS CIRCUIT-SWITCHED CONNECTIONS FOR TRANSFERRING INFORMATION REQUIRING REAL-TIME OPERATION OF PACKET-SWITCHED MULTIMEDIA SERVICES - A system includes a terminal, a wireless access network, a multimedia core network and a network device, which connects the wireless access network to the multimedia core network, expanded location updating to the registration procedure of the multimedia core network, and performs double registration of the user to the multimedia core network. The terminal performs expanded location updating relaying the registration point identity of the multimedia core network, the user's phone number and the private user identity to the network device in connection with normal location updating signaling. In the double registration performed by the network device, two addresses are registered for the user of the terminal, one of which is associated with the domain name of the terminal in question or a numeric IP address, and the other to a domain name of the network device or a numeric IP address. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281625 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method in which user equipment transmits a non-periodic sounding reference signal in a wireless communication system. In detail, the method comprises: a step of receiving a downlink control channel from a base station; a step of decoding a downlink control information (DCI) format contained in the downlink control channel; a step of checking a non-periodic sounding reference signal transmission instruction in the DCI format; and a step of transmitting a non-periodic sounding reference signal to the base station in accordance with the transmission instruction. Preferably, if the downlink control channel is received via an n | 11-08-2012 |
20120281626 | METHOD IN WIRELESS NETWORK USING RELAYS - Nodes, network and methods for communicating utilizing radio in a network including nodes. The method includes broadcasting from a center node, transmitting from a first primary peripheral node, and transmitting from an intermediate node to the center. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281627 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVICE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for providing a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) service using a Payload Header Suppression (PHS) method in a mobile communication system are provided. The method includes extracting header information by analyzing a Session Description Protocol (SDP) offer message that is included in a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) signaling message received from a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) system, generating a Classification (CS) rule based on the extracted header information, determining whether to generate a new service flow based on the extracted header information, generating a PHS rule using a Dynamic Service Addition (DSA) when the new service flow is generated, and generating the PHS rule using a Dynamic Service Change (DSC) when the new service flow is not generated, and transmitting the generated CS rule and PHS rule to the WiMAX system. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281628 | Method and Apparatus for Receiving a Timing Advance Command in a Wireless Communication System - The present invention provides a method of receiving a timing advance command by a user equipment in a wireless communication system. A terminal receives information on a time advance group from a base station, and also receives the timing advance command corresponding to the time advance group from the base station. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281629 | Method and Device for Detecting Primary Synchronization Signal and Generating Sequence in Long Term Evolution (LTE) System - The present invention discloses a method and a device for detecting a primary synchronization signal and generating a sequence in a LTE system, so as to solve the problem that the overhead for 3GPP LTE system to store a local primary synchronization sequence is too much during the initial cell search process. The method for detecting a primary synchronization signal includes: directly generating a local primary synchronization signal sequence with equal amplitude in the time domain as a matched filter; performing a front-end processing for a received signal; performing the matched filtering between the received signal after the front-end processing and the local primary synchronization signal sequence; judging the output amplitude of the signal sequence obtained after the matched filtering; and then obtaining a judgment result of the local primary synchronization signal sequence. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281630 | PREDICTIVE AND NOMADIC ROAMING OF WIRELESS CLIENTS ACROSS DIFFERENT NETWORK SUBNETS - Wireless access points detect neighboring wireless access points in different subnets. Upon connecting with a wireless client, a wireless access point determines predictive roaming information for the wireless client. Predictive roaming information identifies the wireless client; its home network subnet; and includes connection information associated with the wireless client. The wireless access point forwards the predictive roaming information associated with a wireless client to neighboring wireless access points while the wireless client is still connected with the wireless access point. Neighboring wireless access points store received predictive roaming information. Upon connecting with a wireless client, a neighboring wireless access point determines if the wireless client matches the stored predictive roaming information. If so, the neighboring wireless access point uses the predictive roaming information to quickly connect with the wireless client and to establish a tunnel to redirect network traffic associated with the wireless client through to its home subnet. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281631 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless communication system performs data transmission using spatially multiplexed streams from a first terminal including N antennas to a second terminal including M antennas (N and M are integers larger than or equal to 2 and N>M). | 11-08-2012 |
20120281632 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING HOME AGENT GEOGRAPHIC REDUNDANCY VIA A SERVICE REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL - Methods and systems for providing redundancy in servicing packet data communications within wireless mobile data networks are disclosed. More particularly, the method and system provide a redundant Home Agent with the ability to assume the role of the primary Home Agent in the event of a primary Home Agent network, software, or other failure. The redundancy allows the Home Agent services to remain functional even in the event of a failure of one of the Home Agents in the redundant group, which may be composed of one or more Home Agents. The Home Agents can use a service redundancy protocol which is composed of messages that are sent between the redundant group of Home Agents. The messages allow the Home Agents to, for example, back up call session information, check on the status of one another, and share priority information. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281633 | POWER HEADROOM REPORTING METHOD AND DEVICE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus are provided for reporting a Power Headroom (PH) of a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system having a plurality of aggregated uplink carriers. A message to activate an uplink carrier is received. A predetermined time is awaited in order to trigger a Power Headroom Report (PHR). The PHR is triggered after the predetermined time has elapsed. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281634 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STORING MOBILE STATION PHYSICAL MEASUREMENTS AND MAC PERFORMANCE STATISTICS IN A MANAGEMENT INFORMATION BASE OF AN ACCESS POINT - A method and apparatus may be used for exchanging measurements in wireless communications. The apparatus may receive a request. The request may be a measurement request, and may include a request for a measurement of a parameter. The apparatus may transmit a report. The report may be a measurement report, and may include the requested measurement of a parameter. The apparatus may store the requested measurement of the parameter in a management information base (MIB). | 11-08-2012 |
20120287849 | CONTENTION MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS - A system includes an access point and one or more remotes. The access point is configured for receiving signals, and for transmitting signals comprising contention frames, contention grants, and data frames. The one or more remotes include a first remote configured for receiving signals, and configured for transmitting signals comprising contention requests and data frames. The first remote is configured for transmitting one of the contention requests within a selected period of time after receiving one of the contention frames from the access point. The access point is configured for transmitting one of the contention grants to the first remote after receiving one of the contention requests from the first remote. The first remote is configured for transmitting one of the data frames within a selected period of time after receiving one of the contention grants from the access point. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287850 | PHYSICAL LAYER POWER SAVE FACILITY - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose a method to transmit information in unused fields of a physical layer header to improve performance of the system. The proposed method transmits, during single user transmission, a portion of the basic service set identifier (BSSID) of an access point in a field of a header that is usually used to indicate number of space time streams (Nsts). | 11-15-2012 |
20120287851 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING DATA BETWEEN DIFFERENT LAYERS OF MOBILE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and user equipment (UE) for communicating data between a serving layer and a served layer are provided. In one design, a serving layer adjusts the value for the served layer before it forwards the value to the served layer. In another design, The serving layer forwards the value to the served layer without adjusting but the served layer adjusts the received value. A predefined mapping rule can be further applied when adjusting the value between two layers. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287852 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SENDING CLOSE SUBSCRIBER GROUP INFORMATION - A method, system and device for sending Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) information are disclosed by the embodiments of the present invention, and the method includes the following steps: when CSG information of a User Equipment (UE) changes, a mobility management entity acquires the changed CSG information of the UE; the mobility management entity sends the changed CSG information to a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) entity, which charges the UE according to the changed CSG information of the UE. In the present invention, the changed CSG information is carried in messages sent from the mobility management entity to a gateway, so that the PCRF can be notified of the changed CSG information. Therefore, the PCRF can charge according to the changed CSG information, and the problem is solved that the CSG information can not be reported to the gateway. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287853 | Method of and Node B and User Equipment For Power Control in Case of Segmentation | 11-15-2012 |
20120287854 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING ACCESS TO MACHINE TO MACHINE (M2M) CORE NTEWORK - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for implementing an access to a Machine to Machine (M2M) core network. In the method, a network element receives an access request message carrying equipment identity indication information, wherein the access request message is initiated by terminal equipment; the network element determines that the terminal equipment is M2M equipment according to the equipment identity indication information; and the network element selects a corresponding M2M core network for the terminal equipment to implement the access of the terminal equipment. According to the technical solution provided by the present invention, the existing network can meet the M2M service requirement while providing services for existing Human to Human (H2H) equipment, without any need of enhancement and mass expansion. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287855 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A high error correction capability is kept while reducing a processing delay in application of the ECC in a multi-radio. A wireless communication device for performing data transmission by using a plurality of radio systems RAT | 11-15-2012 |
20120287856 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR MULTIPLEXING PROTOCOL DATA UNITS - Embodiments addressing MAC processing for efficient use of high throughput systems are disclosed. In one aspect, a protocol stack is disclosed comprising one or more of the following: an adaptation layer, a data link control layer, a physical layer, and a layer manager. In another aspect, physical layer feedback is used for adaptation layer processing. In one embodiment, physical layer feedback is used for segmentation. In another embodiment, physical layer feedback is used for multicast mapping onto one or more unicast channels. In another aspect, a data unit for transmission from a first station to a second station comprises zero or more complete sub-data units, zero or one partial sub-data units from a prior transmission, and zero or one partial sub-data units to fill the data unit. In one embodiment, a pointer may be used to indicate the location of any complete sub-data units. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287857 | Converged Telephone Number Mapping For Call Completion Among Hybrid Communication Services - System(s) and method(s) are provided for enabling routing and call completion among hybrid communication services. A client component receives a request to establish a call session, the request includes a service identifier tag that uniquely discloses a requested communication service. Client component validates the tag, and generates a query that is conveyed to a server, which supplies a set of Naming Authority Pointer (NAPTR) resource records (RRs) in response to query. The client component receives the set of NAPTR RRs; validates received Telephone Number Mapping (ENUM) embedded service and protocol identifiers associated with the NAPTR RRs; and associates the received tag with a matching NAPTR RR to route the call session and complete the call. Configurable logic that dictates association of the service identifier tag with a NAPTR RR also can enable routing and call completion when the tag is unavailable. A device that exploits service identifier tag is provided. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287858 | SITE BASED MEDIA STORAGE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and methodology that facilitates efficient utilization of bandwidth on a transmission link between a base station and a core mobility network, during content delivery is provided. Moreover, the system includes a data storage device, adjunct to, or integrated within, the base station for storing content locally. Typically, the data storage device is updated by downloading content from the core network at an optimal time. For example, content can be downloaded to the data storage device when the core network-to-base station link is idle, under utilized and/or has sufficient bandwidth for the download. On receiving a request for content from a user equipment (UE), the base station can directly deliver the content to the UE from the data storage device, over an air interface, when the requested content is locally available. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287859 | SERVING BASE STATION SELECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for selecting a serving base station for a terminal in a wireless communication network are described. In one design, multiple candidate base stations for the terminal may be identified, with each candidate base station being a candidate for selection as the serving base station for the terminal. The multiple candidate base stations may include base stations with different transmit power levels and/or may support interference mitigation. One of the multiple candidate base stations may be selected as the serving base station. In one design, the serving base station may be selected based on at least one metric for each candidate base station. The at least one metrics may be for pathloss, effective transmit power, effective geometry, projected data rate, control channel reliability, network utility, etc. The selected candidate base station may have a lower SINR than a highest SINR among the multiple candidate base stations. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287860 | LONG-TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) POLICY CONTROL AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION (PCRF) SELECTION - The PCRF Selection Function selects the PCRF for an IP-CAN session. In embodiments, the PCRF Selection Function is located in the HSS and/or the 3GPP AAA server. The PCRF Selection Function is only required to be located in the HSS if a Bearer Binding and Event Reporting Function (BBERF) is deployed in the serving gateway. In this case, the PCRF selection takes place at the time that the PDN Gateway is selected and returned by the HSS to the serving gateway over the HSS to MME interface (S6a). | 11-15-2012 |
20120287861 | Hybrid ARQ Schemes with Soft Combining in Variable Rate Packet Data Applications - A system and method for transmitting high speed data on fixed rate and for variable rate channels. The system and method provides the flexibility of adjusting the data rate, the coding rate, and the nature of individual retransmissions. Further, the system and method supports partial soft combining of retransmitted data with previously transmitted data, supports parity bit selection for successive retransmissions, and supports various combinations of data rate variations, coding rate variations, and partial data transmissions. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287862 | Mobile Communication Device Having Multiple Independent Optimized Physical Layers - A communication device may include a Physical (PHY) layer configured to provide multiple communication services across a communication network. The communication device may adjust the PHY layer according to a first set of performance characteristics to provide a first communication service. When the device identifies a communication service change to the second communication service, the communication device may adjust the PHY layer according to a second set of performance characteristics, different from the first set, to provide the second communication service. The communication device may also receive a configuration indication from an application executing on the device specifying a performance characteristic change to the PHY layer. The communication device may also include multiple independent PHY layers that may adjusted independently. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287863 | Method and System for Synchronization in Communication System - A method can be used for facilitating an uplink synchronization between a first transceiver and a second transceiver within a cell in a multi-user cellular communication system. The first transceiver receives a reference from the second transceiver and generates a set of signature sequences based on the reference. The first transceiver selects a first signature sequence from the set of signature sequences and incorporates the first signature sequence into a signal. The first transceiver transmits the signal to the second transceiver. The signal is used for a uplink synchronization between the first transceiver and the second transceiver. The set of signature sequences are generated from sequences with zero-correlation zone. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287864 | Access Method, System and Device - The present invention provides an access method, system and device. In the solution of the present invention, a CPE sub-system receives a connection request for carrying out a data connection with a WAN, when determining that the CPE sub-system itself is not able to carry out a wired connection with the WAN, sends the connection request to an MID sub-system through a connection interface, so that a wireless connection is carried out with the WAN through the MID sub-system; the MID sub-system receives a connection request for carrying out a data connection with a WAN, when determining that the MID sub-system itself is not able to carry out a wireless connection with the WAN, sends the connection request to the CPE sub-system through the connection interface, so that a wired connection is carried out with the WAN through the CPE sub-system. In accordance with the solution of the present invention, not only the wired access but also the wireless access is able to be realized for the WAN, thereby providing stable network connection for home users and bringing great convenience for the users. | 11-15-2012 |
20120294231 | WI-FI ACCESS POINT CHARACTERISTICS DATABASE - A method and apparatus for determining characteristics of an access point device are disclosed. The method includes determining, at a first device, a characteristic of the access point device. At the first device, a signal is received from the access point device. The retrieved signal is communicated to a first database. In response to the communication, characteristic information is received from the first database. The characteristic information includes an estimate of the characteristic of the access point device including manufacturing information of the access point device. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294232 | SHORT-RANGE NODES WITH ADAPTIVE PREAMBLES FOR COEXISTENCE - Wireless protocols in the unlicensed spectrum are developed for different requirements in terms of transmit range and power, which makes it difficult for multiple nodes having disparate transmit ranges to coexist in the same unlicensed spectrum. A short-range wireless node uses adaptive preambles to signal presence to long-range wireless nodes outside of its transmit range. In addition, a long-range wireless node detects an adapter preamble and backs-off transmissions for reservation period dedicated to short-range nodes. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294233 | Long-Range Nodes with Adaptive Preambles for Coexistence - Wireless protocols in the unlicensed spectrum are developed for different requirements in terms of transmit range and power, which makes it difficult for multiple nodes having disparate transmit ranges to coexist in the same unlicensed spectrum. A short-range wireless node uses adaptive preambles to signal presence to long-range wireless nodes outside of its transmit range. In addition, a long-range wireless node detects an adapter preamble and backs-off transmissions for reservation period dedicated to short-range nodes. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294234 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REGISTERING NETWORK INFORMATION STRINGS - A system and method for registering network information strings. An information string server device receives a request to register a network information string from a computing device. The network information string may be included in a message broadcast by a string broadcast station. The information string server device determines whether the network information string has been previously registered with the information string server device. The information string server device stores the network information string in a record of an information string datastore when the network information string has not been previously registered with the information string server device. A registration acceptance message may be sent by the information string server device to the computing device when the network information string has not been previously registered with the information string server device. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294235 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CONTENT EXCHANGES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING A LISTENER MODULE - A system and method for managing content exchanges in a wireless network using a listener module. A listener module receives a message broadcast by a string broadcast station. The string broadcast station message includes a network information string. The listener module also receives a message broadcast by a wireless station. The wireless station message includes the MAC address of the wireless station. The listener module associates the network information string with the MAC address of the wireless station and stores the pair a list server device. The wireless station may then request a list from the list server device of network information strings associated with the MAC address of the wireless station. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294236 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING CONTROL PLANE TO TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE DATA - Methods and apparatus are described for transmitting and receiving data by a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) over the control plane. The methods may receive data without the use of an Internet Protocol (IP) address. In an example method, a WTRU may enter an evolved packet system (EPS) mobility management (EMM)-registered control plane only (CPO) state after receiving an attach accepted message for CPO operation, and enter an EMM-deregistered state after receiving a detach message, a tracking area update (TAU) reject message or an attach reject message. In another method, a WTRU may switch between operational modes that use an IP address and a user plane to transmit and receive data, and the CPO mode. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294237 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING NODE BEHAVIOR IN A SENSOR NETWORK - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for controlling sensor networks. A sensor network has a plurality of sensor nodes, which have sensors for monitoring operational parameters of devices within an application-specific system. A wireless communication module is provided for each node to enable the node to wirelessly communicate with other nodes of the network. A user defines various scripts for controlling the behavior of one or more nodes, and the network distributes the scripts, as appropriate, to various nodes thereby implementing the behavior defined by the scripts. Accordingly, a user can easily and dynamically configure or re-configure the behavior of any node without having to physically access the node that is being configured or re-configured. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294238 | Method for automated VIN acquisition and close proximity VIN verification - A new method for transmitting and receiving automated Vehicle Identification Numbers (VIN) and used for the verification of Vehicle Identification Numbers within close proximity of one or more vehicles simultaneously. Provides a new method for real time, on scene vehicle to vehicle information which are located within close proximity to each other for the purpose of transmitting and receiving Vehicle Identification Numbers, vehicle license plate information and owner information during vehicle to vehicle crashes, vehicle to pedestrian crashes, locating stolen vehicles, missing vehicles, crashed vehicles and stranded vehicles. The new inventive method comprises of Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) equipped vehicles for transmitting the vehicles 17 digit VIN and comprises of Computer Modem equipped vehicles or persons for receiving the vehicles 17 digit VIN. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294239 | Method and Arrangement for Network Nodes of a Wireless Communication Network - A method of operating a wireless network node of a wireless communication network is disclosed. The wireless network nodes have at least first and second downlink transmission modes, the first downlink transmission mode comprising normal operation of a particular network node and being applicable when a number of active terminals in a cell associated with the particular network node is greater than a first mode threshold value, and the second downlink transmission mode comprising restricted downlink transmission of the particular network node and being applicable when the number of active terminals in the cell associated with the particular network node is less than or equal to a second mode threshold value. The method comprises transmitting a signal indicative of a current downlink transmission mode of the wireless network node. Corresponding computer program product and arrangement are also disclosed. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294240 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROCESSOR - A communication device on the transmission side includes: a converting device configured to perform equivalent conversion on a part of the plurality of data signals; and a weighting device configured to previously cancel at least a part of interferences among the plurality of streams spatially multiplexed, with respect to at least a part of the plurality of data signals. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294241 | System for transmitting high throughput data between multiple devices - A system for transmitting data directly between a plurality of client network devices in a network having an Access Point (“AP”) device separate from the plurality of client network devices is disclosed. The system may include a first client network device having a first client (“STA”) module and a second client network device of the plurality of client network devices. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294242 | Method and System for Identifying Transport Bearer Capacity of IUR Interface - The disclosure provides a method for identifying the transport bearer capacity of the IUR interface, in which a serving radio network controller (RNC) identifies a cell as supporting “separated IUR transport bearer” and “shared IUR transport bearer” when determining the cell supports “uplink multi-carrier”, and identifies the cell as supporting the “separated IUR transport bearer” and not supporting the “shared IUR transport bearer” when determining the cell does not support the “uplink multi-carrier”. The disclosure also provides a system for identifying the transport bearer capacity of the IUR interface. The cell which does not support the uplink multi-carrier and the cell which supports the uplink multi-carrier may join in a same macro diversity of the soft handoff, thereby improving the system performance and increasing the macro diversity combining gain of the soft handoff | 11-22-2012 |
20120294243 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION AND COOPERATIVE CONTROL METHOD - A wireless communication system comprises: a plurality of first radio base stations that each includes data in frames and uses a frequency in a predetermined frequency band to transmit the frames to a first terminal that is present in its own cover are; and a second radio base station that has as its own cover area the same areas as the cover areas of the plurality of first radio base stations and that includes data in frames and uses a frequency in the predetermined frequency band to transmit the frames to a second terminal that is present in its own cover area. Each of the first radio base stations reports to the second radio base station the transmission timing of frames to the first terminal, and the second radio base station synchronizes the transmission timing of transmitting frames to the second terminal with the reported transmission timing. | 11-22-2012 |
20120300698 | EXCHANGING PRESENCE INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The disclosure relates to decentralized presence management within a communications system performed at a user device. An embodiment of the disclosure comprises selectively updating at least one frequency at which the user device transmits presence update messages to one or more other user devices that belong to a contact group associated with the user device. The embodiment further comprises transmitting one or more presence update messages in accordance with the selectively updated frequency. Another embodiment of the disclosure comprises obtaining a subset of contacts of a subscriber operating the user device that form a presence update group. The embodiment further comprises identifying a plurality of sub-groups within the presence update group based on priorities of the subset of contacts. The embodiment further comprises transmitting one or more presence update messages to less than all of the identified plurality of sub-groups. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300699 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT OF PROCESSING A PACKET OF A HARQ SYSTEM - A method for an electronic receiver of processing a packet of a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a first transmission of the packet, wherein the first transmission comprises a first plurality of soft symbol values and determining whether the first plurality of soft symbol values meets a stop criterion. If it is determined that the first plurality of soft symbol values does not meet the stop criterion, a subject of the first plurality of soft symbol values is determined, wherein the subset comprises a number of soft symbol values of the first plurality of soft symbol values, the number being greater than zero and less than the first plurality. The subset of the first plurality of soft symbol values is stored in a HARQ buffer. A second plurality of soft symbol values, comprised in a second transmission of the packet received by the electronic receiver, is combined with the stored subset of the first plurality of soft symbol values to produce a third plurality of combined soft symbol values. Corresponding arrangement, receiver, device, and computer program product are also disclosed. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300700 | EVENT-BASED KEEP ALIVE TIMES IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method of communicating in a network having a plurality of nodes including a base node (BN), and a plurality of service nodes (SNs) having at least one switch node (SW) and at least one terminal node (TN). The method includes at least one of a) a first SN from the plurality of SNs receiving (i) a data/ALV_B/ACK frame from the BN or (ii) a beacon from the BN or SW, and restarting a first KA timer at the first SN upon (i) or (ii), and b) restarting an ALV_S timer at the BN for the first SN upon receiving a data/ALV_S/ACK frame from the first SN. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300701 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO LINK STATE MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A base station apparatus performing communication through the use of a plurality of frequency bands and a mobile station apparatus wirelessly-connected to the base station apparatus, efficiently manage a radio link state of the frequency band in consideration of a cooperation relation between the plurality of frequency bands. The base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus communicate with each other by aggregating a plurality of cells of different frequencies, the base station apparatus, in a case of configuring a plurality of cells of different frequencies to the mobile station apparatus, configures linkage information indicating a cooperation relation between an uplink and a downlink for each of the cells, and a timer for managing a state of the cells, and the mobile station apparatus simultaneously changes states of the uplink and the downlink of the cell upon timer being expiration, based on the linkage information for each the cell. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300702 | METHOD AND DEVICE USED FOR FEEDBACK OF CHANNEL INFORMATION AND PRECODING - The invention proposes a technical scheme (called as explicit feedback (used for feeding the information of downlink channels back to a base station at the user terminal of a wireless communication system, and a technical scheme for precoding the data transmitted to the user terminal based on the information of downlink channels feed back by the user terminal in the base station. The user terminal determines an approximately equivalent matrix of the transmission matrix of downlink channel, based on the transmission matrix of downlink channel, the number of downlink data streams, the spatial correlation matrix of multiple transmitting antennas in the base station and a predetermined codebook; then feeds the information concerning the approximately equivalent matrix back to the base station. The base station recovers the approximately equivalent matrix based on the information concerning the approximately equivalent matrix fed back from the user terminal, and precodes the downlink data transmitted to the user terminal by using the approximately equivalent matrix. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300703 | Method and system for obtaining actual power headroom of carrier of UE - A method for obtaining actual Power Headroom (PHR) of a carrier of a User Equipment (UE) is provided by the present disclosure. The UE transmits the Power Headroom of the carrier corresponding to the UE in the scenario of carrier aggregation to a network side through the interaction message. After processing the received interaction message, the network side obtains the actual PHR of the carrier corresponding to the UE. A system for obtaining actual PHR of a carrier of a User Equipment (UE) is provided by the present disclosure accordingly. With the present disclosure, the network side can effectively obtain the actual PHR of the carrier of the UE in the scenario of carrier aggregation, thus it is convenient for the network side to make the relevant decision and the system performance is improved. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300704 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION SIGNAL GENERATING METHOD, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND RECEPTION METHOD - A communication system has a base station control device and base station devices. The base station control device totalizes information on the number of base stations as the number of base station devices which can communicate with a mobile station device, makes Nb copies of a data frame, successively assigns integer values from 1 to Nb as stream numbers Ns to the data frames copied, and forms Nb copied data frames including Nb and Ns in header information. Copied data frames having different Ns in the header information are sent to base station devices. According to Ns and Nb, a base station device subjects the data in the copied data frame to temporal/spatial encoding to form a temporal/spatial encoding series. A mobile station device receives the temporal/spatial encoding series signal from each of the base station devices. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300705 | Enhanced Encapsulation Mechanism Using GRE Protocol - Wireless gateway nodes are enabled to support mobile node services, such as content based billing, when a data treatment server is present in the system. Using one of a defined Content Flow Label (CFL), an Application Program Interface (API), and a compression protocol header, content based billing is provided such as by exchanging content and byte count information with the data treatment server. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300706 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS TECHNOLOGY SELECTION - A method and system for selecting at a terminal at least one of a plurality of available access networks for use with a wireless application invoked at the terminal according preferences associated with the wireless application, the network service provider, the subscriber, the subscriber subscription and application content provider. The selection may be constrained by an Application Policy received from a network service provider. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300707 | ENHANCED CARRIER SENSING FOR MULTI-CHANNEL OPERATION - In various embodiments, a multi-channel request-to-send and a multi-channel clear-to-send may be used in a wireless communications network to assure that a subsequent multi-channel communications exchange between two devices takes place only over channels that are sensed by both devices as being free. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300708 | WIRELESS STATION LOCATION DETECTION - A technique for locating a device uses connectivity to find a distance between an access point (AP) and a device. The AP transmits a frame to a device and receives an acknowledgement frame from the device. The amount of time for a signal to pass between the AP and the device is estimated and multiplied by the speed of light to find the distance between the AP and the device. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300709 | METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MAPPING TO DEMODULATION REFERENCE SIGNAL PORT - A demodulation reference signal port mapping method is disclosed. The method includes: a base station communicates with a User Equipment (UE), and allocates corresponding data stream to the UE according to the attribution of the UE; the base station maps the corresponding data stream from a layer to a corresponding demodulation reference signal port; the base station transmits the corresponding data stream to the UE via demodulation reference signal port. By restricting the demodulation reference signal port mapping solution of rank=1 to rank=8 and the demodulation reference signal port mapping solution when the retransmission occurs, the technical solution enables the demodulation reference signal port mapping solution to compatible with the present system and to keep lower overhead of the demodulation reference signal. | 11-29-2012 |
20120307722 | Communication system, communication program, communication apparatus, mobile terminal and, communication method - A communication apparatus internally generates a virtual terminal (emulator) of a mobile terminal. The virtual terminal performs handover to a 3G network in place of the mobile terminal. In the event of an incoming call to the mobile terminal, the virtual terminal receives the call in place of the mobile terminal and notifies the mobile terminal of the call. Consequently, without having to perform handover, the mobile terminal is able to receive communication notification, whereby telephone communication by the mobile terminal remains enabled without the expenditure of power for handover, enabling a reduction in power consumption. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307723 | Method and Apparatus For Generating Radio Link Control Protocol Data Units - A method and apparatus are used to generate radio link control (RLC) protocol data units (PDUs). A data request for a logical channel is received as part of an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transport format combination (E-TFC) selection procedure in a medium access control (MAC). Upon determining the data field size, an RLC PDU is generated such that it matches the requested data from the E-TFC selection. The size of the RLC PDU generated can be greater than or equal to the minimum configured RLC PDU size (if data is available) and less than or equal to the maximum RLC PDU size. The data is then transmitted in the RLC PDU in a current transmission time interval (TTI). | 12-06-2012 |
20120307724 | RADIO LINK FAILURE DETECTION PROCEDURES IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION UPLINK AND DOWNLINK AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method and apparatus for detecting a radio link (RL) failure for uplink (UL) and downlink (DL) in a long term evolution (LTE) wireless communication system including at least one wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and at least one evolved Node-B (eNodeB) are disclosed. A determination is made as to whether an RL has an in-synchronization status or an out-of-synchronization status. An RL failure is declared if an out-of-synchronization status is detected. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307725 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DELIVERING DATA IN AN INTERMITTENT COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - Mobile nodes are allowed to move around within an intermittent communication environment. A mobile node wirelessly communicates with an access node when approaching the access node, and stores data. The access node stores an action history for each mobile node, and generates a forwarder list in association with a destination node, based on action histories of the mobile nodes. The forwarder list stores one or more identifies each identifying a first mobile node in the order of an arrival probability indicating a probability that the first mobile node succeeds in delivering the data to the destination node. The access node selects second mobile nodes that are to carry the data to the destination node, based on the forwarder list, and transfers the data to one of the second mobile nodes when a communication link is established between the access node and the one of the second mobile nodes. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307726 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL AND SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station transmits a plurality of primary synchronization channel (PSC) symbols to a mobile station in a slot of a subframe of a frame-based wireless communication system. The base station also transmits a plurality of secondary synchronization channel (SSC) symbols to the mobile station in the slot of the subframe. The mobile station determines a preferred receiver beam based on the plurality of received consecutive PSC symbols. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307727 | Portable Network Connection Device, Method of Setting Portable Network Connection Device, And Computer Program Product - A portable network connection device that functions as a bridge in a first operation mode and as a router in a second operation mode. The portable network connection device configured to receive a notice packet indicating a presence of a router, and set an operation mode of the portable network connection device to the first operation mode or the second operation mode based on the whether a notice packet is received. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307728 | INTER-NODE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - Disclosed is a data transmission system having a multi-node wireless network in a geographic area within which a plurality of nodes are positioned, having a plurality of directional antennas fixed to respective nodes of the plurality of nodes, with each node including at least two directional antennas to transmit and receive in respective sectors emanating from each respective node. When yaw of a node exceeds a threshold amount, revised routing information is provided to identify preferred directional antennas for use in future link transmissions. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307729 | Pilot Shifting - Some example embodiments presented herein may be directed towards a method in a Base Station, which may be comprised in a Radio Network, for transmitting a combined wireless communication signal. The combined wireless communication signal may comprise a primary and a secondary signal component. The method may comprise transmitting the secondary signal component to be received by an user equipment, the secondary signal component may comprise secondary pilot resources that may be dynamically shifted, where the dynamic shifting may be based on a current estimation procedure. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307730 | Overcharging Prevention by Unsent Downlink Data Volume Record - The present invention provides a method for recording the unsuccessfully transmitted downlink data volume into the CDR generated by gateway support node in a telecommunication system. The method includes creating information relating to the unsuccessfully transmitted downlink data in a node and sending the information from the node to the gateway support node, to make the gateway support node know the volume of unsent downlink data. A node and gateway support node which adapted to prevent overcharging the user which is caused by the G-CDR are also provided. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307731 | Primary Channel Estimation - Some example embodiments may be directed towards a method in a network node, which may be comprised in a Radio Network, for transmitting a combined wireless communication signal. The combined wireless communication signal may comprise a primary and a secondary signal component. The method may comprise transmitting to an user equipment the secondary signal component according to a secondary transmission scheme such that the secondary signal component at least partially overlaps with the primary signal component with respect to a signal domain. The method may also comprise simultaneously, suppressing at least one portion of the secondary signal component during a transmission of the primary signal component. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307732 | Methods and Apparatus For Use in a Communications Network - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of operating a mobility management node to provide location and/or status information for a user terminal connected to an Evolved Packet Core network. The method comprises receiving a request for location and/or status information for the user terminal from a subscriber register, determining the location and/or status information for the user terminal, and sending a response to the subscriber register including the determined location and/or status information. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307733 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is directed to a wireless communication, more specifically to a method and apparatus of transmitting control information via a PUCCH in the wireless communication system, which comprises generating channel quality information and ACK/NACK information; and transmitting the channel quality information and the ACK/NACK information together via the PUCCH at a subframe, the subframe including a plurality of SC-FDMA symbols, wherein if SRS transmission is not configured at the subframe, all SC-FDMA symbols of the subframe are used for the transmission of the PUCCH, wherein if the SRS transmission is configured at the subframe, last SC-FDMA symbol of the subframe is not used for transmission of the PUCCH. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307734 | STORING ACCESS NETWORK INFORMATION FOR AN IMS USER IN A SUBSCRIBER PROFILE - IMS networks and methods are disclosed for storing information on the access network of a user in a subscriber profile for the user. When a communication device of a user attempts to register with an IMS network, a P-CSCF receives a register request message from the communication device, and identifies access network information for the user. The P-CSCF then transmits another register request message to an S-CSCF that includes the access network information, and the S-CSCF in turn forwards the access network information to an HSS. The HSS then stores the access network information in the subscriber profile for the user. Nodes in the IMS network that retrieve the subscriber profile may acquire the access network information to provide services based on the access network information. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307735 | MAINTAINING CIRCUIT SWITCHED CONTINUITY IN AN ENHANCED UNIVERSAL TERRESTRIAL RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method for implementing a fallback procedure from a packet switched (PS) radio access technology (RAT) to a circuit switched (CS) RAT is disclosed. A paging message is received at a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) via the PS RAT, the paging message including a WTRU identifier and a domain indicator, wherein the domain indicator indicates whether the paging message is related to a service on the CS RAT. If the WTRU identifier in the paging message matches a stored identifier of the receiving WTRU, then a fallback procedure to the CS RAT is performed. The WTRU responds to the paging message using a CS RAT-based identifier assigned to the WTRU. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307736 | Method and Apparatus for Offloading Internet Data in Access Network - The present disclosure discloses a method and an apparatus for offloading Internet data in an access network, which are used for solving the technical problems that in a Network Address Translation (NAT) offloading networking solution, the information obtained in a monitor mode is incomplete, offloading characteristics for distinguishing users cannot be provided and offloading strategies are separated from Quality of Service (QoS) strategies of a core network. The solution of the present disclosure includes: an offloading device judges whether a Radio Access Bearer (RAB) data flow needs offloading according to a specific value of a specific parameter in an RAB message; if the offloading is needed, NAT is performed and then the offloaded data is transmitted to the Internet; and if the offloading is not needed, the RAB data flow is transparently transmitted to the core network. In the present disclosure, the offloading judgment condition, which the offloading device is in accordance with, directly originates from the core network, and the core network can proactively obtain required user information, thus offloading judgment can be made correctly and completely as much as possible, and offloading judgment can be implemented with QoS strategies of the core network together, and there is no need to add new QoS management points being independent of the core network. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307737 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To be provided is a radio communication device including a packet generation unit for generating a packet including first decoding information that can be recognized by a radio communication device corresponding to a first communication scheme, second decoding information that can be recognized by a radio communication device corresponding to a second communication scheme and third decoding information that can be recognized by a radio communication device corresponding to a third communication scheme, and a transmission unit for transmitting the packet generated by the packet generation unit. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307738 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a communication apparatus including a first wireless communication part capable of performing wireless communication according to a first communication scheme and a second wireless communication part capable of performing wireless communication according to a second communication scheme that uses a higher frequency band than the first communication scheme, wherein the second wireless communication part determines a reception timing to receive a beacon transmitted according to the second communication scheme based on a time when a predetermined control signal has been received by the first wireless communication part, and forms, at the determined reception timing, a reception beam having a directionality learned in advance. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307739 | SPATIAL MULTIPLEXING WIRELESS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, SPATIAL MULTIPLEXING WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A spatial multiplexing wireless transmission system is formed by a base station, and by a plurality of terminal stations that are provided with a plurality of antennas. The base station is provided with an information signal generating portion, a control signal generating portion, a transmission frame generating portion, a multiple beamforming portion, a transmission/reception switching portion, a reception signal processing portion, a propagation environment estimating portion, and an antenna information generating portion. At least one of the terminal stations is provided with a transmission/reception switching portion, a reception signal processing portion, a decoding portion, an antenna information extracting portion, an antenna information generating portion, an transmitting portion, a battery, a remaining battery detecting portion, a transmission request extracting portion, and a propagation environment estimating portion. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307740 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING CONCURRENT COMMUNICATION OVER MULTIPLE ACCESS POINTS AND PHYSICAL MEDIA - A system and method for enabling communication concurrently over multiple access points and multiple physical media including but not limited to: cellular, network (e.g., Ethernet), broadband wireless, audio communication schemes. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307741 | Method for Synchronizing PDCP Operations after RRC Connection Re-establishment in a Wireless Communication System and Related Apparatus Thereof - A method used in an E-UTRAN for synchronizing PDCP operations after a RRC connection re-establishment procedure with a user equipment (UE) is provided. The method includes: initiating an RRC reconfiguration procedure to resume all radio bearers other than a signaling radio bearer | 12-06-2012 |
20120307742 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR CDMA2000/GPRS ROAMING - IIF architectures and corresponding call flows are provided for CDMA2000/GPRS roaming scenarios such as GPRS foreign mode with Mobile IPv4, GPRS foreign mode with Simple IPv4 or IPv6, CDMA2000 packet data foreign mode with Mobile IPv4, and CDMA2000 packet data foreign mode with Simple IPv4 or IPv6. | 12-06-2012 |
20120314648 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR USER EQUIPMENT-BASED ENHANCEMENTS OF RADIO LINK CONTROL FOR MULTI-POINT WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - In aspects of the present disclosure, a user equipment receives inter-NodeB multi-point transmissions, and a multipoint aggregation component detects a gap in the sequence numbers, delays transmitting a not acknowledged signal (NAK) by starting a NAK delay timer, and transmits, by a transceiver, NAK for the gap in sequence numbers in response to the NAK delay timer expiring and detecting that the gap has not been filled during the delaying. If the Medium Access Control (MAC) entity as the respective NodeB identifies itself to the Radio Link Control (RLC), out-of-order delivery (skew) can eventually be distinguished from genuine data loss before the NAK delay timer expires based upon tracking the highest sequence numbers received. Adaptive NAK delay timer can be performed by monitoring skew duration. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314649 | Systems and methods to enhance spatial diversity in distributed-input distributed output-wireless systems - Systems and methods are described for enhancing the channel spatial diversity in a multiple antenna system (MAS) with multi-user (MU) transmissions (“MU-MAS”), by exploiting channel selectivity indicators. The proposed methods are: i) antenna selection; ii) user selection; iii) transmit power balancing. All three methods, or any combination of those, are shown to provide significant performance gains in DIDO systems in practical propagation scenarios. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314650 | Quality of Service, Battery Lifetime, and Latency in Wireless Communication Devices - Embodiments for processing media over Internet Protocol (IP) packets in a wireless device are provided. Embodiments enable downlink and uplink media over IP flows within the wireless device that reduce the load on the application processor (AP) of the wireless device. In an embodiment, media over IP flows bypass the AP entirely allowing the AP to enter a power saving mode during media over IP sessions. This results in increased battery lifetime and reduced power consumption of the wireless device. In addition, the media over IP session quality is improved by the reduced latency resulting from bypassing the AP. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314651 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, PROCESSING EXECUTING DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - There is provided a communication control device including a communication path selecting unit that selects one or more wireless communication paths by which a wireless communication terminal performing communication using two or more wireless communication paths and a processing executing device executing processing for providing a communication service to the wireless communication terminal communicate with each other and a communication setting control unit that performs setting such that, when a plurality of wireless communication paths are selected, communication is performed between at least one processing executing device corresponding to the plurality of selected wireless communication paths and the wireless communication terminal, using the plurality of wireless communication paths. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314652 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for performing a random access in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes: transmitting a random access preamble on at least one serving cell to a base station; and receiving a random access response message including a plurality of timing advance information applied to each of the at least one serving cell and information on a serving cell to which the plurality of timing advance information is applied as a response to the random access preamble from the base station. The mobile station receives timing information for uplink synchronization through a plurality of serving cells, thereby making it possible to perform the uplink synchronization with the base station. In addition, it is possible to more efficiently configure the random access response message transmitted to the mobile station by the base station in order to perform the uplink synchronization. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314653 | Efficient Transmission for Low Data Rate WLAN - A signal field is generated to include (i) a field to indicate that a physical layer (PHY) data unit is a control frame, and (ii) one or more of a frame control field, a receiver address (RA) field, and a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) field. A PHY data payload (i) that includes one or more of a service field, a transmitter address (TA) field, a network ID field, and a CRC field, and (ii) that omits an RA field is generated. The PHY data unit is generated to include (i) a preamble, (ii) a PHY header having the SIG field, and (iii) the PHY data payload. The PHY data unit is transmitted. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314654 | MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) APPARATUS AND METHODS - A multi-user MIMO downlink beamforming system ( | 12-13-2012 |
20120314655 | DATA TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION WITH HARQ AND NETWORK CODING - Techniques for transmitting and receiving data with hybrid automatic retransmission (HARQ) and network coding via block operation are disclosed. In one design, a transmitter transmits a first block of packets to multiple receivers and receives ACK/NAK feedback for the first block of packets from the receivers. The transmitter identifies candidate packets for network coding based on the ACK/NAK feedback. A pool of candidate packets changes over time as more ACK/NAK feedback for transmitted packets is received from the receivers. The transmitter generates at least one network-coded packet based on the candidate packets. Each network-coded packet may be generated by channel coding each of at least two packets and combining the at least two packets after channel coding. The transmitter transmits another block of packets to the receivers. This block includes the at least one network-coded packet and may also include pending packets and/or new packets. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314656 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMBINING AND TRANSCEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION - Disclosed are a method and apparatus for combining and transceiving control information. The method for combining and transmitting control information in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention comprises: a step in which a base station, which transceives control information and data information to/from a user terminal via a plurality of component carriers (CC), transmits control information via a first component carrier to the user terminal, and determines identification information for identifying a second component carrier so as to transmit data information via the second component carrier which is determined by the control information of the first component carrier; a step of determining indication information required for encoding the data information and/or control information of the second component carrier; a step of combining the identification information for identifying the second component carrier and the indication information; and a step of transmitting the control information of the first component carrier, including said combined information. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314657 | COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM USING MULTICARRIER TRANSMISSION MODE - A communications system that includes a transmission data generator configured to generate frequency band information indicating which frequency band is to be used for transmission of data information between said communication apparatuses; a transmitter configured to transmit the frequency band information by using a specific frequency band, set from among a plurality of frequency band assigned to the communications system, to transmit data information using at least one frequency band set from among said plurality of frequency bands; a receiver configured to receive the frequency band information, using the specific frequency band. The frequency band set as said at least one frequency band set from among said plurality of frequency bands, other than the specific frequency band, is made variable, at the time of establishing the wireless channel, the frequency band usable by the communications apparatus is restricted. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314658 | Station Operation Method and Apparatus in TV Whitespace - The present invention relates to a station (hereinafter, ‘STA’) operation method and apparatus in a TV whitespace. In a TVWS band, when an STA operating as an unlicensed device with permission to operate in an available channel not used by a licensed device needs to operate in the TVWS band by acquiring information on the available channel, the STA transmits an available channel information request message to a device having database information; receives, from the device having database information, an ACK message for the available channel information that includes (a) identification information on an available channel, (b) information on the maximum allowable power level in the available channel, and (c) information on valid time of the available channel; and transmits/receives a signal using the information of (a), (b) and (c), i.e., using the maximum allowable power level within the valid time in the available channel. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314659 | MULTI-PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING (MPLS) FUNCTIONALITY IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK BETWEEN A FIRST NODE AND A SECOND NODE VIA A WIRELESS CONNECTION - A system for providing a Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) functionality in a communications network between a first node and a second node via a wireless connection between a first wireless interface and a second wireless interface includes an enhanced eNodeB of a Radio Access Network (RAN) of an Evolved Packet System (EPS) network, configured to provide the first wireless interface; and a user equipment connected to a second node, configured to provide the second wireless interface. The enhanced eNodeB is a Label Edge Router (LER) of a MPLS domain. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314660 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATING COMMUNITIES OVER AN AD-HOC MESH NETWORK - An approach is provided for locating communities over an ad-hoc mesh network. Community identifiers are used to locate communities and community members over an ad-hoc mesh network. The community identifiers are also associated with keys to authenticate members of the community and to protect the privacy and anonymity of information exchanged between the members. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314661 | Adaptive Transmissions in Wireless Networks - A network includes an access point using a first protocol and a station using both the first protocol and a second protocol. The station uses the first protocol before a first threshold and a second protocol after the first threshold. A first duration between the second threshold and the first threshold is at least of sufficient length for the station to receive one data packet from the access point and send an acknowledgment. The station transmits to the access point a current clear-to-send packet at a current time during a current exchange based on success or failure of a previous exchange during which a previous clear-to-send packet was transmitted to the access point at a previous time. | 12-13-2012 |
20120320824 | System and Method for Providing a Content Delivery Network via a Motor Vehicle - A cache server disposed in a motor vehicle receives and caches content from a content distribution network when a load of a cellular link to the content distribution network is low. The cache server determines that the motor vehicle is turned off, broadcasts a wireless signal as part of a wireless network when the motor vehicle is turned off, and provides a device access to the content cached in the cache server via the wireless network. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320825 | METHOD OF SPEEDING CALL FLOW - A system and method for communicating between a vehicle and a central facility includes initiating at a vehicle a request for turn-by-turn directions; establishing a packet-switched call between the vehicle and a central facility using a wireless carrier system and a mobile dialed number (MDN) associated with the vehicle; receiving determined route information at the vehicle from the central facility via the packet-switched call; offering a vehicle occupant a service option that uses a circuit-switched call; and if the vehicle occupant accepts the service option, directing the wireless carrier system to establish the circuit-switched call using the MDN while maintaining the packet-switched call in a dormant state. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320826 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting uplink control information (UCI), performed by a user equipment, in a wireless communication system are provided. The method comprising: generating encoded information bits by performing channel coding on information bits of the UCI; generating a modulation symbol sequence by modulating the encoded information bits; generating a spread sequence by block-wise spreading on the modulation symbol sequences with an orthogonal sequence; and transmitting the spread sequence to a base station through an uplink control channel, wherein the information bits of the UCI comprises a first UCI bit sequence and a second UCI information bit. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320827 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EPC CONTEXT MAINTENANCE OPTIMIZATION - Internet protocol (IP) continuity is fundamentally not possible when a user equipment (UE) moves from an evolved packet core (EPC) radio access technology (RAT) to a non-EPC RAT. However, there are instances when it is beneficial to not completely release an EPC IP context, such as when the UE moves to the non-EPC RAT for only a short period of time. The UE may retain an EPC IP context in a suspended state while the UE is in the non-EPC RAT, and revive the context when the UE returns to the EPC RAT. Accordingly, a method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for maintaining an EPC context at a UE are provided. The apparatus suspends and retains the EPC context when moving from an EPC capable network to a non-EPC capable network, and resumes the suspended EPC context upon returning to the EPC capable network. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320828 | Inter-Carrier Messaging Service Providing Phone Number Only Experience - A phone number only messaging experience provided in an Inter-Carrier Messaging System service. Subscriber to subscriber digital messages containing user data are routed between carrier's networks using an Inter-Carrier messaging module with appropriate MIN/carrier/carrier routing look-up capabilities. Digital messages containing user data (e.g., short messages, email, etc.) may be sent to a subscriber in another carrier's network addressed only with a phone number. If the recipient is outside of the sender's carrier network, the Inter-Carrier messaging module of the Inter-Carrier service provider (ICSP) determines the appropriate carrier for the recipient, appends appropriate syntax to the digital message containing user data to allow internet protocol (IP) or other standardized communication techniques between message service centers of the two carriers, and routes the digital message containing user data to the destination carrier. The recipient in the other carrier's network may reply back to the ICSP's sender using only the subscriber's directory number. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320829 | Wireless Communication Device and Control Method Thereof - To provide a wireless communication device that can suppress data loss due to reduction in line speed in accordance with hand-down, to thereby improve throughput, and a control method thereof. A cellular telephone device | 12-20-2012 |
20120320830 | Method and apparatus for dispatching short messages In code division multiple access single-mode dual-standby terminal - A method for dispatching short messages in a Code Division Multiplex Access (CDMA) single-mode dual-standby terminal is disclosed in the present disclosure. The method comprises the following steps: the CDMA single-mode dual-standby terminal processes the short message service of an activated user and defers a processing on the received voice calling service and/or data service required by the activated user when processing the short message service, and then defers a processing on the received short message service, voice calling service and data service required by an inactivated user. An apparatus for dispatching short messages in a Code Division Multiplex Access (CDMA) single-mode dual-standby terminal is also disclosed. The method and apparatus of the present disclosure realize a reasonable short message service management and dispatching for a CDMA single-mode dual-standby terminal. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320831 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of transmitting and receiving a synchronization signal in a distributed antenna system (DAS) is disclosed. A method of receiving a synchronization signal in a mobile station of a distributed antenna system (DAS) comprises receiving a primary preamble from a base station through one of a plurality of distributed antennas, which is previously defined; and acquiring first synchronization using the primary preamble. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320832 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a channel status information transmission/reception method and apparatus in a wireless communication system in which the transmission apparatus generates channel status informations for at least two transmission schemes by combining rank informations corresponding to the transmission schemes into combined rank information through analyzing an uplink channel, and transmits the channel status informations for the respective transmission schemes on up link channel, the channel status information for one of the transmission schemes containing the combined rank information; the reception apparatus receives the channel status informations corresponding to at least two transmission schemes, the channel status information for one of the transmission schemes including combined rank information for the transmission schemes, schedules downlink channel according to the channel status information, and transmits signals on the downlink channel. According to the present invention, the transmission apparatus combines rank informations of a plurality of transmission schemes and feeds back the combined rank information so as to reduce overhead at a reception apparatus. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320833 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD IN THE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system, including: a base station apparatus; and a terminal apparatus, wherein the base station apparatus and the terminal apparatus transmits to or receives from the terminal apparatus and the base station apparatus respectively a radio signal by using a plurality of frequency bands as a transmission frequency or a reception frequency, the base station apparatus includes a transmission unit which transmits a synchronization signal or a reference signal in each frequency band of the plurality of frequency bands, and the terminal apparatus includes a synchronization control unit which selects at least one synchronization signal or reference signal from the plurality of synchronization signals or reference signals transmitted from the base station apparatus and performs synchronization control based on the selected synchronization signal or reference signal. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320834 | Adaptive Communications Methods for Multiple User Packet Radio Wireless Networks - An exemplary wireless communication network that includes a base that communicates with remote units located in a cell of the network. The base concatenates information symbols with a preamble corresponding to a destination remote unit. One or more remote units communicating with the base each concatenates information symbols with a preamble corresponding to that remote unit. An adaptive receiver system for a base unit rapidly adapts optimal despreading weights for reproducing information symbols transmitted from multiple remote units. A transmitter system for a base unit concatenates information symbols with a preamble associated with a remote unit in the cell. An adaptive receiver system for a remote unit in a communication network rapidly adapts optimal weights for reproducing a signal transmitted to it by a specific base unit in the network. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320835 | Methods, Devices, Systems, and Computer Program Products for Registration of Multi-Mode Communications Devices - A method of registering a multi mode communications device for service can include registering a multi-mode communications device by receiving and transmitting registration information over separate communications networks. | 12-20-2012 |
20120327848 | System Information Updates In LTE - A method and apparatus for receiving system information updates includes a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) receiving a system frame number. The WTRU also receives system information messages in a modification period. The modification period has a boundary determined by the system frame number. The WTRU receives system information change notification after a first modification change boundary and determines that the system information is valid until a second modification change boundary. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327849 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK CONNECTION OF WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICE AND ASSOCIATED WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICE - A method for controlling a network connection of a wireless network device includes: after the wireless network device is waked up from a sleep mode: loading a wireless network driver; determining whether a predetermined access point satisfies a predetermined rule under a condition that the wireless network driver does not scan access points; and when the predetermined access point satisfies the predetermined rule, the wireless network driver directly utilizes pre-stored network connection information to connect to the predetermined access point without scanning the access points. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327850 | MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - In a mobile device capable of wireless communications using multiple radio access technologies (RATs), transmit communications of one RAT may cause interference with receive communications of another RAT. In the case of wireless local area network (WLAN) communications, a CTS-to-Self message may control the timing of WLAN communications such that WLAN receptions do not overlap with transmissions of another RAT, such as a Long Term Evolution (LTE) radio. The CTS-to-Self message timing control may be executed by a mobile device operating as a WLAN access point. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327851 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP (TDLS) FOR ESTABLISHING BASIC SERVICE SET - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for establishing a direct link between a pair of apparatuses (e.g., stations or access terminals), and setting up a basic service set of the apparatuses via the direct link. An apparatus in the pair can communicate with another apparatus in the pair through a device (e.g., an access point) in a first bandwidth, establish the direct link with the other apparatus in the first bandwidth, and communicate directly with the other apparatus in a second bandwidth different than the first bandwidth, wherein the apparatus and the other apparatus form the basic service set operating in the second bandwidth. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327852 | VOICE TRANSMISSION TECHNOLOGY SELECTION - The present invention relates to a method of transmitting a signal by an MME (Mobility Management Entity) in a wireless network, the method comprising: receiving a tracking area update message from an UE (User Equipment); transmitting, on reception the tracking area update message, an Update Location message comprising an IMS voice over PS (Packet Switched) session supported indication to an HSS (Home Subscriber Server), wherein the IMS voice over PS session supported indication indicates whether or not an 1MS Voice over PS Session is supported homogeneously in all tracking areas in the serving MME. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327853 | Transmission Method of Femtocell - A transmission method of a femtocell includes the following steps. The femtocell receives and temporarily stores multiple real-time transport protocol (RTP) packets from a UE in a buffer. When the RTP packets are temporarily stored for a time period, the femtocell samples the buffer at a sampling rate to generate multiple CS data packets. The CS data packets include a current CS data packet. When there exists no previous CS data packet received from the UE, the femtocell calculates a timestamp of the current CS data packet according to a current timestamp. When there exists the previous CS data packet, the femtocell calculates the timestamp of the current CS data packet according to the timestamp and a connection frame number (CFN) of the previous CS data packet and a CFN of the current CS data packet. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327854 | WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A mobile telephone device includes: a communication switching unit for selectively switching communication between an LTE communication system and a CDMA communication system; a connection availability reception unit for receiving connection non-available information in the LTE communication system in a case where connection to a destination is not possible, upon communication initiation being requested in a situation where location registration is performed in the LTE communication system; and a communication initiation processing unit which, after the communication initiation is requested, in a case where the connection non-available information is not received, performs the communication initiation by changing a location registering destination to the CDMA communication system, and in a case where the connection non-available information is received, maintains a state where the location registering destination is the LTE communication system and ends communication initiation processing. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327855 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING SIGNALS RECEIVED FROM A TRANSMISSION DEVICE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method for reducing consumption of resources due to blind decoding when UE (User Equipment) carries out control and data communication with reference to specific embodiments. For example, a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention can reduce resource consumption of UE by reducing the number of blind decoding according to the information obtained by the UE. In other words, a communication method and apparatus according to one embodiment of the present invention reduces blind decoding of a control channel for control and data communication based on information obtained by UE. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327856 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, PAGING MESSAGE TRANSMITTING METHOD, AND PAGING MESSAGE RECEIVING METHOD - A base station transmits a first message including indices of a plurality of carriers and information for the plurality of carrier to a mobile station. Also, the base station transmits a second message including a bitmap representing whether each of the plurality of carriers corresponds to a paging carrier used for transmitting a paging message, to the mobile station. The base station selects a paging transmission carrier for the mobile station from among the plurality of carriers and transmits a paging message through the selected paging transmission carrier. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327857 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING AN ACCESS POINT - An apparatus and method are disclosed to communicate, from a first device to a wireless device, information by which the wireless device may identify an access point as a potential network device. The information is encoded in a packet stream by the first device, and wirelessly communicated from the access point to the wireless device. The information may be encoded by varying a packet characteristic, such as packet length, that is preserved even if the packets are encoded by the access point. The information may include a beacon, a SSID and/or a key. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327858 | Terrestrial Based High Speed Data Communications Mesh Network - A network for providing high speed data communications may include multiple terrestrial transmission stations that are located within overlapping communications range and a mobile receiver station. The terrestrial transmission stations provide a continuous and uninterrupted high speed data communications link with the mobile receiver station employing a wireless radio access network protocol. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327859 | SERVICE CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS - In the field of mobile communications, embodiments of the present invention disclose a service control method and apparatus. A user equipment has established a circuit switched bearer, and the user equipment initiates a session with a third party. The method includes: receiving, by a service centralization and continuity application server SCC AS, early session media information and sending the early session media information to a circuit switched network in a form of regular session media, so that the circuit switched bearer is used for an early session; and receiving, by the SCC AS, an off-hook signal of the third party and sending regular session media information of the third party to the circuit switched network, so that the circuit switched bearer is used for a regular session. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327860 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN A LTE TDD SYSTEM - A method for transmitting an uplink Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) by a Long Term Evolution (LTE) User Equipment (UE). The UE receives information indicating an SRS transmission, generates an SRS, and transmits the SRS in two OFDM symbol in a half-frame or frame, if the information indicates that a period of SRS transmission is 2 ms. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327861 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTIPLEXING ON AN LTE UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - A wireless communication network comprising a plurality of base stations capable of wireless communication with a plurality of subscriber stations within a coverage area of the network, wherein at least one of the plurality of base stations is capable of: determining a multiplexing scheme for multiplexing a frequency-selective channel quality information/precoding matrix index (FS CQI/PMI) feedback report with a wideband channel quality information/precoding matrix index (WB CQI/PMI) feedback report and a rank information (RI) report on a physical uplink control channel; transmitting the multiplexing scheme to a subscriber station; and receiving, from the subscriber station, an FS CQI/PMI feedback report multiplexed with a WB CQI/PMI feedback report and a RI report on the physical uplink control channel according to the multiplexing scheme. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327862 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A FRAME IN A WIRELESS RAN SYSTEM - There is provided a method and apparatus for transmitting a frame which is performed by a transmission STA in a WLAN system. The method of transmitting a frame includes generating an MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) to be transmitted to a target station, generating a PLCP Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) by attaching a Physical Layer Convergence Procedure (PLCP) header to the MPDU, and transmitting the PPDU to the target station. The PLCP header comprises a partial Association ID (AID) of the target station. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327863 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication method is provided which includes the steps of selecting, by a wireless communication device belonging to a communication system operating on a certain communication protocol, a communication protocol among a plurality of communication protocols, exchanging, among a plurality of wireless communication devices including the wireless communication device, information including peripheral communication status of each wireless communication device by using the selected communication protocol, and changing the communication protocol to be used for exchanging the information. | 12-27-2012 |
20130003652 | SPLIT USAGE OF RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS WITH IMS - Different access networks may perform signaling and data delivery (bearer connection) for communication services. A device may determine, in response to a request for a service from a user of the device, whether the device is connected to a non-cellular access network. The device may transmit, when it is determined that the device is connected to the non-cellular access network, one or more control messages, relating to establishment of the service, using the non-cellular access network. The device may transmit, when it is determined that the device is not connected to the non-cellular access network, the one or more control messages, using a cellular access network. The device may establish, with a party with which the service is to connect, a bearer connection for the service over the cellular access network. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003653 | Method And Apparatus For Facilitating Home Network Access - A manner of extending a home network to a mobile device. An SG (signaling gateway) is provided to receive register an HA (home agent) and an FA (foreign agent) and form a secure tunnel to each to form a communication channel. A heartbeat may be exchanged with the HA to keep open the NAT boundary for the communication channel. If a high bandwidth application request is received from the HA, the SG determines if there is a PS (proxy server) able to handle the session and, if so, transfers the channel. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003654 | Mesh Node Role Discovery and Automatic Recovery - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide for configuring and managing mesh nodes during occasional failure of mesh nodes or addition of new mesh nodes. The disclosed system first determines whether a mesh node is a mesh portal or a mesh point. If it is a mesh portal, the mesh node will advertise its capacity as a mesh portal to other mesh nodes in the network. If it is a mesh point, the mesh node attempts to automatically recover connection to the wireless mesh network if it identifies a unique wireless network based on its associated network identifier. If more than one network identifiers are discovered, the mesh node delays establishing connection to the wireless mesh network until a selection is received. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003655 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF CONTROLLING A GATEWAY - Method of controlling a gateway regarding the communication flow being or to be processed through the gateway. The gateway is assigned to a first communication network that includes a media plane with at least one communication channel to which the gateway is linked, and a control plane, with at least one signaling channel to which a control device is linked. The control device is adapted to controlling the gateway. The method includes that inside a receiver device which is assigned to the first communication network a request for controlling the gateway is received. The request is received from an external third party device. By use of an influence device which, in particular, is assigned to the first communication network, the control device is influenced according to the request and the influenced control device controls the gateway regarding the communication flow being or to be processed through said gateway. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003656 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING ALLOWED LIST BASED ON REGIONS FOR WIRELESS TERMINAL IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for generating an allowed list based on regions for a wireless terminal are disclosed. The method generates an allowed list based on regions to control network access of a stationary wireless terminal, and includes: sending, by the wireless terminal, an attach request to a network; creating, by the network, an allowed list that contains information on regions in which the wireless terminal is permitted to access the network; and controlling, by the network, network access of the wireless terminal on the basis of the allowed list. Hence, the allowed list, which stores information regarding regions in which the MTC terminal 110 is permitted to access the network, may be dynamically created by the terminal or the MME. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003657 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - The present invention relates to a mobile communication method, in which a mobile station UE transmits uplink signals to a radio base station eNB using a plurality of “Component Carriers” having different carrier frequencies, includes a step A of transmitting, by the radio base station eNB, TA to be applied to the plurality of “Component Carriers”, to the mobile station UE, and a step B of adjusting, by the mobile station UE, transmission timings of the uplink signals on the plurality of “Component Carriers” based on the received TA. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003658 | EVOLVED DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - One embodiment is directed to a distributed antenna system (DAS) including a host unit and a plurality of remote units. The host unit includes a plurality of base transceiver stations and a switch. Each of the base transceiver stations is configured to provide a downstream baseband digital signal to the switch and to receive an upstream baseband digital signal from the switch, wherein each downstream baseband digital signal and upstream baseband digital signal is a digital representation of the RF channel at baseband of the respective base transceiver station. The switch is configured to route each of the downstream baseband digital signals to a respective subset of the remote units as one or more downstream serial data streams and to route each of the upstream baseband digital signals from one or more upstream serial data streams to a respective subset of the base transceiver stations. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003659 | RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE AND CORRELATION SETTING METHOD - Provided is a radio communication base station device which can suppress a use amount of an SRS communication resource. In this device, a correlation rule setting unit ( | 01-03-2013 |
20130003660 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR INFORMATION TRANSMISSION - A method, an apparatus and a system for information transmission are provided. The method includes the following steps. A second user equipment receives update information issued by a wireless access point (AP). The second user equipment is located within a coverage area of the wireless AP. After detecting that the second user equipment has the update information, a first user equipment establishes a connection with the second user equipment and obtains the update information from the second user equipment. A wireless AP of the first user equipment is located outside the coverage area of the wireless AP. In the present invention, the user equipment can update the information without additionally increasing the transmit powers of the wireless AP and the user equipment when located outside the coverage area of the wireless AP, and thus the interference to other equipments is not increased. | 01-03-2013 |
20130010686 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUBSCRIBER MOBILITY IN A CABLE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes creating a service flow with an endpoint over a wireless link coupled to a backhaul; notifying a mobility anchor of a location associated with the endpoint; relaying control packets between the endpoint and an access gateway; and relaying bearer packets between the endpoint and the mobility anchor, where the bearer packets are exchanged with the endpoint over a locally terminated bearer tunnel and the bearer packets are exchanged with the mobility anchor using Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010687 | SYNCHRONIZED UPLINK-DOWNLINK HOP FOR MEASUREMENTS - A method of wireless communication is provided which includes communicating with a base station on a first channel and tuning to a second channel concurrently with the base station tuning to a second or third channel. The method also includes measuring interference on the second channel and re-tuning to the first channel concurrently with the base station re-tuning to the first channel. The method further includes reporting channel quality, based on the interference, to the base station to enable channel selection. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010688 | METHOD OF DELIVERING A PDCP DATA UNIT TO AN UPPER LAYER - Disclosed is a radio (wireless) communication system providing a radio communication service and a terminal, and more particularly, to a method of delivering a continuously and/or consecutively received Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) Service Data units (SDUs) to an upper layer immediately if a PDCP entity receives the PDCP SDUs during a process of a RLC re-establishment within an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) that has evolved from a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010689 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, SWITCH, AND SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION SERVER - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step A in which, in location registration processing of a mobile station, an switch of a first communication scheme and an switch of a second communication scheme send a subscriber information server first information used to determine whether or not all coverage areas have a same capability of providing a telephony service by packet switching; and a step B in which, when a status inquiry request made upon receipt of a terminating-call signal destined for the mobile station is received from an application server, the subscriber information server determines based on the first information whether or not to make an inquiry at the switch of the first communication scheme or the switch of the second communication scheme about whether or not provision of the telephony service by packet switching is possible in an area where the mobile station is located. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010690 | Technique of Encoding HARQ Feedback Information with Two Separate Codewords with Unequal Error Protection for DTX and ACK/NACK - A technique for encoding downlink Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request, HARQ, feedback information in a mobile station supporting aggregated component carriers is provided. A method implementation of this technique comprises the steps of obtaining ( | 01-10-2013 |
20130010691 | METHOD FOR UPDATING CARRIER INFORMATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, to a method in which a terminal acquires and updates global carrier configuration information of base stations in a network, and to an apparatus for performing the method. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method in which a terminal acquires carrier configuration information in a broadband wireless access system that supports multiple carriers comprises the following steps; transmitting a first message containing a change count value of the carrier configuration information acquired by the terminal: receiving, from the base station and in response to the first message, a second message containing the current change count value of the carrier configuration information; and, if the change count value of the first message and the change count value of the second message are different from each other, receiving a third message containing current carrier configuration information and the current change count value from the base station. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010692 | Other Protocol Message Routing Over a Wireless Network of Metering Devices - Methods and apparatus are provided for routing DNP (or other) protocol messages over a network of an advanced metering infrastructure (AMI) system that employs a different communications protocol. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010693 | MOBILE NETWORK BACKGROUND TRAFFIC DATA MANAGEMENT WITH OPTIMIZED POLLING INTERVALS - Systems and methods for aligning data transfer to optimize connections established for transmission over a wireless network are disclosed. In one aspect, embodiments of the present disclosure include a method, which may be implemented on a system, for aligning data transfer to a mobile device to optimize connections made by the mobile device in a cellular network. The method includes batching data received in multiple transactions directed to a mobile device for transmission to the mobile device over the cellular network such that a wireless connection need not be established with the mobile device every time each of the multiple transactions occurs. For example, the data received in the multiple transactions for the mobile device can be sent to the mobile device, in a single transaction over a single instantiation of wireless network connectivity at the mobile device. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010694 | Multi-Carrier Operation for Wireless Systems - A method for a subscriber station to perform network entry in a multi-carrier wireless environment that has a primary carrier and at least one secondary carrier associated with a base station. The method includes sensing a carrier in an area serviced by the base station and determining if the carrier is a primary carrier or a secondary carrier. The method further includes performing the network entry if the determining establishes that the sensed carrier is a primary carrier and not a secondary carrier. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010695 | System and method for adaptive frame size management in a wireless multihop network - A system and method for adaptively managing frame size in a wireless multihop network is disclosed. In one embodiment, a packet is transmitted from a source to a destination. A acknowledgement packet is received and a successful acknowledgement packet counter is incremented if the acknowledgement packet arrives prior to a time-out of a timer. A frame size is increased if the successful acknowledgement packet counter reaches a specified value. If the acknowledgement packet arrives after the time-out of the timer, the successful acknowledgement packet counter is reset and the frame size is decreased. These procedures can be repeated until the frame size is greater than or equal to a maximum frame size or less than or equal to a minimum frame size. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010696 | METHOD AND AN ARRANGEMENT FOR LEGACY FALLBACK BETWEEN COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEMS - A method for handling Circuit Switched Fallback from a Packet Switched domain includes receiving an indication that Circuit Switched Fallback is supported from an eNodeB located within the Packet Switched domain. The method also includes registering to a Circuit Switched domain associated with Circuit Switched Fallback by tunneling Circuit Switched Registration information, via the eNodeB, to the Circuit Switched domain, thereby enabling the User Equipment to setup a Circuit Switched call or receive a Circuit Switched page. The method also includes receiving a Circuit Switched specific parameter setting from the eNodeB. The Circuit Switched specific parameter setting includes decoding information to facilitate decoding of transmissions in the Circuit Switched domain. Additionally, the method includes, after receiving the Circuit Switched specific parameter setting, switching from the Packet Switched domain to the Circuit Switched domain and using the decoding information to access the Circuit Switched domain. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010697 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION AND MONITORING - A wireless communication system and method for wireless communication in a multi-hop network. A first preamble is transmitted using a first repetition cycle. Monitoring for a second preamble is done in a second repetition cycle. The first repetition cycle is different than the second repetition cycle. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010698 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISTRIBUTING CONTENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present invention allows content to be delivered to a mobile terminal over different types of networks in order to efficiently use network resources. Content can be delivered using a select delivery method over a cellular network, a local wireless network, or a broadcast network. Within any of the networks, the content may be unicast to individual mobile terminals using individual content flows, multicast to a group of mobile terminals, or broadcast to any or all of the mobile terminals. Content can be multicast or broadcast to mobile terminals via different ones of the disparate networks. During a content flow, the network through which the content flow is delivered may be changed to allow the mobile terminal to receive the content through a different network. Further, the delivery method used to deliver the content may dynamically change as the number of mobile terminals receiving or requesting the content changes. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010699 | METHOD OF RANDOM ACCESS IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A random access method in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The present invention includes transmitting a bandwidth request indicator and a quick access message from a mobile station to a base station and starting a timer having a timer value determined according to an acknowledgement from the base station. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010700 | COMMUNICATIONS AND SYSTEMS UTILIZING COMMON DESIGNATION NETWORKING - A method of forming ad hoc RSI hierarchical communication networks among pluralities of wireless transceivers includes assigning to each of the transceivers one or more common designations. A network organization routine of the transceivers operates to establish hierarchical networks based on the transceivers' common designations, resulting in a logical network organization that provides efficiencies for acquiring information from particular transceivers that share a common designation. Each transceiver's common designation is used by a digital processor of the transceiver to selectively receive data packets that are intended for receipt by transceivers sharing the particular common designation. Such a “common designation” network reduces power consumption and signal interference thereby increasing battery life. Each transceiver may include a sensor interface a query handling routine in communication with a memory of the transceiver for serving as a dynamic distributed hierarchical database system of information such as, for example, sensor-derived information and time-sensitive information. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010701 | BASE STATION AND METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Abase station includes a radio communication unit ( | 01-10-2013 |
20130010702 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SIMULTANEOUS TRANSMISSION FROM MULTIPLE BASE STATIONS, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A first GW function block ( | 01-10-2013 |
20130016654 | MESH NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEMAANM Mayo; Thomas ClaytonAACI Honeoye FallsAAST NYAACO USAAGP Mayo; Thomas Clayton Honeoye Falls NY USAANM Wright; Aaron MichaelAACI East RochesterAAST NYAACO USAAGP Wright; Aaron Michael East Rochester NY US - Aspects of the invention provide for a mesh network management system. In one embodiment, a system is disclosed having: at least one computing device adapted to manage a wireless mesh network by performing the actions comprising: sending data including a plurality of fragments over a network to a plurality of Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) nodes, wherein the data is sent a predetermined number of times; receiving, from the plurality of AMI nodes, a message regarding the plurality of fragments of the data; and sending, in response to receiving the message, fragments of the data that were not received by the plurality of AMI nodes. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016655 | Reducing Blind Decodings for Communications Using Carrier Aggregation - A method and apparatus for transmitting downlink control information when carrier aggregation is being used, by determining at least one downlink control information (DCI) format for a first carrier and at least once DCI format for a second carrier; and including padding in at least one DCI format corresponding to the second carrier such that the DCI format size of the padded DCI format equals the DCI format size of a DCI format corresponding to the first carrier. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016656 | MOBILE STATION AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHODAANM SATOU; HideyoriAACI YokosukaAACO JPAAGP SATOU; Hideyori Yokosuka JP - A mobile station includes: a determining unit configured to make a determination as to whether uplink synchronization is established with a base station; a controller configured to determine a timing for providing notification of a start of data transmission to the base station based on a result of a determination; and a transmitting unit configured to provide the notification of the start of data transmission to the base station at the timing. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016657 | DYNAMIC ENABLEMENT OF M2M SERVICES OVER 3GPP ACCESS NETWORKS - A Machine-to-Machine (M2M) Services Enablement Solution offering M2M services enablement to an M2M entity that supports a 3GPP or a non-3GPP access for connection and service by a 3GPP Evolved Packet Core (EPC). The solution enables an Access Network (AN) to offer a transport connection for the M2M entity over its 3GPP EPC to M2M entity's per-choice M2M Service Provider (SP). The M2M entity's first attach to the AN is forced to be directed to the Access Point Name (APN) of an AN default M2M Network Services Capabilities (N-SC) application. The AN default M2M N-SC application facilitates M2M Service Layer (SL) initial registration of the M2M entity with its per-choice M2M SP. M2M entity's future Regular Attach to the SP network may be directed to the APN of an AN-based regular M2M N-SC application that serves the M2M SP. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016658 | Reactivation of Dedicated BearersAANM Lovsen; LarsAACI GoteborgAACO SEAAGP Lovsen; Lars Goteborg SEAANM Hedman; PeterAACI HelsingborgAACO SEAAGP Hedman; Peter Helsingborg SEAANM Pancorbo Marcos; Maria BelenAACI MadridAACO ESAAGP Pancorbo Marcos; Maria Belen Madrid ES - The present invention relates to re-establishment of dedicated bearers and more particularly, the invention relates to the re-establishment of dedicated bearers when connection is lost temporarily. This is provided in a device, method and system, in a packet based telecommunications network, for receiving on the communication interface an indication that a dedicated bearer for a user equipment, UE, has been deactivated, starting at least one timer, checking if uplink traffic is present for a communication bearer and if uplink traffic is detected on the communication bearer for a deactivated dedicated bearer re-establishing the dedicated bearer and stopping the timer. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016659 | Method of Handling Random Access Procedure with Deactivation Timer - A method of handling random access procedure on secondary cell in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises starting a deactivation timer for a secondary cell, performing a random access procedure for the secondary cell, and when the deactivation timer expires during the random access procedure, aborting the random access procedure or completing the random access procedure unsuccessfully. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016660 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ESTIMATE RELATIVE BASE STATION AND SUBSCRIBER TERMINAL LOCATIONS AND USING IT TO INCREASE FREQUENCY REUSE - Method for estimating position information of base stations as well as terminals for three dimensional centralized real-time spectrum management to achieve high spectral efficiency. In one aspect of the invention, the method comprises i) understanding the position information of plurality of base stations, wherein the plurality of terminals and the base stations form a wireless network, ii) determining, at the central controller, position of a terminal via plurality of communication wirelessly between the base stations and a terminal and between the base station and the central controller, iii) applying network wide real time knowledge at the central controller to electronically steerable antennas to use a resource in a different direction then where it is used by other base stations to achieve frequency reuse of one. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016661 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA IN A NETWORK SYSTEM, eNodeB AND NETWORK SYSTEM - The embodiments of the present invention provide a method for processing data in a network system, eNodeB and network system, relate to the field of communication technology, and is made in view of the problem of increasing of processing burden of a core network and interference aggravation due to decrease of radius of the cell. The method for processing data in a network system comprises: receiving data, using interference alignment or partially distributed space-time coding or network encoding technologies to coordinate and suppress interference of the data; identifying the characteristics of the data, classifying the data; and performing data bypassing on the data according to the classifications of the data. The present invention is applicable to the mobile communication technology. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016662 | MULTI-SITE MIMO COOPERATION IN CELLULAR NETWORK - In a cellular communications network comprising a plurality of transmitting sites wherein each transmitting site comprises at least one antenna, a method of serving a given data stream to a target-mobile terminal, comprising: designating at least two of the plurality of transmitting sites as cooperating sites; assigning tones to each transmitting site from a sub-band associated with the cooperating sites; dividing the data stream into at least two sub-data streams, each of the sub-data streams for transmission over selected tones; and interlacing tones of the cooperating sites in accordance with a selected one of a time switching and a frequency switching transmit diversity technique. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016663 | BASE STATION SUPPORTING TURBO DECODING AND PACKET SPLITTING - A baseband processing module of a base station includes a Turbo decoding module. The Turbo decoding module decodes a Turbo code word to produce one or more Media Access Control (MAC) packet(s) carried by the turbo decode word. Each MAC packet includes a MAC packet header and the MAC packet payload, which carries one or more Radio Link Control (RLC) Packet Data Units (PDUs). The Turbo decoding module decodes the MAC packet header to determine boundaries of the PDUs carried in the MAC packet payload. The Turbo decoding module decodes RLC PDU headers and RLC PDU payloads of the RLC PDUs. The Turbo decoding module writes the decoded MAC packet header, the decoded RLC PDU headers, and the decoded RLC PDU payloads to memory in a word-aligned format. The Turbo decoding module may also operate in various other Turbo decoding modes. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016664 | METHOD, SYSTEM, MAPPING FORWARD SERVER AND ACCESS ROUTER FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION CONTROLLINGAANM Wu; QiangAACI Shenzhen CityAACO CNAAGP Wu; Qiang Shenzhen City CNAANM Jiang; HuaAACI Shenzhen CityAACO CNAAGP Jiang; Hua Shenzhen City CNAANM Fu; TaoAACI Shenzhen CityAACO CNAAGP Fu; Tao Shenzhen City CNAANM Huang; BingAACI Shenzhen CityAACO CNAAGP Huang; Bing Shenzhen City CN - A method, system, mapping forwarding server and access router for mobile communication control are provided in the present invention. The method includes a flow of sending a data message from a source mobile terminal to a destination mobile terminal, including the following steps: A, a source access router receiving a first data message sent by the source mobile terminal, and executing step B; B, encapsulating a location identifier according to an identity identifier in the first data message, and acquiring a second data message; forwarding the second data message to a destination access router connected to the destination mobile terminal according to the location identifier in the second data message; and C, the destination access router stripping out the location identifier encapsulation in the second data message to return the second data message to the first data message, and forwarding the first data message to the destination mobile terminal. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016665 | Method and Apparatus for Employing an Indication of Stored Temporary Information During Redirection - A method for employing an indication of stored temporary information during redirection may include receiving a temporary stored information indicator from a mobile terminal indicating that the mobile terminal stores a system information container comprising temporary information, and determining whether to replace the temporary information with non-temporary information based on reception of the temporary stored information indicator. Alternatively, the method may include receiving a system information container for at least one target cell, storing the system information container, and generating a temporary stored information indicator at a mobile terminal indicating that the mobile terminal stores the system information container comprising temporary information. Corresponding apparatuses and computer program products are also provided. | 01-17-2013 |
20130021965 | ENHANCED CAPABILITIES AND EFFICIENT BANDWIDTH UTILIZATION FOR ISSI-BASED PUSH-TO-TALK OVER LTE - For voice traffic over-the-air in LTE, persistent schedule (PS) or semi-persistent (SPS) scheduling would be the preferred method as they minimize signaling messages. In PS or SPS, resources are pre-allocated to the UE | 01-24-2013 |
20130021966 | Method and Apparatus for Estimating Frequency Deviation - The invention provides a method and an apparatus for estimating frequency deviation, the method comprising: after receiving a sub-frame, transforming a downlink synchronized code of the sub-frame to a frequency domain, and performing a correlation operation between the transformed downlink synchronized code and a local frequency domain synchronized code to obtain a conjugate downlink synchronized code sequence; judging a location of a maximum value in the conjugate downlink synchronized code sequence, and calculating a frequency deviation value according to the location of the maximum value. The estimating method provided in the invention can realize a stable work with no need of a precise sampling value location, an accurate timing synchronization, or even obtaining the information for the multi-path distribution and locations. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021967 | LOW POWER RADIO DEVICE AND RADIO RESOURCE SHARING METHOD FOR LOW POWER RADIO DEVICE - A low power radio device and a radio resource sharing method for the low power radio device are provided. In the low power radio device, a channel state (CS) is detected by carrier sensing before transmission of each frame to reduce interference and a need of retransmission of each frame, accordingly, reducing energy consumption. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021968 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BANDWIDTH AGGREGATION FOR IP FLOW - A method and apparatus for bandwidth aggregation for an Internet protocol (IP) flow are disclosed. A sender may split IP packets on a single IP flow, and transmit the IP packets to a receiver via at least two interfaces. The sender splitting the IP packets over multiple interfaces may not send any signaling to the receiver. Alternatively, the sender may send information to the receiver for configuring distribution of the IP packets over multiple interfaces. The information may be carried on a binding update message, a binding acknowledgement message, or a binding refresh request message. The IP packets may be split and transmitted by a logical interface that sits between an IP layer and a layer | 01-24-2013 |
20130021969 | Method of Performing Retransmissions via Different Transmission Points and Related Communication Device - A method of performing a retransmission of a packet from a plurality of transmission points in a wireless communication system to a mobile device of the wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises transmitting the packet from a first transmission point of the plurality transmission points to the mobile device in a first transmission; and transmitting the packet from a second transmission point of the plurality transmission points to the mobile device in a second transmission, after transmitting the packet from the first transmission point in the first transmission, wherein the first transmission point and the second transmission point are different transmission points. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021970 | GROUP BASED MOBILITY OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND DEVICE IN MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATION - The present invention relates to a method and device of performing Tracking Area Update TAU for a group of Machine-Type Communication MTC devices in a communication network. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the group comprises a first MTC device and at least one second MTC device that have the same group ID and location information, the communication network comprises an old Mobility Management Entity MME and a new Mobility Management Entity MME before and after TAU, respectively, for providing mobility management to the group of MTC devices, and the method comprises: after the new MME receives a TAU request about the first MTC device, obtaining a context of the first MTC device from the old MME; the new MME checking the context of the first MTC device to find the group ID of the group; and if the group ID is included in the context of the first MTC device, the new MME utilizing the group ID to obtain from the old MME a context of the at least one second MTC device. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021971 | ALLOWING A REJECTED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE ACCESS TO A COMMUNICATION CHANNEL - Devices, systems, articles of manufacture, and methods for allowing a rejected wireless communication device access to a communication channel are described. According to some embodiments, a message that includes a wait state override indicator is generated. The message is transmitted to the wireless communication device. A communication channel is established with the wireless communication device based on the wait state override indicator. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021972 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZED HANDLING OF CONTEXT USING HIERARCHICAL GROUPING (FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATIONS) - A hierarchical data structure for signaling and data handling at a packet core network is defined. A hierarchical data structure is applied to both persistent and dynamic information to support a type of devices that share the same characteristics. Subscription database, context information, and policy rule information is comprised of group level information and device level information. Group level information contains the information the devices that belong to the group share. Device level information contains the device specific information that is different from group level information. When a device belonging to a group requests access to a packet network or performs a procedure that changes the mobility or session state of the device, context management unit works with authentication unit, subscription database unit, and policy decision unit to construct a right information for the device to handle the control and user data traffic. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021973 | CELL IDENTIFIER ENCODING AND DECODING METHODS AND APPARATUS - In an embodiment, a wireless communication system ( | 01-24-2013 |
20130021974 | REVERSE LINK FEEDBACK FOR INTERFERENCE CONTROL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that provide techniques for generating and utilizing reverse link feedback for interference management in a wireless communication system. Channel quality and/or interference data can be obtained by a terminal from a serving sector and one or more neighboring sectors, from which an interference-based headroom value can be computed that contains interference caused by the terminal to an allowable range. The interference-based headroom value can then be provided with power amplifier (PA) headroom feedback to the serving sector. Based on the provided feedback from the terminal, the serving sector can assign resources for use by the terminal in communication with the serving sector. Further, the serving sector may choose to honor or disregard a received interference-based power value based on quality of service and/or other system parameters. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021975 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION STATION AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATING STATION-CAPABILITY INFORMATION - Embodiments of a wireless communication station and methods for communication station-capability information are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a first wireless communications station is configured to wirelessly communicate a station-capability information element (IE). The station-capability IE included in at least one item selected from a list of items consisting of an association between the first station and a second station, an information-request action frame, and an information-response action frame. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021976 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCURATE TIME SYNCHRONIZATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for time synchronization and an OFDMA receiver thereof are provided. A preamble timing is obtained by a two-stage correlation in a time domain between a sequence of a received symbol and a reference preamble. The two-stage correlation is further simplified to perform a conjugate multiplication between a one-stage correlation and its correspondingly delayed result. A preamble boundary is adaptively determined by a peak value based on a result of the two-stage correlation. In this way, the time synchronization is achieved with a robust performance in a low SNR, high frequency offset or large delay spread fading channel. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021977 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTEGER FREQUENCY OFFSET ESTIMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing time synchronization and an OFDMA receiver thereof are provided. The method preferably includes performing a differential phase correlation in a frequency domain based on one received sequence and one reference preamble and detecting an integer frequency offset based on a result of the differential phase correlation. The method and apparatus advantageously enable the use of one OFDM symbol to estimate ICFO and the use of a simple method to facilitate ICFO detection. Moreover, the performance of the integer frequency offset estimation becomes more robust in high noise and time-variant fading channels, with reduced hardware complexity. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021978 | GATEWAY DEVICE, BASE STATION, MOBILE MANAGEMENT SERVER, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A gateway device connects a base station to a core network. The gateway device has a communication unit that receives, from a mobile management server in the core network, a key that cancels ciphering that was set in an NAS message that was received from a terminal that is subordinate to the base station. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021979 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for performing random access in a wireless communication system. According to one embodiment of the present invention, the method comprises acquiring a time adjustment value for acquiring uplink timing via the representative CC in an uplink timing group which is set up by a predetermined condition; and updating the time adjustment value for the relevant uplink timing group by using the acquired time adjustment value. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021980 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention provides various methods for transmitting channel state information relative to one or more serving cells in a carrier-coupled environment, and devices for supporting the same. As one embodiment of the present invention, a method for reporting channel state information (CSI) in a wireless access system that supports carrier coupling comprises the steps of: allowing a terminal to receive information related to a CSI report mode for one or more serving cells from a base station; and allowing the terminal to report the channel state information (CSI) on the one or more serving cells to the base station by considering the CSI report mode. In this case, if first type CSI for a first serving cell and second type CSI for a second serving cell are transmitted on the same subframe, the terminal can report CSI for one serving cell only, to the base station, according to priorities of CSI report types related to the CSI report mode. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021981 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COORDINATED MOBILE STATION, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND RECEPTION METHOD - A base station (BS) which communicates with a plurality of mobile stations (MSs) is configured so as to comprise a control signal generation unit which generates control signals showing information on the allocation of resources for each of the plurality of mobile stations (MSs), and a transmission unit which transmits the control signals to the plurality of mobile stations (MSs). A control signal for a given mobile station (MS) includes information relating to another mobile station (MS). | 01-24-2013 |
20130021982 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PACKET RETRANSMISSION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a packet retransmission method of a terminal accessing a base station in contention-based access mode, and the method includes transmitting an uplink packet to the base station; receiving, when the base station fails decoding the uplink packet, a retransmission request message transmitted by the base station; and initiating, when the retransmission request message is received, a Radio Link Control (RLC) retransmission. According to the present invention, the terminal operating in contention-based access mode initiates RLC retransmission in reception of an HARQ NACK from the base station. Accordingly, it is possible to perform the RLC retransmission immediately without necessity of waiting for the expiry of HARQ RTT as in the HARQ retransmission, resulting in reduction of packet retransmission delay. | 01-24-2013 |
20130028176 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION OF DATA PACKETS BASED ON CLIENT ASSOCIATIONS - Techniques are provided for wireless transmission of data packets based on client associations. A data packet may be received at a wireless access point. It may be determined if at least one client associated with the wireless access point should receive the data packet. The data packet may be wirelessly transmitted if it is determined that there is a client that is associated with the wireless access point that should receive the data packet. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028177 | Network Controlled Filtering Over Wireless Device Communications - There is stored in a memory an association between each n | 01-31-2013 |
20130028178 | WIRELESS LONG TERM EVOLUTION RADIO ARCHITECTURE SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method for providing a radio architecture for a long term evolution (LTE) communication system is disclosed. According to one aspect, a radio provides power pooling and direct up-conversion of signals to be transmitted. Power pooling is provided by adjusting the gain and phase of each of a plurality of carrier signals in a digital matrix based on feedback signals received from an analog matrix, such that the output signals are coupled to one or more selected radio output ports. Direct up-conversion is achieved by up-sampling and filtering the carrier signals to be transmitted. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028179 | Methods and Apparatus for Supporting the Implementation of IMS Service Continuity - According to a first embodiment of the present invention there is provided a method of operating a node of a communications network that is configured to provide an IP Multimedia Subsystem Access Transfer Control Function. The method comprises storing information regarding IMS Service Continuity features that are supported by Mobile Switching Center servers within the network. Upon receipt of a message requesting IMS registration of a user equipment using the information to determine the IMS Service Continuity features that may be available to the user equipment, and, for any IMS Service Continuity features that may be available, including an indication that the IMS Service Continuity feature may be available in the message, and forwarding the message towards a Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028180 | Method and system for access and uplink power control for a wireless system having multiple transmit points - A method and system for access and uplink power control for a wireless system having multiple transmit points. In one aspect a method operating in a wireless network having a plurality of transmission points (TP) including a macro evolved Node B (eNB) and at least one low power node (LPN) having transmit power lower than that of the macro eNB, the method detecting, by the user equipment, a transmission point having a lowest path loss to the user equipment; and transmitting, by the user equipment, a physical random access channel (PRACH) preamble on a PRACH directed to the transmission points having the lowest path losses. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028181 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING PARALLEL PROCESSING OF NETWORK PACKETS IN A WIRELESS ACCESS DEVICE - A system for managing parallel processing of network packets is also provided. A wireless access device that includes multiple transceivers and multiple processing units receives network packets. A media access controller determines which transceiver a received network packet is associated with. A tagging module determines whether the transceiver associated with the received network packet is bound to one of the processing units. In response to a determination that the transceiver is bound, a scheduler assigns the received packet to the processing unit the transceiver is bound to. In response to a determination that the transceiver is not bound, the tagging module binds the transceiver to a processing unit such that the processing unit processes network packets associated with the transceiver while the transceiver is bound to the processing unit, and the scheduler assigns the received network packet to the processing unit the transceiver is bound to. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028182 | IMPLICITLY LINKING APERIODIC CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (A-CSI) REPORTS TO CSI-REFERENCE SIGNAL (CSI-RS) RESOURCES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for implicitly linking aperiodic channel state information (A-CSI) reports to CSI-reference signal (CSI-RS) resources. In an aspect, the UE may be instructed to report on specific CSI-RS resource(s) via explicit signaling in the UE grant. Other aspects disclose techniques for implicit CSI-RS resource selection by the UE that require fewer signaling resources. Instead of explicitly signaling CSI-RS resources to the UE, the UE may implicitly select CSI-RS resource for CSI feedback reporting based on information known to the UE, e.g. a subframe on which a reporting request is received. This may reduce the impact of the additional signaling in the UE grant. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028183 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK MESSAGING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A multi-technology wireless communication system is provided that comprises a packet data network and a circuit switched network and that routes circuit switched fallback (CSFB) messages associated with a user equipment operating in the packet data network based on a circuit switched network access network identifier that identifies an Interworking Solutions function (IWS) of the circuit switched network that serves the user equipment. The circuit switched network access network identifier is maintained by a Node B of the packet data network and is provided to a serving Mobility Management Entity (MME) of the packet data network when implementing CSFB for the UE. The MME then selects an IWS of the circuit switched network for a routing of CSFB messaging based on the IWS identified in the circuit switched network access network identifier. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028184 | MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a machine type communication system. The machine type communication system comprises a machine type communication terminal and a machine type communication server. The machine type communication terminal may be applied to a navigation of a vehicle, a sensor network of a bridge, and the like, to transmit data to the machine type communication server using a wireless network. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028185 | Method of Handling Uplink Timing and Related Communication Device - A method of handling an uplink (UL) timing of a timing advance (TA) group for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises maintaining the UL timing of the TA group, if a time alignment timer of the TA group does not expire; and stopping maintaining the UL timing of the TA group, when at least one secondary cell in the TA group is deactivated and the time alignment timer of the TA group does not expire, wherein the at least one secondary cell is configured to the mobile device by a network of the wireless communication system. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028186 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR BEAMFORMING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for generating a frame for communication using beamforming in a wireless communication system are provided. A method for transmitting a signal in a transmitting stage includes determining a beam change time of a region for transmitting information in a frame, and transmitting the information to a receiving stage over the region for transmitting the information by considering the beam change time. The frame includes a plurality of regions divided based on a type of the information transmitted to the receiving stage, and the plurality of the regions includes different beam change times. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028187 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - During a transition procedure from a first communication system to a second communication system, when the priority of a second communication call, whose setup is requested, is the first priority, the second communication system does not set up the bearer of a first communication call between the second communication system and the mobile communication terminal, and notifies the first communication system that the setup of the first communication is not possible, but the setup of the second communication call is possible. When notified that the setup of the first communication is not possible, but the setup of the second communication call is possible, the first communication system aborts the handover procedure, and instructs the mobile communication terminal to switch to the second communication system by another procedure. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028188 | PACKET TRANSFERRING METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION - In a mobile Communication system which includes a base station controller, a plurality of radio base stations connected to the base station controller, and a mobile station simultaneously communicable with the plurality of radio base stations, the base station controller transfers a packet through the plurality of radio base stations to the mobile station. The mobile Station receives the packet as a plurality of reception packets through the plurality of radio base stations. The mobile station includes a controller that selects, among the plurality of reception packets supplied from the plurality of radio base stations, a best quality packet as a selected packet and sends, if the selected packet includes an error portion, a retransmission request to one of the plurality of base stations that sent the selected packet in order to request retransmission of a correct portion corresponding to the error portion. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028189 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING PHYSICAL LAYER ERROR CONTROL TO DIRECT MEDIA ACCESS LAYER ERROR CONTROL - In a system in which both the media access layer and the physical layer use error control, information from the physical layer error control process is used to provide surrogate media access layer error control messaging. In one aspect, the physical layer error control state machine in the transmitting station sends the surrogate message internally to the media access layer error control state machine based on physical layer error control results, thereby eliminating a need to transmit the error control messaging from the media access layer error control state machine of the receiving station over the wireless link. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028190 | MANAGING SERVICE PROVIDER MESSAGING - A system and method for management of service plan modification information between various service providers and telecommunications-based devices are provided. A service management component manages subscriber and service plan information for processing service plan modification requests from a service provider and a mobile device of a subscriber. The service management component processes updated service plan information provided by a service provider component and dynamically offers the updated services to subscribers. The service management component also enables subscribers to modify aspects of their service plans and have the modifications take effect immediately. The service management component maintains various data stores associated with subscriber information and service plan information that facilitate the offer of updated service plans, including service plan features and rule sets, received from a service provider component to subscribers at corresponding mobile devices. The service management component manages a framework that allows management of the updated service plan information. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028191 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF COMMUNICATION - An improved aperiodic downlink channel quality reporting in a radio communication system utilizing carrier aggregation is disclosed. In the radio communication system, a number of downlink component carriers can be aggregated for communication between, a network node and a User Equipment (UE). The invention is characterized in that a set of downlink component carriers is determined from the number of downlink component carriers, a downlink control channel for the UE is arranged to include information being usable for identifying at least one downlink component carrier of the set of downlink component carriers, and a channel quality report is to be provided for each one of the at least one identified downlink component carrier. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028192 | Method, User Equipment and Base Station for Transmitting Uplink Control Information - The disclosure discloses a method for transmitting uplink control information. The method includes: receiving, by a user equipment, a carrier activation command or a carrier deactivation command in a downlink subframe n; updating a first downlink activated carrier set according to the received carrier activation command or the carrier deactivation command into a second downlink activated carrier set; taking the second downlink activated carrier set as a current downlink activated carrier set corresponding to a first uplink subframe which belongs to a subframe set of an uplink subframe n+k and uplink subframe(s) after the uplink subframe n+k; sorting X piece(s) of Uplink Control Information (UCI) corresponding to X downlink carrier(s) according to a sorting rule, and transmitting the sorted X pieces of UCI to a base station in the first uplink subframe. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028193 | ACCESS FEEDBACK BY A MULTIMODE TERMINAL - A method for providing access feedback when a User Equipment, UE, with an established a connection over multiple accesses towards a Gateway, GW, initiates a set-up of a new service for a service session. The method comprises a step where the GW or a Policy and Charging Rules Function, PCRF, initiates a Quality of Service, QoS, resource reservation as a response of the set-up of the new service initiated by the UE. The GW or the PCRF in the QoS resource reservation selects a first access as present access. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028194 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a signal from a base station to a user equipment in a distributed antenna system (DAS) comprises equally broadcasting DA common broadcast information, which includes information required for initial access, into a cell through a plurality of DA groups of the base station; and independently broadcasting DA specific broadcast information, which includes information on the number of antennas of each DA group, through each DA group of the base station, wherein the DA group includes one or more DAs. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028195 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR KEEPING SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY SESSION ALIVE - A method and system are provided for keeping a single radio voice call continuity session alive. The method comprises, during switching of a terminal from a packet switch domain to a circuit switch domain, an application layer gateway establishing a new signaling connection with an enhanced mobile switch center after receiving a first transfer request and notifying a service centralization and continuity application server (SCC AS) to establish a new signaling connection with the application layer gateway, and the SCC AS establishing a new signaling connection with the application layer gateway according to the notification. Using the technical scheme of the method and system provided, the problem of call interruption due to a UE being unable to perform IMS re-registration in a destination domain in a single radio voice call continuity process in the prior art is solved. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028196 | Method and System for Obtaining User Equipment Ability by User Equipment, Home Subscriber Data Server and Core Network Element - The present invention discloses user equipment, a home subscriber data server (HSS) and a method and system for obtaining user equipment ability by a core network element. Wherein, the method for obtaining user equipment ability by the core network element includes: in and/or after the IP multimedia network subsystem (IMS) registration process, the home subscriber data server (HSS) informing the IMS network element of the ability information of user equipment (UE). The HSS is enabled to obtain the user equipment ability information in present invention, and can provide services for various operations of subscribers. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028197 | Method for Updating and Managing Synchronization Identifier by using Release Messages or Status Request and Response - A method for communicating additional network information using a synchronization identifier is presented. A synchronization identifier is defined. The synchronization identifier is used for the purpose of synchronizing communication between a Mobile Station (MS) and a network. In addition, the synchronization identifier is used to define additional functionality in the wireless network. As such, the synchronization identifier may be used to communicate information about wireless services and/or wireless components between the MS and the network. | 01-31-2013 |
20130034051 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION PAGING OF A MOBILE TERMINAL IN AN IDLE STATE - A method and apparatus are provided for reliably paging a mobile terminal in the idle mode, even in an instance in which the mobile terminal is subjected to interference from a CSG cell. In this regard, a method is provided that includes causing an indication of an inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) paging period to be provided to the mobile terminal. The indication of the ICIC paging period includes an ICIC paging period T | 02-07-2013 |
20130034052 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication apparatus can perform data communication by the use of a first radio access network and a second radio access network. When a receiving section detects during time for which a processor is in a suspend state that the mobile communication apparatus moves out of a coverage area of the first radio access network, the receiving section releases the suspend state of the processor. When the suspend state of the processor is released as a result of detecting that the mobile communication apparatus moves out of the coverage area of the first radio access network, the control section establishes a connection to the second radio access network by the use of the processor. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034053 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCALABLE INFORMATION PACKETIZATION AND AGGREGATION FOR INFORMATION TRANSMISSION IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Information communication in a communication network comprises organizing information based on importance levels of the information. The information is aggregated in a packet based on said organization for transmission over a communication medium. Aggregating the information includes placing the information in the packet utilizing a scalable packet structure based on said organization. Information for a packet is partitioned based on information type, and organized in an aggregated packet in a pyramid format. Information in a packet can be organized/coded in a two-dimensional pyramid format for forwarding information from one or more communication devices. A first dimension includes information importance level and a second dimension includes device priorities based on a distance calculation. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034054 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FORMATTING CYCLIC PREFIX/POSTFIX IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and transmitter, the method generating a burst containing a first data portion and a second data portion surrounding a training sequence; and appending to the burst a cyclic prefix and a cyclic postfix. Further a receiver on a network element, the receiver configured to: receive a burst containing a cyclic prefix, a cyclic postfix and a data portion; remove at least one of the cyclic prefix or the cyclic postfix; transform the data portion with a discrete Fourier transform; estimate the channel frequency response and modulation of the burst; undo an effect of a channel on the data portion by using the estimated channel frequency response of the channel on the transformed data; use an inverse discrete Fourier transform on the result of the equalizing step; and further process the output of the equalization step to decode the transmitted bits. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034055 | INTERWORKING FUNCTION BETWEEN IN AND HLR/HSS - A Core Network for data transmission in an Evolved Packet System (EPS) includes: one or more node(s) serving as a Home Location Register (HLR) according to a GSM/UMTS mobile communication network standard; a node serving as a Home Subscriber Server (HSS) according to 3GPP standards; and an Interworking Function (IWF) for the handling of messages exchanged between a signalling layer of the Core Network and the one or more node(s) serving as the Home Location Register (HLR) as well as the node serving as the Home Subscriber Server (HSS). The Core Network is arranged such that for an exchange of information between the signalling layer and the Interworking Function (IWF), an Intelligent Network (IN) or an Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) is used. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034056 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION SIGNAL - The present invention is provided to, when there is a PUSCH signal to transmit in the same subframe as a UCI signal, make the method of transmitting uplink control information in the LTE system adaptable to a broader system band and increase in transmission layers only by minor changes. A UCI signal is generated to a base station apparatus ( | 02-07-2013 |
20130034057 | POSITION MANAGING APPARATUS, PACKET GATEWAY APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - When a connecting destination base station apparatus included in a message including an identifier of a base station apparatus serving as a connecting destination of a mobile station apparatus is different from a connecting source base station apparatus stored in an EPS bearer context, rearrangement of local PDN connection is requested to an L-PGW unit of the connecting destination base station apparatus and local PDN connection is deleted. After establishment of a wireless bearer is completed between the mobile station apparatus and the connecting destination base station apparatus, the connecting destination base station apparatus is instructed to start proxy transmission of neighbor advertisement instead of the mobile station apparatus. In base stations that support local IP access, when UE performs service request processing or handover processing between home base stations, it is possible to continue communication session using local IP access while suppressing alterations to existing system to the minimum. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034058 | Method and system for selecting and establishing a direct interface - A method for selecting and establishing a direct interface is provided. The method includes: when a target network element accesses a network element of a core network (CN) via a target gateway, a source side or a target side selects to establish a direct interface with the target gateway and/or the target network element. A system for selecting and establishing a direct interface is also provided. The system includes a selection and establishment unit for, when the target network element accesses the network element of the CN via the target gateway, selecting to establish the direct interface with the target gateway and/or the target network element by the source side or the target side. Use of the method and system in the present invention can realize establishment of an optional direct interface, so that a plurality of direct interface schemes can be selected. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034059 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and apparatus in which user equipment performs random access procedures in a wireless communication system. More particularly, an embodiment is provided in which a first type backoff parameter and a second type backoff parameter are provided from a base station. The backoff parameter is transmitted from the base station before the user equipment transmits a first random access preamble to the base station. The first type backoff parameter and the second type backoff parameter are included in a random access response. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034060 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING EMPS IN A CSFB MECHANISM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, an apparatus, and a system for processing an eMPS in a CSFB mechanism. The method in the embodiment of the present invention mainly includes: receiving a CSFB access request of a user equipment; determining that the user equipment has a CSFB priority service right according to acquired priority service information of the user equipment; and providing a CSFB access service preferentially for the user equipment with the CSFB priority service right. | 02-07-2013 |
20130039266 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO INCREASE LINK ADAPTATION PERFORMANCE WITH MULTI-LEVEL FEEDBACK - A method and apparatus for explicit adaptive modulation and coding scheme selection, the method receiving, at a mobile device, a transport block targeted to the mobile device, and if a quality of the received transport block exceeds a threshold, providing an acknowledgment or negative acknowledgment to a network element; and if the quality of the received transport block is below the threshold, suppressing the acknowledgment or negative acknowledgement. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039267 | Method and System for Implementing Single Radio Voice Call Continuity - The present invention discloses a method and a system for implementing single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC), and said method includes: an ALG sending number information and/or identifier information if the ALG to a SCAS via a signaling message; said SCAS judging whether the number information and/or identifier information of the ALG are identical with the last used REFER number information or not, and if not, said SCAS notifying a PS or CS network control entity of the number information and/or identifier information of the ALG; alternatively, said SCAS notifying the PS or CS network control entity of the number and/or identifier information of the ALG. The present invention implements to dynamically select the ALG as a REFER operation entity to implement SRVCC, and solves the problem that a REFER request cannot be sent to an appropriate ALG since this ALG cannot be dynamically determined. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039268 | Method and System for Signaling in a Heterogeneous Network - A method at a network element operating in a wireless network, wherein the network element is configured to transmit a default cell search signal at a default position in one or more subframes, the method comprising transmitting, by the network element, an auxiliary cell search signal in addition to the default cell search signal. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039269 | Methods, Apparatus and Wireless Device for Transmitting and Receiving Data Blocks - A wireless transmitter transmits a plurality of data blocks defined in a transmission window for receipt by a receiver. The transmitter transmits a status request to the receiver for positive acknowledgement of successful receipt of the status request, the status request identifying a data block. The transmitter updates the transmission window upon receipt of a positive acknowledgement of receipt of a data block or upon receipt of a positive acknowledgement of receipt of a status request relating to a data block. The updating removes the record of the data block from the transmission window and adds a record of at least one different data block to the transmission window. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039270 | DATA PACKET TRANSMISSION PROCESS IN A LINK ADAPTATION TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM BASED ON A HARQ PROTOCOL FOR OPTIMISING TRANSMISSION POWER - The invention relates to a data packet transmission process in a communication system comprising at least one terminal (UE) communicating with a base station (BS), the process comprising at least one transmission (S | 02-14-2013 |
20130039271 | MODULAR WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE - In view of the above, a wireless network access device is provided. In an example implementation, the wireless network access device includes a radio interface having a plurality of individually addressable radio paths for providing a connection to corresponding radio modules. Each radio module includes a radio configured to communicate with client devices in a corresponding coverage area. Each radio module is configured to operate independently of the other radio modules. A network interface is included to provide data network access. The wireless network access device includes a processor to manage communication between the client devices that communicate with the radio modules and a data network via the radio interface and the network interface when the wireless local area network device includes at least one connected radio module. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039272 | METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION AND BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT USING THE SAME - A method for data transmission, a base station using the same and a user equipment (UE) using the same are provided. According to an exemplary embodiment, the present disclosure provides a method of data transmission, adapted for a user equipment (UE), the method contains the steps of receiving from a base station signaling comprising a sub-frame which comprises a control region and a data region; decoding from the data region a first transport block indicated by a first downlink assignment from the control region; and decoding the first transport block to obtain a first control information, wherein the first control information includes a downlink assignment, an uplink grant, or an extended control region indicator. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039273 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING A MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT HAVING A FRAGMENTATION AND PACKING EXTENDED HEADER - The present invention relates to a method in which a receiver receives an MAC (medium access control) PDU (protocol data unit) in a wireless communication system. The method in which the receiver receives an MAC PDU comprises the following steps: receiving an MAC PDU containing a header and a payload from a transmitter, wherein the header includes a first extended header containing a first length field which indicates the length of a service data unit (hereinafter, referred to as “SDU”) or lengths of fragmented SDUs in the MAC PDU; decoding the header; and determining whether the size of the first length field in the extended header is an extended size or a basic size in accordance with the results of decoding. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039274 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING STATISTIC INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH RANDOM ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for reporting statistic information associated with random access procedure and back-off process are provided. The method proposes a number of back-off interval reporting modes. The reporting modes include the first mode in which a sequence indicating every back-off interval applied during the back-off process is reported, the second mode in which a total sum of the every back-off interval applied during the back-off process is reported, the third mode in which an average of the every back-off interval applied during the back-off process is reported, and the fourth mode in which a variance of the every back-off interval applied during the back-off process is reported. The reporting information is transmitted via RRC signaling. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039275 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING ACCESS POINT SERVICE CAPABILITIES - A method for determining access point service capabilities may include identifying, at a mobile terminal, an access point to which the mobile terminal is capable of establishing a connection, determining, prior to authentication between the mobile terminal and the access point, whether the access point supports a particular service or connection, and enabling a connection determination to be made at the mobile terminal regarding whether to connect to the access point based on whether the access point supports the particular service or connection. A corresponding computer program product and apparatuses are also provided. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039276 | HOME GATEWAY - In a home gateway including an in-home radio base station and the like, a technique not only has a relay function but also enables information useful for a user to be obtained. A home gateway including an in-home radio base station includes a wireless communication section, a wired communication section, and an application execution section. To perform relaying, the in-home radio base station uses first and second protocol stacks. To transmit and receive data to and from a wireless terminal, the in-home radio base station uses a third protocol stack including the first protocol stack and an application layer. To transmit and receive data to and from a PDN, the in-home radio base station uses a fourth protocol stack including the second protocol stack and an application layer. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039277 | MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION EVENT REPORTING METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - Disclosed in the present invention are a Machine Type Communication event reporting method, device and system. The method includes: a mobility management network element acquires identifier information of an MTC server corresponding to an MTC device from a user subscription server; the mobility management network element sends the identifier information to an MTC event reporting entity; and the MTC event reporting entity reports an MTC event of the MTC device to the MTC server corresponding to the identifier information. By way of the present invention, the MTC event report can be sent to a correct MTC server, so that the MTC server can effectively monitor the MTC device. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039278 | PROTOCOL OVERHEAD REDUCTION - Apparatuses and methods may include receiving a data flow comprising a plurality of packets, identifying static data and dynamic data in packet headers of the plurality of packets, generating a plurality of protocol packets by removing the static data from the packet headers while retaining the dynamic data, generating signaling data based on the static data, and generating a transport stream comprising the signaling data and the protocol each data flow packets. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039279 | System, Method, and Device for Routing Calls Using a Distributed Mobile Architecture - A method includes transmitting communications information from a first DMA gateway of a DMA gateway communication network to a second DMA gateway of the DMA gateway communication network. The communications information is associated with a communication network that is accessible to the first DMA gateway. The method includes receiving a communication from the second DMA gateway via the DMA gateway communication network. The communication network and the DMA communication network are different. The communication is associated with a destination device that is indicated by the communications information to be served by the communication network that is accessible to the first DMA gateway. The method includes routing the communication to the destination device | 02-14-2013 |
20130039280 | METHOD, NODE, AND SYSTEM FOR NOTIFYING PROXY UPDATE IN WMN - Embodiments of the present invention disclose Wireless Mesh Network (WMN) for notifying proxy update. By constructing the proxy update add message, where the proxy update add message includes the address of terminal, the current proxy node address after terminal switching and the destination node address of the terminal, and taking the address of the original proxy node before terminal switching as the address of the destination node, and sending the proxy update add message constructed to the original proxy node, where the proxy update add message is used for updating proxy information of the terminal in the proxy information table of the original proxy node to be the current proxy node address. It makes sure that packets received by the original proxy node which should be sent to the terminal could be received by the terminal, and packet loss rate during terminal switching could be reduced. | 02-14-2013 |
20130044678 | System and Method for Reducing Interference - A system and method for reducing interference are provided. A method for communications controller operations in a multi-carrier system includes generating information for a broadcast channel, preparing the information for transmission, selecting a location for an unoccupied subcarrier from a plurality of available locations, and placing the prepared information into a plurality of contiguous subcarriers, where the plurality of contiguous subcarriers includes the unoccupied subcarrier and a plurality of other subcarriers. The method also includes transmitting the plurality of contiguous subcarriers. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044679 | System and Methods for Handling an IP Dual-Stack Connection - In a mobile device operative in a packet switched wireless network, the control logic for handling the PS connection resides inside the modem part of the device when dual-stack operation is required (e.g., PDN connections having PDN types IPv4 and IPv6). This effectively hides how dual-stack IPv4v6 connectivity is implemented towards the relevant 3GPP network. Further, the modem always only uses one and only one network interface, as seen from the IP stack, when it operates in dual-stack mode, regardless of how the underlying PDN connection(s) are set up. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044680 | MANAGING TRANSMIT POWER FOR BETTER FREQUENCY RE-USE IN TV WHITE SPACE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for managing transmit power in a television white space (TVWS) network. By managing transmit power as described herein, medium re-use may be improved in such a network, and unfair usage problems may be alleviated. One example method generally includes receiving, from an apparatus, a message with an indication of a highest transmit power used by the apparatus for transmitting data frames; and determining that the apparatus is a dominant interferer based, at least in part, on the highest transmit power. Another example method generally includes receiving, from an apparatus, a control or management message with a first indication of a first transmit power used by the apparatus for transmitting data frames; and determining that the apparatus is a dominant interferer based, at least in part, on the first transmit power. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044681 | MANAGING TRANSMIT POWER FOR BETTER FREQUENCY RE-USE IN TV WHITE SPACE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for managing transmit power in a television white space (TVWS) network. By managing transmit power as described herein, medium re-use may be improved in such a network, and unfair usage problems may be alleviated. One example method generally includes receiving a request message comprising an indication of a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for transmitting data frames to be received, determining a link margin based on the MCS, and transmitting a response message with an indication of the link margin. Another example method generally includes determining a MCS for transmitting data frames and transmitting a request message comprising an indication of the MCS. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044682 | PMIP PROTOCOL ENHANCEMENT - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards determining a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol version 6 (PIMPv6) control plane used by a network node peer in an Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) transport network. The example embodiments provide a mechanism in PMIP protocol stack, to allow a Mobility Access Gateway/Local Mobility Anchor (MAG/LMA) node such as SGW (which may be supporting both PMIP draft and PMIP RFC) to decide which PMIP protocol stack shall be used to communicate to the peer node, i.e. LMA/MAG. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044683 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DOWNLINK MULTIUSER MIMO TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A base station transmits to a number of relay stations in a wireless network using a beamforming matrix. The beamforming matrix is generated by first obtaining a column vector from a beamforming matrix associated with each of the relay stations. An intermediate matrix is then generated using these column vectors. A zero-forcing procedure is then utilized to process the intermediate network to generate the final beamforming matrix. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044684 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION PATH BETWEEN MULTIPLE DIGITAL UNITS AND MULTIPLE RADIO FREQUENCY UNITS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a communication path control apparatus for controlling a communication path between a plurality of DUs and a plurality of RFUs, and a plurality of antennas included in the plurality of RFUs and a wireless communication system including the communication path control apparatus. Each of the plurality of DUs, the plurality of RFUs, and the plurality of antennas has a unique identifier, and the path control apparatus controls paths between the plurality of DUs and the plurality of RFUs based on identifiers. Accordingly, the wireless communication system can transmit and receive a signal through a specific RFU and a specific antenna included in a specific RFU and performs the next-generation wireless BS operation method, such as CoMP and multi-BS MIMO. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044685 | Reference Signal for a Coordinated Multi-Point Network Implementation - A system and method for broadcasting a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) is disclosed. A CSI-RS that is orthogonal to CSI-RSs transmitted by each of a first network cell and each of a set of neighbor cells that interfere with the first network cell is identified. In one implementation, the first network cell has a coverage containing a coverage of a second network cell. The method includes transmitting, from the second network cell, the CSI-RS that is orthogonal to CSI-RSs transmitted by each of the first network cell and each of a set of interfering neighbor cells. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044686 | CARRIER AGGREGATION WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD THEREOF - A carrier aggregation wireless network system and a base station (BS), a wireless communication device, and a synchronization method thereof are disclosed. The wireless communication device receives a wireless signal from the BS. The wireless signal includes a primary cell (pcell) and a secondary cell (scell). A subframe of the scell includes a first OFDM symbol and a second OFDM symbol. The first OFDM symbol includes an extended primary synchronization signal (PSS). The second OFDM symbol includes a PSS. The scell includes a secondary synchronization signal (SSS). The wireless communication device acquires synchronization according to the extended PSS and/or the PSS. In addition, the wireless communication device may also acquire synchronization according to a cell ID, the PSS, and the SSS. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044687 | LONG RANGE WLAN DATA UNIT FORMAT - In a method for transmitting a data unit in a wireless communication network, a physical layer (PHY) preamble and a media access control layer (MAC) header are generated. In generating the MAC header, a first address field to include a first address and a second address field to include a second address are generated. The first, not globally unique, address indicates a communication device for which the data unit is intended or a communication device that is transmitting the data unit. The second address field indicates the other one of a communication device for which the data unit is intended or a communication device that is transmitting the data unit. The first address field and the second address field are included in the MAC header. The MAC header omits a globally unique address corresponding to the first address of the first address field. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044688 | LONG RANGE WLAN DATA UNIT FORMAT - In a method for generating a data unit for transmission in a wireless network, a physical layer (PHY) preamble is generated. A field to indicate whether an acknowledgment data unit is intended to follow the data unit is generated and included in the PHY preamble. A media access control layer (MAC) header is generated, and the data unit is generated to include the PHY preamble and the MAC header. The data unit is transmitted. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044689 | RANDOM ACCESS BURST TRANSMISSION SCHEME - An apparatus for transmitting and receiving signals in a wireless telecommunication system and to a method for transmitting random access bursts in such an apparatus. The apparatus includes a transmitter for transmitting random access bursts, a receiver for receiving acknowledgement information confirming a successful transmission of a random access burst, a decision unit for deciding if acknowledgement information has been received, and a control unit for randomly choosing a time point for an attempt to retransmit said random access burst from an interval if no acknowledgement information has been received after a random access burst had been transmitted. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044690 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING AN EVOLVED UTRAN - A method and system for supporting an evolved universal mobile telecommunication systems (UMTS) terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) are disclosed. The system includes a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), a UTRAN and an E-UTRAN. The UTRAN sends to the WTRU a list of available radio access technologies in a coverage area of the UTRAN. The list includes information related to the E-UTRAN. The WTRU receives the list and may initiate a handoff based on the list. The WTRU then sends its multi-mode/multi-RAT capability information including the E-UTRAN capability to the UTRAN. The UTRAN then sends a measurement capability message to the WTRU. The measurement capability message includes parameters necessary for performing measurements on an E-UTRAN channel. The WTRU performs measurements based on the measurement capability message and reports measurement results to the UTRAN. The UTRAN may initiate a handoff to the E-UTRAN based on the measurement results. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044691 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTELLIGENT DISCARD IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods for optimizing system performance of capacity and spectrum constrained, multiple-access communication systems by selectively discarding packets are provided. The systems and methods provided herein can drive changes in the communication system using control responses. One such control responses includes the optimal discard (also referred to herein as “intelligent discard”) of network packets under capacity constrained conditions. Some embodiments provide an interactive response by selectively discarding packets to enhance perceived and actual system throughput, other embodiments provide a reactive response by selectively discarding data packets based on their relative impact to service quality to mitigate oversubscription, others provide a proactive response by discarding packets based on predicted oversubscription, and others provide a combination thereof. | 02-21-2013 |
20130051313 | MULTIPLEXING MULTIPLE MOBILE SERVICES ON A SINGLE MOBILE ACCESS POINT NAME - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, for multiplexing multiple mobile services on a single mobile access point name (APN). A method includes, in a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) network, examining Internet Protocol (IP) packets that traverse a mobile GN link of a Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN), and applying a combination of packet protocols coupled with a carrier defined set of work flow rules to route the IP packets to their next destination and earmark billing CDRs for mediation and correlation by back office IT systems residing with a carrier in the mobile network. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051314 | DATA GATHERING FOR A NODE - Methods and systems are disclosed including a mobile device configured for initiating a communication session with a transceiver interface of a node that comprises a network interface. The node may be queried via the communication session for a status report associated with an error, and an instruction may be communicated to the node via the communication session instructing the node to perform an operation. Communication may be established with the wireless access point via the wireless network after communication of the instruction. The transceiver interface may be configured to communicate via a second network to address issues in the wide area network. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051321 | MULTIPLE DESCRIPTION CODING (MDC) FOR CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REFERENCE SIGNALS (CSI-RS) - Aspects of the present disclosure include a wireless system to reduce quantization error due to codebook-based PMI reporting by precoding channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) via a base station. The eNodeB varies the properties for a CSI-RS transmission in a known pattern and receives varying reports from the UE. The eNodeB can reconstruct the PMI with improved accuracy by combining multiple consecutive reports. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051322 | MULTI-POINT PUCCH ATTACHMENT - Various aspects of the present disclosure are directed to periodic over-the-air channel state information (CSI) reporting to serving cells and one or more non-serving cells via a control channel multi-point attachment. The channel state information report may be transmitted based on information indicating how to transmit the channel state information report to the non-serving cell. The information indicating how to transmit the channel state information report may be provided by the serving eNodeB. The information may include a periodicity, offset parameters, timing advance commands, power control commands, and/or an aperiodic report request. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051327 | Server in Charge of Control Plane Within Mobile Communication Network and Method for Controlling Service in Server - According to the present description, data of a user can be detoured (offloaded) to a wired network such as a public communication network even through a Home (e)NodeB. In addition, when the data of the user is detoured (offloaded) to the wired network such as the public communication network even through the Home (e)NodeB, a local IP access (LIPA) service can be selectively supported according to the user or a UE. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051328 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING A MULTI-BAND ACCESS POINT TO ASSOCIATE WITH A MULTI-BAND MOBILE STATION - A method and apparatus may be used for selecting one of a plurality of multi-band APs to associate with a multi-band WTRU. The multi-band APs may broadcast frequency band information regarding multiple frequency bands on which the multi-band AP is configured to operate. The multi-band WTRU may select a multi-band AP to associate with and a frequency band to use to communicate with the selected multi-band AP based on the frequency band information. The multi-band AP may transmit frequency band information from the that indicates that a characteristic, (e.g., throughput, path loss, load, capacity, backhaul), of the selected frequency band and disassociate with the multi-band WTRU or to continue to associate with the multi-band WTRU via a different frequency band. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051329 | RADIO EQUIPMENT AND RADIO BASE STATION - A useful technique for configuring radio equipment as networking radio equipment is provided. Networking radio equipment | 02-28-2013 |
20130058273 | STATION-CENTRIC MULTI-USER MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for using a Media Access Control (MAC) address of a station (STA) sending a direct link multi-user multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) transmission such that one or more STAs receiving the transmission may interpret a group identifier (ID) indicating a group to which the STAs belong. Using the group ID and the MAC address allows a STA to independently manage its group IDs, independent of an access point (AP) or other STAs in a Basic Service Set (BSS). | 03-07-2013 |
20130058274 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and system for distributing network access information by wireless network owner includes using information associated with the user of a mobile terminal to identify potential friends and colleagues that may need access to wireless networks owned or managed by friends and colleagues. The distribution process can be initiated by the candidate user or by the network operator. The information associated with the user can include the user's contacts list or information available from other sources, such as a social networking website. When a candidate is identified, the user's terminal or a server, on behalf the user, can send a communication to network operator requesting access to their wireless network access point. The friend or colleague can verify the pre-existing relationship by searching for the operator in a private database, such the friend or colleague's contacts list or by searching another database, such as a social networking website. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058275 | TRANSPORT OF MULTIHOMING SERVICE RELATED INFORMATION BETWEEN USER EQUIPMENT AND 3GPP EVOLVED PACKET CORE - In an embodiment, there is provided a method for the transport of multihoming service related information between User Equipment UE and 3GPP Evolved Packet Core EPC through untrusted non 3GPP Access Network, said method comprising a step of:
| 03-07-2013 |
20130058276 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALING SIDE INFORMATION FOR NETWORK CODING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for efficiently sending side information to support network coding in a wireless network are disclosed. A node may send a subset of packet identifiers (IDs) for received packets in order to reduce signaling overhead in support of network coding operations. In one design, a node obtains a plurality of received packets, with each received packet being generated based on at least one base packet in a set of base packets. The node determines a reduced set of base packet IDs for the received packets. The reduced set may be a subset of an overall set including base packet IDs of all base packets for each of the received packets. The node sends information conveying the reduced set of base packet IDs, receives a network-coded packet generated based on the sent information, and recovers a base packet intended for the node based on the network-coded packet. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058277 | COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION METHODS AND SYSTEMS - Communication transmission methods and systems are provided. Firstly, a base station is configured to set an indicator for determining whether a first wireless communication technology and a second communication technology are allowed simultaneously for transmissions by the base station. Then, a user equipment, is configured to receive a voice call by a user equipment from the base station and determine whether to answer the voice call using the first wireless communication technology or the second communication technology, when the first wireless communication technology and the second communication technology are not allowed simultaneously shown by the indicator. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058278 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step in which the gateway apparatus P-GW transmits “Proxy Binding Acknowledgement containing “O Flag setting information” indicating whether or not a DNSv6 address is allocated to the mobile station UE to the gateway apparatus S-GW in response to the reception of the “Proxy Binding Update”, and a step in which the gateway apparatus S-GW instructs the mobile station UE that there is no need to acquire a DNSv6 address using a DHCP request signal with “O Flag” in RA when the received “O Flag setting information” indicates that a DNSv6 address is allocated to the mobile station UE. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058279 | DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - The data rate in MIMO transmission is increased to a maximum even when a number of transmitting antennas of a base station apparatus is different from the number of transmitting antennas of the base station apparatus supported by a mobile station apparatus. The base station apparatus (eNodeB) reports the number of transmitting antennas provided for the base station apparatus to the mobile station apparatus UE (ST | 03-07-2013 |
20130058280 | PAGING METHOD AND DEVICE FOR E-MBS TERMINAL IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method for receiving a paging message of an idle-mode terminal in a multi-carrier system, comprising the steps of: receiving, from a network, a paging message through a first carrier corresponding to a predetermined condition in a paging listening interval; transmitting, to the network, a first ranging request message that includes control information indicative of a location updating procedure for notifying a start of E-MBS service reception; determining, as a paging carrier, a second carrier from which an E-MBS service is transmitted; and receiving the paging message from the network through the determined second carrier. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058281 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REAL TIME CONTROL OF AN ACTIVE ANTENNA OVER A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method and system suitable for supporting various wireless services on a Distributed Antenna System (DAS). The DAS can provide wireless services including voice and data services using the same equipment. The DAS can include one or more active antenna units controlled by an access point, and includes control channels for transferring control and status information between the access point and the antenna. The control channels can be transferred over a separate cable, or transferred using one or more intermediate frequency signals transferred over existing cables. The control channels can be used to configure and control and receive status from the managed components of the DAS including active antennas, control the amplifiers used to process TDD signals, and control the switching of diversity antenna systems. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058282 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER APPARATUS AND METHOD - A communication apparatus in a mobile communication system includes a first control information generation unit configured to generate first control information including retransmission information on a previously received data channel, a second control information generation unit configured to generate second control information including scheduling information on radio resources and a transmission signal generation unit configured to generate a transmission signal including a lower layer control channel including at least one of the first control information and the second control information. The transmission signal generation unit generates the transmission signal to transmit the first control information in any of subframes arriving at a first cycle and to transmit the second control information in any of subframes arriving at a second cycle longer than the first cycle. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058283 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for transmitting and receiving system information in a wireless communication system and method thereof are disclosed. In method of receiving system information at a mobile station (MS) in a wireless communication system, the present invention includes the steps of transmitting a version of a broadcast message stored in the mobile station to a base station when failing to receive a broadcast message at a transmission time of the broadcast message or in a transmission interval of the broadcast message, and receiving a response message including the system information contained in the broadcast message being transmitted by the base station from the base station when the version of the broadcast message stored in the mobile station is different from that of the broadcast message being transmitted by the base station. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058284 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING UPLINK RANGING IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present description relates to a method in which a terminal in an idle mode performs network reentry in a wireless access system, wherein the method comprises: a step of receiving, from a base station, control information containing a first parameter and a second parameter for determining a frame in which uplink ranging is to be performed; and a step of performing uplink ranging for network reentry with the base station on the basis of the control information, wherein the first parameter indicates the location of a superframe in which uplink ranging is to be performed, and the second parameter indicates the frame duration in the superframe which is indicated by the first parameter and in which uplink ranging is performed. | 03-07-2013 |
20130064175 | Access Point Assisted Direct Client Discovery - A wireless access point device configured to serve wireless client devices in a wireless network monitors transmissions sent by direct clients capable of forming ad hoc networks with one or more other direct clients. Profile data is stored for each detected direct client. The profile data indicates device type and services of the direct client, as well as potentially other information. The wireless access point receives from a direct client a request for information concerning one or more other direct clients, and sends a response to the direct client containing information for other direct clients based on the stored profile data. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064176 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR ENHANCING DATA RATE FOR PACKET-SWITCHED (PS) DATA SERVICE - A wireless communication device for enhancing a data rate for a packet-switched (PS) data service is provided. The device comprises a processor configured to reference cell information corresponding to a first subscriber identity card to maintain mobility for a second subscriber identity card by using the referenced cell information when performing the PS data service with a first service network for the first subscriber identity card. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064177 | PAYLOAD HEADER REDUCTION CLASSIFICATION FOR MULTIPROTOCOL CONVERGENCE SUBLAYER - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe methods, apparatuses, and systems for payload header reduction classification for multiprotocol convergence sublayer. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064178 | System For Monitoring Electrical Power Distribution Lines In A Power Grid Using A Wireless Sensor Network - A system is disclosed for monitoring electrical power distribution lines comprising a plurality of mesh networks. Each mesh network monitors electrical power distribution lines at a select location of the power grid. Each mesh network comprises a plurality of wireless sensors adapted for wireless communications therebetween. Each wireless sensor measures attributes of line voltage for an associated electrical power distribution line at the select location. A master sensor collects data from the other sensors in the mesh network and determining voltage in phase attribute data of the electrical power distribution lines at the select location. The master sensor comprises a gateway device for communication outside of the mesh network. A monitor device for communication with master sensors receives voltage and phase attribute data from the master sensors for monitoring operation of the electrical power distribution line power grid. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064179 | MANAGEMENT OF TCP/IP MESSAGING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Some implementations of the present invention provide mechanisms for gating the transmission of FIN and other short overhead messages of the like in order to improve spectral efficiency. In some implementations spectral efficiency is improved by reducing the number of air-link connections established to merely transmit FIN and other short overhead messages of the like. In one implementation FIN messages are buffered in a queue and transmitted when an air-link connection is established to transmit higher value messages. In one implementation FIN messages are buffered and transmitted when the contents of the buffer breach a threshold that justifies the establishment of an air-link connection to transmit the contents of the buffer. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064180 | HARQ-ACK FEEDBACK DETECTION FOR AN I/Q-MULTIPLEXED CONTROL CHANNEL - In a network that provides high-speed packet access, a mobile terminal is served by multiple activated serving cells which are grouped into cell groups. The mobile terminal monitors control channel transmissions to detect whether there are any transmissions for the mobile terminal from the activated serving cells for each cell group and provides feedback to a primary serving cell. When no transmission is detected from serving cells of a particular cell group, the mobile terminal may transmit feedback information explicitly indicating that no transmission is detected for that cell group. Alternatively, the mobile terminal may withhold transmitting feedback for that cell group and increases the power for transmitting the feedback information for cell groups in which transmissions were detected. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064181 | CLOSED LOOP TRANSMIT DIVERSITY IN CONTINUOUS PACKET CONNECTIVITY - Apparatus and methods for communicating in a wireless network include receiving a weight vector in a slot for providing closed loop transmit diversity to signals in a next slot, holding the weight vector over a plurality of slots following a transmission burst, and applying the weight vector to signals in at least one slot of a subsequent transmission burst in discontinuous transmit. Additional apparatus and methods for communicating in a wireless network include determining a weight vector based on signals received from a device to provide closed loop transmit diversity feedback to the device, holding the weight vector over a plurality of slots following receiving a transmission burst, and applying the weight vector for signals received in at least one slot of a subsequent transmission burst from the device. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064182 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING NEIGHBOR LIST AND FEMTOCELL CORE PROCESSOR USING THE SAME - A method for configuring a neighbor list is provided. The method is applied to a femtocell to establish a neighbor list. The method includes steps of: accessing a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) list in the femtocell, the PLMN list recording a circuit-switched (CS)/packet-switched (PS) service weighting; determining a weighting parameter with reference to history CS/PS amount information and the CS/PS service weighting of the femtocell; selecting n macrocells from the PLMN list according to the weighting parameter, n being a natural number; and filling the n macrocells into the neighbor list. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064183 | POWER CONTROL METHOD AND RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER - A power control method performing a power control operation between a radio network controller and a node B is provided. The method includes steps of: calculating a packet error rate threshold and a base received packet count according to a target block error rate (BLER) and a precision of the target BLER; obtaining an accumulated received packet count and an accumulated packet error count; increasing a target signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) of the node B when the accumulated packet error count is greater than a product of the accumulated received packet count and the packet error rate threshold; decreasing the target SIR when the accumulated received packet count is greater than or equal to a product of the base received packet count and a threshold parameter; and resetting the accumulated received packet count and the accumulated packet error count after the target SIR is adjusted. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064184 | RECEIVING APPARATUS AND DATA OBTAINING METHOD - A receiving apparatus for communication area evaluation includes a receiving unit configured to receive a first signal transmitted from a base station; a delay profile calculation unit configured to calculate a downlink delay profile based on the first signal; and an estimated value calculation unit configured to calculate an estimated cyclic prefix length based on the calculated downlink delay profile. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064185 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BULK ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF COMPONENT CARRIERS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Method and apparatus are provided for communicating availability and removal of one or more CCs in a cell. The one or more CCs that are available in the cell of a wireless communication network are determined, or a need to release one or more CCs that are active in the cell of a wireless communication network is detected. Availability of or the need to release the one or more CCs in the cell is communicated to a plurality of mobile stations. Each of the plurality of mobile stations is allowed to use or de-activate the one or more CCs in the cell. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064186 | Method and System for Synchronizing Access Stratum Security Algorithm - The disclosure discloses a method and a system for synchronizing an Access Stratum (AS) security algorithm. The method comprises: a control plane notifying a user plane to start a decryption exception detection when sending an Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection re-establishment message ( | 03-14-2013 |
20130070667 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING CALLS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, receiving a request for a voice call at an interrogating call session control function server of an internet protocol multimedia subsystem where the call is associated with an originating communication device, transmitting a mapping query from the interrogating call session control function server to a database to obtain an internet protocol address for establishing the call with a recipient communication device in response to the request for the call, and routing the request to a server of the internet protocol multimedia subsystem or a second server based on a response to the mapping query provided by the database. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070668 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION AND RECOVERY MODES FOR AN RTS/CTS SYSTEM THAT UTILIZES MULTICHANNELS - A method, apparatus and computer readable medium for an RTS/CTS system that utilizes a plurality of channels for data transfer, includes sending, by a first device, an RTS frame over the plurality of channels; receiving, by a second device, the RTS frame and outputting a CTS frame to the first device based on receipt of the RTS frame, the CTS frame being output over at least one of the plurality of channels; setting, by each device within a network that receives the RTS frame, a network allocation vector (NAV) to a time duration that is based in part on information included in the RTS frame; and transmitting, by the first device, data to the second device within the time duration set by the NAV using the at least one of the plurality of channels. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070669 | LATENCY-INSENSITIVE RAN - HIGH-CAPACITY/LATENCY-TOLERANT SESSION MANAGEMENT - A telecommunications network receives an indication that a user device, communicatively coupled to the telecommunications network, is a latency-insensitive device; receives connection information associated with a connection between the user device and the telecommunications network; stores, based on the indication that the user device is a latency-insensitive device, at least a portion of the connection information, associated with the connection between the user device and the telecommunications network, in a virtual memory of the server device; receives an indication that the connection is to become active; and places, based on receiving the indication that the connection is to become active, at least the portion of the connection information, associated with the connection between the user device and the telecommunications network, in a physical memory of the server device. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070670 | EFFICIENT MULTI-USER MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for combining the data (e.g., the channel station information (CSI) and the block acknowledgment (BA)) from one or more stations (STAs) capable of multi-user (MU) transmission in an effort to reduce the number of frames involved in a MU frame exchange. For certain aspects, the BA frames may be moved before a MU transmission and combined with the CSI frames, thereby effectively acknowledging a prior MU transmission. By reducing the number of frames involved, the efficiency of MU exchanges may be increased. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070671 | PATH CONTROL METHOD FOR MULTIHOP WIRELESS NETWORK - A multihop wireless network includes a plurality of wireless nodes. Each wireless node calculates a metric value indicating a quantity of providing a guideline for selecting a superordinate destination node with each candidate for the superordinate destination node when carrying out a multihop wireless communication with a specific wireless node based on peripheral node information about node information received from the peripheral wireless nodes and determines the superordinate destination node based on the calculated metric value. The network system selects a superordinate wireless node as a target wireless node expected to change the number of the wireless nodes existing in a subordinate hierarchy, and intentionally changes a value of the node information sent from the target wireless node to the peripheral wireless nodes. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070672 | Anonymous Messaging Conversation - An anonymous communication module that provides full conversational anonymous messaging and voice/video communication between two or more parties interacting over a wireless/landline network. An anonymous messaging module accepts an anonymous initiation message to a public address to trigger the start of an anonymous voice/video conversation between a message originator and a message recipient. An anonymous communication module performs intercept and address substitution on a message and/or voice/video call transmitted between two or more parties via an anonymous communication service. The anonymous communication module substitutes a real address in the source field of an intercepted message and/or voice/video call, with an anonymous address mapped to that real address, and substitutes an anonymous address in the destination field of an intercepted message and/or voice/video call with a real address mapped to that anonymous address. The anonymous communication module then forwards the newly formatted message and/or voice/video call to an intended message/call destination. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070673 | System and Method for Cross-Layer Encapsulation Messaging - A method for mobile node operations includes communicating with a first point of attachment in a first radio network through a radio interface tuned to the first radio network, and encapsulating a first frame in a second radio network format within a media independent control frame. The method also includes transmitting the media independent control frame with the first frame in the second radio network format encapsulated therein to a second point of attachment in a second radio network using the radio interface tuned to the first radio network. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070674 | MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ABNORMAL POWER DOWN REPORTING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile station, a base station, a communication system and an abnormal power down reporting method thereof are provided. The communication system includes the mobile station and the base station. The mobile station is located within a wireless communication range of the base station. The mobile station transmits a notification message to the base station after detecting abnormal power down of the mobile station. The base station determines that abnormal power down occurred in the mobile station according to the notification message, and notifies a backhaul network to deregister the mobile station. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070675 | WIRELESS DATAGRAM TRANSACTION PROTOCOL SYSTEM - Systems are provided for sequencing, delivery acknowledgement, and throttling of data packets over a network layer, such as UDP and SMS. To support devices with limited battery resources, the invention incorporates asymmetric retry logic and/or acknowledgements with overlapping ranges, to minimize the transmissions required for the device. The sender of a data-bearing frame does not need to wait for a frame to be acknowledged before sending the next, such that many frames can be “in flight” at once. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070676 | ASCERTAINING PRESENCE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - One of many aspects of the invention relates to an ad hoc network in which inbound messages are communicated from an originating node to a gateway node via a plurality of intermediate nodes. In this respect, a method performed by an intermediate node in communicating the inbound message to the gateway node includes: maintaining a routing table; and using the routing table, selecting a node for use as the next hop by determining whether a maximum number of allowable hops for an inbound message is exceeded by using such node, and comparing a preference of using such node to preferences of using other known nodes by which the maximum number of allowable hops would not be exceeded. Another aspect includes sending a “leave” message when an intermediate node leaves the ad hoc network, whereby the intermediate node is removed from similar routing tables maintained by other intermediate nodes. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070677 | CONCURRENT AIRBORNE COMMUNICATION METHODS AND SYSTEMS - Aircrafts or unmanned air vehicles flying near Earth are used as airborne communications towers or relays. Using techniques of ground based beam forming and wavefront multiplexing enhance the ability to coherently combine the power of the communication signals, and improve the signal-to-noise ratio. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070678 | ADAPTIVE PILOT STRUCTURE TO ASSIST CHANNEL ESTIMATION IN SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS - The present invention relates generally to methods for generating a dynamic pilot symbol structure in spread spectrum communication systems, and in particular to the use of pilot symbols by user equipment in channel estimation. In one form, the method includes, allocating basic pilot symbols at the beginning of each data chunk and spread over the plurality of sub-carrier frequencies; and selectively replacing data symbols in each data chunk with adaptive pilot symbols according to the speed of the user equipment. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070679 | Method and Device for Data Processing in a Wireless Network - A method and a device for data processing in a wireless network including several base stations are provided, wherein a mobility information is conveyed between at least two base stations. Furthermore, a communication system is suggested including at least one such device. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070680 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: (A) transmitting, from a mobile station (UE) to a radio base station (eNB), a “Measurement Report” including a measurement result of a “MeasObject”, when the mobile station (UE) links and manages a “MeasID”, the “MeasObject”, and a “ReportConfig”, and when the mobile station (UE) determines that the “ReportConfig” is satisfied; and (B) determining, at the mobile station (UE), whether or not to release the “MeasID” according to a type of a carrier designated by the “MeasObject”, when a change has occurred in a combination of the primary carrier and the secondary carriers. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070681 | TRANSMITTING DATA IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to one embodiment, a method for retransmitting a protocol data unit (PDU) in a mobile communication system includes: segmenting a first PDU to form one or more second PDUs if the first PDU does not fit within a PDU size indicated by a lower layer; and transmitting the one or more second PDUs to a receiving side. Segmenting the first PDU includes: mapping only a data field of the first PDU to a data field of the one or more second PDUs; and setting a header of each of the one or more second PDUs. The header of each of the one or more second PDUs includes a field indicating a sequence number of the first PDU. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070682 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PACKET CONTROL METHOD IN THE MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a protocol structure and packet segmentation and NACK information feedback mechanism for efficient data transmission in a mobile communication in which a terminal receives data on the multiple carriers from multiple base stations. The present invention proposes a protocol structure appropriate for a mobile communication system supporting inter-eNB carrier aggregation and the terminal and base station operations for packet efficient segmentation and efficient NACK information feedback in association with the protocol structure. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070683 | Method And A Device For Increased Bit Rate - In a method and a device for setting the Transport Format Combination size step in a scheduler of a cellular radio system to be used by a user equipment transmitting data to a radio base station of the cellular radio system, the Transport Format Combination size step is set as a function of a number of pre-defined cell and/or user conditions. This will increase the user bit Crate at low load. Specifically, the time to reach a high bitrate in low load situations is reduced. This leads to enhanced user experience for bursty services such as World Wide Web (WWW) services. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070684 | SYSTEM, TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING 1X MESSAGES - The disclosure provides a system, end and method for transmitting 1x messages. The method comprises: when a sending terminal needs to send a plurality of 1x messages to a receiving terminal through a non-1x network, carrying the plurality of 1x messages in one message. With the technical solution of the disclosure, the problem that it is unable to ensure that a plurality of 1x Layer3 messages is transmitted synchronously under the related inter-working situation and the problem of the processing time sequence of messages are solved. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070685 | METHOD FOR ALLOWING TERMINAL TO TRANSMIT POWER HEADROOM INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, to a method for allowing a terminal to transmit power headroom information in a wireless communication system and a device therefor. According to one aspect of the present invention, a method for allowing a terminal, in which at least one serving cell is set, to transmit power headroom information comprises the steps of: generating said power headroom information; and transmitting the power headroom information to a base station. In this case, said power headroom information includes a first field that includes a plurality of indicators, and at least one second field that indicates a power headroom level, wherein each of the plurality of indicators is capable of indicating whether at least one said second field for at least one of each of the serving cell exists. | 03-21-2013 |
20130077564 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A WIRELESS PACKET CABLE ENDPOINT - Methods and apparatuses for recognizing a short range wireless protocol enabled device as a packet-cable endpoint are disclosed. A gateway can provide existing and enhanced services to an end-user over a short range wireless protocol network. A user will have a flexible option to use packet-cable services over any short range wireless protocol enabled user equipment. The user equipment, acting as a packet-cable endpoint, works as a phone or fax machine, providing packet-cable services over a short range wireless protocol connection. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077565 | System and Method for Multiple Access Sensor Networks - A method enables a radio receiver to distinguish sensor probes supplying data to the receiver over a long period of time. The method includes each probe generating a random number sent to the receiver to identify the probe. Each probe and the receiver also uses a pseudo-random process to identify a time of transmission for each probe. The pseudo-random process helps keep the transmission times for the probes separate in the presence of oscillator drift. If a transmission collision occurs, the receiver ignores all probes in the collision and waits until the pseudo-random process separates the probe transmissions. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077566 | UNIPOLAR ANTENNA, WIRELESS ACCESS APPARATUS AND WIRELESS ROUTER - The present disclosure discloses a unipolar antenna, a wireless access apparatus and a wireless router. The unipolar antenna of the present disclosure comprises a medium substrate, as well as a power feeding point, a feeder line and a metal structure that are disposed on a surface of the medium substrate. The feeder line is connected to the power feeding point, and the feeder line and the metal structure are coupled with each other. The unipolar antenna, the wireless access apparatus and the wireless router of the present disclosure can transmit or receive electromagnetic signals of two or more different wavebands simultaneously so that they can operate within multiple operation wavebands in a single-frequency mode and operate within different operation wavebands simultaneously in a multi-frequency mode. Thereby, the antenna can be miniaturized on the premise of satisfying the performance requirements of the communication devices. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077567 | WIRELESS TERMINAL, GATEWAY SELECTION METHOD, AND WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A wireless terminal includes a detection section that detects, from a packet received from a plurality of gateways, a control packet broadcast from the plurality of gateways, a candidate specifying section that specifies a plurality of gateways as candidates for connection from a sender gateway that sent the detected control packet, and a selection section that selects one of the specified gateways as a gateway for establishment of connection. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077568 | TERMINAL DEVICE IDENTIFYING TARGET ACCESS POINT FROM AMONG A PLURALITY OF ACCESS POINTS - A terminal device includes a communication unit, and a first identifying unit. The communication unit is configured to wirelessly communicate with a plurality of access points, receive an output signal from each of the plurality of access points, and send an instruction to an image processing device through one of the plurality of access points. The first identifying unit is configured to identify, from among the plurality of access points, at least one accessible access point from which the communication unit is currently capable of receiving the outputted signal, and identify a target access point through which the communication unit most recently has sent the instruction to the image processing device from among the at least one accessible access point. The communication unit connects to the target access point. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077569 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An apparatus and method for a User Equipment in a wireless network including at least one Base Station (BS) are provided. The method includes receiving an Information Element (IE) for configuring at least one of a PUSCH power control method and a PUSCH DMRS generation method from the BS, determining a state of the IE, and transmitting a PUSCH and a DMRS for the PUSCH according to the state of the IE. A transmission power of the PUSCH is controlled and a base sequence for the PUSCH DMRS is generated according to the state of the IE. When the state of the IE indicates a first state, the transmission power of the PUSCH is determined according to a first power control equation. When the state of the IE indicates a second state, the transmission power of the PUSCH is determined according to a second power control equation. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077570 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ACCESSING LOCAL NETWORK IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING LOCAL NETWORK INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS SCHEME - An apparatus and method for accessing a local network in a mobile communication system supporting a Local Network Internet Protocol Access (LIPA) scheme are provided. In the method, a User Equipment (UE) transmits a radio bearer set up request packet to a router connected to a femto Node B in order to set up a radio bearer with the femto Node B, thereby the router converts the radio bearer set up request packet into a port forward radio bearer set up request packet using a port forward function, and transmits the port forward radio bearer set up request packet to the femto Node B. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077571 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL FOR A SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL - A method and apparatus for transmitting a reference signal from a User Equipment (UE) are provided. The method includes transmitting a first reference signal using a sequence determined from an identity of the at least one transmission point and transmitting a second reference signal with a transmission power having an offset with a first maximum value configured by higher layer signaling from the at least one transmission point; and transmitting a first reference signal using a sequence configured to the UE by higher layer signaling from the at least one transmission point and transmitting a second reference signal with a transmission power having an offset with a second maximum value configured by higher layer signaling from the at least one transmission point, wherein the second maximum value is larger than the first maximum value, and the first reference signal and the second reference signal are either identical or non-identical. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077572 | MULTIPLE-ANTENNA SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR COMMUNICATION AND BROADCASTING - A reception method and apparatus for use in a multi-cell orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) wireless system. In a unicast receive mode during a first receive time period, a first group of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols is received by a mobile device from multiple of a plurality of antennas at a serving base station. In a single-frequency-network (SFN) receive mode during a second receive time period, a second group of OFDM symbols is received by the mobile device from one of a plurality of antennas at the serving base station. The transition between the first receive time period and the second receive time period occurs during a cyclic prefix or a cyclic postfix between OFDM symbols, and the plurality of antennas produce a first beam pattern during the unicast receive mode and a second beam pattern during the SFN receive mode. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077573 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION VIA A SPATIAL RANK INDEX (SRI) CHANNEL - A method for transmitting feedback information via a Spatial Rank Index (SRI) channel includes determining, at an access terminal, a value of a spatial rank index and transmitting, from the access terminal through the SRI channel, feedback information indicating the determined value of the spatial rank index according to a prescribed coding. The codeword of the prescribed coding is one of: (0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0), (1,0,1,0,1,1,0,1), (0,1,1,1,0,0,1,1), or (1,1,0,1,1,1,1,0). | 03-28-2013 |
20130083724 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR A CONVERGED WIRED/WIRELESS ENTERPRISE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - In some embodiments, an apparatus comprises a core network node and a control module within an enterprise network architecture. The core network node is configured to be operatively coupled to a set of wired network nodes and a set of wireless network nodes. The core network node is configured to receive a first tunneled packet associated with a first session from a wired network node from the set of wired network nodes. The core network node is configured to also receive a second tunneled packet associated with a second session from a wireless network node from the set of wireless network nodes through intervening wired network nodes from the set of wired network nodes. The control module is operatively coupled to the core network node. The control module is configured to manage the first session and the second session. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083725 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENFORCING A COMMON USER POLICY WITHIN A NETWORK - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes a core network node configured to be operatively coupled to a set of wired network nodes and a set of wireless network nodes. The core network node is configured to receive, at a first time, a first data packet to be sent to a wired device operatively coupled to a wired network node from the set of wired network nodes. The core network node is configured to also receive, at a second time, a second data packet to be sent to a wireless device operatively coupled to a wireless network node from the set of wireless network nodes. The core network node is configured to apply a common policy to the first data packet and the second data packet based on an identifier of a user associated with both the wireless device and the wired device. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083726 | SMALL DATA TRANSMISSION TECHNIQUES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques and configurations for transmitting small data payloads in a wireless communication network. An apparatus may include non-access stratum (NAS) circuitry configured to receive a trigger to send a data payload to a wireless communication network, the data payload having a size that is less than a preconfigured threshold, and generate a NAS message including the data payload and access stratum (AS) circuitry coupled with the NAS circuitry and configured to transmit the NAS message including the data payload to a node comprising a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) Support Node (SGSN). Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083727 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION AND METHOD FOR SETTING HOLDING PERIOD OF CONNECTION INFORMATION - In a mobile communication system, a mobile station notifies a first base station of a first holding period when a first mode, in which the mobile station performs wireless communication with one of the first base station and a second base station, is set, and notifies the first base station of a second holding period which is longer than the first holding period when a second mode, in which the mobile station performs wireless communication with the first base station and does not performs wireless communication with the second base station, is set. The first base station discards connection information when the notified holding period has elapsed after the mobile station is unable to perform the wireless communication with the first base station. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083728 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PAGING MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a paging message in a wireless communication system is provided. A base station receives a paging announcement from a paging controller. The paging announcement includes a machine-to-machine (M2M) group identity (ID) allocated by a first network entity. The base station transmits the paging message to an M2M device. The paging message includes a M2M zone ID of the first M2M zone, managed by the first network entity, allocated by the first network entity or a network entity ID of the first network entity. An M2M group ID allocated to the M2M device by a second network entity is the same as the M2M group ID included in the paging announcement. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083729 | SRS OPTIMIZATION FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for power control and SRS multiplexing for coordinated multi-point (CoMP) transmission and reception in heterogeneous networks (HetNet). Multiple SRS processes are supported with different physical and/or virtual cell ID. Different power control offsets and processes are associated with the different SRS processes. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083730 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL AND TIMING IN COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION SCHEMES - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus of a first cell communicates with a second cell in relation to a coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission of control information by the second cell and data by the first cell to a user equipment (UE) in a range expanded region of the first cell, determines a desired transmission power level for an uplink transmission to the first cell by the UE, and provides the desired transmission power level for the uplink transmission to the second cell. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083731 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL AND TIMING IN COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION SCHEMES - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus of a first cell communicates with a second cell in relation to a coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission of control information by the first cell and data by the second cell to a user equipment (UE) in a range expanded region of the second cell, receives a desired transmission power level for the UE from the second cell, generates control information based on the desired transmission power level, and transmits the control information to the UE. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083732 | Method of Handling Service Rejection for Circuit Switch Service - A method of handling service rejection for circuit switch service for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a service reject message with not available circuit switch service cause and a non zero timer value for a timer whose running state indicates that the mobile device is not allowed to send a extended service request message for a circuit switch service, from a network of the wireless communication system, starting the timer with the non zero timer value, and sending the extended service request message for a packet service to the network even when the timer is running. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083733 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING MEDIA ACCORDING TO IMPORTANCE OF MEDIA BURST - Provided is a method and system for transmitting media to a receiving PoC user without filtering according to importance indication information of a PoC user trying to transmit the media in a PoC system. If media transmitted by the PoC user is important, in order to inform the receiving PoC user of this, the PoC user transmits an MBCP Request message containing importance indication information to a PoC server, and the PoC server, which has received the MBCP Request message, transmits an MBCP Taken message containing importance indication information to the receiving PoC user. If media corresponding to an important message is filtered since media of a primary or locking-in session among a plurality of sessions or other media is being transmitted, the PoC server temporarily stores the media in a local memory or a PoC box and transmits the stored media after the preceding media is completely transmitted. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083734 | DYNAMIC DISCOVERY OF HOME AGENT WITH SPECIFIC BINDING - The invention relates to a method for obtaining a home node address in a packet switched network comprising nodes. The method comprises the steps of a first node sending to a first home node of a home network a request containing information about a home address of a mobile node to determine whether a binding with said home address indicating a registration of said mobile node at the first home node exists; the first home node receiving the request, said first home node comprising a stored binding table; determining whether the binding with said home address exists in any home node of the home network; and if the home address of the mobile node is in the binding table of any of the home nodes in the home network, the first node receiving a reply comprising the address of the home node with said binding. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083735 | TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A terminal communicating with a base station includes: a switching partswitching between a first feedback mode in which one precoder information specifying a preferred precoder and a reception quality indicator specifying a preferred transmission rate are reported periodically and a second feedback mode in which first partial precoder information among first and second partial precoder information specifying the preferred precoder and a set of the second partial precoder information and the reception quality indicator are reported periodically. A report part uses, in the second feedback mode, a periodic resource for reporting the precoder information and reception quality indicator in the first feedback mode, reporting one of the first partial precoder information and the set of the second partial precoder information and the reception quality indicator alternately and in a period two times a report period of the precoder information and reception quality indicator in the first feedback mode. | 04-04-2013 |
20130089025 | NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - A telecommunications system is provided comprising a mobile device and an IP Multi-media Sub-system (IMS), the mobile device being connected to a Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN. The mobile device is adapted to: identify if the PLMN supports Customised Applications for Mobile network Enhanced Logic, CAMEL; and, upon receiving an attempt to initiate a call to a dialled number, if the PLMN supports CAMEL, allow the call to proceed. The PLMN is adapted to: receive a request to connect a call from the mobile device; invoke a CAMEL service trigger indicating that the call should be routed to the IMS; and, route the call to the IMS. The IMS is adapted to: control the call; and, refer the call to a call storage system for call storage. A mobile device, IP Multi-media Sub-system and method in a mobile device are also provided. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089026 | Wireless Audio Transmission - Approaches for the wireless transmission of audio data are provided, wherein an example approach operates to convert live audio signals, from instruments, microphones, amplifiers, mixers, speakers, MIDI devices, and other similar devices, into wireless signals by utilizing electrical plug devices (“jacks”), whereby the jacks transmit multiple channels of audio/video signals via a standard wireless network to a software application running on a host recording device on the same network. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089027 | MULTI-NETWORK ACCESS METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE THEREOF - In a multiple network access method in a communication device including at least one protocol stack having a physical layer and a medium access control (MAC) layer, and at least one application unit for performing communication through the protocol stack, the method includes applying a first parameter to the protocol stack and a first attribute to the application unit, accessing a first network for a first hour after the applications, switching the first parameter into a second parameter and the first attribute into a second attribute, and accessing a second network for a second hour after the switching. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089028 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD USING DIRECTIONAL COMMUNICATION - A wireless communication system and a wireless communication method using directional communication are provided. The wireless communication method includes a communication request device transmitting a communication request message to a communication target device using directional communication, the communication request device receiving a response message that includes wireless communication connection information of the communication target device generated in response to the communication request message from the communication target device, the communication request device determining a wireless communication technology based on the wireless communication connection information, and the communication request device performing wireless connection with the communication target device according to the determined wireless communication technology. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089029 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING NEIGHBOR CELLS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A neighbor cell search method and apparatus of a User Equipment (UE) is provided for performing the cell search procedure with the utilization of a Physical Cell Identity (PCI) list of PCIs used by evolved Node Bs (eNBs) for a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) which is from an eNB in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. The cell search method includes selecting a cell of a base station, receiving system information including a Physical Cell Identity (PCI) list used by neighbor Closed Subscribed Group (CSG) cells of the base station, determining whether the terminal is in an any cell selection state for selecting any cell, and searching, when the terminal is in the any cell selection state, neighbor cells without application of the PCI list. The cell search method and apparatus are capable of performing the cell search procedure to appropriate eNBs, resulting in improvement of network attachment efficiency. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089030 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TIME SYNCHRONIZATION - An apparatus for time synchronization of a femtocell base station receives, via neighboring macrocell base stations adjacent to a femtocell base station, timing packets generated by timing servers directly connected to the neighboring macrocell base stations, and if time synchronization using a GPS satellite is impossible, obtains system time information from a timing packet received via one corresponding to a master base station, among the neighboring macrocell base stations, and performs time synchronization. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089031 | ASSIST ENGINE FOR TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE FUNCTIONS IN A MODULAR WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE - A wireless network access device comprising a radio interface with a serial communication line, a switch, and M serial connections to M connectors for connecting up to M corresponding detachable radio modules. The radio interface forms up to M individually addressable radio communications paths. Each radio module includes a radio configured to communicate with client devices in a coverage area and a radio processor configured to manage at least one radio receiving buffer. The radio receiving buffers store receiver buffer identifiers to corresponding received data space. A processor manages communication between the client devices that communicate with the radio modules and a data network via the radio interface and a network interface when N 04-11-2013 | |
20130089032 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIAL ACCESS TO A NETWORK IN A FEMTO SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless access system to which a femto cell is applied. In addition, the present invention relates to an initial access method in a femto cell environment, a method for handover to a femto cell and apparatus for supporting the methods. | 04-11-2013 |
20130094436 | LTE SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY CORRELATION SERVICE - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a network node for correlating subscriber IDs in a communication network, the method including: receiving a message from another network node that relates to an application function containing information related to a subscriber of the application function; extracting subscriber identification information for the message; determining if the extracted subscriber identification information is found in a correlation object in a correlation object database; if the extracted subscriber identification information is found, then adding the extracted subscriber identification information to the correlation object found in the correlation object database. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094437 | Frame Acknowledgment In A Communication Network - A method and system for acknowledging multiple frames in a communication network is provided. A receiver detects transmission of frames from a transmitter. The receiver determines a format for an acknowledgment frame comprising multiple bytes, from multiple frame acknowledgment formats for reporting status of reception of the frames by the receiver. The receiver reports the status of reception of the frames by encoding a distance between a number of frames between two successive correctly received frames, between two successive unsuccessfully received frames, between a correctly received frame and a successive unsuccessfully received frame, or between an unsuccessfully received frame and a successive correctly received frame, in the acknowledgment frame. One or more of the frame acknowledgment formats are configured to generate the acknowledgment frame for acknowledging the frames using a decreased number of bytes. The receiver generates the acknowledgment frame in the determined format for acknowledging the frames. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094438 | Split Architecture Remote Radio - A wireless communication system, which includes at least one base station module configured to implement a media access controller and a physical layer, and includes at least one remote radio head module configured to prepare an analog signal or a digital data signal for transmission and receipt over a link in accordance with dedicated interface specifications, and also includes at least one outdoor signal conversion module configured to perform a high rate digital-to-analog conversion and a high rate analog-to-digital conversion in accordance with the dedicated interface specifications, and further includes at least two millimeter wave antenna assemblies, where each antenna assembly is configured to transmit and receive the analog signal over a wireless link in accordance with the dedicated interface specifications. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094439 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CENTRALIZED DISTRIBUTED TRANSCEIVER MANAGEMENT - A master application device comprises a plurality of distributed transceivers, a central baseband processor, and a network management engine that manages operation of the master application device and end-user application devices. The master application device communicates data streams to the end-user devices utilizing one or more distributed transceivers selected from the plurality of distributed transceivers. The selected distributed transceivers are dynamically configured to switch between spatial diversity mode, frequency diversity mode, multiplexing mode and MIMO mode based on corresponding link quality and propagation environment. Digital signal processing needed for the selected distributed transceivers is performed by the central baseband processor. The network management engine continuously monitors communication environment information to configure beamforming settings and/or antenna arrangement for the selected distributed transceivers. Connection types, communication protocols, and/or transceiver operation modes are determined for the selected distributed transceivers. Resources are allocated to the selected distributed transceivers to continue subsequent data communication. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094440 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CENTRALIZED OR DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A DISTRIBUTED TRANSCEIVER NETWORK - A master application device comprises a plurality of distributed transceivers, a central baseband processor, and a network management engine that manages operation of the master application device and end-user application devices. The master application device communicates data streams to the end-user devices utilizing one or more distributed transceivers selected from the plurality of distributed transceivers. The selected distributed transceivers and the end-user devices are concurrently configured by the network management engine based on corresponding link quality and propagation environment. The network management engine allocates resources to the selected distributed transceivers and the end-user devices during the data communication. The network management engine continuously monitors communication environment information to configure beamforming settings and/or antenna arrangement for the selected distributed transceivers. Beam patterns are selected for the selected distributed transceivers so as to minimize power consumption and/or based on the location and orientation information of the end-user application devices. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094441 | SYSTEM, METHOD, DEVICE FOR WIRELESS DEVICE ASSOCIATION, PROGRAM DOWNLOAD, AND EXCHANGE OF DATA BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A system for automatically associating a first wireless device with a second wireless device comprising a wireless device that toggles between client mode and access point mode. The first device communicates using first access point device when is client mode. When the first wireless device switches to access point mode it forms a pulsed overlay wireless network. The first wireless device transmits a unique identifier over the pulsed overlay wireless network to the second wireless device. When the second wireless device receives and detects the unique identifier, a token is transmitted over the first wireless network to the second and wherein the token is configured with a mobile device identifier that uniquely identifies the second client device. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094442 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system using a Coordinated Multi-Point transmission/reception (CoMP) scheme receives Downlink Control Information (DCI) including CoMP control information, determines a starting position of a data channel on wireless resources, based on starting position information of a data channel included in the CoMP control information and used in each of a plurality of cells, and receives data from the plurality of cells starting from the determined starting position. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094443 | METHOD FOR DELIVERY OF MESSAGES IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method in which a message is received to a communication server from a node. The communication server obtains user information with recipient information in the message. The user information comprises user entity state and user entity protocol information. A first protocol is determined to become a preferred protocol based on the user entity protocol information. The delivery of said message is attempted with a delivery mechanism of the preferred protocol. A second protocol is determined to become the preferred protocol with said user entity protocol information upon a failure to deliver said message with said first protocol. The attempting of the delivery of said message is repeated with a delivery mechanism of the preferred protocol. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094444 | AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING OF AN M2M DEVICE HAVING A WIFI INTERFACE - A method for automatically provisioning a WiFi-equipped machine-to-machine (M2M) device is disclosed. A WiFi M2M gateway identifies a WiFi network identifier broadcast by a powered-on M2M device in WiFi ad hoc mode through a scanning procedure and joins the ad hoc network defined by the M2M device. The WiFi M2M gateway obtains device information (e.g., MAC address) of the M2M device. The WiFi M2M gateway transmits a command to the M2M device to switch from ad hoc mode to infrastructure mode. The WiFi M2M gateway registers the M2M device with an M2M server associated with a service provider based on the device information of the M2M device. The WiFi M2M gateway receives a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) associated with the M2M device from the M2M server. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094445 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING INTERFACING BETWEEN CONTENT DELIVERY NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are described for forwarding content delivery network interconnection (CDNI) signaling. A CDNI router content delivery network (CDN) may establish CDNIs with upstream and downstream CDNs. The CDNI router CDN may receive a CDNI route advertisement message from at least one of the upstream and downstream CDNs. The CDNI router CDN may update at least one end-user-based CDNI routing table based on Internet protocol (IP) address blocks in the CDNI route advertisement message. The CDNI router CDN may transmit an updated CDNI route advertisement message to at least one of the upstream and downstream CDNs. At least one of the upstream and downstream CDNs may update at least one end-user-based CDNI routing table based on the end user IP address blocks in the updated CDNI route advertisement message. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094446 | OPTIMIZATIONS TO CIRCUIT-SWITCHED FALLBACK (CSFB) PROCEDURE - Circuit-switched fallback (CSFB) is a technique to deliver voice-services to a mobile, when the mobile is camped in a long-term evolution (LTE) network. Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques that may help reduce delays in call setup related to CSFB and, in some cases, avoid unnecessary paging. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094447 | Energy Efficient Method For Communication Between A Wireless Sensor Network And An Industrial Control System - A method for communication between a wireless device node in a wireless sensor network and control apparatus or control processes of an industrial control system. The wireless network includes a plurality of device nodes and at least one gateway. The method includes receiving at a gateway an aggregated data packet or a final address in the ICS. The gateway processes the data packet, detects that it is an aggregated data packet and reconstructs the original data packets contained therein. The gateway then sends each of the original data packets as standard data packets to the intended final address in the ICS. In other aspects of the invention a method, system and a computer program for carrying out the method are described. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094448 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to an embodiment, the invention provides a method for receiving a sounding reference signal (SRS) at a base station in a wireless communication system, the method including: transmitting a downlink control information (DCI) for triggering a second SRS to a user equipment; and receiving at least one of a first SRS triggered by a higher layer and the second SRS triggered by the DCI from the user equipment, wherein, if both transmission of the first SRS and transmission of the second SRS occur in a same subframe at the user equipment, the second SRS is only received from the user equipment. | 04-18-2013 |
20130100880 | Power Reduction for Correlated Carriers in a Cellular Communication System - A wireless communication transmitter configured to transmit a multi-carrier signal, the multi-carrier signal being an aggregation of two or more separately modulated carriers occupying distinct frequency regions is operated by obtaining a baseline multi-carrier metric indicative of an amount by which a multi-carrier signal's maximum transmit power should be reduced from a pre-determined nominal maximum to satisfy a predetermined out-of-band emission requirement when different scrambling codes are used on all carriers that are combined to create the multi-carrier signal. A compensating metric adjustment value that compensates for an estimation error that results from use of a same scrambling code on two or more of the carriers is estimated. A final multi-carrier metric is obtained by adjusting the baseline metric by an amount based on the compensating metric adjustment value when the same scrambling code is used on the two or more of the carriers. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100881 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION COLLISION AVOIDING METHOD - A wireless access point device receives a packet including a first source port number from a source wireless terminal device, determines if the packet is a control packet according to the first source port number, and obtains a time interval and a second source port number from the control packet and to receive a new packet. The wireless access point device further determines if the new packet is the data packet according to whether the first source port number of the new packet is the same as the second source port number, starts a timer to time for the time interval once the new packet is the data packet, and transmits a Clear-to-Sent packet to other wireless terminal devices once the timer times out. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100882 | DELAY COMPENSATION DURING SYNCHRONIZATION IN A BASE STATION IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present disclosure relates to delay compensation during synchronization of uplink and downlink frames in a base station in a cellular communication network. In general, the base station includes a radio equipment and a radio equipment controller that together form at least part of the base station. In one embodiment, the radio equipment includes a first interface configured to receive data from the radio equipment controller and a second interface configured to send data to the radio equipment controller. During synchronization, the radio equipment receives, at the first interface of the radio equipment, a synchronization message from the radio equipment controller. The radio equipment then passes the synchronization message from the first interface of the radio equipment to the second interface of the radio equipment with a synthetic delay that is in addition to an in-equipment delay from the first interface to the second interface. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100883 | Call Control Entity for a Communication Network - A communication network is described, comprising: an access network, a switching control network comprising call control entities arranged for association with subscribers, where said access network is arranged for routing signalling of a given subscriber to a call control entity associated with said given subscriber, and an Internet Protocol based network for providing a set of services centred in said Internet Protocol based network to one or more of said subscribers, wherein said switching control network comprises a group of first call control entities and a group of second call control entities, said first call control entities are arranged for providing call control services to subscribers having circuit switched subscriptions, and said second call control entities are arranged for providing a gateway to connect to said Internet Protocol based network for subscribers having subscriptions to said set of services centred in said Internet Protocol based network, and each first call control entity has a subscriber association redirector for redirecting an association of a subscriber associated with said each first call control entity and having a subscription to said services centred in said Internet Protocol based network to said group of second call control entities. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100884 | Wireless Gateway - The present invention provides a wireless gateway, having a base interface unit and at least one communication device connected to the base interface unit. The gateway further includes a first transceiver cartridge removeably connected to the base interface unit. The first transceiver cartridge is operably configured to enable the communication device access to a first wireless network. A second transceiver cartridge is removeably connected to the base interface unit, wherein the second transceiver cartridge is operably configured to enable the at least one communication device access to a second wireless network. The gateway also includes an antenna combiner connected to the base interface unit and it is operably configured to transmit and receive signals for the first and second transceiver cartridges. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100885 | SELECTIVELY INVOKING RECEIVE DIVERSITY DURING POWER-UP/INITIAL ACQUISITION AND OUT OF SERVICE MODES - Methods and apparatus for selectively invoking receive diversity during power-up/initial acquisition and out of service modes are disclosed. A method can include selectively enabling receive diversity based on an initial acquisition attempt by one of the receive chains in a wireless device having multiple receive chains. A method can also include enabling receive diversity based on a predetermined list of channels to be acquired. A predetermined list of channels is a subset of a plurality of channels that may be acquired. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100886 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HEADER COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating packets having a plurality of types are described herein. In some aspects, the packets include a compressed header. In one embodiment, a compression protocol is selected from a plurality of compression protocols to compress a first packet header. The packet may contain a second packet header, which may include information indicative of the compression protocol used to compress the first packet header. The packet may be transmitted, including the first packet header which is compressed using the selected compression protocol. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100887 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING VOICE CALL CONTINUITY USING DIFFERENT NETWORKS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for providing call continuity in a wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a first communication unit for setting a call with a counterpart terminal in a first network, a second communication unit for setting a call with the counterpart terminal in a second network while the call is set in the first network, and a control unit for terminating the call of the first network after the call setup is completed in the second network. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100888 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In communication being performed complexly using a plurality of component carriers, a radio resource is efficiently used. A mobile communication system in which a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus communicate with each other through the use the plurality of component carriers, in which the base station apparatus sets a particular downlink component carrier to the mobile station apparatus, the mobile station apparatus selects a first arrangement method for uplink control information when only a physical downlink shared channel in the particular downlink component carrier is scheduled by the base station apparatus, and in which the mobile station apparatus selects a second arrangement method for the uplink control information when at least one of physical downlink shared channels in downlink component carriers other than the particular downlink component carrier is scheduled by the base station apparatus. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100889 | COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Disclosed herein are various embodiments of collision avoidance systems and methods. One method embodiment, among others, comprises a client sending an end of transmission (EOT) request to an access point (AP), and responsive to the EOT request, the AP responding with an EOT frame. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100890 | INTEGRATED CIRCUIT FOR SEQUENCE REPORTING AND SEQUENCE GENERATION - Disclosed are a sequence report method and a sequence report device for reducing a signaling amount for reporting a Zadoff-Chu sequence or a GCL sequence allocated for a cell. Indexes starting at 1 are correlated to different ZC sequences and are allocated for cells so that the indexes are continuous. When such ZC sequences are reported from BS to UE, a start index indicating the start of the continuous indexes is combined with the number of allocated sequences and they are reported as allocation sequence information by a report channel. The UE and the BS share the correlation between the ZC sequences and the indexes and the UE identifies a usable sequence number according to the correlation and the allocation sequence information reported from the BS. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100891 | TERMINAL, THE TRANSMISSION POWER OF WHICH IS LIMITED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AN ADJACENT CHANNEL INTERFERENCE RATIO - The present description relates to a terminal. The terminal comprises: a transceiving unit; and a control unit which controls the transceiving unit. When transmitting a signal in an uplink band that is spaced apart by a predetermined band so as to avoid continuity with the uplink band used by a terminal in an adjacent cell, the transceiving unit has an adjacent channel interference ratio, the value of which can be limited to a preset value in accordance with an offset relative to a predetermined band. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100892 | EVOLVED UNIVERSAL MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION RADIO ACCESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND TASK TRACKING METHOD THEREOF - The disclosure claims an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS) Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) system and a task tracking method thereof. The method comprises the steps of: creating a message, which carries the parameters of multiple tasks for tracking a same user; sending the message to an Evolved NodeB (eNodeB), which is used for the eNodeB to create multiple tasks to track the user according to the parameters. The disclosure also claims an E-UTRAN system, which comprises: a creation module, configured to create a message which carries the parameters of multiple tasks for tracking a same user; a sending module, configured to send the message to the eNodeB; an eNodeB, configured to establish multiple tasks to track the user according to the parameters. The disclosure can guarantee that multiple tasks track one appointed user synchronously. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100893 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Provided is a communication control device controlling communication of one or more secondary usage nodes respectively providing second communication services using a part of a frequency band assigned to a first communication service, the communication control device including a communication unit receiving access technique information indicating radio access techniques usable by the corresponding secondary usage nodes from the respective secondary usage nodes, a storage unit storing the access technique information received by the communication unit, and a control unit that, when at least a portion of a service area of a second-order second communication service is included in a service area of a first-order second communication service, determines whether at least a part of communication resources can be shared between the first-order and the second-order second communication services based on the radio access techniques of the first-order and the second-order second communication services indicated by the access technique information. | 04-25-2013 |
20130107798 | ABS-based Method for Inter Cell Interference Coordination in LTE-Advanced Networks | 05-02-2013 |
20130107799 | Device and Method for UE Aggregate Maximum Bit Rate | 05-02-2013 |
20130107800 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION | 05-02-2013 |
20130107801 | DIRECT COMMUNICATION METHOD AND DIRECT COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COORDINATOR DEVICE USING THE SAME | 05-02-2013 |
20130107802 | DOWNLINK TIME DIFFERENCE DETERMINATION IN FRAME ASYNCHRONOUS SYSTEMS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107803 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR FACILITATING ACCESS TERMINAL REGISTRATIONS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107804 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD | 05-02-2013 |
20130107805 | Reducing Complexity for Implementing Interference Cancellation Applied to Physical Channels of a Wireless Network | 05-02-2013 |
20130107806 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING ACCESS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK | 05-02-2013 |
20130107807 | METHOD FOR USING FEMTOCELL AS A TELEPHONE EXCHANGE | 05-02-2013 |
20130107808 | Base Station and Method for Clock Synchronization of Base Station | 05-02-2013 |
20130107809 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION IN MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107810 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN SINGLE USER AND MULTI-USER MIMO OPERATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK | 05-02-2013 |
20130107811 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CANCELING A CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK | 05-02-2013 |
20130107812 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING CO-LOCATED COEXISTENCE MODE | 05-02-2013 |
20130107813 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTEROPERABILITY POSITIVE TRAIN CONTROL | 05-02-2013 |
20130107814 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS MESSAGING | 05-02-2013 |
20130107815 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING COMPRESSED MODE IN MACRO-DIVERSITY STATE | 05-02-2013 |
20130114501 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile terminal apparatus and a radio communication method are provided which can efficiently transmit feedback control information through a physical uplink control channel. The radio communication method according to the present invention uses a plurality of ACK/NACK control bits as data signals, adds cyclic shifts to a plurality of reference signal blocks of a plurality of time blocks in a physical uplink control channel format comprised of a plurality of time blocks, multiplies the plurality of reference signal blocks by orthogonal codes and transmits a control channel signal including reference signals by which orthogonal codes are multiplied to a radio base station apparatus through a physical uplink control channel. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114502 | MANAGED ACCESS TO MOBILE ENDPOINTS - In one implementation, a method for managing access to mobile endpoints leverages the always-on nature of a first internet layer protocol to expand the reach of a second internet layer protocol. A network device receives a request originating from a remote host. The request includes a domain name of a mobile endpoint. The network device queries a database using the domain name for a first address of the mobile endpoint as designated according to the first internet layer protocol. The network device transmits a wake up message to the mobile endpoint using the first address. A data bearer for communication with the second internet layer protocol is established based on the wake up message, and a second address is assigned to the mobile endpoint. The second address is forwarded to the remote host, allowing communication between the remote host and the mobile endpoint. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114503 | Communication System and Method - A unit for use at a terminal as an external wireless modem. In one embodiment, the unit includes: a wireless transceiver for connecting to a gateway between the wireless cellular network and a further, packet-based network; second interface apparatus for connecting to the terminal. The unit further includes processing apparatus arranged to receive a first link layer identifier from the wireless cellular network, gateway or further network, intended for use by the terminal as a source identifier when accessing the further network via the wireless cellular network and gateway. The processing apparatus is configured to intercept at least one message being conveyed from the terminal to the gateway comprising a second link layer identifier generated by the terminal as a source identifier, translate the second identifier into the first link layer identifier and retransmit the message to the gateway with the first link layer identifier as the source identifier. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114504 | Methods And Apparatus For Selecting A Wireless Networking Device Based On Criteria Associated With An Application - A technique in a wireless device for use in establishing wireless connections is described. The device stores at least one list of wireless networking information. The device receives a request for executing one of a first application or a second application. For executing the first application, the device selects first wireless networking information from the at least one list, where the first wireless networking information is associated with one or more wireless networking devices of a first type, and scans to identify the one or more wireless networking devices of the first type for establishing a wireless connection therewith for communication with the first application. For executing the second application, the device selects second wireless networking information from the at least one list, where the second wireless networking information is associated with one or more wireless networking devices of a second type, and scans to identify the one or more wireless networking devices of the second type for establishing a wireless connection therewith for communication with the second application. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114505 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POWER CONTROL FOR WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS ON MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIERS ASSOCIATED WITH MULTIPLE TIMING ADVANCES - A method and apparatus for power control for wireless transmissions on multiple component carriers associated with multiple timing advances are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may perform power scaling or other adjustments on physical channels in each subframe to be transmitted on component carriers that belong to different timing advance groups (TAGs) if a sum of the transmit powers of the channels would or is to exceed a configured maximum output power for that subframe where each TAG may be associated with a separate timing advance value for uplink transmissions. The WTRU may adjust the transmit power of at least one physical channel if a sum of transmit powers in an overlapping portion of subframes of a less advanced TAG and a more advanced TAG would or is to exceed a configured maximum WTRU output power during the overlap. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114506 | System and Method for Data Forwarding - A method for operating a first station includes broadcasting identifying information during a contention period after obtaining access to a communications medium used to transmit messages. The method also includes receiving a transmission intended for an access point from a second station over the communications medium, and forwarding the transmission to the access point over the communications medium. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114507 | FRAME FORMAT AND FRAME ASSEMBLING/DISASSEMBLING METHOD FOR THE FRAME FORMAT - A method of assembling a plurality of frames including cell/packet-formatted data according to a predetermined frame format for transmission in a communication signal in a wireless or satellite environment. The method begins by assembling a data payload for each frame having a first variable size, including at least one of a partial data cell/packet and a complete data cell/packet. Then, for each frame a block code having a second variable size is generated for use in error correction. Each frame is provided with a frame header which defines aspects of the frame. Finally, the data payload, the block code and the format header are combined to form a frame corresponding to the plurality of frames, the format header defining a first portion of the frame, the data payload defining a second portion of the frame and the block code defining a third portion of the frame. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114508 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING CARRIER AGGREGATION CAPABAILITY - The present invention relates to a method and device for processing carrier aggregation capability, which method comprises: sending, by user equipment, its own carrier aggregation capability to the network side; acquiring, by network side equipment, the carrier aggregation capability of the user equipment; and configuring, by the network side equipment, aggregated carriers for the user equipment according to the carrier aggregation capability thereof. In the present invention, the sending of the carrier aggregation capability to the network side by the UE enables the network side to acquire the UE's carrier aggregation capability, thus ensuring the normal operation of the carrier aggregation system. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114509 | OFDM/OFDMA FRAME STRUCTURE FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An OFDM/OFDMA frame structure technology for communication systems is disclosed. The OFDM/OFDMA frame structure technology comprises a variable length sub-frame structure with efficiently sized cyclic prefixes and efficient transition gap durations operable to effectively utilize OFDM/OFDMA bandwidth. Furthermore, the frame structure provides compatibility with multiple wireless communication systems. An uplink frame structure and a downlink frame structure are provided. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114510 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR ABBREVIATED-CODE DIALING IN A NETWORK SYSTEM - A system, method, and computer readable medium for abbreviated dialing in a femtocell network is provided. A user having authorized access to the femtocell network may dial another authorized user using an abbreviated code. On receipt of the call request, a femtocell system may evaluate the destination number to determine if it is an abbreviated code. If the dialed number is not an abbreviated code, the femtocell system may direct the call request to the telecommunication core network for processing thereby. If the dialed number is evaluated by the femtocell system as an abbreviated code, the femtocell system may direct the call request to an on-site PBX for call handling. If the abbreviated code is a valid code and the dialed user equipment is currently in the femtocell network service area, the PBX may then complete the call setup within the femtocell network. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114511 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES - An IP telephony system allows a user to register a telephony device that receives its native telephony service from a different telephony service provider as an extension telephone. The user can then place calls through the IP telephony system using the extension telephone. Such calls may or may not be established using the extension telephone's native telephony service provider. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114512 | BASE STATION DEVICE, INTER-BASE-STATION SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD, DATA STRUCTURE OF SYNCHRONIZATION INFORMATION, AND DATA STRUCTURE OF SYNCHRONIZATION REQUEST - A base station device includes a transmission unit | 05-09-2013 |
20130121239 | Methods, Systems, and Products for Security Services - Methods, systems, and products are disclosed for notification of alarms in security systems. An alarm is detected by an alarm controller, and an alarm message is sent to notify of the alarm. The alarm message identifies a unique network address assigned to the alarm controller. The alarm controller then receives a Voice-over Internet Protocol call to the unique network address to verify the alarm. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121240 | Delay Management in Shared Baseband Deployments - A method of controlling radio link delay in a multi-standard wireless system having a first Radio Equipment Controller (REC) operating with a first radio standard interface and a second REC operating with a second radio standard interface is disclosed. A time delay between the first REC and a Radio Equipment (RE) and a time delay between the second REC and the RE is determined. When radio signal data from the first and second REC are received, they are stored into a memory. The stored radio signal data is then marked in accordance with the calculated time delay. The marked radio signal data from each REC is then multiplexed into a single radio signal timed according to a reference timing clock signal for transmission to the RE. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121241 | Indication of Selected Core Network in a Network Sharing Environment - A network broadcasts a list of multiple core networks. A mobile station MS selects one and sends an uplink message (e.g., ATTACH or ROUTING AREA UPDATE Request) with a new format detailed by these teachings. The body of the message has a data section and an identity section, and the identity section includes: a temporary identifier for a mobile station, a bit sequence indicating that a selected core network is identified in the uplink message and indicating type for the temporary identifier (e.g., Foreign or Random TLLI), and an indication of the selected core network. For the Foreign TLLI there is an extension field for the additional bits of the Foreign TLLI as compared to the Random TLLI, and the Foreign TLLI is derived from the mobile station's PTMSI. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121242 | LAYER 2 PROCESSING AND CREATION OF PROTOCOL DATA UNITS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Enhanced MAC-es PDUs are created by concatenating enhanced MAC-es service data units (SDUs) based on higher layer PDUs and segments thereof, where segmentation information is included in the enhanced MAC-es headers. An enhanced MAC-e header is generated for each enhanced MAC-es PDU to describe information about the enhanced MAC-es PDU. An enhanced MAC-e PDU is created by concatenating enhanced MAC-es PDUs and enhanced MAC-e headers. An enhanced MAC-es header may include a Transmit Sequence Number (TSN) field, a Segmentation Description (SD) field, length (L) fields to indicate the length of each enhanced MAC-es SDU and/or logical channel indicator (LCH-ID) fields. An enhanced MAC-e header may include one or more logical channel indicator (LCH-ID) fields for corresponding enhanced MAC-es PDUs or MAC-s SDUs and length (L) fields. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121243 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF PACKETS HAVING A PLURALITY OF FORMATS - Systems and methods for communicating packets having a plurality of formats are described herein. In some aspects, a signal (SIG) field in the preamble of a packet may indicate whether an extension field, such as an extension SIG field or SIG-B field, is included in the packet. In another aspect, one or more detectors may be used to auto-detect packets formatted as one of at least two different formats based on a short training field (STF) of a received packet. In some aspects, along training field (LTF) in the preamble of a packet may indicate whether the payload is repetition coded. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121244 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF PACKETS HAVING A PLURALITY OF FORMATS - Systems and methods for communicating packets having a plurality of formats are described herein. In some aspects, a signal (SIG) field in the preamble of a packet may indicate whether an extension field, such as an extension SIG field or SIG-B field, is included in the packet. In another aspect, one or more detectors may be used to auto-detect packets formatted as one of at least two different formats based on a short training field (STF) of a received packet. In some aspects, along training field (LTF) in the preamble of a packet may indicate whether the payload is repetition coded. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121245 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF PACKETS HAVING A PLURALITY OF FORMATS - Systems and methods for communicating packets having a plurality of formats are described herein. In some aspects, a signal (SIG) field in the preamble of a packet may indicate whether an extension field, such as an extension SIG field or SIG-B field, is included in the packet. In another aspect, one or more detectors may be used to auto-detect packets formatted as one of at least two different formats based on a short training field (STF) of a received packet. In some aspects, along training field (LTF) in the preamble of a packet may indicate whether the payload is repetition coded. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121246 | Multi-Stage Timing and Frequency Synchronization - According to exemplary embodiments of the invention, timing and frequency offset estimation is divided into two or more stages. In each stage, a different subset of the available reference symbols is selected to perform timing synchronization, frequency synchronization, or joint timing and frequency synchronization. In each non-final stage, a respective set of the reference symbols is used to perform timing synchronization or frequency synchronization in order to narrow the uncertainty window for the timing or frequency offset, and thus reduce the search space for the final stage. In the final stage, a different set of reference symbols may be used to perform joint timing and frequency synchronization over the reduced search space. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121247 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION IN A MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT SYSTEM - A method is provided for transmitting channel quality information (CQI) in a MIMO system. A method for allowing a receiver to feed back a CQI value to a transmitter in a Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) system includes receiving a transmission (Tx) pilot signal for each Tx antenna from a base station (BS), measuring a first CQI value of a first codeword and a second CQI value of a second codeword on the basis of the pilot signal, and transmitting the first CQI value of the first codeword and the second CQI value of the second codeword to the base station (BS), wherein at least one of the first and second CQI values includes specific information capable of indicating a transmission restriction status of a corresponding codeword. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121248 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND METHOD OF PROCESSING DATA THEREOF - A clustering wireless base station includes a group digital processor including a plurality of digital units (DU) and a plurality of remote radio frequency units (RRU) that are connected to the group digital processor through a transport network and that are installed in each service target area. In this case, each DU includes a decoder that decodes upward data that is received from the each DU, and each RRU includes an encoder that encodes downward data from the each DU. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121249 | Method and apparatus for transmitting system information in a mobile communication system - A method and apparatus are provided for transmitting system information in a mobile communication system. The method includes configuring system information including first antenna configuration information and second antenna configuration information, and broadcasting the system information. The first antenna configuration information includes information about a number of antennas of a base station. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121250 | DATA BREAKOUT AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A first service mechanism in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and performs one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. These services may include caching of data, data or video compression techniques, push-based services, charging, application serving, analytics, security, data filtering, and new revenue-producing services, as well as others. This architecture allows performing new mobile network services at the edge of a mobile data network within the infrastructure of an existing mobile data network. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121251 | METHOD FOR SEARCHING PILOT SIGNALS TO SYNCHRONIZE A CDMA RECEIVER WITH AN ASSOCIATED TRANSMITTER - A wireless transmit-receive unit includes an antenna, detection circuitry configured to detect a pseudorandom (PN) offset of a pilot signal received by the antenna while the antenna is adapted to an omnidirectional receive pattern, and monitoring circuitry configured to monitor a received signal strength of the pilot signal as a directional receive pattern of the antenna is steered in order to determine an azimuth angle of the directional pattern that maximizes the pilot signal at the detected PN offset. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121252 | Information Push Method, Apparatus, and System - The present invention provides a new Push method, apparatus, and system. The Push method includes: receiving a Push message delivered by an application server; obtaining a private IP address of a UE according to a user identifier, where the user identifier is obtained from the Push message; and obtaining, according to the private IP address of the UE, a PS domain node currently connected to the UE, sending the Push message to the PS domain node, and sending the Push message to the UE through the PS domain node. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121253 | COMMUNICATING NETWORK STATUS - A method for communicating network status information includes receiving, via a first link, a request for status information from a client device, the first link being a link between a router device and a client device. In response to the request, a data exchanger is polled for status information via a second link. The second link is a link between the router device and the data exchanger. The status information identifies a state of a third link between the data exchanger and a wide area network. The status information is received via the second link and communicated to the client device via the first link. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121254 | TIMING ADJUSTMENT METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system having a user equipment that performs transmission process having transmission timing adjustment information and a base station that receives a signal sent from the user equipment, the mobile communication system includes, if a timer controlling a term of application of first transmission timing adjustment information expires before transmission of a signal including identification information of the user equipment is performed during a connection process including reception of second transmission timing adjustment information while the user equipment has the first transmission timing adjustment information and performing the connection process to the base station, the user equipment does not transmit the signal. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121255 | GATING CONTROL IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for updating or handling the update of a media path between a first user terminal and a second user terminal in a telecommunications network is provided. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the media path includes one or more gateway nodes. Each gateway node includes a gating function for gating media packets. Each gating function has an associated controlling function for controlling the gating function. Responsive to a message indicating at an update of the gating at the gating function is required, the gating function arranges for a new gating to be opened while keeping the old gating open. The gating function determines when the media has been switched to the new path. Responsive to the determination, the gating function arranges for the old gating to be closed. | 05-16-2013 |
20130128806 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF PACKETS HAVING A PLURALITY OF FORMATS - Systems and methods for communicating packets having a plurality of formats are described herein. In some aspects, a signal (SIG) field in the preamble of a packet may indicate whether an extension field, such as an extension SIG field or SIG-B field, is included in the packet. In another aspect, one or more detectors may be used to auto-detect packets formatted as one of at least two different formats based on a short training field (STF) of a received packet. In some aspects, along training field (LTF) in the preamble of a packet may indicate whether the payload is repetition coded. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128807 | PREAMBLE DESIGN FOR TELEVISION WHITE SPACE TRANSMISSIONS - A method for generating a Physical Layer Convergence Protocol Packet Data Unit (PPDU) having a preamble and a payload for television white space transmission (TVWS) is provided. The symbols of the PPDU each include 128 total (orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing) OFDM tones or 256 total OFDM tones. The preamble includes a signal (SIG) field symbol having 108 OFDM data tones if the symbols of the PPDU include 128 total OFDM tones or having 234 OFDM data tones if the symbols of the PPDU include 256 total OFDM tones. The SIG field symbol indicates at least one of an amount of data in the payload or a length of time that the PPDU will occupy the television broadcast frequency spectrum. The PPDU is generated by down-clocking an 802.11ac signal by a factor so that the bandwidth of the PPDU decreases down to one appropriate for use in a TVWS channel. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128808 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL HEADER COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating packets having a plurality of types are described herein. In some aspects, the packets include a compressed MAC header. In some aspects the packets include an acknowledgment (ACK) frame. The fields included in a particular packet type may be based on the type of information to be communicated to the receiving device. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128809 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL HEADER COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating packets having a plurality of types are described herein. In some aspects, the packets include a compressed MAC header. In some aspects the packets include an acknowledgment (ACK) frame. The fields included in a particular packet type may be based on the type of information to be communicated to the receiving device. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128810 | VIRTUALIZED WIRELESS NETWORK - According to an embodiment of the present invention, a network is provided. The network may include a first base transceiver station (BTS). The first BTS may be operable to provide a first signal including a plurality of first carriers. The network may also include a second BTS operable to provide a second signal including a plurality of second carriers. The network may also include a set of one or more digital access units (DAUs), each of the one or more DAUs being coupled to at least one of the first BTS or the second BTS. A set of one or more digital remote units (DRUs) may be included in the network, each of the DRUs being coupled to one of the one or more DAUs and operable to broadcast the first signal or the second signal. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128811 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GENERATING AND DISPLAYING APPLICATION INFORMATION ON A WIRELESS STATION - Systems and methods for generating and displaying application information on a wireless station. A wireless station is configured to select icons for display on a wireless station based on a network information string received by the wireless station. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128812 | EFFICIENT AND CONSISTENT WIRELESS DOWNLINK CHANNEL CONFIGURATION - A method of wireless communication including a base station transmitting a preamble including information indicating a sector identifier and an antenna port value. The base station further transmits a pilot sequence, wherein the pilot sequence and the location of the pilot sequence are based on the sector identifier and on the antenna port value. A base station configured to perform the method is also disclosed. A corresponding subscriber station configured to receive the preamble and pilot sequence is also disclosed, as well as a subscriber station method. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128813 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention provides various methods for transmitting channel state information relative to one or more serving cells in a carrier-coupled environment, and devices for supporting the same. As one embodiment of the present invention, a method for reporting channel state information (CSI) in a wireless access system that supports carrier coupling comprises the steps of: allowing a terminal to receive information related to a CSI report mode for one or more serving cells from a base station; and allowing the terminal to report the channel state information (CSI) on the one or more serving cells to the base station by considering the CSI report mode. In this case, if first type CSI for a first serving cell and second type CSI for a second serving cell are transmitted on the same subframe, the terminal can report CSI for one serving cell only, to the base station, according to priorities of CSI report types related to the CSI report mode. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128814 | WIRELESS NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communication system comprising one or more wireless stations programmed to await for an authorizing signal to initiate wireless communications with a network controller or access point. The network controller maintains identification information in different queues, said queues based upon the anticipated wireless station's activity. The wireless station identification information is moved between the different queues in response to this predicted activity. Between polling, each mobile station aggregates data for the next opportunity to transmit. Multi-polling may be employed such that more than a single station is polled at a time. Polling is accomplished by polling one of the more active stations along with a less active station. The less active station is unlikely to transmit, so collisions are avoided to a certain degree. If a lesser active station becomes active, it is moved into the more active queue and consequently will be polled more often. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128815 | DYNAMICALLY CREATED AND EXPANDED WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method for the establishment and maintenance of wireless network, such as wireless network enabling access to the World Wide Web. The network can be created by its users as part of social network activity. The users are using automated resources discovery, verification and mapping as a comprehensive wireless resources search engine. Once few locations are mapped as wireless service “hot spots,” the service area can be expanded as users keep discovering and mapping more resources. These existing wireless Internet access resources could be mined by users to create spontaneous wireless network providing wide area high-speed data service. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128816 | Method, Apparatus, and System for Setting Maximum Bandwidth - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for setting a maximum bandwidth. In the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention, through obtaining the bandwidth support capability of the UE, the UE is authorized with the maximum bandwidth matching its capability, which can satisfy bandwidth demands of different types of terminals, make full use of a network resource, and solve a problem that a data service cannot be implemented due to being unable to activate a PDP context after a 3G radio network is upgraded to an HSPA+, the network supports the QoS greater than 16 M, but a part of terminals do not support a bandwidth parameter greater than 16 M whereas a bandwidth authorized by a network side is greater than 16 M. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128817 | METHOD OF NOTIFYING FUNCTION IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is disclosed a notification method in a communication system of notifying specific multifunctionality information between terminal stations. An expansion code is generated from both a user input code and a function identification code corresponding to a specific function. A transmission frame including the expansion code is also generated and transmitted to at least one of the terminal stations. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128818 | RADIO APPARATUS - A control unit, in cooperation with an interface (IF) unit, a modulation unit and a baseband processing unit, produces a packet signal composed of a plurality of streams. While using as a reference a first known signal assigned to one of the plurality of streams and performing a cyclic timing shift within the first known signal on a first known signal assigned to another stream, the control unit performs a timing shift also on an extensional known signal assigned to a stream where no data is assigned. The amounts of timing shift are given degrees of priority beforehand and for the stream where data signals are assigned the control unit uses the amounts of timing shift in descending degree of priority. For the stream where no data signal is assigned, the control unit uses the amounts of timing shift also in descending degree of priority. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128819 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MESSAGE DELIVERY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A router receives from a host service a message which is intended for delivery to a mobile device via a wireless network. The message includes an indication field which includes a return packet indication on whether to send a return packet to the host, an identifier field which includes an identifier which identifies the device, and a payload field which includes a payload of the message. When the indication is set to a first, setting and the message is not being delivered to the device, the router sends to the host a return packet which indicates that the message is not being delivered to the device. When the indication is set to a second setting and the message is not being delivered to the device, the router does not send to the host the return packet which indicates that the message is not being delivered to the device. | 05-23-2013 |
20130136056 | DISTRIBUTED CONTENT MANAGEMENT WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - A mobile network includes a metro ethernet ring including SPGW-X servers, each of the SPGW-X servers including a processor, a memory, function modules and a Gi interface, the function modules including a Serving Gateway (SGW) module, PDN Gateway (PGW) data plane module, transport layer services module, content management module and application layer services module, a PGW-Y server, the PRW-Y server including a processor, a memory and function modules, the function modules include a PGW control plane module, PGW data plane module, centralized services module and a Gi interface, and a mobility management entity (MME), an ISP/private network linked to the Gi interfaces of the plurality of SPGW-X servers, and a centralized Packet Data Network (PDN) and a central IP backbone linked to the Gi interface of the PGW-Y server. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136057 | Base Station Aided Synchronization - An apparatus, method and computer program product include requesting a physical identifier of a communication base station having a preset hierarchical distance to a communication core network from a first communication base station having a higher hierarchical distance than the preset hierarchical distance, based on a connection on one of an interface between a communication base station having a higher hierarchical distance than the preset hierarchical distance and the communication core network and an interface between two communication base stations both having a higher hierarchical distance than the preset hierarchical distance. Prior to the requesting, an initial synchronization with a neighbor base station can be established. After the requesting, an accurate synchronization with the overly base station based on the obtained physical identifier can be established. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136058 | Handling a Registration Timer to Provide Service Continuity in IMS - The invention relates to a method for providing service continuity with respect to a registration of a mobile terminal, UE ( | 05-30-2013 |
20130136059 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS , WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system includes a first wireless communication apparatus, a second wireless communication apparatus, and a third wireless communication apparatus which operates as a control station of controlling the first and second wireless communication apparatuses. The third wireless communication apparatus receives data from the first wireless communication apparatus using a first slot, and sends the received data to the second wireless communication apparatus and an acknowledgment of reception of the data to the first wireless communication apparatus using a second slot. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136060 | METADATA BASED ID INTERPRETATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - Disclosed is a metadata based identifier (ID) interpretation apparatus and method for communication between two nodes present in heterogeneous networks having different ID systems. All of the IDs may be integrally managed using an application layer ID, and communication between nodes having different ID systems may be performed through ID interaction. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136061 | LOW-RATE LONG-RANGE MODE FOR OFDM WIRELESS LAN - A system for implementing an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing scheme and providing an improved range extension. The system includes a transmitter for transmitting data to a receiver. The transmitter includes a symbol mapper for generating a symbol for each of a plurality of subcarriers and a spreading module for spreading out the symbol on each of the plurality of subcarriers by using a direct sequence spread spectrum. The symbol on each of the plurality of subcarriers is spread by multiplying the symbol by predefined length sequences. The receiver includes a de-spreader module for de-spreading the symbols on each of the plurality of subcarriers. The de-spreader module includes a simple correlator receiver for obtaining maximum detection. The correlator produces an output sequence of a same length as an input sequence and the de-spreader module uses a point of maximum correlation on the output sequence to obtain a recovered symbol. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136062 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEPARABLE CHANNEL STATE FEEDBACK IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate the generation and use of separable, hierarchical channel state feedback in a wireless communication system. As described herein, in the event that multiple network nodes cooperate to conduct downlink transmissions to a network user, channel state feedback as reported by the network user can be separated into intra-node feedback relating to per-node channel conditions and inter-node feedback relating to relative phase and/or amplitude between channels corresponding to respective nodes. Further, a network user can select to report intra-node feedback and/or inter-node feedback based on network instructions, a cooperation strategy to be utilized by respective network nodes, or the like. As additionally described herein, respective codebooks on which inter-node and intra-node channel feedback is based can be configured to convey information relating to a partial channel description and/or to vary based on resource units (e.g., sub-bands, resource blocks, etc.) utilized for downlink communication. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136063 | PHY Preamble Format For Wireless Communication System - A system and method of extracting data from data packets transmitted over a wireless network includes receiving a data packet having a preamble portion and a payload portion. The preamble portion is cross correlated with a first known spreading sequence to generate a first timing signal and the preamble portion is cross correlated with a second known spreading signal to generate a frame timing signal. An impulse is detected in the first timing signal and a first timing parameter is set based upon the detected impulse in the first timing signal. An impulse is detected in the frame timing signal and a frame timing parameter is set based upon the detected impulse in the frame timing signal. Data is extracted from the received payload portion according to the first timing parameter and the frame timing parameter. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136064 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF COMMUNICATING PACKET DATA UNITS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT AND SYSTEM USING THEREOF - A method and system for communicating packet data units over a Gb interface in a wireless communication environment is provided. Packed Data Units (PDUs) are received from Machine Type Communication (MTC) device(s) by a base station coupled to the MTC device(s). Then, the PDUs are aggregated over a period of time by the base station. Further, the aggregated PDUs are packed in at least one Logical Link Control (LLC) data packet. The at least one LLC data packet including the aggregated PDUs is multiplexed over a Gb interface in a single session between the base station and a packet core network. | 05-30-2013 |
20130142112 | METHOD OF SWITCHING DATA NETWORK FOR NETWORK APPARATUS, NETWORK APPARATUS, AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A network apparatus and a method of switching a data network for a network apparatus are provided. The network apparatus includes a plurality of User Identity Modules (UIMs), a transceiver module, and a switching unit. The UIMs are used to provide a plurality of network service plans, wherein the network apparatus operates in a first network service plan corresponding to a first UIM of the UIMs. The transceiver module is arranged to receive a plurality of network packets corresponding to the network service plans. The switching unit is arranged to obtain a plurality of corresponding network connection information from the network packets, performing an information-matching operation upon the plurality of corresponding network connection information to generate a matching result by referring to a profile database, and determining if the network apparatus is required to be switched to operate in a second network service plan according to the matching result. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142113 | PATH-LOSS ESTIMATION FOR UPLINK POWER CONTROL IN A CARRIER AGREGATION ENVIRONMENT - Technology for uplink power control in a wireless network is disclosed. Receiving a component carrier list at a User Equipment (UE) is disclosed where the component carriers grouped in the list have one or more common characteristics relative to the power necessary for uplink transmission on those component carriers. A path-loss estimation performed on the downlink of a component carrier in the component carrier list can, therefore, be used to control uplink transmission for other component carriers in the list. Additionally, a UE can receive a path-loss difference parameter providing an offset for one or more factors related to the power necessary for uplink transmission between a component carrier with certain characteristics relative to those factors and a component carrier with different characteristics relative to those same factors. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142114 | Enhancement of Replay Protection in Wireless Communication Systems - Certain aspects of the present disclosure generally relate to methods and apparatus for enhancement of replay protection between receivers and transmitters from third party interveners in wireless communication systems. One example method generally includes transmitting one or more packets, wherein each of the packets comprises an indication of a packet number associated with that packet; determining that a condition has been met or exceeded; and based on the determination, transmitting a message indicating a packet number increase. Another example method generally includes receiving a first packet comprising an indication of a first packet number; receiving a message indicating a packet number increase; updating a packet number window based on the packet number increase; after the updating, receiving a second packet comprising an indication of a second packet number; and discarding at least a portion of the second packet if the second packet number is outside the packet number window. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142115 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data transmission apparatus in a communication system includes a verification unit configured to verify a new frequency band for transmitting and receiving data to and from a plurality of terminals; a generation unit configured to generate a frame in the new frequency band; and a transmission unit configured to transmit data through the new frequency band by using the frame, wherein the frame includes data fields in which data corresponding to the terminals are included, and control fields in which control information for receiving the data included in the data field in the terminals is included, and wherein the control fields include a VHT-STF (very high throughput short training field), a VHT-SIG (very high throughput signal field) A | 06-06-2013 |
20130142116 | CELL CANCELLATION LIST AND AN ADAPTIVE RADIO LINK FAILURE TRIGGER FOR IMPROVED SPECTRUM SHARING - A cell cancellation method for improved spectrum sharing is provided. The cell cancellation method includes detecting interference from a cell. The method also includes cancelling a signal from the cell when a physical cell identifier corresponding to the cell is indicated in a cancellation list. An adaptive radio link failure (RLF) trigger method for improved spectrum sharing is disclosed. The RLF trigger method includes detecting interference from a cell. The RLF trigger method also includes adjusting a radio link failure trigger according to a cell identity of an interferer associated with the cell. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142117 | System and Method for Intelligent Caching - As mobile subscribers increasingly employ their wireless devices to perform an ever expanding range of activities, it has become more and more important for all of the different entities in a wireless ecosystem (e.g., wireless carriers, intermediaries, service providers, etc.) to complete their processing activities in the most efficient, expeditious, flexible, etc. manner possible. An intelligent caching mechanism, through which for example various of the results of a preparatory step may be preserved for subsequent reuse, can inter alia incrementally reduce processing time, reduce system and network resource consumption, save money, etc. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142118 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MACHINE TO MACHINE DEVICE CONTROL AND TRIGGERING - Systems and methods for control and triggering of machine to machine (M2M) devices (e.g., smart meters). More specifically how to allow an M2M service provider (e.g., utility company) to use an operator's network to communicate with the M2M device connected with a UE/GW associated with the operator's network. The M2M service provider may receive identification of the UE/GW, but not for the M2M device. By transmitting an identifier for the M2M device along with an identifier for the UE/GW, the network operator may define establish and maintain a communication path specific to M2M devices. Similar techniques may be incorporated to allow the M2M service provider to locate and trigger the M2M device. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142119 | MULTI CARRIER NETWORK CONFIGURATION - A method of acknowledging receipt of a control message instructing a change in carrier configuration in a multi-carrier wireless telecommunication network. The multi-carrier wireless telecommunications network comprises a plurality of network nodes operable to simultaneously transmit and receive signals on more than one radio frequency carrier within a sector of the telecommunications network. The method comprises the steps of: receiving the control message, encoding an acknowledgement of safe receipt of the control message, transmitting the acknowledgement of safe receipt, and a predetermined period after the transmission of the acknowledgement of safe receipt, re-transmitting the acknowledgement of safe receipt. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142120 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND CALL SESSION CONTROL SERVER DEVICE - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: causing an MME to restart with a bearer for a UE established between an S-GW and a P-GW; causing a P/S-CSCF to transmit a terminating signal addressed to the UE to the S-GW via the P-GW; causing the S-GW to notify the P/S-CSCF via the P-GW that the MME has restarted; causing the P/S-CSCF to hold the terminating signal addressed to the UE; and causing the P/S-CSCF to transmit the terminating signal addressed to the UE to the S-GW via the P-GW after the UE is registered with an IMS again. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142121 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING A REFERENCE SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving reference signals in Long Term Evolution (LTE) and LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) systems includes determining whether a dedicated reference signal is detected in a current subframe; estimating, if a dedicated reference signal is detected in the current subframe, a data channel using the dedicated reference signal to receive data; and estimating, if no dedicated reference signal is detected in the current subframe, a data channel using a common reference signal detected in the current subframe to receive data. The transmission scheme uses a DeModulation Reference Signal (DM-RS) for channel response estimation. To secure backward compatibility of the LTE-A system, a Common Reference Signal is transmitted in normal subframes. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142122 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SELECTING SERVING GATEWAYS TO SERVICE USER EQUIPMENT - Some embodiments provide methods for selecting a serving gateway to service user equipment in communication with a network, including: receiving a message from a base transceiver station including a list of tracking areas handled by the base transceiver station, initiating a domain name system query for at least one tracking area in the list of tracking areas to identify information indicating a serving gateway serving the at least one tracking area, storing, in local memory, the information indicating the serving gateway serving the at least one tracking area, and upon an occurrence of a triggering event, retrieving, from the local memory, the stored information indicating the serving gateway serving the at least one tracking area. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142123 | System and Method of Serving Gateway Having Mobile Packet Protocol Application-Aware Packet Management - Mobile protocol packets, with a header field and a payload field, are communicated from a user mobile equipment to an application-aware serving gateway. The application-aware mobile protocol serving gateway detects header information in the header field and application information in the payload field to manage the mobile protocol packets based on a policy. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142124 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOW-OVERHEAD WIRELESS BEACON TIMING - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating a compressed beacon are described herein. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network includes transmitting, at an access point, a full beacon at a first multiple of a beacon interval. The method further includes transmitting a compressed beacon at each beacon interval that is not the first multiple of the beacon interval. Another method of communicating in a wireless network includes receiving, at a wireless device, a full beacon at a first multiple of a beacon interval. The method further includes receiving a compressed beacon at a beacon interval that is not the first multiple of the beacon interval. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142125 | TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a communication system in which a base station performing precoding processing and a mobile terminal communicate with each other, communication is efficiently performed. The terminal device reports to the base station device, information indicating a codebook that the terminal device supports, among a plurality of codebooks. The base station device determines a transmission mode, based on the information indicating the codebook that the terminal device supports. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142126 | NETWORK ENTITY FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS TOWARDS A USER ENTITY OVER A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network entity for managing communications towards a user entity over a communication network, the network entity having an access domain selector for determining an access domain of the user entity upon the basis of user entity specific data, and an application server for providing the user entity specific data. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142127 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, PROGRAM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication device, including a data processing unit that generates a data packet, and a transmitter unit that transmits the data packet generated by the data processing unit, wherein the data processing unit sets information for use other than an NAV setting to a Duration field in the data packet. | 06-06-2013 |
20130148572 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A modem is disclosed that, in one embodiment, includes: first interface apparatus comprising a first wireless transceiver arranged to connect to a wireless cellular network; second interface apparatus arranged to connect to the terminal; and processing apparatus configured as a wireless cellular modem for accessing packet-based communications. The processing apparatus is arranged to receive at least one first address from the wireless cellular network via the first interface apparatus, the first address being an address of a server of a name-to-address resolution system. The processing apparatus is further configured to intercept, via the second interface apparatus, a name-to-address resolution query being conveyed from the terminal to the wireless cellular network comprising a second address as a destination address, to translate the second address into the first address, and to retransmit the query to the wireless cellular network via the first interface apparatus with the first address as the destination address. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148573 | PHYSICAL MAPPING OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - A computer to identify wireless enabled neighbors while connected to a network via an Ethernet or wireless infrastructure mode communications protocol. The computer switches to a first ad hoc wireless protocol and performs a discovery operation, then switches to a second ad hoc wireless protocol and performs a discovery operation. The computer switches back to the Ethernet or wireless infrastructure mode communications protocol and transmits the neighbor information to a storage device. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148574 | Communication Protocol Technique for Improving Data Throughput - An acknowledgement technique reduces packet-switched communication delays. The technique may be implemented in a mobile communication device with multiple SIMs. The technique facilitates enhanced communication capability for the mobile communication device. In one implementation, the technique helps reduce delays caused by switching between packet-switched and circuit-switched communications. Specifically, in one aspect, the technique reduces delays caused by exponential backoff that may occur during suspension of a packet-switched communication. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148575 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ACKNOWLEDGING COMMUNICATIONS FROM A PLURALITY OF DEVICES - Systems, methods, and devices for acknowledging communications from a plurality of devices for acknowledging communications from a plurality of devices are described herein. In some aspects, a group ACK includes a bitmap indicating whether a communication has been received from each of a plurality of apparatuses within a previous period. The previous period may comprise a time period since a previous ACK. In some aspects, group ACKs are transmitted pursuant to a schedule. For example, group ACKs may be transmitted a scheduled time after transmitting a beacon. In some aspects, a bitmap indicating whether a communication has been received from each of a plurality of apparatuses within a previous period may be transmitted in a beacon. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148576 | VOICE SERVICE SOLUTIONS FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH SYSTEMS - Methods, systems, and devices are disclosed for providing services, such as voice services, within flexible bandwidth systems. In general, the scaling of one or more aspects of a flexible bandwidth system may be compensated for through altering one or more aspects within a code domain. The tools and techniques may include scaling spreading factors (with rate matching tuning in some embodiments), multi-code transmission, code rate increases, AMR codec rate adjustments, and/or higher order modulation. Subframe decoding approaches for the reception scheme may also be utilized. These tools and techniques can be flexibly implemented on the mobile device and/or base station side. Some embodiments may also minimize the latency introduced by the transmission and/or reception process. Flexible bandwidths systems may utilize portions of spectrum that may be too big or too small to fit a normal bandwidth waveform. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148577 | TRANSPORT BLOCK SET SEGMENTATION - Data of a transport block set is to be transmitted in a wireless communication system. Segmentation information for potential segmentation of the data is provided. The data is transmitted with a first specified modulation and coding scheme. The data is received and it is determined whether the received data meets a specified quality. When the specified quality is not met, a repeat request is transmitted. The first specified modulation and coding set is changed to a second specified modulation and coding set. In response to the repeat request, the data is segmented into a plurality of segments supported by the second specified modulation and coding set in accordance with the provided segmentation information. The segments are transmitted and at least two of the segments are transmitted separately. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148578 | System and Method to Control Wireless Communications - Methods and systems to control wireless communications are provided. A particular network communication system includes a plurality of distributed mobile architecture gateways. Each distributed mobile architecture gateway includes at least one interface to communicate with one or more legacy communication networks and each distributed mobile architecture gateway also includes a data network connection. The data network connection is adapted to connect to at least one other distributed mobile architecture gateway of the plurality of distributed mobile architecture gateways. Additionally, the system includes a private Internet Protocol (IP) network connecting each distributed mobile architecture gateway to a respective set of distributed mobile architecture (DMA) servers. Each DMA server is coupled to a respective base transceiver station, and the private IP network also connects each DMA server in a particular set of DMA servers to the DMA servers in the other sets of DMA servers. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148579 | SUPPORT FOR VOICE OVER FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH CARRIER SYSTEMS - Methods, systems, and devices are disclosed for providing data, such as voice data for a voice service, over flexible bandwidth carriers. Some embodiments include support for 12.2 kbps and/or 7.95 kbps AMR CS voice over flexible bandwidth UMTS (F-UMTS) in particular. Some embodiments provide for keeping the information data rate for a flexible bandwidth carrier at least the same as that of a normal bandwidth carrier. For example, one voice frame may still be mapped to a 20 ms time window upon transmission, irrespective of a flexible bandwidth scaling factor N or chip rate divider Dcr in F-UMTS. The tools and techniques provided may be implemented on mobile devices and/or base stations. Flexible bandwidths carriers may utilize portions of spectrum that may be too big or too small to fit a normal bandwidth waveform for a normal bandwidth carrier. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148580 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING BUFFER STATUS - A method, a user equipment (UE), and communications system for reporting buffer status are provided. A UE selects, from a plurality of available transport blocks (TBs) in a single transmission time interval (TTI), a TB that meets a buffer status report (BSR) transmission condition to report BSR information about at least one logical channel group (LCG) of the UE via the selected TB. In instances where there is more than one TB that meets the BSR transmission condition, only one TB is selected by the UE to report the BSR information. In this way, the UE can make full use of the padding bits of the TB, and report the buffer status flexibly via the selected TB. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148581 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADVERTISING THE SAME SERVICE SET IDENTIFIER FOR DIFFERENT BASIC SERVICE SETS - According to one embodiment of the invention, a method comprises advertising services. The services are provided by different basic service sets, each basic service set having the same service set identifier (SSID). Thereafter, one of the basic service sets is selected. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148582 | MESSAGE INJECTION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communication bridging device has a processor and a memory. The communication device includes an application unit operating an application that transmits and receives communication signals to a first communication device over a first wireless network, a wireless interface unit that transmits and receives communication signals to a second communication device over a second wireless network, and a switching unit communicatively coupled to the application unit and the wireless interface unit. The switching unit transmits communication signals between the first network and the second network in a bridging mode. The application unit transmits communication signals from the switching unit to the first communication device over the first wireless network in the bridging mode, and the wireless interface unit transmits communication signals from the switching unit to the second communication device over the second wireless network in the bridging mode. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148583 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING DATA BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A device for transferring data. The device includes a processor operable to process a header portion of data without processing a payload. Processing the header portion generates a processed header. The processor may signal a direct memory access (DMA) unit to access the payload of the data. As a result, the DMA accesses and passes the payload to a wireless interface for transmission to a destination electronic device based on the processed header. The processor used to process the header portion may be a processor of an electronic device, e.g., a cellular phone, a PDA, etc. Alternatively, the processor may be a processor of a removable memory component. In one embodiment, the processor may be a processor of a module adapted to receive a removable memory and further adapted to couple to an electronic device, e.g., a cellular phone, a PDA, etc., where the removable memory includes its own processor. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148584 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NON-ADAPTIVE RETRANSMISSION - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for use in non-adaptive retransmission. The method comprises: configuring an uplink UL demodulation reference signal DM-RS for retransmission in response to a retransmission request. In one embodiment, the demodulation reference signal DM-RS is configured to be the same as a demodulation reference signal for an initial transmission. In another embodiment, the demodulation reference signal DM-RS is configured with respect to the number of layer(s) for retransmission according to predetermined rules for the initial transmission. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148585 | DOWNLOADABLE ISIM - An IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) network contains at least one of (A) a discovery function ( | 06-13-2013 |
20130148586 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING MEASUREMENT REPORT MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of transmitting a measurement report message in a wireless communication system is provided. A mobile station searches for at least one closed subcarrier group (CSG) cell included in a whitelist of the mobile station, and transmits to a GSM/EDGE radio access network (GERAN) cell the measurement report message including a toggling discriminator, which indicates an optimal CSG cell that satisfies a reporting criterion among the at least one found CSG cell, and a physical cell identify (PCI) and frequency of the optimal CSG cell. | 06-13-2013 |
20130155945 | Methods And Apparatus For Communication Synchronization - Systems and techniques for delivering timing over packet (ToP) data over a wireless hop. Timing information is synchronized between a master and a slave node of a wireless hop When a ToP packet arrives at the master node, an arrival time of the packet at an ingress point of the master node is noted and stored as a timestamp. The packet is transmitted over a wireless link to the slave node. The packet makes its way to an egress point of the slave node, and the residence time of the packet in the wireless link is calculated and stored. The residence time of the packet is the time between the packet's arrival at the ingress point of the master and the egress point of the slave. The packet is then transmitted out the egress point of the slave. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155946 | SUBSCRIBER DATABASE FOR SERVICES AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed at the edge of a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A service mechanism in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and performs one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. A subscriber database is dynamically built to support authorization, authentication and accounting for the services performed at the edge of the mobile data network for the broken out data. The core network thus has a subscriber database that is used for non-broken out data, while a separate subscriber database that is not in the core network is used for broken out data. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155947 | DATA COLLECTION PIGGYBACK PROTOCOL - Data from collecting devices may be transmitted to a destination by piggybacking the data on a mobile device. In one example, when a mobile device comes within communication range of a data-collecting device, the data-collecting device, which may lack direct Internet connectivity, may upload data to the mobile device to be carried to a destination. The mobile device may store the data received from the collecting device. When the mobile device enters a state of Internet connectivity, the mobile device may use the Internet to upload the data that is carrying to a destination. In this way, collecting devices can transmit data to Internet locations without maintaining a direct, live connection to the Internet. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155948 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARING A COMMON PDP CONTEXT - Disclosed herein are methods and devices for sharing a packet data protocol (PDP) context among a plurality of devices. For example, a method or sharing a PDP context among a plurality of devices may include a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) sending a request to establish or modify a PDP context. The request to establish or modify the PDP context may include an indication that the WTRU is a member of shared context group. The method may also include the WTRU receiving a response indicating that the request to establish or modify the PDP context was accepted. The method may also include the WTRU acting as a gateway for at least one other device in the shared context group. The request to establish or modify the PDP context may be an attach request. The indication that the WTRU is a member of shared context group may be a group identifier (ID). | 06-20-2013 |
20130155949 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR BALANCING BAND PERFORMANCE - An apparatus includes a processor disposed within an enclosure and configured to communicate with multiple wireless devices. A first and a second antenna are disposed within the enclosure. The first antenna is configured to operate within a first band, and the second antenna is configured to operate within a second band. The second band has a center frequency less than a center frequency of the first band. The first antenna is configured to send a signal having a signal strength at a wireless device and associated with the first band, and the second antenna is configured to send a signal having a signal strength at the wireless device and associated with the second band. The signal strength for the signal associated with the first band is greater than the signal strength associated with the second band such that the wireless device selects the first band to communicate with the processor. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155950 | Terminal Device and Data Transmission/Reception Method - An application execution unit executes an application, and a communication ID acquisition unit acquires a communication identifier set for the application. When a packet generation unit generates a packet including a communication identifier and data, a transmission unit transmits the packet in an IBSS identified by an SSID stored in a SSID storing unit. When a reception unit receives a packet from another terminal device, a determination unit determines whether the communication identifier acquired by the communication ID acquisition unit matches a communication identifier included in the received packet. When the determination unit determines that the acquired communication identifier matches the communication identifier included in the received packet, a data supply unit provides data included in the received packet to the application. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155951 | MOBILE STATION AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile station UE according to the present invention includes a notification reception unit | 06-20-2013 |
20130155952 | SUB-1GHZ MAC FRAME HEADER COMPRESSION - Methods and systems are disclosed specifying the arrangement and content of the fields in data and management frames, which allow for greater payload efficiency in frame-based communication networks. The content of the fields is changed from the standard 802.11 arrangement to meet of the needs of networks such as Sub-1GHz networks, including those of the 802.11 ah standard, and sensor networks with a large number of stations transmitting at low data rates. In some embodiments, MAC header fields are reduced from standard 802.11 header fields by using only two fields for addressing and eliminating standard fields that are not used in sensor networks. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155953 | CHANNEL BANDWIDTH INDICATION AND TXOP PROTECTION - Methods and systems are disclosed for the operation of wireless communication networks, in which communication channels can have possibly overlapping bandwidths of different sizes, including sensor networks operating by the IEEE 802.11ah standard. A first method of signaling to negotiate the channel bandwidth conveys the needed information in the SIG field of the PPDUs of duplicate RTS/CTS frames, and uses the SIG field of PPDUs of duplicated data, control and management frames to perform transmit opportunity protection. A second method of signaling to negotiate the channel bandwidth conveys the needed information in the scrambling sequence field of PPDUs of duplicate RTS, and uses the scrambling sequence field of PPDUs of duplicated data, control and management frames to perform transmit opportunity protection. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155954 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRIGGERING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATIONS - A method and apparatus for triggering at least one machine type communications (MTC) application using at least one wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is disclosed. The method includes receiving a triggering message including a device trigger (DT) and a maximum delayed response time value from a core network entity (CN), storing the DT in the WTRU, initiating a timer in the WTRU set to the maximum delayed response time value, and on a condition that the timer expires, the WTRU transitioning to a radio resource control (RRC) connected mode and dispatching the DT to the MTC application. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155955 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - There is provided a wireless communication apparatus performing access control which starts transmission after a backoff time passes since an available state of a channel is detected through carrier sense, the backoff time being set based on a random value selected within a contention window width, including: a remaining time calculating unit calculating a remaining time untill a request delay time time-outs after data is generated and a setting unit setting the contention window width according to the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculating unit. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155956 | ENABLING COORDINATED MULTI-POINT RECEPTION - This invention measures the propagation delay τ | 06-20-2013 |
20130155957 | COORDINATION AMONGST HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS DEVICES - A computer-implemented method is proposed for coordinating communication amongst wireless communication devices in a wireless network. The coordination scheme creates a side channel between heterogeneous wireless devices to enhance their cooperation. At the transmitter, the coordination scheme appends a customized preamble to a data payload, where the preamble is comprised of a sequence of energy pulses separated by a gap and the duration of the gap encodes coordination data for the receive device. At the receiver, the coordination scheme detects the preamble of the data packet; extracts the coordination data from the preamble of the data packet; and coordinates communication between the transmit device and the receive device using the coordination data. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155958 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND DEVICES FOR ENABLING EFFICIENT HYBRID ROUTE OPTIMIZATION BETWEEN TWO MOBILE ENDPOINTS - A network, a method and devices (i.e., mobile node, access router, home agent, destination home agent) are described herein for enabling an efficient hybrid route optimization between two mobile endpoints so they can re-direct their data traffic to an optimal path without exchanging any mobility signaling messages. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155959 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND MOBILE BASE STATION DEVICE - To establish an appropriate communication path of a mobile terminal to a local network in accordance with a connection configuration of a mobile base station. A mobile base station device of the present invention includes: a base station processing unit that receives a connection request from a mobile terminal accommodated by the mobile base station device; and a switching processing unit that switches connection of the mobile terminal to a local network to either of local IP connection or remote IP connection, in accordance with backhaul media to which the mobile base station device is connected, based on the connection request from the mobile terminal. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155960 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - Provided is a wireless communication method wherein the transmission timing control that follows the movements of mobile stations can be performed. A transmission timing control information generating unit ( | 06-20-2013 |
20130163510 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVED RECOVERY FOR THE DOWNLINK - Systems, methods, and devices for an improved recovery for the downlink are described herein. In some aspects, delay and overhead associated with retransmission of data lost due to an interruption can be reduced and/or eliminated by configuring a receiver to generate and transmit status information following resumption from the interruption. The receiver can be configured to generate and transmit status information immediately upon resuming from the interruption. In some aspects, the receiver can be configured to automatically generate and transmit status information independent of receiving a polling request from the sender. Status information can indentify at least last received user data prior to the interruption. In some aspects, status information further identifies lost data due to the interruption. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163511 | METHOD OF WIRELESSLY COMMUNICATING DATA BETWEEN VEHICLES AND CENTRAL FACILITIES - A method of wirelessly communicating packetized data between a vehicle and a central facility includes receiving a request at a vehicle telematics unit to transmit packetized data; determining whether the vehicle telematics unit is communicating through a roaming wireless carrier system; and delaying the transmission of packetized data between the vehicle telematics unit and a central facility until the vehicle telematics unit is no longer communicating through the roaming wireless carrier system. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163512 | MULTI-BAND CREST FACTOR REDUCTION - Clipping a widely-separated, multi-carrier signal is effectively performed without having to use a high sampling speed. Clipping is performed in a first stage at a combined signal level, but with a predetermined carrier separation of at least twice the channel bandwidth (2CBW), followed by repositioning the carriers at baseband zero frequency. After clipping, carriers are placed at their respective center frequencies with full carrier separation reintroduced in a second stage. Iterative clipping stages smooth out signal reshaping and re-settled amplitudes for combined carriers. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163513 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING INFORMATION - A method of receiving information includes executing an external device link application on a device to be automatically connected to an external device, receiving summary information of information stored in the external device, displaying the received summary information, transmitting a request signal for at least one piece of information stored in the external device based on the displayed summary information to the external device, receiving information corresponding to the request signal from the external device, and storing the received information. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163514 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - When receiving a hello packet, a node registers information on a control header of the hello packet in a work table. The information on the control header of the hello packet includes a plurality of sets of an address, a destination, and ΣPav of a node. The node stores information, in which a set of an address, a destination, and ΣPav of the own node from the own node to the destination is added to the information on the control header, in the control header of the hello packet and transmits the hello packet. These processes are performed by each node included in an ad-hoc network. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163515 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MULTIPLE IDENTIFIERS IN A SINGLE ACCESS POINT - A system and method for providing multiple service set identifiers (SSIDs) in a single access point is disclosed. The system within the single access point comprises a network management module, a virtual access point creation module and a data traffic handling module. The virtual access point creation module creates multiple virtual access points each represented by a unique SSID. The network management module provides at least one tunnel to accommodate the multiple virtual access points. The data traffic handling module receives and redirects data from the multiple virtual access points to and from the at least one tunnel. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163516 | MARITIME COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Provided is a maritime communication system and method. A ship station of the maritime communication system may receive, from a maritime broadcast base station, maritime configuration information that includes setting information of shore base stations and setting information of maritime ship stations, may establish a radio link when a radio link configurable shore base station is present, may set the radio link through a radio link configurable neighbor ship station when the radio link configurable shore base station is absent, and may establish the radio link with an internal maritime satellite (INMARSAT) or a maritime very small aperture terminal (MVSAT) when the radio link configurable shore base station is absent and when the radio link configurable neighbor ship station is absent. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163517 | METHODS FOR OPTIMAL COLLABORATIVE MIMO-SDMA - A system and method for collaboratively designing optimized beamforming vectors is disclosed for a wireless multiple input, multiple output (MIMO) space division multiple access (SDMA) communication system to optimize an aggregate SNR performance metric across the different users, thereby permitting the flexibility to trade off computational requirements and size of control information exchanged with performance. Using adaptive vector space search methods, the space of all receive beamformers is searched to find the set which maximizes either the sum or product of SNRs of the users. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163518 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A method for performing wireless communication includes performing a precoding process beforehand on a plurality of symbols at a base station; performing space block coding on the plurality of symbols at the base station after the precoding process; sending signals from a plurality of antennas of the base station; performing space block decoding on the signals received by a plurality of antennas at a mobile station; performing antenna combination and a deprecoding process on the signals at the mobile station after the signals have undergone the space block decoding; and estimating the plurality of symbols at the mobile station from the signals that have undergone the deprecoding process. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163519 | REDUCED CELL ID REASSIGNMENTS IN MULTI-BAND LOCAL AREA - A method, apparatus, and computer program is provided which allows an access point that is operating in multiple bands to be able to have a conflict-free cell identity when hopping to different bands. A first message is received, at an access point, indicating that a reassignment of cell identities has been triggered in a first band. A second message is transmitted, at the access point, indicating if the access point will participate in the reassignment. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163520 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a communication device within a communication network including a plurality of communication nodes, including: a reception unit that receives a data packet transmitted from a terminal device or transmitted to the terminal device; a communication control unit that selects a forwarding destination node of the data packet from a plurality of forwarding destination node candidates when the terminal device is a machine-type communication (MTC) terminal; and a transmission unit that transmits the data packet to the forwarding destination node selected by the communication control unit. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163521 | METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION - A user equipment (UE) transmits uplink control information (UCI) of 3 bits or more to a base station (BS) after modulating the UCI into 1-bit or 2-bit sub-UCI units. Here, the UE maps each 1-bit or 2-bit sub-UCI unit to one of a plurality of corner constellation points regardless of modulation order of data which is multiplexed with the UCI. The corner constellation points are points having a maximum Euclidean distance from among a plurality of constellation points corresponding to the modulation order. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163522 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST TRANSMISSION METHOD - By reducing the overlap between HARQ subpackets transmitted by means of a transmitting MS and a cooperative MS, the disclosed method is capable of increasing gains in HARQ IR signal synthesis. The method transmits a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) in a cooperative communication system formed so as to comprise a transmitting mobile station (MS) and a cooperative MS, and involves creating individual HARQ subpackets transmitted by means of the transmitting MS and the cooperative MS such that said subpackets are arranged in mutually opposite directions in a circular buffer. | 06-27-2013 |
20130170430 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT INCLUDING A GROUP IDENTIFIER - Systems, methods, and devices for performing acknowledgment signaling including a group identifier are described herein. In some aspects, a device receives an identifier identifying a plurality of wireless communication devices, such as a group identifier. The device then transmits an acknowledgment of whether data transmitted to the device was correctly received. The acknowledgment includes the identifier. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170431 | Subscriber Assignment - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: receiving, at the network device from an entity, a request for a serving device assigned to a subscriber; attempting to locate an assignment record associated with the subscriber; in response to locating the assignment record associated with the subscriber, identifying an assigned serving device of the multiple serving devices indicated by the assignment record as being assigned to the subscriber; and transmitting a response to the entity, wherein the response identifies the assigned serving device. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170432 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS USING BEACON FRAMES - Techniques are described for identifying a wireless access point device using beacon messages and probe responses. An access point may generate and broadcast beacon messages which include an information element containing information specific to the device as well as to the current context of the device. For example, the information element may include a device vendor ID, product ID, and a device-unique ID. That is, the information element provides information related to the device itself independently from the configuration of the wireless network which the beacon message (or probe response) is associated with. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170433 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORKING CODING USING REED-SOLOMON CODES - A method for network coding includes encoding a plurality of message packets to produce a plurality of encoded packets. Each message packet and each encoded packet includes a plurality of symbols having an index and each symbol of the encoded packets is generated by applying a Reed-Solomon code to the symbols of the message packets having the same index as the symbol of the encoded packets. A length of the encoded packets is the same as a length of the message packets. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170434 | COMMUNICATION MODE SELECTION METHOD AND DEVICE - The present invention provides a communication mode selection method, which includes: when a state parameter of a communication terminal meets a predetermined condition, selecting a mode corresponding to a spatial multiplexing technique as a mode for communication between the terminal and a corresponding base station, where the predetermined condition at least includes that the number of antennas is greater than 1. This prevents the terminal from entering a MIMO B mode in the case of using a single antenna, so that repeated switching between a MIMO A mode and the MIMO B mode may not occur, and therefore, the problem of service jittering caused by repeated switching is avoided. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170435 | Network Site for Wireless Communications - A wireless network site comprises a base station and a cell site gateway. The cell site gateway comprises a first interface connected to the base station, a second interface connected to a packet network gateway, a label forwarding layer, and a third interface connected to a signaling peer to exchange control plane information to program the forwarding layer. The label forwarding layer transmits and receive packets. The control plane information comprises at least one first label value for transmitting a first plurality of packets to the base station and at least one second label value for transmitting a second plurality of packets to the packet network gateway. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170436 | MESSAGE GENERATING ARRANGEMENT - A message generating arrangement determines whether a first communication terminal of a communication system can participate, by means of packet-switching network elements of the communication system, in a communication link in which a second communication terminal of the communication system is participating by means of circuit-switching network elements of the communication system, and generates a message on the basis of the result of the determination. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170437 | NETWORK MIMO REPORTING, CONTROL SIGNALING AND TRANSMISSION - A coordinated multipoint transmitter is for use with a network MIMO super-cell and includes a coordination unit configured to provide joint link processing to coordinate a multipoint transmission corresponding to a set of transmission points. Additionally, the coordinated multipoint transmitter also includes a transmission unit configured to transmit the multipoint transmission using the set of transmission points. Additionally, a coordinated transmission receiver is for use with a network MIMO super-cell and includes a reception unit configured to receive a multipoint transmission corresponding to a set of transmission points. The coordinated transmission receiver also includes a processing unit configured to process the multipoint transmission from the set of transmission points. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170438 | PAGING METHOD, CORE NETWORK APPARATUS, RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - A paging method of the present invention is a paging method for paging a UE ( | 07-04-2013 |
20130176938 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREIN COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - An example communication system includes a plurality of communication apparatuses including a search communication apparatus which searches for another communication apparatus. The search communication apparatus includes a search request transmission section configured to transmit a search request signal by using a first channel. The search request signal includes information about a second channel different from the first channel. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176939 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING AGGREGATE DATA UNITS - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of communicating aggregate data units. For example, a device may include a wireless communication unit to communicate an aggregate data unit including a plurality of data units in an increasing order of sequence numbers assigned to the data units, such that a first data unit having a first sequence number always precedes a second data unit having a second sequence number, greater than the first sequence number. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176940 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING, CONFIGURING AND TESTING WIRELESS DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS - A system, apparatus, and method are provided for connecting, configuring and testing wireless devices and applications. For example, one embodiment of wireless device for operation in a wireless network comprises a processor, a wireless module including a radio receiver and transmitter unit coupled to the processor, a graphical user interface (GUI) coupled to the processor, and a Connection Manager Module (CMM) including an Application Programming Interface (API) module, a Rules Engine Module, and a Rules Set Module, wherein the CMM manages a connection to a wireless network | 07-11-2013 |
20130176941 | Method and System for Multiple Frequency Hypothesis Testing With Full Synch Acquisition in an E-UTRA/LTE UE Receiver - A mobile device receives a radio frequency (RF) signal comprising a primary synchronization sequence (PSS) and a secondary synchronization sequence (SSS). The mobile device performs multiple frequency hypothesis (MFH) testing via multiple MFH branches. A SSS decoding and a PSS correlation process are performed, respectively, per MFH branch. The SSS decoding may be performed according to corresponding•PSS detection. Cell-specific information such as cell ID information and/or Cyclic Prefix (CP) length is acquired per MFH branch based on corresponding PSS detection and SSS decoding. Subsequently, the mobile device selects a particular MFH branch with a maximum PSS correlation peak over the entire MFH branches. The cell-specific information from the selected MFH branch is utilized for communications within a corresponding cell if the information is detected consistently. The mobile device compares cell ID information and/or CP length information over the remaining MFH branches for consistency check. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176942 | DEVICES AND METHODS FOR FACILITATING OVERHEAD MESSAGE UPDATES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Access terminals are adapted to facilitate reception of overhead messages. According to one example, an access terminal can determine whether it is at least substantially stationary. The access terminal may receive one or more sequence numbers corresponding to a subsequent overhead message. In response to being at least substantially stationary, the access terminal can ignore the subsequent overhead message when the corresponding sequence numbers are the same as stored sequence numbers corresponding to a previously obtained overhead message, even when the previously obtained overhead message is more than six hundred seconds old. According to another example, a network node may transmit an overhead message including a corresponding sector indicator and sequence numbers. When the sector indicator and the sequence numbers are the same as a previously received and stored sector indicator and sequence numbers, the access terminal can ignore the overhead message. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also included. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176943 | System and Method for Distributed Mobility Management - A method for operating a network device includes receiving a packet addressed to a first mobile node at a first initial home address when the first mobile node is outside a home network, and accessing a location database to determine a current network for the first mobile node. The method also includes routing the packet to the first mobile node in the current network. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176944 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A BEARER FOR A GSM NETWORK - A method for data transmission in a system including a first base station controller (BSC) and a first media gateway (MGW) is provided. The first MGW receives from the first BSC an internet protocol (IP) packet with an encoded voice payload encapsulated therein. The encoded voice payload is obtained by the first BSC by removing a Transcoder and Rate Adaptation Unit (TRAU) encapsulation from data received from a base transceiver station (BTS). The first MGW determines a codec type of the encoded voice payload is the same as a codec type adopted by a second BSC connected to the first MGW or is the same as a codec type adopted by a second MGW connected to the first MGW. The first MGW sends the encoded voice payload to the second BSC or the second MGW after the determination. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176945 | TRANSMISSION OF CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATIONS - Indications of desired radio communications downlink characteristics are transmitted via a radio communications uplink from a user equipment to a node of a cellular wireless network, the indications each relating to one or more components of a radio communications link from the node to the user equipment. The indications are transmitted successively at different cycles, and at each different cycle a first parameter is determined, indicating a more preferred number of components and a second parameter is determined, indicating a less preferred number of components. First additional parameters are calculated and transmitted relating to the desired radio communications link quality corresponding to the first parameter and second additional parameters are calculated and transmitted relating to the desired radio communications link quality on the basis of the second parameter. The first and second parameters are each parameters which are variable between different cycles. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176946 | HIGHLY DETECTABLE PILOT STRUCTURE - Aspects describe a Highly Detectable Pilot that allows a mobile device to detect more base stations and, thus, can provide more accuracy in location estimate. A highly detectable pilot can be transmitted in a portion of one or more data symbols that are not currently being utilized for transmission of data. Transmission of the highly detectable pilot in two data symbols provide a receiver with more convergence time, however, it can take the receiver a longer amount of time to acquire an adequate number of pilots for a location estimate. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176947 | HIGHLY DETECTABLE PILOT STRUCTURE - Aspects describe a Highly Detectable Pilot that allows a mobile device to detect more base stations and, thus, can provide more accuracy in location estimate. A highly detectable pilot can be transmitted in a position in one or more data symbols that are not currently being utilized for transmission of data. In certain aspects, a transmitter may not transmit during other positions of the one or more data symbols. Transmission of the highly detectable pilot in two data symbols provide a receiver with more convergence time, however, it can take the receiver a longer amount of time to acquire an adequate number of pilots for a location estimate. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176948 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND BASE STATION - A wireless communication method, a terminal and a base station are provided. The method includes the step of transmitting a plurality of best companion pre-coding matrix indexs (BCIs) and corresponding delta channel quality indicators (ΔCQIs) from the terminal to the base station, wherein the period of frames for transmitting the plurality of BCIs is larger than the period of frames for transmitting a single BCI. The method, terminal and base station according to the present disclosure can greatly increase scheduling flexibility at base station side and improve MU-MIMO performance without increasing feedback overhead of channels. | 07-11-2013 |
20130182640 | FEEDBACK METHOD AND DEVICE FOR HEADER COMPRESSION FEEDBACK INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a feedback method and device for header compression feedback information: After RN is introduced in LTE-A system, user data transmitted at Un interface possesses a complex header structure with nesting double-IP containing GTP. Through application of the technical solution put forward by the embodiments of the present invention, different types of header compression feedback information carried in control PDU can be analyzed and processed with corresponding strategies according to the information in control PDU, thus effectively realizing separate compression and feedback for double headers and improving data transmission efficiency at Un interface. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182641 | System and Method for Distance-Dependent Data Exchange Between Wireless Communication Devices - In one embodiment, a method includes identifying a plurality of data types; identifying a plurality of communication ranges for data transmission, wherein a first communication range of the plurality of communication ranges is less than a second communication range of the plurality of communication ranges, and wherein the first communication range corresponds to a first data type of the plurality of data types and the second communication range corresponds to a second data type of the plurality of data types; transmitting data in the first data type to a first wireless communication device located within the first communication range; and transmitting data in the second data type to a second wireless communication device located within the second communication range. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182642 | COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION METHODS AND SYSTEMS - Communication transmission methods and systems are provided. Firstly, a base station broadcasts a message to a user equipment, wherein the message includes a priority threshold value. Then, the user equipment compares a priority value of the user equipment with the priority threshold value. Then, an initiation of an access procedure of the user equipment is disabled when the priority value of the user equipment is below the priority threshold value. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182643 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSITIONS OF BROADCAST DASH SERVICE RECEPTIONS BETWEEN UNICAST AND BROADCAST - Techniques are provided for receiving one or more representations of content wirelessly. The method may involve receiving a media presentation description (MPD) that includes parameters for reception of data segments for multiple representations of content via broadcast transmission and unicast transmission. The method may involve determining whether the broadcast transmission or the unicast transmission is appropriate for reception of the data segments, and selecting a given representation from among the multiple representations of the content based on a criteria of the mobile entity. The method may involve receiving the data segments for the given representation based at least in part on the parameters for the determined one of the broadcast transmission and the unicast transmission. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182644 | CONTROL METHOD AND DEVICE BASED ON MULTIPLE PRIORITIES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system is disclosed. More particularly, a control method and device based on multiple priorities in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method of controlling a back-off timer in a terminal configured with multiple priorities, which includes transmitting a first non-access stratum (NAS) request message set to a first priority level, starting the back-off timer configured by a network, and transmitting a second NAS request message, which is not set to the first priority level, while the back-off timer runs. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182645 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTENT FROM A MOBILE DEVICE TO A WIRELESS DISPLAY - A method of transmitting content to a wireless display device is disclosed. The method may include receiving multimedia data, encoding the multimedia data, and writing encoded multimedia data into a first predetermined memory location of a shared memory. Further, the method may include encapsulating the encoded multimedia data and writing encapsulation data into a second predetermined memory location of the shared memory. The method may also include calculating error control encoding and writing the error control encoding into a third predetermined memory location of the shared memory. Further, the method may include transmitting the encoded multimedia data, the encapsulation data, and the error control encoding to the wireless display device. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182646 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system including a transmitting and receiving device that performs communications with the transmitting device, using a radio frame containing control information and data, wherein the transmitting device includes: a first generating unit that generates first control information able to be estimated by the receiving device; a second generating unit that generates second control information used for control of communication from the receiving device to the transmitting device and unable to be estimated by the receiving device; a multiplexing unit that multiplexes the control and data information so that the first control information is allocated in the control information and the second control information is allocated in the data in the radio frame; a transmitting unit a signal multiplexed by the multiplexing unit; the receiving device includes a receiving unit that receives the signal wherein the second control information is allocated in the data from the transmitting device. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182647 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF UNCOMPRESSED VIDEO HAVING BEACON DESIGN - A system and method for efficiently communicating messages over a low-rate channel between multiple devices in a system for wireless communication of uncompressed video is disclosed. The method includes various control bits in a beacon control field of a beacon frame to improve the efficiency of the beacon processing, thereby reducing beacon processing time and size of the beacon frame itself. The transmitting device can use one or more of the various control bits to indicate whether there are changes in various MAC payload information fields. The receiving station can use one or more of the control bits to eliminate the need to parse one or more MAC payload information fields whose values have not changed from the previous beacon frame. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182648 | SIGNALING METHOD, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To provide a signaling method for enabling position information of muting resources to be signaled with a simplified configuration, base station apparatus and mobile terminal apparatus, the signaling method is characterized by having the steps of setting blank resources for a CSI-RS (Channel State Information-Reference Signal) that is a reference signal for downlink channel estimation, and transmitting a bitmap indicative of a position of the blank resources to a mobile terminal apparatus. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182649 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ACTIVATING A COMPONENT CARRIER IN A MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for activating a component carrier in a multiple component carrier system including the steps of: receiving component carrier setting information about a first uplink component carrier, which is connected with a first downlink component carrier corresponding to a secondary serving cell of a UE, from a base station; setting the first uplink component carrier on the basis of the component carrier setting information; and activating the initial state of the set first uplink component carrier according to the activation state of the first downlink component carrier. Accordingly, the ambiguity of the initial state of an uplink component carrier additionally set between the UE and the base station can be removed. | 07-18-2013 |
20130188553 | DOWNLINK INDICATOR CHANNEL PROCESSING IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM BASE STATION - A transmitter comprises indicator channel processing circuitry configured to process indicator channel codewords for transmission in a base station of a wireless system. The indicator channel processing circuitry performs a plurality of processing operations on the indicator channel codewords in a specified processing sequence, with the plurality of processing operations comprising at least modulation, scrambling, spreading and combining. In the specified processing sequence, the scrambling operation is performed for at least a given one of the indicator channel codewords prior to the modulation and spreading operations for that codeword or subsequent to the combining operation for that codeword. For example, the specified processing sequence may comprise the scrambling, modulation, spreading and combining operations performed in that order for at least the given codeword, or the modulation, spreading, combining and scrambling operations performed in that order for at least the given codeword. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188554 | OFFLINE CHARGING PER SERVICE DATA FLOW - Systems and methods for selecting offline charging functions per service data flow during a data session over a packet data network. One embodiment comprises a Policy and Charging | 07-25-2013 |
20130188555 | MME Restoration - A method for a mobility management entity (MME) is disclosed. In some embodiments the method includes: establishing a UE context for a UE; selecting a back-up MME for holding a duplicate context of the user entity; informing a SGW of the selected back-up MME; and transmitting a the duplicate context to the selected back-up MME. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188556 | System and Method for Wireless Stack Implementation on Multiple Wireless Devices - The present invention relates to a Wireless Communication System ( | 07-25-2013 |
20130188557 | WIRELESS GATEWAY APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless gateway apparatus that forms a wireless communication network with wireless field devices may include: a first wireless communication unit configured to communicate wirelessly with wireless field devices that have joined the wireless communication network; and a display unit configured to display at least one of device information of the wireless field devices, which is acquired by communicating with the wireless field devices, and connection information, which indicates a condition of connection with the wireless field devices. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188558 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PILOT SCRAMBLING FOR ENHANCED PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNELS - A telecommunications system is configured to perform a method for mapping synchronization signals. The method includes transmitting data, reference signals, synchronization signals and control elements to at least one of the plurality of subscriber stations. The method also includes configuring enhanced physical downlink control channel (e-PDCCH) DMRS parameters for each of a plurality of e-PDCCH sets | 07-25-2013 |
20130188559 | Method for Establishing a Communication Connection over the Internet Between Mobile Terminals, Computer Program, and Storage Medium - A method for establishing a communication connection over the internet between a first mobile terminal and a second mobile terminal, the method comprising the transfer of connection data between mobile terminals using data text messages, and the establishing of a communication connection between the terminals over the internet using the transferred connection data. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188560 | System and Method for Pushing Content to a Terminal Utilizing a Network-Initiated Data Service Technique - A system is provided for pushing content to a terminal located within a mobile network or a private network. The system includes a network node, such as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) proxy, located across a public network from the network including the terminal. The network node is capable of subscribing to a push service on behalf of the terminal such that the network node is also capable of receiving push content in accordance with the push service. Thereafter, the network node is capable of establishing a network-initiated data session with the terminal. In response to the network-initiated data session, the network node is further capable of registering the terminal such that the terminal is capable of receiving the push content based upon the registration. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188561 | METHOD FOR SETTING CYCLIC SHIFT CONSIDERING FREQUENCY OFFSET - A method for transmitting a random access preamble to a base station includes generating the random access preamble from a Zadoff-Chu (ZC) sequence, wherein the random access preamble is defined by cyclic shift (C | 07-25-2013 |
20130188562 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DELAY OPTIMIZATION OF END-TO-END DATA PACKET TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - For reducing and homogenizing an end-to-end delay of data packet transmissions in a large-scale wireless mesh network, a device, a system and a method are provided for controlling data packet transmission in the wireless network, wherein transmission parameters of an intermediate node are adjusted based on a distance between the intermediate node and a sender node. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188563 | POWER HEADROOM REPORTING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING A PLURALITY OF SERVING CELLS - In the terminal device of the present invention, a transmitter can transmit any one of a maximum transmission power information, a maximum power reduction (MPR) information, and a terminal PHR information of the terminal in each one or more serving cells of the terminal among the plurality of serving cells and the PHR information of each one or more serving cells of the terminal, to a base station and can transmit the changed MPR information, the changed maximum transmission power information, or the changed terminal PHR information when a first PHR triggering condition is generated therefrom. A processor controls the transmitter to enable the transmitter to transmit the changed MPR information, the changed maximum transmission power information, or the changed terminal PHR information when the MPR information or the maximum transmission power information is changed. | 07-25-2013 |
20130195007 | INCREMENTAL PREAMBLE DETECTION - In one embodiment, the present invention is a method for performing incremental preamble detection in a wireless communication network. The method processes non-overlapping chunks of incoming antenna data, where each chunk is smaller than the preamble length, to detect the signature of the transmitted preamble. For each chunk processed, chips of the chunk are correlated with possible signatures employed by the wireless network to update a set of correlation profiles, each profile comprising a plurality of profile values. Further, an intermediate detection is performed by comparing the updated profile values to an intermediate threshold that is also updated for each chunk. Upon receiving the final chunk, the correlation profiles are updated, and a final preamble detection is made by comparing the updated profile values to a final threshold. Detections are performed on an incremental basis to meet latency requirements of the wireless network. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195008 | Providing Feedback For Multiple Downlink Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output (MIMO) Streams - A wireless-transmit-and-receiving unit (WTRU) supports receiving information via a plurality of multiple-input-multiple-output (MIMO) streams by providing a low-rank feedback report to a base station. The WTRU selects a preferred HS-PDSCH transmission rank, from a subset of ranks that the WTRU supports. The subset includes ranks that are lower than the maximum HS-PDSCH transmission rank supported by the WTRU. For example, for a WTRU that supports rank-4 reception, the subset may include rank-1 and rank-2. The WTRU generates the low-rank feedback report based on the preferred rank, and transmits the report to the base station. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195009 | CS/PS COORDINATION FOR CSFB/SRVCC - The embodiments herein relate to a method in an SGSN ( | 08-01-2013 |
20130195010 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS PROCESS COMMUNICATION OVER DISTINCT NETWORKS - A dual-mode router for conveying process communication packets across a plurality of distinct wireless process communication networks is provided. The router includes wireless communication circuitry and a controller coupled to the wireless communication circuitry. The wireless communication circuitry is configured to interact with signals from each of the plurality of distinct wireless process communication networks. The controller is configured to adapt process communication packets from a first distinct wireless process communication network for transmission over a second distinct wireless process communication network. Methods for configuring the distinct wireless process communication networks and relaying process packets over the distinct wireless process communication networks are also provided. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195011 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication method includes: detecting, at a wireless communication apparatus, a collision of data transmitted from a plurality of wireless communication terminals during a first period that is in a communication-enabled state; shifting, when the collision has been detected, a second period, which belongs to the same frame as the first period and is in a communication-disabled state, to a communication-enabled state; transmitting, at the wireless communication apparatus, a request to the plurality of wireless communication terminals for retransmission of the data and receiving data transmitted from the plurality of wireless communication terminals in response to the request, using the shifted second period. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195012 | NETWORK ATTACH PROCEDURE FOR LONG TERM EVOLUTION LOCAL AREA NETWORK - One embodiment is directed to a method and apparatus for performing a network entry procedure for dual radio (LTE+LTE-Hi) capable user equipment to access a LTE-LAN and its services. The method includes detecting a LTE-LAN network from broadcasted system information, and requesting LTE-Hi services. The method may further include transmitting a connection setup handshake to the LTE-LAN AP. The connection setup handshake may include a LTE-LAN UE ID. The method may further include, after the connection establishment to the LTE-LAN AP, sending a LAN attach request message to a SeNB with the LTE-LAN UE ID or sending an announcement to the SeNB through ordinary macro radio connections to indicate the LTE-LAN UE ID in the LTE-LAN AP. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195013 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method and apparatus of user equipment controlling In-Device Coexistence (IDC) interference in a wireless communication system are described in accordance with the present invention. The present invention comprises receiving an IDC indication request from an eNodeB (eNB) when a point of time at which an IDC indication for sending IDC-related information is triggered is different from a point of time at which load balancing is applied, sending the requested IDC indication to the eNB and receiving an In-device Coexistence interference cOordination (ICO) operation order determined based on the IDC indication from the eNB. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195014 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CUBIC METRIC ESTIMATOR IN DUAL-CARRIER AND MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method is disclosed that comprises by using a processor, calculating a plurality of signal states for each of at least two carriers, selecting at least one carrier from the at least two carriers, generating modified signal states for each of the selected at least one carrier by rotating at least one of the respective plurality of signal states with a discrete frequency shift step, determining combinations of signal states of the at least two carriers based at least in part on the modified signal states of the selected at least one carrier, and calculating a cubic metric based on the determined combinations of signal states of the at least two carriers. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195015 | CONNECTION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A connection method of connecting a relay node RN to a radio base station DeNB including a step A of notifying, by the relay node RN, to the radio base station DeNB, a first frequency band supported as a frequency band to be used in a Uu space; a step B of determining, by the radio base station DeNB, the carrier frequency and the bandwidth to be used in the Uu space by using the first frequency band; and a step C of notifying, by the radio base station DeNB, to the relay node RN, the determined carrier frequency and the bandwidth. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195016 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF COMMUNICATING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DATA OVER AN IU INTERFACE IN A UNIVERSAL MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for communicating Machine Type Communication (MTC) data across an Iu interface in a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) network environment are provided. The apparatus includes Packet Data Units (PDUs) associated with one or more MTC devices are aggregated by a radio network controller. The aggregated PDUs associated with the one or more MTC devices are concatenated into an Iu PDU based on a Radio Access Bearer (RAB) identifier associated with the one or more MTC devices. The Iu PDU including the aggregated PDUs is transmitted to a core network across an Iu-Packet Switched (PS) interface that connects the radio network controller and the core network. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195017 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF TRANSMITTING PACKET DATA UNITS OF MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICES OVER A NETWORK INTERFACE IN A LONG TERM EVOLUTION NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for transmitting Packet Data Units (PDUs) associated with Machine Type Communication (MTC) devices over a network interface in a long term evolution network are provided. The method includes aggregating Packet Data Units (PDUs), the aggregated PDUs being associated with at least one MTC device, by a first network entity in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network environment, concatenating the aggregated PDUs associated with the at least one MTC device into a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Tunneling Protocol (GTP) PDU, and transmitting the GTP PDU, the GTP PDU including the concatenated PDUs, to a second network entity over a network interface connecting the first network entity and the second network entity. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195018 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CHANNEL SCANNING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - The disclosure discloses a method and a system for channel scanning in a wireless network. The method includes that an Access Point (AP) and/or Non-AP Stations (STAs) associated with the AP performs channel scanning according to one or more of the following ways: Way A: the AP performs Overlapping Basic Service Set (OBSS) channel scanning on channels within one or more different channelizing sets with a same period or with different periods; Way B: part or all of STAs associated with the AP perform OBSS channel scanning on channels within one or more different channelizing sets with a same period or with different periods; and Way C: the AP or part or all of STAs associated with the AP performs single OBSS channel scanning on one or more channelizing sets under event triggering. With the present disclosure, the channel scanning procedure of an equipment supporting multiple channelizing set schemes under circumstance of OBSS is planned. | 08-01-2013 |
20130201907 | Wireless Data Distributor, Network System and Method for Receiving Audio and Video Streaming Data and Internet Website Data - A wireless data distributor, a network system and a method for receiving A/V streaming data and Internet website data are provided. The method includes steps of receiving A/V streaming signals from a A/V streaming data source; transforming the A/V streaming signals into first wireless network packets; receiving second wireless network packets from the Internet via a network router; and selecting and sending the first or second wireless network packets to a client-end device preferentially according to priority ranks of the first and second wireless network packets. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201908 | Method And Apparatus For Power Optimization In Wireless Systems With Large Antenna Arrays - A method and apparatus for communication between a wireless base station and a population of one or more terminals are provided, involving, in each of a plurality of iterations, transmitting a block of forward-link data from an array of multiple base station antennas to the terminal population. In each iteration, a forward-link power level is updated for each said terminal using a distributed algorithm and purely local information. Meanwhile, a set of beamforming coefficients based on channel state information (CSI) obtained from reverse-link pilot signals is periodically updated, and each data block is precoded with the most recently updated beamforming coefficients. Each data block is transmitted at the most recently updated forward-link power levels. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201909 | MOBILE NODE HOST ROUTE INSTALLATION AND WITHDRAWAL - In general, techniques are described for atomically installing and withdrawing host routes along paths connecting network routers to attenuate packet loss for mobile nodes migrating among wireless LAN access networks and a mobile network. In some examples, whenever the mobile node moves from one attachment point to the next, it triggers the distribution of its host route from the new attachment point toward the service provider network hub provider edge (PE) router that anchors the mobile node on a service provider network. Routers participating in the Mobile VPN install the host route “atomically” from the attachment point to the mobile gateway so as to ensure convergence of the network forwarding plane with the host route toward the new attachment point prior to transitioning mobile node connectivity from a previous attachment point. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201910 | Uplink Timing Alignment - Some of the example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a user equipment ( | 08-08-2013 |
20130201911 | Network Node, User Equipment and Methods Therein for Adjusting the Transmit Timing of Uplink Transmissions - A method in a user equipment ( | 08-08-2013 |
20130201912 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPRESSING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION BASED ON PATH LOCATION INFORMATION - Methods and apparatus are described for compressing channel state information (CSI) in time-domain based on path location information for CSI feedback. Downlink (DL) CSI is compressed in the time domain and fed back by not sending the multipath location information, or sending at a very low rate. In one method, a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) selects the strongest multipath components based on channel characteristics. The multipath components are quantized in the time domain via direct or vector based quantization. The base station reconstructs a channel impulse response from the fed back quantized multipath components and applies same to precoding processing. In another method, the WTRU feeds back information associated with a narrowband portion(s) of a system spectrum. The selected narrowband portion(s) have sufficient density over time to allow good precoding per subband or across the system spectrum. Short term feedback may be augmented with long term channel information. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201913 | Employing Reference Signals in Communications - A method is provided, including receiving a signal on a communications channel, correlating the received signal and a reference signal and determining, on the basis of a result of the correlation, whether the reference signal can be employed on the communications channel. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201914 | Method and System for Measurement Report in Coordinated Multi-Point Transmission and Reception System - A method and system for measurement reporting in a Coordinated Multipoint transmission/reception (CoMP) system are disclosed in the present invention. The method includes: according to a CoMP measurement configuration message sent by a serving cell, when a measurement event report triggering criterion is satisfied, a terminal reporting a measurement report to the serving cell; wherein, the measurement event report triggering criterion includes: a movement speed measurement value of the serving cell being lower than a preset first measurement threshold, and a ratio of a Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) measurement value of the serving cell to an RSRP measurement value of a measuring cell being lower than a preset second measurement threshold. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201915 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR OUT-OF-BAND INFORMATION FEEDBACK - A hybrid receiver is provided with a first wireless communication module and a second wireless communication module. The first wireless communication module is configured to establish a first connection with a hybrid transmitter using a first wireless technology, and generate reception status information of the first connection. The second wireless communication module is configured to report the reception status information to the hybrid transmitter using a second wireless technology. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201916 | OPTIMIZED TELECOMMUNICATIONS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - Systems and methods for optimized telecommunications distribution are provided. For example, a distributed antenna system can include a master unit for transceiving signals with remote units operable for wirelessly transceiving signals with mobile devices in a coverage area. A self-optimized network analyzer can be in a unit of the distributed antenna system. A self-optimized network controller in the distributed antenna system can output commands for changing operation of a component in the distributed antenna system in response to analysis results from the self-optimized network analyzer. In some aspects, the master unit includes base transceiver station cards for receiving call information in network protocol data from a network and for generating digital signals including the call information from the network protocol data for distribution to the remote units. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201917 | DYNAMIC INDICATION OF TRAFFIC TO PILOT (T/P) RATIOS - An method of wireless communication dynamically indicates traffic to pilot ratio (T/P) values in heterogeneous networks. Subframes are categorized into groups that do not overlap. A traffic to pilot ratio (T/P) indicator is received and the a T/P value for a group of subframes is determined based at least in part on the received T/P indicator. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201918 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND CHANNEL SWITCHING METHOD - A first communication control unit and a second communication control unit share a single transmission and reception unit. The second communication control unit maintains connection with a terminal device while the first communication control unit is scanning frequency channels to search for an access point. When a search processing unit | 08-08-2013 |
20130201919 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR ELIMINATING PAGING INTERFERENCE IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and a base station for eliminating paging interference in a heterogeneous network. The method for eliminating paging interference includes: receiving, by a first base station, a paging parameter nB sent by a second base station; calculating, by the first base station according to the paging parameter nB of the second base station, a subframe for the second base station to send paging information and a paging frame to which the subframe belongs; obtaining, by the first base station, a set period; sending, by the first base station, paging information on the subframe in the paging frame within the set period; and stopping, by the first base station, information on the subframe in the paging frame within a next set period. Embodiments of the present invention are capable of reducing paging interference in a heterogeneous network. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201920 | GATEWAY APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a gateway apparatus including a first communication unit that communicates with a base station in a first communication method, a second communication unit that communicates with a communication apparatus in a second communication method, an identification information holding unit that holds a correspondence between first identification information in the first communication method and second identification information in the second communication method of the communication apparatus, and a category information holding unit to share category information showing a characteristic of the communication apparatus with the communication apparatus. The first communication unit performs communication of the communication apparatus in accordance with the category information with the base station by using the first identification information of the communication apparatus. | 08-08-2013 |
20130208656 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CHANNEL ACCESS IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method for controlling channel access performed by an access point (AP) in a wireless system is provided. The method includes: receiving at least one frame from at least one station (STA), respectively, for a specific time period, each frame including information on a contention window (CW) used when the frame is transmitted; processing information one at least one CW for each STA; determining whether to control the channel access based on the processed information on the CW; selecting an abnormal STA candidate group if it is determined that the channel access control is performed; and controlling the channel access to each STA included in the abnormal candidate STA group. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208657 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATION - A system for enabling at least a first mobile communication device and a second mobile communication device to establish communication, the system including a server adapted to receive from the first device an ID string associated with the second device, the ID string being obtained from the second device over a local communication link between the first and second devices, the server being adapted to program a switch or router so as to cause the switch or router to bridge communication between the first and second devices. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208658 | CELLULAR NETWORK CALL MANAGEMENT - Management of a call between a calling party that is a mobile terminal in a first cellular network and a called party that is a mobile terminal in a second cellular network is provided by: receiving at an Application Server, AS, of the first cellular network a request to establish a call with the called party from the calling party, the called party being identified in the indication by a circuit-switched identifier; identifying a registration for the called party in the first cellular network using the circuit-switched identifier for the called party, the registration providing a packet-switched identifier for the called party; and setting up a call between the calling party and the called party of the first cellular network by initiating a packet-switched connection from the AS in the first cellular network to the called party in the second cellular network using the packet-switched identifier for the called party. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208659 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The characteristic of a mobile communication system according to the present invention is that the mobile communication system includes the steps of: causing an MME in a visitor network of UE#1 to acquire SRVCC capability of the UE#1 and to notify an HSS of the SRVCC capability of the UE#1 in an attach process or location registration process of the UE#1; and causing an ATCF, which controls an ATGW, to acquire the SRVCC capability of the UE#1, in a registration process of the UE#1 with IMS. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208660 | SERVING GPRS SUPPORT NODE AND CONTROLLING METHOD - A system is provided which is capable of connecting a call without degrading the security level in a mobile terminal network, even when a call addressed to a user equipment (UE) arrives via the Internet or a home network. A femto base station receives a packet addressed to a UE via the Internet or a home network, and starts a paging procedure. The UE establishes an RRC connection to the femto base station. The UE transmits, to the femto base station, a paging response addressed to the SGSN. The femto base station performs NAS verification. If the femto base station detects the paging response to a paging request that the femto base station itself has issued, the femto base station changes the service type of the service request received from the UE from the paging response to signaling. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208661 | METHOD IN A NETWORK NODE OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and network node for selecting a most suitable gateway for a User Equipment (UE) located in a wireless communications network. The network includes the network node and at least two gateways configured to provide packet data network connectivity to the UE located within a served cell. The network node detects a presence of a local gateway among the gateways and obtains UE information including a type of the UE. The UE type is either a stationary/fixed type or a mobile type, and the UE type is determined based on UE mobility behavior in relation to a local gateway service area. The network node selects the detected local gateway or another gateway among the at least two gateways for providing packet data network connectivity to the UE based on the determined UE type. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208662 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING MULTI-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - The present invention, relates to a method of a terminal transmitting/receiving data to/from first base stations for supporting a first radio access technology (RAT) and second base stations for supporting a second RAT in a wireless access system, includes performing a scanning process for at least one second base station; receiving a first message for reordering the scanning process for the at least one second base station after predetermined time; transmitting a first scanning report message indicating the result of the scanning process for the at least one second base station based on the first message; receiving a second message for ordering the connection with one second base station of the at least one second base station; performing a connecting process for the at least one second base station based on the second message; and simultaneously transmitting/receiving the data to/from the first base stations and the second base stations. | 08-15-2013 |
20130215823 | Reference Signal Configuration for Extension Carriers And Carrier Segments - Reference signals configured for use with extension carriers and/or carrier segments are described. Reference signals for extension carriers and/or carrier segments may include demodulation reference signals (e.g., user equipment-specific reference signals), cell-specific reference signals, and channel-state information reference signals. Methods, systems and apparatuses for configuring extension carriers and/or carrier segments with one or more of the reference signals (e.g., positioning one or more reference signal symbols in extension carriers and/or carrier segments) are described. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215824 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING MAXIMUM POWER OF CARRIER IN CARRIER AGGREGATION SCENARIO - A method and apparatus for reporting a maximum carrier power in a carrier aggregation scenario are disclosed. The method includes: a user equipment (UE) encapsulating a particular power headroom (PH) of an activated uplink component carrier (UL CC) and a particular maximum output power of a physical channel of the activated UL CC into a same power headroom report (PHR) and reporting the PHR to a base station (eNB). The method enables the eNB to acquire the power situation of the UE in time so as to perform scheduling more accurately. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215825 | MOBILE WIDE AREA NETWORK IP TRANSLATION CONFIGURATION - A method, system and non-transitory computer storage readable medium comprise operating a Wide Area Network (WAN) device according to a first Internet protocol (IP) translation mode of operation, changing an initial connectivity status between the WAN device and a WAN and transitioning from the first IP translation mode of operation to a second IP translation mode of operation that is different from the first IP translation mode of operation based on the change in the initial connectivity status. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215826 | Robust Channel Estimation of OFDM Systems - A system and method for estimating a channel in wireless communication systems using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). From the received OFDM symbols, Maximum Likelihood (ML) estimate of the channel frequency response is obtained at the pilot locations. A hypothesis test is performed on the ML estimates and the outcome of the hypothesis test is used to decide a shrinkage target. Biased estimation methods are used to shrink the ML estimates towards the shrinkage target to obtain better estimates of the channel frequency response at the pilot locations and these estimates are interpolated using a Filter to get a set of complete estimates of the channel over the resource block. The Filter is an Empirical Weiner Filter or a robust 2D-MMSE filter and the biased estimation is done using either a James-Stein (JS) estimator or a shrinkage estimator or an empirical Bayes estimator. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215827 | VOIP PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS OF MOBILE TERMINAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An improved VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) processing method and apparatus reduce the processing delay of a mobile terminal in the mobile communication system. The VoIP processing apparatus includes a Radio Frequency (RF) unit configured to transmit and receive a VoIP packet, and an audio processing unit configured to process audio signals. The apparatus also includes a voice engine configured to determine, when VoIP packet processing is requested, whether a dedicated voice path for processing the VoIP packet exists and control, when the dedicated voice path exists, to process voice signal input/output using a dedicated VoIP processing interface for processing the VoIP packet. The VoIP processing method and apparatus are capable of reducing voice delay by improving the audio paths between VoIP applications and terminal platform. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215828 | DYNAMIC WIRELESS DATA RATE SELECTION - Systems, devices and methods described herein provide or possess functionality that enables dynamically selecting a data rate from a plurality of available data rates. In one implementation, an initial data rate for transmitting a packet is reduced aggressively until it is determined that consecutive packets were transmitted successfully. In another implementation, an initial data rate is increased moderately after it is determined that consecutive packets were transmitted successfully. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215829 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAME AND STORAGE MEDIUM - Efficient selection of an access point is performed in accordance with quality of service of wireless communication required for a wireless communication apparatus. To achieve this in a wireless network system that uses a plurality of access points, the access point suited to the quality of service of wireless communication required by the wireless communication apparatus is selected automatically when the access point to which the wireless communication apparatus will be connected is selected. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215830 | SYNCHRONOUS HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST (HARQ) PROTOCOL EMPLOYING A FIRST INFORMATION ELEMENT INDICATING WHETHER TO PERFORM RETRANSMISSION OF AN UPLINK DATA PACKET AND A SECOND INFORMATION ELEMENT INDICATES MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME (MCS) FOR THE RETRANSMISSION - A base station receives an uplink data packet from a user equipment based on a synchronous hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) protocol, and transmits a first information element and a second information element in parallel to the user equipment. The first information element indicates whether to perform a retransmission of the uplink data packet, and the second information element indicates modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for the retransmission. The base station receives the retransmission from the user equipment according to the modulation and coding scheme. The first information element is for example an ACK/NACK feedback message. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215831 | HIGH ORDER MODULATION CONFIGURATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USER EQUIPMENT IN A CELL FORWARD ACCESS CHANNEL STATE - The embodiment of the current invention provides a higher-order modulation method and device for a user equipment in a cell forward channel state, the method comprising: obtaining cell capability reported by a base station; determining whether to deploy a higher-order modulation for the user equipment in the cell forward access channel state according to the cell capability and a current configuration policy configured by the wireless network controller; separately sending a higher-order modulation activation indication to the base station and the user equipment if it is determined to deploy the higher-order modulation for user equipment in the cell forward channel state. The method and device of the embodiment increase the peak rate of the user equipment in the cell forward channel state via introducing higher-order modulation to the cell forward channel state, and provide guarantee for additional subsequent service bearers in the cell forward channel state. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215832 | BROADBAND DUAL-POLARIZED OMNI-DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA AND FEEDING METHOD USING THE SAME - A broadband dual-polarized omni-directional antenna and a feeding method using the same are provided. By setting a vertically polarized antenna and a horizontally polarized antenna each in co-axial, the horizontally polarized antenna is attached to an upper surface and a lower surface of the attaching plate respectively by two arms of a folded dipole and the two arms connect to an inner conductor and an outer conductor of a feed line so that the dual-polarized antenna may have a comparatively broad bandwidth. At the same time, since the dual-polarized ceiling antenna has a good isolation effect and coverage balance, it may work as the MIMO antenna in the LTE and WLAN systems effectively and may be used in the 2G and 3G networks to improve the data transmission rate. | 08-22-2013 |
20130223334 | Channel Scan for Smart Meter Networks to Determine Operating Channels - An operation channel in a multi-hop network is determined. The network uses a set of channels, and one of the nodes is a network management node. The operation channel is selected in the network management node. Then, the network management node broadcasts a channel information packet including the operation channel using all channels. The channel information packet is received in each of other nodes, either directly from the network management node or from an intermediate node that received and rebroadcasted the channel information packet. Lastly, the operation channel in each node is set according to the channel information packet until the network is formed. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223335 | MULTI-MODE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING OPERATION MODE THEREOF - A method for operating a multi-mode terminal having a processor includes receiving a data packet, determining whether the data packet includes foreground data, and selecting, using the processor, a first mode or a second mode based on the presence of the foreground data in the data packet, in which the second mode is selected if the data packet is determined to comprise the foreground data. A multi-mode terminal includes a receiver to receive a data packet, and a mode determiner to determine whether the data packet comprises foreground data, and to select a first mode or a second mode based on the presence of the foreground data in the data packet. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223336 | IN-BAND SIGNALING TO INDICATE END OF DATA STREAM AND UPDATE USER CONTEXT - The disclosure relates to indicating or detecting an end of a stream of data using in-band signaling. An embodiment transmits the stream of data, the stream of data comprising multiple packets, each packet of the multiple packets including a header with a marker bit field and a payload, and configures the marker bit field and/or the payload of at least one packet of the multiple packets to indicate the end of the stream of data, wherein the configuring the payload comprises reducing an amount of data contained in the payload from payloads of other packets of the multiple packets and/or setting a field in the payload indicating a countdown to a last packet of the stream of data. An embodiment receives the stream of data and detects that at least one packet of the multiple packets is configured to indicate the end of the stream of data. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223337 | MOBILE DEVICE TO GENERATE MULTIPLE MAXIMUM TRANSFER UNITS AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - Provided are a mobile device capable of generating multiple maximum transfer units (MTUs) and a data transfer method. The method includes determining whether a network is registered with the mobile device; if the network is not registered in the mobile device, generating a virtual interface to generate a maximum transfer unit (MTU) value of the network; and registering the network by storing the MTU value of the network in the mobile device. The mobile device includes an MTU management unit configured to determine whether a network is registered with the mobile device, and, if the network is not registered in the mobile device, to generate a virtual interface to generate an MTU value of the network. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223338 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for compressing block acknowledgment (ACK) frames/packets are described herein. In some aspects, a method of compressing a block acknowledgment frame includes generating an offset value and a portion of a bitmap, the offset value indicating a location where the portion of the bitmap is located in the bitmap. The method further includes transmitting the offset value and the portion of the bitmap in a compressed block acknowledgment frame. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223339 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND GATEWAY - The number of required GWs is reduced to suppress the number of facilities by storing MS information on an M2M connection in an external device, and cooperating with the GWs such as mobile GWs in a mobile system in which the M2M connection and a connection other than the M2M connection are mixed together. When an MS migrates to an idle state, the MS stores the MS information in the external device once, and deletes information from an ASN-GW. When the MS migrates from the idle state to an active state, the ASN-GW again draws the MS information from the external device, and again stores the MS information within the device, to thereby enable a communication. If a resource of the active state is short within the device, a migration from the idle state to the active state is enabled with the use of another ASN-GW. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223340 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING AVAILABLE ACCESS POINTS - An apparatus to identify an available access point (AP) includes a communication unit to detect one or more APs located within a reference proximity from the apparatus, a determination unit to determine an available state of the detected AP, and a display unit to display an AP scan list including available state of the accessible AP. A method for identifying an available AP of a wireless local area network (LAN) terminal includes detecting APs located within a reference proximity of the wireless LAN terminal, determining an available state of at least one of the detected APs, and displaying an AP scan list including the available state of the AP. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223341 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING DEVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for discovering a device without an access point (AP) to perform P2P communication in a wireless communication network includes: receiving a probe request frame from another P2P device; determining whether a message requesting at least one of a phone number and user identification information is included in the received probe request frame; and transmitting a probe response frame including at least one of the phone number and the user identification information to the another P2P device when the message is included in the probe request frame. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223342 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING PRESENCE FUNCTION IN ENTERPRISE MOBILITY SYSTEM - A method for operating a terminal to provide a presence function in an Enterprise Mobility System (EMS) includes transmitting a registration message a server; receiving a response message including state information of a user group from the server in response to the registration message; and displaying the state information of the user group. The state information is information which is provided to the server from at least one network entity of a plurality of network entities included in the enterprise mobility system and is collected. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223343 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR APPLYING MULTI-SOURCE MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS - A method for applying multi-source multiple-input multiple-output communications by a base station is described. The method includes obtaining data for transmission to a wireless communication device. The method also includes sending a second portion of the data to an assisting base station. The method also includes sending an indication frame that comprises an identifier of the wireless communication device to the assisting base station. The method also includes transmitting a first portion of the data on a first set of spatial streams. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223344 | System and Method for HARQ Entity Configuration - A single hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entity can be associated with multiple serving units to achieve lower complexity user-side signal processing during multi-point communication. Additionally, configuring a single HARQ entity to establish HARQ operations with multiple serving units may achieve lower latency communication when users are engaging in multi-point communications, such as coordinated multi-point transmission/reception (CoMP). HARQ entity associations and/or reconfigurations can be achieved through radio resource control (RRC) signaling. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223345 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for compressing block acknowledgment (ACK) frames/packets are described herein. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network includes generating a block acknowledgment frame comprising a plurality of fields in the following order: a block acknowledgment identifier field including an identifier of the block acknowledgment frame; a starting sequence control field including at least one of a sequence number and a function of a sequence number of a data unit for which the block acknowledgement frame is sent; and a block acknowledgement bitmap field indicating a received status of a number of data units. The method further includes wirelessly transmitting the block acknowledgment frame. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223346 | Systems and Methods for Dynamic Aggregation of Bandwidth - Systems and methods are presented for the dynamic aggregation of communications network bandwidth. Communication devices are bonded in a community in which the communication resources of a bonded device can be used to transfer data on behalf of another bonded device. In an exemplary embodiment, communication devices are bonded wirelessly to share wireless wide area network communication channels. Bandwidth aggregation is performed dynamically based on user communication requirements and the current states of the bonded communication devices. Methods are presented by which communication devices can be automatically bonded when a predetermined bonding condition is satisfied. The methods and systems of the invention optimize utilization of communication resources in a cost-effective manner that provides a user high quality service as well as location mobility. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223347 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING CALL ORIGINATIONS USING SMS AND HOTLINE CAPABILITIES - A method for handling call originations is provided. The method includes sending origination information from a mobile device to an application server in an enterprise network using Short Message Service (SMS) and determining whether a hotline feature is present in a subscriber profile associated with the mobile device. Data is then routed from the mobile device to a predetermined destination based on the hotline feature. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223348 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING CO-CHANNEL AND CO-EXISTENCE VIA ENHANCED FRAME PREAMBLES - Methods and apparatus are described to facilitate co-channel co-existence in a wireless communication environment. First information and second information related to a shared channel may be transmitted. The first information may be transmitted across a plurality of subcarriers over a first symbol set of a subframe and the second information may be transmitted within a subset of the plurality of subcarriers over a second symbol set of the subframe. The second information may include channel-sharing information regarding the wireless communication environment. The channel-sharing information may reduce intercell interference with at least one other base station. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223349 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING, TRANSMITTING, AND RECEIVING A DATA FRAME IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a technique relating to a method and apparatus for generating, transmitting, and receiving a data frame having a newly proposed format in a wireless communication system. According to the technique, the method for generating a data frame in a wireless communication system comprises the following steps: generating at least one first subframe; generating at least one second subframe; and generating a data frame including the first and second subframes, wherein the first and second subframes include length information of a MAC protocol data unit (MPDU) contained in the first and second subframes, and the length information of the MPDU contained in the second subframe is zero. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223350 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A SIGNAL IN A MULTI-NODE SYSTEM - Provided is a method for transmitting a signal in a multi-node system including a plurality of nodes, and a base station connected to each of the plurality of nodes for controlling the nodes. The method comprises the following steps: transmitting first node-setting information to a first terminal; transmitting second node-setting information to a second terminal; transmitting a signal to the first terminal through a first node group; and transmitting a signal to the second terminal through a second node group, wherein the first node-setting information and the second node-setting information include system parameters which are set differently for each terminal, and the first node group is determined on the basis of the first node-setting information, and the second node group is determined on the basis of the second node-setting information. | 08-29-2013 |
20130229979 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HYBRID CONTENT DELIVERY - Systems and methods which provide data communication content delivery through a hybrid network implementation are disclosed. A hybrid network configuration may utilize a broadcast communication technique to deliver large amounts of data communication content to one or more mobile communication device via uni-directional network links and a uni-cast communication technique via bi-directional network links with the one or more mobile communication device to facilitate delivery and utilization of the data communication content. Data content delivery loss recovery techniques implemented according to embodiments of the invention utilize network links of the hybrid network other than or in addition to the uni-directional network links to implement loss recovery techniques such as a hybrid repeat technique, a hybrid retransmission technique, hybrid statistical feedback technique, and/or combinations thereof. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229980 | Radio Base Station and Method Therein for Transmitting a Data Signal to a User Equipment in a Radio Communications Network - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a radio base station ( | 09-05-2013 |
20130229981 | DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING BASIC RESOURCE GRID TYPE INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING A PLURALITY OF SERVING CELLS AND METHOD THEREOF - Provided area device for transmitting/receiving Basic Resource Grid (BRG) type information in a wireless communication system supporting a plurality of serving cells, and a method thereof. According to an embodiment of the present invention, a basic station device for transmitting BRG type information in a wireless communication system supporting a plurality of serving cells includes: a processor for configuring each BRG type for at least one serving cell configured in a terminal; and a transmitter for transmitting the configured BRG type information to the terminal. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229982 | SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a synchronization method, device, and system, and relate to the field of communications, so that a device deployment cost may be reduced and the stability of device synchronization may be improved. The method includes: acquiring, by a switching node, synchronization time from a main control node; and sending, by the switching node, the synchronization time to each controlled node that is connected to the switching node, so as to perform time synchronization between each controlled node and the main control node. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229983 | BASE STATION SYNCHRONIZATION - A method and apparatus of time synchronizing a plurality of base stations in a wireless communication system includes receiving an indication of a timing associated with a synch burst, where the synch burst is from a mastercell having a better time synchronization quality than other cells and measured by at least one cell other than the mastercell. A request is sent to a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) for a measurement of a base station time of arrival (BSTOA) value of the at least one cell other than the mastercell. The BSTOA value from the WTRU is received and a timing adjustment is sent to the at least one cell other than the mastercell. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229984 | Radio Access Network Node with IP Interface - Devices, systems, and methods are disclosed to directly connect a node of a Radio Access Network (RAN) with an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The node is provided with an interface to a broadband local loop network. Access to the local loop network or last mile enables the node to communicate directly with an IP network, including an IP Multimedia System (IMS) core. The node need not access a packet-switched core network via a controller. Embodiments include a Node B with an IP interface in a UMTS system and a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) with an IP interface in a GSM system. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229985 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION FOR REDUCTION OF INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of transmitting control information for reduction of inter-cell interference (ICI) in a wireless communication system is provided. The base station transmits one of precoding information and antenna information for every time frequency resource to a second base station based on a ICI reduction method determined by the base station. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229986 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR DECIDING ON A CONTROL ENTITY FOR A PACKET DATA CONNECTION - The invention relates to an apparatus, a system, a method and a computer program product for receiving a protocol identifier indicating a protocol used in a packet data connection of a user, determining if the user is roaming, and | 09-05-2013 |
20130229987 | TECHNIQUE FOR PROVIDING SUPPORT FOR A PLURALITY OF MOBILITY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOLS - A technique for registering a mobile terminal with an anchor node and for handling data packets after registration is provided. A method implementation of this technique comprises the steps of providing support for a plurality of mobility management protocols, wherein the mobility management protocols are deployed in parallel within a protocol stack of an anchor node, receiving, from a mobile terminal, a registration message, and selectively handling the registration message in accordance with the mobility management protocol associated with the registration message. | 09-05-2013 |
20130235794 | EFFICIENT BROADCASTING VIA RANDOM LINEAR PACKET COMBINING - Embodiments of systems and methods for efficient broadcasting via random linear packet combining are described. A method for random linear packet combining includes receiving a plurality of data packets from a data source. Additionally, the method may include dividing the plurality of data packets into a plurality of data blocks, and multiplying bits associated with the plurality of data blocks by a set of coefficients to generate a plurality of product values. The method may also include generating an encoded data packet having a plurality of encoded data blocks, wherein generating the encoded data packet comprises linearly combining the plurality of product values for respective data blocks of each of the plurality of data packets into corresponding encoded data blocks of the encoded data packet. Because each encoded data packet includes information about a complete set of data packets, rather than just a subset, less broadcast redundancy may be required. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235795 | DISTRIBUTED APPLICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING QUALITY OF SERVICE IN DATA TRANSMISSION THEREOF - A distributed application system and a method for controlling QoS in data transmission are provided. The distributed application system includes an application hosting device (AHD), a wireless sensor network (WSN) and a gateway. The AHD includes a personal health manage software module, a first application programming interface (API) module and a first communication protocol module. The gateway includes a second API module, second and third communication protocol modules. The WSN, the first and second communication protocol modules support a first communication protocol, and the third communication protocol module supports a second communication protocol. The first API module cooperates with the second API module to accomplish all of default functionalities of a personal network API. The PHD is connected to the AHD via the gateway. When the AHD or the gateway transmits a message to the WSN, the QoS control of the message is performed by setting priority and acknowledge parameters. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235796 | System and Method for Uplink Transmission in a Wireless Network - A method of communicating in a wireless network includes communicating, by a network element, a short clear-to-send (CTS) frame including a first short training field and a first long training field. Also, the short CTS frame includes a first signaling field including a first duration field and a first address of the station. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235797 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DATA MESSAGE COMMUNICATION - A method and user device are for communicating data from the user device by transmitting a synchronizing preamble having no timing advance, the synchronizing preamble comprising a base sequence that has been cyclically shifted by N shift index durations. The user device receives from a network station a response that indicates that a preamble was received from the user device having the base sequence cyclically shifted by N−1 shift index durations. The user device determines, based at least partially on the response, that corrective action is appropriate. The user device performs one of transmitting a modified form of synchronizing preamble, transmitting the data as a data message having a timing advance, and barring further attempts to transmit the data to the network station for a defined duration. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235798 | SMART ANTENNA SOFTWARE DEFINITION RADIO TERMINAL DEVICE AND METHOD OF DISTRIBUTING AND INSTALLING SOFTWARE DEFINITION RADIO TERMINAL APPLICATION - Disclosed is a smart antenna software definition radio terminal device. A software definition radio terminal device in a smart antenna software definition radio multi antenna system according to the present invention includes: a storage unit, a microprocessor, and at least one baseband accelerator. The microprocessor is configured to select a smart antenna algorithm; receive a control command from a radio controller layer for delivering a control command to control the baseband accelerator and a radio controller layer on the basis of the selected algorithm; read from the storage unit a code including a baseband driver layer that delivers the received control command to the baseband accelerator, and execute the read code; and load at least one functional block for realizing at least one smart antenna algorithm from the storage unit into the baseband accelerator. According to the terminal device, a terminal having a modem chip of a different structure may execute the same radio application through standard API. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235799 | SIGNAL STRENGTH GUIDED INTRA-CELL UPSTREAM DATA FORWARDING - Intra-cell upstream data forwarding is utilized in a wireless network such as a wireless local area network. A network forwarding path is determined based on the signal strength of an access point signal received at client stations within the network, referred to as the OASS. In particular embodiments, a station that is either originating or forwarding a frame inserts its own OASS into the frame before transmitting it and a client station that receives a frame forwards it only if its own OASS exceeds the frame-enclosed OASS, illustratively by at least a predetermined amount. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235800 | Method of and System for Packet Gateway and Content Management Integration - Methods of and systems for packet gateway and content management integration are disclosed. An integrated gateway and content management module provides content to mobile user equipment from a content delivery network. The module operates on the content based on information about the mobile user equipment and/or network entities with which the mobile user equipment is communicating and information about the content being provided. The integrated gateway and content management module discovers said information. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235801 | Ubiquitous Access to FEMTO-Connected Network - A system and method of enabling a mobile device to communicate with a local IP network host and an external IP network host using a femto cellular access point on a femto cellular access network. A local gateway is coupled to the femto cellular access network for receiving data packets transmitted on the femto cellular access network and for routing the data packets to one of a local IP network and an external IP network, based on a destination address associated with the data packets. The femto cellular access network includes an LTE network, an EVDO network connected to an EPC, or a WiMax 802.16e/m network connected to the EPC. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235802 | Enhanced Encapsulation Mechanism Using GRE Protocol - Wireless gateway nodes are enabled to support mobile node services, such as content based billing, when a data treatment server is present in the system. Using one of a defined Content Flow Label (CFL), an Application Program Interface (API), and a compression protocol header, content based billing is provided such as by exchanging content and byte count information with the data treatment server. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235803 | METHOD OF SELECTIVELY APPLYING A PDCP FUNCTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a wireless communication system and terminal for providing a wireless communication service, and more particularly, a method of selectively applying a PDCP function based on data characteristic transmitted through a radio bearer in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) evolved from a UMTS, Long Term Evolution (LTE) System or LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) system. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235804 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING ACTIVATION INDICATOR REGARDING COMPONENT CARRIER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for supporting activation/deactivation of serving cells by a base station (eNB) in a wireless communication system provides decreased overhead and decreased power consumption for a user equipment (UE). The method includes configuring M supportable serving cells in the UE, configuring an indicator indicating activation/deactivation of each of the M serving cells, configuring a medium access control (MAC) message which includes a MAC control element (CE) and a logical channel identifier (LCID), the MAC CE including the indicator configured for each of the M serving cells and having a length corresponding to an integer multiple of 8 bits, the LCID indicating that the MAC CE includes the indicator indicating activation/deactivation of each serving cell, and transmitting the configured MAC message to the UE. Accordingly, a control channel or data channel regarding a component carrier is selectively received depending on whether the component carrier is activated. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235805 | CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK PAGING FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY POOL - Method for a switching unit (MSC_I) in a network in which a user equipment is being adapted to be attached and connected to a 2G/3G network for performing circuit switched, CS, communication with the network, or being adapted to be attached to a LTE network, for performing packet switched, PS, communication, wherein the PS communication is adapted to be performed via a mobility management entity, MME, which may be arranged in a pool of MME's, the user equipment being adapted to receive page signals so as to inform the user of incoming calls, the switching unit (MSC_I) being adapted for issuing page signals to MME nodes, receiving an incoming external CS call; performing detection of a first selected MME, as to whether the first selected MME is ready or not; if detecting a not ready state concerning the selected MME (MME_I | 09-12-2013 |
20130235806 | ANTENNA ARCHITECTURE FOR MAINTAINING BEAM SHAPE IN A RECONFIGURABLE ANTENNA - A node in a wireless communication system comprising an antenna array with at least a first antenna function and a second antenna function. The node further comprises a first radio chain and a second radio chain, where each antenna function is connected to a base band via a corresponding radio chain. Each radio chain comprises an oscillator, a splitter and a multiplexer, each oscillator being arranged to feed a signal with a unique frequency band to the splitter in the same radio chain. The splitter is arranged to divide the signal into at least two signal parts and feed each part to the multiplexer of each radio chain such that each multiplexer in the node receives signal parts from each splitter in the node. The splitter is arranged to weight the division of the signal into the signal parts in dependence of the frequency bands fed by each oscillator. | 09-12-2013 |
20130242858 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIDEBAND AND SUPER-WIDEBAND TELEPHONY - A gateway includes at least one network interface, at least one analog telephony interface, and a processing unit operable to receive a bandwidth signal over the at least one analog telephony interface from a telephony device and configure an audio bandwidth of a telephony connection for the telephony device over the at least one network interface based on the bandwidth signal. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242859 | Handling Packet Data Convergence Protocol Data Units - Systems, apparatus and methods can be implemented for handling packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) protocol data units (PDUs). A described technique includes receiving a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) protocol data unit (PDU). It can be determined whether the received PDCP PDU is a duplicate PDCP PDU or that the received PDCP PDU is outside of a reordering window. The received PDCP PDU can be discarded without performing deciphering or header decompression for the received PDCP PDU. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242860 | PHYSICAL LAYER FEEDBACK FOR IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Systems, apparatuses, and methods for transmitting IDC information on a physical uplink channel are provided. A described technique includes identifying, at a user equipment (UE), in-device coexistence (IDC) interference, and transmitting, to a base station, an IDC indicator or selected IDC solution identifying the IDC interference on a physical layer uplink channel. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242861 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTED SYNCHRONIZATION IN FEMTOCELL NETWORKS - Aspects disclosed herein relate to facilitating synchronizing frequency and/or timing of a wireless network. In an example, with a femto node configured to receive one or more signals from one or more anchor sources, determine that at least one of the one or more signals are received at least at a threshold signal quality, determine whether a difference in a local frequency and/or a local timing is within a threshold difference to a signal frequency and/or a signal timing determined based on the at least one of the one or more signals, and advertise an anchor status where the difference is within the threshold difference. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242862 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EQUALIZING TRANSMISSION DELAY IN A NETWORK - A network device includes an antenna connected to an RF chip and a processor coupled to an Ethernet port, the RF chip, a program memory, a packet buffer memory, a pointer buffer memory, and a program memory. The program memory contains instruction that, when executed by the processor, cause a plurality of packets received by the antenna and the RF chip in a first order to be stored in the packet buffer memory in such order, cause a pointer associated with each one of the plurality of packets to be stored in the pointer buffer memory, cause the pointers stored in the pointer buffer memory to be placed in a second order in accordance with a timestamp that is included with each packet, cause the packets stored in the packet buffer memory to be passed along to the Ethernet port in accordance with the sorted pointer to each packet. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242863 | TRANSMISSION OF MBMS IN AN OFDM COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention provides for a method of identifying a cyclic prefix to UEs in an OFDM communication system. The cyclic prefix has a dynamically variable length. The method includes, within an OFDM cell, transmitting MCCH scheduling information in a system information block in an OFDM broadcast channel, and using the MCCH scheduling information to receive the MCCH, wherein the MCCH contains MTCH scheduling information to indicate to the UE which sub-frame carries MTCH. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242864 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN A NETWORK OF AIRCRAFT IN FLIGHT - In a communications network including aircraft in flight and at least one ground station, which constitute communication nodes of the network, data are transmitted from a source node to a destination node following a non-predetermined path through the network that includes at least one node which is a so-called intermediate aircraft. Before transmitting data from a transmitting node to at least one receiving node, it envisages a step of selecting the receiving node defining a portion of the path without knowledge of the next portion of the path. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242865 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR ACCESS PROBE ENHANCEMENTS - Methods and wireless communication devices for access procedure enhancement are provided. The wireless communication device for access procedure enhancement includes a transceiver module and a communication protocol module. The transceiver module performs wireless transmissions and receptions. The communication protocol module receives a page message from a base station via the transceiver module, transmits at least one access probe via the transceiver module, and terminates the transmission of the rest of an access probe payload of the at least one access probe according to a termination criterion. Moreover, the access probe is transmitted using a transmission power which is lower than a first threshold, and the access probe is transmitted at a data rate lower than a second threshold. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242866 | METHOD FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION AND BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT USING THE SAME - A method for device to device communication, a control node using the same, and a user equipment using the same has been proposed. For the proposed method, a control node first establishes with a caller device a connection during which an ID of the callee and an establishment cause indicating caller is transmitted to the control node. A control node then informs the call to a callee device by establishing with the callee device a connection during which a D2D ID of the callee and an establishment cause indicating callee is transmitted to the control node. When the control node finds a caller device linked with a caller establishment cause and a D2D ID of the callee, the control node automatically trigger D2D communication between the caller device and the callee device. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242867 | CONTROL OF MACHINE-TO-MACHINE DEVICES - A machine-to-machine device is configured to execute an application and comprises a cellular network interface for wireless communication of data for the application with a cellular network. It has subscription information allowing it to register with more than one cellular network. The device may be registered with one cellular network, selected as having a received signal quality measurement of at least a predetermined level that is based upon a quality of service level defined by the application. It is also provided that the device may identify that a quality measurement for a packet-switched communication link fails to meet a predetermined level. In response, the machine-to-machine device may be deregistered from one cellular network and registered with another cellular network. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242868 | FIRMWARE PROCESSING FOR DOWNLINK F-DPCH - A channel receiver operable to implement fractional dedicated physical channel (F-DPCH) for high-speed data packet access is provided. A received RF signal is processed to produce a set of soft symbol outputs. The receiver detects whether transmit power control (TPC) command bits are present in the set of soft symbol outputs. The TPC command bits are conveyed with the RF signal over non-dedicated pilot bits in the processed baseband signal. When TPC command bits are detected, the set of soft symbol outputs are processed to produce estimated TPC command bits. A TPC quality estimate is generated based on the estimated TPC command bits. A signal-to-interference ratio for the WCDMA dedicated physical channel is adjusted based upon a comparison of the TPC quality estimate with a TPC quality target to effect F-DPCH power control. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242869 | DIRECT GENERATION OF DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORMS OF TIME-SHIFTED ZADOFF-CHU SEQUENCES - A method includes accepting input values u and v, respectively identifying a u | 09-19-2013 |
20130242870 | MULTIPLE-INPUT-MULTIPLE-OUTPUT ANTENNA DEVICE - A Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output (MIMO) antenna device is adapted for connecting electrically to a radio frequency (RF) circuit for transmitting and receiving RF signals . The MIMO antenna device includes a circuit board, a plurality of antenna units, and a plurality of multiplexer units. The antenna units are disposed on the circuit board proximate to a peripheral edge thereof, are arranged in a loop formation, and are divided into a plurality of groups of the antenna units . Each of the multiplexer units is connected electrically to a respective one of the groups of the antenna units for selecting one of the corresponding antenna units and for connecting electrically the selected one of the corresponding antenna units to the RF circuit, thereby achieving the MIMO technique with the independently and simultaneously operating antenna units. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242871 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VERSATILE MAC MULTIPLEXING IN EVOLVED HSPA - Methods and apparatus for versatile medium access control (MAC) multiplexing in evolved HSPA are disclosed. More particularly, methods for downlink optimization of the enhanced high speed MAC (MAC-ehs) entity and uplink optimization of the MAC-i/is entity are disclosed. Apparatuses for using the optimized downlink and uplink MAC entities are also disclosed. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242872 | MONITORING DEVICE, AND INSTALLATION POSITION MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR SMALL-SIZED BASE STATION - A monitoring device ( | 09-19-2013 |
20130242873 | Remote Transmission System - A virtual broadband transmitting unit includes a stream generator to generate a multiplicity of data streams from an incoming media data stream, and a transmission manager to control the upload of the multiplicity of data streams along a multiplicity of transmission channels to at least one wireless communication network. A virtual broadband receiver includes means to receive a multiplicity of media data streams from a multiplicity of data connections, and an assembly engine to assemble the data streams into a single media stream. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242874 | METHOD FOR DETECTING INTERFERENCE USER, HOME BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT - Detecting interference user and home base station including: pre-configuring the cell type information of a home base station as an open cell type, and broadcasting the cell type information by the home base station in the cell; determining whether user equipment is one belonging to the home base station by the home base station according to the related information transmitted by the user equipment via a random access procedure, wherein the related information includes user information or a random access preamble; and determining by the home base station that the user equipment is an interference user, if the user equipment is not one belonging to the home base station. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242875 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO PERFORM RANGING OPERATIONS FOR WIRELESS STATIONS - Certain embodiments provide methods and apparatus for adjusting timing in an SDMA system. One method for adjusting the timing of packet transmissions in a wireless communications system, that may be performed by an access point, includes receiving ranging signals from a plurality of wireless network nodes, determining timing adjustment information for adjusting starting timing of packet transmissions from the wireless network nodes based on the ranging signals, and communicating the timing adjustment information to the wireless network nodes. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242876 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RECEIVED CHANNEL POWER INDICATOR (RCPI) MEASUREMENT - A received channel power indicator (RCPI) value is used as a measure of the received RF power in the selected channel, measured at the antenna connector. This parameter is a measure by the PHY sublayer of the received RF power in the channel measured over the PLCP preamble and over the entire received frame. RCPI is a monotonically increasing, logarithmic function of the received power level defined in dBm. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242877 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NOTIFYING A NODE IN A MULTI-NODE SYSTEM - The present description relates to a method for notifying at least one node being used from among a plurality of nodes in a multi-node system including the plurality of nodes and a base station for controlling the plurality of nodes, wherein the method comprises a step in which a terminal determines, from the table preemptively shared with the base station, an index for indicating at least one node to be notified; and a step in which the terminal performs communication with the base station using the determined index. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242878 | ROUTER WITH STORAGE DEVICE AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A router with a storage device is provided. When a terminal communicates with a first or second communication unit, the terminal may store data into an internal storage device, and read and delete the stored data. When an external storage device is connected to a wired interface unit provided to the router, data stored in the external storage device may be uploaded to be stored into the internal storage device, and the data stored in the internal storage device may be backed up to the external storage device. When the terminal is connected to the wired interface unit, the terminal may store data into the internal storage device, and read and delete the stored data. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242879 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes: a plurality of nodes each of which forwards a packet; a terminal device to establish a connection with at least one of the nodes, and to access a network through at least one of the nodes; and a control device to control a packet forwarding route in response to a request which is sent from at least one of the nodes to request for setting the packet forwarding route. The control device includes: a unit that stores a plurality of location information respectively corresponding to the respective nodes; a unit that receives the request sent from at least one of the nodes connected to the terminal device; and a unit that identifies a location of the terminal device based on the location information corresponding to the at least one of the nodes, and controls the packet forwarding route by using the location of the terminal device. | 09-19-2013 |
20130250849 | Method and Apparatus for Efficient Content Delivery in Radio Access Networks - Various methods and communications devices to improve bandwidth utilization in a wireless communication network are provided. By way of example, efficient content delivery in a radio access network is achieved by using an accelerator module configured to implement a stack having, among others, a hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) layer, a transmission control protocol (TCP) layer, and a de-duplication, Lempel-Ziv (LZ) compression/decompression, and caching layer. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250850 | BASE STATION TIMING CONTROL USING SYNCHRONOUS TRANSPORT SIGNALS - A base station of a wireless system comprises a local clock source and timing circuitry coupled to the local clock source. The timing circuitry is configured to adjust at least one parameter of the local clock source based at least in part on timing information extracted from designated portions of each of one or more frames of a synchronous transport signal received in the base station. The base station may further comprise a physical layer device, such as a mapper, configured to extract the timing information from the designated portions of each of the one or more frames of the synchronous transport signal. The designated portions of the one or more frames of the synchronous transport signal from which the timing information is extracted may comprise designated overhead bytes of the one or more frames, such as, for example, transport overhead (TOH) bytes. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250851 | ENCODED WIRELESS DATA DELIVERY IN A WLAN POSITIONING SYSTEM - A mobile device transmits to a server a request for information regarding access points in a wireless network. In response to the request, the mobile device receives encoded access point identifiers for a plurality of access points. The encoded access point identifiers include a reference identifier that has a number of groups of bits. The encoded access point identifiers also include encoding masks for respective access point identifiers, wherein a respective encoding mask identifies groups of bits for the respective access point identifier that are identical to corresponding groups of bits for the reference identifier. The encoded access point identifiers further include, for the respective access point identifiers, groups of bits that are not identical to the corresponding groups of bits for the reference identifier. The mobile device decodes at least some of the encoded access point identifiers. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250852 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION STRUCTURE, NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND NETWORK COMMUNICATION METHOD - A network communication structure, system and method are disclosed in the invention. The network communication structure includes client devices, a power line network and access points. One of the access points is connected to an external internet. The access points are all connected in the power line network, such that a first local area network is formed between the access points. Each of the access points utilizes an omni-directional antenna to form a local area sub-network between the access point and a client device. Each of the access points utilizes a directional antenna to form a second local area network between access points. According to a network quality of the power line network, each of the access points transmits an information packet to another access point via the first local area network or the second local area network. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250853 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES TO IMPROVE ROUND TRIP TIME IN TRANSFER CONTROL PROTOCOL USING ACCELERATED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT MESSAGES - The present description provides methods and apparatuses for improved transfer control protocol (TCP) acknowledgement transmission during operation of a slow-start process in wireless environments. For example, in an aspect, the present disclosure presents a method of wireless communication, which may include receiving, at a radio network controller (RNC), a transmission control protocol (TCP) packet for a user equipment (UE) from a server. Furthermore, example methods may include reforming the TCP packet into a set of radio link control (RLC) packets. Additionally, in some examples, such methods may additionally include transmitting the set of RLC packets to a base station. Moreover, such methods may include sending an accelerated TCP acknowledgement message to the server based on the transmitting of the set of RLC packets to the base station. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250854 | UE BASED CSFB ENHANCEMENT - A mobile station for notification of a circuit switched event. The mobile station includes a circuit switched modem, a packetized data modem, a radio, and a tune away controller. The circuit switched communicates circuit switched data over a circuit switched network. The packetized data modem communicates packetized data over a packetized data network. The radio couples the packetized data modem to the packetized data network via a packetized data radio link, and couples the circuit switched modem to the circuit switched network via a circuit switched radio link. Only one of the links may be active at a time. The tune away controller is coupled to the circuit switched modem and to the packetized data modem, and indicates tune away events over the packetized data network so that the circuit switched event is processed by the mobile station. The tune away controller directs switching between the links. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250855 | SYNCHRONOUS TDM-BASED COMMUNICATION IN DOMINANT INTERFERENCE SCENARIOS - Techniques for supporting communication in a heterogeneous network are described. In an aspect, communication in a dominant interference scenario may be supported by reserving subframes for a weaker base station observing high interference from a strong interfering base station. In another aspect, interference due to a first reference signal from a first station (e.g., a base station) may be mitigated by canceling the interference at a second station (e.g., a UE) or by selecting different resources for sending a second reference signal by the second station (e.g., another base station) to avoid collision with the first reference signal. In yet another aspect, a relay may transmit in an MBSFN mode in subframes that it listens to a macro base station and in a regular mode in subframes that it transmits to UEs. In yet another aspect, a station may transmit more TDM control symbols than a dominant interferer. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250856 | CARRIER BEARING METHOD AND DEVICE, AND RADIO REMOTE UNIT - The present disclosure discloses a carrier bearing method and device, and a base station. The carrier bearing method includes: obtaining transmit power of each carrier borne on all power amplifiers in a radio remote unit after detecting that transmit power of a carrier borne on a power amplifier in the radio remote unit changes; adjusting a correspondence between the carriers and the power amplifier in the radio remote unit according to the obtained transmit power; and bearing each carrier on its corresponding power amplifier according to the adjusted correspondence. The device and base station are used to implement the above method. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250857 | Method for Reporting Radio Link Failure Information, Terminal Equipment and eNB - A method for reporting radio link failure information, terminal equipment and eNB. The method includes: receiving by a terminal equipment a request for reporting radio link failure information transmitted by a network side; reporting radio link failure information to the network side by the terminal equipment according to the request, such that the network side performs radio link failure cause analysis according to the radio link failure information reported by the terminal equipment; the radio link failure information comprising: link quality measurement report for serving carriers, the carrier identification information of secondary carriers, and link quality measurement report for neighboring cells, when link failure occurs. With the embodiments, the network side may obtain a measurement report including carrier identification information, thereby avoiding miss judgment, and effectively performing radio link failure cause analysis. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250858 | Method and System for Soft Handoff in Mobile Broadband Systems - The present invention provides a method and system for facilitating efficient handoff and data throughput in mobile broadband communication systems. Methods implemented by a system constructed in accordance with the principles of the present invention include selectively enabled soft handoff, performing Layer 2 bearer functions at the base station and using the mobile device to coordinate soft handoff and interference avoidance without the need for a centralized coordination function. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250859 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MOVING A RECEIVE WINDOW IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method of moving a receiving window in a wireless mobile communication system, wherein the AM RLC of the transmitting side sends information of the last discarded SDU regardless of continuity of the discarded SDUs. The AM RLC of the receiving side checks whether all SDUs from the start point of the receiving window up to the last discarded SDU are successfully received, delivers the SDUs that are successfully received to an upper layer, and discard only those SDUs that are not successfully received. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250860 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND REORDERING METHOD - A radio communication system, that includes, a source base station; a target base station; and a mobile station in which the mobile station includes a receiving means for receiving first PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) PDU (Protocol Data Unit) and first sequence number from the source base station and a receiving means for receiving second PDCP PDU from the target base station, in which the second PDCP PDU being created using second sequence number and PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) SDU (Service Data Unit) that are transferred from the source base station to the target base station; a storage means for storing PDCP SDU corresponding to the first PDCP PDU and PDCP SDU corresponding to the second PDCP PDU; and a reordering means for performing in order delivery of the stored PDCP SDUs based on the first sequence number and the second sequence number. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250861 | Intelligent Wireless Access Point Notification - In one or more embodiments, one or more methods and/or systems described can determine whether a first encounter of a mobile device with a wireless access point is concluded. The determination may include determining whether a first period of time has expired, the mobile device continuously receiving a signal from the wireless access point during the first period of time, and determining whether a second period of time following the first period of time has expired. The methods and/or systems may increment a count of encounters with the wireless access point in response to determining that the second encounter with the wireless access point is concluded. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250862 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND REORDERING METHOD - A mobile station that includes a receiving means for receiving first PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) PDU (Protocol Data Unit) to which a first sequence number is added from a source base station; a receiving means for receiving second PDCP PDU from a target base station that applies a second sequence number transferred from the source base station as a sequence number of PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) SDU (Service Data Unit) received from a host station and creates the second PDCP PDU and a storage means for storing PDCP SDU corresponding to the first PDCP PDU and PDCP SDU corresponding to the second PDCP PDU and means for performing in order delivery of the stored PDCP SDUs based on the sequence numbers corresponding to the PDCP SDUs. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250863 | BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system which performs communication between a base station device configuring at least one cell and a mobile station device, wherein: the base station device includes: a synchronization signal generation unit which generates a synchronization signal corresponding to a cell identity for identifying a cell; and a transmission unit which generates a first transmission signal including the synchronization signal using a first parameter obtained from the cell identity, generates a second transmission signal excluding the synchronization signal using a second parameter obtained from a virtual cell identity different from the cell identity, transmits the first transmission signal using a first frequency band, and transmits the second transmission signal via a second frequency band different from the first frequency band. The mobile station device includes: a reception unit which receives a first reception signal including the synchronization signal using the first parameter obtained from the cell identity via the first frequency band and receives a second reception signal using the second parameter obtained from the virtual cell identity via the second frequency band. | 09-26-2013 |
20130258944 | Method for configuring a home node with a secure address for an operator network node - Disclosed is a method for configuring a home node with a secure address for an operator network node. In the method, the home node receives, from a removable smartcard, an initial address for an initial serving network node. The home node establishes communication with the initial serving network node using the initial address. The home node receives the secure address from the initial serving network node. The home node communicates with the operator network node using the secure address. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258945 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING A SESSION ESTABLISHED USING A WIRELESS CHANNEL BETWEEN A BASE STATION AND A MOBILE DEVICE - A first maintenance signal is exchanged between a server coupled to a base station and a processing unit inside a mobile device, via a wireless channel between the base station and the mobile device, to confirm establishment of a session between the server and the processing unit. The base station sends, to the server, one of control signals according to a connection state of the wireless channel, without sending the received first maintenance signal to the mobile device via the wireless channel, where the control signals includes a second maintenance signal, a session disconnected signal, and a session established signal. The mobile device sends, to the processing unit, one of the control signals according to a connection state of the wireless channel, without sending the received first maintenance signal to the server via the wireless channel. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258946 | CROSS-LAYER OPTIMIZATION METHOD IN A MULTIMEDIA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, AND AN ABSTRACTION LAYER COMPONENT FOR THE SAME - Disclosed are cross-layer optimization method where information about lots of dynamic changes in wireless environment is shared and cross-layer optimization is implemented and abstraction layer component. Multimedia transmission layer operating method where optimization of first layer and second layer is implemented by using service information provided from first layer having transmission layer and network layer and second layer lower than datalink layer. The operating method includes upward abstraction step where service information provided to second layer is processed and processed service information is provided to multimedia transmission layer and downward abstraction step where indication information provided from multimedia transmission layer is processed and processed service information is provided to second layer. Consequently, there is advantage that all layers share diverse information about lots of dynamic changes in wireless environment, and the diverse information can be controlled to allow transmission where QoS is ensured more effectively. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258947 | DISCOVERING CAPABILITIES OF OFFLINE USERS - A system and method is provided for discovering capabilities of a first device communicating with a second device using a telecommunications network. The first and second devices are registered at a service platform. The first and second devices access the service platform through first and second core networks. At the first core network, a request is received from the second device for discovering capabilities of the first device. The first core network determines a first status indicator of the first device. The request is routed from the second device to an application server. The first status indicator of the first device is identified by the application server and a second status indicator of the first device is determined. A response is sent from the application server to the second device, the response containing feature tags describing a set of services supported by the first device. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258948 | WIRED CELLULAR TELEPHONE SYSTEM - Disclosed is a telephone system using a telephone network interface configured to couple a cellular telephone to a cable network. The interface coupled in this way enables transmission and reception of communication signals to and from a cellular telephone network over the cable network allowing communication of the cellular phone to a cellular network connected to the cable network, for instance. The telephone network interface is further configured to enable the interface to communicatively couple with the cellular telephone using packet-based communication, such as session interface protocol (SIP) packet based communication. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258949 | ROAMING SUPPORT FOR WIRELESS ACCESS SUBSCRIBER OVER FIXED IP ACCESS NETWORKS - Roaming support for wireless access subscribers over fixed IP access networks is provided herein. An authentication component can authenticate a subscription of a multi-mode device across different network architectures. A policy component can provide at least a portion of a service-level policy agreement to enable or disable services or policies associated with a multi-mode device at the fixed IP access network on a per session basis. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258950 | CHARACTERIZING TRANSMISSION OF ACCESS NODES WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods, apparatuses and systems for characterizing transmission of access nodes within a wireless mesh network are disclosed. One apparatus includes an access node, wherein the access node is operative to determine a neighbor function based on how many neighboring nodes are affected by signals transmitted from the access node at varying power levels, determine an airtime per link occupied by transmission packets on links to each of the identified neighbor nodes of the neighbor function, determine an airtime metric based on the neighboring nodes and the airtime per link occupied by the transmission packets, calculate combinations of transmission power levels and transmission data rates that jointly minimize an air-time metric, and set a transmission power level and transmission data rate for transmission to a target node based on a path loss between the access node and the target node, and the calculated transmission power levels and data rates. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258951 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A system, method, and computer program product are provided for transmitting wireless signals to one or more portable devices. In use, a plurality or wireless signals is received utilizing a plurality of protocols. In addition, the plurality of protocols associated with the plurality of wireless signals are converted to a single different protocol. Further, the plurality of wireless signals is transmitted to at least one portable device utilizing the single different protocol. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258952 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO AVOID MOBILE STATION TRANSMISSION OF DUPLICATE EVENT-BASED AND POLLED ACKNOWLEDGMENTS - Methods and apparatus to avoid mobile station transmission of duplicate event-based and polled acknowledgments are disclosed. Example methods disclosed herein for a mobile station include determining whether an acknowledgment status of a first downlink data block classified as unreported is to be reported by a polled acknowledgment response to be sent in response to a poll received from a network, sending event-based acknowledgment information to report the acknowledgment status of the first downlink data block after determining that the acknowledgment status of the first downlink data block is not to be reported by the polled acknowledgment response, and refraining from sending the event-based acknowledgment information to report the acknowledgment status of the first downlink data block after determining that the acknowledgment status of the first downlink data block is to be reported by the polled acknowledgment response. | 10-03-2013 |
20130265936 | HOSTING DEVICE-SPECIFIC EDGE APPLICATIONS AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A breakout component in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and hosts device-specific edge applications that perform one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265937 | MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION (MTC) VIA NON-ACCESS STRATUM LAYER - Technology for providing a machine type communication (MTC) service via a non-access stratum (NAS) layer is disclosed. In an example, a wireless device can include a NAS layer module, an application processor, and a MTC dispatcher. The NAS layer module can provide mobility management (MM) and session management (SM) for different radio access technology (RAT) signaling via the NAS layer. The application processor can process a MTC application running on the wireless device. The MTC dispatcher within the NAS layer module or the application processor can be used identify a MTC type of service in a message and perform an action based on the MTC type of service. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265938 | ENHANCEMENTS TO WIRELESS NETWORKS TO SUPPORT SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS) COMMUNICATION IN THE PACKET SWITCHED DOMAIN - Technology for communicating a short message service (SMS) communication in a packet switched (PS) domain of a serving general packet radio service (GPRS) support node SGSN in a Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN). One method comprises receiving, at the SGSN, a request message from a user equipment (UE) indicating that the UE supports PS based SMS and performs a circuit switched (CS) registration only to receive SMS service via a CS domain; and sending, from the CN control node, an accept message to the UE indicating that SMS over a non-access stratum (NAS) is supported by the SGSN. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265939 | Network Element and Method of Communication in a Wireless Communication Network - A network element for a communication network, wherein the network element includes an input interface adapted to receive a measurement report associated with a further network element, wherein the measurement report includes an identifier value identifying the further network element and a first value of a characteristic feature, and a comparing unit adapted to compare the first value with a second value of the same characteristic feature stored for said identifier value in the network element. Furthermore, the network element includes a signal generating unit adapted to generate a signal in case the comparison of the first value and the second value indicates that an appropriately defined distance between the first value and the second value is above a predetermined threshold. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265940 | Method, Gateway, Proxy and System for Implementing Mobile Internet Services - A method, gateway, proxy and system for implementing mobile Internet services are provided, in which an AOG receives a first register request from a terminal application proxy, and establishes a first data link with the terminal application proxy according to the first register request; receives a second register request from at least one application server and establishes a second data link with the at least one application server according to the second register request; performs application data forwarding between at least one application client in a terminal and the at least one application server through the terminal application proxy, the first and second data links. Arrangement of an AOI system between a terminal application proxy and an AOG converges a large number of data links in the present mobile Internet, lowers the network load, reduces network resource consuming of mobile Internet applications and improves the utilization performance of mobile Internet. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265941 | PREVENTING ROAMING USER TERMINAL RE-AUTHENICATION - A method and device for preventing a roaming user terminal from re-authentication are provided. The method includes: when Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) of a roaming user terminal changes, change information of the roaming user terminal is reported to a Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS) via an Access Controller (AC) and the BRAS reports modified information of the roaming user terminal to an Authentication, Authorization, Accounting server (AAA server). | 10-10-2013 |
20130265942 | Method for Obtaining Parameters, Base Station and Terminal Equipment - A method for obtaining parameters, base station and terminal equipment. The method includes: receiving by a terminal equipment a request message sent by a base station reporting related parameters of a random access procedure occurred in at least one carrier, the request message including carrier identification information; and sending the related parameters of a random access procedure occurred in the at least one carrier by the terminal equipment to the base station according to the request message, such that corresponding random access optimization is performed by a network side by using the related parameters. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265943 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADVERTISING THE SAME SERVICE SET IDENTIFIER FOR DIFFERENT BASIC SERVICE SETS - According to one embodiment of the invention, a method comprises advertising services. The services are provided by different basic service sets, each basic service set having the same service set identifier (SSID). Thereafter, one of the basic service sets is selected. | 10-10-2013 |
20130272192 | Apparatuses and Methods for Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) Buffering Optimization - A wireless communications device is provided with a first cache unit coupled to a memory unit, a wireless communications module, and a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) combine component coupled to the first cache unit. The wireless communications module receives from a cellular network a wireless signal carrying first data corresponding to an HARQ process. The HARQ combine component reads second data corresponding to the HARQ process from the memory unit into the first cache unit, and combines the first data and the second data for an HARQ combining procedure. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272193 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLEXING APPLICATION IDENTIFIERS FOR PEER-TO-PEER DISCOVERY SYSTEMS - A method, a computer program product, and an apparatus are provided. The apparatus may be equipped to obtain one or more application identifiers from one or more applications on a wireless device, generate a super identifier (SID) having elements corresponding to the one or more applications and a base that identifies one or more common properties of the one or more applications, and broadcast the SID during one or more peer discovery slots allocated for the wireless device. In another example, a UE may be equipped to receive the SID broadcast by another UE, determine a match between at least one of the one or more common properties in the base, and determine whether an element associated with one or more applications is present in the SID. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272194 | HANDOVER OF CALLS BETWEEN ACCESS NETWORKS - A method is provided of performing a session transfer with Single Radio Voice Call Continuity, SRVCC, from a Packet Switched, PS, access to a Circuit Switched, CS, access of a telecommunications session that has been established over the PS access via an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, network. A request for the transfer of the session is received. An indication of a voice codec that is currently being used for the session is obtained from the IMS network. Allocation of resources for the session in the CS access network is initiated, including specifying the voice codec to be used based on the obtained codec indication. Transfer of the session to the CS access is initiated so that the session continues with use of the specified voice codec. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272195 | SYSTEME DE COMMUNICATION ENTRE UN EQUIPMENT NON CONNECTE ET UN SERVEUR DE GESTION - The present invention concerns the field of communication between a server and target devices not connected to a communications network. The context of use is typically the management of a fleet of devices by an operator. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272196 | INTERFERENCE NOTIFICATION IN DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Systems and techniques for wireless device-to-device (D2D) communication are provided herein. A D2D group identifier may be included in wireless transmissions within D2D groups. D2D interference mitigation processes may be initiated when a D2D group identifier is detected by a wireless device outside the D2D group. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272197 | Technique for Introducing a Real-Time Congestion Status in a Policy Decision for a Cellular Network - A technique for introducing a real-time congestion status in a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) policy decision in a cellular network is presented. A method embodiment performed by the PCRF comprises the steps of obtaining, from one of a Policy Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF) and a database, at least one cell identifier; sending, to a Performance Manager network element, a request for checking congestion status, the request comprising the at least one cell identifier; receiving, from the Performance Manager network element, a retrieved congestion status for the at least one cell identifier; generating at least one of a QoS Class Identifier and a QoS Profile based on the at least one cell identifier and the received congestion status; and sending, to the PCEF, a message comprising the at least one of the Class Identifier and QoS Profile. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272198 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR ORTHOGONAL TRAINING SEQUENCES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Logic may implement an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) system operating in the one gigahertz and lower frequency bands. Logic may detect new long training sequences that are differentially orthogonal to each other for a first bandwidth mode of operation such as a one megahertz mode as well as differentially orthogonal to half of the long training sequence for a second bandwidth mode of operation such as a two megahertz or greater mode. Logic may implement two or more long training sequences for the first bandwidth mode of operation to transmit information based upon the selection of the particular long training sequence for the transmission. Logic may implement a new acknowledgement packet comprising a short training sequence and a long training sequence without a signal field and without a payload. And logic may implement bandwidth detection logic to classify a transmission based upon orthogonal properties of the long training sequences. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272199 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING DATA PACKETS IN A CLOUD CELL - The present disclosure provides a method and apparatus for communicating data packets in a cloud cell. In one embodiment, a network node from which data packets are received is identified by the BS. If the data packets are received from a data gateway, a network node to which the data packets to be sent is identified. If the data packets are to be sent to a slave BS, partial processing, is performed on the data packets by the master BS. Furthermore, partially processed data packets are transmitted to the slave BS so that the slave BS performs complete processing on the partially processed data packets and transmits the completely processed data packets to the MS. If the data packets are to be sent to the MS, then complete processing of the data packets is performed by the BS and transmitted to the MS. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272200 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A wireless network system includes a plurality of devices operating on the basis of incompatible and different standards. At least one of the devices comprises a standard identifying module configured to identify standards on the basis of parameters inherent and different in the respective standards. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272201 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS THEREOF - To provide a stable high speed wireless network, the relay process is solved at the lower layers (PHY layer, MAC layer) without depending on upper layers to reduce the load of the upper layers to the utmost. Discrimination is made between a packet of one's own station and a relay packet to process the presence and absence of the relay packet without using a CPU to construct a wireless network executing the relay processing at a high speed. Further, the retransmission is executed without using a CPU to provide a stable wireless network. In addition, the table for relay process (routing table) is constantly updated to add to the table the information of the packets of which processes are not executed to eventually suppress unnecessary processes. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272202 | DAISY-CHAINED RING OF REMOTE UNITS FOR A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - The present disclosure is a novel utility of a software defined radio (SDR) based Distributed Antenna System (DAS) that is field reconfigurable and support multi-modulation schemes (modulation-independent), multi-carriers, multi-frequency bands and multi-channels. More specifically, the present invention relates to a DAS utilizing one or more Daisy-Chained Rings of Remote Units. The present invention enables a high degree of flexibility to manage, control, enhance, facilitate the usage and performance of a distributed wireless network such as Flexible Simulcast, automatic traffic load-balancing, network and radio resource optimization, network calibration, autonomous/assisted commissioning, carrier pooling, automatic frequency selection, frequency carrier placement, traffic monitoring, traffic tagging, pilot beacon, etc. As a result, a DAS in accordance with the present invention can increase the efficiency and traffic capacity of the operators' wireless network. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272203 | METHOD FOR SENDING STATUS INFORMATION IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND RECEIVER OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS - Discussed is a method of sending status information (STATUS PDU) in which a receiving side reports a data received state to a transmitting side in a mobile telecommunication system. A receiving side RLC entity considers an available radio resource to construct a status PDU fit to the size of the radio resource and then sends the constructed status PDU to a transmitting side RLC entity, thereby avoiding a deadlock situation of RLC protocols. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272204 | COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER - A controller, implemented as a virtual machine, for operating in a communication network, the controller being configured to format data to be transmitted over the network into a series of frames, transfer the formatted data to a radio for transmission over the network, and control the radio to communicate the series of frames at a frame rate that is sufficiently low for there to be a delay of at least one second between data being received over the network by the radio and the controller having to control the radio to transmit a response to that data. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272205 | COMMUNICATION DELAY TIME DERIVATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION DELAY TIME DERIVATION PROGRAM - There is provided a communication delay time derivation method for calculating a communication delay time depending on a combination of channels set between communication terminals on a communication path in the MCH/IF environment. When selecting a channel to be used for communication in each section on the communication path per section between communication terminals on the communication path, a calculation target section specification means | 10-17-2013 |
20130272206 | TERMINAL AND BASE STATION, METHOD THEREOF IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and a method for transmitting the channel state information for Base Stations included in a Coordinated Multi-Point (COMP) set in a terminal when a wireless communication system uses a CoMP scheme. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272207 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting, by a UE, “Attach Request” for E-UTRAN; transmitting, by an MME, “Attach Reject” in which “# | 10-17-2013 |
20130272208 | SCALABLE WIRELESS MULTICELL VOIP ARCHITECTURE - Wireless base station device for handling wireless communication, e.g. DECT, between a plurality of associated wireless terminals and an IP network. The base station device has a radio transceiver, a network interface, and a processor with communication application and a communication session management software. The communication session management is arranged to control a communication session with an associated wireless terminal (upper layer management), while wireless communication with said associated wireless terminal involved with said communication session (lower layer) is handled by another base station device. Thus, the base station can manage separate operation of its upper and lower layer, thereby enabling e.g. hand-over of a session to and from other base stations. This allows self contained single casing base station devices to operate in a network without the need for at central server, and still such network is easy to extend by adding base stations. | 10-17-2013 |
20130279401 | ROAMING CONTROL FOR IMS APN - The embodiments herein relate to a method in a second node ( | 10-24-2013 |
20130279402 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR IPV6 ADDRESS ACQUISITION - A mobile communication device operating as a Mobile Terminal (MT) with multiple processor logics is provided. In the mobile communication device, a first processor logic is configured for sending an Activate PDP (Packet Data Protocol) Context Request message to a service network, a second processor logic is configured for receiving an Activate PDP Context Accept message indicating a PDP address from the service network, and a third processor logic is configured for indicating an interface identifier and a prefix obtained from the PDP address to a Terminal Equipment (TE), so that the TE constructs an IPv6 address based on the prefix and interface identifier. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279403 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Overhead related to precoding (beamforming weight) information to be notified over a backhaul may be reduced while maintaining an ICI reduction effect by coordinated CoMP among a plurality of nodes. A communication apparatus of the invention includes a reception unit that receives precoding information from user equipment, a selection unit that variably controls an amount of the precoding information, which is to be notified to another communication apparatus via a backhaul, in response to positions of frequency resources, and a transmission unit that transmits the precoding information to the other communication apparatus in accordance with the amount of the precoding information controlled by the selection unit. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279404 | CHUNK-BASED DOUBLE-DWELL PREAMBLE DETECTION - In one embodiment, the invention is a method for performing preamble detection in a wireless communication network. The method performs a first dwell, wherein non-overlapping chunks of received data are processed to generate partial correlation values for each possible combination of a signature code and delay. Candidate selection is performed by comparing each of the partial correlation values to a candidate-selection threshold. For each detected candidate, the chunks of received data are processed to generate full correlation values. Each full correlation value is then compared to a preamble-detection threshold to detect a transmitted signature. Generating full correlation values for only the selected candidates reduces the computation complexity over prior-art methods that generate full correlation values for all signatures at all delays. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279405 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOW OVERHEAD PAGING - Systems, methods, and devices for low overhead paging in a wireless communications network are described herein. In one aspect, a wireless communications device comprises a processor and a transmitter. The processor is configured to compress a bitmap of a paging message to obtain a compressed paging message. The bitmap is associated with a plurality of receiver identifiers, and each of the plurality of receiver identifiers associated with at least one receiver of a set of receivers. The compressed bitmap comprises a block bitmap and a plurality of sub-block bitmaps. Each bit of the block bitmap comprises a logical OR of a subset of the bitmap, and each sub-block bitmap corresponds to a bit of the block bitmap. The transmitter is electronically coupled with the processor and configured to transmit the compressed paging message to at least one receiver. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279406 | POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL METHODS - An IMS registration and session initiation is disclosed for a user equipment (UE). The UE has a subscription identifier comprising an IMSI and/or MSISDN. A PDN-GW establishes (s | 10-24-2013 |
20130279407 | Radio Network Controller With IP Mapping Table - Devices, systems, and methods are disclosed for routing data to mobile devices that undergo handovers from one access point to another. In one embodiment, a processor performs operations including receiving a network location of a mobile device from a network agent in communication with the mobile device, updating a mapping table with the network location of the mobile device, receiving a request to transfer a data packet to the mobile device, routing the data packet to the mobile device according to the mapping table, and forwarding the network location to a source of the data packet. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279408 | QUALITY OF SERVICE BASED RESOURCE DETERMINATION AND ALLOCATION APPARATUS AND PROCEDURE IN HIGH SPEED PACKET ACCESS EVOLUTION AND LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEMS - A wireless transmit receive unit and method disclose processing communication data in a hierarchy of processing layers including a physical (PHY) layer, a medium access control (MAC) layer, and higher layers. A MAC layer transport format selection device (TFSD) assigns higher layer transmission data to parallel data streams based on data characteristics received from higher layers and physical resource information received from the PHY layer. The TFSD generates transport format parameters for each data stream. A multiplexer component multiplexes transmission data onto parallel data streams in transport blocks according to data stream assignment and transport format parameters generated by the TFSD and outputs the selectively multiplexed transmission data to the PHY layer for transmission over physical resource partitions. The TFSD generates physical transmission attributes such as modulation and coding rate, number of subframes per transmission time interval (TTI), duration of TTI, transmission power, and hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) parameters. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279409 | Establishing a Mesh Network - Establishing a mesh network. A gateway in the mesh network may broadcast a wireless message to neighboring nodes of the gateway in the mesh network. The neighboring nodes may store first hop count information based on the wireless message received from the gateway. The neighboring nodes may each broadcast the wireless message to other neighboring nodes in the wireless mesh network. The other neighboring nodes may store second hop count information based on the received messages from the respective neighboring nodes. The second hop count information may indicate a greater hop count than the first hop count information. The first hop count information and the second hop count information may be used to establish routes from nodes to gateways in subsequent communications in the mesh network. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279410 | Communicating Data in a Mesh Network - Establishing a mesh network. A gateway in the mesh network may broadcast a wireless message to neighboring nodes of the gateway in the mesh network. The neighboring nodes may store first hop count information based on the wireless message received from the gateway. The neighboring nodes may each broadcast the wireless message to other neighboring nodes in the wireless mesh network. The other neighboring nodes may store second hop count information based on the received messages from the respective neighboring nodes. The second hop count information may indicate a greater hop count than the first hop count information. The first hop count information and the second hop count information may be used to establish routes from nodes to gateways in subsequent communications in the mesh network. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279411 | METHOD FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY - Configurations are described for maintaining a continuity and quality of wireless signal connection between a mobile device and systems accessible through the internet. In particular, configurations are disclosed to address the challenge of a mobile device that moves through a physical environment wherein the best wireless connectivity performance is achieved by switching between available connection sources and constantly evaluating a primary connection with other available connections that may be switched in to become a new primary connection. The mobile device may be self-propelled or carried by some other mobilizing means. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279412 | INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENT IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - In a heterogeneous network based on LTE, the random access, RA, procedure triggered in a macrocell produces transmissions from a UE ( | 10-24-2013 |
20130279413 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL FOR AN ALARM SYSTEM - An interface module in the form of a communication terminal for coupling to an alarm system that allows routing both analog and digital communications between the alarm system and a remote recipient through a digital network selected by the terminal and therefore independently from the alarm system. Embodiments of the communication terminal include an analog phone line emulator connectable to the alarm system, at least one digital network coupler such as a cellular module and an Ethernet port, and a controller coupled to both the at least one digital network coupler and to the analog phone line emulator for allowing communications therebetween. The terminal allows communicating alarm messages from the alarm system to an alarm central via the selected digital network and also allow VoIP communications to make phone calls and remote configuration of the alarm system, terminal or other devices connected thereto. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279414 | Method and Apparatus for Enabling DNS Redirection in Mobile Telecommunication Systems - Method and radio network controller of a mobile telecommunication network for providing DNS redirection in a mobile telecommunication network. The radio network controller includes an interface configured to receive a DNS query from a mobile terminal and a domain name system, DNS, interceptor module. The DNS interceptor module is configured to intercept the DNS query from the mobile terminal, detect the indication of the content originator server or the content delivery provider, check the indication against a list of domain names handled by the radio network controller, and generate a DNS reply in response to the DNS query, the DNS reply including an IP address of a content server associated with the radio network controller and not including an IP address of the content delivery provider. The interface is configured to send the DNS reply to the mobile terminal. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279415 | Method For Transmitting Streaming Media Content To Wireless Subscriber Stations Using Packet Header Suppression - A radio access system receives packets from a local source of streaming media content via a local connection and from remote packet sources via a remote network. The radio access system communicates with a subscriber station via an air interface that includes an uplink and a downlink. A packet classifier in the radio access system maps packets having the subscriber station's IP address as destination address to the subscriber station's downlink. The subscriber station communicates with a content controller via the remote network to request selected streaming media content. The content controller instructs the radio access system to convey the selected streaming media content from the local source to the subscriber station. In response, the packet classifier maps the packets containing the selected streaming media content to a downlink (either the original downlink or a new one) for transmission to the subscriber station. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279416 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST (ARQ) FEEDBACK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for Automatic Repeat reQuest (ARQ) feedback in a wireless communication system are provided. A method for the ARQ feedback at a receiving end includes when receiving an ARQ block from the transmitting end, checking for error in the ARQ block, when the ARQ block has no error, initializing and driving a timer used for determining whether to perform the ARQ feedback according to reception of a next ARQ block, when receiving the next ARQ block without error before the timer expires, initializing and driving the timer, and when the timer expires, performing the ARQ feedback in relation to at least one ARQ block received without error. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279417 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FREQUENCY SHIFTING OF A WIRELESS SIGNAL AND SYSTEMS USING FREQUENCY SHIFTING - A wireless signal in a frequency band is shifted to another distinct band, and carried in the shifted band to another location, wherein the wireless signal is shifted back to the original frequency band. The frequency shifting can employ conventional frequency shifting schemes such as mixer/filter and heterodyne. In one embodiment the wireless signal is frequency shifted by converting it to other representing signals (such as I/Q components) and forming the frequency-shifted signal from the representations. The system is may be used to increase in-door or outdoor coverage, as well as bridging between in-door and outdoor networks. The medium may use dedicated wiring or existing service wiring in a residence or building, including LAN, telephone, AC power and CATV wiring. The system can be enclosed as a stand-alone unit, housed in integrated form as part of a service outlet or as a snap-on/plug-in module. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279418 | Providing Easy Access to Radio Networks - An improved connectivity to radio access point is enabled by a server that includes a database storing data about various radio access points, and an evaluation module evaluating the quality of connection to each of the access points. Clients receive updates about relevant access points from the server and use the information to connect to the preferred access point. The clients also check connectivity to other access points in the vicinity, and report the findings to the server. The server uses the reports to update its database, and send corresponding updates to the clients. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279419 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND TRANSMITTING METHOD - The present invention provides a base station device capable of improving the throughput of a whole network by minimizing interference between respective base stations. In a communication system including a plurality of base stations, which transmit a signal by using any of a plurality of different ABS patterns which are sub frame ABS patterns represented by the combination of a transmission sub frame for transmitting a signal and a non-transmission sub frame for suspending the transmission of the signal, a determining unit ( | 10-24-2013 |
20130279420 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE MANAGEMENT NODE, AND SERVING GATEWAY APPARATUS - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: starting, by a UE, re-attach processing for MME# | 10-24-2013 |
20130279421 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE MANAGEMENT NODE, AND SERVING GATEWAY APPARATUS - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: starting, by a UE, re-attach processing for MME# | 10-24-2013 |
20130279422 | INTERFERENCE ALIGNMENT METHOD AND DEVICE IN CELLULAR NETWORK - According to one aspect of the present invention, the present invention provides a method for allowing a base station, which receives signals from one or more terminals, to align receiving signals and interference signals in a wireless access system. Said method comprises the steps of: receiving the receiving signals and the interference signals, wherein said receiving signals are signals which are received from terminals that belong to a serving cell of said base station, and said interference signals are signals which are received from terminals that belong to neighbor cells of said base station; dividing a signal space for receiving said receiving signals and said interference signals into one or more signal spaces of size N; and arranging K receiving signals of said receiving signals in each of said divided signal spaces, wherein said K receiving signals arranged in each of said divided signal spaces are orthogonal to each other. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279423 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE WITHIN DEVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present specification discloses the following steps: detecting a transmission from a first frequency band in a first network system causing interference on a reception in a second frequency band in a second network system; transmitting to a base station support information for supporting control of the interference that is detected; and receiving from the base station reply information for accepting or denying control of the interference that is detected, as a reply to the support information. The coexistence interference within the device can be detected, the resolving process thereof can be simplified and achievable, and reverse compatibility with other existing processes can be maintained. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279424 | METHOD FOR A TERMINAL TO TRANSMIT CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION TO A BASE STATION IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR SAME - A method for a terminal to allocate a resource for transmitting uplink control information to a serving base station (BS) in a radio communication system includes when a report of at least one periodic RI and a report of at least one aperiodic RI occur in the same subframe, mapping the at least one periodic RI and the at least one aperiodic RI into a physical uplink shared channel of the subframe and transmitting the mapped at least one periodic RI and at least one aperiodic RI to the serving BS. The at least one aperiodic RI may correspond to at least one component carrier wave in each of the serving BS and an adjacent BS for CoMP transmission of the serving BS and the adjacent BS, and the at least one periodic RI may correspond to at least one component carrier wave for non-CoMP transmission in the serving BS. | 10-24-2013 |
20130286935 | METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING SPECIFIC TERMINATION CAUSE CODES IN TERMINATION REQUESTS - A method includes a wireless mobile device communicating with a wireless network via an evolved high rate packet data (eHRPD) interface. The wireless mobile device may receive a vendor specific network control protocol (VSNCP) packet such as a terminate-request packet, for example, that indicates the wireless network has requested a PDN disconnection. The VSNCP packet includes a cause code that indicates a reason for the PDN disconnection request. The wireless device may use the cause code to determine the reason for the PDN disconnection request. Accordingly, in response to receiving the VSNCP packet, the wireless mobile device may perform one or more operations in an effort to resolve any issues that may have caused the PDN disconnection request. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286936 | EXTENSION OF LOCATION STATUS EVENT - A processor in a mobile wireless device communicates detailed state information about attachments to a user identity module card embedded in the mobile wireless device. The processor detects a change in an attach state of the mobile wireless device for at least one of a plurality of attachment types. The processor determines the attach state of the mobile wireless device for each of the plurality of attachment types and sends a status message to the user identity module card indicating the determined attach states. The plurality of attachment types can include at least a circuit switched attachment and a packet switched attachment. The processor can wait until completion of circuit switched and packet switched attachments of the mobile wireless device to the wireless network prior to sending the status message. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286937 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCANNING MULTIPLE CHANNELS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A client station including a transceiver module, a scanning module, and an association module. The transceiver module is configured to transmit and receive data via a frequency band, where the frequency band includes a plurality of channels. The scanning module is configured to simultaneously scan multiple channels of the frequency band at the same time instead of scanning the plurality of channels of the frequency band one channel at a time, and to determine whether one or more access points are available for association in one or more of the multiple channels. The association module is configured to, in response to the scanning module determining that one or more access points are available for association, determine whether to associate with one of the one or more access points determined to be available for association. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286938 | Frame formatting for communications within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Frame formatting for communications within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. A signal is processed within a communication device using at least two respective downclocking ratios (e.g., a first downclocking ratio applied to a first portion of the signal such as a frame or packet extracted there from, a second downclocking ratio applied to a second portion of the signal). Alternatively, a signal is divided into more than two respective portions, and different respective downclocking ratios are applied to those different respective portions (e.g., a first downclocking ratio applied to a first portion of the signal, and so on up to an n-th downclocking ratio applied to an n-th portion of the signal). Some implementations apply a singular or common downclocking ratio to more than one portion of the signal (which may be contiguous/adjacent or non-contiguous/non-adjacent within the signal). | 10-31-2013 |
20130286939 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR MANAGING PACKET TRANSMISSION - In a method for managing packet transmission using an electronic device, a refreshed application sends refreshed packets to a wireless base station is determined when the electronic device is in a connected state with the wireless base station. When the electronic device receives a disconnection signal, the method determined whether the disconnection signal is a result of a disconnection operation performed by a user on the electronic device. When the disconnection signal is not the result of the disconnection operation, the method further controls the electronic device to attempt to reconnect to the wireless base station and not to send any disconnection information to the refreshed application within a predetermined time period, when the electronic device does not receive any communication signal. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286940 | BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE BASE STATION DEVICE AND THE TERMINAL DEVICE - A wireless communication system in which a base station apparatus having a plurality of transmission antennas and one or more terminal apparatuses communicate with each other is provided with at least two methods of a first feedback method and a second feedback method regarding propagation path information at the time of reception. In accordance with a communication condition between the base station apparatus and the terminal apparatus, or the function of the terminal apparatus, the terminal apparatus performs feedback by one of the two methods of the first feedback method and the second feedback method. The base station apparatus performs spatial multiplexing transmission on the basis of the propagation path information that has been fed back. Thus, in a system in which CSI is fed back for MIMO transmission, desired transmission characteristics can be efficiently obtained. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286941 | SYSTEM, DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SIMULTANEOUS DATA TRANSMISSION SERVICE BASED ON HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Disclosed are a heterogeneous network based-simultaneous data transmission service system and method which include a transmission device for dividing data into two or more partial data, selecting first partial data corresponding to a part of the two or more partial data, and selecting second partial data corresponding to another part of the two or more partial data; a first network device for receiving the first partial data from the transmission device; a second network device for receiving the second partial data from the transmission device; and a reception device for receiving the first partial data from the first network device, receiving the second partial data from the second network device, and reconstituting the data by combining the first partial data and the second partial data. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286942 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC AUTOMATIC COMMUNICATION PATH SELECTION, DISTRIBUTED DEVICE SYNCHRONIZATION AND TASK DELEGATION - Systems, software, and apparatuses that provide wired and wireless telecommunications under conditions where signal strength is poor or intermittent, the coordination and synchronization of data and workflows across various communication links under such conditions, especially intermittent or unreliable communications links, and the management of wireless mobile applications in such environments. The present invention technology herein relates to the fields of computer science, telecommunications, and data management. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286943 | MULTICARRIER PACKET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Messages transmitted between a receiver and a transmitter are used to maximize a communication data rate. In particular, a multicarrier modulation system uses messages that are sent from the receiver to the transmitter to exchange one or more sets of optimized communication parameters. The transmitter then stores these communication parameters and when transmitting to that particular receiver, the transmitter utilizes the stored parameters in an effort to maximize the data rate to that receiver. Likewise, when the receiver receives packets from that particular transmitter, the receiver can utilize the stored communication parameters for reception. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286944 | System and Method of Providing IMS Services to Users on Terminating Non IMS Devices - Disclosed is a device in an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) that provides IMS services to terminating non-IP (TNIP) devices. The method includes receiving a message to register a Public User Identity (PUID) at a TNIP device at a network-based device, the TNIP device being at an E.164 routing address, establishing, in a network device accepting communications where to send sessions destined for a PUID and providing information where to send sessions, the routing address as a final destination of sessions to the PUID based on the registration and an IP address of a network device with routing functionality based on telephone numbers as immediate destinations and using information from the registration to route to the TNIP device, after providing IMS services, using the relationship between the PUID, the routing address and the IP address of the network device with routing functionality based on telephone numbers. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286945 | MOBILE ROUTER DEVICE - A wireless mobile router ( | 10-31-2013 |
20130286946 | ACCESS NETWORK DISCOVERY AND SELECTION IN A MULTI-ACCESS TECHNOLOGY CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication unit ( | 10-31-2013 |
20130286947 | Enterprise Collection Bus - Systems and methods are presented to collect raw data from a plurality of servers and nodes on a network. A Distributed Enterprise Collection Bus (DECB) architecture is employed at various points on a network. The DECB comprises a collector unit that is protocol agnostic, an orchestration unit, a rule database, a filtering unit, and a distribution unit. Packets of raw data such as Call Detail Records (CDRs) generated by switching centers are received, and distributed to relevant destinations. Relevant destinations include data warehouses, mediation, analytics, etc. The goal is to alleviate collection and filtration duties of the source and destination. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286948 | UPLINK POWER CONTROL METHOD, POWER CONTROL PARAMETER CONFIGURATION METHOD AND APPARATUS THEREOF - Disclosed are an uplink power control method, power control parameter configuration method and apparatus thereof. The uplink power control method comprises: a user equipment receives data in M downlink sub-frames of N downlink carriers and generates uplink control information, wherein the uplink control information of the M downlink sub-frames is transmitted in one uplink sub-frame; the user equipment determines ΔF_PUCCH(F) and h(n) for calculating the transmit power of a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) according to whether the number of bits of the uplink control information is larger than a predefined threshold; ΔF_PUCCH(F) represents the power offset of different PUCCH formats relative to the PUCCH format 1a, h(n) represents the power offset corresponding to the number of transmission bits of the PUCCH; the user equipment calculates the PUCCH transmit power according to ΔF_PUCCH(F) and h(n), and sending the uplink control information on the PUCCH using the calculated transmit power. The present is invention can improve the accuracy of power control, thus enhance the transmission performance of the uplink control information. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286949 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system includes a base station apparatus having a plurality of antennas and a plurality of mobile station apparatuses each having, at least, one antenna. The base station apparatus acquires channel state information of the plurality of mobile station apparatuses, based on any one of a plurality of different channel state information formats, and, separately precodes data signals addressed to the plurality of mobile station apparatuses based on the channel state information, and spatially multiplexes and transmits the precoded signals. The mobile station apparatus receives the precoded signals and detects a desired data signal from the multiplexed signals addressed to mobile station apparatuses, based on the channel state information. With this scheme, it is possible to realize a new spatial multiplexing technology that enables a plurality of mobile station apparatuses using different CSI feedback schemes to be spatially multiplexed on the same wireless resource in the downlink MU-MIMO transmission. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286950 | Method and Mobile Terminal for Dealing with PS Domain Service and Realizing PS Domain Service Request - The present invention provides a method for dealing with a PS domain service and realizing a PS domain service request for a mobile terminal and the mobile terminal. The method comprises: identifying, by the mobile terminal, a type of a PS domain signaling process that is used for realizing a PS domain service; when the type of the PS domain signaling process belongs to a first type, acquiring a result of the PS domain signaling process corresponding to the PS domain signaling process; and when it is judged that the result is network refusal and the reason for refusal is Reason #7 (GPRS service not allowed), judging that a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) on which the mobile terminal currently resides is not a Home Public Land Mobile Network (HPLMN) and adding the PLMN into a list of forbidden PLMNs for GPRS service. According to the above technical solution, it is able to provide a GPRS service on a HPLMN or other PLMNs, thereby to provide a user with a PS domain service with the biggest possibility. | 10-31-2013 |
20130294333 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REDUCED OVERHEAD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methods are disclosed which implement one or more overhead reduction technique, if channel conditions favorable to implementation of overhead reduction are present. The one or more overhead reduction technique may have one or more restriction corresponding to the channel for which the overhead reduction technique is implemented. The one or more overhead reduction technique implemented may include time-domain bundling, frequency-domain bundling, and pattern adaptation. Pattern adaptation may include pattern code-domain reduction, pattern timing-domain reduction, and pattern frequency-domain reduction. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294334 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION POWER OF A MOBILE STATION - A base station holds an accumulated value of a transmission-power control command that is transmitted to a mobile station so as to perform closed-loop control of transmission power of the mobile station. The base station detects a discrepancy between an accumulated value held by the base station and an accumulated value of the transmission-power control command held by the mobile station. The base station sets the accumulated value held by the base station and the accumulated value held by the mobile station at the same value when the discrepancy is detected. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294335 | METHODS AND APPARATUS - There is provided a method comprising providing for an application, application offload configuration information, said application offload configuration information comprising offload information for the deployment of said application in an offload environment. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294336 | Systems and Methods for Reestablishing a Call in a Telecommunications Network - A call server includes a network interface for connecting the call server to a packet-based network within a telecommunications network. The call server establishes a first connection with a calling party terminal and a second connection with a called party terminal via the packet-based network. The call server then joins the first connection with the second connection to establish communication between the calling party terminal and the called party terminal. The call server may park the second connection when the first connection is terminated or vice-versa and establish a new connection with the calling party terminal via the packet-based network if the first connection was terminated or vice versa. The call server may join the new connection with the first or second connection to reestablish communication between the calling party terminal and the called party terminal. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294337 | Buffer Status Report Triggers in Wireless Communications - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate utilizing timers in conjunction with transmitting buffer status reports (BSR). A prohibit timer can be utilized to determine when BSRs can be transmitted to an eNB. The prohibit timer can be initialized or restarted upon transmitting a BSR to an eNB. A BSR retransmit timer can be used to determine when to retransmit a BSR. The BSR retransmit timer can be initialized upon transmitting a BSR to an eNB and restarted each time an uplink resource allocation is received from the eNB. Once the timer expires, if an uplink transmission buffer contains data (e.g., size>0), the BSR can be retransmitted to the eNB. Control data feedback can additionally be used to determine when to retransmit the BSR. In addition, in either case, the timer duration values can be provided by the eNB. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294338 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INTERFERENCE COORDINATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION - A method and device for interference coordination in a communication system and the corresponding communication system, mobile station and base station (BS) are disclosed. In the method for interference coordination, a BS of a Pico Cell shifts a transmission frame backwards; a BS of a Macro Cell selects a sub-frame for transmitting a Channel State Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS) from transmission frames of the Macro Cell itself, to enable the sub-frame of the BS of Macro Cell for transmitting CSI-RS to at least not overlap a sub-frame of the BS of the Macro Cell for transmitting a public channel and a sub-frame of the BS of Pico Cell partially; and the sub-frame of the BS of the Macro cell for transmitting the public channel at least does not overlap the sub-frame of the BS of Pico Cell for transmitting the public channel partially. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294339 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING REGISTRATION BACKUP DATA - A Serving Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) receives a registration request message carrying an IMS Private User Identity (IMPI) and IMS Public User Identity (IMPU) pair. The S-CSCF determines: a lack of registration data corresponding to the IMPI and IMPU pair; and that the registration request message includes a reg-id parameter indicating that the registration request message relates to a multi-registration. The S-CSCF sends a Server Assignment Request (SAR) message to a Home Subscriber Server (HSS). The SAR message carries the IMPI and IMPU pair, a parameter for identifying that the SAR message relates to an initial registration of a user, and a multiple registration indication which indicates that the SAR message relates to a multi-registration associated with the IMPI and IMPU pair. The S-CSCF receives a Server Assignment Answer (SAA) message carrying registration backup data corresponding to the IMPI and IMPU pair from the HSS. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294340 | CONTEXT BASED DATA MEDIATION - A communication environment includes of one or more subscriber terminals capable of receiving and transmitting data over a communication network via a communication management system. The communication management system receives mobile communication device context information and mobile communication device identification information from the mobile communication device. The communication management system then identifies data availability profiles reflective of a prior determination of mobile communication device availability to receive data communications according to context. The communication management system then implements data filtering rules corresponding to a current data availability profile. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294341 | Macro-Network Location Determination, Local-Oscillator Stabilization, and Frame-Start Synchronization Based on Nearby FM Radio Signlas - Exemplary methods and systems may generally be implemented to allow a macro-network base station without access to a GPS reference signal to provide some or all of the functionality for which existing macro-network base stations typically rely on GPS. In a first aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may determine its location using a location-determination technique that is based upon the angles of arrival of FM radio signals from nearby FM stations. In a second aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may stabilize its local oscillator by phase-locking its local oscillator to an FM radio signal, and periodically adjusting its local oscillator to account for phase drift of the FM radio signal. And in a third aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may synchronize its frame-start timing with a nearby base station using a frame-start timing signal that the base station has synchronized to frame transmissions from the nearby base station during a setup routine. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294342 | Macro-Network Location Determination, Local-Oscillator Stabilization, and Frame-Start Synchronization Based on Nearby FM Radio Signlas - Exemplary methods and systems may generally be implemented to allow a macro-network base station without access to a GPS reference signal to provide some or all of the functionality for which existing macro-network base stations typically rely on GPS. In a first aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may determine its location using a location-determination technique that is based upon the angles of arrival of FM radio signals from nearby FM stations. In a second aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may stabilize its local oscillator by phase-locking its local oscillator to an FM radio signal, and periodically adjusting its local oscillator to account for phase drift of the FM radio signal. And in a third aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may synchronize its frame-start timing with a nearby base station using a frame-start timing signal that the base station has synchronized to frame transmissions from the nearby base station during a setup routine. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294343 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIAL ACQUISITION AND CELL SEARCH FOR AN OFDMA SYSTEM - A method and apparatus is provided for transmitting an orthogonal frequency domain multiple access (OFDMA) signal including a synchronization channel signal transmitted within a localized portion of a bandwidth of the OFDMA signal, the synchronization channel signal having predetermined time domain symmetry within the localized portion of the bandwidth and including information for providing at least partial cell identification information. The synchronization channel signal enables an initial acquisition and cell search method with low computational load which provides OFDMA symbol timing detection and frequency error detection and frame boundary detection and cell specific information detection in an OFDMA system supporting multiple system bandwidths, both synchronized and un-synchronized systems, a large cell index and an OFDMA symbol structure with both short and long cyclic prefix length. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294344 | METHOD, BASE STATION AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING RESOURCES - A method, a base station and a system for managing resources belong to the field of communication technologies. In an embodiment of the present invention, the base station decodes the uplink data or the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment according to the format of the periodic indication information comprised in the uplink data or the acknowledgement information, determines that the uplink data or the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment comprises the periodic indication information when the decoding is successful, and then validates the periodic resources corresponding to the periodic indication information comprised in the uplink data or the acknowledgement information. The technical solution of the present invention overcomes the problem in the prior art that data is erroneously retransmitted since the base station and the user equipment asynchronously validate the periodic resources corresponding to the periodic indication information, thereby reducing interruption time delay. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294345 | DATA RETRANSMISSION METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A data retransmission method for retransmitting a data using a wireless communication, including: receiving data transmitted from a transmitting apparatus; determining whether the received data is correct or not; transmitting data including information indicating that the received data is received correctly to the transmitting apparatus upon being determined the received data is correct, and transmitting data including information indicating that the received data is not received correctly to the transmitting apparatus upon being determined the received data is not correct; measuring an elapsed time from transmission of the data including information indicating that the received data is not received correctly; and monitoring whether to receive data corresponding to the received data from the transmitting apparatus before the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294346 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROCESSING DATA - A digital broadcast receiving system includes a known data detector, a carrier recovery unit, and a timing recovery unit. The known data detector may detect known data information inserted and transmitted from a digital broadcast transmitting system and using the known data information to estimate initial frequency offset. The carrier recovery unit may obtain initial synchronization by using the initial frequency offset, and may detect frequency offset from the received data by using the known sequence position indicator so as to perform carrier recovery. The timing recovery unit may detect timing error information from the received signal by using the known sequence position indicator so as to perform timing recovery. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294347 | SCALABLE HEADER EXTENSION - Systems and methods for extending header fields are disclosed. The header field may be extended without changing the current size of the header. Reserve bits may be used to indicate the use of an extended header and the extended header may be store in a variety of locations within the frame, including the frame payload or pad bits. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294348 | ENABLING IPV6 MOBILITY WITH NAT64 - A method for maintaining connectivity between a mobile node and a corresponding node when the mobile node connects to a foreign network, where the foreign network and the home network are Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) networks but the corresponding node is an Internet protocol version 4 (IPv4) node. The method includes receiving at the home agent node an IPv6 care-of address, determining that the IPv6 care-of address belongs to the foreign network and that the foreign NAT64 node has a prefix to generate virtual IPv6 addresses and sending a prefix binding request message to a home NAT64 node to bind the prefix to the home address of the mobile node for translation between IPv6 and IPv4. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294349 | Method, Apparatus and System for Sending Messages - The present invention discloses a method for sending messages, including: acquiring a destination region to which an outgoing message is to be sent; determining a first base station identifier corresponding to the destination region, and acquiring a first unique user identifier corresponding to the first base station identifier; and sending the outgoing message to a mobile terminal of a first user, where the first user is a user identified by the first unique user identifier. The present invention also discloses an apparatus for sending messages, including: a destination region acquiring module; a user identifier determining module; and an outgoing message sending module. According to the embodiments of the present invention, a first base station identifier corresponding to the destination region is determined, a first unique user identifier corresponding to the first base station identifier is acquired, and the outgoing message is sent to the a corresponding first user, such that a server is capable of acquiring information of actual geographical location of a mobile terminal user. This improves precision in sending messages to mobile terminal users according to regions, and enhances effects of information release. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294350 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STATISTICAL HANDLING OF CONNECTIONS - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method is described which comprises receiving data relating to at least one connection from a network ( | 11-07-2013 |
20130294351 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present description relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting channel state information in a wireless communication system. The method comprises the following steps: receiving, from a base station, information indicating a linkage between a cell set including a serving cell and a subset including a subframe; configuring channel state information for the subframe on the serving cell; receiving, from the base station, channel-state-information-request information indicating the cell set; and transmitting the channel state information to the base station. According to the present invention, channel state information, which varies as time elapses, may be accurately measured, and channel state information of the point in time desired by the base station may be provided. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294352 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION ON MULTI-CELL OPERATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. And, a method of transmitting and receiving channel status information on a multi-cell operation in a wireless communication system and apparatus for the same are disclosed. The present invention may include determining a report type of channel status information on multi-cell operation and transmitting/receiving the channel status information corresponding to the determined channel status information report type via uplink data channel. | 11-07-2013 |
20130301522 | INLINE NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION WITHIN A MOBILE GATEWAY ROUTER - Techniques are described for performing inline NAT functions in a forwarding element of a mobile gateway router or other device in which subscriber sessions of a mobile access network are distributed across a plurality of session management cards. The session management cards pre-allocate a public network address and port range for subscribers at the time a network connection is established in response to connection request prior to receiving any data traffic associated with the subscriber. NAT profiles are programmed into hardware forwarding elements of the mobile gateway router for inline NAT when routing subscriber traffic for the mobile access network. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301523 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR CONTROL FRAME AND MANAGEMENT FRAME COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating frames having a plurality of types are described herein. In some aspects, the frames include a compressed frame, such as a compressed management frame or a compressed control frame. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network includes generating a management frame including a local identifier or a global identifier for a transmitter of the management frame based on a link type over which the management frame is transmitted, a local identifier or a global identifier for a recipient of the management frame based on the link type, a frame check sequence, and information indicating the link type. The method further includes transmitting the management frame. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301524 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATIONS - The described aspects include methods and apparatus providing MTC in a wireless network. In an aspect, a narrow bandwidth within a wide system bandwidth is allocated for communicating data related to MTC. MTC control data generated for communicating over one or more MTC control channels for an MTC UE within the narrow bandwidth is transmitted over the one or more MTC control channels. The one or more MTC channels are multiplexed with one or more legacy channels over the wide system bandwidth. Other aspects are provided for transmission mode and content of the MTC control data or other MTC data. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301525 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATIONS - The described aspects include methods and apparatus providing MTC in a wireless network. In an aspect, a narrow bandwidth within a wide system bandwidth is allocated for communicating data related to MTC. MTC control data generated for communicating over one or more MTC control channels for an MTC UE within the narrow bandwidth is transmitted over the one or more MTC control channels. The one or more MTC channels are multiplexed with one or more legacy channels over the wide system bandwidth. Other aspects are provided for transmission mode and content of the MTC control data or other MTC data. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301526 | SIGNALING SCHEME FOR COORDINATED TRANSMISSIONS - A method of signal transmission in a wireless communications network is disclosed. The method includes identifying a particular transmission point to transmit to a mobile device in a particular transmission and determining whether the particular transmission point will operate at a power level equivalent to that of a serving cell of the mobile device. The method further includes transmitting to the mobile device an identification of the value of a cell-specific parameter associated with the cell of the particular transmission point, if the particular transmission point will not operate at a power level equivalent that of the serving cell. The method still further includes transmitting to the particular transmission point an identification of a value of the cell-specific parameter associated with the serving cell, if the particular transmission point will operate at a power level equivalent to a power level of the serving cell. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301527 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system according to the present invention, a node #A and a node #Z are configured such that, when a call is generated by a mobile station UE subordinate to the node #A, one of the preset SCTP streams is assigned to the mobile station UE in a round robin manner regardless of whether the call is an emergency call or a normal call. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301528 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - Provided is a mobile communication method including a step A of transmitting, by a mobile station UE, “Measurement Report” including measurement results of radio qualities of neighboring cells # | 11-14-2013 |
20130301529 | Methods and Systems of Advanced Real-time IP Communication in a Mobile Terminal - A method of making Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) calls, legacy circuit calls, sending/receiving Short Message Service (SMS) over Long Term Evolution (LTE) modem or a legacy modem on a mobile terminal with both kinds of modems, and providing all legacy modem functions is disclosed. In addition, methods for dynamic selection of radio in a mobile terminal capable of Rich Communications Services (RCS) capabilities, and a method for redirecting RCS traffic to an alternate network interface is also disclosed. Methods for Session Initiation Protocol module (SIP) stack functions to be distributed across different processors on a mobile terminal, and directed to different network interfaces is disclosed. Methods of adding video calling and RCS functions without encountering the dual registration problem are also disclosed. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301530 | BASE STATION DEVICE - Problems that may occur when the transmission power of a base station device is changed during communication between the base station device and a terminal device are prevented. A processing unit | 11-14-2013 |
20130301531 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATION OF SENDING REFERENCE SIGNALS FROM MULTIPLE CELLS - Methods and apparatus for coordination of sending reference signals in wireless network are disclosed. A network node may select a cell ID based on a measurement of adjacent cells so as to mitigate interference. A network node may communicate information to another network node to control transmitted resources in a protected interval so as to measure channel characteristics. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301532 | Resource Allocation in a Communication System - Methods and corresponding systems for determining a transmit power in a wireless device include receiving, in the wireless device, a cell-wide power control parameter related to a target receive power at a serving base station. Thereafter, a transmit power is calculated in response to the cell-wide power control parameter and an implicit mobile-specific power control parameter. The wireless device then transmits using the transmit power. The cell-wide power control parameter can be a cell target signal to interference-plus-noise ratio, or a fractional power control exponent. The implicit mobile-specific power control parameter can be a modulation and coding level previously used by the wireless device, or a downlink SINR level measured by the wireless device. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301533 | Resource Allocation in a Communication System - Methods and corresponding systems for determining a transmit power in a mobile device include receiving, in the mobile device, a cell-wide power control parameter related to a target receive power at a serving base station. Thereafter, a transmit power is calculated in response to the cell-wide power control parameter and an implicit mobile-specific power control parameter. The mobile device then transmits using the transmit power. The cell-wide power control parameter can be a cell target signal to interference-plus-noise ratio, or a fractional power control exponent. The implicit mobile-specific power control parameter can be a modulation and coding level previously used by the mobile device, or a downlink SINR level measured by the mobile device. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301534 | MIMO Based Network Coding Network - A wireless communication system includes an intermediate node, a first node and a second node. A apparatus for implementing MIMO based network coding, comprises the first node transmitting first data to the intermediate node, and the second node transmitting second data to the intermediate node. Both the first node and the second node may use spatial multiplexing or time division multiplexing or frequency division multiplexing on a common/different resource. The intermediate node receives the transmissions from the first node and second node, and performs network coding on the first data and second data using a predefined network coding scheme to produce network coded information. The intermediate node transmits the network coded information to the first node and second node using multi-user MIMO and each first or second node receives the MIMO transmissions from the intermediate node and applies network decoding procedures to recover the first data and second data. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301535 | Methods for Control Signaling for Wireless Systems - To effectively and efficiently provide control information, a broadcast pointer channel (BPCH) may be used to identify the type and perhaps relative location of control information that is being provided in a given frame structure, such as a sub-frame, frame, or superframe. A sub-frame (or like framing entity, such a frame or superframe) may have a BPCH and a corresponding system control information segment in which control information may reside. The system control information segment may have any number of control information blocks, wherein each control information block that is present may correspond to a particular type of control information. The BPCH is used to identify the type of control information that is present in a corresponding system control information segment, and if needed or desired, the relative locations of the various control information. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301536 | Apparatus and Method of Reporting Power Headroom in Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus of reporting a power headroom in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment transmits a first power headroom report to a base station and starts a virtual power backoff timer upon transmitting the first power headroom report. When a second power headroom report is triggered while the virtual power backoff timer is running, the user equipment transmits the second power headroom report. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301537 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING IDC INTERFERENCE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting In-Device Coexistence (IDC) interference information to a base station from a first communication module of a terminal in a wireless communication system. More specifically, the method is characterized by comprising: calculating a value representing the reduction in transmission power of the first communication module for avoiding the effect of interference of at least one second communication module which coexists in the terminal; and transmitting IDC interference information that includes the calculated reduced power value to a base station, if the calculated reduced power value exceeds a threshold value. | 11-14-2013 |
20130308524 | DISTRIBUTED INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT ALGORITHM - A method, a computer program product, and an apparatus are provided. In a first configuration, an AP receives a transmission request from a UE in a communication link with the AP. The AP determines whether to yield a transmission request response to the transmission request based on one or more transmission requests received from at least one communication link with at least one other AP, but not from UEs in communication links with the AP. In a second configuration, an AP receives a transmission request response from a UE in a communication link with the AP. The AP determines whether to yield a data transmission to the UE based on one or more transmission requests responses received from at least one communication link with at least one other AP, but not from UEs in communication links with the AP. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308525 | Ad-Hoc Radio Communications System - A wireless communications system comprising a wireless communications unit. The wireless communications unit comprises a communications device, a back-end router, a cryptographic module connected to the back-end router, and a front-end router connected to the cryptographic module and the communications device. The communications device is configured to exchange information over a single wireless communications channel. The front-end router is configured to perform at least one of sending a first data packet received at the front-end router from the communications device to the back-end router through the cryptographic module and sending a second data packet received at the front-end router from the back-end router through the cryptographic module to the communications device. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308526 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT SIGNALING MESSAGE PROCESSING IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A network element that acts as a local mobility anchor (LMA) in a communications network efficiently distributes signaling messages using a data plane and a control plane having a plurality of processes executing on a plurality of processing units. When a network connection ID of a received signaling message is not mapped to a host process in a steering table, the signaling message is sent to a process in the control plane. A second process is assigned to be the host process for the network connection, and the steering table is updated to indicate this assignment. Upon receipt of a second signaling message with the network connection ID, it is efficiently sent to the second process because of the updated steering table. A mobility access gateway (MAG) also utilizes a steering table with network connection ID to host process mappings to efficiently distribute signaling messages. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308527 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELEASING CONNECTION WITH LOCAL GW WHEN UE MOVES OUT OF THE RESIDENTIAL/ENTERPRISE NETWORK COVERAGE - A method, system and device are provided for managing LIPA and/or SIPTO connection releases when UE moves out of residential/enterprise network coverage in case service continuity is not supported for the LIPA/SIPTO PDN connection(s). To address problems caused by not providing service continuity for LIPA/SIPTO PDN connections, the PDN connection/PDP context created in the HeNB/HNB by the MME/SGSN includes context information related to the UE indicating whether such connection is a LIPA PDN connection PDN connection or not. In addition, each UE may be configured to reconnect or not reconnect to the PDN corresponding to a certain APN or service, depending on how the PDN connection was disconnected by the network. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308528 | USER EQUIPMENT BUFFER MANAGEMENT IN MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Embodiments of the disclosure provide a system and method for dynamically allocating storage capacity in a user equipment buffer. In various embodiments of the invention, a plurality of transport blocks associated with a process are stored in a plurality of subpartitions of a partition of a buffer in a user equipment device. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308529 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING A LOCAL TRAFFIC SHORTCUT IN A PACKET-ORIENTED MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for providing a local traffic shortcut (LTS) in a packet-oriented mobile communication network comprising the steps of: providing a network node with traffic instance identification data (TIID) wherein the network node stores the TIID with a node ID of the network node as an entry in an LTS-database; querying by the network node the LTS-database of the network for entries comprising the same TIID to identify at least one network node for performing a local traffic shortcut (LTS); and establishing an LTS-tunnel with the identified network node. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308530 | System and Method for Reducing Signaling Overhead - A method for operating a first station includes receiving a first management frame from a communications device, and generating an optimized management frame including a reference to the first management frame and update information for the first management frame specific to the first station. The method also includes transmitting the optimized management frame. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308531 | CO-EXISTENCE SUPPORT FOR 3GPP DEVICE AND FIXED DEVICE BEARER TRANSPORT OVER FIXED BROADBAND ACCESS NETWORK - A communications system includes a trusted wireless access gateway, a broadband network gateway and a user equipment. The user equipment is configured to transmit an attachment request. The broadband network gateway is configured to receive the attachment request from the user equipment and determine whether the attachment request is an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) authentication request and forward to the trusted wireless gateway the attachment request when is determined that the attachment request is an EAP authentication request. The trusted wireless access gateway is configured to fulfill the attachment request based on a type of the attachment request. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308532 | BASE STATION CLOCK APPARATUS, BASE STATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION - A base station clock apparatus, a base station system, and a method for clock synchronization are provided in embodiments of the present invention. The base station clock apparatus includes: a first-standard clock module based on a first standard, configured to generate a first frequency synchronization clock signal, a first phase synchronization signal, and a first system clock signal according to a first external clock signal, where the first system clock signal includes the first frequency synchronization clock signal and the first phase synchronization signal; a second-standard clock module based on a second standard that is different from the first standard, configured to receive the first frequency synchronization clock signal and the first phase synchronization signal from the first-standard clock module, and generate a second system clock signal, where the second system clock signal includes the first frequency synchronization clock signal and the first phase synchronization signal. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308533 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD IN RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND TERMINAL APPARATUS - A radio base station apparatus for performing radio communication with a terminal apparatus, the radio base station apparatus including: a control unit which causes to overlap first timing at which the terminal apparatus confirms incoming addressed to the terminal apparatus with a second timing transmitting a reference signal, when the radio base station apparatus transmits the reference signal discontinuously in a second transmission time period shorter than a first transmission time period; and a transmission unit which transmits to the terminal apparatus the first timing overlapped with the second timing. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308534 | METHOD OF BEARER DELETION, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - A method of bearer deletion is provided to improve the universality of the bearer deletion process. The method includes: receiving, by the original intermediate NE, the cancellation type indication parameter sent by the HSS, and deleting the bearer between the serving gateway (S-GW) and a packet data network gateway (P-GW), if the original intermediate network element obtains an attach type according to the cancellation type indication parameter indicating an attach type and a corresponding bearer exists on the original intermediate NE. This method helps efficiently improve the universality of the bearer deletion flow. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308535 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION THEREOF - Disclosed is a communication apparatus in a network system constituted by a plurality of communication apparatuses, wherein the fact that a specific communication apparatus connected to a temporary network constructed temporarily has left the temporary network is detected. In response to the specific communication apparatus leaving the temporary network, another communication apparatus connected to the temporary network is allowed to return to the original network. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308536 | Customization of Data Session Retry Mechanism in a Wireless Packet Data Service Network - In one embodiment, a method is provided for customization of a mobile communications device's data session retry mechanism in a wireless packet data service network. The mobile communication device requests activation of a data session with a node via the wireless network and receives a reject message via the wireless network in response to the request for activation of the data session, the reject message including a cause code. If the cause code corresponds to a no-retry behavior of the data session retry mechanism of the mobile communication device, the mobile communications device no longer requesting activation of a data session with the node. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308537 | DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEMS - A distributed antenna system is provided for communicating with a plurality of base stations. The distributed antenna system includes a system controller and a master unit communicating with at least one of the plurality of base stations. A remote unit communicates over a high data rate media with the master unit and/or a downstream remote unit. Alternatively, the distributed antenna system includes a controller and a digital time/space crosspoint switch controlled by the controller. A digitizing transceiver is in communication with the digital time/space crosspoint switch. The crosspoint switch is configured to transmit and receive digital data through the digitizing transceiver. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308538 | Mobile Route Optimization - Embodiments provide techniques for mobile route optimization authentication protocols. Embodiments allow for system control over whether route optimization is allowed or not allowed. A conditional allowance of route optimization solves several billing and security issues by allowing the system to impose appropriate charges for the route optimization feature or prevent route optimization where message flow using care-of addressing can be monitored. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308539 | Method for Synchronizing PDCP Operations after RRC Connection Re-establishment in a Wireless Communication System and Related Apparatus Thereof - A method used in an E-UTRAN for synchronizing PDCP operations after a RRC connection re-establishment procedure with a user equipment (UE) is provided. The method includes: initiating an RRC reconfiguration procedure to resume all radio bearers other than a signaling radio bearer 1 (SRB1) when an RRC connection is re-established; re-transmitting a designated group of PDCP Service Data Units (SDUs) to the UE when a data radio bearer (DRB) mapped on Radio Link Control (RLC) Acknowledged Mode (AM) is resumed. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308540 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS - The present invention is designated to reduce the deterioration of transmission characteristics upon data transmission, even when soft buffer memory for retransmission control is not sufficiently secured in a mobile terminal apparatus. The present invention provides the steps of, in a base station apparatus (eNB), performing channel coding of information bits (ST | 11-21-2013 |
20130308541 | Terminal access method and device - The disclosure provides a terminal access method and a terminal access device. The method comprises: determining, according to a value within an Enhanced Access Barring (EAB) parameter corresponding to an Access Class (AC) configured by a system, whether to allow access of a terminal corresponding to the AC; when the corresponding AC is determined to be not barred according to the EAB parameter, then according to a common Access Class Barring (ACB) parameter broadcasted by the existing system, performing access allowed judgment; when the corresponding AC is determined to be barred according to the EAB parameter, then, according to a barring time parameter configured by the system, calculating a barring time for re-accessing the system. In the method of the disclosure, the EAB and the existing ACB mechanism are jointly processed, solving the problem of possible impact on a system caused when large numbers of delay-insensitive or low-priority services or terminals access a network simultaneously. Also, during the occurrence of an unexpected event, as the EAB applicable terminal is provided with appropriate control, this type of terminal is prevented from accessing the system directly without constraints, and the duration of system congestion during the unexpected event is shortened. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308542 | CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION FEEDBACK METHOD AND APPARATUS IN MULTI-NODE SYSTEM - Provided is a channel status information feedback method and apparatus of a terminal in a multi-node system, including a plurality of nodes and a base station which is connected to and can control each of the plurality of nodes. The method comprises the steps of: obtaining one precoding matrix index (PMI) for each cooperative node with respect to the entire target frequency band; obtaining a phase correction value to be applied to the PMI for said each cooperative node in each sub-band within the target frequency band; and feeding the calculated PMI and phase correction value back to the serving node. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308543 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM OF COMMUNICATION OVER MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BANDS - Devices, systems and methods of communication over multiple wireless communication frequency bands. For example, a multiple frequency band (multi-Output Storage Memory band) wireless communication device may include at least two radios to communicate over at least two different frequency bands; and a common station management entity (SME) operably coupled to the at least two radios, and configured to manage parallel and simultaneous operation of the at least two radios. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308544 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING CONTROL PROGRAM THEREFOR - The system of the present invention includes a first radio station and a plurality of second radio stations that communicate via a limited radio resource having a limited time slot and a limited frequency band allocated in advance. The first radio station performs control not to request the plurality of second radio stations to re-transmit transmission data when detecting a receive error in the transmission data from the plurality of second radio stations to the first radio station. Each of the plurality of second radio stations performs control, when detecting a receive error in transmission data from the first radio station to the second radio station, not to request the first radio station to re-transmit the transmission data in which the receive error has been detected, but to receive the transmission data re-transmitted according to a upper layer protocol from a communication partner radio station with which communication on the upper layer has already been established. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308545 | METHOD FOR USER EQUIPMENT TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - In the present invention, disclosed is a method for a user equipment transmitting/receiving a signal with a network in a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method comprising the following steps: transmitting to the network a connection request message including an indicator for indicating a short transmission; receiving from the network a connection setting message as a reply to the connection request message; and connecting with the network and transmitting a connection setting completion message to the network. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308546 | MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION APPLICATION, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication application is caused to be capable of receiving a “RA” before “Router lifetime” expires, while avoiding waste of radio resources, waste of a battery of a mobile station UE or an externally-connected apparatus, or network processing required for the mobile station UE to transition between an “IDLE state” and an “ACTIVE” state. The mobile station UE according to the invention includes a RA reception unit configured to receive a “RA” from the network and a RA transmission unit | 11-21-2013 |
20130308547 | METHOD FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING TERMINAL CAPABILITY CHANGE INFORMATION FOLLOWING TERMINAL CONNECTION TO AN EXTERNAL APPARATUS - The present invention relates to concerns a capability information transmission method in a wireless mobile communication system wherein, when a terminal having a predetermined capability reports the capability of the terminal to a base station, the reporting comprises the steps of: connecting to an external apparatus comprising at least an antenna; and reporting, to the base station, information giving the capability as changed by the connection with the external apparatus. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308548 | METHOD FOR REPORTING MEASUREMENT INFORMATION OF TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for enabling a terminal to process a signal in a wireless communication system. Specifically, the method includes the steps of: selecting a cell according to a measurement based on a first sub-frame pattern; transmitting a first message to the cell; and receiving a second message from the cell on the basis of a second sub-frame pattern, wherein the first message indicates that the measurement is performed on the basis of the first sub-frame pattern. | 11-21-2013 |
20130315138 | CONFIGURABLE SERVICES IN INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP)-BASED MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) - A method and apparatus for providing configurable services in an IMS based network based on standardized iFC is provided. The method includes creating, in an internet protocol multimedia subsystem (IMS) based network, at least one data structure that is assigned to at least one subscriber aspect. The method further includes storing the at least one data structure in a network node of the IMS based network, and using the at least one data structure as a condition for evaluating filter criteria. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315139 | METHODS, DEVICES, AND SYSTEMS FOR EFFICIENT RETRANSMISSION COMMUNICATIONS - Methods, devices, and systems for retransmitting Media Access Control (MAC) protocol data units (MPDUs) in a multi-user multiple-input and multiple-output (MU-MIMO) communication system are disclosed. Concurrent data streams within a first transmission window are transmitted. Each concurrent data stream is associated with a different recipient and includes an equal number of MPDUs. An indication of a retransmission subset of the MPDUs to be retransmitted for each concurrent data stream may be obtained if errors are present. The retransmission subset for each concurrent data stream is retransmitted within a second transmission window. A length of the second transmission window is as long as the longest of the retransmission subsets of the concurrent data streams. One or more new MPDUs may be added to the concurrent data streams in the second transmission window so that each concurrent data stream in the second transmission window carries a same number of MPDUs. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315140 | RECEPTION QUALITY ASSESSMENT - A method for assessing reception quality of a common transmission by a set of receivers comprising deriving a reception quality for different combinations of the set, and assessing each against a threshold which varies according to the number of receivers in the respective combination. A single assessment of quality can be produced which takes into account multiple different receivers, and multiple different combinations of such receivers. Such assessment allows transmission power and/or the number of active receivers to be set according to a given reception criteria. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315141 | METHODS AND A SYSTEM OF MULTIPLEXING MULTIPLE CONCURRENT OPERATIONAL MODES ON A SINGLE PHYSICAL TRANSCEIVER BY OPPORTUNISITC TIME STEALING - Systems and methods are provided for enhancing the concurrency of a wireless device operating in multiple network contexts. By identifying opportunity instants that may exist within the normal exchange of information by a device having a single physical transceiver in a first network context, tasks for a second network context may be performed using the transceiver with minimal impact on performance related to the first network context and preferably in complete transparence to the first network context. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315142 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND METHOD FOR REDUCING INTERFERENCE IN A DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a terminal device and a method thereof for reducing interference in a device, which belong to the field of interference processing. The method includes: receiving a control signaling for interference processing sent by a base station; and according to the control signaling, stopping a related operation within a non-scheduling period of a communication mode corresponding to the control signaling. The terminal device includes: a receiving module, and a stopping module. This reduces the interference to the other communication modes due to the communication mode corresponding to the control signaling within the non-scheduling period, and thus reduces interference in the terminal device within the non-scheduling period. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315143 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FAST CLOSED-LOOP RATE ADAPTATION IN A HIGH RATE PACKET DATA TRANSMISSION - In a high data rate communication system capable of variable rate transmission, an open loop rate control can be adjusted with a closed loop rate control to maximize throughput. An access point generates interleaved multi-slot packets that allow an access terminal to transmit indicator messages to the access point in accordance with recently received data carried within slots of the multi-slot packets. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315144 | Location-Aware Application Based Quality Of Service (Qos) Via A Broadband Access Gateway - A system and method supporting access to multimedia information based upon user-defined quality of service criteria is disclosed. A broadband access gateway may coordinate network behavior during the transition of an access device among communication pathways having different available capacities. Adjustments in bit rates and levels of compression may be made based upon the user-defined quality of service criteria. The user may be notified when network conditions disallow support for the desired quality of service, and may choose to override selected criteria. The user-defined quality of service criteria may be stored within the gateway and associated with a user, or may be located in the access device and accessible to the gateway. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315145 | PRE-ALLOCATED RANDOM ACCESS IDENTIFIERS - Systems and methods of pre-allocating identifiers to wireless devices for use in requesting resources over a random access channel are described. A wireless communication system includes a random access channel over which wireless devices can anonymously send requests for resources. The base stations receiving and processing the anonymous requests reduces the probability of random access channel collisions and conserves the resources needed to support the anonymous requests by pre-allocating one or more identifiers to select wireless devices. The wireless devices having the pre-allocated codes can transmit a particular code over the random access channel as a request for resources that uniquely identifies the requester. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315146 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO SUPPORT DATA APPLICATIONS IN A MULTI-HOMING, MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of transmitting and receiving data from a multi-homing network device to a data network is disclosed and includes defining a network policy and transmitting the network policy to a routing module. Further, the method includes receiving a route scope from the routing module. The route scope identifies a subset of data interfaces to the data network that satisfy the network policy wherein the subset of data interfaces are selected from a set of available data interfaces and wherein the subset of data interfaces includes at least one data interface. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315147 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A VOIP SERVER IN A WIRELESS INTEGRATED DEVICE - A method and apparatus for handling a call using a wireless integrated access device that is compatible with Voice over ATM and Voice over DSL on a network side while being compatible with VoIP on a customer premise side are disclosed. For example, the present method employs a wireless integrated access device for receiving an incoming call from a broadband access network that uses dedicated connection switching. In turn, the method establishes a wireless connection for the incoming call with at least one VoIP enabled endpoint device located at a customer premise. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315148 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF AN AVERAGING PARAMETER FOR PCINR AND RSSI - A system and method for adaptive control of an averaging parameter in a communications network may include an averaging parameter adaptive control module (APAC) that is associated with a base station and that includes one or more processors configured to generate a first averaging parameter that is transmitted by the base station to a mobile station communicating with the base station. The mobile station may use the first averaging parameter to generate first channel condition information that indicates a condition of a communication channel. First feedback information including the first channel condition information may be received at the base station. The APAC may generate a second averaging parameter using the first averaging parameter and the first feedback information and may transmit the second averaging parameter from the base station to the mobile station, thereby adaptively controlling the second averaging parameter based on the first feedback information. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315149 | METHOD OF DOWNLINK HARQ OPERATION AT AN EXPIRY OF TIME ALIGNMENT TIMER - According to one embodiment, a method of processing data for a Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) operation in a wireless communication system includes: receiving control signaling from a network; receiving data based on the received control signaling; generating a positive response message (ACK) if the received data is successfully decoded or a negative response message (NACK) if the received data is not successfully decoded, wherein the generated ACK or the generated NACK is not transmitted to the network when a timer is expired or not running; and combining the received data with data currently in a buffer after the timer is stopped or expired. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315150 | Methods and Devices for Estimating Terminals' Interest in Services - The present invention proposes a device including a receiver module configured to receive data from a respective terminal's logging memory, and a processor module configured to process the received data to calculate an estimate for the conditional probability for a random terminal, while being interested in a service, to be in a specific state. Also, the present invention proposes correspondingly configured terminals, together with respective methods. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315151 | SERVICE PROCESSING METHOD, A BASEBAND PROCESSOR CHIP AND A TERMINAL - A service processing method, a baseband processor chip and a terminal are disclosed in embodiments of this invention, wherein the service processing method comprises: in response to a need for processing a CS domain service by a terminal, identifying whether PS domain data that is being received/transmitted in a PS domain service currently processed by the terminal is critical data for maintaining the QoS level of the PS domain service; in response to that the PS domain data being received/transmitted is not critical data, suspending the processing of the PS domain service and processing the CS domain service. The embodiment of this invention enables a terminal of Class B to process a CS domain service during the process of receiving/transmitting PS domain data. | 11-28-2013 |
20130322327 | ROUTING DECISION CONTEXT OBJECTS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: receiving a Diameter message at the DRA from an origin device; establishing a routing decision context object in response to receiving the Diameter message, wherein the routing decision context object is associated with a destination device chosen to receive a previous message; evaluating a rule that includes a context object reference, wherein the evaluation includes accessing the routing decision context object based on the context object reference; and transmitting a message based on the evaluation of the rule. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322328 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR OPTIMIZING CELL RE ACQUISITIONS - Access terminals are adapted to employ timing information for a Synchronization Channel (SCH) associated with a neighboring base station during a re-acquisition procedure after such timing information has been determined to be inaccurate, or potentially inaccurate. For instance, an access terminal can obtain timing information for a Synchronization Channel (SCH) associated with a neighboring base station, such as by means of a combined acquisition procedure. The access terminal may subsequently determine that the obtained timing information is, or appears to be, no longer synchronized with the base station. In response to such a determination, the access terminal can employ the obtained timing information to time the opening of a receive window for re-acquiring the base station. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322329 | SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING INTELLIGENT NETWORK ACCESS SELECTION FOR A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE - Systems and methods enable alternative network access implemented by a mobile wireless communication device. The method includes receiving information associated with a mobile device, the information comprises location information associated with the mobile device. Based on the information associated with the mobile device, identifying an access point available for providing connectivity services to the mobile device, the access point is not the computing device. Information is provided to the mobile device which is associated with the access point. The information can comprise at least one of usage terms, usage conditions, usage costs, access point characteristics, connection characteristics, access point capacity, and access point security access information | 12-05-2013 |
20130322330 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GROUP MOVING OBJECT IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication apparatus for a group moving object in a communication system includes a Radio Frequency (RF) transmission/reception unit configured to simultaneously set up links with two or more Base Stations (BSs) placed on right and left sides of a road or a track, a baseband unit configured to perform baseband signal processing on signals transmitted and received through the RF transmission/reception unit, and a network interface unit connected to the baseband unit and configured to establish an Ethernet connection for providing communication service to devices within the group moving object. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322331 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXCLUDING GUARANTEED BIT RATE TRAFFIC BEARERS FROM LTE UL FLOW CONTROL - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus is a UE. The UE transmits data packets. The UE determines to implement a flow control to reduce a transmission rate of the data packets. The UE determines whether the data packets include known or potential real-time data packets. The UE refrains from implementing the flow control to reduce the transmission rate of the known/potential real-time data packets when the data packets include known/potential real-time data packets. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322332 | POWER CONTROL METHODS - Power control methods are provided. The power control method, performed by a receiving end device, includes receiving two consecutive slots from a dedicated physical channel (DPCH), determining a transmit power control command based on signal qualities of the two consecutive slots; and transmitting the transmit power control command in only a first transmit power control field that is firstly available after the transmit power control command is determined | 12-05-2013 |
20130322333 | NETWORK SERVER, MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE, AND METHOD THEREOF - A network server and method thereof are provided. The method performed by a network server includes receiving a first data from a first radio frame on a UL DPDCH, despreading the first data with a fixed spreading factor, de-rate matching the despreaded first data with a plurality of de-rate matching schemes, and determining a transport format of the first data that is being used based on all decoded data. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322334 | HARQ Buffer Size Reduction in Wireless Systems for Downlink Shared Channels - A receiver arranged to process a flow of data in a communication system for downlink shared channels and a method for processing the flow of data sequence. The receiver includes a processor that receives a subframe comprising a data packet; a demapper that receives supplemental channel data symbols and is positioned after the processor in a sequence of the flow of data; means for performing rate matching of estimated the data symbols and positioned after the demapper in the data sequence; and a Hybrid Automatic Retransmission Request (HARQ) buffer positioned before the demapper in the data sequence. The communication system includes a long-term evolution (LTE) communication system. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322335 | CONTROLLING A PARAVIRTUALIZED WIRELESS INTERFACE FROM A GUEST VIRTUAL MACHINE - A method, system and an apparatus to paravirtualize a wireless interface is disclosed. In one embodiment, a method receives a frame of data for a wireless service through a wireless interface of a host device using a processor. If the frame of data is associated with a first type of category, the frame of data is processed through a first standard interface. If the frame of data is associated with a second type of category, the frame is processed through a second standard interface. The method then sends the frame of data processed through the first standard interface or the second standard interface to a guest. A virtual wireless interface associated the guest that is emulating the wireless interface of the host device converts the frame of data processed through the first standard interface to the second standard of communication. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322336 | RADIO UNIT, BASEBAND PROCESSING UNIT AND BASE STATION SYSTEM - A radio unit configured to connect to a baseband processing unit includes a transformation unit configured to obtain uplink time domain signal data and transform the uplink time domain signal data into uplink frequency domain signal data; and a compression unit configured to compress the uplink frequency domain signal data by using a compression algorithm. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322337 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND PROGRAM - The present invention relates to a telecommunications apparatus and a method, a storage medium, and a program for determining whether or not an other side communicating apparatus is near in a network. In a transmitting apparatus, a transmitting unit transmits a sending-message, and a control unit receives a response message to the sending-message, which includes acknowledgement information based on shared data and transmission information in the sending-message. The transmitting apparatus also includes a first judging unit that judges whether a response time of the acknowledgement message is less than a predetermined time. A receiving apparatus includes a generating unit that generates the acknowledgment information and transmits the response message to the transmitting apparatus. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322338 | METHODS OF REVERSE LINK POWER CONTROL - Methods of reverse link power control are provided. A first example method includes first adjusting OFDMA transmission power based on first feedback signals during an OFDMA transmission and second adjusting OFDMA transmission power based on second feedback signals during periods between OFDMA transmissions. A second example method includes sending first power adjustment indicators based on measured OFDMA SINRs when receiving OFDMA transmissions from a mobile station and sending second power adjustment indicators based on estimated OFDMA SINRs when not receiving OFDMA transmissions from the mobile station. A third example method includes receiving a plurality of interference indicating signals from different base stations and determining whether to adjust a maximum transmit power threshold based on the plurality of interference indicating signals, the maximum transmit power threshold indicating the maximum permitted transmission power level below which transmissions are constrained. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322339 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A wireless communication system includes a sending device and a receiving device. The sending device includes a first control unit that sends the state of a buffer by using a first wireless carrier, and a first random access management unit that manages random access performed by the sending device. The receiving device includes a second control unit that receives the state of the buffer by using the first wireless carrier and that performs a data exchange by using a second wireless carrier on the basis of the state of the buffer, and a second random access management unit that manages random access performed by the receiving device. The second random access management unit sends control information that includes a dedicated preamble that is unique to a device. The first and the second random access management units perform non-contention based random access that uses the dedicated preamble. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322340 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR RECEIVING INFORMATION INDICATIVE OF CHANNEL QUALITY FROM MOBILE STATION - A wireless communication method and apparatus are provided for selecting quality-reporting sub-carrier bands based on sub-carrier band quantity information received from a base station. The method includes generally four steps. First, from a base station, information indicating quantity of sub-carrier bands is acquired. Second, channel quality of each of a plurality of sub-carrier bands within a communication band is measured from a received signal. Third, sub-carrier bands are selected from the plurality of sub-carrier bands, wherein quantity of the selected sub-carrier bands corresponds to the quantity of sub-carrier bands indicated by the acquired information. Fourth, information indicating channel quality of the selected sub-carrier bands is reported to the base station. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322341 | REVERSE LINK INITIAL POWER SETTING USING EFFECTIVE RADIATED POWER MESSAGE TO COMPUTE PATH LOSS - In an illustrative embodiment of the present invention, a reference signal including pilot information is transmitted from a base station to one or multiple field units over a pilot channel. A message is also sent to the field units over a paging channel to indicate an effective radiated power level at which the reference signal is transmitted on the pilot channel. Based on a received power level of the reference signal at a field unit and the effective radiated power level of the reference signal, a forward path loss is estimated at the field unit for the forward link between the base station and field unit. Assuming the path loss in the reverse link is approximately the same as the estimated forward link path loss, the field unit can transmit, a reply message in the reverse link so that the base station generally receives a message at-a desired power level. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322342 | REALLOCATION OF RESOURCES FOR DUAL-MODE WIRELESS DEVICES - A wireless service of a first type is scanned. A first station associated with the first type is selected. A first indicator of expected service conditions associated with the first station is received. Based on the first indicator, a wireless service of a second type is scanned. A second station associated with the second type is selected. A second indicator of expected service conditions associated with the second type is received. Based on the first indicator and the second indicator, one of the first type and second type is selected to receive wireless service. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322343 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING RECEPTION CONFIRMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to one embodiment, a method for transmitting acknowledgement/not-acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) of a user equipment in a wireless communication system. Includes: receiving uplink-downlink (UL-DL) configuration 5 information on a plurality of subframes; receiving data in at least one subframe among the plurality of subframes; configuring ACK/NACK for the received data; and transmitting the ACK/NACK through a UL subframe. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322344 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACQUIRING AND USING LOCATION INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a method and device for acquiring and using location information, where a mobility management entity acquires trusted user location information from a base station and provides a home subscriber server with the trusted location information. With enhanced interfaces between the home subscriber server, on one side, and a serving-call/session control function, a proxy subscriber server and the serving-call/session control function, an application server, an online charging system and an offline charging system respectively, on the other side, the home subscriber server can provide these network elements with the trusted user location information, and also with enhanced interfaces between the online charging system and the offline charging system, on one side, and the serving-call/session control function, the proxy subscriber server and the serving-call/session control function, and the application server respectively, on the other side, transmission of the trusted user location information via these interfaces can be supported. | 12-05-2013 |
20130329631 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL - Methods and apparatus for improved power control in communications (such as connection establishment) in a wireless network. In one embodiment, a data-based, iterative approach is used to select an appropriate transmission power level during the establishment of a wireless connection. An assessment of the quality of the channel between a connecting device and target device is made, based on a received reference signal from the target device. The assessment is used to select an initial power level for a random access request. In the case a response is not received, a subsequent assessment of the channel quality is made. If the quality of the channel has changed, then a second power level for a second random access request is selected. This approach allows the connecting device to adapt to changing conditions related to the channel quality, and adjust its transmission power level accordingly. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329632 | NETWORK CONTROL OF APPLICATIONS USING APPLICATION STATES - Techniques for network control of application states of applications associated with a communication device are presented herein. An application agent, associated with an application used by the communication device, controls transitioning the application between application states based on network indicators received or network events detected from a communication network. The application states include active state or doze state. An application management component associated with the communication network at least partially controls transitioning the application between application states to facilitate controlling network traffic or reducing network congestion. The application agent or application management component can map application states to various factors, including radio states, congestion level, application performance indicators, network policies, or user policies, to facilitate determining which application state to apply to an application at a given time. The application agent can be in a centralized location, or at a same or different location as the application source. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329633 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSPORTING DIGITAL BASEBAND STREAMS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in example embodiments that include receiving a radio signal stream and segmenting the radio signal stream into segments. The segments may be packetized and transported in packets over a pseudowire in a packet-switched network. The radio signal stream can be reconstructed from the segments. In more particular embodiments, the pseudowire may be a multi-protocol label switching pseudowire or a layer 2 tunneling protocol pseudowire, for example. In yet other specific example embodiments, the radio signal stream may be received using a common public radio interface or a femtocell application programming interface. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329634 | RESOLVING IP ADDRESSES IN A WIRELESS ENVIRONMENT - A method of anonymously resolving Internet Protocol (IP) addresses using a distributed network includes defining a virtual geographic area that comprises a micro dynamic domain name server (MDDNS); wirelessly receiving at a central facility a geographic attribute of a telematics unit; determining at the central facility that the telematics unit is within the virtual geographic area using the received geographic attribute; and transmitting an IP address of a host telematics unit in the MDDNS to the telematics unit. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329635 | Method and Apparatus for Reporting Measurement Result in Wireless Communication System - Provided an apparatus and a method for reporting a measurement result in a wireless communication system. A terminal receives report conditions and a measurement setting including a report for position information from a base station. When a measurement report is triggered, the terminal determines whether valid position information is available and the measured result is transmitted to the base station. When the valid position information is not available, the measured result includes serving cell information and adjacent cell information. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329636 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REQUESTING ALMOST BLANK SUBFRAMES IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - One embodiment of the invention provides a mechanism to assist the eNodeB of the second cell, for example macrocell eNodeB or femtocell eNodeB to determine the configuration of ABSs. To be specific, the eNodeB of the first cell sends a request signaling to the eNodeB of the second cell to inform of the requirement for ABSs. The eNodeB of the second cell receives the request signaling from the eNodeB of the first cell, and then it determines the pattern of ABSs and sends the pattern of ABSs in the form of bitmap through a signaling to the eNodeB of the first cell. As the requirement for ABSs is determined by the eNodeB of the first cell on the basis of the number of the UEs and/or the traffic load of the UEs which are near the edge of coverage area of the picocell, it can help the eNodeB of the second cell to determine the configuration of ABSs, i.e. the pattern of ABSs, so that the efficient resource utilization is achieved. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329637 | ADJUSTING CONNECTION STATES OF A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE BASED ON A PERIOD OF INACTIVITY - Methods, apparatuses and computer readable media are described that adjust radio resource control connection states between a mobile wireless device and a wireless network following determination that a set of inactivity trigger conditions is met. Time periods between successive data messages and/or signaling messages transmitted to and/or received from a wireless access network are measured. When a prolonged period of data inactivity and/or signaling activity is determined, the mobile wireless device re-establishes an existing radio resource control connection to the wireless access network or releases the radio resource control connection to the wireless access network and transitions to an idle state. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329638 | AVOIDING PREMATURE E-UTRAN DISABLING - Methods, systems, and apparatuses for mobility management in wireless communications systems that provide both voice connection services and data services are disclosed. In some aspects, enhanced connectivity with wireless networks after a failure of voice connection services is provided. A counter may be utilized in connection with a combined registration procedure in which a device requests registration for both data services and voice connection services in the wireless network. The counter may track failed attempts to register for voice connection services when the request is accepted for data services. The counter may be reset in response to a deregistration event, such as a user input or a network command, allowing a full number of attempts for later registration with the wireless network. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329639 | CONNECTION MANAGEMENT FOR MULTI OPERATOR SELECTION - A user equipment (UE) may flexibly or dynamically access one or more network operators via one or more subscriber identity modules (SIMs) (or virtual SIMs) in the mobile device. Each SIM provides authentication/access to a single network operator, and multiple SIMs will therefore enable multiple network operator accesses. The authentication may be based on one or more physical SIMs and/or virtual SIMs. A connectivity engine in the UE allows for dynamic selection and/or authentication of network operators, e.g., wireless/mobile network operators or carriers, and their corresponding radio access technologies (RATs). | 12-12-2013 |
20130329640 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENCODING FEEDBACK SIGNAL - A method and apparatus for encoding feedback signal is provided. The method includes: encoding feedback signals of three carriers to output a bit sequence; and transmitting the bit sequence on a High Speed-Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH). The encoding the feedback signals of the three carriers may specifically include: mapping the feedback signals of the three carriers into a codeword, in which the codeword can be selected from a codebook, and codewords in the codebook satisfy a particular code distance relationship. The method for jointly encoding feedback signals of three carriers in a Ternary Cell (TC) mode is provided. Feedback signals are transmitted over a single code channel. Therefore, power overhead is reduced, and system performance is improved. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329641 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329642 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FACILITATING PAGING A USER EQUIPMENT - The technical solution under various embodiments of the present invention determines paging time by determining the position of a radio frame that includes a paging identifier with a view to ensuring energy efficiency of a User Equipment (UE). | 12-12-2013 |
20130329643 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE TERMINATION PROCESSING BY A FEMTOCELL SYSTEM - A system, method, and computer readable medium for processing short message service terminations in a communication system featuring an IP-based femtocell system are provided. The femtocell system includes a base transceiver station and a Session Initiation Protocol to Internet Operating System adapter. The Session Initiation Protocol to Internet Operating System adapter conveys the depacketized message content to the base transceiver station which transmits the message content to the user equipment. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329644 | Hybrid ARQ Schemes with Soft Combining in Variable Rate Packet Data Applications - A system and method for transmitting high speed data on fixed rate and for variable rate channels. The system and method provides the flexibility of adjusting the data rate, the coding rate, and the nature of individual retransmissions. Further, the system and method supports partial soft combining of retransmitted data with previously transmitted data, supports parity bit selection for successive retransmissions, and supports various combinations of data rate variations, coding rate variations, and partial data transmissions. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329645 | COMMUNICATION SCHEME FOR CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION - The invention relates to a method for transmitting and a method for reconstructing channel quality information in a communication system. Further, the invention also provides a transmitter and receiver performing these methods, respectively. The invention suggests a scheme for communicating channel quality measures that on the one hand allows for an accurate reconstruction of the channel quality measures at the receiver and on the other hand requires an acceptable transmission overhead. This is achieved by partitioning channel quality measures into at least two partitions and to compress the values partition-wise, for example, by means of a discrete cosine transform and the transmission of only a subset of the resulting coefficients. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329646 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ROUTE SELECTION METHOD - A base station device includes: an information collection unit configured to collect information for calculating evaluation values for each of first, second, and third transmission paths; an evaluation value calculation unit configured to calculate the evaluation values for each of the first, second, and third transmission paths, based on the collected information; and a transmission path selection unit configured to select, using the evaluation values of each of the first, second, and third transmission paths, a transmission path to be used by a mobile communication terminal. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329647 | ENHANCED HANDLING OF ACCESS CAPABILITY INFORMATION IN A MOBILE NETWORK - In a mobile network with a plurality of access networks, a control node, which is controlling access of a user equipment to that one of the access networks which is currently used by the user equipment, performs a determination of an access capability of the user equipment in this access network. The control node provides an indication of the determined access capability to a subscriber database associated with the user equipment. When transmitting the indication, a guard timer is started. After determining the access capability, the control node receives an update indication for the user equipment. In response to receiving the update indication, the control node performs a redetermination of the access capability. Further, the control node checks if the guard timer has expired and, only if the guard timer has not expired, provides a further indication of the redetermined access capability to the subscriber database. | 12-12-2013 |
20130336204 | CONTROL METHOD FOR ADJUSTING QUEUING DATA VOLUMN OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE BY DETECTING DATA TRANSFER SPEED AT PHYSICAL LAYER AND RELATED CONTROL MODULE AND MACHINE-READABLE MEDIUM THEREOF - A control method for a wireless communications device supporting a specific protocol includes detecting a data transfer speed at a physical layer of the wireless communications device regarding an architecture of the specific protocol, and accordingly generating a detection result; and adjusting queuing data volume of the wireless communications device according to the detection result. An associated control module for the wireless communications device is also provided. The associated control module includes a speed detection unit for performing the operation of detecting the data transfer speed at the physical layer of the wireless communications device, and a control unit for performing the operation of adjusting the queuing data volume of the wireless communications device. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336205 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING WIRELESS DEVICES WITHOUT SENDING TIMESTAMP DATA - A sensor network includes a plurality of sensors and a base station for sending a series of data acquisition requests to the sensors. Each data acquisition request has an index. Each sensor has a synchronization calculation module and an internal clock. The sensors are adapted and configured to receive the series of data acquisition requests and record a timestamp of receipt for each data acquisition request. The sensors also store a predefined time interval related to the plurality of data acquisition requests so that the sensor can calculate a time to start collecting data based upon the series of data acquisition requests, the timestamps, the indices, and the predefined time interval. In an alternative embodiment, the base station only sends a general request for data acquisition and a synchronization sensor module receives the general request and, in turn, sends the series of data acquisition requests to the sensors. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336206 | COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - In an example embodiment, a delegate terminal may include a first wireless inter-terminal interface, a processing device; and a computer storage medium. The computer storage medium may have computer instructions stored thereon that are executable by the processing device to perform operations. The operations may include receiving transmissions from multiple terminals via the first wireless inter-terminal interface. The transmissions may be aggregated from the multiple terminals into an aggregated transmission. The aggregated transmission may be transmitted to a base station of a radio access network. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336207 | REDUCING PACKET LOSS IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK WITH DATA BREAKOUT AT THE EDGE - A breakout system initiates RLC resets to resynchronize data communication to improve quality of experience for the user. Synchronization of radio traffic is monitored and maintained by the breakout system. When data is broken out, the RLC function is split into two different flows, between the UE and the breakout system and between the breakout system and the RNC. When the sequence numbers of the two flows become out of sync the ciphering context will become out of synchronization resulting in errors. The breakout system can initiate an RLC reset into both of these flows to resynchronize the data communication to improve user's quality of experience. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336208 | REDUCING PACKET LOSS IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK WITH DATA BREAKOUT AT THE EDGE - A breakout system initiates radio link control (RLC) resets to resynchronize data communication to improve quality of experience for the user. Synchronization of radio traffic is monitored and maintained by the breakout system. When data is broken out, the RLC function is split into two different flows, between the user equipment (UE) and the breakout system and between the breakout system and the radio network controller (RNC). When the sequence numbers of the two flows become out of sync the ciphering context will become out of synchronization resulting in errors. The breakout system can initiate an RLC reset into both of these flows to resynchronize the data communication to improve user's quality of experience. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336209 | MOBILE DEVICE DRIVEN INFORMATION EXCHANGE - A system and method are disclosed for exchanging data in a heterogeneous wireless communications environment. A mobile device initiates a first communication session with a first radio access network (RAN) that is connected to a wired network comprising a remote fixed node (RFN). A first set of data exchange transactions with the RFN is initiated by the mobile device during the first communication session to exchange a first set of data. The mobile device then initiates a second communication session with a second RAN that is likewise connected to the wired network. A second set of data exchange transactions with the RFN is initiated by the mobile device during the second communication session to exchange a second set of data contemporaneously with the first set of data exchange transactions. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336210 | Wholesale partner and video services enablement using a mobile virtual network enabler (MVNE) - A solution enabling subscribers of an enterprise, which itself is not a client of a Mobile Network Operator, MNO, but is a client of a Mobile Virtual Network Enabler, MVNE, to utilize a high speed data access at a guaranteed Quality of Service, or to access APIs, through a mobile network of the MNO. The MVNE includes a plurality of IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, core elements to facilitate delivery of high speed data associated with IMS services to the subscribers of the enterprise via the MNO mobile network. The MVNE is modeled as a roaming partner to the MNO allowing the MNO to leverage its existing roaming agreement with the MVNE. Allocation and utilization of an MNO's Subscriber Identification Module, SIM, cards by the MVNE minimizes the barrier to entry for the enterprises served by the MVNE. The MNO can provide monetizeable services to MVNE's subscribers as well. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336211 | METHOD TO CONTROL RECONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARERS IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - Methods to control reconfiguration of multiple radio access bearers in a mobile wireless device connected to a wireless network are described. The mobile wireless device is connected to the wireless network through a voice connection and a data connection simultaneously. The data connection is concurrently active with the voice connection. Transmission of one or more signaling messages for the data connection is delayed until the voice connection terminates. Representative signaling messages include messages that reconfigure a radio access bearer supporting the data connection and messages estimated to exceed a pre-determined transmission time interval. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336212 | METHOD OF SHARING A SERVICE PROVIDED TO A NEIGHBORING USER EQUIPMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method of sharing a service provided to a neighboring user equipment, which is shared by a user equipment in a wireless communication system, includes the steps of obtaining at least one URL (uniform resource locator) information corresponding to an IP (internet protocol)-based service provided by a first communication network by the neighboring user equipment, executing an application corresponding to the obtained URL information and making a request for the IP-based service to the first communication network, receiving the requested IP-based service from the first communication network, and controlling the application to execute the received IP-based service. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336213 | GATEWAY DEVICE AND PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD - In packet communication using TCP, a gateway device for relaying communication packets between a mobile node and a correspondent node, temporarily rewrites a parameter of the receive window size of the ACK packet of the TCP communication from the mobile node, to adjust the amount of communication packets transmitted from the correspondent node. Whit this configuration, it is possible to reduce the packet loss due to error control for the existing TCP communication with respect to the mobile node, without converting the mobile node and the correspondent node. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336214 | APERIODIC AND PERIODIC CSI FEEDBACK MODES FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION - Coordinate multi-point (CoMP) transmission is facilitated by resolving collisions between feedback reporting. Based upon the conditions within the network, collision resolution may be by dropping a channel report during a subframe, multiplexing channel reports from a plurality of user equipment, compressing channel reports a plurality of user equipment, and combined reporting, either through joint reports or by using carrier aggregation, for conditions between a user equipment and a plurality of transmission points. New signaling and reporting formats facilitate selection of a collision resolution suitable for current network conditions. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336215 | Explicit feedback format within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Explicit feedback format within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. A beamformer provides a first communication to a beamformee, and based thereon, the beamformee may ascertain certain characteristics associated with the type and format of feedback to be provided to the beamformee via a second communication from the beamformee to the beamformer. For example, the first communication may include indication of a current operational mode, such as whether it is in accordance with single-user multiple input multiple output (SU-MIMO) or multi-user multiple-input-multiple-output (MU-MIMO). Also, the first communication may indicate a requested steering matrix's rank to be employed in accordance with subsequent beamforming by the beamformer. Also, additional information such as that pertaining to per-tone SNR values for each respective space-time stream, per-tone or per-sub-band eigen-values, the particular channel width being employed (e.g., 20, 40, 80, or 160 MHz), etc. may be included within the second communication. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336216 | PERSISTENT MESH FOR ISOLATED MOBILE AND TEMPORAL NETWORKING - A structured wireless mesh network is disclosed where a tree-like connection topology is formed. In one embodiment, each node has separate uplink and downlink radios operating on different channels. When a cluster of such nodes becomes isolated as in the case of a mobile mesh application, a node in the cluster according to this invention acts as a root node thus enabling the tree structure to persist, even in isolation. Example methods of joining sub networks are disclosed that guide the joining of mesh networks and channel management. Nodes that may operate in isolation also support a distributed DHCP capability such that IP addresses are assigned to clients even when a connection to a central DHCP server is unavailable. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336217 | Providing User-Spot (U-Spot) Services In A Communication System - A mobile communication device may be utilized to establish a localized user network that is accessible by client devices when the client devices are communicatively coupled to the mobile communication device. The mobile communication device is then operable to determine services that may be provided in the user network to the client devices, and to advertise these services within the user network. The services comprise network and/or data accessibility, and bandwidth availability. Mobile communication devices are also operable to provide, directly or via local and/or remote resources, additional services, comprising audio/video processing capability, storage, and/or processing. Offering of services in user networks is incentivized to the mobile communication devices and/or to client devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the mobile communication devices. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed in U-Spot networks, based on incentives and/or availability of resources. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336218 | HANDLING DUAL PRIORITY CONFIGURATIONS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques in which a device may transmit, to a network controller of an evolved packet system (EPS), a first non-access stratum (NAS) message including a device properties information element (IE) with a low-priority indicator set to indicate a mobile station (MS) is configured for NAS signaling low priority; transmit a second NAS message to establish a packet data network (PDN) connection, the second NAS message including a low-priority indicator set to indicate the MS is not configured for NAS signaling low priority; and perform an EPS session management (ESM) procedure related to the PDN connection or an EPS mobility management procedure related to the PDN. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336219 | Dynamic Transcoder Placement - The invention provides for a dynamic transcoder placement in case that transcoding functionality for codecs is offered in a TRAU associated to a Base Station Controller and/or a MGW selected for a call. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336220 | Single Carrier Cell Aggregation - It is provided an apparatus, including first receiving means adapted to receive a first signal from a first cell on a first carrier of a cellular network; second receiving means adapted to receive a second signal from a second cell on the first carrier, wherein the first cell is different from the second cell; combining means adapted to combine the first signal and the second signal to a single incoming data unit of a radio link control layer of the cellular network. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336221 | Method and Apparatus for Enabling DNS Redirection in Mobile Telecommunication Systems - System and method for providing DNS redirection in mobile telecommunication network. The system includes a functionality that is capable of intercepting a DNS reply from a content delivery provider, extracting a token, comparing the token with a stored token and replacing an IP address associated with the content delivery provider with an IP address of a resource of the mobile telecommunication network. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336222 | Machine-To-Machine (M2M) Interface Procedures For Announce and De-Announce of Resources - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed to propagate announcement and de-announcement of a resource across one or more networks. A first entity, which may be a hosting service capability layer (SCL), may receive a request from an issuer to announce a resource. The first entity may create a representation of the resource. The representation may be referred to as an announced resource. The first entity may send an announce resource request to a second entity (e.g., an announced-to SCL), which may be registered with the first entity. The announce resource request may be sent over an mid interface. The first entity may receive a first response from the second entity over the mid interface indicating that the second entity created the announced resource. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336223 | REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION FOR M2M COMMUNICATIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for establishing power saving data transmissions with machine-to-machine (M2M) communication capable devices and like user equipment in wireless networks are generally disclosed herein. One embodiment includes data transmission techniques to bundle small M2M data packet transmissions in an initial wireless network access process, performed before the device begins to negotiate the wireless network connection with a base station (BS). If the M2M data is successfully transmitted to the BS in the initial communication(s), then further connection does not need to occur, saving power and transmissions needed to negotiate and establish the wireless network connection. Configurations for a system, base station, and user equipment (user equipment including various M2M communication capable devices) are also described herein, including configurations for implementing the data transmission techniques. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336224 | DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENHANCED POSITIONING - Embodiments of a distributed antenna system (DAS) and method for enhanced positioning in a wireless network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, an enhanced Node-B (eNB) operates as part of a DAS that includes one or more nodes having the same cell ID as the eNB. The eNB is to transmit a UE-specific reference signal and configure one or more of the other nodes of the cell to transmit UE-specific reference signals that are distinguishable from each other and from the UE-specific reference signal that is transmitted by the eNB. The eNB may receive location estimate information from user equipment (UE) that is determined at least in part from the UE-specific reference signals. The eNB may also configure the nodes to perform cooperative OFDMA transmission techniques for the UEs operating in the cell. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336225 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A NETWORK IDENTITY - The invention relates to a session control entity, method and computer program for receiving an indication indicating a network where an access network entity for a user is located, transmitting a message for establishing a session for the user, and, including the indication indicating the network in the message. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336226 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and a device for transmitting wireless communication data. A terminal transmits a channel quality indicator (CQI) to a base station through a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) which is allocated within a sounding reference signal (SRS) subframe that is determined in a UE-specific manner, and transmits uplink (UL) data through a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) which is allocated within said SRS subframe. Said SRS subframe is a subframe to which said PUSCH and said PUCCH are simultaneously allocated, and said SRS subframe contains a single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-MDMA) symbol reserved for SRS transmission. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336227 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data in a wireless communication. In a communication performed by a user equipment supporting a multi-RAT (multi-radio access technology), the present invention includes receiving a 1st information for identifying a 1st cooperative user equipment candidate from the 1st cooperative user equipment candidate corresponding to at least one of a plurality of cooperative user equipment candidates, transmitting the 1st information to a base station, receiving an information on at least one 2nd cooperative user equipment candidate determined among the at least one 1st cooperative user equipment candidate using the 1st information from the base station, and performing a communication of a 1st data with the base station in cooperation with the at least one 2nd cooperative user equipment candidate. Moreover, the user equipment and a plurality of the cooperative user equipment candidates support a direct communication without using an access point. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336228 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR POWER HEADROOM REPORTING AND SUB-FRAME SCHEDULING - Embodiments of the invention relate to the field of wireless communications and particularly to a method of and apparatus for power headroom reporting so as to address such a problem in the prior art that PH information is reported for only an uplink subframe and the existing PHR mechanism discourages subsequent scheduling in the case that there are different TDD UL/DL configurations for a plurality of configured and active cells aggregated for a user equipment. A method of power headroom reporting according to an embodiment of the invention includes: determining PH information of each of configured and active cells at a current instant if PH information is required to be reported, wherein the configured and active cells include a cell which is configured with a downlink subframe at the current instant; and reporting the determined PH information. Since a power headroom is reported by obtaining PH information of a configured and active cell which is currently a downlink subframe according to a virtual transmission format, the PH information facilitates subsequent scheduling by an eNB. | 12-19-2013 |
20130343265 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ALIGNING VOICE CODER AND SCHEDULING TIMING - The described aspects include methods and apparatus for aligning a voice over data vocoder timing at a user equipment (UE). A scheduling interval timing is determined at the UE, and a timing of a vocoder of the UE can be aligned based on the scheduling interval timing. The UE transmits one or more packets generated by the vocoder according to the timing in at least one transmission period related to the scheduling interval timing. Thus, time delay between packet generation and transmission can be minimized. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343266 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UPDATING SOFTWARE - A method of providing a software update to a plurality of transmission devices includes receiving, by a processor, a first information signal containing a first transmission device identifier, a first transmission device hardware version identifier, and a first software version identifier. The method further includes wirelessly transmitting a first plurality of data packets in series, wherein each of the first plurality of data packets includes one of a set of data packet identifiers and a portion of an update to software corresponding to the first software version identifier. The method also includes receiving, by the processor, at least one data packet acknowledgment and wirelessly transmitting a second plurality of data packets. The second plurality of data packets includes at least one previously transmitted data packet for which a data packet acknowledgment has not been received by the processor. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343267 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR FLASH WCDMA FREQUENCY SCANS - A method and apparatus of wireless communication are configured to capture, at a user equipment, one or more adjacent Universal Mobile Telecommunication System Terrestrial Radio Access Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Numbers (UARFCNs), extract a useful wide band signal from the one or more adjacent UARFCNs, perform a PSCH search on the useful wide band signal to obtain a composite PSCH signal, and reject the one or more UARFCNs where no peaks greater than a noise threshold are detected in the composite PSCH signal. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343268 | Data Sending Method, Device and System - The present invention discloses a data sending method, device and system. The data sending method includes: before establishing a connection with a wireless network side, detecting whether a wireless terminal has data to be sent to the wireless network side, the data to be sent including signaling data for establishing the connection between the wireless terminal and the wireless network side; if a result of detecting whether the wireless terminal has data to be sent to the wireless network side is that the wireless terminal does not have data to be sent, making sure that a power amplifier (PA) of the wireless terminal is in a non-working state; if a result of detecting whether the wireless terminal has data to be sent to the wireless network side is that the wireless terminal has data to be sent, making sure that a PA of the wireless terminal is in a working state. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343269 | ROUTING DATA OVER A NON-3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT TRUSTED NETWORK - A method and system for routing a packet in a non 3rd Generation Partnership Project (“3GPP”) network are provided. In accordance with one aspect, a method includes receiving via a first type interface a 3GPP Policy and Charging Control (“PCC”) rule. The 3GPP PCC rule is evaluated. A local rule associated with the 3GPP PCC rule is determined. The packet is routed on the non-3GPP network to a user equipment using the determined local rule. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343270 | NOTIFICATION METHOD, USER TERMINAL AND RADIO BASE STATION - In order to assure reception of broadcast information by a user terminal handed over to a micro base station by CRE (Cell Range Expansion) and to reduce the number of transmission stopped subframes in a macro base station, the present invention provides a notification method for a user terminal to receive modification notification information for notifying modification in system information from the micro base station, the notification method including: the macro base station notifying the micro base station of a subframe pattern including a protection subframe to protect the modification notification information every a plurality of radio frames; and the micro base station notifying the user terminal of identification information of the protection subframe in the subframe pattern. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343271 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH REPEAT-RESPONSE COMBINING MECHANISM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - A communication system includes: a validation module configured to transmit a repeat request corresponding to a preceding data including a communication content; an inter-block processing module, coupled to the validation module, configured to determine a previous communication value based on the preceding data; a detection module, coupled to the inter-block processing module, configured to identify a repeat data corresponding to the repeat request from a receiver signal; an accumulator module, coupled to the detection module, configured to generate an accumulation output based on the preceding data and the repeat data; and a decoding module, coupled to the accumulator module, configured to determine the communication content using the previous communication value and the accumulation output across instances of transmission blocks for communicating with a device. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343272 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH CHANNEL-QUALITY INDICATOR MECHANISM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - A wireless communication system includes: a filter configured to monitor a behavior of a channel-quality indicator response; and a base station behavior matrix, coupled to the filter, configured to select an ACK channel-quality indicator to be transmitted. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343273 | ENHANCED TTI BUNDLING WITH FLEXIBLE HARQ MERGING - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which mandated retransmission of data packets according to a compressed timeline provide an alternative to TTI bundling. A first data unit is transmitted in a first subframe and automatically retransmitted in one or more non-consecutive subframes before a response to a preceding transmission or retransmission of the first data unit has been processed. The retransmissions are terminated after an acknowledgement is processed. The automatic retransmissions occur periodically with a predetermined number of intervening subframes transmitted before each retransmission of the first data unit. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343274 | METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR STORING ADDRESS OF NETWORK ANCHOR POINT TO NETWORK SERVER - A method, apparatus and communication system for registering address information of a network anchor point to a network server are disclosed. A network apparatus, such as a mobility management entity, determines whether to register address information of a network anchor point to a network server, and registers the address information of the network anchor point to the network server when determining to do so. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343275 | Methods For Signaling A Maximum Number of MSDUs In A Transmission - A first wireless station provides a configuration indication value that specifies a maximum number of medium access control layer service data units (MSDUs) that may be included in each medium access control layer protocol data unit (MPDU), or in each aggregated MPDU (A-MPDU), received by the first wireless station. A second wireless station receives the configuration indication value from the first wireless station, and in response, transmits only MSDUs (or A-MSDUs) having no more than the specified maximum number of MSDUs to the first wireless station. The configuration indication value can be included in various elements transmitted between the first and second wireless stations, including for example, a high throughput (HT) capabilities element, a very high throughput (VHT) capabilities information field, a VHT operation element or an add block acknowledge (ADDBA) response frame. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343276 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA PACKETS AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING DATA PACKETS - The invention relates to a data packet structure for conveying data of service data units (SDU) using protocol data units (PDU). The data packet comprise a data packet payload comprising at least one protocol data unit (PDU), wherein a protocol data unit (PDU) comprises a service data unit (SDU) or a fragment of a service data unit; and a data packet header comprising an indicator (FFF,SFF) indicating whether or not the data packet payload begins with a protocol data unit (PDU) being a fragment of a service data unit and whether or not the data packet payload ends with a protocol data unit (PDU) being a fragment of a service data unit. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343277 | MULTIMODE USER EQUIPMENT ACCESSING WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A method, an apparatus and a computer-readable storage medium for accessing a wireless sensor network with a multimode user equipment. The method includes a user equipment receiving broadcasted wireless sensor network information; requesting access information for the wireless sensor network from a base station of a mobile data network; receiving the access information from the base station; and accessing the wireless sensor network using said access information. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343278 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RETRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT FOR RELIABLE HYBRID ARQ PROCESS - A method for transmitting a packet from a transmitter to a receiver in a wireless communication system begins by building a packet by a transport format combination (TFC) selection process, and the packet is transmitted from the transmitter to the receiver. If the transmitter receives an indication that the packet was not successfully received at the receiver, the packet is retransmitted via a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) procedure. If the HARQ procedure did not successfully transmit the packet, then the packet is retransmitted via a retransmission management (RM) procedure. If the RM procedure did not successfully transmit the packet, then the packet is discarded by the transmitter. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343279 | SELECTION OF SERVICE DOMAIN IN IMS CENTRALISED SERVICES - The invention includes methods of using IMS Centralised Services, ICS, in the selection of a service domain relating to a call involving a User Equipment, UE, being served by a CS access network. In one aspect a method includes receiving a request from a routing node, such as a Mobile Switching Centre, MSC, or a Gateway Mobile Switching Centre, GMSC, for a service domain selection at a Service Control Point, SCPin the UE's IMS network ( | 12-26-2013 |
20130343280 | METHOD FOR USER EQUIPMENT SETTING SECURITY WITH NETWORK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - In the present invention, a method for a user equipment transmitting/receiving a signal with a network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. More particularly, the method comprises the following steps: receiving security setting information from the network; transmitting or receiving data with the network based on the security setting information; receiving a disconnection message from the network; releasing connection from the network; and actuating a timer when an indicator for maintaining the security setting is received from the network, wherein the security setting information is maintained while the timer is actuated. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343281 | COMPUTING CLOUD IN A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method for communication in a wireless telecommunication system, wherein the wireless telecommunication system comprises a plurality of base stations ( | 12-26-2013 |
20130343282 | PROVIDING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION ABOUT A RADIO CHANNEL - The invention relates to a method for providing channel state information, CSI, about a radio channel ( | 12-26-2013 |
20130343283 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING DIFFERENT TYPES OF WIRELESS COMMUNCIATION APPROACHES - A wireless terminal supports both peer to peer communications and access node based communications. The wireless terminal considers and evaluates communications link alternatives and selects between (i) communication using a peer to peer link and (ii) communications using a link, with a base station serving as an access node, Received signals corresponding to each of the link alternatives are used in performing link quality determinations. In one example, a received user beacon signal from a peer wireless terminal is the received signal used for the peer to peer link evaluation and a: base station beacon signal is the received signal used for the access node link evaluation. A link is selected as a function of quality determination, predicted data throughput, link maintenance energy requirements, and/or least cost routing determination information. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343284 | METHOD FOR MEMBERS OF EMERGENCY RESCUE GROUP UTILIZING RADIOS TO TRANSMIT COMPOUND FILES CONTAINING COMPRESSED PHOTO/TEXT/VOICE DATA OF AN EMERGENCY EVENT SITE DIRECTLY OR THROUGH SIGNAL REPEATER TO CONSOLE FOR REAPPEARANCE OF THE EVENT SITE - A method for members of an emergency rescue group utilizing radios to transmit compound files containing compressed photo/text/voice data of an emergency event site directly or through a signal repeater to a console for reappearance of the event site, includes: the radio capable of creating a compound file containing pictures of the emergency event site, GPS coordinates of where the pictures are taken, and a voice description of an on-site situation or the photos, and transmitting the compound file over an existing channel directly or through a signal repeater to the console at a rescue center, so as to allow the console receiving the compound file to reappear a real situation of the event site and to improve the efficiency of dispatching and commanding personnel, medical or material resources conducted by public security rescue units or military units. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343285 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT METHOD, SERVING GPRS SUPPORT NODE OR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY, AND TERMINAL - The present invention discloses a mobility management method, a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) or a mobility management entity (MME), and a terminal. Setting or dynamically modifying the mobility management frequency of a particular terminal among numerous terminals is enabled. The technical solution of the present invention includes: obtaining subscription data of a terminal, where the subscription data carries periodic update setting information; obtaining a periodic update interval of the terminal according to the periodic update setting information; sending the periodic update interval to the terminal; and setting a value that is a longer than the periodic update interval of the terminal as a mobile reachable interval for monitoring the periodic update of the terminal. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343286 | SPREAD-SPECTRUM COMMUNICATION UNIT - A set of spread-spectrum units is capable of operating as a base station or as a remote unit. Each spread-spectrum unit includes a base subunit or a remote subunit, each subunit having a receiver for receiving spread-spectrum signals at a first frequency transmitted from the spread-spectrum units; a signal despreader for despreading the spread-spectrum; a demodulator for demodulating the despread-spread-spectrum signals; a combiner for combining the demodulated signals, and a local signal; a converter for converting the combined signal to a base-data signal; a spread-spectrum circuit for processing the base-data signal; and a transmitter for transmitting at a second frequency the processed base-data signal as a base-spread-spectrum signal. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343287 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT OPERATION OF AN ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL - A method for processing enhanced dedicated channel data in a wireless transmit/receive unit is described. An interrupt message is received at a medium access control (MAC) layer. The interrupt message is processed by the MAC layer, including at least one of: performing grant processing, on a condition that a grant is included in the interrupt message; obtaining buffer occupancy information; performing transport format combination recovery and elimination; generating a rate request; or multiplexing multiple protocol data units (PDUs) into a single MAC-e PDU. | 12-26-2013 |
20140003330 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATION OF SUPPORTED MODULATION CODING SCHEMES | 01-02-2014 |
20140003331 | DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS EXTENDERS OVER HOME MoCA BACKBONE | 01-02-2014 |
20140003332 | Management of Backhaul Nodes in a Microwave Backhaul | 01-02-2014 |
20140003333 | S1-MME and LTE-Uu Interface Correlation in Long Term Evolution Networks | 01-02-2014 |
20140003334 | LOCATION BASED AUTHENTICATION FOR ONLINE SERVICES | 01-02-2014 |
20140003335 | STATEFUL CONNECTIONLESS OVERLAY PROTOCOL FOR INFORMATION TRANSFER ACROSS MULTIPLE DATALINKS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003336 | NETWORK TRAFFIC PRIORITIZATION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003337 | Long Term Evolution Network Admission Management | 01-02-2014 |
20140003338 | COHERENT TRANSMISSION FROM DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS TRANSMITTERS USING LEGACY RECEIVERS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003339 | MACHINE-TO-MACHINE (M2M) DEVICE AND METHODS FOR 3GPP AND ETSI M2M INTERWORKING | 01-02-2014 |
20140003340 | HOME CLOUD GATEWAY APPARATUS FOR MULTI-SERVICE AND METHOD OF PROVIDING SERVICE USING THE SAME | 01-02-2014 |
20140003341 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK TRANSMIT POWER AT AN ACCESS TERMINAL | 01-02-2014 |
20140003342 | WIRELESS NETWORK SELECTION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003343 | Systems and Methods for Packet Transmission with Compressed Address | 01-02-2014 |
20140003344 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MULTI-HOP ROUTING DECISION AND LOOPING PREVENTION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003345 | Method of Handling Collisions among Channel State Information Reports and Related Communication Device | 01-02-2014 |
20140003346 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING STATUS REPORT OF PDCP LAYER IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND RECEIVER OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003347 | REDUCING LATENCY IN CIRCUIT SWITCHED DATA CALLS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003348 | DETACHMENT OF A MOBILE TERMINAL FROM A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-02-2014 |
20140003349 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEARCHING CONTROL INFORMATION BY TERMINAL IN MULTINODE SYSTEM | 01-02-2014 |
20140003350 | Cell Access Processing Method and Apparatus and Communication System | 01-02-2014 |
20140003351 | Radio Communication Apparatus, Radio Communication System and Radio Communication Method | 01-02-2014 |
20140003352 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING HEARTBEAT MESSAGE, METHOD FOR ACQUIRING HEARTBEAT PERIOD, AND ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE | 01-02-2014 |
20140010148 | Card Toolkit Support for IP Multimedia Subsystem - A method, system and computer-usable medium are provide for managing the Open Channel for IMS command correctly the UICC to have knowledge about the specific status codes the ME received from IMS. This knowledge allows the UICC to make a smarter decision on what it attempts to do to access IMS. Accordingly, the UICC is provided with detailed information about the status codes from the IMS service to allow the UICC to make an informed decision. If the UICC does not have such knowledge, it is possible that the UICC will send potentially unwanted commands to the ME to establish access to IMS. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010149 | Multi-service Provider Wireless Access Point - Novel tools and techniques that can provide wireless service for multiple service providers from a single, multi-service provider wireless access point. In an aspect, a multi-service provider wireless access point might communicate with a plurality of wireless devices, each associated with a different wireless carrier, and route communications from each device to the appropriate carrier (and/or, similarly, transmit communications from each carrier to the appropriate wireless device). In this way, for example, a single wireless access point could provide service to cellphones of subscribers of a number of different carriers. Such a wireless access point can provide enhanced efficiency and reduced cost, along with the ability to provide higher service for a number of wireless carriers. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010152 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR TRAFFIC INDICATION MAP SEGMENTATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Logic may implement a hierarchical data structure for traffic indication mapping (TIM) and segment the TIM into TIM segment bitmaps to facilitate transmissions for wireless communications devices. The traffic indication provides information as to whether a device associated with an access point (AP) has data buffered by the AP. Logic of the AP may inform devices about the range of devices represented by each of the TIM segments by including a block start and block range or a TIM segment index that can be associated with a range of blocks. Logic may provide at least one page bitmap to devices for the TIM segment bitmaps to provide an indication to the devices as to whether a particular block includes an indication that any client devices have data buffered by the access point. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010153 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH PHASE/ANGLE TRANSFORMATION AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A communication device includes antennas to receive a first signal from a remote device, wherein the first signal corresponds to a first operational mode. A baseband processor selects either a first operational mode for transmitting a second signal or a second operational mode for transmitting the second signal. When the second operational mode is selected the baseband processor transforms the phase-related information corresponding to the first operational mode to transformed phase-related information corresponding to the second operational mode. The antennas transmit the second signal to the remote device in accordance with the transformed phase-related information corresponding to the second operational mode. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010156 | Method and Wireless Device for Antenna Selection - A transmission method for a wireless device is disclosed. The wireless device has a plurality of antennas. The transmission method includes determining a first set of the plurality of antennas, determining a second set of the plurality of antennas, transmitting a packet to a first client using the first set of the plurality of antennas; and transmitting a packet to a second client using the second set of the plurality of antennas. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010157 | Method and wireless communication device for conveying neighbor access point information - A method for one of a plurality access points (APs) of a wireless communication system to convey neighbor information to a station is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a compact information of at least one neighbor AP; wherein the compact information is transmitted in a frame and the compact information is used for scanning. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010158 | MODULATION CODING SCHEME SELECTION FOR RESPONSE FRAMES IN CASE OF TRANSMIT POWER IMBALANCE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for selecting modulation coding schemes (MCS). In some aspects, the MCS is selected based on a characteristic of an electronic device and the MCS of a transmitter. In some aspects, the MCS is selected based on a power imbalance between an access point and a user terminal. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010159 | MULTI-STREAM JOINT TRANSMISSION SCHEME FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments herein provide a wireless communication system including a user equipment (UE) and a plurality of base stations (e.g., evolved NodeBs (eNBs)). The UE may generate feedback information based on channel conditions between the UE and two or more of the plurality of base stations. The UE may transmit the feedback information to one or more of the base stations. Two or more of the plurality of base stations may contemporaneously send different data streams to the UE, the data streams having properties based at least in part on the respective feedback information. The UE may decouple and decode the data streams from the two or more base stations using multi-antenna techniques. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010162 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION FOR CLIENT COOPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and a device for transmitting information for client cooperation in a wireless communication system. A first device or a base station of the client cooperation determines whether the first device is operable as a cooperative device for the client cooperation, on the basis of a decision factor. The first device transmits information for carrying out the client cooperation to a second device on the basis of whether the first device is operable as the cooperative device for the client cooperation. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010163 | Transmission Timing in a Carrier Group - A base station configures a first carrier group and a second carrier group in a wireless device. The wireless device transmits first uplink signals in the second carrier group employing a first secondary carrier in the second carrier group as a timing reference carrier. The wireless device autonomously changes the timing reference carrier to a second secondary carrier in the second carrier group. The second secondary carrier is an active carrier different from the first secondary carrier. The wireless device transmits second uplink signals in the second carrier group employing the second secondary carrier as the timing reference carrier. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010164 | METHOD OF MANAGING AUTHORIZATION OF PRIVATE NODE B IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED DEVICE - A method of managing authorization of a private node-B in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes performing cell searching, when a cell is found, reading system information corresponding to the cell, and then determining authorization validity of the private node-B according to the system information and licensed band area corresponding to the private node-B. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010165 | COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR WIRELESS TERMINAL AND HOST DEVICE, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND HOST DEVICE - The present invention provides a communication method for a wireless terminal and a host device, a wireless terminal, and a host device. The method includes: reporting, by a wireless terminal, a port type of a port corresponding to the wireless terminal to a host device, where the port type is based on a network layer data transfer protocol, so that the host device drives the port by using a port driver corresponding to the port type; establishing, by the wireless terminal, a communication link that is based on the network layer data transfer protocol between the wireless terminal and the host device through interaction with the host device via the port; and transmitting, by the wireless terminal, a service packet and a type of the service packet via the communication link that is based on the network layer data transfer protocol. | 01-09-2014 |
20140016544 | Method to enable device mobility in ZigBee networks - A method with novel procedures to enable device mobility in ZigBee networks is invented and the method can be used in ZigBee systems for managing mobile devices under different applications, like mobile devices control system and mobile announcement system. The method solves the problems of the short address assignment and pending data buffering for the left-over devices in a ZigBee system. The present invention is dedicated to the management of mobile devices in a ZigBee system. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016545 | USING ENCAPSULATION HEADERS TO INDICATE INTERNET PROTOCOL PACKET FRAGMENTATION IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - A method of an aspect is performed in an Internet Protocol (IP) packet fragment reassembly system of a cellular network. The method is one of reassembling IP packet fragments that are destined for wireless devices. The method includes a step of receiving a plurality of encapsulated IP packet fragments. Each of the encapsulated IP packet fragments have an encapsulation header, an outer IP header, and an inner IP header. The method also includes a step of determining that the encapsulation headers indicate that the IP packet fragments are encapsulated. The method further includes a step of reassembling the IP packet fragments into a reassembled IP packet. A more fragments (MF) bit is set in the inner IP header of each, except for a last one, of the IP packet fragments. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016546 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention discloses various methods and devices for transmitting uplink control information in a wireless access system which supports a carrier aggregation environment (i.e., multiple cell environment). The method for transmitting the uplink control information (UCI) in the wireless access system, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the following steps: a user equipment receiving information on at least one cell, which is allocated from the multiple cell environment; the user equipment producing representative rank indicator (RI) information on the at least one cell; the user equipment performing channel encoding on the UCI including the representative RI information and uplink data; and the user equipment transmitting an physical uplink shared channel signal including the UCI, which includes the representative RI information. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016547 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING WIRELESS CHANNEL AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING THE METHOD - The method performed in the terminal includes generating a random value for wireless channel access, receiving a competitive index indicating a channel competition state from an access point, and determining whether to attempt a wireless channel access based on a comparison result between the random value and the competitive index. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016548 | TRANSPORT STREAM PACKET GENERATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF GENERATING TRANSPORT STREAM PACKET THEREOF - A method of generating a transport stream (TS) packet in a data transmitting device includes receiving a packetized elementary stream (PES) packet and generating at least two TS packets among a plurality of TS packets corresponding to the PES packet at a time on a basis of an analysis result of the PES packet. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016549 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CODEBOOK SUBSET RESTRICTION FOR TWO-DIMENSIONAL ADVANCED ANTENNA SYSTEMS - A user equipment (UE) in a wireless network having two-dimensional antenna systems performs a method of codebook sampling. The method includes receiving from an eNodeB (eNB) an indication of a restricted subset M of vertical precoding matrices, wherein M is less than a total number of vertical precoding matrices N in a codebook, the codebook comprising a plurality of vertical precoding matrices and horizontal precoding matrices. The method also includes feeding back vertical precoding matrix indicators (V-PMI) to the eNB based on the restricted subset of vertical precoding matrices. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016550 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OFFLOADING CHECKSUM PROCESSING - Aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for offloading checksum processing in a user equipment (UE) (e.g., from an application processor to a modem processor). Such offloading may speed up packet processing, increase data rate, and/or free up resources of the application processor for other tasks. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016551 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING COMMUNICATION LINKS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication method for a third device that controls a first link established directly between a first device and a second device is provided. The third device allocates a first link identifier for identifying the first link. The third device transmits first information including the first link identifier to the first device and the second device. The third device receives, from the first device and the second device, second information including allocation acceptance information indicating the acceptance or rejection of allocation of the first link identifier. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016552 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COLLECTING CHARGING INFORMATION OF A DATA SERVICE - The present invention discloses a charging method for collecting charging information of data service and an apparatus thereof. The method comprises: receiving service data from a gateway service node; determining a protocol type of the received service data according to an IP port number of the service data; classifying the received service data according to the protocol type of the service data; distributing the classified service data to a plurality of protocol processing modules; at each of the plurality of protocol processing modules, extracting charging information of the classified service data, wherein the charging information comprises the protocol type of the service data; sending the charging information to a charging system for charging by a charging mode; and transmitting the respective classified service data transparently to a packet switched domain network. This invention can accurately collect the charging information of service data of various classes. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016553 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE MANAGEMENT NODE, AND SERVING GATEWAY APPARATUS - A mobile communication method in a mobile communication system according to the present invention in which when MME# | 01-16-2014 |
20140016554 | PUSH MANAGEMENT SCHEME - Technologies are generally described for a push management scheme for a mobile operating server. In some examples, a method performed under control of a mobile operating server may include receiving from a mobile device a request for generating one or more keep-alive messages, the request including information on a destination push server, generating the keep-alive messages, and transmitting the keep-alive messages to the destination push server. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016555 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING CONFIGURABLE MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION POWER OF UE CARRIER - Disclosed are a method and device for reporting, in a carrier aggregation scenario, the configurable maximum transmission power of a UE carrier. Application of the technical solution as put forth in embodiments of the present invention enables a base station to accurately ascertain the A-MPR/MPR of a UE in a situation in which various resources are being allocated by including the configurable maximum transmission power of a UE carrier in a PHR MA CCE, and thereby more accurately perform UE scheduling | 01-16-2014 |
20140016556 | BASE STATION, TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A base station is provided in which a terminal efficiently controls a demodulation reference signal for a data signal transmitted from the base station in a wireless communication system in which the base station and the terminal communicates with each other. The base station that performs a communication with the terminal includes a data signal generation unit that generates a data signal for terminal, and a demodulation reference signal for a data signal multiplexing unit that multiplexes a demodulation reference signal for a data signal, which is a known signal for demodulating the data signal, into the data signal. The scramble code included in the demodulation reference signal for the data signal is generated based on a first scramble ID and a second scramble ID that are notified from the base station to the terminal. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016557 | Method And Apparatus For Enabling Provision Of Routing Information And Network Selection Information To One Or More Devices - An apparatus for providing route information to a device(s) may include a processor and memory storing executable computer program code that cause the apparatus to at least perform operations including receiving route information from a network device defining rules for devices for connection to a network(s). The computer program code may further cause the apparatus to convert the route information into a type of packet data to obtain route selection information corresponding to the route information. The route selection information is generated on behalf of a device(s) that is unable to communicate with the network device to use the route information to select an interface(s) for communication of content. The computer program code may further cause the apparatus to provide the route selection information to the device to utilize the route information to select an interface(s) for communication of data. Corresponding methods and computer program products are also provided. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016558 | ADAPTIVE SYSTEM FOR EFFICIENT TRANSMISSION OF POWER AND DATA THROUGH ACOUSTIC MEDIA - An apparatus and method for transmitting data and power through a metal barrier using ultrasonic waves, having ultrasonic transmission channels through the barrier formed by coupling ultrasonic transducers on opposite sides of the barrier. A power transmitter sends power over a channel and forward and reverse data transmitters send forward and reverse data signals by orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing OFDM over a separate channel. The data signals are made up of plural sub-carriers at plural different sub-carrier frequencies with none of the sub-carriers of the forward transmission signal being at a power harmonic frequency. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016559 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING UPLINK TRANSMISSION DELAY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - The present invention proposes a method of sending a UE the timing advance information per carrier group promptly and commanding preamble transmission, and activating secondary carriers in a wireless communication system supporting carrier aggregation technology using uplink transmission timings for the respective carrier groups. Through the present invention, the UE is capable of configuring the timing advance information of the carrier group promptly and activating the secondary carrier quickly, resulting in reduction of uplink transmission delay. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016560 | DISCOVERY OF A SET OF NODES IN A NETWORK - Methods and systems for discovery of a set of nodes ( | 01-16-2014 |
20140016561 | METHOD FOR COMPENSATING FOR MULTI-PATH OF A CDMA REVERSE LINK UTILIZING AN ORTHOGONAL CHANNEL STRUCTURE - An apparatus for receiving reverse link signals from a plurality of subscriber units in a multi-path environment is described. The apparatus includes a receiver in a base station that receives a first plurality of reverse link signals and a second plurality of reverse link signals in a time interval. Each reverse link signal of the first plurality of reverse link signals is derived from at least a common pseudo noise (PN) sequence and unique orthogonal sequence and each reverse link signal of the second plurality of reverse link signals is derived from a unique pseudo noise (PN) sequence. The apparatus also includes a a processor that determines a timing offset associated with at least one reverse link signal to align a timing of the at least one reverse link signal with reverse link signals from other subscriber units. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016562 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING NON-PACKET SWITCHED SERVICE IN A TARGET RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY NETWORK - A method and apparatus are described for providing non-packet switched service to a target radio access technology (RAT) network. A circuit switched (CS) service notification message is received by a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). If the WTRU has been allocated a valid temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI), a paging response message including the valid TMSI is transmitted after an inter-system change is performed from a source RAT network to a target RAT network. The CS service notification message is for terminating a CS call request. The source RAT network may be a long term evolution (LTE) network, and the target RAT network may be a third generation partnership project (3GPP) network. Alternatively, if the WTRU has not been allocated a valid TMSI, a paging response message including an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) that identifies the WTRU is transmitted after the inter-system change. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016563 | WIRELESS NETWORK THROUGHPUT ENHANCEMENT THROUGH CHANNEL AWARE SCHEDULING - A channel aware scheduler (CAS) is disclosed that takes advantage of changing wireless channel conditions in order to maximize aggregated system throughput. The CAS is aware of the different channel conditions for one or more stations and adjusts its scheduling of packet transmissions in light of the same. A related CAS algorithm may take advantage of that knowledge in order to increase aggregated system throughput while concurrently addressing other potential fairness constraints. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016564 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY - A method for neighbor discovery including: transmitting a neighbor detection message according to a neighbor VLAN information table, where the neighbor VLAN information table includes neighbor VLAN information; receiving a neighbor response message with which a terminal responds; acquiring a MAC address of the terminal according to the neighbor response message. With the method, numerous invalid detections, heavy apparatus load and large CPU resource consumption caused by traversing a public network VLAN and a private network VLAN to conduct neighbor detection decease. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016565 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, TERMINAL APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes a terminal apparatus; and primary and secondary base station apparatuses each providing one or more cells. Further, the primary base station apparatus includes a transmission unit transmitting communication conditions to the secondary base station apparatus in a coordinated communication mode where the primary and secondary base station apparatuses perform radio communications with the terminal apparatus in coordination with each other, and a radio communication unit performing radio communications with the terminal apparatus using the communication conditions in the coordinated communication mode. Further, the secondary base station apparatus includes a receiving unit receiving the communication conditions from the primary base station apparatus, a transition unit transitioning, when the communication conditions are received from the primary base station apparatus, into the coordinated communication mode, and a radio communication unit performing radio communications with the terminal apparatus using the communication conditions. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016566 | METHOD FOR REPORTING MDT LOG, NETWORK SERVER, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE UTILIZING THE SAME - Methods, network server, and mobile communication devices for reporting an MDT log are provided. The method, adopted by a network server, requesting a Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) log from a mobile communication device is disclosed, including: transmitting a first request message for the MDT log to the mobile communication device; in response to the first request message, receiving a first response message comprising a part of the MDT log from the mobile communication device, wherein the first response message indicates whether the MDT log reporting is finished or whether at least one more part of the MDT log is available; and transmitting a second request message for the MDT log to the mobile communication device when the first response message indicates that the MDT log reporting is not finished or at least one more part of the MDT log is available. | 01-16-2014 |
20140022985 | OFFLOADING RUNNING A NEEDED EDGE APPLICATION TO A NEIGHBORING BASESTATION IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network that includes a radio access network and a core network. A breakout component in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation connected to user equipment, and hosts edge applications that perform one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network. When a breakout component is not running a needed edge application, and the needed edge application is running in a neighboring basestation, the breakout component can route the request for the needed edge application to the neighboring basestation via the overlay network. The neighboring basestation processes the request using the needed edge application, then returns the data to the original basestation via the overlay network. The original basestation thus maintains the subscriber session with the user equipment while offloading the work of the needed application to a neighboring basestation. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022986 | WAN ASSISTED MONITORING AND COMMUNICATIONS METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for improved monitoring and tracking of communications devices, e.g., peer to peer devices, using assistance from WAN elements such as base stations, are described. In some embodiments, a wireless terminal requests peer to peer communications discovery assistance from one or more base stations. In some embodiments, the request includes information identifying peer communications discovery information the wireless terminal is seeking to detect. In some embodiments, upon receiving the request, nearby base stations listen to the common discovery channel and upon detecting the specified discovery information, send a response indicating the detection of the discovery information and a proximate location of the announcing peer device, to the wireless terminal. The wireless terminal can use the received information to locate and page the announcing peer via the base station serving the announcing peer. Location tracking of peer devices is facilitated and peer-to-peer communication setup time may be reduced. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022987 | WIRELESS MOBILE DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF BROADCASTING WIRELESS STREAMING MEDIA - A wireless mobile device, a system and a method of broadcasting wireless streaming media are disclosed, where the device includes an eavesdropping module, a packet-filtering module and a streaming player unit. The eavesdropping module can eavesdrop packets of streaming data through a wireless network. The packet-filtering module can determine whether the packets of the streaming data have identification information. When the packets of the streaming data have the identification information as determined, the packet-filtering module can allow the streaming data to be passed. The streaming player unit can play media based on the passed streaming data. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022988 | USER EQUIPMENT AND METHOD FOR ANTENNA PORT QUASI CO-LOCATION SIGNALING IN COORDINATED MULTI-POINT OPERATIONS - User Equipment (UE) and methods for antenna port quasi co-location signaling in coordinated multi-point (CoMP) operations are generally described herein. In some embodiments, one or more downlink channels are at least partially offloaded from a serving Evolved Node-B (eNB) to one or more neighbor eNBs. The UE may receive signaling from the serving eNB to indicate a reference signal of a neighbor eNB to use for estimation of one or more large-scale physical-layer parameters associated with the one or more downlink channels provided by one of more of the neighbor eNB. The UE may estimate the one or more large-scale physical-layer parameters based on receipt of the indicated reference signal from the neighbor and serving eNBs. The UE may also apply the estimated one or more large-scale physical-layer parameters for processing the one or more downlink channels from the neighbor and serving eNBs. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022989 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING A CELL UPDATE MESSAGE - The present disclosure presents a method and apparatus for dynamically configuring a cell update message at a user equipment (UE). For example, the method may include determining that a size of the cell update message at the UE is above a threshold value after a “measured results on random access channel (RACH)” information element (IE) is excluded from the cell update message. Furthermore, such an example method may include removing one or more IEs from the cell update message until the size of the cell update message is at or below the threshold value. As such, dynamic configuration of a cell update message at a UE is achieved. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022990 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING SIGNALING OVERHEAD IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus are disclosed for reducing signaling overhead in a wireless communication network. In one embodiment, the method is implemented in a network node. The method includes transmitting a first indication to a UE (User Equipment) to tell the UE to remember a configuration which is currently used after the UE enters RRC_IDLE. In an alternative embodiment, the method is implemented in a UE. The method includes (i) receiving a first indication from the network node to tell the UE to remember a configuration which is currently used after the UE enters RRC_IDLE, and (ii) retaining and not releasing or discarding the configuration upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022991 | Method of Jointly Encoding Channel State Information Reports and Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request Feedbacks and Related Communication Device - A method of jointly encoding channel state information (CSI) reports and hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) feedbacks for a user equipment in a wireless communication system includes generating a first data stream based on a plurality of input streams of CSI reports or a combination of a plurality of input streams of CSI reports and HARQ feedbacks; and transmitting the first data stream to a network of the wireless communication system. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022992 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TUNNELED GPM - An apparatus provides notification of a circuit switched event over a packetized data network. The apparatus includes a packetized data modem that is configured to receive lower level packetized data over the packetized data network that comprises the notification. The packetized data modem has a first service-oriented tunneling link access control processor that is configured to decapsulate an Improved 1x Layer 3 General Page Message (IGPM) from the lower level packetized data, where the IGPM comprises a service option corresponding to the circuit switched event. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022993 | DIGITAL FIXED STATION INTERFACE (DFSI) INTERNET PROTOCOL TO BINARY SERIAL DATA PROTOCOL CONVERTER - A system and method are provided for converting radio communication signals between a Digital Fixed Station Interface (DFSI) Internet Protocol (IP) APCO P25 standard communications format and binary serial data protocol standard communications. Received serial binary data may be evaluated, separated into control information and data payloads, and converted to DFSI IP standard data. Incoming and outgoing data communications are processed by implementing decisions about how to handle the information contained in, or to be contained in, the incoming and outgoing data communications based upon the substance, or overarching format, of the data contained in individual data packets, or serial bit streams. In embodiments, decisions and determinations regarding the information include determining that the information is damaged or corrupted and therefore not available to be converted. The data may be discarded based on such a determination. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022994 | POWER CONTROL METHOD AND DEVICE - A power control method and device are disclosed. The method comprises: a user equipment receiving a power adjustment value corresponding to transmit diversity determined and sent by a network side device; the user equipment determines a transmission power for a PUCCH transmission according to the power adjustment value. In the embodiment of the present invention, the transmission power adopted by the transmission PUCCH channel is determined according to the power adjustment value corresponding to the transmission diversity, solving the problem of inaccurate power control after introducing the PUCCH transmission diversity, so that each PUCCH format is capable of performing transmission diversity power control independently. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022995 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING A PAGING MESSAGE IN M2M COMMUNICATIONS - Provided are a method and an apparatus for monitoring a paging message in machine-to-machine (M2M) communications. An M2M device receives a paging setup for initiating an idle mode from a base station. The paging setup includes information indicating a paging cycle, a first paging offset, and a second paging offset. In the idle mode, the M2M device monitors the transmission of a paging message at the first paging offset of the paging cycle. If the paging message is not received at the first paging offset, the M2M device monitors the transmission of the paging message at the second paging offset of the paging cycle. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022996 | METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTING OF USER EQUIPMENT CONTEXT IN AN EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM - A method for distributing user equipment context in an evolved packet system, including a plurality of user equipment, at least one eNodeB, a first mobility management entity and a second mobility management entity and one serving gateway connected to the first and second mobility management entity, the plurality of user equipment being connected via one of the eNodeBs to the second mobility management entity and to the serving gateway, wherein the user equipment context for the plurality of user equipment is each stored at the second mobility management entity, includes:
| 01-23-2014 |
20140022997 | Reporting Method, Detection Method, Device And System For Network State - Disclosed are a reporting method, a detecting method, device and system for a network state. The reporting method for a network state includes: an intermediate node receiving a data packet; the intermediate node marking the data packet according to the current network state; and the intermediate node forwarding the marked data packet. The detecting method for a network state includes: a sink node receiving a data packet; the sink node parsing the data packet to obtain the marking information about the network state; and the sink node determining the network state according to the marking information. With the present document, the problem of heavy network burden due to a method of determining the network state with an active inquiry mode is solved, thus prolonging the service life of each node and optimizing the performance of the system. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022998 | BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station includes plural communication units that each includes a first processing unit that executes physical layer and data link layer processes of radio communication between the base station and a mobile station, and a second processing unit that executes network layer processes of the radio communication; and a third processing unit that is of a network layer and controls a series of radio communication sessions between the base station and the mobile station, based on carrier aggregation using the first processing unit of each of the communication units. | 01-23-2014 |
20140029511 | METHODS OF TRANSMITTING USING FILTERING IN THE TIME DOMAIN AND RELATED DEVICES - Methods may be provided to transmit data from a wireless terminal operating in a radio access network. For example, sampling rate conversion may be performed on a serial stream of modulation symbols to generate sampling rate converted symbols, and the sampling rate converted symbols may be transmitted over a wireless channel to a node of the radio access network. Related terminals are also discussed. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029512 | SINGLE-SSID AND DUAL-SSID ENHANCEMENTS - A wireless local area network system establishes a PASSPOINT™ connection between a mobile station and a hotspot using an enhanced single SSID method or an enhanced dual SSID method. In the dual SSID method, an access point associates and authenticates a mobile device to a secondary SSID of the access point during enrollment and provisioning. After enrollment, the access point authenticates the mobile station to a primary SSID of the access point using the credential that the mobile station received from an online sign-up (“OSU”) server in connection with the secondary SSID. In the single SSID method, an access point performs two levels of authentication. During authentication, communications are limited to an 802.1x controlled port running on the mobile station and access point. After a first authentication, communications between the OSU server and the mobile station are unblocked. After the second authentication, all traffic from the mobile station is unblocked. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029513 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal includes: an LTE wireless processing unit having an LTE communication function; a wireless LAN processing unit having a wireless LAN communication function; and a terminal control unit that determines whether to use the LTE wireless processing unit or the wireless LAN processing unit and controls a function as a wireless terminal. The mobile terminal includes a base station functional unit having a communication protocol processing function of an LTE base station. Based on control of the terminal control unit, a signal generated at the base station functional unit, the signal being based on the communication protocol of the LTE base station, is stored in a wireless LAN frame, and the signal is sent to a device in the LTE core network via a wireless LAN base station. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029514 | Method of Efficient Blind SCell Activation - An effective SCELL activation procedure is proposed to reduce the SCELL activation time. For carrier aggregation, a secondary cell (SCELL) needs to be configured and then activated before a UE can perform normal operation. In a first embodiment, the UE performs measurements on a list of candidate SCELLs before SCELL configuration. In a second embodiment, the UE performs measurements on a configured SCELL with high priority after the SCELL is configured. In a third embodiment, the UE performs deactivated-state SCELL measurements with adaptive SCELL measurement interval based on a configured measurement cycle and a state machine. Small SCELL activation time allows energy saving and network scheduling gain. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029515 | Device Connectivity Management for Machine Type Communications - Methods for managing device connectivity of machine type communications devices include receiving a packet data protocol based command addressed to a Machine Type Communication (MTC) device, determining if the MTC device has an active packet data protocol context, in response to determining that the MTC device does not have an active packet data protocol context, activating a packet data protocol context for the MTC device, and forwarding the packet data protocol based command to the MTC device. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029516 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIMULTANEOUSLY PERFORMING FREQUENCY RESOURCE SENSING AND DATA TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for simultaneously performing frequency resource sensing and data transmission in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method for performing frequency band sensing or data transmission and reception at a pico Base Station (BS) within the coverage of a macro BS in a wireless communication system includes determining the number of (M | 01-30-2014 |
20140029517 | Multicarrier OFDM Transmission - A base station transmits a first message comprising a field describing content over a first plurality of subcarriers. The base station receives a second message requesting for the content. The base station transmits a first plurality of content packets to the wireless device over a second plurality of subcarriers of a first carrier. The first plurality of packets comprises a first portion of the content. The base station transmits a second plurality of packets to the wireless device over the first carrier and at least one additional carrier over a third plurality of subcarriers. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029518 | TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - A transmission system determines whether property data of a transmission terminal matches property data of a counterpart terminal to generate similarity information indicating the degree of similarity between the property data of the transmission terminal and the property data of the counterpart terminal, and determines a destination to which the event data specifying an event created by the transmission terminal is to be transmitted based on the similarity information. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029519 | Wireless Architecture in Support of Voice and Data Communications - A wireless access network including a wireless base station configured to, for Iu-CS voice traffic, act as a network controller, by, terminating Iu-b signals from user equipment, and relaying the voice traffic over Iu-CS via an IP sec tunnel. And for data traffic, wireless base station is configured to act as the network controller, by, terminating Iu-b signals from the user equipment, striping IP payload, and sending the data traffic inside IPsec. Further, the wireless access network includes a wireless gateway configured to act as a security gateway for Iu-CS voice traffic, by, establishing the IP sec tunnel with the femtocell base station without the support of a GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GTP) as defined over Iu-PS. Also receiving and forwarding the tunneled Iu-CS voice traffic to a mobile switching center, and for data traffic, encapsulate the IP payload and send it via Gn to GGSN. | 01-30-2014 |
20140036766 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING AND PROCESSING MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PACKET DATA UNITS IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - The present invention provides a method and system for generating and processing medium access control (MAC) protocol data units (PDUs) in a broadband wireless network environment. In one embodiment, a method includes determining whether a MAC service data units (SDUs) intended for a receiving device includes fragmented MAC SDU(s). The method also includes generating MAC PDU(s) from the fragmented MAC SDU(s) when the MAC SDUs includes fragmented MAC SDU(s), where each MAC PDU includes a single fragmented MAC SDU. The method further includes determining whether unfragmented MAC SDU(s) in the MAC SDUs satisfy pre-defined criteria. If the unfragmented MAC SDU(s) satisfy the predefined criteria, the method includes generating MAC PDU(s) from the unfragmented MAC SDU(s), where each MAC PDU includes multiple unfragmented MAC SDUs. Otherwise, the method includes generating MAC PDU(s) from the unfragmented MAC SDU(s), where each MAC PDU includes a single unfragmented MAC SDU. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036767 | Proximity Based Wireless Docking - The present application discloses various implementations of a wireless docking system. In one implementation, such a wireless docking system includes a docking surface and at least one wireless transceiver configured to establish a wireless connection with a portable device. The wireless connection results in interoperability of the portable device and another device connected to the wireless docking system. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036768 | Processing of Access Point Crowdsourcing Data - Method and apparatus for processing access point (AP) crowdsourcing data are disclosed. In one embodiment, the method comprises receiving WiFi scan lists and their corresponding location descriptions, consolidating the WiFi scan lists and their corresponding location descriptions based at least in part on a set of selection criteria to generate a WiFi AP record, and uploading the WiFi AP record to a crowdsourcing server. The method consolidating the WiFi scan lists and their corresponding location descriptions comprises quantizing data received in accordance with time segment of the WiFi scan lists and their corresponding location descriptions. The set of selection criteria comprises a maximum number of scan lists to be uploaded in a predetermined period of time, a maximum number of scan lists to be uploaded in a single upload, ratio of MNoO to remaining unprocessed observations, similarity between scan lists, and comparison of HEPE values between similar scan lists. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036769 | COMMUNICATION PATH SWITCHING FOR MOBILE DEVICES - Methods, systems, and devices for switching internet protocol (IP) flows from a first communication path to a second communication path are disclosed herein. A user equipment (UE) may include an exchange component, a session component, and a communication component. The exchange component exchanges second communication path availability information between the UE and another UE by sending and receiving session initiation protocol (SIP) messages that include second communication path availability information over the first communication path. The session component changes the communication session by re-routing traffic flows to the second communication path based on the exchanged second path availability information. The communication component sends to and receives from the other UE data corresponding to an IP flow over the second communication path. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036770 | FREQUENCY TRANSLATION IN A VIRTUALIZED DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method for communicating with wireless user devices includes receiving a signal at a DAU, the signal residing within a first frequency band and processing the signal at the DAU. The method also includes transmitting the processed signal from the DAU and receiving the transmitted signal at a DRU. The method further includes converting the signal to a second frequency band different than the first frequency band. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036771 | Networked Video Bridge Device - A networked video bridge device includes a data input module that receives at least one raw image data stream from a plurality of data sources. The device further includes a storage module that records the raw image data and temporarily stores the raw image data. A display screen displays the raw image data. The device also includes a user interface module that receives user input data from a user of the networked video bridge device. The device also includes a control module that selectively augments the raw image data based on the user input data. The control module also communicates the augmented image data to a remote image data storage device. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036772 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR CONTROL FRAME AND MANAGEMENT FRAME COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating frames having a plurality of types are described herein. In some aspects, the frames include a compressed frame, such as a compressed management frame or a compressed control frame. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network includes generating a control frame including an identifier, the identifier comprising a portion of a frame check sequence and a service field of a frame that elicited the control frame. The method further includes transmitting the control frame. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036773 | Session Management procedures for transferring data - Method for transferring user data from one or more user equipment (UE) over a telecommunications network to customer network(s). The UE inserts the user data in session management signalling message(s) before transmitting the session management message(s) containing the user data over the signalling plane of a telecommunications network. On the customer network, the user data is retrieved by extracting the user data from one ore more authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) protocol message(s) sent from the telecommunications network to the customer network. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036774 | System and Method for Controlling Advanced Triggering Operations in a Telecommunication Network - A network server may be configured to generate, modify, augment, communicate, and/or manage the triggers and signaling communications so that they may be processed and communicated in a more intelligent, efficient, and/or cost effective manner than that which is available via conventional solutions. The network server may receive a trigger communication message that includes trigger parameters and information suitable for causing a destination device to automatically initiate an operation, determining a criterion for sending the trigger communication message to the destination device based on the trigger parameters included in the trigger communication message, monitoring a condition to determine whether the criterion has been satisfied, and send the trigger communication message to the destination device when it is determined that the criterion has been satisfied. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036775 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR FRAME CONTROL DESIGN - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating packets having a plurality of types are described herein. In some aspects, the packets include a MAC header with a frame control field. The sub-fields included in a particular frame control field may be based on the type of information to be communicated to the receiving device. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036776 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE RELAY PACKET GATEWAY RELOCATION FOR PATH OPTIMIZATION - A bearer path can be optimized following a mobile relay node (MRN) handover in order to directly re-route the bearer path from a user equipment (UE) core network to a target donor base station (DeNB). Bearer path optimization signaling includes a packet data network gateway (PGW) relocation information element (IE) indicating that a PGW of an MRN is being relocated from an initial DeNB to a target DeNB. The PGW relocation IE may be carried in a path switch request message. Bearer path optimization signaling also includes an non-access stratum (NAS) activate default enhanced packet switch (EPS) bearer context request/accept messages for activating the optimized bearer path. The NAS activate default EPS bearer request/accept messages may be communicated between the mobile relay node mobility management entity (MME) and the MRN via the target DeNB. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036777 | ACTIVE ANTENNA ARRAYS - In order to reduce the weight, cost and complexity of an active antenna array, designed for use with a plurality of different mobile telecommunications systems (multi-band system), the array comprises a plurality of antenna elements, which are divided into a plurality of antenna groups; a plurality of RF transceivers, which are divided into transceiver sets, wherein each transceiver of a set is arranged to operate on a different mobile telecommunications system, and including respective phase shifting and feeding networks coupled between each transceiver set and a respective antenna group, so that each transceiver of a set is coupled to each antenna element of the respective antenna group. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036778 | GATEWAY RELOCATION CONTROL METHOD AND CONTROL DEVICE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A control method and device, as well as a system, are provided that make it possible to perform relocation at an appropriate timing without impairing a user's sensory feeling about use of a service. A relocation control device | 02-06-2014 |
20140036779 | ROBUST DOWNLINK TIMING SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD IN LTE SYSTEM - Disclosed is a robust downlink timing synchronization method in an LTE system, which includes: step 1: a receiving terminal continuously storing time domain signal sequences of M PSS transmission periods; step 2: performing narrowband filtering on the time domain signal sequences of the M PSS transmission periods; step 3: performing down-sampling on data obtained after the filtering; step 4: performing sliding differential mirror correlation on the down-sampling data of an m | 02-06-2014 |
20140036780 | MULTIPROTOCOL ANTENNA SYSTEM FOR MULTIPLE SERVICE PROVIDERS - A radio access node is configured to digitize a first analog radio frequency signal in order to generate first digital data indicative of the first analog radio frequency signal and is configured to digitize a second analog radio frequency signal in order to generate second digital data indicative of the second analog radio frequency signal. The first analog radio frequency signal is broadcast from a first mobile unit using wireless service provided by a first wireless service provider. The second analog radio frequency signal is broadcast from a second mobile unit using wireless service provided by a second wireless service provider. The first and second digital data are transported from the radio access node to the base unit using a shared transport medium. The base unit is configured to produce information derived from the first digital data and the second digital data that is used in performing base station processing for the first mobile unit and the second mobile unit. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036781 | REMOTE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A virtual broadband transmitting unit (FIG. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036782 | AVOIDING REDUNDANT TRANSMISSIONS OF DATA DURING MULTIMEDIA MOBILE PHONE COMMUNICATIONS - A method, apparatus, and computer product for avoiding redundant data transmissions during communication via multimedia mobile phones. In operation, a sending party inquires whether intended for transmission data already resides in a mobile phone of a receiving party Depending on a content of the response from the receiving party, the sending party transmits the data or a request for displaying the already available data. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036783 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING CIRCUIT SWITCHED INTERWORKING - A method includes receiving internet protocol (IP) multimedia core network subsystem (IMS) session content that includes voice call content in IMS domain and multimedia content in IMS domain; translating the voice call content in IMS domain to voice call content in circuit switched (CS) domain; transmitting the voice call content in CS domain to a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) via a CS domain entity and a radio access network (RAN); and transmitting the multimedia content in IMS domain to the WTRU via a PS domain entity and the RAN. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036784 | Data Transmission Method, Radio Access Network Device, Wireless Gateway and System - A data transmission method, a radio access network device, a wireless gateway and a system are disclosed. A downlink data transmission method of a radio access network includes: when receiving a downlink data packet transmitted by a wireless core network device, compressing the downlink data packet; transmitting the compressed downlink data packet to a radio frequency module, where the compressed downlink data packet is sent in a wireless manner via an air interface. An uplink data transmission method of a wireless gateway includes: when receiving an uplink data packet transmitted by a user terminal, compressing the uplink data packet; transmitting the compressed uplink data packet to a radio frequency module, where the compressed uplink data packet is sent in a wireless manner via an air interface. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036785 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING QOS AND/OR POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL OF A GUEST USER - The invention proposes a method and device for controlling QoS and/or policy and charging control of a guest user. The method proposes an innovative solution to extend the current policy and charging control architecture and online charging system to dynamically control the data connection of third party application services over network operator's network. This enables network operator and third party application provider to jointly provide QoS control service based on end user service usage limit. | 02-06-2014 |
20140044038 | In-Frame Acknowledgments and Retransmissions - Implementations for retransmitting erroneous portions within a transmission frame are described. A sender transmits a transmission frame and the receiver performs error detection on portions of the transmission frame in order to determine if any are received in error. The receiver sets up a feedback channel and transmits acknowledgements to the receiver to indicate that one or more portions have been received and to identify any portions that are received with errors. At least some of the acknowledgements are transmitted prior to receipt of the entire transmission frame. The sender retransmits any portions that are identified as being erroneous within the transmission frame. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044039 | COOPERATIVE MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK WITH DATA BREAKOUT AT THE EDGE - A TCP context is transferred to a Gi Optimizer to provide cooperative mobility management in a mobile data network with a breakout system. The breakout system includes an Iub Optimizer at the MIOP@NodeB, and the Gi Optimizer at the MIOP@Core. When a MIOP@NodeB detects a mobility event for a broken out user equipment (UE), the Iub optimizer in the MIOP@NodeB coordinates with the Gi optimizer to transfer the TCP/UDP connection established between the UE and the IuB Optimizer to the Gi Optimizer. After the transfer, the UE is served by the Gi Optimizer. The transfer of the TCP/UDP connection to the Gi optimizer may require tunnel stitching at the MIOP@RNC depending on the PDP context state and the RRC state of the UE. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044040 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING ACTIVE CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REFERENCE SIGNAL (CSI-RS) CONFIGURATIONS - Techniques for indicating active channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) configurations for a user equipment (UE) are disclosed. The UE may be configured with multiple CSI-RS configurations and may receive signaling indicating which of its CSI-RS configurations are active. Improved performance may be obtained by dynamically signaling the active CSI-RS configurations. In one example, the UE may receive first signaling (e.g., upper-layer signaling) indicating a plurality of CSI-RS configurations configured for the UE. The UE may receive second signaling (e.g., lower-layer signaling) indicating at least one active CSI-RS configuration for the UE. The active CSI-RS configuration(s) may include all or a subset of the plurality of CSI-RS configurations. The UE may perform at least one communication task based on the at least one active CSI-RS configuration for the UE. The communication task(s) may include de-rate matching, CSI reporting, cell set management, etc. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044041 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTED TRANSCEIVERS FOR DISTRIBUTED ACCESS POINTS CONNECTIVITY - A controlling entity communicates with a plurality of network devices having a plurality of distributed transceivers and one or more corresponding antenna arrays. The controlling entity receives information, such as location information, propagation environment characteristics, physical environment characteristics and/or link parameters and quality from the network devices and/or communication devices that are communicatively coupled to the plurality of network devices. The controlling entity coordinates communication of data streams for the distributed transceivers and the antenna arrays based on the received information. The network device comprises an access point, a router, a switching device, a gateway and/or a set top box. The controlling entity is located within or external to one of the network devices. One or more functions performed by the controlling entity are split between the controlling entity and one or more of the network devices. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044042 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTELLIGENTLY CONTROLLING PROPAGATION ENVIRONMENTS IN DISTRIBUTED TRANSCEIVER COMMUNICATIONS - A communication device comprising a plurality of distributed transceivers and one or more corresponding antenna arrays is operable to determine characteristics of one or more objects that are sensed within a surrounding communication environment of the communication device. The communication device may configure one or more of the plurality of distributed transceivers and/or one or more of the corresponding antenna arrays to handle communication of one or more data streams based on the determined characteristics. Exemplary characteristics may comprise reflective property and/or refractive property of the sensed one or more objects within the surrounding communication environment of the communication device. The communication device may be operable to store the determined characteristics, corresponding temporal information and/or spatial information for the sensed one or more objects, and/or signal propagation characteristics within a surrounding communication environment of the communication device. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044043 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING COMMUNICATION IN LEAKY WAVE DISTRIBUTED TRANSCEIVER ENVIRONMENTS - A communication device may comprise a plurality of distributed transceivers and one or more corresponding antenna arrays. A processor may configure a first distributed transceiver to receive signals comprising one or more first data streams via one or more first communication links. The processor may configure a second distributed transceiver to receive signals comprising one or more second data streams via one or more second communication links. The processor may determine a channel response matrix associated with communication of the one or more first data streams via the one or more first communication links and/or the one or more second data streams via the one or more second communication links. The processor may optimize one or both of link capacity and/or link reliability of the one or more first communication links and/or the one or more second communication links based on the determined channel response matrix. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044044 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO SUPPORT CHANNEL REFINEMENT AND MULTI-STREAM TRANSMISSION IN MILLIMETER WAVE SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus for sending and receiving mobile station (MS) specific channel state indication reference symbols (CSI-RS) is provided. A common CSI-RS is sent from a base station (BS) and is received by an MS. First feedback is sent to the BS from the MS based on the common CSI-RS. A configuration of an MS-specific CSI-RS is sent from the BS and received by the MS. An MS specific CSI-RS is sent from the BS and is received by the MS. Second feedback is sent to the BS from the MS based on the MS specific CSI-RS. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044045 | STRUCTURE OF TVWS OFDM PHY FRAME - The present invention relates to the structure of a frame which can be used as the Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) physical (PHY) standard of TV White Spaces (TVWS). In accordance with the present invention, the throughput of an OFDM system can be improved by providing the TVWS OFDM PHY structure that supports efficient data transfer, and the wide selection of a scrambling seed can be guaranteed because a scrambling seed value is included in the PHY header. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044046 | REDUCING PACKET LOSS AT A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE DUE TO A CONNECTION INTERRUPTION - A method for reducing packet loss during data transfer from a network to a wireless communication device over a connection is disclosed. The method can include the wireless communication device signaling a first receive window size for a data transfer; determining occurrence of an event resulting in an interruption of the connection; and, in response to determining occurrence of the event, signaling a second receive window size for the data transfer prior to the event to trigger an adjustment of a data rate of the data transfer in preparation for the event. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044047 | RECORDING COMMUNICATIONS - Controlling the recording of a wireless device's communications in a system comprising the wireless device, a recording device operable to record the wireless device's communications, and a controlling server operable to control the recording of the wireless device's communications in accordance with a recording protocol. The wireless device's communications are recorded according to a first recording policy. At the wireless device, an event is detected that indicates a change in the recording environment of the wireless device. The wireless device transmits an alert to the controlling server identifying the event. The controlling server compares the identified event to events defined by the recording protocol, and based on the comparison determines to instruct the wireless device to implement a second recording policy. The controlling server transmits an instruction to the wireless device to implement the second recording policy. The wireless device modifies its operation so as to implement the second recording policy. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044048 | BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A base station (BS) that changes a state of the BS from a first state to a second state, wherein the first state being a state in which a sector of the BS is not switched off, transmission from the BS to the sector is able to be received by mobile station devices, and the BS is able to communicate with the mobile station devices in the sector, and the second state being a state in which the sector is switched off, transmission from the BS to the sector is unable to be received by the mobile station device being able to communicate with the BS on the first state device in the sector, the BS is unable to communicate with the mobile station devices being able to communicate with the BS on the first state in the sector and handover into the sector is unable to be performed. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044049 | Telecommunications Network Responsive to Server-Provided Location Information - The invention relates to a telecommunications network for wirelessly establishing a connection with a terminal located at a location in said network by a server. The terminal is identified by a terminal identifier in the telecommunications network. The telecommunications network contains a first network node and a second network node. The first network node is configured for receiving a data unit for the terminal from the server, that is preferably located outside the telecommunications network. The data unit comprises the terminal identifier. The first network node is being configured for receiving a location identifier indicative of the location of the terminal from the server and for deriving an address of the second network node using the location identifier. The derived address of the second network node is then used for transmitting a first connection request for establishing a connection with the derived second network node. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044050 | Method for Maintaining Time Advance Timer, Base Station and Terminal Equipment - A method for maintaining a time advance timer, a base station and terminal equipment, the method includes: judging by a base station whether a band to be uplink adjusted includes only the band where a primary cell is located; and transmitting by the base station a time advance command to the band where the primary cell is located if the band where the primary cell is located is only included, such that the time advance timer to which the band where the primary cell is located corresponds is restarted. The advantages exist in that by processing time advance timers by the base station or the terminal, the time advance timer to which the band where the PCell is located corresponds expires at last, thereby preventing interruption of communications of the terminal due to advanced expiration of the time advance timer to which the band where the PCell is located corresponds. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044051 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING TRACKING AREA IDENTITY LISTS IN A MOBILE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes communicating a plurality of queries associated with common tracking areas in a wireless network; identifying a set of serving gateways that serve the common tracking areas; generating a tracking area identity (TAI) list to be used in provisioning network resources for user equipment; and selecting a first serving gateway from the set of serving gateways for the user equipment, wherein the first serving gateway is selected based on the common tracking areas served by the set of serving gateways. In more specific embodiments, the queries are domain name system (DNS) queries that are supported by a network element and that have no cached DNS response. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044052 | UPLINK POWER CONTROL FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide closed loop and open loop power control techniques for each antenna of the user equipment (UE). The access point may measure the received signals from each antenna of the user equipment, calculate a power adjustment parameter for each antenna of the UE, and transmit the parameters to the UE. The UE may use the adjustment parameters to determine the transmit power value for each antenna. In addition, the UE may measure the path loss for each antenna and update the transmit power per antenna based on the path loss and other parameters. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044053 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a communication control apparatus including a communication controller that controls communication with other communication control apparatuses, the communication exchanging information about terminal grouping to distinguish operations to a specific wireless terminal and to other wireless terminals. | 02-13-2014 |
20140050145 | Methods, Radio Base Station and Radio Network Controller - It is presented a method performed in a first radio base station, RBS, in communication with a radio network controller, RNC. The RNC is configured for multi-flow HSDPA, High-Speed Downlink Packet Access, operation and packet data units, PDUs, are communicated toward a user equipment, UE, node via the first RBS and at least one second RBS. The method comprises: detecting PDU drop events and/or loss events; and communicating information from the RBS to the RNC, notifying of each detected PDU drop event and/or loss event. A corresponding RBS and RNC are also presented. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050146 | MULTI-RADIO INTERFERENCE MITIGATION VIA FREQUENCY SELECTIVITY - A user equipment (UE) may mitigate interference on the user equipment with two or more radios. In some instances, the UE may determine when communications of the two or more radios experience interference, in which two radios of the two or more radios operate with the same radio access technology. Further, the UE may alter an operating frequency of a first radio of the two radios to mitigate the interference. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050147 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A method of controlling data transmission over a radio network between a first machine-type communication (MTC) entity and a second MTC entity in a wireless telecommunications system is described. The method comprises an element of the radio network architecture, for example a base station, deriving a transmission cost for transmitting data between the first and second MTC entities based on traffic load, and then communicating the transmission cost to one or both of the MTC entities. The MTC entities may then control their data transmissions based on the transmission cost. Thus the radio network is able to dynamically manage traffic load by providing a cost incentive for transmitting MTC data when network resources are under utilised and applying a cost penalty for transmissions made while the network is relatively busy. Furthermore, the MTC entities of the wireless communication system are able to select times and/or manner of data transmissions to reduce their overall cost of using the network. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050148 | Methods and Apparatus for Error Correction for Coordinated Wireless Base Stations - Methods and apparatus for coordinated error correction among a set of wireless base stations in communication with one another. In one embodiment, the wireless base stations are part of a cellular network having various cellular base stations (including a serving base station, and multiple supplemental base stations), and transmit multiple redundant versions of a transport block using a Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) based scheme. The aggregate of the multiple redundant versions of the transport block are soft combined and acknowledged (ACK) or not-acknowledged (NACK) by the cellular equipment. The serving base station and supplemental base station devices dynamically configure the bundled acknowledgment operation based on various desired operational attributes relating to the operational parameters of the network. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050149 | OFDM/OFDMA FRAME STRUCTURE FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An OFDM/OFDMA frame structure technology for communication systems is disclosed. The OFDM/OFDMA frame structure technology comprises a variable length sub-frame structure with efficiently sized cyclic prefixes and efficient transition gap durations operable to effectively utilize OFDM/OFDMA bandwidth. Furthermore, the frame structure provides compatibility with multiple wireless communication systems. An uplink frame structure and a downlink frame structure are provided. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050150 | ROBUST MULTIPATH ROUTING - Implementations related to robust multipath routing are disclosed. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050151 | Link Quality Reporting For A Communication System Capable Of Using Different Modulation Schemes - It is described a method for reporting, in a link quality report ( | 02-20-2014 |
20140050152 | TRUNK MOUNTED AUTOMOTIVE NETWORK SERVER WITH WIRELESS DATA CAPABILITY - An automotive server arrangement includes an infotainment head unit disposed in a passenger compartment of a vehicle. An antenna is associated with the vehicle. At least one audio speaker is associated with the passenger compartment of the vehicle. A network server is disposed in-between the head unit and the antenna. The network server includes a processor and an amplifier disposed within a common housing. The amplifier drives at least one audio speaker. The processor is connected to the head unit and to the antenna. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050153 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step of transmitting, by the mobile station UE# | 02-20-2014 |
20140050154 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR ASSISTING A NETWORK MANAGEMENT UNIT - A method in a base station for assisting a network management unit in managing a cellular network is provided. The base station determines a status of the cellular network. The status affects a measurement of a quality of a radio channel between the base station and a user equipment comprised in the cellular network. The measurement is to be performed by the user equipment. The base station receives a feedback report from the user equipment comprising the measurement. The base station evaluates a validity of the measurement based on the determined status. The base station sends a report to the network management unit. The report comprises an indication of the measurement and an indication of the validity, thereby assisting the network management unit in managing the cellular network. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050155 | MODE CONVERSION METHOD FOR CLIENT COOPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREOF - Provided are a mode conversion method for client cooperation in a wireless communication system and a device thereof. A first device converts a second system repetitively into an active mode which can receive a signal and a non-active mode which cannot receive the signal based on mode conversion information, and detects at least one second device based on the second system in the active mode. The first device is connected to the base station through the second system and another first system. | 02-20-2014 |
20140056214 | MESSAGE HANDLING EXTENSION USING CONTEXT ARTIFACTS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: identifying a context artifact, wherein the context artifact defines a context object type for use by the DRA; receiving a Diameter message at the DRA from an origin device; establishing a context object of the context object type defined by the context artifact; evaluating a rule that includes a context object reference, wherein the evaluation includes accessing the context object based on the context object reference; and transmitting a message based on the evaluation of the rule. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056215 | RAPID NETWORK ACQUISITION AND OVERHEAD MESSAGE STORAGE FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE DEVICES - A stationary access terminal, such as a stationary remote sensor, capable of wireless communication with a network is provided. The access terminal obtains sector information associated with a wireless network node by establishing a communication link with the network node. The access terminal then stores the sector information in non-volatile memory, and later retrieves the sector information from the memory, for example, after a subsequent boot up or wake up event. The stored sector information is used by the access terminal to establish a subsequent communication link with the network node, and may include at least one of channel, band, and pseudo-random number sequence information. The access terminal may also store overhead messages received from the network node in the non-volatile memory. The stored overhead messages may later be retrieved to establish system operating parameters of the network node after the subsequent boot up or wake up event. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056216 | SUBSCRIBER RECORD CONTEXT OBJECTS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: receiving a Diameter message at the DRA from an origin device, wherein the Diameter message is associated with a subscriber; establishing a subscriber record context object in response to receiving the Diameter message, wherein the subscriber record context object is associated with a subscriber record of the subscriber; evaluating a rule that includes a context object reference, wherein the evaluation includes accessing the subscriber record. context object based on the context object reference; and transmitting a message based on the evaluation of the rule. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056217 | INTELLIGENT INTER RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MEASUREMENT REPORTING - A user equipment (UE) may scale down a signal strength of a radio access technology (RAT) cell in a report to a serving cell to avoid multiple connection attempts to the same radio access technology cell. The UE may initiate a predefined timer, called a target cell timer, on which the scaling down of the reported signal strength of the particular RAT cell is based. The timer is initiated when the UE returns back to the serving cell after failure to access a top ranked RAT neighbor cell. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056218 | Systems and Methods for Measuring Available Bandwidth in Mobile Telecommunications Networks - A network device receives probe packets communicated by a user equipment device. The network device communicates response packets back to the user equipment device, including timestamps, and/or other information. The user equipment device may be configured to test the performance of different portions of a wireless network (i.e., determine an available bandwidth measurement throughput (ABMT) of the wireless network) by accessing different network devices (or information associated with different network devices). | 02-27-2014 |
20140056219 | UPLINK DATA SENDING METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention provides an uplink data sending method and a user equipment. The method includes: distinguishing uplink data to be sent, and obtaining acknowledgement data of downlink TCP service data and uplink TCP service data; buffering the acknowledgement data of the downlink TCP service data in a first buffer, and buffering the uplink TCP service data in a second buffer; and sending in priority the acknowledgement data of the downlink TCP service data in the first buffer. In embodiments of the present invention, a peak rate of a downlink TCP service may still be ensured when services are concurrent. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056220 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE DISCOVERY - Methods and apparatus for performing device-to-device (D2D) discovery are described. A service discovery process may include a discoverable device (e.g., a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU)) sending a discovery request, over a wireless connection, for a radio resource for the purpose of performing a transmission for radio frequency (RF) proximity detection for a given service. The WTRU may receive a discovery response including a configuration for RF proximity detection from a network, which configuration may be associated to the service. The configuration for RF proximity may be received by dedicated signaling, (e.g., physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)), in particular for a discoverable WTRU. The configuration for RF proximity may be received on a broadcast channel, (e.g., a discovery shared channel (DISCH)), in particular for a monitoring WTRU, and may include one or more service identities, each associated with an RF proximity detection configuration, or a validity information and a measurement configuration. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056221 | METHOD FOR PAGING-BASED DELGATE INDICATION FOR M2M GROUP - A machine-to-machine-type (M2M-type) device and technique comprising a transceiver at an M2M-type device that receives from a base station a paging message designating the M2M-type device to be a delegate for a group of M2M-type devices. In response, a processor of the M2M-type device generates an acknowledgement and/or an M2M-type group-based reentry communication for the transceiver to send to the base station. The base station is part of wireless network that can comprise one of a Bluetooth-based standard wireless network, an IEEE 802.11-based standard wireless network, an IEEE 802.16-based standard wireless network, an IEEE 802.18-based wireless network standard, a 3GPP LTE-based wireless network standard, a 3GPP-based protocol wireless network, a 3GPP2 Air Interface Evolution (3GPP2 AIE) based wireless network standard, a UMTS-based protocol wireless network, a CDMA2000-based protocol wireless network, a GSM-based protocol wireless network, a cellular-digital-packet-data-based (CDPD-based) protocol wireless network, or a Mobitex-based protocol wireless network. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056222 | SHARED CIRCUIT SWITCHED SECURITY CONTEXT - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide a method for wireless communications. The method generally includes attempting, by a machine type communication (MTC) device, an attach procedure in order to detect a triggering request from an MTC server. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056223 | FRAGMENTATION FOR LONG PACKETS IN A LOW-SPEED WIRELESS NETWORK - A method includes determining, at a transmitter, whether the transmitter supports multi-fragment acknowledgment (MFA) based on a parameter of the transmitter. The method also includes transmitting a first frame to a receiver. A fragment block acknowledgment (BA) support sub-field of a sub-1 gigahertz (S1G) capabilities information field of a S1G capabilities element of the first frame has a first value in response to determining that the transmitter supports MFA. The fragment BA support sub-field has a second value in response to determining that the transmitter does not support MFA. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056224 | EFFICIENT DELIVERY OF REAL-TIME SERVICES OVER A WIRELESS NETWORK - In embodiments of the present disclosure improved capabilities are described for providing efficient delivery of real-time services over a large area broadband LTE wireless network, where optimization servers utilizing publish-subscribe broker services are provided within the wireless network to reduce the resources required for applications streaming data to a plurality of mobile cellular devices. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056225 | Method and Apparauts and Network Node for Applying Conditional CQI Reporting - A method for limiting Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) reporting from a User Equipment to a network node is provided where a User Equipment can transmit CQI reports to a network node, such as e.g. a base station, when the User Equipment is operating in low transmission and/or low reception activity mode. A limited CQI reporting is obtained by triggering the reporting according to one or more predefined rules, which to at least some extent depend on CQI specific information provided to the User Equipment from the network node. A User Equipment and a network node adapted to operate in accordance with the suggested method are also provided. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056226 | Base-Station Provided Access to IMS Services - Exemplary methods and systems for providing access to IMS services are disclosed herein. An exemplary method involves a first radio access network (RAN) component: (a) sending a registration message to an IMS network in order to register the first RAN component with the IMS network, wherein the IMS registration message provides an IP address at which to register the first RAN component, (b) receiving a service request from a first access terminal, wherein the first RAN component is a serving RAN component for the first access terminal, and (c) in response to receiving the service request, the first RAN component engaging in an IMS service on behalf of the first access terminal, wherein engaging in the IMS service on behalf of the first access terminal comprises sending the IMS network a first initiation message for a session event, wherein the first initiation message comprises: (i) a field that identifies the first access terminal and (ii) a field that includes an IP address of a second RAN component that serves a target access terminal. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056227 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STORE AND REPLAY FUNCTIONS IN A DIGITAL RADIO BROADCASTING RECEIVER - A method for receiving and processing a digital radio broadcasting signal includes: receiving a digital radio broadcasting signal including encoded content in a first format; processing the encoded content to convert the encoded content into a second format; storing the encoded content in a second format; and decoding the stored encoded content to recover decoded content. A receiver that implements the method is also provided. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056228 | MULTI-CLUSTER UPLINK TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method in a wireless communication device comprises determining transmission powers for at least two clusters, wherein each cluster includes at least one physical resource block (RB), determining a difference in a characteristic of the transmission powers determined for the at least two clusters, and varying a transmit power allocated to at least one cluster if the difference in the characteristic exceeds a power spread threshold, wherein the power allocated to each cluster is a function of pathloss between the wireless communication device and a serving base station. | 02-27-2014 |
20140064180 | DYNAMIC HEADER COMPRESSION BASED ON ATTRIBUTES OF TRAFFIC - A system may be configured to identify attributes of a bearer channel. Based on the attributes of the bearer channel, the system may identify a header compression policy associated with the bearer channel. The system may be configured to identify, based on attributes of traffic sent and/or received via the bearer channel, and further based on the header compression policy, that header compression should be performed on at least a portion of the traffic associated with the bearer channel. The system may be configured to perform header compression on the at least the portion of the traffic. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064181 | WIRELESS MESH NETWORK CONFIGURATION - A wireless mesh network employs an integrated interface between a plurality of access points for mitigating throughput degradation of multiple consecutive “daisy chain,” or mesh, links. The mesh network employs a plurality of access points, each linked back to a root access point by a series of “hops” through other access points. The wireless mesh network, therefore, employs a plurality of access points operable for wireless links to subscriber, or user, devices, including cellular phones, smart phones, tablet and laptop computing devices, or any suitable portable or handheld computing device. Access points establish an integrated interface with an adjacent access point for direct coupling of the access points for message traffic. The resulting integrated access point establishes a wireless link to a root access point connected to a backhaul network from which media services emanate. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064182 | MOBILITY DETECTION FOR EDGE APPLICATIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Various embodiments detecting wireless communication device mobility in a wireless communication network. In one embodiment, one or more Internet Protocol (IP) data packets associated with a wireless communication device are analyzed. The wireless communication device is coupled with the edge entity. A determination is made, based on the analyzing, that the wireless communication device is a newly coupled device at the edge entity. A central entity disposed within the wireless communication network is notified that the wireless communication device is currently coupled to the edge entity. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064183 | FAST ACCEPTANCE OF DIAMETER PEER FAILOVER - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a network node, the method including: receiving a connection request from a peer network node including a peer identifier; determining that the received peer identifier matches an identifier of an existing peer; sending a verification message to the existing peer; setting a timer; when a response the verification message is received before the timer expires: cancelling the timer; and rejecting the received connection request; when the timer expires: closing a connection to the existing peer; and accepting the new connection from the new peer. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064184 | SYSTEMS, APPARATUS, AND METHODS FOR ADDRESS FORMAT DETECTION - Systems, methods, and devices for address format detection are described herein. In one aspect, a method of detecting whether an addressing format is supported by an access point on a wireless network is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a request to an access point using an addressing format including a source address field and a separate transmitter address field. In some aspects, the request may be an address resolution protocol (ARP) request or an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) ping request. The request includes the source address field set to a first address and the transmitter address field set to a second address; monitoring transmissions of the access point to determine whether the access point transmits a response to the request that includes a destination address equal to the first address; and determining whether the access point supports the addressing format based on the monitoring. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064185 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SECURELY TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DISCOVERY AND PAGING MESSAGES - Methods, devices, and computer program products for transmitting and receiving discovery and paging messages in a wireless communication device are described herein. In one aspect, a wireless apparatus operable in a wireless communication system comprises a transmitter configured to transmit a medium access control change request message to an access terminal to initiate a change in a medium access control address of the wireless apparatus and a receiver configured to receive a medium access control change response message from the access terminal. The wireless apparatus further comprises a processor configured to change the medium access control address of the wireless apparatus in response to receiving the medium access control change response, wherein the transmitter is configured to transmit a medium access control change confirm message to the access terminal. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064186 | A Radio Network Controller, A Serving Base Station, A User Equipment and Methods Therein - A radio network controller, RNC, | 03-06-2014 |
20140064187 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system including: a terminal, and a base station including an antenna configured to perform wireless communication with the terminal, and a processor configured to perform, when a difference between a first throughput at a radio layer for the wireless communication and a second throughput at an upper layer to the radio layer for the wireless communication is larger than a given value, a processing to decrease errors at a radio layer for the wireless communication. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064188 | ARRANGEMENT FOR PROVIDING FUNCTIONS OF A MOBILE IP-CAN GATEWAY AND USE OF SUCH ARRANGEMENT FOR OFFLOADING TRAFFIC FROM SAID MOBILE IP-CAN - In an embodiment, there is provided an arrangement for providing functions of a mobile IP-CAN gateway, said arrangement comprising:
| 03-06-2014 |
20140064189 | USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION AND METHODS RELATED TO MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT - It is presented a method for controlling multiple input multiple output, MIMO, pilot channel boosting. The method is performed in a user equipment, UE, capable of MIMO transmissions using a primary and a secondary stream. The method comprising the steps of: determining a rank used for uplink transmissions from the UE; and determining a boosting parameter affecting power boosting of an Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel, E-DPCCH, and a Secondary Dedicated Physical Control Channel, S-DPCCH, based on the rank. A corresponding UE, base station and associated method are also presented. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064190 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING LTE UPLINK RANDOM ACCESS PREAMBLE BASED ON PARALLEL PROCESSING - Disclosed herein is an apparatus and method for detecting an LTE uplink random access preamble based on parallel processing. The apparatus for detecting an LTE uplink random access preamble based on parallel processing according to the present invention includes a generation unit for calculating a random access preamble sequence using a root index and generating channel delay profile data using the random access preamble sequence and a channel delay profile generation input signal. A comparison unit generates a preamble start position value corresponding to the root index and compares the preamble start position value with a channel delay profile index. A detection unit detects a peak value of the channel delay profile data if the preamble start position value is identical to the channel delay profile index. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064191 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELIABLY TRANSMITTING RADIO BLOCKS WITH PIGGYBACKED ACK/NACK FIELDS - A method and apparatus are described. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) generates data bits and piggybacked acknowledgement/non-acknowledgement (PAN) bits and generates a plurality of symbols based on the data bits and the PAN bits. Each symbol of the plurality of symbols represents a plurality of bits and has a least significant bit (LSB) position, and no PAN bits are present in the LSB position of each of the plurality of symbols. The plurality of symbols are transmitted. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064192 | Method and Apparatus for Supporting the Large Service Data Unit (SDU) - Systems and methodologies are described that segment or concatenate radio link control (RLC) service data units (SDUs) into RLC protocol data units (PDUs). In accordance with various aspects set forth herein, systems and/or methods are provided that receive a first RLC SDU, partition the first RLC SDU into a first RLC PDU and a second RLC PDU, set a length indicator (LI) field associated with the second RLC PDU to indicate the size of information contained in the second RLC PDU, concatenate the second RLC PDU with a third RLC PDU associated with a second RLC SDU to form a concatenated RLC PDU, and dispatch the first RLC PDU, the concatenated RLC PDU, and a fourth RLC PDU associated with the second RLC SDU. | 03-06-2014 |
20140071887 | REUSE OF AN IDLE PAGING SLOT OF A FRAME IN A MACHINE-TO-MACHINE (M2M) WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK (WAN) - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing wireless communications in a machine-to-machine (M2M) wireless Wide Area Network (WAN). A physical layer frame is generated. The frame being used for wireless M2M communications on a forward link in the M2M wireless WAN. A paging slot is generated in the frame for an M2M device in the M2M wireless WAN. A determination is made as to whether the paging slot includes available capacity. System information is inserted in the paging slot upon determining the paging slot includes available capacity. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071888 | Data Buffering based on Access Stratum Conditions in a Call Having both Circuit-Switched and Packet-Switched Components - Data buffering based on access-stratum conditions by a wireless user equipment (UE) device. A call may be established with a network via a wireless link. The call may include a circuit-switched component and a packet-switched component. It may be determined that the packet-switched component has been released by the network. The UE may have packet data for transmission to the network when the packet-switched component is released. The packet data may be buffered based on determining that the packet-switched component has been released by the network. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071889 | OVER-THE-TOP (OTT) VIDEO / VOICE CONFIGURATION - A user equipment (UE) provides for display, to a user, information identifying available over-the-top (OTT) services provided via voice-over-Long-Term Evolution (VoLTE), and receives, from the user, a selection of a particular OTT service of the available OTT services. The UE receives, from the user, information identifying a selected contact associated with the particular OTT service, and determines whether a particular UE associated with the selected contact is a VoLTE capable device or a non-VoLTE capable device. The UE provides a call to the particular UE, via a LTE network and an Internet protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network, when the particular UE is a VoLTE capable device. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071890 | DIAMETER PROTOCOL VERSION SPANS - Embodiments of the invention provide a method and apparatus for managing feature support requirements for a communication protocol with major-minor version spans having temporal constraints on feature definitions using a flexible Diameter command dictionary wherein context-specific definitions are defined to apply to different versions and releases. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071891 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL CELL IDENTIFIER COLLISION DETECTION AND NEIGHBORING CELL LIST CONSTRUCTION - System, apparatus, and methods are provided for preventing the collision of physical cell identifiers. A network entity broadcasts via a first radio technology a physical cell identifier of a second radio technology, where the first and second radio technologies are co-located in the network entity. The network entity receives from a neighboring network entity another physical cell identifier of the second radio technology used by the neighboring network entity, where the neighboring network entity broadcasts the another physical cell identifier via the first radio technology, and where the first and second radio technologies are co-located in the neighboring network entity. The network entity changes the physical cell identifier, in response to the physical cell identifier being the same as the another physical cell identifier. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071892 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF DATA COMMUNICATIONS IN MILLIMETER WAVE NETWORK - The method and apparatus of data communications for a transmitter in a millimeter wave network are provided. The method includes: generating a control physical layer (CPHY) preamble; generating a header, wherein the header includes a mode indicator; modulating and encoding a payload according to the mode indicator; generating a packet according to the control physical layer (CPHY) preamble, the header and the payload; and transmitting the packet. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071893 | TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A terminal including: an antenna configured to transmit a first random access signal, when the terminal loses a synchronization with a base station, to the base station, and to transmit a second random access signal, when a response signal to the first random access signal is not received by the terminal, to the base station after a period, and a processor configured to obtain a detection result by detecting, when the terminal loses the synchronization with the base station, whether a communication is in progress or not, and to set the period based on the detection result. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071894 | VARIABLE BLOCK LENGTH AND SUPERPOSITION CODING FOR HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST - An eNB may retransmit packets according to a hybrid automatic repeat request using superposition coding. In one instance, the eNB receives a negative-acknowledgement of an initially transmitted packet and retransmits at least one packet according to hybrid automatic repeat request using superposition coding in response to the negative-acknowledgement. The eNB also retransmits packets according to variable block length retransmission. In this instance, the eNB receives a negative-acknowledgement of an initially transmitted fixed block length packet and retransmits a variable block length packet in response to the negative-acknowledgement | 03-13-2014 |
20140071895 | Network Selection Based On Customizing Crowdsourced Connection Quality Data - Embodiments select networks for connection based on application-specific quality scores. A request is received from an application for a network connection. Connection quality data for nearby networks is accessed. The connection quality data is derived from crowdsourced data. The connection quality data is adjusted based on a device context to produce an application-specific quality score for each of the networks. One or more of the networks are selected for connection based on the application-specific quality scores. In some embodiments, a single network connection endpoint is provided to the application to abstract connection management details from the application. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071896 | SYSTEM LEVEL ARCHITECTURES FOR RELAYED UPLINK COMMUNICATION - A wireless communication method and apparatus are disclosed for assigning different phases, (i.e., time periods), to perform data transmissions over designated frequency bands in a cooperative relaying system. In phase 1, a relay station (RS) listens to a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and successfully receives b information bits. In phase 2, the RS and WTRU cooperatively transmit these b information bits to the destination. These transmissions may be performed in a unicast scheme, wherein a WTRU sends information to a selected RS in phase 1, and the RS forwards the information to a base station (BS) in phase 2. The transmission may also be performed in a multicast scheme, wherein the WTRU sends information to the RS and the BS in phase 1, and the RS transmits a subset the information to the BS in phase 2. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071897 | Synchronizing a Base Station in a Wireless Communication System - A method for synchronizing a wireless communication system is disclosed. A silence duration for a base station is determined based on the time required for a neighbor base station to obtain or maintain synchronization. All transmissions from the base station are ceased for the silence duration. Multiple base stations level may cease transmissions at the same time, thus mitigating interference. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071898 | Using EAP Instead of PPP for Authentication - Various embodiments are described for Point-to-Point Protocol-free (PPP-free) access and service authentication in a wireless network. An HRPD connection/session is established between an access terminal and the access network. Instead of setting up a PPP session and performing access (i.e., device access) authentication and service authentication using PPP, the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) is utilized. | 03-13-2014 |
20140078958 | SCHEMES FOR DETECTING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A station for accessing the resources of an access point in a wireless network, the station including a transmitter that is arranged to formulate probe requests and a transmit chain that is arranged to transmit probe requests on multiple channels of the access point simultaneously, wherein the probe requests are configured to elicit responses from the access point. Also disclosed is a station for accessing the resources of an access point in a wireless network, wherein the network includes a plurality of channels at different frequencies and the station includes a receiver and a receive chain arranged to deliver to the receiver a signal that has been acquired wirelessly from the network and which spans a plurality of the channels, wherein the receiver is arranged to produce a first spectrogram of the signal and to make a determination, by comparing the first spectrogram with one or more earlier spectrograms of the signal, of whether there is communication starting in the network in a channel covered by the signal. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078959 | BASE STATION, USER EQUIPMENT AND METHODS THEREIN - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a base station ( | 03-20-2014 |
20140078960 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a wireless communication system, a first wireless communication unit receives a first data including identification information associated with the first data transmitted from a third wireless communication unit; generates, when needed to share a specific time with a second wireless communication unit, a second data associated with a first reception time of the received first data; and transmits the second data and the identification information of the received first data. The second wireless communication unit calculates, upon reception of the identification information and the second data, if it is judged that the first data has previously been received based on the identification information, a time value needed to synchronize with the first wireless communication unit, based on a second reception time of the first data previously received and the first reception time of the first data associated with the second data transmitted from the first wireless communication unit. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078961 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL - A method of detecting a secondary synchronization signal in a received signal having desired primary and secondary synchronization signals, and interfering primary and secondary synchronization signals, includes providing information regarding primary synchronization signal location and, based on the information regarding primary synchronization signal location, performing successive interference cancellation to remove the interfering secondary synchronization signals for detecting the desired secondary synchronization signal, without performing successive interference cancellation on the primary synchronization signals. Apparatus for detecting a secondary synchronization signal in a received signal having (i) desired primary and secondary synchronization signals and (ii) interfering primary and secondary synchronization signals includes a source of information regarding primary synchronization signal location, and successive interference cancellation circuitry. The successive interference cancellation circuitry uses the information regarding primary synchronization signal location to remove interfering secondary synchronization signals for detecting the desired secondary synchronization signal, without performing successive interference cancellation on the primary synchronization signals. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078962 | METHODS FOR ACCESSING TO BASE STATION THAT USES SACK MECHANISM AND APPARATUSES USING THE SAME - A method for mobile station accessing to a base station in a wireless communication system that uses selective acknowledgement mechanism, comprising: transmitting, an access probe from the mobile station to the base station;
| 03-20-2014 |
20140078963 | METHODS FOR ACCESSING TO BASE STATION THAT USES SACK MECHANISM AND APPARATUSES USING THE SAME - A method for a mobile station to access to a base station in a wireless communication system that uses selective acknowledgement mechanism, comprising: transmitting, an access probe from the mobile station to the base station, the access probe including a plurality of data frames; setting, a vector in the mobile station based on a message received from the base station, wherein the message indicates parts of the plurality of data frames in the access probe are not decoded by the base station; passing, the parts of the plurality of data frames that are not decoded by the base station from a MAC layer of the mobile station to a PHY layer of the mobile station according to the vector; and sending, by the mobile station to the base station, the parts of plurality of data frames that are not decoded by the base station. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078964 | COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL, A SYSTEM AND A METHOD FOR INTERNET/NETWORK TELEPHONY - A communication terminal for Internet telephony is provided that handles and control communication of data in accordance with a standardized network protocol and exchanges data with a connecting unit connected to the Internet where the resulting data exchanged between the terminal and a connecting unit consist of packets in a standardized protocol data packet format embedded in a wireless format. This provides a communications terminal which uses a network or the Internet for the transfer of digitized speech, etc., thereby achieving great economic savings. Also, the flexibility is increased with respect to wireless communication with the network or the Internet without any need for specialized equipment and functionality. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078965 | Dynamic Buffer Status Report Selection For Carrier Aggregation - In one exemplary aspect of this invention a method includes buffering data in a user equipment and, in response to an amount of buffered data exceeding a threshold value, triggering the generation of a buffer status report and the sending of the buffer status report to a network access node, where the threshold value is a function of the capacity of a currently allocated uplink data transmission resource and some certain amount of time. In another exemplary embodiment the triggering of the generation of the buffer status report and the sending of the buffer status report to a network access node occurs when an amount of buffered data in a buffer of a particular logical channel group exceeds a maximum value associated with one of a plurality of buffer status report tables that is currently in use. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078966 | Distributed signal field for communications within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Distributed signal field for communications within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. In accordance with wireless communications, a signal (SIG) field employed within such packets is distributed or partitioned into at least two separate signal fields (e.g., SIG A and SIG B) that are located in different portions of the packet. A first of the SIG fields includes information that may be processed and decoded by all wireless communication devices, and a second of the SIG fields includes information that is specific to one or more particular wireless communication devices (e.g., a specific wireless communication device or a specific subset of the wireless communication devices). The precise locations of the at least first and second SIG fields within a packet may be varied, including placing a second of the SIG fields (e.g., including user-specific information) adjacent to and preceding a data field in the packet. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078967 | Local Access Point Name for Use in Accessing Packet Data Networks - One aspect provides a method of enabling a user entity, UE ( | 03-20-2014 |
20140078968 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR KEEP-ALIVE SIGNALLING - Various methods for determining network entity timeout values to improve keep-alive signaling are provided. One example method may comprise providing for transmission of a request for a timeout value associated with a keep-alive timer. The method of this example embodiment may further comprise receiving a response to the request, wherein the response comprises an indication of the timeout value of the keep-alive timer. Additionally, the method may further comprise determining an expiration time of the keep-alive timer based at least in part on the timeout value. The example method may further comprise providing for transmission of a keep-alive data packet prior to the determined expiration time. Similar and related example methods, example apparatuses, and example computer program products are also provided. | 03-20-2014 |
20140086142 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF ROUTING IP TELEPHONY DATA PACKET COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods of establishing a communications channel between a first telephony device and a second telephony device obtain information about the capabilities of various data network elements that can be used to establish the communications channel. The information about the elements is used to select a combination of elements that are used to establish the communications channel. A communications channel may also be monitored while it is in use. If the requirements for the channel change, the communications channel may also be changed accordingly. If any of the elements become incapable of providing the required level of service or functionality for a communications channel, the element may be removed from the communications channel. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086143 | Selection of M2M Devices by External Triggering - Techniques for facilitating the activation or establishing of a data session between an M2M device and a service provider external to the wireless communications network serving the M2M device are disclosed. In an example method, a trigger message is received ( | 03-27-2014 |
20140086144 | Automatic Transfer of Machine-to-Machine Device Identifier to Network-External Service Providers - Techniques for automatically transferring an external identifier for a wireless device from a wireless communication network serving the wireless device to a service provider external to the wireless communication network are disclosed. In an example method, carried out in one or more nodes of the wireless communication network, a binding between the external identifier and an internal identifier for the wireless device is maintained. A data session for the wireless device and corresponding to the service provider is established, wherein said establishing includes an assignment of an IP address to the wireless device. A request for the external identifier is received from the service provider, said request including the IP address for the wireless device. The external identifier is then sent to the service provider, in response to the request. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086145 | OPTIMIZED HARQ RECOMBINING WITHIN TRANSMISSION WINDOW - Techniques for optimized HARQ recombining are provided. In one exemplary embodiment, a method for wireless communication comprises receiving a broadcast message to determine a timing of a transmission window, receiving at least one transmission within the transmission window, and determining whether the at least one transmission is successfully decoded. The method further comprises instructing a lower protocol layer to ignore remaining transmissions within the transmission window upon a determination that the at least one transmission is successfully decoded, wherein the remaining transmissions and the at least one transmission comprise duplicate copies of a message segment. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086146 | LIMITING DATA USAGE OF A DEVICE CONNECTED TO THE INTERNET VIA TETHERING - Technologies and implementations for selectively synchronizing data with a tethered device are generally disclosed. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086147 | ENHANCED REGISTRATION MESSAGES IN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEMS - An enhanced Session Initiation Protocol (“SIP”) registration message having extended header information that is used by an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (“IMS”) core to determine the registration status of a mobile device and the physical location of the mobile device. The extended header information includes hardware and subscriber identifiers, such as an International Mobile Equipment Identity (“IMEI”) and International Mobile Subscriber Identity (“IMSI”). The IMS core queries an equipment identity register to validate IMEI/IMSI identifiers in the header to determine whether to deny registration to a mobile device. The IMS core also queries a capability database using an IMEI to determine which location determination techniques are supported by or suitable for the associated mobile device. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086148 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR COORDINATING CELL INTERFERENCE - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and a base station for coordinating cell interference. The method includes: receiving each backhaul signal transmitted by each cooperative base station, where the backhaul signal is determined by the cooperative base station according to strength of a signal received from a served user and strength of a signal received by a serving base station from an interfering user in the cooperative base station; and combining, at different stages of baseband processing and according to a type of each backhaul signal, a backhaul signal of a corresponding type and a user signal received from each user. An embodiment of the present invention further provides a base station. According to the embodiments of the present invention, backhaul transmission capacity is maximally utilized, backhaul transmission efficiency is improved, and relatively high performance is obtained. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086149 | SETTING MODE OF COMMUNICATION - A method in a communication system is disclosed. In the method a procedure for setting up a communication link between a first user equipment and a second user equipment via a communications network is initiated. Information regarding at least two modes of communication that can be used for communication via the communication link is signalled between the first and second user equipment. An indicator regarding a mode to be used for the communication is also signalled between the first user equipment and the second user equipment. After the signalling steps, a procedure for setting the mode of communication in accordance with the indicator is initiated in at least in one of the user equipment. According to an alternative embodiment signalling for reserving a possibility for at least tow different communication modes occurs between elements of the communication system. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086150 | ADDRESSING WIRELESS NODES - A user may point a control device at a controllable device for which control is desired, and the control device may detect the targeted controllable device. Additionally, the control device may detect a plurality of wireless nodes and list the available wireless nodes. For example, the control device may identify wireless nodes associated with a particular room in the house, or the control device may detect the wireless nodes within a certain range. The list may be a selectable list and a user may select the desired device to control from the list. Upon detection or user selection, the control device may establish control of the wireless node and initiate actions associated with the selected device. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086151 | QUALITY OF SERVICE LEVEL ADAPTATION FOR VISUAL SERVICES IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The invention refers to a method for performing a visual service associated to a mobile user equipment—UE—( | 03-27-2014 |
20140092805 | MIXED OFF-SITE/ON-SITE PREDICTION COMPUTATION FOR REDUCING WIRELESS RECONNECTION TIME OF A COMPUTING DEVICE - A method, system, and device for reducing connection time to a wireless access point includes recording wireless connection information in a log, remotely computing parameters as a function of past wireless connection information in the log, generating an ordered list of wireless access points most likely to be available for reconnection at a desired time as a function of recent wireless connection information in the log, and directly probing a wireless access point instead of initiating a wireless access point scan. In some embodiments, remotely computing parameters as a function of past wireless connection information in the log comprises performing genetic programming operations to generate prediction programs for later prediction of wireless access points most likely to be available for reconnection at a desired time. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092806 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR A MULTISTACK BLUETOOTH CONTROLLER - Embodiments may comprise logic such as hardware and/or code to assign or offload Bluetooth applications from the main processor while maintaining the legacy interface to the OS protocol stack and compatibility to legacy Bluetooth applications. Embodiments may comprise selection logic such as a multiplexer in the Bluetooth radio controller to allow it to support multiple Bluetooth core stacks. The selection logic may enable offloading specific applications to an additional stack, such as an embedded stack while supporting the operating system (OS) stack in parallel. Embodiments may also comprise a Bluetooth radio controller with one or more additional host interface drivers to support multiple Bluetooth core stacks. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092807 | REDUCING SYNCHRONIZATION TIMES DURING TESTING OF WIRELESS DEVICES - The disclosed embodiments provide a system that tests wireless devices. The system includes a signal generator that generates a downlink signal. The system also includes a management apparatus that tests a first wireless device using the downlink signal. During testing of the downlink signal, the management apparatus configures a second wireless device to listen to the downlink signal and save a set of tuning circuit states for synchronizing to the downlink signal. The management apparatus may then configure the second wireless device to load the saved tuning circuit states to expedite synchronization with the downlink signal during subsequent testing of the second wireless device. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092808 | MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION MONITORING FRAMEWORK FOR 3GPP SYSTEMS - A 3GPP monitoring architecture framework provides monitoring event configuration, detection, and reporting for machine-type and other mobile data applications using a machine type communication interworking function (MTC-IWF) that communicates monitoring event configuration, detection, and reporting messages through existing interfaces, such as Tsp, T4, and T5 interfaces. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092809 | TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA BASED ON MULTIPATH - Methods, apparatuses and systems for transmitting and receiving data based on multipath for transmitting data based on multipath include: establishing WiMAX connection-based multiple paths between a first device and a second device; transmitting data frames in a data queue in the multiple paths; obtaining the quality condition of the multiple paths; and based on the quality condition, adjusting the transmission of the data frames in the data queue in the multiple paths. According to one aspect, there is provided a method for receiving data based on multipath, which includes: establishing WiMAX connection-based multiple paths between a first device and a second device; receiving a plurality of data frames in the multiple paths; processing the received plurality of data frames based on quality condition of the multiple paths. There are further provided corresponding apparatuses and systems. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092810 | TRANSMISSION DEVICE, RECEPTION DEVICE FOR PROVIDING SIMULTANEOUS DATA TRANSMISSION SERVICE AND METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are a transmission device, a reception device and a method for providing a simultaneous data transmission for a data session through a plurality of heterogeneous networks. The transmission device divides particular data to be transmitted into two or more partial data, transmits first partial data after inserting first tunneling information which induces the first partial data to pass through a first network of two or more networks into the first partial data, and transmits second partial data of the two or more partial data after inserting second tunneling information which induces the second partial data to pass through a second network of the two or more networks into the second partial data. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092811 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION AND USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION AND BASE STATION - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for transmitting/receiving channel status information on at least one of a plurality of nodes in a multi-node system. According the present invention, a channel status between a UE and a node which transmits data to the UE can be reported more accurately. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092812 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING A TIME ALIGNMENT TIMER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING A CARRIER AGGREGATION TECHNIQUE - Operation of a terminal for determining which time alignment timer is applied to a certain condition when specific timers operate for each carrier-wave group in the event a wireless communication system using carrier aggregation techniques. A terminal performs communication without malfunctions using a timer suitable for a certain condition. The terminal operates the timer by receiving, from a base station, a message including a timing advance command and an index on a timing advance group (TAG), operating the timer for the TAG, the index has a value of 00 when the TAG includes a first cell. A terminal operates a timer by operating a first timer for a TAG including a first cell, operating a second timer upon receipt of a timing advance command for a second TAG that does not include the first cell, and, if the first timer has expired, deeming the second timer to also be expired. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092813 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHARING CONNECTIVITY SETTINGS VIA SOCIAL NETWORKS - An apparatus for enabling sharing of one or more connectivity parameters with one or more friends may include a processor and memory storing executable computer code causing the apparatus to at least perform operations including detecting one or more connection parameters and associated data of at least one access point. The computer program code may further cause the apparatus to facilitate provision of the connection parameters and associated data for inclusion within at least one profile of a user. The profile may be associated with a social network service identifying one or more relationships among one or more determined friends of the user. The computer program code may further cause the apparatus to enable provision of the connection parameters and associated data to at least one device of the user or one or more devices of the friends. Corresponding methods and computer program products are also provided. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092814 | TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OF CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - The present disclosure is related to reporting channel state information associated with a downlink channel in a wireless communication system. | 04-03-2014 |
20140098740 | Signaling Control for Reduced Signaling Storm and Improved User Equipment Battery Life - A UE comprising a transmitter configured to transmit data from a network; and a processor coupled to the transmitter and configured to execute an application that performs signaling with a wireless network via the transmitter, determine that the application is assigned to an application group based on signaling requirements of the application, and determine that the application group is associated with a connection parameter that limits network signaling of all applications in the group, and initiate a network signaling link for the application according to the connection parameter. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098741 | Indoor and Outdoor 700 MHz or 4G LTE Fabric Wi-Fi Non Mesh and Non Relay Enterprise Private Network Wi-Fi Solution - The 4G LTE Fabric WI-FI network solution provides a secure, Wi-Fi private networking solution for indoor, outdoor, and multi-location deployments. The “Fabric” Wi-Fi solution improves on the legacy mesh or web Wi-Fi networks used today, by eliminating relay latency that is experienced due to the recognized degradation of the internet signal which is distributed from the centralized hub, connected to the internet. The signal hops between wireless access points that extend away from the hub and the single point of entry for the internet signal. The 4G LTE Fabric Wi-Fi network solution integrates with the cellular 4G LTE network by installing a 4G LTE modem/network card in each individual wireless access point, providing independent point to point internet access. Networked by a hosted cloud based controller system, the network is managed remotely, providing Wi-Fi coverage that becomes scalable, more stable, increases network capacity, and provides multiple layers of redundancy. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098742 | Up-Converter for Ethernet Physical Layer - An interface device includes a first connector to connect to a port of a switch, where the switch sends data packets at a first rate and a second connector to connect to a port of a device, where the device sends data packets at a second rate slower than the first rate. A physical control layer connects to the first connector and the second connector to control a flow of data packets. The physical control layer throttles down the flow of data packets to the second connector when the data packets are travelling from the first connector to the second connector, and matches a speeds of the flow of data packets to the first connector when the data packets are travelling from the second connector to the first connector. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098743 | RESOLVING CO-CHANNEL INTERFERENCE BETWEEN OVERLAPPING USERS USING RANK SELECTION - An improved method for resolving interference between co-channel users is disclosed. A peak in a spectrum generated by a MUSIC algorithm is determined for a signal of interest (“SOI”) using a noise subspace. Also, an estimated carrier frequency offset (“CFO”) is determined for the SOI based on the determined peak in the spectrum. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098744 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION OF PROTOCOL DATA UNITS - A method and system are disclosed that allow for the control of transmission characteristics associated with an exchange of protocol data units (PDUs) between a first wireless device and a second wireless device. The first wireless device determines a number of transmission conditions that may include, for example, a maximum duration of time that the first wireless device can spend receiving or transmitting each PDU. The first wireless device embeds the transmission conditions into a frame, and transmits the frame to the second wireless device. The second wireless device may selectively modify a size of the PDUs in response to the maximum duration of time so that the first wireless device can receive each of the PDUs in less than the maximum duration of time. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098745 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMPRESSING DATA PACKETS IN LTE EVOLVED MULTICAST BROADCAST MULTIMEDIA SERVICE - Compression of broadcast data packets is described in which a compressed broadcast data packet is formed by causing at least one field in a packet header to be excluded from the transmitted data packet. The data from the compressed or removed field is data that is otherwise available to a user entity. The user entity receives the compressed broadcast data packet and determines information corresponding to at least one of the eliminated fields in order to process the received broadcast information. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098746 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION, AND TERMINAL DEVICE - The present invention provides a communication method. The method includes: determining, by a first base station serving a first cell, a position of an almost blank subframe and transmission power of the almost blank subframe according to obtained adjustment information about a second cell of a second base station; and determining a frame structure for the second cell according to the adjustment information, the position of the almost blank subframe, and the transmission power of the almost blank subframe. The present invention further provides a base station and a terminal device. With the present invention, transmission power of each almost blank subframe may be adaptively adjusted according to the adjustment information about the second cell, so that interference between the first cell and the second cell is reduced. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098747 | Handling Redundant Data in a Communication System - Explicit discard indications are used that allows a radio network controller ( | 04-10-2014 |
20140105101 | Method and System for Low Power Transmission and Data Alignment - A method and apparatus automatically maintains a JESD204 serial data link ( | 04-17-2014 |
20140105102 | Method for Determining Feedback Information and Circuit to Perform such Method - A method includes receiving a first signal at a circuit from a first base station and receiving a second signal at the circuit from a second base station different from the first base station. The method further includes determining a first channel estimate based on the first signal, determining a second channel estimate based on the second signal and determining a feedback information based on the first channel estimate and based on the second channel estimate. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105103 | Offloaded Security as a Service - In one implementation, traffic in a mobile network is offloaded to a security as a service server or a cloud server. A mobile access gateway (MAG) in the mobile network identifies one or more mobile nodes that are configured for communication on the mobile network. The MAG receives a message that includes an address of a mobile node and sends a request based on the message to the security as a service server. The MAG forwards traffic flows to the security as a service server according to the message, which is configured to detect an indication of malicious software in the traffic flows and/or filter content of the traffic flows according to a user profile. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105104 | Cost Optimization of Wireless-Enabled Metering Infrastructures - Embodiments of the present disclosure include a system for managing cost in a wireless enabled advanced metering infrastructure (AMI). The system includes a remote server, a wide area network, and an access point device. The system further includes wireless enabled meters coupled to each other and to the access point through a neighborhood area network (NAN). The system includes datasinks. Each datasink is a wireless enabled meter capable of being a data coordinator and capable of receiving metering information from the sensors, processing metering information, and transmitting metering information to the access point. Moreover, each wireless enabled meter is capable of being a routing node and an endpoint node. Also, a first set of wireless enabled meters are configured to be routing nodes and a second set of wireless enabled meters are configured to be endpoint nodes based on a graph theoretic algorithm to reduce the cost of the AMI. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105105 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION, AND MANAGEMENT APPARATUS - A communication method performed in a communication system including a base station and a plurality of terminals, the communication method including: transmitting, by the base station, a first signal specifying a representative terminal of an aggregation group to which member terminals of the plurality of terminals belongs, each of the member terminals on which common application is installed in common, and relaying, by the representative terminal, communications associated with the common application between a server apparatus and one or more non-representative terminals other than the representative terminal of the member terminals, the server apparatus providing service for the common application. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105106 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - A base station apparatus adapted to inform a mobile station apparatus of a signature not reserved as a dedicated signature in case of causing the mobile station apparatus to perform a random access by using a randomly selected signature. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105107 | INSTANT VIDEO AND VOICEMAIL MESSAGING METHOD AND MEANS - The invention relates to the field of instant messaging. More specifically the invention relates to a server centric method and unit for instant voice and video mail messaging. Even more particularly the invention relates to voicemail messaging with mobile terminals. The inventive methods and units under study allow faster voice messaging and enable similar, but not identical audio/video message “ping ball”. The sending of voicemail in accordance with the invention is instantaneous and involves no different telephone numbers for the sender to remember. The reception of messages is always instantaneous, provided the recipient is available, and only if not available, may the delivery of the messages be delayed. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105108 | COMMUNICATING A MESSAGE REQUEST TRANSACTION TO A LOGICAL DEVICE - A general input/output communication port implements a communication stack that includes a physical layer, a data link layer and a transaction layer. The transaction layer includes assembling a packet header for a message request transaction to one or more logical devices. The packet header includes a format field to indicate the length of the packet header and to further specify whether the packet header includes a data payload, a subset of a type field to indicate the packet header relates to the message request transaction and a message field. The message field includes a message to implement the message request transaction. The message includes at least one message that is selected from a group of messages. The group of messages to include a message to unlock a logical device, a message to reset a logical device, a message to indicate a correctable error condition, a message to indicate an uncorrectable error condition, a message to indicate a fatal error condition, a message to report a bad request packet, a message to indicate power management and a message to emulate an interrupt signal. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105109 | Joint Transmission in a Wireless Network - A system for receiving joint transmission wireless signals may include a transceiver to receive a plurality of colliding wireless signals. One of the wireless signals may include reference signal data while another of the wireless signals may include user data. The reference signal data may be combined with the user data into a superimposed signal. The reference signal data may be filtered out from the superimposed data, and the user data may be decoded. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105110 | TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND TRANSMIT POWER SETTING METHOD - The objective of the present invention is to provide a terminal device capable of suppressing delay in switching between transmit/receive points, and of reliably switching between the transmit/receive points. In the device, a reception processing unit ( | 04-17-2014 |
20140105111 | Over The Air Programming Via A Broadband Access Gateway - A system and method supporting over-the-air programming of access device such as, for example, a mobile multimedia handset and a wireless personal digital assistant (PDA) via a broadband access gateway, is disclosed. The broadband access gateway may receive identifying information from the access device via a personal area network and/or a wireless local area network, and may transfer the identifying information to a wide area network or a third party content provider, via a broadband network. The broadband access gateway may enable the registration of the access device with the wide area network, and may receive firmware/software updates and/or provisioning parameters via the broadband network. The gateway may then transfer the firmware/software update and/or provisioning parameters to the access device via the personal area network and/or wireless local area network. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105112 | METHOD FOR QOS GUARANTEES IN A MULTILAYER STRUCTURE - A method in which a user equipment processes data in a wireless mobile communication system is provided. The method includes the steps of receiving a first data block from an upper layer, transferring a second data block including the first data block to a lower layer at a particular protocol layer, discarding the first and second data blocks present in the particular protocol layer if a certain period of time has passed, and transferring information associated with the discard of the second data block to the lower layer. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105113 | Network Architecture for Data Communication - This invention relates to a network architecture for data communication between data sources and data destinations via network nodes and at least one data concentrator. According to the invention the nodes ( | 04-17-2014 |
20140105114 | Facilitating Synchronization Between a Base Station and a User Equipment - Methods and apparatus are provided for facilitating synchronization between a base station (BS) and a user equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system. The UE receives a synchronization signal originated by the BS. The synchronization signal is encoded with a selected cyclically permutable (CP) codeword. The selected CP codeword is selected from a set of CP codewords. Encoding of the synchronization signal is facilitated by a repetitive cyclically permutable (RCP) codeword derivable from the selected CP codeword. The RCP codeword has a plurality of codeword elements each associated with a value, the value of at least one codeword element in the RCP codeword being repeated in another codeword element position in the RCP codeword. And the synchronization signal is decoded in accordance with repetitive structure of the RCP codeword. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105115 | VIRTUAL BROADBAND RECEIVER, AND SYSTEM AND METHOD UTILIZING SAME - A virtual broadband transmitting unit includes a stream generator to generate a multiplicity of data streams from an incoming media datastream, and a transmission manager to control the upload of the multiplicity of data streams along a multiplicity of transmission channels to at least one wireless communication network. A virtual broadband receiver includes means to receive a multiplicity of media data streams from a multiplicity of data connections, and an assembly engine to assemble the data streams into a single media stream. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105116 | Method and Apparatus for Exchanging Wireless Network Management Message - A method for exchanging a wireless network management message includes: an access point device receives a terminal management message sent by a terminal, and in a contention-free period, sends a management polling frame to the terminal. After receiving, in a contention-free period, the management polling frame sent by the access point device, the terminal sends a next terminal management message to the access point device. The embodiments of the present invention further provide an access point device and a terminal for exchange a wireless network management message. Because the access point device controls the terminal to send a wireless network management message in a contention-free period, a problem of a conflict in a contention period among a plurality of terminals that have accessed a network is avoided, thereby decreasing time for a terminal to access a network. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105117 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATION SELECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for operating a Base Station (BS) in a wireless communication system capable of supporting a Peer-to-Peer (P2P) communication is provided. The method includes receiving at least one response message from at least one Mobile Station (MS) that has received a request message from a first MS and determining whether to allow the first MS to performs the P2P communication with a second MS based on the at least one response message. | 04-17-2014 |
20140112243 | USING A CELL AS A PATHLOSS OR TIMING REFERENCE - Information is communicated indicating whether a cell on a first carrier of a first type is to be used as a reference cell, wherein the reference cell is at least one selected from among a pathloss reference cell and a timing reference cell, and wherein the first carrier of the first type is part of a carrier aggregation that further includes at least a second carrier of a second, different type. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112244 | SYNCHRONIZING FLOOR CONTROL AND MEDIA SHARING IN A HALF-DUPLEX PTT SYSTEM - The disclosure is directed to synchronizing media sharing in a communication group. An embodiment transmits one or more media files to one or more members of the communication group, receives, after the transmitting, a selection of one of the one or more media files, and transmits, in response to the receiving, a request to start a group call with the one or more members of the communication group or a request to acquire the floor of the group call. An embodiment receives, at a user device, one or more media files from a member of the communication group, receives, after the receiving the one or more media files, a talk spurt from the member and a reference to one of the one or more media files, and displays the one of the one or more media file during the talk spurt. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112245 | Techniques for Multi-Level Service Discovery - Examples are disclosed for multi-level service discovery. In some examples, a first level of information indicating a service type for a service provided by a first wireless device may be transmitted by the first wireless device to another wireless device. The first level may enable the other wireless device to determine whether the indicated service type at least partially matches a service interest. A second level may then be transmitted by the first wireless device that includes a service identification to enable the other wireless device to determine whether the service substantially matches a service interest for the other wireless device. A third level may then be transmitted from the first wireless device that includes service content information. The third level may be transmitted responsive to the other wireless device requesting the service content information. Other examples are described and claimed. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112246 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR FREQUENCY SELECTIVE TRANSMISSION - Logic such as hardware and/or code to narrow available sub-channels in frequency selective transmission communications in which a station selects a narrow band from a wider channel bandwidth. A frequency selective transmission scheme for communications devices may select a 1 or 2 MHz channel from a wider channel bandwidth (e.g., 4, 8, 16 MHz) that consists of a number of 1 or 2 MHz sub-channels and transmitting packets on the selected sub-channel. The access point may narrow the number of sub-channels available for selection by stations. Stations may narrow the number of sub-channels. Both the AP and the stations may operate to narrow the number of sub-channels. A medium access control sub-layer protocol common to the communications devices may facilitate a frequency selective transmission scheme. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112247 | UE-ASSISTED MANAGEMENT OF ADVANCED RADIO LINK FEATURES - UE-assisted management of advanced radio link feature in a wireless communication network may include a network entity determining that a mobile entity is capable of communicating with one or more base stations using a set of radio link configurations, receiving a request from the mobile entity to restrict use of at least one of the radio link configurations, and restricting use of the at least one of the radio link configurations for communicating with the mobile entity, based on the request. The request may indicate a reason for the restriction, and the network entity may determine whether to restrict based on the reason. Once a radio link configuration is restricted, it may similarly be unrestricted based on a subsequent UE request, or based on expiration of a time period. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112248 | Load-Invariant Configuration of Interference Measurement Resources - According to one aspect of this disclosure, the configuration of which Interference Measurement Resources, “IMRs”, a given user equipment, “UE”, should measure for Channel State Information, “CSI”, reporting is made more or less invariant to dynamic traffic variations affecting the set of Coordinated Multi-Point, “CoMP”, transmission points used for serving the UE, or to the use of dynamic blanking for those transmission points. These goals are achieved at least in part by configuring one or more of the transmission points to follow a first rule embodying a negative logic. According to the first rule, the transmission point transmits on a given IMR if it has been deemed as being not likely to transmit data at a time relevant to the IMR, and, conversely, to not transmit the IMR if it has been deemed as being likely to transmit data at a time relevant to the IMR. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112249 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING DATA THROUGH CLIENT COOPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and a device for transmitting data through client cooperation in a wireless communication system. A cooperative device of the client cooperation receives uplink (UL) data from a source device through a frame of a first system, and if the UL data is the data to be transmitted to a base station of the second system, transmits the UL data to the second system. In addition, when receiving downlink (DL) data from the base station of the second system, and the DL data is data to be transmitted to the source device, the DL data is transmitted to the source device through the frame of the first system. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112250 | METHOD OF INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION AND METHOD OF DETECTION OF ERRONEOUS NEIGHBOUR CELL MEASUREMENTS - Methods of interference cancellation are provided. Channel estimation is performed with or without interference cancellation. Methods of detection of erroneous neighbor cell measurements are provided. The channel estimates for neighbour cells are processed to identify unreliable measurements. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112251 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RETRANSMITTING MTC GROUP MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for retransmitting an MTC group message in a wireless communication system are disclosed. A method for performing retransmission of a Machine Type Communication (MTC) group message by an MTC-InterWorking Function (MTC-IWF) in a mobile communication system includes: receiving an MTC group message response from a network node; and determining whether to perform retransmission of the MTC group message on the basis of information contained in the MTC group message response, wherein the MTC group message response includes zero or more region information of a predetermined unit, related to completion of the MTC group message transmission. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112252 | Search Area Based Control Channel Monitoring - According to an embodiment of the invention, a method of operating a control node for communication with at least one receiving node is provided. The communication is structured in frames comprising several subframes ( | 04-24-2014 |
20140112253 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To enable a mobile terminal apparatus to correctly demodulate a data signal in the case of applying Coordinated Multi-Point transmission (CoMP), particularly, JP-CoMP, a radio communication method of the invention is characterized in that a radio base station apparatus generates information for demodulation of a data signal in a mobile terminal apparatus in applying Coordinated Multi-Point transmission, and transmits the information for demodulation to a mobile terminal apparatus that performs Coordinated Multi-Point reception, and that the mobile terminal apparatus receives the information for demodulation of a data signal, and demodulates the data signal subjected to Coordinated Multi-Point reception using the information for demodulation. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112254 | METHODS AND NODES FOR RANDOM ACCESS - The present invention relates to a method in a wireless device for performing a random access to a cell of a wireless network, and to corresponding methods in a radio network node and a positioning node, and the corresponding nodes. The method comprises receiving information from a radio network node comprised in the wireless network, wherein the received information indicates a first and a second random access transmission configuration. The method also comprises selecting one of the first and second random access transmission configurations, and transmitting a random access preamble in accordance with the selected random access transmission configuration. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112255 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING STATUS REPORT COMPRISING RECEIVED STATUS OF PACKET DATA IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting packet data units Packet Data Units (PDUs) at a PDU transmitter in a communication system is provided. The method includes transmitting a first PDU comprising a PDU header and a data portion, receiving Negative Acknowledgement NACK information for the first PDU, segmenting the first PDU to form one or more PDU segments if a size of a second PDU for retransmission is smaller than a size of the first PDU, wherein each of the one or more PDU segment comprises a PDU segment header and a data portion, and transmitting the one or more PDU segment to a PDU receiver. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112256 | TRANSMITTING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DIGITAL BROADCAST SIGNAL IN TRANSMITTING SYSTEM - A transmitting system and a method of transmitting digital broadcast signal are provided. The method of transmitting digital broadcasting signal in a transmitter includes multiplexing mobile data and main data, transmitting a transmission frame including the multiplexed mobile and main data, where a parade of data group is transmitted during slots, where each slot includes specified number of mobile data packets, a first scalable number of mobile data packets, and a second scalable number of main data packets, where the data group including a plurality of regions and the fifth region of the plurality of regions includes the first scalable number of mobile data packets, and where the data group is assigned to one of the slots in such a manner that slots of consecutive slot number carry data groups of inconsecutive group number. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112257 | Method and Apparatus for Implementing Resending of Short Message - The present invention discloses a method for implementing resending of a short message, including: when an Internet Protocol short message gateway (IP-SM-GW) learns that in an Internet Protocol multimedia subsystem (IMS) domain, a short message fails to be sent to a receiver, sending, by the IP-SM-GW, the short message to a service center, so that the service center stores the short message; and when the receiver corresponding to the short message changes to available status, receiving, by the IP-SM-GW, the stored short message sent by the service center, and resending the short message to the receiver through the IMS domain, thereby implementing resending of a short message request failing to be sent, improving availability of sending the short message request in the IMS, and improving user experience. | 04-24-2014 |
20140119276 | Distributed V-MIMO Processing for Coordinated Multipoint Reception - The base stations in a coordinating set, i.e., CoMP set, implement distributed V-MIMO processing to decode uplink signals transmitted from multiple user terminals over the same time and frequency resources. Each base station uses the extrinsic information received from its coordinating base stations to facilitate demodulation and decoding. In the event that one of the base stations successfully decodes an uplink signal, it may provide the decoded data to the other coordinating base stations in the coordinating set. In this case, the coordinating base stations do not need to decode the uplink signal. Even if the uplink signal is not successfully decoded, the demodulated data received from the coordinating base station increases the likelihood of successfully decoding uplink signal in the next iteration of a HARQ process. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119277 | WIRELESS DEVICE - The present application relates to a wireless device that is able to operate in overlapping first and second wireless networks. The wireless device is configured to adjust the time at which it transmits beacons for the second wireless network so that the time at which beacons are transmitted by the wireless device does not coincide with the time at which beacons for the first wireless network are transmitted. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119278 | Methods and Circuits for Determining Feedback Information - A method includes receiving at a circuit an information on a partitioned time interval wherein the partitioned time interval includes a first time element and a second, different time element. The method further includes determining a single-cell feedback information based on first data wherein the first data is received by the circuit during the first time element. The method further includes determining a multi-cell feedback information based on second data wherein the second data is received by the circuit during the second time element. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119279 | Method and System for Improving Performance in Discovery Stage of Fast Roaming - The present disclosure discloses a method and digital device for improving performance in discovery stage of fast roaming. A disclosed digital device switches from a first wireless communication channel to a second wireless communication channel; transmits, on the second wireless communication channel, a request message comprising a designated field; and switches from the second wireless communication channel to the first wireless communication channel prior to receiving a response message corresponding to the request message on the second wireless communication channel. A network device receives the request message from a client device on the second wireless communication channel. The request message is associated with a first signal strength level. The network device determines that the request message includes a designated field; and transmits a response message to the client device via a different communication interface, such as a wired or wireless distribution system, or the client device's data transmission channel. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119280 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS TO MITIGATE COLLISIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS BY ENABLING COEXISTENCE OF DISPARATE BANDWIDTHS - Systems, devices, and methods for mitigating collisions between wireless transmissions operating at different bandwidths are disclosed. As such, a wireless device operating at a predefined bandwidth includes a transceiver that receives a signal across a wireless channel, a filter that generates a band-limited filtered signal at the predefined bandwidth of the wireless device, a correlating mechanism that correlates the band-limited filtered signal with a delayed, conjugated version of the band-limited filtered signal, logic that performs a moving average of the correlated filtered signals to determine correlation peaks, and logic configured to compare the correlation peaks with a predetermined threshold. With this configuration, if the correlation peaks are greater than the predetermined threshold, the received signal is determined to operate at a wider bandwidth than the predefined bandwidth of the wireless device, and the wireless device defers accessing the wireless channel to transmit until a predetermined time interval. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119281 | Digital Baseband Transport in Telecommunications Distribution Systems - A telecommunications system is provided that includes a unit for communicating channelized digital baseband signals with remotely located units. The channelized digital baseband signals include call information for wireless communication. The unit includes a channelizer section and a transport section. The channelizer section can extract, per channel, the channelized digital baseband signals using channel filters and digital down-converters. The transport section can format the channelized digital baseband signals for transport together using a transport schedule unit for packetizing and packet scheduling the channelized digital baseband signals. A signal processing subsystem can control a gain of uplink digital baseband signals, independently, that are received from the remotely located units prior to summing the uplink digital baseband signals. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119282 | MESSAGE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - A message acknowledgement method includes: An access point sends a beacon frame, receives an uplink frame sent by a terminal, and sends an acknowledgement frame for the uplink frame, where the acknowledgement frame includes offset time, and the offset time is a difference between a time point when the access point sends the acknowledgement frame and a time point when the access point sends the beacon frame; compares the difference that is obtained through calculation by the terminal and is between the time point when the terminal receives the acknowledgement frame and the time point when the terminal lately receives a beacon frame with the offset time carried in the acknowledgement frame, and if a difference between the two is within a preset error range, determines that the acknowledgement frame received by the terminal is sent by the access point associated with the terminal. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119283 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING TRANSMISSION POWER - There is a provided a method for deciding transmission power in order to transmit at least one of secret data and non-secret data. The method may comprise: determining whether data to be transmitted by a transmitting device is sensitive to a delay; determining whether both the secret data and the non-secret data are required to be simultaneously transmitted when the data to be transmitted is sensitive to the delay; and applying different weights to the secret data and the non-secret data and deciding transmission power to maximize a total channel capacity according to the application, when it is determined that both the secret data and the non-secret data are required to be transmitted. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119284 | Resources for Multi-Cell Channel State Information Feedback - User Equipment reports single-cell or multi-cell channel state information to a base station on a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) Format 3 (PF 3) resource. The PF 3 resource selected depends on whether ACK/NACK needs to be reported simultaneously. Different coding and/or scrambling and/or interleaving schemes are used depending on whether ACK/NACK bits are present, as well as the number of ACK/NACK and/or CSI bits. Resource compatibility is maintained independently of the details of coding, interleaving, or scrambling—that is, all formats can be orthogonally multiplexed onto the same time-frequency resources. The format used for CSI only is PF 3c whereas the format used for CSI and ACK/NACK is PF 3b. PUCCH Formats 3b and 3c may be further differentiated depending on whether a CSI from a single or multiple cells are reported, or from which cells (PCell, SCell) an ACK/NACK is reported. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119285 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DELIVERY OF DATA-BASED/VOICE SERVICES OVER PICONETS AND WIRELESS LANs (WLANs) COUPLED TO 3GPP DEVICES INCLUDING PROTOCOL ARCHITECTURE AND INFORMATION ELEMENTS RELATING TO SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS) OVER WLANs - Method and apparatus delivering voice/data services within a piconet operating over a limited range or over a WLAN communicating with 3GPP devices by reformatting data into IP format before delivering to the WLAN. The service is short message service (SMS). Upon receipt of an SMS message, relevant routing information is retrieved. A PDGW address for the SMS message is identified and is sent to the PDGW address which identifies the WLAN user equipment (UE) for receiving the SMS and reformats the SMS message into IP format (text or encapsulation) for delivery to the UE. A protocol architecture is provided for SMS delivery over WLANs, in particular, for UMTS/CDMA based SMS over WLAN through two alternative mechanisms, i.e., SMS tunneling and SMS proxy, for protocols for the delivery of SMS across the WLAN. The invention enhances standard 802.11 in the context of UMTS and CDMA 2000; as well as other scenarios. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119286 | SOFT HANDOFFS IN NETWORKS - Various embodiments enable a device to maintain a plurality of connections to a plurality of wireless networks simultaneously using one radio. For instance, a device can partition in time, or “time-slice”, when it transmits and receives data such that a device can maintain a plurality of connections with a plurality of networks concurrently. With the plurality of connections, the device can receive multiple copies of data. In some embodiments, a device can compare multiple copies of data and determine which copy of data is a best representation. Once a best representation has been determined, it can be selected for further usage. | 05-01-2014 |
20140126466 | VIRTUAL WIRELESS NETWORKING - An access controller is coupled to a plurality of physical access points. The access controller is operable to create a plurality of virtual access controllers that are each coupled to the plurality of physical access points. The access controller then creates a different virtual access point for each of the plurality of virtual access controllers, and associates the virtual access point of each virtual access controller with each of the plurality of physical access points coupled to that virtual access controller. The access controller then provides a plurality of different wireless sub-networks through each of the plurality of physical access points, with each virtual access controller providing one of the different wireless sub-networks using the virtual access point associated with each of the plurality of physical access points coupled to that virtual access controller. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126467 | MULTIPLE OUTER LOOP LINK ADAPTATION - Systems and methods for subframe-based link adaptation for a radio signal in a cellular communications network are disclosed. In one embodiment, a base station obtains a hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement for data transmitted between the base station and a mobile terminal in a radio signal of the base station. The base station then updates a parameter (e.g., SINR offset) used to control a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) for transmission of data between the base station and the mobile terminal in the radio signal for one or more subframes in a frame structure of the radio signal based on the hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement. The one or more subframes are a subset of all of the subframes in the frame structure of the radio signal. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126468 | Determination of Packet Retransmission using Time Threshold - Techniques for determination of packet retransmission using a time threshold are described. In at least some embodiments, information for a packet that is received is compared to information for previously received packets. If the information for the packet matches a previously received packet, a receive time for the packet is compared to a timestamp for the previously received packet to determine if the packet is a retransmission of the previously received packet. In at least some embodiments, packet information associated with different senders can be stored, e.g., to enable packet information comparison for purpose of retransmission detection. An amount of packet information that is stored can be limited to a certain number of senders to control the impact of packet information storage on memory resources. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126469 | LIMITING OF PACKET DATA NETWORK CONNECTION REQUESTS FOR WIRELESS DEVICES - Packet data network (PDN) connection requests from a mobile device may be limited by the mobile device. In one implementation, the mobile device may track an amount of successful PDN connection requests issued by the mobile device over a cellular network and maintain a timer value relating to an amount of time over which the successful PDN connection requests have been tracked. The mobile device may determine an allowable number of PDN connection requests and compare the amount of successful PDN connection requests to the allowable number of PDN connection requests. The mobile device may determine, based on the comparison, whether to block a PDN connection request from being issued to the cellular network. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126470 | MECHANISM TO ENABLE REJECTION AND CANCELLATION OF REQUEST ACTIONS FROM WIRELESS PEER-TO-PEER DEVICES - Systems, apparatuses, and methods are directed to a first peer-to-peer (P2P) enabled device configured to wirelessly transmit a first request message and a second P2P-enabled device configured to wirelessly receive the first request message. In response to receiving the first request message, the second P2P-enabled device wirelessly transmits a second request message to the first P2P-enabled device, and if the first request message is rejected by the second P2P-enabled device, the second request message includes status control information indicating that the first request message is rejected. In addition, if the first request message is to be cancelled, the first P2P-enabled device transmits another request message to the second P2P-enabled device with status control information indicating that the first request message has been cancelled. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126471 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TUNING MEDIUM ACCESS PARAMETERS - Systems and methods for tuning media access parameters are disclosed. In one aspect an access point includes a receiver configured to receive at least one message from a second access point. The access point further includes a processor configured to coordinate with the second access point to select a value of a medium access parameter comprising one of a carrier sense threshold and an energy detection threshold for a wireless station. The processor may generate a message identifying the value of the medium access parameter and may further comprise a transmitter connected to the processor and configured to transmit the message to the station. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126472 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MAINTAINING TIME STAMPING ACCURACY TO MEET A NON-LINEAR TIME DRIFT CONSTRAINT - Systems and methods for maintaining time stamping accuracy are disclosed. In one embodiment, a wireless device in a cellular communications network logs data to provide a log. The wireless device maintains an accuracy of time stamping for the log to meet, or satisfy, a non-linear time drift constraint. In one embodiment, the log is one or more of a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection establishment failure log, a radio link failure log, a random access failure log, a paging channel failure log, a broadcast channel failure log, data related to failure of one or more specific channels, and a radio measurement. In another embodiment, the log is a Minimization of Drive Tests (MDT) log. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126473 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for routing data by a Corresponding Mobility Agent (CMA) in a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes managing mobility for a Mobile Station (MS) with a Mobile Access Gateway (MAG), and routing a data packet between a Corresponding Node (CN) and the MS based on a location of the MS, wherein the CMA is mapped to an application server which provides an application service. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126474 | PROVIDING INFORMATION TO A CORE NETWORK RELATING TO A CACHE IN AN ACCESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for a providing information to a core network where a terminal exchanges data with a cache in an access network. The node stores data in the cache. Data is exchanged between the cache and the terminal, and information relating to the exchanged data is provided to the core network. This allows the core network to apply normal core network functions such as LI, charging and policy control, | 05-08-2014 |
20140126475 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK - Provided are a method and a wireless device for transmitting an uplink. The wireless device transmits a random access preamble to a first serving cell through a first wireless resource, and transmits an uplink channel to a second serving cell through a second wireless resource. The first serving cell belongs to a first timing advance (TA) group, and the second serving cell belongs to a second TA group that differs from the first TA group. All or a portion of the first wireless resource and the second wireless resource overlap. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126476 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING APERIODIC CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method of user equipment transmitting aperiodic channel state information and user equipment using the method. The method includes receiving a channel state information request for a plurality of reference signals, receiving the plurality of reference signals, generating channel state information on each of the plurality of reference signals in response to the channel state information request, and transmitting the channel state information through a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), wherein the channel state information request is included in only some of subframes in which the plurality of reference signals is received. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126477 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RANGING TRANSMISSION BY MOBILE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a ranging transmission method comprising: a mobile station receiving a message including backoff window information from a base station; the mobile station determining an x-th backoff window for an x-th (x is a non-negative integer) ranging transmission using the backoff window information; the mobile station performing the x-th ranging transmission to the base station within the x-th backoff window; and the mobile station determining a start point of an (x+1)th backoff window on the basis of an end point of the x-th backoff window. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126478 | MULTI-RECEIVER FRAME AGGREGATION - When using a multi-receiver aggregation protocol in a wireless communications network, a sub-header may be used to identify groups of data units that share common parameters, such as destination addresses, acknowledgement modes, modulation/coding rates, lengths, etc. The layout of this sub-header may permit each receiving device to identify the portion of the aggregated payload that is addressed to that receiving device, where that portion is located, how long that portion is, and how to demodulate it. In addition, by controlling the selection and timing of various acknowledgement modes used by the mobile stations, a base station may improve overall network efficiency and throughput. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126479 | TERMINAL APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A REFERENCE SIGNAL - Provided are a radio communication terminal apparatus and a radio transmission method by which intersymbol interference of DM-RS of a CoMP terminal and a Non-CoMP terminal can be reduced. A CoMP set setting unit ( | 05-08-2014 |
20140133391 | SYSTEM AND METHOD ADOPTING A RELIABLE STOP-AND-WAIT HYBIRD AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PROTOCOL - A communication system and a method for transferring data are provided. The method is implemented in a communication system having first and second network devices. The first network device configured to transmit a coded version of a frame and a first state variable to the second network device in a media access control (MAC) layer. The second network device is configured to receive the coded version of the frame and the first state variable and transmit a second state variable to the first network device. The first network device and the second network device use a state machine based on the first and second state variables and implement a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) protocol. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133392 | MOBILE TERMINATING PACKET CONNECTION - A method of establishing a packet data connection includes accessing a Domain Name Server (DNS) to obtain an Internet Protocol (IP) address of a vehicle telematics unit; initiating a mobile-terminated packet data connection with the vehicle telematics unit using the IP address of the vehicle telematics unit; and establishing the mobile-terminated packet data connection when the vehicle telematics unit determines that a hostname representing an IP address of a third party initiating the mobile-terminated packet data connection matches at least one approved hostname recognized by the vehicle telematics unit. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133393 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MULTIPLE MODE IDENTIFIER ADDRESSING - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments of the invention are disclosed for multiple mode identifier addressing employable, for example, in connection with wireless networks. In an example embodiment of the invention, a method comprises: receiving, at a device, an addressing mode indication from an access node, wherein the mode indication does not alter an association identifier of the device; determining from the addressing mode indication, at the device, an addressing mode to be employed; and operating, at the device, in accordance with the determined addressing mode, wherein the determined mode defines a hierarchical data structure, wherein the association identifier of the device is a manifestation of the hierarchical data structure, and wherein devices are grouped according to hierarchical elements of the hierarchical data structure. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133394 | STATION, METHOD, AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK DETECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A station, method, and apparatus for network detection in a wireless communication system are provided. One implementation may include a station for identifying the presence of at least one access point to associate with. The station comprises a processor configured to generate a probe message, the probe message including a scrambling seed. The processor is further configured to transmit the probe message. The processor is further configured to receive a first probe response message from each access point, the first probe response message being encoded with the scrambling seed. The processor is further configured to receive the second probe response message from each of the access points, the second probe response message from each of the access points including at least an address of the access point. The processor is further configured to identify an access point to associate with based on the second probe response messages. The processor is further configured to generate an association request to transmit to the identified access point. The processor is further configured to transmit the association request to the identified access point. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133395 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFICATION OF SMALL CELLS - Orthogonal multi-user, multiple input, multiple output (MU-MIMO) multiplexing capacity for demodulation reference signals (DMRSs) is increased without increasing the overhead in resource elements per physical resource block by using length-4 orthogonal cover codes (OCC-4). A base station switches between legacy DMRS antenna port mappings and OCC-4 mapping based upon either a transmission mode or a channel station information process configuration field value. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133396 | Method and system for configuring route to base station in operation maintenance center - A method for configuring a route to a base station in an OMC is described. The method includes: an IP address of a base station and a mask of the base station are acquired; an IP address of a routing gateway is determined, wherein the IP address of the routing gateway and an address of an OMC server are on a same network segment; and a route from the OMC server to the base station is obtained according to the IP address and the mask of the base station and the IP address of the routing gateway. A system for configuring a route to a base station in an OMC is also described. With the method and system, a base station can communicate with an OMC server, and can download and update a version automatically. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133397 | CHARGING INFORMATION TRANSFER IN THE IMS - Apparatus for use within an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, network to handle Session Initiation Protocol, SIP, messages. The apparatus comprises a receiver for receiving a SIP message from a peer IMS node, and a SIP message inspector for inspecting a P-Charging-Vector, PCV, header within a received SIP message in order to detect the presence within the PCV header of a parameter and associated handling determinator. The apparatus further comprises a SIP message handler for determining, on the basis of a handling determinator and without reference to said associated parameter, an action or actions to be applied to said parameter and associated handling determinator. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133398 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, CSG TYPE BASE STATION, HOME SUBSCRIBER SERVER, PROGRAM, INTEGRATED CIRCUIT, AND BASE STATION - In a mobile communication system including a plurality of RATs (Radio Access Technologies), the necessity of a control channel for notifying RAT information is eliminated, and the lack of capacity of the control channel can be avoided. In a mobile station | 05-15-2014 |
20140133399 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DELIVERING MESSAGES - A method for interworking messages of heterogeneous, and which includes acquiring a temporary identifier of the sending terminal when the sending terminal is a terminal that subscribes in an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) without a mobile communication global unique number, in which the temporary identifier is an identifier used for transmitting a short message during an IMS registration valid period of the sending terminal; receiving a session initiation protocol (SIP) based message transmitted by the sending terminal from an IMS based session controller; acquiring a temporary identifier of a receiving terminal based on an SIP based identifier of the receiving terminal encapsulated in the SIP based message; and generating a short message service (SMS) based message based on the received SIP based message, the temporary identifier of the receiving terminal, and the temporary identifier of the transmitting terminal. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133400 | LED Lamp and LED Illumination System - A LED lamp and LED illumination system, the LED lamp comprises LED light-emitting element, LED driver circuit and Wi-Fi routing module with routing function that receives and transmits Wi-Fi signals, in which the LED driver circuit is connected to the LED light-emitting element and Wi-Fi routing module respectively; the LED illumination system consists of at least two above mentioned LED lamp units, each unit transmitting the Wi-Fi signals it receives to other units within the reach of its Wi-Fi signals. The LED lamp referred in this invention makes a lamp work also as wireless router, or wireless hub. Therefore, as long as one lamp receives a signal, the signal will be passed on one after another, extending constantly the covering range of the wireless network, thereby breaking through the limit of transmission distance and penetration capability of Wi-Fi signals. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133401 | SIGNALLING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - In accordance with a first aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method of signalling in a communications network comprising a user equipment, a first radio access network, a second radio access network and a core network, the core network comprising a first packet switched network control node communicatively coupled to the first radio access network, a circuit switched network control node communicatively coupled to the first radio access network, and a second packet switched network control node communicatively coupled to the second radio access network, wherein the second packet switched network control node is capable of forming an association with the circuit switched network control node, in dependence on the user equipment performing an update to the second radio access network, to enable one or more features which employ said circuit switched network control node, the method comprising: receiving a first update of the user equipment from the first radio access network towards the first packet switched network control node; subsequent to the receipt of said first update, receiving an update of the user equipment from the second radio access network towards the second packet switched network control node; sending a context-related message from the second packet switched network control node to the first packet switched network control node, the context-related message comprising association requirement context data indicating an association requirement between the second packet switched network control node and the circuit switched network control node; and receiving a further update of the user equipment from the first radio access network towards the first packet switched network control node, wherein said context-related message is sent before said further update of the user equipment from the first radio access network is received. This has an advantage that the sending of the context-related association requirement context data is independent of the further update of the user equipment towards the first packet switched network control node. The sending of the association requirement context data may thus be reliably achieved even if the receipt of the further update causes suppression of the sending of context-related messages. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133402 | Architecture for Open Communication in a Heterogeneous Network - Network architecture configured for open communication between a plurality of sub-networks. Each of the plurality of sub-networks has a different routable network addressing scheme. The architecture includes at least one broker node adapted to communicate using at least two different routable network addressing schemes. The broker node comprises an identification management module configured to collect peer-application addresses for nodes currently accessing a specific application, the peer-application addresses being associated with a specific application, an address resolution module configured to map each of the peer-application addresses to a sub-network specific routable network address and a network coordination module configured to monitor and coordinate sub-network communication capabilities between the broker node and at least one other broker node and elect a primary broker node for each sub-network which the broker node and at least one other broker node is capable of communication. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133403 | Method and System for Establishing Disparate Connection Paths From a Mobile User Device to a Base Station Through a Mobile Peer-To-Peer (PTP) Network - A system and method for establishing and/or maintaining disparate connection paths from an originating mobile user device to a base station via a mobile peer-to-peer (PTP) network including an originating mobile user device configured to broadcast at least one of a path establishment request signal and a confirmation request signal to an intermediate mobile user device; a mobile peer-to-peer network including the intermediate mobile user device configured to forwarding at least one of the path establishment request signal, the path establishment response signal, the path confirmation request signal, and a path confirmation response signal, via a disparate connection path; and a base station configured to broadcasting at least one of the path establishment response signal and the path confirmation response signal to the originating mobile user device via one or more disparate connection paths within the mobile peer-to-peer network. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133404 | MAC EXTENSIONS FOR SMART ANTENNA SUPPORT - Apparatus and methods implement aggregation frames and allocation frames. The aggregation frames include a plurality of MSDUs or fragments thereof aggregated or otherwise combined together. An aggregation frame makes more efficient use of the wireless communication resources. The allocation frame defines a plurality of time intervals. The allocation frame specifies a pair of stations that are permitted to communicate with each other during each time interval as well as the antenna configuration to be used for the communication. This permits stations to know ahead of time when they are to communicate, with which other stations and the antenna configuration that should be used. A buffered traffic field can also be added to the frames to specify how much data remains to be transmitted following the current frame. This enables network traffic to be scheduled more effectively. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133405 | Dynamic Multi-Point Access Network - A router is operatively coupled to a plurality of local computers and has one or more connections to a remote computer network for managing one or more data routes between the local computers and the remote computer network. In providing dynamic access to the remote computer network by any of the local computers, one or more of the connection(s) of the router to the remote computer network includes one or more wireless connections independent of the router between the local computers and the remote computer network. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133406 | Programmable Communicator - A programmable communicator device is disclosed having a wireless communications circuit, including an antenna, configured to receive a transmission, and an identity module having a unique identifier. The programmable communicator further includes a processing module including program code configured to determine if the transmission is from an authenticated caller by determining whether a received transmission contains the unique identifier, and memory configured to store telephone numbers or IP addresses received in transmissions from an authenticated caller. | 05-15-2014 |
20140140268 | INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY SESSION HANDLING - An access control device may include logic configured to receive a request from a user device to set up a packet connection for an emergency session to a packet data network via an access network. The logic may be further configured to determine a location associated with the user device; identify a public safety answering point associated with the determined location; determine whether a connection capacity associated with the identified public safety answering point has been reached; and reject the request to set up the packet connection for the emergency session, in response to determining that the connection capacity associated with the identified public safety answering point has been reached. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140269 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING DISTRIBUTED FREQUENCY SYNCHRONIZATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in connection with enabling distributed frequency synchronization based on an average clock rate. In one example, a UE is equipped to receive a synchronization signal from each of one or more UEs, perform an averaging process to generate an average clock rate based at least on the received synchronization signals, and adjust an internal clock rate based on the average clock rate. In another example, a UE is equipped to adjust an internal clock rate of a UE based on timing information provided by a GPS, select a sequence to communicate a synchronization signal transmission from a subset of sequences reserved for GPS connected UEs, and transmit the synchronization signal based on the adjusted internal clock rate. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140270 | Long Term Evolution RAN Component Selection Based on Message Type - A front end processing unit may be configured in a radio access network (RAN) and may determine a particular RAN component to use to provide transport for incoming communications. The front end processing unit may determine criteria for the communication and select an appropriate RAN component based on the criteria for communicating with the user mobile device originating the communication. In an embodiment, a higher service level capable user device that transmits a communication to a higher service level RAN component may be instructed to communicate with a lower service level RAN component for transport of the communication where it is determined that the communication does not warrant the use of higher service level network resources. Front end processing unit functionality may be integrated into individual RAN components, such as a base transceiver station, a Node B, and an eNode B, rather than being performed by a separate device. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140271 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR RAPID DECODING OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK UPLINK DATA - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for rapid decoding of wireless communications network uplink data are disclosed. According to one method, the wireless communications network data analyzer receives downlink data generated by a wireless access node. The wireless communications network data analyzer extracts uplink data decode keys from the downlink data. The wireless communications network data analyzer stores the uplink data decode keys. The wireless communications data analyzer captures uplink data and decodes the uplink data using the stored uplink data decode keys. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140272 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND TRANSMITTING TERMINAL - A wireless communication system includes a plurality of wireless terminals. Each of transmitting terminals executes direct communication or indirect communication. The wireless communication system includes a first obtainer that obtains a reception side terminal number which is the number of the wireless terminals with which the receiving terminal is able to communicate directly, a second obtainer that obtains a transmission side terminal number which is the number of the wireless terminals with which the transmitting terminal is able to communicate directly for each of a target transmitting terminal and a neighboring transmitting terminal, and a setter that selects one of the direct communication and the indirect communication based on the reception side terminal number, the transmission side terminal number for the target transmitting terminal, and the transmission side terminal number for the neighboring transmitting terminal, and executes the selected communication. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140273 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSCEIVING AN UPLINK HARQ IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and apparatus for transceiving an uplink hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ). According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for performing a HARQ operation in a terminal of a wireless communication system comprises the steps of: receiving, in a subframe n, an uplink grant message for first uplink data from a base station; determining a first HARQ process from among a plurality of HARQ processes associated with the subframe n; and transmitting, in a subframe n+k, the first uplink data to the base station through the first HARQ process. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140274 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING HIGH-SPEED WIRELESS PACKET BETWEEN UPLINK AND DOWNLINK TRANSMISSIONS - The mobile station | 05-22-2014 |
20140140275 | System and Method For Advertising The Same Service Set Identifier For Different Basic Service Sets - According to one embodiment of the invention, a method comprises advertising services. The services are provided by different basic service sets, each basic service set having the same service set identifier (SSID). Thereafter, one of the basic service sets is selected. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140276 | MAC AND RLC ARCHITECTURE AND PROCEDURES TO ENABLE RECEPTION FROM MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION POINTS - A method for use in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) for two-stage reordering of received protocol data units (PDUs). The method comprising receiving PDUs from Node-Bs, wherein each of the received PDUs has a transmission sequence number (TSN), reordering the received PDUs from Node-Bs using the TSN in a MAC layer in different reordering queues, delivering the received PDUs from reordering queues to one logical channel in the RLC layer, reordering the received PDUs in the RLC layer based on a sequence number (SN), starting a timer when at least a RLC PDU is missing based on SN of the RLC PDU, and transmitting a status report indicating a missing RLC PDU based on SN of the RLC PDU if the timer expires, wherein transmission of the status report is delayed if a RLC PDU is missing based on SN of the RLC PDU and the timer is running. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140277 | COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL AND METHOD - A mobile communications network can establish one or more communications bearers for communicating data packets to/from a communications terminal via a radio network and a core network, each of the communications bearers established using context information associated with connections from the communications terminal to destination addresses, or to the communications terminal from source addresses. The communications terminal can, in an idle state, communicate a short signalling message data packet to a base station of the radio network, using predetermined parameters for configuring a mobile communications terminal transmitter, which correspond with parameters with which a receiver in the base station can receive the short message data packet, the short message data packet including an indication of context information usable by the mobile communications network for communicating the short message data packet to a mobility manager of the mobile communications network. The short message data packet can be context-less or quasi-context-less. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140278 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATION OF SELF-OPTIMIZATION FUNCTIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A network management device and method for coordination of self-optimization functions in a wireless network. A network management device for coordination of self-optimization functions includes one or more processors and an interface. The interface communicates with a plurality of enhanced node Bs (eNodeBs). The interface is arranged to receive a request to change a coverage or a capacity of an enhanced node B (eNodeB). The interface is further arranged to transmit a query to the eNodeB to obtain a self-optimizing network (SON) coordination state of the eNodeB. The one or more processors are arranged to determine whether to grant or deny the request based on a coordination policy and the SON coordination state. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140279 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, INFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENT AND METHOD - A mobile communications network configured to establish communications bearers communicating data packets to/from mobile communications terminals via a radio network and core network, each communications bearer established using context information associated with one or more connections from mobile communications terminals to destination addresses, or to the mobile communications terminals from source addresses. A mobile communication terminals can, in an idle state, communicate a short message data packet to a base station of the radio network as a signalling message, using predetermined parameters configuring a transmitter of the mobile communications terminal, corresponding with parameters with which a receiver in the base station can receive the short message data packet, which includes an indication of context information used by the mobile communications network for communicating the short message data packet to a mobility manager of the mobile communications network. The short message data packet can be communicated context-less or quasi-context-less. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140280 | Wireless Terminal Apparatus and Wireless Base Station Apparatus - Both a wireless terminal apparatus and wireless base station apparatus are provided that can, in an operation of encoding the control signals of the upstream link transmitted from the multiple terminal stations while encoding with regard to each of the terminal stations, increase a number of the terminal stations to which different codes are respectively assigned. A wireless terminal apparatus includes: an encoding information receiving portion receiving encoding information which is used at the wireless terminal apparatus from the base station; a phase-shifting unit which conducts a phase-shifting operation on a predetermined first code based on the encoding information; a code selection unit which, based on the received encoding information, selects a second code from multiple codes orthogonally crossing each other; and a control signal encoding portion which conducts an encoding operation on the control signal that is going to be transmitted to the base station by using both the first code on which the phase-shifting operation has been conducted and the second code. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140281 | PRIORITIZING MULTIPLE CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (CSI) REPORTING WITH CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) on a user equipment (UE) is described. Multiple channel state information (CSI) reports are generated for multiple component carriers (CCs) that are scheduled to be transmitted in a subframe. A method of prioritization for the CSI reports is selected. A highest priority CSI report of the multiple CSI reports is determined using the selected method of prioritization. The highest priority CSI report is transmitted. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140282 | SERVICE RESPONSE METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A service response method, device, and system, and relate to the field of mobile communications, which provides conditions for implementing optimized transmission of small-packet data and reducing the waste of network signaling resources. The service response method includes: receiving, by a user equipment, downlink data or a downlink message, where the downlink data or message is small-packet data; selecting a signaling mode or data mode as a mode of responding to the downlink data or message; and responding to the downlink data or message by using the selected mode. The technical solutions provided in the present invention are applicable to a scenario where a UE responds to a service. | 05-22-2014 |
20140146742 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY SEARCHING - Aspects of radio access technology searching include apparatus and methods for obtaining relative synchronization information between a first radio access technology and a second radio access technology, and determining a time location of a pilot signal of the second radio access technology based on the relative synchronization information. Further aspects include searching for the pilot signal of the second radio access technology using the determined time location. Other aspects further include determining a measurement gap duration and measurement gap location based on the relative synchronization information so as to encompass a pilot of the second radio access technology. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146743 | STAGING A MOBILE DEVICE TO AN ENTERPRISE NETWORK SECURELY USING VOICE CHANNEL OF A WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK (WWAN) - Wireless networking systems and methods are provided for “staging” a wireless communication device (WCD). The WCD is designed to communicate over the air with a wireless communication station via RF signals. Network infrastructure (NI) that receives a call from the WCD (via the wireless communication station), can authenticate the WCD. Once authenticated, the NI can communicate an RF signal that includes the encrypted staging data to the WCD over an RF channel. The staging data can include settings for the WCD and/or a list of software packages to be installed on the WCD and their respective server locations. When the WCD receives the RF signal, the WCD can convert (e.g., decode) the received RF signal to generate digital data. The WCD can then decrypt the digital data to generate decrypted staging data that can be used to stage the WCD. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146744 | DIGITAL MOBILE RADIO CELLULAR MESSAGING - Communication is facilitated between cellular and digital mobile radio devices. In one aspect, a digital mobile radio messaging gateway is deployed within a cellular network that allows cellular devices to send and/or receive data (e.g., text messages, media content, voice calls) to digital mobile radio devices. Moreover, the digital mobile radio messaging gateway provides transparent messaging access from devices to digital mobile radio switches and/or gateways essentially making the cellular network an extension of the digital mobile radio network. As an example, the digital mobile radio messaging gateway converts data received from the digital mobile radio network to a message that conforms to a protocol supported by the cellular network. Similarly, the digital mobile radio messaging gateway converts data received from the cellular network to a message that conforms to a protocol supported by the digital mobile radio network. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146745 | DOCKEE-CENTRIC WIRELESS DOCKING - In one example, a method includes sending a request to a wireless docking host to select one or more peripheral functions available via the wireless docking host in accordance with authentication and association information associated with a docking session with the wireless docking host. The method further includes sending a request to the wireless docking host to establish one or more payload connections with the wireless docking host, wherein the one or more payload connections are configured to communicate data via the wireless docking host for the selected one or more peripheral functions. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146746 | QUALITY OF SERVICE CONTROL - A mobility management node ( | 05-29-2014 |
20140146747 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING AN IP CONNECTION IN A MOBILE NETWORK AND VARIOUS CORRESPONDING EQUIPMENT ITEMS - The disclosure relates to the field of wireless communications, and more particularly a method of establishing an IP connection through a 3GPP mobile network, at least partially of IP type, a network equipment item, MME or PDN-GW, of that mobile network, a mobile network infrastructure, a mobile terminal and a corresponding system. The method includes the following steps, on a first equipment item, MME or PDN-GW, of the mobile network other than a mobile equipment item UE of the mobile network: receiving a fully qualified domain name, FQDN, sent by a mobile equipment item, UE, of the mobile network, the FQDN identifying a target data server; and on reception of the FQDN, triggering the resolution of the FQDN into an IP address of the target data server. Thus, a mobile user equipment item provided with a UICC card may be produced at low cost without incorporating DNS resolution mechanisms. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146748 | System and Method for Pilot Sequence Design in a Communications System - A method for pilot sequence design in a communications system includes selecting an initial cell in the communications system, and grouping other cells in the communications system relative to the initial cell into one of a neighbor group and a non-neighbor group in accordance with a neighborness measure of each of the other cells to the initial cell. The method also includes designing pilot sequences that are substantially orthogonal to one another for the initial cell and the other cells in the neighbor group, and providing information about the pilot sequences to the initial cell and the other cells in the communications system. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146749 | Communication Method - A method of determining suitable communication paths between a first device and a second device, the first device being connected to a plurality of third devices to which the second device is also connected. The method comprises, at the first device: for each of the third devices, obtaining first information indicating a characteristic of communications between the first device and the second device via the third device, obtaining second information associated with first data to be transmitted from the first device to the second device, and determining, based upon the first and second information, whether any of the third devices should receive the first data for communication of the first data to the second device. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146750 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER IN A NETWORK INCLUDING A PLURALITY OF CELLS, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - Disclosed is a method for determining uplink transmission power in a network including a plurality of cells, and an apparatus therefor. The method for a terminal to determine uplink transmission power in a network including a plurality of cells may comprise the following steps: receiving information including values of path-loss compensation factors set for each of the plurality of cells; determining uplink transmission power using the value of the path-loss compensation factor corresponding to the cell, from among the plurality of cells, in which the terminal is currently located; and a step of transmitting an uplink signal using the determined transmission power. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146751 | Method and system for transmitting channel feedback information - The disclosure provides a method and system for transmitting channel feedback information. The method includes: a transmitting station transmits, after obtaining a Transmission Opportunity (TXOP), a radio frame to a receiving station to request the receiving station to transmit channel feedback information; and the receiving station transmitting, after receiving the radio frame transmitted by the transmitting station, a radio frame including channel feedback information to the transmitting station, wherein a transmission end time of the radio frame including channel feedback information is allowed to exceed an end time set by a transmission time threshold of the TXOP. The technical solution of the disclosure solves the technical problem that the transmitter is unable to timely obtain channel feedback information from the receiver, enabling the transmitter to timely obtain the channel feedback information from the receiver even in the condition that the transmitter cannot estimate a data volume and a rate of the channel feedback information fed back from the receiving station and whether the time for feeding back the channel feedback information by the receiver would exceed the transmission time threshold value or not. | 05-29-2014 |
20140153479 | System and Method for Time Saving Cell Search for Mobile Devices in Single and Multiple Radio Technology Communication Systems - A cellular device has a stacked protocol, with an upper layer and a lower layer. The lower layer includes a multiple carrier detection unit, a memory and a digital processing system. The multiple carrier detection unit receives a plurality of wireless carrier signals and provides a respective plurality of output digital streams. The memory is used to store a target cell search list, and the digital processing system processes the digital streams in parallel based upon parameters within the target cell search list. The parameters may include a frequency indicator and a radio access technology (RAT) indicator. The lower layer controls the multiple carrier detection unit to detect the wireless carrier signals based upon the frequencies and RATs in the target cell search list. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153480 | Methods and Apparatus to Provide Extended Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Services - Methods and apparatus to provide extended voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) services are disclosed. An example residential gateway comprises a radio frequency (RF) detector to detect a presence of a cellular communication device, a service controller to enable a VoIP communication device when the cellular communication device is present, wherein the VoIP communication device and the cellular communication device are different devices. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153481 | CLOUD-BASED TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE - A cloud-based telecommunications infrastructure may include one or more cloud-based network instances that each provide telecommunications services to mobile devices. A proxy may be used to select, based on initial communications from the mobile devices, one of the cloud-based network instances to service the mobile devices. Communications to the mobile devices may then be routed to the selected cloud-based network instances. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153482 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, MOBILE TERMINAL, METHOD FOR REQUESTING INFORMATION AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION - A communication device is described comprising a message generator configured to generate a message indicating that a mobile terminal is to determine whether a transmitter of the mobile terminal has been active at a predetermined time and provide information which depends on the activity of the transmitter of the mobile terminal at the predetermined time and a transmitter configured to transmit the message. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153483 | L1 CONTROL SIGNALING FOR UTRAN HSDPA - A Level-1 (L1) signaling flag is mapped to unused (invalid) bit sequences in Part 1 of the HS-SCCH—that is Part 1 bit encodings that are not defined in the UTRAN specifications—and a corresponding L1 command is encoded in Part 2. This allows UE ( | 06-05-2014 |
20140153484 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENCODING TRANSPORT BLOCK - A method and apparatus for encoding a transport block are provided. The method for encoding the transport block includes: determining, by a transmitter, a size of transport block; dividing, by the transmitter, the transport block into at least one code block based on the size of transport block; interleaving, by the transmitter, the at least one code block by an interleaver; and performing, by the transmitter, a turbo coding for the interleaved at least one code block, wherein the size of transport block is determined based on the number of the divided code blocks. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153485 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - There is provided an information processing apparatus including a determining unit that determines a movement state of a wireless communication apparatus, and a control unit that restricts a base station selection process of the wireless communication apparatus, on the basis of the determined movement state. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153486 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK DISCOVERY AND MANAGEMENT AND ASSOCIATED E-COMMERCE - The subject matter described herein relates to wireless network discovery, management, the enabling of services, and economic exchanges in a cooperative manner by one or more federated sets of consumers, one or more access point providers, and one or more wireless service providers. Described herein are methods and apparatus for the discovery, classification, and management of wireless networks. The methods and apparatuses described herein may leverage two complementary elements impacting the performance of wireless LANs: (1) organization and management of the wireless access points (hot spots) from an ontology perspective, and (2) organization of mobile devices as a federation. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153487 | Method and Apparatus for Wide Bandwidth Mixed-Mode Wireless Communications - A network device for implementing high-rate greenfield transmission in a mixed mode frame structure. The network device is configured to transmit a mixed mode frame on two adjacent channels. The mixed mode frame comprises at least two backward compatible portions of a first frequency and a greenfield portion of a second frequency. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153488 | INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - A network node includes, into a field of downlink control information that provides a user equipment with information for reception and decoding of data transmitted from the network node to the user equipment in a mobile communication network, an indication of receiver information. The receiver information is applicable for interference suppression/cancellation by a receiving operation of the user equipment, capable of performing interference suppression/cancellation using the receiver information. The user equipment detects the receiver information from the downlink control information, and can select a receiving operation using the receiver information. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153489 | Methods, Apparatus and Systems for Inter-Converged Gateway (ICGW) Communications - User equipment (UE) may include dual mode devices that enable two different radio access technologies (RATs) for connection to wireless communication networks. Recently, these RATs have been used for message splitting in which a message is split into two packet flows, for example, that may enable increased throughput to the (UE). Dynamic mobility management may be provided for the UE by allowing a converged gateway (CGW) to discover the UE. For example, the CGW may identify the UE in communication a first CGW that may be within a first subnet. The CGW may store the identity of the WTRU in the memory. The CGW may transmit the identity of the UE to a second CGW that may be in communication with a second subnet. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153490 | Device and Method for Controlling Interference - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a transceiver ( | 06-05-2014 |
20140153491 | TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION USING WIRELESS POWER SIGNAL - The present description relates to an apparatus for transmitting wireless power and a method for same, comprising: a power transmission control portion for generating a packet comprising data for at least one electronic device; a modulation/demodulation portion for modulating a carrier signal so as to comprise the packet that is generated; and a power conversion portion for forming the wireless power signal for transmitting power, based on the carrier signal that is modulated, wherein the power transmission control portion transmits the packet to the at least one electronic device through the wireless power signal. Also, the present description relates to the electronic device and a method for receiving power by same, comprising: a power reception portion for receiving the wireless power signal from the apparatus for transmitting wireless power; a modulation/demodulation portion for demodulating the packet which is comprised in the wireless power signal; and a power reception control portion for obtaining data based on the packet that is demodulated. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153492 | INDEXING RESOURCES FOR TRANSMISSION OF ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SIGNALS IN MULTI-CELL TDD COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus are described for a User Equipment (UE) to determine a set of resources available for transmitting an acknowledgement signal in an UpLink (UL) Component Carrier (CC) in response to reception of multiple DownLink (DL) Scheduling Assignments (SAs) transmitted from a base station with each DL SA being associated with a respective DL CC. The UL CC and a first DL CC establish a communication link when the UE is configured for communication over a single UL CC and a single DL CC. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153493 | SECTOR-BASED BASE STATION - A sector-based base station includes at least one of a shared transmission RF local oscillator TX_LO, a shared receiving RF local oscillator RX_LO, a shared digital signal processing unit, and a shared transmission feedback unit. A technical solution of sharing an intermediate RF unit circuit in the sector-based base station is adopted, so as to reduce the number of elements used in the circuit without sacrificing the communication capacity of the base station. As such, the reliability index of a single board is improved, and the system reliability is also enhanced. Meanwhile, the material cost and the time required for debugging are both reduced, thus lowering the cost of the base station. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153494 | System and Method for Reducing Interference in Wireless Communication Systems - A system and method for mitigating interference in a physical layer is disclosed. The system may include a transmitter configured to transmit a message, the message having appended to it an interference signal and a receiver configured to receive the message from the transmitter. The receiver may also include a singular value decomposition filter receiver into which the message is input, the singular value decomposition filter receiver configured to use singular value decomposition data from the interference signal to recover the message from the transmitter while substantially eliminating the interference signal. The interference signal may be co-channel with the message and/or the interference signal may be dominant to the message. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153495 | REAL-TIME RATE CONTROL MECHANISM FOR MULTI-RATE DATA TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Wireless networks are becoming increasingly heterogeneous in terms of the processing capabilities of network users' receiving equipment. According to embodiments of the innovation, in a communications network comprising a plurality of receivers with different data reception rate capabilities, data frames targeted to respective receivers may be transmitted to the receivers in accordance with the respective data reception rate capabilities of the receivers. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153496 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REMOTE-ACCESSING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, a method and an apparatus for remote-accessing are disclosed. A method for transmitting remote access indication information, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the steps of: generating from a first network node remote access packet data network (PDN) connection indication information with respect to PDN connection of a user equipment (UE); and transmitting the remote access PDN connection indication information from the first network node to the UE, wherein the remote access PDN connection indication information can express whether the PDN connection of the UE is the remote access PDN connection. | 06-05-2014 |
20140161026 | MULTIHOMED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The invention relates to a method for routing an uplink IP packet of a cellular device. The method comprises obtaining, by a routing client of the cellular device, a routing rule from a routing server, routing the uplink IP packet, according to the routing rule, through a first PDN connection or through a second PDN connection, both PDN connections being established over the same cellular radio interface of the cellular device. The invention also relates to a corresponding cellular device. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161027 | Rogue Wireless Access Point Detection - A method includes, receiving a first set of media access control (MAC) addresses from one or more wireless communication detection devices of a network. The method also includes receiving a second set of MAC addresses from one or more wired devices of the network. The second set of MAC addresses corresponds to devices with wired connections to the network. The method further includes, determining that a wireless device having a first MAC address of the first set of media access control addresses is a potential rogue wireless device when a numeric value of the first MAC address and a numeric value of a second MAC address of the second set of MAC addresses differ by no more than a threshold amount and when a first location associated with a device that detects the first MAC address matches a second location associated with the second MAC address. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161028 | DIGITAL MOBILE RADIO FRONT END PROCESSOR - Front-end processors are provided that receive an identifier representative of a target device and match the identifier with a device type. The identifier can be received from a first device that utilizes a first communication protocol and the target device can utilize a second communication protocol. Communications received from the first device and intended for the target device can be translated from the first communication protocol to the second communication protocol. The communication, translated to the second communication protocol type can be transmitted to the target device for reception at the target device. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161029 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA TRAFFIC OFFLOAD - A method and a system for data traffic offload are provided. The method includes the following steps. Create a local tunnel between a first base station and a second base station according to a first record and/or a second record. The first base station and the second base station are located on a front-end network. The first record corresponds to a first user equipment and the first base station. The second record corresponds to a second user equipment and the second base station. Route network packets transmitted between the first user equipment and the second user equipment via the local tunnel. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161030 | Methods and Devices for Transmission of Signals in a Telecommunication System - Methods and devices for generating training symbols to be transmitted in a radio network are provided for a radio system where multiple users are sharing the same transmission slot. The method involves forming a sequence of training symbols by repeating an initial block of training symbols and for each user rotating the repeated block by a user specific rotation angle. A rotated block is periodically extended in both ends. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161031 | BLUETOOTH VOICE QUALITY IMPROVEMENT - Various examples are provided for related to Bluetooth voice quality improvement. In one example, among others, a method includes determining whether a packet payload is received during a transmission period of a collocated interface based at least in part upon signaling from the collocated interface and replacing at least a portion of the payload with estimated payload data based at least in part upon whether the payload was received during the transmission period. In another example, a communication device includes a first interface that supports BT communications and a collocated second interface. The first interface is operable to replace at least a portion of a payload of a BT packet with estimated payload data based at least in part upon signaling from the second interface that indicates whether at least a portion of the BT packet was received during a transmission period of the second interface. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161032 | COMMUNICATION DEVICES FOR MANAGING MULTIPLE OPERATION MODES OF A PLURALITY OF CO-LOCATED WIRELESS MODULES - A communication device for managing multiple operation modes of a plurality of co-located wireless modules is provided. In the communication device, a first and second wireless module perform first and second wireless transceiving using first and second wireless technologies, respectively, and a managing module duplicates or fragments at least a Tx data packet according to the first wireless transceiving and the second wireless transceiving signal qualities, transmits the Tx data packet and the duplicated Tx data packet via the first wireless module and the second wireless module, respectively, or transmits the fragments of the Tx data packet via the first wireless module and the second wireless module, alternately, and aggregates a plurality of Rx data packets, which are received via the first wireless module and the second wireless module, according to the first wireless transceiving and the second wireless transceiving signal qualities. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161033 | METHODS, SMART CARDS, AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING PORTABLE COMPUTER, VOIP, AND APPLICATION SERVICES - A smart card is used with a network based system to providing portable telecommunication and computing services. In an exemplary embodiment the smart card holds a user authentication code and user telephony account information. The smart card transfers the user authentication code and the account information to one of a plurality of geographically dispersed card readers which are each connected to a local telephony device. When the smart card is plugged into a first card reader, telephone calls directed to the smart card user's follow-me telephone number are received at a first local telephony device. When the smart card is plugged into a second smart card reader, telephone calls directed to the follow-me telephone number are received at a second telephony local device. Hence the user is enabled to receive and place calls using any of the geographically dispersed telephony devices as though they were his/her own personal landline or cellular telephone supplied by his/her telephony services provider. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161034 | CARRIER WITH CONFIGURABLE DOWNLINK CONTROL REGION - A first carrier of a carrier aggregation system has a downlink control region DCR which is selectively enabled and disabled. For the case the DCR of the first carrier is disabled, a DCR of a second carrier is used to cross-schedule a user equipment for radio resources on the first carrier. In various embodiments: the DCR of the first carrier lies within an unlicensed radio frequency band; the DCR of the first carrier is disabled by signaling which reduces to zero a number of symbols reserved for the DCR and is enabled by signaling which increases from zero a number of symbols reserved for the DCR; the signaling is downlink and group-based to a plurality of user equipments. The group-based signaling may be a broadcast system information block or a group RNTI, either of which give frequency information of the DCR and an enabled/disabled status indication. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161035 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - An operation monitoring unit monitors whether a WiMax communication unit operates and whether a CDMA communication unit operates. A quality determining unit determines whether the reception quality of the CDMA communication has deteriorated when the WiMax communication and the CDMA communication are simultaneously performed. An interference suppressing unit suppresses the interference in the CDMA communication and caused by the WiMax communication when the reception quality of the CDMA communication has deteriorated. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161036 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT SIGNALING FOR COMPRESSION - An apparatus and method of wireless communication includes determining, at a compressor component, whether to transmit a current data packet as a compressed current data packet or an uncompressed current data packet. Further, these aspects include determining whether a data sequence in the current data packet matches a first or second data sequence when determining to transmit the uncompressed current data packet, wherein the first data sequence indicates a first compression state and the second data sequence indicates a second compression state. Also, these aspects include adding the second data sequence to the uncompressed current data packet for transmission when the data sequence in the current data packet matches the first or second data sequence. Additionally, these aspects include transmitting the uncompressed current data packet with the second data sequence when the data sequence in the current data packet matches the first or second data sequence. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161037 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A cellular telecommunications network for facilitating communication connections for terminals having token identification modules, the network including: a location register for receiving requests to access the network and, if the requests are associated with a token identification module, redirecting the requests; a token register which receives redirected requests, generates connection identification data and transmits the connection identification data to the location register to identify the terminal to the location register; a network gateway component for establishing a communication between the network and the terminal in accordance with the connection identification data; and a network monitoring component for performing service management, such as a session authentication check. A network implementing the invention is capable of providing data communication sessions to terminals having identification modules that are not associated with MSISDN numbers. Embodiments described are directed to laptops and M2M terminals with embedded token identification modules. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161038 | MOBILE FAST ALERTING - Systems and methods of operating a communication session control server. A first communication session initiation message is received from a first communication terminal, the first communication session initiation message indicating a second communication terminal with which the first communication terminal is requesting a communication session. A second communication session initiation message is sent to the second communication terminal, the second communication session initiation message indicating a delay to be used by the second communication terminal to determine when to initiate an alerting process. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161039 | SCHEDULING DATA TRANSMISSION BY MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) LAYER IN A MOBILE NETWORK - A method for determining padding compatibility is disclosed. A determination is made of a number of protocol data units (PDUs) for a logical channel mapped to a transport channel such that, for a logical channel allowing segmentation, calculate n wherein n=service data unit size/transport block size (SDU size/TB size), and on a condition that n is an integer, setting the number of PDUs=n. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161040 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication terminal including a receiver, a first processor, a first storage, a second storage, a second processor, and a transmitter is provided. The receiver receives one physical packet that includes at least one frame body field, a first field including information on a length of the frame body field, a second field used to detect an error of the frame body field, and a sequence number field including a sequence number corresponding to the frame body field. The second storage retains a successively and successfully received maximum sequence number on the basis of a result of the first processor. The transmitter transmits a response frame indicating the successively and successfully received maximum sequence number when the first processor extracts at least one correct frame body. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161041 | METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS USING AN IP ADDRESS BASED ON GEO POSITION - Method of routing data over a network in which contact is made with a home network to determine the reported geo-position, using this geo-position to transmit data to the device over a path through a node in which the node reads the geo-position, accesses a list of possible recipients and their geo-positions, compares its location to the positions, selects a recipient based at least in part on the proximity of the recipient to the device, and transmits the data over the best path. Eventually, the device becomes the recipient. A geo-position may be transmitted as part of an IP address, or as geo-position data or XML tagged geo-position information contained in a data packet or IP addressed message or IP addressed voice calls (VoIP). The geo-position information can be generated from a GPS receiver. This method and/or IP address may be used in a method of doing business in which the geo-position is used to identify the source and location for delivery. This information may be incorporated into a purchase order or confirmation receipt. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161042 | Systems, Methods and Computer Program Products for Intelligent APN Management in Wireless Communications Networks - Systems, methods, and computer program products are for managing APNs in a wireless communications network during a PDP context activation sequence. An exemplary method includes a radio network controller (RNC) generating an APN assignment request in response to a PDP context activation request being received from a device and sending the APN assignment request to an intelligent APN management system (iAPNMS). The method also includes determining, at the iAPNMS based upon an assignment factor, an APN to assign to the PDP context activation request and assigning the APN to the PDP context activation request. The method also includes one of the RNC and the iAPNMS modifying the PDP context activation request to include the APN, and the RNC forwarding the PDP context activation request including the APN to a serving general packet radio service (GPRS) gateway support node (SGSN) to continue the PDP context activation sequence. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161043 | SAMPLE SELECTION FOR SECONDARY SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL (SSS) DETECTION - Methods and apparatus for selecting samples for secondary synchronization signal (SSS) detection are described. Several alternatives are provided for efficient cell identifier detection. In a first alternative, multiple bursts of a signal received from a cell are sampled with non-uniform spacing between sampling intervals to determine a sequence for cell identification. In a second alternative, samples of a first and a second signal received from a stronger cell are cancelled, and a sequence for detecting a weaker cell is determined by reducing effects of the samples of a third signal received from the weaker cell which do not overlap with the primary synchronization signal (PSS) or SSS of the stronger cell. In a third alternative, a sequence for detecting a weaker cell is determined by reducing effects of any sampled bursts that correspond to a high transmission power portion of a signal from a stronger cell. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161044 | SAMPLE SELECTION FOR SECONDARY SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL (SSS) DETECTION - Methods and apparatus for selecting samples for secondary synchronization signal (SSS) detection are described. Several alternatives are provided for efficient cell identifier detection. In a first alternative, multiple bursts of a signal received from a cell are sampled with non-uniform spacing between sampling intervals to determine a sequence for cell identification. In a second alternative, samples of a first and a second signal received from a stronger cell are cancelled, and a sequence for detecting a weaker cell is determined by reducing effects of the samples of a third signal received from the weaker cell which do not overlap with the primary synchronization signal (PSS) or SSS of the stronger cell. In a third alternative, a sequence for detecting a weaker cell is determined by reducing effects of any sampled bursts that correspond to a high transmission power portion of a signal from a stronger cell. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161045 | BACKOFF ADAPTATION FOR DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION - System and method for backoff correction of channel quality information (CQI). A correction factor is calculated based on a goodness measure such as packet error rate (PER). The selection of modulation and coding scheme (MCS) is made considering the channel quality information (CQI) adjusted by the correction factor. A meaningful goodness measure can be imposed if the goodness measure is very low. A different correction factor can be calculated for different confidence levels, MCSs and transmission modes. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161046 | SUPPORTING VERSION NEGOTIATION FOR POSITIONING FOR TERMINALS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques for supporting positioning for terminals in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, a message is prepared and transmitted with a message segment including a version of a protocol used to encode the message and a compatibility level associated with inter-operable protocol versions, wherein different compatibility levels indicate non-compatibility between protocol versions. In another aspect, a message is received with a message segment including a version of a protocol used to encode the message and a compatibility level associated with inter-operable protocol versions, wherein different compatibility levels indicate non-compatibility between protocol versions. The compatibility level included in the received message is compared to an internal compatibility level and a response message is prepared and transmitted with a message segment including the internal compatibility level. | 06-12-2014 |
20140169268 | ARCHITECTURE FOR CELLULAR NETWORKS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method for transmitting data packets in a cellular network to a user equipment using a first distributed access gateway, including: receiving a first tunnel request from a second distributed access gateway; establishing a first tunnel with the second distributed access gateway; receiving a first data packet destined to the user equipment from a native packet transport network; and transmitting the first data packet to the user equipment via the first tunnel to the second distributed access gateway. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169269 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND MEDIA FOR MOBILE MANAGEMENT ENTITY (MME) SELECTION BY EVOLVED NODE B (eNodeB) - A method for mobile management entity (MME) selection includes receiving at a base transceiver station (BTS) a message from each of multiple MMEs including information for advertising functionalities of each of the MMEs. The functionalities include at least one type of communications session supported by each of the MMEs. The method also includes receiving at the BTS a message from a user equipment (UE) to request for a communications session. The request message includes session type information indicating a type of session requested by the UE. At least one of the MMEs is capable of serving the requested type of session. The method further includes generating a list of candidate MMEs capable of serving the requested type of communications session from the MMEs by matching the session type information with the capability information, and selecting a serving MME from the list based on the information relating to the advertised functionalities. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169270 | Dynamically Configurable IP Based Wireless Devices and Wireless Networks - A wireless communication and control system including a wireless device. There is a central server for storing communication protocols and control protocols and communicating the communication protocols and selectively communicating the control protocols between the wireless device and the central server. A communication protocol configures the system for communication and control protocols configure the system as one of a selection of intelligent appliance controllers. Alternately the control protocols configure the system as one of a selection of Internet terminals. The wireless device is any hand-held communication device, such as a hand-held computing device, wireless telephone, or cellular phone. A TV may be controlled using the cell phone if the TV set is capable of receiving wireless commands. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169271 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT METHOD, ACCESS GW APPARATUS, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT CONTROL APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - An access GW ( | 06-19-2014 |
20140169272 | DEVICE, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING DATA - A device, method and system for communicating data are disclosed. The method for communicating data is adapted for a base station, and the method includes grouping a data for transmission in a plurality of data subsets, in which the data for transmission includes a plurality of information bits, encoding the data subsets; modulating the data subsets, and transmitting the data subsets to a receiving device. A base station includes a communication protocol module grouping a data for transmission in a plurality of data subsets, in which the data for transmission comprises a plurality of information bits, encoding the data subsets, modulating the data subsets, and transmitting the data subsets to a receiving device. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169273 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR EARLY DECODING OF TFCI IN UMTS - Disclosed are systems, methods, and computer program products for decoding of transport format combination indicator (TFCI) in a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS). In one aspect, a method includes receiving by a UE coded TFCI bit sequence on a physical channel, determining a range of TFCI bits that contain information, performing early decoding of the received TFCI bit sequence; and limiting the search set of decoded TFCI bits to the determined range of TFCI bits. The range of TFCI bits that contain information may be determined from a code book. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169274 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PLAYING CONTENTS IN HOME NETWORK SYSTEM - Provided is a method and apparatus for controlling home devices forming a home network at a time by using a mobile terminal in a home network system. In particular, the present disclosure provides a method and apparatus for controlling home devices at a time, depending on a type of contents. A method for playing contents in a Home GateWay (HGW) in a home network system includes receiving from a mobile terminal a control command requesting continuous playback of contents that are currently played in the mobile terminal and controlling at least one home devices in response to the control command. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169275 | METHOD FOR COORDINATING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK AND HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Provided are a method for coordinating inter-cell interference in a heterogeneous network (HetNet) and the heterogeneous network. The method includes: forming M normal base stations and low-power nodes within coverage of the respective normal base stations in the heterogeneous network into a coordinated group; combining mute/non-mute states of bandwidths of the M normal base stations to obtain a plurality of states of the coordinated group; a user of each of the normal base stations feeding at least one first CQI back to the normal base station; a user of each of the low-power nodes feeding one or more second CQIs back to the low-power node; using the first CQI and the second CQIs as a basis to make capacity estimation of the coordinated group; and setting the mute/non-mute states of the bandwidths of the M normal base stations in accordance with a state of the coordinated group corresponding to an optimal system capacity so as to perform data transmission. In the method for coordinating interference provided by the present invention, M transmission points each including one or more normal base stations and low-power nodes covered by the respective normal base stations can be formed into a coordinated group, thereby extending processing for the normal base stations up to all the transmission points in the coordinated group. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169276 | METHOD FOR GENERATING SEQUENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for generating a sequence in a wireless communication system includes generating a bit sequence from combined bits of reception acknowledgements for each of a first transport block and a second transport block according to a predetermined coding rate, mapping the bit sequence to modulation symbols to generate a block of modulation symbols, and generating a sequence of modulation symbols by applying an orthogonal sequence repeated n times to the block of modulation symbols. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169277 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System - Handling of UE capability information in a mobile telecommunications network wherein an eNodeB receives information regarding the UE capability information from the UE and stores the information. The eNodeB sends the UE capability information to the EPC, i.e., to an MME, which receives and stores the UE capability information. When the UE transits from idle to active state, does an initial attach, or when a part of the UE capabilities have changed, it sends a message to the eNodeB regarding the update. The eNodeB forwards the message to the MME, which sends a response associated with the previously stored UE capability information to the eNodeB. The eNodeB decides whether the UE capabilities stored in the MME is up-to-date based on the message from the UE and the response from the MME. If the UE holds updated UE capabilities the eNodeB can request updated UE capability information from the UE. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169278 | METHOD, DEVICE, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER AND CHIP FOR IMPROVING NETWORK QUALITY - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method, device, radio network controller and chip for improving network quality. A signal of a user in a serving cell, detected by the same-frequency cell adjacent to the serving cell, is combined with a signal detected by the serving cell using a MCJD technology, so as to improve the signal quality of the user in the serving cell. The method of the present disclosure comprises: obtaining a first signal which belongs to a user terminal of a first cell and is detected by a base station of at least one second cell; combining the first signal with a second signal of the user terminal detected by a base station of the first cell to obtain a third signal; sending the third signal to a radio network controller. Therefore, the signal quality of the user in the first cell can be improved. | 06-19-2014 |
20140177523 | Gateway Selection Based on Geographical Location - A system may be configured to receive information regarding a geographical location of a user device; and compare the geographical location of the user device to geographical locations of a set of gateway devices. The gateway devices may be associated with a cellular network, and the gateway devices may communicatively couple one or more network devices associated with the cellular network to an access point that is not associated with the cellular network. The system may further select a particular gateway device based on the geographical location of the user device and the geographical locations of the particular gateway device; and store or output information regarding the selected particular gateway device. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177524 | Ad-Hoc Wireless Sensor Package - Systems, methods, computer-readable storage mediums including computer-readable instructions and/or circuitry for control of transmission to a target device with communicating with one or more sensors in an ad-hoc sensor network may implement operations including, but not limited to: receiving one or more wireless signals associated with a sensing capability status of at least one sensor; wirelessly transmitting one or more sensor operation activation signals to one or more sensors according to the sensing capability status of the at least one sensor; and at least one of powering one or more sensing operations of the at least one sensor and charging one or more power storage devices of the at least one sensor via the one or more sensor operation activation signals. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177525 | MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATIONS IN A RADIO NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for providing information from a machine device, in particular from a sensor device (S | 06-26-2014 |
20140177526 | MIMO System - Improved performance of downlink data transmission in a high speed downlink packet access, HSDPA, mobile communication system is described. Rank information, RI, and channel quality information, CQI, is obtained in a radio base station from a user equipment, UE, and this rank and CQI information is used in a medium access control-ehs, MAC-ehs, entity for determining a transport format and resource combination, TFRC, on a downlink channel. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177527 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INFORMATION TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and more specifically relates to a method and device for transmitting information. A wireless communication system can support carrier aggregation (CA). In one aspect of the present invention, a method, in which a terminal transmits information to a base station in a wireless communication system, comprises the steps of: carrying out rate matching for a preset number of symbols in a subframe for transmitting first information on at least one serving cell formed in the terminal; and transmitting the first information from the subframe in which the rate matching has been carried out, to the base station. Therein, the uplink transmission timing of the one or more serving cells are different from one another, and the preset number is determined in accordance with the difference between the uplink transmission timings of the one or more serving cell. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177528 | Method for Synchronizing Clocks in a Communication Network - A method for synchronizing clocks in a communication network includes a first clock of a first network element which is a master element is used for synchronizing second clocks of one or more second network dements which are slave elements. A first sequence of first messages transmitted from the first network element to the second network element and/or a second sequence of second messages transmitted from the second network element to the first network element is recorded. First messages and/or second messages out of those sequences are identified by using an appropriate threshold function with respect to the transmission delays of those messages. Those identified messages have the same constant minimum delay, and based on those messages clock synchronization between the first clock and the second clock is performed. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177529 | Service processing method and device for ubiquitous UE - The disclosure discloses a service processing device for a ubiquitous User Equipment (UE). The device is a UE middleware embedded in the ubiquitous UE, and includes: a data transferring module, configured to perform data interaction with a ubiquitous node (U-node) via a protocol layer for U-node network connectivity and a protocol layer for wide-area connectivity; an interaction-frame module, configured to provide a capability to select from and convert between different communication-interaction models for data interaction between a functioning module and the U-node via the data transfer module; and the functioning module, configured to determine a UE capability required by a service, determine required U-nodes in a peripheral network environment, aggregate the required U-nodes into a virtual UE, integrate service data, and present the integrated data to a user. The disclosure further discloses a service processing method for a ubiquitous UE. With the solution of the disclosure, a ubiquitous UE in a ubiquitous network is allowed to acquire context information in time, thereby achieving optimized resource utilization and adaptation to a dynamically changing environment. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177530 | Access method and system and mobile intelligent access point - An access method is disclosed. The method includes: a mobile intelligent access point is attached to a core network and acquires an address of a 3rd Generation Partnership Project Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (3GPP AAA) server of a User Equipment (UE) from the core network; the UE requests the mobile intelligent access point and the 3GPP AAA server selected by the mobile intelligent access point for the UE to perform an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) authentication on the UE; the UE initiates an access process to the mobile intelligent access point and acquires an Internet Protocol (IP) address of the UE; and the mobile intelligent access point selects a Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW) for the UE and establishes an underlying access tunnel for the UE. Correspondingly, an access system and a mobile intelligent access point are further disclosed. With the disclosure, network authentication can be implemented to facilitate an operator to control the number of access users and to guarantee the network of the operator. Furthermore, a broadband mobile network is taken as a backhaul network, so as to reduce the reliability on a fixed network and improve the utilization of the broadband mobile network. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177531 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION - There are provided a base station, a terminal, and a communication system in a wireless communication system in which a base station and a terminal communicate with each other, in which the base station and the terminal can efficiently perform communication. The communication system includes a higher layer processing unit | 06-26-2014 |
20140177532 | TERMINAL APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION POWER AND METHOD FOR SAME - A terminal apparatus for controlling downlink signal transmission power and a method for same are disclosed. The present invention is a method and a terminal apparatus for transmitting downlink transmission power, a method for the base station controlling the downlink transmission power in a wireless communication system comprising the steps of: transmitting a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) to the terminal through a carrier comprising orthogonal frequency distribution multiplexing (OFDM) symbols which do not have a cell-specific reference signal (CRS); and transmitting an upper layer parameter for controlling the transmission power of the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), wherein the upper layer parameter comprises information on at least one of PDSCH energy per resource element (EPRE), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) EPRE, and demodulation reference signal (DM-RS) EPRE. | 06-26-2014 |
20140185518 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WiFi POSITIONING - An aspect of the invention provides instantaneous Wi-Fi positioning that is robust to outliar APs using a recursive centroid method. It estimates user position and uncertainty based on the current list of scanned APs. Another aspect of the invention provides a Wi-Fi navigation solution that estimates good Wi-Fi positions even in the areas of low AP density and further improves robustness to outliar APs. Wi-Fi navigation solution improves the estimate of instantaneous Wi-Fi positioning by using a 4-state Kalman filter, which models user dynamics. As a result, the uncertainty estimate of the Wi-Fi positions is accurately estimated, thereby, making it suitable for blending with GNSS. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185519 | Intelligent Routing of Network Packets on Telecommunication Devices - A telecommunication device configured to select one of a plurality of network connectivities of the telecommunication device to use for transmission of a network packet is described herein. The telecommunication device may select the network connectivity based on user routing criteria, connectivity metrics, or transmission times. The user routing criteria may be dynamically updated during a communication or connection, affecting selection of the network connectivity for further network packets. The network connectivities may be respectively associated with different network operators. Also, the telecommunication device may select a first network connectivity for transmitting a first network packet and a second network connectivity for transmitting a second network packet. Further, the telecommunication device may select a first network connectivity for uplink communications and a second network connectivity for downlink communications. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185520 | PROCESSING DELAY ESTIMATE BASED ON CROWDSOURCING DATA - Techniques are provided for providing a processing delay estimate of an access point, or turnaround calibration function (TCF), associated with round trip time (RTT) measurements. Mobile devices, access points, and/or other systems can utilize these techniques to derive processing delay from the RTT measurements. Crowdsourcing can also be used to help increase the accuracy of the processing delay estimate, which can be propagated to multiple devices. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185521 | INSTALLATION OF A VOICE CLIENT FOR ROAMING DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Voice over LTE (VoLTE) services may be provided to a roaming mobile device, even when the home network of the mobile device does not provide VoLTE service. In one implementation, one or more devices in a network may determine based on a mobile device attaching to a network as a roaming device for the network, a home network of the mobile device. The devices may further determine whether the home network, associated with the mobile device, provides VoLTE services; transmit, based on the determination that the home network does not provide VoLTE services, a VoLTE client application to the mobile device, the VoLTE client application providing functionality, for the mobile device, relating to usage of VoLTE services in the network. The devices may further communicate with the mobile device and the VoLTE client application, to provide one or more VoLTE services to the mobile device. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185522 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SENDING MTC DEVICE TRIGGER INFORMATION, AND TARGET USER EQUIPMENT - A method and system for sending Machine Type Communication (MTC) device trigger information and target user equipment is disclosed. An MTC server sets contents of MTC device trigger information, and sends the received MTC device trigger information to a network node equipment. The network node equipment searches a core network equipment corresponding to a target user equipment, and sends the received MTC device trigger information to the core network equipment. The core network equipment forwards the MTC device trigger information to the target user equipment via a radio access network. The target user equipment receives the MTC device trigger information, and sends an MTC device trigger information acknowledgement message to the core network equipment. Through the solution of the disclosure, the sending of MTC device trigger information in a 3GPP network can be realized. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185523 | ASSOCIATION BIASING FOR A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK (HetNet) - A method for association biasing at a mobile device in a heterogeneous network (HetNet) is disclosed. The method can include the mobile device receiving coordination set information from a macro node in the HetNet. The coordination set information can include at least one low power node (LPN) identifier of at least one LPN. The mobile device can receive a request from the macro node to apply a specified reference signal (RS) biasing. The mobile device can apply the specified RS biasing to an LPN RS measurement derived from a LPN RS received from an LPN having an LPN identifier in the received coordination set information. The mobile device can associate the mobile device with the LPN when the LPN RS measurement with the specified RS biasing exceeds an association threshold. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185524 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONSIDERING ROUTING INFORMATION IN THE DETERMINATION OF AN ACCESS NETWORK TO BE UTILIZED - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided to allow a plurality of access networks to be utilized in a coordinated manner in accordance with the routing policies defined by the network operator as well as other routing information including, for example, IETF routing and router information. In the context of a method, information, such as ANDSF information, defining the routing policies of the network operator may be received from a mobile terminal. The method also includes at least a portion of the information defining one or more routing policies of the network operator within an IP connectivity stack along with other routing information that is not based on the routing policies of the network operator. And, the method considers both the one or more routing policies defined by the network operator and the other routing information in determining utilization of a plurality of access networks. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185525 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPLICATION SERVER APPARATUS - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: when an S-CSCF in an IMS receives a terminating signal directed to a UE, sending the terminating signal from the S-CSCF to an SCC-AS in the IMS, the terminating signal including call-type information indicating whether the terminating signal is for voice communication or AV communication; sending an inquiry signal including the call-type information from the SCC-AS to an HSS; and determining, by the SCC-AS, a domain to which the terminating signal is to be transferred, based on the call-type information and a response signal received from the HSS as a response to the inquiry signal. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185526 | INSTALLATION OF A VOICE CLIENT FOR ROAMING DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A mobile device may obtain wireless network connectivity from a local telecommunications provider by replacing a card in a mobile device associated with the user. In one implementation, a method may include receiving identification information relating to a mobile device; determining, based on the identification information, that the mobile device is compatible with a wireless network; transmitting, based on the determination that the mobile device is compatible with the wireless network, a Voice over Long Term Evolution (VoLTE) client application to the mobile device, the VoLTE client application providing functionality, for the mobile device, relating to usage of VoLTE services in the wireless network; and communicating, with the mobile device and the VoLTE client application, to provide one or more VoLTE services to the mobile device. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185527 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CSI-RS AND DATA USING PARTIAL MUTING OF CSI-RS - A method and apparatus for transmitting Channel State Information Reference Symbol (CSI-RS) and data with partial muting of the CSI-RS are proposed. The method includes determining a CSI-RS pattern to be used among CSI-RS pattern candidates, determining a muting pattern for muting some resource elements constituting CSI-RS pattern candidates except for the determined CSI-RS pattern, mapping data symbols and CSI-RS to resource elements in a resource grid with rate patching in consideration of the CSI-RS pattern and muting pattern, and transmitting the data symbols and CSI-RS to a terminal. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185528 | TERMINAL, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - There are provided a terminal, a base station, a communication system, and a communication method allowing a base station to efficiently notify a terminal of control information in a communication system in which the base station and the terminal communicate with each other. A terminal configured to communicate with a base station including a plurality of transmit antenna ports is configured to estimate, based on a channel state information reference signal transmitted from the plurality of transmit antenna ports, a channel state between the base station and the terminal; and to generate power difference information representing a difference between powers for groups of transmit antenna ports that are some of the plurality of transmit antenna ports. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185529 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN A CELLULAR NETWORK, AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - Disclosed are a method for supporting device-to-device (D2D) communication in a cellular network, and an apparatus for same. The method for supporting device-to-device communication by a terminal in a cellular network comprises the steps of: the terminal receiving, from a base station, information on a D2D zone which has been set up for the D2D communication; and monitoring the D2D zone, using the information on the D2D zone, to detect a search signal transmitted by at least one D2D terminal, wherein the D2D zone may comprise: a search section for the transmission of the search signal by the at least one D2D terminal; and a connection section for transmission of a signal for requesting D2D transmission. | 07-03-2014 |
20140192709 | METHODS OF WIRELESS DATA COLLECTION - A wireless mesh is used to collect data such as from a seismic survey. Data is collected at sensor nodes and transmitted in packets to aggregator nodes, where they are aggregated and transmitted to a central controller or a processing node for processing, in which the data is recorded on a storage device. Packets and aggregate packets may be compressed, encrypted and have wrappers applied, and these steps may be reversed in processing. The central controller distributes packets to multiple processing nodes for processing in parallel. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192710 | ROUTER - A router includes a first communications port, a second communications port, and a processor that is configured to transmit data via at least one of the first communications port or the second communications port. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192711 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SERVING BINARY SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE CONTENT TO DIFFERENT WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods are described for serving binary short message service (SMS) content to multiple mobile devices that use different wireless networks to receive data. One implementation involves a method for serving binary SMS content to the subscribers of a telematics service provider (TSP) on multiple mobile devices that are provisioned with multiple wireless networks. The method involves receiving a binary SMS at a receiving module of an external short message entity (ESME), translating the SMS into a protocol data unit (PDU), and routing the PDU to an SMS gateway producing application. The PDU is directed to a virtual serial port, which is created by the gateway producing application and mapped to a physical serial port at a terminal server. The PDU is sent from the terminal server to a data modem that is provisioned with a wireless carrier, and the data modem is instructed to transmit the SMS to a mobile device. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192712 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS POINTS COUPLED TO A COMMON POWER SOURCE - Power efficient methods and apparatus for detecting wireless terminals in a relatively small geographic area are described. Wireless terminals transmit discovery signals and/or other signals which may be detected by an access point. Various described methods and apparatus are well suited for embodiments where multiple access points, which obtain power from a common power source and/or via a common power bus, with limited power delivery capability. To address power constraints, access points are controlled by a gateway device coupled to the access points so that one or more access points perform monitoring at different times with one or more access points having their receivers powered off while another access point monitors for wireless terminal signals. Power consumption from the common power source is managed by controlling power consumption associated with monitoring operations performed by one or more access points coupled to a common power source. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192713 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR SHORT BEACON FRAMES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments provide a new short beacon frame format and its operation with full beacon frame transmissions for wireless communications devices. Many embodiments comprise a medium access control (MAC) sublayer logic to build frames comprising the short beacon frame for a first communications device. In some embodiments, the MAC sublayer may determine a frame control field comprising a type field indicative of an extension frame and a subtype indicative of a short beacon. In further embodiments, the frame control field may comprise a service set identifier (SSID) control field, and a reserved field. Some embodiments may store the short beacon frame or frame format in memory, in logic, or in another manner that facilitates transmission of the short beacon frames. Some embodiments may receive and detect communications with the short beacon frames. Further embodiments may generate and transmit a communication with the short beacon frames. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192714 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM OF FRAME TUNNELING OPERATION OF MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BANDS DEVICE - Disclosed is a tunneling mechanism that enables frames generated by a MAC layer management entity (MLME) to be transmitted by another. By doing that, a pair of stations (STAs) can perform functions such as (re)association, authentication, and the like, without having to transmit frames over-the-air but, instead, use a different MLME for this purpose. This enables the station management entities (SMEs) of a pair of multi-band capable STAs to provide a seamless fast session transfer (FST), including the provisioning of multi-band (de)authentication and (re)association. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192715 | Routing for Mobile Nodes - A route for establishing a wireless connection between a wireless device and a node may be selected based on an estimated duration of the route. The route duration may be estimated based on information related to the expected movement of nodes included in the route. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192716 | Methods and Apparatuses for Managing Acknowledgements - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for designating an acknowledgment of data. A method and apparatus may designate a mode of operation, in a signal, for acknowledging receipt of data. The method and apparatus may assign an aggregation period, to the signal, including a time period in which one or more stations are designated to communicate one or more items of data to an intermediate node. The method and apparatus may also transmit the signal to enable the stations to detect the designated mode of operation and the time period of the assigned aggregation period in which to communicate the items of data to the intermediate node. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192717 | Information Centric Networking Based Service Centric Networking - A method implemented by a network device residing in a service domain, wherein the network device comprises an information centric networking (ICN) transport layer and a service access layer (SAL) for handling context-aware service logistics and service mobility overlaid on the ICN transport layer, the method comprising receiving, in the ICN transport layer, a message comprising a service request that originates from a user equipment (UE), in the SAL, retrieving, from the service request, contextual information relevant to the UE or an access network connected to the UE, determining, based on the contextual information, one or more services needed to execute the service request, and determining one or more service identities (SIDs) each of which identifies one of the one or more services. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192718 | Wireless Communication - Communication apparatus, method and computer program product for communication in a communication system. While a transmitter of a transceiver module of a user equipment is transmitting, a first receiver is operated on a first received signal, and a second receiver is operated on a transmitted signal from the transmitter. While the transmitter is not transmitting, the second receiver is operated on a second received signal. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192719 | IP ENCAPSULATION AND ROUTING OVER WIRELESS RADIO NETWORKS - Various methods of operating a wireless mesh network are disclosed herein. According to various embodiments, an Internet Protocol (IP) router generates IP addresses for wireless sensor nodes that do not have native support for the IP protocol stack. The IP router then receives and translates an incoming IP request and routes the incoming IP request to the appropriate wireless sensor node. In some embodiments, an IP data packet can be encapsulated and routed using an IP router and an IP bridge device. In other embodiments, an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) session can be managed over a wireless mesh network. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192720 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PAGING INFORMATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for efficiently transmitting and receiving a paging message and system information from and in a mobile station of a broadband wireless access system is disclosed. A method for receiving a paging message in a mobile station comprises receiving paging information from a serving base station, the paging information including paging sub group identifier (paging sub group ID) indicating a paging sub group to which the mobile station belongs; and receiving the paging message for a predetermined paging interval of the paging sub group, wherein the paging sub group is determined separately from a paging group and a geographical location determining the paging group, and is maintained while the mobile station is being operated in an idle mode. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192721 | Diameter Signaling for Mobile IPv4 - The invention consists of a new registration and authentication protocol for between a Mobile Node and a Home Agent. The new protocol uses a novel messaging sequence to request registration, authentication and authorization of the Mobile Node when it is located on a foreign network, and the novel protocol will avoid some of the standard registration and authentication protocol messages in order to eliminate the problems associated with re-transmission errors. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192722 | SELECTION OF SENSORS FOR MONITORING PHENOMENA CONSIDERING THE VALUE OF INFORMATION AND DATA SHARING PREFERENCES - A method disclosed herein includes the act of computing a value of information for obtaining data from a personal sensor of a user for utilization in a utilitarian computing application, wherein a mobile computing device comprises the personal sensor of the user. The method further includes the act of requesting that the mobile computing device transmit a data packet to the computing device based at least in part upon the value of information for obtaining data from the personal sensor of the user. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192723 | Device and method for controlling a node of a wireless network - In order to increase transmission reliability and transmission efficiency in the presence of interference at a transmitting or receiving node of a wireless network a device for controlling the node of the wireless network is provided, wherein the node is associated to at least one load unit. The device comprises a control unit that is adapted to adjust a communication mode of the node based on an operation state of the load unit. | 07-10-2014 |
20140198718 | AVOIDING NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATON IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - A flow setup table in a basestation breakout component allows for servicing non-cacheable IP data flows at the breakout component without the need for network address translation. For each broken out IP flow at the breakout component, the flow setup table holds a mapping between tunnel IDs and the IP related information. The flow setup table data is sent to the breakout component at the gateway. The gateway breakout component uses the flow setup table to forward non-cacheable data requests to the internet and return data received from the internet back to the basestation breakout component. The basestation component then sends the non-cacheable data in the correct tunnel to the user equipment requesting the data. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198719 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING LOCATION INFORMATION WITH PRIVATE EXPRESSIONS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in connection with providing location information with expression information announced in a wireless network. In one example, a UE is equipped with applications that can request announcement of an expression. In an aspect, the expression may be associated with expression information to be announced over the air. In an aspect, the request indicates to provide location information with the expression information during announcement. Further, the UE may be equipped to generate Peer-Discovery (PD) data including the expression information and the location information. In an aspect, the location information may be included along with the expression information in a data section of the announced PD data. Still further, the UE may be equipped to announce the PD data. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198720 | ANTENNA PORT MANAGEMENT FOR LOCALIZED ENHANCED PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL TRANSMISSIONS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing wireless communications. A first decoding candidate and a second decoding candidate are identified from a plurality of decoding candidates for a localized enhanced Physical Downlink Control Channel (EPDCCH) transmission. A first antenna port is identified from a set of antenna ports for the first decoding candidate. A second antenna port is identified from the set of antenna ports for the second decoding candidate. The second antenna port is different from the first antenna port. The localized EPDCCH is decoded based at least on the first and second decoding candidates and the identified first and second antenna ports. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198721 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING GROUND TRANSCEIVER COMMUNICATIONS WITH A SATELLITE TRANSCEIVER - A system and method of controlling communication between a satellite transceiver and a ground transceiver, where the satellite transceiver is configured to receive concurrently a plurality of messages at substantially the same carrier frequency from a plurality of ground transceivers. The satellite transceiver transmits a ranking threshold indicative of a transmit power that a ground transceiver is authorized to use to transmit a message. The ground transceiver receives the ranking threshold transmitted by the ground transceiver, and determines a transmit power of the transmitter to transmit a message based on a comparison of the ranking threshold and a transceiver ranking of the ground transceiver. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198722 | METHOD OF PROVIDING SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE IN A NETWORK - In a network implemented using packet-switching and circuit-switching mythologies, a short message is sent from a first device to a second device in a packet-switched domain or in a circuit-switched domain of the network. If an initial transmission attempt of the short message in the packet-switched domain is rejected due to a network-related cause, the short message is resent from the first device to the second device in the circuit-switched domain. If an initial transmission attempt of the short message in the circuit-switched domain is rejected due to a network-related cause, the short message is resent from the first device to the second device in the packet-switched domain or is directly aborted. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198723 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIUM ACCESS GROUP ASSIGNMENT - Systems and methods for implementing a medium access group assignment of stations (STAs) are disclosed. An access point (AP) device may be configured to allocate a chosen beacon interval to a medium access group (MAG). Further, the AP device may assign STAs to different MAGs. After assignment to a particular MAG, the STAs that are associated to the particular MAG may use the configured beacon interval during transmission and reception of messages. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198724 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FORMATTING FRAMES IN NEIGHBORHOOD AWARE NETWORKS - Systems and methods for formatting frames in neighborhood aware networks are described herein. One aspect of the subject matter described in the disclosure provides a method of communicating in a wireless neighborhood aware network (NAN). The method includes determining at least one connection setup information element indicating one or more connection parameters of the NAN. The method further includes determining at least one service identifier of the NAN. The method further includes generating a public action discovery frame comprising the at least one connection setup information element and the at least one service identifier. The method further includes transmitting, at a wireless device, the public action discovery frame. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198725 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FORMATTING FRAMES IN NEIGHBORHOOD AWARE NETWORKS - Systems and methods for formatting frames in neighborhood aware networks are described herein. One aspect of the subject matter described in the disclosure provides a method of communicating in a wireless neighborhood aware network (NAN). The method includes determining a discovery period. The method further includes generating a discovery window information element indicating a start time of a discovery window. The method further includes generating a NAN beacon or other sync frame comprising the discovery period and the discovery window information element. The method further includes transmitting, at a wireless device, the NAN beacon or other sync frame during the discovery window. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198726 | BROADCAST AND SYSTEM INFORMATION FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION - Methods, systems, and devices are described for facilitating Machine Type Communication in a wireless communications system. Link budget-limited MTC devices, may be supported. An MTC physical broadcast channel may be utilized for the Machine Type Communication. The MTC physical broadcast channel may be transmitted over one or more subframes different from a regular physical broadcast channel. The payload for the MTC physical broadcast channel may be reduced. The MTC physical broadcast channel may also be utilized to indicate the presence of paging and/or to indicate a change in system information. Some embodiments utilize one or more MTC-specific system information blocks. The MTC-specific system information blocks may combine and/or simplify multiple system information blocks. The location of the MTC system information blocks may be predetermined or information about their location may be transmitted over the MTC physical broadcast channel. An enhanced paging channel may be used to indicate system information updates. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198727 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A wireless communication apparatus is for communicating with an access point through a first communication and communicating with another communication apparatus through a second communication via a network including an access point. The wireless communication apparatus includes a detection unit configured to detect a status of the first communication; and a reconnection unit configured to reconnect the first communication and then reconnect the second communication by using connection information of a corresponding network layer of the wireless communication apparatus acquired through the first communication when disconnection of the first communication is detected by the detection unit. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198728 | Information Transmission Method, Packet Data Gateway, and Policy and Charging Rules Function - Disclosed are an information transmission method, a packet data gateway, and a policy and charging rules function. The method includes: after receiving a Mobile IPv6 support for Dual Stack Hosts and Routers (DSMIPv6) binding update signaling, a packet data network gateway (P-GW) notifying a source User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number of the DSMIPv6 binding update signaling to a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF); and the PCRF notifying the source UDP port number of the DSMIPv6 binding update signaling to a fixed broadband access network. The above-mentioned method provides the UDP port number for the fixed broadband access network according to whether the IPSec capsulation is performed on the user plane data, which makes the fixed broadband access network be able to identify the user plane data of the user equipment correctly and perform a corresponding policy control. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198729 | Controlling Random Access Failure on a Secondary Cell - A method in a base station for controlling a Random Access, RA, procedure is provided. The base station initiates ( | 07-17-2014 |
20140204836 | PDCCH RESOURCE UTILIZATION - The present disclosure provides coordination of assignments for the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) in a multi-sector cell based on reuse of CCE resources to user equipment (UE) in different sectors that are well isolated from each other. For non-isolated UEs the CCE resources are either repeated in all sectors for better reception performance, or transmitted in one sector whilst the corresponding CCEs in the other sectors are reserved. In order to achieve coordinated PDCCH assignment there is provided methods for coordinated PDCCH transmission, a system comprising transmission points which are associated with a common physical cell identity and which are controlled by a common network node. There is also provided a corresponding network node and computer readable media comprising computer program code. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204837 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR CHANNEL ACCESS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Some embodiments provide a normal rate preamble detector to detect a signal transmitted in accordance with a first set of modulation and coding schemes and a low rate preamble detector to detect a signal transmitted in accordance with a second set of modulation and coding schemes. Embodiments may comprise channel traffic logic to determine a traffic indicator indicative of traffic on a communications channel. In many embodiments, channel traffic logic may comprise logic to determine a duty cycle of communications to determine the traffic indicator for the channel. In several embodiments, channel traffic logic may comprise logic to determine channel occupancy to determine the traffic indicator. Based upon the traffic indicator, channel traffic logic may determine whether to disable the low rate preamble detector. Further embodiments comprise logic to design a station, determining whether to include a low rate preamble detector based upon parameters related to channel traffic. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204838 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR COMMUNICATING VIA A PLURALITY OF NETWORKS - Access control information is received from a first network, which is the device's serving network ( | 07-24-2014 |
20140204839 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONCURRENT CALL AVOIDANCE - Disclosed herein are a terminal device including: a state determining unit to determine a connection state of a voice call or a data call at a specific time prior to a transfer period of a keep-alive message designated to a specific application; and an application interworking unit to transfer the keep-alive message through the data call according to the determined connection state of the voice call or the data call to notify of a driving state of the specific application. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204840 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTHORIZING ACCESS TO AN IP-BASED WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE - A system for providing an IP-based wireless telecommunications device with access to an IP-based wireless telecommunications service provided by a carrier network includes an access point that sets up a radio link with the IP-based wireless telecommunications device and couples the IP-based wireless telecommunications device to the network. The system also includes a network controller in communication with the carrier network and the access point. The network controller is configured to receive data packets corresponding to the IP-based wireless telecommunications device at the access point. The network controller is also configured to accept/reject the provision of the IP-based wireless telecommunications service to the IP-based wireless telecommunications device based on an IP address or other unique identifier associated with the access point. In other examples, the system further includes a data store that associates IP addresses of access points (or other identifiers) with an indicator of a black or whitelisted status. Other features and systems are also disclosed. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204841 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION DEVICE AND WIRELESS RECEPTION DEVICE - A wireless reception device is notified of whether a multi-user MIMO signal transmitted from a wireless transmission device has undergone linear precoding or non-linear precoding without increasing the amount of control information. A wireless transmission device having a plurality of transmit antennas | 07-24-2014 |
20140204842 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PUCCH TRANSMISSION POWER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TERMINAL FOR SAME - A method for controlling a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission power in a wireless communication system and a terminal apparatus are disclosed. A terminal for controlling the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), according to the present invention, comprises: a processor for deciding the uplink transmission power for a PUCCH format 3 transmission; and a transmitter for transmitting the PUCCH format 3 at the uplink transmission power that is decided, wherein the processor distinguishes and decides the uplink transmission power from bits of the PUCCH format 3, on the basis of a predetermined number of information bits, the processor controls so that a different diversity method is applied to the PUCCH format 3, on the basis of the predetermined number of information bits, and wherein the transmitter transmits the PUCCH format 3 to which the different diversity method is applied with respect to the PUCCH format 3, by means of the processor, on the basis of the predetermined number of information bits. | 07-24-2014 |
20140211689 | Slow-Fading Precoding for Multi-Cell Wireless Systems - Methods and apparatuses for slow-fading precoding for multi-cell wireless systems are provided. At a base station of a cellular network, the base station serving a pluralities of same-cell terminals and other-cell terminals, and the cellular network including other base stations that serve respective pluralities of same-cell terminals and other-cell terminals, a plurality of slow-fading coefficients are obtained, wherein each of the plurality of slow-fading coefficients is associated with channel state information for communication between one of the other base stations and one of the respective same-cell terminals or other-cell terminals. A set of slow-fading precoding coefficients are generated for transmitting signals to same-cell terminals and other-cell terminals based on the plurality of slow-fading coefficients. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211690 | USE OF A COMMON PHYSICAL CELL IDENTITY IN A SMALL CELL NETWORK - A dual identity cell adapted for use in a small cell RAN includes two identities that may be supported on the same hardware platform—a dedicated PCI (Physical Cell Identity as defined under LTE) identity and a common PCI identity. The dedicated PCI identity operates similarly to a cell in a regular RAN in which neighboring cells use unique PCIs so that user equipment (UE) may distinguish among cells. The dedicated PCI identity, when exposed to the UE, may be used to determine the position of a UE within the RAN so that cells within listening range of the UE are identified. Those identified cells (termed here as the “detected set”) can then transmit the same data and control signals to the UE using their common PCI identities. In this way, all the cells in the detected set appear to the UE as one single cell. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211691 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CHOOSING SUITABLE ACCESS POINTS IN QUIPS AUTARKIC DEPLOYMENT - This disclosure presents methods, systems, computer-readable media, and apparatuses for determining a limited but sufficient group of APs suitable to be used for efficient and accurate wireless device location fixing. Certain embodiments relate to methods for eliminating unsuitable APs even when the geographic position of APs in the area of interest is not known a priori. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211692 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A modem is disclosed, one embodiment including: first and second interface apparatuses; and a processing apparatus arranged to transmit a request message to part of a wireless cellular network to request establishment of a channel to access a packet-based network, wherein the request message requests the channel as being of a type that supports both a first and second version of a packet protocol; receive a response message indicating rejection of the request, and upon detecting that a field in the response message defines a reason other than the part of the wireless cellular network does not support first and second versions of the packet protocol on a single channel, to default to transmit a default request message to request establishment of a channel to access the packet-based network, the default request message requests the channel as being of a type that supports the first version of the packet protocol. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211693 | Transmitter, Receiver, Transmission Method, Control Program of Transmitter, Reception Method, and Control Program of Receiver - According to one embodiment, transmitter includes, instruction receiving module, network detection module and request command output module. The instruction receiving module configured to receive instruction to transmit recorded content to receiver connected via network. The network detection module configured to detect, by using connection information to network of receiver, whether receiver is inside home-network that the local device belongs to. The request command output module configured to output first request command to receiver when receiver is in home-network, and configured to output second request command to receiver when receiver is not in the home network. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211694 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF IMPROVING THE OVERALL DECISION QUALITY OF THE F-DPCH CHANNEL - Aspects of the methods and apparatus relate to improving the overall decision quality of the Fractional-Dedicated Physical Channel (F-DPCH) channel. One aspect of the methods and apparatus relates to detecting bad channel conditions of a serving base station and improving the serving base station F-DPCH decoding performance in such bad conditions based on the serving base station signal-to interference ratio (SIR) estimation. Another aspect of the methods and apparatus relate to improving the overall decision quality of the F-DPCH channel in soft handover (HO) scenarios by increasing the non-serving base station F-DPCH channel rejections thresholds based on certain SIR estimations. The F-DPCH channel rejections thresholds are based on either the SIR of the non-serving base station, or a difference between non-serving base station SIR and serving base station SIR. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211695 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR NOTIFYING AND DETERMINING PATTERNS OF COMMON REFERENCE SIGNALS - The disclosure relates to methods and devices for notifying and determining common reference signal (CRS) patterns. The notification method comprises the steps of transmitting first downlink control information (DCI) to user equipment (UE) to inform the UE an aperiodic channel status information (CSI) feedback set and a CoMP transmission scheme to be applied to the UE, wherein the CoMP transmission includes a plurality of possible combinations of transmission points that transmit PDSCH to the UE; and transmitting second DCI to the UE for notifying transmission parameter to the UE based on the first DCI. In the disclosure, all CoMP transmission schemes and notifications of all CRS patterns therein can be supported, thus effectively perfecting notifications of the CRS patterns, saving signaling overheads, and significantly improving the flexibility. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211696 | Content Publishing Method and User Equipment - Embodiments of the present invention provide a content publishing method and a user equipment. The content publishing method includes: obtaining, by a first user equipment supporting a D2D function, a resource for broadcasting information of the first user equipment; and broadcasting, by the first user equipment, the information of the first user equipment on the obtained resource, so that a second user equipment obtains and sends the information of the first user equipment to a network-side device to set up a connection with the first user equipment, where the second user equipment supports the D2D function and is matched with the first user equipment. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211697 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING RECEIVER FREQUENCY ERRORS - A method includes, in a receiver that includes an uncompensated crystal oscillator, receiving signals from a transmitter by activating the receiver periodically at intervals corresponding to a specified wake-up time period. In response to detecting at the receiver that the specified wake-up time period is insufficient for maintaining synchronization between the receiver and the transmitter using the uncompensated crystal oscillator, an actual wake-up time period, smaller than the specified wake-up time period, is selected. The receiver is activated periodically according to the selected actual wake-up time period. | 07-31-2014 |
20140219164 | Hardware-Based Private Network Using WiMAX - A private data and voice network which uses the Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) system to connect groups of users via mobile handset devices. A WiMAX transmitter facilitates communication between wireless devices on the network, which are connected remotely by a server which routes encrypted shared data. The network operates independently, without the use of any cable Internet systems or wireless Internet. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219165 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ACQUIRING IPV6 DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM SERVER AND SIP SERVER ADDRESS - A mobile communications device, operating as a Mobile Terminal (MT), is provided. In the mobile communications device, a receiver is configured to receive a Router Advertisement from a service network, a processor is configured to set an O-Flag of the Router Advertisement to 1 when the O-Flag of the Router Advertisement from the service network is set to 0, and a transmitter is configured to transmit the Router Advertisement to a Terminal Equipment (TE), wherein the TE transmits a DHCPv6 INFORMATION-REQUEST message to the MT when the TE receives the Router Advertisement. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219166 | RECEIVED DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD OF PROCESSING THE SAME - According to one embodiment, a received data processing apparatus includes a FIFO memory, a forwarding designation unit, and an output processing unit. The FIFO memory stores received data in reception order. The forwarding designation unit analyzes an ID added to the received data having reached a head of the FIFO memory, and outputs a forwarding designation signal that indicates a forwarding destination in the case where there is designation of the forwarding destination, and indicates non-designation in the case where there is no designation of a forwarding destination. The output processing unit performs output processing of the received data having reached the head of the FIFO memory based on the forwarding designation signal. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219167 | QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR WEB CLIENT BASED SESSIONS - The disclosure generally relates to network-initiated and client-initiated mechanisms to enable quality of service (QoS) for web-based client applications that may high efficiency, high performance, or otherwise guaranteed service levels. For example, to enable QoS for calls or other sessions associated a web-based application, one or more signaling messages may be exchanged between a server and a first user equipment (UE) to establish a call between the first UE and a second UE and to establish a peer connection between the server and at least the first UE. As such, QoS may be activated for at least the peer connection between the first UE and the server, wherein the server may route data associated with the web-based application between the first UE and the second UE over the established peer connection to implement the activated QoS. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219168 | ROUTING DEVICE AND METHOD - Disclosed herein are provided a routing device and method for configuring a Low Power Wireless Mesh Network (LPWMN) including a channel hopping time multiplexing wireless link. The routing device includes a control unit and a communication unit. The control unit sets up a virtual link, a shared link, or a dedicated link to an external device or router. The communication unit forwards a data frame to the device or router based on the set-up link. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219169 | Receiving Network Node, a Transmitting Network Node and Methods Therein in a Wireless Communications Network - The present disclosure relates to a to a receiving network node, a transmitting network node and to methods therein. In particular, it relates to controlling of caching information for a radio bearer for a UE located in a wireless communications network. The receiving network node ( | 08-07-2014 |
20140219170 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING CAPABILITY OF UE - A method and device for reporting a capability of UE. A UE receives a capability querying message from a base station, and sends a capability reporting message to the base station. The capability reporting message contains multi-TA capability information of the UE through at least one of an explicit mode and an implicit mode. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219171 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE - A mobile station UE chooses an appropriate domain for originating AV communication without causing connection delay even when roaming. A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: causing a mobility management node MME in an LTE network to send a mobile station UE “ATTACH ACCEPT” containing AV communication provision capability information indicating a capability of providing AV communication in the LTE network; and causing the mobile station UE to determine, based on the AV communication provision capability information, whether to perform the AV communication via an IMS or to perform the AV communication by circuit switching communication. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219172 | METHODS OF REVERSE LINK POWER CONTROL - Methods of reverse link power control are provided. In one example embodiment, a signal-to-interference+noise (SINR) is measured for a plurality of mobile stations. A power control adjustment is determined for each of the mobile stations based on the measured SINR for the mobile station and a fixed target SINR, the fixed target SINR being used in the determining step for each mobile station and sending the power control adjustments to the mobile stations. In another example embodiment, one or more signals are transmitted to a base station. A power control adjustment indicator indicating an adjustment to a transmission power level is received. The received power control adjustment is determined based on a measured signal-to-interference+noise ratio (SINR) for the one or more transmitted signals and a fixed target SINR threshold, the fixed target SINR threshold being used for power control adjustment of a plurality of mobile stations. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219173 | UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - In at least some embodiments, a wireless networking system is provided. The wireless networking system includes a base-station and a plurality of user devices in communication with the base-station. The base-station selectively assigns each user device to one of a first group and a second group. Also, the base-station selectively assigns each user device to an uplink synchronized state and an uplink non-synchronized state. The base-station allocates a unique reduced identifier to each user device in the uplink synchronized state, but does not allocate unique reduced identifiers to user devices in the non-synchronized state. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219174 | REMOTE RADIO HEAD UNIT SYSTEM WITH WIDEBAND POWER AMPLIFIER AND METHOD - A remote radio head unit (RRU) system for multiple operating frequency bands, multi-channels, driven by a single or more wide band power amplifiers. More specifically, the present invention enables multiple-bands RRU to use fewer power amplifers in order to reduce size and cost of the multi-band RRU. The present invention is based on the method of using duplexers and/or interference cancellation system technique to increase the isolation between the transmitter signal and receiver signal of the RRU. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219175 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SERVER - A SOAP-SIP adapter | 08-07-2014 |
20140219176 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMBINING RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) TECHNOLOGIES - A communications system for allowing a host system such as a GNSS satellite receiver to obtain a data communications connection is provided, comprising: a processor board connecting a cellular module, a WiFi module, and a radio module; and a communications selection means for automatically determining which module is capable of obtaining a data communications connection, wherein the communications selection means includes an algorithm that scans through the modules in a pre-defined order in search of the preferred communications connection, wherein the algorithm includes instructions to stop scanning when a module has found a valid connection. In one embodiment, the communications system further comprises a GNSS module connected to the processor board. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219177 | COAXIAL CABLE INTERFACE TO OUTDOOR BROADBAND UNIT - A network device within an outdoor broadband unit receives, via Ethernet over coaxial cable signals, Internet Protocol (IP) data traffic originating from a device within a local area network (LAN). The IP data traffic is buffered in a memory within the outdoor broadband unit. A forwarding plane module of the network device sends the IP data traffic toward a destination via an air interface for a wide area network (WAN). The network device receives, via different Ethernet over coaxial cable signals, IP control traffic originating from the device within the LAN. A control plane module of the network device implements the instructions in the IP control traffic to initiate a test function for the network device. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219178 | OPTIMIZING USER DEVICE CONTEXT FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY (MME) RESILIENCY - A first mobility management entity (MME) device receives an attachment request that includes information associated with a user device. The first MME device creates a context for the user device based on the information, stores the context, and creates an optimized context based on the context, wherein a size of the optimized context is smaller than a size of the context. The first MME device also identifies a second MME device that is a backup for the first MME device, and transmits the optimized context to the second MME device. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219179 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR COMMUNICATING CONTENT DATA TO A COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL FROM A LOCAL DATA STORE - A mobile communications network includes a core network part including a plurality of infrastructure equipment, and a radio network part including a plurality of base stations for providing a wireless access interface for communicating data packets to or from communications terminals. The core network part or the radio network part includes a local data store having stored therein content data, which has been received from an applications server via the core network, and the mobile communications network is configured to receive a request to access the content from a communications terminal from the applications server, to identify that the content data is stored in the local data store, and to communicate the content data to the communications terminal from the local data store as if the content data had been communicated from the applications server. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219180 | BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station | 08-07-2014 |
20140219181 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING MEASUREMENT INFORMATION TO NETWORK AT USER EQUIPMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting and receiving a signal to and from a network at a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving measurement configuration information from the network, storing data unit retransmission information related to a data unit based on the measurement configuration information, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, receiving a request message requesting a measurement result from the network, and transmitting the data unit retransmission information to the network in response to the request message. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219182 | DEVICE TRIGGERING SOLUTIONS - For many machine to machine applications a poll model can be used for communications between machine type communication devices and the machine type communication server. In such and other communication systems device triggering solutions can permit efficient communication. According to certain embodiments, a method can include preparing an attach request to be sent to a network element, wherein the attach request includes an indication of a device trigger capability of a user equipment. The method can also include activating the user equipment in response to a received device trigger. | 08-07-2014 |
20140233455 | COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL PREFERENCES - Systems and methods for the management of communications related to telecommunications-based devices are provided. Telecommunications-based devices initiate requests to gateway computing devices corresponding to a radio communication network to establish data communications. The gateway computing device accepts the communication request and specifies an ordered preference of one or more communication protocols that will be used telecommunications-based devices accessing the wireless communication network. The telecommunications-based device processes the acceptance and selects a communication protocol from the ordered preference provided by the gateway computing device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233456 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication device includes a memory, and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to execute a process, the process including setting a retransmission determination time for a packet complying with a protocol of a first layer based on a communication state of a second layer that is lower than the first layer. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233457 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF TRIGGERING INTERFERENCE MITIGATION WITHOUT RESOURCE PARTITIONING - Systems and methods for triggering interference mitigation at a wireless device in a cellular communications network are disclosed. In one embodiment, a node associated with a cellular communications network makes a determination to trigger interference mitigation at a wireless device based on a signal load in at least one interfering cell from which transmissions result in interference at the wireless device during reception from a desired cell, a relation between reference signals used in the desired cell and the at least one interfering cell, and a timing relation between at least one of a group consisting of: signals transmitted by the desired cell and the at least one interfering cell and signals received at the wireless device from the desired cell and the at least one interfering cell. In response to making the determination, the node triggers interference mitigation at the wireless device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233458 | AUTOMATIC AD-HOC NETWORK OF MOBILE DEVICES - A process for the automatic creation of ad-hoc networks between mobile devices in emergency and evacuation events. During an emergency or an evacuation event a command centre ( | 08-21-2014 |
20140233459 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING IDLE STATE TRANSITION TIME BASED ON APPLICATION DETECTION IN A BASE STATION - A system, method, computer program product, and base station for coordinating communication of data packets between a user device and an application server are described. According to one aspect, the base station includes a memory and a computer processor operatively coupled to the memory, to a radio transmitter, and to a radio receiver. The computer processor is configured to detect the application type of a data packet, determine an inactivity time based on the detected application type, and transition the user device to an idle state based on the determined inactivity time. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233460 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN A BACKPLANE FABRIC ARCHITECTURE - A system and method of wirelessly communicating in a backplane mesh network is disclosed. A data message received from a first network device is handled at a first antenna system located in a first network device cabinet via a first network interface. The data message is wirelessly transmitted from a first millimeter wave antenna coupled to the first antenna system over a high speed backplane network to a second network device in a second device cabinet using emitted millimeter wave electromagnetic radiation. The data message is wirelessly received at a second millimeter wave antenna over the high speed backplane network using emitted millimeter wave electromagnetic radiation, wherein the received data message is handled by a second antenna system coupled to the second millimeter wave antenna. The received data message is sent, via a second network interface, from the second antenna system to the second network device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233461 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for analyzing a wide frequency band with respect to signal power levels in specified narrow frequency bands, detecting narrow band signal power levels received in the specified narrow frequency bands, determining an average composite wideband power level from the narrow band signal power levels, determining an adaptive threshold from the average composite wideband power level, detecting narrow band interference according to the adaptive threshold, and configuring a filter to substantially suppress the detected narrow band interference. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233462 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROCESSING DATA IN DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM - A digital broadcast receiver and a control method thereof are disclosed. The digital broadcast receiver includes a reception unit for receiving a broadcast signal which mobile service data and main service data are multiplexed, an extractor for extracting transmission parameter channel signaling information and fast information channel signaling information from a data group in the received mobile service data, an acquirer for acquiring a program table describing virtual channel information and a service of an ensemble by using the extracted fast information channel signaling information, the ensemble being a virtual channel group of the received mobile service data, a detector for detecting a descriptor defining Internet access information corresponding to the mobile service data by using the acquired program table, and a controller for controlling such that the Internet access information of the detected descriptor and the mobile service data are displayed. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233463 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR VOICE DOMAIN OPERATION - Methods and apparatus for voice domain operation are described herein. One example method includes determining that an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) network is not preferred for voice service based on receiving a response message to a NAS message via the E-UTRA network, wherein the response message to the Non-Access Stratum (NAS) message comprises an indication that no voice service is available, storing an identification of a first public land mobile network (PLMN), wherein the first PLMN is associated with the E-UTRA network that is not preferred for voice service, and avoiding selection of a second PLMN's E-UTRA network when an identification of the second PLMN matches the identification of the first PLMN | 08-21-2014 |
20140233464 | TRANSMITTING DATA TO AND FROM NODES OF A CLUSTERED MULTI-HOP NETWORK WITH A TDMA SCHEME - A method for transmitting data to and from nodes of a multi-hop network with a TDMA scheme is suggested. The network is clustered into N clusters, wherein each cluster of the N clusters has at least one of the nodes. In a first step, the TDMA scheme is organized by periodic superframes. Each superframe of the periodic superframes has a number of frames including at least one broadcast frame and one collection frame for the N clusters. In a second step, one dedicated communication channel is shared by the N clusters within the broadcast frame. In a third step, N separate communication channels are used by the N clusters within the collection frame. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233465 | UE, ANDSF, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PGW, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - UE receives a mobile operator policy including flow identification information, access system identification information, and a degree of compulsion from an ANDSF, and in a case where the degree of compulsion included in the mobile operator policy is a degree of compulsion that compels the UE to perform switching, transmits a request to forcibly switch a communication path used flow communication corresponding to the flow identification information to an access system corresponding to the access system identification information included in the mobile operator policy. As a result, by transmitting an MO policy from the ANDSF to the UE while the UE connected to a first access system is performing data communication, the UE changes a UE policy to the MO policy, thereby providing a mobile communication system or the like that is capable of avoiding concentration of traffic in the first access system. | 08-21-2014 |
20140241240 | Distributed Processing Distributed-Input Distributed-Output (DIDO) Wireless Communication - Techniques are presented for distributed processing Distributed-Input Distributed-Output (DIDO) wireless communication. A plurality of base stations (e.g., APs) are provided, each configured to wirelessly serve one or more wireless devices (e.g., clients). At least first and second base stations are configured to transmit simultaneously at an agreed upon time. The first and second base stations are each configured to locally generate steering matrix information used to spatially precode their respective data transmissions in order to steer their respective data transmissions to their one or more wireless devices while nulling to the one or more client devices of the other base station. Moreover, the first and second base stations are each configured to locally generate a transmit waveform by applying the steering matrix information to their respective data transmissions. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241241 | Method and apparatus for supporting short message services for packet switched devices - Embodiments of the claimed subject matter provide a method and apparatus for supporting short message services (SMS) for packet switched devices. One embodiment of the method includes providing, from user equipment, a request for packet-switched (PS) service or combined packet-switched (PS) service and circuit-switched (CS) service. The request includes an indication that the user equipment is requesting short message services (SMS) and is not requesting any other CS services. Some embodiments of the method also include receiving, at the user equipment, a response indicating whether the SMS services are supported by a PS domain. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241242 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL SOUNDING IN BEAMFORMED MASSIVE MIMO SYSTEMS - Base station (BS) and mobile station (MS) methods and apparatus are provided. The BS configures an uplink sounding channel made up of at least one OFDM symbol in an uplink slot. The BS signals to the MS use and location of different configurations of the uplink sounding channel via a system configuration broadcast message. The uplink sounding channel comprises OFDM symbols where one or more of a subcarrier spacing and a sampling frequency is different from that of OFDM symbol used for data transmission. Each OFDM symbol comprises a sounding reference symbol corresponding to at least one transmit beam and is received by at least one receive beam to form at least one transmit-receive beam pair. The at least one transmit-receive beam pair for UL-SRS in different OFDM symbols are different. The sounding channel configuration is based on information received from neighboring BSs via inter-BS coordination over a pre-defined interface. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241243 | REDUNDANT TRANSMISSION OF REAL TIME DATA - A method for redundant transmission of real time data is provided. The method can include an edge node in a wireless network sending a first RTP packet including a first real time data frame to a second edge node. The method can further include the edge node determining that a radio link condition is sufficient to support redundant transmission of real time data to the second edge node. The method can additionally include the edge node, in response to determining that the radio link condition is sufficient to support redundant transmission of real time data, bundling the first real time data frame with a next sequential real time data frame that has not been previously sent to the second edge node in a second RTP packet at a PDCP layer of the edge node; and sending the second RTP packet to the second edge node. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241244 | DISTRIBUTION OF LOCATION INFORMATION - In one aspect, a method of determining a geographical location of a base station is provided. The base station is within a coverage area of a master base station and requests geographical location information from the master base station through a first Precision Time Protocol (PTP) management message. The base station receives the geographical location information from the master base station through a second PTP management message. In addition, the base station determines the geographical location of the base station from the geographical location information included in the second PTP management message. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241245 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR CANCELLING UPLINK INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - The method comprising measuring by an interfered base station (BS | 08-28-2014 |
20140241246 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIGNALLING INFORMATION RELATING TO NETWORK'S CAPABILITIES - Methods and apparatuses are provided for transmitting information from a serving network element to a mobile terminal in a mobile communications network. The serving network element transmits indication indicating whether a voice over internet protocol (VoIP) via packet switched (PS) session is supported, to the mobile terminal, via an eNode B, during one of a tracking area updating (TAU) procedure and an attach procedure. A Voice Call Continuity (VCC) capability of the mobile terminal is received from the mobile terminal. It is determined whether or not to anchor a call based on the received VCC capability of the mobile terminal. The indication is determined based on a capability of the serving network element. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241247 | IMPLEMENTING A 3G PACKET CORE IN A CLOUD COMPUTER WITH OPENFLOW DATA AND CONTROL PLANES - A control plane device in a cloud computing system executes a plurality of virtual machines for implementing network function virtualization (NFV). The control plane device is operable to manage implementation of a general packet radio service (GPRS) tunnel protocol (GTP) in a packet core (PC) of a third generation (3G) network having a split architecture where a control plane of the PC of the 3G network is in the cloud computing system. The control plane communicates with a data plane of the PC through a control plane protocol. The data plane is implemented in a plurality of network devices of the 3G network. The control plane device and the plurality of virtual machines are operable to communicate with other control plane devices in the cloud computing system and with the plurality of network devices of the data plane. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241248 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROCESSING DATA - A digital broadcasting system and method of processing data are disclosed. Herein, a method of processing data in a transmitting system includes creating a data group including a plurality of mobile service data packets, re-adjusting a relative position of at least one main service data packet of a main service data section, the main service data section including a plurality of main service data packets, and multiplexing the mobile service data of the data group and the main service data of the main service data section in burst units. Herein, a position of an audio data packet among the main service data packets of the main service data section may be re-adjusted. Also, a position of an audio data packet included in the main service data section may be re-adjusted based upon a multiplexing position of the main service data section. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241249 | ENHANCED CHANNEL INTERLEAVING FOR OPTIMIZED DATA THROUGHPUT - In a transmission scheme wherein multi-slot packet transmissions to a remote station can be terminated by an acknowledgment signal from the remote station, code symbols can be efficiently packed over the multi-slot packet so that the remote station can easily decode the data payload of the multi-slot packet by decoding only a portion of the multi-slot packet. Hence, the remote station can signal for the early termination of the multi-slot packet transmission, which thereby increases the data throughput of the system. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241250 | METHOD OF SELECTIVELY REPORTING MEASUREMENT RESULT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method of reporting measurement results performed by a user equipment in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: measuring at least one cell; checking whether interference occurs during the measurement; and transmitting a measurement report to a network. If the interference does not occurs, the method further includes logging the measurement result in the measurement report. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241251 | RADIO EFFICIENT TCP RELEASE - A radio communication handling device handling communication for an application running in a mobile station and communicating with an application server via a mobile communication network includes a radio resource determination unit that determines a state transition for the radio resources between the mobile station and the mobile communication network from a first current state to a second state, where the first state involves communication with a higher bandwidth than the second state, and informs, prior to the transition, at least one application communication control unit about the transition in order to allow the application communication control unit to release unused application communication connections before the transition. The application communication control unit receives the information about the following state transition and determines whether to release an application communication connection or not based on the information. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241252 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING SERVICE OF MULTI-MODE TERMINAL - Disclosed are a method and apparatus for switching a service of a multi-mode terminal. The method includes: a multi-mode terminal performing, via one activated Packet Data Protocol (PDP) link, data transmission for a Packet Switch (PS) service requested by a user; when detecting an available network in a current network environment, the multi-mode terminal activating a PDP link corresponding to the detected available network; and the multi-mode terminal performing data transmission for the PS service via one or more PDP links in activated PDP links. Through the technical solution, the problem that a multi-mode terminal cannot implement high speed data transmission for a PS service by using network resources of multiple communication networks is solved, and the effect of multi-network binding high speed data transmission for a PS service is achieved. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241253 | STRUCTURE FOR INTEGRATING MOBILE SERVICES - A structure for integrating mobile services, includes a top structure and a bottom structure, the top structure including: a device suitable for selecting, according to selection criteria, a service domain so as to determine whether a requested application, such as voice applications, SDS applications, or IP data applications, belongs to the domain of legacy services or IP service; a device capable of managing the various requests; and a device capable of providing APIs for the voice, SDS, and IP applications, the bottom structure including: a unit for IP routing towards the wireless network, ensuring the IP routing of data to the suitable IP networks, configured so as to take into account the configuration of the network, the user profile, and the provision of QoS and security; and a unit for managing users, in particular in terms of user registration, deregistration, mobility and security, such as the use of the SSO. | 08-28-2014 |
20140247771 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING NETWORK REGISTRATION - A method and apparatus for user location registration comprising registering subscriber location information associated with a device with a registration service in a first network, receiving, from a second network, a broadcast location request and sending, in response to the broadcast location request, the subscriber location information to the second network. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247772 | Robustness Header Compression Processing Method, Compressor And System - A robustness header compression processing method, compressor and system are disclosed. The method includes: after receiving a CONTEXT_MEMORY option transmitted by a decompressor, a compressor selecting to use Profile0 to perform data compression on packets to be compressed; and after determining that a first threshold is reached by using the Profile0, the compressor performing data compression using a Profile type to which the packets to be compressed belong. In the above robustness compression processing method, compressor and system, after receiving a CONTEXT_MEMORY feedback option, a compressor selects a compression packet format Profile0 and attempts to restore normal compression and decompression after a certain period of time, thus improving efficiency and accuracy of compression and decompression as well as utilization of wireless bandwidth. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247773 | Method and Arrangement in a Wireless Communications System - A method for assisting the adaptation of a signal from a first node to a second node is provided. The first node communicates with the second node in a wireless communication system over a radio link. The second node has a codebook comprising a set of possible information alternatives for assisting the adaptation of a signal received from the first node. The second node may select an information alternative from the codebook and send it to the first node to assist the first node in adapting the signal. The first node is configured with a number of subsets, each comprising a part of the possible information alternatives. The first node requests that the second node restrict the selection of information alternatives to one of the subsets, and in response, receives an information alternative from the second node that is selected from among the subsets configured according to the configuration request. | 09-04-2014 |
20140254475 | BAN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD USING SELECTIVE DISCOVERY - The present description relates to a BAN (Body Area Network) wireless communication control method, and more particularly, to a BAN wireless communication control method to which a selective discovery technique is applied. The present invention provides a BAN wireless communication control method, comprising the steps of transmitting a discovery request frame including a selective standard profile, and receiving a discovery response frame from a host that provides at least one of services specified in the selective standard profile. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254476 | SENDING DATA RATE INFORMATION TO A WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK NODE - A first wireless access network node sets a data rate for communication of data between a second wireless access network node and a user equipment (UE) that is concurrently connected to the first wireless access network node and the second wireless access network node. The first wireless access network node sends information relating to the data rate to the second wireless access network node for use by the second wireless access network node in controlling data communication between the second wireless access network node and the UE. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254477 | METHOD FOR ADDING A DEVICE TO A WIRELESS NETWORK - Load control devices may form an energy control network for the purpose of controlling one or more electrical and/or mechanical loads related to energy control in residential and/or commercial environments. The various load control devices of the energy control network may communicate with one another via a wireless communication network. Access information for communicating with/on a wireless communication network often takes the form of character-based information, such as a service set identifier (SSID), a type of network security, and/or a security key. The load control devices may have user interfaces that may not be well suited via which to enter the access information for a wireless communication network. Techniques and devices are described to provide network access information wirelessly in the form of data packets of modulated lengths to load control devices that may decode the access information from the modulated lengths to join the wireless communication network. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254478 | ENHANCED CALL CONTROL FOR DIRECTING A CONTENT PATH OVER MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS - Aspects for enhancing call control for directing a content path over multiple connections may include a method which includes establishing a first connection to a destination to use as a content path, receiving information from the destination for establishing an alternative connection, establishing as the alternative connection a background connection to the destination based on the information received, evaluating whether the background connection is preferable to the first connection for use as the content path, and switching the content path to the background connection when the background connection is preferable. Another method may include establishing a first connection as a content path and a background connection simultaneously to a destination for exchanging call traffic representing the same content, evaluating whether the background connection is preferable to the first connection for use as the content path, and switching the content path to the background connection when the background connection is preferable. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254479 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISCOVERING DEVICES IN A NEIGHBORHOOD AWARE NETWORK - Methods, devices, and computer program products communicating discovery information in a wireless neighborhood aware network (NAN). One method includes receiving a message from a neighboring wireless device. The message includes an identifier associated with the neighboring wireless device. The method further includes adding the identifier to a data structure indicative of discovered device identifiers. The method further includes transmitting a message including the data structure indicative of discovered device identifiers. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254480 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION WITHIN A CO-OPERATIVE SYSTEM - A method for communication within a co-operative system is provided. The co-operative system comprises a plurality of communication units, which are adapted to execute a group of tasks repeatedly in a repetition cycle: acquire raw data from at least one raw data collector, process the raw data into an information package, and broadcast of the information package. The repetition cycle lasts a predetermined time period from a start of a repetition cycle, and the at least one raw data collector collects data from a global navigation satellite system (GNSS). The raw data from the GNSS comprises a global timing signal, to which said communication units synchronise. A timing of said execution of tasks is dependent of said global timing signal. An individual acquisition time for acquiring raw data from the raw data collectors is set for each of the plurality of communication units. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254481 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING CHARGING BY USING VOLUME INFORMATION OF DATA - The present disclosure relates to a method and an apparatus for controlling charging by using volume information of data, and more particularly, to a method and an apparatus for controlling charging for a UE by using volume information of data when a caching operation according to a byte caching mode or an object caching mode is performed. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254482 | MEDIA DELIVERY PLATFORM - A method of delivering an audio and/or visual media file including, for example, one or more of full or partial master recordings of songs, musical compositions, ringtones, videos, films, television shows, personal recordings, animation and combinations thereof, over the air wirelessly, from one or more servers to an electronic device with or without an Internet connection, said method comprising transmitting and audio and/or visual media file in compressed format to said electronic device, and wherein the electronic device is effective to receive said audio and/or visual file and playback said audio and/or visual content on demand by a user. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254483 | CONTROLLING DATA TRANSMISSION BETWEEN A USER EQUIPMENT AND A PACKET DATA NETWORK - A method and apparatus are described for controlling transmission of user data between a user equipment and a packet data via a packet switched data network, such as an Evolved Packet System (EPS). An association is formed between the user equipment and one or more gateways in the packet switched data network. In some embodiments, one or more messages are sent to the user equipment indicating a capability of the one or more gateways to inhibit transmission of user data towards the user equipment; an indication is received from the user equipment to inhibit transmission of user data to the user equipment from the first gateway, and, in response, transmission of user data towards the user from at least one of the gateways is inhibited. In some embodiments, in response to receipt of an indication from the user equipment to inhibit transmission of data towards the user equipment, a message is sent to the user equipment indicating parameters defining transmission characteristics of user data that may be transmitted between at least one of the gateways and the user equipment, and the gateways control transmission of data towards the user equipment in accordance with the sent parameters. This enables transmission of user data between a user equipment and a packet data network to be controlled. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254484 | Establishing a Communication Session - A method for operating an IP Multimedia Subsystem Application Server to facilitate a communication session between a first user and a second user at a required Quality of Service (QoS) is provided. The method calls for receiving a notification that a Policy and Charging Rules function (PCRF) associated with the first user has not authorised the required QoS. The notification includes an indication of additional QoS required by the first user in order to achieve the required QoS. Authorization for the additional QoS for the first user is then requested from a PCRF associated with the second user. The method then calls for receiving a notification that the PCRF associated with the second user has authorised the additional QoS, and notifying the PCRF associated with the first user that the additional QoS has been authorised for the first user. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254485 | TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICE, TRAFFIC CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A traffic control device that controls traffic of data transmitted from mobile units that belong to different groups, includes a memory, and a processor coupled to the memory, configured to switch an output destination for the data in accordance with a group and a type of the data, store the data to a plurality of data storage sections on a first-in-first-out basis, adjust an output timing for the stored data in accordance with the group and the type of the data, and attach an identifier to the data output from the plurality of data storage sections in accordance with the group and the type of the data. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254486 | SIGNALING SEPARATE UNICAST AND BROADCAST INFORMATION WITH A COMMON PILOT - Aspects describe conveying unicast information and broadcast information in a resource set for a transmission request. The unicast information and broadcast information can be transmitted at substantially the same time. Power control can be applied separately to the unicast information and the broadcast information for reliable decoding. A null request can be indicated by “00” bits in a unicast portion and a zero power level in the broadcast portion. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254487 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PRESERVING A SIGNALING CONNECTION - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for preserving a signaling connection after a network has indicated that the signaling connection can be closed, such as by selection of a no follow on proceed mode during routing area updates or attach procedures. By preserving the signaling connection, subsequent communications between the network and the user equipment can be completed without closing and then subsequently reopening the signaling connection. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254488 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for measuring power levels in narrow frequency bands of signals provided by a radio frequency receiver configured to scan radio frequency signals over a wide frequency band, calculating an average wideband power level from at least a portion of the measured power levels, determining a threshold from the average wideband power level, the portion of the measured power levels in the narrow frequency bands, or both, detecting from the signals narrow band interference based on the threshold, and substantially suppressing the detected narrow band interference. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254489 | Method, Device and System for Processing Streaming Media Service Data - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, device, and system for processing streaming media service data. When a user equipment detects a service terminate operation or a service switching operation performed by a user, the user equipment sends a scheduling terminate message to a scheduling device, so that the scheduling device can timely learn that the user equipment has stopped a streaming media service being performed, and immediately stop scheduling, according to the scheduling terminate message, streaming media service data requested by the user equipment to the user equipment. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254490 | SMALL DATA COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques and configurations for transmitting small data payloads such as, for example, Machine Type Communication (MTC) data in a wireless communication network. A system may include features to implement an interworking function (IWF) to receive, from a machine type communication (MTC) server, a trigger to send a data payload, which is smaller than a preconfigured threshold, to a user equipment (UE) over a wireless communication network, and send, over a first reference point to a first module including a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) Support Node (SGSN) or a second reference point to a second module including a Home Location Register (HLR) or a Home Subscriber Server (HSS), the data payload and a request to forward the data payload to the UE. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254491 | HOME ROUTING FOR IMS ROAMING USING VPLMN ANCHOR - Methods and apparatus are described for use in handling session establishment in a home network or visited network. IMS roaming is described for a UE of the home network that is roaming in the visited network. On receipt of a session establishment request associated with an originating call from the UE the home network determines whether to perform home routing and/or direct home routing of the originating call to the called party. When home routing, execution of service invocation is suspended and the home network sends a session establishment request including a routing number of an application server in the home network back to the visited network, which performs visiting service invocation of the call and routes the signaling and media to the home network-based on the routing number. The network node in the home network resumes execution of service invocation and routing of the originating call to the called party. When direct home routing, the home network performs execution of service invocation and routes the originating call to the called party. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254492 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and device for transmitting data in a wireless communication system. A user equipment (UE) transmits uplink data, to a base station, via a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) corresponding to a random access response grant, in a UE-specific aperiodic SRS subframe. At said time, the PUSCH is assigned to the entire UE-specific aperiodic SRS subframe. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254493 | METHOD AND SYSTEM ALLOWING THE DYNAMIC ALLOCATION OF POWER AND/OR OF MODULATION IN A SYSTEM COMPRISING N CHANNELS - A method and system is provided for dynamic allocation of power required on a number n with n greater than 1 of an HF communication system, comprising an amplifier of maximum total power and at least one step in which the power and/or the modulation is managed on all the n pathways of said system so as to optimize a given probability of error termed the operating point for a maximum bitrate under the constraint of the total power imposed by the operation of said system. | 09-11-2014 |
20140269490 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF CONFIGURING A TERMINAL ADAPTER FOR USE WITH AN IP TELEPHONY SYSTEM - A terminal adapter that acts as an interface to allow an analog telephony device to be used to conduct telephony communications with an Internet protocol (IP) telephony system include a user interface that can obtain information from a user. The user interface makes use of the analog telephony device to request information from the user, and to receive input from the user. The user could provide input by depressing the keys of a standard numeric telephony keypad. Alternatively, the user could provide spoken input that is interpreted by the terminal adapter. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269491 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCANNING FOR A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - Techniques for access point acquisition using the location of a mobile device and probabilistic self-learning are described herein. An example of a method of scanning for an access point with a mobile device includes detecting a serving cell, determining a location for the mobile device, determining a maximum coverage area of an access point that is associated with the serving cell, determining whether the location of the mobile device is within the maximum coverage area, and performing a fast rate scan for the access point if the location is within the maximum coverage area. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269492 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR EXPLOITING INTER-CELL MULTIPLEXING GAIN IN WIRELESS CELLULAR SYSTEMS VIA DISTRIBUTED INPUT DISTRIBUTED OUTPUT TECHNOLOGY - A multiple antenna system (MAS) with multiuser (MU) transmissions (“MU-MAS”) exploiting inter-cell multiplexing gain via spatial processing to increase capacity in wireless communications networks. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269493 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR EXPLOITING INTER-CELL MULTIPLEXING GAIN IN WIRELESS CELLULAR SYSTEMS VIA DISTRIBUTED INPUT DISTRIBUTED OUTPUT TECHNOLOGY - A multiple antenna system (MAS) with multiuser (MU) transmissions (“MU-MAS”) exploiting inter-cell multiplexing gain via spatial processing to increase capacity in wireless communications networks. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269494 | NETWORK SUPERVISED WIRELESS DEVICE NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY - A method of discovering neighboring wireless devices may include assigning a discovery channel resource to a transmitting wireless device. The transmitting wireless device may accordingly be configured to transmit a neighbor discovery signal based on the discovery channel resource. The method may further include receiving neighbor discovery signal information associated with the neighbor discovery signal as received by a receiving wireless device that may be configured to receive the neighbor discovery signal. Additionally, the method may include directing the transmitting wireless device and the receiving wireless device to participate in device-to-device communication with each other based on the neighbor discovery signal information. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269495 | SELECTING A NETWORK FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE - Disclosed is an apparatus, system, and method for a wireless device to select a network. The wireless device receives a request from a user to access a network site. The wireless device then selects a network based upon a predefined weighted criteria setting that was previously selected by the user. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269496 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING A MEDIA GATEWAY SELECTION IN MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER POOL ARCHITECTURE - A system and method to allow call traffic localization within a mobile switching center server pool (MSS pool) or between MSS pools, provides a trunk group identifier mapped to an originating media gateway. An originating mobile switching center server (MSC server) initiates a call session with a terminating MSC server by sending a session initiation protocol (SIP) message that includes a trunk group identifier mapped to an originating media gateway identity. The terminating MSC server examines the mapping received in the SIP message, and uses the trunk group identifier to select a terminating media gateway for call routing to realize call traffic localization. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269497 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ALLOWING MULTIPLE DEVICES TO COMMUNICATE IN A NETWORK - A method for allowing multiple devices to communicate includes initiating a multi-media communication session between a first device and a second device, each of the first and second device having access to at least one additional device, identifying at least a portion of the multi-media communication session to direct to the at least one additional device, the first device obtaining a unique identifier of the at least one additional device and directing the identified at least a portion of the multi-media communication session to the at least one additional device. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269498 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RAPID SETUP OF TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS - When an incoming communication is directed to a telephony device that is capable of conducting an IP based communication via an IP telephony system and a cellular-based communication via a mobile telephony service provider, the communication is initially setup as a cellular-based communication via the mobile telephony service provider. At the same time, an IP-based communication channel is setup between the telephony device and an IP telephony system. Once the IB-based communication channel is available, the communication is transitioned from the cellular-based communication channel to the IP based communication channel. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269499 | WIRELESS CLIENT ASSOCIATION AND TRAFFIC CONTEXT COOKIE - In an example embodiment, an access point or wireless local area network controller programs an opaque cookie into a wireless client. The cookie carries association detail and current traffic information of the client. When the client roams to a new access point, the client presents the cookie to the new access point. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269500 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HANDLING INCOMING COMMUNICATIONS DIRECTED TO A TELEPHONY DEVICE - Systems and methods for terminating telephony communications to a mobile telephony device via a data network make use of a forwarding termination service. The forwarding termination service causes a native mobile telephony service provider that provides service to the mobile telephony device to forward incoming telephony communications directed the native telephone number of the mobile telephony device to a forwarding access number. The forwarding termination service receives telephony communications directed to the forwarding access number, and then terminates the telephony communications to the mobile telephony device via any one of multiple different methods. The mobile telephony service provider can be instructed to implement and cancel call forwarding instructions by a forwarding agent that is separate from the forwarding termination service. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269501 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSITIONING A TELEPHONY COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CONNECTION PATHS TO PRESERVE COMMUNICATION QUALITY - An IP telephony communication being conducted by a user telephony device is transitioned from an IP based communications path to a cellular based voice or video communications path if a quality of the telephony communication falls below a threshold level. The user telephony device and/or elements of an IP telephony system handling the call could detect when the quality is below the threshold level. The communication might also be transitioned to a cellular based voice or video communications channel if the strength of a wireless connection between the user telephony device and a wireless access point providing access to a data network falls below a threshold level. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269502 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RADIO FREQUENCY CALIBRATION EXPLOITING CHANNEL RECIPROCITY IN DISTRIBUTED INPUT DISTRIBUTED OUTPUT WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods are described for radio frequency (RF) calibration in a multiple antenna system (MAS) with multi-user (MU) transmissions (“MU-MAS”) exploiting uplink/downlink channel reciprocity. The RF calibration is used to compute open-loop downlink precoder based on uplink channel estimates, thereby avoiding feedback overhead for channel state information as in closed-loop schemes. For example, a MU-MAS of one embodiment comprises a wireless cellular network with one or multiple beacon stations, multiple client devices and multiple distributed antennas operating cooperatively via precoding methods to eliminate inter-client interference and increase network capacity. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269503 | Wireless Reliability Architecture And Methods Using Network Coding - Network-coding-enabled reliability architectures and techniques are provided that are capable of enhancing data transfer reliability and efficiency in next generation wireless networks. In some embodiments, the techniques and architectures utilize a flexible thread-based coding approach to implement network coding. The techniques and architectures may also, or alternatively, utilize systematic intra-session random linear network coding as a packet erasure code to support reliable data transfer. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269504 | METHOD AND MOBILE DEVICE FOR AUTOMATICALLY CHOOSING COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for automatically choosing a communication network is applicable to a mobile device. When receiving a communication request for a contact from a user interface, a processing unit determines a status of a network card module according to the communication request. When the network card module is enabled, the network card module sends a network packet and receives a corresponding response packet to determine whether the network card module is connected to the Internet. When the network card module is connected to the Internet, the network card module sends an inquiry packet to a voice over internet protocol (VoIP) proxy server and receives a corresponding response packet to determine whether the contact is online. When the contact is online, the network card module carries out the communication request through the VoIP proxy server. Otherwise, the communication request is carried out by a cellular phone module. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269505 | Wireless Reliability Architecture And Methods Using Network Coding - Network-coding-enabled reliability architectures and techniques are provided that are capable of enhancing data transfer reliability and efficiency in next generation wireless networks. In some embodiments, the techniques and architectures utilize a flexible thread-based coding approach to implement network coding. The techniques and architectures may also, or alternatively, utilize systematic intra-session random linear network coding as a packet erasure code to support reliable data transfer. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269506 | SET OF OPTIMIZATIONS APPLICABLE TO A WIRELESS NETWORKS OPERATING IN TV WHITE SPACE BANDS - A server acts as a proxy mechanism for node registration with a database. The node initially registers to participate in a wireless mesh network by transmitting a registration request to the server. The server forwards the request to the database, which validates the request. The server records that the registration request was, in fact, validated by the database. The node is then permitted to participate in the network. If the node becomes decoupled from the network, the node may then transmit a re-registration request to the server. Since the server recorded that the previous registration was validated, the server may then simply validate the re-registration request, without interacting with the database. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269507 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME, AND A STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus for performing communication with a communication terminal, and a method of controlling the same. The apparatus performs wireless communication with the communication terminal by a first wireless communication mode and performs wireless communication with the communication terminal by a second wireless communication mode in which either the communication apparatus or the communication terminal becomes an access point. The apparatus receives a switching instruction of communication mode from a user, and determines whether or not the switching of the communication mode in accordance with the received switching instruction is executable, makes a request for an additional instruction to the user when it is determined that it is not executable, and controls the switching of the communication mode in accordance with an additional instruction in response to the request. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269508 | BLUETOOTH VIRTUALISATION - Embodiments of the present application relate generally to electrical and electronic hardware, computer software, wired and wireless network communications, Bluetooth systems, RF systems, self-powered wireless devices, and consumer electronic (CE) devices. More specifically the present application relates to provision of networked based services to Bluetooth-enabled devices. The present application describes a very low-cost, multi-purpose, rapidly re-purposable Bluetooth node that may sit at the edge of a network and may be configured to allow a network system to dynamically add and remove different Bluetooth capabilities and allow for a much higher level of management of Bluetooth devices that are interacting with the network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269509 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PUBLISHING SERVICE AVAILABILITY - Aspects of the present disclosure provided techniques for wireless communications, and more particularly, to techniques and apparatus for publishing service availability. According to certain aspects, a method for wireless communications by a user equipment (UE) is provided. The method generally includes providing status information to a presence server that the UE is available via the first network service, wherein the presence server is a network-based entity that provides presence status services for a plurality of destination devices including the UE, detecting one or more operational limitations that might prevent the UE from being available via the first network service, and updating the presence server, in response to the detecting, to indicate the UE is not available via the first network service. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269510 | Method and Apparatus For Voice Over LTE - According to at least one example embodiment, a transit network is configured to handle signaling messages between service provider networks. Upon receiving, at the transit network, a session control message from a mobile network, a signaling type associated with the session control message is determined. The transit network then routes the session control message based on the signaling type determined. According to at least one aspect, the session control message is routed based on domain routing if the determined signaling type is roaming signaling. According to at least one other aspect, the session control message is routed based on called party number routing if the determined signaling type is non-roaming signaling. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269511 | SS7 ANSI-41 to SIP Based Call Signaling Conversion Gateway for Wireless VOIP E911 - An SS7-based call protocol conversion gateway that translates between circuit-switched SS7 protocols and session initiation protocol (SIP) oriented protocol, allowing an E911 call initiated over a switched network to be routed by a VoIP network. The SS7-based call protocol conversion gateway provides a PSAP with MSAG quality (street address) information about a VoIP dual mode phone user without the need for a wireless carrier to invest in building out an entire VoIP core. Thus, wireless carriers may continue signaling the way they are today, i.e., using the J-STD-036 standard for CDMA and GSM in North America, yet see benefits of a VoIP network core, i.e., provision of MSAG quality location data to a PSAP. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269512 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING DATA TRANSMISSION SERVICE OVER MULTIPLE NETWORKS - A transmitting device includes a communication unit to transmit data through two or more networks including a first network and a second network, and a transmission controller to control the communication unit to transmit data to a receiving device through the first network, and transmit the data, which is to be transmitted to the receiving device through the first network, to the receiving device through the second network in response to a message from the receiving device indicating a data roundabout transmission request state of the receiving device with respect to the first network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269513 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING SERVICE TRANSMISSION - A method and a device for controlling service transmission can implement service forwarding. The method includes: receiving a connection request message, where the connection request message includes user information; determining value-added service system VAS information according to the user information; receiving a first data packet of the service that is sent by a sending end; obtaining, according to the VAS information, a second data packet from the at least one destination VAS; and sending the second data packet to a receiving end. A VAS performs value-added processing on a data packet, and returns the data packet to a gateway device, allowing the gateway device to perform service arrangement flexibly according to dynamic information about a user. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269514 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATING COMMUNITIES OVER AN AD-HOC MESH NETWORK - An approach is provided for locating communities over an ad-hoc mesh network. Community identifiers are used to locate communities and community members over an ad-hoc mesh network. The community identifiers are also associated with keys to authenticate members of the community and to protect the privacy and anonymity of information exchanged between the members. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269515 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING A WIRELESS TERMINAL TO A NETWORK VIA A GATEWAY - A system including (i) a first gateway providing access to a first network and a second network, and (ii) a second gateway providing access to the second network. A network device determines whether a wireless terminal is communicating with the first network via the first gateway and attempting to communicate with the second network via the second gateway. The network device determines whether the first gateway permits the wireless terminal to communicate with the second network. In response to determining that the wireless terminal is communicating with the first network via the first gateway and is attempting to communicate with the second network via the second gateway and that the first gateway permits the wireless terminal to communicate with the second network, the network device permits the wireless terminal to access the second network via the first gateway prior to the wireless terminal establishing a connection with the second gateway. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269516 | INTERNET, CELLULAR BROADCAST PHONE SET AND SOFTWARE - Internet, cellular, wireless communication broadcast device that functions with software application that provides a means to utilize the internet, make telephone calls via an always connected ISP and cellular service provider. Touch screen base, mobile devices and remote devices can create, receive, store content submitted by broad cast software application and camera use. Broadcast software provides a targeted medium to send content to a network of recipients. All devices comprise wireless technologies (i.e. Bluetooth, satellite, cellular) that provide a means to switch telecommunication functions between the base device and mobile device to the technological advantage of the user. Thus allowing alternating functionality of the mobile device | 09-18-2014 |
20140269517 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING MOBILE STATION IDENTIFICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and a method for switching mobile station identification information in a wireless communication system are provided. A method for transmitting mobile station identification information includes, when a base station receives a RaNGing (RNG)-REQuest (REQ) message from the mobile station, sending, at a base station, a RNG-ReSPonse (RSP) message including a temporary mobile station identifier to the mobile station, determining, at the mobile station, the temporary mobile station identifier in the RNG-RSP signal, when base station receives REGistration (REG)-REQ message including the temporary mobile station identifier from the mobile station, sending, at the base station, a REG-RSP message comprising a mobile station identifier of the mobile station to the mobile station, determining, at the mobile station, the mobile station identifier in the REG-RSP message and sending a response signal for the REG-RSP message to the base station, when receiving the response signal for the REG-RSP message, deleting, at the base station, the temporary mobile station identifier of the mobile station, and communicating, at the mobile station and the base station, using the mobile station identifier. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269518 | MACHINE TO MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS IN A MULTIPLE M2M DEVICE GROUP ZONE ENVIRONMENT - A method and a system apparatus for providing Machine to Machine (M2M) communications in a multiple M2M device group zone environment are provided. The method for performing communication by an M2M device in an M2M communication system includes determining zone indexes corresponding to one or more zone identifiers assigned to one or more M2M device group zones of the base station, selecting a zone index corresponding to a zone identifier of the M2M device group zone associated with a M2M device group of a M2M device from the determined zone indexes, and performing communication with the base station by using the selected zone index and a M2M device group identifier associated with the M2M device group of the M2M device. | 09-18-2014 |
20140286237 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING ADDRESS OF A MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques, systems and apparatus are described for implementing a framework for an address determination technique for IPv4 addressing of MTC devices behind NATs in wireless networks. In one aspect, a method includes determining address for machine type communications (MTC) devices behind Network Address Translators (NATs) in a wireless communication network. The determining includes assigning a private address to an MTC device attached to the wireless communication network, and determining mapped public transport address. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286238 | Shared PLCP Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) within wireless communications - A wireless communication device is configured to generate frames based on any of a number of different frame formats for transmission to one or more other recipient wireless communication devices. The frame may be implemented to include data intended for two or more recipient devices. The device encodes first data intended for a first recipient device using first one or more coding parameters and encodes second data intended for a second recipient device using second one or more coding parameters. The manner by which the first and second data have been encoded is indicated within one or more other fields within the frames based on the selected frame format. In one example, a single preamble specifies the first and second one or more coding parameters. In another example, an initial preamble and one or more respective sub-preambles specify the first and second one or more coding parameters. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286239 | Transmission Control Protocol Proxy in Long Term Evolution Radio Access Network - A system, a method, a device, and a computer program product for transmission of data packets between a user device and a server. A transmission control protocol proxy component for establishing a communication link between the user device and the server in accordance with a transmission control protocol for transmission of a data packet between the user device and the server is provided. The data packet is transmitted utilizing the transmission control protocol. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286240 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA USING A MULTI-CARRIER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting data using a multi-carrier in a mobile communication system. The method of transmitting data in user equipment of a wireless communication system using a carrier aggregation technique according to an embodiment of the present invention includes setting secondary cells included in an S-TAG (Secondary-Timing Advance Group) configured of only secondary cells (SCells), deactivating a downlink timing reference cell in the S-TAG; determining whether other activated secondary cells exist besides the deactivated downlink timing reference cell in the S-TAG, and when the other activated secondary cells exist in the S-TAG, setting one of the other activated secondary cells as a new downlink timing reference cell. According to the present invention, uplink transmission speed can be increased in the user equipment and user QoS can be improved by transmitting data using one or more uplink carriers in the terminal. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286241 | AUTHENTICATION USING DHCP SERVICES IN MESH NETWORKS - A new device is deployed to an area in which a network is provided. The new device may join the network using a single handshake via a neighboring device that is a member of the network and register with a network management system managing the network. If the network is overloaded or has limited bandwidth remaining, the network may refuse to admit the new device, or if the new device is isolated, may force some devices that are members of the network to leave or migrate from the network to allow the isolated device to join the network. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286242 | DISCOVERING NETWORK INFORMATION AVAILABLE VIA WIRELESS NETWORKS - Network information may be discoverable without requiring a connection to that network. For example, Access Network Query Protocol (“ANQP”) may allow a device to discover information about a network prior to the device associating with that network. In other words, ANQP allows a network terminal to request additional network information prior to establishing network capability. The additional network information that may be discoverable includes network latency, cellular capabilities, hotspot capabilities, mobility capabilities, neighbor reports, station identification, and multiple hotspot session identification. | 09-25-2014 |
20140293868 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING FEEDBACK - A method, apparatus and computer program for providing a frame based access (FBA). An example method for use in an access point or station may comprise causing capture of a header, for example PLCP or PHY header from an attempted packet transfer and causing transmission of a negative acknowledgement (NACK) frame in response to a transmitter comprising the decoded address in the header, the NACK configured to indicate a failure to receive or decode data from the attempted packet transfer. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293869 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CO-LOCATED AND CO-CHANNEL WI-FI ACCESS POINTS - A wireless communication system may include a first transceiver co-located with a second transceiver. The first and second transceivers may be configured to transmit data to at least one user equipment, according to a collision sense multiple access/collision avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol. A processor may identify data transmission from the second transceiver and allow data transmission from the first transceiver simultaneously with data transmission from the second transceiver, on one frequency. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293870 | BEAMFORMING BASED ON INFORMATION FROM PLATFORM SENSORS - A system and method are provided for triggering re-beamforming in a 60 GHz communication link based on information collected from platform positional sensors associated with one or the other or both of the transmitters/receivers that constitute ends of the communication link. The disclosed systems and methods monitor various positional sensors that may be used to sense translational and rotational movement of at least one of the platforms on which at least one of the transmitters/receivers is mounted. Information provided by the positional sensors is processed to determine whether or not to trigger re-beamforming for link recovery in 60 GHz communication link. Information provided by the sensors may be used in combination with other link operating metrics, such as PER and RSSI, to make an intelligent determination whether to trigger re-beamforming. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293871 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD USING THE SAME - A mobile communication network includes a plurality of access nodes that control wireless access of a mobile terminal, a location server that stores location information of a mobile terminal that has wireless access to the access node, and a gateway that controls interlock with the Internet, wherein the mobile terminal that is connected to the access node communicates with another mobile terminal using location information that is stored at the location server or communicates with an Internet terminal that is connected to the Internet. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293872 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PORTABLE INFORMATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION ADAPTER, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes a network cradle provided on a network, and a handy terminal connected to the network through the network cradle. The handy terminal includes a control unit generating a header in an IP protocol including a MAC address of the handy terminal as a transmission source MAC address, generating first data obtained by adding the header to data to be transmitted, and generating second data obtained by adding a header in a P2P protocol to the first data, and a communication unit transmitting the second data to the network cradle by the P2P protocol. The network cradle includes a mobile terminal communication unit that receives the second data transmitted from the handy terminal, and a network communication unit transmitting the first data obtained by removing the header in the P2P protocol from the second data, to the network. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293873 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SMALL CELL ENHANCEMENTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods an apparatuses are disclosed for small cell enhancement in a wireless communication system. The method includes having a user equipment (UE) connected to a Macro evolved Node B (eNB. The method further includes configuring the UE to establish a very first Small Cell through a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message, wherein the very first Small Cell belongs to a Small Cell eNB different from the Macro eNB. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293874 | TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COOPERATIVE TRANSMISSION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention pertains to a communication system, and more particularly, to a terminal and method for autonomously controlling cooperative transmission wherein the terminal determines a cooperative transmission mode based on channel information and service quality information acquired by the terminal in a communication system. To this end, the present invention provides a terminal for controlling cooperative transmission from/to at least two cooperative transmission communication devices, the terminal including: a transmission mode determination unit for determining a cooperative transmission mode; and a mode-transmission-targeting communication device set determination unit for determining at least one mode-transmission-targeting communication device to which information on the determined cooperative transmission mode is to be transmitted. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293875 | Radio Access Network Cache - A caching module is provided at the interface between a radio access network (RAN) and a core network (CN). If the requested content is available in the caching module as cached content, the caching module sends a header request upstream to an origin server to determine if the cached content is valid and authorized. If the cached content is invalid, it is evicted from the cached and may be replaced with a new, valid content. The CN can inspect the header response to perform data accounting and billing, to provide upstream content filtering, and to provide lawful interception capabilities. Related techniques are also provided. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293876 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STORING MOBILE STATION PHYSICAL MEASUREMENTS AND MAC PERFORMANCE STATISTICS IN A MANAGEMENT INFORMATION BASE OF AN ACCESS POINT - A method and apparatus may be used for exchanging measurements in wireless communications. The apparatus may receive a request. The request may be a measurement request, and may include a request for a measurement of a parameter. The apparatus may transmit a report. The report may be a measurement report, and may include the requested measurement of a parameter. The apparatus may store the requested measurement of the parameter in a management information base (MIB). | 10-02-2014 |
20140293877 | Handset-Based Approach of Multimedia Service Quality Management - Service quality relating to multimedia content is measured in a mobile wireless telecommunication network by comparing, in a mobile wireless device, a received test media clip with a pre-stored sample media clip. The network transmits a test media clip, which is received by one or more mobile wireless devices. A device that receives the test media clip compares it with a sample media clip stored in mobile wireless device memory to detect differences between characteristics of the received test media clip and sample media clip. The device produces a result in response to detected differences. The result is provided to the network's service quality management function. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293878 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio communication system includes multiple base stations including a first base station and a second base station, and a mobile station. A candidate base station selector selects multiple candidate base stations that are candidates for a radio access point for the mobile station on the basis of the reception powers reported by the mobile station. When the mobile station actually executes wireless communication with the base station, an access-point base station determiner determines, as an access-point base station that is the actual radio access point for the mobile station, a base station corresponding to a best reception quality among reception qualities measured in the protected resource and reception quality measured in the non-protected resource. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293879 | Method and system for data record packet processing - A method for processing a Data Record Packet includes: a General Packet Radio Service Supported Node (GSN) sends a Data Record Packet to a Charging Gateway Function (CGF), wherein the Data Record Packet is a normal packet or a possibly duplicated packet, and the message header of a message for sending Data Record Packet includes a sequence number and the message body includes packaging time; and the CGF sends a response message of receiving the Data Record Packet to the GSN, wherein the Packet Transfer Response Command information element in the response message is used to indicate whether the response message is for the normal packet or the possibly duplicated packet. Therefore, the problem that possibly duplicated packets occupy sequence number resources is solved without limiting the network transmission speed. | 10-02-2014 |
20140301270 | IDENTIFIERS FOR PROXIMITY SERVICES - Various systems and methods for providing identifiers for proximity services are described herein. A proximity server to provide identifiers for proximity services comprises: a receiving module to receive from a requester user equipment (UE) at a proximity services server, a request to connect the requester UE to a connection UE, the request including a user-defined proximity identifier that identifies the connection UE; a permission module to confirm permission for the requester UE to connect to the connection UE; and an output module to, based on the confirmation, provide a first link layer identifier (LLID) to the connection UE for use in direct discovery between the requester UE and the connection UE. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301271 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REFERENCE SIGNAL (CSI-RS) HANDLING FOR NETWORK ASSISTED INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - A method of wireless communication includes transmitting channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) configuration information to a user equipment (UE). The CSI-RS configuration information is transmitted so that the UE may mitigate interference caused by interfering CSI-RSs. The CSI-RS configuration may be a CSI-RS configuration of a neighbor cell. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301272 | COMMON REFERENCE SIGNAL INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION TRIGGERING IN HOMOGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus determines whether one or more criteria for triggering interference cancellation in a homogeneous network are satisfied. The apparatus transmits a signal to a UE to control triggering the interference cancellation at the UE if the one or more criteria are satisfied. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301273 | DETERMINATION OF IMS APPLICATION SERVER INSTANCE BASED ON NETWORK INFORMATION - In an LTE telecommunication system subscribers may be member of a group of users wherein subscriber related data are stored on different servers according to the group of users. To enable an Aggregation/Authentication Proxy to route XCAP messages to the competent server for processing the Proxy is enabled to determine the user group membership of the subscriber by querying the Home Subscriber Server. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301274 | MOBILE ROUTER IN EPS - A method of proxy operation at a mobile router includes connecting to a plurality of machine-type communication (MTC) devices via a southbound interface of the mobile router that uses a first radio access technology, and connecting to a mobile communication network via a northbound interface of the mobile router that uses a second radio access technology. The method further includes establishing a main communication session between the mobile router and the mobile communication network via the northbound interface, including authenticating the mobile router to the mobile communication network, and operating as a proxy for the plurality of MTC devices. Such operation includes relaying signaling between individual ones of the plurality of MTC devices and the mobile communication network via respective sub-sessions of the main communication session. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301275 | DUAL-HOMING PROTECTION - Examples of the present disclosure provide a dual-homing protection method and device. In the dual-homing protection method, a forwarding item synchronizing channel and a data transfer channel are established between two Provider Edge (PE) devices in a dual-homing node, a Pseudo Wire (PW) and a Label Switched Path (LSP) protection group bearing the PW are established between a network side peer PE device and the two PE devices in the dual-homing node, which are taken as a logical device, so as to implement LSP protection within a network. The present disclosure may enable the protection within a network to be independent of access link protection. Subsequently, the management is simple. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301276 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EVALUATION OF SENSOR OBSERVATIONS - Method and sensor observation system ( | 10-09-2014 |
20140301277 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM - A communication system, (a base station apparatus, a data transmission method, and a program) in which unnecessary signalings do not occur in a large quantity as a result of the execution of a SON function, includes an eNB and an eNB that performs data transmission/reception with the eNB, in which the eNB includes a signal transmission/reception unit that transmits information to the eNB, the information being used to determine whether or not autonomous setting information should be transmitted from the eNB to the eNB. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301278 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING UPLINK SIGNALS - A method comprises determining in a first network element how much of a received uplink transmission is to be transmitted to a second network element, said first and second network elements both receiving said uplink transmission; and causing at least part of said received uplink transmission to be transmitted to said second network element. | 10-09-2014 |
20140307621 | SIGNALING OF SYSTEM INFORMATION TO MTC-DEVICES - Network node and UE, and methods therein for signaling system information, SI, to UEs. The method in the network node comprises transmitting SI to one or more UEs, where the SI comprises multiple alternative sets, where each set assigns different values to one or multiple radio system parameters. The method further comprises determining which set, out of the multiple alternative sets, that should currently be applied for a UE, and transmitting an SI selection signal to the UE, the SI selection signal indicating the determined set, thus enabling the UE to apply currently appropriate radio system parameters also in unfavorable radio conditions. The UE may be an MTC device (Machine Type Communication). | 10-16-2014 |
20140307622 | PACKET-LEVEL SPLITTING FOR DATA TRANSMISSION VIA MULTIPLE CARRIERS - Packet-level splitting for data transmission via multiple carriers is discussed. Data packets for transmission may be segregated by a first network node into multiple flows in which data packets for a first flow may be sent from the first network node to a second network node using a first set of carriers while data packets for the other flows may be forwarded to other network nodes for transmission to the second network node using other sets of carriers. The various sets of carriers are determined by the sets of carriers configured for the second network node. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307623 | UE INITIATED SCELL CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT - Methods, systems, devices, and apparatuses are described for wireless communications in which a wireless device may identify a small cell (e.g., SCell) and establish an independent connection with the small cell based at least in part on selection parameters received from a macro cell (e.g., PCell). The selection parameters may include power and/or quality parameters, as wells as a set of candidate cells from which to make the selection. The macro and small cells may be in communication with each other but need not be associated with the same base station (i.e., are not collocated). Once the small cell connection is established, the device may communicate with both cells concurrently. Available uplink data and/or downlink data may trigger the need for the device to connect with the small cell. For example, the small cell connection may be used to communicate uplink/downlink data associated with certain quality-of-service (QoS) and/or bearer identifier. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307624 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING VIDEO TRAFFIC IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of scheduling video traffic in a wireless communication system includes detecting codec information and a number of video frames included in at least one video traffic. The method also includes predicting a reproduction time of the at least one video traffic by using the codec information and the number of video frames. The method also includes performing scheduling of the at least one video traffic based on the predicted reproduction time. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307625 | LEGACY-COMPATIBLE CONTROL FRAMES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for using different MAC addresses in frames for the same station to indicate how to process the frames. In this manner, frames for IEEE 802.11ac can carry information not present in legacy frames (e.g., frames according to IEEE 802.11a/n), but these frames may be interpreted by legacy devices in a legacy way. One example method generally includes receiving a first frame comprising an indication of a first MAC address and processing the received first frame based on the first MAC address. For certain aspects, the method further includes receiving a second frame comprising an indication of a second MAC address, wherein the second MAC address is different than the first address; and processing the received second frame based on the second MAC address, such that the processing of the second frame is different than the processing of the first frame. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307626 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK USER ISOLATION - The present disclosure describes systems for user isolation in a communication network based on the particular user not on the user's physical location with respect to a network access device. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307627 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSPORTING DIGITAL RADIO SIGNAL STREAMS IN A SMALL CELL NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment that includes receiving a radio signal stream, segmenting the radio signal stream based on a control word in the radio signal stream, mapping the segmented radio signal stream to a service class, transporting the segmented radio signal stream in packets through channels over a backhaul link, and maintaining the order of the radio signal stream over the backhaul link. In more particular embodiments, the backhaul link may use a DOCSIS link, the radio signal stream can be received using a Common Public Radio Interface, and the radio signal stream may include sub-streams transported through segmented channels over the backhaul link. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307628 | Method and System for the Distributed Transmission of a Communication Flow and Use of the System - A method and system for the distributed transmission of the communication flow, in which the communication flow takes place at least unidirectionally from a first to a second communication unit and wherein the first and second communication units are capable of transmitting the communication flow by means of at least two different communication paths, the communication flow comprises at least one vehicle-to-X message. The communication flow is divided into at least two communication flow elements by the first communication unit prior to sending, wherein the at least two communication flow elements are transmitted from the first to the second communication unit in a manner distributed over the at least two different communication paths, and wherein the at least two communication flow elements are assembled again by the second communication unit following reception. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307629 | PER-HOST LOCATOR TO ENABLE MOBILITY GATEWAY RELOCATION IN DISTRIBUTED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A method and system of relocating user equipment, such as a mobile device in a network from a first mobility anchor to a second mobility anchor, includes providing an identifier address to the user equipment when the latter is anchored to the first mobility anchor or gateway. When the user equipment is relocated to be anchored at the second mobility anchor or gateway, a per-host locator address is associated with the user equipment, the per-host locator address directing network packets to be routed to the second mobility anchor. A destination address of network packets addressed to the identifier address is translated to the per-host locator address, such that the network packets are routed to the second mobility anchor, and the destination address of network packets that are addressed to the per-host locator address are reverse translated to the identifier address, and the packets are forwarded to the user equipment. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307630 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - To enable a user terminal to determine a cell of a downlink signal also in a heterogeneous environment using the same cell identification information, and thereby enable reception accuracy to be maintained, a radio communication method of the invention is characterized in that a radio base station apparatus generates a reference signal sequence by using a pseudo random sequence including user specific information, and transmits the reference signal sequence to a user terminal, and that the user terminal performs signal processing using the reference signal sequence transmitted from the radio base station apparatus. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307631 | Feedback Messaging - The disclosure relates to methods and apparatuses for feedback messaging in a communication system. A station can include into a scheduling information entity an indication of aperiodic feedback messaging on a physical uplink control channel and dynamically send the scheduling information entity with the indication to a communication device configured for periodic feedback messaging to trigger aperiodic feedback messaging by the communication device on the physical uplink control channel. Upon receiving the scheduling information entity the device can determine that it includes the indication and in response to the determining send at least one aperiodic feedback message on the physical uplink control channel. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307632 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRIGGERING MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATION MTC IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for enabling a MTC (machine type communication) IWF (interworking function) to perform a trigger request in a wireless communication system. The method includes transferring, to a first serving node, the trigger request and information related to retrying the trigger request which includes information on whether to retry if the transferring of the trigger request fails, wherein if the information on whether to retry indicates retrying, the retrying of the trigger request is assigned to the first serving node. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307633 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATING IN AN AD HOC NETWORK, TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING STATION AND ASSOCIATED COMPUTER PROGRAM - The invention relates to a method for communicating between nodes of an ad hoc network including a database matching geographical zones and radio channels, at least one respective radio channel, called geographical radio channel, being selectively associated with each geographical zone in the database: detection, by at least one node, of its location; determination, by said node, of at least one geographical zone within which it is located, based on the detected location, and determination of at least one geographical radio channel selectively associated with said determined geographical zone; transmission and/or reception by said node of data to be relayed between nodes of the ad hoc network on said geographical radio channel thus associated with it. | 10-16-2014 |
20140313973 | DATA OFFLOADING APPARATUS AND METHOD - Disclosed are a data offloading apparatus and method. The data offloading apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention includes an analysis unit configured to analyze a type of a packet and a provision unit configured to provide the packet to an Internet network through a mobile core network or through a route of bypassing the mobile core network on the basis of the type of the packet. According to the present invention, a terminal can transmit data to the Internet network through the mobile core network or the route of bypassing the mobile core network according to characteristics of the data. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313974 | MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST/MULTIMEDIA SERVICE (MBMS) SESSION UPDATE - Systems, methods, apparatuses, and computer program products for multimedia broadcast/multimedia service (MBMS) session update are provided. One method includes receiving a session update request which may include a TGMI pointing to the current active MBMS session and new QoS requirement. The method may then include updating the MBMS bearer context with the new QoS. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313975 | WHITE LISTING FOR BINDING IN AD-HOC MESH NETWORKS - Techniques are disclosed for specifying and enforcing connections in a network. Embodiments generally include a network device that maintains a data structure that identifies preferred nodes. The data structure includes entries associated with preferred nodes. Connections are established and enforced based on the entries of the data structure. The data structure may be updated and modified allowing network and node reconfiguration. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313976 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEEDING BACK CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - In solutions provided in embodiments of the present application, a second orthogonal basis vector group and a group number of the second orthogonal basis vector group are determined according to a pre-defined first basis vector group, a third orthogonal basis vector group corresponding to each data layer is determined according to the second orthogonal basis vector group, then a second-level code word of each data layer is calculated separately, and the group number of the second orthogonal basis vector group, the third orthogonal basis vector group corresponding to the each data layer, and the second-level code word corresponding to the each data layer are sent to a base station, so that the base station may synthesize a multi-layer code word. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313977 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFACING AMONG MOBILE TERMINAL, BASE STATION AND CORE NETWORK IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method, apparatus and a computer readable record media storing instructions for executing the same method for interfacing among a hybrid type synchronous or asynchronous terminal to a core network in a next generation mobile telecommunications system. The hybrid type synchronous or asynchronous radio network determines the operating type of the core network when the core network has a connection thereto, and sends the determined core network operating type information and information related to the core network to the hybrid type synchronous or asynchronous terminal, thereby allowing the synchronous or asynchronous terminal to smoothly perform a data interfacing operation with the core network. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313978 | BASE STATION, RADIO TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - When completing radio communication with a radio terminal, a transmitting unit of a base station transmits to the radio terminal a validity period of control information on radio communication which has been used to communicate with the radio terminal. When starting radio communication with the radio terminal within the validity period, a communication unit of the base station performs radio communication with the radio terminal without performing a process of exchanging control information. When completing radio communication with the base station, a receiving unit of the radio terminal receives a validity period from the base station. When starting radio communication with the base station within the validity period, a communication unit of the radio terminal performs radio communication with the radio terminal without performing a process of exchanging control information. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313979 | MULTI-RADIO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - In various embodiments, two wireless communication devices may communicate with each other using multiple protocols, by dividing the data to be communicated into multiple portions, and using each protocol to communicate different portions. The different protocols may be used simultaneously or concurrently. This multi-protocol technique may be used in several different ways to provide different types of advantages in wireless communications. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313980 | Handling ICS Enhanced and Non Enhanced MSC in a Pool - Handling core network entities of a radio core communications network comprising a first network entity and a second network entity, where the second network entity differs from the first network entity in that it is capable of processing inter-working between messages exchanged with the radio core communications network and messages exchanged with an IP multimedia subsystem. In other words, one network entity is capable of performing inter-working while the other one not. The first and/or second network entities are provided with configuration information indicating a relationship between the two network entities. Messages relating to calls established between the at least one user terminal attached to the entity non capable of inter-working and a further user terminal attached to the IP multimedia subsystem are routed according to the configuration information. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313981 | Handling Redundant Data in a Communication System - In multi flow high speed downlink packed access, MF HSDPA, communication between a radio network controller, RNC, ( | 10-23-2014 |
20140313982 | Method of Management in a Communications Network - A method including maintaining a database of unique radio network identifiers within a home node B gateway, wherein the unique radio network identifier uniquely identifies the radio network termination point of user equipment attached to a radio node controlled by the home node B gateway. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313983 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FINGERPRINTING OF NETWORK DEVICES - A method for fingerprinting at least one network device is disclosed which comprises, in a monitoring device, computing a passive fingerprint from a plurality of parameters of the at least one network device. And in the at least one network device, modifying at least one parameter among the plurality of parameters of the at least one network device by applying to the at least one parameter a diversity function; wherein the diversity function is chosen in such a way that variations of the modified parameter of each network devices are not correlated; and wherein a variation range of the at least one modified parameter is inferior to a first value so that a variation range of the passive fingerprint for each of the at least one network device is limited to a determined range. A network device, modifying at least one parameter among the plurality of parameters of the at least one network device by applying to the at least one parameter a diversity function is further disclosed. The invention is particularly suitable for IEEE 802.11 and for a fingerprinting method based on inter-arrival time histogram. | 10-23-2014 |
20140321359 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More specifically, the present invention relates to a method and a device for reporting channel state information, wherein the method comprises the steps of: receiving configuration information for a period report of CSI from a first transmission point; and transmitting, to said first transmission point, a CSI report for the downlink of a transmission point corresponding to a corresponding subframe among a plurality of transmission points through each subframe that is periodically set according to said configuration information, wherein: one or more subframes corresponding to a second transmission point are used to transmit a CSI report for multi-transmission point cooperative transmission, if rank information reported to said first transmission point prior to said CSI report is a critical value or less; and one or more subframes corresponding to said second transmission point are used to transmit a CSI report for single-transmission point transmission, if the rank information reported to said first transmission point prior to said CSI report is said critical value or more. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321360 | DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) PREAMBLE DESIGN - This application discusses, among other things, methods and apparatus for providing more efficient ways to enable D2D discovery and D2D communication simultaneously. In an example, a method can include assembling device-to device (D2D) discovery data at a wireless device, assembling D2D communication data at the wireless device, assembling a D2D preamble including the discovery data and the communication data, and transmitting the D2D preamble using a wireless transmitter of the wireless device. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321361 | Method and Arrangement for Load Management in Heterogeneous Networks with Interference Suppression Capable Receivers - In a method of providing load measurements in an interference suppression capable radio base station node associated with a plurality of users in a heterogeneous wireless communication system, applying interference suppression to received signals in the radio base station node, to provide interference suppressed received signals. Subsequently, estimating neighbor cell interference based on the interference suppressed received signals, and estimating a reference received total wideband power, based on the interference suppressed received signals. Then performing the steps of determining a first load measure based on the interference suppressed received signals and the estimated reference received total wideband power, and determining a second load measure based on the interference suppressed received signals, the estimated reference received total wideband power and on the estimated neighbor cell interference. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321362 | AUTOMATIC SECURITY ALERT SYSTEM AND METHOD USING MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - An Automatic Emergency Call Initiator (AECI) initiates an automatic emergency call protocol on a mobile communication system, which can be done using signaling messages. The user uses the AECI to initiate the call on a mobile station. GPS or other location data is automatically determined. Data is stored on an Emergency Notification Server (ENS) associated with an event identifier for easy retrieval or notification to emergency responders. The ENS generates an automated call to a call center and also supports the automatic emergency call protocol by storing GPS and identifying info on mobile stations meeting location criteria of the AECI initiated call. The ENS can also tag a mobile station to continue tracking mobile stations coming within a specified distance of the mobile station. A security alert protocol for predetermined mobile stations detected by a network can also be implemented using the ENS. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321363 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING A LIST OF ENTRIES CONTAINING ROUTING INFORMATION - A system and method adds and manages entries on a list of entries of routing information to allow the top entry to be used for routing to a destination corresponding to the list. Costs of a wireless link may be a function of the success rate experienced on that wireless link. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321364 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VOICE CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM THEREOF - Methods and apparatuses are provided for providing a voice call service in a Circuit Switching (CS) domain to a User Equipment (UE) being in a Packet Switching (PS) domain in a mobile communication system. A first message for paging to provide the voice call service in the CS domain to the UE is sent to an evolved Node B (eNB) in the PS domain. A second message including a cause associated with a domain change from the PS domain to the CS domain, is received from the eNB. A third message requesting suspension of the service being provided to the UE in the PS domain, is sent to a gateway in the PS domain. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321365 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM THEREFOR - In a detach request signal that requests detach being received from the mobile station UE ( | 10-30-2014 |
20140321366 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING MESSAGES FROM A DATA NETWORK TO A VEHICLE AND SERVER DEVICE FOR A DATA NETWORK - A method ensures that message traffic runs smoothly during the transmission of messages from a plurality of data sources in a data network to a vehicle connected to the data network via a mobile radio interface. Messages are sent out to the vehicle from a plurality of data sources in a data network, in particular the Internet, and the messages are not delivered directly to the vehicle, but rather to a server device of the data network, where the messages are each assigned one of a plurality of predetermined message classes by the server device and messages of a first message class are immediately transferred to the vehicle by the server device, messages of a second message class are saved in the server device and messages of a third message class are deleted. A server device coupled to a data network works with the method. | 10-30-2014 |
20140328247 | Explicitly Sounding Beyond the Beamformee Sounding Capability - A first device explicitly sounds a wireless channel with respect to a second device even when the second device cannot sound all the antenna/transmit paths of the first device. The first device has a first plurality of antennas and corresponding transmitters and the second device has a second plurality antennas and corresponding receivers. The first device wirelessly transmits a plurality of sounding frames to the second device such that at least one of the first plurality of antennas is kept constant across the plurality of sounding frames. The first device receives from the second device at least one feedback message containing channel matrix information derived from reception of the sounding frames at the second plurality of antennas of the second device. The first device derives a full wireless channel estimate between the first plurality of antennas of the first device and the second plurality of antennas of the second device. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328248 | VEHICLE DRIVER IDENTIFICATION USING PORTABLE DEVICE - A network device associates a fleet vehicle with a driver of it. The network device receives customer input associating a group of media access control (MAC) addresses of portable devices with driver identifiers and stores, in a memory, the MAC addresses associated with the driver identifiers. The network device also receives, from a vehicle telematics unit, a vehicle identifier of a vehicle connected to the vehicle telematics unit and a MAC address of a particular portable device proximate the vehicle. Based on the MAC address of the particular portable device, the network device associates a particular driver identifier and the vehicle identifier. The vehicle telematics unit may determine that driver is no longer driving when it can no longer detect a signal from the particular portable device that was proximate the vehicle. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328249 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AGGREGATION OF PHYSICAL PROTOCOL DATA UNITS ON A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods for aggregation of multiple physical protocol data units are disclosed. In one aspect, a method of transmitting a physical layer packet to a plurality of wireless devices is disclosed. The method includes generating a physical layer packet, the packet including a plurality of payloads, wherein at least one of the payloads comprises first data addressed to a first device and second data addressed to a second device, and wherein each payload is preceded by at least a signal field in the physical layer packet, and transmitting the physical layer packet. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328250 | ACCESS CONTROL - An access point ( | 11-06-2014 |
20140328251 | DIRECT CONNECTION WITH SIDE CHANNEL CONTROL - A wireless computer that pairs with a remote audio-video presentation device, such as a television. As a result of the pairing, a communication channel is established for the computer to transmit audio-video content for presentation through that device. Additionally, as part of the pairing, the computer and remote device select a side channel for communication of user commands. The wireless computer may display a user interface through which a user may input commands that control the manner in which the remote audio-video device presents the content. As a result, a user may use the wireless computer as a remote control for the audio-video device, controlling both the content presented and the manner in which it is presented. The side channel may use different frequencies than the channel used to communicate audio-video content, and may use very low power at frequencies in the digital TV spectrum. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328252 | RECEIVING CELL BROADCAST (CB) MESSAGES - A method for receiving cell broadcast messages is described. The method includes communicating with a first cell. The method also includes switching to communicating with a second cell. A cell broadcast channel is read after switching cells. The method further includes switching from a dedicated mode to a packet idle mode. The cell broadcast channel is reread once after switching from a dedicated mode to a packet idle mode. Other aspects, embodiments and features are also claimed and described. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328253 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING VALIDITY OF TERMINAL GROUP IDENTIFIER IN MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATION - Disclosed is a method for determining whether a machine-to-machine group identifier (MGID) for identifying a multicast service flow is supported in a wireless access system that supports machine-to-machine (M2M) communication, wherein the multicast service flow is shared by a group of M2M terminals within an M2M group zone that is allocated to the terminals. The method comprises the steps of: receiving from the first base station M2M group zone information of the first base station and neighboring base stations; receiving from the second base station system information of the second base station; and determining whether the MGID that is received from the first base station is supported by the second base station by comparing the system information of the second base station and the M2M group zone information on the neighboring base stations. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328254 | METHOD FOR RE-SELECTING AP IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR SAME - The method performed by a base station and comprises receiving, from a terminal connected to a first WLAN AP, an AP re-selection response message requesting a connection change from the first WLAN AP to a second WLAN AP; transmitting, to the second WLAN AP, an AP change request message including information relating to the association of the terminal and information relating to the connection setup of the terminal; receiving, from the second WLAN AP, an AP change response message including information indicating approval, or not, of the connection of the terminal; if the second WLAN AP has provided approval, transmitting, to the first WLAN AP, an AP change indication message indicating the connection change of the terminal; and transmitting, to the terminal, an AP re-selection command message ordering connection with the second WLAN AP. | 11-06-2014 |
20140334380 | TECHNIQUES FOR CONNECTIONLESS SMALL DATA TRANSMISSION - Various embodiments are generally directed to techniques for connectionless small data transmission. In one embodiment, for example, an apparatus may comprise a processor circuit, a configuration component for execution by the processor circuit to establish a connectionless small data transmission (CSDT) mode, and a communication component for execution by the processor circuit to send a small data preamble, receive a resource allocation message identifying an assigned resource, and send a small data item in the CSDT mode using the assigned resource. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334381 | VIDEO STREAMING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Wireless communication devices are provided with direct video and audio streaming capability. The streaming capability may support overlays, and seek functionality. Some implementations include incorporation of these features into devices with a mirroring display mode such as Miracast. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334382 | MESSAGE GENERATING ARRANGEMENT - A message generating arrangement determines whether a first communication terminal of a communication system can participate, by means of packet-switching network elements of the communication system, in a communication link in which a second communication terminal of the communication system is participating by means of circuit-switching network elements of the communication system, and generates a message on the basis of the result of the determination. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334383 | NETWORK SYSTEM, NODE DEVICE, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING NETWORK SYSTEM - A node device which is provided in a network and for transmitting a packet including a first header portion, a second header portion, a payload data portion, the node device includes: a memory and a processor coupled to the memory. The processor is configured to: calculate a first value that is a first logical relationship for payload data set in the payload data portion and first header information including a transmission destination address set in the first header portion, and transmit a packet including the payload data, the first header information, second header information including a final transmission destination address set in the second header portion, the first value and a second value that is a second logical relationship to the payload data and the second header information to outside of the node device. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334384 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SEGMENTATION OF PACKETS FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION - A method and apparatus for segmenting medium access control (MAC) service data units (SDUs) creates enhanced MAC-es PDUs in the enhanced MAC-e/es sub-layer by concatenating MAC SDUs received from the logical channels. An enhanced transport format combination (E-TFC) selection entity controls the concatenation of MAC SDUs into enhanced MAC-es PDUs. When a MAC SDU is received that is too large to fit into a selected enhanced MAC-es PDU payload, a segmentation entity segments the MAC SDU such that the MAC SDU segment fills the remaining payload available in the selected enhanced MAC-es PDU. The enhanced MAC-es PDU is then assigned a transmission sequence number (TSN) and multiplexed with other enhanced MAC-es PDUs to create a single enhanced MAC-e PDU that is transmitted on the E-DCH in the next transmission time interval (TTI). A HARQ entity stores and, if necessary retransmits the enhanced MAC-e PDU when a transmission error occurs. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334385 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MOVING A RECEIVE WINDOW IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method of moving a receiving window in a wireless mobile communication system, wherein the AM RLC of the transmitting side sends information of the last discarded SDU regardless of continuity of the discarded SDUs. The AM RLC of the receiving side checks whether all SDUs from the start point of the receiving window up to the last discarded SDU are successfully received, delivers the SDUs that are successfully received to an upper layer, and discard only those SDUs that are not successfully received. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334386 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, GATEWAY APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A first gateway apparatus includes: an apparatus determining unit configured to receive a connection request signal for requesting a connection from the second communication apparatus and identify at least one of the group and service based on the connection request signal; and a data transfer unit configured to transfer data received from the second communication apparatus to the second gateway apparatus. | 11-13-2014 |
20140341108 | MANAGING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN COLLOCATED RADIOS - A device implementing a system for managing interference between collocated radios may include a first radio module, a collocated second radio module, and a host processor. The first radio module may be configured to generate a collocated radio tolerance indicator that indicates a tolerance of the first radio module to interference caused by the collocated second radio module when the collocated second radio module is transmitting, and provide the collocated radio tolerance indicator to a host processor when a second collocated radio module is transmitting. The host processor may be configured to control the second radio module based at least in part on the collocated radio tolerance indicator. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341109 | Methods, Apparatus and Systems for Managing Converged Gateway Communications - Systems and methods for providing a converged gateway (CGW) may be disclosed. A policy may be by the CGW to make routing decisions (e.g. segregation and/or aggregation of flows or traffic associated with data) for various interfaces and/or radio access technologies (RATs) that may be included in a LAN, device, and/or communication system. The policy may be locally stored within the CGW. Dynamic flow management, load balancing, offloading, PDF context establishment, prioritization, detection of devices, and the like may also be provided and/or implemented in the CG W and may be used to route flows and/or traffic associated with data. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341110 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROTOCOL ADAPTATION LAYER (PAL) COMMUNICATION TO INDICATE TRANSITIONING A DEVICE TO A DEFAULT STATE - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of transitioning a device to a default state. For example, an apparatus may include a first Protocol Adaptation Layer (PAL) communication unit to communicate PAL traffic with a second PAL communication unit over a communication link, the PAL traffic comprising traffic of a PAL connection over a PAL, the PAL is above a layer of the communication link, wherein the first PAL communication unit is to communicate a device reset request and a device reset response with the second PAL communication unit over the communication link, the device reset request indicating transitioning of a peripheral device to a default state, the device reset response in response to the device reset request, the device reset response indicating whether the device reset request is successfully handled. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341111 | LINKING METHOD BETWEEN COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND RELATED MACHINE READABLE MEDIUM - A linking method employed by a first communication device includes: transmitting a first network domain information to a second communication device before/after a link with the second communication device is established; receiving a second network domain information from the second communication device before/after the link with the second communication device is established; and when the first communication device is decided to be a group owner before/after the link with the second communication device is established, determining a network domain address of the link according to the first network domain information and the second network domain information. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341112 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IP SESSION CONTINUITY IN DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing, by a User Equipment (UE), Device-to-Device (D2D) communication using a wireless communication network is provided. The method includes performing D2D communication via a direct communication path using an allocated Internet Protocol (IP) address, establishing a first Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearer supporting D2D communication via the wireless communication network, to a Packet Data Network (PDN) Gateway (P-GW), determining to switch from the direct communication path to D2D communication via the wireless communication network, and communicating an IP packet through the first EPS bearer based on the determination. An IP packet transmitted through the first EPS bearer may not be transmitted to a packet data network, or an IP packet received through the first EPS bearer is not received from the packet data network. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341113 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FORWARDING DATA BASED ON SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORK IN COMMUNICATION NETWORK - To forward traffic to a base station using Software Defined Network technology, a method for operating a switch includes receiving path information of a packet to be forwarded from a source terminal to a plurality of destination terminals, from a controller, receiving the packet to be forwarded from the source terminal to the destination terminals, from a base station, and transmitting the packet along a path determined by the path information. An apparatus for controlling a switch in a communication network includes a transceiver configured to receive information of a source terminal and a plurality of destination terminals, from a server which controls a service for forwarding traffic from the source terminal to the destination terminals, and a controller configured to determine a packet forward path between the source terminal and the destination terminals, wherein the transceiver transmits the determined path information to at least one switch. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341114 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for allowing a base station to transmit a reference signal in a wireless communication system, and the method for transmitting the reference signal comprises the steps of: generating a reference signal sequence; and applying an orthogonal sequence to said reference signal sequence, and mapping to resources of each antenna port, wherein said antenna ports are included in one of first and second antenna port sets, and the configuration of the antenna ports included in said respective antenna port sets varies according to the number of available resource elements in a physical resource block pair. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341115 | SERVER AND DATA SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEM - A server enabling mobile equipment on a mobile communication network to synchronously receive data sent from two or more mobile equipment, including: a terminal manager receiving synchronizing terminal information from each mobile equipment specifying a group to which it belongs and participation in the group as a session terminal or an audience terminal; a transmission time measuring part measuring transmission time from each mobile equipment to the server; a route establishing part determining whether to change a route from each session terminal of the same group to an alternative route based on whether the transmission times from the session terminals are practically equal, and establishing and sending a route to the session terminal; a synchronous data receiver receiving data sent through the established route; and a synchronous data sending part sending the received data to the audience terminal in the same group as the mobile equipment that sent the data. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341116 | Method and System for Reporting FGI Capability by Terminal and Assigning Measurement Task by Network Side - Disclosed are a capability for reporting Feature Group indicators (FGI) capability by the terminal and a method for configuring a measurement task for the terminal by the network side and a terminal, a network side device and a system thereof. Wherein, the method for reporting the FGI capability by the terminal comprises: when reporting the FGI capability of the terminal to the network side, for each Radio Access Technology (RAT), the terminal reporting whether the terminal supports Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR) capability of the RAT or not. The method for configuring the measurement task for the terminal by the network side comprises: when obtaining the FGI capability of the terminal, the network side also obtaining whether the terminal supports the ANR capability of each RAT or not, and configuring a measurement task corresponding to the FGI capability for the terminal according to the FGI capability supported by the terminal. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341117 | USER EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT/DETACHMENT FROM A LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) NETWORK - A device searches for a primary access network, and acquires the primary access network. The device also requests a service provided by a network connected to the primary access network, and attaches to the primary access network only when the service is requested by the device. | 11-20-2014 |
20140348060 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR LOW-COMPLEXITY FEEDBACK IN A MULTIUSER AND MULTIPOINT COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and device for low-complexity feedback in a multiuser and multipoint cooperative communication system. The base station in the multiuser and multipoint cooperative communication system transmits a feedback stop signal to a terminal in order for the terminal receiving the feedback stop signal to stop feedback for a predetermined period. The terminal receiving the feedback stop signal stops the feedback of channel information for a period indicated by the feedback stop signal. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348061 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A method and system establishes a peer-to-peer (P2P) communication session between user equipments (UEs) under control of a network. A proximity services (ProSe) server associated with a first controlling network receives from a first UE a communication request message indicating that at least one other UE is in close proximity with the first UE. Based on the close proximity between the UEs, the server establishes a P2P group which includes the first UE and at least one other UE. In addition, the server identifies respective P2P Internet Protocol (IP) addresses for the UEs within the established P2P group. The server then instructs the UEs to communicate within the established P2P group using respective P2P IP addresses. Following receipt of a response indicating acceptance by a second UE of an instruction to communicate within the established P2P group using a corresponding P2P IP address, the server establishes the communication session. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348062 | NEUTRAL HOST WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK APPARATUS AND METHOD AND/OR DATA OFFLOADING ARCHITECTURE APPARATUS AND METHOD - Network architectures, apparatus, methods, and processes related to WiFi enabled devices (e.g., tablets and cellular phones) and wireless local area networks. In certain non-limiting embodiments, network architectures, apparatus, methods, and processes for providing or handling data offloading from congested cellular networks. In other non-limiting embodiments, network architectures, apparatus, methods, and processes pertaining to shared WiFi networks and/or infrastructures. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348063 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AN UPLINK REFERENCE SIGNAL IN A MULTI-NODE SYSTEM AND TERMINAL USING SAME - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting an uplink reference signal in a multi-node system and a terminal using same. The method comprises the steps of: receiving a synchronization signal from a node; receiving parameters for a virtual cell identifier(ID) from the node; generating an uplink demodulation reference signal(DM-RS) using the parameters for the virtual cell ID; and transmitting the generated uplink DM-RS to the node, wherein a physical cell ID is a cell ID obtained from the synchronization signal, and the parameters for the virtual cell ID are parameters used for generating the uplink DM-RS in the replacement of the physical cell ID. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348064 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING CELL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatuses are provided for selecting a cell in a mobile communication network for a network access of a terminal and a position update. A method includes receiving a first message from a network; determining whether a cell, which the terminal accesses, supports Circuit Switched FallBack (CSFB), based on the first message; and determining whether to select the cell, based on whether the cell supports the CSFB. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348065 | METHOD OF IMPROVING MOBILE TERMINATING CALL HANDLING DURING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK (CSFB) - The present invention relates to a method of improving mobile terminating call handling in a change of a receiving mobile terminal (UE) from a first network to a second network, wherein the change is carried out as circuit switched fallback (CSFB) from the first network not providing circuit switched (CS) domain services to the second network providing circuit switched (CS) domain services. The method is characterized in that the Mobile Switching Centre/Visitor Location Register (MSC/VLR) of the second network supervises completion of the circuit switched fallback (CSFB) internetwork change to the second network. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348066 | METHOD TO ACHIEVE A FULLY ACKNOWLEDGED MODE COMMUNICATION (FAMC) IN PUSH-TO-TALK-OVER-CELLULAR (PoC) - A system and method for providing advanced voice services in a wireless communications network, and more specifically, a method and framework to achieve a Fully Acknowledged Mode Communication (FAMC) in Push-to-talk-over-Cellular (PoC). A FAMC call session is a PoC call session that can only be established when all members of a set are available. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348067 | METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION IN POINT-MULTIPOINT RADIO BROADCASTING OF MULTILANGUAGE MESSAGES IN CELLULAR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS, MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND MOBILE TERMINAL FOR THE EMBODIMENT OF THE METHOD - A method for broadcasting messages in a cellular mobile communications system with broadcast functionality includes the steps of: selecting a geographic area over which the message broadcasting must be carried out; obtaining information adapted to identify the languages used in mobile terminals referring to the cellular mobile communications system within the geographic area; composing the messages in the set of the identified languages, thus obtaining one or more multilanguage messages; broadcasting the one or more multilanguage messages to said mobile terminals. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348068 | Multiplexing Core Networks in RAN Sharing - An apparatus, includes core interface means adapted to provide an eastbound interface to a first core network element and to a second core network element different from the first core network element; radio interface means adapted to provide a westbound interface to a first radio access network element and to a second radio access network element different from the first radio access network element; multiplex detecting means adapted to detect if a first request received at one of the eastbound and westbound interfaces is directed to the first and/or the second of the network elements of the respective other interface; adapting means adapted to adapt the first request according to the network element to which it is directed; multiplexing means adapted to multiplex the adapted first request to the first and/or the second of the network elements of the respective other interface according to detection by the multiplex detecting means. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348069 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING LOCAL ACCESS CONNECTION - A method for processing local access connections, comprises: when a user terminal is in a connected state and accesses through a hybrid mode home nodeB, if a mobility management entity of a core network detects that closed subscriber group (CSG) membership of the user terminal changes or times out (401), the mobility management entity of the core network initiating releasing of all the activated local access packet data network (PDN) connections or notifying the home nodeB to trigger a local gateway to initiate releasing of all the activated local access PDN connections ( | 11-27-2014 |
20140348070 | PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATOR - A technical data monitoring device for use with a wireless data monitoring network includes a wireless communications circuit, and at least one technical device/system. The technical data monitoring device establishes a wireless communication link with a programmable interface of a programmable cellular telephone. The device is also configured to send and/or receive wireless packet switched data transmissions, generate data and send data over the wireless communication link for processing by the programmable cellular telephone, and has an associated status condition. Data from the device is (1) sent to be processed and displayed by the programmable cellular telephone and/or (2) sent to be processed and forwarded by the programmable cellular telephone to an Internet website. The device forms part of the wireless data monitoring network in communication with the programmable cellular telephone. The technical device/system can be one of a number of sensors, devices, or systems. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348071 | BEARER PROCESSING METHOD AND MOBILE MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A bearer processing method and a network device are provided. The method includes: determining whether a corresponding user equipment (UE) exists, if user subscription data recorded in a mobile management device is changed; and initiating a bearer modification or deletion process by the mobile management device according to the determining result with regard to whether the UE exists. The mobile management device includes: a storage unit, adapted to record user subscription data; a determination unit, adapted to determine whether a corresponding UE exists, after the user subscription data recorded in the storage unit is changed; and a trigger unit, adapted to initiate a bearer modification or deletion process according to the determining result with respect to whether the UE exists. | 11-27-2014 |
20140355517 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR WIRELESS DEVICE DISCOVERY - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments enhance wireless communications device discovery processes. In an example embodiment, a method comprises detecting, by an apparatus, a sequence of wireless device advertising channel messages in a first communications protocol during device discovery scans of the first communications protocol; and multiplexing, by the apparatus, transmission of a sequence of wireless device discovery messages in a second communications protocol, with the detected sequence of wireless device advertising channel messages in the first communications protocol, in response to the detecting of the sequence of wireless device advertising channel messages in the first communications protocol. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355518 | Inter-Medium Bridging With Inter-Domain Routing And Multi-Medium Domain Coordination - Various embodiments of inter-medium bridging are provided. In one aspect, a method may involve an inter-medium bridging device bridging between a plurality of mediums of a network connected to the first inter-medium bridging device at the Data Link Layer of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. The plurality of mediums may comprise at least a first medium and a second medium that comprise separate communications channels. The method may also involve the inter-medium bridging device facilitating communications between an external device and the network through an application interface of the first inter-medium bridging device. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355519 | SHARING WIRELESS TRAFFIC - The invention discloses a method and system for sharing wireless traffic, the method comprising: receiving a request for sharing the wireless traffic from a requesting mobile device, the request containing a list of unique numbers of other mobile devices within a certain range of distance from the requesting mobile device; selecting, for the requesting mobile device, at least one mobile device for sharing the wireless traffic from the received list; and sending, to the requesting mobile device, the unique number of the at least one selected mobile device and its connection channel password. By virtue of the method and apparatus according to the embodiments of the present invention, traffic can be shared among mobile devices' users without participation of mobile operators, thereby saving money for the users. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355520 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VISITING SUBSCRIBER SERVER IN IMS CORE NETWORKS - A method for supporting an inbound roaming subscriber in an IMS network, comprises receiving a request from the inbound roaming subscriber to access the IMS network, determining the inbound roaming subscriber's home network, retrieving authentication credentials from the inbound roaming subscriber's home network, and verifying the authentication credentials, dynamically deriving public and private user identities for the inbound roaming subscriber, and creating and storing a subscriber record for the inbound roaming subscriber. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355521 | INTELLIGENT MULTIPLE ACCESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD - An intelligent multiple access communication (MAC) control apparatus and method are disclosed. The intelligent MAC control apparatus includes a connection control unit, a resource management unit, a session control unit, a flow control unit, and a determination unit. The connection control unit connects at least one Radio Access Technology (RAT) and a wireless network. The resource management unit collects RAT information including information about available resources and radio state of the RAT. The session control unit checks the QoS of at least one connection target service. The flow control unit determines the priority of the connection target service, and selects a preferential connection target service. The determination unit determines a connection RAT for performing the preferential connection target service based on the QoS and the RAT information. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355522 | Systems and Methods for Splitting and Recombining Communications in Multi-Network Environments - Systems and methods for providing dynamic substream definition and handover are provided. In embodiments, a user device includes a multiple radio access technology (RAT) communications modules and a communication controller. Each RAT communication module is further configured to communicate using a different RAT. The user device identifies available networks for communication. Then, the controller determines whether a need to split a communications stream exists (e.g., the user device is engaged in a bandwidth intensive application). If the communications stream is to be split, the controller defines the substreams (either equally or unequally) and assigns a first substream to a communication pathway in a first available network and assigns a second substream to a communication pathway in a second available network. The destination then recombines the substreams. In embodiments, the controller inserts synchronization in the substreams. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355523 | INITIALIZING NETWORK ADVERTISEMENTS FROM PROBE REQUESTS - A probe request from a wireless station can cause the access point to contact a roaming enablement service and alter the services accessible through the access point. The roaming enablement service can identify preferred services of the wireless station and mediate automated negotiations between the access point and a service provider to determine whether the access point may provide a service from the service provider. Upon successful negotiations, the brokerage service can enable the access point to provide access to the preferred services. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355524 | SENSOR NETWORK INFORMATION COLLECTION VIA MOBILE GATEWAY - There is provided a sensor network information collection mechanism in which, after a UE has decided to become part of an information collecting operation for collecting information from a local sensor network, a signaling transmitted from a managing node of a local sensor network is received and processed. A communication network control element is informed about the willingness to become an information collector by sending a report message comprising measurement results derived from the signaling received from the managing node of the local sensor network. When receiving a gateway allocation message indicating that the UE is determined to be a gateway element to the local sensor network, the information collecting operation is started wherein sensor nodes of the local sensor network are woke up, and a traffic flow direction in the local sensor network is set in accordance with the managing node identity to which the UE is accessed. | 12-04-2014 |
20140362764 | SELECTING A PARTICULAR CODEC LIST FOR CODEC NEGOTIATION - A first user device may receive a call instruction associated with a second user device; select a particular codec list from multiple codec lists stored by the first user device based on selection rule and based on receiving the call instruction; provide the particular codec list as part of a call negotiation process; and provide, using a particular codec from the particular codec list, a data flow towards the second user device via a session between the first user device and the second user device. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362765 | Multipath TCP Subflow Establishment and Control - Techniques for electronic devices to control a multipath transmission control protocol (MPTCP) connection. An MPTCP connection between two endpoints may be established. The MPTCP connection may include at least one MPTCP subflow. At least one of the endpoints may be configured to act as a master with respect to the MPTCP connection. The master may perform one or more control operations on the MPTCP connection, while if one of the endpoints is not a master, that endpoint may not perform control operations on the MPTCP connection. The control operations may include initiating or establishing new MPTCP subflows or modifying a priority level of one or more MPTCP subflows of the MPTCP connection. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362766 | Interference Cancellation In Wireless OFDMA With MIMO Spatial Multiplexing - Various embodiments of techniques related to interference cancellation in wireless OFDMA with MIMO spatial multiplexing are provided. In one aspect, a method receives wireless communication downlink signals from a first base station and a second base station. The method cancels interference of wireless downlink communications between the first base station and the communication device by the second base station by calculating an equalizer solution that orthogonalizes the downlink signals from the first and the second base stations. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362767 | PASSIVE RADIO LINK CONTROL ENTITY WITH UNIFIED INTERFACE - The techniques introduced here provide a single, passive radio link control entity with a unified interface. The unified interface is configured to receive a request for a RLC service of a plurality of RLC services from upper and lower protocol layers. The unified interface is coupled with a processing module to process the request. The radio link control entity further includes a plurality of data transfer modules configured to provide data transfer between upper and lower protocol layers, the interface modules are coupled with the processing module and the unified interface. The single, passive radio link control entity provides bi-directional data transfer services for TM, UM, and AM data transmissions. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362768 | Non-Waking Push Notifications - In some implementations, a mobile device can be configured to monitor environmental, system and user events. The occurrence of one or more events can trigger adjustments to system settings. In some implementations, the mobile device can be configured to keep frequently invoked applications up to date based on a forecast of predicted invocations by the user. In some implementations, the mobile device can receive push notifications associated with applications that indicate that new content is available for the applications to download. The mobile device can launch the applications associated with the push notifications in the background and download the new content. In some implementations, before running an application or accessing a network interface, the mobile device can be configured to check energy and data budgets and environmental conditions of the mobile device to preserve a high quality user experience. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362769 | Network Signaling for Network-Assisted Interference Cancellation and Suppression - Embodiments of the invention are directed to a cellular communication network that can determine whether communications between one base station-UE pair may interfere with another UE that is in the same cell or a different cell. The network identifies interference parameters associated with interference signals that may be received by a UE. The interference signals may be generated by the base station itself, such as communications with other UEs, or by a neighboring base station. The base station transmits the interference parameters to the UE. The UE receives the one or more parameters comprising information about signals expected to cause intra-cell or inter-cell interference. The UE then processes received signals using the one or more parameters to suppress the intra-cell or inter-cell interference. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362770 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION OF RADIO NETWORK FUNCTIONALITY - A method implemented in a first peer entity communicating with a second peer entity using a predetermined protocol includes receiving a first packet from the second peer entity. The method further includes identifying an instruction field included within the first packet, the instruction field indicating a predetermined function to be performed by the first peer entity. The method further includes determining whether the predetermined function can be performed by the first entity. The method also includes transmitting a second packet to the second peer entity indicating whether the first entity performs the predetermined function. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362771 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING LOCAL AREA COMMUNICATION CONNECTION BY MEANS OF WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE - An apparatus and a method for controlling a connection to a local area wireless communication network on the basis of a communication environment by means of a wireless terminal device are provided. To this end, the wireless terminal device collects information regarding a neighboring base station that constitutes a public communication network by means of a cell search, and determines whether it is possible to connect to a local area communication network on the basis of the collected information regarding the neighboring base station. If it is determined to be possible to connect to a local area communication network, the wireless terminal device makes an attempt to connect to a pre-registered wireless connection device on the basis of the collected information regarding the neighboring base station. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362772 | Local Forwarding Method and System for User Plane Data, and Local Gateway - A local switching method for user plane data includes: after being triggered, a level 1 data node judging whether a direct tunnel can be established for a source user equipment and a target user equipment, and if so, establishing a direct tunnel between a source level 2 data node and a target level 2 data node for the source user equipment and the target user equipment; after receiving an IP data packet transmitted by the source user equipment to the target user equipment, the source level 2 data node forwarding the IP data packet to the target level 2 data node through the direct tunnel between the source level 2 data node and the target level 2 data node, so that the target level 2 data node forwards the IP data packet to the target user equipment. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362773 | LOCAL IP ACCESS SCHEME - Local IP access is provided in a wireless network to facilitate access to one or more local services. In some implementations, different IP interfaces are used for accessing different services (e.g., local services and operator network services). A list that maps packet destinations to IP interfaces may be employed to determine which IP interface is to be used for sending a given packet. In some implementations an access point provides a proxy function (e.g., a proxy ARP function) for an access terminal. In some implementations an access point provides an agent function (e.g., a DHCP function) for an access terminal. NAT operations may be performed at an access point to enable the access terminal to access local services. In some aspects, an access point may determine whether to send a packet from an access terminal via a protocol tunnel based on the destination of the packet. | 12-11-2014 |
20140369257 | TOLL PATH ROUTING PROTOCOL - Methods, systems, and devices are provided for selecting a wireless access point from a plurality of access points operated by a plurality of wireless service providers, where each access point may be enabled to concurrently compete for a user's access. A wireless device may transmit and/or broadcast a request for communication service to several network access points, which may be access points associated with licensed- and unlicensed-spectrum network service. A wireless device may receive offers for service in response to a service request and select one of the offers based on one or several factors, which may include the power cost or battery life required to connect to a network access point associated with an offer. In some cases, a non-agent based scheme may be employed in which a wireless device may communicate directly, and may negotiate service with one or more access points. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369258 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TRIGGER SERVICE - The present application is provided a system and a method of a trigger service, which is applied between an end equipment group and an application service terminal. The end equipment group includes a plurality of end equipment, and the end equipment of the mobile equipment group is configured to sequentially connect to mobile network. Each of the end equipment is configured to keep connection with mobile network in a waiting period and suspended to access mobile network after the waiting time period. The application service terminal is configured to transmit a trigger message to the end equipment group, and the trigger message is repeatedly transmitted in a transmission period of the message arrangement. During the transmission period, each of the end equipment of each end equipment group in mobile network is configured to execute the requested order of the trigger message when it receives the trigger message from the application service terminal. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369259 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN MOBILE CONTENT NETWORK - A method for receiving data in a User Equipment (UE) in a mobile content network is provided. The method includes transmitting a request message, which requests a content, to a first Digital Unit (DU), receiving an Internet Protocol (IP)_ADD message, including information of a second DU which caches the content, from the first DU, updating a Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) connection according to the information of the second DU included in the IP_ADD message, and receiving data from the second DU using the updated SCTP connection. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369260 | PARACHUTE ASSEMBLY FOR DEPLOYING A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - The present invention relates to the deployment of a plurality of wireless communication devices in order to provide a wireless mesh communications network. According to various embodiments, deployment of the communications devices is made by parachutes suitably adapted for the purpose. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369261 | Method, Server and User Equipment for Accessing an HTTP Server - Method for accessing a Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) server from a user equipment. The method comprises the steps of transmitting, by the user equipment, an HTTP message destined for that HTTP server to an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) server with which the user equipment is in a connection, determining, by the IMS server, on the basis of the HTTP message whether a trust relation exists between the IMS server and the HTTP server, and if a trust relation exists transmitting the HTTP message from the IMS server to the HTTP server. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369262 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION BASED ON DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME - A method for transmitting channel quality information based on a differential scheme is disclosed. When channel quality information of a predetermined number of sub-bands selected by a receiver in a frequency selective channel is transmitted, total average channel information is transmitted. Channel information of the selected sub-bands is transmitted as sub-band differential information associated with average channel information. In this case, the sub-band differential information may be denoted by a specific value contained in a differential-value range including only positive (+) values. If at least two channel quality information is transmitted by a MIMO system, channel quality information of one channel is transmitted, then channel quality information of the other channel is transmitted as spatial differential information. In this case, the spatial differential information is denoted by a specific value contained in a differential-value range asymmetrical on the basis of “0”. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369263 | DUAL INTERPRETATION OF A LENGTH FIELD OF A SIGNAL UNIT - A method includes receiving, at a wireless device, a frame via a sub-1 gigahertz (GHz) wireless network. The frame includes a signal (SIG) unit including a length field and an aggregation field. The length field may be interpreted as a number of bytes or as a number of symbols based on a value of the aggregation field and based on whether the frame is associated with a 1 megahertz (MHz) bandwidth mode, based on whether the frame includes either a short format preamble or a long format preamble, or based on whether the frame is determined to be a single user (SU) frame or a multi user (MU) frame. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369264 | SERVICE IMPLEMENTATION METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - A service implementation method, apparatus, and system are disclosed. The service implementation method includes: receiving, by a serving gateway, a data packet of a terminal device sent by a packet data network gateway; if the data packet is a data packet with a serving priority and the serving gateway has sent a paging trigger message with a serving priority to a mobility management element, skipping, by the serving gateway, sending a paging trigger message to the mobility management element; or if the data packet is a data packet with a serving priority and the serving gateway has sent no paging trigger message with a serving priority to a mobility management element, sending, by the serving gateway, a paging trigger message to the mobility management element; wherein the paging trigger message is used to enable the mobility management element to page the terminal device. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369265 | TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROCESSING DATA IN THE TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYSTEM - A transmitting/receiving system and a data processing method are provided. The receiving system includes a receiving unit, a first processing unit, and a second processing unit. The receiving unit receives a broadcast signal including mobile service data and an FIC segment from at least one slot. A transmission frame includes a plurality of sub-frames for receiving at least one ensemble and at least one mobile service, with a sub-frame comprising a plurality of slots. The first processing unit extracts FIC segments each having a different FIC chunk major protocol version from the broadcast signal and acquires a number of the corresponding FIC segment, a number of the last FIC segment, and FIC chunk major protocol version information from each segment header of the extracted FIC segments. The second processing unit obtains an FIC chunk including signaling information between at least one ensemble and at least one mobile service frame from respective payloads of the FIC segments based upon the acquired number of the corresponding FIC segment, number of the last FIC segment, and FIC chunk major protocol version information. | 12-18-2014 |
20140376451 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF ROUTING IP TELEPHONY DATA PACKET COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods for determining quality measures for communication paths that can be used to conduct telephony communications determine and record quality measures for each of a plurality of paths during different times of the day and different days of the week. This information is used to determine and record measures of how the quality of each path varies over predetermined periods of time. When it is necessary to select a path for the setup of a new telephony communication, information regarding the anticipated quality of different potential paths, and information regarding how that quality is expected to vary over the duration of the telephony communication are used to select a path for the telephony communication. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376452 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SHARING DIGITAL INFORMATION BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICES OF FRIENDS AND FAMILY USING EMBEDDED DEVICES - A method is provided for sharing digital information between first and second mobile devices. The method may include, at an embedded device, receiving the digital information from the first mobile device; at the embedded device, notifying the second mobile device of the digital information via a push notification; and at the embedded device, maintaining communication with the first and second mobile devices. In some embodiments, the method further includes, at the embedded device, receiving an embedded device wide area network (WAN) Internet protocol (IP) address. Maintaining communication with the first and second mobile devices may include notifying the first and second mobile devices of the new embedded device WAN IP address via respective additional push notifications, or using a DDNS server. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376453 | DYNAMIC SENSITIVITY CONTROL FOR WIRELESS DEVICES - A wireless communication device that includes an interface and a processor; wherein the interface is arranged to receive input signals; wherein the processor is arranged to: calculate an input signal's attribute; and determine an attribute of a collision avoidance scheme in response to the input signal's attribute. | 12-25-2014 |
20150009892 | Active Scattering for Bandwidth Enhanced MIMO - Embodiments of a communications system with multiple active scattering devices to service multiple users either indoor or outdoor over same spectrum in a communication network and a method for the system are generally described herein. Signals streams for transmission to users in spoke-and-hub configurations will utilize multiple active scattering devices. Three categories of operational concepts are presented: (1) multiple scattering devices arranged geometrically bundled together to function as active mirrors or retro-directive repeaters, (2) distributed man-made scattering devices placed to enhance channel bandwidth in between a hub and a common service area via frequency re-use, and (3) organizing distributed active scattering devices by remote beamforming for servicing a small common coverage area indoor or outdoor with enhanced bandwidth. All three techniques are for service with enhanced bandwidth and angular resolutions via frequency reuse, and extended service range via coherent operations of scattering devices. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009893 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND A METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION - A communication apparatus communicating with a wireless communication apparatus includes a control unit that controls communication; a wireless processing unit that converts a signal to be sent to a wireless signal; input and output units inputting or outputting the wireless signal between a transmission path and the corresponding input and output unit; and a first switch corresponding to input and output units and switch output destinations of the wireless signal from the wireless processing unit to any input and output unit, wherein the control unit detects the input and output unit and controls the first switch to switch over an output destination of the wireless signal to the input and output unit connected to the transmission path connected to the wireless communication apparatus, wherein the first switch switches over the output destination of the wireless signal to the input and output unit connected to the transmission path. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009894 | HIGH EFFICIENCY WLAN PREAMBLE STRUCTURE - Aspects of the present disclosure provide example preamble formats with repeated signal (SIG) fields that may help provide backwards compatibility and help address the effects of larger delay spreads in various wireless bands (e.g., WiFi bands). | 01-08-2015 |
20150009895 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING AND CANCELLING CROSS-SUBFRAME CO-CHANNEL INTERFERENCE - Embodiments of the disclosure provide methods and apparatuses for cancelling cross-subframe co-channel interference (CCI). The method comprising receiving a channel quality indicators (CQI) of a cross-subframe from user equipment (UE), wherein the cross-subframe is a downlink subframe that is interfered by an uplink subframe in a neighboring cell; determining if the UE should be scheduled during cross-subframes based on at least the CQI; scheduling the UE during the cross-subframes if the UE is determined to be scheduled. By means of measuring and reporting CQIs on cross-subframe at UEs, base stations may determine more accurately if interferences at the cross-subframes are severe enough and if resources should be scheduled at the cross-subframe. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009896 | SESSION TERMINATION IN A MOBILE PACKET CORE NETWORK - A gateway device of a mobile packet core network matches (S | 01-08-2015 |
20150009897 | Data Block Transmission with Variable Retransmission Feedback Time - Data Block Transmission with Variable Retransmission Feedback Time For communicating data between a transmitter ( | 01-08-2015 |
20150009898 | Configuration of Carrier-Related Reference Signal Transmission - There are provided measures for configuration of carrier-related reference signal transmission. Such measures exemplarily include setting of a transmission mode for reference signal transmission on a carrier out of at least a long-cycle discontinuous transmission mode and a short-cycle discontinuous transmission mode, said long-cycle discontinuous transmission mode having a longer transmission discontinuity period than the short-cycle discontinuous transmission mode, and configuration of a transmission of at least one reference signal on the carrier according to the set transmission mode. The transmission mode setting may for example be based on at least one of an activation state of the carrier as serving cell and/or secondary cell and/or measurement object cell and a period of radio resource management measurement on the carrier. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009899 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATION OF CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for communicating Channel State Information (CSI) feedback. In some aspects, the CSI feedback is communicated in a very high throughput (VHT) wireless communications system. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009900 | Enhanced E911 Location Information Using Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) - An E-9-1-1 voice-over-IP (VoIP) solution is provided wherein a 911 call from a wireless VoIP device is routed directly to the correct Public Safety Answer Point (PSAP) via dedicated trunks, together with correct location information and call-back number. VoIP gateways are implemented locally, at least one per LATA, and accept VoIP packetized data inbound, and convert it to standard wireline voice calls. Calls are routed to an IP address at the VoIP gateway, which then egresses the call to a voice port at a selective router. Dedicated voice trunks (CAMA, SS7, FG-D) are installed between each local VoIP gateway and appropriate selective routers. An Automatic Location Identification (ALI) database is provisioned with ESRKs dedicated for VoIP use. TCP/IP circuits may be established between some or all of the various local VoIP gateways. | 01-08-2015 |
20150016336 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VOIP COMMUNICATION COMPLETION TO A MOBILE DEVICE - Systems and methods for establishing an IP telephone call to a called party's telephony device include attempting to send a call setup request directly to the called party's telephony device, and requesting that a push notification be sent to the called party's telephony device. If the direct request does not reach the called party's telephony device, the push notification will result in the called party's telephony device contacting the IP telephony system to setup the requested call. In some embodiments, the request for a push notification is not sent until the direct request is determined to have failed. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016337 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING RADIO FRAMES AND APPARATUS USING THE METHOD - Disclosed are a method for configuring a radio frame, an apparatus for the same, a method for a mobile terminal to acquire synchronization with a base station, and a mobile terminal for the same. A method for configuring a radio frame, according to an example embodiment of the present invention, comprises generating a first synchronization signal and arranging the first synchronization signal in a slot for synchronization signal, generating a second synchronization signal and arranging the second synchronization signal in a predetermined position from the first synchronization signal, and constructing a radio frame including the first synchronization signal and the second synchronization signal. A plurality of secondary synchronization signals include difference sequences derived from a same sequence, and constitute hopping code with a predetermined hamming distance. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016338 | METHOD FOR HANDLING CORRUPTED SIGNALS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method is provided for combining corrupted messages received in a wireless network which comprises the following steps: (a) receiving a first message transmitted from one of a plurality of communication devices, wherein that first message is received as a corrupted message; (b) following the receipt of the first corrupted message, receiving a first plurality of messages, wherein the first plurality of messages are received as corrupted messages and wherein at least one of the first plurality of corrupted messages is essentially identical to the first message; (c) combining the first corrupted message with the at least one of the first plurality of corrupted messages that is essentially identical to that first message to form a combined message; and (d) deriving from the combined message information which was transmitted within the first message. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016339 | USER EQUIPMENT AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS, AND BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS - The present invention relates to a new type of carrier wave having a different configuration from existing carrier waves. The new type of carrier wave is detected by using at least one of a primary synchronization signal (PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS). When the new type of carrier wave is formed for detection by using only one of the PSS or the SSS, or by using both of the PSS and SSS, the new type of carrier wave includes PSS and SSS transmissions which are different from existing PSS and SSS transmissions. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016340 | Communication System, Gateway Control Apparatus, Path Control Apparatus, Communication Method and Program - A communication system includes a plurality of gateway apparatuses that connect a first network and a second network; a gateway control apparatus that selects at least one of the plurality of gateway apparatuses based on information related to location in the second network of a terminal that communicates with the first network via at least one of the plurality of gateway apparatuses; and path control means for controlling the first network so that a packet(s) having the terminal as a destination passes through the selected gateway apparatus(es). | 01-15-2015 |
20150016341 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF INDICATING STATION-SPECIFIC INFORMATION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of indicating station-specific information within a wireless communication. For example, a device may include a wireless communication unit to transmit a wireless communication frame to a plurality of stations using a respective plurality of beamforming configurations, wherein the wireless communication unit is to transmit to the stations beamforming configuration information including station-specific information corresponding to the plurality of beamforming configurations, respectively. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016342 | OPTIMIZING TRAFFIC BY CONTROLLING KEEP-ALIVES - A system, method and non-transitory computer code for operating a proxy server operating under software to cause the proxy server to access a communication network and to delay, advance or block keep-alives for a client device to improve traffic data flow. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016343 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING DATA STREAM - Disclosed are a method and a system for transmitting a data stream, aiming at increasing system capacity. The method includes: transmitting, by a first sending end, a coded first data stream to a first receiving end, and transmitting, by a second sending end, a coded second data stream to a second receiving end on time-frequency resources occupied by transmission of the first data stream by the first sending end; decoding, by the first receiving end, a first received signal received to obtain a first decoded result, and transmitting at least one decoded result in the first decoded result to the second receiving end; and decoding, by the second receiving end, a second received signal received, by using the at least one decoded result in the first decoded result to obtain a second decoded result. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016344 | Signal Transmission Method, Communications Equipment, and System - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a signal transmission method. A first correspondence is acquired between both a PSD of transmitted signals of the first communications equipment and a PSD of transmitted signals of a second communications equipment and a signal-to-noise ratio of received signals of the first communications equipment. A second correspondence is acquired between the signal-to-noise ratio of received signals of the first communications equipment and the number of bits for bearing signals. An optimization algorithm is used to calculate a PSD of transmitted signals of the first communications equipment and a PSD of transmitted signals of the second communications equipment. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016345 | PACKET ROUTING METHOD, PROXY SERVER AND APPARATUS - A method is described of using a mapping between a session initiation protocol (SIP)-Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), local IP address and a global IP address to identify a mobile host attached to a first subnet of a plurality of subnets included in a network domain, receiving a new local IP address of the mobile host upon the mobile host attaching to a second subnet of the plurality of subnets, replacing the local IP address with the new local IP address in the mapping, reformatting routing information of a SIP packet by replacing the global IP address in the routing information with the new local IP address, and communicating the reformatted packet to the mobile host. A proxy server and apparatus for use in this method are also disclosed. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016346 | Method for Obtaining Location Information for Emergency Services in Wireless Multimedia Networks - A method and apparatus for obtaining end-user location information for emergency services within a multimedia network is presented. The multimedia network may include a network implementing the Session Initiation Protocol, H.323, etc. In one embodiment, a Location Application Server (LAS) in the multimedia network and an interface between the LAS and a gateway mobile location center (GMC) is defined. | 01-15-2015 |
20150023247 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND AUTHENTICATION METHOD THEREOF - A wireless communication system and an authentication method thereof are provided. The wireless communication system includes a User Equipment (UE), an Evolved Node B (eNodeB), a Home Subscriber Server (HSS), and a Mobility Management Entity (MME). Before the UE enters an Attachment Procedure, the MME is configured to acquire an Authentication Vector from the HSS in advance, and transmit, based on the Authentication Vector, a first Authentication Vector corresponding to the UE to the UE and a second Authentication Vector corresponding to the eNodeB to the eNodeB in advance. The eNodeB is configured to transmit a UE identifier to the UE. The UE is configured to complete an Authentication procedure with the eNodeB according to the UE identifier and the Authentication Vector. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023248 | MULTI-USER MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MIMO) COMMUNICATION WITH DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEMS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A system and a method are provided. The method includes deploying a plurality of antennas of an access point or a base station as a distributed antenna system. The method further includes configuring the distributed antenna system for multi-user wireless transmissions by applying medium access techniques and power-balanced pre-coding at the access point or the base station. The method also includes providing device localization for devices communicating with the distributed antenna system by applying time-difference-of-arrival techniques to antenna pairs from among the plurality of antennas at the access point or the base station. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023249 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - A transmitting apparatus includes: a baseband packet generator configured to generate a baseband packet including a header and payload data corresponding to an input stream; a frame generator configured to generate a frame including the baseband packet; a signal processor configured to process the generated frame; and a transmitter configured to transmit the processed frame, wherein the header includes information about whether a number of null packets deleted when generating the baseband packet is more than a predetermined number, information about a number of packets within the baseband packet, and information about a number of the deleted null packets. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023250 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING AN INTERFACE AND COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A RELAY NODE AND A CORE NETWORK - The present invention provides a method for establishing an interface and communication between a relay node (RN) and a core network. The method may include: a base station sends an IP address of a control plane node of the core network to an RN; the RN initiates a process for establishing an interface with the control plane node corresponding to the IP address. Alternatively, the method may include: a base station sends an IP address and an identification of a control plane node of the core network to an RN; the base station sends an IP address and an identification of the RN to the control plane node of the core network; the RN and the node communicate with each other by using information of each other received from the base station. The method for establishing an interface and communication between an RN and a core network according to the present invention realizes transparent transmission of access layer signaling between a relay node and a core network via a base station, which reduces complexity of the process when the RN is in movements, makes it easier to support multiple access techniques, and reduces the complexity in network configurations. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023251 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING TO A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method and apparatus include a first server that communicates with a second server to cause a call back request to be communicated to an endpoint so that the endpoint can initiate a call back connection with the first server or a third server. Such a call back connection may occur near real time or in substantially real time so that updates can be supplied to an endpoint running an application supported by the server quickly and efficiently. The endpoint may register with the second server such that the second server is able to utilize notification messages for providing call back request information to the endpoint to advise the endpoint of a call back request. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023252 | METHOD TO USE EXISTING NAS SIGNALING CONNECTION FOR PENDING UPLINK SIGNALING/ DATA AFTER TAU ACCEPT - A method and system to use existing Non-access stratum (NAS) signaling connection for pending uplink signaling/data after Tracking Area Update Procedure (TAU) complete is disclosed. The proposed method handles the EPS Session Management (ESM), Short Message Service (SMS) or voice call or data when a User Equipment (UE) is waiting for TAU accept. The method allows UE to inform the network with specific Information Element (IE) in TAU complete message, so that the network will take the next action. This will help to provide quick services to the user. Using the “CONN REQ TYPE” IE, in TAU complete, to handle all abnormal Cases for Circuit Switches (CS) services/data services in E-UTRAN (Evolved UTRAN) network. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023253 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention achieves optimal CA in terms of both mobility and throughput. In a mobile communication system according to the present invention, a cell # | 01-22-2015 |
20150023254 | NETWORK DEVICE IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS TRAFFIC BREAKOUT - According to an exemplary embodiment of the invention a network device may be provided which may comprise a receiving unit, a sending unit and an evaluating unit. It may be foreseen that the receiving unit may be adapted to receive a trigger signal for preparing a breakout of a plurality of packets, wherein the plurality of packets may comprise at least one packet from a first source and at least one packet from a second source and wherein the evaluating unit may be adapted to evaluate the trigger signal. Moreover, the evaluation unit may be adapted to evaluate packets from a first source and packets from a second source and the evaluation unit may be adapted to distinguish packets from the first source from packets from the second source. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023255 | Ubiquitous Access to FEMTO-Connected Network - A system and method of enabling a mobile device to communicate with a local IP network host and an external IP network host using a femto cellular access point on a femto cellular access network. A local gateway is coupled to the femto cellular access network for receiving data packets transmitted on the femto cellular access network and for routing the data packets to one of a local IP network and an external IP network, based on a destination address associated with the data packets. The femto cellular access network includes an LTE network, an EVDO network connected to an EPC, or a WiMax 802.16e/m network connected to the EPC. | 01-22-2015 |
20150029933 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR TRAFFIC INDICATION MAPPING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments may implement a new hierarchical data structure for traffic indication mapping to facilitate transmissions for wireless communications devices. Many embodiments comprise MAC sublayer logic to generate and transmit management frames such as beacon frames with a partial virtual bitmap based upon the hierarchical data structure for traffic indication mapping. In some embodiments, the MAC sublayer logic may store the traffic indication map and/or the traffic indication map structure in memory, in logic, or in another manner that facilitates transmission of the frames. Some embodiments may receive, detect, and decode communications with frames comprising the partial virtual bitmap based upon the hierarchical data structure. In some embodiments, indications of buffered data for pages, blocks, sub-blocks, and/or stations may be inverted. In several embodiments, a new association identifier (AID) structure is defined for the new hierarchical data structure for traffic indication mapping. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029934 | STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREIN COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Access from a communication terminal apparatus is received, and identification information that enables identification of a position of a communication terminal apparatus from which the access has been received and transmission data are acquired from the communication terminal apparatus, and are stored in a storage unit. Then, if access has been received from a communication terminal apparatus next and thereafter, the transmission data stored in the storage unit is transmitted to the communication terminal apparatus on the basis of identification information that enables identification of a position of the communication terminal apparatus. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029935 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR HOME AGENT DISCOVERY IN MOBILE IP USING LINK STATE ADVERTISEMENTS - In one embodiment, an apparatus receives an advertisement from each of one or more Home Agents, the advertisement including a first set of information associated with a corresponding one of the Home Agents, each advertisement being in a first protocol. The apparatus obtains the first set of information associated with a corresponding one of the Home Agents from each advertisement. The apparatus composes a router advertisement including a second set of information associated with at least one of the Home Agents, the router advertisement being in a second protocol. The apparatus then sends the router advertisement. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029936 | ENABLING DIRECT TRANSPORT LAYER CONNECTIVITY - A technology for a user equipment (UE) that is operable to establish direct transport layer connectivity with a selected UE. An internet protocol (IP) address of the UE can be sent to a Proximity Services (ProSe) server. A user application identification (ID) and ProSe server ID of the selected UE can be requested from an application server. A user application ID and ProSe server ID can be received from the application server. A facilitation message can be sent to the ProSe server in communication with the UE, wherein the facilitation message includes a request to facilitate direct transport layer connectivity between the UE and the selected UE for a selected application. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029937 | COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication management system manages session information regarding a contents data session being established to communicate contents data among a plurality of participating communication terminals, and receives a request for registering a group of the plurality of participating communication terminals that are currently participating in the session, from a first participating communication terminal of the plurality of participating communication terminals, during when the session is being established. In response to the request for registering, the communication management system stores first candidate information of the first participating communication terminal in a first memory, the first candidate information associating the group of the plurality of participating communication terminals with the first participating communication terminal. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029938 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PUSH-TO-TALK VOICE COMMUNICATION OVER VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORKS - Push to talk (PTT) devices that communicate packet-based voice communications are disclosed. An example PTT device receives voice packets via a packet-based communication network from another PTT device. Voice information in the received voice packets are used to reconstruct the voice communication. The receiving PTT device is able to identify an occurrence of at least one delayed, corrupted or lost voice packet, and then communicate a packet re-transmit request to the other PTT device requesting a replacement voice packet that has a portion of the voice communication that is identical to the voice communication portion of the delayed, corrupted or lost voice packet. The voice communication may then be repaired based on the received replacement voice packet. While the voice communication is being repaired, a comfort tone may be generated so that the listener of the PTT device understands that the voice communication is being repaired. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029939 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station apparatus includes a first identification information acquisition unit for acquiring first identification information for identifying a terminal, the terminal being under management of the base station apparatus, a second identification information generation unit for generating second identification information associated with the first identification information acquired by the first identification information acquisition unit, and a terminal identification information notification unit for notifying an external device of the second identification information generated by the second identification information unit as information for identifying the terminal. An external apparatus is notified of identification information generated based on highly confidential first identification information within a base station, so that personalization can be feasible between a terminal and the external apparatus. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029940 | Optimization of Mobile Data Communication Using Byte Caching - Method and system are provided for optimization of mobile data communication using byte caching. The method includes: intercepting data communications at a base station, wherein the data communications are between a user equipment and a network; and implementing byte caching at the base station to optimize data transfer between the base station and a byte cache server in the network at a peering point; wherein the network containing the base station supports mobility management of data transfer to and from the user equipment. The method includes providing a byte cache server as a transparent proxy with byte caching functionality where traffic for the user equipment is no longer tunnelled. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029941 | Public Services Access Point (PSAP) Designation of Preferred Emergency Call Routing Method Via Internet or Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) - The use of the VoIP emergency network for routing wireless E911 calls to a designated PSAP. In this embodiment, a mobile positioning center (MPC) assigns an ESRK per existing prior art, but uses the invention to route the call to the PSAP via the VoIP server and an ESGW. This relieves wireless carriers of the obligation to install and maintain expensive dedicated SS7 or CAMA trunks from each MSC to each selective router in the areas served by that MSC. Instead, wireless 911 calls can be consolidated by ESGW vendors, maximizing the efficiency of the dedicated trunks to the selective router by sharing those trunks with multiple MSCs. | 01-29-2015 |
20150043424 | WIRED ETHERNET ADAPTOR FOR PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A cover is provided for a portable electronic device having a device wireless antenna. The cover includes a housing configured to accommodate the portable electronic device, as well as a cover wireless antenna located within the housing. The cover also includes a shield surrounding the cover wireless antenna, and configured to surround the device wireless antenna when the portable electronic device is placed in the cover. In addition, the cover includes wireless access point (WAP) electronics in communication with the cover wireless antenna, as well as a wired Ethernet connector in communication with the WAP electronics. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043425 | LIGHTING ELEMENT-CENTRIC NETWORK OF NETWORKS - A lighting system utilizes intelligent system elements, such as lighting devices, user interfaces for lighting control or the like and possibly sensors. The system also has a data communication network. Some number of the intelligent lighting system elements, including at least two of the lighting devices, also support wireless communication with other non-lighting-system devices at the premises. Each such element has a communication interface system configured to provide a relatively short range, low power wireless data communication link for use by other non-lighting-system devices at the premises in proximity to the respective intelligent system element. Also, in such an element, the processor is configured to control communications via the communication interface system so as to provide access to the data network and through the data network to the wide area network outside the premises for non-lighting related communications of the other non-lighting-system devices. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043426 | LIGHTING ELEMENT-CENTRIC NETWORK OF NETWORKS - A method for sending and receiving data via a relatively short range, low power wireless data communication link between lighting devices and other non-lighting-system devices. The method includes routing the data over a data network at a premises for which the lighting devices provide illumination. The data may be routed over the data network to a wide area network outside the premises for non-lighting related communications. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043427 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTION IN A BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A Bluetooth communication system is provided wherein a remote, or destination, wireless communication device provides its Bluetooth profile information, including all of the necessary Service Discovery Protocol (SDP) information required to initiate a profile connection, to a source wireless communication device in an Extended Inquiry Response (EIR) message as part of Device discovery or Inquiry procedure. In response, the source wireless communication device will establish an ACL connection with the remote wireless communication device and provide its own EIR message containing the necessary SDP information of the source wireless communication device over ACL connection as an ACL data packet. The manufacturer data field of the EIR messages will include the SDP information of the respective devices. Thus the Bluetooth communication system preserves the overhead that would be expended in establishing a Layer Logical Link Control and Adaption Protocol layer (L | 02-12-2015 |
20150043428 | METHOD FOR MANAGING A PROXY TABLE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING PROXY DEVICES - The invention relates to a proxy node comprising means for managing a proxy table, a receiver for receiving a message from a first resource restricted device, said message being intended to at least one corresponding destination device, control means for checking whether an entry for the first resource restricted device is included in the set of entries of the proxy table, the set of entries of the proxy table indicating the set of resource-restricted devices the proxy node is in charge of, a transmitter for forwarding the message depending on the result of the proxy table checking, the means for managing the proxy table being arranged for cleaning the proxy table of the entry relative to the resource-restricted device by monitoring the relative usage of the proxy node for forwarding messages for the resource restricted device with the usage of competitor proxy nodes for forwarding messages for the resource restricted device. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043429 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PERFORMING PROXIMITY SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more particularly, to a method and apparatus for performing a proximity service in a wireless communication system. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for allowing a first Internet protocol multimedia subsystem (IMS) terminal to perform a proximity service (ProSe) in a wireless communication system can comprise the steps of: allowing the first IMS terminal to transmit a first session initiation protocol (SIP) message containing ProSe communication request information to a second IMS terminal through a network node; and receiving a second SIP message containing ProSe communication response information from the second IMS terminal through the network node. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043430 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY - There is provided a method of ensuring that an identifier for a subscriber of an IP Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) is available to a third-party service provider that can provide a service to the subscriber. The method comprises, at an application server of the third-party service provider, receiving a service request message from the subscriber, the service request message requesting access to the service, obtaining a source IP address and source port number from the service request message, generating an identity request message including the source IP address and source port number, the identity request message requesting a subscriber identifier associated with the source IP address and source port number, sending the identity request message to a node of the IP-CAN, and receiving an identity response message from the node of the IP-CAN, the response including a subscriber identifier that the IP-CAN associates with the subscriber. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043431 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING TRAFFIC INDICATION INFORMATION - Provided are a method and a device for sending traffic indication information. In the method, an AP sends a radio frame to multiple STAs associated with the AP, wherein the radio frame carries an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate whether the radio frame carries traffic indication virtual bitmap information. According to the technical solution provided, in the case where the AP has no unicast cache data for any station, multiple STAs associated with the AP can know whether the AP has their respective unicast cache data to be sent. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043432 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORK FUNCTION - The present invention provides a method, a device, and a system for selecting a self-organizing network (SON) function. The method comprises: an SON function selecting entity receives SON capability information of an SON functional entity, the SON capability information of the SON functional entity comprising: an SON capability supported by the SON functional entity and an activated state of the SON capability supported by the SON functional entity; the SON function selecting entity acquires an SON function selecting policy; the SON function selecting entity performs SON function selection according to the SON capability information of the SON functional entity and the SON function selecting policy. The technical solutions provided by the present invention are applicable to the field of communications, and solve the problem in the prior art that during the operation of SON function coordination, execution conflicts occur among functional instances. | 02-12-2015 |
20150049666 | MULTI-CARRIER BASE STATION RECEIVER - Embodiments of the present invention may provide a receiver. The receiver may include an RF section and a quadrature mixture, coupled to the RF section, to downconvert a first group of wireless signals directly to baseband frequency quadrature signals and to downconvert a second group of wireless signals to intermediate frequency quadrature signals. The receiver may also include a pair of analog-to-digital converters (ADCs) to convert the downconverted quadrature signals to corresponding digital quadrature signals. Further, the receiver may include a digital section having two paths to perform signal processing on the digital baseband frequency quadrature signals and to downconvert the digital intermediate frequency signals to baseband cancelling a third order harmonic distortion therein. The receiver may be provided on a monolithically integrated circuit. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049667 | USER EQUIPMENT AND DATA DESTINATION DETERMINING METHOD - User equipment includes a first communication entity that supports a transport layer protocol and a network layer protocol, and that transmits data a transmission source address of which is set to be a certain network layer address, to a network; and a second communication entity that supports the transport layer protocol and the network layer protocol, and that by commonly using the certain network layer address, is able to transmit the data the transmission source address of which is set to be the certain network layer address, to the network, wherein the second communication entity includes a storage device that stores a port number not being overlapping a port number which is used in the first communication entity, and a control device that performs determining processing which, when the received data does not include the port number, determines that the destination of the received data is the first communication entity. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049668 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING DOMAIN SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to an embodiment, a network access method of a user equipment (UE) in a communication system comprises the steps of: receiving information including an access order from a configuration server; storing the received information; and transmitting an access request to the network according to an access method determined on the basis of the stored information. According to another embodiment, a UE for accessing a wireless communication system comprises: a transceiving unit which receives information including an access order from a configuration server; and a control unit for storing the received information and controlling the transceiving unit to transmit an access request to the network according to an access method determined on the basis of the stored information. According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, when a UE for supporting a PS network and a CS network accesses a network, the UE receives a configuration of each domain registration method in advance, and thus can more easily access each network. In addition, according to another embodiment of the present disclosure, message transmission can be more easily achieved between a system in which a long SMS message can be transmitted and a system in which a SMS message of conventional-length is transmitted. Furthermore, according to another embodiment of the present disclosure, when a UE, which has performed a CS fallback, returns to a 4G network due to the end of a CS service, the UE can be prevented from returning to another provider network since the UE has existing return information. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049669 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGEMENT OF THE MOBILITY OF A MOBILE NETWORK - A system and a method is provided for managing the mobility of a mobile network in a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol (PMIP) environment operating under the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) protocol. The method is based on prefix allotment between a server DHCPv6 and a mobile router via an access gateway (MAG) and the exchanging of messages between the server and a point of attachment (LMA). | 02-19-2015 |
20150049670 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A NETWORK AND A NETWORK - For allowing a very efficient service marking a method for operating a network, especially a mobile network, is claimed, wherein an ADC, which is co-located in a PCEF or separate in a TDF, detects data flows for reporting data flow-specific information to a control-plane node according to service-specific information received from said control-plane node. The method is characterized in that said service-specific information is provided to the ADC on a service context basis, and the ADC reports the data flow-specific information in the form of a service detection result to the control-plane node according to the service-specific information on a service context basis after having detected a new data flow and checked or identified to what service the new data flow belongs. Further, an according network is claimed, preferably for carrying out the above mentioned method. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049671 | ASSOCIATION LIMIT IN RELAY NETWORK - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. In aspect, a first apparatus receives from a second apparatus information related to an ability of the second apparatus to associate with other apparatuses, and limits associations at the first apparatus based on the information. In another aspect, the first apparatus associates with a second apparatus, and transmits to the second apparatus information that indicates a number of desirable associations at the second apparatus. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049672 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING OR ESCAPING CELL RANGE EXPANSION (CRE) IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Certain aspects relate to methods and apparatus for avoiding and/or escaping cell range expansion (CRE) in a heterogeneous network (HetNet). A user equipment (UE) may detect the occurrence of one or more conditions while the UE is in a region of cell range expansion (CRE) in which the UE may be handed over from a first cell of a first power class type to a second cell of a second power class type, the second power class type being lower than the first power class type. The UE may take action to stop being served by the second cell or avoid being handed over to the second cell in response to the detection. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049673 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS THAT COMMUNICATES WITH INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus communication apparatus capable of performing communication by quickly determining a suitable communication path from among a plurality of communication paths. A digital camera searches for a predetermined device connected to the same network, and transmits content data to the predetermined device found by the search. The digital camera is controlled according to one of a plurality of modes including a first control mode in which when a first time period elapses without the predetermined device being found, after starting the search, the search is stopped, and a second control mode in which, when a second time period elapses without the predetermined device being found, after starting the search, the search is stopped, and the content data is transmitted to a cloud server. The second time period is shorter than the first time period. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049674 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed for device to device discovery in a wireless communication system. The method includes a UE (User Equipment) receiving information included in a system information message broadcasted by a cell. The method also includes the UE finds, based on the information, a neighboring cell which provides resources for D2D discovery. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049675 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PACKET DATA UNIT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses are provided for transmitting and receiving a Packet Data Unit (PDU) in a mobile communication system. The PDU, including a header and at least one data field, is generated. The PDU is transmitted. The header includes a length indicator (LI) field and an extension bit field. The LI field indicates a length of a corresponding data field. The extension bit field indicates whether a data field follows or a set of an extension bit field and an LI field follows. The extension bit field is placed prior to the LI field in the set of the extension bit field and the LI field. An LI field is present for every data field except a last data field. | 02-19-2015 |
20150055550 | EXCHANGING RICH COMMUNICATION SUITE CAPABILITY INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, a client device associated with a first user performing a registration procedure with an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network to register the client device to a first user for IMS service. The client device communicates (e.g., via GRUUs) with one or more other client devices that are also registered to the first user for the IMS service to obtain rich communication suite (RCS) capability information for the one or more other client devices. The client device receives a request (e.g., a SIP OPTIONS message) to report the client device's RCS capability information, and then transmits, in response to the received request, a message (e.g., a SIP 200 OK message) that indicates both (i) the client device's RCS capability information and (ii) the RCS capability information for the one or more other client devices. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055551 | MOBILE WIRELESS ACCESS POINT NOTIFICATION DELIVERY FOR PERIODICALLY DISCONNECTED MOBILE DEVICES - A mobile wireless access point includes at least one processor, memory and a cellular radio disposed within a housing, as well as a wireless router configured to generate and maintain a wireless hotspot within a geographic distance of the housing and to route data from the wireless hotspot to the Internet over the broadband data connection. Finally, the mobile wireless access point includes a mobile wireless access point notification delivery module executing in the memory of the housing and programmed to respond to a determination that a mobile device formerly connected to the wireless hotspot no longer is connected to the wireless hotspot by queuing in the memory messages received from over the broadband connection that are directed to the mobile device, and by subsequently delivering the queued messages to the mobile device in response to a determination that the mobile device has reconnected to the wireless hotspot. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055552 | CONFIGURABLE RF CARRIER PHASE NOISE SHAPING - A method and system is includes configurable carrier phase noise shaping. A fractional phase locked loop (PLL) uses a bank of delta-sigma modulators (DSM) to generate fractional ratios of the reference signal frequency. The bank of delta-sigma modulators provides for dynamic adjustments in the fractional PLL based phase noise performance of the communications network. The bank of DSMs is designed such that they have different and conflicting phase noise profiles. The communication network parameters are monitored and utilized for selecting a specific DSM from the bank of DSMs which most closely resembles a desired communications network phase noise profile. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055553 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SETUP METHOD THEREFOR - A wireless communication system includes: a smart device, supporting at least a first wireless communication connection and a second wireless communication connection; a wireless network connecting device, supporting at least the second wireless communication connection; and a controlled device, supporting at least the first wireless communication connection and the second wireless communication connection. The controlled device has input keys whose number is less than a threshold value. After the smart device and the controlled device are paired via the first wireless communication connection, the smart device sends a connection setup related information to the controlled device via the first wireless communication connection. The controlled device is connected to the wireless network connecting device and the second wireless communication connection based on the connection setup related information. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055554 | Providing an IMS Voice Session via a Packet Switch Network and an Emergency Voice Session via a Circuit Switch Network - A method of providing an availability of an execution of an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem voice session via a packet switched capable radio access network of an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem based communication network ( | 02-26-2015 |
20150055555 | METHOD FOR ESTIMATING CHANNEL STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More specifically, the present invention relates to a method for reporting a channel state by a terminal to a serving base station in a wireless communication system, wherein extra channel state information is reported to enable the serving base station to estimate the channel state more accurately. When the base station estimates the channel state with the terminal, the channel state information received from the terminal, the extra channel state information, and traffic information of neighboring base stations are collectively considered to estimate the channel state with the terminal, thereby enabling estimation of the channel state with improved reliability and accuracy. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055556 | RADIO BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - A system and method for CA and “TTI bundling” together in an efficient manner is disclosed. A radio base station (eNB# | 02-26-2015 |
20150055557 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MACHINE-TO-MACHINE CACHING AT A SERVICE CAPABILITY LAYER - A method and apparatus for supporting machine-to-machine (M2M) caching at a service capability layer are disclosed. A service capability layer of an M2M entity provides functions that are shared by the M2M applications and expose functionalities to the M2M applications through a set of open interfaces. The service capability layer may be configured to cache resources in a resource structure of the service capability layer. The service capability layer caching can provide complete cached resource discovery, and provide more intelligent and robust security mechanism to authenticate the clients, and subscription to the cached resource becomes flexible and feasible. M2M service may be virtualized in a cloud. An M2M cache manager may maintain a record of resources cached in a plurality of M2M servers and coordinate the M2M servers in caching the resources. The M2M cache manager may provide mapping between a virtualized cached resource and a real cached resource. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055558 | Adaptable Network Service Access through Dynamic Request Routing - In an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network in which multiple subscriber data servers are deployed with partitioned subscription data for users, a subscriber location function (SLF) is used to proxy queries to a subscriber data server (such as an HSS) in which subscription data for a user can be found. The SLF receives a query for the subscriber data server, looks up the address of appropriate subscriber data server and proxies the query to the appropriate subscriber data server. Preferably, the SLF is co-located with a subscriber data server. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055559 | Ubiquitous Access to FEMTO-Connected Network - A system and method of enabling a mobile device to communicate with a local IP network host and an external IP network host using a femto cellular access point on a femto cellular access network. A local gateway is coupled to the femto cellular access network for receiving data packets transmitted on the femto cellular access network and for routing the data packets to one of a local IP network and an external IP network, based on a destination address associated with the data packets. The femto cellular access network includes an LTE network, an EVDO network connected to an EPC, or a WiMax 802.16e/m network connected to the EPC. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055560 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING NETWORK REGISTRATION - A method and apparatus for user location registration comprising determining, by a first network service provided by a first network, subscriber location information associated with a first user communication device registered with the first network, wherein the subscriber location information includes a network identifier of the first device, and wherein the network identifier is not obtained via session initiation protocol (SIP) messaging received from the first device; receiving, by the first network service, a broadcast location request for the subscriber location information in response to a call initiated from a second user communication device wherein receiving the broadcast location request further includes determining subscriber identity information from the broadcast location request, and determining that the subscriber identity information is associated with the subscriber location information; and sending, by the first network service, the determined subscriber location information in response to the broadcast location request. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055561 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SERVICES ACROSS SERVICE DOMAINS - The present invention supports services that span multiple service domains. In one embodiment, the present invention provides service-level interaction between an enterprise network and a non-enterprise network (or networks), thereby enabling enterprise users at remote locations (i.e., at home, on vacation, or at other locations remote from the enterprise location) to use services typically only available to the enterprise users while at the enterprise location (e.g., while in the office). The present invention provides a calendar notification service, whereby a calendar notification originating in an enterprise network is provided to a remote enterprise user via a non-enterprise network. The present invention provides an enterprise dialing plan service, whereby a remote enterprise user may register a remote user device to be able to use an enterprise dialing plan. Once registered, the remote enterprise user may use the enterprise dialing plan from the remote user device to place calls to local enterprise users at local user devices connected to the enterprise network and, similarly, local enterprise users may use the enterprise dialing plan to place calls to the remote enterprise user at the remote user device. | 02-26-2015 |
20150063204 | AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND NETWORK CONNECTION METHOD - A network connection method is provided. Firstly, plural communication address data and plural connecting port data are automatically transmitted from plural devices of an area network group to a connection module according to the UPnP protocol and the DLNA protocol. A communication address look-up table is created by the connection module of the passive electronic device according to the communication address data and the plural connecting port data. In addition, the communication address look-up table is transmitted to a network router of the area network group. Consequently, a controlling device can be connected to a passive electronic device of the area network group. Consequently, it is not necessary to input the communication address data and the connecting port data through manual settings. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063205 | MOBILE STATION AND METHOD FOR ANONYMOUS MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL ADDRESSING - Embodiments including methods and apparatuses for secure wireless communication through use of one or more temporary MAC addresses to identify a mobile station in a WiFi environment are generally described herein. For example, a method is presented for secure wireless communication, which includes generating a temporary media access control (MAC) address in one or more mobile stations, establishing a lifetime period of the temporary MAC address, optionally transmitting the temporary MAC address for service querying or association with an access point, determining that the lifetime period has expired, and replacing the temporary MAC address with a newly generated temporary MAC address upon determining that the lifetime period has expired. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063206 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCAL AREA NETWORK IMPLEMENTATION - Various methods are described for implementing secondary networks for cooperative communications with a primary network. One example method may include providing for connection to a primary network. The method of this example embodiment may further include receiving configuration information comprising one or more criteria for connecting to a secondary network. Furthermore, the method of this example embodiment may include providing for connection to the secondary network based at least in part on the one or more criteria. The method of this example embodiment may further include causing communication of data with a network entity in the primary network in cooperation with one or more devices connected to the secondary network. Similar and related example methods, example apparatuses, and example computer program products are also provided. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063207 | RECEPTION DEVICE, POST-DECODING LIKELIHOOD CALCULATION DEVICE, AND RECEPTION METHOD - A reception device that can transmit, at a good error rate, information on which error correction has been performed by a block code is provided. The reception device includes a demodulating unit that generates a demodulation result of each coded bit for the signal received from the transmission device, a decoding unit that calculates a post-decoding likelihood of the block code based on the demodulation result, a symbol replica generating unit that generates a symbol replica based on the post-decoding likelihood, and a cancelling unit that cancels interference from the received signal by using the symbol replica. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063208 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SERVICE IDENTIFICATION IN NEIGHBORHOOD AWARE NETWORKS - Systems and methods in accordance with various embodiments provide for robust service IDs for utilization in wireless devices in neighbor aware networks. In certain embodiments, a service ID is generated as a hash value from a diversified input string. One aspect of the subject matter described in the disclosure provides a method of transmitting service information in a wireless neighborhood aware network. The method includes generating, via a wireless device, a message including a hash value of a data string, the data string including both a name of a service and information identifying a type of the message. The message further includes a matching filter field including matching filter information that characterizes the service named in the data string. The method further includes transmitting the message. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063209 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVED UTILIZATION OF A WIRELESS MEDIUM - Systems, methods, and devices for wireless communication are provided. In an embodiment, a method of wireless communication includes receiving, at an access point, a probe request, generating a probe response to conditionally include neighbor report information based on the probe request; and transmitting the probe response to a wireless device. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063210 | SPEED FRAME EXCHANGE RULES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus that may determine operation for speed frame exchange. According to certain aspects, a method for wireless communications by an apparatus is provided. The operations may be performed by a station, for example, by an access point initiating a speed frame exchange. The method generally includes indicating, via a value of at least one bit of a field of a frame of a sequence of frames being exchanged between the apparatus and a device, whether the apparatus is initiating a subsequent exchange of a sequence of frames, and transmitting the frame to the device. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063211 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING NESTED NETWORK CORDING IN MULTIPATH PROTOCOL - A method of communicating with a User Equipment (UE) through a multipath transmission control protocol is provided. The method includes receiving information, by a first node, on a packet requested by the UE and information on a buffer state of the UE from the UE, exchanging, by the first node, information on a packet to be transmitted/received to/from each of one or more second nodes, determining, by the first node, a combination of packets which maximizes a coding gain and throughput of the UE and a transmission sequence by using the exchanged information on the packet, and transmitting, by the first node, packets to the UE according to the determined combination of the packets and the transmission sequence. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063212 | OPTIMIZING KEEPALIVE AND OTHER BACKGROUND TRAFFIC IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods for optimizing keepalives or other non-interactive or background traffic from applications on a mobile device are disclosed. A keepalive optimizer can detect keepalive and other background traffic and optimize such traffic by blocking keepalives, advancing or delaying execution of keepalives, delaying repeatable background requests based on radio state, device state or characteristics, policy, transaction characteristics, application characteristics, and/or the like. The disclosed keepalive optimization methods facilitate management of traffic and/or conservation of resources on the mobile device and the network. The keepalive optimization can be performed by an application sending the keepalives or by a local proxy on the mobile device. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063213 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS AND APPARATUS USING BEACON SIGNALS - Methods and apparatus supporting peer to peer communications are discussed. A base station, serving as an access node for wireless terminals also communicates information supporting peer to peer communications. A base station transmits a beacon signal conveying information about a peer to peer frequency band and also receives user data from a plurality of wireless terminals, using the base station as a current point of network attachment. In some embodiments, the beacon signal is transmitted into the same frequency band being used for access node based communications and identifies a different frequency band which is to be used as a peer to peer frequency band. Alternatively, or in addition, in support of peer to peer communications, a beacon signal transmission apparatus, a free standing device which doesn't transmit user data, transmits a sequence of beacon signal bursts, each beacon signal burst including at least one high power beacon symbol. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063214 | Heterogeneous Mesh Network and a Multi-RAT Node Used Therein - This invention discloses a heterogeneous mesh network comprised of multiple radio access technology nodes, wherein nodes can function dynamically, switching roles between client and server. Moreover, these nodes can operate in a heterogeneous fashion with respect to one another. In an alternate embodiment, the invention describes a mesh network comprised of nodes operating over TV white-space. This invention additionally discloses self-organizing network embodiments and embodiments that include novel methods of monitoring operational parameters within a mesh network, adjusting those operational parameters, and creating and implementing routing tables. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063215 | DATA COLLECTION DEVICE HAVING DYNAMIC ACCESS TO MULTIPLE WIRELESS NETWORKS - There is set forth herein a method of providing network connectivity. The method can include introducing a new communication device within a communication range of a portable data collection device, the new communication device comprising a dynamic access module enabling the new communication device to receive data packets from the portable data collection device and route payload data of the data packets to an access point. In one aspect the new communication device can receive data packets from the portable data collection device and route payload data of the data packets to the access point if the new communication device determines that it is in range of both of said access point and the portable data collection device. There is set forth herein a system having a dynamic access module. | 03-05-2015 |
20150071165 | SCALABLE WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE - Functionality relating to control and data plane functions in a telecommunications network may be separated. In one implementation, a telecommunications network may include a radio access network to provide a radio interface to mobile devices that connect to the telecommunications network. A first set of devices may implement functionality corresponding to control plane operations by the telecommunications network, the control plane operations including operations relating to establishing communication sessions in the telecommunications network. A second set of devices may implement functionality corresponding to data plane operations by the telecommunications network, the data plane operations including operations relating to transmitting user data over the established communication sessions. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071166 | NETWORK SELECTION SUPPORT FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - In an LTE network, an MME processes network status information to transfer aggregated data to an ANDSF. The ANDSF processes a request from a wireless communication device that indicates device location and the aggregated data to generate an information response indicating a priority between the LTE network and a non-LTE network at the device location. The ANDSF transfers the information response for delivery to the wireless communication device. The wireless communication device processes the information response to select between the LTE network and a non-LTE network at the device location. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071167 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETUP OF A CIRCUIT SWITCHED CALL DURING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK - A method, at a user equipment (‘UE’), the method: sending a request to a first network for Circuit Switched Fallback (‘CSFB’); receiving, responsive to the request, redirection information; acquiring a second network based on the redirection information; initiating establishment of Circuit Switched (‘CS’) voice radio bearers with the second network; waiting for a predetermined event to occur; after the predetermined event has occurred, establishing a Packet Switched (‘PS’) connection with the second network. Further, a method, at a network element, the method receiving a request for Circuit Switched Fallback (‘CSFB’) from a user equipment (‘UE’); sending, to the UE, redirection information; receiving a Routing Area Update (‘RAU’) message from the UE; waiting for a predetermined event to occur; upon the predetermined event occurring, responding to the RAU message. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071168 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING THE EFFICIENCY OF PACKET TRANSMISSION IN A MULTI-USER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system utilized in a wireless communication system transmitting and receiving a multi-user packet is disclosed. The communication system includes a transmitter and a plurality of users in communication therewith. The method and system comprise determining a lowest coding scheme for transmitting the packet; and deriving a coding rate for the efficient transmission of the packet from a standard coding rate by de-puncturing bits in the packet. A system and method in accordance with the present invention provides for an efficient utilization of packet length, and improves the reliability by improving SNR, by lowering the MCS, un-puncturing, and/or repetition. More efficient packed data rates are also provided and both Tx and Rx compute parameters independently. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071169 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING DATA - The invention embodiments disclose a method, system and device for transmitting data, relate to wireless communication technical art, and resolve the question that terminal how to transmit data when packet data network (PDN) connection is not be established. In the invention, when the terminal needs to transmit data and the PDN connection for transmitting the data is not be established, the terminal sends data transmitting message which carries a PDN connection request message and package to be transmitted to mobility management entity (MME). The PDN connection is only established by core network side when the MME receives the data transmitting message, and the package to be transmitted is sent out by the PDN connection. Therefore, the invention enables UE to transmit data when PDN connection is not be established. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071170 | System and Method for Virtual User-Specific Service Gateways - A method embodiment includes receiving, by a virtual user-specific service gateway (v-u-SGW) on a processor, a packet, processing the packet, and forwarding the packet to a user equipment (UE). The v-u-SGW is created in accordance with registration of the UE in a network. The method further includes processing the packet in accordance with a configuration of the UE and/or a configuration of the network. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071171 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DEVICE AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION PATH CONTROL - A communication device performs communication over a communication path configured in a network, includes: a communication path identification section that can identify a communication path to which a received packet belongs; and a switching section that can forward the received packet to a network node associated with the communication path to which the received packet belongs, among multiple network nodes that can terminate the communication path. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071172 | Intelligent Load Balancer Enhanced Routing - Enhanced intelligent routing logic for routing and load balancing a SET-initiated SUPL session request based on SET capabilities (e.g. SET-supported positioning protocols) and a roaming status identified for a requesting SET. When a SET capabilities parameter in a SUPL START message initiated by a requesting SET indicates that the SET supports a LTE positioning protocol (LPP), only, enhanced intelligent routing logic routes the SUPL session request to newly configured SUPL servers that support the LTE positioning protocol (LPP), only. Alternatively, when SET capabilities indicate that a requesting SET supports a radio resource location services protocol (RRLP), in addition to or in exclusion of a LPP, the intelligent router routes the session request message to SUPL servers that support the RRLP, in addition to or in exclusion of the LPP. Intelligent routing logic may also be enhanced to support SUPL intelligent off load (SI-OL) based on SET capabilities. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071173 | DATA SERVICES USING LOCATION PATTERNS AND INTELLIGENT CACHING - Pre-caching may decrease the response time necessary for a wireless communication network to fulfill a user request. Pre-caching includes predicting what data the user will request next and preemptively fetching that data from a network (e.g., the Internet). Additionally, the wireless communication network may predict the geographic location of the mobile device when it makes the request. Instead of pre-caching the data in the memory of the mobile device, the data may be stored at a wireless access point that has a radiation pattern that covers the predicted geographic location of the mobile device. Once the wireless access point receives the request from the mobile device for the pre-cached data, the pre-cached data may be transmitted wirelessly to the mobile device, thereby avoiding having to forward the request to rest of the communication network. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071174 | BACKHAUL SIGNAL COMPRESSION THROUGH SPATIAL-TEMPORAL LINEAR PREDICTION - The technology in this application compresses multi-antenna, complex-valued signals by exploiting both a spatial and a temporal correlation of the signals to remove redundancy within the complex-valued signals and substantially reduce the capacity requirement of backhaul links. At a receiver, the compressed signal is received, and a decompressor decompresses the received signal over space and over time to reconstruct the multiple antenna stream. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071175 | Mobile Device Assisted Coordinated Multipoint Transmission and Reception - Idle mobile devices are used as cooperating devices to support coordinated multipoint transmission and reception for uplink and downlink communications between a primary mobile device and its serving base station. For uplink communications, the cooperating mobile devices receive the uplink transmission from the primary mobile device and retransmit the received data signal to the serving base station for the primary mobile device. For downlink communications, the cooperating mobile devices receive the downlink transmission from the serving base station and retransmit the received data signal to the primary mobile device. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071176 | Mobile Device Assisted Coordinated Multipoint Transmission and Reception - Idle mobile devices are used as cooperating devices to support coordinated multipoint transmission and reception for uplink and downlink communications between a primary mobile device and its serving base station. For uplink communications, the cooperating mobile devices receive the uplink transmission from the primary mobile device and retransmit the received data signal to the serving base station for the primary mobile device. For downlink communications, the cooperating mobile devices receive the downlink transmission from the serving base station and retransmit the received data signal to the primary mobile device. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071177 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING DATA ROUTING OF ROAMING USER - A method and system for implementing data routing of a roaming user are disclosed. The method comprises: configuring a roaming protocol between the home network and the roaming network; during the registering process of the user in the roaming network, performing an interactive negotiation between the home network and the roaming network, so as to determine one of the home network and the roaming network to allocate IP address according to the roaming protocol between the home network and the roaming network; and establishing the IP access bearer based on the IP address. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071178 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA TRANSMISSIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for data transmissions in a wireless network are disclosed. A first device may send a first frame to a second device including information regarding a number of pending data frames to be transmitted from the first device to the second device. The first device receives an acknowledgement frame including a number of approved data frames for transmission from the first device to the second device. The first device then may send a plurality of data frames without performing the contention-based channel access procedure in response to the acknowledgement frame. The first device may send a first frame to a second device for requesting data frames that are pending at the second device. The first device receives an acknowledgement frame including a number of pending and approved data frames. The first device may receive a plurality of data frames in response to the acknowledgement frame. | 03-12-2015 |
20150078251 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND METHOD FOR OPERATING A COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE - According to an aspect of this disclosure a communication terminal device is provided, comprising: a transceiver configured to communicate with a communication device according to a retransmission protocol; a controller configured, for a message transmitted from the communication device to the communication terminal device, to at least one of decide, upon a successful receipt of the message from the communication device, if the controller controls the transceiver not to transmit an acknowledgement message which is to be transmitted according to the retransmission protocol; and decide, upon an unsuccessful receipt of the message from the communication device, if the controller controls the transceiver not to transmit a negative acknowledgement message which is to be transmitted according to the retransmission protocol. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078252 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Provided are a communication control device by which a situation where a mobile station is disabled to receive a terminating call can be prevented from continuing for a long time, even when the IP-CAN bearer is removed for some reason. A P-CSCF | 03-19-2015 |
20150078253 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM STORING COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A routing table stores therein an upper unit for 60 G wireless, a lower unit for 60 G wireless, a left unit for 60 G wireless, a right unit for 60 G wireless, or a WLAN unit as a routing destination based on a direction from its own node to a destination node and a distance therebetween. A routing unit routes a packet to the upper unit for 60 G wireless, the lower unit for 60 G wireless, the left unit for 60 G wireless, the right unit for 60 G wireless, or the WLAN unit based on the routing destination retrieved from the routing table through table retrieval. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078254 | Method, System, Network Element, and Gateway for Processing Access Point Name Restriction Information - A method, a system, a network element, and a gateway for processing access point name restriction information are disclosed. The method includes a second mobility management element receives first access point name restriction information from a first mobility management element, and the second mobility management element obtains maximum access point name restriction information according to the first access point name restriction information, so that a packet data network gateway determines to or refuses to establish a new packet data network gateway connection. With the present invention, the second mobility management element may obtain the maximum access point name restriction information according to the received access point name restriction information. In this way, the packet data network gateway can determine to or refuse to establish a new packet data network gateway connection, therefore improving the security of private packet data network gateways. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078255 | Paging Processing Method, Communication Apparatus, and Communication System - A paging processing method, a communication apparatus, and a communication system are disclosed. The paging processing method includes: receiving, by a mobility management network element, a downlink data notification message which includes service attribute information of a downlink data packet; obtaining the service attribute information; and initiating paging of the user equipment based on different policies according to the service attribute information. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078256 | COMMUNICATION PACKET CONVERSION - Techniques for converting communication packets in a network having multiple nodes are described herein. A node may receive communication packets from one or more neighboring nodes. Each communication packet may include control data and payload data. The node may extract the payload data and store the payload data for a time period. The node may determine whether to concatenate the extracted payload data of the communication packets (e.g., based on destinations to where each of the extracted payload data are to be sent, a supported data rate, an application type associated with the extracted payload data, etc.). The node may concatenate the extracted payload data of the communication packets and send the concatenated payload data to another node in a communication packet. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078257 | INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION METHOD, DATA SENDING METHOD, AND APPARATUSES IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEM - An interference cancellation method, data sending method, apparatus, user equipment and base station in a Long Term Evolution system are disclosed. The interference cancellation method includes: obtaining downlink cell-specific power ratio information of a specific cell; performing channel estimation based on a downlink cell-specific reference signal (CRS) of the specific cell, to obtain a channel estimation matrix of a specific physical channel, signal, or message of the specific cell; compensating the channel estimation matrix by using the downlink cell-specific power ratio information; and canceling, in an original signal that is received from a target cell and is interfered by the specific cell, interference caused by the specific cell in a received signal from a specific physical channel, signal, or message. A technical problem in the prior art that a user equipment cannot effectively cancel interference because power transmission strength of a strong interfering cell cannot be correctly estimated is solved. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078258 | EVOLVED DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - One embodiment is directed to a method for generating and distributing wireless RF signals at a host unit in a distributed antenna system. At least a first subset of IP data from an IP network entity is routed to a first base transceiver station within the host unit, and at least a second subset of the IP data is routed to a second base transceiver station within the host unit. The IP data is baseband processed by the first and second base transceiver stations to generate a first digital representation of a first RF signal and a second digital representation of a second RF signal. The first digital representation of the first RF signal is routed to a first subset of the plurality of remote units and the second digital representation of the second RF signal is routed to a second subset of the plurality of remote units. | 03-19-2015 |
20150085745 | PLAN-ASSISTED WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CONFIGURATION - Implementations relate to configuring wireless access points in a wireless network. In some implementations, a method includes selecting, from a plurality of wireless access points in a communication network, a configuring subset of wireless access points and a different compensating subset of wireless access points. New settings are applied to the compensating subset of wireless access points to change a physical coverage of wireless communication provided by the compensating subset, thus at least partially compensating for disabled wireless communication of the configuring subset. The method disables wireless communication provided by the configuring subset, and configures the disabled configuring subset of wireless access points. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085746 | SELECTIVE UTILIZATION OF CONSUMER SHARED ACCESS POINTS TO FACILITATE OPTIMIZED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Certain embodiments herein relate to selective utilization of shared access points to facilitate optimized wireless communications. A wireless access point located at a home, residence, or other facility may be shared among other such access points to form a wireless network of shared access points across various regions or areas. One or more access points that provide an optimized wireless connection for user devices within range of the access points may be determined in certain embodiments herein. The determination may include comparing operational or performance information associated with the access points, such as link quality, quality of service, current load, backhaul connectivity information, etc., as well as pricing associated with the access points, to determine which one or more access points facilitate or provide optimized wireless communications between devices on a wireless network. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085747 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE CONNECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for establishing a device-to-device (D2D) connection in a wireless communication system is provided. A first device may establish the D2D connection with a second device. The first device only knows information on neighbor devices of the first device, and a network does not know the information on neighbor devices of the first device. The first device determines whether to establish the D2D connection with the second device or not, based on at least one of a proximity between the first device and the second device based on a profile of the second device obtained through a neighbor discovery procedure, a presence of data to be transmitted to the second device, and a preference for the D2D connection of the first device. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085748 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PEAK TO AVERAGE POWER RATIO - A system and method for reducing peak to average power ratio in a wireless communication system. A wireless communication system includes a radio frequency wireless transmitter that includes signal peak reduction circuitry configured to reduce peak to average power ratio of a signal to be transmitted by reducing amplitude of the signal to be transmitted that is greater than a predetermined amplitude. The signal peak reduction circuitry includes a bit inverter configured to invert a bit of a symbol identified as causing the amplitude of the signal to exceed the predetermined amplitude. The bit inverter is also configured to select the bit to invert such that inversion of the bit reduces the amplitude of the signal, and such that forward error correction in a receiver wirelessly coupled to the transmitter restores the bit to a pre-inversion value. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085749 | MECHANISM TO EXCHANGE PROPRIETARY SIGNALING MESSAGES BETWEEN A UE AND A NETWORK - Methods and apparatus are described for configuring features for a user equipment (UE) communicating with a network entity. For example, the methods and apparatus include receiving, at the network entity, a capability message indicating one or more features supported by the UE; transmitting control data in a data type Protocol Data Unit (PDU), wherein the control data is configured to enable one of the one or more features based on the capability message; and enabling one of the one or more features in response to receiving an acknowledgement message from the UE. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085750 | METHOD FOR FEEDING BACK CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION, UE AND SYSTEM - A method for feeding back channel state information, UE and system. The method is applicable to a CoMP transmission system and includes: feeding back channel state information to a network side by way of concatenating more than one pieces of channel state indication information in a bit domain. In this way, a method for feeding back multiple pieces of CSI in the CoMP transmission may be provided. Furthermore, RI information and CQI/PMI information in the CSI may be respectively encoded and mapped, so as to ensure reliable transmission of the RI information and CQI/PMI information. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085751 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR EXPLOITATION OF WELL-CONNECTED NODES IN PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS NETWORKS - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure relate to a method for increasing a capacity in a peer-to-peer (P2P) wireless network. A scheme has been proposed in which well-connected nodes of the P2P wireless network can be exploited in a manner that increases the overall connectivity of all the nodes in the network. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085752 | NODE AND METHOD FOR PRIORITY OF APPLICATION BASED HANDLING OF A PAGING REQUEST - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a device, mobility management node and/or a serving gateway, and corresponding methods there, for providing application, service or priority based paging. According to some of the example embodiments, the decision whether or not to issue or accept a paging request may be made based on a priority, application or service (or type of service) associated with the paging request. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085753 | SMALL CELL COVERAGE ADJUSTING METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - A small cell coverage adjusting method, device, and system are disclosed. The method includes: determining whether a load of a macro cell meets a coverage parameter value adjusting condition of a small cell; and if the load of the macro cell meets the coverage parameter value adjusting condition of the small cell, sending a request message carrying a coverage parameter adjusting value to the small cell, so that after determining to accept the coverage parameter adjusting value, the small cell adjusts a current coverage parameter value of the small cell according to the coverage parameter adjusting value. By Embodiments of the present invention, a coverage parameter of the small cell can be dynamically adjusted, so that the small cell can offload services on the macro cell better, and decrease intra-frequency interference caused by the coverage of the small cell to the macro cell. | 03-26-2015 |
20150092664 | Long Term Evolution Femtocell Based Content Service System, and Driving Method Thereof - Provided is a long term evolution (LTE) femtocell based content service system and a driving method thereof, which include user equipment (UE) connected to an evolved packet core (EPC) network that is a core network through routes, that is, a radio network subsystem (RNS) and a home eNode subsystem (HeNS) having a femtocell and a content service server connected to the EPC network and configured to receive system information including PCI, U_DL BW, Cell ID, TAC, HeNB Name and SNR, and query data from the user equipment (UE), retrieve corresponding content with reference to the received system information and query data, and provide the corresponding content to the user equipment (UE). | 04-02-2015 |
20150092665 | RELEASING CONNECTIONS WITH LOCAL GW WHEN UE MOVES OUT OF RESIDENTIAL/ENTERPRISE NETWORK COVERAGE - A method, system and device are provided for managing LIPA and/or SIPTO connection releases when UE moves out of residential/enterprise network coverage in case service continuity is not supported for the LIPA/SIPTO PDN connection(s). To address problems caused by not providing service continuity for LIPA/SIPTO PDN connections, the PDN connection/PDP context created in the HeNB/HNB by the MME/SGSN includes context information related to the UE indicating whether such connection is a LIPA PDN connection PDN connection or not. In addition, each UE may be configured to reconnect or not reconnect to the PDN corresponding to a certain APN or service, depending on how the PDN connection was disconnected by the network. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092666 | INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION METHOD FOR COMMON REFERENCE SIGNAL, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - An interference cancellation method for a common reference signal, eNB and system. The method includes: notifying assistance information for interference cancellation by a pico cell to a neighboring cell; wherein the assistance information for interference cancellation includes first related information of a neighboring cell interfering with the pico cell, or includes second related information of a neighboring cell that collides with the common reference signal of the pico cell in neighboring cells interfering with the pico cell. With the embodiments of the present invention, the eNB of the neighboring cell is enabled to receive the assistance information for interference cancellation, and configure the UE served by the neighboring cell with the assistance information for interference cancellation, so that the UE having an ability to cancel interference may perform interference cancellation according to the assistance information for interference cancellation, thereby solving the problem of too-late handover. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092667 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DATA PATH CONTROL IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - In various embodiments, the data plane may be abstracted from a control plane in a wireless network such as WiMax, WiFi, LTE or the like. In some embodiments, a method comprises a receiving control data at a control server from a source device, generating routing instructions at the control server regarding routing network data based on the control data, providing the routing instructions to a routing device, configuring the routing device based on the routing instructions, receiving network data from the source device, and routing the network data from the source device to a target device using the configured routing device. | 04-02-2015 |
20150098387 | Parameter Optimization and Event Prediction Based on Cell Heuristics - A heuristic approach to configuration and/or planning for wireless networks is disclosed herein. In one embodiment, statistics relating to mobile device cell usage are collected and monitored. The statistics may include UE measurements (RSRP/RSRQ), UE location, number of connection requests, duration of connectivity, average traffic load associated with the users, channel utilization, and other statistics. Based on statistical analysis of the data collected, neural network analysis, data fitting, or other analysis, adjustments to cell coverage parameters such as handover thresholds, inactivity timer values, contention window size, inter-frame duration, transmit power, DRX cycle duration, or other parameters may be identified. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098388 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR JOINING NEIGHBOR AWARENESS NETWORK DEVICE CLUSTER - In a process for a wireless network device in a first Neighbor Awareness Network device cluster (NAN cluster) to join a second NAN cluster, the wireless network device first discovers the second NAN cluster by means of scanning for networking signals from the second NAN cluster. If it determines, based on the discovery information, to join the second NAN cluster, the wireless network device sends an event message to other wireless network devices in the first NAN cluster to inform them that it is leaving the first NAN cluster to join the second NAN cluster. The event message also contains a cluster ID (CID) of the second NAN cluster. The wireless network device then leaves the first NAN cluster and joins the second NAN cluster. | 04-09-2015 |
20150103737 | METHOD OF RECEIVING A SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND ASSOCIATED NETWORK ELEMENTS - In one embodiment, the method includes determining, at a network element, a first filter component based on reference sequences for user equipments in a first set. The method further includes determining a second filter component. The second component is based on a plurality of received signals and has estimated contributions to the plurality of received signals by the user equipments in the first set removed. The plurality of received signals are associated with a plurality of antennas. The method further includes filtering a selected received signal based on the first and second filter components to obtain an estimated signal for a selected user equipment. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103738 | SELECTING AN ACCESS POINT FOR DETERMINING POSITION OF A DEVICE BASED ON TRAFFIC LOAD INFORMATION - Techniques described herein enable a mobile device in selecting an access point (AP) from a plurality of APs for determining the position of the mobile device. In one aspect, the mobile device receives assistance data including traffic load information associated with one or more APs. The mobile device may determine which AP to communicate with based on the traffic load information associated with a plurality of APs. The assistance data including the traffic load information associated with the plurality of APs may be compiled using information from a controller connected to the plurality of APs, crowdsourcing (using information from a plurality of mobile devices over time), or information regarding the traffic conditions received from the plurality of APs. In one implementation, the mobile device may receive the assistance data information including the traffic load information from an assistance data (AD) Server. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103739 | OPTIMIZING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE OPERATIONS FOR LTE-ENABLED DEVICES - A method of optimizing transactions involving Call Independent Supplementary Service (CISS) data on a Long Term Evolution (LTE) device may include receiving an indication that the CISS data should be transmitted between the device and a core network. The method may also include determining whether the device is standing by in a packet-switched LTE network or standing by in a 3G/2G network. In response to a determination that the device is standing by in the packet-switched LTE network, the method may additionally include packaging the CISS data in a control layer message and sending the control layer message between the core network and the device in the packet-switched LTE network. In response to a determination that the device is standing by in the circuit-switched 3G/2G network, the method may further include sending the CISS data between the core network and the device in the circuit-switched 3G/2G network. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103740 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING A WIRELESS DEVICE THAT SUPPORTS WLAN MODULES OPERATING SIMULTANEOUSLY IN DIFFERENT WIRELESS BANDS - Systems and methods for enabling a WLAN client to communicate simultaneously over more than one band at a time are described, where each client has at least one radio that is operational in each supported band. Load balancing based on traffic requirements optimizes the use of the multiple bands. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103741 | MOBILE STATION - A mobile station UE according to the present invention includes: a managing unit | 04-16-2015 |
20150103742 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, TERMINAL APPARATUS, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides a technology that sets an offset value with respect to a received power of a reference signal from each of base station apparatuses, taking into consideration a difference between precoding schemes, in a wireless communication system that supports multiple different precoding schemes. The base station apparatus according to the present invention communicates with at least one of terminal apparatuses using the multiple different precoding schemes. The base station apparatus according to the present invention includes a transmission unit that transmits to the terminal apparatus multiple offset values that are to be added by the terminal apparatus to the received power of the reference signal from the base station apparatus, in which the multiple offset values correspond to the multiple precoding schemes, respectively. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103743 | NETWORK SYSTEM, PATH CONTROL APPARATUS, PATH CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM - An object is to provide a network system, a path control apparatus, a path control method, and a program that can realize flexible routing in a communication network. The network system according to the present invention is a network system including a base station ( | 04-16-2015 |
20150103744 | MODE SWITCHING METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a mode switching method and apparatus, which relate to the communications field and are used to improve user experience. The method includes: when a user equipment UE is in a state of accessing a first network in a first network mode of a first communications mode, determining, by the UE, whether the first network supports a first subsystem; enabling, by the UE, if the UE determines that the first network does not support the first subsystem and when the UE does not access a second network in the first communications mode, a second communications mode and accessing the second network in the second communications mode; and sending, by the UE, a first registration request message to the second network. The embodiments of the present invention are applicable to a service transmission scenario. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103745 | INTELLIGENT BACKHAUL RADIO WITH CO-BAND ZERO DIVISION DUPLEXING - A intelligent backhaul radio is disclosed, which can operate by zero division duplexing for use in PTP or PMP topologies, providing for significant spectrum usage benefits among other benefits. Specific system architectures and structures to enable active cancellation of multiple transmit signals at multiple receivers within a MIMO radio are disclosed. Further disclosed aspects include the adaptive optimization of cancellation parameters or coefficients. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103746 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication system controls routing performed by a physical gateway that connects a mobile station and a communication network. The communication system comprises a communication setting information acquiring unit and a routing control unit. The communication setting information acquiring unit acquires communication setting information between a virtual gateway corresponding to the physical gateway and the mobile station by executing a communication establishment sequence between the virtual gateway and the mobile station. The routing control unit controls routing performed by the physical gateway based on the communication setting information. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103747 | MAINTAINING INFORMATION FACILITATING DETERMINISTIC NETWORK ROUTING - In a wireless network that includes a plurality of nodes, a method of maintaining, by a first node, information regarding communications links between nodes in the wireless network includes: for each communications link that is established with another node, recording an identification of the other node; and for each message received by the first node from the other node through the communications link with the other node, recording a network pathway by which the message has been sent in the wireless network, the network pathway identifying the nodes and the communications links therebetween by which the message has been sent. Another method includes recording, by a server, for each message that is received by the server from the wireless network, a network pathway by which the message has been sent, the network pathway identifying the nodes and the communications links therebetween by which the message has been sent. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103748 | TERMINAL, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING COMBINATION SERVICE USING TERMINAL CAPABILITY VERSION - A method and a terminal are described for providing a circuit switched (CS) service, a session initiation protocol (SIP)-based service, or a CSI service which is a combination of the CS service and an Internet Protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) service. The terminal may receive a terminal capability version of at least one target terminal, and compare the received terminal capability version with a previously stored terminal capability version of the at least one target terminal. The terminal may send a message for requesting for terminal capability information of the at least one target terminal, if the received terminal capability version of the at least one target terminal is different from the previously stored terminal capability version of the at least one target terminal based on the comparison result. Otherwise, a CS or IMS process is implemented. | 04-16-2015 |
20150109994 | TOPOLOGY DISCOVERY BASED ON EXPLICIT SIGNALING - In one embodiment, a method for automatically creating a network route using a discovered IP address includes a first network device creating a connection-oriented interface with a first radio base station (RBS) for exchanging packets originating from the first RBS destined for the first network device, and for exchanging packets originating from the first network device destined for the first RBS, by receiving a first HELLO packet originating from the first RBS destined for the first network device, and transmitting a first HELLO packet destined for the first RBS. The method includes receiving, via the connection-oriented interface, a first CONNECT packet from the first RBS, the first CONNECT packet including a first IP address of the second RBS. The method includes creating a first network route between the first RBS and the second RBS using the first IP address included in the first CONNECT packet. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109995 | NODE SELECTION IN VIRTUAL EVOLVED PACKET CORE - The present disclosure includes gateways and methods for node selection of virtual network nodes in virtual evolved packet core networks. The methods include receiving, at a gateway from an evolved Node B (eNodeB), an attach request for a user equipment (UE), and determining a network selection hint corresponding to the received attach request, where the network selection hint is used for determining a virtual network node for selection in a mobile cloud network. The methods further include determining a domain name for establishing a network connection based at least in part on the network selection hint, where the selected domain name is associated with a virtual network node in the mobile cloud network. The methods also include selecting a virtual network node associated with the determined domain name, and establishing a network session to the selected virtual network node. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109996 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING COMPRESSION lEVEL OF HARQ SIGNAL - A device for optimizing a data compression level when processing a Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest (HARQ) signal includes a combiner which receives a log likelihood ratio (LLR) signal, determines whether the LLR signal is a new or retransmitted signal, and generates a composite signal by combining the LLR signal with a related signal received and previously stored when the LLR signal is the retransmitted signal; a compression level decision unit which calculates a first compression level based on quality of a received signal, calculates a second compression level based on an available memory size, and decides a final compression level according to the first compression level and the second compression level; a compressor which compresses the LLR signal according to the final compression level; a HARQ memory which stores the compressed signal; and a decompressor which decompresses a signal read from the HARQ memory. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109997 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF INTERFACING BETWEEN A CELLULAR MANAGER AND A WLAN ACCESS DEVICE - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of interfacing between a cellular manager and a Wireless Local Area network (WLAN) access device. For example, a WLAN access device, e.g., an Access Point (AP) or an Access Controller (AC), and a cellular manager, e.g., an evolved Node B (eNB) or a Radio Network Controller (RNC), may be configured to communicate via a direct link between the cellular manager and the WLAN access device. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109998 | METHOD OF PERFORMING HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST OPERATION FOR RANDOM ACCESS RESPONSE MESSAGE - The invention proposes a method of performing a hybrid automatic repeat request operation for a random access response message. The method at the base station includes the steps of: receiving a contention free random access preamble from a user equipment; transmitting a random access response message to the user equipment in a first media access control protocol data unit; transmitting a second media access control protocol data unit to the user equipment in a hybrid automatic repeat request process of the first media access control protocol data unit including the random access response message, wherein a physical control channel corresponding to the second media access control protocol data unit includes an indicator for indicating that the second media access control protocol data unit includes new data, the indicator being used for indicating whether the media access control protocol data unit is transmitted for a first time or retransmitted. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109999 | TRANSFERRING MESSAGES - A method of transferring messages between base stations of a wireless telecommunications network, a proxy node, a method of transmitting messages from a base station, a base station and computer program products are disclosed. The method of transferring messages comprises the steps of: receiving an X2 Application Protocol message within an incoming X2 interface IP packet over an X2 interface from a source base station; extracting, from said X2 Application Protocol message, target base station identity information identifying a target base station; and routing the X2 Application Protocol message to said target base station, said X2 Application Protocol message being carried within an outgoing X2 interface IP packet having a target IP address derived from said target base station identity information. This approach uses a modified X2 Application Protocol message which includes the target base station identity information and which is wrapped within an X2 interface IP packet. This enables the modified message to be received by a proxy and the IP address of the target base station easily derived so that the message may be relayed onto a target base station with minimal processing being required by the proxy. Also, the extraction of the target base station identity information and routing of the X2 Application Protocol message can still effectively be done within the X2 Application Protocol layer which significantly reduces the processing and resources required from the proxy, which can remain effectively stateless. The method also enables a direct X2AP association to remain defined end to end between the source and the target base station without terminating the full X2 Application Protocol in the proxy which makes the proxy simple and without corresponding statefull X2 contexts. All of this improves the flexibility, reliability and scalability of establishing and maintaining X2 connections between base stations compared to existing techniques. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110000 | DATA DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DEVICE - The present invention discloses a data downlink transmission method and a device, and belongs to the field of communications technologies. The method includes: receiving, by an MTC-IWF device, a first message sent by a server, where the first message includes downlink data that needs to be sent to a user equipment; and acquiring, by the MTC-IWF device, locally stored serving node information of the user equipment, and sending a second message to a serving node of the UE according to the serving node information of the UE, where the second message includes the downlink data that needs to be sent to the user equipment, so that the serving node sends the downlink data to the user equipment. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110001 | Communication Method and System - A method of co-ordinating communication between a plurality of base stations in a communication system, comprising designating timeslots where said base stations receive and/or transit co-ordination messages to each other. The system may be an autonomous cellular system and the timeslots may be regularly spaced. | 04-23-2015 |
20150117305 | DYNAMIC ZONE ROUTING IN A MOBILE AD HOC NETWORK BASED ON MAXIMUM AVAILABLE NETWORK DEVICE BATTERY POWER - In one embodiment, a method comprises identifying, by a wireless network device, whether any other detectable network device advertises a higher advertised remaining power than a corresponding remaining power in the wireless network device; the wireless network device advertising as an active node for a zone of a wireless mobile ad hoc network, based on no other detectable network device advertising the higher advertised remaining power. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117306 | ENHANCING USER EXPERIENCE FOR INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA CORE NETWORK SUBSYSTEM BASED COMMUNICATION SERVICES - User experience is enhanced for Internet Protocol Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (IMS) based rich communication services in telecommunication environments. A system receives, from a user equipment, a session initiation protocol invitation packet to commence a communication session, and as a function of the session initiation protocol invitation packet, displays an access network technology type used by the user equipment to access a network device associated with a multiple access communication network. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117307 | ADJUSTING PHYSICAL RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL (PRACH) TRANSMISSION POWER - A method of wireless communication includes modifying an initial transmit power for a subsequent uplink physical channel based on the difference between the desired received powers of the subsequent uplink physical channel and a random access physical channel. When the difference between the desired power of the subsequent uplink physical channel and the random access physical channel is above a predefined threshold, the modification is based on a first adjusted factor. When the subsequent uplink physical channel and random access physical channel are on different frequencies (or time slots) the modification is based on a second adjusted factor. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117308 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCALABLE AND MANAGEABLE NON-ACCESS STRATUM (NAS) NODE SELECTION FUNCTION FOR EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM - A network element having a Non-Access Stratum (NAS) Node Selection Function for discriminating information in order to determine which core network node a signaling message should be sent comprising: a network interface unit configured to interact with a packet network system; a processor with a memory associated with the network interface unit and adapted to: receive the signaling message from an eNB at a selection function; extract header information from Stream Control Transport Protocol (SCTP) of the signaling message; communicate with a database having a persistent application map to determine if there is an association between the header information and a core network entity; if there is an association, forward the signaling message to a selected core network entity; and determine at the selected core network entity which one of a plurality of core network nodes within a core network pool to route the message based on availability of the plurality of core network nodes. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117309 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISCOVERY OF DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH PARTIAL COVERAGE - A method at a wireless device outside of base station control, the method comprising: transmitting a device presence signal for a predetermined time period; and listening for a network presence signal sent in response to the device presence signal. Further, a method at a wireless device, the method comprising: listening for a device presence signal; and transmitting a network presence signal in response to the device presence signal. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117310 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ROUTE PACKET FLOWS OVER TWO TRANSPORT RADIOS - In accordance with an example embodiment, a method is provided comprising receiving packets of at least one flow in a packet switching function, and based on at least one criterion, deciding in the packet switching function on switching the packets to one or both of a cellular transport radio and a wireless local area network transport radio. In some embodiments, the packet switching function is disposed in a protocol stack between a radio link control protocol layer and a medium access control protocol layer. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117311 | SINGLE-PDP DUAL STACK SERIAL DIALING METHOD AND SYSTEM - a method and system for single-PDP dual-stack serial is provided. A mobile terminal sets a single-PDP dual-stack serial dialing parameter according to a parameter setting command transmitted by a host; then the mobile terminal initiates a PDP activation request to a mobile communication network according to a first dialing instruction transmitted by the host and the configured single-PDP dual-stack serial dialing parameter, acquires activation response information fed back by the mobile communication network, generates dialing response information according to the activation response information, and feeds back the dialing response information to the host, wherein the dialing response information includes cause reference information; and after receiving the dialing response information, the host can acquire a specific condition of the current mobile network according to the cause reference information included in the dialing response information to determine a dialing mode. Unnecessary dialing processing and a dialing failure can be avoided, the condition of unnecessarily returning to dual-PDP dual-stack dialing can be avoided, a dialing flow can be simplified, dialing efficiency can be improved, and a utilization rate of a system resource can be increased. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117312 | Charging Data Control in an IP Telecommunications Network - Charging data for a call in an IP telecommunications network is generated by establishing a direct SIP connection between a SIP-AS and an MGCF; defining in the SIP-AS service related data corresponding to the call; submitting the defined service related data in SIP signalling via the established direct SIP connection between the SIP-AS and the MGCF; and generating in the MGCF the charging data, based on the submitted service related data. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117313 | Selective Bicasting - A method including receiving a packet and determining whether a bicast indication associated with the packet indicates that the packet has been transmitted to two or more access points; and dropping the packet in dependence on at least one criterion. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117314 | SYNCHRONIZATION TRACK REFERENCE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION PROCESSING, RECEIVING PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS - Provided are a synchronization track reference signal transmission processing, receiving processing method and apparatus. According to the transmission processing method, a base station configures, for a new carrier, subframe pattern information used for a synchronization track reference signal (STRS), wherein the subframe pattern information is used for describing at least one subframe for transmitting the STRS in a radio frame; and the base station transmits the configured subframe pattern information to user equipment. By applying the technical solution, the technical problems of being unable to transmit the STRS in a new carrier since there is not technical solution regarding how to transmit the STRS in the related technologies, etc. are solved, thereby achieving the transmission of the STRS in the new carrier. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117315 | UE BASED CSFB ENHANCEMENT - A mobile station for notification of a circuit switched event. The mobile station includes a circuit switched modem, a packetized data modem, a radio, and a tune away controller. The circuit switched communicates circuit switched data over a circuit switched network. The packetized data modem communicates packetized data over a packetized data network. The radio couples the packetized data modem to the packetized data network via a packetized data radio link, and couples the circuit switched modem to the circuit switched network via a circuit switched radio link. The tune away controller is coupled to the circuit switched modem and to the packetized data modem, and indicates tune away events over the packetized data network and notice the mobile station to process the circuit switched event, where the tune away controller directs switching of the radio between the packetized data radio link and the circuit switched radio link. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117316 | DATA ROUTING IN HYBRID WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Data is routed in a mesh network of devices that can communicate wirelessly through a plurality of technologies. One or more of such devices receive broadcast message(s) from a destination device intended to receive the data, and generate a first radio link quality metric (RLQM) value based on the broadcast message(s). A source device originates and delivers a quantum of data with an embedded first RLQM value. A set of intermediate devices relays the quantum of data if a forwarding criterion is fulfilled; the forwarding criterion is based in part on the first RLQM value and a second RLQM value generated by an intermediate device in the set of intermediate devices based on the broadcast message(s). The intermediate device exploits an optical interface to transmit the quantum of data. The destination device broadcasts an acknowledgement signal in response to receiving intended data. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117317 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING VALIDITY OF WIFI CONNECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for determining validity of a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) connection in a wireless apparatus is provided. In the method, a query is performed on a specific Domain Name Server (DNS) via a connected Access Point (AP). When a response to the query on the specific DNS is received, a connection to a specific node is attempted via the connected AP. When the connection to the specific node is successful, a valid WiFi connection is determined. The WiFi connection is maintained. Therefore, a WiFi apparatus is allowed to connect to only a valid AP, so that convenience is provided to a user and the WiFi apparatus is prevented from wasting power. | 04-30-2015 |
20150124698 | Adaptive Crowdsourced Keep-Alive Interval Determination - A system and method of determining a keep-alive interval for a network access point (AP) employs adaptive learning and crowd sourced data building to increase the effectiveness and efficiency of mobile device connectivity. In particular, in addition to allowing group accessed storage of resolved keep-alive intervals for specific APs, the disclosed principles provide a mechanism for resolving the keep-alive interval for any AP upon first encounter, allowing devices to maintain connectivity during a session without consuming bandwidth unnecessarily by sending superfluous keep-alive messages. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124699 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING AUDIO PACKETS DURING A VOLTE CALL - A method and a system for handling audio packets in a Voice over Long Term Evolution (VoLTE) call by a User Equipment (UE) when Robust Header Compression (ROHC) is enabled are provided. The Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) layer provides the VoLTE call properties to the ROHC compressor. The TCP/IP layer receives the audio packets from audio engine and sends the Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packets to a ROHC compressor. Further, the ROHC compressor compresses the Internet Protocol/User Datagram Protocol (IP/UDP) headers and a RTP header. The ROHC compressor sends the compressed RTP data along with a payload to the network in the UpLink (UL) data path. During DownLink (DL) data path, ROHC decompressor receives compressed ROHC packet from network. The ROHC decompressor ignores the construction of IP/UDP headers for the compressed data. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124700 | METHOD OF ASSISTING USER EQUIPMENT IN RECEIVING BROADCAST INFORMATION OF PICO ENB - The invention provides a method, in a communication System, of assisting a user equipment in a cell range expansion of a pico cell in receiving broadcast information from a pico eNB. According to an embodiment of the invention, a macro eNB or the pico eNB sends an assisting signaling including the broadcast information of the pico cell and an identifier of the pico cell corresponding to the broadcast information to the user equipment which will move into the cell range expansion of the pico cell so that the user equipment receives the broadcast information smoothly from the pico eNB after moving into the cell range expansion of the pico cell. And the macro eNB or the pico eNB sends and updates the broadcast information over a specific resource so that the user equipment satisfies reception robustness. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124701 | CONTROLLING STREAMING OF DATA FROM A STREAMING SERVER TO A USER EQUIPMENT VIA A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method of controlling streaming of data, such as video, from a streaming server to a User Equipment (UE) via a Radio Access Network (RAN) is provided. The method includes receiving streaming data from the streaming server, re-shaping the received streaming data into bursts, and transmitting the bursts to the UE. The bursts are transmitted at a higher bitrate than the bitrate of the received streaming data. By re-shaping the streaming data into bursts, streaming can be effected in a more radio-friendly way, since the UE may switch to a less resource consuming radio state in-between reception of data bursts delivered at high bitrates. Further, a corresponding computer program and computer program product, and a proxy unit for controlling streaming of data from a streaming server to a UE via a RAN, are provided. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124702 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING TO USE X2 GATEWAY FOR X2 INTERFACE - The subject technology provides for initiating a communication interface in a wireless communication system. In an embodiment, a neighbor node is discovered at an access point. The subject technology receives, via a network message in response to discovering the neighbor node, an address indication associated with the neighbor node for configuration of the communication interface. It is then determined whether to initiate one of a direct communication interface or indirect communication interface for communication with the neighbor node based on the address indication in the received network message. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124703 | TRAFFIC CLASSIFICATION ELEMENT CLASSIFIER PARAMETERS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques, corresponding apparatus, and program products, for traffic classification (TCLAS) element classifier parameters for short frames. Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide an apparatus for wireless communications. The apparatus generally includes a processing system configured to generate a frame with an element that contains one or more fields, wherein the one or more fields identify at least one medium access control (MAC) packet data unit (MPDU) and identify a type of parameters in the element based, at least in part, on one or more fields in the at least one MPDU and an interface to output the generated frame for transmission. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124704 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR MAC HEADER COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for compression of wireless communications headers are disclosed. In one aspect, an apparatus for wireless communication includes a processing system configured to output a request for transmission to a second apparatus, the request indicating a request to the second apparatus to store first information; decode a response from the second apparatus to determine whether the second apparatus will store the first information; generate a first header, the first header generated without the first information therein if the second apparatus will store the first information; and output the first header for transmission to the second apparatus. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124705 | NETWORK ACCESS METHOD AND DEVICE - When an access point notifies a user equipment of a communications network supported by the access point, the access point also notifies the user equipment of priority information of the access point, so that the user equipment can select an access point that an operator expects the UE to select, to be connected to the communications network, thereby avoiding inconsistency between an access point, which is randomly selected by the user equipment to be connected to a communications network, and an access point that a communications network operator expects the UE to select. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124706 | Method and Apparatus for Signaling Sequence Root - A first access node of a first network utilizes code sequences, assigned to different user devices, to distinguish at least acknowledgements received in parallel or sequentially from those user devices. The first access node determines from received signaling that a root sequence of the code sequences is in use by a second access node of a second network, then changes that root sequence of the code sequences assigned to the different user devices. In certain examples the access nodes are WLAN access points APs and the acknowledgements are received in response to a group probe/poll. In various embodiments the first AP monitors its neighbors' group probes/polls to learn the root sequences/basic service sets in use in those neighbor networks, or the AP's own stations monitor and send the information in neighbor reports. This latter option can be initiated by the stations themselves, or by the AP. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124707 | System and Method for Channel State Information Feedback in Wireless Communications Systems - A system and method for channel state information feedback in wireless communications systems are provided. A method for reporting channel information includes determining, at a user equipment, a channel information type for first channel information to be reported to a communications controller, determining the first channel information conditioned on previously reported channel information and on the channel information type, and reporting the first channel information, the channel information type, or a combination thereof, to the communications controller. | 05-07-2015 |
20150131524 | REDUCED-SIZE MESSAGE PASS IN FACTOR GRAPHS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - Systems and methods are disclosed for graph-based distributed parameter coordination in a communications network. In general, discrete local parameters to be coordinated among communication nodes in the communications network and their respective performance metrics, or costs, are modeled using a factor graph. Based on the factor graph, a variant of a sum-product algorithm, namely the min-sum algorithm, is applied in order for the communication nodes, through iterative message passing of reduced size messages with their neighboring communication nodes, to decide upon optimal values for the local parameters for the communication nodes that collectively optimize a global performance metric across the communications network. In one embodiment, the communications network is a wireless communications network. In one specific embodiment, the wireless communications network is a cellular communications network. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131525 | Method, Device, and System for Implementing Function Sharing in Wireless Access Hotspot Device - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, a device, and a system for implementing function sharing in a wireless access hotspot device. The method comprises: a wireless access hotspot device sends information of a function supported by the wireless access hotspot device to a terminal that passed authentication; the wireless access hotspot device receives a function sharing request message returned by the terminal, and obtains from the function sharing request message information of a function the terminal requests to share, the information of the function that is requested to share comprising a function that is successfully matched from the information of the function supported by the wireless access hotspot device and is capable of being shared by the terminal; and when the terminal enabling a function in the information of the shared function, the wireless access hotspot device sends application data corresponding to the function to the terminal in a wireless transmission manner. The present invention relates to the field of wireless communication devices. By means of the method of the present invention, one or more terminals can simultaneously access the wireless access hotspot device in a wireless manner and share their functions and the obtained related network information. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131526 | Method, Network and Network Entity for Establishing a Communication Session to a User Equipment Roaming in IMS - The invention relates to a method, network ad network entity for establishing a communication session between a calling subscriber residing in a first Visited IMS network and a called subscriber roaming in a second Visited IMS network. The method includes routing a first Invite request for the communication session via a media path extending from the first Visited IMS network via a Home IMS network of the called subscriber to the second Visited IMS network, and establishing the communication session. The method further includes inserting an additional IMS network entity, residing in the second Visited IMS network, in the part of the media path extending from the first Visited IMS network to the Home IMS network of the called subscriber and removing the Home IMS network of the called subscriber from the media path. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131527 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS IN LOW POWER WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments may comprise an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) system operating in the 1 GHz and lower frequency bands. In many embodiments, the physical layer logic may implement repetition logic to repeat portions of the data streams to increase the ability of a receiving device to detect and decode the data streams. In some embodiments, the repetition logic may comprise a preamble repeater to repeat the training and/or signal fields. In further embodiments, the repetition logic may comprise a payload repeater to repeat the payload one or more times. Other embodiments comprise a receiving device comprising a correlator to correlate the repeated preamble symbols to detect a communication from a transmitting device. The receiving device may also comprise correction logic to correct data streams from the communications signal based upon repetitions of the payload in the data streams. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131528 | SYSTEMS, APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR SYNCHRONIZING A GLOBAL TIME REFERENCE FOR ACCESS POINTS OVER THE AIR - Methods and apparatus for synchronizing a global time reference for access points over the air are provided. In one aspect, a method for synchronizing a global time of an access point comprises receiving a message comprising a global time indication from a second access point. The method further includes updating the global time of the access point to the global time indication from the second access point by updating a timer of the access point by an increment not to exceed a predetermined value selected small enough to ensure a maintenance of synchronization between the access point and at least one associated wireless station. The global time of the access point is updated to the global time indication from the second access point when the global time indication from the second access point indicated a later global time than the global time of the access point. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131529 | SERVER AIDED NAN CLUSTER MERGING - One embodiment of this invention comprises an apparatus that desires to merge clusters in a neighbor aware network comprising a processing system, where the processing system is configured to generate a request to another apparatus to inform the apparatus when a neighboring cluster with a better cluster grade than the cluster of the apparatus exists, provide the request for transmission to the other apparatus, receive a response from the other apparatus informing of the neighboring cluster with the better cluster grade, scan for the neighboring apparatus, and merge with the neighboring cluster with the better cluster grade. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131530 | LEGACY-COMPATIBLE CONTROL FRAMES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for using different MAC addresses in frames for the same station to indicate how to process the frames. In this manner, frames for IEEE 802.11ac can carry information not present in legacy frames (e.g., frames according to IEEE 802.11a/n), but these frames may be interpreted by legacy devices in a legacy way. One example method generally includes receiving a first frame comprising an indication of a first MAC address and processing the received first frame based on the first MAC address. For certain aspects, the method further includes receiving a second frame comprising an indication of a second MAC address, wherein the second MAC address is different than the first address; and processing the received second frame based on the second MAC address, such that the processing of the second frame is different than the processing of the first frame. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131531 | Uplink Mimo Transmission from Mobile Communications Devices - Uplink transmission from a mobile device having multiple antennas to a base station having multiple antennas includes transmitting in an open-loop single-user MIMO mode when the mobile device is at high speed, transmitting in a closed-loop single-user MIMO mode when the mobile device is at low speed, and, upon request, transmitting in a multi-user collaborative MIMO mode. The method also includes controlling uplink transmissions in a selected one of the open-loop single-user MIMO, the closed-loop single-user MIMO and the multiuser collaborative MIMO modes. Uplink transmissions from the mobile device may be transmitted using multiple antennas of the mobile device. Upon request, the mobile device may switch to transmitting in multi-user collaborative MIMO mode with a subset of the multiple antennas. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131532 | Method of Routing a Session from a Calling Party in a Serving Communication Network of the Calling Party to a Called Party - A method of routing a session from a calling party in a serving communication network of the calling party to a called party is described. The serving communication network of the calling party is distinct from a home communication network of the calling party. The method is executed by a session routing node in the serving communication network of the calling party. In order to optimize a session routing path of signaling data of the session, the method comprises receiving from the home communication network of the calling party a session routing request requesting routing the signaling data of the session to the called party via the serving communication network of the calling party, and routing the signaling data of the session to the called party via the serving communication network of the calling party based on the received session routing request. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131533 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF PROVIDING IPV6 PACKET TRANSIT BETWEEN TWO IPV6 NODES OF A UTILITY NETWORK CONNECTED VIA AN IPV4 NETWORK USING ENCAPSULATION TECHNIQUE - One example embodiment provides a method and system where a node in an IPv6 utility network communicates with an IPv6 destination node through and IPv4 network. IPv6 utility nodes are reachable through at least one access point. IPv6 packets to be transmitted between an IPv6 access point and an IPv6 destination node through a IPv4 communications network are encapsulated in IPv4 packets for transmission through the IPv4 communications network. Packets received after transmission through the IPv4 communications network at the destination node are extracted to retrieve the IPv6 packet. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131534 | WIRELESS ROUTER SYSTEMS AND METHODS - A communication routing arrangement includes two or more wireless routers coupled to a communication network, and a user device adapted to couple with the communication network through a communication path including at least one of the two or more wireless routers. The communication path between the user device and the communication network is selected based on available resources of the two or more wireless routers. | 05-14-2015 |
20150139074 | Adaptive Generation of Network Scores From Crowdsourced Data - Embodiments generate and provide connection quality data for networks based on past performance of those networks. Network experience data and corresponding device context are received from a first set of mobile devices. The received data is processed to generate the connection quality data, which is distributed to a second set of mobile devices for use in selecting a network and establishing a connection. Feedback describing performance of the selected network is received and applied to adjust the previously generated connection quality data. In some embodiments, the connection quality data represents voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call quality. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139075 | PROVIDING CELLULAR-SPECIFIC TRANSPORT LAYER SERVICE BY WAY OF CELL-SITE PROXYING IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving a first request from a first user equipment by a first transport layer proxy located within an access network The first request includes a request to establish a user session between the first user equipment and a remote server. The method further includes establishing a first transport layer session between the first user equipment and the first transport layer proxy, establishing a second transport layer session between the first transport layer proxy and the remote server, and establishing a first control channel between the first transport layer proxy and a transport layer function manager within a core network. The method further includes sending session state parameters associated with the first transport layer session and the second transport layer session to the transport layer function manager using the first control channel. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139076 | SERVICE PROVISION IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK COMPRISING CELLS WITH DIFFERENT SERVICE CAPABILITIES - The invention refers to a method of providing a certain communication service with respect to a user equipment —UE ( | 05-21-2015 |
20150139077 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a process for measuring by a system having a processor, within a wide frequency band, signal power levels received in the specified narrow frequency bands, determining an average composite wideband power level that excludes a portion of the signal power levels, determining an adaptive threshold from the average composite wideband power level, detecting interference according to the adaptive threshold, and configuring an adjustable bandwidth of a filter to suppress at least a portion of the interference. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139078 | COMMUNICATION SUPPORTING METHOD AND APPARATUS USING NON-ACCESS STRATUM PROTOCOL IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for supporting Non-Access Stratum (NAS) communication between a User Equipment (UE) and a Mobility Management Entity (MME) efficiently by addressing the signaling problems occurring between the UE and the MME in a situation where it is necessary for a network node to identify the UE and acquire UE information, if there is any, from another network node to which the UE has been attached, are provided. The method for communication between the UE and network based on the NAS protocol messages and operations is implemented with the involvement a UE, an MME, and an old MME or an old Serving General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Support Node (SGSN) to which the UE has been attached before so as to facilitate discovering a best node using the UE information acquired from the old MME or old SGSN during the communication between the UE and the network, resulting in a reduction of a communication delay between the UE and network and an improvement of communication efficiency. | 05-21-2015 |
20150146611 | COLLABORATIVE SCHEDULING OF LAST HOP CELLULAR TRAFFIC - An eNodeB or other cell access point device can receive demand data from mobile devices served by the cell. The demand data can represent an estimate of demand over a future period for network resources (e.g., bandwidth). The cell can aggregate this demand data and determine price data for the time period or for various intervals of the time period, then transmit the price data to the mobile devices. The price data can operate as a collaborative approach to scheduling traffic. For example, data (e.g., delay tolerant data) can be shifted (e.g., delayed for a few seconds) based on an examination of the price data in conjunction a determined priority of the data. Such can be applicable to data traffic not traditionally thought of as delay tolerant such as streaming video or web browsing, and can be accomplished without negatively impacting the quality of service or experience of the client. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146612 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING DATA FLOWS - The method and system supports multiple bandwidth traffic over a single CPRI (common public radio interface) link ( | 05-28-2015 |
20150146613 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESETTING AT LEAST ONE NODE WITHIN A CPRI RADIO BASE STATION SYSTEM - A method of resetting at least one node within a Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI) radio base station system is described. The method comprises, at an end-point Radio Equipment Controller (REC) node within the CPRI radio base station system, receiving on a slave port a reset notification, and in response thereto transmitting on the slave port a reset notification comprising a reset bit being set within at least ten hyperframes. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146614 | TCP TRAFFIC ADAPTATION IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Embodiments described herein relate generally to efficient transmission of data over a radio network between a user equipment (“UE”) and a network node. The UE may adapt packets from TCP to a private protocol and transmit those data packets to the network node. The UE may use ARQ data from link layer circuitry to locally generate TCP ACK data for TCP layer circuitry. At the network node, the private-protocol data packets may be adapted to TCP and transmitted to a remote host over the Internet so that the TCP semantic may be maintained between the UE and the remote host. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146615 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES FOR CONTROLLING TRANSPORT OF RATELESSLY CODED MESSAGES - Systems, methods, and devices for controlling transport of ratelessly coded messages are disclosed herein. User equipment (UE) may be configured to receive a data object using a plurality of radios having distinct radio protocols. The data object may divided into a plurality of segments, and the segments may be encoded with a random linear network code before transmission. The random linear network code may permit the UE to reassemble each segment from any large enough set of encoded packets. The UE may use delivery control messages with very low overhead to control the flow of packets for each radio. The UE may control the number of packets received for each segment without specifying which particular packets should be sent. The transmitters may transmit the packets with very little overhead, and encoding information for the packets may be included in the packets in a compact form. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146616 | Radio Access Bearer Monitoring - A technique for RAB monitoring is disclosed. In one method aspect for generating reports for at least one RAB of a radio access network, the following items are pre-identified: i) at least one UeRc ii) a state of the UeRc, and iii) at least one transition to or from the state, and the method is performed in an RAB analyzer and comprises the steps of receiving at least one event provided by a network node of the radio access network, determining whether the event coincides with at least one of the pre-identified items, and generating, based on the result of the determination, a report indicating occurrence or non-occurrence of the event. In another method aspect for comparing the report to at least one KPI on the at least one RAB, the method is performed in a PM functionality and comprises the steps of transmitting the at least one event, receiving, responsive to the transmitting, the report, and comparing the report to the at least one KPI. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146617 | METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING A STATUS REPORT AND A COMMUNICATION DEVICE THEREOF IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a method for transferring a status report in a wireless communication system, the method comprising: configuring a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) status report used by a PDCP layer located above a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer, the PDCP status report including an indicator indicating a count value of a first non-received service data unit (SDU); and transferring the configured PDCP status report to a lower layer. The indicator may be first missing sequence number count (FMS COUNT) value which contains the count value of the first non-received PDCP SDU. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146618 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, disclosed are a method and an apparatus for reporting channel status information. A method for reporting the channel status information (CSI) from a user equipment in the wireless communication system, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the steps of: receiving from a base station a channel status information-reference signal (CSI-RS) on the basis of CSI-RS configuration information, which is provided from the base station; and reporting to the base station the CSI that is generated by using the CSI-RS, wherein the CSI-RS configuration information can include a plurality of CSI-RS configurations with respect to a first domain antenna group having a 2-dimensional antenna structure of the base station. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146619 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING UP SCTP CONNECTION AND X2 INTERFACE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting target cell information in a wireless communication system is provided. An eNodeB (eNB) transmits target cell information to an X2-gateway (GW) via an X2 setup request message or an eNB configuration update message. The target cell information may include at least one of target eNB identifier (ID), target cell ID or target radio network layer (RNL) ID. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146620 | D2D CLUSTER COMMUNICATION AND CONFIGURATIONS - Systems, methods, apparatuses, and computer program products for D2D cluster communication and configurations are provided. One method comprises receiving, at a first cluster head, information of a second cluster head; determining, based on the received information, a possible establishment of inter-cluster relationship with the second cluster; selecting a user equipment of at least one user equipment associated with the first cluster head, based on the received information, to relay information between the first cluster head and the second cluster head; indicating to the selected user equipment of at least one user equipment associated with the first cluster head to relay information between the first cluster head and the second cluster head; and negotiating, via the selected user equipment, an inter-cluster relationship with the second cluster head, wherein the second cluster head is associated with another user equipment for a device-to-device communication. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146621 | TERMINAL SELECTION METHOD AND SYSTEM BASED ON SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORK, AND NETWORK ENTITY - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a SON-based terminal selection method related to the field of communications technologies, where a target terminal is selected pertinently to participate in implementation of a SON algorithm. The method provided by the embodiments of the present invention includes: determining a terminal selection criterion under a requirement of implementing different SON algorithms; and performing target terminal selection from managed terminals according to the terminal selection criterion. A system and a network entity corresponding to the method are also provided. By applying the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention, a target terminal can be selected pertinently to participate in implementation of the SON algorithm, which avoids waste of resources of terminals that do not need to participate in implementation of the SON algorithm, and improves user experience of these terminals. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146622 | METHOD, TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION - Embodiments of the present application provide a method, a terminal, and a base station for transmitting information. In the embodiments of the present application, subframe configuration information of a first carrier is obtained, where the subframe configuration information is used to indicate a type-1 subframe of the first carrier and a type-2 subframe of the first carrier, the type-1 subframe is used for the base station to transmit, in system bandwidth, first information including a first CRS, the first CRS is used for demodulation, and the type-2 subframe is not used for the base station to transmit a CRS used for demodulation, so that the terminal can receive, according to the subframe configuration information and on the first carrier, information sent by the base station. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146623 | System and Method for Multiple Point Transmission in a Communications System - A system and method for multiple point transmission in a communications system are provided. A method for multiple point transmission operation comprises modifying a configuration of a radio bearer for use in a multiple point transmission to a user equipment according to operating condition information of the user equipment, reconfiguring the radio bearer according to the modified configuration, and initiating a multiple point transmission to the user equipment using the reconfigured radio bearer. | 05-28-2015 |
20150295682 | STREAMED RADIO COMMUNICATION WITH ARQ AND SELECTIVE RETRANSMISSION OF PACKETS IN BURSTS - A system for streaming data packets, comprises a source device ( | 10-15-2015 |
20150295683 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND RETRANSMISSION METHOD - A terminal capable of ensuring that when a UL-DL configuration is switched over, recognition of a UL HARQ process continued in the UL-DL configuration before and after the switchover is matched between a base station and the terminal. A terminal ( | 10-15-2015 |
20150295723 | Technique for Communication Between a Client Entity and a Packet Mode Data Network - A technique is provided for communication between a client entity and a packet mode data network by way of a communication network implementing control and metering mechanisms. A method implemented by an entity for controlling rules includes the following acts: receiving from a rules application entity a request to open a control session relating to a communication session between a client entity and the data network; ordering this application entity to associate for the session with at least one application level message received from the client entity at least one information item relating to a resources control function, intended to be used by an application entity situated in the data network to implement a command of resources for this session. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295841 | EFFICIENT PACKET AGGREGATION USING DYNAMIC WAIT TIME - Methods, systems, and devices are described for determining when to aggregate packets (e.g., transmit an aggregated packet) at a protocol layer based on an indication of whether more packets are available for transfer from a higher layer. In aspects, the protocol layer may receive an indication from the higher layer of whether additional packets are present in a second packet queue of the higher layer for transfer to the protocol layer. Based on the received indication, the protocol layer may determine when to aggregate the packets in the protocol layer queue into an aggregated packet (e.g., whether to transmit the aggregated packet upon receipt of the indication, etc.). Determining when to aggregate packets in the protocol layer based on the indication may override conventional packet aggregation conditions such as an aggregation wait time, an aggregation window size (minimum or maximum), and the like. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296367 | Mobility Estimation - An apparatus, method, and computer program product for mobility estimation are provided. One method may include estimating a mobility state of a user equipment, and scaling the estimate of the mobility state according to certain factors. The factors may include, for example, a DRX cycle applied during the period of estimation of the mobility state and the number of cell changes of the user equipment. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296392 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING VIRTUAL BASE STATION - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for creating a virtual base station. The creating method includes: receiving a virtual base station creation request sent by a third-party server; sending a virtual machine creation request to an RAN; receiving a virtual machine creation complete response sent by the RAN; sending a base station image load request to the RAN; receiving a base station image load complete response sent by the RAN; sending a virtual base station creation complete response to the third-party server, where the virtual base station creation complete response includes a virtual base station ID. The present invention can realize creation of a virtual base station. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296414 | METHOD OF SELECTIVELY APPLYING A PDCP FUNCTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a wireless communication system and terminal for providing a wireless communication service, and more particularly, a method of selectively applying a PDCP function based on data characteristic transmitted through a radio bearer in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) evolved from a UMTS, Long Term Evolution (LTE) System or LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) system. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296437 | WIRELESS DATA TRANSFER - Techniques for setting up wireless data transfer are described. In one embodiment, for example, an apparatus may be configured to monitor network traffic. A context or origin of the network traffic may be determined. Control options for setting up a wireless data transfer may be determined and presented to a user. Based upon user input, a control option may be selected. Routing network traffic may be performed based upon the selected control option. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296445 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING PACKET DATA NETWORK TYPE - A method, device and system for managing a packet data network type management are disclosed. The method comprises: a User Equipment, UE, sends a request message to a WLAN AN, wherein the request message carries a packet data network type requested by the UE; the UE receives an acknowledgement message returned by the WLAN AN to the UE, wherein the acknowledgement message carries a packet data network type decided by a network side. It is solved the technical problem in the related art of the waste of the address resources, which is caused by the fact that the addresses corresponding to the packet data network type subscribed by the user in the subscription information are all directly allocated to the UE in advance, thereby achieving the technical effects of reducing the wasted address resources and improving the address resource utilization rate. | 10-15-2015 |
20150303950 | Distributed Software-Defined Radio - A software defined radio (SDR) virtualizes physical-layer processing operations of a radio access network (RAN) communication standard. The SDR comprises multiple components which are distributed across network nodes communicatively coupled by a fronthaul network. The SDR components are coordinated to function as a RAN transceiver. In one aspect, the SDR can simultaneously support multiple RAN communication protocols and function as a personalized virtual base station for each and every client device in the RAN. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304061 | SYNCHRONIZATION AT A RADIO LINK CONTROL (RLC) LAYER ENTITY - Aspects are described for synchronizing a user equipment (UE) and at least one network entity at, for example, a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer entity. The aspects may include receiving a first status packet data unit (PDU). In some aspects, the first status PDU may be a most recent non-erroneous status PDU. Further, the aspects may include receiving a second status PDU. In some aspects, the second status PDU may be received subsequent to receiving the first status PDU. Moreover, the aspects may include determining whether the first status PDU and the second status PDU are transmitted from a same network entity. Additionally, the aspects may include performing a RLC reset based at least in part on a determination being made that the first status PDU and the second status PDU are transmitted from the same network entity. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304072 | Automatic Retransmission in Communications Systems - Automatic retransmission in communications systems. In one embodiment, a portion of data is identified to be retransmitted based on feedback information indicating a negative acknowledgement (NACK) during a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) on a previous transmission of the portion of data. A retransmission mode is selected for the portion of data, from at least a first mode that retransmits the portion of data on at least a first transmitter antenna while transmitting new data on at least a second transmitter antenna, based on first desired transmission characteristics; and a second mode that retransmits the portion of data simultaneously on at least the first and second transmitter antennas, based on second desired transmission characteristics. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304875 | Method and Apparatus for Controlling Cell Aggregation - According to one aspect of the teachings herein, a wireless device operating in a wireless communication network determines the difference in signal arrival times with respect to first and second cells, and the device and/or the involved wireless communication network uses the difference to control one or more aspects of Carrier Aggregation, CA, operation for the wireless device. For example, there may be a maximum timing difference defined for the wireless device, e.g., as a function of its inherent capabilities, and the wireless device may evaluate the timing difference of a second cell that is a candidate of aggregation into its CA configuration, or that may be a candidate for activation as a serving cell within a CA configuration, with respect to a first cell that is already in use as a serving cell for the wireless device. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304890 | Apparatus and Method for Implementing Common Public Radio Interface Negotiation State Machine - An apparatus and a method for implementing a common public radio interface (CPRI) negotiation state machine. The apparatus includes an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) chip and a system on chip (SOC), where the ASIC chip is configured to send an interrupt request to the SOC in condition that n transition paths of m transition paths of the CPRI negotiation state machine need to be processed by the SOC; the SOC is configured to execute the software code according to the interrupt request to generate interrupt configuration information, and send the interrupt configuration information to the ASIC chip, where the interrupt configuration information is used to indicate whether the CPRI negotiation state machine transits to a state pointed by the n transition paths; and the ASIC chip is further configured to control transition of the CPRI negotiation state machine according to the interrupt configuration information. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304975 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF UPDATING COUNTER OF BASE STATION DEVICE - There is provided a base station device capable of achieving synchronization in a wired manner between base station devices in IP-DECT. Thus, according to the base station device, in slave base station devices, synchronization control unit hardware that is connected to Ethernet (registered trademark), and outputs timestamp information and synchronization pulses which includes interval pulses and wide pulses, synchronization control unit software that generates frame numbers based on the timestamp information, and a wireless timing control unit that receives the synchronization pulses generated in the synchronization control unit hardware and the frame numbers generated in the synchronization control unit software, and performs timing control for performing wireless communication with IP-DECT client terminals are provided. The wireless timing control unit includes a frame counter, and the frame counter is updated using the frame numbers with the wide pulses as triggers. | 10-22-2015 |
20150305085 | Mobility management unit and wireless side network element, and method and device for releasing local IP access connection - A method for releasing a LIPA connection is provided, which includes that a MME executes a LIPA connection releasing check according to received LIPA connection releasing auxiliary information, and judges whether to release a LIPA connection of UE; or, a wireless-side network element executes a LIPA connection releasing check according to received LIPA connection releasing auxiliary information, and judges whether to release the LIPA connection of the UE. A device for releasing a LIPA connection, an MME and a wireless-side network element are also provided. According to the technical solutions of the present disclosure, under the condition that a mobile relay supports LIPA, continuity of the LIPA connection of the UE in an Mobile Relay Node (MRN) handover process is ensured, continuity of a LIPA service of the UE is further ensured, and the quality of service for a user and a user experience are improved. | 10-22-2015 |
20150311877 | Automatic Gain Control in a Heterogeneous Mobile Communication Network - The invention refers to performing an automatic gain control—AGC—with respect to a received signal comprising a plurality of consecutive subframes (S | 10-29-2015 |
20150312101 | GEO-REDUNDANT PCRF MRA WITH MPE ALLOCATION VIA IMSI HASHING AND IP INDEXED TABLE - A system includes a wireless access network, a gateway that controls communications between the wireless access network and a packet data network, and a policy-charging-and-rule-function (PCRF). The PCRF includes a routing agent in communication with the gateway and a group of multi-media processing engines (MPEs) that are associated with the routing agent. The routing agent receives from the gateway a request to establish a session for a piece of user equipment, and selects one of the MPEs to handle the session based on an IMSI of the piece of user equipment. The routing agent maintains a table indexed by IP address, and makes an entry therein that points to the selected MPE. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312738 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR OBTAINING IN BUILDING LOCATION DATA FOR VOIP PHONES FROM NETWORK ELEMENTS - An emergency call handling system can route an emergency call received from a caller to an appropriate public safety answering point (PSAP) and provide the PSAP with an emergency response location (ERL) of the caller. The ERL of the caller can include, in addition to a civic address, floor, wing, sector, room, etc., information associated with the caller. The system can include a location information server (LIS) for obtaining and storing the ERLs associated with the callers. A network element, to which the caller's phone is connected, can be configured to store the location information of the caller's phone. The LIS can be configured to store a validated civic address of the network element and obtain the location information of the phone dynamically from the network element. The LIS can then combine the civic address of the network element with the location information of the network element to determine a complete ERL of the caller. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312849 | Method and wireless communication device for conveying neighbor access point information - A method for one of a plurality access points (APs) of a wireless communication system to convey neighbor information to a station is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a compact information of at least one neighbor AP; wherein the compact information is transmitted in a frame and the compact information is used for scanning. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312866 | USER TERMINAL, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - In order to apply power scaling in a signal overlapping period where uplink transmission power exceeds an upper limit, while minimizing deterioration of uplink transmission quality, the present invention provides a user terminal that is capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base stations via a plurality of component carriers in a radio communication system using a system band configurable with the plurality of component carriers, the user terminal having: a transmitting section ( | 10-29-2015 |
20150312883 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FROM COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR PROVIDING VEHICLE INFOTAINMENT SERVICE AND SYSTEM USING THE SAME - The present disclosure relates to a method of data transmission of On-Board Unit for vehicle infotainment service and system using thereof. More particularly, the present disclosure relates to a method of data transmission of a vehicular communication device and a system thereof to receive service advertisement message from other vehicular communication device when failing to receive a service advertisement message that is broadcasted from a Road-Side Unit. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312893 | Signalling for Coordinated Multi-Point Transmission and Reception (CoMP) - A wireless communications method implemented in a transmission point (TP) used in a wireless communications system is disclosed. The wireless communications method comprises receiving, from another TP, channel state information (CSI) for a user equipment (UE), and receiving, from said another TP, user identification for the user equipment, wherein the signaling of the CSI for the user equipment enables user identification for the user equipment. Other methods, systems, and apparatuses also are disclosed. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312956 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, USER TERMINAL, PROCESSOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication control method used in a cellular mobile communication system which comprises a user terminal performing inter-terminal communication that is direct radio communication capable of being performed between user terminals in a state in which a radio connection with a network is established, comprises a step of continuously transmitting, by the user terminal, a search signal for discovering a communication partner of the inter-terminal communication in a constant period when starting searching for the communication partner. | 10-29-2015 |
20150318960 | TRANSMISSION OF ACKNOWLEDGE/NOT-ACKNOWLEDGE WITH REPETITION - In ACK/NAK responses with repetition, the ACK/NAK response from the user equipment to a Physical Downlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH) transmission is repeated in consecutive frames a predetermined number of frames following receipt. This repeat ACK/NAK causes a problem when a PSCCH transmission directed to the same user equipment occurs in consecutive subframes. In a first embodiment, the first ACK/NAK response repeats preempting any ACK/NAK response to the later PDSCH transmission. In a second embodiment, the first ACK/NAK response does not repeat and the ACK/NAK response to the later PDSCH transmission occurs. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319609 | EDCA PARAMETER SET DIFFERENTIATION FOR DIFFERENT DEVICE TYPES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for signaling enhanced distributed channel access (EDCA) parameter sets, with support for different device types. The apparatus typically includes a processing system configured to generate a frame with an indication of a type of device that is to use a particular enhanced distribution channel access (EDCA) parameter set and an interface for outputting a frame containing the TIM IE for transmission | 11-05-2015 |
20150319620 | BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD, RECEPTION METHOD, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - In a communication system including a first base station device, at least one second base station device that has smaller transmit power than that of the first base station device, and a terminal device that is connected with the first base station device or the second base station device, a transmission unit of the second base station device maps per one resource block a smaller number of reference signals than a number of reference signals mapped per one resource block by the first base station device and transmits the mapped reference signals. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319627 | PRIORITY HANDING-BASED OPERATION METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING SAME - An operation method performed by a terminal in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: applying de-prioritization to one or more frequencies in a de-prioritization frequency list; receiving a de-prioritization cancellation command from a network; and handling the applied de-prioritization on the basis of the de-prioritization cancellation command. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319645 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD, AND PROGRAM THAT CALCULATE TRANSMISSION TIME BASED ON DATA RATE - A radio communication method stores a plurality MAC frames for each of a plurality of destinations. The method decides the longest transmission time of transmission times needed to transmit the plurality of MAC frames to each of the plurality of destinations within a fixed period. The method generates a plurality of physical frames for the plurality of destinations to transmit them at the same time by connecting the plurality of MAC frames and adding additional information to each connected MAC frame so as to be a frame length equivalent to a transmission time equal to the longest transmission time. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319744 | METHOD OF REPORTING INFORMATION ON UE STATE PERFORMED BY UE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING SAID METHOD - A method of reporting information on a UE state performed by UE in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: generating information on a UE state; transmitting the information on the UE state to a network; obtaining, from the network, configuration information generated based on the information on the UE state; and operating based on the configuration information. The information on the UE state includes at least one of UE activity specifying a frequency at which a UE communicates with the network, and an activity state of the UE determined based on the UE activity. | 11-05-2015 |
20150326283 | ON-BOARD UNIT, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - An on-board unit includes a first antenna and a second antenna, a traffic data service communicating section corresponding to a traffic data service; a billing service communicating section corresponding to a billing service, a switch which switches a connection relation between each of the first antenna and the second antenna and the traffic data service communicating section and the billing service communicating section, a control section which controls the switch. When the operation mode is switched from the traffic data service mode to the billing service mode, the on-board unit is set to a switching communication mode in which one of the first antenna and the second antenna is connected with the traffic data service communicating section and the other is connected with the billing service communicating section. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326296 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING GENERIC HIERARCHICAL PRECODING CODEBOOKS - A base band unit, BBU, in a wireless cellular heterogeneous network, the BBU being provided in a transmission node cluster, TNC, of transmission nodes, TNs, of neighbouring cells of the wireless cellular heterogeneous network, wherein the BBU comprises generic hierarchical precoding codebooks, CBs, each CB comprising cluster precoding matrices, CPMs, and each CPM is provided for a possible combination of active TNs within the TNC. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326324 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT UTILIZATION OF RESOURCES FOR INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION AND SUPPRESSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for transmitting interference related control information in order to improve reception performance of a UE which receives a downlink signal, in a cellular mobile communication system based on an Long Term Evolution-Advanced (LTE-A) system. A communication method of a UE according to an embodiment of the present invention includes receiving information on a resource allocation unit of an interference signal from an eNB; performing blind detection using information on the resource allocation unit of the interference signal; performing error-correcting coding using a transmission parameter for interference and a result obtained by the blind detection; and decoding reception data. According to an embodiment of the present invention, a reception performance of the UE can be improved through interference cancellation and suppression. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326341 | METHOD AND TRANSMITTER FOR CHANNEL CODING AND MODULATION IN THE FREQUENCY DOMAIN OF ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY-DIVISION MULTIPLEXING WIRELESS NETWORKS - The method comprising: applying, by a transmitter, a Forward Error Correction to an information block to be sent to a receiver and modulating said information block prior to its transmission, wherein the transmitter has knowledge of a channel frequency response seen by the receiver and the applying and modulating are performed at a variable-rate, at the transmitter side, by: transforming the information block into a number of smaller packets denoted as codeblocks fitting the input sizes accepted by the Forward Error Correction; selecting, a set of modulation and coding schemes to be independently applied to each of the codeblocks; including, information about the selected set of modulation and coding schemes within part of physical resources devoted to user data by reserving specific subcarriers and OFDM symbols; and mapping, said information within physical resources devoted to user data and not reserved for said selected set of modulation and coding schemes, first in order of ascending OFDM symbols and then of ascending subcarriers. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326408 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO TRAINING FIELD DESIGN FOR INCREASED SYMBOL DURATIONS - Methods, devices, and computer program products for improving training field design in packets with increased symbol durations are disclosed. In one aspect, a method of transmitting a packet on a wireless communication network is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a preamble of the packet over one or more space-time-streams, the preamble including one or more training fields configured to be used for channel estimation, the one or more training fields each comprising one or more symbols of a first symbol duration. The method further includes transmitting a payload of the packet over the one or more space-time-streams, the payload comprising one or more symbols of a second symbol duration, the second symbol duration greater than the first symbol duration. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326619 | ON-DEMAND REGISTRATION FOR IMS SERVICES - A device may receive service information associated with an internet protocol multimedia subsystem (IMS) service. The IMS service may be provided via an IMS network. The service information may include information that identifies a terminating device that is to receive the IMS service. The device may cause registration trigger information to be provided to the terminating device based on receiving the service information. The registration trigger information may be provided to the terminating device to cause the terminating device to register to the IMS network to allow the terminating device to receive the IMS service. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326637 | OPTIMAL USE OF MULTIPLE CONCURRENT INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) DATA STREAMS FOR VOICE COMMUNICATIONS - Examples are disclosed for hosting a communication session between a hybrid mobile device and a second communication device in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. A communications server functions as a bridge service between the hybrid mobile device and the second communication device enabling the exchange of multiple concurrent IP packet data media streams over multiple different IP based networks between the hybrid mobile device and the communications server. The communications server determines a packet quality for each corresponding packet in the multiple concurrent IP packet data media streams and creates a blended IP packet data media stream by selecting the highest quality packet from among the multiple concurrent IP packet data media streams. On the send side, the communications server receives a single IP packet data media stream and simultaneously fully and partially encodes it to be sent out over the multiple different IP based networks to the hybrid mobile device. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326689 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING COLLABORATIVE CONTENT - An example approach for enabling content to be distributed based on user and device related execution criteria is described. A collaboration platform determines one or more execution criteria for at least one device based, at least in part, on presence information, capability information, characteristic information, or a combination thereof of at least one other device within proximity of the at least one device. The collaboration platform also determines an execution of the one or more content items based, at least in part, on one or more execution criteria associated with the one or more content items. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326733 | OPTIMAL USE OF MULTIPLE CONCURRENT INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) DATA STREAMS FOR VOICE COMMUNICATIONS - Examples are disclosed for hosting a communication session between a hybrid mobile device and a second communication device in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. A communications server functions as a bridge service between the hybrid mobile device and the second communication device enabling the exchange of multiple concurrent IP packet data media streams over multiple different IP based networks between the hybrid mobile device and the communications server. The hybrid mobile device determines a packet quality for each corresponding packet in the multiple concurrent IP packet data media streams and creates a blended IP packet data media stream by selecting the highest quality packet from among the multiple concurrent IP packet data media streams. On the send side, the hybrid mobile device fully and partially encodes an IP packet data stream to be sent out over the multiple different IP based networks to the communications server. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327051 | DISTRIBUTED MOBILITY ANCHORING FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and an information handling system configured to select a mobility anchor point for a mobile device in a distributed mobility anchor point network may comprise collecting information about movement behavior or data transfer behavior of the mobile device, or tunneling overhead of two or more base stations. A mobility anchor point associated with a first base station may be assigned to the mobile device if the mobile device is connected to the first base station for at least a predetermined amount of time, if the mobile device transfers at least a predetermined amount of data via the first base station, or device if a tunneling overhead of the first base station is less than a predetermined level. In some embodiments, a centralized mobility anchor may be assigned to the mobile device if the mobile device is highly mobile and there is no identified base station to which the mobile device is frequently connected. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327052 | Techniques for Managing Network Access - Computer-implemented systems, methods, and computer-readable media are provided for managing access of a wireless device to a network based on one or more policies. In accordance with some embodiments, a request for authorization to associate a wireless device with a network is received. A policy associated with the network is retrieved from a storage device in response to the request. A determination is then made as to whether information included in the request satisfies a condition in the policy. If the information satisfies the condition, a response is transmitted granting authorization to associate the wireless device with the network. If the information does not satisfy the condition, a response is transmitted denying authorization to associate the wireless device with the network. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327053 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, CAPABILITY OPENNESS GATEWAY, AND METHOD FOR OPENING WIRELESS PIPE CAPABILITY - Embodiments of the present invention provide a communications system, a capability openness gateway, and a method for opening a wireless pipe capability. The system includes: a COGW and at least one wireless pipe network element, where a first interface is provided between the COGW and the capability openness object, and a second interface is provided between the COGW and the at least one wireless pipe network element; the COGW is configured to converge a capability of the at least one wireless pipe network element through the second interface, and supply the capability of the at least one wireless pipe network element to the capability openness object through the first interface; and the capability openness object is configured to use the capability of the at least one wireless pipe network element, thereby implementing openness of a wireless pipe capability | 11-12-2015 |
20150327058 | MOBILE NETWORK DEVICE MULTI-LINK OPTIMIZATIONS - The disclosed embodiments support mobility internal and external to enterprise networks. Service providers provide mobility by providing Home Agent functionality corresponding to each Enterprise network. In this manner, mobility may be provided to Mobile Nodes both internal and external to their enterprise networks. Moreover, data packets may be transmitted by Mobile Nodes to Correspondent Nodes, whether they are within their enterprise network, the Service Provider network, or the Internet. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327078 | Base Station and Method Thereof - There is provided a base station (BS) ( | 11-12-2015 |
20150327083 | Mobile Terminal, Base Station and Methods Therein - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a mobile terminal for requesting access to a wireless communication system. The mobile terminal receives broadcasted system information that indicates a first available resource of a contention based channel. The mobile terminal derives a second available resource of the contention based channel based on the first available resource of the contention based channel. The mobile terminal further transmits an access request preamble mapped to the second available resource to access the wireless communication system. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327115 | METHOD FOR REPORTING BUFFER STATUS AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE THEREOF - There is provided a method for reporting buffer status. The method may comprise: establishing a first MAC entity for a first eNodeB and a second MAC entity for a second eNodeB; identifying the first MAC entity on which an uplink data is to be transmitted among the first and second MAC entities, if the uplink data becomes available to be transmitted; and triggering a buffer status report (BSR) for the first MAC entity. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327118 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA THROUGH DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Exemplary embodiments provide a method and apparatus for transmitting data through a device-to-device (D2D) communication between user equipments (UEs), the method including: generating, at a first UE, first D2D data, the first D2D data corresponding to a transport block (TB) unit; and transmitting, from the first UE to a second UE, the first D2D data through at least one D2D communication resource, the at least one D2D communication resource being based on a sub-RPT (sub-resource pattern for transmission). An RPT defined in a D2D resource pool is configured based on the sub-RPT, and the sub-RPT indicates the at least one D2D communication resource for the transmission of the first D2D data among at least two D2D communication candidate resources. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327121 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments of a system and method for communicating acknowledgments in a wireless network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a method of wirelessly communicating acknowledgements includes receiving a first signal on a first subchannel from a second wireless device. The method may include transmitting a block acknowledgement of the first signal on a subchannel. The first wireless communication device may not receive a block acknowledgement request to transmit the block acknowledgement. In some embodiments, a method of communicating block acknowledgements includes transmitting a first transmission to a first wireless device on a first subchannel and a second transmission to a second wireless device on a second subchannel. The method may include receiving a first block acknowledgement from the first wireless device and a second block acknowledgement from second wireless device. The first and second block acknowledgement may be received on one of the first and second subchannels. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327148 | Heterogeneous Self-Organizing Network for Access and Backhaul - This application discloses methods for creating self-organizing networks implemented on heterogeneous mesh networks. The self-organizing networks can include a computing cloud component coupled to the heterogeneous mesh network. In the methods and computer-readable mediums disclosed herein, a processor determines if a user equipment (UE) should hand over its service from a base station to a multi-radio access technology (RAT) node, based on heuristics including one or more of: a distance traveled over a time T | 11-12-2015 |
20150327157 | EXTENSIBLE SOLUTION FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE DISCOVERY MESSAGE SIZE - A method for providing an extensible solution for discovery message size includes determining a capsule size at a layer one protocol of a user equipment operating in a cellular network. The capsule size is forwarded to a layer two protocol of the user equipment where it is adjusted to accommodate layer two overhead. The adjusted capsule size is then forwarded to a layer three protocol. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327163 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING MOBILITY ANCHOR IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a pre-5 | 11-12-2015 |
20150327194 | SERVICE CONTINUITY DURING LOCAL BREAKOUT IN A FEMTOCELL - Service continuity when a user equipment (UE) employing local breakout mechanisms at a femto access point (FAP) for a communication session and moves out of the femto coverage area is disclosed. In particular, a network change detection component can be employed to detect when the UE, attached to the FAP, changes its connection from the femto network to the macro network. Further, an active communication session can exist between the UE and a device/service/application on a local Area network (LAN) connected to a FAP, and/or the Internet, which utilizes local breakout at the FAP. When the UE moves out of the femto network, a context management component can be employed to seamlessly resume the communication session, via the macro network. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327197 | METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR ADJUSTING TIME, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIA AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - The embodiments of the present invention provide a method and apparatus for adjusting time, a computer-readable storage media and a computer program product. In an embodiment of the present invention, the method can comprise determining a time adjustment amount based on at least a history frame number for a cell, a history timestamp corresponding to the history frame number, a current frame number for the cell, and a current timestamp corresponding to the current frame number; and adjusting time on the mobile device based on the time adjustment amount. With the embodiments provided in the present invention, the time on the mobile device can be adjusted in a simply manner and thus the accuracy of the time is improved at a low cost. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327211 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND POSITION MANAGING APPARATUS - A mobile node includes a plurality of transceivers, has a network conforming to network-based mobility as its home link and performs position registration to a positional managing apparatus and performs position registration to the position managing apparatus through a foreign network by position registration conforming to host-based mobility. In mobile node and position managing apparatus, a plurality of routes passing through the home link and the foreign link are established. Accordingly, when the mobile node has the plurality of transceivers, it can simultaneously connect to the home link and the foreign link through respective transceivers, to perform communication. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327286 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES FOR PRIORITIZING INTER-FREQUENCY MEASUREMENTS - Systems and methods for prioritizing inter-frequency measurement are disclosed herein. User equipment (UE) may be configured to communicatively couple to an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) Node B (eNB). The eNB may determine a priority for performing each of a plurality of inter-frequency measurement. The eNB may indicate the priority of each measurement to the UE. The eNB may transmit lists of higher priority and lower priority measurement objects. The lists may be separate and/or concatenated. Alternatively, or in addition, each measurement object may include a priority indicator, or the priority may be determined from the type of measurement object. In some embodiments, the eNB may provide indications of normal priority and low priority measurement objects and/or indications of normal priority and high priority measurement objects. The UE may perform measurements according to the indicated priorities. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327326 | METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING SPECIFIC TERMINATION CAUSE CODES IN TERMINATION REQUESTS - A method includes a wireless mobile device communicating with a wireless network via an evolved high rate packet data (eHRPD) interface. The wireless mobile device may receive a vendor specific network control protocol (VSNCP) packet such as a terminate-request packet, for example, that indicates the wireless network has requested a PDN disconnection. The VSNCP packet includes a cause code that indicates a reason for the PDN disconnection request. The wireless device may use the cause code to determine the reason for the PDN disconnection request. Accordingly, in response to receiving the VSNCP packet, the wireless mobile device may perform one or more operations in an effort to resolve any issues that may have caused the PDN disconnection request. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327327 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY, USER EQUIPMENT AND METHODS FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION - Embodiments of a Mobility Management Entity (MME) to support packet-switched (PS) services in a network in accordance with Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearers are disclosed herein. The MME may receive, from a User Equipment (UE), an indicator of Machine Type Communication (MTC) operation, which may indicate that the UE operates as an MTC UE. The MME may, at least partly in response to a determination of UE inactivity on an EPS bearer, transmit a bearer release message for release of an S5/S8 bearer included in the EPS bearer. In some embodiments, the indicator of MTC operation may include a permission indicator from the UE for the release of the S5/S8 bearer. In some embodiments, the indicator of MTC operation may include an indicator of transmission of small blocks of data or transmission at an infrequent rate. | 11-12-2015 |
20150333856 | End-to-End Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Packet Transmission Delay Measurement Apparatus and Method - In a wireless call between two mobile phones, metrics of conversational latency between the two parties determines a measure of Quality of Service (QoS) for the one or more carriers of real-time transport protocol RTP packets. Packages of metrics are collected at the two terminal devices, each of which may have an independent local clock. A Quality of Service estimation apparatus transforms metric packages into a pair of probability distribution functions for a plurality of real-time transport protocol packets between two endpoints. The offset between the two independent local clocks is determined or eliminated. A key performance indicator is determined for End-to-End RTP stream delay by transforming the timestamps associated with transmission and reception at user equipment hosting a QoS agent. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333881 | METHOD FOR CARRIER AGGREGATION TRANSMISSION AND APPARATUS FOR REALIZING CARRIER AGGREGATION TRANSMISSION - A carrier aggregation transmission method and apparatus are provided. The method includes: bearing N carriers in a preset band, where N is a positive integer greater than 1, and a nominal bandwidth values of the carriers are less than or equal to 5 MHz; aggregating the N carriers, to make nominal channel spacing between adjacent carriers among the N carriers is integral multiples of 0.2 MHz; and transmitting the N aggregated carriers. Besides, by further appropriately setting the chip rate corresponding to the carriers with different nominal bandwidths, the performance of small-bandwidth and narrow-bandwidth aggregation systems is efficiently improved, and existing hardware and algorithms can be reused. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334202 | METHODS CIRCUITS DEVICES SYSTEMS AND ASSOCIATED MACHINE EXECUTABLE CODE FOR EFFICIENT DELIVERY OF MULTI-UNICAST COMMUNICATION TRAFFIC - Disclosed are systems and methods for the delivery of multi-unicast communication traffic. A multimedia router is adapted to analyze and identify contents which it handles and one or more access nodes are adapted to receive one or more of the identified contents, cache contents based on said identification; and use cached contents as substitutes for redundant traffic, received by the same access node. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334509 | METHOD AND UNIT FOR PROCESSING TRIGGERING INFORMATION OF MTC DEVICES - Provided is a method for processing triggering information of Machine Type Communication (MTC) devices. The method includes: an MTC-IWF receiving indication information sent by an MTC server, wherein the indication information is used for triggering multiple MTC devices at a same time; the MTC-IWF determining that at least two of the multiple MTC devices belong to different MTC groups; and the MTC-IWF forwarding triggering information to the multiple MTC devices. Through the technical solution, multiple MTC devices not belonging to the same MTC group can be triggered, thereby improving the efficiency of triggering the MTC devices. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334534 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A POSITION OF A MOBILE DEVICE BY AN ACCESS POINT - A method and system for determining a position of a mobile device in an indoor environment by an access point is provided. The method includes obtaining identity information of the mobile device. The method includes extracting signal characteristics of the mobile device corresponding to the identity information. Further, the method includes determining the position of the mobile device based on the signal characteristics of the mobile device. The position of the mobile device is determined based on the signal characteristics of the mobile device received from a plurality of access points along with the information of the plurality of access points such as location information and identity information of the access points. The determined position is sent to the mobile device. The access point implements robust multipath mitigation algorithms while determining the position of the mobile device as there is no battery power limitation at the access point. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334633 | Method, Apparatus And System For Policy Control - A method, equipment and system for policy control. The method includes: a trusted Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) access gateway receiving Quality of Service (QoS) information from a 3GPP core network, and sending the QoS information to an Access Controller (AC) or a Broadband Network Gateway (BNG); the AC or the BNG or other fixed network access devices performing admission control and/or resource allocation according to the QoS information. In the technical solution, the interface configuration and policy configuration are performed for the WLAN access gateway in the fixed mobile convergence scenario, thereby the policy control is implemented in the fixed mobile convergence scenario. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334660 | Method of Handling On-Off State of a Cell and Related Communication Device - A method of handling an on-off state of a cell for a communication device comprises receiving a first downlink (DL) control information (DCI) in a first subframe from a network, wherein the first DCI indicates at least one first on-off state of at least one first subframe of a first cell of the network; and determining an on-off state of a second subframe of the first cell according to the first DCI, wherein the at least one first subframe comprises the second subframe. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334742 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RESTRICTED ACCESS WINDOW-BASED CHANNEL ACCESS IN WLAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More particularly, a method and a device for restricted access window-based channel access in a WLAN system are disclosed. The method whereby a station (STA) performs channel access in a wireless communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention may comprise the steps of: receiving restricted access window (RAW) cross-border transmission allowance (CBTA) information from an access point (AP) in case an RAW is allocated to the STA; and performing transmission by the STA on the basis of the RAW CBTA information. In case the RAW CBTA information is configured as a first value, transmission by the STA beyond the border of the RAW may be allowed. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334748 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention disclose a random access method and user equipment, which relate to the field of communications and improve the transmission efficiency and reliability of a UE for sending a message to a base station in a random access process. The specific solution includes: sending a random access preamble sequence to a base station through a first antenna, so that the base station obtains the antenna number of the UE according to the random access preamble sequence, wherein the first antenna is any antenna of multiple antennas of the UE; judging whether a random access response sent by the base station is received within a preset time threshold; and sending a layer 2 or layer 3 message to the base station by using multiple antennas according to a preset rule if the random access response is received. The present invention is applied to the random access process. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334764 | Assignment of Component Carriers in Dual Connectivity Operation - A method comprises obtaining component carrier information for a user equipment, the component carrier information comprising information about one or more component carriers currently configured at the user equipment for dual connectivity operation, and obtaining capability information for the user equipment, the capability information comprising information about a maximum number of component carriers that the user equipment can use for dual connectivity operation. The method comprises configuring one or more component carriers at the user equipment such that a total number of component carriers configured at the user equipment does not exceed the maximum number of component carriers that the user equipment can use for dual connectivity operation, the one or more component carriers configured according to one or more predefined rules and based at least in part on one or more of the component carrier information for the user equipment and the capability information for the user equipment. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334765 | Assignment of Component Carriers in Dual Connectivity Operation - A method in a user equipment comprises receiving, from a network node, a request to configure a first component carrier at the user equipment for dual connectivity operation, and determining whether a total number of currently configured component carriers including the first component carrier associated with the request exceeds a threshold number of component carriers that the user equipment can use for dual connectivity operation. The method further comprises performing one or more component carrier related radio operations based at least in part on the determination of whether the total number of currently configured component carriers including the first component carrier associated with the request exceeds the threshold number of component carriers that the user equipment can use for dual connectivity operation. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334768 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROL OF MULTIPLE AUTONOMOUS MOBILE NODES BASED ON DYNAMIC SITUATIONAL AWARENESS DATA - Techniques for autonomously establishing, maintaining, and repairing of a wireless communication network among multiple autonomous mobile nodes (AMN) are provided. The multiple AMNs are flown towards a first node. A tentacle is established with the first node and extended to cover a second node over a distance, thereby establishing a wireless communication network between the first node and the second node via the multiple AMNs. Any damage to the established wireless communication network or tentacle may be autonomously detected and repaired by using spare AMNs. Further, the communication network may be used to enable autonomous detection, tracking of the second node, as well as autonomous detection of a contamination area, based on data received from one or more sensors onboard the AMNs deployed in the air. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334773 | Wireless Communication Network System Based On Centralized Control And Content Delivery - The present disclosure provides a wireless communication network system based on centralized control and content delivery, comprising a centralized controller, a core network data forwarding unit, a core network data cache unit, and at least one distributed base station. The centralized control and content delivery control can be performed by the wireless communication network system provided by the present disclosure. In this manner, the user experience can be guaranteed, the centralized control can be realized, and the load of the base station equipment can be reduced to the largest extent. At the same time, the data interaction between base station and internet can be reduced, and thus the occupancy of bandwidth resources can be reduced accordingly. | 11-19-2015 |
20150341105 | METHODS FOR EFFICIENT BEAM TRAINING AND COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND NETWORK CONTROL DEVICE UTILIZING THE SAME - A communications apparatus includes a controller and a wireless communications module. The controller selects a first subset of receiving beam(s) from receiving beams supported by a wireless communications module. The wireless communications module uses the receiving beam(s) in the first subset in turns to receive signals transmitted by a network control device for a first stage of beam training. The network control device uses control beams in turns to transmit the signals. The controller further calculates a detection metric for each combination of the receiving beam(s) in the first subset and the control beams, and determines a preferred control beam and a preferred receiving beam according to the detection metrics for the first stage of beam training. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341162 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR EMITTING AND/OR RECEIVING SIGNALS IN AT LEAST TWO SYMMETRICAL TRANSMISSION FREQUENCY BANDS - Device for emitting-receiving signals in two symmetrical frequency bands in relation to a first frequency F | 11-26-2015 |
20150341396 | REGISTERING A TERMINAL INTO A MULTI-SERVICE NETWORK - A system includes a terminal, a wireless access network, an IP telephony network, a core network gateway from the IP telephony network to the public mobile phone network and a network device, which connects the wireless access network to the IP telephony network and adapts the IP telephony network services to be used by utilizing the circuit-switched signaling protocols of the terminal. A location updating request is received from the terminal over the wireless access network. Location updating is performed via a core network gateway. The network device performs user registration to the IP telephony network using a domain name formed by the phone number of the user and the domain name of the network device or the numeric IP address as the address connection to be registered and as location data in the IP telephony network. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341750 | Identifier for device location within wireless communication systems - A wireless communication device (WDEV) includes a communication interface and a processor, among other possible circuitries, components, elements, etc. to support communications with other WDEV (s) and to generate and process signals associated with such communications. The WDEV supports first communications with a first other WDEV and supports second communications with a second other WDEV. The WDEV processes the first communications and the second communications to determine whether the first other WDEV and the second other WDEV are substantially co-located at a physical location. When not co-located, the WDEV processes the first communications and the second communications based on at least one of a ranging or a location protocol to determine location information of the WDEV. Alternatively, when co-located, the WDEV stores information that indicates co-location of the first other WDEV and the second other WDEV. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341769 | Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) E911 Metro Street Address Guide (MSAG) Validation - An overlay list of MSAG-valid addresses is created for use in lieu of (or in addition to) the lat/lon or postal address which otherwise would go with an E911 VoIP 911 call. This overlays the nation with a series of MSAG-addressed polygons, with center points identified in those polygons, and MSAG-valid addresses provided to the PSAPs for those centers, preferably along with the original latitude/longitude coordinates. | 11-26-2015 |
20150349917 | Methods and Node Apparatus for Adaptive Node Communication within a Wireless Node Network - Methods and node devices for adaptively communicate within a wireless node network. In one method, a first node generates an advertising message in a first format, and then broadcasts the advertising message in the first format when in a first state. The first node detects a state change associated with a changed relative environment of the first node. The first node then adapts to the detected state change by altering the first format of the advertising message to a shortened format comprising an identifier for the first node derived from the changed relative environment of the first node. Such a shortened format may be a variable broadcast format, such as a shortened global format, a shortened nested format, and a shortened local format. In another embodiment, one node may instruct another node change broadcasting from the first format to the shortened format based upon a detected state change. | 12-03-2015 |
20150349928 | Multi-cast Optimized Medium Access Method for Wireless Network - Collisions in wireless networks may be avoided by stacking acknowledge messages, relaying the stacked acknowledge messages, and reducing the number of acknowledge frames transmitted as a result of successful stacked acknowledge message transmissions. Additionally, a blind relay setup may be implemented to increase successful transmission rates such that a relay node in a transmission chain is configured to relay a frame without addressing the relay to a specific node. Non-neighboring nodes may receive frames out of order and relay the frames despite the out of order delivery. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350098 | IMPLEMENTATION METHOD FOR APPLICATION FOR SPEAKING RIGHT OF LTE-BASED BROADBAND TRUNKING SYSTEM - A method for implementing the application for speaking right of a Long Term Evolution (LTE)-based broadband trunking system, a Mobility Management Entity (MME), a network subsystem, a broadband wireless access subsystem and the LTE-based broadband trunking system are disclosed. The method includes: the broadband wireless access subsystem sending a trunking speaking right update request to the network subsystem, receiving the trunking speaking right update accept message returned by the network subsystem, and sending the trunking speaking right update accept message to a speaking right seizing terminal; and the broadband wireless access subsystem receiving the speaking right occupation prompt message sent by the network subsystem, and sending the trunking speaking right occupation prompt message and updated configuration information via a multicast control channel of an enhanced Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (eMBMS). | 12-03-2015 |
20150350279 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MEDIA SELECTION FOR MOVING USER - In an example embodiment, a method includes scanning, by an apparatus, for wireless messages associated with presence of a mobile wireless device, while the apparatus is connected to a server. The apparatus reproduces content received from the server. The apparatus maintains measured signal strength of wireless messages received from the mobile wireless device. Then the apparatus relinquished reproducing content received from the server based on information relating to measured signal strength of wireless messages received by another wireless device from the mobile wireless device is greater than the maintained signal strength associated with the mobile wireless device. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350872 | MOBILITY DETECTION FOR EDGE APPLICATIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Various embodiments detect wireless communication device mobility in a wireless communication network. In one embodiment, one or more Internet Protocol (IP) data packets associated with a wireless communication device are analyzed. The wireless communication device is coupled with the edge entity. A determination is made, based on the analyzing, that the wireless communication device is a newly coupled device at the edge entity. A central entity disposed within the wireless communication network is notified that the wireless communication device is currently coupled to the edge entity. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350996 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATIONS ORIGINATING FROM A NON-TERRESTRIAL NETWORK - Embodiments are provided for facilitating text- and voice-based communications that originate from an electronic device connected to a non-terrestrial network. According to certain aspects, the electronic device can be previously registered with a data center and can have an active service or product with the data center. The electronic device initiates a communication request that is intended for a destination device. The data center examines the communication request to identify the electronic device, and modifies the communication request to indicate a subscription associated with the electronic device. The data center transmits the modified communication request to a service provider network for delivery to the destination device. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351013 | Station and Method for Location Aware Network Selection - A method, station and computer readable storage medium used for location aware network selection. A station determines a geographic location of the station, determines at least one predetermined Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) in the geographic location by comparing the geographic location to a database including stored geographic locations and PLMNs known to be present within each of the geographic locations, performs a targeted scan on select channels corresponding to the at least one predetermined PLMN to identify at least one available PLMN from among the at least one predetermined PLMN and selects one of the at least one available PLMN for the station to join. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351039 | UPLINK POWER CONTROL SIGNALING WITH CARRIER AGGREGATION - Technology for providing uplink power control signaling for semi-persistent scheduling with carrier aggregation is disclosed. One method comprises receiving a transmitter power control (TPC) carrier aggregation (CA) physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) configuration information element (IE) identifying a location of information to adjust an uplink power control of a selected component carrier of the UE using semi-persistent scheduling. The TPC-CA-PDCCH configuration IE includes a carrier index value for the selected component carrier of the UE to allow a power level of the selected component carrier to be individually adjusted. A power level of a physical uplink shared channel and/or a physical uplink control channel can be adjusted for the selected component carrier. | 12-03-2015 |
20150358190 | PAPR ADJUSTMENT USING PRECODER DATA - In some examples, data to be transmitted by a transmit node to at least one receive node may be compressed according to one or more sets of compression parameters. One or more estimated peak to average power ratios (PAPRs) to transmit one or more resulting versions of compressed data may be calculated based on precoder data associated with the at least one receive node. A version of the compressed data that has an estimated PAPR that is less than a PAPR threshold value may be sent to the transmit node to transmit to the at least one receive node. Alternately, a version of the compressed data that has an estimated PAPR that is a lowest estimated PAPR relative to at least some other estimated PAPRs corresponding to other versions of the compressed data may be sent to the transmit node to transmit to the at least one receive node. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358480 | SEQUENCE NUMBER REUSE FOR CDR TRANSPORT USING GTP' - Systems and methods that transport Charging Data Records (CDRs) using GTP′ for offline charging. One embodiment comprises a Charging Data Function (CDF) that communicates with a Charging Gateway Function (CGF) of an offline charging system using GTP′. The CDF assembles a GTP′ request for a transaction, assigns a sequence number for the transaction, and assigns a timestamp to the sequence number. The CDF inserts the sequence number in a GTP′ header of the GTP′ request, inserts the timestamp assigned to the sequence number in the GTP′ header of the GTP′ request, and sends the GTP′ request to the CGF. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358483 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADJUSTING SERVICE LEVEL IN CONGESTION - A method for managing congestion in a base station in a mobile communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: requesting user subscription information to a mobility management entity (MME); receiving the user subscription information from the MME; and performing a congestion control in a communication between terminals on the basis of the received user subscription information. According to the embodiment, action may be taken in consideration of the user information and a current congestion state when controlling the congestion in a wireless communication system, and thus side effects resulting from the congestion control may be reduced. Further, the present invention provides a method and device for not charging for dropped packets when performing a packet drop, and thus the congestion control may be performed more easily. Also, the present invention has an advantage of performing the congestion control, according to the type of packets to which congestion control is applied or the type of application or service which has generated packets, at the time of controlling the congestion, thereby minimizing user's inconvenience due to the congestion control. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358791 | SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE FOR MULTIPLE ANTENNA/SERVICES REMOTE RADIO HEAD - One embodiment of the present invention provides a remote radio head (RRH) for a wireless communication system. The RRH includes a first integrated circuit (IC) chip that comprises multiple functional blocks, a second IC chip that comprises at least a frequency up-converter for up-converting outputs of the DAC block to a radio frequency (RF) domain and a frequency down-converter for down-converting RF signals received from one or more antennas, and a plurality of RF front-end components that are packaged into a system in a package (SiP) module. The multiple functional blocks in the first IC chip include at least a processing unit, a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) block, and an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) block. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358850 | CONVEYING SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION TO SERVICE CHAIN SERVICES USING TUNNEL PROTOCOL HEADER ENCAPSULATION FOR MOBILE NETWORK APPLICATIONS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method provided in one embodiment includes receiving, at a first network element, a first data packet of a data flow, wherein the data flow is associated with a subscriber. The method further includes receiving subscriber information associated with the subscriber, and encapsulating the subscriber information with the first data packet to form an encapsulated data packet. The method still further includes determining a service chain including one or more services to which the encapsulated data packet is to be forwarded, and forwarding the encapsulated data packet to the service chain. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358852 | RECEIVER PROCESSOR FOR BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT OF A MULTIPLE RECEIVER REAL-TIME LOCATION SYSTEM (RTLS) - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for an active bandwidth management system for a tag target location system. A method is provided including determining a buffer fullness level for a receive buffer in a receiver in a set of one or more receivers, determining, by the processor hub, a set of buffer elements to be removed from the receive buffer in at least one of the receivers based on the buffer fullness level, and communicating to the one or more receivers to remove from the receive buffers the set of receive buffer elements identified by a sequence number. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358902 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCANNING FOR A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - Techniques for access point acquisition using the location of a mobile device and probabilistic self-learning are described herein. An example of a method of scanning for an access point with a mobile device includes determining a plurality of locations associated with the access point, determining a detection probability of the access point for each location, determining that the mobile device is at one location of the plurality of locations, and performing a scan for the access point wherein a rate of the scan is based on the detection probability for the one location. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358934 | USING A CELL AS A PATHLOSS OR TIMING REFERENCE - Information is communicated indicating whether a cell on a first carrier of a first type is to be used as a reference cell, wherein the reference cell is at least one selected from among a pathloss reference cell and a timing reference cell, and wherein the first carrier of the first type is part of a carrier aggregation that further includes at least a second carrier of a second, different type. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358942 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING DATA THROUGHPUT OF A TUNE-AWAY OPERATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Aspects of the present disclosure relate to wireless communication devices and methods configured to operate with multiple communication protocols in tune-away operations. Some aspects of the present disclosure may improve the legacy tune-away operations at an access terminal. An access terminal establishes a call utilizing a first communication protocol, tunes away from the call to receive cell signaling utilizing a second communication protocol, and tunes back to the call utilizing the first communication protocol. Following the tuning back, during a first predetermined number of subframes and if the size of a reverse link (RL) packet is smaller than a first packet size and larger than a second packet size, the access terminal forces the RL packet to be a low latency (LoLat) packet. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358943 | MULTI-PATH WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - Provided is a process that includes obtaining a directed acyclic graph describing a plurality wireless connections between a plurality of downstream nodes forming a multi-path route to an Internet connected wireless transceiver; determining an encoding kernel specifying transformations to be performed by the plurality of downstream nodes on data received from upstream nodes; transmitting at least part of the encoding kernel to at least some of the downstream nodes; and transmitting data from a data source to a downstream node in the directed acyclic graph specified by the encoding kernel such that the data is conveyed through the multi-hop, multi-path route to the Internet connected wireless transceiver. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358985 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF OBTAINING SCHEDULING INFORMATION OF A DATA CHANNEL - A method for obtaining scheduling information of a data channel is disclosed. The method includes: receiving a set of radio resources for a set of candidate control channels, wherein a part of the set of candidate control channels constitute the enhanced common search space (ECSS) for an enhanced physical downlink control channel (EPDCCH); attempting to decode each candidate control channel to obtain a physical control channel; and obtaining scheduling information of the data channel from the decoded physical control channel. | 12-10-2015 |
20150359025 | Telecommunications Network Responsive to Server-Provided Location Information - The invention relates to a telecommunications network for wirelessly establishing a connection with a terminal located at a location in said network by a server. The terminal is identified by a terminal identifier in the telecommunications network. The telecommunications network contains a first network node and a second network node. The first network node is configured for receiving a data unit for the terminal from the server, that is preferably located outside the telecommunications network. The data unit comprises the terminal identifier. The first network node is being configured for receiving a location identifier indicative of the location of the terminal from the server and for deriving an address of the second network node using the location identifier. The derived address of the second network node is then used for transmitting a first connection request for establishing a connection with the derived second network node. | 12-10-2015 |
20150359027 | Networking method for mobile terminals and mobile terminal - A networking method for mobile terminals is provided, including: dividing a frequency spectrum resource suitable for operation in a mobile communication network into three kinds of frequency bands which are a CB, a LB, and a UB; and establishing, by a calling mobile terminal, a radio communication connection with a called mobile terminal on the CB or the LB or the UB; wherein the calling mobile terminal and the called mobile terminal are implemented by an SDR way. The present disclosure also discloses a mobile terminal. Accordingly, not only a utilization rate of a frequency spectrum resource and a resource usage rate of a base station are improved, a coverage range of the mobile communication network is expanded, but also mobile terminal user experience is improved. | 12-10-2015 |
20150359033 | PATH SWITCHING PROCEDURE FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Session continuity may be maintained when communication devices transition from communicating through network infrastructure (e.g., through a cellular network) to direct mode communications (e.g., a communication path directly between two communication devices). For example, in switching from an infrastructure mode communication path to a direct mode communication path, a method may include: determining a public-facing address corresponding to the infrastructure path; replacing, for a packet that is to be transmitted over the direct mode communication path to a second communication device, a source address field of the packet with the determined public-facing address; and encapsulating the packet with source and destination address fields corresponding to the first and second communication device through the direct mode communication path respectively. | 12-10-2015 |
20150359034 | PDCCH MONITORING REGARDLESS OF DRX CONFIGURATION - PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel) monitoring operation regardless of the DRX configuration is disclosed. The UE operating in a wireless communication system receives DRX (Discontinuous Reception) configuration information from a network. When the UE transmits a specific indication, the UE ignores the DRX configuration information and monitor a PD-CCCH after transmitting the specific indication. | 12-10-2015 |
20150359038 | TRANSDUCER ACCESS POINT - The invention relates to a method and apparatus for exposing (i.e. bridging) data and services offered by low power, low duty cycle transducers (e.g. sensors and actuators) in a standardized format over existing and established home networking technologies. A transducer access point is a functional component that serves as a proxy for health devices and sensors that are off/asleep the majority of the time to conserver power (e.g. battery life). The transducer access point may be implemented as a stand alone device or embedded within a computing device such as a home PC. | 12-10-2015 |
20150365250 | Method of data retransmission in collaborative service transmission and access network gateway thereof - The present invention discloses a method of data retransmission in coordination service transmission and access network gateway thereof. Wherein, the method includes: in coordination service transmission, access network gateway receives the service data requested by the coordination terminal, caches the data and transmits it to the corresponding destination terminal; the access network gateway executes retransmission strategy, and when decides data retransmission is needed, retransmits the cached data to the corresponding destination terminal. The access network gateway is used to receive the service data requested by the coordination terminal, to cache the data and transmit it to the corresponding destination terminal, to retransmit the cached data to the corresponding destination terminal when data retransmission is needed. Using the present invention, to the problem of service data retransmission in coordination service transmission, the service data transmission efficiency is effectively improved. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365374 | PROXY SCHEMES FOR VOICE-OVER-LTE CALLS - A method includes, in a wireless data network, monitoring communication conditions at an intermediate location between a wireless communication terminal and a network element that provides voice-call services over the network to the wireless communication terminal. Upon detecting that the communication conditions are expected to cause the wireless communication terminal to send a notification to the network element, an early notification is sent to the network element on behalf of the terminal. Another method includes detecting a notification in which a terminal notifies a network element of degraded reception performance. A modification, which the network element is expected to perform in a transmission characteristic to the terminal in response to the notification, is predicted. In-flight communication traffic, which is en-route to the terminal and whose transmission characteristic is not yet modified in response to the notification, is intercepted. The predicted modification is applied to the in-flight communication traffic. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365376 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND NETWORK CONNECTION METHOD OF ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and an electronic device are provided for providing a network connection. Gateway address information of a first network is received from the first network. The gateway address information is configured as gateway address information of the electronic device. It is determined whether the configured gateway address information remains valid when the network connection of the electronic device is switched from the first network to a second network. It is determined whether to update the configured gateway address information based on whether the configured gateway address information remains valid. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365535 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR GSM CALL IDENTIFIER - A network node for a GSM network, arranged to receive a TDMA frame comprising a plurality of timeslots, each of which comprises payload from one or more calls. The network node extracts payload from calls and to assigns the extracted payload a corresponding identifier identifying the call of the payload. The network node is also arranged to generate a data packet comprising the extracted payload from calls together with their corresponding identifier, and places the corresponding identifier in a header in the data packet. The network node is also arranged to transmit the data packet to another node in the GSM network. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365832 | WIRELESS DEVICE - A wireless device capable of enabling improvement in reliability of communication, enlargement of cell regions, improvement in PER and improvement in system performance is provided. The wireless device according to an embodiment is a wireless device which transmits information for a counterpart wireless device, and includes a signal processing unit which generates a symbol sequence; a transmission vector calculating unit which converts the symbol sequence into a plurality of transmission symbol sequences, and controls phases of the transmission symbol sequences to be a same phase or an opposite phase based on a channel estimation to the counterpart wireless device; and a plurality of antennas each of which transmits the plurality of transmission symbol sequences. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365877 | MATRIX SWITCH - A matrix switch comprises a number of switching elements configured in a matrix and a controller that operates to dynamically select one or more signal routes via the switching elements. The matrix switch can operate to dynamically route multiple signal routes between antenna ports to one or more transceiver ports, transmitter ports, receiver ports or termination ports. The controller can select the signal routes based on a set of criteria, which can include one or more use conditions, radio resource conditions or propagations conditions. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365883 | METHOD FOR ENABLING THE MANAGEMENT OF AN ACCESS CONTROL LIST, A HOME NODEB MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREFOR - A method for enabling the management of an access control list (ACL) of a Home NodeB (HNB) within a cellular communication network is described. The method comprises receiving an ACL management message originating from a subscriber unit, identifying at least one HNB with which the originating subscriber unit of the received message is registered as being authorised to manage an ACL therefor, and performing at least one ACL management operation for the ACL of the identified HNB in accordance with the received ACL management message. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365887 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, BASE STATION AND USER TERMINAL - A communication control method for linking a cellular communication system with a wireless LAN system comprises: in a cellular base station, a step of storing location information of a wireless LAN access point; a step of acquiring location information of a user terminal connected to the cellular base station; a step of determining, on the basis of the respective location information of the wireless LAN access point and the user terminal, whether or not the user terminal is connected to the wireless LAN access point; and a step of transmitting a scan instruction for the wireless LAN access point to the user terminal when it is determined that the user terminal is connected to the wireless LAN access point. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365912 | Methods and Apparatus to Provide Extended Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Services - Methods and apparatus to provide extended voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) services are disclosed. An example residential gateway comprises a radio frequency (RF) detector to detect a presence of a cellular communication device, a service controller to enable a VoIP communication device when the cellular communication device is present, wherein the VoIP communication device and the cellular communication device are different devices. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365965 | METHODS FOR DETERMINING SIGNALING TIMING AND SCHEDULING TIMING IN DETERMINING UPLINK AND DOWNLINK RECONFIGURATION, AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention provides a method for determining HARQ-ACK feedback timing and uplink scheduling timing, and for managing the synchronous uplink HARQ process during uplink and downlink reconfiguration. The method comprises: when uplink and downlink reconfiguration is performed, determining whether at least one HARQ-ACK feedback associated with the last frame of a previous uplink and downlink configuration cannot be transmitted in the first frame of a current uplink and downlink configuration; and when the HARQ-ACK feedback cannot be transmitted in the first frame of the current uplink and downlink configuration, the HARQ-ACK feedback follows a new timing determined by the previous and the current uplink and downlink configuration. | 12-17-2015 |
20150366000 | ARCHITECTURE FOR RADIO ACCESS NETWORK AND EVOLVED PACKET CORE - As radio access network (RAN) architecture evolves and evolved packet core deployments get more distributed, there is an opportunity to provide significant optimizations of latency and processing. Certain embodiments can provide these and other benefits using vertical aggregation of radio access network and evolved packet core functionalities. A method can include operating a network element as a per-user-equipment control plane entity. The method can also include operating the network element as a first user plane entity (for example, a per-user-equipment user plane entity). The method can further include operating the network element as a second user plane entity. The method can additionally include operating the network element as a per-cell control plane entity. The method can also include operationally interconnecting the per-user-equipment control plane entity, the first user plane entity, the second user plane entity, and the per-cell control plane entity via interfaces. | 12-17-2015 |
20150372698 | SOFTWARE PROGRAMMABLE CELLULAR RADIO ARCHITECTURE FOR TELEMATICS AND INFOTAINMENT - A cellular radio architecture for a vehicle that includes a programmable bandpass sampling radio frequency front-end and an optimized digital baseband. The architecture includes a triplexer having signal paths that include a bandpass filter that passes a different frequency band than the other bandpass filters and a circulator that provides signal isolation between the transmit signals and the receive signals. The architecture also includes a receiver module having a separate signal channel for each of the signal paths in the triplexer, where each signal channel in the receiver module includes a receiver delta-sigma modulator that converts analog receive signals to a representative digital signal. The architecture further includes a transmitter module having a transmitter delta-sigma modulator for converting digital data bits to analog transmit signals, where the transmitter module includes a power amplifier and a switch for directing the transmit signals to one of the signal paths in the triplexer. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372848 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO TRAINING FIELD DESIGN FOR INCREASED SYMBOL DURATIONS - Methods, devices, and computer program products for improving training field design in packets with increased symbol durations are disclosed. In one aspect, a method of transmitting a packet on a wireless communication network is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a preamble of the packet over a number (N | 12-24-2015 |
20150372849 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO TRAINING FIELD DESIGN FOR INCREASED SYMBOL DURATIONS - Methods, devices, and computer program products for improving training field design in packets with increased symbol durations are disclosed. In one aspect, a method of transmitting a packet on a wireless communication network is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a preamble of the packet over a number (N | 12-24-2015 |
20150372874 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND APPARATUS FOR INCORPORATING A CENTRALIZED SELF ORGANIZING NETWORK (SON) IN A NETWORK - In one example embodiment, a Self Organizing Network (SON) element is provided to communicate with at least one Long-Term Evolution (LTE) wireless network and at least one transport communication network. The SON element is operative to obtain information that relates to updated Neighbor Lists from a plurality of enodeBs (eNBs) belonging to the at least one LTE wireless network, and to convey information that relates to the updated Neighbor Lists obtained, to at least one managing entity belonging to the transport communication network. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373173 | UNIFIED USER EXPERIENCE FOR SMART PHONE WITH DEFAULT INTEGRATED VOIP VOICE, VOIP MESSAGING, VOIP VIDEO, AND VOIP CONFERENCING CAPABILITIES - A smart phone includes VoIP circuitry that enables the smart phone to make and receive voice and video calls and text messages over a data network using VoIP. The smart phone also includes GSM circuitry that enables the smart phone to make and receive voice and text messages through a GSM network. A unified user experience is created for sending and receiving phone calls, video calls, text messages, and conferencing over VoIP, as well as for sending and receiving phone calls, enabling conferencing, and text messages over the GSM phone network. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373527 | USER EQUIPMENT DETACH INDICATION TO HOME SUBSCRIBER SERVER - In certain communication systems, such as wireless communication systems, there may be benefit to knowing a user equipment's registration status. For example, there may be benefit to observing a user equipment's registration status via a home subscriber server, including whether the user equipment is attached/detached. The communication system may be for example, a long term evolution (LTE) of the third generation partnership project (3GPP). A method can include determining, in a mobility node, that a user equipment is currently deregistered. The method can also include notifying a subscriber server that the user equipment is currently deregistered, responsive to the determination that the user equipment is currently deregistered. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373531 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENHANCED SYSTEM INFORMATION DECODING - Embodiments of the present invention include devices, systems and methods for enhanced system information decoding. For example, a method for wireless communication by a multi-SIM wireless communication device is described. The method includes determining time codes (TC) associated with system information (SI) messages for a first subscription. The method also includes determining that multiple SI messages for the first subscription are being sent on the same TC. The method further includes prioritizing decoding the SI messages for the first subscription when activity of an additional subscription can be preempted. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373616 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION-SIDE TERMINAL, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROCESSOR - The mobile communication system directly performs user-data communication between a plurality of radio terminals without involvement of a radio base station. The user-data communication directly performed between the plurality of radio terminals is performed by using a part of radio resources assigned to the mobile communication system. The plurality of radio terminals comprise: a transmission-side terminal that transmits the user data; and a reception-side terminal that receives the user data. The reception-side terminal comprises: a reception-side transmission unit that transmits a transmission acknowledgement signal indicating whether the user data transmitted from the transmission-side terminal has been able to receive or not. The reception-side transmission unit transmits the transmission acknowledgement signal to the radio base station. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373629 | DORMANT CELL DETECTION AND REPORT CONFIGURATION - It is provided a method, comprising checking if an indication is received that another cell device will remain in an active state and not enter into a dormant state for a time interval, wherein, in the dormant state, a cell specific reference signal is transmitted less frequently than in the active state; providing a request not to report a detection of an identification signal of the other cell device for the time interval if the indication is received. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373634 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISTRIBUTING CONTENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present invention allows content to be delivered to a mobile terminal over different types of networks in order to efficiently use network resources. Content can be delivered using a select delivery method over a cellular network, a local wireless network, or a broadcast network. Within any of the networks, the content may be unicast to individual mobile terminals using individual content flows, multicast to a group of mobile terminals, or broadcast to any or all of the mobile terminals. Content can be multicast or broadcast to mobile terminals via different ones of the disparate networks. During a content flow, the network through which the content flow is delivered may be changed to allow the mobile terminal to receive the content through a different network. Further, the delivery method used to deliver the content may dynamically change as the number of mobile terminals receiving or requesting the content changes. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373641 | WIRELESS NETWORK CONTROL SYSTEM, WIRELESS NETWORK CONTROL APPARATUS AND WIRELESS NETWORK CONTROL METHOD - A wireless network control system includes a macrocell base station configured to form a macrocell, at least one small cell base station configured to form a small cell disposed within the macrocell, and a control apparatus including a controller configured to execute a process of acquiring a first value indicating a traffic state of a wireless terminal using the macrocell and a second value indicating a traffic state of a wireless terminal using the small cell, and a process of setting OFF the small cell when an added value of the first value and the second value falls within a predetermined range related to the macrocell. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373777 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus includes a determination unit configured to determine whether the communication apparatus has joined a wireless network established with another communication apparatus prior to start of a predetermined service, and a leaving unit configured to perform processing for leaving the wireless network according to a result of determination by the determination unit when the predetermined service ends. | 12-24-2015 |
20150381694 | Bonding of Multiple Concurrent Data Streams Among Multiple Devices - Examples are disclosed for hosting a communication session between a computer device and a destination communication device in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. A communications server receives multiple concurrent IP packet data streams each representative of the same content but received over corresponding multiple communication links. The original IP packet data stream is created by the computer device. At least one IP packet data stream representative of the original IP packet data stream traverses a communication link through a second communication device working in tandem with the computer device before arriving at the communications server. The communications server determines a packet arrival time for each corresponding packet in the multiple concurrent IP packet data streams. The communications server then creates a bonded IP packet data stream by selecting the first to arrive packet for each time slot from among corresponding time slots of the multiple concurrent IP packet data streams. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381695 | Bonding of Multiple Concurrent Data Streams Among Multiple Devices - Examples are disclosed for hosting a communication session between a computer device and a destination communication device in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. A communications server receives multiple concurrent IP packet data streams each representative of the same content but received over corresponding multiple communication links. The original IP packet data stream is created by the computer device. At least one IP packet data stream representative of the original IP packet data stream traverses a communication link through a second communication device working in tandem with the computer device before arriving at the communications server. The communications server determines a highest quality packet for each corresponding packet in the multiple concurrent IP packet data streams. The communications server then creates a bonded IP packet data stream by selecting the highest quality packet for each time slot from among corresponding time slots of the multiple concurrent IP packet data streams. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381696 | Bonding of Multiple Concurrent Data Streams Among Multiple Devices - Examples are disclosed for hosting a communication session between a computer device and a destination communication device in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. A communications server situated in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network is communicable with a computer device and a communication device. The communications server receives an IP packet data stream and establishes a first communication link with the computer device. The communications server also establishes a second communication link with the communication device. The communications server then sends the received IP packet data stream to the computer device over the first communication link and also sends the IP packet data stream to the communication device over the second communication link. The communication device then relays the IP packet data stream to the computer device over one or more additional communication links between the communication device and the computer device. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381697 | Bonding of Multiple Concurrent Data Streams Among Multiple Devices - Examples are disclosed for hosting a communication session between a computer device and a destination communication device in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. A computer device receives multiple concurrent IP packet data streams each representative of the same content but received over corresponding multiple communication links. The original IP packet data stream comes from the communications server. At least one IP packet data stream representative of the original IP packet data stream traverses a communication link through a second communication device working in tandem with the communications server before arriving at the computer device. The computer device determines a packet arrival time for each corresponding packet in the multiple concurrent IP packet data streams. The computer device then creates a bonded IP packet data stream by selecting the first to arrive packet for each time slot from among corresponding time slots of the multiple concurrent IP packet data streams. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381698 | Bonding of Multiple Concurrent Data Streams Among Multiple Devices - Examples are disclosed for hosting a communication session between a computer device and a destination communication device in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. The computer device is communicable with a communications server and a communication device, wherein the communications server situated in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. The computer device creates an IP packet data stream and establishes a first communication link with the communications server. The computer device also establishes a second communication link with the communication device. The computer device then sends the IP packet data stream to the communications server over the first communication link and sends the IP packet data stream to the communication device over the second communication link. The communication device then relays the IP packet data stream to the communications server over one or more additional communication links between the communication device and the communications server. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382132 | Method and Device for Monitoring - Disclosed are a method and device for monitoring. The method comprises: performing monitoring operation, by a gateway, on a monitored object in monitoring configuration information, and obtaining a monitored result (S | 12-31-2015 |
20150382241 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING MOBILE NETWORK SIGNALING - Component for insertion into a cellular communication network to reduce redundant signaling on the network or between the network and other networks, comprises: an extractor, to extract signaling passing the insertion point towards a destination, modify the signaling and reinsert the signaling for sending onwards. The extractor comprises a signal part remover to remove a part determined to be present at the destination; and an inserter for inserting a flag into the signaling to indicate the removal. The modified signal is sent on to the destination where a complementary component reads the flag and reinserts the extracted part from a database of its own. Location update activity often involves redundant transfer of user profiles, which the components herein can save. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382245 | Method and Apparatus for Wireless Transmission of Service Data, and Device - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and an apparatus for wireless transmission of service data, and a device. The method for wireless transmission of service data provided in the present invention includes: receiving a bandwidth information report sent by a base station, where the bandwidth information report carries a service bandwidth that is admissible to the base station; determining, according to the service bandwidth, service data that matches the service bandwidth; and sending the determined service data to the base station. By using the present invention, a transmission mode of service data can adapt to an unstable bandwidth of a wireless network, and service data that can ensure smooth implementation of a service is identified based on prediction of a capability of a base station, thereby achieving improvement of user experience. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382283 | Access Points, Radio Communication Devices, Methods for Controlling an Access Point, and Method for Controlling a Radio Communication Device - According to various embodiments, an access point may be provided. The access point may include: a transmitter configured to transmit restricted access window parameters. The restricted access window parameters may include at least one parameter selected from a list of parameters consisting of: a type parameter indicating which type of restricted access window parameters is represented by the restricted access window parameters; a same group indicator parameter indicating whether a group field is present; and a channel indication presence parameter indicating whether a channel indication is present. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382378 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING A RANDOM ACCESS (RA) PROCEDURE FOR A DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) COMMUNICATION - A method and apparatus are disclosed for performing a RA procedure for a D2D communication. The method includes the UE transmitting a third message to a network, wherein the third message includes at least a first identification of the UE. The method also includes the UE determining that a contention resolution of the RA procedure is successful if the UE receives a fourth message addressed to a second identification of the UE from the network, wherein the first identification is different from the second identification. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382393 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO SUPPORT NETWORK-BASED IP FLOW MOBILITY VIA MULTIPLE WIRELESS ACCESSES FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE - Apparatus and methods to support IP flow mobility (IFOM) via multiple wireless accesses in a wireless device are disclosed. The wireless device initiates network-based IFOM (NB-IFOM) to establish and manage IP flows. Support for NB-IFOM is negotiated during initial attach procedures to either or both wireless accesses and by using packet data network (PDN) connectivity procedures. The wireless device sends routing rules including priorities to apply to both existing and future IP flows or to future IP flows only. The wireless device requests to move IP flows from a source access to a target access. When a new wireless access is added to an existing PDN connection, an identical IP address for the wireless device is allocated as used for the existing PDN connection. The network establishes a GPRS tunneling protocol (GTP) tunnel for the new wireless access while maintaining a previously established GTP tunnel for the existing wireless access. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382398 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATION BETWEEN USER EQUIPMENT (UE) AND SERVING CELL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed for cooperation between UE and serving cell in a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, the method includes the UE receiving an indication of deactivating a cell via broadcast or multicast. The method also includes the UE deactivating the cell based on the indication. | 12-31-2015 |
20160006528 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION FOR INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - A method of a wireless communication device for a cellular communication system is disclosed. According to the method, a signal comprising a first known signal sequence and a second known signal sequence for each of one or more first cells of the cellular communication system is received, and the first and second known signal sequences of each of the one or more first cells are detected based on the received signal. For at least one of the one or more first cells, one of the first known signal sequence, the second known signal sequence, and a combination of the first and second known signal sequences is selected for channel estimation. The selection is based on the detected first and second known signal sequences of the one or more cells. Channel estimation of the at least one of the one or more first cells is performed based on the signal sequence selection. In some examples, the method may further comprise performing interference cancellation of at least one of the first and second known signal sequences of the at least one of the one or more first cells based on the channel estimation and detecting one or more second cells of the cellular communication system after the interference cancellation. Corresponding computer program product, arrangement and wireless communication device are also disclosed. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006778 | Data Routing Optimization - Certain examples accommodate data routing optimizations. An example method includes receiving, by a first playback device, data to be directed to at least a second playback device. The method further includes transmitting non-audio data to the second playback device via a third playback device and transmitting audio data to the second playback device directly. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007191 | NETWORK-CONTROLLED WTRU ADDRESS/ANCHOR SELECTION - A method and apparatus are provided to enable or aid network-controlled selection of an IP address (and anchor) to be used by a WTRU on an application/service basis. In one example, a method is provided for a WTRU to establish a link with a gateway, transmit a query related to a selected application via the gateway, receive an advertisement for an internet protocol (IP) address, and use the IP address to communicate via the gateway with respect to the selected application. It may be assumed that there are more than one possible IP address/anchor available for the WTRU to use, as it might be the case in a mobility environment, in which an operator can provide addresses with different mobility capabilities. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007206 | INTERFERENCE COORDINATION PARTNERSHIP ESTABLISHMENT AND TERMINATION - Coordination of interference handling may be beneficial in a variety of communication systems. In particular, enhanced inter-cell interference coordination may benefit from proper configuration and setup, as well as termination, of partnerships amongst base stations. A method can include determining at a first base station of an interference coordination partnership pair a corresponding partner base station of the pair. The partner base station may not be configured regarding the partnership pair. The method can also include setting up the partnership pair with the partner base station. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007307 | TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OF SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS OVER AN UNLICENSED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM BAND - Techniques are described for wireless communication. A first method includes receiving a primary synchronization signal (PSS) from a base station over an unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band. The PSS may be received on adjacent orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols of a first subframe of a downlink transmission. A user equipment (UE) may be synchronized with the base station based at least in part on the received PSS. A second method includes receiving a channel usage indicator over an unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band, and determining at least one OFDM symbol to monitor based on a time associated with the received channel usage indicator. A PSS may then be received from a base station over the unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band during the determined at least one OFDM symbol, and a UE may be synchronized with the base station based at least in part on the received PSS. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007390 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRIGGERING DEVICES AND DELIVERING SMALL DATA - Method and apparatus are described for delivering triggers and small data. In an embodiment, a receiver may be configured to receive a trigger or small data packet, and a transmitter may be configured to transmit a subscriber information request to see whether a subscriber is present. The receiver may be further configured to receive an identity of a second node on a condition that the subscriber is present. The transmitter may be further configured to transmit the trigger or small data packet to the second node over an interface, the second node configured to create an Internet Protocol (IP) packet with an IP address containing the trigger or small data packet and deliver the IP packet to a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) using the IP address and a default or dedicated bearer of the WTRU. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007391 | NETWORK ACCESS METHOD, APPARATUS, SERVER AND TERMINAL - A method, an apparatus, a server and a terminal of accessing a network are disclosed. The method includes: receiving a first base station identifier and a first terminal identifier of a terminal from the terminal, the first base station identifier being a base station identifier of a first Bluetooth base station acquired by the terminal after establishing a connection with the first Bluetooth base station; obtaining a first access point device associated with the first Bluetooth base station based on the first base station identifier; and sending an access instruction to the first access point device to cause the first access point device to allow the terminal to access a wireless network upon verifying that the terminal has been registered based on the first terminal identifier. Using the embodiments of the present disclosure, a terminal can automatically access a wireless network without the need of a terminal user to perform cumbersome input operations manually, thereby improving the speed of accessing a network. | 01-07-2016 |
20160013877 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR MUD SYMBOL DETECTION AND SYMBOL-LEVEL MUD INTER-CELL PARALLEL INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION IN TD-SCDMA | 01-14-2016 |
20160013892 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, RECEPTION APPARATUS, AND TRANSMISSION APPARATUS | 01-14-2016 |
20160013895 | OPERATING METHOD AND APPARATUS ACCORDING TO DATA DUPLICATE RETRANSMISSION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160013900 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FEEDBACK INFORMATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160014616 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND BASE STATION | 01-14-2016 |
20160014619 | MULTIPLE CELL JOINT DETECTION AND INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION | 01-14-2016 |
20160014621 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING AND PROCESSING POLICY PROFILE RESTRICTIONS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014629 | QoS Verification and Throughput Measurement for Minimization of Drive Test | 01-14-2016 |
20160014637 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENCODING TRANSPORT BLOCK | 01-14-2016 |
20160014682 | CELL IDENTIFICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014684 | INTELLIGENT WIRELESS ACCESS POINT NOTIFICATION | 01-14-2016 |
20160014686 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING SESSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160014706 | TECHNIQUES FOR REPORTING TIMING DIFFERENCES IN MULTIPLE CONNECTIVITY WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS | 01-14-2016 |
20160020887 | COMMUNICATION METHOD OF NODE IN CONTENT CENTRIC NETWORK (CCN) AND THE NODE - Provided is a communication method of a node, including receiving a first interest requesting content from a previous node in a content centric network (CCN), generating a first acknowledgment (ACK) message indicating reception of the first interest in response to receiving the first interest, and sending the first ACK message to the previous node. Provided also is a node that includes structure that is suitable to perform such a communication method. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021146 | ENHANCED IMS SERVICES RESTRICTION AND SELECTION CONTROL FOR MOBILE DEVICES ROAMING IN FOREIGN NETWORKS - A system and method that allows a mobile device to register for IMS services while the mobile device is roaming in a visited telecommunications network is disclosed. The system receives a request for multiple IMS services from a mobile device while the mobile device is roaming in a foreign network. The system uses an identifier of the foreign network and an associated RAT type to query a policy table containing a list of whitelisted IMS services for the foreign network and associated RAT type. The system processes the requested IMS registrations for services that are whitelisted and does not process requested IMS registrations for services that are not on the whitelist. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021218 | CONTROLLING A PARAVIRTUALIZED WIRELESS INTERFACE FROM A GUEST VIRTUAL MACHINE - A method, system and an apparatus to paravirtualize a wireless interface is disclosed. In one embodiment, a method receives a frame of data for a wireless service through a wireless interface of a host device using a processor. If the frame of data is associated with a first type of category, the frame of data is processed through a first standard interface. If the frame of data is associated with a second type of category, the frame is processed through a second standard interface. The method then sends the frame of data processed through the first standard interface or the second standard interface to a guest. A virtual wireless interface associated the guest that is emulating the wireless interface of the host device converts the frame of data processed through the first standard interface to the second standard of communication. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021482 | MANAGEMENT OF TRANSIENT NODES AND MULTIPLE CAPABILITY INSTANCES IN WIRELESS M2M NETWORKS - The embodiments herein provide a method and system for automatically optimizing a Machine-to-Machine (M2M) network including a central controller configured to communicate with a plurality of nodes controlled using one or more hubs. The method including receiving, at the central controller, one or more parameters associated with each node from the one or more hubs in the M2M network, wherein the one or more hubs requests each node using a short range communication to receive the one or more parameters from each node. Further, the method includes identifying, at the central controller, a capability of each node based on a plurality of rules. Furthermore, the method includes performing one or more actions in the one or more hubs to automatically optimize the M2M network based on the identified capability of each node in the M2M network. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021547 | MULTI-BOARD ARCHITECTURE FOR WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER STATION - A transceiver station provides wireless resources including communication features for users in a geographical coverage area including a plurality of cells, each of the plurality of cells being associated with a different combination of at least one carrier and at least one sector of the geographical coverage area. The transceiver station includes a first board and a second board. The first board includes a first L1 processing circuit configured to perform functions associated with providing a first set of the communication features for the users in a first subset of cells from among the plurality of cells. The second board communicatively is coupled with the first board, and includes a second L1 processing circuit configured to perform functions associated with providing a second set of the communication features for the users in a second subset of cells from among the plurality of cells. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021551 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACQUIRING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN ANTENNA ARRAY - A method for transmitting channel state information by a terminal comprises the step of: receiving relation information on a CSI-RS and a physical antenna from a base station by the terminal, the relation information including information on a first CSI-RS and a first physical antenna transmitting the first CSI-RS and information on a second CSI-RS and a second physical antenna transmitting the second CSI-RS; and transmitting first channel state information and second channel state information to the base station on the basis of the relation information by the terminal | 01-21-2016 |
20160021576 | HQOS Control Method, RSG and HQOS Control System - The present application provides an HQoS control method, where the RSG is connected to multiple CSGs, and each CSG of the CSGs is connected to multiple base stations. The RSG configures a bandwidth limitation parameter for each CSG; creates different AAA domains for different IP address network segments, and configures a QoS scheduling parameter in each AAA domain; and determines, according to a configuration parameter of a first base station, a bandwidth limitation parameter of a CSG connected to the first base station, and determines a QoS scheduling parameter of the first base station, where the configuration parameter is used to indicate the CSG connected to the first base station and an AAA domain corresponding to the first base station. The present application greatly migrates a risk from excessively concentrated base station gateways, and ensures that a service packet securely traverses a layer 2 tunnel of a fixed network operator. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021598 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND DATA TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION METHOD THEREOF - A communication network includes base stations. Each base station includes a BS function unit, a terminal function unit, a transfer unit, and an antenna. The antenna receives first uplink data from a subscriber terminal and downlink data transmitted from another base station and transmits downlink data to another base station or a subscriber terminal. The terminal function unit converts the downlink data received by the antenna to second uplink data. The BS function unit demodulates and outputs the first uplink data or the second uplink data as first data, and modulates input second data into downlink data and transmits the downlink data from the antenna. The transfer unit recognizes a communication destination of the first data, and, when a transfer of the first data is required, outputs the first data to the BS function unit as second data. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021604 | SELECTING A NETWORK - For selecting a network, a method is disclosed that includes associating interface executable code with one or more network interfaces, selecting one of the network interfaces responsive to detecting network communication originating at the executable code, and directing the network communication to the selected network interface. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021605 | METHOD FOR SELECTING ACCESS NETWORK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - Disclosed are a method for selecting an access network in a wireless communications system and an apparatus therefor. In a wireless communications system, a method for a terminal to select an access network according to an embodiment of the present invention includes the steps of: receiving the policy information of a first network; receiving the policy information of a second network; determining the load value of a WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) access network; and comparing the load value with a predetermined reference value so as to determine whether the WLAN access network is overloaded. The predetermined value can be determined by comparing first reference information for determination of the WLAN access network overload contained in the policy information of the first network with second reference information for determination of the WLAN access network overload contained in the policy information of the second network. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021606 | CONTROL OF WLAN SELECTION POLICIES IN ROAMING SCENARIOS - The Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) is a function in LTE networks that an operator can use to control how UEs prioritize between different access technologies if non-3GPP access networks such as wireless local area networks (WLANs) are available and can also assist devices to discover available access networks. Schemes are described that introduce flexibility in the control of WLAN selection in roaming scenarios based on HPLMN preferences. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021626 | MONITORING PERIODS FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for determining a monitoring schedule for device-to-device (D2D) synchronization signals. A synchronization cycle may be determined that includes a plurality of monitoring periods. The monitoring periods may be a time between at least two start times of sequential D2D synchronization signals to detect at least one of the D2D synchronization signals. Sub-monitoring periods may be determined based on the duration of the monitoring periods. The sub-monitoring periods may have a cumulative duration the same as the duration of the monitoring period and be scheduled to occur during different monitoring periods of the synchronization cycle. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021628 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING A TIME ALIGNMENT TIMER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING A CARRIER AGGREGATION TECHNIQUE - The present invention involves defining the operation of a terminal for determining which time alignment timer is to be applied to a certain condition when specific time alignment timers operate for each carrier-wave group in the event a wireless communication system uses a carrier aggregation technique. According to the present invention, a terminal may perform communication without malfunctions using a time alignment timer suitable for a certain condition. In detail, a method for a terminal to operate a time alignment timer according to the present invention comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, a message including a timing advance command and an index on a timing advance group (TAG); and operating the time alignment timer for the TAG, wherein the index has a value of 00 when the TAG includes a first cell. In the meantime, a method for a terminal to operate a time alignment timer according to the present invention comprises the steps of: operating a first time alignment timer for a first timing advance group (TAG) including a first cell; operating a second time alignment timer upon receipt of a timing advance command for a second TAG that does not include the first cell; and, if the first time alignment timer has expired, deeming the second time alignment timer to also be expired. In addition, a method for a base station to control a time alignment timer according to the present invention comprises the steps of: determining whether or not an uplink timing of a terminal needs correction; and transmitting a message including a timing advance command and an index on a timing advance group (TAG), wherein the index has a value of 00 when the TAG includes a first cell. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021629 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING A TIME ALIGNMENT TIMER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING A CARRIER AGGREGATION TECHNIQUE - The present invention involves defining the operation of a terminal for determining which time alignment timer is to be applied to a certain condition when specific time alignment timers operate for each carrier-wave group in the event a wireless communication system uses a carrier aggregation technique. According to the present invention, a terminal may perform communication without malfunctions using a time alignment timer suitable for a certain condition. In detail, a method for a terminal to operate a time alignment timer according to the present invention comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, a message including a timing advance command and an index on a timing advance group (TAG); and operating the time alignment timer for the TAG, wherein the index has a value of 00 when the TAG includes a first cell. In the meantime, a method for a terminal to operate a time alignment timer according to the present invention comprises the steps of: operating a first time alignment timer for a first timing advance group (TAG) including a first cell; operating a second time alignment timer upon receipt of a timing advance command for a second TAG that does not include the first cell; and, if the first time alignment timer has expired, deeming the second time alignment timer to also be expired. In addition, a method for a base station to control a time alignment timer according to the present invention comprises the steps of: determining whether or not an uplink timing of a terminal needs correction; and transmitting a message including a timing advance command and an index on a timing advance group (TAG), wherein the index has a value of 00 when the TAG includes a first cell. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021630 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING A TIME ALIGNMENT TIMER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING A CARRIER AGGREGATION TECHNIQUE - The present invention involves defining the operation of a terminal for determining which time alignment timer is to be applied to a certain condition when specific time alignment timers operate for each carrier-wave group in the event a wireless communication system uses a carrier aggregation technique. According to the present invention, a terminal may perform communication without malfunctions using a time alignment timer suitable for a certain condition. In detail, a method for a terminal to operate a time alignment timer according to the present invention comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, a message including a timing advance command and an index on a timing advance group (TAG); and operating the time alignment timer for the TAG, wherein the index has a value of 00 when the TAG includes a first cell. In the meantime, a method for a terminal to operate a time alignment timer according to the present invention comprises the steps of: operating a first time alignment timer for a first timing advance group (TAG) including a first cell; operating a second time alignment timer upon receipt of a timing advance command for a second TAG that does not include the first cell; and, if the first time alignment timer has expired, deeming the second time alignment timer to also be expired. In addition, a method for a base station to control a time alignment timer according to the present invention comprises the steps of: determining whether or not an uplink timing of a terminal needs correction; and transmitting a message including a timing advance command and an index on a timing advance group (TAG), wherein the index has a value of 00 when the TAG includes a first cell. | 01-21-2016 |
20160025838 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a method in a cellular telecommunications network, the cellular telecommunications network comprising at least a first cell and a second cell. The method comprises the steps of transmitting first periodic physical signals, usable by a device to determine its location, to the first cell; and transmitting second periodic physical signals, usable by a device to determine its location, to the second cell. The second periodic physical signals are synchronized with the first periodic physical signals and have a timing offset, such that the first periodic physical signals and the second periodic physical signals are not transmitted simultaneously. The method is characterized in that transmission of data or control signals to the first cell is inhibited when the second periodic physical signals are transmitted to the second cell. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029300 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING LINK IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method and device for configuring a link in a wireless LAN system are disclosed. The wireless link configuration method comprises the steps of: generating a probe request message including wireless service requirements; transmitting the probe request message; and receiving a probe response message, which is a response to the probe request message, from a wireless access device satisfying the wireless service requirements. Therefore, a time for configuring a link between wireless LAN devices can be reduced. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029330 | Method and Apparatus for Configuring Enhanced Timing Measurements Involving Multifarious Radio Links - The present invention addresses challenges associated with making timing measurements involving multifarious radio links. Such measurements are referred to herein as “enhanced” to connote that such timing determinations are being made across multifarious radio links. A radio link will be understood as connecting two radio nodes, and two radio links are considered to be multifarious with respect to each other if they are opposite in terms of uplink and downlink transmit directions, and further if they are associated with different cell identifiers and/or if the two links are between different pairs of radio nodes. The sharing of “enhanced timing measurement” capability information, e.g., between radio nodes and positioning nodes is disclosed. Such information indicates the enhanced timing measurement capability of a radio node. Sharing such information enables another node to determine an enhanced timing measurement configuration to be used by a radio node. | 01-28-2016 |
20160036863 | COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - A method of initiating a voice call via a dialler user interface on a user device in a telecommunications network is provided. The user device comprises at least a first communication client adapted to communicate via a first part of the telecommunications network and a second communication client adapted to communicate via a second, different part of the telecommunications network. The method includes, at the user device, receiving, via the dialler user interface of the user device, user input from a user of the device associated with initiating setup of a communication session, and selecting a given one of the first and second communication clients to pass the user input to for processing, whereby a communication session setup request is transmitted from the given communication client into the respective part of the telecommunications network. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036922 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXTENDED WIRELESS ACCESS GATEWAY SERVICE PROVIDER WI-FI OFFLOAD - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) discovery signal at a wireless network element from a customer premise equipment; requesting that a data session be established at a gateway; receiving an Internet protocol (IP) address; and communicating the IP address to the customer premise equipment. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037328 | NODE SELECTION IN NETWORK TRANSITIONS - The present disclosure relates to methods, systems and apparatuses for transferring a user equipment (UE) connected to a first network (e.g., a LTE network) to a second network (e.g., a Wireless Local Area Network, or WLAN). In particular, the present disclosure teaches methods, systems and apparatuses for selecting and connecting the UE to a gateway (e.g., an evolved packet data gateway (ePDG)) and a network apparatus (e.g., a packet data network gateway (PGW)). By sending the IP address of the gateway and the network apparatus to the UE before the UE disconnects from the first network (e.g., via a Protocol Configuration Option (PCO) message), the UE is able to connect to the gateway and network apparatus directly without consulting a DNS server or a Home Subscriber Server. These techniques can be useful when no DNS server is available and in virtualized, cloud-based networks. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037330 | Methods for Group Management, Scheduling, and Rate Selection for MU-MIMO Using User Location and Other System Parameters - Disclosed herein, one embodiment of the disclosure is directed to a system, apparatus, and method for grouping client devices for simultaneous MU-MIMO transmissions. When client devices are being grouped for simultaneous MU-MIMO transmissions, a first wireless network device may obtain information corresponding to a plurality of client devices that are associated with the first wireless network device. This information may correspond to signals received from one or more of the client devices by each of the wireless network devices other than the first wireless network device. Then, a subset of the client devices may be selected for concurrent communications based, at least in part, on the information corresponding to the plurality of client devices for concurrent communication. Thereafter, the subset of client devices, referred to as the first group, may be concurrently communicated with. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037385 | Interference Mitigation of D2D Communications in Different Coverage Scenarios - The embodiments herein relate to a method in a first D2D UE ( | 02-04-2016 |
20160037442 | METHOD OF MANAGING POWER OF RF CIRCUITS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE UTILIZING THE SAME - A method of locating a mobile device, and a mobile device utilizing the same are provided. The method, adopted by a wireless communication device, includes: searching for a plurality of signal-source types; in response to the searching, determining whether a first type of signal source is available; setting a search configuration based on availability of the first type of signal source; and searching again for the plurality of signal-source types according to the search configuration. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037471 | Suppressing Third Party Registration and Third Party Deregistration Actions - An S-CSCF component within an IMS receives a registration request associated with the UE. The registration request is associated with the UE switching from a first network that provides support for a first feature set to a second network that provides support for the second feature set. Instead of performing registration actions and deregistration actions with an application server in response to the registration request, the S-CSCF compares the feature tags of the registration request with previous feature tags that are associated with currently registered features. The S-CSCF causes a registration action to be performed in response to determining that the current registration request includes a feature tag that is not currently registered. The S-CSCF causes a deregistration action to be performed in response to determining that the current registration request does not include a feature that is currently registered. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037474 | AUTHENTICATION USING DHCP SERVICES IN MESH NETWORKS - A new device is deployed to an area in which a network is provided. The new device may join the network using a single handshake via a neighboring device that is a member of the network and register with a network management system managing the network. If the network is overloaded or has limited bandwidth remaining, the network may refuse to admit the new device, or if the new device is isolated, may force some devices that are members of the network to leave or migrate from the network to allow the isolated device to join the network. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037580 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING DATA FLOWS - An apparatus for facilitating the re-distribution of processing load between a plurality of radio equipment controllers arranged in a daisy chain configuration on a Common Public Radio Interface. The apparatus may be included in each REC and has two framers which may co-operate to forward IQ data of antenna carriers received on a downlink from a preceding REC to a subsequent REC in the chain and a DMA module or channel which can read IQ data from a system memory for onward transmission. In a re-allocation mode, the framer may be reconfigured so that an AxC initially allocated to a preceding REC for processing may be instead, accessed by a second (usually redundant) transmit DMA module included in the apparatus from system memory and transferred to the framer for onward transmission. | 02-04-2016 |
20160043792 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING RECEIVE BEAM GAIN IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure is related to a 5 | 02-11-2016 |
20160043949 | MAKING A FRAME RECEIVE DECISION IN A RECEIVER PHY LAYER - According to an example, a receiver having a physical (PHY) layer may receive a portion of a frame from a transmitter, in which the portion of the frame comprises information available at the PHY layer. A signature of the transmitter may be determined based upon the information available at the PHY layer and a hardware component in the PHY layer may determine whether to continue to receive the frame based upon the determined signature of the transmitter. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044098 | CODING METHODS OF COMMUNICATING IDENTIFIERS IN PEER DISCOVERY IN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate identifying peers based upon encoded signals during peer discovery in a peer to peer network. For example, direct signaling that partitions a time-frequency resource into a number of segments can be utilized to communicate an identifier within a peer discovery interval; thus, a particular segment selected for transmission can signal a portion of the identifier, while a remainder can be signaled based upon tones communicated within the selected segment. Moreover, a subset of symbols within the resource can be reserved (e.g., unused) to enable identifying and/or correcting timing offset. Further, signaling can be effectuated over a plurality of peer discovery intervals such that partial identifiers communicated during each of the peer discovery intervals can be linked (e.g., based upon overlapping bits and/or bloom filter information). | 02-11-2016 |
20160044144 | UMA/GAN KEEP-ALIVE MECHANISM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A wireless communication terminal ( | 02-11-2016 |
20160044441 | MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION PREREGISTRATION - A method and apparatus for machine type communication (MTC) preregistration are provided. The methods provide single or periodic preregistrations and may be machine to machine (M2M) application function (AF) or device (MTC user equipment based). The devices in the system may be divided into groups and accessed by on a group Internet Protocol (IP) address. Two wake up cycles may be provided, one for control and one for uploading information (a reporting cycle). During the control cycle, the devices may wake up and listen to the control channel for any paging messages. Depending on the paging information, individual devices or the entire group may access the system. In the reporting cycle, all the devices may wake up and access the system to connect to the M2M system to upload data. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044469 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A non-transitory computer readable medium stores a program causing a computer to execute a process for transmission and reception of media data including at least one of audio data and video data among multiple terminal apparatuses connected via a network. The process includes receiving a transmission request for the media data from at least one terminal apparatus among the multiple terminal apparatuses; receiving a reception request for the media data from at least one terminal apparatus among the multiple terminal apparatuses; and establishing a communication path to transmit the media data between a terminal apparatus that has made the transmission request among the multiple terminal apparatuses and at least one of terminal apparatuses that have made the reception request among the multiple terminal apparatuses, in a case where the total number of terminal apparatuses that have made the transmission request is less than or equal to a predetermined set value. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044479 | DATA PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a data packet transmission method and a device, which relate to the communications field, so as to reduce a storage burden on a base station in a data transmission process. The method includes: acquiring, by a base station that serves a UE, instruction information of a small data packet; and after receiving a radio resource control message sent from the UE, acquiring, by the base station that serves the UE, the small data packet from a core network device according to the instruction information of the small data packet, and sending the small data packet to the UE. The embodiments of the present invention are used for data packet transmission. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044487 | NETWORK ACCESS METHOD AND APPARATUS, AND NETWORK SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a network access method and apparatus, and a network system. The method includes: receiving, by first user equipment through a wireless fidelity Wi-Fi network, account information sent by second user equipment; sending, by the first user equipment, the account information to a mobility management entity MME, so that the MME establishes, between the first user equipment and a gateway according to the account information, a dedicated bearer serving the second user equipment; and establishing, by the first user equipment, a mapping relationship between identification information of the second user equipment and the dedicated bearer after determining that the establishment of the dedicated bearer is completed, where the identification information of the second user equipment is used for distinguishing the second user equipment that accesses the first user equipment through the Wi-Fi network. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044488 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING PROXIMITY SERVICE - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for managing a user equipment (UE), by a base station (eNodeB), in a wireless communication system supporting a proximity service (ProSe). More particularly, the method comprises the steps of: determining the connection state of a UE; and starting a radio resource control (RRC) inactivity timer when the connection state of the UE is idle, wherein the connection state is determined according to whether the UE performs infrastructure communication and whether the UE performs ProSe communication. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044489 | Providing an Indicator of Presence of a First Access Network that is Capable of Interworking with a Second Access Network - A mobile station receives a control message containing an indicator of presence of a first access network that operates according to a first protocol that is capable of interworking with a second access network that operates according to a second, different protocol. In response to receiving the indicator, the mobile station performs a procedure to establish a personality for the mobile station that specifies the configuration to allow the mobile station to use features of the first access network that enable interworking with the second access network. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044507 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COUNTER MANAGEMENT AND SECURITY KEY UPDATE FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE GROUP COMMUNICATION - A system and a method of counter management and security key update for device-to-device (D2D) communication are provided. The method includes creating by a user equipment, a new packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) entity for a service group wherein a service group is identified by a destination identifier (ID), determining if any PDCP entity of the service group exists or not, generating a new proximity service (ProSe)traffic key (PTK) from a ProSe group key (PGK) corresponding to the service group associated with the new PDCP entity, initializing a new packet counter associated with the service group to zero if the new PDCP entity is a first PDCP entity associated with the service group, generating a ProSe encryption key (PEK) from the PTK and encrypting data packets mapped to the new PDCP entity using the PEK and a packet counter associated with the service group. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044514 | DUAL CONNECTIVITY OF USER EQUIPMENT TO MACRO AND SMALL CELL IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEM - A communications system includes a macro base station, a plurality of UEs (user equipment), a plurality of small cells, and a network through which the macro base station, the UEs, and the small cells communicate with each other, the small cells within a macro coverage area of the macro base station. The macro base station comprises a processor, a memory, and a small cell on/off module which is operable, for each small cell of the plurality of small cells, to: determine an interference metric for the small cell; if the determined interference metric meets a preset condition for the small cell, then determine a loss in signal strength to the UEs associated with the small cell caused by switching off the small cell; and judge whether to switch off the small cell based on at least one of the determined interference metric or the determined loss in signal strength. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044518 | METHODS OF OPERATING RADIO ACCESS NETWORK BASE STATIONS AND RELATED NETWORK NODES - Methods of operating a first base station in a radio access network including a plurality of base stations may be provided. For example, a cell configuration change indicator may be transmitted from the first base station to a second base station responsive to receiving a Radio Link Failure (RLF) Report at the first base station from a wireless terminal or responsive to receiving a Radio Link Failure Indication message from a third base station. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044542 | Traffic Classification Over the Bast Station Subsystem Transport Network - A method, performed by a base station ( | 02-11-2016 |
20160044594 | DYNAMIC CELL CLUSTER INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT SCHEME USING DYNAMIC POINT SELECTION (DPS) OR SEMI-STATIC POINT SELECTION (SPSS) FOR ENHANCED INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT AND TRAFFIC ADAPTATION (EIMTA) - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for interference management. The interference management is based on dynamic point selection or semi-static point selection. The method includes determining interference at a plurality of network nodes. The method includes selecting a transmission point from the plurality of network nodes for a transmission to at least one mobile entity based on the determined interference. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044702 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION AMONGST PARTIES SHARING THE SAME RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for allocating resources of a cell served by a base station among a plurality of operators sharing the cell resources are disclosed. One embodiment is a method including receiving from a central node serving at least the base station, a resource allocation request instructing the base station to reallocate the cell resources among the plurality of operators. The method further includes allocating cell resources among the plurality of operators according to the resource allocation request received from the central node. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044737 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPERATING BUFFER STATE REPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A method of supporting a buffer status report (BSR) associated with a device-to-device (D2D) communication includes: establishing a radio resource control (RRC) connection with an evolved NodeB (eNB) and receiving configuration information associated with a D2D communication from the eNB, the configuration information including information of a resource allocation mode for a D2D data transmission and information of a timer associated with a BSR for a D2D data transmission; determining, by a user equipment (UE), a radio link failure (RLF), the RLF being associated with a connection problem of the RRC connection; initializing a re-establishment process for the RRC connection; canceling all BSRs for a D2D data transmission in response to the determined RLF, the canceled BSRs for a D2D data transmission being associated with a D2D data transmission scheduled by the eNB; and initializing the timer associated with a BSR for a D2D data transmission. | 02-11-2016 |
20160050511 | Over The Air Programming Via A Wireless Network - In a communications system, one or more mobile devices may be programmed through the use of an assigned channel of a logical channel. For example, a broadcast control channel (BCCH) transmission may be received by one or more mobile devices, the transmission comprising a set of instructions to program the mobile devices. The BCCH transmission may be used to program certain mobile devices, such as a type or brand of device, or mobile devices having certain features, such as call waiting. The mobile device may be configured to accept a transmission, such as a packet in a GPRS network, on one channel while rejecting a transmission on other channels. Further, the mobile device may be reconfigured to accept additional channel transmissions or reject currently approved channel transmissions. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050545 | IDENTIFYING DOWNLINK USER PACKETS - A method and apparatus can be configured to transmit, by a first user equipment, a first communication. The method can also receive, by the first user equipment, a group communication. The group communication is directed to a group. The group comprises the first user equipment and a second user equipment. The group communication comprises the first communication. The group communication also comprises an identifier that identifies the first communication of the group communication as originating from the first user equipment. The method can also identify, by the first user equipment, that the first communication of the group communication originates from the first user equipment based on the identifier. The method can also ignore the first communication of the group communication. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050593 | HARQ ADAPTATION FOR ACQUISITION OF NEIGHBOR CELL SYSTEM INFORMATION - A method in a mobile station including receiving an order from a serving cell for system information acquisition of a neighbor cell, wherein the order includes at least a physical cell identifier and a time limit for acquisition of the system information of the neighbor cell, acquiring the system information of the neighbor cell within the time limit for the acquisition of the system information, and reporting at least a part of the acquired system information to the serving cell. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050611 | Data transmission method and system - Disclosed is a data transmission method. The method includes that: when downlink data is transmitted, a master node shunts, on a Radio Link Control (RLC) sublayer, the downlink data to obtain shunted data packets, and sends the shunted data packets to shunting nodes; the shunting nodes process the shunted data packets, and send the processed data packets to a User Equipment (UE); and when uplink data is transmitted, the master node converges data packets sent from the shunting nodes and data packets sent from the UE, and sends the converged data packets to a core network. Also disclosed is a data transmission system. With embodiments of the disclosure, mobile communications system is able to provide an optimized service, a higher bandwidth and better performance. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050619 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) SELECTION RULES - In embodiments, apparatuses, methods, and storage media may be described for identifying a wireless local area network (WLAN) selection preference rule for use by a user equipment (UE) during a re-association procedure of the UE. The UE may use the WLAN selection preference rule to identify a WLAN with which the UE should associate. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050620 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCALABLE AND MANAGEABLE NON-ACCESS STRATUM (NAS) NODE SELECTION FUNCTION FOR EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEMS - A network element having a Non-Access Stratum (NAS) Node Selection Function for discriminating information in order to determine which core network node a signaling message should be sent comprising: a network interface unit configured to interact with a packet network system; a processor with a memory associated with the network interface unit and adapted to: receive the signaling message from an eNB at a selection function; extract header information from Stream Control Transport Protocol (SCTP) of the signaling message; communicate with a database having a persistent application map to determine if there is an association between the header information and a core network entity; if there is an association, forward the signaling message to a selected core network entity; and determine at the selected core network entity which one of a plurality of core network nodes within a core network pool to route the message based on availability of the plurality of core network nodes. | 02-18-2016 |
20160057030 | MONITORING INTERACTIONS WITH AUDIOVISUAL CONTENT - Embodiments of the invention relates to a method for monitoring interactions with audiovisual content, performed by a monitoring device ( | 02-25-2016 |
20160057257 | Handling of Timers - System, methods, entities, and computer program for handling timers in a communication network are described. The communication network comprises a plurality of entities ( | 02-25-2016 |
20160057287 | SS7 MAP/Lg+ TO SIP BASED CALL SIGNALING CONVERSION GATEWAY FOR WIRELESS VoIP E911 - An SS7-based call protocol conversion gateway that translates between circuit-switched SS7 protocols and session initiation protocol (SIP) oriented protocol, allowing an E911 call initiated over a switched network to be routed by a VoIP network. The SS7-based call protocol conversion gateway provides a PSAP with MSAG quality (street address) information about a VoIP dual mode phone user without the need for a wireless carrier to invest in building out an entire VoIP core. Thus, wireless carriers may continue signaling the way they are today, i.e., using the J-STD-036 standard for CDMA and GSM in North America, yet see benefits of a VoIP network core, i.e., provision of MSAG quality location data to a PSAP. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057636 | INCREASING SPECTRAL EFFICIENCY IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - A technology for a user equipment (UE) in a heterogeneous network (HetNet). A modulation order can be selected for transmission from a small cell in the HetNet. A change in a UE state of the RRC idle mode can be identified. A desired coding rate can be identified to apply to the modulation order for a selected modulation and coding scheme (MCS) index. A predetermined transport block size (TBS) can be selected. Data in the TBS can be transmitted from the small cell to a UE using the MCS. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057695 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM, MASTER DEVICE, AND SLAVE DEVICE - An objective of the present disclosure is to provide a wireless communication device that is capable of efficiently searching another wireless communication device that is capable of providing a required service. A master device, when the master device receives an advertisement from a slave device, transmits, to the slave device, a scan request that includes information on a requested service that the master device requires. The slave device, which has received the scan request, decides whether or not the slave device itself is capable of providing the requested services, and transmits, to the master device, a scan response that includes a result of the decision. When the decision result included in the scan response indicates that the slave device is capable of providing the requested service, the master device establishes a connection to the slave device. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057769 | UPLINK ENHANCEMENTS FOR EFFICIENT OPERATION IN SMALL CELL ENVIRONMENTS - In embodiments, apparatuses, methods, and storage media may be described for processes that may be performed in a network with decoupled uplink (UL)-downlink (DL) association. Specifically, if a user equipment (UE) is configured to receive DL transmissions from a macro cell, and transmit UL transmissions to a small cell, hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) or power control (PC) may be described. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057791 | METHOD OF FACILITATING SET UP OF NETWORK CONNECTION, A COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT, AND AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method of facilitating set up of network connection of an electronic device to an external network is to be implemented by a portable communication device, and includes the steps of obtaining connection information which is associated with network connection with the electronic device, establishing wireless network connection with the electronic device according to the connection information, and transmitting an identifier and a password which are associated with a wireless AP to the electronic device so as to enable the electronic device to connect to the wireless AF using the identifier and the password so that the electronic device gains access to the external network via the wireless AP. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057808 | QUALITY OF SERVICE BASED RESOURCE DETERMINATION AND ALLOCATION APPARATUS AND PROCEDURE IN HIGH SPEED PACKET ACCESS EVOLUTION AND LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEMS - A wireless transmit receive unit and method disclose processing communication data in a hierarchy of processing layers including a physical (PHY) layer, a medium access control (MAC) layer, and higher layers. A MAC layer transport format selection device (TFSD) assigns higher layer transmission data to parallel data streams based on data characteristics received from higher layers and physical resource information received from the PHY layer. The TFSD generates transport format parameters for each data stream. A multiplexer component multiplexes transmission data onto parallel data streams in transport blocks according to data stream assignment and transport format parameters generated by the TFSD and outputs the selectively multiplexed transmission data to the PHY layer for transmission over physical resource partitions. The TFSD generates physical transmission attributes such as modulation and coding rate, number of subframes per transmission time interval (TTI), duration of TTI, transmission power, and hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) parameters. | 02-25-2016 |
20160065700 | PDCP OPERATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING DUAL CONNECTIVITY - PDCP operations in a wireless communication system supporting dual connectivity are disclosed. According to this scheme, when the PDCP of the UE receives PDCP PDU from two RLCs, the PDCP reordering is performed first on the received PDCP PDU. Then, deciphering and decompressing are performed after the PDCP reordering. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066251 | ACCESS NETWORK DISCOVERY AND SELECTION - Embodiments of the present disclosure are directed towards devices and methods for identifying preferred access networks based at least in part on access network information including access network assistance information, steering policies, or access commands. In some embodiments, conflicts between access network information and access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF) policies may be rectified in identifying a preferred access network. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066253 | Systems and Methods of Controlling Communication with Multiple Subscriptions and Radio Protocol Stacks - Embodiments include systems and methods of controlling access to radio access protocol stacks within a communication device using a single parameter command. A processor of a communication device may send to a modem an attention (AT) parameter command that includes a parameter identifying two or more protocol stacks from among a plurality of protocol stacks of the communication device. The modem may use the included parameter to identify the protocol stacks from which modem information is to be obtained, and access the information indicated in the AT parameter command. The processor may receive from the modem information related to each of the two or more protocol stacks identified in the parameter included in the AT parameter command. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066293 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REFERENCE TIME ACQUISITION FOR POSITIONING REFERENCE SIGNALS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention provides a muting configuration for reference signal (RS) transmission as a pattern defined by at least the combination of a muting sequence and a reference point. Muting occasions for a given wireless communication network cell ( | 03-03-2016 |
20160066311 | CELL UPDATE PROCEDURE ENHANCEMENTS - Methods and apparatuses for enhanced cell update procedures are presented. In an aspect, an example method may include determining that a first cell update trigger has occurred and generating a first cell update message based on determining that the first cell update trigger has occurred. In an additional aspect, the example method may include determining that a second cell update trigger has occurred subsequent to the first cell update trigger and generating a second cell update message based on determining that the second cell update trigger has occurred. Furthermore, the example method may include determining that at least a portion of the first cell update message is pending transmission at a time that the second cell update message is generated, discarding the first cell update message, and transmitting the second cell update message to a network entity. | 03-03-2016 |
20160069984 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING RELATIONSHIPS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method enables automatic determination that an area covered by an Access Point (AP) of a Wi-Fi Radio Access Network (RAN) overlaps with a cell of a 3GPP RAN. The method comprises, at an entity of the Wi-Fi RAN, obtaining a 3GPP identifier related to a user terminal that is attached to the Wi-Fi RAN and an identifier for an AP of the Wi-Fi RAN to which the terminal is attached. The method further comprises, at the entity, generating and sending a Location Service Request including the 3GPP identifier to a Location Services (LCS) Server associated with the 3GPP RAN, receiving a Location Service Response from the LCS Server that includes information identifying a cell of the 3GPP RAN in which the user terminal is located, and causing storage of an association between the identified Wi-Fi AP and the identified 3GPP cell. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072643 | MODULAR DEVICE AND DATA MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND GATEWAY FOR A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A gateway provides duplex-directional, multimedia ad hoc mesh networking, peer-to-peer direct communications, power optimization, dynamic configuration, and data management, while operating within various devices and network topologies. A multitasking virtual machine monitor for mobile networked devices, that is capable of functional expandability and portability to various operating environments, interoperability with a variety of operating systems, the Gateway Control System (GCS) performs functional capabilities in both a local and a networked topology using local and remote hardware and software. Software within the GCS is partitioned into sequentially, autonomous code, referred to herein as “modules,” each module being configured to communicate with hardware and other gateway modules. Collectively, all gateway modules are referred to herein as the gateway stack (GS). Each member of the GS can be turned on or off, downloaded from a remote site, and dynamically configured. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072959 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IP COMMUNICATION COMPLETION VIA A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and systems for internet protocol (IP) communication completion via a wireless network include receiving a request from a first device to setup an IP telephony communications session with a second device, generating, based on user device data retrieved for the second device, a first message based on a first communication protocol including telecommunication invitation data to complete the IP telephony communications session, sending the first message to the second device, receiving a response message based on a second communication protocol from the second device, and connecting the second device with the first device to establish the IP telephony communications session. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073251 | Device of Handling Open Direct Discovery - A communication device for handling an open direct discovery comprises a storage unit for storing instructions and a processing means coupled to the storage unit. The processing means is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit. The instructions comprise detecting a proximity service (ProSe) Application Code in a discovery message transmitted by an announcing user equipment (UE); and transmitting a discovery notification message to a ProSe function in a home public land mobile network (HPLMN) of the communication device, wherein the discovery notification message comprises a discovery notification for a ProSe Application ID corresponding to the ProSe Application Code. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073285 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING CELL UPDATES WITHIN A SMALL CELL CLUSTER FOR IDLE MOBILITY IN CELL PAGING CHANNEL MODE - An example method is provided in one example embodiment and may include assigning an identifier to each of a plurality of Home Node Bs (HNBs); receiving a cell update for a user equipment (UE) transitioning from a first HNB to a second HNB, wherein the cell update for the UE includes a first identifier associated with the first HNB and wherein the UE is in a cell paging channel (PCH) mode; determining based, at least in part, on the first identifier associated with the first HNB, whether the first HNB is operating within a cluster of HNBs including the second HNB; and withholding registration of the cell update for the UE with an HNB gateway (HNB-GW) if the first HNB is operating within the cluster of HNBs including the second HNB until packet switched (PS) traffic for the UE is received by the second HNB. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073319 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING MULTI-MODAL COMMUNICATION - Systems and methods for a multi-tenant communication platform. At a multi-tenant communication platform, and responsive to authentication of a communication request provided by an external system, a routing address record of the communication platform is determined that matches a communication destination of the communication request. The matching routing address record associates the communication destination with a plurality of external communication providers. At least one communication provider associated with the matching routing address record is selected, and a request to establish communication with the communication destination is provided to each selected communication provider. The communication request specifies the communication destination and account information. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073322 | Proximity Service Authorization Method, Apparatus, and System - A proximity service authorization method, an apparatus, and a system. A first network-side entity receives a first request message sent by first user equipment, where the first request message includes identity information of the first user equipment and an application identifier; and it is determined, at least according to acquired proximity service configuration data of the first user equipment, that the first user equipment can perform a proximity service corresponding to the application identifier. In this way, a first proximity service server authorizes and authenticates two user equipment that require a proximity service. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073328 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING PCRF - First, correspondence relationships between subscribers and PCRFs are preset in HSS, and a same PCRF is configured to subscribers belonging to the same subscriber group. Then, the MME or AF or 3GPP AAA server sends a query message to HSS, obtains the PCRF corresponding to a certain subscriber, and then sends the PCRF information to S-GW or P-GW or ePDG. In this way, S-GW or P-GW or ePDG may send messages related to the same subscriber or the same subscriber group to the same PCRF. A network element may send to the same PCRF messages related to the same subscriber or the same subscriber group as required to be sent to the PCRFs, such that the same PCRF performs a uniform control to all related sessions of the same subscriber or the same subscriber group. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073375 | SIMPLIFIED NOTIFICATION OF NETWORK TRIGGERED REPORTING - SECOND CORE NETWORK NODE (E.G., SGSN) AND METHOD - A first Core Network (CN) node (e.g., Gateway GPRS Support Node), a second CN node (e.g., Serving GPRS Support Node) and a wireless access node (e.g., Base Station Subsystem) are described herein that are configured to efficiently deliver a network triggered report notification to a wireless device (e.g., Internet of Things device). | 03-10-2016 |
20160073443 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENERGY-OPTIMIZED DATA TRANSMISSION USING THE OPC UA PROTOCOL IN RADIO NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for energy-optimized data transmission by OPC UA protocol in radio networks is disclosed. When OPC UA communication is operated in a mobile device, e.g. as mobile access to part of a plant for maintenance, monitoring, parameterization, transmission is frequently implemented by the OPC UA's own request-response based communication behavior. Since the device is rarely able to switch off the transmitter, the battery of the device is very quickly discharged. This poses a problem, particularly in the case of devices that are intended to respond promptly to infrequent warnings or events. However, when a client device is intended to provide notification in relation to one event only, the previous polling, i.e. the periodic interrogation is dispensed with and an alternative notification through means inherent in the mobile network is used. This method uses, for example, a mobile push service supplied by the network provider. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073449 | ACKNOWLEDGMENT PACKET SENDING METHOD AND DEVICE - An acknowledgment packet sending method and device are provided, so as to reduce sending of acknowledgment packets on an air interface, and improve efficiency of air interface resource utilization. After receiving a TCP acknowledgment packet that is sent by a TCP protocol entity unit of a communications device and does not carry data information, an RLC protocol entity unit of the communications device discards the received TCP acknowledgment packet; or determines, according to a sending status of an RLC acknowledgment packet, whether to send a TCP acknowledgment packet to a peer communications device, and performs corresponding processing according to a result of the determining. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080128 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MoCA NETWORK WITH PROTECTED SET-UP - Systems and methods are disclosed for securing a network, for admitting new nodes into an existing network, and/or for securely forming a new network. As a non-limiting example, an existing node may be triggered by a user, in response to which the existing node communicates with a network coordinator node. Thereafter, if a new node attempts to enter the network, and also for example has been triggered by a user, the network coordinator may determine, based at least in part on parameters within the new node and the network coordinator, whether the new node can enter the network. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080279 | SELECTIVE STORAGE AND DELETION IN MOBILE CONTENT DELIVERY NETWORKS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for storing and deleting received data packets over combined vehicular and wireless communications networks. In one example, an apparatus in a vehicular communication network may receive a data packet and may determine whether to store or delete the received data packet based on a ratio of distances between the data packet and its destination address as well as the data packet's source address and its destination address. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080930 | MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT - A method for managing, e.g. subscriptions on a security element of, a mobile device comprises the steps of recognizing a new network and initiating a management step. In order to recognize the new network, information about a network selected by the mobile device is captured. Then, the captured information is evaluated in order to recognize the new network. Further, it is determined whether the captured information satisfies a specified stability condition. If this is the case, the management step is initiated. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080976 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPERATING A TIMER FOR PROCESSING DATA BLOCKS - A timer for processing data blocks is proposed for a receiver of a mobile communications system. If the timer is not running, the timer is started based a data block. The data block has a sequence number higher than a sequence number of another data block that was first expected to be received. If the timer is stopped or expires, the timer is based on a highest sequence number of a data block among data blocks that cannot be delivered to a higher entity. The timer can be used to prevent a stall condition in mobile communications. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081002 | TECHNIQUE FOR ROUTING PACKETS - The invention relates to a technique for forwarding data packets by a gateway device ( | 03-17-2016 |
20160081012 | METHOD FOR MINIMIZATION OF DRIVE TESTS, METHOD FOR COLLECTING TERMINAL INFORMATION, TERMINAL, AND NETWORK ELEMENT - A method for minimization of drive tests, a method for collecting terminal information, a terminal, and a network element, belong to the field of communication technologies. The method includes: in a process of activating a minimization of drive tests MDT task, checking, by a network element, a consent type of a user corresponding to a selected terminal; sending an MDT task activation command to the selected terminal according to a check result of the consent type; after receiving measured data reported by the selected terminal, performing an operation according to a check result of the consent type. In embodiments of the present invention, check on user consent is implemented in a network detection process, thereby avoiding a case that a user equipment is forced to report personal information without permission of the user and improving the user experience. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081046 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESOURCE SHARING FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE AND CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS IN A MULTICELL NETWORK - Embodiments of the disclosure provide a method and apparatus for resource sharing for D2D and cellular communications in a multicell network. The method comprises steps of: acquiring CSI on channels relating to D2D pair and a plurality of cellular users that potentially share resources with the D2D pair; and determining D2D transmit powers of the D2D pair on a plurality of frequency bands allocated to the plurality of cellular users and cellular transmit powers of the plurality of cellular users based on the CSI, to improve throughput of the multicell network. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081048 | USE OF CORRELATION COMBINATION TO ACHIEVE CHANNEL DETECTION - Combinations of correlation results are used to achieve detection of multiple coded signals at a receiver in a wireless communications system. The code applied to signals includes a lower rate code and a higher rate code. The lower rate code is a nested or tiered code such that it comprises at least two code sequences of the higher rate code. The received coded signal is correlated with the higher rate code using a single higher rate correlator to provide a higher rate code correlation result. The higher rate code correlation results are fed to two or more lower rate code correlators that combine multiple higher rate code-correlation results, each using a different lower rate code, to provide corresponding lower rate code correlation results. The presence of at least one coded signal or mutually exclusive coded signals can be determined from the lower rate code correlation results. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081049 | FIXED MULTIPLE ACCESS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Disclosed is a user terminal for wireless communication with a remote access point. The user terminal may include a mapping module adapted to map one or more input data bits to an uplink symbol, a delay module adapted to apply a delay to the uplink symbol, a transmit module adapted to modulate the delayed symbol into a frequency channel, and an antenna being adapted to transmit the modulated symbol to the access point. The delay can be chosen such that the transmitted symbol arrives at the access point simultaneously with a further symbol modulated into the frequency channel and transmitted by a further user terminal. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081106 | ENHANCED RTS/CTS ENABLEMENT AND DETECTION - In an aspect of the disclosure, a method, a computer-readable medium, and an apparatus are provided. The apparatus may be an AP that requests a plurality of STAs to jointly enable and disable an MRP based on at least one of that each STA of the STAs has uplink traffic with the AP or that each STA of a subset of the STAs has a hidden node. The AP receives, from the STAs, information indicating a communication metric while jointly enabling or disabling the MRP. The AP determines, based on the received information indicating the communication metric, whether the joint enablement of the medium reserving procedure improves communication for the plurality of STAs. The AP requests the STAs to jointly enable the medium reserving procedure for subsequent communication when the joint enablement of the medium reserving procedure improves communication for the plurality of STAs. | 03-17-2016 |
20160087744 | DIRECTIONAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for directional synchronization signal signals in a millimeter wave communication system. A user equipment (UE) may receive a narrowband signal component of a synchronization signal for the millimeter wave communications. The narrowband signal component may include correlation information. The UE may use the correlation information to identify a wideband signal component of the synchronization signal for the millimeter wave communications. The UE may search frequencies associated with a first frequency location determined from the correlation information to identify and detect the wideband signal component of the synchronization signal. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088127 | CONFIGURING A DISCARD TIMER - A first wireless access network node receives, from a second wireless access network node, delay information relating to a delay in buffering data at a protocol layer in the second wireless access network node. The first wireless access network node configures a discard timer based on the received delay information for a packet to be sent to a user equipment. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088420 | METHOD FOR SUBSCRIPTION AND NOTIFICATION IN M2M COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method performed in a machine-to-machine (M2M) device comprising a first resource and a second resource, and an apparatus for the same. The method comprises the steps of: adding first condition information to filtering properties of the first resource; receiving, from a first entity, a request message including first information indicating an address corresponding to the second resource and second information indicating an operation to be performed in the device; and transmitting a notification message to a second entity indicated by address information set in the first resource when predetermined conditions are satisfied, wherein the predetermined conditions include (1) a condition that the second resource should correspond to a parent resource of the first resource and (2) a condition that the first condition information should include a parameter corresponding to the operation, and wherein the first resource and the second resource respectively show data structures which are uniquely addressable by using unique addresses. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088457 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION PROCESSING METHOD AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - According to one embodiment, an information processing apparatus includes an execution controller. The execution controller acquires a communication request for requesting data communication with another communication apparatus and controls execution of the communication request by comparing an evaluation value with a threshold, the evaluation value being based on a parameter value obtained through measurement of a wireless communication environment. The execution controller changes the threshold so as to decrease or increase according to a lapse of time after acquiring the communication request. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088458 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An embodiment of the present invention is a method for transmitting and receiving signals between a device and a device in a wireless communication system, comprising the steps of: determining a component carrier wave in which a discovery signal among two or more component carrier waves is transmitted; and detecting a discovery signal on the determined component carrier wave, wherein the component carrier wave in which the discovery signal is transmitted is determined on the basis of one among a frequency band of the component carrier wave, a device ID, a measurement result and a service type. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088513 | WIRELESS DEVICE, METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR CHANNEL CONTENTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Wireless device, method, and computer readable media for channel contention in wireless communication devices. The wireless communication device may include hardware processing circuitry configured to: determine to adapt the channel contention, and configured to adapt the channel contention settings by changing a level of a clear channel assessment (CCA) and adapting at least one additional channel contention setting. The hardware processing circuitry may be configured to adapt the channel contention settings by raising a level of the clear channel assessment (CCA) and by decreasing a power used to transmit, raising a back-off time, or modifying a portion of or parameter to a distributed coordination function (DCF). The hardware processing circuitry may be configured to adapt the channel contention settings by decreasing the clear channel assessment (CCA) and increasing a power used to transmit or decreasing an amount of time to wait after a CCA determines the channel is free. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088517 | Compression of Internet Protocol Version 6 Addresses in Wireless Sensor Networks - A method for managing Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) addresses in a wireless sensor network is provided that includes storing, on a wireless sensor device in the wireless sensor network, a prefix of an IPv6 address in association with a key, forming an address indicator for the IPv6 address, the address indicator consisting of the key and a node address of the IPv6 address, and storing the address indicator in at least one memory location on the wireless sensor device in lieu of the IPv6 address. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088664 | A Node and Method For Establishing Direct Communications - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards providing direct communications between a mobility management node (e.g., SGSN, S4-SGSN or MME) and an MTC-IWF node via a T5 interface. With the use of the direct communications unnecessary queries to a HSS or HLR may be avoided. The direct communications are established by the mobility management node and the MTC-IWF node saving identifying information of the other node. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088676 | SUPPORT BLACKLISTING DEVICES ON WLAN ACCESS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be a core network entity. The apparatus sends a request for a device identifier of a UE to the UE. The apparatus receives a response message including the device identifier of the UE from the UE. The apparatus determines to maintain, establish, terminate or prevent a connection with the UE through WLAN access based on the device identifier of the UE. | 03-24-2016 |
20160094587 | ENHANCING USER EXPERIENCE FOR INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA CORE NETWORK SUBSYSTEM BASED COMMUNICATION SERVICES - User experience is enhanced for Internet Protocol Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (IMS) based rich communication services in telecommunication environments. A system receives, from a user equipment, a session initiation protocol invitation packet to commence a communication session, and as a function of the session initiation protocol invitation packet, displays an access network technology type used by the user equipment to access a network device associated with a multiple access communication network. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094588 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING CALLS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, receiving a request for a voice call at a mobile switching center server, transmitting a mapping query from the mobile switching center server to a database in response to the request for the voice call, route the request from the mobile switching center server to an internet protocol multimedia subsystem for facilitating establishing the voice call when the mapping query is successful in obtaining an internet protocol address for establishing the voice call with a recipient communication device, and routing the request from the mobile switching center server to a second server for facilitating establishing the voice call without routing the request to the internet protocol multimedia subsystem when the mapping query is not successful in obtaining the internet protocol address. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094669 | USE OF PACKET HEADER EXTENSION FOR GEOLOCATION/GEOTARGETING - A method for providing geo-location information in a communication packet is disclosed. The method comprises constructing an IPv6 packet using a client device. Further, the method comprises inserting an extension header into the IPv6 packet. Also, the method comprises determining geo-location information. Next, the method comprises inserting the geo-location information into the extension header. Finally, the method comprises transmitting the IPv6 packet to a communication network. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094685 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD - A telecommunications system for communicating internet packet data in accordance with a first internet protocol (IPV6) via a packet radio network operable in accordance a second internet protocol (IPV4). The system comprises a user equipment operable to request a bearer for communicating internet protocol data according to the second internet protocol (IPV4) to and from a gateway support node of the packet radio network. The gateway support node is operable to establish a tunnelling protocol bearer for communicating the internet packet data to and from the user equipment across the packet radio network. The user equipment is operable in combination with the gateway support node to form an address which is compatible with the first internet protocol (IPv6). The address includes an interface identifier having a tunnel end identifier of the tunnelling protocol bearer which ends at the gateway support node of the packet radio network. The internet packet data is communicated to and from a correspondent node via the gateway support node and the established bearer using internet protocol address which is compatible with the first internet protocol (Ipv6). | 03-31-2016 |
20160094977 | COMMUNICATING WITH A RADIO NETWORK CONTROL NODE IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for communicating with a radio network control node in a communication network. A core network control node receives a first message from a further node. The first message identifies a User Equipment (UE) connected with the radio network control node. The core network control node determines whether an established connection relating to the UE exists between the core network control node and the radio network control node. If not then the first message is forwarded to the radio network control node using the established connection, a first response message is received from the radio network control node and forwarded to the further node. If the established connection does not exist, a second response message is sent to the further node informing the further node that the UE is not connected with the radio network control node. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095042 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF NETWORK BASED IP FLOW MOBILITY WITHOUT UE BASED SIGNALING - Methods apparatus and systems providing a mechanism for policy-based steering of user flows/applications via paths traversing different access networks between multi-homing user equipment (UE) and a gateway device in a manner avoiding UE signaling, wherein the UE address is the same for each path, and wherein the same flow/application paths are selected by both the UE and the gateway device in accordance with-based criteria. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095047 | BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY BEACON DEVICE AND ADVERTISING METHOD - A Bluetooth low energy (BLE) beacon device and a BLE advertising method are provided. The BLE advertising method includes: enabling a broadcast action with different advertising packets simultaneously, wherein the advertising packets include connectable and unconnectable advertising packets; setting advertising time information of the advertising packets; setting advertising data and an advertising packet address code; and executing the broadcast action for the advertising packets in sequence according to the advertising time information and the type of each of the advertising packets. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095089 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR SIGNALING DYNAMIC NETWORK ASSISTED INFORMATION TO A USER EQUIPMENT - At least one example embodiment discloses a system including a network element configured to transmit at least first downlink control information and second downlink control information to a first user equipment (UE) being served by a serving cell, the first downlink control information associated with a first identification and the second downlink control information associated with a second identification, and the second downlink control information corresponding to at least one interfering source. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095126 | MODIFYING PARAMETERS OF A WIRELESS ACCESS NODE - A capability for modifying parameters of a wireless access node is provided. The capability for modifying parameters of a wireless access node may support use of parameter monitoring and computation functions to jointly improve or optimize capacity for voice and data users in wireless networks. The capability for modifying parameters of a wireless access node may include detecting a trigger event associated with the wireless access node, modifying a signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) threshold of the wireless access node responsive to the trigger event, modifying a call admission control (CAC) threshold of the wireless access node based on evaluation of a parameter associated with modification of the SINR threshold of the wireless access node, and further modifying the CAC threshold of the wireless access node based on evaluation of a parameter associated with modification of the CAC threshold of the wireless access node. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095149 | MECHANISM TO ENABLE REJECTION AND CANCELLATION OF REQUEST ACTIONS FROM WIRELESS PEER-TO-PEER DEVICES - Systems, apparatuses, and methods are directed to a first peer-to-peer (P2P) enabled device configured to wirelessly transmit a first request message and a second P2P-enabled device configured to wirelessly receive the first request message. In response to receiving the first request message, the second P2P-enabled device wirelessly transmits a second request message to the first P2P-enabled device, and if the first request message is rejected by the second P2P-enabled device, the second request message includes status control information indicating that the first request message is rejected. In addition, if the first request message is to be cancelled, the first P2P-enabled device transmits another request message to the second P2P-enabled device with status control information indicating that the first request message has been cancelled. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095163 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A SINGLE UNIT SMALL, LOW-POWER BASE STATION SUPPORTING BOTH METRO CELL OUTDOOR (MCO) AND METRO RADIO OUTDOOR (MRO) OPERATIONS - A single unit with a backhaul interface and radio card able to support both metro cell outdoor (MCO) and metro radio outdoor (MRO) operations. The single unit includes a switch used to switch between these operational modes. The single unit is versatile from the standpoint that MCO or MRO operations may be selected at the time of installation, and this selection may be changed at any time while operating. The single unit configuration provides a low power MRO mode requiring up to 80% less power than the MCO mode, as the switching function of the single unit can power down all unused internal components and allow radio signals received at a backhaul interface to be exchanged directly with a radio card. | 03-31-2016 |
20160099793 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND PACKET PROCESSING METHOD - A packet processing method, the method includes, receiving TCP packets from a wireless access point. An A-MSDU packet is created by aggregating TCP ACK frames generated by the received TCP packets. When the current data transmission speed is less than or equal to a first threshold value and timeout for the A-MSDU packet sent to the wireless access point continuously occurs over a first predefined time, a transmission time interval is reduced by the first preset value and the packet size value is re-calculated according to the adjusted transmission time interval. When the current data transmission speed is greater than or equal to the second threshold value and the size of the created A-MSDU packet that achieves the packet size value occurs over a second predefined time, the packet size value is increased by the second preset value. | 04-07-2016 |
20160099914 | DEVICE IDENTIFICATION IN A PICONET - An illustrative example device for communicating in a piconet includes a communication module configured to at least receive signals corresponding to a plurality of other devices, respectively. A first one of the signals indicates that a corresponding first one of the devices is capable of communicating in the piconet. A controller determines a first device name of the first device based on the first one of the signals and determines whether the first device name conflicts with a name of another device currently in the piconet. The controller modifies the first device name if the first device name conflicts with the name of the other device currently in the piconet and assigns the modified first device name to the first device for communications with the first device in the piconet. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100305 | METHODS FOR RESTRICTED DIRECT DISCOVERY - Techniques may be used for restricted direct discovery in proximity services (ProSe). A ProSe function may receive from a discovery wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) a restricted ProSe Application identity (ID) of an application located at the discoverer WTRU requesting ProSe discovery. The ProSe function may derive a first and second ProSe codes for the discoveree WTRU and discoverer WTRU, and provide the ProSe codes to the discoverer and/or discoveree WTRUs. A ProSe application server may receive a revocation message from an announcing WTRU indicating a revoked WTRU. The ProSe application server may provide a ProSe discovery WTRU ID for the revoked WTRU to a ProSe Function. The ProSe function may instruct the announcing WTRU to stop announcing a ProSe code known by the revoked WTRU, and may provide a new ProSe code to at least one WTRU authorized to discover the announcing WTRU. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100350 | A NODE AND METHOD FOR HANDLING INFORMATION CENTRIC NETWORKING BASED COMMUNICATIONS - A base station and wireless device, as well as corresponding methods, for Information Centric Networking (ICN) based communications with radio bearers, to provide a means for using ICN bearers in parallel with standard Packet Data Network (PDN) bearers. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100448 | METHOD FOR SIMULTANEOUSLY RECEIVING LTE AND 1X IN SRLTE DEVICE - Methods, apparatuses and computer readable media are described that configure wireless circuitry of a wireless communication device. The wireless communication device establishes a connection to a first wireless network using first and second receiving signaling chains. In response to detecting a radio frequency tune-away event, the wireless communication device reconfigures only one of the radio frequency signaling chains to receive signals from a second wireless network when a set of receive signal conditions for the second wireless network is satisfied. The wireless communication device reconfigures both of the radio frequency signaling chains to the second wireless network when the set of receive signal conditions is not satisfied. | 04-07-2016 |
20160105787 | Method and System for Discovering User Equipment in a Network - A system and method for discovering user equipment in a network is disclosed. According to one embodiment, a discovery proxy periodically scans an access router that serves a target user equipment and collects an address assignment record of the target user equipment via the access router. The discovery proxy passes the address assignment record to a discovery server, and the discovery server identifies a location of the target user equipment based on the address assignment record of the target user equipment. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105845 | M2M PLATFORM APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SERVICE EXECUTION METHOD - An M2M platform apparatus | 04-14-2016 |
20160105920 | Method and System for Notifying Transport Layer Address - A method and system for notifying a transport layer address are disclosed. The method includes: a first base station sending transport layer address information of an X2 gateway connected to the first base station to a second base station, wherein, the first base station is a home base station (step | 04-14-2016 |
20160112216 | SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC AND PROGNOSTIC ANALYSIS - A black-box gateway device implemented in a vehicle and configured to interface with an engine computer and a plurality of wireless sensors installed in the vehicle, the gateway device can include a transceiver including input ports in communication with conductors that interface with the engine computer installed in an engine of the vehicle, radio frequency communications components comprising dual wireless functionality, including a first functionality for communicating wirelessly within the vehicle and a second functionality for communicating wirelessly over a cellular network disposed outside the vehicle, and one or more antennae that receive wireless signals from the radio frequency components. The transceiver can be configured to wirelessly receive sensor data from the wireless sensors disposed within the vehicle, the sensor data providing information associated with functionality of components of the vehicle. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112217 | TRAFFIC ACCELERATION IN MOBILE NETWORK - A method for enabling traffic acceleration in a mobile telecommunication network. The method includes the steps of receiving, at a Radio Network Node, a reply message from a content delivery provider located outside the mobile telecommunication network; intercepting the reply message; extracting a token from the reply message; comparing the token with a stored token in the Radio Network Node; replacing in the reply message, an Internet protocol IP address of a content delivery provider server with a preset IP address corresponding to an acceleration edge server in the mobile network, when there is a match between the token and the stored token; and sending from the Radio Network Node the modified reply message to a mobile terminal. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112221 | METHOD FOR UE AND USER EQUIPMENT - The disclosure is related to a method used in a user equipment and a user equipment thereof. The UE determines an initialization value of of a scrambling sequence generator in step 1, wherein the initialization value is determined by one or more of a first ID, a second ID and a time slot index; generates a D2D scrambling sequence in step 2; and performs a scrambling operation on a D2D signal by using the D2D scrambling sequence and transmits the D2D signal performed by the scrambling operation. In one embodiment, the second ID is one element in an integer set from 504 to 3080. In the disclosure, the UE performing D2D communication is capable to reuse a formula generating the initialization value of the current PUSCH scrambling sequence generator and the base station is capable to distinguish the D2D signal and the uplink data at the same, so as to avoid occurrence of the severe interference due to the same cell physical ID. The disclosure is capable to support the UE performing D2D communication inside or outside the cell coverage at the same time. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112311 | ENHANCED CONNECTIVITY TO END DEVICES VIA ACCESS POINTS OF WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLAN) - A wireless node of a wireless network maintains link information for a set of layer-2 addresses, each of the layer-2 addresses corresponding to a medium access control (MAC) address of a corresponding device that transmits packets on the wireless network. The link information indicates whether the corresponding device is in an uplink direction or a downlink direction with respect to the wireless node. The wireless node receives a layer-2 packet in one of the uplink direction and downlink directions, the layer-2 packet containing a layer-2 address specifying a destination system, with no layer-2 address in the layer-2 packet indicating that the packet is destined to the wireless node. The wireless node forwards the layer-2 packet to a next wireless device in one of the uplink direction and downlink direction. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112863 | MOBILE STATION, POSITION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A system includes a subscription storage that stores a group identifier for identifying a home base station | 04-21-2016 |
20160112884 | Indication of Wireless Signal Quality - Techniques for indication of wireless signal quality are described. According to various implementations, attributes of a wireless signal are detected and processed to ascertain a quality of the wireless signal. Based on an ascertained signal quality, indicia of the signal quality can be exposed. For instance, an indication of wireless signal quality is communicated to an application and/or service that manages communication of media data. According to one or more embodiments, an application/service may perform one or more actions based on the indication of signal quality, such as a procedure to improve signal quality, a procedure to optimize wireless performance, and so forth. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112885 | DECOUPLING RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) AND BASEBAND PROCESSING - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication. A first device, such as a user equipment (UE) may be configured with a peak data rate that corresponds to the radio frequency (RF) capacity of a modem and a sustained data rate that corresponds to the baseband capacity. The first device may receive a set of data blocks during a transmission burst from a second device. The quantity of data blocks in the burst may be based on the peak data rate. The first device may store time domain samples or frequency tones for the data and then power down the RF components for an interval based on how long it will take to process the data. The first device may then process the data at the sustained data rate. After the rest interval, the first device may power up the RF components and receive another burst of data. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112936 | BLOOM FILTER FOR SERVICE HINT INFORMATION IN ADVERTISEMENTS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure generally relate to using bloom filter hash functions for service hint information in advertisements such as beacons and probe responses. Certain aspects provide an apparatus for wireless communications, such as an access point (AP). The apparatus generally includes a processing system configured to generate a plurality of bitmaps that indicate one or more services known by the apparatus, each bitmap being generated by applying a different set of one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC) based hash functions to one or more service identifications (IDs) of each service, and to generate one or more frames, each frame including one of the plurality of bitmaps and an indication of the set of one or more CRC based hash functions used to generate the bitmap included in the frame, and an interface configured to output the one or more frames for transmission. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112972 | DATA SENDING AND RECEIVING METHODS AND DEVICES - Embodiments of the present invention provide data sending and receiving methods and devices. The data sending method includes: sending a first data transmit power control (TPC) command and first service data to first user equipment (UE) in a first sending time period, so that the first UE performs inner loop power control according to the first data TPC command and receives the first service data; and sending a second preamble transmit power control TPC command to a second UE in a second pre-configured time period, so that the second UE establishes inner loop power control loop according to the second preamble transmit power control TPC command and receives second service data in a second sending time period. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112990 | PAGING OVER A HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK SHARED CHANNEL - An apparatus and methods are provided for paging in a HSDPA connected mode CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state. Preferably, a WTRU is configured to select various PICH information that is broadcast by a base station. The WTRU is preferably configured to receive paging messages, based on the selected PICH information. In one embodiment, a preferred WTRU is configured to receive paging messages, based on a PICH, a HS-SCCH, and a HS-PDSCH. In another embodiment, a preferred WTRU is configured to receive paging messages, based on a PICH and a HS-PDSCH. In both embodiments, a time delay parameter is preferably used so that the WTRU may listen for either the HS-SCCH or HS-PDSCH for a period of time and return to a sleep mode if no paging message is received. | 04-21-2016 |
20160113057 | Communications Device, Apparatus, System, Method and Computer Implementable Instructions Product | 04-21-2016 |
20160113058 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEQUENTIAL FORWARDING CONSIDERING MULTI-FLOW IN DUAL CONNECTIVITY SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method for user equipment receiving multi-flow data with respect to one evolved packet system (EPS) bearer through a macro base station (macro eNB) and a small base station (small eNB) in a wireless communication system supporting dual connectivity. The method comprises the steps of: a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) entity of the user equipment receiving PDCP packet data units (PDU) through the macro base station and the small base station from a PDCP entity of the macro base station; obtaining PDCP service data units (SDU) corresponding to PDCP PDUs; and receiving from the macro base station information related to a sequence timer for the PDCP SDUs through a radio resource control (RRC) message, wherein the PDCP SDUs are indicated by a predefined PDCP sequence number (SN). | 04-21-2016 |
20160119037 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for a cooperative communication according to a portion of the present specification, may include receiving at least one of information related to a radio access point and information related to a user equipment (UE) receiving a service from the radio access point, from the radio access point. The receiving may be performed by using a User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Tunneling Protocol (GTP). | 04-28-2016 |
20160119085 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING SENDING OF GTP MESSAGE, AND DATA SENDING METHOD AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and device for controlling sending of a GTP message, and a data sending method and device. A GTP message sending device receives a no-response time indication of user equipment sent from a GTP message response device, where the no-response time indication indicates a no-response time of the user equipment in an implicit or explicit manner, the GTP message sending device adjusts, according to the no-response time of the user equipment indicated by the received no-response time indication of the user equipment, a time of sending a GTP message, where adjusting the time of sending the GTP message is specifically postponing the time of sending the GTP message as the no-response time of the user equipment increases, or bringing forward the time of sending the GTP message as the no-response time of the user equipment decreases. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119087 | HARQ IMPLEMENTATION FOR DISTRIBUTED BASE STATIONS - A method for operating a distributed base station includes performing Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) processing. The distributed base station comprises a centralized processing entity and distributed remote radio access points, which are coupled to the centralized processing entity via a backhaul connection. The HARQ processing is performed locally by the remote radio access points, by performing an assessment a quality of received data and/or current radio conditions. Based on the assessment, it is decided locally on a necessity of re-transmissions without decoding the received data at the remote radio access points. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119089 | METHOD FOR BIT ERROR RATE DETECTION, AND NETWORK DEVICE - This application provides a method for bit error rate detection, and a device. The method includes: sending, by a first device, a first notification packet to a second device, where the first notification packet is used to instruct the second device to perform bit error rate detection, the first device is an ingress node of a first LSP, and the second device is a downstream node; and receiving, a second notification packet, where the second notification packet carries a second bit error rate, the second bit error rate includes a first bit error rate of a first interface of the second device, and the first interface is an interface that receives an MPLS packet sent by the first device. By using the technical solutions of the present disclosure, the first device can perceive a bit error rate of the second device, thereby helping ensure reliability of MPLS packet transmission. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119163 | BILLING MULTIPLE PACKET FLOWS ASSOCIATED WITH A CLIENT ROUTER - A method includes receiving at a network device, an identifier from a vehicle routing device. The vehicle routing device is configured to identify packet data flows based on an application running on a vehicle client device. The packet data flows are flowing over a communication link between the vehicle routing device and the vehicle client device. The method includes identifying each packet of each flow according to the application that sends or receives packets related to each of the packet data flows, determining an extended header for the one or more packet data flows based on an Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) extension header and a RADIUS vendor specific attributes (VSA) structure, and transmitting, by the vehicle routing device, to the network device, the extended header and the one or more packet data flows. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119770 | METHOD FOR SCANNING NEIGHBORING DEVICES AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - A method and electronic device implementing the same is disclosed. The electronic device includes an antenna, a communication module, and at least one processor. The processor may implemented the method, including determining, by at least one processor, directional information associated with a certain orientation of transmission or reception, transmitting, by a communication module, a scan request message comprising the directional information through wireless communication, and receiving a scan response message responding to the scan request message through the wireless communication. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119772 | HOME AGENT DISCOVERY UPON CHANGING THE MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SCHEME - The invention relates to a method for discovering a home agent serving a mobile node upon the mobile node changing its mobility management scheme in a packet-switched network and the implementation of such method in a mobile node or home agent. In order to propose a home agent discover scheme that maintains session continuity in a seamless manner upon a mobile node changing its mobility management scheme, a mobile node comprises information on its location prior to changing the mobility management scheme to one of the first signaling messages transmitted upon changing the mobility management scheme (home agent discovery message). The receiving node uses this information to identify the home agent serving the mobile node or to provide a hint to the home agent where the mobile node is registered in a response message to the mobile node. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119796 | ACTIVE ANTENNA ARRAY - An ultra wideband active antenna platform can be deployed globally. A plug-and-play radio unit is removably attached to an outside of the active antenna. The PAPR can be removably plugged into a docking station to provide different technology or frequency bands specific for customers in different regions without the costly replacement of the whole antenna. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119856 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNAL - In one disclosure of the present specification, a method is provided for transmitting a reference signal in a small-sized cell. The method for transmitting the reference signal may comprise the steps of: generating, by the small-sized cell, a sequence of the reference signal, based on a physical cell ID and cell load degree; transmitting, by the small-sized cell, the generated sequence of the reference signal on a mapped resource element (RE); and transmitting, by the small-sized cell to a terminal during camp-on, information about the cell load degree used during the generation of the sequence of the reference signal. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119881 | UPLINK POWER CONTROL IN MULTI-USER UNLICENSED WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and systems of providing uplink (UL) transmission power control are provided. The UL transmission power control is provided between access points (APs) and wireless stations in a multi-user (MU) unlicensed wireless network. The disclosed method includes participating in a first wireless communication between an AP and at least one station of a plurality of stations in an unlicensed wireless network, and using an uplink UL transmission power parameter transmitted from the AP to the at least one station to regulate UL power control of UL transmissions between the at least one station and the AP. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119892 | METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR STORING ADDRESS OF NETWORK ANCHOR POINT TO NETWORK SERVER - A method, apparatus and communication system for registering address information of a network anchor point to a network server are disclosed. A network apparatus, such as a mobility management entity, determines whether to register address information of a network anchor point to a network server, and registers the address information of the network anchor point to the network server when determining to do so. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119893 | METHOD OF HANDLING SERVING CELL BECOMING BARRED STATUS, BASE STATION USING THE SAME, AND USER EQUIPMENT USING THE SAME - A method of handling serving cell becoming barred status, a base station (BS) using the same, and an user equipment (UE) using the same are provided. A cell status is changed into barred status is determined, and a first signaling message comprising a cell information indicator is transmitted by the BS, wherein the cell information indicator is used for indicating whether to transmit a second signal message comprising cell re-selection related information. The first signal message comprising the cell information indicator is received by the UE. When the UE determines that the BS switches to the barred status, the UE determines whether to receive the second signal message comprising the cell re-selection related information according to the cell information indicator in the first signal message. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119970 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION AND APPARATUS THEREFOR IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING RECONFIGURATION OF WIRELESS RESOURCE - The present invention relates to a method for detecting control information of a terminal and an apparatus therefor in a wireless communication system supporting reconfiguration of a radio resource. Specifically, the present invention comprises the steps of: counting a discontinuous reception (DRX) timer in accordance with a first uplink-downlink configuration on a system information block (SIB) associated with a previously defined control channel; and monitoring the control channel on the basis of whether a radio resource reconfiguration message is received, wherein, if the reception of the radio resource reconfiguration message is successful, then the control channel is monitored according to a second uplink-downlink configuration indicated by the radio resource reconfiguration message. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119971 | SYSTEM TIMING-AWARE CO-EXISTENCE ON A SHARED COMMUNICATION MEDIUM - Techniques for co-existence on a shared communication medium are disclosed. To foster co-existence, operation of a first Radio Access Technology (RAT) may be cycled between active periods and inactive periods of transmission, on a communication medium shared with a second RAT, in accordance with a Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) communication pattern. One or more cycling parameters of the DTX communication pattern may be set based on a frame structure associated with the first RAT. Transmission may proceed over the communication medium in accordance with the first RAT and the one or more cycling parameters of the DTX communication pattern. | 04-28-2016 |
20160126982 | FRONT-END CIRCUIT - A front-end circuit includes a multiplexer, a circulator, reception ports, and variable filters. A port in the multiplexer is connected to an antenna. A port in the circulator is connected to a port in the multiplexer. The reception ports are connected to a port in the circulator with the variable filters interposed therebetween. The multiplexer outputs a communication signal having a frequency in a low band to the port and outputs a communication signal having a frequency in a middle band to a port. Each of the low band and the middle band includes a plurality of frequency bands. The middle band is a range of frequencies higher than those in the low band and does not overlap the low band. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127154 | TRANSMITTING DEVICE, RECEIVING DEVICE, COMMUNCATION SYSTEM AND INTERPOLATION METHOD - A transmitting device in a wireless communication includes a control module configured to indicate a method out of a plurality of interpolation methods, each of which interpolates channel values in missing subcarriers based on positions of representative subcarriers, which are selected out of the subcarriers defining a frequency band used in the wireless communication, and values in the representative subcarriers, and a transmitting module configured to transmit information about a selected interpolation method. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127426 | SPI HANDLING BETWEEN UE AND P-CSCF IN AN IMS NETWORK - Managing Security Parameter Information (SPIs) to prevent race condition failures begins where a system negotiates SPIs along with associated expiration times, and re-negotiates new SPIs as necessary. The system prevents race conditions that would otherwise occur when both an old SPI and a new SPI are active at the same time. The system accomplishes this by managing the storage and deletion of old SPIs such that only active SPIs are stored on the system for use by a User Equipment (UE) or Proxy Call Session Control Function (P-CSCF). | 05-05-2016 |
20160127850 | CONNECTED CAR DATA LINKS AGGREGATOR - Connected cars are coupled to several communication devices (e.g., embedded devices and/or user equipment (UE) of occupants of the car) having independent data links to a communication network (e.g., cellular network). Peer-to-peer (P2P) protocols can be employed to consolidate and aggregate multiple data links within the car to create an aggregated data link that is shared by the devices. During initialization, a local platform device within the connected car sets up a local tracker and communicates with a backend network device to setup a corresponding remote tracker. The trackers generate virtual data nodes corresponding to the communication devices and facilitate communication between the virtual data nodes and the devices via P2P protocols. Moreover, the P2P protocol technology is overlaid on the application layers of the communication devices without modifications to the devices' hardware and software construction. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127851 | METHOD FOR DEVICE TO CONTROL ANOTHER DEVICE AND THE DEVICE - The present disclosure relates to a sensor network, Machine Type Communication (MTC), Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communication, and technology for Internet of Things (IoT). The present disclosure may be applied to intelligent services based on the above technologies, such as smart home, smart building, smart city, smart car, connected car, health care, digital education, smart retail, security and safety services. The present disclosure relates to control a client device using a server device based on context data indicating a circumstance of a user. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127881 | DISCOVERY SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD OF TERMINAL PERFORMING D2D COMMUNICATION AND TERMINAL USING SAME - Provided are a discovery signal transmission method of a terminal supporting device-to-device (D2D) communication and a terminal device using such a method. The method comprises: directly receiving information on a specific discovery signal (DS) transmission mask or receiving discovery signal configuring information; selecting the specific DS transmission mask or one DS transmission mask from among a plurality of DS transmission masks indicated by the DS configuring information; and transmitting a discovery signal on the basis of the selected DS transmission mask. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127889 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - Mobility management may be utilized to effectuate handover and route packets of information to one or more radio access technologies and/or cells/access points based on network, UE conditions, device location, and/or network entity location. Packet routes, device addresses, handover functions, dynamically may be adjusted based on the best radio technology, cell layer, service provider specified criteria, or the like. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127947 | DYNAMIC USE OF RTS AND/OR CTS FRAMES - A method is described for intelligently toggling request-to-send/clear-to-send (RTS/CTS) mechanisms on and off for a channel between an access point and a client device. In particular, the method may determine one or more characteristics related to the transmission of frames and toggle RTS/CTS based on these characteristics. The characteristics may describe (1) the airtime used to transmit frames, (2) the data rate used to transmit frames, (3) traffic measurements on the wireless channel between the access point and the client device, (4) overlapping basic service set traffic measurements, and (5) the number of data units included in frames to be transmitted. By toggling RTS/CTS on and off based on network/channel and frame conditions/characteristics, the method ensures that RTS/CTS is enabled when frame collisions are likely and/or channel capacity is low and disabled when frame collisions are unlikely and the overhead associated with RTS/CTS outweighs the potential benefits. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127977 | SINGLE FREQUENCY DATA NETWORK - A Next Generation Data Network is described. It leverages the “cloud” for data management, frequency data computation and analytics. Packets are transmitted at times and in directions to minimize interference between nodes in the network. The wireless network is a single frequency network that permits limited non-line-of-sight operation. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128020 | Tracking Area Planning - A method is disclosed for improved tracking area planning and handling, comprising: assigning a single tracking area code to a plurality of eNodeBs at a messaging concentrator gateway, the messaging concentrator gateway situated in a network between the plurality of eNodeBs and the core network; storing, at the messaging concentrator gateway, at least one indicator of a last known location of a user equipment (UE) other than the single tracking area code; receiving a paging message from the core network at the messaging concentrator gateway for a UE; and performing a paging sequence using the at least one indicator to identify a set of eNodeBs to page the UE, thereby allowing larger tracking area list sizes to be used without increasing signaling traffic between the radio access network and the core network. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128103 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD AND TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE SAME - Provided are a random access method and a terminal supporting the random access method. The terminal may monitor a state of a channel, when the state of the channel is idle, attempt a packet transmission at a first packet transmission probability, and transmit a packet including the first packet transmission probability. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128130 | MIXED-MODE MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) ON A SHARED COMMUNICATION MEDIUM - Techniques for co-existence on a shared communication medium are disclosed. To foster co-existence, operation of a first Radio Access Technology (RAT) may be cycled between active periods and inactive periods of transmission, on a communication medium shared with a second RAT, in accordance with a Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) communication pattern. An identifier may be selected for association with the first RAT. A channel reservation message associated with the second RAT may then be transmitted, over the communication medium, to reserve the communication medium for one of the active periods, the channel reservation message including the identifier. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128133 | Managing Bandwidth Availability in a Mobile Telecommunications Network - A mobile wireless device for use with a mobile telecommunications network. The device comprises a controller unit for switching one or more mobile services on and off, and a user interface unit configured to receive user inputs indicating that a user wants to turn the one or more mobile services on or off and for causing the controller unit to act accordingly. The device further comprises a network signalling unit for identifying times at which the user switches the one or more mobile services on and off and for signalling those times to an entity within or connected to said mobile telecommunications network. | 05-05-2016 |
20160134340 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING FEEDBACK IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for processing feedback implemented in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) comprises estimating a channel matrix. The effective channel is calculated and a precoding matrix is selected. Feedback bits are generated and transmitted. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134344 | DUAL QR DECOMPOSITION DECODER FOR SPATIALLY MULTIPLEXED MIMO SIGNALS - Wireless communication systems employ Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) transmission and reception schemes to increase performance and the data rate of the system. A new approach for an SM-MIMO decoder that operates on the received symbols in parallel is presented. The new approach performs two different QR decompositions of the estimated channel matrix and produces two triangular matrices; one is right triangular and the other is left triangular. The modified systems of equations are processed in parallel. After each M-algorithm process has processed half of the total number of stages, total search space for the globally optimal transmitted symbol vector is reduced significantly. Finally, cumulative distance metrics are computed for the symbol sequences in the reduced search space and a global minimum is determined for the estimated transmitted symbol vector. This approach offers faster processing of the SM-MIMO signals and reduced distance metric computations and search operations. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134351 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING, BY TERMINAL, CSI FEEDBACK IN HETEROGENEOUS CELLULAR ENVIRONMENT - Disclosed are a terminal and a CSI feedback method of a terminal, comprising the steps of: classifying cells into one or more cell groups on the basis of cell IDs of the cells set in a terminal; selecting a representative cell representing other cells belonging to each cell group; and transmitting a CSI feedback on the cells belonging to each cell group to at least one of a macro cell and a small cell connected to the terminal by using the representative cell selected in each cell group. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134405 | REDUCING PROCESSING TIME FOR LOW LATENCY TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - Techniques are provided for reduction of processing requirements for portions of a received transmission relative to processing requirements for other portions of the same transmission. Different coding schemes may be employed for portions of a data transmission. In some examples, a tail portion of a data transmission may use a coding scheme that had reduced processing requirements relative to other portions of the data transmission. The reduced processing requirements may allow a receiver to generate an acknowledgment of receipt relatively quickly, which may reduce latency for acknowledging receipt of a transmission. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134521 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A processor device processes data samples of a radio signal in a mobile communication system. A fast flow process is executed for all samples and a batch process is executed at intervals on a subset of the samples. The device has a processor for executing the flow process via a local buffer memory, a memory interface to a system memory, and a memory controller for controlling storing of the data samples in the buffer memory. The processor establishes whether data samples in the local buffer memory are part of the subset, and if not, invalidates them after executing the flow process. The memory controller provides free memory space in the local buffer by transferring data samples which are not invalidated from the local buffer memory to the system memory, and by invalidating processed samples. Advantageously the local buffer may be relatively small, while the amount of data transferred to the system memory is limited. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135010 | USER PLANE LOCATION BASED SERVICE USING MESSAGE TUNNELING TO SUPPORT ROAMING - An improved User Plane location based service (LBS) architecture and message flow, enabling seamless User Plane location based services even when a mobile or wireless device has roamed among different carrier networks. The present invention overcomes constraints inherent in the current protocol for roaming support defined by the Secure User Plane Location Service specification. A location system is enabled to automatically fall back to a message tunneling mechanism to ensure the security of a communication path between the location service system and the target wireless device, ensuring that the communication path is uninterrupted as the wireless device travels. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135033 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIRMING VALIDITY OF CANDIDATE COOPERATIVE DEVICE LIST FOR CLIENT COOPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and an apparatus for confirming the validity of a candidate cooperative device list for client cooperation in a wireless communication system. A base station searches for at least one candidate cooperation device for a source device, then an effective period timer, for an effective time command list for a list of candidate cooperation devices for a source device, is initiated, and a determination is made as to whether the list of candidate cooperation devices is valid. The base station and the source device are connected through a first system, and the base station and one recommended candidate cooperation device selected from the list of candidate cooperation devices are connected through a second system. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135035 | System and Method for Mobility Support Selection - A method for mobility support selection includes determining a mobility class of a first application executing on a device, and determining if a subset of a plurality of available mobility support techniques associated with the entity one of meets and exceeds requirements of the mobility class of the first application. When the subset of the plurality of available mobility support techniques associated with the entity one of meets and exceeds the requirements of the mobility class of the first application, the method comprises selecting a mobility support technique from the subset of the plurality of available mobility support techniques, and sharing information related to the selected mobility support technique with other entities. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135063 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING OF DDN MESSAGE, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR THE SAME - The present disclosure relates to a method and device for controlling a Downlink Data Notification (DDN) message, which can reduce the DDN messages that occur while a user equipment transits from an active (ECM-active) state to an inactive (ECM-idle) state. During a bearer activation procedure according to a request from a user equipment, the DDN message control apparatus of the present disclosure sets a DDN flag value to a predetermined value when uplink data is received. When a DDN message is received from outside, the apparatus identifies the DDN flag value and stores the DDN message in case that the DDN flag value is identical with the predetermined value. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135095 | Device and Method of Handling Network Configurations - A communication device for handling network configurations comprises a storage unit for storing instructions and a processing means coupled to the storage unit. The processing means is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit. The instructions comprise receiving a radio resource control (RRC) message indicating a reconfiguration of at least one of a radio link control (RLC) configuration, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) configuration and a semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) configuration; performing the reconfiguration according to the RRC message, when at least one of following conditions is satisfied: the RRC message changes a secondary cell group (SCG) of the communication device, and the RRC message reconfigures a radio bearer from a SCG bearer to a MCG bearer; and stopping performing the reconfiguration, when none of the conditions is satisfied. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135241 | CONNECTIVITY MODULE FOR INTERNET OF THINGS (IOT) DEVICES - The disclosure relates to an Internet of Things (IoT) connectivity module that can add connectivity to an otherwise non-connected host and simplify procedures to connect, configure, and enable device-to-device (D2D) communication between the host and various heterogeneous IoT devices. For example, according to various aspects, the connectivity module may comprise a connectivity chip configured to implement a wireless network platform (e.g., a radio-frequency front end and one or more wireless radios), one or more standard peripheral interfaces configured to interconnect the connectivity module to a host having at least one processor, and a D2D application configured to implement a proximal D2D communication framework and expose a command protocol associated with the proximal D2D communication framework via the standard peripheral interfaces. Furthermore, according to various aspects, the connectivity module may comprise a dedicated interrupt line that may be asserted to notify the host when data becomes available to consume. | 05-12-2016 |
20160142187 | TONE PLANS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Methods and apparatuses for communicating over a wireless communication network are disclosed herein. One example apparatus includes a memory that stores instructions. The apparatus further includes a processor coupled with the memory. The processor and the memory are configured to determine a total bandwidth for a transmission of a message, the total bandwidth including a plurality of tones. The processor is further configured to divide the plurality of tones in the total bandwidth into one or more 26-, 52-, 106-, 242-, or 996-tone blocks. The processor is further configured to determine an indication. The indication assigns one or more of the one or more tone blocks to a first wireless communication device. The apparatus further includes a transmitter configured to transmit the indication to at least the first wireless communication device or a second device. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142196 | MULTIPLE DATA SERVICES OVER A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - Supporting multiple time division duplexed (TDD) based wireless services or frequency division duplexed (FDD) wireless services on a Distributed Antenna System (DAS). TDD based services use a common clock signal to synchronize the components of the DAS for transmission and reception of TDD signals. The DAS can include a GPS receiver which can extract a timing signal from a GPS signal and distribute the timing signal to any and all components of the DAS to enable synchronization of the components for transmitting and receiving TDD signals. The GPS receiver can be part of the interface that connects a TDD based service to the DAS or separate component of the DAS. The DAS can distribute a reference clock signal to all of the components of the DAS in order to maintain zero frequency shift while manipulating with the carrier frequencies of the various wireless services carried by the DAS. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142552 | MECHANISM FOR DYNAMIC SIGNALING OF ENCODER CAPABILITIES - The present disclosure provides systems and methods for dynamically signaling encoder capabilities of vocoders of corresponding communication nodes. In one embodiment, during a call between a first communication node and a second communication node, a control node (e.g., base station controller or mobile switching center) for the first communication node sends capability information for a voice encoder of a vocoder of the first communication node to a control node for the second communication node. As a result, the second communication node is enabled to select and request a preferred encoder mode for the voice encoder of the vocoder of the first communication node based on the capabilities of the voice encoder of the vocoder of the first communication node. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142902 | CONTEXT-AWARE RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR VIDEO STREAMING SERVICES - The increasing amount of internet traffic from video streaming services, in addition to users requesting more personalized content and creating/sharing video content, has led to a huge demand for highly scalable and efficient distribution of video content, especially with mobile computing devices. Embodiments provide a network and service infrastructure better suited to these video content distribution and mobility needs. More intelligence is provided in the network infrastructure through an awareness of the user status/activity, end-user device, and content characteristics in correlation with the network bandwidth conditions. In this view of adding more intelligence in the network, additional communication is utilized between the service platform and the network to identify content characteristics (e.g., video content, content encoding characteristics), network characteristics, and device characteristics. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142911 | FACILITATING DYNAMIC PRIVATE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Private communication networks are facilitated. One method includes broadcasting, by a first device, to an access point device associated with a first network, a first signal comprising an identifier for a second network, wherein the access point device of the first network foregoes broadcast of a name of the first network, and wherein the first device is located at a first location and a second device is located at a second location remote from the first location. The first device and the second device are associated with the second network. The method also includes receiving a second signal indicative of a broadcast of the name of the second network based on an authentication of the identifier for the second network and key data representing a key for the second network; and connecting to a network device of the second network in response to the receiving the second signal. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142932 | EVOLVED DATA COMPRESSION SCHEME FOR UNRELIABLE TRANSMISSION MODES - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication at a device. A transmitting device such as a base station may select some packets for direct transmission to a receiving device using data compression based on the reliability of the direct connection. The transmitting device may select other packets for indirect transmission via an unreliable connection using uncompressed packets or compressed packets that will not be used to update a compression buffer. In some cases, uncompressed packets may also be sent via the reliable connection. If a packet sent over the unreliable connection is lost, it may be transmitted over the reliable connection. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142934 | BUFFER STATUS REPORT FOR eDCS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication. A user equipment (UE), for example, may determine a content size of an uncompressed buffer and a content size of a compressed buffer. The UE may then generate a buffer status report (BSR) based on the content sizes of the uncompressed buffer and the compressed buffer. Alternatively, a base station may receive a BSR based on a size of an uncompressed buffer of the UE. The base station may then receive a compressed packet from the UE and may determine a compression gain based on a size of the compressed packet and a size of a corresponding uncompressed packet. The base station may then adjust the received BSR based on the compression gain. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142937 | TECHNIQUES FOR COMPRESSING SESSION INITIATION MESSAGES USING TEMPLATES FOR EVOLVED DATA COMPRESSION SCHEME (EDCS) - Session initiation messages may be compressed using templates for evolved data compression scheme (eDCS). One or more session initiation messages may be exchanged between various network entities, such as UEs and base stations, for purposes such as registration, call setup, and call modification, for example. Session initiation messages may include header fields which identify the caller and characteristics of the device receiving the call, and may also contain payload, which describes the audio/video codec characteristics. Many of these contents may be repeated across all user devices of the same vendor attached to the same operator and may be compressed using templates to enhance system efficiency. These templates may be known at the transmitter and receiver, and reduce the data that has to be carried over air. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142965 | Efficient Beacon Transmission and Reception - A control point, such as a laptop, phone, wireless access point, or other device, transmits beacons to receiving stations in a wireless network. The control point may reduce power and bandwidth consumption by transmitting beacons with smaller payloads and/or less frequently to sectors with no associated stations. The stations, which may include laptops, phones, or other devices may reduce power consumption be powering on their antennas when beacons may be transmitted to their sectors. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142966 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UPDATING INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) REGISTRATION USING MULTIPLE PROTOCOLS - Apparatus, systems, and methods for updating Internet Protocol (IP) registration on a proxy server, including receiving a device registration message from a first user device in a first protocol, extracting device registration data and network communication address data associated with the first user device from the device registration message, storing an association of the registration data with the network communication address data, and receiving a device registration update message from the first user device in a second protocol. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142970 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING NETWORK TRAFFIC FOR USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION AND RELATED APPARATUSES USING THE SAME - The present disclosure is directed to a method of controlling network traffic for a user equipment (UE) and a base station (BS). In one of the exemplary embodiments, the disclosure is directed to a method of controlling network traffic for a UE. The method would include not limited to determining whether to select a target access network, and transmitting a traffic re-direct inform message in response to the selection of the target access network, wherein the traffic re-direct inform message comprises information of the target access network and a traffic flow indicator corresponding to at least one traffic flow. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142994 | TECHNIQUES FOR TRANSMITTING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS IN A SHARED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM BAND - Techniques are described for wireless communication. A first method includes generating a first type of synchronization signal based at least in part on a first type of transmission in a shared radio frequency spectrum band, and generating a second type of synchronization signal based at least in part on a second type of transmission in the shared radio frequency spectrum band. The second type of synchronization signal is different from the first type of synchronization signal. A second method includes receiving a synchronization signal associated with a type of transmission in a shared radio frequency spectrum band; determining a type of the synchronization signal; and determining one or more cell parameters based at least in part on the synchronization signal. | 05-19-2016 |
20160143082 | METHOD FOR DETECTING A MESSAGE FROM A GROUP OF PACKETS TRANSMITTED IN A CONNECTION - A group of packets are extracted based on data captured from packets transmitted between communication apparatuses, where each packet has an identical transmission source address or an identical transmission destination address, and is transmitted in an identical connection. First and second beginning-packet candidates, which are transmitted within the identical connection, are identified based on a time difference of capturing individual packets included in the group of packets. A message length is calculated from lengths of packets including the first beginning packet candidate, captured before capturing the second beginning-packet candidate and after capturing the first beginning-packet candidate. A position, at which a message length of a message formed by the group of packets is stored, is estimated from the first beginning-packet candidate, based on the calculated message length, and the message formed by the group of packets is detected in accordance with the message length stored at the estimated position. | 05-19-2016 |
20160143083 | METHOD FOR MANAGING A WIRELESS LINK BETWEEN A FIRST DEVICE AND A SECONG DEVICE - The invention relates to a method for managing a wireless link between a first device and a second device. The method includes the steps of polling an activity of a first wireless interface of the first device during a first predetermined lapse of time, suspending the wireless link and polling an activity of a first body-coupled communication interface of the first device during a second predetermined lapse of time when no activity is detected on the first wireless interface of the first device during the first predetermined lapse of time, and resuming the wireless link when at least one polling packet comprising a resume request is detected by the first body-coupled communication interface of the first device during the second predetermined lapse of time. | 05-19-2016 |
20160143089 | NETWORK ACCESS POINTS USING MULTIPLE DEVICES - A system and method for providing access to a communication network includes providing a radio node comprising a first set of access point components including a radio component, and providing a physically separated controller node in communication with the radio node. The access point controller comprises a second set of access point components distinct from the first set of access point components, creating a distributed access point. A system controller may also be used to control at least one of the radio node and the controller node. The radio node, the controller node, and the system controller communicate over a communication link, such as a wireless or wired link. | 05-19-2016 |
20160144875 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING OF TRAIN MONITORING TRAFFIC BASED ON HIERARCHICAL WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - Provided is an apparatus for distributed processing of train monitoring traffic based on a hierarchical wireless sensor network, the apparatus including: a wireless sensor node configured to generate sensor data by measuring states of a train; a wireless mesh network (WSN) manager configured to classify the sensor data into priority data and non-priority data according to change characteristics, and to transmit the priority data to a sensor monitoring center through a wireless communication network and the non-priority data to wireless mesh nodes through a wireless mesh network; and one or more wireless mesh nodes configured to be spaced apart at predetermined intervals on a railway side, and to transmit the non-priority data, received from the WSN manager, to the sensor monitoring center. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150430 | RADIO TERMINAL, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication unit of a radio terminal performs radio measurement of a base station and monitoring of a paging signal within a periodic duration. A controller controls the communication unit so as to perform filtering of the radio measurement within the duration with intervals less than half of the duration. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150433 | Polling and Reporting Mechanism - Methods, devices, and computer program products for status reporting in a network are provided. In some embodiments, mechanisms to delay responding to a received request for status information (“a polling request”) or the triggering or transmission of a status message caused by a reception of a polling request, or to delay the triggering or transmission of the polling request itself are provided, such that redundant transmissions maybe minimized and power consumption may be optimized. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150459 | TECHNIQUES TO SUPPORT HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK DATA PATH DISCOVERY - Methods, systems, and devices are described for discovering and establishing an optimal data path between a source device and a destination device of a first network by employing one or more other networks having a network protocol different from the first network. The techniques of the present disclosure may include receiving a route request message from the source device at an edge device connected to both a first network and a second network, and forwarding the route request message via the second network. In some examples, the data path that offers an improved link metric and/or a minimum hop count may be established by routing traffic along a data path employing a plurality of networks (e.g., WLAN, cellular or Ethernet) between the source device and the destination device. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150461 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, WIRELESS TERMINAL, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND CONTROL DEVICE - A wireless communication method including: acquiring, by a wireless terminal configured to asynchronously transmit a wireless signal to a first base station in a first wireless communication system, first information relating to a stop period during which a synchronous wireless communication between two apparatus is stopped in a second wireless communication system that is interfered by the wireless signal asynchronously transmitted from the wireless terminal, and adjusting, by the wireless terminal, a timing of transmitting the wireless signal so as to suppress an overflow of the wireless signal into a period subsequent to the stop period, based on the first information. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150488 | UPLINK POWER CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS THEREOF - Embodiments of the disclosure provide an uplink power control method and an apparatus thereof. The method includes: optimizing uplink power control parameters of the multiple cells according to a KPI model, where the KPI model is used to indicate a mapping relationship between the uplink power control parameters of the multiple cells and at least one KPI of a network on which the multiple cells are located; and performing uplink power control on user equipment in the multiple cells according to the uplink power control parameters of the multiple cells. In the embodiments of the disclosure, by considering impact of uplink power control parameters of multiple cells on a KPI of a network on which the multiple cells are located, uplink power control parameters that are more optimized from the perspective of global performance of the network are obtained, thereby improving overall performance of the network. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150584 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION, AND WIRELESS STATION - A wireless communication system includes a plurality of wireless stations including a first wireless station, a second wireless station, and a third wireless station. The wireless communication system further includes a first controller that obtains a transmission timing at which the third wireless station transmits first notification information to the second wireless station, the first notification information indicating that the third wireless station is to communicate with the second wireless station; and a first communicator that transmits second notification information to the second wireless station at the obtained transmission timing, the second notification information indicating that the first wireless station is to directly communicate with the second wireless station. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150589 | LEARNING NETWORK TIMEOUT VALUES DYNAMICALLY - Methods, systems, and devices are described for passively and dynamically determining network timeout (NTO) values. The method may include adjusting an amount of delay applied to transmissions on an existing connection to a device in a network and determining how long the existing connection is allowed to remain idle before the existing connection expires based on the adjusting of the amount of delay applied to the transmissions on the existing connection. | 05-26-2016 |
20160156430 | LINK ADAPTATION BASED ON NEIGHBORING CELL TRANSMISSION INFORMATION | 06-02-2016 |
20160156497 | Method for uplink multiuser data transmission and system for uplink multiuser multiple input multiple output | 06-02-2016 |
20160156748 | NODE AND METHOD FOR OBTAINING PRIORITY INFORMATION IN A HEADER OF A CONTROL PLANE MESSAGE | 06-02-2016 |
20160157080 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DISCOVERY INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND PROTOCOL STACK ARCHITECTURE FOR THE SAME | 06-02-2016 |
20160157082 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAPPING DISCOVERY SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-02-2016 |
20160157094 | Methods and Arrangements For Enabling Data Transmission Between a Mobile Device and a Static Destination Address | 06-02-2016 |
20160157122 | TERMINAL INFORMATION REPORTING METHOD AND RELATED DEVICE | 06-02-2016 |
20160157280 | SIGNALLING REDUCTION FOR IP TRAFFIC IN WIRELESS NETWORKS | 06-02-2016 |
20160164587 | Method and System for Sharing Antenna between Multiple Operators and Radio Frequency and Digital Conversion Unit - A system for sharing an antenna between multiple operators is provided. The system includes a radio frequency and digital conversion unit and an active antenna. The radio frequency and digital conversion unit is configured to convert a radio frequency signal of each radio frequency module into a digital signal, and send digital signals of a same sector to an active antenna corresponding to the sector. The active antenna is configured to perform at least one of vertical beam forming processing and horizontal beam forming processing on received digital signals according to a signal transmitting parameter that is set for each operator, convert the processed digital signals into radio frequency signals, and then transmit the radio frequency signals from an air interface. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164669 | HANDSHAKING PROTOCOL FOR TIME-REVERSAL SYSTEM - A handshaking process for time-reversal wireless communication is provided. A first device receives a handshake signal transmitted from a second device through multiple propagation paths, the handshake signal including a preamble and a training sequence, in which the training sequence includes a sequence of symbols known to the first and second devices. A synchronization index is determined based on the preamble, and the training sequence in the handshake signal is identified based on the synchronization index. A channel response signal is determined based on the received training sequence, and a signature waveform that is a time-reversed signal of the channel response signal is generated. A transmission signal is generated based on transmit data and the signature waveform, in which the transmit data are data configured to be transmitted to the second device. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164708 | Channel Sounding Using Multiple Sounding Configurations - More than one set of sounding signal configuration parameters are determined for the same mobile terminal. The mobile terminal uses the sets of configuration parameters to generate different sounding reference signals which can be used for different purposes such as estimating timing and channel quality. In one embodiment, a method of configuring uplink sounding transmissions by mobile terminals in a wireless communication network is characterized by determining different sets of configuration parameters for sounding signal transmissions for a given mobile terminal ( | 06-09-2016 |
20160164732 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RULE CREATION AND PARAMETER ADAPTATION BY DATA MINING IN A SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORK - Data mined in a radio access and transport network is used to create or adapt SON rules and SON parameters. More particularly, the analytics of “Big Data” mined in the network are used to generate new or modified SON rules and/or parameters, in realtime, in an automated way (i.e., substantially without human interaction in creating/updating the rules and/or parameters). A system and method for creating or adapting a rule in a SON network, is provided including a first network management layer (which can be, but does not have to be, the network management layer of a “Big Data” system), an element management system layer, and at least one network element. In this embodiment, the system is configured to: obtain data mined from the SON network and/or other sources; perform analytics on the mined data; and automatically create a new rule or adapt an existing rule, based on the results of the analytics performed. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164767 | HANDSHAKING PROTOCOL FOR TIME-REVERSAL SYSTEM - A handshaking process for time-reversal wireless communication is provided. A first device receives a handshake signal transmitted from a second device through multiple propagation paths, the handshake signal including a preamble and a training sequence, in which the training sequence includes a sequence of symbols known to the first and second devices. A synchronization index is determined based on the preamble, and the training sequence in the handshake signal is identified based on the synchronization index. A channel response signal is determined based on the received training sequence, and a signature waveform that is a time-reversed signal of the channel response signal is generated. A transmission signal is generated based on transmit data and the signature waveform, in which the transmit data are data configured to be transmitted to the second device. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164777 | GATEWAY DEVICE FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATION WITH DUAL CELLULAR INTERFACES - Gateway devices can use dual cellular interfaces to provide reliable communications for client machines. A gateway device can use one of the dual cellular interfaces as a primary interface and the other as a hot backup interface. The backup interface remains connected to a cellular network while communications are routed on the primary interface. Accordingly, the gateway device can rapidly switch communications between from the primary interface to the backup interface. Applications, for example, for ATM payment processing, vending machine telemetry, point of sale payment processing, kiosk internet connectivity, remote monitoring and control, mobile or electronic health, and remote information displays, may run on the gateway devices, on servers, on user devices, or a combination of these devices. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165379 | Method for Sending Trigger Message and Device - A method for sending a trigger message and a device. When a third-party application server (AS) needs to establish a connection with machine-to-machine communications user equipment (M2M UE), the third-party AS sends a trigger message to a device trigger application server (DT-AS), where the trigger message includes at least an identifier of the M2M UE, and the DT-AS determines, according to the identifier of the M2M UE, whether the M2M UE has registered with a network at which the DT-AS is located, and when the M2M UE has registered with the network at which the DT-AS is located, sends the trigger message to the M2M UE, in order to implement that the DT-AS identifies the trigger message, such that the M2M UE establishes a connection with the third-party AS. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165477 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO REPORT LINK QUALITY MEASUREMENTS FOR DOWNLINK DUAL CARRIER OPERATION - Methods and apparatus to report link quality measurements for downlink dual carrier operation are disclosed. Example methods and apparatus disclosed herein implement one or more example techniques for reporting link quality measurements involving, for example, modifying measurement reporting messages to increase the number and/or types of link quality measurements that can be reported, permitting mobile stations, when appropriate, to use different reporting messages capable of supporting more link quality measurements, and/or prioritizing certain link quality measurements to be reported when the reporting messages do not contain sufficient space to report all requested and/or specified link quality measurements. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165514 | WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE FOR PROVIDING MEDIA CONTENT - A method includes receiving information associated with a first data request from a base station at a server of a wireless communication network. The first data request is received at the first base station from a first mobile device. The method includes selecting a second base station to transmit data responsive to the first data request to the first mobile device based on a data type of the data and based on a location of the first mobile device. The method further includes transmitting the data from the server to the second base station. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165515 | Ubiquitous Access to FEMTO-Connected Network - A system and method of enabling a mobile device to communicate with a local IP network host and an external IP network host using a femto cellular access point on a femto cellular access network. A local gateway is coupled to the femto cellular access network for receiving data packets transmitted on the femto cellular access network and for routing the data packets to one of a local IP network and an external IP network, based on a destination address associated with the data packets. The femto cellular access network includes an LTE network, an EVDO network connected to an EPC, or a WiMax 802.16e/m network connected to the EPC. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165527 | NEIGHBOR RELATION INFORMATION MANAGEMENT - Neighbor relation information management involves, for example: acquiring, reporting, and exchanging neighbor relation information. In some cases, neighbor relation information is acquired and/or reported in a manner that does not significantly impact other functionality of the access terminal. For example, an access terminal may be configured to acquire and/or report neighbor relation information only during one or more defined radio states. In some cases, the acquisition of neighbor relation information is based on a neighbor relation threshold. In some cases, an access terminal does not immediately report measured neighbor relation information and instead stores the information for reporting at a later time. In some cases, a transmitted indication is used to facilitate retrieval of neighbor relation information from an access terminal. In some cases, neighbor relation information acquired from an access terminal is exchanged over a direct interface between access points. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165563 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TIME SYNCHRONIZATION IN DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A method for matching time synchronization between UEs during Device-to-Device (hereinafter referred to as “D2D”) communication in a radio communication system without involving an Evolved Node B (ENB) is proposed. Using the proposed method, all the UEs can operate to match the time synchronization without malfunction in accordance with a synchronization signal of the ENB even if the UE inside an ENB area and the UE outside the ENB area coexist. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165643 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION BETWEEN DEVICES - A method for establishing a connection between a detection device and another device, wherein the detection device is coupled with a remote-sensing motion detection apparatus, the method including acquiring a first motion signature information of a motion object through the remote-sensing motion detection apparatus; and establishing a connection with the other device when the first motion signature information matches with a second motion signature information of the motion object acquired by the other device. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165644 | Method for Receiving Push Information and Related Apparatus and System - A method for receiving push information and a related apparatus and system are disclosed. The method for receiving push information includes: receiving, by a terminal, information about a network access interface sent by a network access point, where the information about the network access interface includes address information of a push server and access information of a wireless local area network WLAN access hotspot; acquiring, by the terminal, the address information of the push server included in the information about the network access interface; accessing, by the terminal, the WLAN access hotspot based on the access information of the WLAN access hotspot; establishing a push connection channel between the terminal and the push server according to the address information of the push server by using the WLAN access hotspot; and receiving, by the terminal by using the established push connection channel, push information sent by the push server. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165647 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK SENSOR INFORMATION FOR CONTROL OF INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT IN HARSH ENVIRONMENTS - In certain embodiments, a system includes a master node device. The master node device includes communication circuitry configured to facilitate communication with a welding power supply unit via a long-range communication link, and to facilitate wireless communication with one or more welding-related devices via a short-range wireless communication network. The master node device also includes control circuitry configured to receive sensor data from one or more sensors within a physical vicinity of the short-range wireless communication network, and to route the sensor data to final destinations for the one or more sensors. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165654 | CONTROL DEVICE, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - Effective utilization and maintenance of direct communication are provided. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165662 | Method of Controlling a Base Station System - A method of controlling a base station system is provided. The method comprises generating and transmitting a control signal arranged to cause a radio equipment controller to control a first radio equipment from a plurality of radio equipment at a first time; and generating and transmitting a control signal arranged to cause the radio equipment controller to control a second radio equipment from the plurality of radio equipment instead of the first radio equipment at a later time; wherein each of the plurality of radio equipment is coupled to a respective antenna having a respective coverage area. Also provided is a controller and a computer program product configured to control a base station system. | 06-09-2016 |
20160173214 | MOBILE STATION AND RADIO BASE STATION | 06-16-2016 |
20160173241 | DETECTING AND PROCESSING WEAK SIGNALS USING AN ARRAY OF ANTENNAS | 06-16-2016 |
20160173248 | SNR ESTIMATION FOR SOUNDING SIGNALS | 06-16-2016 |
20160173297 | WIFI BOOST WITH UPLINK OFFLOAD TO LTE WITH INDEPENDENT IP ADDRESSES | 06-16-2016 |
20160173361 | RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY CO-EXISTENCE USING ADAPTIVE ENERGY DETECTION | 06-16-2016 |
20160174067 | Ranging Procedure Identification of Enhanced Wireless Terminal | 06-16-2016 |
20160174129 | Methods, Systems, and Devices for Message Destination Hunting | 06-16-2016 |
20160174131 | DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING AN IP CORE NETWORK AND CONTROL METHOD IMPLEMENTED BY THIS DEVICE | 06-16-2016 |
20160174141 | Automatic Detection of a Network Operator for a Mobile Network Device | 06-16-2016 |
20160174145 | Connecting to Radio Access Networks Selected based on Charging Data for Subscription of a User | 06-16-2016 |
20160174255 | UNIVERSAL REPEATER, A METHOD OF OPERATING A UNIVERSAL REPEATER AND A NETWORK INCLUDING THE SAME | 06-16-2016 |
20160174279 | USER TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | 06-16-2016 |
20160174284 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STARTING OR STOPPING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE OPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
20160182267 | SYMBOL CONSTELLATION DESIGN | 06-23-2016 |
20160183083 | USER EQUIPMENT AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) REGISTRATION | 06-23-2016 |
20160183158 | RETRANSMISSION OF PROTOCOL DATA UNIT VIA ALTERNATE TRANSMISSION PATH FOR DUAL CONNECTIVITY WIRELESS NETWORK | 06-23-2016 |
20160183171 | TECHNIQUES FOR CONDUCTING FINE TIMING MEASUREMENTS | 06-23-2016 |
20160183175 | INDICATION OF PACKET BASED VOICE SUPPORT IN A MOBILE NETWORK WITH DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES | 06-23-2016 |
20160183180 | Access Network, Selection and Connection Methods, Devices, and Computer Programs | 06-23-2016 |
20160183197 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD OF OPERATING A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND A MOBILE STATION | 06-23-2016 |
20160183300 | METHODS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION STATIONS, AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING IN THE 5 GHZ FREQUENCY BAND | 06-23-2016 |
20160183316 | Method, Device and System for Detecting Data Link | 06-23-2016 |
20160183325 | USER TERMINAL, RADIO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | 06-23-2016 |
20160191107 | RADIO FREQUENCY FRONT END CIRCUITRY FOR CARRIER AGGREGATION - RF front end circuitry includes at least three antennas, RF filtering circuitry, antenna switching circuitry coupled between the antennas and the RF filtering circuitry, and transceiver circuitry coupled to the RF filtering circuitry. The RF front end circuitry may support at least five carrier aggregation configurations between eight different operating bands. Two of the antennas are configured to operate at mid/high-band frequencies, while one of the antennas is configured only to operate at high-band frequencies. The third antenna along with the arrangement of filters in the RF filtering circuitry is used to support at least two additional configurations over those achievable by conventional RF front end circuitry. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191209 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, INFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENT AND METHOD - A communications system including an infrastructure equipment, forming part of a mobile communications network, that transmits and receives data to/from a user device via a wireless access interface using a plurality of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) subcarriers that extend across a first bandwidth. The infrastructure equipment is configured to transmit repeatedly signals representing a same instance of user device payload data in a second bandwidth less than and within a first bandwidth, and includes a subset of the OFDM subcarriers. The user device is configured to receive one or more of the signals repeatedly transmitted across the second bandwidth, to store in a memory signals representing the repeatedly transmitted signals received across the second bandwidth and to combine the stored signals, and to detect the user device payload data from the combined signals, the user device having been provided with an indication of the second bandwidth. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191357 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MAPPING AND VISUALIZING A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - According to at least one embodiment, a system for mapping a mesh network is provided. The system includes a memory and at least one processor coupled to the memory. The at least one processor is configured to receive at least one network data packet from at least one network device in the mesh network; build a map of the mesh network including a representation of the at least one network device using information contained in the at least one network data packet; and display the map on a user interface. In some embodiments, the at least one network includes a plurality of network devices. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192290 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING POWER OF PHYSICAL LAYER DEVICE OF BASE STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of controlling power of a physical layer device of a base station in a mobile communication system which is applied to a fifth generation (5G), that is the next generation, mobile communication system and makes it possible to efficiently control the power of physical layer devices managing each beam spot, such as a radio frequency (RF) module and a modem, according to the number of pieces of user equipment (UE) or an amount of traffic processed by the beam spot. The method is applied to a mobile communication system including a plurality of media access control processing units (MACs) corresponding to a plurality of modems on a one-to-one basis and the plurality of modems each connected with one or more RF modules covering beam spots dividing a base station cell. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192407 | Wireless sensor pod uses trigger events for pairing and testing - A wireless sensor pod and associated method use a trigger event to pair with a master device. The wireless sensor pod includes an inertial sensor for detecting physical movement of the wireless sensor pod, a wireless transceiver, a processor communicatively coupled to the inertial sensor and the wireless transceiver, and a memory communicatively coupled with the processor and storing machine readable instructions. When the machine readable instructions are executed by the processor, they are capable of: detecting, using the inertial sensor, a first trigger event caused by the physical movement, and when the first trigger event is detected, transmitting, using the wireless transceiver, a communication to pair the wireless sensor pod with a master device. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192424 | TERMINAL APPARATUS AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - A terminal apparatus transmits information related to communication/discovery between terminal apparatuses to a base station apparatus of EUTRAN. The base station apparatus of the EUTRAN transmits the information related to the communication/discovery between the terminal apparatuses to the terminal apparatus. | 06-30-2016 |
20160197693 | Selective Interference Cancellation in the Range-Expansion Region of a Heterogeneous Network | 07-07-2016 |
20160197713 | PACKET DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE SAME | 07-07-2016 |
20160197754 | Reference Signal Configuration for Extension Carriers and Carrier Segments | 07-07-2016 |
20160198337 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACQUIRING INFORMATION ON ACCESS POINT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 07-07-2016 |
20160198352 | System and Methods for Improving Data Performance Via Deliberate Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) Acknowledgment (ACK) and Fast Radio Link Control (RLC) Non-acknowledgment (NACK) in a Multi-Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Wireless Communication Device | 07-07-2016 |
20160198371 | Method and Apparatus for Transforming Carrier and System | 07-07-2016 |
20160198384 | METHOD FOR REPORTING MOBILITY INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME | 07-07-2016 |
20160198390 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM | 07-07-2016 |
20160198394 | TECHNIQUE FOR MAINTAINING NETWORK SERVICE IDENTIFICATION RULES | 07-07-2016 |
20160198400 | METHOD FOR LOCATION AREA UPDATE IN MULTI-RAT ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING PAGING INFORMATION | 07-07-2016 |
20160198458 | Base Station and Wireless Communication System | 07-07-2016 |
20160198511 | EFFICIENT SERVICE ADVERTISEMENT AND DISCOVERY IN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT WITH COOPERATIVE ADVERTISEMENT | 07-07-2016 |
20160202350 | TECHNIQUES FOR USE IN WIDEBAND TIME-OF-ARRIVAL ESTIMATION | 07-14-2016 |
20160204907 | TECHNIQUES FOR MANAGING SOFT BUFFERS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205060 | BASE-STATION-TO-BASE-STATION GATEWAY AND RELATED DEVICES, METHODS, AND SYSTEMS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205150 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DELIVERY OF DATA-BASED/VOICE SERVICES OVER PICONETS AND WIRELESS LANs (WLANs) COUPLED TO 3GPP DEVICES INCLUDING PROTOCOL ARCHITECTURE AND INFORMATION ELEMENTS RELATING TO SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS) OVER WLANs | 07-14-2016 |
20160205532 | METHOD OF PERFORMING PROXIMITY DISCOVERY FOR NETWORK ENTITY AND USER EQUIPMENT | 07-14-2016 |
20160205563 | COMMUNICATION PARAMETER SETTING METHOD, COMMUNICATING APPARATUS, AND MANAGING APPARATUS FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205705 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONDUCTING RANDOM ACCESS ON SMALL CELL UNDER DUAL CONNECTIVITY | 07-14-2016 |
20160205708 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNALS BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICES | 07-14-2016 |
20160205720 | SECURE TOLL-FREE APPLICATION DATA ACCESS | 07-14-2016 |
20160254895 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS WITH USE OF FIRST AND SECOND RF TRANSCEIVER MODULES | 09-01-2016 |
20160255021 | System and Method for Monitoring and Traffic Management in Cellular Networks Based on Cellular Attributes | 09-01-2016 |
20160255473 | PROXY-BASED RANGING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 09-01-2016 |
20160255478 | VEHICLE AD HOC NETWORK (VANET) | 09-01-2016 |
20160255490 | REALM TRANSLATION IN AN IMS NETWORK | 09-01-2016 |
20160255491 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT METHOD, ACCESS GW APPARATUS, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT CONTROL APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM | 09-01-2016 |
20160255520 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD | 09-01-2016 |
20160255573 | ACCESS POINT, STATION, AND ACCESS CONFIGURATION METHOD BETWEEN ACCESS POINT AND STATION | 09-01-2016 |
20160255593 | UPLINK POWER SHARING IN DUAL CONNECTIVITY | 09-01-2016 |
20160255677 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR MANAGING A COMMUNICATION INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BASE STATIONS | 09-01-2016 |
20160380739 | PATCH DOWNLOAD WITH IMPROVED ACKNOWLEDGE MECHANISM - Generally, this disclosure provides systems, devices, methods and computer readable media for patch downloading, from a host to a target, with improved acknowledge (ACK) mechanisms including combinations of out-of-sequence, single and aggregate acknowledge mechanisms. The method may include determining a packet size based on buffer capacity of the host; calculating the total number of packets (P) for transmission based on a size of the patch divided by the packet size; and calculating a packet storage capacity (N) of the target, based on buffer capacity of the target divided by the packet size. The method may also include transmitting the P packets to the target, including a sequence number and a portion of the patch, the transmission segmented into one or more cycles of up to N packets. The method may further include receiving ACKs from the target (asynchronously relative to the packet transmissions), the ACKS associated with the sequence numbers. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380791 | INTERFERENCE ESTIMATION - An interference estimation method and a communication device configured to estimate interference. The interference estimation method can include determining a first communication channel of a first uplink communication signal of a first communication protocol and determining a second communication channel of a second downlink communication signal of a second communication protocol. The method can further include: determining frequency spacing between the first uplink communication signal and the second downlink communication signal; determining the PSD of the transmit signal within the receiver bandwidth of the second downlink communication signal; and determining the transmit noise floor from the first uplink communication signal in the receiver bandwidth. Power integration terms can be determined based on the overall PSD of the transmit signal from first uplink communication signal within the second downlink communication channel. An interference estimation can be calculated using the interference power integration term(s). | 12-29-2016 |
20160380794 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING AN OFDMA LTF DESIGN FOR WIRELESS NETWORK COMMUNICATION - Systems, methods, and apparatuses are disclosed herein for aligning HE-LTFs corresponding to a plurality of users by determining a respective number of spatial streams corresponding to each user, determining a highest respective number of spatial streams of the spatial streams, and setting an alignment number of HE-LTF symbols to be equal to or larger than the highest respective number of spatial streams. For each respective user, a respective matrix of HE-LTF symbols corresponding to the respective number of spatial streams of the respective user is selected, and it is determined whether the respective matrix of HE-LTF symbols has fewer symbols than the alignment number. In response to determining that the respective matrix of HE-LTF symbols has fewer symbols than the alignment number, padding symbols may be added to the respective matrix to yield a number of HE-LTF symbols in the respective matrix that corresponds to the alignment number. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380962 | WIRELESS ACCESS GATEWAY - A wireless network including a wireless access gateway (WAG) and methods are provided for routing traffic between non-cellular and cellular networks. The WAG receives a first IP address for the UE in the cellular domain and the WAG allocates a second IP address for the UE in the non-cellular domain from a dedicated pool of IP addresses for that non-cellular domain. The WAG also creates a routing rule between the first and second IP addresses. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381550 | Methods and Arrangements in a Cellular Network - A node in a cellular network node supports ad hoc networking between UEs. The network node accesses a user equipment capability database and receives update messages from user equipments (UEs) comprising information regarding the capabilities of the UEs, such as supported frequency bands, radio access technologies, and antenna modes. The network node updates the user equipment capability database with the information from the received messages, and it uses the user equipment capability database and a matching algorithm to identify given UEs that have matching capabilities and are able to communicate wirelessly. The network node then transmits an ad hoc “paging” message identifying the UEs. The paging message is received by the identified UEs and they may then establish an ad hoc network. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381565 | INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN MULTI-PROVIDER WLAN NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and apparatuses are disclosed for improving the efficiency of resource usage while facilitating transmission by multiple providers in a WLAN system. Information elements (lEs) may be used to coordinate among providers. Provider(s) may use an auction based method to contend for the channel. A provider may elect an auctioneer or auctioneers (e.g., Provider Coordinator(s)) that may broadcast a utility metric, performance-based (e.g., Network Throughput, Network Energy Level, Network Interference Level, Channel Selection Cost,etc.) or non-performance based (e.g., bid, payment, charge, preferred provider,etc). A granting entity, e.g., a central controller, may compare the utility metrics to determine a most favorable utility metric and grant access based on the most favorable utility metric, for example, to a provider associated with the most favorable utility metric. The provider with the most favorable utility metric may gain access (e.g., be granted access and gain access) to the channel. Provider contention may be considered as a contention at a first level, where a provider may contend for the channel using CSMA/CA. Nodes associated with a provider may contend for access (contention at a second level). | 12-29-2016 |
20160381716 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ESTABLISH GROUPCAST WITH RETRIES SERVICE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS OVER BRIDGED LINKS - A disclosed example method to setup a Groupcast with Retries service for use with wireless communications involves receiving an association response at a wireless station from an access point. The association response is responsive to a General Link capability of the wireless station sent in an association request from the wireless station to the access point. The example method also involves confirming a General Link and the Groupcast with Retries service between the wireless station and the access point based on the association response indicating that the access point has successfully associated the wireless station with the access point. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381717 | WIRELESS CONNECTION MANAGEMENT - Embodiments are disclosed for managing wireless communication requests in a communication system. An example in-vehicle computing system comprises a wireless communication interface including a soft wireless access point/group owner coupled to a physical network interface to provide access to a network, a processor, and a storage device storing instructions executable by the processor to receive a first request from a first device to initiate communication via a first wireless client of the first device, during communication via the first wireless client, receive a second request to initiate communication via a second wireless client, and identify a unique identifier of the second wireless client. The instructions are further executable to disconnect a connection to one or more devices via one or more associated wireless clients including the first wireless client, initiate communication via the second wireless client, and selectively re-establish communication via the one or more associated wireless clients. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237463 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DATA TRANSMISSION DEVICE | 08-17-2017 |
20170238163 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING AND ACQUIRING UE CAPABILITY | 08-17-2017 |
20170238189 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK BRIDGE | 08-17-2017 |
20170238195 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DATA SYNCHRONIZATION | 08-17-2017 |
20170238223 | Method and Device for Implementing Flow Mobility Triggering, and Storage Medium | 08-17-2017 |
20170238232 | TRANSMIT ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE AND SPECTRAL MASK REQUIREMENTS FOR OFDMA TRANSMISSION | 08-17-2017 |
20170238233 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 08-17-2017 |
20170238237 | Method and Apparatus for Access Controlling | 08-17-2017 |
20170238245 | NODE SELECTION IN VIRTUAL EVOLVED PACKET CORE | 08-17-2017 |
20170238246 | ACCESS METHOD AND DEVICE IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK | 08-17-2017 |
20170238263 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CHANGE OF USAGE OF RADIO RESOURCE AND APPARATUS THEREFOR | 08-17-2017 |
20170238267 | POWER ESTIMATION METHOD AND APPARATUS | 08-17-2017 |
20170238348 | Hybrid Networking Implementation Method, System and Device and Computer Storage Medium | 08-17-2017 |
20170238360 | STATE TRANSITION METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT, AND RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER | 08-17-2017 |
20170238362 | Methods and systems for controlling a SDN-based multi-RAT communication network | 08-17-2017 |
20180026740 | MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL WITH DIFFERENT ENCODING SCHEMES | 01-25-2018 |
20180026754 | METHOD FOR REALIZING SENDING OF HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST INFORMATION, AND DATA RECEIVING END | 01-25-2018 |
20180026757 | METHOD OF DATA TRANSMISSION IN MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEM | 01-25-2018 |
20180026837 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS | 01-25-2018 |
20180027126 | PANEL CONTROL OVER BROADBAND | 01-25-2018 |
20180027439 | INTER-RAT MEASUREMENT METHOD, RELATED APPARATUS, AND MEASUREMENT SYSTEM | 01-25-2018 |
20180027518 | PROXIMITY SENSING USING SPECTRAL ANALYSIS | 01-25-2018 |
20180027590 | LATENCY REDUCTION TECHNIQUES FOR LTE TRANSMISSION IN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM | 01-25-2018 |
20180027599 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND STORAGE MEDIUM SUITABLE FOR CONNECTION TO WIRELESS LAN (LOCAL AREA NETWORK) | 01-25-2018 |
20190149384 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL IN WIRELESS CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
20190149984 | USER TERMINAL, RADIO BASE STATION AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD | 05-16-2019 |
20190149998 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING NETWORK SLICE | 05-16-2019 |
20190150015 | Measurement Gap Configuration for 5G | 05-16-2019 |
20190150055 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHORT MESSAGE DELIVERY IN A MOBILITY NETWORK | 05-16-2019 |
20190150056 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REALIZING SERVICE CONTINUITY | 05-16-2019 |
20190150058 | METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATING TO THE USE OF REAL AND/OR VIRTUAL BEACONS | 05-16-2019 |
20190150064 | SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATES IN BAND WIDTH PART (BWP) SWITCH OPERATION | 05-16-2019 |
20190150069 | SIGNALLING IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS | 05-16-2019 |
20190150071 | TIMER-BASED METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REQUESTING SIB | 05-16-2019 |
20190150129 | Methods of Two-Stage Scheduling in Downlink Control Channel | 05-16-2019 |
20190150206 | Method and Device for Establishing Wireless Connection through First Application on User Equipment | 05-16-2019 |
20220140867 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A communications system ( | 05-05-2022 |
20220140946 | RATE-SPLITTING CONSTRUCTION OF POLAR CODED HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST (HARQ) SCHEME - Wireless communications systems and methods related to hybrid repeat request (HARQ) with rate splitting are provided. A first wireless communication device communicates, with a second wireless communication device, a first communication signal including a plurality of information bits. The first wireless communication device determines a number of bits in the plurality of information bits to be repeated in a second communication signal based on channel capacity information. The first wireless communication device communicates, with the second wireless communication device, the second communication signal including the plurality of information bits and a repetition of a subset of the plurality of information bits, where the subset of the plurality of information bits includes the determined number of bits. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141134 | MULTI-ACCESS EDGE COMPUTING DEVICE AND NETWORK ACCESS CONTROL METHOD - A multi-access edge computing device configured to be connected to first and second networks with different radio access technologies comprises a routing module, a comparison module and a control module. The control module performs steps when determining a user device connected to the first network intends to switch to the second network, wherein the steps comprise: according to identity information of the user device, looking up a target address in a comparison table in the comparison module, notifying the routing module to temporarily store a data packet corresponding to the user device and the first network, notifying the user device to release an original used address on the first network interface and then assigning the target address identical to the original used address to the second network interface of the user device, and transmitting the temporarily stored data packet to the second network interface of the user device. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141674 | COVERAGE ENHANCEMENT LEVEL SIGNALING AND EFFICIENT PACKING OF MTC SYSTEM INFORMATION - The present disclosure relates to transmitting and receiving of system information which includes controlling the transmission and/or the reception to transmit and/or receive system information including a coverage enhancement level indication for indicating enhanced coverage levels supported by the wireless communication system and to transmit and/or receive system information including a group of information elements common for different coverage enhancement levels and information elements specific for different coverage enhancement levels grouped for respective coverage enhancement levels. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141752 | Methods for Data Transmission in Relay Node - Disclosed are methods, systems, apparatus, and computer programs for data transmission in an integrated access and backhaul (IAB) network. In one aspect, a method includes generating a routing table for the IAB network; determining to forward a data packet from a source IAB node to a destination IAB node; and forwarding, based on the generated routing table, the data packet from the source IAB node to the destination IAB node. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141756 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SYSTEM INFORMATION ACQUISITION VIA UE-TO-NETWORK RELAY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and device are disclosed for a remote User Equipment (UE) to receive system information. In one embodiment, the method includes the remote UE receiving a system information from a network node via a relay UE, wherein a sidelink transmission of the system information is sent with a common Layer-2 Identity (ID) as Destination Layer-2 ID and a Layer-2 ID of the relay UE as Source Layer-2 ID, and wherein the common Layer-2 ID is associated with a purpose of delivering or forwarding the system information from the network node. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141789 | DELIVERY TIME WINDOWS FOR LOW LATENCY COMMUNICATIONS - Generally, the described techniques provide for a device determining or receiving signaling including a packet delivery time window configuration that indicates delivery windows within which transmissions may be held and/or delivery opportunities within which communications are expected to be transmitted. For example, the device may identify a packet delivery time window configuration for communications with another device. The packet delivery window configuration may indicate a periodicity, offset, start time, end time, and/or duration of the delivery windows, among other information. Based on the identified packet delivery time window configuration, the device may delay transmission of the data packet (e.g., for the duration of one or more configured delivery windows). At, for example, the end of the respective delivery window, the device may deliver the data packet to a network device for which the information of the data packet is to be used. | 05-05-2022 |